Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the annual convention"

See other formats


HBH 


60 

A90B 
6k 


w< 


mSsmR 


111 

H 


1 


■ 


««§ 


ran 


■Hi  ■     N 
ills 


^^H 


HSirailSlliBs 


Mm* 


'-'■'V* 


Hi 
■ 

HH  HH 
IHHmlH  H 

H 


^H 


I  ■ ;;     Hi 

^H  Hi 

I 


PROCEEDINGS  OF  THE 

AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ENGINEERING 

ASSOCIATION 

(Engineering  Division,  Association  of  American  Railroads) 

CONTENTS,  VOLUME  64 

(For  detailed  index,  see  Bulletin  579,  page  739) 

Bulletin   573,   September-October   1962 

Page 

Epoxy    Resins    1 

Termite    Control    Investigation — Inspection    of    Specimens    After    52    Months 

of  Exposure    19 

Grading  Problems  Encountered  During  Relocation  of  the  Santa  Fe  Railway's 

Main  Line  Between  Williams  and  Crookton,  Ariz 25 

Conductivity  Tests  of  Open-Hearth-Slag  Ballast   35 

Rail  Slippage  Tests — Concrete  Ties    39 

Preventing  Rail  Failures  in  Track    47 

Welded  Railroad  Bridges    57 

Field  Investigation  of  Florida  East  Coast  Prestressed  Concrete  Beams  69 

Field   Investigation   of   Southern   Pacific   Company,   Texas   &   Louisiana  Lines, 

Concrete   Girder  Spans    70 

Train   Performance   Calculator    73 

A  Computer  Simulation  of  Railroad  CTC  Operations   82 

Average  Tie  Life — An  Interpretation   95 

Bulletin  574,  November   1962  (Reports  of  Committees) 

16 — Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation  Ill 

9 — Highways    131 

13 — Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services  139 

14 — Yards  and  Terminals    159 

20 — Contract    Forms    187 

25 — Waterways   and   Harbors    197 

6 — Buildings      213 

Bulletin  575,  December  1962   (Reports  of  Committees) 

8 — Masonry    223 

3 — Ties   and  Wood  Preservation    241 

22 — Economics  of  Railway  Labor   263 

27 — Maintenance   of  Way  Work  Equipment   305 

30 — Impact  and  Bridge  Stresses    327 

28 — Clearances     2>2>2> 

Bulletin  576,  January   1963   (Reports  of  Committees) 

15 — Iron  and  Steel  Structures    359 

7— Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles  371 

11 — Engineering  and  Valuation   Records    387 

24 — Cooperative  Relations  with  Universities    397 

18— Electricity    407 

Bulletin  577,  February  1963  (Reports  of  Committees) 

5— Track     419 

Continuous  Welded  Rail    449 

4— Rail     497 

1 — Roadway  and  Ballast   543 

Bulletin  579,  June-July  1963 

Report  of  the  Business  Meeting  of  the  Association,  March  15-16,  1963  579 

Report  of  the  Executive  Secretary   706 

Report  of  the  Treasurer    725 

Constitution    

Tie  Renewals  and  Cost  per  Mile  of  Maintained  Track   738 

Index  of  Proceeding,  Vol.  64,  1963   739 


&if 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 

Vol.  63,  No.  573  September-October  1962 


CONTENTS 


Epoxy  Resins 1 

Termite  Control  Investigation — Inspection  of  Specimens  After 

52  Months  of  Exposure 19 

Grading    Problems    Encountered    During    Relocation    of    the 
Santa    Fe    Railway's    Main    Line    Between    Williams    and 

Crookton,  Ariz. 25 

Conductivity  Tests  of  Open-Hearth  Slag  Ballast 35 

Rail  Slippage  Tests — Concrete  Ties 39 

Preventing  Rail  Failures  in  Main  Track 47 

Welded  Railroad  Bridges 57 

Field    Investigation   of  Florida   East   Coast   Prestressed   Con- 
crete Beams   69 

Field   Investigation   of   Southern   Pacific   Company,   Texas   & 

Louisiana  Lines,  Prestressed  Concrete  Girder  Spans 70 

Train  Performance  Calculator 73 

A  Computer  Simulation  of  Railroad  CTC  Operations 82 

Average  Tie  Life — An  Interpretation 95 


Copyright    1962,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    Association 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 
1962-1963 

President 

C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Vice  Presidents 
L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines, 

Houston  1,  Tex. 
T.  F.  Burris,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 

Past  Presidents 

E.  J.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  Chicago  6. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 

Directors 

C.  J.  Henry,  Chief  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

J.  M.  Trissal,  Vice  President  and  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

W.  B.  Throckmorton,  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chi- 
cago 5. 

J.  A.  Bunjer,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  Omaha   2,  Nebr. 

J.  H.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway,  Springfield  2,  Mo. 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Rail- 
way, Amarillo,  Tex. 

W.  H.  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,  Chicago  6. 

F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  L.  Young,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Defendorf,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 
Denver  17,  Colo. 

Treasurer 
A.  B.  Hillman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 
Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

Executive  Secretary 
Neal  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  111. 

Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November    and    December;    Bi-Monthly,    June-July,    and    September-October,    at    2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

59  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5,  111. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special   rate  of  postage  for  in  Section   1103,   Act  of  October  3,    1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,   1918. 

Subscription   $10  per  annum. 


Advance   Report  of  Committee   7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles 
Report  on  Assignment  6 

Applications   of   Synthetic   Resins  and  Adhesives 
to   Wood   Bridges  and  Trestles 

Collaborating  with  Committees  8  and   15 

L.  R.  Kubacki  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  E.  Anderson,  C.  E.  Atwater,  J.  W.  Brent, 
T.  P.  Burgess,  J.  \V.  Chambers,  B.  E.  Daniels,  R.  H.  Hunsinger,  W.  D.  Keeney, 
C.  A.  Meadows,  T.  K.  May,  D.  V.  Sartore,  F.  E.  Schneider,  W.  D.  Turner,  D.  L. 
Walker. 

This  report,  in  four  parts,  is  presented  as  information.  It  supersedes  the  report  on 
this  assignment  published  in  Bulletin  562,  January  1961,  pages  526  to  537,  incl.  Part  1 
explains  the  technology  of  epoxy  resins.  Part  2  summarizes  the  railroad  applications  of 
epcxy  resins.  Part  3  presents  tentative  formulations  for  epoxy  resins.  Part  4  provides 
general  instructions  for  the  use  of  epcxy  resins. 

The  report  was  prepared  for  the  committee  by  F.  P.  Drew,  research  engineer  struc- 
tures, Association  of  American  Railroads  under  the  general  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee, 
director  of  engineering  research,  AAR. 

Part  1 
Technology  of  Epoxy  Resins 

1.  Characteristics  of  Epoxy  Resins 

The  term  "epoxy"  refers  to  a  three-member  ring  structure  containing  two  carbon 
atoms  and  an  oxygen  atom.  Materials  containing  an  average  of  more  than  one  epoxy 
group  per  molecule  are  considered  to  be  epoxy  resins. 

Epoxy  resins  are  thermosetting  materials  which  can  be  converted  with  a  wide 
variety  of  curing  agents  to  insoluble,  infusible  solids.  The  commercial  use  of  these 
resins  is  based  on  the  superiority  of  the  epoxy  resins  over  other  thermosetting  resins 
in  one  or  more  of  the  following  properties: 

a.  The   liquid    resin   is   convenient   and   easy   to   use   in   many    different   types   of 
applications. 

b.  Versatility  in  curing  schedule  is  possible  with  a  wide  variety  of  curing  agents. 

c.  The   property  of  the  cured  resins  may  be  varied  within   wide  limits   witli   tin 
pre  per  choice  of  curing  agent  and  modifier. 

d.  No  volatile  materials  are  formed  during  the  cure  of  epoxy  resins. 

e.  Low  shrinkage  during  cure  allows  for  accurate  reproductions. 

f.  The  combination  of  hardness  and  toughness  of  cured  resins  is  outstanding. 

g.  The  overall  strength  properties  such  as  tensile,  flexure,  and  compression  strength 
are  excellent. 

h.  Resistance   to  solvents  and  chemicals  of  many  kinds  is  exceptionally  k'«'od. 
i.  Adhesion  of  cured  epoxy  resins  to  most  surface-  i-  excellent, 
j.  Electrical  insulation  properties  of  cured  epoxy  resins  are  very  good. 

Epoxy  resins  may  be  used  with  a  wide  variety  of  fillers  to  further  modify  and 
reduce  cost  of  epoxy  resin  compositions.  The  color  of  many  epoxy  resin  systems  is  satis- 
factory for  all  except   the  most  exacting  applications. 

1 

Bull.  573 


2  Epoxy    Resins 

Several  modifications  of  the  basic  epoxy  resins  are  available.  The  use  of  these  mod- 
ified resins  is  generally  directed  toward  a  specific  application,  since  the  improvement 
of  one  property  is  normally  accompanied  by  a  sacrifice  in  one  or  more  of  the  other 
properties. 

Most  epoxy  adhesives  are  two-package  systems  which  are  mixed  just  prior  to  appli- 
cation because  of  limited  pot  life.  Depending  on  the  curing  agent  and  the  desired  curing 
time,  these  two-package  systems  may  be  cured  at  room  temperature  or  an  elevated  tem- 
perature. Systems  designed  to  cure  at  room  temperature  normally  reach  handling  strength 
within  a  few  hours,  but  usually  require  several  days  to  attain  maximum  strength.  De- 
pending on  the  curing  agent,  adhesives  formulated  for  curing  at  elevated  temperatures 
may  require  a  few  minutes  to  several  hours  for  complete  cure.  As  with  other  epoxy  resin 
applications,  the  choice  of  resin  and  curing  agent  depends  on  the  service  requirements 
and  desired  curing  schedule. 

2.  Curing  Agents 

A  curing  agent,  which  is  usually  added  just  prior  to  use,  is  required  to  convert 
epoxy  resins  to  thermoset  polymers.  Curing  agents  may  be  poly-functional  compounds 
containing  groups  which  react  with  the  epoxide  ring  or  they  may  be  catalysts  which 
promote  the  self-polymerization  of  the  resin.  Some  curing  agents  act  through  a  com- 
bination of  these  processes. 

3.  Formulation 

The  selection  of  an  eopxy  resin  system  for  a  particular  application  depends  not 
only  on  the  required  properties  of  the  cured  resin,  but  also  on  the  desired  curing  sched- 
ule and  handling  properties,  such  as  viscosity,  pot  life,  exotherm  and  toxicity.  The  prop- 
erties of  both  the  uncured  composition  and  the  cured  product  can  be  varied  over  a  wide 
range  by  the  proper  selection  and  use  of  resin  modifiers,  reactive  diluents  and  fillers. 
These  materials  are  important  components  of  most  epoxy  resin  formulations  and  infor- 
mation concerning  their  effect  on  the  properties  of  the  composition  before,  during  and 
after  it  is  cured  is  necessary  for  the  most  effective  use  of  epoxy  resins. 

In  Part  2  of  this  report  are  listed  various  applications  of  epoxy  resins  on  timber, 
concrete  and  steel  railroad  structures.  For  each  application  a  suggested  formulation  num- 
ber is  indicated.  These  numbers  refer  to  Part  3  of  this  report  wherein  the  composition 
of  each  formulation  is  given,  together  with  certain  pertinent  information  such  as  mixing, 
curing,  application  and  physical  properties. 

4.  Resin  Modifiers 

Epoxy  resins  are  modified  primarily  to  improve  the  mechanical  and  thermal  shock- 
resistant  properties  of  the  cured  resin,  although  in  some  cases  the  main  purpose  of  the 
modifier  is  to  reduce  the  cost  of  the  resin  system.  In  general,  nonreactive  plasticizers, 
which  are  used  widely  with  thermoplastic  resins,  are  of  little  value  for  modifying  epoxy 
resins.  The  most  satisfactoiy  modifiers  are  materials  which  react  either  with  the  resin 
or  with  the  curing  agent  to  become  an  integral  part  of  the  cured  resin.  One  obvious 
approach  is  the  use  of  curing  agents  or  modified  resins  which  contribute  the  desired 
degree  of  flexibility. 

The  modifications  of  epoxy  resins  to  improve  impact  and  thermal  shock  resistance 
is  usually  accompanied  by  a  loss  of  strength  as  well  as  electrical  insulation  properties 
and  chemical  resistance.  Since  the  loss  of  properties  is  most  evident  at  elevated  tem- 
peratures, an  epoxy  resin  should  not  be  modified  more  than  necessary  to  meet  the 
requirements  for  a  specific  application. 


Epoxy    Resins 3 

5.  Reactive  Diluents 

For  many  applications  it  is  necessary  to  reduce  the  viscosity  of  epoxy  resin  for- 
mulation and  at  the  same  time  maintain  as  nearly  as  possible  the  original  properties 
of  the  cured  resin.  Since  the  most  suitable  materials  for  this  purpose  react  to  become 
a  part  of  a  cured  system,  they  are  commonly  called  reactive  diluents.  A  reactive  should 
contribute  good  viscosity  reduction  at  low  concentration,  be  nonreactive  with  the  resin 
under  normal  storage  conditions,  react  at  approximately  the  same  rate  as  the  resin  and 
have  little  effect  on  the  properties  of  the  cured  resin. 

The  most  effective  reactive  diluents  are  low-viscosity  epoxy  compounds.  In  addi- 
tion to  viscosity  reduction  they  contribute  better  wetting  and  penetration  and  permit 
a  higher  loading  of  inert  filter.  The  degree  to  which  the  properties  of  the  resin  are 
affected  depends  not  only  on  the  choice  of  diluent,  but  also  on  the  amount  used.  The 
properties  most  affected  arc  chemical  and  solvent  resistance  and  strength  at  elevated 
temperatures.  Although  most  reactive  diluents  may  be  used  in  ratios  of  25  or  more  parts 
per  100  parts  of  resin,  it  is  recommended  that  no  more  be  used  than  is  actually  required 
for  a  given    application. 

Properties  such  as  pot  life,  curing  schedule,  and  exotherm  are  usually  altered  some- 
what by  the  presence  of  a  diluent.  Epoxy  resins  containing  reactive  diluents  are  available 
commercially. 

6.  Fillers 

In  addition  to  reducing  the  cost  of  epoxy  resin  formulations,  fillers  are  used  to 
modify  properties  of  both  the  cured  and  uncured  composition.  For  many  applications 
the  success  of  an  epoxy  formulation  may  depend  on  the  judicious  use  of  fillers.  Advan- 
tages to  be  gained  by  the  use  of  fillers  include  extended  pot  life,  reduced  exotherm, 
lower  shrinkage  during  cure,  flow  control,  reduced  coefficient  of  thermal  expansion  and 
increased  thermal  conductivity.  These  effects  are  dependent  on  volume  loading  as  well 
as  on  the  specific  filler  being  used.  With  the  exception  of  fibrous,  reinforcing  fillers, 
properties  such  as  tensile,  flexural  and  compressive  strength  are  adversely  affected  by 
the  addition  of  fillers. 

Epoxy  resins  have  a  remarkable  tolerance  for  fillers  of  almost  every  variety.  They 
should  be  nonreactive  with  both  resin  and  curing  agent  and  should  be  stable  under  the 
conditions  at  which  the  formulation  is  to  be  cured  and  used.  For  most  applications 
the  limiting  factor  on  filler  content  is  the  viscosity  of  the  uncured  mixture.  Reactive 
diluents  may  be  used  to  permit  higher  loadings  in  many  applications.  Handling  of  for- 
mulations at  elevated  temperatures  also  allow  a  greater  concentration  of  filler  to  be  used. 
For  a  given  weight  of  filler  a  larger  particle  size  gives  less  viscosity  increase  bul  ilii- 
advantage  must  be  balanced  by  the  greater  settling  tendency  of  larger  parti 

In  general,  colloidal  silica  fillers  and  fibrous  fillers  such  as  asbestos  pri  duce  a  max 
imum  pourable  viscosity  at  less  than  10  parts  per  hundred  parts  of  resin  (phr).  At 
the  usual  200  to  325  mesh  size,  fillers  such  as  silica,  calcium  carbonate,  mica,  flint, 
pumice  and  slate  ran  be  used  at  loadings  of  50  to  150  phr.  Atomized  aluminum,  alumina 
and  calcium  silicate  are  used  at  100  to  200  phr,  and  the  heavier  oilers  such  as  iron  and 
iron  oxide  can  be  used  up  to  .?00  phr.  In  some  applications  it  is  possible  to  use  50-mesh 
sand  at  loadings  as  high  as  800  phr. 

The  choice  of  filler  depends  largely  on  the  application,  Silica  and  alumina  are  used 
extensively  in  electrical  potting  applications.  Adhesives  are  Improved  considerably  with 
moderate  loadings  of  alumina  and  asbestos  fillir.  Parts  which  may  require  machining 
may    be    loaded    with    powdered    aluminum,    calcium    carbonate    or    caldum    sili 


4 Epoxy    Resins 

Aluminum-filled  compositions  are  widely  used  in  metal  forming  tools,  and  alumina, 
flint  and  carborundum  are  used  to  improve  abrasion  resistance.  Maximum  leadings  of 
alumina,  calcium  carbonate  or  silica  are  recommended  for  reducing  the  coefficient  of 
thermal  expansion.  Aluminum  powder  is  used  to  improve  thermal  conductivity,  although 
it  is  only  marginally  better  than  alumina  in  this  respect.  Steel  wool  has  been  suggested 
for  improving  mechanical  properties  as  well  as  thermal  conductivity,  but  special  tech- 
niques are  required  for  fillers  of  this  type. 

For  best  results  fillers  should  be  free  of  moisture  and  absorbed  gases.  Thorough 
mixing  can  usually  be  accomplished  with  mechanical  stirring  at  an  elevated  temperature, 
although  for  some  fillers  grinding  or  milling  may  be  necessary. 

7.  Handling  Precautions 

Prolonged  or  frequent  skin  contact  of  materials  used  in  epoxy  resin  systems  may 
cause  dermatitis  for  some  individuals.  The  reactive  diluents  that  are  used  in  epoxy  resins 
have  been  found  to  be  sources  of  skin  irritation. 

In  working  with  epoxy  resins  it  is  important  to  realize  that  dermatitis  problems 
may  exist  even  though  they  may  not  be  apparent  at  first.  Most  persons  can  work  with 
these  materials  for  some  time  without  taking  any  precautions  to  avoid  skin  irritation. 
A  few  persons  under  these  conditions  may  suddenly  break  out  with  skin  irritations 
which  will  disappear  when  they  are  transferred  to  other  types  of  work.  Those  who 
return  to  work  with  epoxy  resins  and  experience  skin  disorders  very  quickly  are  to  be 
considered  sensitized  and  should  discontinue  work  with  the  resins.  Some  individuals 
become  relatively  immune  to  the  materials  and  with  normal  contact  do  not  experience 
any  difficulty. 

Dermatitis  can  be  avoided  or  held  to  a  minimum  by  the  use  of  proper  equipment 
and  handling  technique.  The  following  protective  measures  have  been  effective  in  reduc- 
ing the  incidence  of  dermatitis: 

a.  Reasonable  care  in  preventing  skin  contact  and  regular  washing  of  hands,  arms 
and  face  with  warm,  soapy  water. 

b.  Effective   ventilation    to   prevent   the    accumulation   of   vapors   of   the   volatile 
amines  and  reactive  diluents. 

c.  Storage  of  materials  in   closed  containers  fitted  with  spigots  and  valves. 

d.  Use  of  disposable  containers  for  mixing  the  materials  to  keep  cleaning  of  con- 
taminated equipment  to  a  minimum. 

e.  Solvents  such  as  denatured  alcohol  for  clean  up  must  be  used  with  extreme 
care  since  contaminated  solvents  are  a  prime  source  of  irritation. 

f.  Use  of  rubber  gloves  and  prctective  clothing  is  helpful  but  they  should  not  be 
worn   after   they  have  been   contaminated. 


Part  2 
Applications  of  Epoxy  Resins 

The  recommended  formulations  for  the  following  applications  are  based  on  the 
assumption  that  the  surfaces  on  which  they  will  be  used  are  dry.  For  damp  surface 
conditions  alternate  formulations  can  be  used,  as  indicated  below: 

On  Dry  Surfaces  On  Damp  Surfaces 

Formulation  PI  Formulation  P2 

Formulation  991-67  Formu'ation  991-76 

Formulation  1101-32  Formulation  991-75 


Epoxy    Resins        5 

While  the  damp-surface  formulations  can  also  be  used  on  dry  surfaces,  they  are 
particularly  designed  to  cure  well  in  the  presence  of  moisture.  However,  they  are  less 
flexible  and  have  a  shorter  pot  life  than  the  corresponding  formulations  recommended 
for  use  on  dry  surfaces. 

A.  APPLICATIONS  FOR  COMMITTEE  7— WOOD  BRIDGES  AND  TRESTLES 

1.  Protection  of  Pile  Cut-Offs 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  adhesive  formulation  991-67  1/16 
in  thick  as  a  protective  coating. 

2.  Hardening  of  Bearing  Surfaces 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  adhesive  formulation  991-67. 
Incorporate  either  emery  grit  or  graphite.  The  emery  will  produce  an  abrasive  surface, 
and  the  graphite  will  produce  a  hard  sliding  surface. 

3.  Repairs  to  Checks  and  Splits 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then,  assuming  that  the  application  is  for 
timber  impregnated  with   creosote,  apply  adhesive   formulation   991-67. 

4.  Adhesive  for  Laminating  Timbers 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then,  assuming  that  the  application  is  for 
timber  impregnated  with   creosote,   apply  adhesive   formulation  991-67. 

5.  Adhesive   for   Gluing    Component    Parts  of  Trestle 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then,  assuming  that  the  application  is  for 
timber  impregnated  with    creosote,  apply  adhesive  formulation  991-67. 

6.  Adhesive  for  Bonding  Concrete  Surfacing  to  Laminated  Timber  Girders 

If  cast-in-place  concrete  is  to  be  used,  coat  the  timber  surfaces  with  formulation 
991-61,  991-75  or  P2,  and  cast  the  concrete  onto  the  wet  epoxy  formulation. 

If  precast  concrete  is  to  be  used  prime  both  the  timber  and  the  concrete  surfaces 
with  formulation  Pi.  Use  formulation  991-67  to  completely  fill  space  between  concrete 
and  timber. 

7.  Bonding    Other    Wearing   Surfaces   to   Timber   Decks 

Prime  surfaces  with   formulation  Pi,  then  apply  formulation  991-67. 

8.  Spraying    for    Fire   Retardants 

No  suggestions. 

9.  Filling  Rotted  Cores  in  Piles,  Caps,  Etc. 

The  decayed  wood  should  be  removed  to  expose  a  sound  substrate.  Formulation 
991-67  is  suggested  for  filing  the  volume  from  which  the  decayed  material  has  been 
removed.  If  possible,  first  apply  a  prime  coat  of  formulation  Pi.  Large  cavities  can  be 
partially  filled  with  sound  wood,  using  the  adhesive  for  filling  the  balance  <>t  the  void. 

B.   APPLICATION'S   FOR    COMMITTEE  8— MASONRY 
1.  Waterproofing  of  Concrete  and  Dampproofing 
Backs  of  Abutments,  Retaining  Walls,  Etc. 

Use   formulation  Pi.  It  may  be  applied  by  brush   oi  spray   equipment. 


6       Epcxy    Resins 

2.  Surfacing  Car   Washing  Platforms 

Use  formulation  632-1255,  a  pigmented  coating,  for  concrete  washing  platforms. 
It  may  be  applied  by  brush  or  spray  equipment. 

If  the  platform  has  a  concrete  surface  that  is  pitted  or  spalled,  prime  the  surface 
with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  the  epoxy  floor-topping  compound,  formulation  1101- 
32.  This  formula  may  be  pigmented  to  any  desired  color,  and  may  be  applied  tV  to 
%  in  thick. 

If  a  non-skid  surface  is  desired  on  the  washing  platforms,  a  brush  or  squeegee 
coat  of  formulation  Pi  may  be  applied,  and  sand  or  an  abrasive  aggregate  such  as 
carborundum  may  be  strewn  on  top  of  the  wet  application.  Following  an  overnight 
cure  at  room  temperature  (75  F  or  above)  the  surface  is  ready  for  light  traffic.  If 
waterproofing  the  surface  is  required,  use  formulation  Pi. 

3.  Bonding  New  Concrete  to  Old  Concrete 

Use  formulation  991-61,  991-75  or  P2.  Apply  a  brush  coat  onto  the  old  concrete 
and  cast  the  fresh  concrete  onto  the  wet  epoxy  to  effect  a  bond. 

4.  Splicing  Concrete  Piles 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  use  formulation  991-67.  Apply  a  brush 
coat  to  both  concrete  surfaces  prior  to  splicing. 

5.  Protection  of  Post-Tensioning  Anchorage 

If  chemical  and  solvent  resistance  is  of  prime  importance  and  water  resistance  is 
not  required,  use  Epi-Rez  285-1  primer  with  Epi-Rez  285-6  as  an  enamel  finish.  If 
water  resistance  is  of  prime  importance  use  Epi-Rez  285-22  primer  with  632-1255  as 
an  enamel  finish.  These  may  be  applied  by  brush  or  spray  equipment. 

6.  Bonding  for  Composite  Section  of  Concrete  and  Steel 

Prime  concrete  surfaces  with   formulation  Pi,  then  use  formulation  991-67.  Apply  a 
brush  coat  of  991-67  to  both  surfaces  to  be  bonded. 

7.  Sealing   Joints   Where   Masonry   Stones  Are   Moving   Under  Load 

Prime   surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  formulation  991-67. 

8.  Grout  for  Heavy   Bed  Plates 

Use  formulation  991-67. 

9.  Joint  Filler 

Use  formulation  Epi-Rez  504-33. 

10.  Repair  of  Membrane  Waterproofing 
Use    formulation   Epi-Rez   242-2. 

11.  Fastening   Rubber   Pads  to  Concrete 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  adhesive  formulation  991-67. 

12.  Shear   Keys   Between  Concrete   Beams 

Prime  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi  and  then  fill  keyway  with  formulation  1101-32, 
using  600  parts  of  sand  per  100  parts  of  resin  by  weight.  If  a  faster  cure  time  is  required 
use  formulation  991-75  instead  of  1101-32.  Use  of  electric  heating  cables  or  steam  in 
the  key-way  will  further  accelerate  the  cure. 


Epoxy    Resins 7 

C.  APPLICATIONS  FOR  COMMITTEE   15— IRON  AND  STEEL  STRUCTURES 

1.  Protection  Against  Corrosion 

If  chemical  and  solvent  resistance  is  of  prime  importance  and  water  resistance  is 
not  required,  use  Epi-Rez  285-1  primer  with  Epi-Rez  285-6  as  an  enamel  finish.  If  water 
resistance  is  of  prime  importance  use  Epi-Rez  285-22  primer  with  632-1255  as  an 
enamel  finish.  The  materials  may  be  applied  by  brush  or  spray  equipment. 

These  applications  are  two-ccat  systems.  If  time  permits  only  a  one-coat  system, 
use  formulation  Cl.  This  is  not  considered  a  substitute  for  the  two-coat  system  and 
should  be  used  only  if  time  does  not  permit  using  the  two-coat  system. 

2.  Fastening   Masonry   Plates  to   Concrete 

Prime  concrete  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  formulation  991-67.  Apply 
a  brush  coat  to  both  surfaces  to  be  bonded. 

3.  Preventing  Slippage  of  Bolted  Joints 

Use  adhesive  formulation  991-67.  It  may  be  applied  on  the  contact  surfaces  and 
on  the  bolt  shanks. 

4.  Waterproofing    Steel   Plates   in  Lieu   of   Other   Waterproofing   Methods 

Use  Epi-Rez  285-22  and  formulation  632-1255.  If  time  permits  only  a  one-ccat 
system,  use  formulation  Cl.  This  is  not  considered  a  substitute  for  the  two-coat  system 
and  should  be  used  only   when  time  does  not  permit  using  the  two-coat  system. 

5.  Tacking  Welded  Sub-Assemblies  Prior  to  Welding 

Use  formulation  991-67.  The  application  of  heat  (blow  torch)  to  the  bonded  mem- 
ber will  speed  up  the  rate  of  set  of  this  adhesive. 

6.  Shipping   Shop   Assembled   Sub-Assemblies 

Use  formulation  991-67.  The  application  of  heat  (blow  torch)  to  the  bonded  mem- 
ber will  speed  up  the  rate  of  set  of  this  adhesive. 

7.  Bonding  Timber  Decks  and  Ties  to  Steel  Girders 

Prime  the  timber  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi,  then  apply  formulation  991-67  to 
either  the   timber  or  the  steel    surfaces. 

8.  Bonding   Elevation   Blocks   to    Bridge   Decks 

Prime  the  timber  surfaces  with  formulation  Pi.  then  apply  formulation  991-67  to 
either  the   timber  or  the  steel   surfaces. 

9.  Sealing   Hold-Down  Devices   and  Spikes   Firmly  in  Bridge  Timber 

Formulation  Pi  is  recommended  where  a  fluid  system  is  needed  to  obtain  good 
penetration.  If  the  space  to  be  filled  IS  large,  formulation  991-67  or  1101-32  can 
be  used. 

10.  Applying   Anti-Slip   Surfaces   on  Steel  Plates, 
Stairs  and   Other  Areas   for  Positive  Traction 

Apply  a  squeegee  coat  of  formulation  Pi  and  sand,  or  an  abrasive  aggregate  such 
as  carborundum  may  be  strewn  on  top  01  the  wet  coat.  Following  an  overnight  cure 
at  room  temperature  (75  F  or  above),  the  surface  i-  ready  for  traffic. 


Epoxy    Resins 


Part  3 
Formulations 


FORMULATION   242-2,  EPOXY— TAR   COATING 


Formula: 

Pounds 

Gallons 

Material 

25.0 

1.42 

Cab-O-Sil 

300.0 

12.86 

Silver  Lake  talc 

433.0 

44.41 

Tar  @  75%  solids* 

361.0 

38.00 

Epi-Rez  242 

24.0 

3.31 

Solvesso   1 00 

1143.0 

100.00 

32.5 

3.91 

Tetraethylene  penta 

Catalyze: 

To  100.0  lb  242-2,  add  2.9  lb  tetraethylene  pentamine.  Age  1  hr,  then  apply. 


Constants: 

Viscosity 
Wt/Gal 
P.V.C. 

Vehicle  solids 
Total  solids 
Converter 
Pot  life 

Resin  Composition: 

50%  tar  solids 
50%  epoxy  solids 


Thixotropic 

11.43 

18.4% 

79.4% 

85.3% 

10.0%  on  epoxy  solids 

4-8     hr 


*  Various   tars    can   be    used;    successful    results    were    obtained   with    those   having   a    melting   point 
of   50-60   C   and   a   free   carbon   content  of    10-20%. 


EPI-REZ  285-1,   ZINC   CHROMATE— IRON  OXIDE  PRIMER 

Formula  and  Manufacturing  Procedure: 
Pounds  Gallons  Material 


245.0 

5.70 

Pure  iron  oxide 

36.8 

.79 

Zinc  oxide 

36.8 

1.26 

Zinc  chromate 

116.0 

4.80 

Asbestine 

116.0 

5.16 

Whiting 

408.0 

47.00 

Epi-Rez  285 

124.0 

17.29 

Xylol 

136.0 

18.00 

Butyl  cellosolve 

1218.6 

100.00 

14.7 

1.71 

T.E.P.A.  (tetraethyh 

Reduce  and  Catalyze: 

3:1   (by  weight)  +  1.2  lb  T.E.P.A/100  lb  632-768 

Reduction  solvent  for  spray — 2,  1,   1  tuluol,  butanol,  M.E.K.   (by  volume) 
Reduction  solvent  for  brushing — 2,  1,  1  xylol,  butyl  cellosolve  (by  volume) 
Allow  to  stand  1  hr  before  using 


Epoxy    Resins                                                          9 

Constants: 

Viscosity 

77  K.U. 

Wt/Gal 

12.19 

Red.  viscosity 

spray — (after  1  hr  aging) — 19-21  sec,  No.  4  Ford  cup 

brush — (after  1  hr  aging) — 24-27  sec,  No.  4  Ford  cup 

Application 

spray/brush 

P.V.C. 

41.4% 

Total  solids 

65.5% 

Vehicle  solids 

36.6% 

Converter 

6%  T.E.P.A.  (on  resin  solids) 

Pot  life 

8-12  hr 

EPI-REZ   285-6,   GRAY  ENAMEL 
Formula  and  Manufacturing  Precedure- 

Materials 
Rutile  non-chalking   titanium  dioxide 
Lampblack 

IAF  Compound  X-2280  Imperial  Color  &  Chem. 
Epi-Rez  285 
Xylol 
Butyl  cellosolve 

Tetraethylene  pentamine 


Pounds 

Gallons 

100.0 

2.86 

3.0 

.20 

4.0 

.18 

698.0 

80.00 

60.5 

8.41 

62.7 

8.35 

928.2 

100.00 

16.8 

2.04 

Co. 


Reduce  and  Catalyze: 

For  Spray— to  100  lb  of  285-6  add  35  lb  of  reducing  solvent  and  1.8  lb  of  T.E.P.A. 

Allow  to  stand  1  hr  before  using. 
For  Brush— to  100  lb  of  285-6  add  20  lb  of  reducing  solvent  and  1.8  lb  of  T.E.P.A. 

Allow  to  stand  1  hr  before  using. 
Reducing  Solvent  Lineup — 2-1-1  parts  by  volume  diacetone  alcohol,  toluol  and  butyl 

cellosolve. 


Constants: 

Viscosity 

75  K.U. 

Wt/gal 

9.28 

Red.  viscosity 

spray  (1  hr  aging)   19-22  sec.  No.  4  Ford  cup 

brush  (1  hr  aging)  54-57  sec.  No.  4  Ford  cup 

Application 

brush  or  spray 

P.V.C. 

6.8% 

Vehicle  solids 

51.6% 

Total  solids 

56.7% 

Catalyst 

4%  on  resin  solids 

Pot  life 

8-12  hr 

EPI-REZ  285-22,  RUST   INHIBITIVE  PRIMER 
Formula  and  Manufacturing  Procedure: 


Pounds 

Gallons 

Part 

A 

Material 

600.0 

17.50 

M-50  lead  silica  chromatc   

4.0 

.50 

Soya  lecithin 

261.0 

30.00 

Epi-Rez   285 

71.7 

10.00 

Xylol 

112.3 

15.00 

Butyl  cellosolve 

15.8 

2.00 

Diacetone  alcohol 

1064.8 


75.00 


National  Lead  Co 


1(1 


Epoxy    Resins 


Viscosity— 72  K.U. 
Wt/gal— 14.18  lb 


Part  B 
171.5  22.00 

23.7  3.00 


195.2 


25  mi 


Versamid  401 
Diacetone  alcohol 


Viscosity — 70  K.U. 
Wt/gal— 7.82 


.General  Mills 


Composite  Blend 

1064.8  75.00  Part  A 

195.2  25.00  Part  B 


1260.0 

100.00 

Constants: 

Viscosity 

70  K.U. 

Wt/gal 

12.60  lb 

P.V.C. 

39.4% 

Vehicle  solids 

39.5% 

Total  solids 

68.5% 

Application 

brush  after  aging 

blend  approximately  1   hr 

Pot  life 

8-24  hr 

FORMULATION  504-33— JOINT  FILLER 

Resin  Portion: 

Part  A 

k 

Same  Formula 

Based  on 
100  Parts  by 

Pounds 

Gallons 

Material 

Weight  of  Resin 

56.8 

6.14 

Epi-Rez   504 

100 

8.5 

0.57 

Bentone  34 

15 

29.5 

1.34 

Surfex  MM 

52 

5.2 

0.31 

Asbestos  7RF6 

9 

100.0 

8.36 

Converter:  Part  B 

73.8 

9.36 

Epi-Cure  854 

130 

11.3 

0.75 

Bentone  34 

20 

45.4 

2.06 

Surfex  MM 

80 

8.5 

0.50 

Asbestos  7RF6 

15 

139.0 

12.67 

Constants: 

Viscosity 

Paste 

Wt/gal 

11.36  lb 

Pot  life 

8  hr 

for  1  gal.  at  77  F 

Mixing: 

Part  A — Combine  Epi-Rez  504,  Bentone  34,  Surfex  MM  and  Asbestos  7RF6.  Blend 
thoroughly.  Pass  resin  composition  through  a  three-roll  paint  mill.  (Color  is  light  gray). 

Part  B — Combine  Epi-Cure  854,  Bentone  34,  Surfex  MM  and  Asbestos  7RF6.  Blend 
thoroughly.  Pass  converter  composition  through  a  three-roll  paint  mill.  (Color  is  buff). 

When  ready  to  use  combine  Part  A  and  Part  B  and  mix  thoroughly  until  a  uniform 
color  is  obtained 


Epoxy   Resins 


11 


Application: 

Caulking  compound  may  be  applied  by  putty  knife,  spatula,  or  caulking  gun. 

Curing  Schedule: 

Gel  time,  16  hr  at  74  F  for  thin  sections.  At  74  F  the  compound  continues  to  cure 
lor  several  days.  At  temperatures  below  70  F  this  composition  will  cure  only  very  slowly. 

Physical  Data: 

This  material  develops  a  hardness  of  Shore  A  70  in  five  days  and  will  not  harden 
appreciably  on  further  aging.  The  water  resistance  and  caustic  resistance  is  quite  good, 
although  immersion  in  strong  solvents  and  acids  is  not   recommended. 


Material  Sources: 

Epi-Rez  504 
Bentone  34 
Surfex  MM 
Asbestos  7RF6 
Epi-Cure  854 


(Jones-Dabney  Company) 
(National  Lead  Company) 
(Diamond  Alkali  Company) 
(Johns-Manville  Asbestos  Fibre  Division) 
(Jones-Dabney  Company) 


FORMULATION  632-1255 
Description  and  Use: 

Epi-Rez  285 — Versamid  401  gray  enamal 

Formula  and  Manufacturing  Procedure: 


Pounds 

Gallons 

(Part  A) 

Material 

100.0 

2.86 

Rutile  non-chalking  TiOa 

3.0 

.20 

Lamp  black 

4.0 

.18 

IAFX-2280 

350.0 

40.14 

Epi-Rez  285 

98.0 

13.00 

Butyl  cellosolve 

81.0 

10.29 

Diacetone  alcohol 
Viscosity— 61  KU, 

636.0 

66.67 

wt/gal- 

(Part  B) 

233.0 

29.87 

Versamid  401** 

27.0 

3.46 

Diacetone  alcohol 

260.00 


33.33 


Composite  Blend*** 
636.0  66.67 

260.0  33.33 


896.0 


100.00 


Viscosity— 89  KU,  wt/gal— 7.80 


Part  A 
Part  B 


Resin  Composition 

60 — epoxy  solids 
40 — Versamid  solids 


*'  If   Versamid    100  is  preferred,  then   use  60%  by  weight  (if  the   Versamid 
'•  Allow    mixture   to  age    1    hr  before  using. 


Constants: 


Viscosity  72  KU 

Wt/cal  8.96 

P.V.C.  7.5% 

Vehicle  solids  44.4% 

Total  solids  51.0% 

Pot  life  24-^8  hr 


12 

Epoxy   Resins 

FORMULATION  991- 

61 

Resin  Portion 

Same  Formula  Based  on 

Pounds 

45.35 

54.42 

0.23 

Gallons 
4.67 
2.46 
0.01 

Material 
Epi-Rez  509 
Surfex  MM 
Lamp  black  S-100 

100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 
100 
120 

0.5 

100.00 

7.14 

Converter  : 

22.67 

4.53 

36.28 

2.14 
0.56 
1.64 

Thiokol  LP-3 
DMP-30 
Surfex  MM 

50 
10 
80 

Constants: 

Wt/gal 
Viscositv 
Pot  life' 

14.24  lb,  including  converter 

brushing  paste 

45  min-1  lb  batch,  at  72  F 

Mixing: 

Blend  Epi-Rez  509,  Surfex  MM,  and  lamp  black.  Stir  thoroughly.  Pass  combina- 
tion over  a  three-roll  mill  two  passes  for  good  dispersion.  Blend  Thickol  LP-3,  DMP- 
30,  and  Surfex  MM,  and  stir  thoroughly.  Pass  combination  over  a  three-roll  mill  two 
passes  for  a  good  dispersion.  When  ready  to  use  combine  the  resin  mixture  with  con- 
verter mixture  and  blend  thoroughly. 

Application: 

Apply  this  adhesive  to  the  old  concrete  surface  evenly  with  a  stiff  brush  to  a  film 
thickness  of  at  least  15  mils.  Apply  immediately  fresh  concrete  on  top  of  the  adhesive. 
No  more  should  be  mixed  at  one  time  than  can  be  used  within  the  limits  of  the  pot  life 
of  the  adhesive. 

Suggested  Uses: 

For  bonding  old  to  new  concrete,  under  water;  for  bonding  old  to  new  concrete 
in  air;  for  sealing  cracks  on  horizontal  concrete  surfaces. 

Cure: 

Time  required  for  curing  under  water  is  approximately  14  days.  Cure  time  at  room 
temperature  is  over  night. 


Material  Sources: 

Epi-Rez  509 
Surfex  MM 
Lamp  black  S- 
DMP-30 
Thiokol  LP-3 


(Jones-Dabney  Company) 
(Diamond  Alkali  Company) 
100  (Monsanto  Chemical  Company) 

(Rohm  and  Haas  Company) 
(Thiokol  Chemical  Company) 


FORMULATION  991-67,  GENERAL  PURPOSE  ADHESIVE 


Resin  Portion: 

Pounds        Gallons 

Material 

Same  Formula  Based  on 
100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 

64.51 

25.81 

9.68 

6.65 
1.21 
0.31 

Epi-Rez  509 
Asbestos  7-TF-l 
Alumina  T-60 

100 
40 
15 

100.00 


8.17 


Epoxy    Resins 13 

Converter: 

32.26  4.08  Epi-Cure  855  50 

6.45  0.37  Asbestos  7-TF-l  10 

6.45  0.21  Alumina  T-60  10 

Constants: 

Wt/gal   11.31  lb,  including  converter  portion 

Pot  life    2]/2  hr  at  77  F  1-lb  batch 

Viscosity    Brookfield,  No.  6  spindle,  at  77  F 

RPM  Cps 

5  56,000 

10  34,000 

20  22,500 

Mixing: 

Blend  the  Epi-Rez  509,  7-TF-l  Asbestos,  and  T-60  Alumina  to  a  smooth  texture. 
Blend  the  Epi-Cure  855,  7-TF-l  Asbestos,  and  T-60  Alumina  to  a  smooth  texture. 
When    ready    to    use    combine    the    resin    and    converter    compositions    and    blend 
thoroughly. 

Curing  Schedule: 

This  adhesive  will  reach  its  maximum  strength  at  77  F  after  2  days.  At  250  F 
the  maximum  strength  is  obtained  in  10  min. 

Physical  Properties: 

The  following  shear  strengths  were  obtained  after  five  days  at  room  temperature: 

1.  Creosoted  wood  to   creosoted  wood    1,610  psi  in  shear 

Wood  failure  on  all  tests. 

2.  Creosoted  wood  to  steel   1,744  psi  in  shear 

Wood  failure  on  all  tests. 

3.  Steel   to    steel    2,793  psi  in  shear 

4.  Aluminum   to   aluminum    2,130  psi  in  shear 

5.  Rubber  to  concrete  1 20  psi 

The  elongation  of  the  rubber  was  285%,  at  ultimate  shear. 

The  adhesive  was  applied  approximately  5  mils  thick  on  each  surface  to  be  bonded. 
Only  sufficient  pressure  to  achieve  contact  was  applied.  All  samples  were  allowed  to  cure 
at  room  temperature  for  a  ptriod  of  five  days  prior  to  testing. 

Material  Sources: 

Epi-Rez    509    ( Jones-Dabney  Company) 

Asbestos    7-TF-l    (Johns-Manville  Asbestos  Fibre  Division) 

Alumina  T-60   (Aluminum  Company  of  America) 

Epi-Cure   855    (Jones-Dabney   Company) 

FORMULATION  991-75 

Resin  Portion:  Same  Formula  Based  on 

Pounds        Gallons  Material  100  Paris  by  Weight  of  Resin 

100.00  10.31  Epi-Rez  509  100 

Converter: 

35.00  4.27  Epi-Cure  872  35 

Filler: 

(Variable)     (Variable)     Clean,  dry,  well  graded  masonry  sand 

The  amount  of  sand  to  use  will  depend  on  the  gradation  of  the  taod  and  the 
degree  of  workability  desired.  Mix  trial  batches   to  determine  best  proportions. 


14 


Epoxy    Resins 


Constants: 

Unfilled  Filled 

Pot  life  at  77  F  in   1-lb  batch    y2  hr  Ya,  hr 

Pot  life  in   thin   films  at   77  F    2  hr  2  hr 


FORMULATION   991-76 


Resin  Portion: 

Pounds 

Gallons 

Material 

Part 

71.42 

7.36 

Epi-Rez   509 

100 

14.29 

0.47 

Alumina  T-60 

20 

14.29 

0.67 

Asbestos  7-TF-l 

20 

100.00             8.50  140 

Converter  : 

25.00             3.05             Epi-Cure   872  35 

15.00            0.50            Alumina  T60  21 

15.00            0.70            Asbestos  7-TF-l  21 

55.00             4.25  77 

Constants: 

Viscosity  at  1   rpm,  77  F   (cps)  84,000 

Viscosity  at  5  rpm,  77  F   (cps)  35,200 

Pot  life  at  77  F  for  a  1-pint  batch  (min)  35 

Material  Sources: 

Epi-Rez    509    (Jones-Dabney  Company) 

Alumina  T-60   (Aluminum  Company  of  America) 

Asbestos    7-TF-l     ( Johns-Manville  Asbestos  Fibre  Division) 

Epi-Cure    872    (Jones-Dabney  Company) 


FORMULATION    1101-32 

Same  Formula  Based  on 
Pounds        Gallons  Material  100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 

100  10.31  Epi-Rez  509  100 

Converter  : 

50  6.33  Epi-Cure  855  50 

Filler: 

(Variable)      (Variable)  Clean,  dry,  well  graded  masonry  sand 

The  amount  of  sand  to  use  will  depend  on  the  gradation  of  the  sand  and  the  degree 
of    workability   desired.  Mix   trial  batches  to   determine  best  proportions. 

Constants: 

Pot  life    (filled)     3-4  hr 

Pot  life   (unfilled)    \y2-2  hr 

mixing  1,900  cps  at  77  F  on  Brookfield  Spindle 

No.  3  at  20  rpm  33%  of  liquid 

Converter 

Wt/gal    (unfilled)     9.0  lb 

Mixing: 

Blend  resin,  converter,  and  sand,  in  that  order. 


Epoxy    Resins 


15 


Curing  Schedule: 

Light  traffic — overnight  at  77  F 
Heavy  traffic — 3  days  at  77  F 

Material  Sources: 

Epi-Rez  509    (Jones-Dabney   Company) 

Epi-Cure  855    (Jones-Dabney   Company) 

Crystal   silica   sand    (Ottawa  Silica  Company) 


FORMULATION  Pi 


\<\  >i.\  Portion: 

Pounds         Gallons 
100  10.31 


Converter: 

50 


6.33 


Material 
Epi-Rez  509 

Epi-Cure  855 


Same  formula  Based  on 

100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 

100 


50 


Pot  life:   100-g  batch  at  77  F  =  4J^  hr. 


FORMULATION  P2 


Resin  Portion: 

Pounds         Gallon* 
100  10.31 


Material 
Epi-Rez  509 

Epi-Cure  872 
Pot  life:  100-g  batch  at  77  F  =  38  min 


Convert kr  : 
35 


4.27 


Same  Formula  Based  on 

100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 

100 


35 


Resin  Portion:  Part  .1 
Pounds        Gallons 


100 


10.31 

0.45 


FORMULATION  Cl 


Material 

Epi-Rez  509 
Cabosil  M5 


Same  Formula  Based  on 
100  Parts  by  Weight  of  Resin 

100 


Converter  Portion:   Part  B 

35  4.27  Epi-Cure  --7- 


35 


Mixing: 

1.  Using  separate  containers,  measure  out  108  parts  by  weight  of  the  resin  portion 
(  white  paste  marked  "A")  and  35  parts  of  the  converter  portion  (brown  liquid  marked 
"B"). 

2.  Put  the   108  part-  ol    "A"  and  35   parts  of  "BM  together  in  a  third  container. 

3.  Blend  "A"  and  "B"  together  until  the  mix  has  a  uniform  color  with  oo  streaks 
Be  sure  that  no  unmixed  resin  adheres  to  the  side  of  the  container.  It  should  take  from 
3  to  5  min  to  obtain  thorough  blending. 

4.  The  epoxy  mixture  should  now  be  applied  without  delay  to  the  surfaces  to  be 
coated.  An  inexpensive  4-in  brush  i-  recommended.  Brush  it  on  in  a  thick  even  coal 
The  coverage  should  be  approximately  100  sq  ft  per  gal  on  a  reasonably  smooth  sur 
face,  less  coverage  will  be  realized  over  areas  containing  rivel  head-  or  deep  pits.  It  the 
rate  of  application  i-  dower  than  anticipated,  the  hardening  time  for  the  batch  (pot 
life)  can  be  extended  by  emptying  tht  containei  ol  epoxj  along  the  surface  to  be 

and  then  brushing  it  out  for  the  required  covei 


16 Epoxy    Resins 

Curing  Time: 

When  the  epoxy  is  spread  out  in  a  thin  film,  the  internal  heat  of  the  reaction  is 
rapidly  dissipated  into  the  air.  Because  of  this,  the  curing  time  of  the  epoxy  ccating 
is  dependent  on  the  surrounding  temperature;  below  60  F  it  will  not  harden,  between 
60  and  70  F  it  will  harden  in  a  few  hours  and  obtain  maximum  strength  in  three  to 
four  days.  If  a  second  or  touch  up  coat  is  necessary,  it  can  be  applied  as  soon  as  the 
first  coat  is  hard  enough  so  that  the  second  application  will  not  disturb  it. 


Part  4 
General  Instructions  for  Use  of  Epoxy  Resins 

1.  Surface   Preparation 

For  Application   to  Timber 

Untreated  timber  will  normally  not  require  any  special  surface  treatment.  Surface 
brushing  or  blowing  with  high-pressure  air  will  remove  dirt,  dust  and  loose  particles. 
Make  certain  the  air  compressor  is  equipped  with  an  oil-water  trap.  Oil  and  grease 
should  be  removed  with  a  solvent.  The  surface  should  preferably  be  dry. 

Timber  treated  with  a  preservative  such  as  creosote,  coal-tar  or  petroleum  oil  must 
have  the  preservative  removed  from  the  surface  before  applying  the  epoxy  resin.  Loose 
oil  must  be  scraped  off  and  the  surface  washed  with  a  solvent.  A  final  rubbing  with 
clean  cloths  should  then  produce  a  suitable  surface.  Treated  timber  that  has  weathered 
a  number  of  years  and  has  no  surface  oil  present  can  be  cleaned  as  indicated  for 
untreated  timber. 

For  Application  to  Concrete 

Concrete  has  a  natural  roughness  that  is  favorable  to  the  acceptance  of  epoxy  resin. 
New  concrete  and  old  concrete  that  is  still  sound  should  be  well  brushed  and  air  blown 
with  high  presssure  air.  Any  oil  or  grease  on  the  surface  should  be  removed  with  a 
solvent  and  the  surface  wiped  with  clean  cloths.  If  the  surface  has  been  treated  with  a 
curing  membrane,  oil,  silicone,  etc.,  such  materials  must  be  removed,  sand  blasting  may 
be  necessary.  Laittance  must  also  be  removed.  Loose  material  on  old  concrete  that  has 
surface  deterioration  must  be  removed  to  sound  concrete.  All  pulverized  and  powdered 
concrete  must  then  be  removed  from  cracks  and  cavities.  A  high-pressure  water  jet  can 
be  used  for  this,  followed  by  blowing  with  high-pressure  air  supplied  by  a  compressor 
with  an  oil-water  trap.  Allow  to  dry  as  necessary  for  the  type  of  epoxy  resin  to  be  used. 

For  Application  to  Steel 

Until  various  surface  treatments  have  been  evaluated  it  is  recommended  that  steel 
surfaces  be  sand  blasted  to  receive  the  epoxy  resin.  If  sand  blasting  is  not  practical,  the 
surfaces  should  be  thoroughly  scraped,  wire  brushed  to  remove  loose  mill  scale  and 
cleaned  with  a  solvent  to  remove  all  dirt,  oil,  grease  and  other  materials  that  would 
prevent  the  epoxy  resin  from  bonding  to  the  base  metal.  Wipe  with  clean  cloths.  This 
is  not  a  substitute  for  sand  blasting,  but  may  in  some  instances  produce  satisfac- 
tory bond. 

For  Application  to  Rubber 

Wash  surfaces  thoroughly  with  methyl  ethyl  ketone  to  remove  any  mold-release 
agent. 


E  poxy    Resins 17 

2.  Mixing 

The  manufacture's  instructions  should  be  read  and  followed.  Some  mixtures  require 
a  specific  time  for  aging  before  application,  others  do  not.  Note  also  the  specified  pot 
life,  as  this  can  be  a  guide  as  to  how  fast  the  mixture  will  set  up. 

Mix  small  quantities  at  a  time.  Usually  1  to  3  gal  can  be  most  conveniently  handled. 
Use  separate  containers  and  measure  parts,  by  volume  or  weight,  of  resin,  converter 
and  fillers  as  specified  in  Part  3,  Formulations. 

Thorough  blending  of  all  ingredients  is  essential.  Blend  the  resin  and  converter 
before  adding  the  filler.  The  mixing  container  should  be  of  larger  capacity  than  the 
volume  to  be  mixed.  For  example,  for  a  1-gal  batch,  use  a  3-gal  container.  Mix  thor- 
oughly so  that  all  components  are  blended  uniformly  from  top  to  bottom  as  well  as  to 
the  sides  of  the  container. 

If  the  resin  portion  and  the  converter  portion  are  furnished  in  contrasting  colors, 
the  time  of  mixing  can  be  determined  by  the  time  required  to  attain  a  uniform  color. 
If  color  contrast  is  not  apparent,  a  1-gal  mix  should  be  hand  mixed  with  a  spatula  for 
5  min  or  mixed  with  an  electric  paint-type  mixer  for  2  min. 

Care  should  be  taken  to  not  contaminate  the  resin  and  converter  by  reusing  mixing 
tools  covered  with  other  ingredients. 

The  chemical  reaction  between  resin  and  converter  generates  heat.  When  large  quan- 
ties  are  mixed,  this  heat  cannot  be  dissipated  through  the  sides  of  the  container  or  into 
the  air  and  will  accelerate  the  setting  of  the  mixture.  Pot  life  is  thus  influenced  by  the 
volume  of  the  mixture  and  the  degree  with  which  its  heat  of  reaction  can  be  dissipated. 
Spread  out  in  a  thin  film,  it  will  set  up  slower  than  if  in  a  deep  container. 


Advance  Report  of  Committee  3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation* 
R.  B.  Radkey,  Chairman 

Termite  Control  Investigation — Inspection  of  Specimens 
After  52  Months  of  Exposure 

Introduction 

This  report  summarizes  the  results  of  an  inspection  of  treated  specimens  and  un- 
treated control  specimens  after  about  52  months  of  exposure  in  a  test  plot  established 
in  the  Austin  Cary  Memorial  Forest  of  the  University  of  Florida  near  Gainesville,  Fla., 
to  determine  the  most  effect  preservatives  and  preservative  retentions  to  reduce  the  rate 
of  decay  and  termite  attack  in  oak,  pine  and  fir  wood. 

The  initial  installation,  consisting  of  1296  treated  specimens  and  30  untreated  con- 
trol specimens,  was  made  in  November  1957.  A  total  of  9  different  preservatives  was 
used,  with  3  different  retentions  for  each  preservative.  A  report  describing  the  initial 
installation  is  published  in  the  1959  Proceedings,  Vol.  60,  page  131.  It  covers  in  detail 
the  treatment  of  the  specimens,  chemical  analyses  of  the  preservatives,  and  method  of 
installation.  A  supplemental  installation  of  576  specimens  treated  with  4  additional  pre- 
servatives, and  15  untreated  control  specimens,  was  made  in  November  1959.  A  detailed 
report  describing  this  installation  is  published  in  the  1961  Proceedings,  Vol.  62,  page  95. 

The  results  of  an  inspection  of  the  specimens  after  40  months  of  exposure  are  set 
forth  in  AAR  Research  Department  report  ER-16  and  in  the  1962  Proceedings,  Vol.  63, 
page  53.  The  general  conclusion  was  that  only  those  specimens  treated  with  coal  tar 
creosote  completely  resisted  both  decay  and  termite  attack  during  that  interval. 

The  investigation  is  being  conducted  under  the  general  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee, 
director  of  engineering  research,  Research  Department,  AAR.  The  conduct  of  the  inves- 
tigation and  preparation  of  the  report  were  in  charge  of  E.  J.  Ruble,  executive  research 
engineer,  research  staff,  AAR.  The  inspection  of  the  specimens  was  conducted  by  Dr. 
J.  B.  Huffman  of  the  University  of  Florida,  R.  B.  Radkey,  chairman  of  Committee  3 — 
Ties  and  Wood  Preservation,  F.  J.  Fudge  and  W.  L.  Kahler,  members  of  Committee  3, 
and  I.  A.  Eaton,  research  staff,  AAR.  Funds  for  the  investigation  are  being  provided 
by  the  AAR. 

Grading 

The  system  of  specimen  grading  for  both  decay  and  termite  attack  used  during  the 
inspection  corresponds  to  that  recommended  by  the  American  Wood  Preservers  Associa- 
tion and  is  fully  described  in  the  previously  mentioned  reports  covering  the  inspection 
after  40  months  of  exposure. 

Field  Inspections 

The  inspection  of  the  specimens  was  conducted  in  the  same  manner  as  described  in 
the  above  mentioned  reports.  It  involved  the  removal  of  each  2-  by  4-  by  18-in  speci- 
men, which  is  buried  in  the  ground  for  half  its  length,  cleaning  off  the  dirt  and  sand 
with  a  spatula  and  then  determining  its  grade  for  both  decay  and  termite  attack.  The 
specimen  was  then  replaced  in  its  original  position.  The  decay  and  termite  grades  are 
recorded  on  "Field  Inspection  Data  Sheets"  an  example  of  which  is  shown  in  the  above 
mentioned  reports. 


•  An    abstract    of    Report    ER-23    issued    by    the    Research    Department.    AAR.    Copies   of    the    full 
report  can  be  obtained  from  the  director  of  engineering  revarch,   AAR,  3140  S.   Federal  St.,   Chicago   16 

19 


20 Termite    Control    Investigation 

Analysis  of  Field  Inspection  Data 

The  data  on  the  decay  and  termite  attack  grades,  as  recorded  on  the  ''Field  Inspec- 
tion Data  Sheets"  were  summarized  and  recorded  on  the  "Classified  Data  Sheets", 
example  of  which  is  shown  in  the  above  mentioned  reports.  The  ratings  for  decay  and 
termite  attack  were  determined  in  the  same  manner  as  explained  in  the  previous  reports. 

In  previous  reports  the  average  index  rating  was  obtained  by  averaging  the  decay 
rating  with  the  termite  attack  rating.  It  has  been  pointed  out  that  when  all  the  stakes 
have  failed,  either  by  decay  or  termite  attack,  the  average  index  rating  should  be  zero, 
but  the  method  previously  used  to  determine  this  average  rating  will  result  in  a  num- 
erical value  greater  than  zero  after  all  the  stakes  have  failed.  The  method  to  determine 
the  average  value  in  this  report  follows  the  recommendation  of  ASTM  Method  D  1758- 
60T,  Evaluating  Wood  Preservatives  by  Field  Tests  with  Stakes,  in  which  the  decay 
and  termite  grades  are  combined,  that  is,  the  lowest  grade  from  either  cause  is  used. 
The  average  index  rating  for  the  untreated  specimens  as  determined  for  the  previous 
inspections  and  shown  in  Tables  1,  2,  and  3  have  not  been  revised,  however. 

Results  of  Inspections 

Untreated  Controls 

The  decay  and  termite  attack  ratings  with  their  average  index  ratings  for  the  un- 
treated controls  installed  in  November  1957  are  shown  in  Table  1  for  exposures  of  14 
months,  25  months,  40  months  and  52  months.  The  values  shown  in  this  table  are  the 
average  of  10  untreated  specimens  of  each  species,  and  it  can  be  seen  that  after  52  months, 
7  of  the  oak,  6  of  the  fir  and  all  10  of  the  pine  specimens  had  failed.  It  can  be  seen  from 
the  index  ratings  that  both  decay  and  termite  attack  contributed  to  the  failure  of  the 
specimens. 

Additional  untreated  controls  were  installed  at  the  time  of  each  inspection,  and  the 
index  ratings  for  these  specimens  for  the  exposure  time  are  shown  on  Tables  2,  3,  and  4. 
In  general  the  index  ratings  for  termite  attack  are  lower  than  the  ratings  for  decay. 

Treated  Specimens 

The  decay  and  termite  attack  ratings  after  52  months  of  exposure  for  the  speci- 
mens treated  with  preservatives  1  to  9,  inch,  are  shown  in  Table  5.  The  data  are  also 
shown  for  preservative  13,  a  25  percent  creosote  with  75  percent  petroleum,  after  27 
months  of  exposure  for  the  No.  1  retention.  Complete  data  are  shown  for  retention  1 
and  2  for  the  nine  preservatives  and  also  for  the  specimens  having  No.  3  retention  of 
preservative  2,  chromated  zinc  chloride,  and  preservative  3,  tanalith.  Only  a  cursory 
examination  was  made  of  the  remaining  specimens,  but  it  was  evident  that  very  little, 
if  any,  decay  or  termite  attack  has  taken  place. 

The  data  tabulated  in  Table  5  for  the  specimens  treated  with  No.  1  retention  are 
shown  graphically  by  the  bar  diagram  on  Fig.  1.  It  is  evident  from  this  diagram  that 
even  with  this  light  retention,  which  is  only  half  that  recommended  by  AREA,  coal  tar 
creosote  is  offering  the  best  protection  against  decay  and  termite  attack  while  chromated 
zinc  chloride  and  tanalith  are  offering  the  least  protection. 

Conclusions 

From  the  data  secured  during  the  inspection  of  treated  specimens  of  oak,  fir  and  pine 
species  after  52  months  of  exposure,  it  seems  logical  to  conclude  that: 


Termite    Control    Investig ation 


21 


Table  1 

SUMMARY  OF  INDEX  RATINGS 

UNTREATED  SPECIMENS 

INSTALLED:    NOV.  1957 


T=Termito 

or 
D»  Decay 

14  Months 
Exposure  , 

25  Months 
Exposure 

40  Months 
Exposure 

52  Months 
Exposure 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

T 

D 

AV. 

77.5 
72.5 

75.0 

67.5 
95.0 
81.25 

60.0 
70.0 
65.0 

37.5 
40.0 

38.75 

40.0 
72.5 
56.25 

30.0 
25.0 
27.5 

27.5 
22.5 
25.0 

40.0 
55.0 

48.75 

10.0 
12.5 
11.25 

10.0 

17.5 

7.5 

15.0 
47.5 

15.0 

0 
0 
0 

No.  of 
Failures 

1 

1 

0 

2 

1 

6 

4 

3 

9 

7 

6 

10 

Table  2 

SUMMARY  OF  INDEX  RATINGS 

UNTREATED  SPECIMENS 

INSTALLED:    JAN  1959 


T=Termite 

or 
D=Decay 

11  Months 
Exposure 

26  Months 
Exposure 

37  Months 
Exposure 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

T 

D 

AV. 

62.5 
67.5 
65.0 

60.0 
67.5 
63.75 

62.5 
65.0 
63.75 

47.5 
42.5 
45.0 

37.5 

57.5 
47.5 

37.5 
17.5 
27.5 

30.0 
35.0 
25.0 

30.0 
42.5 
20.0 

5.0 

5.0 

0 

No.  of 
Failures 

0 

0 

0 

2 

2 

5 

5 

5 

10 

Table  3 

SUMMARY  OF  INDEX  RATINGS 

UNTREATED  SPECIMENS 

INSTALLED:    NOV.  1959 


T=Termite 

or 
D-Decay 

15  Months 
Exposure 

27  Months 
Exposure 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

T 

D 

AV. 

70.0 

75.0 
72.5 

67.5 
77.5 
72.5 

55.0 
70.0 
62.5 

57.5 
65.0 

50.0 

45.0 
67.5 
45.0 

35.0 
47.5 
20.0 

No.  of 
Failures 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

4 

Table  h 

SUMMARY  OF  INDEX  RATINGS 

UNTREATED  SPECIMENS 

INSTALLED:    FEB.  1961 


T"=Termite 

or 

D=Decay 

12  Months 
Exposure 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

T 

D 

AV. 

62.5 
87.5 
60.0 

50.0 
75.0 
50.0 

47.5 
72.5 
40.0 

No.  of 
Failures 

0 

0 

0 

1.  Coal  tar  creosote  is  offering  the  best  protection  against  decay  and  termite 
attack. 

2.  Chromated  zinc  chloride  and  tanalith  are  affording  less  protection  against 
decay  and  termite  attack  than  the  other  preservatives.  However,  even  the 
bwer  retentions  of  chromated  zinc  chloride  and  tanalith  considerably  reduce 
the   rate   of  decay  and   termite  attack  compared  with  no  treatment. 


22 


Termite    Control    Investigation 


Table  5 

SUMMARY  OF  QUALITY  INDEX-RATINGS 

TREATED  SPE  OMENS 


Months 

T=Termite 

No. 

1  Retention 

No 

2  Retention 

No.   3  Retention 

of 
Service 

Pres. 

D=Decay 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

Oak 

Fir 

Pine 

T 

100.0 

100.0 

97.5 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

1 

52 

D 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

97.5 

100.0 

100.0 

AV. 

100.0 

100.0 

97.5 

97.5 

100.0 

100.0 

T 

67.5 

55.0 

37.5 

70.0 

60.0 

67.5 

75.0 

80.0 

82.5 

2 

52 

D 

80.0 

92.5 

80.0 

92.5 

95.0 

95.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

AV. 

55.0 

55.0 

37.5 

67.5 

60.0 

67.5 

75.0 

80.0 

82.5 

T 

60.0 

87.5 

35.0 

65.0 

77.5 

75.0 

97.5 

92.5 

92.5 

3 

52 

D 

57.5 

92.5 

55.0 

57.5 

92.5 

87.5 

67.5 

97.5 

95.0 

AV. 

45.0 

80.0 

27.5 

45.0 

77.5 

70.0 

67.5 

90.0 

87.5 

T 

90.0 

75.0 

70.0 

100.0 

87.5 

82.5 

4 

52 

D 

87.5 

90.0 

92.5 

97.5 

100.0 

92.5 

AV. 

80.0 

72.5 

70.0 

97.5 

87.5 

80.0 

T 

90.0 

92.5 

85.0 

97.5 

97.5 

100.0 

5 

52 

D 

87.5 

95.0 

95.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

AV. 

80.0 

90.0 

82.5 

97.5 

97.5 

100.0 

T 

72.5 

65.0 

67.5 

97.5 

100.0 

92.5 

6 

52 

D 

82.5 

92.5 

82.5 

97.5 

100.0 

100.0 

AV. 

67.5 

62.5 

65.0 

92.5 

100.0 

92.5 

T 

100.0 

100.0 

92.5 

100.0 

100.0 

97.5 

7 

52 

D 

77.5 

100.0 

100.0 

87.5 

100.0 

100.0 

AV. 

77.5 

100.0 

92.5 

87.5 

100.0 

97.5 

T 

75.0 

90.0 

62.5 

92.5 

97.5 

90.0 

8 

52 

D 

72.5 

87.5 

85.0 

75.0 

95.0 

95.0 

AV. 

60.0 

82.5 

55.0 

75.0 

95.0 

85.0 

T 

72.5 

90.0 

77.5 

92.5 

92.5 

85.0 

9 

52 

D 

67.5 

90.0 

97.5 

85.0 

87.5 

100.0 

AV. 

57.5 

82.5 

77.5 

82.5 

80.0 

85.0 

T 

10 

27 

D 

AV. 

T 

11 

27 

D 

AV. 

T 

12 

27 

D 
AV. 

T 

100.0 

100.0 

97.5 

13 

27 

D 

AV. 

95.0 
95.0 

100.0 
100.0 

92.5 
90.0 

Specimens  treated  with  preservatives  1  to  9  incl.  were  installed  in  November  1957. 
Specimens  treated  with  preservatives  10  to  13  incl.  were  installed  in  November  1959. 


Inspection  Date:  Feb.  1962 


Ter mite    Control    Investigation 


23 


FIG    l 

SUMMA  'ALITY    INDEX  RATINGS 

TREATED     SPECIMENS 
RETENTION:  I 


QUALITf    INDEX  RATING-  PERCENT 
—      DECAY 
iTMBOl       urn™      TERMITE 
100         JO  dO  70  60  50  40  iO 


Advance    Report   of    Committee    1 — Roadway   and    Ballast 
F.  N.  Beighley,  Chairman 

Grading  Problems  Encountered  During  Relocation  of  the 

Santa  Fe  Railway's  Main  Line  Between  Williams 

and  Crookton,  Ariz. 

By  R.  A.  STANE 
Construction  Engineer,  Coast  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway 

The  Santa  Fe  Railway  completed  the  construction  of  a  44-mile  relocation  of  its 
double-track  railroad  between  Williams  and  Crookton,  Ariz.,  in  December  1960.  Con- 
struction of  the  original  single-track  railrcad  was  started  in  April  1881,  and  the  line 
was  completed  and  placed  in  service  in  the  winter  of  1883.  Lewis  Kingman,  Santa  Fe's 
locating  engineer  at  that  time,  was  aware  of  a  more  operable  route  farther  to  the  north. 
However,  its  construction  would  have  entailed  the  movement  of  malpais  rock  in  quan- 
tities too  large  to  be  practicable  for  the  equipment  of  that  time,  so  he  was  forced  to 
locate  the  line  from  Williams  down  through  Johnson  Canyon  to  Crookton  by  way  of 
Ash  Fork.  This  location  called  for  canyon  wall  construction  and  the  building  of  Johnson 
Canyon  tunnel,  396  ft  long  and  on  a   10-deg,  6-min  curve. 

In  time  the  single-track  railrcad  no  longer  sufficed,  and  by  1913  a  separated  tunnel- 
free  second  track  had  been  placed  in  service  to  serve  as  the  eastbound  main  line  as  it 
was  intended  that  westward  traffic  would  be  carried  on  the  old  single-track  railroad. 
However,  the  company  was  frequently  called  upon  to  handle  westbound  loads  too  high 
or  too  wide  to  pass  through  Johnson  Canyon  tunnel  and  they  had  to  be  run  against 
traffic  on  the  eastbound  main  line,  resulting  in  considerable  loss  of  train  time  in  eastward 
movements.  This,  together  with  excessive  costs  due  to  rail  wear  on  curves  as  sharp  as 
10  deg,  34  min,  fuel  consumption  on  heavy  grades  as  steep  as  1.8  percent,  helper  service, 
etc.,  created  a  serious  need  for  a  major  relocation. 

Reconnaissance  surveys  were  made,  and  it  was  determined  that  with  modern  equip- 
ment a  route  employing  curves  of  1  deg  or  less  and  maximum  grades  of  1  percent  was 
feasible — probably  not  too  distant  from  the  northerly  route  mentioned  in  Mr.  Kingman's 
memoirs. 

During  the  time  of  planning,  the  basalts  were  considered  to  be  a  major  problem 
even  though  they  constituted  only  41  percent  of  the  solid-rock  excavation,  the  remain- 
ing 59  percent  being  sandstone  and  limestone.  If  the  basalts  had  been  entirely  solid  and 
unbroken,  they  would  not  have  been  too  difficult  to  handle  with  modern  heavy  equip- 
ment and  blasting  agents.  However,  they  were  badly  fractured  during  the  cooling  process, 
and,  in  addition,  many  types  were  encountered,  each  presenting  an  individual  problem. 

The  first  type  was  solid  and  firm  with  no  distinct  cleavage  or  fracture  planes.  It 
was  so  coarse  in  grain  that  it  approached  the  texture  of  gabbro,  and  was  dark  in  color. 
On  the  surface,  it  was  evidenced  by  well  rounded  outcrops.  The  rock  was  hard;  the  rate 
of  drill  penetration  in  it  was  low,  approximately  30  to  40  ft  per  hr,  and  the  powder 
factor  was  high — as  high  as  1.75  lb  per  cu  yd.  However,  the  rock  broke  into  small 
fragments,  which  resulted  in  good  shovel  production. 

The  second  type  was  solid  and  firm  with  distinct,  closely  spaced  horizontal  cleavage 
planes.  It  was  fine  grained  and  could  be  identified  by  its  slab-like  appearance  and  Bat 
residual  boulders.  It  could  be  drilled  at  a  rate  of  52  to  56  ft  per  hr  and  broke  well  into 
small  fragments. 

25 


26       Grading    Problems— Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton    Relocation 


&&&&&. 


Fig.  1— North  face  of  Cedar  Tank  cut  at  Mile  Post  SQS1/^  This  shows 
conditions  at  the  time  it  was  decided  to  lay  slopes  back  and  do  additional 
benching  because  of  a  general  failure  of  the  cut  slopes  caused  by  petrostatic 
pressures  in  this  cut,  which  is  115  ft  deep. 


Grading    Problems— Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation       27 

The  third  type  was  solid  and  firm  with  fracture  planes  in  all  directions.  It  was  fine 
grained  and  could  be  identified  by  its  irregular  and  well  rounded  outcrops.  Drill  pene- 
tration was  approximately  56  ft  per  hr,  and  the  rock  broke  into  small,  well  graded 
fragments  which  made  it  particularly  suitable  for  roadbed  embankments. 

The  fourth  type  was  vesicular  but  firm,  having  no  distinct  cleavage  or  fracture  planes 
The  rock  was  light  in  both  color  and  weight  and  drilled  easily,  but  blasting  results  were 
erratic  and  much  secondary  shooting  was  required. 

The  fifth  type  was  solid  and  firm  but  intermixed  with  volcanic  cinders.  The  loose 
cinders  caused  the  drill  holes  to  plug  during  the  drilling  and  hading  operations,  which 
resulted  in  high  drilling  costs  and  poor  loading  patterns  causing  poor  fragmentation  and 
requiring  extensive  secondary  shooting.  However,  the  resulting  material,  though  expen- 
sive in  its  production,  made  exceptionally  good  roadbed  embankment. 

The  sixth  type  was  a  volcanic  cinder  with  inclusions  of  malpais  boulders  or  dikes. 
Stripping  was  difficult,  in  some  areas  so  much  so  that  stripping  was  not  economically 
feasible.  Drilling  and  loading  were  very  difficult  and  expensive  and  recovery  was  unsatis- 
factory. The  resulting  drill  patterns  were  poor,  and  excessive  secondary  shooting  was 
required.  This  condition  could  be  recognized  by  the  presence  of  occasional  ledges  out- 
cropping in  the  cinder  areas. 

Roadbeds  were  constructed  in  excavation  with  a  minimum  bottom  width  of  42  tt. 
sufficiently  wide  to  permit  the  use  of  4-yd  shovels.  As  these  machines  are  capable  of 
working  30-ft  faces,  drill  holes  were,  for  the  most  part,  30  ft  deep.  The  holes  were  3in. 
in  diameter  and  were  drilled  on  various  patterns,  the  most  common  being  on  6-  by  7-tt 
centers,  and  were  loaded  with  ammonium  nitrate  blasting  materials  boosted  by  60  percent 
extra  dynamite  which  was,  in  turn,  detonated  by  primacord. 

On  the  average,  1.347  lb  of  explosive  were  used  per  cubic  yard  of  malpais  excavated. 
During  the  first  V/2  years  the  track  was  in  service  the  only  failures  experienced  in 
the  malpais  areas  were  in  cut  slopes  comprised  of  malpais  boulders  in  a  matrix  of  vol- 
canic cinders.  These  failures  were  minor  and  developed  so  slowly  that  loosened  materials 
could  be  removed  before  the  track  was  endangered. 

Sandstone  and  limestone  comprised  the  greater  portion  of  the  rock  excavation  and. 
though  more  easily  moved  than  the  malpais,  they  posed  the  most  difficult  design  prob 
lems.  Both  sedimentary  formations  were  laid  down  during  the  Permian  Period.  The 
sandstones  are  particularly  interesting,  as  in  them  is  seen  substantiation  of  the  theory 
of  shifting  poles.  According  to  recent  papers  by  geologist  M.  D.  Opdyke  and  physicisl 
S.  K.  Runcorn  a  study  of  the  magnetic  fields  in  the  Supai  sandstone,  southeast  of  Wil 
liams  and  southwest  of  Flagstaff,  indicates  that  at  the  time  of  their  formation,  during 
the  early  Permian  Period,  the  north  pole  was  near  Nanking,  China,  not  taking  into 
account  changes  in  relative  location  due  to  continental  drift.  This  placed  the  equator 
approximately  in  the  middle  of  Utah.  Its  direction  was  that  which  is  now  northeast  to 
southwest.  A  later  study  of  the  magnetic  fields,  during  the  Triassic  Period,  in  the  Moen 
kopi  formation  shows  the  north  pole  to  have  been  so  positioned  as  to  have  placed  the 
equator  in  the  proximity  of  Tampico,  Mexico  in  a  direction  which  is  now  south  IS  deg 
west,  more  or  less.  If  this  may  be  accepted,  the  equator  passed  slightly  south  ol  the 
Williams  area  about  Mid-Permian  in  a  direction  roughly  northeast  to  southwest,  and 
for  this  reason  the  prevailing  winds  wen-  fr<  m  what  is  now  north  but  at  that  time 
northeast. 

Sand  migrations  caused  by  these  winds  sweeping  over  an  ancient  dead  sea  built  up 
deposits  which  were  later  to  become  the  Coconino  sandstones.  The  materials  so  dej 


28       Grading    Problems— Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation 


Fig.  2 — North  side  of  cut  about  2000  ft  long  and  75  ft  deep  just  east 
of  Mile  Post  410.  This  picture  shows  the  failure  which  occurred  in  the 
deepest  part  of  the  cut  about  one  year  after  the  line  was  placed  in  service. 


Grading    Problems — Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation       29 


Fig.  3 — North  side  of  same  cut  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  but  view  shows  the 
north  face  of  this  cut  just  east  of  point  of  failure  in  the  steeply  dipping 
sandstone. 


created  a  huge  sand  plain,  its  surface  being  from  200  to  300  ft  above  underlying  mate- 
rials— in  this  area  the  Hermit  shales — and,  as  equatorial  winds  are  very  nearly  constant 
in  direction,  a  great  sloping  front  was  advanced  toward  the  southwest  as  the  sands 
spilled  over  its  face.  This  would  account  for  the  bedding  planes  dipping  from  what  is 
now  north  to  south  due  to  the  45  deg  rotation  of  the  earth's  surface,  with  occasional 
ancmalies  caused  by  storms  moving  in  directions  contrary  to  that  of  the  trade  wind- 
Laminations  are  probably  the  result  of  crustations  caused  by  intermittent  precipitation 
and/or  gradation  variations  resulting  from  wind  velocity  changes. 

The  general  area  then  subsided  and  the  Permian  Sea  moved  in  to  form  the  Kaibab 
limestone  by  marine  depositicn.  The  country  rose  and  again  subsided  for  the  Cretaceous 
Sea.  It  then  began  its  rise  to  its  present  level.  This  rise  was  fairly  uniform  over  a  great 
area.  However,  minor  differences  caused  alternate  compression  and  tension  in  the  rock 
masses  which  probably  accounts  for  the  jointing  now  evident  in  plane-  roughly  °0  deg 
to  each  other. 

The  sandstone  lies  in  thin  beds  varying  in  thickness  from  less  than  1  in  to  2  or 
3  ft.  It  is  badly  crossbedded  and  lies  on  planes  sloping,  for  the  mosl  part,  2  or  3  tt 
horizontally  to  1  ft  vertically.  This  variatii  n  from  the  u.-ual  angle  Ol  repose  of  -and- 
is  probably  due  largely  to  the  encouragement  of  horizontal  movement  oi  the  -and  par 
tides  by  winds  passing  over  the  sloping  face  always  in  a  direction  tending  to  Batten 
the  slopes.  To  a  lesser  degree,  thi-  Hatter  slope  is  the  result  of  the  pull  of  gravity  being 
less  as  it  would  be  at  the  equator  because  of  the  greater  distance  between  the  centers 


30 


Grading    Problems — Santa  Fc's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation 


■ 


Fig.  4 — North  face  of  cut  just  east  of  Mile  Post  410  during  the  con- 
struction period.  The  massive  sandstone  material  jutting  out  of  the  slope 
behind  the  pickup  truck  was  removed  by  a  series  of  tractor  treads  pulled 
between  two  crawler  tractors. 


of  masses,  and  greater  opposition  by  an  increased  centrifugal  force  because  of  the  ex- 
tended radius  of  the  earth  at  the  equator  and  a  slightly  faster  rotation  of  the  earth  at 
that  time,  all  of  which  would  reduce  the  "weight"  of  the  sand  particles  thus  requiring 
a  lesser  external  horizontal  force  to  cause  movement. 

The  bedding  planes  are  covered  by  a  thin  coating  of  clay  which  originated  in  the 
overlying  shales  and  limestones.  The  joints  through  which  these  clays  gained  access  to 
the  bedding  planes  now  permit  surface  water  to  find  its  way  to  the  clays,  thus  lubricating 
the  planes  making  huge  rock  slides  a  possibility.  In  fact,  approximately  one  year  after 
the  new  line  was  placed  in  service,  a  large-scale  failure  occurred  following  a  period  of 
considerable  precipitation.  The  failure,  however,  was  anticipated  at  the  time  of  construc- 
tion and  sufficient  extra  width  had  been  provided  to  safely  contain  the  slide. 

In  many  areas  the  sandstone  formation  is  still  overlaid  with  limestone  in  beds 
which  lie  very  nearly  on  the  horizontal.  Apparently  the  entire  area  through  which  the 
new  line  was  constructed  is  presently  in  compression  due  to  the  current  upward  move- 
ment of  the  earth's  crust,  as  it  is  found  that  instability  of  slopes  in  limestone  cuts  was 
further  increased  by  petrostatic  pressure.  The  blasting  for  one  cut,  approximately 
40  ft  deep  and  3000  ft  long,  was  done  in  one  operation,  and  the  limestone  overlying  the 


Grading    Problems — Santa  Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation       3 1 

sandstone  suddenly  moved  in  about  14  in.  No  correction  was  made  and  no  further 
movement  has  occurred.  Another  cut,  13,000  ft  long  and  having  a  maximum  depth  of 
115  ft,  was  designed  for  a  roadway  width  of  42  ft,  s'.opes  of  JA:1,  and  a  25-ft  bench  at 
the  50-ft  level.  Excavation  was  about  two-thirds  completed  when  the  slopes  began  to 
fail  due  to  petrostatic  pressures,  and  it  was  necessary  to  reopen  the  entire  cut.  In  the 
redesigned  roadbed  the  original  width  and  slopes  were  maintained;  however,  two  35-ft 
benches  were  constructed  at  the  40-ft  and  70-ft  levels.  The  redesigned  slopes,  during 
the  first  two  years  after  construction,  have  been  stationary,  and  it  appears  that  there 
will  be  no  further  movement. 

The  sandstones,  though  highly  abrasive  to  bits,  could  be  drilled  easily,  progress 
being  from  62  to  70  ft  per  hr. 

Limestones  were  not  abrasive  and  varied  considerably  in  hardness.  The  harder 
limestones  were  drilled  at  the  rate  of  54  to  60  ft  per  hr;  the  softer  limestones  were 
drilled  at  rates  varying  from  80  to   100  ft  per  hr. 

On  the  average,  1.075  lb  of  explosive  were  used  per  cubic  yard  of  sandstone/lime- 
stone excavated. 

Over  the  entire  job  the  blasting  agents  were  comprised,  by  weight,  of  13.5  percent 
dynamite  and  86.5  percent  ammonium  nitrate  in  one  form  or  another.  Coated  ammonium 
nitrate  prills  were  used  where  holes  were  dry;  however,  nitro-carbo-nitrate  was  used 
where  holes  were  wet.  It  was  found,  when  the  holes  were  dry,  that  the  nitro-carbo- 
nitrate  materials  were  a  little  more  efficient  than  the  ammonium  nitrate  prills  sensitized 
by  the  addition  of  2  qt  of  diesel  fuel  oil  per  50  lb  of  prills.  Regardless  as  to  which 
materials  were  used,  the  required  spacing  of  dynamite  bocs.ers  was  the  same — in  gen- 
eral, three  1.09-lb  sticks  in  the  bottom  of  the  hole  with  1  stick  at  every  5-  to  8-ft  level 
to  within  30  in  of  the  top  of  the  hole. 

A  definite  saving  can  be  made  by  making  use  of  ammonium  nitrate  prills  wherever 
possible.  For  example,  letting  the  cost  of  coated  ammonium  nitrate  prills  after  treatment 
serve  as  an  index,  that  is  1.0,  the  comparative  cost  of  one  of  the  nitro-carbo-nitrates 
was  1.57,  the  second  2.22,  and  dynamite  4.83. 

Usual  railroad  roadbed  specifications  require  that  embankments  made  of  rock  be 
constructed  in  lifts  of  no  greater  than  18-in  depths.  To  have  obtained  rock  usable  in 
such  lifts  would  have  required  much  more  expensive  drilling  and  blasting.  Dense  fill- 
were  constructed  using  rock  of  3-ft  sizes  and  even,  occasionally,  as  large  as  4  ft  in 
diameter.  This  was  accomplished  by  dropping  the  loads  on  top  of  the  lift  being  made 
and  dozing  the  materials  over  the  face  of  the  lift.  The  fines  of  the  later  dumpings  were 
thus  dropped  into  the  voids  created  by  the  larger  rolling  rock  of  the  preceding  dumpings 
Occasionally  it  was  necessary  to  bring  in  fines  to  provide  a  smooth  roadwaj  for  the 
trucks,  and  only  when  this  was  done  were  sheepsfoot  tamp-  employed  on  rock  fills. 

No  water  was  used  on  the  entire  construction,   including   the   making   of   roadbed 
embankments  of  cinders  and  clay,  and,  by  slightly  increasing  the  compactive  effort,  no 
difficulty  was  experienced  in  obtaining  required  densities.  For  the  most   part,  the  com 
paction   of   common    materials   was   by   proper   routing    of    beavj    rubber-tired    hauling 
equipment,  the  remainder  being  by   sheepsfoot   tamp. 

The  compaction  of  select  materials  around  corrugated  metal  pipes  was  also  accom 
plished  without  the  use  of  water.  These  materials,  either  cinders  deteriorating  to  daj 
or  of  a  more  solid  granular  nature,  were  tamped  with  hand-operated  pneumati»   tamper- 
directly  under  the  haunch  of  the  pipe.  The  volume  so  tamped  was  kept   at   an  absolute 
minimum  and  the  remainder,  up  to  the  spring  line,  was  compacted   bj    a   No.   12  motor 


32       Grading    Problems— Santa   Fe's  Williams-Crookton   Relocation 


Fig.  5— North  face  of  75-ft  cut  just  east  of  Mile  Post  410  during  the 
construction  period,  showing  the  variable  dips  and  strikes  of  the  Coconino 
sandstone  of  the  Permian  period. 


Grading    Problems — Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation       33 


^^SvSSSS^ 


►  *..-»     -~4 


"A 


M?0 


*k- 


i>isf: 


/ 

Fig.  6 — North  face  of  sandstone  cut  with  maximum  depth  of  110  ft 
just  west  of  Mile  Post  410,  showing  condition  of  the  Coconino  sandstone 
during  the  construction  period. 


patrol  running  longitudinally  with  the  pipe  with  its  front  wheels  laid  over  as  far  as 
possible  so  as  to  force  the  material  under  the  pipe.  Above  the  spring  line,  to  an  elevation 
of  twice  the  radius  above  the  spring  line  but  not  less  than  3  ft  over  the  top  of  the 
pipe,  and  outside  of  vertical  planes  tangent  to  the  pipe,  materials  were  tamped  by  a 
front-end  loader  running  longitudinally  with  the  pipe  and  carrying  a  full  load  in  its 
scoop.  In  so  doing,  loose  materials  spilled  over  the  top  of  the  pipe,  filling  that  area 
between  the  vertical  planes  mentioned  above.  The  leader  was  then  passed  transversely 
over  the  pipe  until  at  least  the  upper  1  ft  had  been  compacted  to  roadbed  embankment 
requirements.  The  result  was  an  evenly  compacted  embankment  easily  meeting  the  re- 
quirements for  roadbed  construction  and  the  pipes  were  squeezed  so  as  to  slightly  elon- 
gate the  vertical  axis.  It  was  found  after  large  diameter  pipes  had  been  subjected  to  loads 
imposed  by  high  fills  that  the  entire  ellipse  provided  in  the  manufacture  of  the  pipe 
remained. 

Since  the  line  has  been  placed  in  service  a  slight  Battening  of  the  upper  half  of  72-in 
corrugated  metal  pipes  has  been  noted  where  they  have  been  placed  with  minimum 
— 3  ft  below  base  of  rail.  This  has  occurred  wherever  select  cinder  material  contained 
an  appreciable  clay  fraction.  Apparently  the  clay  fraction  reduces  the  safety  factor  to 
very  nearly  1.0  percent.  Maximum  distortion  probably  occurs  just  before  the  front 
wheels  of  fast-moving  locomotives  reach  the  center  of  the  pipe,  thus  causing  maximum 


Hull.   573 


34       Grading    Problems — Santa   Fe's   Williams-Crookton   Relocation 

loading  on  one  side  of  the  pipe  with  nothing  but  the  weight  of  the  minimum  cover 
resisting  on  the  other  side.  As  all  72-in  pipes  under  minimum  cover  did  not  fail  it  would 
seem  that  the  little  additional  resistance  required  may  be  obtained  by  increasing  the 
minimum  cover  approximately  6  in  wherever  the  clay  fraction  cannot  be  avoided.  An- 
other solution  to  this  problem  might  be  the  introduction  of  vibratory  equipment  above 
the  spring  line  to  attain  a  higher  degree  of  compaction  directly  over  the  pipe,  as  con- 
siderable consolidation  would  be  obtained  through  the  transmission  of  vibratory  forces 
into  the  soils  not  directly  beneath  the  compactor. 

The  Williams-Crookton  relocation  required  the  movement  of  3%  million  yards  of 
basalt,  5  million  yards  of  sandstone  and  limestone,  Zl/2  million  yards  of  common  mate- 
rials, \l/2  million  yards  of  common  borrow,  the  construction  of  bridges  costing  $2  mil- 
lion, the  laying  of  88  track  miles  of  electrically  welded  rail,  and  the  installation  of  the 
most  modern  train  control  and  signal  systems,  certainly  a  major  undertaking  for  private 
enterprise  and  a  clear  indication  that  railroads  are  willing  to  expand  their  plants  even 
at  tremendous  costs  to  better  their  service  in  the  field  of  heavy,  long-haul  transportation 
for  which  they  are  so  well  equipped. 


Advance   Report  of   Committee   1 — Roadway   and   Ballast 
Report  on  Assignment  10   (a) 

Ballast  Tests 

T.  W.  Creighton  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  W.  Bauman,  J.  G.  Campbell,  J.  E.  Gray, 
\V.  C.  McCormick,  E.  W.  McCuskey,  E.  L.  Robinson,  Jr.,  Stanton  Walker,  C.  E. 
Webb,  E.  L.  Woods. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  a  report  on  conductivity  tests  conducted 
at  the  AAR  Research  Center  on  open-hearth  slag*  furnished  by  the  United  States  Steel 
Corporation  from  Lorain,  Ohio,  to  determine  if  that  material  is  satisfactory  for  use  as 
railrcad  ballast  in  track-circuit  territory. 

This  research  is  sponsored  by  Committee  1 — Roadway  and  Ballast,  and  the  tests 
were  performed  by  the  engineering  research  staff  of  the  AAR  Research  Depart  nun  t 
under  the  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  and  Rockwell 
Smith,  research  engineer  roadway.  The  tests  were  conceived  and  conducted  by  M.  F. 
Smucker,  assistant  electrical  engineer,  and  G.  L.  Hinueber,  engineering  laboratory  man- 
ager. The  report   was  prepared  by  G.  L.  Hinueber. 

A  series  of  conductivity  tests  were  run  on  the  open-hearth  slag  using  a  specially 
built  8-cu-ft  box  with  dimensions  of  2  by  2  by  2  ft.  The  box  was  constructed  of  >4-in  ply- 
wood, and  the  inside  was  coated  with  epoxy  resin  to  waterproof  it.  Two  copper  plates 
(24  in  by  llj^  in  by  iV  in)  were  bonded  to  each  of  two  opposite  faces  of  the  inside 
of  the  box.  The  upper  and  lower  plates  on  each  face  were  separated  by  approximately 
1  in. 

The  box  was  filled  to  the  top  with  the  open-hearth  slag  and  the  resistance  between 
the  copper  plates  on  opposite  faces  was  determined  by  using  an  ohmmeter.  Resistance 
readings  were  taken  between  the  two  bottom  plates  and  between  the  two  top  plates. 
The  top  and  bottom  plates  were  then  connected  in  parallel,  and  resistance  readings  were 
then  taken  between  the  two  sides.  The  open-hearth  slag  was  removed  from  the  box  and 
sprinkled  with  water  until  thoroughly  wet.  It  was  allowed  to  drain  for  about  1  hr  and 
then  shoveled  back  into  the  box.  The  resistance  of  the  wet  ballast  in  the  box  was  deter- 
mined by  applying  a-c  voltage  across  the  copper  plates,  measuring  both  the  current  and 
applied  voltage.  The  dynamic  resistance  of  the  sample  was  determined  by  dividing  the 
applied  voltage  by  the  current.  It  was  necessary  to  use  the  a-c  method  for  determining 
the  resistance  of  the  wet  ballast  material  to  overcome  the  polarity  of  the  individual 
ballast  particles  which  would  tend  to  make  d-c  resistance  readings  unreliable. 

In  order  to  compare  the  resistance  readings  of  the  opm-hearth-slag  ballast  material 
with  a  ballast  of  acceptable  conductivity,  the  procedure  described  above  was  repeated, 
using  a  representative  blast-furnace-slag  ballast. 

The  results  of  these  tests  are  as  follow-: 


Ballast  Type 
Open-hearth  slag 
Open-hearth   slag 
Open-hearth   slag 
Blast-furnace   slag 
Blast-furnace   slag 
Blast-furnace   slag 

*  Open-hearth   slag   is    formed   simultaneously    whin    steel    i-   produced   and   refined    i"    open-hearth 
furnaces.    It   consists   essentially   of   a    fused   mixturi    of    oxides   and 

35 


Plata  Between 

.'                 Readings 

Whirh   Resistance 

Box  Full 

Full 

Was  Measured 

Empty  Box 

Dry  Ballast 

Wei  Ballast 

.  Bottom  in  bottom 

Infinity 

620  megohms 

3500  ohms 

.Tup     In     tOP 

infinity 

620  megohms 

3900  ohm- 

.Side  to  side 

infinity 

500  megohms 

2200  ohm- 

.Bottom  to  bottom 

infinity 

I  n  G  n  i  t  y 

1850  ohm- 

.Top    to    top 

infinity 

Infinity 

3100  ohms 

.Side   to   side 

Infinity 

Infinity 

1350  ohm- 

36  Ballast   Tests 


These  results  indicate  that  the  open-hearth  slag  is  a  better  conductor  in  the  dry 
state  than  the  blast-furnace  slag.  This  was  to  be  expected  because  of  the  higher  metallic 
content  of  the  open-hearth  slag.  However,  when  the  ballast  materials  were  wet  the 
open-hearth  slag  showed  a  slightly  lower  conductivity  than  the  blast-furnace  slag.  Blast- 
furnace slag  is  more  porous  than  the  open  hearth  and  consequently  will  retain  more 
water,  which  is  a  conductor.  It  will  also  be  noted  that  the  b'.ast-furnace  slag  sample 
contained  more  fine  material  than  the  open-hearth  slag,  and  a  check  with  a  magnet  indi- 
cated the  presence  of  considerable  metallic  material  in  the  fines.  These  fines  had  a  tend- 
ency to  settle  to  the  bottom  of  the  test  bcx  and  probably  account  for  the  resistance 
reading  of  the  wet  blast-furnace  slag  in  the  bottom  half  of  the  box  being  lower  than 
that  in  the  top  half. 

The  next  phase  of  the  investigation  consisted  of  testing  the  conductivity  of  individual 
pieces  of  seven  different  ballast  materials.  Ten  representative  pieces  of  each  of  the  seven 
ballast  materials  were  selected.  An  chmmeter  was  used  to  determine  the  resistance  across 
each  piece  in  the  dry  condition.  Next  the  pieces  were  soaked  in  water  and  the  resistance 
across  each  piece  was  determined  for  the  wet  state.  The  pieces  were  then  surface  dried 
with  a  cloth  and  resistances  determined  for  the  saturated  surface-dry  state.  The  fol- 
lowing results  of  these  tests  are  reported  for  the  average  of  the  resistances  of  the  10 
pieces  of  each  ballast  material: 

Saturated  Surface-  Wet 

Ballast  Material                            Dry  Resistance  Dry  Resistance              Resistance 

Open-hearth   slag    27  megohms  550,000  ohms  145,000  ohms 

Blast-furnace   slag    Infinity  850,000  ohms  180,000  ohms 

Limestone   Infinity  1.4  meg  ohms  260,000  ohms 

Chert    (Chat)    Infinity  10  meg  ohms  500,000  ohms 

Quartzite     Infinity  10  meg  ohms  800,000  ohms 

Trap    Rock    Infinity  10  meg  ohms  600,000  ohms 

Granite    Infinity  10  meg  ohms  340,000  ohms 

It  will  be  noted  that  a  considerable  difference  exists  between  the  resistance  of  the 
open-hearth  slag  pieces  and  the  resistance  of  the  other  types  of  ballast  tested  in  the  dry 
state.  This  difference  is  somewhat  less,  although  still  considerable,  in  the  saturated  surface- 
dry  state.  The  difference  between  the  resistance  of  the  open-hearth  slag  and  the  resistance 
of  the  other  ballast  materials  tested  is  considerably  smaller  in  the  saturated  state.  The 
materials  with  higher  porosities,  such  as  blast-furnace  slag,  and  higher  absorptive  qual- 
ities, such  as  limestone,  exhibit  conductivity  of  higher  magnitudes  in  the  saturated  surface- 
dry  and  wet  states  than  those  of  lower  porosity  and  lower  absorption.  The  conductivity 
of  these  more  porous  and  absorptive  aggregates  approaches  the  conductivity  of  the 
open-hearth  slag  fairly  closely  for  the  saturated  surface-dry  condition  and  even  more 
closely  for  the  wet  or  saturated  state. 

The  last  phase  of  the  investigation  was  conducted  with  the  use  of  a  5-ft,  3-tie  sec- 
tion of  railroad  track.  The  track  was  first  placed  on  the  laboratory  floor  and  the  re- 
sistance across  the  rails  was  read  with  an  ohmmeter.  The  dry  open-hearth  slag  ballast 
was  then  leveled  to  a  depth  of  2  ft  and  the  track  section  placed  on  top.  The  resistance 
reading  across  the  rails  was  again  read.  Next,  the  cribs  between  the  ties  were  fiiled  with 
ballast,  making  certain  that  the  ballast  particles  were  in  contact  with  the  rail  base.  The 
resistance  reading  was  repeated.  The  ballast  and  the  track  section  were  then  thoroughly 
saturated  with  water  and  the  resistance  reading  repeated  once  again.  The  track  and 
ballast  section  were  allowed  to  drain  for  a  period  of  about  1  hr,  at  which  time  the 
resistance  reading  was   taken  for  the  damp  condition. 


Ballast   Tests  37 


Results  of  these  tests  on  the  open-hearth  slag  are  as  follows: 

Resistance 
Condition  Across  Rails 

3-tie  section  on  lab.   floor    20  megohms 

3-tie  section  on  top  of  dry  ballast   10  megohms 

J  dry  ballast    10  megohms 

3-tie  section  on  ballast  with  cribs  full       I  damp   ballast    7500  ohms 

j  wet   ballast    4500  ohms 

Again  it  will  be  observed  that  the  lowest  resistance  measured  was  for  the  thoroughly 
saturated  condition.  If  we  extrapolate  the  resistance  for  the  5-ft  track  length  to  a  1000-ft 
track  length,  we  get  a  22. 5-ohm  resistance  for  the  saturated  condition.  This  value  satisfies 
the  minimum  value  of  2  ohms  as  specified  by  the  AAR  Communication  and  Signal 
Section.  The  tests  utilizing  the  5-ft  track  section  were,  however,  run  on  the  laboratory 
flcor,  and  it  should  be  noted  that  the  test  procedure  is  of  limited  extent  and  would  not 
necessarily  be  directly  comparable  to  track  conditions. 

In  1959  three  ballast  materials,  a  limestone,  an  open-hearth  slag  from  Hammond. 
Ind.,  and  a  blast-furnace  slag,  were  tested  for  conductivity  using  the  5-ft  track  section 
and  following  the  same  procedure  as  described  above.  The  resistances  for  the  saturated 
condition  per  1000  ft  track  length  were  obtained  by  extrapolating  the  data  from  the 
5  ft  track  length.  The  results  were  as  follows: 

Resistance — 

Ohms 
Per  1000  Ft 
Ballast  Material  Track  Length 

Limestone    (saturated)     22.5  ohms 

Open-hearth   slag   (saturated)    15.0  ohms 

Blast-furnace   slag    (saturated)    20.0  ohms 

All  of  the  tests  run  indicate  that  the  open-hearth  slag  sample  had  a  higher  conduc- 
tivity in  the  dry  state  than  any  of  the  other  ballast  materials  tested.  However,  in  tin 
wet  condition,  which  is  the  most  critical  as  far  as  conductivity  is  concerned,  the  open- 
hearth  slag  is  about  comparable  to  the  blast-furnace  slag  used  in  the  investigation  and 
apparently  not  much  less  favorable  than  the  limestone.  In  fact,  the  resistance  of  the 
individual  pieces  of  the  open-hearth  slag  tested  was  in  the  same  general  range  as.  although 
lower  than,  the  quartzite,  chat,  trap  rock  and  »ranitc  matt-rials  whin  tested  in  tin- 
saturated  condition. 

The  test  results  indicate  that  the  moisture  in  the  ballast  cm  In-  a  more  important 
factor  in  conductivity  than  the  ballast  material  itself.  For  the-  ballast  materials  tested, 
the  moisture  is  undoubtedly  the  governing  factor  when  the  ballast  section  is  saturated. 

In  addition  to  the  conductivity  tests,  the  tests  required  in  the  AREA  Ballast 
Specifications  for  air-cooled  blast-furnace  slag  were  run  en  the  open-hearth  slag  from 
Lorain,  Ohio.  These  test  results  are  as  follows: 

(  in  \n\l  [ON 

Screen  Size  Percent  Passing 

2]/2"  100.0 

2"  

V/2"  80.9 

1"  

y4"      i6A 

V2"         2.6 

H"         1-7 

No.     4      1.2 


38  Ballast   Tests 


Los  Angeles  Abrasion 

Percent  loss  =31.5 

Sodium  Sulfate  Soundness 

Percent  loss=  1.0 

Weight  per  Cubic  Foot  (Compacted) 

Wt/Ft3=  116.6  lb 

The  gradation  does  not  conform  strictly  with  any  of  the  AREA  ballast  grading 
requirements.  However,  this  is  merely  a  matter  of  processing  which  could  be  easily 
altered  to  produce  a  material  of  satisfactory  gradation.  All  of  the  other  physical  test 
results  are  well  within  the  limits  required  by  the  AREA  Ballast  Specifications. 

The  test  results  on  the  open-hearth  slag  as  included  in  this  report  are  for  a  sample 
furnished  by  the  U.  S.  Steel  Corporation  from  Lorain,  Ohio.  Although  these  results  indi- 
cate that  this  material  should  prove  satisfactory  from  the  conductivity  standpoint,  it 
must  be  noted  that  they  will  not  necessarily  apply  to  open-hearth  slag  material  from 
other  sources.  It  is  believed  that  open-hearth  slag  can  be  processed  to  produce  acceptable 
ballast  material.  However,  control  of  the  processing,  particularly  for  the  elimination  of 
particles  high  in  metallic  content,  is  very  important. 

In  addition  to  the  above  tests  a  field  inspection  was  made  on  a  railroad  in  Michigan 
whose  main  line  track  is  ballasted  for  a  distance  of  approximately  90  miles  with  an  open- 
hearth  slag  ballast.  The  track  has  been  in  service  with  this  ballast  for  a  period  of  about 
five  years  without  any  difficulty  being  encountered  with  the  signal  system.  The  ballast 
is  performing  well  in  service,  having  apparently  resisted  breakdown  due  to  weathering 
and  abrasion.  Inspections  of  this  nature  are  planned  on  other  railroads  using  open-hearth 
slag  ballast,  with  samples  being  taken  for  laboratory  tests. 


Rail  Slippage  Tests — Concrete  Ties* 

Introduction 

In  designing  the  fastenings  for  AAR  Type  E  prestressed  concrete  ties,  and  having 
in  mind  particularly  their  use  with  welded  rail,  it  was  considered  that  a  minimum  rail 
slippage  resistance  of  2000  lb  per  tie  per  rail  was  desirable.  This  was  based  on  measure- 
ments that  had  been  made  of  the  resistance  of  wood  ties  to  movement  in  the  ballast  by 
rail  creepage  forces  (see  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  56,  1955,  page  283)  and  on  studies 
made  of  the  forces  needed  to  properly  restrain  welded  rail  from  expansion  and  contrac- 
tion movements  at  the  ends,  against  buckling  in  extreme  hot  weather,  and  against  exces- 
sive gap  in  the  event  of  rail  breakage  in  very  cold  weather  (see  AREA  Proceedings, 
Vol.  38,  1937,  page  493).  Calculations  based  on  a  coefficient  of  friction  of  the  rail  base 
on  the  tie  plate  of  0.25  and  the  leverage  ratios  of  the  clips  indicated  that  with  the 
fastenings  designed  for  the  Type  E  tie  the  slippage  resistance  would  be  2000  lb  with 
5000-lb  bolt  tension.  It  was  further  considered  that  an  initial  bolt  tension  of  10,000  lb 
would  be  desirable  to  extend  the  period  between  tightenings  so  the  cost  of  tightening 
the  clip  bolts  would  be  within  economical  limits.  It  was,  therefore,  anticipated  that  the 
slippage  resistance  would  range  between  4000  and  2000  lb  per  tie  per  rail. 

However,  no  actual  slippage  tests  had  been  made  with  the  fastenings  to  check  the 
slippage  resistance  anticipated  in  the  design  calculations.  For  making  these  tests  it  was 
thought  desirable  to  include  a  drive-on  type  anchor  and  wood  tie,  and  also  French, 
German  and  Swedish  concrete  ties  with  the  particular  type  fastenings  used  on  these  ties. 
In  discussion  of  the  subject,  the  Portland  Cement  Association  kindly  agreed  to  the  con- 
duct of  such  tests  in  their  research  development  laboratories  at  Skokie,  111.,  where  the 
PCA  staff  designed  and  built  the  test  layout,  and  provided  the  necessary  test  instru- 
mentation and  a  portion  of  the  personnel  for  operation.  The  AAR  furnished  the  ties 
and  fastenings,  except  the  Swedish  tie,  and  members  of  the  research  staff  cooperated 
in  the  conduct  of  the  tests. 

Test  Procedure 

It  was  decided  that  the  control  test  should  be  with  conventional  wood  tie  construc- 
tion using  132  RE  rail,  a  double-shoulder  tie  plate  and  a  grip-type  rail  anchor.  The 
control  test  was  followed  by  the  AAR  Type  E  prestressed  concrete  tie  with  AAR  design 
fastenings,  a  variation  of  the  Type  E  tie  without  a  tie  plate,  but  having  direct  fixation 
with  only  a  pad  under  the  rail,  the  French  RS  concrete  tie,  the  German  post-tensioned 
concrete  tie  with  GEO-type  fastenings,  and  the  Swedish  concrete  tie  with  FIST  sprint 
rail  clip.  The  fastenings  for  the  concrete  ties  are  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

It  was  believed  that  the  vibrations  that  accompany  train  movement  might  have  an 
effect  on  the  rail  slippage  resistance  of  the  fastenings.  In  order  to  study  the  vibration 
effect,  certain  of  the  tests  were  repeated  with  a  60-cycle  vibrator  attached  to  the  rail; 
the  magnitude  of  vibration  was  determined  by  the  amplitude  of  vibration  <>t  the  rail 
directly  above  the  tie  connection.  This  method  of  introducing  vibration  was  used  for 
practical  reasons  realizing  that  the  vibrations  so  produced  did  not  necessarilj  simulate 
those  that  occur  in  track. 

The  testing  layout  was  designed  for  tests  as  follows  with  three  slips  for  each  con 

dition. 


*An  abstract  of   Report   No.   V.R-22   issued  by  the  Research  Department.    \  \k.   Copies  of  the  full 
report  can  be  obtained  from  the  director  of  engineering  research,  AAR,  3140  a  Chicago  16. 

39 


40 


Rail    Slippage    Tests  —  Concrete    Ties 


AAR  Tie  -  AAR  Fastenings 


AAR  Tie  -  Direct  Fixation 


French  RS  Tie  &  Fastenings 


German  Tie  -  GEO  Fastenings  Swedish  Tie  -  FIST  Clip 

Fig.  1. 


Rail   Slippage    Tests  —  Concrete   Ties 41 

Series  A — Wood  tie  control  test 

2  rail  anchors  without  vibration 

2  rail  anchors  with  vibration 

Total  4  tests 
Series  B — Concrete  tie,  Type  E,  AAR  fastenings  (See  ER-20  report  for  details) 

Bolt  tension  5000  lb,  7500  lb,  10,000  lb 

Polyethylene  pad  without  vibration 

Polyethylene  pad  with  vibration 

Hardwood  plywood  pad  without  vibration 

Total  9  tests 
Series  C — Concrete  tie,  variation  of  Type  E  for  direct  fixation  with  uniclips 

Bolt  tension  5000  lb,  7500  lb  and  10,000  lb 

Polyethylene  pad  without  vibration 

Polyethylene  pad  with  vibration 

Hardwood  plywood  pad  without  vibration 

Total  9  tests 
Series  D — Concrete  tie,  French  RS  with  rubber  pad  and  RX  clips 

With  and  without  vibration 

2  tests 
Series  E — Concrete  tie,  German  with  GEO-type  fastenings 

With  and  without  vibration 

2  tests 
Series  F — Concrete  tie,  Swedish  101  with  rubber  pad  and  FIST  rail  clip 

With  and  without  vibration 

2  tests 

The  test  layout,  shown  in  the  illustration  on  page  42,  consisted  of  a  concrete 
base  with  a  variable  position  loading  crosshead  for  attaching  a  hydraulic  jack  with  pro- 
vision for  centering  the  jack  at  the  centroidal  axis  of  the  rail.  Hold-down  bolts,  suitably- 
spaced  in  the  concrete  base,  permitted  moving  the  jack  and  rail  over  a  sufficient  range 
to  obtain  new  bearing  surfaces  on  the  rail  and  tie  plate  or  pad  for  each  test.  The  tie  was 
sjrouted  to  the  floor  at  proper  height  and  held  down  by  two  crossheads  bolted  through 
the  floor  by  tensioned  tie-rods  which  were  prestressed  by  hydraulic  jacks  beneath  the 
floor.  Thus  the  slippage  values  are  between  the  rail  and  the  tie  or  between  the  rail  and 
the  tie  plate  without  movement  of  the  tie.  The  free  end  of  the  rail  was  supported  on  a 
ring  of  roller  bearings  to  reduce  friction  to  the  minimum.  Pressure  on  the  rail  end  was 
applied  at  2000  lb  per  minute. 

The  instrumentation  consisted  of  a  load  cell  to  measure  the  force  at  the  rail  end 
while  the  movements  of  the  rail  with  respect  to  the  tie  and  also  with  respect  to  the  tie 
plate  were  determined  by  differential  transformers.  AH  instrumentation  results  were 
continuously  recorded  by  an  oscillograph.  Dial  gages  were  used  with  the  grip-type  r;iil 
anchor  to  determine  the  incident  of  slip  of  the  rail  through  the  anchor. 

Vibration  was  provided  by  a  60-cycle  vibrator  mounted  <>"  the  rail.  The  rail  ampli- 
tudes above  the  tie  were  those  which  could  be  held  constant   with  the  equipment 

The  actual  bolt  tension  was  measured  by  means  of  two  -train  gages  mounted  00 
each  bolt  throuuh  the  use  of  a  static  strain  Indicator,  In  the  case  of  the  French  tie, 
the  bolts  were  tightened  to  a  prescribed  torque  of  120  ft-lb  and  the  tension  was 
measured  with  the  strain  gages,  except  for  slip  test  D-4  where  the  bolts  were  tightened 
to  a  tension  of  7000  lb. 


42 


Rail    Slippage    Tests  —  Concrete    Ties 


Test  layout. 


Rail  anchors,  clips,  plates  and  pads  were  changed  out  after  each  test  to  provide  new 
bearing  surfaces. 

The  AAR  is  indebted  to  the  Portland  Cement  Association  for  providing  the  test 
facilities  and  the  personnel  to  aid  in  carrying  out  the  investigation.  The  tests  were  con- 
ducted in  the  PCA  laboratory  under  the  general  direction  of  Eivind  Hognestad,  manager. 
Structural  Development  Section.  The  design  and  construction  of  the  test  equipment  was 
by  Charles  H.  Raths,  assistant  development  engineer,  who  also  participated  in  the  direct 
supervision  of  the  tests. 

Participation  in  the  tests  by  the  AAR  research  staff  was  under  the  general  direction 
of  W.  M.  Keller,  vice  president— research,  and  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering 
research;  E.  J.  Ruble,  executive  research  engineer,  was  in  direct  charge,  assisted  by  L.  R. 
Lamport,  assistant  research  engineer — track,  who  shared  the  supervision  at  the  PCA 
laboratory  and  was  responsible  for  the  report. 

Test  Results 

The  slippage  forces  together  with  the  initial  bolt  tension  and  bolt  tension  loss  for 
each  test  condition  are  presented  in  Report  No.  ER-22  in  Tables  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  which 
are  not  reproduced  herein.  In  the  test  with  the  Swedish  tie  an  attempt  was  made  to 
measure  the  clamping  force  on  the  rail  by  means  of  strain  gages  but  the  results  were 
unsatisfactory,  hence  this  report  must  deal  only  with  the  slippage  force  applied  to  the 
rail  end.  The  Swedish  Railway,  however,  advises  that  the  pressure  on  the  rail  is  2000  kg 
(4410  lb). 


Rail   Slippage   Tests  —  Concrete    Ties 


43 


RAIL  SLIPPAGE  TESTS 
Table  5.    Comparison  of  Average  Slippage  Forces 


Type  of  Tie 
and  Anchor  or  Clip 

Witho 

it    Vibration 

With 

Vibration 

Slip  Force 

Percent  of  Control 

Slip  Force 

Percent  of  Control 

Creosoted  Oak  Tie- Fair 

Rail  Anchor    Control 

5215 

100 

5445 

100 

AAR  Type  "E"  Concrete 

Tie,  AAR  Clips 

Polvethvlene  Pad 

5000  lb.  Bolt  Tension 

2033 

39 

1002 

18 

7500  lb.  Bolt  Tension 

3207 

61 

1717 

31 

10000  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

4037 

77 

2707 

50 

Hdwd.   Plywood  Pad 

5000  lb.  Bolt  Tension 

2277 

44 

- 

- 

7500  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

2217 

42 

- 

- 

10000  lb.  Bolt  Tension 

3290 

63 

- 

- 

AAR  Type  "E"  Concrete 

Tie  with  Direct  Fixation 

and  Uniclips 

Polyethylene  Pad 

5000  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

1197 

23 

1273 

23 

7500  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

2163 

42 

1227 

23 

10000  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

2593 

50 

2443 

45 

Hdwd.   Plywood  Pad 

5000  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

2013 

39 

- 

- 

10000  lb.   Bolt  Tension 

3427 

66 

- 

- 

French  Concrete  Tie  and 

Clips  (120  ft. lb.   Torque) 

2903 

56 

2320 

43 

German  Concrete  Tie  and 

GEO  Clips 

4143 

79 

3967 

73 

Swedish  Concrete  Tie  and 

FIST  Clip 

2160 

41 

2113 

39 

From  the  comparison  in  Table  5  it  is  apparent  that  rail  slippage  resistance  with  the 
concrete  tie  is  greatest  on  a  steel  tie  plate,  namely,  the  German  tie  with  GEO  fastening! 
and  the  AAR  tie  with  AAR  design  fastenings.  These  arc  followed  bj  the  AAR  tie  with 
direct  fixation  on  a  hardwood  plywood  pad,  the  French  tie  with  a  rubber  pad,  the  AAR 
tie  with  direct  fixation  on  a  polyethylene  pad,  and  last,  the  Swedish  tie  with  a 
rubber   pad. 

The  loss  of  slippage  resistance  due  to  vibration  was  greatest  "ii  the  AAR  tie-,  p.n 
ticularly   those   with   5000-lb  and   7500-lb  bolt  tension.   There  was  no  appreciable  effed 
on  the  rail  anchors  with  wood  ties,  the  German  ties,  or  the  Swedish  ties. 

The  loss  of  bolt  tension  was  somewhat  erratic  on  the  AAR  Type  E  ties  with  the 
AAR  clips  at  5000-lb  and  7500-lb  bolt  tension.  It  is  believed  that  this  was  due  primarily 
to  some  rotation  of  the  clips  as  the  slips  occurred.  More  uniformity  WW  had  in  tin   t v  - 1 ~ 


44 


Rail    Slippage    Tests  —  Concrete   Ties 


RAIL  SLIPPAGE  TESTS  -  CONCRETE  TIES 
Table  6.    Ratio:    Slippage  Force  to  Pressure  on  Rail  -  Without  Vibration 


Tie  and  Fastenings 

Initial  Bolt 
Tens  ion -Lb. 

Avg.  Slip 
Force 

Avg.  Pressure 
on  Rail 

Ratio  Slip  Force 
to  Rail  Pressure 

AAR  Type  "E"  with  AAR 
clips  and  polyethylene 
pad 

5000 

7500 

10000 

2033 
3207 
4037 

3770 
5470 
7810 

0.54 

0.59 

0.52 

Avg.            0.55 

As  above  with  hard- 
wood plywood  pad 

5000 

7500 

10000 

2277 
2217 
3290 

3850 
5810 
7950 

0.59 

0.35 

0.41 

Avg.             0.45 

AAR  Type  "E"  direct 
fixation  with  uni clips 
and  polyethylene  pad 

5000 

7500 

10000 

1197 
2163 
2593 

3680 
5430 
7220 

0.33 

0.38 

0.36 

Avg.            0.36 

As  above  with  hard- 
wood plywood  pad 

5000 
10000 

2013 
3427 

3680 
7220 

0.55 

0.47 

Avg.            0.51 

French  Tie  and  fasten- 
ings-rubber pad 

120  ft.  lb. 
torque 

2903 

4760 

0.61 

German  Tie-GEO 
fastenings 

6720 

4143 

5870 

0.69 

Swedish  Tie- FIST 
Clip 

2160 

4410 

0.47 

Vertical  Pressure  on  Rail 

AAR  Type  "E"  with  AAR  Clips                           2  x  0.41  x  Bolt  Tension 
AAR  Type  "E"  direct  fixation-Uniclips            2  x  0.37  x  Bolt  Tension 
French                                                                     2  x  0 .  44  x  Bolt  Tension 
German                                                                    2  x  0.  50  x  Bolt  Tension 
Swedish                                                                 *  44i0  lb. 

*  Swedish  Railway  advise  the  pressure  on  rail  is  2000  Kg  (4410  lb. ) 

made  with  10,000-lb  bolt  tension  and  also  with  the  AAR  Type  E  ties  with  direct  fixa- 
tion and  the  French  and  German  ties,  where  little  rotation  of  the  clips  was  possible. 
It  will  be  noted  that  the  bolts  were  retightened  in  a  few  instances  with  the  result  that 
the  bolt  tension  loss  was  usually  less  in  the  subsequent  slip. 

Table  6  shows  the  ratio  of  slippage  force  to  pressure  on  the  rail  and  brings  out  the 
relatively  low  slippage  resistance  of  the  polyethylene  pad  on  the  AAR  Type  E  tie  with 
direct  fixation.  The  polyethylene  pads  have  a  smooth,  wax-like  surface  which  undoubtedly 
accounts  for  the  low  slippage  resistance. 


Rail   Slippage    Tests  —  Concrete   Ties 45 

Discussion  of  Test  Results 

The  values  of  rail  slippage  resistance  as  determined  in  these  tests  for  the  AAR  design 
clips  for  the  Type  E  tie  were  generally  in  excess  of  the  2000  lb  minimum  for  5000-lb 
bolt  tension,  except  those  with  vibration,  which  were  only  about  1C00  lb.  However,  as 
previously  stated,  it  is  not  known  to  what  extent  the  vibration  actually  simulated  track 
vibrations  so  it  is  questionable  as  to  how  significant  these  values  are. 

The  slippage  resistance  with  the  AAR  clip  is  much  below  that  of  the  drive-on- 
type  anchor.  This  may  be  reflected  in  track  by  some  slippage  through  the  clips  at  the 
ends  of  welded  rail  at  extreme  temperatures,  but  not  necessarily  to  the  extent  the  slip- 
page resistance  provided  may  be  sufficient  to  move  the  ties  in  the  ballast.  The  slippage 
resistance  provided  throughout  the  length  of  the  rail  should  be  adequate  to  prevent 
buckling  and  excessive  gap  opening  in  the  event  of  rail  breakage. 

The  slippage  resistance  with  the  direct  fixation  Uniclips  is  somewhat  lower  than  for 
the  AAR  design  clips,  and  it  might  be  found  desirable  to  maintain  the  bolt  tension 
between  a  range  of  7500  lb  to  10,000  lb  to  provide  adequate  slippage  resistance  in  track. 

The  slippage  resistance  with  the  German  tie  and  GEO  type  clip  was  very  good  and 
was  little  affected  by  vibration. 

The  slippage  resistance  for  the  French  RN-type  clip  was  slightly  above  that  for 
the  AAR  clip  at  the  same  bolt  tension,  possibly  due  to  the  two  contact  points  between 
the  clip  and  rail  and  the  shear  force  carried  by  the  pad. 

The  slippage  resistance  of  the  Swedish  clip  was  above  the  2000-lb  desired  minimum, 
both  with  and  without  vibration. 

Conclusions 

The  measurements  of  rail  slippage  resistance  obtained  in  these  tests  agree  reasonably 
well  with  those  anticipated  in  the  design  of  the  fastening  for  the  AAR  Type  E  pre- 
stressed  concrete  tie.  It  is  believed  that  a  range  of  bolt  tension  between  10,000  and 
5000  lb  should  be  maintained  with  AAR  clips  until  such  time  as  service  experience  might 
indicate  that  a  change  in  these  limits  is  warranted. 


Preventing    Rail    Failures   in    Track* 

By  G.  M.  MAGEE 
Director  of  Engineering  Research,  AAR 

Rail  is  the  most  important  component  of  the  track  structure  for  the  safe  operation 
of  trains.  It  serves  two  important  functions,  one  to  support  the  wheel  and  the  other 
to  guide  it.  In  order  to  support  the  wheel,  the  rail,  through  its  flexural  strength  and 
stiffness  as  a  beam,  distributes  the  wheel  load  over  several  ties  lengthwise  of  the  track. 
The  ties  in  turn  distribute  the  portion  of  the  wheel  load  they  receive  to  the  ballast  and 
the  ballast  distributes  this  load  to  the  subgrade.  Thus  the  rail,  ties  and  ballast  serve  to 
distribute  the  wheel  load  over  a  sufficient  area  of  the  subgrade  that  the  pressure  per 
square  foot  is  well  within  its  supporting  power.  However,  in  serving  this  function  there 
is  a  repeated  flexural  stress  in  the  rail  for  each  passing  wheel  load. 

In  order  to  serve  its  function  of  guiding  the  wheel,  it  is  most  important  that  the 
rail  provide  a  continuous  path  for  the  wheel.  This  requires  that  the  rail  shall  not  become 
broken.  If  the  rail  becomes  broken,  the  rail  ends  will  not  be  held  at  the  same  height. 
If  the  rail  is  under  tension  due  to  low  temperature  it  will  tend  to  open  up  and  make 
a  gap  when  the  rail  breaks.  Thus  a  broken  rail  may  result  in  a  derailment  of  a  train, 
although  this  is  not  necessarily  so  as  there  are  many  broken  rails  that  occur  in  track 
that  do  not  result  in  derailments,  particularly  it  the  break  occurs  on  tangent  track  or  on 
the  low  side  of  a  curve.  Nevertheless  it  is  a  matter  of  first  importance  in  the  safe  opera- 
tion of  trains  to  prevent  broken  rails  occurring  in  track. 

How  can  this  be  done?  Very  few  of  the  broken  rails  that  occur  in  service  are  sudden 
or  complete  fractures  of  the  rail  unless  there  is  some  defect  present  in  the  rail.  Com- 
plete and  sudden  fractures  rarely  occur  in  sound  rail.  Also,  in  most  cases  defects  in  rail 
are  originally  small  and  progressively  grow  under  repeated  wheel  loadings.  Thus  if  we 
are  able  to  examine  the  rail  carefully  and  periodically  to  determine  whether  there  are 
any  flaws  or  defects  in  the  rail  of  a  size  likely  to  initiate  a  sudden  rupture  and  remove 
such  rails  from  track  and  replace  them  with  sound  rails,  the  occurrence  of  broken  rails 
can  be  largely  prevented.  To  distinguish  between  rails  that  are  removed  from  track 
because  of  detected  defects  that  may  cause  the  rail  to  break  and  those  that  actually 
break  in  track,  we  refer  to  the  first  as  detected  rail  failures  and  to  the  latter  as  service 
rail  failures. 

For  the  purpose  of  describing  the  development  of  equipment  For  detecting  rail  de- 
fects, I  should  like  to  classify  rail  defects  into  two  general  types,  namely,  head  d 
and  web  defects.  Head  defects  include  transverse  fissures,  compound  fissures,  detail 
tures,  vertical  split  heads,  and  horizontal  split  heads.  Although  each  of  these  types  <>i 
defects  have  certain  distinguishing  characteristics,  they  are  all  progressive  fractures  that 
grow  from  a  small  nucleus  and  result  in  a  separation  of  metal  in  the  rail  head.  Also, 
it  is  usually  not  possible  to  determine  the  existence  of  these  defects  by  looking  at  tin- 
rail  because  the  separation  of  the  metal  is  inside  the  rail  head  and  therefore  not   visible 

Web  defects  generallj  consisl  of  cracks  in  the  horizontal  plane  in  the  upper  fillet 
between  the  rail  head  and  the  web  or  in  crack-  out  of  boll  holes  Most  defects  ol  this 
type  occur  within  joint  bar  limits  Horizontal  crark-  in  the  upper  web  fillet  are  called 
head  and  web  separations.  These  sometimes  develop  on  the  gage  ride  of  the  low  rail 
of  curves  when  the  rail  head  has  become  considerably  reduced  in  depth  by  wear  and 


•Presented    before    the    Railroad    Sessions    of    the    Transportation    Engineering    <  I    the 

American   Society  of   Civil   Engineers  in   Detroit,   Mich.,   October  8-11,    1962.  1! 

features   in    the   program   of   the   Railroad   Sessions,   on   October  9.   developed   by  the   Board  of   Direction 

of  the  AREA. 

47 


48 


Preventing    Rail    Failures   in    Tr  ack 


The  first  rail  defect  detector  car— 1928. 


flow.  These  develop  relatively  slowly  and  can  be  detected  readily  by  visual  inspection 
so  they  do  not  offer  much  of  a  problem.  The  head  and  web  separations  and  bolt  hole 
cracks  within  the  rail  joint  limits,  however,  are  not  readily  accessible  for  inspection. 
The  cost  of  removing  joint  bars  to  make  inspections  periodically  would  be  prohibitive. 
Thus  an  adequate  and  economical  means  of  inspecting  the  rail  web  within  the  joint 
bar  limits  is  needed  for  this  purpose.  Here  again  both  of  these  types  of  defects  are 
progressive-type  fractures  that  grow  with  repeated  stressing  from  the  passing  wheel  loads. 

Defect-detection  equipment  was  developed  first  for  the  head  type  of  defect  because 
it  was  of  the  most  importance.  The  first  rail  defect  detector  car  was  built  by  the  Sperry 
Development  Company  for  the  American  Railway  Association  upon  the  recommenda- 
tion of  the  Rail  committee  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association.  Several 
years  were  required  for  the  research  and  development  work,  and  the  car  was  accepted 
by  the  Committee  on  October  2,  1928.  In  this  detector  car,  two  sets  of  brushes  for  each 
rail  were  mounted  underneath  to  continuously  contact  the  top  of  the  rail  as  the  car 
moved  along  the  track.  A  very  heavy  electrical  current  (2  volts,  2000  amperes)  was 
passed  between  the  brushes  through  the  rail.  If  a  defect  existed  in  the  rail  head,  it 
caused  an  abrupt  change  in  the  direction  of  the  flow  of  current  at  the  location  of  the 
defect.  A  specially  designed  pick-up  coil  was  located  above  the  rail  between  the  two 
brushes.  The  abrupt  change  in  the  direction  of  current  flow  at  a  defect  and  resultant 
change  in  the  magnetic  flux  surrounding  the  rail  head,  generated  a  small  potential  in 
the  pick-up  coil  by  inductance.  The  voltage  from  the  pick-up  coil  was,  of  course,  very 
low  and  had  to  be  amplified  with  radio-type  amplifiers  to  provide  enough  power  to 


Preventing    Rail    Failures   in    Track 49 

actuate  recording  pens  on  a  moving  paper  tape.  A  paint  gun  was  also  connected  with 
the  defect  indicating  mechanism  so  that  when  the  pens  were  actuated  a  spot  of  yellow 
paint  was  also  sprayed  on  the  rail  to  locate  the  defect.  This  principle  of  detection  is 
generally  referred  to  as  the  inductance  method. 

This  principle  of  defect  detection  has  both  advantages  and  disadvantages.  The  prin- 
cipal advantage  is  that  it  gives  a  strong  signal  for  a  defect  and  thus  can  be  used  to 
detect  relatively  small  transverse  defects  in  the  rail  head.  One  disadvantage  is  that  an 
electrical  contact  must  be  made  between  the  brushes  and  the  rail  and  sometimes  the 
surface  condition  of  the  rail  makes  this  difficult.  Also,  if  sparking  should  occur  this 
creates  a  localized  magnetic  effect  that  may  give  a  false  indication  of  a  defect.  Another 
disadvantage  is  that  when  one  brush  has  passed  over  the  rail  gap  the  defect  detection 
equipment  will  not  be  operative  until  the  second  brush  has  also  passed  over  it,  thus 
leaving  a  portion  of  each  rail  end  in  which  defects  cannot  be  located. 

Another  type  of  the  defect-detection  equipment  for  locating  defects  in  the  rail  head 
was  later  developed  by  the  Association  of  American  Railroads  and  is  known  as  the 
residual  magnetic  method.  With  this  method  no  electric  current  is  actually  passed  through 
the  rail,  but  a  powerful  magnet  placed  toward  the  front  end  of  the  detector  car  on  each 
side  passes  a  heavy  magnetic  flux  through  the  rail  head.  After  the  magnet  has  passed, 
if  there  is  any  defect  in  the  rail  head  there  will  be  a  small  residual  magnetic  field  at 
the  defect.  A  pick-up  coil  mechanism  located  at  the  rear  end  of  the  detector  car  on  each 
side  generates  a  small  potential  when  it  cuts  through  the  lines  of  the  residual  magnetic 
force.  This  signal  is  amplified  to  actuate  pens  on  a  recording  paper  tape  and  also  to 
spray  a  spot  of  paint  on  the  rail.  The  advantages  of  the  residual  magnetic  method  are 
that  no  current  is  actually  passed  through  the  rail  so  there  is  no  problem  offered  by  any 
surface  condition  of  the  rail  that  would  tend  to  affect  the  resistance  of  the  brush  con- 
tacts. Also  with  the  residual  magnetic  equipment  it  is  possible  to  locate  defects  close  to 
the  rail  ends.  In  other  words,  there  is  very  little  dead  area  at  the  rail  ends  with  the 
AAR  type  car. 

The  first  of  the  AAR  type  detector  cars  was  a  double-unit  rail  car,  the  first  car 
being  the  tow  car  and  power  supply  and  the  second  or  trailer  car  having  the  defect 
detection  pick-up  equipment  and  sleeping  quarters  for  the  crew.  A  recent  development 
of  the  AAR  type  equipment  is  the  road-rail  unit  which  utilizes  the  same  general  prin- 
ciples of  defect  detection  as  the  rail-type  unit.  However,  every  effort  has  been  expended 
to  make  the  equipment  compact  and  light  in  weight  so  that  it  can  be  applied  to  a  truck 
chassis  with  a  specially  built  panel  bcdy.  This  unit  is  equipped  with  retractable  pilot 
wheels  so  that  it  can  be  operated  on  the  rail  for  testing  or  on  the  highway  for  trans 
ferring  between  test  location. 

Today,  rail  in  main  track  is  tested  periodically  by  detector  cars,  the  frequency  of 
testing  depending  upon  the  age  of  rail,  density  of  traffic,  number  of  defects  found,  etc 
Approximately  two-thirds  of  the  track  mileage  is  tested  by  Sperry  Rail  Service  under 
contractural  arrangement  with  the  individual  railroads.  This  company  i-  ;m  outgrowth 
of  the  Sperry  Development  Company  that  developed  the  firsl  detector  car  for  the  Ameri- 
can Railroad  Association.  I  am  not  sufficiently  familiar  with  the  Sperry  detector  car  to 
be  able  to  describe  its  method  of  operation  in  detail,  It  i-  mj  understanding  that  the 
Sperry  car,  in  general  terms,  utilizes  a  combination  of  the  inductance  method  of  testing 
combined  with  ultrasonic  units  that  exph  re  the  rail  at  the  rail  ends  for  head  di 
Thus  the  head  of  the  rail  is  tested  for  defects  for  the  entire  rail  length.  The  remaining 
one-third  of  the  track  mileage  is  tested  with  detector  cars  that  are  owned  and  operated 
by  individual  railroads  or  contracted  for  testing  service  from  the  AAR  Research  Center. 


50 


Preventing   Rail    Failures   in    Track 


The  AAR  road-rail  type  detector  car. 


Defect  detector  pick-up  coils  at  the  rear  of  the  road-rail  detector  car. 


Preventing   Rail   Failures   in    Track 


SI 


For  detecting  defects  in  the  rail  web  the  ultrasonic  principle  of  defect  detection  has 
been  found  to  be  effective.  There  are  several  different  types  of  units  available  for  doing 
this  detection.  In  general  these  units  inspect  one  joint  at  a  time,  the  operator  of  the 
equipment  slowly  moving  the  crystal  over  the  rail  for  the  length  of  the  joint  bar,  ex- 
amining the  web  for  possible  head-and-web  separations  or  bolt-hole  cracks.  The  crystal 
generates  an  ultrasonic  wave  and  transmits  it  vertically  into  the  rail  head  and  down  into 
the  web.  In  one  type  of  equipment  the  reflected  sound  wave  is  shown  on  an  oscillo- 
scope. The  operator  is  able  to  see  two  lines  representing  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  rail 
and  when  passing  over  the  bolt  hole  the  reflected  sound  wave  is  interrupted  by  the  bolt 
hole  so  that  a  definite  pattern  is  shown  for  the  hole.  If  there  is  a  crack  emanating  from 
a  bolt  hole  a  different  pattern  will  be  indicated  which  will  enable  the  operator  to  deter- 
mine the  existence  of  a  bolt-hole  crack. 

Another  type  of  equipment  is  quite  portable;  in  fact  it  can  be  carried  in  a  sort  of 
knapsack  on  the  back  of  the  operator.  The  principle  of  detection  is  to  pass  a  crystal 
along  the  length  of  the  rail,  transmitting  a  vertical  sound  wave  into  it  and  the  reflected 
sound  wave  is  picked  up  and  transmitted  to  a  set  of  earphones.  An  experienced  opera- 
tor is  able  to  detect  by  the  difference  in  the  transmitted  buzzing  sound  in  the  earphones, 
the  existence  of  a  crack  in  a  bolt  hole  or  a  head-and-web  separation.  In  another  type  of 
unit,  the  reflected  sound  wave  is  indicated  visually  on  a  meter. 

For  several  years,  the  Santa  Fe  Railway  has  been  engaged  in  the  development  of 
a  road-rail  unit  to  continuously  test  the  rail  web  for  defects  by  the  ultrasonic  method. 
This  unit  has  a  very  ingenious  coupling  method  utilizing  a  column  of  water  to  make 
the  coupling  between  the  crystal  and  the  top  surface  of  the  rail,  surrounded  by  a  rubber 


Road-rail  ultrasonic  type  rail  defect  detector  car  developed  by  the  Santa  Fe. 


>2 


Preventing   Rail    Failures   in    Track 


Crystal  coupling  unit  on  the  Santa  Fe  ultrasonic  detector  car. 


suction  cup  to  reclaim  most  of  the  water  used.  Cathode  ray  viewing  scopes  show  the 
reflected  pattern  continuously  for  both  rails,  and  two  additional  retention-type  scopes 
show  an  enlarged  pattern  for  each  rail  joint  as  it  is  passed. 

It  is  my  understanding  that  Sperry  Rail  Service  has  recently  added  further  equip- 
ment to  their  regular  detector  car  so  that  it  can  be  used  to  locate  defects  in  the  rail  web 
by  ultrasonic  means  at  the  same  time  that  the  test  is  being  made  for  head  defects.  This 
supplemental  equipment  does  not  make  a  continuous  record  but  indicates  by  a  light  sig- 
nal when  a  defect  is  located  and  the  operator  of  the  car  can  then  stop  and  make  a  hand 
check  with  a  portable  ultrasonic  unit  to  verify  the  existence  of  a  bolt-hole  crack  or 
head-and-web  separation. 

Several  years  ago  the  detector  car  engineer  and  metallurgical  engineer  of  the  Asso- 
ciation of  American  Railroads  made  a  trip  to  Germany  to  see  the  ultrasonic  type  of 
detector  car  developed  for  the  German  National  Railways.  This  type  of  car  depends  en- 
tirely upon  ultrasonic  sound  transmitted  into  the  rail  with  three  sets  of  crystals,  one  in 
the  vertical  direction,  one  at  35  deg,  and  one  at  70  deg,  to  locate  defects  both  in  the  rail 
head  and  in  the  web.  This  car  has  the  advantage  of  affording  high-speed  operation  as 
it  can  be  operated  as  fast  as  40  mph,  making  a  photographic-type  record  on  sensitized 
paper  of  the  traces  actuated  by  the  reflected  sound  waves.  It  was  considered  that  this 
type  of  car  had  many  advantages  but  that  it  had  two  important  disadvantages  for  use 
on  railroads  in  the  United  States.  One  disadvantage  is  that  the  photographic  record  must 
be  developed  and  examined  by  observers  especially  trained  to  locate  defects  by  noting 
any  deviation  from  the  normal  pattern.  The  existence  of  a  defect  would  then  have  to  be 
communicated  to  the  track  men  to  locate  and  remove  the  rail  from  service.  Thus  a  delay 


Preventing   Rail    Failures   in    Track 


S3 


*► 


Ultrasonic  type  detector  car  developed  by  the  German  National   Railways. 


Three  sets  of  crystal  generating  and  pickup  units  on  the  German  National 

Railways  ultrasonic  car. 


>4 


Preventing   Rail    Failures   in    Track 


Interior   view  of  the   German  National   Railways  ultrasonic  car. 


of  several  days  would  occur  between  the  time  when  the  car  makes  a  test  and  the  defec- 
tive rail  is  replaced.  Also,  there  is  the  possibility  that  a  mistake  might  be  made  in  locating 
the  defective  rail  and,  therefore,  it  would  not  be  removed  and  replaced  with  a  sound 
rail.  These  two  disadvantages  and  other  factors  have  been  considered  of  sufficient  im- 
portance so  that  at  the  present  time  only  limited  use  is  being  made  of  the  German  type 
of  car  in  the  United  States.  However,  I  understand  Sperry  Rail  Service  does  have  at 
least  one  car  of  this  type  with  which  it  is  experimenting  and  it  is  possible  that  further 
development  may  make  the  detection  of  both  head  defects  and  web  defects  practical 
with  this  type  of  unit. 

The  economic  advantages  to  the  railroads  that  have  accrued  from  the  use  of  defect- 
detection  equipment  cannot  be  over  emphasized.  It  is  difficult  to  place  a  dollar-and-cents 
evaluation  on  these  advantages.  However,  an  estimate  can  be  made  that  will  serve  to 
give  some  idea  of  the  importance  to  the  railways  of  the  use  of  detector  cars  for  prevent- 
ing rail  failures  from  occurring  in  service.  Approximately  200,000  miles  of  track  are 
tested  each  year  by  detector  cars  and  some  20,000  defective  rails  are  located  and  replaced 
with  sound  rails  before  service  failure  occurs.  In  one  year  one  large  railway  had  65  service 
failures  that  were  not  located  by  detector  cars  and  from  these  65  service  failures  there 
were  three  train  derailments  that  cost  the  railway  approximately  $750,000  in  damages 
to  track,  equipment  and  personal  injury.  This  represents  a  cost  of  approximately  $10,000 
for  each  service  failure.  If,  therefore,  the  20,000  detected  defective  rails  were  left  in 
service  until  a  service  failure  occurred,  it  could  reasonably  be  assumed  that  these  service 
failures  would  cost  the  railroads  an  average  of  $10,000  each  or  a  total  of  $200,0000,000 
for  the  20,000  defective  rails  that  are  detected  and  removed  from  track  annually.  This, 


Preventing   Rail   Failures   in    Track 55 

of  course,  is  aside  from  the  humane  considerations  of  the  reduction  in  personal  injury 
and  possibly  death  of  passengers  and  employees.  The  cost  of  testing  200,000  miles  of 
track  per  year  is  on  the  order  of  S4.000,000  and  this  cost  would  perhaps  be  increased 
to  approximately  £6,000,000  if  the  cost  of  operating  the  ultrasonic  equipment  for  testing 
for  bolt  hole  cracks  and  head  and  web  failures  is  added  thereto.  Thus  it  is  apparent  that 
the  railways  have  benefited  greatly  not  only  in  safety  of  train  operation  but  also  in 
economy  of  train  operation  by  virtue  of  preventing  rail  failures  in  track  through  the 
use  of  defect-detection  equipment. 


Welded  Railroad  Bridges* 

By  J.  E.  SOUTH 

System    Engineer — Structures,    Pennsylvania    Railroad 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  first  all-welded  bridges  in  this  country  and  possibh 
in  the  world  were  railroad  bridges  constructed  in  1928.1  The  first  bridge  was  a  single- 
track  through  truss  with  a  span  of  135  ft  built  to  carry  the  railroad  over  a  canal  at 
Chicopee  Falls,  Mass.,  for  the  Westinghouse  Company.  The  second  bridge,  also  built  in 
1928  at  the  East  Pittsburgh  Plant  of  Westinghouse,  is  an  open-floor  single-track  through 
girder  span  of  55  ft.  The  floor  system  of  this  bridge  is  made  up  of  rolled  beams.  No 
connection  angles  are  used — the  ends  of  the  stringers  are  fillet  welded  to  the  floorbeams 
with  a  tension  plate  carried  through  the  floorbeam  web,  making  the  stringers  continuous. 
The  floorbeams  are  fillet  welded  to  the  girder  webs.  The  girders  are  made  up  of  Y%  by 
54-in  web  with  three  cover  plates  for  each  flange.  One  cover  plate  of  each  flange  runs 
full  length,  and  the  other  plates  are  cut  off  as  would  be  done  with  a  riveted  bridge. 
The  shortest  cover  plates  are  Yz  in  by  1  ft  4  in,  the  next  plates  are  J^  in  by  1  ft  2>l/$  in, 
and  the  full  length  plates  are  %  in  by  1  ft  2l/2  in.  Lateral  bracing  is  welded  directly 
to  the  bottom  flanges  of  the  girders  and   floorbeams. 

Another  early  all-welded  bridge  is  a  two-track  bascule  span  built  in  1935  for  the 
Florida  East  Coast  Railroad.  Plans  and  specifications  for  this  bridge  were  prepared  by 
the  railroad  and  the  bridge  was  fabricated  by  McClintic-Marshall.  J.  M.  Wolfe,  chief 
engineer  of  the  Florida  East  Coast,  advises  that  the  bridge  was  designed  for  Copper  E  55 
loading,  and  in  the  26  years  the  bridge  has  been  in  service  it  has  carried  each  day  an 
average  of  10  passenger  trains  with  16  cars  each  and  six  freight  trains  with  60  cars  each, 
or  a  total  of  150,000  trains  and  about  10,000,000  freight  cars.  He  further  states  that  they 
have  experienced  no  difficulty  with  the  \ve!ded  work  and  have  had  no  weld  failures. 
In  their  experience  they  have  had  more  corrosive  action  from  brine  drippings  from 
refrigerator  cars  on  rivet  heads  than  en  welds  similarly  exposed.  In  fact,  he  reports  that 
there  has  been  practically  no  corrosion  on  weld  metal. 

In  addition  to  these  early  bridges,  welding  has  been  employed  extensively  from  the 
early   'thirties  by  many  railroads  for  the  strengthening  and  repairing  of  steel   bridges. 

Welded  railroad  bridges  in  a  number  of  ways  are  preferable  to  riveted  constructirn. 
the  mest  important  being  the  matter  of  initial  cost.  To  be  certain  of  this  point,  a  few- 
years  ago  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  took  bids  on  a  deck-plate-girder  bridge  with  a  65-ft 
span.  One  span  was  designed  for  riveted  construction  and  one  span  i<  r  welded  construc- 
tion. The  riveted  span  weighed  25  percent  more  than  the  welded.  The  low  bid  was  16 
cents  per  pound  for  the  welded  bridge  and  17  cents  per  pound  for  the  riveted  bri  Ige 
Since  that  time  similar  welded  bridges  have  been  purchased  fi  t  as  low  as  13.4  cents  per 
pound.  The  economy  of  the  all-welded  bridge  has  definitely   been  established. 

The  clean  surfaces  of  the  welded  bridge  make  painting  easier,  and  the  paint  last 
longer.  Rivet  heads  and  edges  of  plates  and  angles  are  usually  where  the  paint  film  first 
breaks  down  as  it  is  the  thinnest  at  these  points.  Dirt  that  is  often  trapped  by  tivel 
heads  will  many  times  be  washed  off  the  flanges  of  the  welded  bridges  by  a  heavy  rain 
The  lighter  weight  of  the  welded  bridge  often  facilitates  erection. 


•Presented    before    the    Railroad    Sessions    of    the    Transportation    Engineering.    Conference    of    the 
American   Society   of   Civil    Engineers   in    Detroit,    Mich.,   October   8-11,    1962.    This    papa    «.i- 

ten    features    in    the    program    cl    the    Railroad    Sessions,    on    October    9,    developed    by    the    Boat 
Direction   of   the  AREA. 

1  Arc  Welded  Steel   Frame  Structures — Gilbert   D.    Fish     McGraw-Hill. 

57 


58 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges 


""M*'n  Stt   ™ 
All-welded  bridge  built  in    1928   at   East  Pittsburgh,   Pa. 


.  ■  ■■■■ 


Removing  old  cover  plates  in  connection  with  cover-plate  replacement  work, 
Pennsylvania  Railroad's  West  Philadelphia  elevated  line. 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges 59 

The  proven  economy  of  all-welded  bridges  and  the  many  other  advantages  will 
force  their  eventual  adoption  by  most  railroad  bridge  engineers.  However,  before  that 
happens,  the  engineers  must  be  satisfied  beyond  any  doubt  that  welded  bridges  will  be- 
as  reliable  from  a  safety  standpoint  as  the  riveted  bridges  have  proven  to  be  since  the 
turn  of  the  century.  The  development  of  reliable  riveted  bridges  was  accomplished  only 
over  a  considerable  period  of  time.  In  the  1870's  and  1880's  railroad  bridges  were  failing 
at  the  rate  of  about  25  per  year.2  It  was  only  the  employment  by  the  railroads  of  engi- 
neers specializing  in  bridge  engineering  who  through  research,  scientific  design,  careful 
detailing,  thorough  testing  of  materials  and  inspection  developed  the  reliable  riveted 
railroad  bridges  we  have  today. 

It  has  only  been  since  the  end  of  the  second  world  war  that  study  and  research  in 
connection  with  the  brittle  failure  of  a  number  of  the  more  than  500  all-welded  Liberty 
Ships  in  service  by  January  1943s  that  the  different  requirements  for  welded  and  riveted 
structures  was  understood. 

When  brittle  failure  occurs  the  crack  usually  propagates  very  rapidly  across  the 
entire  width  of  a  plate.  When  plates  are  welded  together  they  act  as  a  single  plate, 
whereas  in  riveted  work  plates  fastened  together  by  rivets  act  more  as  individual  plates, 
thus  limiting  the  extent  of  the  fracture.  In  addition,  thicker  plates  are  generally  used  in 
welded  structures.  Thicker  plates  are  more  sensitive  to  brittle  fracture,  from  both 
geometrical  and  metallurgical  factors.4 

In  addition,  the  notch  effect  produced  by  the  restraint  of  welded  connections,  the 
notches  due  to  imperfections  in  the  welds,  the  residual  stresses  caused  by  weld  shrinkage, 
and  many  other  factors,  contribute  to  making  welded  structures  more  prone  to  brittle 
failure  than   riveted  structures. 

To  prevent  the  rapid  propagation  of  a  brittle  fracture  the  steel  must  yield  plastically 
in  the  presence  of  a  notch.  The  tendency  toward  failure  in  a  brittle  manner  increases  as 
the  temperature  decreases  and  the  rate  of  loading  increases.  Studies  of  welded  ship  fail- 
ures by  the  Ship  Structures  Committee6  concluded  that  a  steel  that  was  not  notch  sensi- 
tive at  low  operating  temperature  was  required,  resulting  in  the  standard  specification 
for  structural  steel  for  ships,  ASTM  A  131. 

It  is  interesting  to  compare  the  requirements  for  ship  steel  with  the  requirements 
for  welded  bridge  steel  covered  by  ASTM  Specifications.  A  36,  A  373  and  A  441.  Cer- 
tainly the  speed  of  application  of  load  and  low  range  of  operating  temperature  is  as 
severe  for  a  railroad  bridge  as  for  a  ship.  One  main  difference  in  the  structures  is  that 
it  is  more  difficult  to  eliminate  geometrical  notches  in  ship  construction,  and  the  large 
size  of  the  ship  increases  the  sensitivity  to  brittle  failure.  Since  tension  flange  plates  of 
welded  bridges  are  usually  2  in  or  more  thick  ("which  inddently  i>  the  greatest  thickness 
covered  by  the  ship  steel  specification)  the  following  comparison  is  confined  to  thick- 
nesses in  this  range: 

CnEMicAL  Requirements" 

A  131 
Grade  C°  A  373  A  441 

C    max     % 0.23  0.26  0.26  0.22 

Mn  % 0.60  to  0.90  0.50  to  0.90  0.80  to  1.20  1  2S  max 

Si  % 0.15  to  0.30  0.15  to  0.30  0.15  to  0.30  0.30  max 

V   min    0  0  0  0.02 

*  All   requirements  shown   tased   <>n   ladle   analysis. 

b  Plate  steel   produced   to  requirements  of   Grade   C  '-hall   he   made   with   fine  grain   practice   .   .   . 

3  Railway    .Age    Centennial    1 

3  Control  of  Steel  Construction   to  Avoid  Brittle  Failure    Welding  Research   Council,  page  31. 

♦Control   of  Steel   Construction  to  Avoid  Brittle  Failure    Welding  Research  Council,  pagi 

■Welding    Research    Council    Bulletin    Xo.  16. 


60 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges 


Another  view  of  cover-plate  replacement  work,  West  Philadelphia 

elevated  line. 


Welding  new  18-  by  iy2-in.  plate. 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges  61 

Tensile  Requirements 

A  131                    A  373                       A  36  A  441 

Tensile    strength     58,OCO  to  71,000  58,000  to  75,000  58,000  to  80,000  63,000  min 

Yield   point   min    32,000                     32.000                     36,000  42  0:Omin 

Elongation  in   8"   min   ...            21%                        21%                        20%  19% 

Elongation  in   2"   min    ...            24%                        24%                        23%  24% 

There  is  no  reason  to  believe  that  A  36  steel  will  have  more  notch  toughness  than 
A  373,  and  it  is  known  that  A  373  steel  has  failed  by  brittle  fracture  while  field  welding 
a  deck  plate  to  the  top  flange  plate  of  a  welded  railrcad  bridge  girder.  There  did  exist, 
however,  a  severe  notch  because  of  faulty  construction  procedure  in  cold  weather.  There 
have  also  been  brittle  failures  in  service  of  A  441  steel  under  low  temperature  conditions. 

It  has  been  shown  that  the  transition  temperature  of  thicker  plates  is  higher  than 
thinner  plates  of  the  same  heat.  Ship  steel  has  been  limited  to  2  in.  in  thickness,  and  all 
steel  over  1  in  thick  must  be  Class  C  made  to  fine  grain  practice.  Thicknesses  are 
permitted  up  to  4  in  for  steel  for  welded  bridges,  and  in  the  case  of  A  373  and  A  36, 
an  increase  of  carbon  to  0.27  percent  is  permitted.  In  the  case  of  A  441  steel  there  is  no 
minimum  silicon  specified,  implying  that  killed  or  simi-killed  steel  is  not  required.  There 
is  no  minimum  manganese  requirement,  so  presumably  if  the  manufacturer  can  find 
some  other  strengthening  material  to  enable  meeting  the  tensile  requirements,  it  could 
be  used  regardless  of  the  effect  on  notch  toughness.  It  is  not  the  average  steel  that  is 
produced  under  the  specification  that  is  of  most  concern  to  the  bridge  engineer,  however. 
It  is  the  possibility  of  obtaining  the  worst  possible  steel  that  would  still  meet  the 
specifications  that  is  a  disturbing  factor. 

There  has  been  no  standard  set  for  notch  toughness  requirements  for  steel  for 
welded  bridges,  but  there  seems  little  reason  to  believe  it  should  be  much  less  than 
that  required  for  ship  construction.  The  rate  of  load  application  on  a  railrcad  bridge 
is  probably  more  severe  than  for  a  ship  and  the  thicknesses  used  are  much  greater.  It 
would  seem  logical  that  steel  for  important  tension  elements  for  bridges  in  thicknesses 
over  about  1  in  should  be  made  with  fine  grain  practice  as  is  the  case  for  ship  steel 
over  1  in. 

To  the  present  time  there  have  been  few  fatigue  failures  in  railroad  bridges  in  thi> 
country  except  for  connection  angles,  secondary  members  and  members  carrying  high 
live  load  and  low  dead  load  and  subjected  to  high  secondary  stresses. 

Since   it   has   been   demonstrated   that   certain    details,   such   as   short   length   cova 
plates  whether  riveted  or  welded  and  other  stress-raising  details,  can  reduce  the  fatigue 
strength  at  2  million  cycles  of  zero-to-tension  stress  range  to  as  low  as  10.000  psi,"  it   i- 
quite  possible  that  the  high  impact  allowances  that  have  been  used  in  the  past  also  pro 
vided  a  safeguard  against  fatigue  failure. 

With  more  accurate  measurements  of  impact  hading  to  a  reduction  of  the  Impart 
loads  combined  with  the  higher  stresses  to  be  permitted  with  the  A  16  Steel)  probably 
more  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  effect  i  I  fatigue  on  the  shorter  spans  (under 
60  ft)  and  where  the  full  effert  is  obtained  by  loading  s  single  track,  In  any  case,  in 
the  zero-to-tension  stress  range  at  2  million  cycles,  members  fabricated  of  bigh-strengtb 


9  Prof.    W.    M.    Wilson,    Univ.    "f    Dlinois    Akl  \    Pi linj  Mlnob 

Bulletin    Series   No.    382. 


62 


Welded    Railroad    B  ridges 


PONTOON 


ABUTMENT 


LONGITUDINAL  SECTION 


Details  of  welded  float   transfer  bridge,  Norfolk  Portsmouth  Belt  Line 
Railroad,  Norfolk,  Va.  See  also  drawings  on  opposite  page. 


i&'»  Flame  Plate 
thickness    \ 


inq 
icKi 

Edgeofplate-^ 


/—Edge  of  plate 


GIRDER    FLANGE  JOINT 


Welded    Railroad    Brid  ges 


63 


a-a  DETALS-OUTSHORE  END 


SLOPE  2nni-»    *      60*     * 


WEB   PLATE   JOINT 


MID -SECTION 


-10". 

60'  ^;*    % 

NOSE  SECTION 


GIRDER  SECTION 


64 Welded    Railroad    Bridges 

steel  do  not  show  any  significant  increase  in  fatigue  strength  over  A  7  or  A  373  steel, 
so  for  certain  short-span  members  no  advantage  can  be  gained  by  use  of  higher 
strength  steels. 

On  spans  of  about  60  ft  and  longer  during  the  passage  of  an  entire  train  the  load- 
ing will  increase  from  zero  to  maximum  and  then  fluctuate  from  about  half  maximum 
to  maximum.  In  this  case  fatigue  becomes  of  considerably  less  importance.  In  the  case 
of  longer  spans  (over  100  ft)  and  members  receiving  the  maximum  load  from  two 
tracks,  it  is  quite  possible  that  the  number  of  cycles  of  maximum  load  would  be  so  low 
that  fatigue  effect  would  be  unimportant. 

A  study  of  Variable  Stress  Cycle  Fatigue  is  now  being  carried  out  at   the  Ecole 

Polytechnique,  Montreal,  Canada,  under  the  guidance  of  the  Fatigue  of  Welded  Joints 

Committee  of  the  Welding  Research  Council  that  should  be  helpful  in  evaluating  the 
fatigue  requirements  for  railroad  bridges. 

The  design  formulas  in  Table  I  of  the  AWS  Specification  for  Welded  Highway  and 
Railway  Bridges  are  based  on  2,000,000,  600,000,  and  100  cycles  of  loading.  There  seems 
to  be  need  for  a  study  that  would  develop  the  number  of  loading  cycles  that  should 
be  considered  for  various  spans  and  leading  conditions. 

It  might  be  that  the  simplest  method  of  providing  for  fatigue  would  be  to  assign 
lower  allowable  unit  stresses  for  certain  span  lengths  and  loading  conditions.  Certainly 
the  actual  ultimate  carrying  capacity  of  a  dynamically  loaded  bridge  cannot  be  deter- 
mined by  having  equal  stress  in  all  members  as  would  be  the  case  in  a  statically  loaded 
structure. 

Fatigue  cracks  are  of  more  importance  in  a  welded  structure  only  because  of  the 
notch  effect  of  the  crack  leading  to  possible  brittle  failure. 

Regardless  of  some  of  the  above  uncertainties  many  all-welded  railroad  and  high- 
way bridges  have  been  built  and  are  functioning  satisfactorily.  In  the  New  York  Times 
of  August  21  there  was  an  article  about  the  failure  of  a  new  $10,000,000  welded  girder 
bridge  in  Melbourne,  Australia,  emphasizing  the  need  of  careful  design,  good  workman- 
ship and  use  of  the  proper  steel  for  the  job. 

Design  should  follow  the  requirements  of  the  American  Welding  Society  Specifica- 
tions for  Highway  and  Railway  Bridges. 

In  addition,  the  engineer  should  minimize  the  possibility  of  having  a  geometrical 
or  metallurgical  notch  effect  in  tension  members.  For  instance: 

a.  Do  not  weld  to  tension  flanges  of  beams  or  girders. 

b.  Avoid  unnecessary  splices  in  tension  flanges.  Have  all  such  splices  and  others 
in  regions  of  high  stress  radiographed  to  insure  weld  soundness. 

c.  Grind  flange  splices  smooth  and  to  a  rounded  contour. 

d.  Inspect  flange-to-web   welds  by  dye  penetrant   or  magnetic  particles  or   other 
satisfactory  method   to  insure  against  weld  cracks. 

e.  Use   full  penetration  welds  in  important  web-to-flange   connections. 

f.  Carefully  inspect  all  welds  to  see  they  are  smooth  and  without  unfilled  weld 
craters. 

g.  Edges  of  flange  plates  should  be  smooth  and  without  nicks  caused  by  handling 
during  fabrication  or  erection. 


Welded    R  ailroad    Bridges 


65 


Washout  of  timber   trestle,    Crawfordsville   Branch,  Pennsylvania  Railroad. 


Typical  welded   steel   replacement   trestle. 


null.  573 


66 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges 


Typical  details   of  welded  trestle. 


h.  Be   certain  that  procedure  for  field  welding  will  not  produce  undue  shrinkage 
stresses  or  result  in  stress-raising  notches. 

i.  Arc  strikes   should  be   removed  and  voids  filled  with  weld  metal  and  surface 
ground  smooth. 

Use  the  thinnest  plates  possible  consistent  with  design  requirements.  For  instance, 
if  design  considerations  permit,  it  would  be  preferable  to  use  a  24-  by  2-in  flange  plate 
rather  than  a  16-  by  3-in  plate,  giving  the  same  area.  Thinner  plates  have  better  notch 
toughness  than  thicker  plates  from  the  same  heat. 

Steel  for  important  tension  elements  can  be  ordered  made  to  fine  grain  practice. 
It  has  been  estimated  that  this  would  add  1.3  to  1.75  percent  to  the  cost  of  welded 
bridges.7 

If  extra-thick  tension  plates  are  needed  it  would  be  desirable  to  specify  that  they 
be  normalized  to  lower  the  transition  temperature.  Normalizing  will  have  greater  effect 
on  steel  made  to  fine  grain  practice. 

Railroad  bridges  in  regions  of  extremely  low  temperatures  should  be  given  special 
consideration  in  regard  to  transition  temperature  of  steel  in  tension  elements. 

If  possible,  select  a  type  of  structure  where  the  failure  of  one  member  will  not 
result  in  the  instability  of  the  entire  bridge.  For  instance  use  a  series  of  longitudinal 


7  Control    of  Steel   Constructon   to  Avoid  Brittle  Failure — Welding  Research  Council — page  130. 


Welded    Railroad    Bridges 67 

stringers  or  girders  instead  of  just  one  pair  carrying  one  track  independently  of  adjacent 
tracks. 

There  are  other  things  the  engineer  could  do,  such  as  limiting  the  allowable  stress 
in  short  spans  which  are  likely  to  receive  a  large  number  of  stress  cycles  of  relatively 
high  intensity;  avoiding  high-strength  material  in  these  circumstances  as  such  steels 
show  no  increase  in  fatigue  strength  in  fabricated  form,  and  being  certain  that  the 
welded  design  has  not  introduced  high  secondary  stresses. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  by  scientific  design,  careful  detailing,  use  of  proper  steel 
for  the  job,  and  thorough  inspection  that  all-welded  railroad  bridges  will  be  as  reliable 
as  the  riveted  bridges  and  will  be  built  at  considerable  savings  to  the  railroads 
and  others. 


Advance   Report  of   Committee   30 — Impact   and   Bridge   Stresses 
Report  on  Assignment  6 

Concrete  Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committee  8 

P.  L.  Montgomery  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  YV.  Davidson,  W.  E.  Dowling,  C.  E. 
Ekberg,  Jr.,  N.  E.  Ekrem,  J.  A.  Erskine,  J.  F.  Hoss,  Jr.,  R.  E.  Kuban,  K.  H. 
Lenzen,  C.  V.  Lund,  James  Michalos,  N.  M.  Newmark,  L.  P.  Nicholson,  M.  Noys- 
zewski  A.  L.  Piepmeier,  E.  D.  Ripple,  A.  P.  Smith,  C.  A.  Still,  F.  W.  Thompson. 
J.  R.  Williams,  J.  D.  Woodward. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  abstracts  of  two  reports  on  investigations 
undertaken  for  the  committee  by  the  research  staff  of  the  Association  of  American 
Railroads. 


FIELD   INVESTIGATION  OF  FLORIDA  EAST   COAST   PRESTRESSED 
CONCRETE  BEAMS* 

This  report  covers  the  testing  and  analysis  of  two  30-ft  6-in  long  spans  in  ■ 
ballasted-deck  precast,  prctensioned  concrete  double-track  bridge  over  Cypress  Creek 
Pompano  Beach,  Fla.  East  test  span  is  comprised  of  sh  2  it  3  in  wide  l>y  2  u  6  in 
deep  rectangular  beams  per  track  and  are  identical  except  thai  the  beams  In  one  ipan 
had  longitudinal  recesses  cast  along  their  sides  near  the  top  which  formed  kiy\v;r 


•An  abstract  of  Report  No.   ER-21   issued  by  the  Research   Department     VAF  thr  full 

report  can  be  obtained   from   the  director  of  enginccrine  research,   A\K,    1140   9     I  IfO   It 

69 


70 


Prestressed    Concrete    Structures 


tilling  with  cement  mortar.  The  purpose  of  the  invesligation  was  to  compare  the  static 
and  dynamic  effect  on  spans  with  and  without  shear  keys  before  and  after  transverse 
post  tensioning  under  the  passage  of  a  test  train  operating  at  speeds  up  to  nearly  70 
mph.  The  test  train  was  composed  of  a  two-unit  diesel  locomotive,  five  50-ton  and  two 
70-ton  loaded  hopper  cars  and  a  caboose. 

Either  shear  keys  or  transverse  post  tensioning  is  effective  in  distributing  the  load 
across  the  deck.  An  improvement  in  load  distribution  was  noted  for  the  span  with  shear 
keys  and  after  post  tensioning.  Before  post  tensioning,  in  several  instances,  the  recorded 
static  strains  in  various  beams  exceeded  the  calculated  values.  For  the  span  without 
shear  keys,  the  outside  beam  carried  negligible  load  until  after  post  tensioning.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  outside  curb  beam  and  the  other  five  beams  in  the  span  with  shear 
keys  carried  approximately  the  same  load  before  and  after  post  tensioning.  The  post 
tensioning  caused  some  of  the  load  to  be  transferred  to  the  span  in  the  adjacent  track. 

Comparing  the  spans,  the  one  with  shear  keys  had  the  lowest  range  of  impact 
values  after  post  tensioning.  While  the  maximum  recorded  total  impact  for  the  locomo- 
tive did  not  exceed  the  current  AREA  specifications,  it  is  interesting  to  note  that  the 
increase  in  strains  with  increase  of  speed  was  appreciable  only  at  speeds  above  SO  mph. 

FIELD   INVESTIGATION  OF  SOUTHERN  PACIFIC   COMPANY,  TEXAS  & 
LOUISIANA   LINES,  PRESTRESSED    CONCRETE   GIRDER   SPANS* 

A  test  was  conducted  in  1961  to  determine  maximum  strains,  static  effects  and  load 
distribution  in  two  spans  of  a  ballasted-deck  single-track  bridge  near  Houston,  Tex. 
Both    spans    have    cast-in-place    concrete   decks   supported   by    precast    concrete   girders 


*  An   abstract   of   Repurt   No.   ER-25    issued   by   the   Research   Department,   AAR.    Copies  of   the   full 
report  can  be  obtained  from  the  director  of  engineering  research,  AAR,  3140  S.  Federal  St.,  Chicago  16. 


Prestressed    Concrete    Structures  71 


having  the  same  I-shaped  cross  section.  One  span  contains  four  30-ft  long  pretensioned 
girders  while  the  other  has  five  55-ft  long  girders  which  were  first  pretensioned  and 
later  post  tensioned.  The  test  loading  consisted  of  two-  and  three-unit  diesel  li  comotives 
operating  at  speeds   up  to   20  mph. 

Two  different  approaches  were  followed  in  the  determination  of  calculated  strains. 
In  one  case,  the  basis  was  to  assume  that  the  entire  cross  section  acted  as  a  composite- 
unit.  In  the  other  case,  one  girder  and  the  corresponding  portion  of  slab  was  assumed 
to  act  together.  The  maximum  recorded  strains  occurred  at  the  maximum  speed  but 
they  did  not  exceed  the  calculated  values  regardless  of  which  approach  was  followed. 
The  study  of  vertical  strain  distribution  was  dependent  on  the  same  assumptions 
used  in  calculating  the  neutral  axis.  On  the  assumption  that  the  entire  cross  section 
acted  as  a  unit,  the  neutral  axis  based  on  average  recorded  values  was  below  that 
calculated  for  the  shorter  span  and  approximately  the  same  for  the  longer  span.  Com- 
posite action  existed  between  the  precast  girders  and  the  cast-in-place  decks  of  both 
spans.  In  regard  to  transverse  distr.bution,  the  two  inside  girders  of  the  shorter  span 
carried  approximately  63  percent  of  the  total  load.  Each  of  the  five  girders  in  the  longer 
span  carried  nearly  equal  loads,  and  the  interior  girders  also  carried  approximately 
60  percent  of  the  total  load. 


Advance  Report  of  Committee   16 — Economics  of  Railway 
Location  and  Operation 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Potential   Applications  of  Electronic   Computers   to   Railway 

Engineering  and  Maintenance  Problems  in  Research, 

Design,   Inventory,   Etc. 

Collaborating  with  Committees  11  and  30,  and  Informally  with  the  Railway 
Systems   and    Procedures  Association 

F.  Wascoe  (chairman,  subcommittee),  L.  P.  Diamond,  W.  J.  Dixon,  G.  B.  Dutton,  Jr. 
S.  B.  Gill,  C.  A.  James,  T.  J.  Lamphier,  R.  J.  Lane,  A.  S.  Lang,  M.  B.  Miller. 
V.  J.  Roggeveen,  G.  Rugge,  G.  S.  Sowers,  J.  J.  Stark,  Jr.,  C.  L.  Towle,  T.  D. 
Wofford,  Jr. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  two  reports  on  the  use  of  computers  in 
operations  research  on  the  Canadian  National  Railways.  One  of  these  reports  is  entitled 
"Train  Performance  Calculator"  and  the  other,  "A  Computer  Simulation  of  Railroad 
CTC  Operations." 


Train  Performance   Calculator 

By  CHARLES  SANKEY 

Operational  Research  Branch,   Research  and   Development   Department, 
Canadian  National  Railways 

The  Canadian  National  Railways'  Train  Performance  Calculator  (TPC)  is  a  method 
of  using  an  electronic  computer  to  simulate  a  train's  movement  along  a  railway  lint' 
The  results  include  a  graph  showing  the  train's  speed  all  along  the  line,  and  tables  of 
running  times,  station-to-station  times,  locomotive  power  factor  and  other  useful 
information. 

The  TPC  program  was  developed  by  the  Operational  Research  Branch  in  early 
1960  at  the  request  of  the  Transportation  Department.  Since  then  it  has  been  exten- 
sively used,  particularly  by  the  Operating  Department.  Among  the  questions  investigated 
by  the  use  of  TPC  are: 

1.  To    find    the    time   any   particular   train    will    take    to   cover   a    .subdivision    (or 
several  subdivisions).  This  is  particularly  useful  in  train  scheduinp. 

2.  To  find  the  amount  of  power  required   (i.e.  how  man)    diesel   units)    to  make 
a  run  in  a  certain  time. 

3.  To  determine  how  much  time  is  spent,  and  how  much  extra  fuel  is  used,  ii    t 
train  makes  an  extra  stop. 

4.  To  find  out  what  effect  a  speed  restriction,  or  the  removal  of  ;■  speed  restrii 
tion,   will   have  on  a   train. 

5.  To    estimate    the   effects   of    rolling-stock    or    locomotive    improvements 
rcl'.er  bearings  instead   of  solid  journals)    on  schedules  and   fuel   D  DSUmptii  n 

TPC  can  be  used  just  as  easily  for  a  track  which  has  not  been  built,  or  i<t  >  nun 
which  does  not  exist,  as  it  can  for  an  actual  train  on  an  actual  track.  This  is  of  the 
greatest  use  in  planning  new  lines,  for  example,  where  it  is  necessary  to  decide  what  th< 

73 


74 Train   Performance    Calculator 

best   route   or   the   maximum   grades   and   curvature   should   be.   Approximate  rules  and 
guesses  can  be  replaced  by  detailed  and  accurate  information. 

In  the  past  few  years,  several  methods  have  been  devised  by  different  railroads 
to  perform  train  performance  calculations  on  an  electronic  computer.  In  the  CNR  pro- 
gram, particular  emphasis  has  been  placed  on  the  ease  with  which  it  can  be  used  and 
in  simulating  actual  conditions  as  accurately  as  possible.  Among  the  special  features  are: 

1.  The  length  of  the  train  is  fully  taken  into  account.  This  is  important  firstly 
because  the  effective  grade  under  a  long  train  is  different  from  that  under  a 
short  train,  tending  to  smooth  out  variations  in  grade,  and  secondly  because 
speed  restrictions  generally  apply  to  the  whole  length  of  a  train — for  example, 
restrictions  through  turnouts.  The  other  case,  where  a  slow  order  applies  only 
until  the  engine  has  passed  a  point  such  as  a  grade  crossing,  is  also  correctly 
treated. 

2.  The  computer  uses  an  automatic  "look  ahead"  method  to  determine  when  the 
train  should  apply  brakes  in  order  to  comply  with  a  lower  speed  limit  or 
come  to  a  stop. 

3.  The  effect  of  track  curvature  in  retarding  a  train  is  allowed  for  in  the  com- 
puter by  using  the  relation  that  each  degree  of  curvature  is  equivalent  to  a 
certain  increase  in  gradient. 

4.  Locomotive  tractive  forces  and  train  resistance  are  given  to  the  computer  in 
the  form  of  tables  as  a  function  of  train  speed.  This  is  much  more  flexible 
than  assuming  a  constant  horsepower  or  using  Davis-type  formulas  for  train 
resistance. 

5.  The  actual  calculations  are  done  by  a  step-by-step  solution  of  the  differential 
equation  governing  the  train's  motion,  expressed  in  terms  of  energy  rather  than 
acceleration.  The  effect  of  this  is  that  a  larger  interval  between  successive  steps 
can  be  used.  We  have  found  that  a  lS-sec  interval  using  the  energy  equation 
gives  as  much  accuracy  as  a  5-sec  interval  using  accelerations.  The  result  of 
this  is  to  reduce  the  number  of  calculations  required  for  a  run. 

6.  The  "velocity  profile"  (i.e.,  graph  of  speed  versus  distance)  which  is  produced 
as  an  output  shows  very  simply  and  clearly  such  things  as  the  effect  of  slow 
orders,  the  minimum  speed  up  the  ruling  grade,  and  the  relationship  between 
actual  train  speed  and  the  speed  limit. 

7.  The  quantities  entered  on  a  control  card  and  therefore  completely  under  the 
operator's  control,  include: 

(a)  The   effective   value   of   "free-fall"  gravitational  acceleration,    modified  by 
rotational  inertia,  which  varies  from  train  to  train. 

(b)  Braking  deceleration. 

(c)  Height  equivalent  of  curvature   (see  above). 

(d)  Length  of  train. 

(e)  Weight  of  train. 

(f)  Time   interval   for  calculating  successive  steps. 

(g)  Distance  interval  for  detail  output  and  for   the  velocity  profile. 

8.  Preparation  of  the  input  to  the  computer  is  very  simple.  One  set  of  punched 
cards  contains  tractive  forces  and  train  resistance,  another  gives  speed  limits, 
a  third  has  elevations  and  curvature  at  arbitrary  points  along  the  track  (usually 
where  the  gradient  changes),  and  a  last  set  gives  temporary  speed  orders  (slow 


Train    Perform  ance    Calculator 75 

or  fast),  stations  for  which  summary  outputs  are  required,  and  train  stops. 
An  interesting  feature  of  the  last  three  sets  is  that  they  are  reversible.  In  order 
to  run  a  train  in  the  opposite  direction,  the  cards  are  merely  turned  around 
and  read  into  the  computer  backwards,  without  being  sorted  or  rearranged. 
This  is  accomplished  by  plug-beard  wiring  in  the  computer. 

Although  there  are  always  differences  from  the  ideal  in  actual  train  operation,  and 
no  two  train  runs  will  ever  be  identical,  the  TPC  results  have  shown  remarkably  good 
agreement   with   measured   train   times. 

The  Transportation  Department  has  used  the  program  to  prepare  charts  for  all 
main-line  subdivisions,  eastbound  and  westbound,  giving  running  times  as  a  function 
of  weight/power  ratio  for  passenger  trains  and  for  freight  trains  with  various  values 
of  average  car  weight.  These  are  being  distributed  to  the  Regions,  and  it  is  believed 
that  as  they  become  more  familiar  to  management  and  operating  personnel,  more  uses 
will  be  found  for  them  and  for  the  greatly  improved  information  which  they  contain. 

APPENDIX  A— EQUIPMENT 
IBM   650  with: 

Basic  alphabetic  device 

2000-word  drum  storage 

On-line  IBM  407  tabulating  machine 

The  program  is  at  present  being  rewritten  to  make  use  of  the  IBM-7070  computer 
which  has  recently  been  acquired  by  the  CNR.  Various  additions  and  modifications  will 
be  incorporated  at  the  same  time. 

APPENDIX  B— MATHEMATICAL  METHOD 
Units 

For  simp'icity  and  precision  in  operations  within  the  computer,  the  following 
quantities  have  been  used: 

Distance  .V  miles 

Time  T  minutes 

Speed  V  miles  per  minute 

Acceleration  A  m'les  per  minute1 

Energy  Potential  P  (miles  per   minute) 

For  machine  use  ( but  not  tor  input  and  output),  all  variables  have  been  expressed 
in  these  units.  For  example: 

I  I-    in  lb  ui 

\r  =  acceleration  due  to  tractive  effort  =  —  ■  .  .  •     ,,  G 

tram   weight   m  ll> 

.    .       ,  Resistant  e  in  lb  w  i 

An  =  deceleration    due    to    resistive    forces  =  ; — : .  .  ,  . — r. ■    (, 

train  weight  in  lb 

Pit  =  Energy  potential  due  to  height   (including  curve  effeel 
=  average    height    of    train    in    miles  X  G 

In  these  examples,  G  is  the  gravitational  acceleration  constant,  modified  to  lake 
account  of  rotational  inertia. 


76 Train   Performance    Calculator 

Full-Power   Operation — i.e.,    Below    Speed   Limit 

A  step-by-step  integration  procedure  is  used,  with  an  approximately  constant  time 
increment. 

Let   DT,    DX,  DV,   DPn   denote  increments   of   time,   distance,   speed  and   height 
potential,  and  let  DCT  be  the  basic  time  interval.  Suppose  that  after  any  step  the  train's 
position  and  speed  are  X  and  V. 
Then: 

DX  =  (V  +  l/2  DoV)  DeT,  where  D„V  is  a  first  approximation  to  DV  (see  below). 
Calculate  DPn  corresponding  to  DX,  from  the  elevation  card  input. 
Calculate  Am  =  Ap  —  AR  for  a  speed  V-\-l/2  D0V,  by  interploating  in  the  table 
of  tractive  force  and  resistance. 

Am  DX  —  DPb 

DV  —    v+y2D0v 

_  DX 

DT~  v+y2DV 

Provided  that  no  braking  lines  or  speed  limits  are  violated,  these  increments  are 
then  added  to  the  old  variables  and  the  process  is  repeated,  using  the  value  of  DV  as 
the  new  value  for  DaV. 

For  the  first  step  after  release  from  a  speed  limit,  or  from  a  stop,  there  is  no 
available  value  for  D0V,  and  so  it  is  calculated: 

DoV  =(AM  —  AG)   DcT,  where  Ao  is  the  acceleration  due  to  the  gradient  under 
the  train. 


Train    Performance    Calculator 

77 

•• 

T3TD     ' 

A 

C    «   O 

re  o  "V 

<£ 

«/> 

,«t-5  c 

4*. 

oz 

u        © 

3 

•i 

O   U    A 

\I 

>- 

<ANt»«<MnN«prtHN4<#a4rth-o»H«oo» 

*ss 

to 

f»-#**d«0»*^-*£W«>l^.#oj?>f*o>^©«**\©0>«n 

V9      • 

z>v> 

C   t/) 

—  OQC 

-"  E  c 

vctl 

cr 

<UJ 

Kzn. 

t»  z> 

t 

oouxx 

aC  c 

u_ 

•OCT 

W  «  re 

• 

atri 

•-    Ui 

i 

XUJ 

•2E   - 

ujza. 
uxr 

z 

!* 

«    P    ») 

< 

•i  • 

or 

^M 

C   o 

h~ 

I- 

o  C  ll 

«  i< 

4f  \t 

\m    d    tl 

*- 

*(< 

1:1 

o  w 

+J          to 

a 

D 

O  i  • 

a   a 

O 

u. 

w  —  u 

°  o  ° 

a. 2  j= 

4>  -^  n_^ 

U* 

O  «o 
•  ZtU 

«  rt  «       *                  «*       ~>             m        o-  <        ir  o 

U 

u-cu 

<M  ©>  o>>        «o                 •       •*            «A       *\<       *>  «■« 

■-J    « 

r 

oxa 

•    •    •         •                   ••              ••••• 

Sog; 

< 

_j   •/> 

r\  «n  «->        o                  m       o*            «n        o  «>        e>  •> 

X 

hhn       r>                 *i       «f\            r-       «o>       o  ** 

j.- 

§ 

• 
ox 

r-4  r4 

rent 
d  o  o 

u. 

1*1 

xa  • 

*\  r-  o      o 

•  •  •       • 

•        •            •        •  •       •  • 

72  ■£  <-> 

a 

«az 

r-  •  r»       •                 to       ■€            *       «o  «       m  <C 

E  «  ° 

BO 

r 

aOT  >, 

—• 

i*i* 

'C  n-° 

< 

xv> 

H  w  — 

•z 
a  • 

••  5  2 

Ik 

U    V    ., 

«^>  re 

O 

<u> 

-IK 

UiX 

_    t»   W 
.«  WO 

i 

T3  ac 

1 

§ 

w                                                                                              X  lu                  a 

re  <"  t> 

2 

Ui              tt 

u      a      oc_#o      z  o      <  a:          >- £ 

J=T3  X 

UJ  BE        U 

v2  v 

h* 

ae< 

< 

u  uj       ir       >-  z 

jEo 

BMOMXU  jaillO  J">K 

H.c  bo 

g 

»- 

r  «/i       >w)OZ<< 

OUlLhlOfCOUX 

<c  3v 

jiflMLwSNkjhU*!*!       WJ 

<z>ij<ii.>f3»j»)Kq 

V) 

&.  z  3 

jj  ~  *> 

«o 

HhJIIIMi^U< 

M    E    J 

3   r   C 

•36 

6 

<OQkJ<M<UJ 

5§3 

3*5     - 

o 

au 

o  «  i2 

© 
St 

X-i 

• 

eoooooooooooooooooopoo«v««« 

>»  bflO 

t 

c  E  iS 

5  3  tn 
Ijg 

•*©«©-#r>#-«M«o.#rMr^rx«D.©«>.->.*«>c><.*^.tfr--.#*. 

■J 

NNHOOfre 

■S«)f-f-^>-OrfN*>-*^«^«^    —    — • 

2 

»-_) 

8 

w  ^ 

M 

bo  tn"° 

* 

z 

• 

•    ••«••••••••••••••••••••• 

.^u        c 

o«\  •  m»  «»  s  " .  ^  »-  «m  r-  — tr^^<r^*>»^r~^»'<ri«M«^<» 

^   3   O.- 

.3  o  re 
ere-" 

»-«»<*<iMr»'**'#tr*\«<«r>-f-«»»»'©©«-,'«<»«w 

«• 

n 

7S 


Train   Performance    Calculator 


SU3D 

VISON 

IL     UP         KAII' 

KLKI-yr< 

M«N(.t     UU 

TRAIN    NO.     /c«/7       Ar**r+>/tfJb 

TRIP               M/P 
MILEA6C            LOC 

stat; on 

ELAP.TIME 
HRS.MINS. 

SPEED 
M.P.H. 

COMP.GR 
% 

POWER    U.         EXP.       8RA<INo 

,    ENERGY    ET.ERGY         ST, TO    ST 

P. AVAIL.*    HP    HR.S    HP    hRS.            M1NS. 

5      0*00 

129.58 

EDSON 

S      0.00 

12^.58 

EDSON 

0.25 

129.33 

01.0 

25.6 

.12- 

0.50 

129.08 

01.5 

33.4 

.38- 

0.75 

128.83 

01.9 

35.0 

.36- 

1.00 

128.58 

02.4 

35,0 

.34- 

1.25 

128.33 

02.8 

35.0 

.27- 

1.50 

128.08 

03.2 

39.9 

.20- 

1.75 

127.83 

03.5 

43.4 

.21- 

2.00 

127.58 

03.9 

46.5 

.32- 

2.25 

127.33 

04.2 

49.4 

.35- 

2.50 

127.08 

04.5 

52.0 

.35- 

2.75 

126.83 

04.8 

54.4 

.35- 

3.00 

126.58 

05.0 

56.5 

.37- 

3.25 

126.33 

05.3 

58.4 

.38- 

3.50 

126.08 

05.5 

60.0 

.38- 

3.75 

125.83 

05.8 

60.0 

.38- 

A.  00 

125.58 

06.0 

60.0 

.39- 

4.25 

125.33 

06.3 

60.0 

.39- 

4.50 

125.08 

06.5 

60.0 

.40- 

4.75 

124.83 

06.8 

60.0 

.40- 

5.00 

124.58 

07.0 

60.0 

.40- 

5.25 

124.33 

07.3 

60.0 

.19- 

5.38 

124.20 

YATES 

07.4 

60.0 

.08- 

5.38 

124.20 

YATES 

07.4 

60                    322                      9            7.6 

5.75 

123.83 

07.8 

60.0 

.43- 

6.00 

123.58 

08.0 

60.0 

.38- 

6.25 

123.33 

08.3 

55.9 

.34- 

6.50 

123.08 

08.6 

49.0 

.06 

6.75 

122.83 

08.9 

41.0 

.16 

7.00 

122.58 

09.3 

40.0 

.05 

7.25 

122.33 

09.7 

40.0 

7.50 

122.08 

10.0 

40.0 

.05- 

7.75 

121.83 

10.4 

40.0 

.46- 

8.00 

121.58 

10.8 

44.4 

.53- 

8.25 

121.33 

U.  1 

48.1 

.29- 

8.50 

121.08 

11.4 

50.7 

.22- 

8.78 

120.80 

WOLF    CREEK 

11.7 

53.0 

.30- 

8.78 

120.80 

WOUF    CREEK 

11.7 

58                     459                  170             4.2 

9.00 

120.58 

12.0 

54.9 

.35- 

9.25 

120.33 

12.2 

56.9 

.36- 

Fig.  2 — Detail  output.  Since  the  summary  cards  have  not  been  sorted 
out,  they  also  appear  in  the  print-out.  The  headings  referring  to  the  details 
cards  are:  Trip  mileage,  Milepost  location,  Elapsed  time,  Speed,  Gradient, 
compensated  for  curve  effect. 


Train   Performance    Calculator 


79 


VELOCITY     PROFILE 
SUBDIVISION       XJ 


OATF      t/9/i/ 


4_ 
'3 

< 

0 

3 

\ 

„- 

- 

^^ 

~ 

~- 

- 

0 
I  o 

e 

D 
0 

- 

c  ■> 

u 

L 

IS 

IH 

- 

U 

0. 

ID 

\ 

J 
I 

Z  0 

4 

X 
Zo 

\ 

0 

H 

a 

a 

- 

0. 

in 

I 

i 

< 

Ul 
Itl 
or 

a 

© 

111 

1- 

b. 

O 

0 

0 

c<s>/»-cru-f-rrurr(-arrrur<rcr'rur^furtfurcrurrrur<rur-C'«rf<--»rcrKr''--' 

Fig.  3 — Velocity  profile.  The  figures  "1"  refer  to  the  train  speed.  "2" 
to  the  speed  limit.  Where  the  train  is  travelling  at  the  speed  limit,  a  "3" 
is  printed. 


80 


Train   Performance    Calculator 


€,°iod8l 
TOT 

•)*9drr>S 
V6 

L'6     „ 

BUB30£ 

1*6 

TBU^ag 

TOOOMO  01  c 

JTnpexo 


B3BU0TJ 

qsn^BJinM 
T  . 


a  - 


a  ^ 


J3_*_ 


a     a 


a     3     a  a 


a  a 


— ; — cr- 


?  a 

o  o 

^  w 

.5  c 

re1"* 

Sis 

CO 

go 
u 

»% 
is 

"■^  c 
c  ^ 
cd  u  G 

w  O  «*> 
•  _.  w 

gE,rt 


U*2 

S  h'*f, 

tn.E 
re  C  V 

3   re 

E  «  <u 

bO-O.S 

.Sew 

C  w 

Egv, 

|.2E 

.5     o 

ET3  W. 
OwJg 

t:  «  « 

J3  *  „ 
Owe 

■  >.s 

o  c 


I 


Train   Performance    Calculator 


81 


C    1-    !/)»*- 

^ 

3  re  >,  o 

E 

-     £   C 

X  to  re  re 

--c 

M  re      h 

r: 

E  w  n 

>  2  « 

a 

ti 

9 

u 

E 

•GX  w'O 

&6*"'S 

3 

^•s§ 

y 

•-*  re  _c      »h 
u  o  5  u  c 

•2  re  p  c«c 
0-  53  m  «  c 


o  c 


re  ' 


c  ac  ™  a 

re  ;,,       -""  en 


go 

u 

X 

3 

u 

X 

ZJ 

4_j 

^ 

X 

0. 

u 

B 

re 

u 

re 

re 

ri 

V 

0 

re 

> 

C 

re 

BO 

x 
Eh 

u 

re 
x 

go 

in 
II 

9 

u 

> 
re 

B 
g 

re 

i) 

fl 

V£ 

X  vo 

ex 

U 

EH 

<N1 

re 

U 

00 

u 

B 

(Nl 

•■ 

O 

+-j 

B 

u 

a 

0 

go 

M 
II 

L) 
II 

go 

3 

u 
U 

> 
a) 

X 

0 

11 

1 

u 

i 

■y; 

M 

■_ 

0 

re 

u 

OJ 

~ 

CJ 

U 

R 

1) 

u 

** 

M 

B 

'5 

re 
- 
re 
A 

x 

7. 
go 

O 

0 

P 

re 
> 

0 
A 

X 

M 

'53 

U 

_re 
•- 
O 

X 

a 
0 

O 

u 

4J    O 

R 

0 

B 

bfl 

** 

3 
E 
'3 

x 

0 

re 

X 

la 

II 

>> 

0 

- 

II 

> 

re 

9 

E 

CO 

p 

a 

ao 

E 

0 

0 

c 

a 

0 

u 

h 

re 
X 

VI 

> 

II 

0 
~ 

- 

E 

WV 
I3 

0, 

E 

CO 

C 

II 

O 

u 

X 

U1 

■ 

0 

E 

h 

■■ 

A 

.5*x 

„_; 

> 

^ 

d 

Et, 

X 

X 

Fi 

u. 

M 

bf 

> 
0 

V 

u 

* 

0 

cm 

A    Computer   Simulation   of   Railroad   CTC   Operations* 

By  C.  J.  HUDSON 

Operational   Research    Branch,   Research  and    Development   Department 

Canadian    National    Railways 

A.  INTRODUCTION 
Background 

The  Canadian  National  Railways  are  currently  implementing  a  program  of  Cen- 
tralized Traffic  Control  on  40  main-line  subdivisions,  a  total  of  4500  miles  of  single  track. 
Since  the  cost  of  installing  CTC  is  high  ($50,000  per  siding  or  approximately  $1  million 
per  subdivision),  it  is  essential  to  determine  the  most  economic  number  and  locations 
of   signalled   sidings   which   will  adequately   handle    the   current  and  anticipated   traffic. 

In  the  past,  upon  a  proposal  to  install  CTC,  the  number  of  sidings  required  has 
been  based  on  the  grid  system,  their  location  determined  largely  by  local  operating  per- 
sonnel and  the  suitability  of  the  configuration  evaluated  by  a  manual  redispatch.  This 
process  of  drawing  by  hand  the  trains'  time-distance  graphs  and  planning  the  meets  as 
would  an  experienced  CTC  dispatcher  is  time-consuming,  and  any  quantitative  measure 
by  which  one  siding  configuration  may  be  compared  to  another  entails  much  further 
work.  The  time  taken  to  redispatch  one  day's  train  over  a  subdivision  runs  into  several 
man-hours. 

The  Operational  Research  Branch  was  asked  to  develop  a  technique  which  would 
enable  the  Transportation  Department  to  evaluate  various  proposals  for  siding  con- 
figurations easily  and  quickly,  and  to  compare  these  alternatives  quantitatively. 

Many  persons  have  been  associated  with  the  development  of  this  project  from  its 
beginning — in  particular,  J.  M.  Davey,  KCS  (Quebec)  Ltd.;  I.  H.  Cole,  now  with  A.  D. 
Little  Inc.,  and  members  of  the  Transportation  and  Maintenance  Department. 

Program  Design 

Various  approaches  to  the  problem  were  made,  including  linear  programming  and 
combinatorial  analysis.  In  an  analytic  formulation  the  complexity  of  the  problem  is 
greatly  increased  by  introducing  the  siding  spacing,  siding  capacity,  and  train  speed, 
length,  density  and  departure  times  as  true  variables.  Yet  it  is  essential  that  each  of 
these  remains  variable  if  the  representation  is  to  be  realistic  and  the  solution  of  prac- 
tical value.  From  these  considerations  it  was  decided  that  the  most  suitable  approach 
would  be   a  direct  simulation  using  a  digital  computer. 

By  direct  simulation  is  meant  that  an  attempt  is  made  to  create  in  the  computer 
a  representation  of  the  situations  that  occur  on  a  subdivision.  In  the  computer  represen- 
tation of  the  CTC  subdivision  and  the  train  traffic,  the  program  moves  the  trains, 
predicts  meets,  decides  the  trains  to  be  delayed,  arranges  meets  at  the  sidings  and 
imposes  on  the  delayed  trains  the  delays  they  incur  in  practice. 

The  use  of  a  computer  to  represent  a  subdivision  and  its  traffic  is  closely  analogous 
to  that  of  a  CTC  dispatcher's  console,  which  is  itself  a  direct  simulation  of  the  track. 
Here  the  dispatcher  observes  an  indication  of  the  presence  of  a  train  in  a  certain  block 
of  track  by  a  small  light  in  the  appropriate  location  on  the  console.  The  equivalent  in 
the  computer  might  be  the  presence  of  a  number,  identifying  the  train,  in  a  specific 
memory  location. 


Presented  at  the  1962  Joint  ASME-AIEE-EIC  Railway  Conference,  Toronto,  Ont.,  April  10,  1962. 

82 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations        83 

There  were  two  stages  to  the  development  of  the  program.  First  the  objectives 
of  the  program  had  to  be  translated  into  a  logical  set  of  operating  rules.  Computer 
techniques  were  then  developed  to  represent  and  move  trains.  The  objective  of  the  pro- 
gram is  to  "duplicate"  good  dispatching  of  trains  over  a  subdivision.  A  dispatcher's 
objectives  can  be  stated  simply: 

1.  Scheduled  traffic  should  maintain  its  schedule  as  far  as  possible 

2.  In   delaying   trains,   priorities  must   be   recognized. 

3.  The  overall  delay  to  all  trains  should  be  as  small  as  possible. 

These  objectives  imply  that: 

4.  Future  meets  must  be  anticipated. 

5.  A  decision  must  depend  on  concurrent  consideration  of  (1),  (2)  and  (3) 
above. 

A  set  of  decision-making  rules  now  used  in  the  program  was  the  result  ol  many 
discussions  with  dispatchers  and  operating  personnel,  analysis  of  CTC  train  charts,  and 
trial-and-error  methods  using  the  computer.  One  of  the  difficulties  was  to  formulate  a 
set  of  rules  which  apply  to  any  subdivision.  Dispatchers,  with  considerable  experience 
of  local  traffic,  have  intuitively  created  for  themselves  a  set  of  rules  which  are  suitable 
for  the  efficient  movement  of  trains  on  their  particular  subdivisions;  and  with  highly 
repetitive  patterns  of  movement,  experience  is  one  of  the  most  useful  factors  of  decision 
making.  Such  a  rule  might  be  "If  No.  1  doesn't  overtake  No.  IS  by  siding  X  it  will 
arrive  late  at  the  terminal." 

There  are  many  ways  of  building  a  program  to  move  trains,  detect  meets  in  ad- 
vance, implement  a  decision  once  it  has  been  made,  and  to  initiate  and  terminate  trains. 
These  are  matters  of  technique  and,  in  this  case,  the  prime  considerations  in  determining 
the  type  of  program  were  speed  and  convenience  of  operation,  using  the  features  and 
capacity  of  the  available  4000-word  IBM  650. 

B.  DESCRIPTION  OF  PROGRAM 
Data  Preparation 

When  a  decision  is  taken  to  study  a  subdivision  prior  to  CTC  installation,  the 
Operating  Department  first  chooses  one  or  more  samples  of  actual  traffic  which  are 
considered  suitable  for  evaluation  of  the  siding  configuration,  the  traffic  being  either 
typical  or  as  heavy  as  will  be  encountered  on  the  subdivision  in  the  foreseeable  future. 
These  samples  usually  consist  of  a  week's  trains,  though  any  lesser  time  period  ma\ 
be  used.  If  the  installation  of  CTC  indicates  any  changes  in  schedules,  departure  time] 
or  length  of  trains,  these  are  allowed  for  in  preparing  the  data  The  data  which  are 
punched  on  cards  completely  specifies  each  train  and  includes  such  items  as  the  running 
characteristics,  schedules,  number  of  cars  and  tasks  enroute. 

Track  and  train  running-time  data  complete  the  input  to  the  simulation.  Tin 
information  is  that  needed  completely  to   specif]    the  CTC    configuration,   namely,  the 
location   of   signalled   sidings,  electric   lock   sidings  and  junction-,   and    the   cai    capadt] 
and  switch  arrangement  of  sidings. 

Instead   of    calculating   the   siding-to-siding    running    tfnv  cfa    nam    pp 

these  times  are  interpolated  from  a  series  of  time-distance  tables,  which  are  pari  ol  the 
results  of  another  simulation,  the  Train  Performance  Calculai 01  or  TP(  I  I  train 
of  given  characteristics,   this   program  simulate-   its  movement   QVtt  ol   track, 

taking  into  account  elevation,  curvature,  speed  limit-  and   temporary   -low  orders    Cal 


S4        A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations 

culations  are  made  at  discrete  time  intervals,  and  the  velocity,  time,  horsepower  ex- 
pended, braking,  etc.,  are  recorded  at  specified  mileages.  In  addition,  a  velocity  profile 
is  plotted.  For  the  CTC  simulation,  which  is  only  one  of  the  many  uses  of  this  pro- 
gram, condensed  tables  of  running  times  are  compiled  for  a  range  of  trains  of  typical 
characteristics.  Using  interpolation  on  these  precalculated  tables  is  both  time  and  space 
saving  in  the  CTC  simulation,  although  there  may  be  a  small  loss  of  accuracy  due  to 
rounding  off  siding-to-siding  times  to  the  nearest  minute. 

The  Optimum  Path  Program 

Because  of  limited  storage  in  the  computer,  the  simulation  has  been  divided  into 
three  separate  programs,  namely,  an  optimum  path  routine,  the  dispatching  program 
and  a  statistical  analysis.  A  flow  chart  of  the  computer  operation  is  shown  in  Fig.  1. 
The  optimum  path  routine  assimulates  the  raw  data  and  produces  for  each  train  a  table 
of  the  times  it  will  enter  and  leave  each  siding  and,  in  addition,  indicates  whether  the 
siding  is  adequate  for  the  train,  whether  the  power  switch  is  facing  or  opposing  the 
train,  and  the  type  of  task  to  be  pertormed,  if  any.  This  optimum  time  line  is  the  path 
the  train  would  take,  allowing  for  schedules  and  tasks,  but  assuming  there  is  no  inter- 
ference from  other  trains.  The  departure  time  from  one  siding  and  the  arrival  time  at 
the  next  specify  the  block  requirements  for  each  train.  Since  only  one  train  may  occupy 
one  block  at  a  time,  there  is  no  need  to  record  the  distribution  of  time  within  a  block. 
The  optimum  time  lines  together  with  the  track  data  form  the  input  to  the  main 
program. 

The  computer  time  for  this  routine  averages  10  min,  or  approximately  10  percent 
of  that  for  the  dispatching  program.  Incorporated  in  this  routine  are  editing  features 
which  detect  most  invalid  data,  and  which  from  experience  have  proved  very  necessary. 

The  Dispatching  Program 

A  block  diagram  of  the  dispatching  program  is  shown  in  Fig.  2.  Trains'  optimum 
time  lines  are  read  into  the  computer  in  the  order  trains  are  ready  to  enter  the  sub- 
division. A  horizon  is  set,  determined  by  the  earliest  time  that  any  train  in  the  system 
will  reach  its  destination.  All  trains  due  to  enter  the  system  prior  to  this  time  are  read 
into  the  computer.  By  this  means  the  number  of  trains  being  considered  varies  according 
to  the  traffic  density. 

In  a  systematic  manner,  trains  are  moved  forward  as  far  as  possible  on  a  free 
path.  A  train's  progress  is  halted  at  the  furthest  adequate  siding  to  which  it  can  move 
prior  to  a  train  ahead  in  the  same  direction,  or  to  a  conflict  of  time  requirements  for 
a  block.  If  progress  is  stopped  by  a  conflict,  the  train  number  is  stored  in  the  appropri- 
ate siding  location,  and  the  time  is  defined  as  the  time  the  second  train  is  to  enter  the 
block.  In  this  way  all  trains  are  moved  as  far  as  possible  on  a  free  path. 

When  all  movements  have  been  completed,  the  earliest  of  conflicts  is  found,  together 
with  the  trains  involved.  The  CTC  dispatcher  normally  plans  meets  and  sets  the  switches 
at  sidings  well  ahead  of  the  trains.  Similarly,  in  the  program  the  conflict  is  recognized 
before  either  train  enters  the  disputed  block,  and  the  decision  is  made  at  this  time. 
In  the  decision-logic  phase  of  the  program,  the  time-space  around  the  two  conflicting 
trains  is  examined.  For  each  train,  information  is  collected  on  its  priority,  length,  the 
d3lay  it  will  incur  if  the  other  proceeds,  and  for  a  scheduled  train  its  slack  time  to  the 
next  schedule  point.  The  slack  time  is  the  difference  between  its  minimum  running  time 
and  its  schedule  time.  With  the  two  basic  alternatives  of  holding  one  train,  the  important 
factors  Influencing  a  decision  are: 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CT  C   Operations        85 


/TRACK     DATA 


(   TRAIN    DATA 


RUNNING    TIMES 


OPTIMUM 

PATH 
ROUTINE 


OPTIMUM 
TIME     LINES 


DISPATCHING 
ROUTINE 


(   DECISIONS 


ORIGIN- 
DESTINATION 
PERFORMANCE 


STATISTICAL 
ROUTINE 


STATISTICAL 
ANALYSIS 


Fig.   1 — The  computer  operation. 


86 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations 


READ     TRAINS    UP 
TO     HORIZON 


DETECT     EARLIEST 
CONFLICT.     MOVE 
ALL    TRAINS     PRIOR 
TO     CONFLICT 


IS    SITUATION     CLEAR 
FROM    PREVIOUS    CONFLICT 


USE     FORCE-ON 
LOGIC    TO  CHOOSE 
TRAIN     TO    MOVE 


DECIDE      TRAIN 
TO     BE     HELD 

r 

IMPLEMENT 
DECISION 

1 

RESET 
HORIZON 

Fig.  2— Flow  chart  of  the  dispatching  program. 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC   Ope  rations 


s: 


C 


ARE     TRAINS     AT 
ADJACENT  SIDINGS? 


c 


IS  AN    INTERMEDIATE 

SIDING   ADEQUATE   FOR 

EITHER    TRAIN? 


INVESTIGATE 

ADVANTAGES  OF 

SAWBY 


c 


FAVOURABLE 


PLAN 
SAWBY 


UNFAVOURABLE 


3       C 


IS  ONLY  ONE  OF    THE 
TRAINS    ABLE    TO 
ACCEPT    DELAY 


IS  ONLY   ONE  OF  THE 
TRAINS    BLOCKED    BY    THE 
THIRD 


DELAY 
THAT 
TRAIN 


DELAY 
BLOCKED 

TRAIN 


USE   PRIORITIES    TO 
WEIGHT  DELAYS. 
DELAY   TRAIN    WITH 
LEAST    RELATIVE  DELAY 


Fig.  3 — Decision  logic   (simplified). 


1.  the  possible  interference  to  other  trains; 

2.  the  ability  of  each  train  to  accept  a  delay; 

3.  the  priority  and  potential  delay  of  each  train. 

For  a  meet,  the  skeleton  logic  is  Bow-charted  in  Fig.  I  \  scheduled  train  can 
"accept"  a  delay  if  it  can  be  absorbed  in  it-  slack  time,  i.e.,  il  can  suffei  the  delaj  and 
still  maintain  its  schedule.  In  this  connotation  an  unscheduled  train  can  always  "accept" 
a  delay.  The  disposition  of  other  trains  in  the  system  Is  checked  t..  see  whethei  .i  delay 
to  a  third  train  would  ensue  if  either  train  were  allowed  I"  proceed  li  SO,  the  train 
which  would  cause  this  delay  is  said  to  be  blocked.  In  the  situation  ol  tw>  trains  oppoi 
ing  one,  the  tendency  is  to  delay  the  one  When  neither  or  both  train>  are  blocked, 
and  neither  or  both  can  accept   the  respective  delays,  the  priority  and  delay   for  each 


88       A    Computer   Simulation   of    Railroad    CTC   Operations 

train  are  compounded  to  choose  the  minimum  weighted  delay.  Other  factors  affecting 
a  decision  are  the  presence  of  one  train  in  a  terminal  (since  there  is  a  premium  on  ter- 
minal time),  the  use  of  grade  sidings,  and  tasks  to  be  performed  at  a  siding. 

The  inclusion  of  short  sidings  in  a  configuration  (or  the  running  of  long  trains) 
contributes  to  the  complications  of  the  decision  logic.  With  short  sidings,  a  saw-by 
is  sometimes  a  third  alternative  to  delaying  either  train  at  its  present  siding.  For  this, 
the  long  train  must  arrive  first  at  a  siding  which  is  long  enough  only  for  the  short  train. 
Since  this  decision  causes  delays  to  both  trains,  the  saw-by  logic  measures  this  total 
delay  against  a  delay  to  either  train,  and  if  unfavorable  returns  to  the  decision  logic 
for  a  straightforward  meet. 

Nothing  has  yet  been  said  about  overtaking  situations.  Overtaking  occurs  mainly 
while  one  train  is  performing  a  task,  and  hence  little  or  no  delay  is  caused  to  that  train. 
The  use  of  sidings  for  overtaking  is  limited  to  those  which  are  both  adequate  for  the 
train  being  passed  and  which  can  be  entered  through  the  power  switch.  The  desirability 
of  an  overtake  is  based  not  only  on  the  relative  speeds  of  the  trains,  but  also  on  future 
tasks,  if  any,  and  on  scheduled  arrival  times. 

When  it  has  been  decided  which  train  is  to  be  delayed,  the  opposing  train  is  moved 
to  the  siding  location  of  the  delayed  train,  and  one  of  the  two  trains  placed  in  the 
siding,  depending  on  the  power  switch  disposition.  If  the  delaying  train  has  to  run 
through  the  passing  track  it  is  delayed  an  amount  equal  to  the  difference  in  time  to  run 
through  at  normal  speed  and  at  siding  speed.  Its  arrival  and  departure  times  at  all 
siding  locations  ahead  are  then  modified  by  this  amount.  The  clearance  time  of  the 
delayed  train  is  then  determined  by  the  delaying  train,  and  its  future  path  modified 
according^. 

With  the  two  trains  still  at  the  same  siding,  the  program  returns  to  the  beginning, 
the  horizon  is  reset,  more  trains  are  brought  into  the  system  if  necessary,  and  all  trains 
are  mcved  prior  to  conflict.  If  one  of  the  two  formerly  conflicting  trains  is  able  to  move 
on  a  free  path  to  an  adequate  siding  at  this  stage,  then  the  next  conflict  in  time  may 
be  accepted  for  resolution.  However,  if  the  situation  does  not  clear  itself,  one  of  the 
two  trains  must  be  forced  to  move  on  to  a  further  sid'ng,  leaving  one  train  only  at 
each  siding  and  thus  available  for  arranging  future  meets.  The  situation  occurs  in  times 
of  congestion  and  in  particular  when  one  train  is  longer  than  some  sidings.  Considerable 
program  development  was  necessary  to  handle  the  many  conditions  that  occur  in  "force- 
ons",  which  resu't  mostly  from  saw-by  meets.  These  situations  occur  in  real  operation, 
for  when  a  dispatcher  makes  such  a  meet,  and  allows  a  long  train  into  sections  of  track 
where  the  sidings  are  inadequate,  he  must  accept  the  consequence  of  that  meet  by  ac- 
cepting further  saw-bys  or,  if  opposed  by  other  long  trains,  by  first  forcing  the  train 
on  to  an  adequate  siding  and  holding  the  opposing  trains. 

In  this  way  the  program  is  recycled  until  all  trains  have  been  processed.  For  each 
decision  made,  a  record  is  punched,  and  when  a  train  reaches  its  destination  the  resolved 
path  of  its  arrival  and  departure  times  for  each  siding  location  is  punched  out. 

The  sequence  of  operation  of  the  program  is  reviewed  in  time-distance  graphs  for 
a  specific  example,  in  Fig.  4.  On  the  vertical  scale  S^,  S3  are  100  car  sidings  and  S«. 
60  cars.  The  horizontal  scale  is  time.  The  manifest  MF  is  100  cars;  the  passenger  P,  10 
cars;  and  the  wayfreight  WF,  40  cars.  Stage  (a)  represents  the  output  of  the  optimum 
path  routine,  that  is.  the  path  each  train  wou'd  take  neglecting  the  pressnee  of  the  other 
trains.  In  (b)  the  first  three  trains  have  entered  the  system,  moved  as  far  as  possible 
prior  to  the  earliest  conflict,  and  are  at  the  siding  locations  indicated  by  the  arrows. 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroa  d    CTC    Operations        89 


A 


MF 
(100)    ^ 


T 


XI 


l 
I 


K 


\      I 

-\T- 

X 

/\ 
/     \ 


±-4 


p  / 

(10)4 

1     / 


X 


/WF 
/  (40) 


(100) 


(60) 


S3 
(100) 


MF\ 

(100)  \ 

/    \ 

/         \        / 

\   1            \    1 

? 

^ 

*       A 

4  \        J  \ 

s    1 

h 

(10)/ 

*1  / 

r  \ 

(o) 


(b) 


Fig.  4 — Phases  of  the  dispatching  program  cycle. 


Trains  are  halted  at  a  siding  prior  to  an  event,  hence  tluir  times  an  do)  Identical.  In 
(c)  the  decision  has  been  made  to  hold  the  manifi  I  Ml  il  5  the  pmcngfl  P  DU 
been  moved  to  5!  and  the  path  of  MF  modified.  The  passenger  P  has  readied  the  ter- 
minal in  stage  (d)  but  the  next  decision  must  be  made  bcfori-  the  manifest  movi 
yond  Si,  as  53  is  a  short  siding.  The  next  operation  would  be  to  resolve  thai  conflict 
between  the  manifest  and  the  wayfreight. 


90        A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations 


I,  I'.        [AY        ''".|. 


I  i 


!l 

w 


►  lit      scr.     i«i      pfKiur 
pc  ■  t      «         ?  :■ 


Fig.  5 — Simulated  train  chart. 


The  program  uses  the  minimum  clock  technique,  moving  from  conflict  to  conflict. 
Based  on  the  activity  of  an  average  subdivision,  this  represents  a  considerable  saving  in 
time  over  the  master  clock  method.  The  highest  clock  time  is  10,000  min  (just  40  min 
short  of  1  week)  and  the  smallest  interval  is  1  min.  For  an  average  subdivision  of  15 
sidings  and  120  trains  per  week,  the  dispatching  program  takes  about  V/z  hr,  which 
gives  a  simulation  ratio  of  100  to  1.  Since  the  relationship  between  computer  time  and 
train  density  is  non-linear,  this  ratio  will  decrease  rapidly  with  higher  density  traffic. 
Because  of  the  limitation  of  4000  words  of  storage  in  the  IBM  650,  the  number  of 
sidings  cannot  exceed  38  and  the  number  of  trains  in  the  system  at  any  one  time  is 
restricted  to   10.  The  program  itself  occupies  3000  locations  in  memory. 

The    Train  Charts  and  Analysis  Program 

The  punched  cards  of  the  trains'  resolved  paths  are  sorted  and  listed  off-line  on  an 
IBM  407  to  produce  scaled  time-distance  charts  of  the  simulated  dispatching.  Each  train 
is  allocated  a  digit,  and  a  point  is  plotted  for  the  time  a  train  arrives  at,  and  leaves  a 
siding  location,  as  shown  in  Fig.  5.  The  day  is  divided  into  3  periods  of  8  hr.  The  ends 
of  the  sidings  are  considered  to  be  1  mile  apart  for  plotting  purposes.  Where  only  one 
mileage  appears  against  a  siding  number  it  is  either  a  junction  or  an  electric  lock  siding. 
The  dotted  lines  show  the  difference  in  time  between  the  actual  arrival  time  and  the 


A    Computer    Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC   Operations        91 

scheduled  arrival  time.  For  unscheduled  trains  the  equivalent  of  the  scheduled   time   is 
the  time  the  train  would  have  arrived  without  any  interference 

The  statistical  program  utilizes  the  resolved  origin-destination  performance,  and 
the  decision  and  delay  data  from  the  dispatching  program  to  prepare  an  analysis  of  the 
siding  configuration  and  the  traffic  pattern  imposed.  The  most  general  indication  of 
performance  is  given  by  the  total  train  interference  in  train-minutes.  This  interference 
is  also  given  as  a  distribution  over  various  trains  or  classes  of  trains.  Some  of  the 
other  statistics   derived   include: 

1.  The  lateness  of  scheduled  trains  leaving  and  arriving  at  terminals 

2.  A  distribution  of  the  number  and  duration  of  delays  by  sidings. 

3.  The  accumulated  number  of  meets  and  passes  occurring  during  the  same  hour 
of  each  day  for  the  period.   (This  shows  the  traffic  peaks). 

4.  The  average  delay  per  meet  or  pass. 

5.  A  distribution  of  the  activity  of  the  system.  This  is  measured  by  the  number 
of  hours  in  which  no  meets,  one  meet,  two  meets,  etc.,  occur. 

6.  The  distribution  of  interference  to  each  class  of  train  caused  by  each  class  ol 
train   (e.g.,   to   passenger  trains  by  manifest  trains). 

C.  PROJECT  EVALUATION  AND  DEVELOPMENT 

Evaluation  of  Results 

When  an  analysis  of  a  subdivision  is  required,  about  five  or  six  configurations  are 
initially  chosen  for  comparison.  These  configurations,  which  range  from  an  expected 
minimum  to  maximum  number  of  sidings,  are  based  on  proposals  from  local  and  Re- 
gional operating  personnel,  and  the  Headquarters  Transportation  Department.  Because, 
in  most  cases,  CTC  is  being  installed  to  supersede  train-order  operation  on  a  subdivision, 
and  the  cost  of  building  complete  new  sidings  is  high,  the  existing  siding  locations  impose 
many  constraints  on  the  location  of  sidings  to  be  signalled.  On  train-order  subdivisions 
the  siding  spacing  is  normally  much  less  than  that  considered  necessary  for  CTC  opera- 
tion. Hence  the  problem  often  reduces  to  deciding  which  of  the  existing  sidings  should 
be  signalled,  and  in  some  cases  extended. 

From  the  statistical  analysis  and  from  the  train  charts,  the  Transportation  Depart- 
ment can  very  quickly  judge  the  feasibility  of  a  configuration.  The  charts  highlight  any 
extraordinary  situations,  or  poor  dispatching,  which  may  be  hidden  in  a  statistical 
summary.  The  results  of'.en  lead  to  further  proposed  configurations,  which  are  simulated 
before  the  economics  of  the  different  configurations  are  studied, 

It  is  expected  that  the  introduction  of  CTC  will  reduce  both  the  operating 
of  a  subdivision  and  the  cost  of  interference  to  traffic  on  thai  subdivision.  The  main 
items  contributing  to  the  operating  costs,  which  are  significantly  different  in  train  order 
and  CTC  operation,  are  operators'  wages,  maintenance  ot  signals  and  maintenance  of 
way.  Operators'  wages,  and  to  some  extent  the  maintenance  costs,  are  independent  ol 
the  CTC  configuration.  To  the  railway  the  main  measurable  costs  ol  Interfereno 
car  time  and  locomotive  time.  The  potential  reduction  in  costs  must  be  weighed  against 
the  capital  cost  of  CTC  (or  the  annual  interest  and  depredation  cost)  Trends  of  the 
capital  cost  of  CTC  and  the  resulting  interference  for  a  typical  subdivision  are  shown 
in   Fig.   6. 

In  addition  to  the  reduction  of  interference  costs,  there  an  benefits  ol  CTC  which 
have  as  yet  only  been  measured  qualitatively   The  most  apparent  of  these  are  Imp 


92 A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations 


2000  2500  3000  3500 

INTERFERENCE     (TRAIN    MINUTES) 

Fig.  6 — Capital  cost  and  interference. 


operating  safety,  faster  and  more  consistent  service  to  both  freight  and  passenger  cus- 
tomers. In  a  ccmplete  appraisal  of  a  configuration  the  quantitative  value  of  these  factors 
must  be  included. 

In  most  of  the  subdivisions  studied  to  date,  there  is  no  proposed  configuration 
giving  acceptable  performance,  which  stands  out  clearly  as  the  economic  optimum. 
Usually,  within  the  limits  of  permissible  performance  there  is  a  steady  improvement  in 
performance  with  increased  total  cost.  Two  problems,  however,  can  be  easily  solved: 
if  the  capital  cost  is  fixed,  the  configuration  giving  the  best  performance  can  be  found, 
or  if  the  desired  performance  is  specified,  the  cheapest  configuration  to  attain  this  can 
be  found.  In  general,  considerations  other  than  performance  limit  the  choice  of  con- 
figuration. Since  the  studies  are  based  on  current  traffic  levels  it  is  necessary  in  design- 
ing the  CTC  configuration  to  provide  enough  flexibility  to  handle  the  expected  traffic 
five  to  ten  years  hence.  It  is  now  a  standard  practice  in  determining  the  most  suitable 
configuration,  to  choose  one  which  can  be  easily  and  efficiently  expanded  for  greater 
capacity. 

Program  Development 

The  current  simulation  program  produces  a  redispatch  reasonably  close  to  that  of 
a  CTC  dispatcher.  It  is  to  be  stressed  that  the  program  is  not  designed  to  operate  on 
line  and  in  real  time  to  do  the  dispatcher's  job.  Its  main  function  is  in  p'anning  require- 
ments for  CTC  installations  and  has  been  used  for  this  purpose  by  the  Headquarters 
Transportation  and  Maintenance  Department  since  July  1960.  It  has  also  proved  valu- 
able in  planning  siding  extensions  and  retirements  on  existing  CTC  subdivisions.  Fig.  7 


A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operation: 


►  III       SO0.      0>T      M«I0 


I.I  I 

II.}  I 


h.i       i 
m.i       • 


tl.? 

II 

•  •.0 

II 

11.0 

ii 

H.J 

It 

»».» 

11 

tl.t 
is.* 

II 

it 

IS.'* 

tt.l 

II 
it 

tl.t 
It.* 

II 
II 

II. 1 

it 

rt.i 

ii.i 

20 

n.« 

11 

•s.i 

•  t.r 
ir.t 

J! 

101. I         II 

lot. I       ir 

IC5.S         If 


93 


Fig.  7 — Simulated  and  actual  dispatching. 


94        A    Computer   Simulation    of    Railroad    CTC    Operations 

is  a  comparison  of  simulated  and  actual  dispatching  on  an  existing  CTC  subdivision. 
The  simulated  dispatching  is  shown  by  a  solid  line.  Where  the  actual  dispatching  is 
different  from  the  simulated,  it  is  shown  by  a  dotted  line.  Overall,  the  differences  are 
minor,  and  the  simulation  compares  favorably  with  the  CTC  dispatcher. 

The  current  program  has  certain  limitations,  some  of  which  are  due  to  memory 
size  of  the  IBM  650.  At  present,  for  example,  only  one  subdivision,  or  a  section  of 
track  with  not  more  than  38  sidings,  can  be  simulated.  A  new  program,  designed  pri- 
marily for  the  same  purpose,  is  now  being  developed  for  use  on  an  IBM  7070.  This  will 
enable  a  greater  length  of  track  to  be  simulated,  and  will  inccrporate  more  extensive 
decision  logic.  Since  the  program  was  first  used,  much  experience  has  been  gained  of 
CTC  operation  and  of  subdivisional  problems,  and  this  knowledge  is  a  valuable  back- 
ground for  future  programs. 

A  more  general  simulation  of  railroad  operations  is  also  planned.  In  this  it  is 
intended  to  simulate  traffic  over  a  large  network,  such  as  Montreal  and  Toronto  to 
Winnipeg,  and  to  incorporate  in  the  simulation  the  operation  of  major  yards. 

With  the  availability  of  a  general  and  a  detailed  simulation  program,  many  oper- 
ating problems  can  be  studied.  The  detailed  program  will  continue  to  be  used  for  CTC 
subdivision  studies.  In  addition  it  may  help  in  an  understanding  of  the  theory  of  single 
track  traffic  flow  by  studying  the  relationships  between  interference,  traffic  density,  sid- 
ing spacing,  train  priority  and  velocity.  The  general  simulation  could  be  applied  to  such 
problems  as  the  scheduling  of  traffic  between  major  terminals,  and  the  operating  effect 
of  varying  the  number  and  length  of  trains. 

We  now  have  a  technique  to  compare  CTC  configurations  quantitatively  in  terms 
of  performance  and  interference.  The  effect  of  these  factors  is,  however,  not  sufficiently 
understood  to  apply  cost-effectiveness  measures  to  the  quantitative  results.  This  is  a 
worthwhile  area  for  intensive  research. 


Average   Tie   Life — An   Interpretation* 

By  C.  J.  CODE 
Assistant  Chief   Engineer — Staff,   Pennsylvania  Railroad 

The  cross  tie  statistics  for  Class  I  Railroads  which  appear  annually  in  the  Bulletins 
of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association  and  in  the  Cross  Tie  Bulletin  are  of 
great  interest  to  many  people  in  the  railrcad  field.  This  interest  extends  from  tcp  man- 
agement down  into  the  ranks  of  the  engineering  and  purchasing  departments  and  has 
not  infrequently  been  the  subject  of  editorial  comment  in  railway  magazines. 

That  these  figures  are  subject  to  misinterpretation  and  misuse  probably  does  not 
distinguish  them  materially  from  other  types  of  statistical  information.  The  first  cause 
of  misinterpretation  is  the  tendency  to  look  at  the  figures  for  one  years  renewals,  or 
even  the  average  figures  for  five  years,  and  place  undue  weight  on  the  results  as  reflect- 
ing differences  in  maintenance  efficiency  or  economy — for  instance,  as  between  two  rail- 
roads. Again,  if  we  are  to  evaluate  the  benefit  of  any  change  in  practice  which  is  ex- 
pected to  produce  increased  tie  life,  we  must  have  an  accurate  idea  of  present-day  tie 
life  on  which  to  base  a  comparison.  I  think  most  of  you  will  agree  that  the  five-year 
average  including  1961.  which  could  be  interpreted  as  reflecting  an  average  life  of  62 
years,  is  deceptive  to  say  the  least,  and  that  these  figures  can  scarcely  be  taken  as  truly 
representative  of  average  tie  life. 

Actually,  to  get  a  true  overall  picture  of  tie  life,  we  should  have  an  average  over  a 
sufficient  number  of  years  to  include  the  fife  of  the  ties  which  remain  in  track  longest. 
This  would  mean,  in  my  opinion,  an  average  over  a  period  of  50  to  60  years.  However, 
we  have  not  been  using  creosoted  ties  for  a  major  percentage  of  renewals  for  60  years. 
and  it  is  necessary  in  obtaining  a  realistic  average  to  confine  our  study  to  a  period 
during  which  the  present-day  standard  of  creosoted  ties  represents  all  but  a  very  small 
percentage  of  the  ties  used.  It  is  also  desirable  if  not  essential  to  choose  years  for  the 
beginning  and  end  of  the  period  such  that  the  average  condition  of  ties  in  track  is  about 
the  same  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  the  period.  I  have  chosen  for  these  reasons  the 
period  from   1934  to  1957,  incl. 

In  interpreting  the  statistics,  it  is  also  necessary  to  take  account  of  the  fact  that 
mechanical  wear  and  damage  has  an  important  effect  on  tie  life  and  that  consequently 
the  average  life  in  a  heavy-tonnage  track  in  territory  where  there  are  many  sharp  curves 
heavily  elevated  is  going  to  be  quite  different  from  what  it  is  under  light  traffic  at  low 
speed  on  tangent  and  light  curves.  One  cannot  take  the  overall  average,  apply  it  to 
any  specific  situation,  and  say  that  the  ties  in  that  location  are  expected  to  equal  the 
overall  average  life.  For  instance,  if  I  make  a  study  of  the  economic  benefit  of  a  certain 
change  in  tie  practice  which  will  apply  only  to  main  track,  or  to  main  track  in  a  specific 
territory,  and  base  the  study  on  an  average  life  which  includes  40  percent  of  side  and 
yard  tracks,  I  am  only  deceivim:  myself. 

How  this  can  work  out  in  a  specific  instance  is  shown  on  Table  I.  which  repre- 
sents a  combination  of  two  railroads,  one  eastern  and  one  western,  for  which  tin-  statis- 
tics  were  readily  available,  and  in  which  the  average  renewals  over  the  24-year  period, 
1934  to  1957,  inch,  are  broken  down  by  classes  of  track.  In  making  this  breakdown 
of  mileage  I  have  had  to  make  some  assumption-,  but  these  are  not  such  as  to  distort 
the  overall  picture. 


"Presented   before   the   annual   convention    "f    the    Railw.iy   Tie    Association,    Minneapolis,    Minn, 
October    24,    1962. 

95 


96 Average   Tie    Life  —  An    Interpretation 

Table   I 
Railroads  A  and  B 
Tie  Life   -  24  Year  Average 
1934  to  1957  Incl. 


Class  of  Track  and  Miles  on  Ties  in  Ave.  Ties  Renewed 

Annual  Gross  Ton  Miles     Cros3  Ties     Ties/Mile  Track  Life     Ties/Mile/Year  Per  Year  Total 

2560         19,700,000         60 

3070         18,650,000         60 


2710  3,210,000  50 

2970  6,870,000  35 

3100        10,400,000  30 

3240         38,100,000  32 

3100         10,050,000  25 

3240  6,480,000  25 

3250  6,630,000  20 

39,657  120,090,000  35  86.5  3,428,000 

(a)   and   (b)   reflect  differences  in  ties  per  mile. 

The  values  of  average  life  used  for  various  classes  of  main  track  are  based  on  my 
own  studies  over  the  past  17  or  18  years  in  which  I  have  had  the  opportunity  to  follow 
the  performance  of  dated  test  ties  in  detail  throughout  their  life  to  date.  This  has  been 
augmented  by  observation  of  older  ties  of  known  vintage  based  on  the  type  of  end  irons 
used,  and  on  overall  observation  of  tie  performance. 

You  will  note  that  average  life  of  ties  in  main  track  is  shown  as  varying  from  20 
to  35  years  for  all  but  the  lightest  traffic  lines,  and  these  figures  are  pretty  well  sub- 
stantiated as  far  as  I  am  concerned  by  the  observations  referred  to  above.  The  20-year 
average  for  main-line  heavy  traffic  could  be  further  broken  down  to  show  some  loca- 
tions where  life  is  only  15  years.  The  figure  of  50  years  for  light  traffic  branch  lines 
and  the  figure  of  60  years  for  side  and  yard  tracks,  are  pretty  much  assumptions,  but 
they  are  assumptions  which  are  necessary  in  order  for  the  table  to  balance  out  to  an 
overall  average  of  35  years  for  the  two  railroads,  which  figure  is  obtained  from  the 
published  tie  statistics  for  the  24  year  period. 

Since  first  preparing  the  table  I  have  had  a  look  at  some  40-year-old  ties  in  little 
used  side  tracks,  and  I  must  confess  that  based  on  this  observation,  my  60-year  figure 
for  yard  and  side  tracks  looks  too  optimistic.  Nevertheless,  I  am  quite  hesitant  to  make 


Side  and  Yard  Tracks 

(a)  7697 

(b)  6080 

Main  Tracks 
Less  than  2  Million 
Gros3  Ton  Miles 

1185 

2  to  5  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

2310 

5  to  10  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

(a)  3355 

5  to  10  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

(b)ll,750 

10  to  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

(a)  3240 

10  to  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

(b)  2000 

Over  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

2040 

42.7 

328,000 

51.2 

311,000 

54.2 

64,000 

84.8 

196,000 

103.3 

347,000 

101.3 

1,190,000 

124.0 

402,000 

129.5 

259,000 

162.5 

331,000 

Average    Tie    Life  —  An    Interpretation 


'-7 


Table  II 
Railroads  A  and  B 
Tie  Life  -  24  Year  Adjusted  Average 
1934  to  1957  incl. 


Class  of  Track  and     Miles  on 
Annual  Gross  Ton  Miles  Cross  Ties 

Side  and  Yard  Tracks  (a)   7697 

(b)   6080 


Main  Track 
Less  than  2  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

2  to  5  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

5  to  10  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

5  to  10  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

10  to  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

10  to  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 

Over  25  Million 
Gross  Ton  Miles 


1185 
2310 

(a)  3355 

(b)  11,750 

(a)  3240 

(b)  2000 
2040 


Total  Ties 

Ties/Mile  in  Track 

2560         19,700,000 
3070         18,650,000 

2710  3,210,000 

2970  6,870,000 

3100  10,400,000 

3240  38,100,000 

3100  10,050,000 

3240  6,480,000 

3250  6,630,000 


Ave.  Ties  Renewed 

Life  Ties/Mile/Year  Per  Year  Total 


50 

51.2 

394,000 

50 

61.4 

373,000 

50 

54.2 

64,000 

35 

84.8 

196,000 

30 

103.3 

347,000 

32 

101.3 

1,190,000 

25 

124.0 

402,000 

25 

129.5 

259,000 

20 

162.5 

331,000 

39,657  120,090,000       33-8*  89.7*  3,556,000* 

(a)  and   (b)   reflect  differences  in  ties  per  mile. 
*   This  is  an  adjusted  figure   -  see  text. 


the  upward  revision  of  about  5  percent  in  the  life  of  main-track  ties  which  is  necessarj 
to  make  the  table  balance  with,  for  example.  50  years  for  side-track  life. 

It  is  quite  likely  that  in  the  24-year  period  covered  by  the  average,  we  have  not 
experienced  the  renewal  of  a  sufficient  percentage  of  our  side-track  tie-  to  have  thl 

age  figure  truly  representative  of  the  life  of  these  ties,  li  I  assume  SO  year  Bfe  for  tie- 
in  yard  and  side  track,  and  make  do  change  in  tnj    figures  for  main  track,  I  arri< 
an  overall  average   life  of  33.8  year-  instead  of   IS   years    It   seems  t"  me  <i"'11'  likely 
that  this  is  a  more  realistic  overall  average  life  than  the     ;  years  shown  in  Table  I 
I   have  prepared  Table  II  to  show  this  situation. 

I   am    sure    there   are    railroad-    where    there    i-    not    such    B    wide    variation    in    main 

track   tie  life  as   I   have  shown,  and  perhaps  a   single   figure   would   mi  main 

track  mileage  on  such  a  road;  however,  I  am  sure  that  an  adjustment  should  be  made 
to  allow  for  the  greater  life  in  yards  and  side  tra<       I 
has  a  single  main  line  with  408  miles  ol  track  maintained  on 
main  track  and   L9S   side  and  yard  tracks,  with   an 
year,  representing  an  overall   tie  life  oi 


98 Average    Tie    Life  —  An    Interpretation 

and  side  tracks  with  2840  ties  per  mile  in  such  tracks  vs.  3250  ties  per  mile  in  main 
track,  we  arrive  at  an  average  life  for  main  track  of  25. 2  years,  which  is  probably  not 
far  off   for  this  road. 

Obviously,  maintenance  policy,  in  both  good  times  and  bad,  has  a  marked  effect 
on  tie  life.  A  policy  of  careful  economy  disregarding  refinement  of  line  and  surface 
will  produce  longer-than-average  life,  while  a  policy  of  "nothing  but  the  best  is  good 
enough"  will  produce  a  shorter-than-average  life.  A  change  in  maintenance  policy  can 
easily  make  a  difference  of  5  or  10  percent  in  apparent  average  tie  life. 

So  that  you  do  not  have  to  take  on  faith  alone  my  figures  for  tie  life  in  main 
track,  I  am  including  a  set  of  photographs  which  illustrate  the  appearance  of  ties  in 
main  track  after  3  years,  7  years,  10  years,  13  years,  15  years  and  16  years  in  heavy 
traffic  main  line,  after  25  years  in  a  branch  line  of  moderate  traffic,  and  after  32  years 
in  a  track  having  frequent  low-speed  movement  of  light  passenger  trains,  but  no  freight. 
You  will  note  that  some  have  already  been  removed  from  track  after  13  years.  At  15 
and  16  years  many  are  ready  for  renewal.  A  recent  check  of  about  1000  ties  installed 
15  years  ago  in  a  series  of  6-deg  curves  in  a  track  carrying  an  average  of  60  million 
gross  tons  annually,  shows  an  estimated  life,  based  on  the  percentage  remaining  in  track, 
of  14  years  with  one  type  of  anti-splitting  device  and  16  years  with  another. 

In  the  lighter  traffic  situation  after  25  and  30  years,  heavy  renewal  is  indicated, 
and  was  in  fact  in  progress  or  about  to  start  when  I  took  my  pictures. 

In  many  cases  these  pictures  show  the  worst  ties  of  a  given  lot;  however,  I  have 
tried  to  include  also  some  pictures  of  the  average  or  better  ties. 

I  have  found  that  under  heavy  traffic  most  ties  still  look  new  after  five  years.  At 
from  8  to  10  years  they  start  to  show  deterioration.  At  13  to  16  years  many  are  ready 
for  renewal,  although  many  still  have  several  years  life. 

The  appearance  of  these  ties,  and  of  the  ties  associated  with  them,  leads  me  to 
believe  that  the  table  presented  gives  a  reasonable  interpretation  of  tie  life  under  the 
conditions  with  which  I  am  familiar.  A  similar  table  can  be  constructed  for  any  rail- 
road or   group  of  railroads  by  collecting  certain  basic  information. 

Tie  statistics  must  be  averaged  over  a  long  period  of  time  to  be  meaningful,  and 
must  be  interpreted  in  the  light  of  knowledge  of  the  variations  of  life  with  different 
classes  of  track  and  service  conditions. 


Average   Tie   Life  —  An    I  nterpretation 


99 


New  ties,  recently  installed. 


Hull.   573 


100 


Average   Tie   Life  —  An    Interpretation 


3  year  old  ties,  combined  seasoning  and  treatment. 


7  year  old  ties. 


A  v  e  r  a  ge   Tie   Life  —  An    Interpretation 


101 


10  year  old  ties. 


102 


Average    Tie    Life  —  A  n    Interpretation 


10  year  old  ties. 


10  year  old  ties. 


Average    Tie   Life  — An    Interpretation 


103 


13  year  old  ti< 


104 


A  v  e  r  a  ge    Tie   Life  — An    Interpretation 


15  year  old  ties. 


Average   Tie   Li  f e  —  An    Interpretation 


105 


16  year  old  ties. 


106 


Average   Tie    Life  — An    Interpretation 


■■ 


16  year  old  ties. 


Average   Tie   Life — An    Interpretation 


107 


16  year  old  ties. 


108 


Average   Tie   Life  — An    Interpretation 


ysfis*1 


a 


5 


16  year  old  ties. 


Average    Tie    Life  —  An    Interpreta  t i  o  n 


10" 


25   year   old   ties — medium-traffic   branch   line. 


no 


Average    Tie    Life  — An    Interpretation 


32  year  old  ties— light-tonnage,  slow-speed  suburban  passenger  traffic. 


Cut  Maintenance  Costs  With 
Dependable  Aeroquip  Hose  Lines 


Aeroquip  Flexible  Hose  and  Reusable 
Fittings  are  designed  to  cut  costs  two  ways: 
Dependable  replacement  lines  can  be 
assembled  quickly,  easily  in  your  shop  as 
they  are  needed.  There's  no  costly  in- 
ventory of  factory-made  lines;  a  few  coils 


of  bulk  hose  and  some  reusable  fittings 
meet  every  requirement.  Second,  you  save 
on  future  replacements  because  every 
Aeroquip  Fitting  is  detachable  and  com- 
pletely reusable.  Call  your  Aeroquip  Dis- 
tributor today! 


AEROQUIP  HOSE  LINES  FOR  RAILROADS 


For  Hot  Water,  Fuel  and  Lube 
Oils,  use  Aeroquip  1534  Hose  and 
Fittings.  Sizes  from  Va"  to  2Vi "  meet 
all  locomotive  and  equipment  require- 
ments. Special  high  temperature  hose 
types  also  available. 


For  Air  Brake  and  Signal  Lines, 

use  Aeroquip  1531  Air  Hose  and 
Fittings.  Hose  has  internal  reinforce- 
ment for  longer  service  life,  lower 
initial  cost. 


eroquip 


AEROQUIP  CORPORATION  •  JACKSON,  MICHIGAN 
INDUSTRIAL  DIVISION 

INDUSTRIAL  PLANTS:  VAN  WERT,  O.J  BURBANK,  CALIF.;  DALLAS,  TEX.; 

PORTLAND,  ORE.;   CRANBURY,   N.J.;   ATLANTA,   GA. 

In  Canada:  Aeroquip  (Canada)  Ltd.,  Toronto  19,  Ontario 

In  Germany:  Aeroquip  GmbH.,  Baden  Baden-Oo> 

AEROQUIP  PRODUCTS  ARE   PROTECTED   BY  PATENTS   IN   U.S.A.,  CANADA   AND  ABROAD 
FLEXMASTER  is  an  Aeroquip  Trademark 

AEROQUIP   PRODUCTS  ARE   DESIGNED   FOR   BETTER   RAILROADING 


FLEXMASTER  Pipe  Coupling  Diesel  Manifold  Clamp 


Aeroquip  Automatic  Fueling  Unit 


£-x-t-e-n-d    i-l-Q  JZ-i-ft-el 

USE  TIE  PLATE 
LOCK  SPIKES 


One-piece  Design 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  tie  plates  firmly  in  place  on 
cross-ties  and  bridge  timbers. 

LOCK  SPIKES  are  quickly  and  easily  driven, 
or  removed,  with  standard  track  tools. 

Driven  to  refusal,  the  spread  shank  is  com- 
pressed by  the  walls  of  the  hole.  Tie  plates  are  held 
against  horizontal  and  vertical  movement  under 
spring  pressure.  Play  between  the  spike  and  the 
hole  is  eliminated — abrasion  and  seating  of  tie 
plates  is  overcome. 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  their  position  in  the  tie, 
and  redriving  to  tighten  the  plate  is  not  required. 
They  provide  a  quiet  and  strengthened  track. 

Annual  cost  of  ties  and  maintenance  expense  is 
reduced  by  extending  the  life  of  ties  and  holding 
gage.  Here  is  one  answer  to  conservation  of  ma- 
terials and  labor.  Write  for  free  folder. 

BERNUTH,  LEMBCKE   CO.,  INC. 

420  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 


Actual 
Size 


6RS  Announces  ...ROLKODE 

A  New  Communication  System  SJJJT" 


SOLID 
UNITS 


for  centralized 

traffic  control 

for  supervisory 

control  systems 

Advantages  of  the  System: 

•  ROLKODE  is  up  to  50% 
faster  than  time  coded  sys- 
tems. 

•  When  combined  with  other 
services,  ROLKODE  sim- 
plifies line  circuit  require- 
ments. 

•  ROLKODE  operates  on  line 
wire,  cable,  microwave,  or 
telephone  company  facili- 
ties. 

•  ROLKODE  eliminates 
need  for  line  battery  or 
stand-by  a-c. 


Control  office  solid  state  counter. 


Typical  coding  unit. 


ROLKODE  is  simple,  fast,  and 
economical.  Its  advanced  electronic 
circuitry,  solid  Btate  units,  new  and 
improved  relays,  and  unusual  adapt  • 

ability  will   make  your  oexl 
installation  the  most  efficient  avail- 
able today. 


FOR     MORE    INFORMATION    ASK    FOR    PUBLICA 


GENERAL  RAILWAY    SIGNAL    COMPANY 

ROCHESTER  2,  NEW  YORK  NEW  YORK  17,  NEW  YORK  CHICAGO  1,  ILLINOIS  ST.  10UIS  1.  MISSOUH 


The  custom-built  assembly  shown 
above  and  to  the  right  is  an  all-purpose 
rig  designed  to  give  maximum  flexibility 
in  coating  and  painting  work.  It  was 
designed  for  field  application  of  paints, 
lacquers,  vinyls,  cutback  asphalts, 
creosotes,  heavy  oils  and  greases. 
<-  It  uses  the  economical  Graco  Hydra- 
Spray  Process,  and  proves  once  again, 
you  get  the  job  done  faster  and  better 
with  Graco  than  with  any  other  coat- 
ing system. 

If  speed  of  coating  application,  and 
material  savings  are  important  to  you, 
write  today  for  all  the  details  of  the 
Graco  Hydra-Spray  Process. 


FREE! 


Graco  Engineers  are  prepared  to  help  you  in  the  design  of  your 
paint  and  material  spray  assemblies.  Your  Graco  Railway  Rep- 
resentative will  be  glad  to  explain  the  many  benefits  of  this 
service.  Write  or  call  him  .  .  .  today! 


Graco 

GRAY  COMPANY,  INC. 

MINNEAPOLIS  13,  MINNESOTA 


RAILWAY  DEPARTMENT 

JOHN  P.  McADAMS,  Eastern  Sales  Representative 
2304  Wilson  Boulevard,  Arlington,  Virginia 


CHICAGO— (Broadview,  III.) 

R.  D.  Worley 

3030  South  25th  Ave. 

CLEVELAND 

M.  H.  Frank  Company,  Inc. 
1202  Marshall  Building 

HOUSTON 

Houston  Railroad  Supply  Co. 
1610  Dumble  Street 


PHILADELPHIA 

The  A.  R.  Kidd  Co. 

1036  Suburban  Station  Bldg. 

LOUISVILLE 

T.  F.  &  H.  H.  Going 
6308  Limewood  Circle 

ST.  LOUIS 

The  Carriers  Supply  Company 
818  Olive  Street 


NEW  YORK— Newark,  New  Jersey 

R.  A.  Corley 
744  Broad  Street 

SAN  FRANCISCO 

The  Barnes  Supply  Company 
Rm  504,  74  Montgomery  Street 

TWIN  CITIES— SI.  Paul,  Minn. 

The  Daniel  L.  O'Brien  Supply  Compare 
Endicott-On-Fourth  Bldg, 


WASHINGTON— Arlington,  Va. 

Southeastern  Railway  Supply,  Inc. 
2304  Wilson  Blvd. 


MONTREAL— Ontario,  Canada 

International  Equipment  Co.,  Ltd. 
360  St.  James  Street  West 


the 


JACKSON  UTILITY  TAMPER 


An  inexpensive,  easy-to-maintain  Multi-purpose  Tamping  Machine! 

Here's  a  tamper  involving  very  moderate  investment  that  is  gaining  tremendous 
favor  with  trackmen  everywhere.  It  can  be  used  to  great  advantage  for  jack- 
tamping,  spot-tamping  and  production  tamping  in  moderate  to  high  raises  ...  a 
truly  multi-purpose  machine  that  can  be  kept  working  virtually  all  the  time  .  .  .  and 
one  that  returns  one  of  the  biggest  dividends  of  any  investment  in  track  equipment. 

PERFECT  FOR  SPOT  TAMPING  in  all  ballasts  and 
all  conditions.  Power  options  are  available  to  suit  in- 
dividual requirements. 

AS  A  JACK  TAMPER-lts  fast,  accurate 
and  positive  in  reaching  and  holding  the  track 
raise  and  level.  It  easily  keeps  ahead  of  large 
production  tampers  and  is  adapted  to  existing 
surfacing  devices. 

AN  EXCELLENT  PRODUCTION  TAMPER 

—Produces  complete  consolidation  of  ballast 
in  out-of-face  raises  with  maximum  stability 
right  under  the  rail— the  load  bearing  zone. 


SIMPLE  CONTROLS 

Fast,  easy  to  coordinate. 


Manual-hydraulic. 


Let  us  furnish  you  with  complete 
information  concerning  this  excep- 
tionally   advantageous    machine. 


As  always,  direct  sales, 
leases  and  service  to  all 
U.S.  railroads. 


JACKSON 


VIBRATORS. — 

LUOINGTON.  MICHIGAN.  US» 


Machine  knocks  off,   ejects  ties,  lines  track  behind  plow  while  above  subgrade. 

Mannix  AUTO-TRACK 

liminates  15  to   20  Men 


PLOWING,  TIE  REPLACEMENT,  TRACK  ALINEMENT  are 
accomplished  faster  and  with  fewer  men  using  the  new 
Mannix   AUTO-TRACK   unit. 

Hydraulic  hammer  on  each  side  knocks  tie  down.  Con- 
veyor belt  ejects  tie  to   either  side.  ^ 


NOW,  lease  or  purchase  MANNIX  Auto-Track 
Equipment  to  operate  with  railroad  crew  for 
greatest  convenience  and  maximum  savings. 
Write  for  details.  Arrange  showing  of  operating 
films  with   no   obligation, 


^,™  'mm*  a 

to  •    ^arn   <* 
•   ♦  *  k_J 


Lining  head  controlled  by  levers 
near  rear  end  where  operator 
observes  alinement.  One  man 
replaces   lining   crew. 


MANNIX 

INTERNATIONAL 


Phone:   Liberty  5-0411 

Box  7485 

MINNEAPOLIS   22,  MINNESOTA 


at 

your 

service 


for 

all    types   of   cranes 

d  iesel   wreckers 

pile    drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608       S.       DEARBORN       ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.   COVELLI 

President 

Representative*    in    Principal    Cities 


with  America's  most  complete  line  of 
special  trackwork:  For  Railroads, 
Mines  and  Industries — A  complete 
line  of  frogs,  switches  and  crossings  • 
Trackwork  for  installation  in  paved 
areas  •  Manganese  steel  guard  rails 
•  Automatic  switch  stands  •  Samson 
switch  points  •  Snow-Blowers  •  Switch 
point  guards  •  Rail  and  flange  lubri- 
cators •  Tie  pads  •  Racor  studs  •  Dual 
spike  setters  •  Dual  spike  drivers  • 
Car  retarders. 

with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  manufacturing  facilities:  Coast 
to  coast  to  serve  your  needs. 


»►   RACOR  PLANTS: 

Buffalo  •  Chicago  Heights  •  Los  Angeles  • 
Niagara  Falls,  Ontario,  Canada  •    Pueblo 

•  Superior. 

•  RACOR  SALES  AND  ENGINEERING 

Chicago  •  Cleveland  •  Denver  •  Houston  • 
Los  Angeles  •  Louisville  •  New  York  • 
Philadelphia  •  Richmond  •  San  Francisco 
St.  Louis  ■  St.  Paul.  In  Canada:  Dominion 
Brake  Shoe  Co.,  Ltd.,  Montreal,  Quebec 

•  Niagara  Falls,  Ontario  •  Winnipeg, 
Manitoba  •   Vancouver,  B.  C. 

*  RACOR  RESEARCH: 

Chicago  •   Mahwah,  N.  J. 


with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  engineering  service:  This  lies  in 
making  available  to  our  customers 
Racor's  engineering  experience — 
practical  experience  from  years  of 
designing  and  manufacturing  .  .  . 
advanced  experience  solving  tomor- 
row's trackwork  problems  today  in 
Racor  research  laboratories. 

Why  not  let  us  help  you  with  your 
trackwork  problems? 


RAILROAD  PRODUCTS  DIVISION 

-<JS2>"  530  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  36,  New  York 


'[BrakeShoe, 


CHANNELOC 


...THE 


^M 


HARD-WORKING 


RAIL  ANCHOR 


■ 

a 

1 

S'^7  ■  , 

39   \  ••■.   - 

1 

» 

HP1' 

$ 

Channeloc's  construction  gives  it  the  brute  strength 
to  grip  the  rail  with  extra  force  —  with  plenty  of 
reserve  strength  for  reapplication.  And  the  way  we 
make  it  gives  it  the  temper,  the  spring,  to  fit  itself 
to  variations  in  the  edge  thickness  of  rail  bases  . . . 
no  shims.  This  is  the  anchor  we  introduced  just 
two  years  ago,  and  millions  have  already  been 
ordered  by  a  large  number  of  Class  I  roads. 


ml  RUE  I  EM  PER. 

RAILWAY  APPLIANCE    DIVISION 
1623   EUCLID  AVE..  CLEVELAND   15.   OHIO 


P.  O.   Box    10378 


LOgan  6-7922 


GREENHEART,   INC. 

1431    N.  E.  26th   Street 
FORT  LAUDERDALE,  FLORIDA 

President — John   L.  McEwen — Quarter  Century  Experience 

IMPORTERS: 


Greenheart  Piles,  Lumber,  Timbers  Long  Length 
MORA  EXCELSA— Lumber  and  Timbers 

Teak  and   other  Woods  from   Burma,  Siam,  Australia, 
Africa   and   South  America 


the  world's  largest 
selling  rail  anchor 


876R 


IMPROVED 
FAIR 

RAIL  ANCHOR 


POWER 

DESIGN  MEANS 

•  longer  service  life 
/   •  Greater  holding  power 
f^Faster,  easier  installation 

fHIP.*M.22: 

Division  of  Poor  and  Company 


CHICAGO.  NEW  YORK,  DENVER,  ST.  LOUIS,  BOSTON,  ST.  PAUL,  WASHINGTON.  SAN  FRANCISCO,  MEXICO  CITY 


mmmgm 


Assure  lower  maintenance  costs, 
better  performance  with... 


;:::::::;:::::::x:>-:::::  :■::-: ::::-:::  ::::.::-  'xVy::':':::  yXyMVy* 


TEXACO 

Railroad  Lubricants 

and  Systematic 

Engineering  Service 


TEXACO  inc. 

RAILWAY  SALES  DIVISION 

135  East  42nd  St.,  New  York  17.  N.  Y. 


NEW  YORK    •    CHICAGO    •    SAN  FRANCISCO    •    ST.   LOUIS    •    ST.   PAUL    .    ATLANTA 

t- 


Hubbard  Super  Service  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Super  Steel  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Track  Tools 

Hubbard  Tool  Division 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

New  York  Pittsburgh  Chicago 


% 


Unit  Rail  Anchor 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  DIVISION 


UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 
NEW  YORK  PITTSBURGH  CHICAGO 


FIBRE  REPAIR  PARTS 

for 
INSULATED  JOINTS 


The   Effectiveness  of  the  Joint 

Is  Dependent  Upon  the  Quality, 

Workmanship   and   Fit  of   Every   Part. 


Rail  Joint  Company 

Division   of  Poor  &  Company,  (Inc.) 
New  York  7,   N.  Y. 


Model  N  U  Tie  Cutter 


HERE  IS  THE  WINNING  TEAM 

The  Woolery  NU  Tie  Cutter  and  the  Woolery  Tie-end  Remover  preserve  the  line  and  surface 
of  the  track  and  at  the  same  time  reduce  the  cost  of  tie  renewals.  Ties  can  be  removed 
without  trenching,  jacking  up  track  or  adzing  tops  of  rail-cut  ties.  With  this  team  you  simply 
cut  both  ends  of  tie,  pry  out  center  piece,  insert  in  its  place  the  tie-end  remover  and  out 
go  the  tie  ends  pushed  by  the  double  acting,  double  ended  hydraulic  cylinder  of  the  Tie- 
end  remover. 


FOR   HIGHEST  EFFICIENCY  USE  TWO  TIE   CUTTERS  WITH   ONE  TIE-END   REMOVER 


WOOLERY  MACHINE  COMPANY 

MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN 


OCV  WOODINGS-VERONA  TOOL  WORKS 

\f  Pioneer  Manufacturers 

oi 
HIGH  GRADE  TRACK  TOOLS 

and 
SPRING  WASHERS  FOR  TRACK 

Since  1873 

VERONA.  PA.  CHICAGO.  ILL. 


w 

WOODINGS  FORGE  6c  TOOL  COMPANY 

Makers 

oi 

WOODINGS  RAIL  ANCHORS 

VERONA.  PA. 

CHICAGO. 

ELL. 

Notes  on 

Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures 
from  the  School  of  Experience 

By  J.  A.   Given 

A  series  of  notes,  comments,  short-cut  methods  and  "tricks  of  the 
trade"  written  by  a  railroad  location  engineer  of  many  years  of 
practical   experience  for  the   benefit  of  young   engineers. 

Price  $0.50 

AMERICAN   RAILWAY  ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 

59   East  Van   Buren  Street 

Chicago  5,  III. 


VEGETATION  CONTROL 

CHEMICALS 


READE  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  INC. 

Jersey  City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas 
City — Birmingham — Stockton 

SERVING  RAILROADS   OF  AMERICA  FOR 
MORE   THAN   FORTY   YEARS 


W 

E 

E 
D 

A 
N 
D 

B 

R 

u 

S 
H 

C 
O 
N 
T 
R 
O 
L 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  are  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Cleaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  well 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rai 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand. 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  jot 
better  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  for  —  and  more 


(yfoz?~/z&&  tfie  ^acfomds  yn^~naae  used;  as. 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


COT' 

IIII'.IHl 


Clark  Sir 
East  Syracusf 


THE  TRASCO 
AUTONOMIC  CAR  RETARDER 

CLAMPS  IN  PLACE 
ANYWHERE  IN  TRACK 

SIMPLE  —  EFFECTIVE  —  INEXPENSIVE 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  CO. 

GENERAL    MOTORS    BLDG. 
NEW  YORK   19,  N.  Y. 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 

Vol.  64,  No.  574  November  1962 


REPORTS  OF  COMMITTEES 

1 6 — Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation 111 

9 — Highways    131 

1 3 — Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services 139 

1 4 — Yards  and   Terminals 159 

20 — Contract  Forms 187 

25 — Waterways  and  Harbors 197 

6 — Buildings    213 


The  reports  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  will  be  presented  to  the  1963  Busi- 
ness Meeting  of  the  Association  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  March 
15-16.  Comments  and  discussion  with  respect  to  any  of  the  reports  are  solicited, 
and  should  be  addressed  to  the  chairman  of  the  committee  involved,  in  writing 
in  advance  of  the  Meeting,  or  from  the  floor  during  the  Meeting. 


Copyright    1962,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    Association 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 
1962-1963 

President 
C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Vice  Presidents 
L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines, 

Houston  1,  Tex. 
T.  F.  Burris,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 

Past  Presidents 

E.  J.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  Chicago  6. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 

Directors 

C.  J.  Henry,  Chief  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

J.  M.  Trissal,  Vice  President  and  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

W.  B.  Throckmorton,  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chi- 
cago 5. 

J.  A.  Bunjer,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  Omaha  2,  Nebr. 

J.  H.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway,  Springfield  2,  Mo. 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Rail- 
way, Amarillo,  Tex. 

W.  H.  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,  Chicago  6. 

F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  L.  Young,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Defendorf,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 
Denver  17,  Colo. 

Treasurer 
A.  B.  Hh-lman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 
Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

Executive  Secretary 
Neal  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  111. 

Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,   Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November    and    December;    Bi-Monthly,    June- July,    and   September-October,   at    2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

59  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  S,  111. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  for  in  Section   1103,  Act  of  October  3,   1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,  1918. 

Subscription  $10  per  annum. 


Report    of    Committee    16 — Economics    of    Railway 
Location   and   Operation 


C.  L.  Towle,  Chairman 

T.    D.    WoFFOBD,    JB., 

Vice  Chairman 
C.  W.  Sooby,  Secretary 
A.  S.  Lang 
J.  E.  Inman 
L.  E.  Ward 
I".  Wascoe 


W.  J.  Dixon 

H.    L.    WOLDBIDGE 

A.  L.  Sams 
Q.  K.  Baker 

J.  \Y.  Barriger 

G.  A.  Bennewitz,  Jr. 

C.  H.  Blackman  (E) 
J.  W.  Bolstad 

I.  C.  Brewer 

D.  E.  Brunn 
H.  S.  Bull 

B.  ClIAPPELL 

J.  L.  Charles 

H.  B.  Ciiristiaxson,  Jr. 

P.  J.  Claffey 

W.    P.    COLITON 

L.  P.  Diamond 
G.  B.  Dutton,  Jr. 
A.  J.  Gellman 
S.  B.  Gill 
R.  L.  Gray 

F.  E.  Gunning 
R.  M.  Hasdwicke 

G.  E.  Hartsoe 
L.  \Y.  Haydon 
H.  C.  Hutson 


C.  A.  James 
T.  D.  Kern 

T.  J.  Lamphier 
R.  J.  Lane 
R.  F.  Lark 
H.  A.  Lim) 
J.  C.  Martin 
Raymond  McCann 
M.  B.   Miller 
R.   L.  Milner 
T.  C.  Nordquist 
F.  N.  Nye 
\V.   E.  Quinn 
J.  S.   Reed 
F.  L.  Rees 

F.  J.  Richter 

V.    J.    ROGGEVKEN 

G.  RUGGE 

H.    F.    SCHRYVER     (E) 

T.  M.  Scott 
L.  K.  Sillcox 
G.  S.  Sowers 
J.  J.  Stark,  Jr. 

D.  S.  Sundel 
J.  E.  Teal  (E) 
K.  A.  Werden 

Committer 


i  E  i  Members  Emeritus. 


Those    whose    names   are    set    in    bold-face    type   constitute    the    Engineering    Division,     \\K.    Com- 
mittee 16. 

To  the  American   Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

No  report  at  this  time.  Committee  is  continuing  its  work  on  revision  "i 
Manual  material,  with   the  aim   of  completing   it    in    1" 

2.  Study  of  methods  of  analyzing  the  economics  oi  railwaj   engineering  proj 
ects  designed  primarily  to  improve  the  quality  oi  transportation  service 
This  new    subjeel    i-   being  progressed   through  assignment   of  its  various 
phases  to  the  committee  membership. 

v  Determination  of  maintenance  oi  way  expense  variation  with  various  traffi< 
volumes  and  effed  of  using  such  variations,  in  terms  ol  equated  milt 
or  other  derived  factors,  for  allocation  ni  available  funds  to  maintenance 
of  way,  collaborating  with  Committees  n  and 

Progress   report,   submitted   a-  information    p-ice  113 


in 


112  Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

4.  Potential  applications  of  electronic  computers  to  railway  engineering  prob- 
lems in  research,  design,  inventory,  etc.,  collaborating  with  Committees 
11  and  30,  and  informally  with  the  Railway  Systems  and  Management 
Association. 

Advance  reports  on  the  use  of  electronic  computers  in  operations  research 
on  the  Canadian  National  Railways  were  published  in  Bulletin  573,  Sep- 
tember-October 1962. 

5.  Methods  of  reducing  time  of  freight  cars  between  loading  and  unloading 
points,  collaborating  with  Car  Service  Division,  AAR,  Communication  and 
Signal  Section,  AAR,  Operating-Transportation  Division,  AAR,  and 
American   Association   of  Railroad  Superintendents. 

As  a  result  of  the  recommendation  by  the  AAR  to  discontinue  this  subject, 
progress  is  temporarily  suspended  awaiting  determination  of  the  Board 
Committee  on   Assignments  as  to  future  handling  of  the   assignment. 

6.  Features  of  economic  and  engineering  interest  in  the  study,  design,  con- 
struction and  operation  of  new  railway  line  projects,  or  major  line  reloca- 
tions, proposed,  in  progress  or  recently  completed. 

Photogrammetry  as   Applied   to   Railway  Location    page  116 

Keystone  Dam   Relocation— St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway    page  119 

Abra-Skull  Valley  Relocation  in  Arizona — Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe 
Railway     page  122 

8.  Innovations  in    railway   operations. 

No  report  at  this  time.  Committee  is  continuing  preparation  of  report 
covering  various  aspects  of  containerization. 

11.  Review  of  developments  in  new  methods  and  modes  of  transport. 

No  report  at  this  time.  Committee  is  continuing  study  and  data  collection 
for  possible  future  reports  on  pipeline  operation  and  air-flow  vehicles. 

The  Committee  on  Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation, 

C.  L.  Towle,  Chairman. 

AREA  Bulletin  574,  November  1962. 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 113 

Report  on  Assignment   3 

Determination  of  Maintenance  of  Way  Expense  Variation 

With  Various  Traffic  Volumes  and  Effect  of  Using 

Such  Variations,  In  Terms  of  Equated  Mileage 

or  Other  Derived  Factors,  For  Allocation 

of  Available  Funds  To  Maintenance 

of  Way 

Collaborating   With  Committee   11   and   22 

L.  E.  Ward  (chairman,  subcommittee),  Q.  K.  Baker,  J.  W.  Bolstad,  I.  C.  Brewer,  D.  E. 
Brunn,  H.  S.  Bull,  B.  Chappell,  H.  B.  Christianson,  Jr.,  P.  J.  Claffev,  L.  P.  Dia- 
mond, R.  L.  Grav.  G.  E.  Hartsoe,  H.  A.  Lind,  R.  L.  Milner,  T.  C.  Nordquist,  W.  E. 
Quinn,  C.  W.  Sooby,  J.  J.  Stark,  Jr.,  C.  L.  Towle,  F.  Wasco,  K.  A.  Werden. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  as  information.  The  por- 
tion of  maintenance  of  way  and  structures  expenses  affected  by  use,  or  variable  with 
traffic,  has  been  a  controversial  and  much  discussed  subject.  This  committee  was  given 
the  task  of  developing  a  formula  which  would  allow  measurement  of  the  maintenance 
of  way  and  structures  costs  affected  by  use.  A  progress  report  was  presented  as  infor- 
mation  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  58,   1957. 

Any  track  which  is  maintained  in  usable  condition  incurs  some  costs  even  if  there 
is  no  traffic  on  the  track.  Then  there  are  costs  which  are  variable  with  the  amount  of 
traffic.  There  are  factors  other  than  traffic  which  affect  total  maintenance  of  way  and 
structures  cost  variation    Some  of  these  are: 

.1.  GEOGRAPHICAL-PHYSICAL 

1.  Temperature  range  and  variation. 

2.  Rainfall — amount  and  intensity. 

3.  Snowfall — duration,  amount,  and  nature. 

4.  Storms — duration,  intensity,  and  nature. 

5.  Areal   nature — metropolitan,   urban,   rural. 

6.  Drainage — size,  frequency,  flow,  flooding. 

7.  Vegetation — type,  rate  of  growth,  fire  hazard. 

8.  Character  of  adjacent  area — ground  cover,  topography. 

9.  Accessibility  of  railroad. 

10.  Animal  and  insect  conditions. 

B.  CONSTRUCTIONAL 

1.  Grade — amount  and  frequency, 

2.  Curvature — amount  and  frequency. 

3.  Subgrade  conditions. 

4.  Right-of-way  nature — cut,  fill,  ditched. 

5.  Bridges  and  culverts — design,  type,  special  conditions. 

6.  Dikes,  cribbing,  retaining  walls 

7.  Ballast — type  and  nature 

8.  Track — type  and  nature. 

9.  Tunnels,   elevated    structures,    drawbridges — type   and    nature 
10.  Warvea  and  docks — type  and  nature. 

li.  Communication  system    type  and  nature 


114 Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

12.  Crossings,  railroad  and   highway — frequency,   type  and  traffic. 

13.  Station,  yard  and  facility — occurrence  and  nature. 

14.  Adequacy  and  nature  of  previous  construction  and  maintenance. 

15.  Protectional  facilities  against  trespassing  and  occupation. 

16.  Power  systems  and  supply — type  and  nature. 

17.  Track  arrangement — number  and  design. 

C.  POLITICAL 

1.  Activity  and  requirements  of  regulatory  bodies. 

2.  Activity    and    nature    of    areal    government    operations — sanitary    requirements, 
drainage  requirements,  sidewalks,  lighting,  fences,  etc. 

3.  Activity  and  relations  with  employee  organizations. 

4.  Restrictions  on  accessory  income. 

5.  Local  labor  costs,  fringe  benefits,  and  living  and  working  requirements. 

D.  OPERATIONAL 

1.  Type  and  nature  of  train  operation  and  control. 

2.  Protective   train-track   devices — extent   and   nature. 

3.  Nature  of  commodities  transported. 

4.  Nature  of  locomotive  power  and  power  systems. 

5.  Accident  hazard  ratio  of  railroad. 

6.  Speed  of  trains. 

7.  Distance  from  source  of  material  supply. 

8.  Joint   facilities — type,   nature    and   agreement  provisions. 

9.  Materials  employed — type  and  nature. 

10.  Availability  of  local  labor  and  methods  of  employment. 

E.  MANAGERIAL 

1.  Type  of  organization   and  methods  of  budget  control. 

2.  Accounting  policies   and  practices — R&E,   etc. 

3.  Policies  on  industrial   track   construction   and   maintenance. 

4.  Policies  on  degree  and  nature  of  maintenance. 

5.  Degree  and  effectiveness  of  supervisory  control. 

6.  Overtime  policies  in  relation  to  maintenance  and  operations. 

7.  Maintenance  methods  and  equipment  policy. 

8.  Stores  practices  and  policies — inventory,  protection,  etc. 

9.  Policies  on  retirement  of  track  and  structures. 

Attempts  to  determine  relative  importance  and  to  assign  significant  values  to  such 
factors  has  not  been  entirely  successful  to  date,  as  adequate  cost  information  has  not 
been  generally  available.  One  large  railroad  has  been  able  to  utilize  its  cost  information 
to  derive  a  formula  for  use  in  estimating  variation  of  track  expense  with  increased  or 
decreased  traffic.  The  formula  has  been  checked  against  various  traffic  densities  over  a 
period  of  several  years.  This  formula  is: 

A  =  F  (0.5+  D04X) 

Where:   A  =  Amount  of  annual  track  maintenance  cost  per  mile  of  track. 

F  =  Constant  based  on  labor  costs,  productivity,   and  material  prices. 
D  =  Traffic  density  in  millions  of  gross  tons  per  year. 

Several  observations  should  be  made  concerning  application  of  the  formula  at  this 
time. 


Economics    of    Railway    Loca  tion    and    Operation 


115 


1.  The   formula   reflects  track  maintenance  costs  only. 

2.  Further  investigation  is  desirable  in  areas  of  high-volume  single-tracks  and  on 
lines  carrying  an  extremely  high  ratio  of  passenger  traffic.  Experience  thus  far 
indicates  that  single-track  labor  costs  are  relatively  the  same  as  multiple-track 
labor  costs  up  to  approximately  12  M.G.T.,  then  labor  costs  for  single  track 
increase  over  multiple-track  at  the  rate  of  approximately  2.5  percent  per 
M.G.T. 

3.  Analysis  thus  far  does  not  indicate  that  such  factors  as  local  conditions  and 
type  of  traffic  have  an  extreme  effect  on  track  costs. 

4.  The  0.5  in  the  formula  which  represents  the  cost  of  keeping  the  track  in  service 
for  use  even  if  no  trains  are  operated  might  be  reduced  to  0.4  or  0J,  but  will 
have  very  little  effect  on  the  usefulness  of  the  curve  produced  for  determining 
track   cost  variation  with  various  traffic  volumes. 

5.  The  constant  F  should  be  determined  for  use  on  a  particular  line  for  a  given 
period.  In  the  absence  of  information  to  derive  the  value,  $1100  could  be 
substituted. 

Thus  the  total  annual  track  maintenance  cost  for  any  portion  of  a  railroad 
would  be: 

C  —  $1100  [2Mi  (0.5  +  Z?!0436)  +  Mi  (0.5  +  Dt**)  +  etc.] 

Where:   C  =  Total  track  maintenance  cost. 

M  =  Miles  of  track  of  each  traffic  density. 
D  =  Annual  millions  of  gross  tons  of  traffic. 

The  formula  should  be  checked  against  data  for  railroads  operating  under  different 
physical  conditions,  i.e.,  geographical,  in  a  continued  effort  to  determine  significant 
causes  for  variation.  Analysis  must  also  include  communication  and  signals  and  struc- 
tures costs. 


ft  4,000 


id 

I 

1- 

l/> 

Z 

0 

i 

o 

* 

< 

-> 

4. 

a. 

2 

r- 

Z 

< 

a. 

Ui 

a 

ft  3,000 


ft  2,000 


ft  1,000 


^ 

>J££ 

o.*3S  } 

h 

2        4        6        8         io        12 

TRAFFIC      DENSITY 


MILLION      GROSS    ToViS      AMKHJ/SLLY 


116  Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Features  of  Economic  and  Engineering  Interest  in  the 
Study,  Design,  Construction  and  Operation  of  New 
Railway  Line  Projects,  or  Major  Line  Reloca- 
tions, in  Progress  or  Recently  Completed 

H.  L.  Woldridge  (chairman,  subcommittee).  J.  L.  Charles,  F.  E.  Gunning,  L.  W.  Hay- 
don,  H.  C.  Hutson,  J.  E.  Inman,  H.  A.  Lind,  J.  C.  Martin,  F.  N.  Nye,  F.  L.  Rees, 
T.  M.  Scott,  G.  S.  Sowers. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  three  monographs  pertaining  to  Assign- 
ment 6,  as  follows:  "Photogrammetry  as  Applied  to  Railway  Location",  by  J.  L. 
Charles;  "Keystone  Dam  Relocation — St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway",  by  H.  L. 
VVoldridge;  and  "Abra-Skull  Valley  Relocation  in  Arizona — Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe 
Railway",  by  George  Rugge. 

Photogrammetry  as  Applied  to  Railway  Location 

By   J.  L.  CHARLES,  P.E. 

Photogrammetry  and  related  practices  are  invaluable  aids  to  reconnaissance  and 
location  surveys,  especially  through  remote  or  rugged,  undeveloped  regions  where  ground 
travel  is  difficult.  This  has  been  proven  under  extremely  different  conditions— in  North- 
ern Canada  and  in  tropical  West  Africa. 

Railway  location  is  a  specialized  field.  The  engineer  should  have  natural  aptitude 
for  this  "art"  plus  training  and  experience  obtained  on  the  ground  and  in  observing 
from  aircraft.  He  should  realize  that  ground  checking  of  controlling  features — in  co- 
ordination with  aerial  observation  and  office  studies  of  photographs  and  maps — is 
essential. 

Final  results,  including  economy,  are  dependent  upon  thorough  reconnaissance — 
the  basic  phase  of  location — to  keep  control  surveys  and  mapping  to  a  minimum;  but, 
at  the  same  time  to  ensure  that  all  practicable  possibilities  are  studied. 

A  major  example  of  photogrammetric  worth  was  a  study  undertaken  during  the 
summer  of  1959  by  the  Canadian  National  Railways.  It  was  desired  that  a  route  be 
established  between  the  existing  railways  in  northern  British  Columbia  and  the  northern 
boundary  of  this  province,  at  a  point  from  whence  it  could  be  extended  on  through 
Yukon  Territory  and  Alaska,  to  the  Alaska  Railway.  The  length  of  the  route  was 
estimated  to  be  700  miles. 

General  reconnaissance  studies  were  made  from  a  light  aircraft,  and  a  total  of 
3200  route  miles  were  flown  in  making  the  studies.  Several  possibilities  were  determined. 

The  reconnaissance  indicated  that  the  point  of  commencement  should  be  from  the 
Pacific  Great  Eastern  Railway,  near  Prince  George,  to  a  terminus  on  the  boundary  of 
Yukon  Territory,  southeast  of  Whitehorse.  The  actual  distance  was  established  as  697 
miles,  through  rugged  and,  in  some  parts,  precipitous  mountain  terrain — virgin  country, 
unspoiled  by  man. 

Thorough  reconnaissance  was  carried  out,  including  alternative  intermediate  routes, 
for  an  aggregate  of  1100  miles.  One  helicopter  was  operated,  supported  by  one  fixed- 
wing  craft  to  supply  fuel  and  rations  and  to  move  camp.  Landings  were  made  to  ex- 
amine all  controlling  features — summits,  river  crossings,  areas  subject  to  land  and  snow 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 117 

slides    and   swamps — to    establish    the    most    practical    route.    This    was   achieved    within 
three   weeks. 

A  strip,  in  general  \l/>  miles  wide,  was  delineated  to  be  photographed  from  an 
elevation  of  12,000  ft  above  the  average  ground.  Two  small  ground  parties,  operating 
tellurometers,  theodolites  and  barometers  with  support  of  aircraft,  were  then  put  into 
the  field  to  establish  horizonal  and  vertical  control  points.  As  the  photographs  were 
received  progressively,  the  reconnaissance  engineer  examined  them  in  stereo  pairs  and 
delineated  a  strip,  varying  in  width  from  1000  ft  to  one  mile,  to  be  mapped  by  pho- 
togrammetry,  showing  all  physical  features  and  contours.  This  was  done  quickly  and 
accurately. 

Following  delivery  of  the  first  strip  maps,  scale  1  in  to  400  ft,  showing  contours 
with  a  10-ft  vertical  interval,  the  reconnaissance  engineer  projected  the  location  center 
line.  Assistants  plotted  the  relative  profile  and  the  engineer  then  set  the  grade  line. 
Revisions  were  made  where  advisable.  In  this  manner  an  average  of  SO  miles  of  pro- 
posed location  were  projected  per  day,  ready  to  be  staked  on  the  ground  when  required 
in  preparation  for  the  first  item  of  construction — clearing  right-of-way. 

Based  on  maps  and  profiles  of  the  projected  locations,  associate  teams  prepared 
preliminary  estimates  of  quantities — clearing,  grading,  culverts,  bridges,  track,  etc. — for 
construction  and  costs.  A  general  route  map,  with  condensed  profile,  and  sketches  of 
proposed  major  bridge  sites  and  general  structures  layout  were  drawn  to  accompany  a 
written  report. 

This  entire  survey,  including  the  field  and  office  work  required  to  project  and  esti- 
mate costs  for  697  miles  of  railway,  was  accomplished  within  6  months.  This  is  a  note- 
worthy accomplishment,  considering  that  the  relatively  small  force  of  18  men  were 
confronted  with  mountainous  terrain  and  no  surface  access  other  than  by  packhorse 
and  cance.  The  projected  line  could  then  be  staked  on  the  ground  when  required  for 
construction.  Except  for  a  short  distance  around  the  Grand  Canyon  of  the  Stikine 
maximum   rate   of  gradient   secured   was    1.00  percent   compensated. 

Also  during  1959,  Canadian  engineers  employed  photogrammetry  to  establish  a 
location  for  a  railway  in  Liberia,  West  Africa.  This  was  under  very  different  climatic 
conditions;  52  miles  through  tropical  rain  forests,  between  Bomi  Hills  and  Mano  River, 
the  boundary  of  Sierra  Leone,  in  connection  with  the  development  of  an  iron  mine 
Reconnaissance  was  carried  out  by  observation  from  a  light  fixed-wing  aircraM  and 
making  an   appreciation   on   the  ground.   Xo   helicopter  was  available 

Beyond  Bomi  Hills  the  only  development   was   native  villages   with   small   adjacent 
cleared  areas   for  production  of  cassava  and  native  rice.  Communicati<  n   between   Hum 
Pillages   was  by    walking  trails.   A    narrow   landing  Strip  had   been   hewn    (  ul    in   the  den 
foresl   ul   trees  up  to  150  ft  high,  near  the  prospective  iron  mine  at   Mano  River. 

When  on  the  ground,  vision  was  restricted  to  a  radius  <>|  ;i  lew  feet,  anil  from  a 
low    flying   aircraft    little  could    lie   observed   other  than   the  dense   foliage  at    the  tree   top  . 

excepting  the  villages  which  were  5  to  io  miles  apart  -even  some  important  river-  were 
difficult  to  spot. 

The  topography  encountered  was  rough,  Five  main  divide-  with  considerable  rise 
and   fall   had   to   be   surmounted.    It    was   decided    to   endeavor   to   secure  a    maximum    rate 

of  gradient  0.80  percent,  compensated,  tor  loaded  ore  trains  and  i.SO  percent  tor  erapt) 
ore  train- 
After  deciding  on  the  route  in  be  surveyed,  a  -trip  averaging  1 '  .■  miles  wide-  was 
delineated  on  a  general  map    \n  aerial  camera  had  io  be  shipped  from  New   York  by 

air  express,  and  on  arrival  .it    Monrovia   it   was  mounted  in  a   small  aircraft.    The  required 


118  Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

strip  was  successfully  photographed  at  a  scale  of  1  in  to  1000  ft;  however,  it  was  found 
that   best   results  were  obtained   by   use  of  infra-red   film   because   of  the  dense   foliage. 

The  nucleous  of  a  ground  survey  party  then  arrived  from  Canada  to  establish  the 
necessary  horizontal  and  vertical  control  points  required  for  photogrammetric  plotting. 
This  survey  consisted  of  a  traverse  along  walking-trails  between  villages  and  setting  con- 
trol points  where  visible  in  the  respective  photographs.  After  these  surveys  were  com- 
menced, it  was  not  necessary  for  the  two  senior  engineers  to  remain  in  Liberia.  The 
photographic  films  to  be  processed  and  survey  notes  to  establish  coordinates  and  eleva- 
tions of  ground  control  stations  were  shipped  to  Canada.  After  study  of  photographs, 
strips  to  be  mapped  were  delineated;  plotting  was  then  carried  out  by  usual  photogram- 
metric  methods  and  followed  by  projection  of  center-line  location  and  relative  profile. 

Although  it  would  be  impractical  to  expect  photogrammetric  contour  maps  of  this 
rugged  and  broken  territory,  with  its  dense  forests  and  many  local  hills,  to  be  highly 
accurate,  the  results  were  found  to  be  surprisingly  good  when  the  projected  location  was 
staked  on  the  ground.  These  topographic  maps  were  considerably  more  accurate  than 
could  have  been  obtained  by  normal  ground  survey  methods,  under  the  conditions 
encountered,  excepting  with  expenditure  of  many  months  of  painstaking  work,  at  much 
higher  cost. 

This  location  survey  in  Liberia  was  immediately  followed  by  construction  and  the 
railway  is  now  in  operation. 

The  writer  is  not  at  liberty  to  disclose  costs  on  the  above  projects,  but,  during 
August  and  September  1960,  a  preliminary  location  survey — reconnaissance,  establishing 
ground  controls,  photogrammetry,  projection,  photo  interpretation  and  estimate  of  costs 
— was  carried  out  through  undeveloped  territory  in  northern  Canada,  a  distance  of 
approximately   64   miles;   it  presents  a  good  example  of  costs  involved: 

Reconnaissance  area  2200  square  miles,  charter  of  helicopter — $105  per  hr  . .  .$  2,236.69 
Aerial  photography,  strip   \y2   miles  wide,  $20  per  mile  for  approximately   64 

miles      1,257.74 

Set  ground  controls,  horizontal  and  vertical,  party  of  8  men  and  cook,  supplies 

and   transportation    11,901.04 

Photogrammetry— 26,178  acres  at  $0,299  per  acre  7,821.98 

Photo   interpretation — specialist's  fee    772.50 

Projection,  estimating  and  general  directive    6,095.75 

$30,085.70 
Average  cost  per  mile   $      470.00 

It  should  be  noted  that  this  project  was  carried  out  under  favorable  conditions, 
as  there  is  an  access  road  from  the  existing  railhead  to  the  mine  property  to  be  served, 
and  there  are  many  large  lakes  along  the  route,  so  very  little  line  had  to  be  cut  to 
establish  ground  control  stations. 

The  cost  to  carry  out  this  job,  64  miles,  without  photogrammetry,  would  have 
been  considerably  higher. 

In  December  1960,  surveys  were  commenced  for  a  proposed  railway  from  near 
Peace  River,  Alberta,  to  Hay  River,  North  West  Territories,  a  distance  of  377  miles,  and 
from  Hay  River  to  Pine  Point,  North  West  Territories,  53  miles — total  430  miles.  By 
employing  the  same  methods,  this  survey  was  completed  within  10  months. 

Although  temperatures  may  drop  to  50  deg  below  zero,  winter  is  a  favorable  season 
for  survey  work  in  northern  Canada,  where  there  are  extensive  areas  of  muskeg  which 
would  be  difficult  to  traverse  in  summer;  also,  the  muskegs  produce  hordes  of  mosqui- 
toes and  other  pests,  which  tend  to  retard  progress  during  the  summer  season. 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation  119 

During  winter,  a  line  was  cut  to  establish  ground  control  stations  by  the  operation 
ul  two  bulldozers.  Six  men — transitman,  head  chainman,  rear  chainman,  stakeman,  level- 
man  and  rodman — following  the  two  dozers,  could  run  4  to  5  miles  per  day.  This  is 
very  efficient  practice  where  trees  are  not  over  18  in.  in  diameter  and  there  is  not  too 
much  rugged  rock  formation  to  retard  the  tractors. 

Current  prices  in  Canada  for  aerial  photography  for  a  strip  2  miles  wide — scale  ol 
photos  1  in  equals  1200  ft,  format  9  in  by  9  in — range  from  $14  to  $25  per  line  mile. 
Three  sets  of  contact   prints  and  photo  index  arc  included  in  this  price. 

Map  plotting,  no  field  work  included,  original  pencil  manuscript  on  drafting  film, 
scale  1  in  to  200  ft  or  400  ft  showing  contours  on  5-ft  vertical  intervals  and  all  physical 
features  visible  on  respective  photos,  ranges  from  25  cents  to  50  cents  per  acre,  in  rela- 
tion to  the  topography  and  other  physical  features  to  be  shown,  providing  all  necessary 
horizontal  and  vertical  controls  are  supplied.  For  a  strip  2000  ft  wide,  cost  would  vary 
from  $60.50  to  $121.00  per  mile. 

Photo  analysis  and  interpretation  of  land  forms  and  soils  is  related  to  photogram- 
metry.  It  is  advisable  to  engage  a  specialist  in  this  field  to  indicate  classes  of  soils  (in- 
cluding gravel  for  ballast),  possible  trouble  areas  (where  land,  rock  and  snow  slides  may 
occur),  the  depth  of  muskegs  and  swamps,  and  the  depth  of  overburden  above  solid  rock. 

To  date,  photogrammetry  has  not  been  generally  accepted  to  facilitate  measure- 
ment of  grading  quantities.  The  writer  is  of  the  opinion  that  time  and  expenditure  could 
be  reduced  by  this  practice,  together  with  calculation  by  electronic  computers,  particu- 
larly in  measurement  of  solid-rock  excavation  in  precipituous  mountain  regions.  This 
should  reduce  the  possibility  of  human  errors  and  increase  the  accuracy  of  final  results. 


Keystone  Dam  Relocation — St.  Louis-San  Francisco 

Railway 

By  H.  L.  WOLDRIDGE 
Assistant   Chief    Engineer,    St.    Louis-San   Francisco    Railway 

Construction  of  the  Keystone  dam  and  reservoir  on  the  Arkansas  River  about  13 
miles  upstream  from  Tulsa,  Okla.,  involved  relocating  16.64  miles  of  St.  Louis-San  Fran- 
cisco  Railway  main  track  between  Tulsa  and  Enid,  Okla.  The  relocation  was  required  to 
gain  approximately  100  ft  in  elevation  to  permit  operation  above  the  flood-control  pool 
elevation  as  determined  by  the  United  States  Army  Corps  of  Engineers.  Two  stations 
were  involved  in  this  relocation,  one  (Mannford,  Okla.)  being  relocated  and  tin- 
other  abandoned.  The  existing  sidings  were  considered,  as  well  as  the  present  require- 
ments for  sidings,  and  it  was  agreed  to  provide  one  6100-fl  siding  and  one  361-fl  In  use 
track  for  the  relocated  station  of  Mannford.  The  old  line  was  single  track,  and  was 
operated  under  time  card,  and  train  orders.  The  new  line  i-  also  single  track  and  has  the 
same  type  of  operation. 

The  Corps  of  Engineers  negotiated  a  contract  with  the  Frisco  <>n  this  project  pro 
viding  for  the  railway  to  design  the  bridges,  furnish  l>a~i<  design  criteria,  retire  the  orig 
inal  track,  make  necessary  connections  at  each  end.  construe)  communication  lines  and 
other  facilities,  furnish  rail  and  the  fastenings  and  provide  a  resident  engineer.  The  aline 
ment  survey  was  made  by  a  consulting  engineering  firm  under  contract  to  the  Corps  ol 
Engineers  Final  plans  wen-  approved  by  the  chief  engineer  of  the  Frisco  after  a  field 
inspection  was  made  with  representatives  ol   the  railway,  the  Corps  of  Engineers,  and 


120 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 


TERLTON 


KEY3T0ME. 

DAM 


51 


10       12 

u  l  1 1 1 1 

SCALE  IN  MILES 


SKETCH  MAP 

SHOWING  RELOCATED   LINE   IN 

KEYSTONE    RESERVOIR    AREA 
APRIL  1962 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 12_1 

the  consulting  engineers.  The  right-of-way  was  acquired  by  the  Corp.-  of  Engineers,  the 
right-of-way  of  the  original  line  being  exchanged  for  the  right-of-way  of  the  new  line. 

Six  contracts  were  awarded  on  the  project,  four  for  grading,  one  for  bridge  con- 
struction, and  one  for  track  construction.  Utility  lines  were  relocated  prior  to  grading 
operations,  and  contracts  were  prepared  on  individual  crossings  to  comply  with  railroad 
specifications. 

The  new  track  length  of  15.56  miles  required  5.5  million  yards  of  excavation.  Maxi- 
mum curvature  is  2  deg  and  maximum  grade,  1  percent.  The  grade  is  compensated  at 
the  rate  of  0.04  percent  per  degree  of  curve  angle.  In  comparison  with  the  orginal  track, 
the  maximum  curvature  is  reduced.  The  new  line  has  the  same  maximum  grade  as  the 
old.  but  has  a  slightly  longer  ruling  grade. 

Slopes  of  2:1  were  used  for  fills  not  exceeding  heights  of  35  ft,  and  slopes  of  2J^:1 
were  used  for  fills  in  excess  of  35  ft.  Roadbed  width  of  24  ft  was  used  with  an  increase 
of  1   ft  in  width  for  each  additional   15   ft  of  height. 

Back  slopes  in  excavated  sections  were  set  at  Yi\\  for  rock  and  2:1  for  all  other 
material.  Berms  12  ft  wide  were  used  on  top  of  rock  strata  with  maximum  of  25  ft 
vertically  between  berms.  The  roadbed  width  was  24  ft,  plus  7  ft  for  flat-bottom  track 
ditches  on  each  side.  Ditch  checks  were  placed  at  intervals  of  200  ft  divided  by  the  ditch 
slope   in  percent. 

To  provide  a  stable  roadbed,  select  material  was  used  for  the  upper  2  ft  of  roadbed 
in  excavated  sections,  and  3  ft  of  material  was  used  in  the  embankment  sections.  The 
select  material  was  specified  to  have  a  liquid  limit  of  less  than  30  and  a  plasticity  index 
not  exceeding  10.  Sand  rock  was  available  for  use  as  the  select  material,  and  sheeps 
foot-roller  compaction  eliminated  any  large-size  rock  in  the  material.  Six  inches  of 
unwashed  fine  chatt  was  used  for  sub-ballast  throughout  the  roadbed  area,  providing 
gradation  separation  between  the  fine  select  material  and  the  more  coarse  ballast.  The 
sub-ballast  was  rolled  by  rubber-tired  pneumatic  rollers,  thus  allowing  the  track  con- 
tractor to  distribute  the  rail  fastenings  and  place  them  on  the  outside  of  the  embank- 
ment by  truck  prior  to  the  placement  of  cross  ties.  Embankment  was  compacted  to  90 
percent  maximum  density  per  AASHO  Standard  Method  T  99. 

Core  samples  were  taken  by  the  Corps  of  Engineers  to  determine  the  geological 
strata  along  the  alinement  of  the  new  roadbed.  Sections  of  the  rcadbed  known  to  be  in 
slide  areas  on  hillside  locations  were  excavated  to  provide  4  ft  of  uniform  material  below 
the  select  material  base  elevation.  Sections  in  fine  sandy  areas  were  cut  to  a  slope  of 
'■- \.\  to  reduce  surface  erosion.  All  slopes  were  mulched  with  emulsified  asphalt  and  hay 
and  were  seeded  with  grass  mixtures  most  favorable  ti>  each  type  of  soil.  Intercepting 
ditches  were  constructed  on  t<  p  of  all  hillside  cuts  to  divert  the  surface  drainage  from 
the  slope.  Embankment  slopes  were  riprapped  within  reservoir  area  to  a  height  of  5  ft 
above  flood-control  elevation.  On  the  downstream  side  <>i  tin-  embankments  18  in  of 
riprap  was  placed,  and  on  the  upstream  side  of  embankments,  12  in  of  riprap  was 
placed   with   both  sides  having   12   in   of  gravel   backing. 

The  crossing  ol  three  rivers  required  1676  Lin  ft  of  bridges.  These  bridges  were 
designed  for  Cooper  E  60  hading  plus  AREA  diesel  impact  loading   Concrete  piers  were 

Constructed    on    rock    foundation    except    lor    abutments    placed    on    the    tills,    where    14-in 

H  beam  bearings  piles  were  driven.  The  maximum  height  of  the  piers  is  no  ft.  [-beams 

were    used    for    spans    of    45    and    50    ft,    while    100  fl    Spans    <  ailed    for    deck   plate    girders. 

A  metal-grate  walkway  was  constructed  on  one  side  of  the  full  length  of  each  bridge, 
with  a  catwalk  underneath  the  girders  to  provide  an  inspection  walkway. 


122 Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

Since  the  new  line  crosses  an  arm  of  the  reservoir,  a  small  boat  passage  was 
required.  The  opening  was  constructed  parabolic  in  section  and  392.5  ft  long.  The 
passage  provides  a  14-ft  horizontal  opening  and  an  18-ft  vertical  opening.  The  height 
of  the  fill  over  the  structure  is  67  ft.  Other  drainage  structures  are  reinforced  concrete 
boxes  and  corrugated  metal  pipes  (asphalt  coated  and  asbestos  bonded)  with  asphalt- 
paved  inverts. 

Specifications  called  for  oak  cross  ties,  air-dried  one  year  prior  to  creosote  treating. 
The  relay  rail  was  cropped,  112-lb  section  in  lengths  of  36  ft  6  in.  Twenty-two  ties  per 
rail  were  used  in  the  construction  of  the  new  track  and  12  rail  anchors  were  applied 
per  rail  length.  The  rail  was  furnished  by   the  railway  company  from  several  sources. 

A  five-year  deferred  construction  clause  was  incorporated  in  the  contract  between 
the  Corps  of  Engineers  and  the  railway.  The  purpose  of  this  clause  was  to  relieve  the 
railway  of  any  cost  of  abnormal  maintenance  on  the  new  line. 

The  cost  of  the  relocation,  exclusive  of  right-of-way,  rail,  and  fastenings,  is 
indicated  below: 

Grading    $3,943,172 

Bridges     924,972 

Track      939,472 

Railway    Company    350,000 

Total     $6,157,616 

The  relocation  work  was  started  in  November  1958,  and  the  new  line  was  opened 
to  traffic  in  February  1961. 


Abra-Skull  Valley  Relocation  in  Arizona — Atchison, 
Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway 

By  GEORGE  RUGGE 
Assistant    Engineer,   Atchison,   Topeka    &    Santa    Fe    Railway 

On  March  29,  1961,  the  Santa  Fe  commenced  construction  of  a  39-mile,  single-track 
line  change  in  its  line  between  Ash  Fork  and  Phoenix,  Ariz.  The  new  line  begins  near 
Abra,  which  is  about  28  miles  south  of  Ash  Fork.  It  was  completed  and  placed  in 
service  April   21,   1962. 

The  basic  logic  of  this  relocation  is  illustrated  in  Photograph  No.  1,  which  shows  a 
relief  model  of  the  Abra-Skull  Valley  area.  The  new  line  runs  through  a  series  of  valleys 
in  contrast  to  the  tortuous  trans-mountain  route  of  the  old  line  between  Prescott  and 
Skull  Valley. 

Drawing  No.  1  shows  the  general  geography  of  the  line  revision,  together  with  the 
profile  of  the  old  and  new  lines  and  a  comparison  of  the  engineering  statistics  of  the 
two  lines. 

The  maximum  elevation  of  the  new  line  is  5018  ft,  compared  with  6108  ft  on  the 
old  route.  The  old  route  had  a  maximum  ruling  grade  of  3  percent  in  both  directions 
with  up  to  12-deg  curves.  Contrasted  with  this  arduous  line,  the  new  route  has  a 
maximum  grade  of  1.42  percent  eastward  and  1.38  percent  westward.  The  new  line  has 
one  curve  of  2  deg  30  min  while  all  of  the  other  curves  are  2  deg  or  less  in  sharpness. 
The  portion  of  the  old  line  between  Prescott  and  Skull  Valley  was  retired.  Prescott  is 
now  served  by  the  remaining  part  of  the  original  line  south  from  Abra. 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 


123 


LEGEND 

— —  NEW  LINE 

RETIRED  LINE 

OTHER   LINES 


Photograph  No.    1 


The  A.T.  &  3. P.  Ry.  Co. 

LINE  REVISION 

ABRA  TO  SKULL  VALLEY,  ARIZONA 


History 

To  understand  this  relocation  it  is  necessary  to  review  some  of  the  early  history 
of  this  part  of  Arizona.  The  City  of  Prescotl  in  the  1880's  was  the  territorial  capital 
and  the  center  of  the  Arizona  mining  industry.  It  was  also  the  most  important  trading 
center  in  the  state.  The  line  from  Ash  Fork  through  Prescott  to  Phoenix  was  constructed 
in  the  early  1890's,  being  completed  in  1895.  At  the  time,  the  important  locatii  n  problem 
was  to  find  the  shortest  rail  line  between  Prescott  and  Phoenix.  To  go  around  the  north- 
ern end  of  the  Sierra  Prieta  Range  would  have  added  approximately  64  miles  of  dis 
tance  by  rail  between  Prescott  and  Phoenix.  The  meager  traffic  between  these  points 
did  not  justify  the  location  through  the  Chino,  Williamson  and  Skull  Valleys  that  is 
now   traversed    In    the   new    line. 

Since  the  1920's  the  relative  importance  ol  Prescott  as  a  mining  center  has  greatlj 
declined,  while  the  importance  ol  Phoenix  and  the  surrounding  Salt  River  Valle)  has 
increased  at  an  accelerated  rate.  In  1958  when  the  studies  for  the  line  change  were  made, 
we  conservatively  estimated  that  Maricopa  Count)  would  increase  about  SO  percent  in 
population  by  1965.  Actually,  the  county  almost  attained  this  increase  bj  Mas 
Some  recent  projections  ol  this  area  indicate  that  within  25  years  it  will  l>e  one  o(  the 
live  great  cities  of  the  Nation.  The  phenomenal  growth  ol  Maricopa  Counts  and  it- 
county  seat,  Phoenix,  i-  shown  by  the  following  statistics. 


124 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 


CO 

o 

►— 

CO 
CO 

o 


S 


o 


_l 

O 
3 


<*>  l*S   K>  rf» 


SK'o  UJ  w  V" 
©  o*  o  o "•»" 


o  •*> 


81 


5~     "     C 


♦  =  —  *  *>  K> 


Uj    uj   -J   »   Ul 

oc  <r  cc  Q  2 
O  OUJ  *J 

o  o        So 

£  £<#  *  * 

«/>   to  T      ' 

w   WW  uj  uj  ui  ui 

3  3  3  =^  =^  «2  «5 

\m  a  at  a  a  <r  oc 


2* 

K  i— 

if  3 

9! 


O 

O     § 

o       . 

UJ 


5* 


o  *  "■ 
»  u  in 
Sum 

*&* 

*  °   3 

■e  «/»  o 

SB* 

UJ    ui    I       '        I       I       I     Hi 

is  •bt-ViToto- 


or 

CD 


o 

bfl 
C 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 125 

Maricopa 
County  Phoenix 

1881  Incorporated 

1891  2,000 

1910  34,488  11,134 

1920  89,576  29,053 

1930  150,970  48,1 18 

1940  186,193  65,414 

1950  331,770  106,816 

1957  550,000  172,000 

1960  663,510  439,170 

1962  720,000  480,739 

Santa  Fe's  problem  was  to  find  a  "better  way"  to  Phoenix  and  Central  Arizona  in 
order  that  it  could  make  its  contribution  to  this  thriving  area  and  its  future  agricultural 
and   industrial   development. 

Effect  of  The  Federal   Interstate  Highway  Program 

The  federal  interstate  highway  program  in  the  mountainous  areas  of  the  West  is 
greatly  altering  the  future  competitive  position  of  the  railroads.  This  is  especially  true 
of  the  route  from  Northern  Arizona  to  Phoenix.  If  we  were  to  effectively  compete  in 
the  future,  it  was  necessary  that  we  shorten  the  distance,  reduce  the  curvature  and  im- 
prove the  gradients  of  our  line  which  serves  Phoenix  and  Central  Arizona  area.  The 
unusual  geography  of  the  Abra-Skull  Valley  area  has  enabled  us  with  one  line  change 
to   go  a  long   way  toward  this  goal. 

Descriptions  of  the  Old  and  New  Lines 

The  old  line  was  constructed  by  the  Santa  Fe,  Prescott  &  Phoenix  Railway  between 
1893  and  1895,  and  acquired  by  the  Santa  Fe  in  1911.  South  from  Abra  this  line  crosses 
the  Verde  River  and  follows  a  valley  location  southerly  about  29  miles  to  Prescott.  This 
portion  of  the  line  has  a  maximum  gradient  of  1.50  percent  with  curves  as  sharp  as  12 
deg.  It  starts  at  an  elevation  of  4642  ft,  descends  to  the  Verde  River  crossing  at  4360  ft, 
and  ascends  to  Prescott,  which  has  an  elevation  of  5330   ft. 

At  Prescott  the  portion  of  the  old  line  that  has  been  abandoned  turned  generally 
west  and  immediately  began  the  ascent  over  the  Sierra  Prietas,  which  it  crossed  at  an 
elevation  of  6108  feet  at  Prieta  and  then  descended  westward  to  an  elevation  of  4282 
feet  at  Skull  Valley.  In  order  to  make  this  difficult  ascent  and  descent  over  the  Sierra 
Prietas,  it  was  necessary  to  use  3  percent  compensated  grades  and  thirty-two  12 -deg 
curves,  which  included  six  so-called  horseshoe  curves.  A  general  idea  of  the  development 
necessary  to  cross  this  range  is  reflected  by  the  fact  that  the  straight-line  distance  be- 
tween Prescott  and  Skull  Valley  is  slightly  more  than  14  miles,  while  the  railroad 
distance  was  23.5  miles.  The  track  consisted  of  90-lb  rail  on  treated  ties  and  volcanic 
cinder  ballast.  On  the  thirty-two  12 -deg  curves  it  was  necessary  to  have  rail  braces  and 
gage  rods.  The  bridges  consisted  of  a  270-ft  deck  girder  bridge  on  high  steel  towers  ovei 
the  Ramsgate  Gorge  and  numerous  pile  trestles  and  culverts.  The  grading  \\:i«  chara< 
terized   by  deep  rock   cuts. 

The  route  ot  the  new  line  is  approximate!}    14  mile-  west  <>i  Prescott,  but  on  tin 

other   side    of    the   Sierra    Prieta    Mountain-.    It    extends    from    an    elevation    ot    Id! 
V/%  miles  east  of  Abra,  following  the  Chino  Valley  westerlj    for  about    6  mile-,  thence 
4  miles  over  rolling  terrain  into  Williamson  Valley,  proceeding  along  this  vallej    for   < 
distance  of  about  7  miles,  then  into  Long  Canyon  for  about    10  miles  t..  Cowboj    Pass 
whidi  ha-  an  elevation  ol   5018  tt.  then  it  descends  foi  about  l.  mile-  into  skull  Vallej 


126 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 


which  has  an  elevation  of  4282  ft.  Between  Abra  and  Skull  Valley  the  new  line  traverses 
ranch  land  most  of  the  distance,  but  also  goes  through  Prescott  National  Forest  for 
about  6  miles. 

Design  Features 

This  is  the  first  major  line  relocation  where  the  Santa  Fe  has  used  continuous  welded 
secondhand  rail.  The  131-lb  rail  was  cropped  and  welded  by  the  electric-flash  butt 
welding  process.  Ties  for  this  project  were  obtained  from  the  segments  of  main  line 
that  were  retired  in  conjunction  with  the  Williams-Crookton  relocation  30  miles  north 
of  Abra. 

The  route  chosen  for  the  new  line  had  generally  been  known  for  many  years.  Gov- 
ernment topographical  maps  were  used  for  a  rough  preliminary  location.  After  this  was 
completed,  the  route  was  flown  and  photogrammetric  maps  were  made  on  the  scale 
of  1  in  to  400  ft,  with  a  contour  interval  of  10  ft.  These  photogrammetric  maps  were 
used  to  determine  the  preliminary  location.  The  main  difference  between  this  preliminary 
location  and  the  final  one  was  the  location  of  the  crossing  of  U.  S.  Highway  89  near 
the  northern  end  of  the  project. 

Some  of  the  design  elements  for  the  line  revision  were: 

Gradients 

Maximum  ascending  gradient — westward — 1.38% 
Maximum  ascending  gradient — eastward — 1.42% 
Grade  compensation  per  degree  of  curve — 0.04% 

Curves 

Central 

Number                                                                                 Degree  Angle 

1        0°  IS'  5°  40' 

6       0°  30'  36°  11' 

1        0°  40'  5°  13' 

26        1  °  00'  624°  28' 

4        2°  00'  240°  51' 

1        2  °  30'  100°  01 ' 


Grading 
Embankments: 
Width  of  roadway — 22  ft 
Slopes—  \y2  to  1 
All  embankments  compacted 

Excavations : 

Width  of  roadway  (rock) — 28  ft 
Width  of  roadway  (common) — 44  ft 
Slope  inclination  (rock)— %  to  1 
Slope  inclination  (common) — 1  to  1 

Track 
No.  of  main  tracks — single  track 

Rail — 131-lb   to  the  yard,  continuous  welded,  secondhand 
Tie  plates — 7^4"  by  14"  double  shoulder 
Spikes  (line) — ¥%"  by  6" 
Spikes  (anchor) — Studs 
Rail  anchors  per  mile — 7500 
Ties — secondhand,  treated 
Ballast — volcanic  cinders,  3360  cu  yd  per  mile 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 127 

Signals 
None — train  order  operation 

Designated  Speed 
Freight  trains — 19  mph 
Passenger  trains — 59  mph 

Bridges 
Corrugated  metal  pipe,  asphalt  coated 
Reinforced  concrete  boxes 
Ballasted-deck  timber  trestles 
Steel  beam  spans 

The  soils  encountered  on  the  eastern  portion  of  the  line  consisted  of  silts  and  clays 
with  which  it  was  necessary  to  use  water  to  achieve  the  desired  compaction.  On  the 
western  portion  of  the  line  the  soils  encountered  consisted  principally  of  decomposed 
sranite  and  silt  formations.  It  was  found  that  the  desired  compaction  could  be  obtained 
without  the  use  of  water;  however,  water  was  used  because  it  considerably  reduced 
the  cost   of  compaction. 

The  compaction  was  accomplished  with  a  sheepsfoot  roller  equipped  with  a  vibra- 
tory compactor  which  was  powered  by  a  diesel  engine  and  had  a  frequency  of  1400  to 
1600  vibrations  per  minute.  This  type  of  roller  gave  deep  penetration  of  the  compacting 
action  which  reduced  compaction  cost.  A  sub-ballast  of  select  material  was  used  on  the 
roadbed  to  prevent  future  penetration  of  the  ballast  materials  into  the  roadbed. 

The   quantities  of  the  project   included   the   following  items: 

1 .  Clearing     603  acres 

2.  Roadbed  excavation,  rock    323,400  cu  yd 

Roadbed  excavation,   common    1,389,600  cu  yd 

3.  Borrow    1.007,400  cu  yd 

4.  Surface  ditch  and  channel  excavation,    rock    2,400  cu  yd 

Surface  ditch  and  channel  excavation,    common    156,300  cu  yd 

5.  Fencing    27,200  rods 

6.  Structural  excavation,  rock    2,500  cu  yd 

Structural  excavation,   common    6.100  cu  yd 

7.  Structural   backfill    4,100  cu  yd 

8.  Reinforced    concrete    6,600  cu  yd 

9  Reinforcing    steel     580,000  lb 

10.  Structural    steel    75  tons 

11.  Ballasted-deck   creosoted  pile  trestles   18,000  lin  ft 

12.  Corrugated  metal  pipe,  36  in   to   72  in    7,300  lin  It 

13.  Structural  plate  pipe,  72  in  to  96  in   (>50  lin  ft 

14.  13 1  -lb  secondhand  continuous  welded   rail    410.000  lin  it 

15.  1.31  -lb   secondhand   jointed    rail    42.400  lin  It 

16.  Secondhand    ties    121.000 

The  major  items  of  the  project  completed  by  the  contractor  were  clearing  the  right- 
of-way,  constructing  the  access  roads,  installing  right-of-way  fences,  constructirm  l  i 
pile  trestles,  4  underpasses,  37  reinforced  concrete  boxes,  113  pipe  culverts  and  excavating 
almost  3.000,000  cu  yd  of  material.  The  track  construction  was  handled  b)  Santa  Fe 
forces.  The  total  net  capital  cost  of  the  work   was  estimated  at   <<A22.000. 

The  construction  of  this  new  line  featured  three  interesting  operations 

1.  The  depth  compaction  of  embankments  by  low-cycle  vibrator)    rollei 

2.  Ties  for  the  new  line  were  selected  from  the  retired  portions  <>i  the  Williams 
Crookton  line  change.  The  ties  were  picked  up  with  their  tie  plates  in  plan-  and  banded 
together   in   bundles   of    12    to    16.   Then    they    were    trucked    30   mile-    to    the    new    line 
where    a    truck-mounted    crane    unloaded    them    onto    a    tie    distributing    -led    which    wa- 

towed  behind  the  truck  tram-  ami  from   whii h  they  ware  positioned  <»n  the  roadbed. 


128  Ec 


onomics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 


Photograph  No.  2. 


Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 129 

3.  The  laying  of  a  single  track  with  continuous  welded  rail  on  a  new  roadbed 
posed  a  special  problem.  To  accomplish  this  a  special  piece  of  equipment  was  designed 
called  a  "straddle  buggy."  It  was  built  in  the  Santa  Fe  work  equipment  shop  at  Albu- 
querque. This  machine  is  illustrated  in  Photograph  No.  2.  The  straddle  buggy  pulled 
the  strings  of  rail  from  the  rail  train  in  pairs  and  placed  them  on  rollers  that  were 
placed  on  the  ties  at  SO-ft  intervals.  Once  the  rail  strings  were  completely  on  the  rollers 
and  joints  were  made  at  the  rear  of  the  string,  the  Straddel  Buggy  returned  to  lift  up 
the  rail  so  that  the  rollers  could  be  removed  and  retrieved  by  the  straddle  buggy.  In  so 
doing,  the  rail  was  lowered  into  place  on  the  tie  plates.  Immediately  behind  this  opera- 
tion the  rail  was  spiked  every  fifth  tie  and  the  rail  train  moved  forward,  keeping  pace 
with  the  spiker.  The  air  compressor  for  the  spike  drivers  used  in  this  operation  was 
mounted  on  the  leading  end  of  the  rail  train  idler  car.  Behind  the  rail  train  the  spiking 
was  completed  and  the  anchors  attached,  after  which  ballast  was  unloaded  and  the 
surfacing  operation   completed. 

Benefits 

Because  of  this  change  of  line  the  Santa  Fe 

1.  Is  saving  2  hr  each  direction  on  freight  trains. 

2.  Is  saving  1  hr  10  min  each  direction  on  passenger  trains. 

3.  Has   eliminated   helper   service   in   both   directions   between   Prescott  and   Skull 
Valley  over  the  Sierra  Prieta  Mountain  Range. 

4.  Has  reduced  the  maximum  grade  between  Abra  and  Skull  Valley  from  3  per- 
cent to  1.42  percent. 

5.  Has  within  the  limits  of  the  line  change  reduced  the  curve  sharpness  from  12 
deg  to  2  deg  with  the  exception  of  one  curve  of  2  deg  30  min. 

6.  Has  reduced  the  central  angle  5131  deg. 

7.  Has  reduced  the  distance   between  Ash   Fork  and  Phoenix  14.5  miles. 

8.  Is  now  realizing  the   following  annual  savings: 

a.  Savings  in  expenses  for  maintenance  of  way    $  70,000 

b.  Reduction   in  freight   train  miles  over  shorter  line    70,000 

c.  Reduction  in  passenger  train  miles  over  shorter  line    21,000 

d.  Elimination  of  helper  engine  mileage    51,000 

e.  Fuel  saved  by  reduction  in  grades    57.000 

f.  Reduction   in   mileage  allowances  paid  on   foreign-line  and    private- 
line    cars    10,000 

g.  Depreciation  on  helper  engines  no   longer  needed   48,000 

h.  Savings  in  freight  crews'  wages  due  to  shortening  line  and  reducing 

grades 39,000 

i.  Savings  in   passenger  crews'  wages  due  to  shortening  line   7,000 

j.  Reduction  in  station  forces  at  Prescott    25,000 

k.  Reduction   in   hostlers  at   Prescott    18,000 

1.  Reduction  in  mechanical   forces  at  Prescott    44,000 

m.  Savings   in    pavments    to    crews   deadheading    between    Prescotl    and 

Phoenix ^7,000 

Total   Savings    $497,000 


Report   of    Committee   9 — Highways 

E.  R.  Englert  M.  Johnson  (E) 
J.  T.  Hoelzer  R.  F.  MacDonald 
J.   A.  Jorlett  H.   L.   Michael 
C.  A.  Christensen  E.  S.  Miller 

F.  C.  Cunningham  H.  G.  Morgan  (E) 
C.  I.  Hartsell  R.  E.  Nottingham 

R.  J.  Pierce 

\V.     S.    AUTREY  W.    C.    PlNSCHMIDT    (E) 

F.  X.   Barker  P.  H.  Slack 

G.  B.  Blatt  K.  E.  Smith 
B.  Blum  (E)  J.  E.  Spangler 
W.  A.  Buckmaster  R.  F.  Spars 
R.  B.  Carrington,  Jr.  C.  W.  Truster 
A.  C.  Cayou  J.  M.  Trissal 
M.  H.  Corbyn  T.  M.  Vanderstempel 

J.    T.    FlTZPATRK   K  H.    W.    WALBRIGHT 

R.  W.  Mauer,  Chairman       T.  L.  Gibson  V.   R.  Walling  (E) 

R.  Dejaiffe,  Vice  Wm.  J.  Hedley  G.  H.  Way,  Jr. 

Chairman  J.  A.   Holmes  H.  J.  Wilkins 

R.  E.  Skinner,  Secretary       W.  H.  Huffman  K.  E.  Wyckoff 

Committee 

i  E  >  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names    are    set    in    bold-face   type   constitute    the    Engineering   Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 9. 

To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee   reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Progress  report,  with   recommendations  submitted  for  adoption    page  132 

2.  Merits  and  economics  of  prefabricated  types  of  highway-railway  grade 
crossings. 

Progress    report,  submitted  as  information    page   132 

v  Merits  of   various   types   of   highway-railway  grade  crossing  protection,  col- 
laborating   with    Communication   and   Signal   Section,   AAR. 
Progress    report,   submitted    as   information    page    133 

I    Factors  to  be  considered  for  determining  the  advantages  "i  bighwaj   over- 
passes as  opposed  to  underpasses. 
Final    report,    submitted    ;is    information    page    134 

5.  Recommended  method  of  developing  annual  maintenance  nisi  ,,i  the  various 
types  of  highway-railway  grade  crossing  protection,  collaborating  with 
Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR. 

Brief  progress  report,  submitted  a-  information    pagi 

6.  Methods  of  providing  additional  advance  warning  t<>  bighwaj    traffic    ap 
preaching  a  highway  railway  grade  crossing, 

Brief  progress  report,   submitted  as  information    pagi 

131 


132 Highways 

7.  Conduct  study   with    the  view  toward  developing  alternate  types  of  auto- 
matic   crossing    protection,    collaborating    with    Communication    and    Signal 
Section,  AAR. 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  136 

The  Committee  on  Highways, 

R.  W.  Mauer,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  574,  November  1962. 


Report  on  Assignment   1 

Revision  of  Manual 

E.  R.  Englert  (chairman,  subcommittee),  F.  N.  Barker,  A.  C.  Cayou,  C.  A.  Christensen, 
F.  C.  Cunningham,  Wm.  J.  Hedley,  J.  T.  Hoelzer,  J.  A.  Jorlett,  E.  S.  Miller,  R.  E. 
Nottingham,  W.  C.  Pinschmidt,  J.  E.  Spangler,  T.  M.  Vanderstempel,  H.  J.  Wilkins, 
K.  E.  Wyckoff. 

The  Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR,  has  eliminated  from  its  Manual 
drawings  showing  the  vertical  STOP  sign  on  flashing-light  and  wig-wag  types  of  crossing 
signals.  This  was  done  because  these  signs  are  no  longer  being  used  for  new  installa- 
tions. Your  committee  believes  that  these  signs  should  remain  in  the  AREA  Manual  to 
protect  those  railroads  which  still  have  them.  However,  since  they  are  no  longer  in  the 
Signal  Manual,  the  notes  referring  to  the  Signal  drawings  on  the  AREA  plans  should 
be  deleted.  The   following  changes  are   therefore   recommended: 

Page  9-3-18 
Fig.    15 — Highway   Crossing    Signal,   Flashing-Light  Type  with  Stop   Sign 
Delete  note  reading  "Details  shown  on  Signal  Drawing  1654." 

Page  9-3-20 

Fig.   17 — Highway  Crossing  Signal,  Wig- Wag  Type  with  Stop  Sign 
Delete  note  reading  "Details  shown  on  Signal  Drawing  1652." 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Merits    and    Economics    of    Prefabricated    Types 
of   Highway-Railway   Grade   Crossings 

J.  T.  Hoelzer  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  S.  Autrey,  F.  N.  Barker,  W.  A.  Buckmaster, 
C.  A.  Christensen,  M.  H.  Corbvn,  T.  L.  Gibson,  W.  H.  Huffman,  R.  E.  MacDonald, 
R.  E.  Nottingham,  R.  J.  Pierce,  P.  H.  Slack,  K.  E.  Smith,  C.  VV.  Traister,  H.  VV. 
Walbright,  G.  H.  Way,   Jr.,  H.  J.  Wilkins. 

Prefabricated   highway-railway   grade   crossings  are  of   the   following  types: 

1.  Timber  panel  crossings 

2.  Concrete  slab  crossings 

3.  Metal  panel  crossings 

4.  Rubber  panel  crossings 

Bituminous-paved  crossings  with  a  timber  on  each  side  of  the  rails  are  extensively 
used.   They  are  not   considered  prefabricated,  except  that  the  timbers  are  undercut  on 


Highways  133 

the  bottom  of  one  edge  to  fit  over  the  tops  of  the  tie  plates  and  track  spikes,  and  usually 
are  prebored  for  lag  or  drive  spikes. 

A  previous  report  on  this  assignment  (Proceedings,  Vol.  61,  1960,  page  270)  indi- 
cated that  at  that  time  installation  costs  of  several  types  of  prefabricated  crossing 
varied  from  $21.50  to  SS1.00  per  lineal  track  foot,  annual  maintenance  costs  varying 
from  $2.47  and  $5.05  per  lineal  foot.  It  also  indicated  that  the  cost  of  bituminous  cross- 
ings was  about  $12.00  per  lineal  foot  and  annual  maintenance  cost  about  $3.50  per  lineal 
foot.  Obviously,  annual  maintenance  costs  and  life  of  crossings  are  dependent  upon 
varying  factors  such  as  the  amount  and  speed  of  railroad  and  highway  traffic,  weather, 
drainage,  and  track  subgrade  conditions.  From  studies  to  date,  it  appears  that  full-depth 
creosoted  timber  panel  crossings  may,  in  many  circumstances,  result  in  the  least  annual 
expense. 

Rubber  panel  crossings,  which  are  quite  expensive  per  lineal  foot  installed,  have 
been  in  use  since  the  first  one  was  installed  in  1954  on  Erie-Lackawanna  Railroad  near 
Akron.  Ohio.  Recent  information  shows  that  i2  rubber  panel  crossings  have  been  in- 
stalled by  railroads  in  the  United  States,  and  75  have  been  installed  throughout  20 
states  by  other  industries  on  interplant  and  industrial  tracks. 

This  committee  is  collecting  information  on  the  installation  and  annual  maintenance 
costs  of  various  types  of  crossings.  Further  data  on  actual  maintenance  costs  and  life 
of  highway  crossings  available  from  any   railroad  will  be  very  helpful. 

This  is  a  progress  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends 
that   the  assignment  be  continued. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

Merits   of   Various   Types   of   Highway-Railway    Grade 
Crossing  Protection 

Collaborating  with  Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR 

J.  A.  Jorlett  (chairman,  subcommittee).  W.  S.  Autrey,  G.  B.  Blatt,  A.  C.  Cavou,  M.  H. 
Corbvn,  R.  Dejaiffe,  E.  R.  Englert,  Wm.  J.  Hedlcv,  J.  A.  Holmes,  R.  E.  Mac- 
Donald.  H.  L.  Michael,  R.  F.  Spars,  J.  M.  Trissal,  6.  H.  Way,  Jr..  H.  J.  Wilkins, 
K.  E.  Wyckoff. 

Last  year  your  committee  reported  that  the  Armour  Research  Foundation  of  tin 
[Qiois  Institute  of  Technology,  with  funds  provided  through  the  Research  Department 
of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  had  produced  the  final  report  on  an  "Analysis 
of  Railroad  Crossings  and  Accident  Data  for  the  State  of  Ohio  During  the  10  Ye.n 
Period,  1949  through  1958."  Recognizing  the  weaknesses  in  the  report  which  would 
require  careful  evaluation  of  all  factors  before  this  method  oi  determining  risk  t :i » i < •  i - 
could   be  used,  your  committee  did   not    release  the  report. 

Since  that  time,  considerable  interest  in  the  report  ha-  developed  and  numerous 
requests   have   been    received    for   topic-.    Because   <>t    this    interest    in    the    report    and    the 

considerable  sum  of  money  expended  tor  it-,  preparation,  your  committee  felt  that  it 
should  be  released  to  all  interested  parties.  To  guard  against  misuse  of  the  report  and 
acceptance  of  the  formulas  as  infallible,  your  committee  ha-  prepared  a  foreword  to  bi 
bound  in  the  report  which  point-  out  the  danger  of  using  the  formula^,  without  careful 
consideration.   With    the   following   foreword,   your   committee   recommends   the   release 

of   the    report. 


134 Highways 

FOREWORD 

This  analysis  covers  6011  accidents  that  occurred  at  7416  highway  crossings  of  12 
railroads  in  the  State  of  Ohio  during  the  10-year  period  1949  through  1958.  While  it 
includes  more  data  than  had  been  available  for  previous  similar  studies,  it  must  be  un- 
derstood that  information  on  several  important  items  was  missing  from  the  accident 
reports.  Deficiencies  in  the  available  data  include  the  following: 

(1)  Highway  and  rail  traffic  was  not  recorded  by  hour  of  day  or  night.  As  a 
result,  it  was  not  possible  to  relate  properly  rail-highway  traffic  conflicts,  or 
exposure  to  accident,  in  the  analysis. 

(2)  The  accident  reports  do  not  cover  such  important  elements  as  season  of  the 
year,  weather  conditions,  pavement  surface  condition  and  whether  accidents 
occurred  in  daylight  or  darkness. 

(3)  Data  were  not  available  on  the  speed  of  highway  traffic — an  important 
characteristic. 

(4)  Apparent  mental  and  physical  condition  of  drivers  of  highway  vehicles  in- 
volved in  accidents  was  not  recorded.  This  omission  is  characteristic  of 
practically  all  accident  reports  because  of  the  obvious  difficulty  or  impos- 
sibility of  determining  driver  condition. 

Because  of  these  and  other  deficiencies  in  the  data  available  for  study,  it  is  empha- 
sized that  while  the  relationships  and  conclusions  developed  by  the  study  are  acceptable 
as  representative  of  the  Ohio  data,  they  cannot  be  assumed  to  be  completely  reliable 
when  applied  to  other  railway-highway  grade  crossings.  If  used  as  a  guide  to  judgment, 
they  may  be  of  some  assistance  in  evaluating  risks  at  other  crossings. 


This  is  a  progress  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends 
that   the  assignment  be  continued. 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Factors   to   Be   Considered   for   Determining   the 

Advantages   of    Highway   Overpasses   as 

Opposed  to  Underpasses 

C.  A.  Christensen  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  S.  Autrev,  F.  N.  Barker,  A.  C.  Cavou, 
M.  H.  Corbyn,  E.  R.  Englert,  T.  L.  Gibson,  Wm.  J.Hedlev,  J.  A.  Holmes,  W".  H. 
Huffman,  J.  A.  Jorlett,  R.  E.  MacDonald,  E.  S.  Miller,  R.  f.  Pierce,  J.  E.  Spangler, 
J.  M.  Trissal,  G.  H.  Way,  Jr.,  K.  E.  Wyckoff. 

Generally,  the  selection  of  the  type  of  grade  separation  structure  will  be  governed 
by  physical  conditions  at  the  site  of  the  crossing.  If  the  normal  grade  line  of  a  highway 
were  some  distance  above  that  of  the  railroad,  the  highway  would  go  over  the  track. 
Conversely,  if  the  highway  grade  were  much  lower,  the  highway  would  be  carried  under 
the  track  by  construction  of  a  subway.  In  the  case  of  the  grade  lines  being  the  same, 
or  nearly  so,  a  choice  of  type  of  construction  is  possible,  and  the  advantages  of  overpass 
construction  should   be  considered. 

Highway  overpasses  often  can  be  built  at  less  cost  than  underpasses.  Loads  carried 
by  highway  vehicles  are  lighter  than  those  carried  on  the  railroad,  thus  lighter  con- 
struction is  possible.  Simpler  construction  procedures  resulting  in  savings  of  cost  are 
possible  with  overpasses,  as  they  can  be  built  with  little  or  no  interference  with  railroad 
traffic  and  involve  no  expensive  temporary  construction — falsework  bridges  to  carry 
railroad   traffic   or   temporary  detour  tracks. 


Highways 135 

An  overpass  offers  a  better  opportunity  for  stage  construction  of  the  highway  and 
structure  with  minimum  impairment  of  the  original  facility.  This  is  true  if  the  original 
structure  is  widened  or  if  an  additional  structure  and  roadway  is  constructed  for  a 
divided  highway.  Usually  the  railroad  traffic  is  known  and  can  be  predicted  with  rea- 
sonable accuracy.  If  additional  tracks  are  to  be  required  within  a  reasonable  time,  they 
can  be  provided  for  in  the  original  overpass  design,  often  without  increasing  the  cost. 
Highway  traffic  is  constantly  increasing  and  required  capacity  can  be  provided  as  needed 
with  stage  construction  without  loss  of  the  initial  facility.  If  an  underpass  requires 
widening  under  these  circumstances,  extensive  rebuilding  and  loss  of  a  great  part  of  the 
original   facility  is  seldom  avoidable. 

Troublesome  drainage  problems  may  be  avoided  by  construction  of  an  overpass. 
In  some  locations  the  construction  of  an  underpass  would  involve  installation  of  expen- 
sive drainage  systems  with  pumping  plants,  costly  to  maintain  and  operate  and  subject 
to  failure  during  heavy  storms.  This  alone  may  be  sufficient  reason  to  choose  an 
overpass. 

An  overpass  provides  a  wide  overlook  for  the  vehicle  driver  from  the  structure  and 
its  approaches,  and  the  driver  has  a  minimum  feeling  of  restriction  or  confinement.  It 
also  usually  eliminates  the  problem  of  restricted  overhead  clearance  and  the  attendant 
hazard  of  high  vehicular  loads  striking  the  bridge  structure. 

Lateral  clearance  can  readily  be  provided  for  the  railroads'  off-track  maintenance 
equipment  when  an  overpass  is  built,  but  provision  for  such  equipment  at  highway 
underpasses  is  more  difficult.  Also,  the  expense  of  track  maintenance  is  increased  by  an 
underpass  structure. 

An  overpass  does  not  require  lighting  during  the  daytime,  and  lighting  at  night  is 
optional  or  governed  by  policies  affecting  the  highway  as  a  whole. 

Overpasses  are  not  subject  to  the  problems  involved  in  keeping  a  subway  clean  and 
light,  particularly   where  pedestrian  traffic  is  involved. 

There  are.  of  course,  seme  disadvantages  involved  in  overpass  construction.  In  yard 
areas,  for  instance,  overpass  structures  may  interfere  with  free  use  of  the  area  for  track 
rearrangement.  Piers  of  an  overpass  may  obstruct  the  view  of  switching  crews,  thus 
hampering  their  operation.  Vertical  and  lateral  clearances,  although  adequate  for  opera- 
tion of  trains,  may  seriously  curtail  the  use  of  work  equipment  such  as  cranes  and  pile- 
drivers.  This  is  especially  serious  in  shop  areas  and  in  the  vicinity  of  bridges. 

This  is  a  final  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends  that 
the  subject   be   discontinued. 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Recommended    Method    of    Developing    Annual    Main- 
tenance  Cost   of   the   Various   Types   of   Highway- 
Railway    Grade    Crossing    Protection 

Collaborating   with   Communication   and   Signal    Section   AAK 

P.  C.  Cunningham  (chairman,  subcommittee),  \\    S    Vutrey,  <;  B.  Blatt,  \\     \    Buck 

master,    V  C.  Cayou,  M    H.  Corbyn,  T,  I-    Gibson,  C    I  HartseU,   I     V  Holmes, 

J.  A.  JorUtt.  E.  S.  Mill.r.  R    I    Pierce,  P.  U    Slack,  k    K  Smith,  I    E.  Spangler, 

R.  F.  Spar.-.  J.  M    Trissal,  H.  \V.  Wall, right. 

Your  committee  is  continuing  collaboration  with  Committee  8  ol  the  Communica- 
tion and  Signal  Section,  \\k  which  i-  progressing  a  concurrent  stud}  <>i  this  subject, 
including  a  one-year  ( J u I >    1961  to  July  1962)  actual  cosl  record  stud)   on  represents 


136 Highways 

tive  railroads.  Signal  Committee  8  is  presently  assembling  cost  figures  supplied  by  these 
railroads  and  expects  to  prepare  a  report  in  the  near  future. 

In  addition,  your  committee  is  communicating  with  the  several  AAR  State  Grade 
Crossing  Committees  concerning  any  data  which  they  have  been  assembling  in  con- 
nection with  this  subject. 

An  evaluation  of  the  results  of  these  studies,  together  with  the  data  the  committee 
now  has,  will  form  the  basis  of  future  recommendations. 

This  is  a  progress  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends 
that   the  assignment   be   continued. 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Methods  of  Providing  Additional  Warning  to  Highway 

Traffic   Approaching   a    Highway-Railway 

Grade  Crossing 

T.  M.  Vanderstempel  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  S.  Autrey,  G.  B.  Blatt,  W.  A.  Buck- 
master,  F.  C.  Cunningham,  T.  L.  Gibson,  C.  I.  Hartsell,  J.  A.  Holmes,  W.  H.  Huff- 
man, H.  L.  Michael,  E.  S.  Miller,  R.  J.  Pierce,  W.  C.  Pinschmidt,  R.  E.  Skinner, 
K.  E.  Smith,  J.  E.  Spangler,  R.  F.  Spars,  K.  E.  Wyckoff. 

Your  committee  is  conducting  a  survey  on  the  use  of  additional  warnings  at  high- 
way-railway grade  crossings  by  the  various  state  highway  departments.  The  purpose 
of  the  survey  is  to  determine  what  standards  have  been  adopted  and  if  the  use  of 
additional  warnings  has  resulted  in  any  appreciable  decrease  in  the  number  of  accidents. 

A  further  survey  is  contemplated  on  the  use  and  types  of  advance  warning  signs 
at  highway-railway  grade  crossings.  A  study  of  the  information  received  will  form  the 
basis  of  future  Committee  9  recommendations. 

This  is  a  progress  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends 
that   the  assignment  be  continued. 

Report  on  Assignment   7 

Conduct    Study    with    the    View    Toward     Developing 

Alternate   Types   of   Automatic   Crossing 

Protection 

Collaborating  with  Communication  and  Signal   Section,  AAR 

C.  I.  Hartsell  (chairman,  subcommittee),  G.  B.  Blatt,  VV.  A.  Buckmaster,  F.  C.  Cunning- 
ham, J.  T.  Hoelzer,  R.  F.  MacDonald,  H.  L.  Michael,  R.  E.  Nottingham,  R.  E. 
Skinner,  P.  H.  Slack,  K.  E.  Smith,  R.  F.  Spars,  C.  W.  Traister,  J.  M.  Trissal,  T.  M. 
Vanderstempel,  H.  W.  Walbright,  G.  H.  Way,  Jr. 

Your  committee  has  found  that  the  following  types  of  alternate  protection  are 
presently  in  use  at  some  highway-railway  grade  crossings,  constructed  and  maintained 
as  indicated: 

1.   By  Public  Authorities 

a.  Side-of-road  reflectorized  highway  "STOP"  signs  without  lights. 

b.  Side-of-road  reflectorized  highway  "STOP"  signs  with  one  or  two  continuously 
flashing  red  or  amber  lights  either  above  and  below  or  on  each  side  of  sign. 


Highways 137 

c.  Side-ol-road  reflectorized  36-  by  36-in  sign  reading  "Railroad  Crossing",  with  or 
without   continuously   flashing  amber  or   red   lights. 

d.  Regular  highway  traffic  signals  using  red,  amber,  and  green  lights  activated  by 
train  crews  or  crossing  watchmen— usually  at  switching  leads  or  industrial  track 
crossings. 

e.  Continuously   flashing  overhead  lights  with  or  without  railroad  crossing  sign. 

f.  Special  30-  by  48-in  red  reflectorized  background  sign  with  white  reflectorized 
letters  "RR"  and  "X",  with  continuously  flashing  amber  lights  above  and  below  sign 
placed  in   close   proximity   to   standard   railroad  crossing   sign. 

2.  By  Railways  at  Joint   Railway  and   Public  Authority  Expense 

a.  Track-circuited  automatic  flashlights  with  unc  single  center  circuit.  This  is 
usually  on  lightly  used  branch-line  or  industrial-lead  track.  The  railroad  movements  stop 
short  of  the  crossing  on  the  single  circuit  and  then  proceed,  the  railroad  stop  being  pre- 
determined so  that  the  flashlights  operate  20  to  30  sec  before  the  engine  or  cars  move 
into  the  crossing  area.  Sometimes  this  protection  is  implemented  by  railroad  operating 
rules. 

b.  A  transistorized  electronic  device  superimposing  a  low  frequency  a-c  circuit  on 
the  rails  in  the  track  or  tracks  from  which  the  position  of  the  train  and  its  speed  are 
obtained  by  the  train  forming  a  moving  short  on  the  track.  Trains  which  may  have 
activated  the  crossing  protection  and  stopped  short  of  the  crossing,  or  reversed  their 
movement,  immediately  deactivate  the  crossing  protection.  There  are  no  insulated  joints 
in  the  track. 

c.  Signs  on  separate  posts  at  double-track  crossings  with  flashing-light  signals  read- 
ing "Look  for  Train  on  Second  Track",  which  are  illuminated  when  two  trains  are  in 
track  circuit  simultaneously  approaching  crossing.  At  certain  locations  the  installation 
of  these  signs  may   eliminate  the  necessity  for  gates. 

3.  Suggested   Improvements   Received   to   Date   for  Greater  Safety 

1.  Paint  flashlight  masts  bright  orange  for  better  visibility. 

2.  Change  center  flasher  circuits  to  show  a  constant  red  when  center  section  through 
crossings  is  occupied. 

This  is  a  progress  report,  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends 
that   the  assignment  be   continued. 


Report    of    Committee    13 — Water,    Oil    and 
Sanitation  Services 


E.  C.  Harris,  Chairman 
T.  A.  Tennyson,  Jr., 

Vice  Chairman 
H.  E.  Graham,  Secretary 


J.    J.     DWYER 

C.    F.    MuELDER 

VV.  F.  Arksey 
F.  O.  Klemstine 
W.  E.  Billingsley 
V.  C.   Barth 
T.  L.  Hendrix 
W.  C.  Harsh 

R.   C.   Arcii.vmri  All  I 
R.    A.    BARDWELL 

R.  C.  Bardwell   (E) 
J.  M.  Bates 
I.  C.  Brown 
T.  W.  Brown 
P.  J.  Calza 

C.  E.  DeGeer 

D.  E.  Drake 
A.  E.  Dulik 
R.  S.  Glynn 


T.  I.  Gray 

H.  M.  Hoff.meister 

A.  VV.  Johnson 

H.  L.  McMui.ux   (E) 

G.  F.  Metzdork 

P.  M.  Miller 

E.  T.  Myers 

Henry  Parrish,  Jr. 

A.  B.  Pierce  (E) 

R.  D.  Powrie 

J.   C.  Roberts 

J.  P.  Rodger 

H.  E.  Silcox  (E) 

E.  R.  Sciilaf 

R.   M.   Stimmel* 

D.  C.  Teal 

H.  W.  Van  Hovenberg   (E) 

C.    B.   VOITELLE 

E.  M.  Walters 
J.  E.  Wiggins 

Committee 


<  E  i  Member  Emeritus. 
*  Died  July  8,   1962. 

Those    whose    names   are   set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the   Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 13. 


To    the   American    Railway    Engineering   Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Progress   report,   with   recommendations   submitted  for  adoption    page  141 

2.  Prevention  of   corrosion  in  hot  and  cold  water  systems. 

Report  entitled  Corrosion  Prevention  in  Potable  Hot  Water  Systems  sub- 
mitted for  publication  in  the  Manual  at  the  end  of  Part  4 — Water  Treat- 
ment        page  1 43 

3.  Design,  construction   and  operation  of  coach  servicing  facilities  to  comply 
with   regulations  of  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  on  the  latest  amendments  to 
U.  S.  Public  Health  Service  Drinking  Water  Standards  and  Dining  Car 
Sanitary    Regulations    page   147 

4.  Cathodic   protection    of   pipe    lines   and   steel   storage    tanks,    collaborating 
with  Committee  18. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  outlining  practical  examples  in 
application  of  cathodic  protection   to  underground  storage  tanks    page  148 

6.  Railway  waste  disposal. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  outlining  the  plan  of  work  to  l><- 
followed  in  the  development  of  a  report  for  the  ensuing  year    page   152 

139 


140 Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

7.  Practical    methods    for    removing   iron   and    manganese    from    small   water 
supplies. 

Final   report,  submitted  as  information,  covering  the  methods  of  removing 

iron   and   manganese   from   water  outlined  in    technical  publications    page   152 

8.  Methods  of   controlling  spillage  of  fuel   oil  at   diesel   fueling  and  unloading 
stations. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  stating  procedure  to  be  followed 
in  developing  new  information  on  automatic  shut-off  fueling  devices  for  a 
report   in    1963    page  156 

9.  Disinfectants,   deodorants,    fumigants,  and   cleaning  materials. 

Progress  is  being  made  in  the  study  of  this  complex  subject  for  the  pur- 
pose of  producing  a  report  of  recommended  practices  for  1963.  There  is  no 
report  for  1962. 

10.  Railroad  aspects  of  radioactive  substances. 

Final  report,  submitted  as  information,  outlining  specific  methods  of 
handling   radioactive   substances    page  157 

The  Committee  on  Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services, 

E.  C.  Harris,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  5  74,  November  1962. 


MEMOIR 

^Robert  Jlartcm  Stimmel 

Robert  Marion  Stimmel,  engineer  of  test  and  water  service,  New  York,  Chicago  & 
St.  Louis  Railroad,  died  after  a  short  illness  at  St.  Francis  of  Oak  Ridge  Hospital,  Green 
Springs,  Ohio,  July  8,  1962. 

Mr.  Stimmel  was  born  on  September  30,  1896,  at  Garnett,  Kans.,  and  received  his 
higher  education  at  the  University  of  Kansas,  graduating  with  the  degree  of  Bachelor 
of  Arts. 

He  began  his  railroad  career  in  1924  as  an  assistant  chemist  in  Water  Supply  De- 
partment of  the  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  at  Huntington,  W.  Va.,  and  by  January  1, 
1930,  had  been  promoted  to  the  position  of  chief  chemist.  Mr.  Stimmel  held  this  position 
until  August  1,  1933,  when  he  transferred  to  the  New  York,  Chicago  &  St.  Louis, 
where  he  served  as  chief  chemist,  superintendent  of  water  service,  and  engineer  of  test 
and  water  service  until  he  retired  on  June  12,  1962. 

He  is  survived  by  two  daughters,  Mrs.  Nancy  Staley  and  Mrs.  Dorothy  Davis,  and 
a    son,   Robert   M.  Stimmel,  Jr. 

Mr.  Stimmel  joined  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association  in  1929  and 
became  a  member  of  Committee  13  that  same  year.  He  was  very  active  in  committee 
work  and  served  as  chairman  of  many  subcommittees  during  the  33  years  he  had  been 
a  member.  He  will  be  missed  and  remembered  by  his  associates  and  friends  for  his 
willingness  to   accept   an  assignment  and  his   friendliness. 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services  141 


Report  on  Assignment   1 

Revision  of  Manual 

T.  A.  Tennvson   (chairman,  subcommittee).  \V.  F.  Arksey,  D.  E.  Drake,  T.  L.  Hendrix. 
A.  W.  Johnson,  F.  O.  Klemstine,  D.  C.  Teal,  C.  B.  Voitelle. 

Your  committee  has  continued  its  review  of  the  Manual  and  at  this  time  submits 
the   following   recommendations   for  adoption: 

Page   13-8-1 

WATER  FOR  DRINKING  PURPOSES 

Reapprove    with   the  following   revisions: 

To   bring  the   text   in   line  with   current   practice,   revise  Par.    1    to   read  as  follows: 

1.  Interstate  Quarantine  Regulations,  latest  revision,  which  includes  revised  Drink- 
ing  Water  Standards,  issued  by  the  Department  of  Health,  Education  and  Welfare, 
provide  that  the  Surgeon  General  of  the  United  States  Public  Health  Service  shall 
approve  the  use  of  water  furnished  by  railways  on  cars  in  interstate  traffic  if,  (1)  the 
water  supply  at  the  watering  point  meets  prescribed  standards  of  sanitary  quality  as 
set  forth  in  the  Drinking  Water  Standards,  and  if  (2)  methods  of  and  facilities  for 
delivery  of  such  water  to  the  conveyance  and  the  sanitary  conditions  surrounding  such 
delivery  prevent  the  introduction,  transmission  or  spread  of  communicable  diseases.  The 
Surgeon  General  may  base  his  approval  or  disapproval  of  a  watering  point  upon  results 
of  investigations  made  by  representatives  of  state  departments  of  health  or  of  the  health 
authorities  of  contiguous  foreign  nations.  Further,  if  a  watering  point  has  not  been 
approved,  the  Surgeon  General  may  permit  the  temporary  use  under  such  conditions  as, 
in  his  judgment,  are  necessary  to  prevent  the  introduction,  transmission  or  spread  of 
communicable  diseases.  Upon  request  by  the  Surgeon  General,  operators  of  conveyance 
shall  provide  information  as  to  watering  points  used  by  them. 

Add  new  Pars.  4  and  5   to  read  as  follows: 

4.  The  latest  edition  of  United  States  Public  Health  Service  handbook  entitled 
"Railroad  Servicing  Areas"  sets  up  standards  of  sanitary  practice  intended  for  use  as 
a  guide  by  (1)  persons  who  design  and  operate  railroad  servicing  equipment,  and 
health  department  representatives  and  others  who  make  periodic  investigations  or  inspec- 
tions of  facilities  and  operations  in  servicing  areas.  The  standards  arc  established  with 
a  view  to  conforming  to  the  intent  of  the  interstate  Quarantine  Regulations.  This  is  one 
of  a  set  of  three  handbooks  on  railroad  sanitation  standards  prepared  by  the  United 
States   Public    Health    Service. 

5.  Water  supplies  and  procedures  which  are  in  compliance  with   interstate  Quaran 
tine  Regulations  will  also  satisfy   requirements  of  the  various  state  health  departments 
for  water  to  be  used  on  passenger  cars  in   intrastate  traffic    a-  well  a-  drinking  water 
for  locomotives  and  cabooses. 

Add  "References"  as  follows: 

REFERENi  ES 

Railroad   Servicing   Area-,    Public    Health    Service   Publication   No.   <>(>.  available   from 

Supt.  of  Document-.  V    S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  -,:;.  D.  ('.  price 

20  cent- 
Dining   Cars   in   Operation.   Public    Health   Service   Publication    No    83,   available    from 

Supt.  of  Document-,  i     -    Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  .  ;.  I>   C,  pria 

15  cents. 


142 Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

Railroad  Passenger  Car  Construction,  Public  Health  Service  Publication  No.  95,  avail- 
able from  Supt.  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25, 
D.  C,  price  15  cents. 

Pages   13-8-2  to   13-8-21,  incl. 

RAILWAY  SEWAGE  DISPOSAL  FACILITIES 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revisions: 

Pages  13-8-2  and  13-8-3:  Delete  Art.  3,  Sec.  B,  Use  of  Imhoff  Tank,  and  Art.  4, 
Sec.  B,  Disposal  by  Other  Means,  substituting  therefor  the  following  new  Art.  3. 

3.  Disposal  by  Other  Means 

For  larger  sewage  flows,  the  use  of  Imhoff  tanks,  extended  aeration  systems,  pack- 
age sewage  treatment  plants  or  sewage  lagoons  may  be   employed. 

Pages  13-8-5  to  13-8-7,  incl.:  Delete  the  entire  text  under  Sec.  E.  Design  of  Septic 
Tanks,  including  Fig.   2   on   page   13-8-6,  substituting  therefor  the  following  new  text: 

E.  DESIGN  OF  SEPTIC  TANKS 

Septic  tank  systems  should  be  designed  in  accordance  with  local  regulations,  which 
generally  are  derived  from  recommendations  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  Health,  Edu- 
cation and  Welfare. 

Pages  13-8-7  to  13-8-9,  incl.:  Delete  in  their  entirety  Sec.  F.  Multi-Compartment 
Septic  Tanks,  and  Sec.  G.  Septic  Tanks  with  Automatic  Siphons,  including  Fig.  3  on 
page  13-8-8. 

Page  13-8-9,  Sec.  H — Maintenance  of  Septic  Tanks:  Change  the  letter  designation 
of  this  Section  from  H  to  F. 

Pages  13-8-9  to  13-8-19,  incl.:  Delete  in  their  entirety  the  following  sections:  Sec. 
I — Distribution  Boxes,  Sec.  J — Absorption  Fields,  Sec.  K — Subsurface  Sand  Fillers,  Sec. 
L — Surface  Sand  Fillers,  and  M — Other  Treatment  of  Effluent,  including  Figs.  4  to 
10,  incl. 

Page  13-8-19,  Sec.  N — Imhoff  Tanks:  Change  letter  designation  of  this  Section 
from  N  to  G. 

Page  13-8-20,  Fig.  11:   Change  figure  number  from   11  to  2. 
Add  new  Sec.  H  as  follows: 

H.  PACKAGE-TYPE  SEWAGE  DISPOSAL  SYSTEMS 

Investigation    of    commercially    available    package-type   sewage    disposal    systems    is 
recommended  for  new  installations.  These  are  adaptable  to  a  wide  variety  of  situations. 
Add  new  Sec.  I  as  follows: 

I.  LAGOONS 

Under  favorable  conditions  lagoons,  sometimes  known  as  oxidation  ponds,  can  be 
successfully  used  for  treatment  of  both  industrial  and  sanitary  wastes.  The  basic  criteria 
as  to  whether  lagoon  treatment  can  be  used  are:  (1)  whether  lagooning  will  provide 
satisfactory  treatment  for  the  type  of  waste  involved,  and  (2)  whether  sufficient  open 
space  with  suitable  terrain  is,  or  can  be  made  available. 

It  is  obvious  that  stabilization  lagoons  must  be  located  some  distance  away  from 
existing  or  future  residential  or  human  work  areas.  To  be  economically  feasible,  use  of 


Water,   Oil   and    Sanitation    Services 143 

this  method  depends  on  cheap  land,  convenient  open  spaces,  and  a  gently  sloping  ter- 
rain so  that  length  and  depth  of  sewers  will  not  become  excessive.  In  this  connection 
the  cost  of  land,  if  necessary  to  purchase  it,  or  its  value  for  industrial  purposes,  together 
with  the  cost  of  installing  sewer  lines  to  it  and  in  some  cases  sewage  pumps,  could 
amount  to  more  than  the  cost  of  the  more  conventional  disposal  facilities. 

The  lagoon  method  of  sewage  treatment  depends  on  action  by  various  forms  of 
organic  life  which  require  oxygen  and  sunlight  to  thrive.  It  has  been  approved  for  use 
by  small  municipalities  and  residential  subdivisions.  In  general,  such  lagoons  should 
be  shallow  enough  to  permit  penetration  by  sunlight,  and  they  should  be  kept  free  of 
vegetation.  Fencing,  as  well  as  posting  of  warning  signs,  is  required. 

Advice  concerning  specifications  for  sewage  disposal  lagoons  is  readily  obtainable 
from  local  or  state  public  health  authorities. 

REFERENCES 

Manual  of  Septic  Tank  Practice,  Public  Health  Service  Publication  No.  526,  available 
from  Supt.  of  Documents,  U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C, 
price  35  cents. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Corrosion  Prevention  in  Hot  and  Cold  Water   Systems 

J.  J.  Dwyer  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  C.  Archambeault,  M.  V.  Biar,  W.  E.  Bil- 
lingsley,  T.  W.  Brown,  P.  J.  Calza,  C.  E.  DeGeer,  A.  E.  Dulik,  G.  F.  Metzdorf, 
J.  P.  Rodger,  A.  G.  Tompkins. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  final  report  on  Assignment  2  with  the  recom- 
mendation that  it  be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual  at  the  end  of  Part  4 — Water 
Treatment. 

CORROSION   PREVENTION   IN   POTABLE   HOT-WATER   SYSTEMS 

Corrosion  damage  in  potable  water  systems  in  the  past  generally  has  been  tol- 
erated, replacements  in  kind  being  routine  following  failures  of  piping  and  tanks.  This 
attitude  was  accepted  because:  (1)  most  protective  chemicals  imparted  an  undesirable 
taste  to  the  water,  (2)  special  equipment  would  be  required  to  applj  the  treatment, 
and  (3)  chemical  control  would  be  required  to  insure  thai  prescribed  limits  <>l  impuri- 
ties would  not  be  exceeded.  In  recent  years,  due  to  rising  costs  for  both  materials  and 
labor,  a  new  evaluation  of  the  expense  of  such  failures  has  become  necessary. 

Copper  water  tube  has  now  practically  replaced  galvanized  iron  in  the  potable 
water  system  field,  particularly  in  the  smaller  pipe  sizes.  Copper  costs  more  than  iron 
initially,  hut  lasts  much  longer  under  suitable  conditions;  ii  is  simpler  t<>  install,  reducing 
labor  costs;  and  it  does  nol  plug  with  deposits  near!)  as  fast  as  iron  pipe.  Under  these 
conditions  copper  becomes  cheaper,  in  the  long  run,  than  galvanized  pipe. 

There  are  certain  conditions,  however,  under  which  copper  tube  maj  fail  faster  than 
iron  pipe.  Corrosion  of  copper  water  tube  is  accelerated  by;  (1)  increased  dissolved 
oxygen,  (2)  increased  carbon  dioxide,  (3)  increased  temperature,  (4)  increased  velocity, 
and  (5)  soft  water.  Zeolite-softened  or  zero-hardness  water  has  been  found  t<>  have  ■< 
more  rapid  destructive  effect  <>n  new  copper  tube  than  old  tubing  previous]]    used   for 

Bull.  574 


144 Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

hard  water;  a  reason  is  that  such  old  tube  is  protected  by  a  film  of  adherent  deposit,1 
while  the  new  tube  has  no  such  interior  coating.  Heat  exchanger  failures  have  likewise 
been  aggravated  by:  (1)  aggressive  water,  (2)  high  temperatures,  and  (3)  high 
velocities. 

Another  cause  of  failures  in  potable  hot  water  systems  by  corrosion  is  the  galvanic 
couple.  Whenever  two  dissimilar  metals,  such  as  copper  water  tube  and  a  galvanized 
water  tank  are  connected  and  thereby  placed  in  electrical  contact  with  each  other,  a 
current  flows.  The  water  flowing  in  or  out  of  the  tank  is  the  electrolyte.  The  current 
produced  tends  to  cause  one  of  the  metals  to  go  into  solution  by  corrosion.  The  rate 
of  corrosion  is  dependent  upon  several  factors,  such  as:  (1)  the  particular  metals  present, 
(2)  the  temperature,  (3)  the  substances  dissolved  in  the  water,  and  (4)  its  conductivity. 
A  solution  to  this  problem  would  be  to  use  copper  tube  with  a  copper  or  monel  tank, 
and  galvanized  pipe  with  a  galvanized  tank. 

In  spite  of  the  disadvantages  mentioned,  it  sometimes  becomes  necessary  to  use 
components  of  two  or  more  different  metals  or  alloys  in  a  potable  hot  water  system. 
Corrosion  problems  so  introduced  can  be  diminished  by  the  use  of  rubber  or  plastic 
couplings,  so-called  dielectric  unions,  bushings,  nipples,  or  gaskets  placed  between  the 
two  different  metals  so  as  to  separate  them  electrically.  This  will  tend  to  reduce  greatly 
the  rate  of  corrosion  at  critical  points  at  which  dissimilar  metals  are  close  together  in 
the  system.  It  should  be  noted,  however,  that  a  dielectric  union  or  other  insulator  will 
not  stop  or  greatly  mitigate  corrosion  if  the  water  has  a  substantial  amount  of  copper 
dissolved  in  it.  The  copper  ions  are  believed  to  plate  out  as  metallic  copper  on  galvan- 
ized surfaces,  forming  miniature  galvanic  cells  which  produce  a  corrosive  action.  Water 
containing  ammonia  or  carbon  dioxide  is  very  prone  to  cause  any  copper  in  the  system 
to  go  into  solution  and  form  copper  ions. 

A  method  of  preventing  corrosion  in  potable  hot  water  tanks  is  the  utilization  of 
magnesium  anodes.  The  magnesium  anode  must  be  properly  sized  and  carefully  spaced 
to  obtain  a  reasonably  uniform  current  density  throughout  the  tank  interior  surface. 
It  is  usually  connected  to  the  shell  through  a  high  resistance  which  limits  the  current 
flow,  to  prevent  the  anode  from  being  consumed  more  rapidly  than  necessary.  It  is  a 
valuable  accessory  in  a  vitreous-enameled  or  "glass-lined"  steel  tank  because  of  the 
small  amount  of  actual  bare  metal  exposed  in  such  a  tank.  Such  anodes  are  normally 
effective  for  use  in  water  supplies  with  mineral  content  from  120  ppm  upwards.  They 
do  not  provide  adequate  protection  in  very  pure  soft  water,  due  to  the  low  conductivity, 
in  which  case  driven  or  impressed  current  anodes  are  required.  Ordinary  galvanized 
steel  tanks  may  be  protected  by  an  anode  plus  a  resistor  to  control  current  flow,  but 
as  the  size  of  the  tank  is  increased,  the  sacrificial  anode  method  becomes  uneconomical, 
and  impressed  current  anodes  should  be  used.  This  recommendation  applies  particularly 
in  commercial  or  industrial-size  hot-water  tanks.  With  the  impressed  current  installa- 
tion, using  a  mild  iron  anode  suspended  in  the  center  and  equidistant  from  the  tank 
walls,  an  average  current  density  of  6.65  milli-amp/sq  ft  has  been  found  to  furnish 
adequate  protection  against  corrosion  with  most  water  supplies.2 

Dissolved  corrosive  gases  have  been  mentioned  as  a  cause  of  hot-water  system  cor- 
rosion. A  means  of  diminishing  the  dissolved  gas  content  of  water  is  the  mechanical 
degasifier  or  deaerator.  Deaeration  is  accomplished  by  dividing  the  water  into  small  par- 
ticles or  thin  films,  thus  facilitating  gas  removal.  A  vacuum  should  be  maintained  on 


1  How  Temperature,  Velocity  of  Potable  Water  Affect  Corrosion  of  Copper  and  Its  Alloys",  by 
Malvern    F.   Obrecht,    PhD,   and   Laurence  L.   Quill,    PhD,   Michigan   State  University. 

3  "Corrosion  Problems  In  Hot  Water  Tanks",  by  J.  Van  Bladeren,  corrosion  engineer,  Northwest 
Natural   Gas   Company,   Portland,  Ore. 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 145 

the  deaerator  corresponding  to  the  boiling  pressure  for  the  water  temperature  involved. 
If  necessary  to  reach  extremely  low  gas  concentrations,  multi-stage  units  can  be  em- 
ployed. Deaeration  can  lower  incoming  concentrations  of  oxygen  from  the  range  6-12 
ppm  to  1-2  ppm,  and  can  lower  carbon  dioxide  from  around  40  ppm  to  5-7  ppm,  or 
reductions  of  up  to  80  percent  for  these  two  gases.  Corrosion  losses  in  nondeaerated 
soft  water  at  high  temperatures  (above  170  deg  F)  and  high  velocities  (above  8  ft  per 
sec)  may  be  up  to  50  percent  higher  than  in  deaerated  water.  Deaerators  for  potable 
hot-water  supply  systems  are  designed  mainly  for  use  in  large  buildings  such  as  hospi- 
tals and  hotels.  Where  deaerators  might  not  be  practical,  the  application  of  simple  air- 
release  valves  to  water  heaters,  hot-water  tanks,  and  other  high  points  in  the  hot-water 
system  where  gases  collect,  may  reduce  the  corrosive  gas  content  of  the  water. 

The  influence  of  pressure  must  not  be  overlooked.  The  use  of  a  pneumatic  tank  to 
increase  pressure  can  increase  the  oxygen  content  of  the  water  300  percent,  and  likewise, 
its  corrosive   effect. 

Uniform  temperature  control  in  hot-water  systems  also  is  very  important.  Galva- 
nizing is  not  recommended  for  hot-water  lines  at  temperatures  above  140  deg  F.  Above 
this  temperature  zinc  may  reverse  its  potential  and  begin  to  accelerate  the  corrosion  of 
iron  at  any  holidays  which  exist."  At  lower  temperatures  zinc  is  sacrificial  and  provides 
cathodic  protection  for  the  iron  or  steel  pipe.  Copper  tube  is  excellent  for  temperatures 
not  exceeding  140  deg  F.  For  higher  temperature  water,  Admiralty  tube  (approximate 
composition  71  percent  copper,  1  percent  tin,  28  percent  zinc,  0.06  percent  arsenic)  at  a 
cost  of  about  5  percent  over  copper,  may  be  used.  For  more  severe  service,  with  both 
high  temperatures  and  high  velocities,  90/10  cupro-nickel  alloy,  at  about  65  percent  over 
cost  of  copper,  is  recommended.1 

Temperatures  above  140  deg  F  present  the  following  disadvantages:  (1)  corrosive- 
ness  increases  rapidly  (doubles  approximately  each  17  deg  rise,  up  to  about  180  deg), 
(2)  reversal  of  potential  may  occur  in  galvanized  pipe,  and  accelerated  attack  may  take 
place  at  locations  where  galvanizing  has  been  lost,  (3)  dezincification  of  brass  pipe  is 
accelerated,  (4)  pinhole  pitting  in  copper  tube  may  be  expected,  and  (5)  expansion  and 
contraction  strains  are  magnified,  and  contribute  to  leaks  at  screwed  fittings.  Where 
temperatures  exceeding  140  deg  F  are  required  for  a  specific  use,  such  as  180-190  deg 
for  dishwashing,  a  booster  heater  close  to  the  point  of  use  must  be  provided,  and  piping 
from  this  booster  to  the  point  of  use  must  be  at  least  Admiralty  tube,  and  preferably 
should   be  90/10  cupro-nickel   alloy. 

One  of  the  suggested  chemical  methods  of  protecting  potable  hot-water  systems  is 
the  Saturation  Index  (carbonate  balance)  system  of  treatment,  which  aims  at  main- 
taining a  protective  layer  of  calcium  carbonate  on  the  inside  surface  of  the  pipe  or 
container.  The  Saturation  Index  is  an  indication  of  the  tendencj  for  a  calcium  car- 
bonate scale  to  be  deposited.  Two  possible  disadvantages  to  this  method  are:  (1)  that 
it  requires  constant  attention  and  analyses  to  control  the  amount  of  calcium  carbonate 
and  the  pH,  and  (2)  a  carbonate  balance  based  on  cold  water  will  deposil  calcium  car- 
bonate scale  in  hot  water;  if  the  treatment  is  sel  up  on  hot  water,  it  will  not  be  Satis 
factory  on  cold  water.  This  treatment  system  cannot  be  used  on  waters  softened  to  rero 
hardness.* 

Two  straight  chemical  treatments  an-  used  without  injuring  tin  water  for  domestic 
use.  One  of  these  is  sodium  silicate,  which  has  been  used  since  1920  to  protect  iron, 
lead,  and  brass  water  pipe.  The  dosage  for  the  initial  month  is  general!}    12  to  16  ppm 


s  T.  F.  Wilkes,  37S  Merchandise   Mart    Plaza,  Chicagi 

*See  Treatment  of  Water  for  Cooling  Purposes  Other  than  Engines,  Part    i.  Chapter   IJ 


146        Water,    Oil   and    Sanitation    Services 

as  silica,  after  which  it  may  be  reduced  to  8  ppm,  or  even  lower.  This  simple  treatment 
may  be  us2d  to  retard  solution  of  copper  by  regulating  the  silicate  to  give  the  water  a 
pH  of  about  eight.  The  common  method  of  application  is  the  by-pass  feeder,  but 
proportioning   pumps    could   be   used   as  well. 

In  general,  three  types  of  silicates  are  used  for  the  inhibition  of  corrosion  in 
potable  waters.  They  have  Na20/Si0,.  percentage  compositions  of  8.9/28.7,  18.0/36.0, 
and  14.7/29.4.5  The  first  is  used  for  waters  with  a  pH  above  6,  while  the  latter  two 
are  for  waters  with  pH  of  6  or  below.  The  latter  two  are  basically  the  same  silicates, 
differing  in  concentration  and  in  viscosity.  For  hot  water  only,  sodium  silicate  glass, 
a  slowly  dissolving  solid,  may  be  used.  The  protection  afforded  by  silicate  treatment  is 
due  to  a  film  which  forms  on  the  inside  surface  of  the  pipe.  It  is  not  a  scale  and  is 
invisible  when  the  pipe  is  wet.  The  thickness  of  this  film  is  about  that  of  a  colloid. 
If  the  silicate  feed  is  discontinued,  the  film  gradually  disappears  and  the  corrosion  will 
begin  again— but  there  is  a  considerable  lag,  just  as  there  was  in  building  up  the  film 
initially.  Sodium  silicate  treatment  may  provide  90  percent  protection  or  better.  It  should 
be  noted  that  protection  with  silicates  is  best  in  water  below  pH  7,  is  satisfactory  in 
the  range  7  to  8,  and  that  silica  films  do  not  form  readily  at  pH  above  8.5,  and  will 
dissolve  rapidly  at  pH  of  9.5  and  above. 

Sodium  metaphosphate  glass  has  proved  to  be  highly  useful  in  preventing  the  for- 
mation of  scale  deposits  due  to  excess  calcium  and  magnesium  salts  in  water,  utilizing 
a  dosage  of  only  2  to  5  ppm.  Higher  dosages  of  8  to  10  ppm  have  materially  retarded 
corrosion  when  flow  rate  in  pipes  has  been  1  ft  per  sec  or  higher.  It  should  be  noted 
that  the  water  must  be  circulated  to  get  benefits  from  polyphosphates;  they  do  not 
protect  in  stagnant  systems.  Another  requirement  is  that  calcium  must  be  present.  Thus, 
calcium  is  built  into  some  of  the  slowly  dissolving  metaphosphate  glasses.  A  mixture 
of  sodium  metaphosphate  glass  and  sodium  silicate  fed  together  is  reported  to  give 
better  protection  to   potable  water  systems,   both  hot  and   cold,  than  either  separately. 

SUMMARY 

Causes  of  Hot-Water-System   Corrosion 

1.  Corrosive  dissolved   gases,  such  as  carbon   dinxide,   oxygen,   hydrogen  sulfide,   or 
ammonia. 

2.  Dissolved  copper. 

3.  High  temperature. 

4.  High  velocity,  turbulence. 

5.  Galvanic  couples. 

6.  Soft  water. 

Remedies  for  Potable  Hot-Water-System  Corrosion 

1.  Use  deaerators  where  practicable. 

2.  Use  air  release  valves  at  high  points  in  system. 

3.  Do  not  use  pneumatic  tanks  in  hot-water  systems. 

4.  Use  Type  K  copper  tube  for  temperatures  up  to   140  deg  F. 

5.  Confine  temperatures  to  the  range  130-140  deg  F. 

6.  Where  higher  temperatures  are  required,  use  90/10  cupro-nickel  alloy. 

fTxhese   are   sometimes   referred   to   as  N,    C   and   D   silicates,   respectively,   and   also    as    Grade   F, 
No.  6,   and  No.   22,  in  the  same  order. 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services  147 


7.  Confine  velocities  to  5  ft  per  sec,  preferably  4  ft  per  sec. 

8.  Insulate  galvanic  couples. 

9.  Use   cathodic   protection   in   hot    water   tanks    when   practicable. 
10.  Use  appropriate  chemical  treatment.  This  may  be: 

(a)  Carbonate  balance  system. 

(b)  Sodium  silicate. 

(c)  Sodium  metaphosphate. 

(d)  Mixture  of  (b)   and   (c). 

(e)  pH  adjustment.' 

(f)  Dealkalization." 

aSee  AREA   Bulletin    560,   Vol.   62,   November   1960,  page  237. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

Design,  Construction  and  Operation  of  Coach-Servicing 

Facilities  to   Comply  With   Regulations  of  U.   S. 

Public    Health    Service 

C.  F.  Muelder  (chairman,  subcommittee),  H.  E.  Graham,  J.  M.  Bates,  I.  C  Brown, 
T.  W.  Brown,  P.  J.  Calza,  C.  E.  De  Geer,  A.  W.  Johnson,  J.  C.  Roberts,  J.  P. 
Rodger,   F.   M.   Walters,   J.   E.   Wiggins,   Jr. 

Under  this  assignment  your  committee  reports  information  on  new  regulations  and 
standards  pertaining  to  coach  servicing  and  sanitation  facilities  regulated  by  the  U.  S. 
Public  Health   Service.  The  following  information  was  developed  during  the  past  year. 

1.  A  new  Food  Service  Sanitation  Manual  was  released  in  July  1962  by  the  Public 
Health  Service.  It  is  designated  as  Public  Health  Service  Publication  No.  934.  It  super- 
sedes the  1959  Revision,  Handbook  on  Sanitation  of  Dining  Cars  in  Operation.  The  new 
manual  is  not  restricted  to  railroad  facilities  but  covers  all  phases  of  food  service  and 
sanitation  regulated  by  the  Public  Health  Service.  It  applies  to  other  forms  of  trans- 
portation and  those  engaged  in  interstate  commerce. 

2.  The  Public  Health  Service  is  now  preparing  a  new  manual  which  will  supersede 
the  Handbook  on  Sanitation  of  Railroad  Servicing  Areas,  publication  No.  66.  Publica- 
tion date  has  not  been  announced. 

3.  There  have  been  no  new  developments  or  requirements  in  the  design,  construi 
tion,  or  operation  of  railroad  coach  servicing  facilities.  Prime  empha^iv  on  the  part  of 
governmental  authorities  has  been  shifting  from  equipment  requirements  to  inspection 
of  the  final  facility  While  regulations  on  equipment  have  not  been  relaxed  or  changed, 
major  inspection  efforts  are  being  put  on  the  drinking  water,  food,  and  services  .i-  it  i- 
offered  and  made  available  to  the  public.  Any  unacceptable  conditions  found  resull  in 
immediate  complaint  and  request  to  take  the  equipment  or  fatilitj  out  ol  service  until 
the  defects  are  corrected. 


H8 Water,   Oil   and    Sanitation    Services 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Cathodic  Protection  of  Pipelines  and  Steel  Storage  Tanks 

Collaborating  with  Committee   18 

VV.  F.  Arksey  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  E.  Dulik,  T.  I.  Gray,  T.  L.  Hendrix,  H.  M. 
Hoffmeister,  F.  O.  Klemstine,  C.  F.  Muelder,  E.  T.  Myers. 

The  report  for  this  year  concludes  a  study  begun  in  1956.  The  first  report,  in  1957, 
covered  Introduction  to  Cathcdic  Protection,  and  Cathodic  Protection  Technical  Prac- 
tices. The  second  report,  in  1959,  covered  Instrumentation.  The  third  report,  in  1961, 
covered  Design  of  Cathodic  Protection  System  for  Pipelines.  This  year's  report  gives  a 
practical  example  of  the  application  of  cathodic  protection  to  underground  tanks  and 
is  submitted  as  information. 

E.  PRACTICAL  APPLICATION 

A  system  of  cathcdic  protection  was  installed  on  two  underground  diesel  fuel  oil 
tanks,  each  11  ft  in  diameter  and  48  ft  long,  to  protect  them  from  corrosion.  The  tanks 
are  insulated  from  all  piping,  and  are  placed  with  2  ft  of  ground  cover  in  a  primarily 
sandy  soil  having  ground  water  close  to  the  bottom  of  the  tanks. 

Seven  magnesium  anodes  weighing  50  lb  each  were  installed  as  shown  in  Fig.  1. 
Leads  from  the  ancdes  were  brought  to  terminal  boxes  where  they  were  connected  to 
tank  leads.  The  terminal  boxes  are  short  lengths  of  4-in  fiber  pipe  buried  vertically  in 
the  ground  and  are  equipped  with  metal  caps  to  keep  the  boxes  dry  and  to  allow  access 
for  making  tests.  The  tank  leads  were  welded  to  the  tank  shells  by  thermit-type  welds. 
Tanks  Nos.  1  and  2  were  both  connected  to  anode  No.  6. 

To  allow  the  electrical  conditions  in  the  soil  to  stabilize,  the  tests  described  below 
were  not  made  until  the  system  had  been  in  service  for  10  months. 

Soils  resistance  measurements  using  the  four-pin  method  were  made,  spacing  the 
pins  11  ft  and  5  ft  6  in  apart,  respectively,  for  the  two  tests.  The  differences  in  results 
show  variations  in  the  soil  at  depths  corresponding  to  the  spacing  of  the  pins. 

Pins  11  Ft  Apart 
£  =  2.35  volts      7=1.35  milli-amperes 
Resistance  =  R  —  2a  X  E/I 

where  R  =  resistivity  in  ohm  —  centimeters 
a  =  spacing  in  centimeters 

E  =  measured  potential  between  two  inner  terminals 
/=  current  between  two  inner  terminals 

Calculation  R  =  (2  X  H-0  X  12  X  2.54)  X  2.35 
0.00135 
R  =  1,166,000  ohm-cm 

Pins  5  Ft  6  In  Apart 
£=1.86   volts  7=2.30  milli-amperes 

Calculation  R  =  (2  X  5-5  X  12  X  2.54)  X  1-86 
0.0023 
R  =  273,000  ohm-cm 
The  resistances  obtained  were  very   high  and  the  current  produced  by  each  anode 
correspondingly   low.   However,    results   of   the  entire   test   will  illustrate   procedure  and 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 


149 


serve  as  a  future  guide.  Fortunately,  these  tanks  are  located   where  frequent   tests  can 
be  run   for  additional  information  and   checks. 

Readings  showing  electrical  characteristics  of  each  anode  are  shown  below: 

Table  1 


Aim,l,   No.  (imi  'l'u)„  Backfill 

'  'urrent 
M  Mi-amps 

Potential 
Volts 

.1  node 
Resistance 
in  Ohms 

'  'aU  ulated 

Life  of   l  nodi 

in   Years 

1 

Prepacked..   

Wet  mix   . 

18.il 
58.  <> 
84.0 
5 1  . 5 
23 . 5 
3 1  .  •"> 
44.0 

0.71 

0.90 

0.94 

0 . 8.">r» 

0.935 

0.955 

0.975 

38.2 

1 5 .  1 
LI.  2 
L6.6 
39.8 
30.3 
22 .  1 

184 
58.5 

3 

40.8 

1 

66.5 

S 

Dr,-  mix._   ___ 

l  16 

6 

109 

7 

79 

Method  of  Calculating  Life  of  Anodes 

Magnesium  anodes  are  estimated  to  produce  600  amp  hr  per  lb  of  metal  consumed. 
8760 


600  amp  hr/lb 
Wt  of  anodes  50  lb 
Life  =      50X1 


600 


=  14.6  lb/amp  hr 


50 


40.8  vears,  anode  No.  3 


14.6  amp         14.6  X  0.0S4 

Table  1  shows  the  life  to  be  expected  for  the  anodes.  These  anodes  are  larger  than 
necessary  for  reasonable  life.  Probably  9-  or  1 7-lb  anodes  spaced  6  or  8  to  a  tank 
would  be  more  economical  and  give  better  protection.  The  lower  potentials  observed 
between  anodes  would  be  raised,  giving  better  overall  protection. 

Results  in  Table  1  indicate  very  graphically  the  effect  of  the  various  types  of  back- 
fill material  in  a  high-resistance  soil.  Those  with  wet  mix  produced  much  higher  currents 
and  had  lower  resistance,  but  have  a  shorter  life. 

Fig.  1  shows  the  tank-to-soil  potential  as  measured  with  a  copper-copper  sulfate 
electrode  and  a  multi-combination  meter  using  the  potentiometer  circuit.*  Readings 
were  taken  at  5-ft  intervals  to  show  variation  from  points  over  the  tank  to  points 
rather  remote.  Note  that  the  potential  close  to  the  anode  is  considerably  higher  than  at 
some  distance  away  and  that  readings  directly  over  the  tank  are  lowest.  The  desired 
minimum  potential  of  0.85  was  obtained  at   remote  distances  from  the  tank.-. 

Results  described  so  far  were  sent  to  C.  A.  Erickson,  who  gave  your  committee  a 
very  excellent  talk  several  years  ago,  for  his  comments.  He  made  a  suggestion  that  the 
anodes  be  disconnected  and  tank-to-soil  potentials  be  taken  directlj  over  the  centei 
line  of  the  tanks  to  compare  with  the  readings  shown  on  Kit:,  l.  He  advised  thai  thej 
endeavor  to  obtain  an  increase  of  0.30  v  on  a  well  coated  structure,  but  o.io  v  inci 
was  about  all  that  could  be  expected  from  a  poorrj   coated  tank. 

Accordingly,  readings  with  anodes  disconnected  were  taken  at  S  it  intervals  with 
the  following  results   (readinu  from  I'M    to   right   en  Fig.   1): 

•  See  Proceedings,  Vol.  60,  1959,  page  273. 


150 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 


Table  2   (Based  on  Fig.  1) 


Center  Line  Tank  No.  1 

Anodes  connected.  _ 
Anodes  disconnected 

0.64 

End  tank 

0.59 

0.54 

0.46" 

0.58 
0.56 

0.52 
0.46 

0.52     0.58     0.60     0.56 
0.47     0.52     0.49     0.52 

Center  Line  Tank  No.  2 

0.55 
0.50 

0.53 
0.49 

End  tank 

0.64 
0.56 

0.68 
0.58 

0.67 
0.58 

0.59 
0.56 

0.65 
0.61 

0.66 
0.63 

0.60 
0.64 

0.57 
0.63 

0.59 
0.61 

0.51 
0.50 

0.51 
0.44 

0.49 
0.47 

End  tank 

0.89 

0.58 

Readings  indicate  that  less  than  0.10  v  change  is  obtained  with  a  high-resistance 
soil  which  will  cause  little  corrosion  under  soil  moistures  present  during  the  summer 
months  when  the  tests  were  made.  It  is  believed  that  the  odd  readings  on  tank  No.  2 
were  caused  by  oil  spillage  between  the  first  and  second  readings- 
Results  of  the  tests  on  the  installation  described  illustrate  how  a  cathodic  protec- 
tion system  works.  The  soil  resistance  here  was  very  high,  therefore,  not  too  much 
corrosion  would  take  place  without  the  use  of  the  system.  However,  experience  obtained 
on  this  test  will  enable  better  design  of  future  installations  in  low-resistance  soils  where 
corrosive  conditions  would  be  more  acute. 

The     following    procedure    is    recommended    for    designing    a    cathodic    protection 
system  for  underground  tanks: 

(1)  Determine  soil  resistance  by  the  four-pin,  soils-box,  or  other  suitable  method. 

(2)  Read  tank-to-soil  potentials  every  5  ft  over  center  of  tank. 

(3)  Select  an  anode  that  will  have  IS  years  of  life.  (Tables  are  available  from 
manufacturers  of  anodes  showing  current  output  and  life  expectancy  of 
various  types  and  sizes  of  anodes  in  soils  of  varying  resistances.) 

(4)  Install  six  or  eight  anodes  per  tank  depending  on  length  of  tank. 

(5)  After  anodes  have  been  in  service  for  three  weeks  to  a  month  make  readings 
similar  to  those  shown  in  Table  1  and  2  to  see  what  results  are  being  ob- 
tained, for  it  may  be  found  that  more  anodes  are  required.  Experience  gained 
with  each   installation  will  prove  very  beneficial  in  later  designs. 


REFERENCES 

Notes  on  backfill  for  anodes — Magnesium  Anodes  for  Cathodic  Protection,  by  The  Dow 
Chemical  Company. 

Notes  on  selecting  size  of  anode — High  Current  Magnesium  Anodes  For  Corrosion  Con- 
trol, by  Standard  Magnesium  Corporation. 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 


151 


n 

o 

in 

• 

2 

UJ 

D 

O 

9) 

Z 

Ifi 

r- 

0> 

io 

(1 

o 

00 

on 

in 

"X 

T 

m 

CO 

co 

OD 

O 

z 

oo 

I 

oo 

CD 

■ 

X 

GO 

00 

00 

00 

«n 

CO 

^ 

UJ 

CD 

in 

n 

^ 

00 

q 

o 

* 

m 

in 

00 

CO 

oo 

D 

O 

x 

CO 

r^ 

i 

h-__J_ 

.IB 

— 

1 

CO 

00 

CD 

00 

n 

ff> 

en 

2 
< 

O 

<o 

1 

t 

cn 

1 

^ 

rr; 

T 

r^ 

m 

OD 

CO 

OD 

A 

V 

OD 

r^ 

10 

<T 

IO 

r 

r- 

d 

2 

CD 

CO 

00 

• 

i 

,<. 

h. 

o 

o 

m 

<r 

_ 

<T 

_ 

UJ 
Q 

O 

en 

_ 

00 

CO 

en 

<J> 

T 

CO 

^ 

10 

<S) 

IO 

D 

00 

cn 

OD 

1 

<a 

to 

in 

o 

-g 

*>Q 

cm 

3 

r- 

i? 

^ 

IO 

I 

cn 

00 

00 

CD 

r- 

10  5; 

o 

<I 

on 

cn 

cn 

3 

i 

1 

• 

OD 

10 

<r 

10  5 

91 

o 

t 

t 

t 

O 

CO 

so 

00 

00 

f- 

r^ 

in 

< 

f~ 

CD 

01 

o> 

cn 

0: 

$ 

1 

m 

<T> 

w 

3 

CO 

tu 

io  y 
i    -5 

n_ 

5 

1 
o 

o 

^ 

CO 

00 

ED 

CO 

OD 

OD 

r- 

1- 

CO 

CD 

00 

-j 

1 

rs. 

10 

T 

o 

o> 

ro 

5  "oo 

o 

o 

d 

10 

m 

<r 

T 

CO 

CO 

00 

h- 

CO 

f- 

IS 

r- 

CD 

00 

i    ** 

,-J 

ID 

T 

<T 

fO 

O 

o 

* 

en      Tr- 

ID 

Uj 

n 

0D 

CO 

CD 

00 

i*- 

lO     ^" 

IO 

ID 

f^ 

CD 

CO 

UJ 

Q 

10 

in 

o 

in 

cn 

rO 

0D 

CO 

CD 

00 

B 

X 

z 
< 

^ 

r^ 

a 

IO 

r- 

r^- 

CD 

lf> 

Kl 

IO 

• 

in 

en 

<T 

Ol 

O 

o 

o 

^: 

CO 

X 

I 
o 

CD 

5 

DO 

CO 

N 

r- 

in 

IO 

r- 

r^ 

00 

CO 

o 

jji 

1 

z 

t— 

z 

- 

in 

_ 

v 

_ 

O 

0 

o 

m 

CO 

cu 

OJ 

*5 

< 

< 

o 

r 

cn 

00 

X 

X 

l*- 

r^ 

<£ 

r- 

00 

OD 

1- 

o 

_i 

"- 

X 

_i 

_| 

<T 

in 

0 

in 

00 

t 

on 

B 

^ 

C4 

IO 

*T 

CO 

< 

X 

CO 

X 

r- 

s 

10 

f^ 

CO 

6 

O 

h- 

1 

1 

2 

CO 

cn 

_i 

UJ 

CO 

CO 

s 

o 

X 

7 

m 

2 

T 

93 

01 

UJ 

cn 

o 

S 

o 

Z 

l 

1 

Q 

O 
Z 

z 

3 

10 

CO 

V 

00 

00 

r^- 

to 

■X' 

£ 

IS 

01 
W 

O 

in 
o 

iT 

cn 

OD 

Q 
< 

UJ 

Q 

U. 

Q 

Z 

o 

o 
z 

r- 

10 

1 

h- 

_• 

n 

T 

UJ 

cr 

O 

CO 

00 

OD 

oo 

LlI 

3 

p 

i" 

i 

in 

r 

00 

- 

° 

cn 

CD 

_i 

<r 

x 

00 

<x> 
•r 

00 

en 
B 

3 
Z 
< 

• 

0 

r- 

x 

1 
C 

1 
1 

m 
is 

°   1 

IO     < 

.1 

1 
0 

1 
IS 

s 

7 
B 

fO 
CD 

O 
O) 

in 

CO 

in 

CO 
CO 

<i 

i- 
z 

UJ 

1- 
o 

0. 

2 

CO 

UJ 

or 
o 

CE 
UJ 
Q 

«T 

o 

1 

1 

1 

N 

cn 

o 

Z 
CD 

< 

Z 
3 

CD 

00 

00 

n 

r- 

IS 

.n    Q 

5 

'- 

f^ 

CD 

CO 

cn 

o 

X 

1 
1 

X 

I 

i 

Kl 

IO 

cn 

z 

2 

U. 

O 

OO 

^3- 

CD 

OD 

f- 

P 

1 
1 

*$ 

IS 

1 
1 

'- 

r- 

^ 

r- 

r>- 

< 

X 

T 

r^ 

lO 

N 

OD 

T 

r^ 

n 

IO 

in 

r- 

CO 

1— 

CO 

00 

oo 

s 

r- 

IS 

IS 

^ 

01 

f^ 

r^ 

r- 

o 

o 

| 

1 

O 
Z 

h- 

_l 

£ 

T 

0> 

5 

IS 

* 

c 

IS 

to 

B 

in 
0 

o 
o 

in 
cn 

cn 

_l 

3 
CO 

H 

1 

UJ 

o 

UJ 

Z 

o 

O 

o 

x 

CM 

n 

on 

1 

O 

Cj 

o 

ID 

C*> 

CO 

Q\ 

o 

CO 

op 

OD 

• 

'■ 

IS 

«] 

' 

c 

o 

z 

•: 

S 

OD 

r* 

O 

CO 

00 

X' 

P 

P 

. 

t 

IO 

■ 

• 

a 

o 

00 

O 
00 

cn 

1 

(V, 

s 

152  Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Railway  Waste  Disposal 

F.  0.  Klemstine  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  C.  Archambeault,  J.  M.  Bates,  W.  E. 
Biliingsley,  I.  C.  Brown,  D.  E.  Drake,  G.  F.  Metzdorf,  H.  Parrish,  J.  C.  Roberts, 
R.  M.  Stimmel,  F.  M.  Walters. 

One  phase  of  this  assignment  involves  a  study  of  the  economics  of  railway  waste 
disposal  facilities,  including  such  items  as  installation  cost  (capital  investment),  cost  to 
operate  and  salvage,  if  any   (mostly  fuel  oil). 

Each  system,  because  of  variations  due  to  location,  is  a  problem  in  itself  and  should 
be  dealt  with  individually. 

Before  any  expenditure  is  made  fcr  waste  disposal  facilities,  it  is  advisable  that  a 
committee,  consisting  of  representatives  of  the  engineering  and  mechanical  departments, 
make  a  careful  study  of  existing  facilities  to  secure  the  following  information: 

1.  Where  is  the  waste  coming  from? 

2.  Why  is  the  waste  there  in  the  first  place?  Can  it  be  eliminated  or  relocated? 

3.  What   are  the  water  flows  in  gallons  per  minute  that  carry  the  waste  away? 

4.  Are  the  flows  necessary  or  are  they  a  result  of  leakage  or  wastage  of  water? 

The  size  or  capacity  of  a  disposal  system  is  a  function  of  the  maximum  flow,  and 
an  effort  should  be  made  to  reduce  the  flow  to  a  minimum.  Sometimes  this  can  be  done 
by  separating  the  present  sewer  systems  or  bypassing  high  flows  and  installing  an  oil 
separator  close  to  the  source  of  pollution.  Adequate  means  should  be  provided  to  re- 
move and  handle  the  oil  or  other  contaminates  that  are  removed  before  final  discharge. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Practical  Methods  for  Removing  Iron  and  Manganese 
from   Small    Water   Supplies 

W.  E.  Billingsley  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  A.  Bardwell,  M.  V.  Biar,  T.  W.  Brown, 
C.  E.  DeGeer,  J.  J.  Dwyer,  R.  S.  Glvnn,  H.  E.  Graham,  T.  I.  Gray,  W.  C.  Harsh, 
A.  W.  Johnson,  D.  C.  Teal,  A.  G.  Tompkins,  F.  M.  Walters. 

The  following  report  is  submitted  as  information  on  the  problems  and  some  prac- 
tical solutions  to  these  problems,  resulting  from  the  presence  of  iron  and  manganese  in 
small  water  supplies.  Application,  individually  or  in  various  combinations,  of  the  meth- 
ods may  be  through  field-fabricated  systems  or  through  commercially  available  com- 
ponents and  systems. 

The  natural  occurrence  of  iron  and  manganese,  singly  and  together,  presents  several 
problems  in  water  supply  systems.  These  problems  are  a  particular  nuisance  in  small 
domestic-type  systems  which  are  normally  not  subject  to  modern  water  treatment  meth- 
ods. The  United  States  Public  Health  Service  standard  for  potable  water  limits  the 
concentration  of  iron  and  manganese,  taken  together,  to  a  maximum  of  0.3  ppm.  Latest 
U.S.P.H.S.  directives  indicate  that  the  concentration  of  manganese  should  not  be  greater 
than  0.05  mg/1.  For  industrial  use  a  concentration  of  0.3  to  0.5  ppm  may  be  acceptable. 

In  domestic  and  commercial  water  supplies  the  presence  of  these  agents  contribute 
to:   (a)  discoloring  stains  in  textiles,  cooking  utensils  and  plumbing  fixtures,  (b)  restrict- 


Water,    Oil   and    Sanitation    Services  153 

ing  deposits  in  water  pipes  and  accessories,  (c)  distorting  of  color  and  taste  of  certain 
cooked  and  processed  foods  and  beverages,  and  (d)  objectionable  taste  and  odor  of 
potable  water  due  to  iron  bacteria.  In  industrial  water  supplies  the  above  items  apply 
plus  the  creating  of  deposits  in  beverages,  inhibiting  or  preventing  certain  textile  opera- 
tions, and  creating  control  problems  in  the  tanning  industry.  In  addition,  deposits  from 
iron  and  manganese  clog  and  scale  heat  exchange  surfaces  operating  above  approxi- 
mately 140  F. 

Iron  and  manganese  occur  naturally  in  the  earth's  sub-strata  throughout  most  of 
the  United  States,  but  especially  in  the  Mississippi  River  iron-rich  watershed  area.  Usu- 
ally the  two  elements  are  found  together  and  in  varying  proportions  even  in  areas  of 
very  close  proximity.  Iron  is  the  fourth  most  common  substance  in  the  earth's  crust, 
and  it  is  second  only  to  aluminum  as  the  most  common  metal. 

The  most  common  occurrence  of  iron  in  ground  water  is  in  the  form  of  soluble 
ferrous  bicarbonate,  but  it  may  also  be  found  as  ferrous  sulfate,  ferric  hydroxide  and 
colloidal  or  organic  iron.  Manganese  is  most  prevalent  as  soluble  manganous  bicarbonate, 
but  may  also  be  found  as  manganous  sulfate  and  colloidal  or  organic  manganese.  In 
regions  where  the  water  has  filtered  through  swampy  organic  deposits  on  the  earth's 
surface  or  sub-strata,  increased  acidity  and  oxidation  level  are  provided  to  enable  the 
water  to  dissolve  the  dioxide  films  from  the  sand  and  gravel  aquifier.  The  seepage  of 
surface  water  through  refuse  land  fills  creates  the  same  conditions.  Complex  chemical 
reactions  with  organic  and  inorganic  chemicals  (such  as  humates,  lignin,  phosphates 
and  tannin)  and  acid-polluted  waters  (such  as  acid  mine  waters)  will  dissolve  iron 
and  manganese  in  the  oxygen-free  sub-surface  strata.  The  sulfates  are  generally  in  areas 
polluted  with  acid  mine  waters  or  in  water  containing  hydrogen  sulfide.  Water  pumped 
from  aquifiers  containing  organic  material  or  proximate  to  organic  strata  may  yield 
iron  and  manganese  bound  to  organic  matter. 

Adjacent  wells  may,  and  most  probably  will,  yield  water  of  different  analyses  de- 
pending upon  the  aquifier,  depth  of  well,  draw-down  and  flow.  The  first  step  in  solving 
the  problems  coincident  with  the  presence  of  iron  and  manganese  is  to  have  an  analysis 
made  by  a  qualified  technician  with  repeated  checks  continuing  as  found  necessary.  The 
methods  for  the  removal  of  iron  and  manganese  from  water  supplies  are  identical  ex- 
cept that  for  manganese  the  pH  in  aeration,  sedimentation  and  contact  filtration  treat- 
ments must  be  higher  than  that  normally  required  for  iron  removal. 

When  an  analysis  reveals  an  objectionable  level  of  iron  and  manganese,  the  pump- 
ing and  distribution  system  design  should  be  examined  regardless  of  whether  it  is  a 
proposed  new  system  or  an  existing  system.  If  the  system  itself  is  releasing  the  iron 
flue  to  corrosive  attack  or  the  manganese  by  deposit  release,  the  possibility  of  usiii),' 
materials  that  are  unaffected  by  corrosion  and  scaling  should  be  evaluated.  Piping  and 
valving  arrangements  should  be  installed  in  a  manner  to  allow  Bushing  and  draining  of 
tanks,  coils  and  pipes  with  back-flushing,  if  possible,  as  a  more  effective  means  of 
loosening  scale  and  sludge. 

If  iron  or  manganese  is  contributed  by  the  pumping  or  distribution  system,  after 
first    (lushing   the   system    thoroughly   and   determining   that    the   well    water   i-   acceptabl) 

pure,  a  sodium  silicate  solution  may  lie  metered  to  the  pump  suction  at  a  rate  to  allow- 
about  X  ppm  silicon  dioxide  in  the  treated  water.  Tin-  will  provide  a  film  of  iron  silicate 
to  protect  against  the  electrolytic  attack  caused  by  dissolved  oxygen  anil  carbon  dioxide 
in  the  water.  A  residual  of  up  to  25  ppm  may  be  desirable  lor  the  tir-t  few  weeks  to 
afford  the  initial  protective  coating.  Alkalies  maj  be  added  simultaneousl)  lor  elevation 
of  the  pH  to  a  more  desirable  level. 


154  Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

If  treatment  of  the  water  is  deemed  necessary,  the  different  methods  of  treatment 
should  be  evaluated  against  the  single  or  combined  existence  of  iron  and  manganese, 
the  presence  of  other  deleterious  agents  and  the  end  use  of  the  water.  Often  it  is  pos- 
sible to  treat  a  relatively  small  quantity  of  water  rather  than  the  entire  usage,  which 
might  include  stock,  watering,  lawn  sprinkling,  vehicle  washing,  etc.  Whether  it  is  desir- 
able to  soften  the  water  or  treat  it  for  substances  such  as  hydrogen  sulfide  may  influ- 
ence the  choice  of   the  most   suitable  treatment  procedure. 

For  non-recirculating  water  systems  having  a  combined  content  of  iron  and  man- 
ganese less  than  3.0  ppm,  the  most  economical  method  may  be  the  complexation  or  in- 
activation)  of  the  metal  in  solution  by  the  use  of  sequestrants  to  form  a  stable  complex 
to  prevent  oxidation  and  precipitation.  Chelation  is  a  special  type  of  sequestration. 
Only  inorganic  polyphosphates  are  permissible  for  potable  systems,  but  organic  com- 
pounds may  be  used  in  non-potable  systems.  Polyphosphates  are  suitable  only  for  low 
iron  contents  due  to  the  possibility  of  calcium  phosphate  precipitation  at  high  feed 
rates;  also,  the  polyphosphates  revert  to  orthophosphates  at  approximately  140  F,  pro- 
ducing stains  very  similar  to  those  of  iron  and  manganese  oxides.  High  concentrations 
of  the  organic  sequestrants  may  be  used  without  danger  of  precipitation,  but  there  is 
the  possibility  of  attack  on  wetted  equipment  surfaces. 

Sequestrants  have  been  used  successfully  in  domestic  applications  despite  the  fact 
that  most  household  water  heaters  are  set  at  approximately  140  F.  Sequestrants  are 
obtainable  which  will  retain  the  iron  in  solution  as  either  the  ferrous  or  ferric  ion  and 
in  the  presence  of  air  or  chlorine  (bleach).  For  domestic  usage,  a  relatively  inexpensive 
by-pass  feeder  may  be  installed  between  the  pump  and  the  pneumatic  tank.  For  heavier 
usages  a  chemical  tank  and  proportioning  pump  should  be  installed.  Regardless  of  the 
method  of  application,  it  is  important  to  inject  the  sequestrant  prior  to  the  commenc- 
ing of  any  oxidation  of  the  iron  or  manganese.  Boiler  and  dishwasher  installations  gen- 
erally require  temperatures  in  the  range  of  180  F.  and,  therefore,  complexing  agents  are 
not  recommended. 

Sedimentation  is  an  effective  and  economical  method  of  iron  and  manganese  re- 
moval if  adequate  tank  capacity  is  available  to  afford  sufficient  retention  time  as  re- 
lated to  sedimentation  rate.  Water  from  a  shallow  well  with  fluctuating  draw-down  or  a 
well  equipped  with  a  jet  pump  often  has  begun  partial  aeration  and  carbon  dioxide 
release  before  reaching  the  surface.  This  initial  natural  process  of  separation  may  be 
propagated  by  aeration  and/or  chemical  oxidation  and  pH  adjustment  with  subsequent 
sedimentation  of  the  oxides.  Sodium  carbonate  or  other  alkali  can  be  fed  through  a  fixed 
orifice  where  there  is  a  uniform  flow  rate,  and  the  alkaline  solution  then  discharged  into 
a  pneumatic  tank  through  a  spray  nozzle  to  bring  the  water  into  intimate  contact  with 
the  air  in  the  tank.  The  resulting  increase  of  pH  and  oxidation  level  will  render  the 
iron  and  manganese  insoluble,  resulting  in  sludge  precipitation  to  the  bottom  of  the 
pneumatic  tank  if  sufficient  retention  time  is  available.  The  pneumatic  tank  must  be 
recharged  with  air  frequently  and  also  drained   of  the  resulting  sludge  regularly. 

When  sodium  hypochlorite  (NaCIO)  as  an  oxidizing  agent  is  fed  into  the  water 
system  prior  to  the  pneumatic  tank,  the  rewards  gained  are  accelerated  oxidation, 
sterilization  of  the  water  and  the  removal  of  hydrogen  sulfide.  Chlorine  also  kills  iron 
bacteria  which  exhibits  itself  in  a  malodorous  slime,  especially  in  toilet  tanks.  Chlorine 
will  oxidize  iron  and  manganese  in  a  pH  range  of  4  to  5  as  opposed  to  a  pH  greater  than 
7  for  oxidation  by  dissolved  air.  However,  it  requires  1  part  chlorine  to  oxidize  1.6 
parts  iron  as  opposed  to  1  part  oxygen  to  7  parts  ferrous  iron.  Sodium  hypochlorite 
may  be  used  also  in  the  regeneration  of  oxidizing  filters. 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services  155 

Where  the  iron  concentration  is  below  5  ppm  and  is  in  a  form  bound  with  organic 
matter,  it  may  be  necessary  to  introduce  a  coagulant  salt  such  as  alum  to  promote 
sedimentation. 

Oxidizing  niters  may  be  used  on  the  discharge  side  of  the  tank  to  assist  in  con- 
verting the  iron  and  manganese  ions  into  an  insoluble  state  with  subsequent  separation 
from  the  water  by  the  filter  media.  These  filters  usually  require  a  12-  to  15-gpm-per- 
sq-ft  backwash  at  regular  intervals.  This  backwash  flow  rate,  which  is  generally  required 
to  raise  the  bed  50  percent  or  more,  may  be  excessive  for  small  water  systems.  The 
filter  also  requires  the  regeneration  of  the  oxidizing  filter  medium.  However,  by  feeding 
the  strong  oxidizing  agent  potassium  permanganate  (KMnOi)  into  the  system  the  sedi- 
mentation can  be  improved,  and  by  slight  overfeeding  the  filter  bed  will  be  regenerated 
continuously.  This  overfeeding  is  approximately  0.5  to  1.0  part  potassium  permanganate 
in  the  filter  influent  to  1.0  part  of  combined  iron  and  manganese.  The  filter  bed,  while 
being  regenerated  itself,  will  act  as  a  buffer  to  remove  the  excess  permanganate,  thereby 
resulting  in  a  manganese-free  filter  effluent.  Units  operating  on  this  principle  will  remove 
high  iron  and  manganese  concentrations. 

If  the  iron  and  manganese  are  still  in  a  soluble  state  when  the  water  reaches  the 
pump,  probably  the  most  effective  method  of  removal  is  by  ion  exchange  before  a  ferric 
hydroxide  suspension  can  be  formed.  This  may  be  done  by  placing  a  sodium  cycle  cation 
exchanger  between  the  pump  and  the  pneumatic  tank.  The  exchanger  replaces  ferrous 
and  manganous  ions  with  sodium  ions  prior  to  the  aeration  of  the  water  as  it  is  sprayed 
into  the  pneumatic  tank.  If  the  exchanger  tank  will  not  withstand  pump  pressure,  a 
filter  may  be  installed  between  the  pump  and  the  exchanger.  The  ion  exchange  method 
will  remove  heavy  concentrations  of  iron  and  manganese  as  well  as  calcium  and  mag- 
nesium hardness.  Commercially  available  exchangers  generally  are  not  recommended  for 
concentration  above  10  ppm;  however,  properly  designed  units  are  effective  up  to  20-30 
ppm.  The  iron  content  in  parts  per  million  should  not  be  greater  than  the  hardness  in 
grains  per  gallon  for  successful  operation  of  the  exchanger.  A  higher  iron  or  manganese 
content  will  result  in  excessive  fouling  of  the  zeolite  bed.  This  method  is  particularly 
effective  for  removing  iron  and  manganese  from  soft  water,  and  it  is  probably  the  most 
practical  method  for  domestic  use  where  hardness  is  to  be  removed  simultaneously. 

Sodium  hydrosulfite  (NaHSOo)  may  be  found  to  be  a  helpful  clean-up  agent  for 
zeolite  beds  fouled  with  iron  and  manganese.  In  some  instances  the  chemical  may  be 
mixed  and  charged  with  the  regeneration  salt  at  the  time  of  backwash.  The  sodium 
hydrosulfite  reduces  any  oxidized  iron  and  manganese  back  to  the  soluble  ferrous  or 
manganous  state  which  allows  it  to  be  flushed  from  the  system. 

A  serious  objection  to  ion  exchangers  may  be  the  problem  of  disposal  of  the  rela 
lively  large  quantities  of  saline  regeneration   and   backwash   wastes.  These  waters  will 
clog  portions  of  septic  systems  and  adversely  affect   vegetation. 

Subsequent  to  the  ion  exchanger  the  insoluble  iron  and  manganese  may  l>e  removed 
by  filtration  as  previously  discussed. 

The  preceding  methods,  or  combinations  thereof,  for  the  treatment  of  iron-  and 
manganese-laden  waters  should  be  applied  only  after  carefully  evaluating  the  particular 
problem  at  hand,  taking  into  consideration  not  only  the  cost  and  efficiency  of  the 
method  but  also  the  requisites  of  the  finished  water  supply.  Attention  should  also  be 
given  to  the  problem^  attenndant  upon  proper  operation  and  maintenance  which,  ii 
neglected,  may  nullify  the  potential  advantages  of  a  well  designed  system. 


156 Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 

REFERENCES 

Adams,  R.  B.,  "Manganese  Removal  by  Oxidation  with  Potassium  Permanganate", 
Journal  of  AWWA,  Vol.  52,  No.  2,  Feb.  1960. 

Calise,  V.  J.,  and  R.  F.  Dietz,  "Iron  and  Manganese  Removal  from  Municipal  and 
Industrial  Water  Supplies",  Joint  Meeting  of  the  Florida  Section  of  AWWA  and 
the  Florida  Sewage  and  Industrial  Waste  Association,  Orlando,  Fla.,  1955. 

Cherry,  A.  K.,  "Rx  for  Tastes  and  Odors — KMnOi  and  Activated  Carbon",  Water  Works 
Engineering,  March  1962. 

Dwyer,  J.  J.,  et  al.,  "Corrosion  Prevention  in  Potable  Hot  Water  Systems",  AREA  Bul- 
letin, Vol.  62,  No.  560,  November  1960;  Vol.  63,  No.  567,  November  1961. 

Edwards,  S.  E.,  and  G.  B.  McCall,  "Manganese  Removal  by  Break-Point  Chlorination", 
Water  and  Sewage  Works,  Vol.  93,  No.  8,  August  1946. 

Gurnham,  C.  F.,  Principles  of  Industrial  Waste  Treatment,  John  Wiley  &  Sons,  Inc., 
New  York,  1955. 

Humphrey,  S.  B.,  and  M.  A.  Eikelberry,  "New  Potassium  Permanganate  Techniques", 
Water  and  Sewage  Works,  May  1961. 

Mathews,  E.  R.,  "Iron  and  Manganese  Removal  by  Free  Residual  Chlorination",  Jour- 
nal of  AWWA,  Vol.  39,  No.  7,  July  1947. 

Scattergood,  A.  G.,  personal  correspondence,  American  Water  Softener  Company,  May 
1962. 

Symposium  on  Chemistry  of  Water  Supplies,  Washington,  D.  C,  American  Chemical 
Society,  1962. 

Taggart,  E.  J.,  J.  Levendusky  and  V.  J.  Calise,  "Iron  and  Manganese  Reduction",  78th 
Annual  Conference  of  the  AWWA,  Dallas,  Tex.,  1958. 

Technical  Bulletin  No.   101 1-C,  Rohm  and  Haas  Company,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Technical   Bulletin    No.   CWF-61,   Softener   Corporation   of  America,  Melrose  Park,   111. 

Technical  Data:  243.1  March  28,  1955,  Industrial  Filter  and  Pump  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany, Chicago. 

Water  Purification  and  Treatment  Handbook,  Everpure,  Inc.,  Chicago. 


Report  on  Assignment  8 

Methods  of  Controlling  Spillage  of  Fuel  Oil  at  Diesel 
Fueling   and   Unloading   Stations 

V.  C.  Barth  (chairman,  subcommittee),  H.  E.  Graham,  W.  F.  Arksey,  R.  A.  Bardwell, 
I.  C.  Brown,  P.  J.  Calza,  G.  F.  Metzdorf,  C.  F.  Mueller,  E.  T.  Myers,  H.  Parrish, 
R.  D.  Powrie,  J.  C.  Roberts,  E.  R.  Schlaf,  C.  B.  Voitelle,  J.  E.  Wiggins,  Jr. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  progress  report  on  Assignment  8. 

At  the  committee  meeting  held  on  May  9,  1962,  the  subcommittee  for  this  assign- 
ment was  directed  to  investigate  new  automatic  cut-off  fueling  nozzles  being  developed 
by  a  certain  company.  The  latest  information  received  indicates  that,  while  a  study  is 
being  made,  no  basic  design  has  been  developed  to  date. 

The  committee  was  also  directed  to  make  a  survey  on  the  performance  of  various 
types  or  designs  of  automatic  shut-off  diesel  fueling  nozzles  and  the  savings  to  be 
realized  through  their  use.  This  is  now  being  pursued;  however,  usage  to  date  has  been 
too  limited  for  reliable  data  to  be  reported.  One  or  possibly  two  designs  are  being  used 


Water,    Oil    and    Sanitation    Services 157 

quite  extensively,  and  one  other  is  presently  being  applied  on  a  large  scale,  but,  it  is  too 
early  to  evaluate  the  economics  of  automatic  shut-off  diese]  fueling  devices  strictly  on  a 
merit  basis,  avoiding  any  commercial  aspects  or  favoritism. 


Report  on  Assignment  10 

Railroad   Aspects   of    Radioactive   Substances 

W.  C.  Harsh   (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  C.  Archambeault,  V.  C.  Barth,  J.  M.  Bates. 
R.  S.  Glynn,  P.  M.  Miller,  R.  D.  Powrie,  J.  P.  Rodger,  E.  R.  Schlaf,  C.  B.  Voitelle. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  report  on  handling  radio- 
active substances. 

Radioactive  materials  have  come  into  use  during  the  past  few  years:  (1)  as  tracers 
to  determine  wear  rates  of  materials,  (2)  for  detection  of  flaws  in  various  materials,  and 
(3)    as  an  energy  source  for  signal  lighting. 

Iron  59  and  chromium  51  are  used  in  diesel  piston  ring  tests  to  determine  wear 
rates  of  lubricating  and  fuel  oils.  Radiography  uses  cobalt  60  for  detecting  flaws  in 
welds.  Cesium  137  is  used  for  railroad  cross  tie  inspection.  Radium  is  used  to  detect 
pipeline   corrosion  and  krypton  85  as  an  energy  source  for  switch  lamps. 

In  general,  the  specific  effects  of  nuclear  radiation  are  only  superficially  like  those 
of  thermal  radiation.  As  in  the  case  of  sunburn  the  effects  are  apparent  only  after 
exposure.  Since  the  human  senses  cannot  detect  radiation  at  the  time  of  exposure,  the 
user  of  radioisotopes  must  monitor  his  operations  at  all  times  where  the  safety  factor 
has  not  been  determined  by  trained  professional  personnel. 

The  three  kinds  of  radiation  likely  to  be  encountered  are: 

(1)  Gamma  Radiation  is  the  most  penetrating  and  for  this  reason  presents  the 
greatest  hazard.  Shields  of  lead,  iron  or  concrete  of  sufficient  thickness  must 
be  used  to  protect  the  worker. 

(2)  Beta  Radiation,  often  called  "Beta  Rays",  are  high-energy  electrons.  The 
radiation  damage  to  the  body  is  generally  confined  to  the  surface  and  the 
first  few  millimeters  of  the  skin.  Glass  shields  are  sufficient  for  worker 
protection. 

(3)  Alpha  Radiation,  because  of  its  high  specific  ionization,  has  a  very  short 
range  in  matter  and  is  entirely  absorbed  by  glass,  rubber  gloves  and  beavj 
clothing.  Alpha  particles  range  in  tissue  is  less  than  the  outer  layer  of  the 
skin. 

The  handling  of  radioactive  materials  presents  a  few  problems  as  Atomic  Energy 
Commission  rules  pertaining  to  their  use  must  be  followed.  Distance  is  the  best  and 
easiest  shield:    however,   lead,   iron,  and  concrete  will   reduce  the   hazard. 

Proper  clothing,  shoe  covering,  gloves  and  breathing  apparatus  are  required  A  sur 
vey  meter,  normally  a  gamma-beta  instrument,  is  required  to  measure  radiation.  The 
device  must  be  cared  for,  calibrated  and  not  abused,  as  this  instrument  is  the  worker's 
sixth  sense.  He  must  be  well  trained  in  its  use  and  interpreting  the  information  that  it 
gives  him.  Monitoring  the  area  is  the  first  step  in  handling  radioactive  material.  This 
will  determine  the  necessary  precautions  that  will  be  required  for  safe  handling  of  such 
materials. 


Report   of   Committee    14 — Yards  and   Terminals 


D.  C.  Hastings, 

Chairman 
H.  J.  McNally, 

Vice  Chairman 
A.  E.  Biermann, 

Secretary 

F.    E.    AUSTERMAN 

R.  O.  Balsters 
W.  P.  Buchanan 
M.  H.  Aldrich 
C.  E.  Stoecker 
F.  A.  Hess 


W.  H.  Pollard 

E.  T.  Lucey 

F.  S.  King 

L.  L.  Lyford  (E) 

R.  F.  Beck 

S.  N.  MacIsaac 

H.  R.  Beckmann 

G.  W.  Mahn,  Jr. 

WlLLARD    BlNZEN 

T.  F.  Maloney,  Jr. 

H.  M.  Booth 

J.  C.  Miller 

E.  G.  Brisbin 

C.  J.  Morris 

B.  E.  Buterbaugh 

C.  H.  Mottier  (E) 

G.    H.  Chabot 

B.  G.  Packard 

J.  F.  Chandler 

R.  H.  Peak,  Jr. 

H.  P.  Clapp 

H.  L.  Pepper 

E.  H.  Cook 

Hubert  Phypers 

V.  R.  Copp 

L.  F.  Pohl 

B.  E.  Crumpler 

L.  J.  Riekenberg 

J.  L.  Dahlrot 

L.  W.  Robinson 

H.  M.  Dalziel 

H.  T.  Roebuck 

A.  V.  Dasburg 

H.  H.  Russell 

CM.  Frazhcr 

R.  A.  Skooglun 

W.  H.  Giles  (E) 

E.  B.  Sonnhelm 

W.  H.  Goold 

R.  F.  Straw 

C.  W.  Hamilton 

T.  D.  Styles 

G.  F.  Hand  (E) 

J.  G.  Sutherland 

VVm.  J.  Hedley 

Jack  Sutton 

H.  W.  Hem 

J.  B.  Sutton 

J.  E.  Honing 

J.  J.  Tibbits 

V.  C.  Kennedy 

L.    G.    TlEMAN 

A.  S.  Krefting 

J.  N.  Todd  (E) 

Fred  C.  Larsen,  Jr. 

J.  W.  Tucker 

B.  Laubenfels 

W.  E.  Webster,  Jr. 

Glen  Lichtenwalner 

W.  A.  Wood 

J.  L.  Loida 

C.  E.  Zeman 

Committee 

(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose   names   are    set   in    bold-face   type   constitute    the   Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 14. 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

There  are  no  recommendations  for  revisions  to  Chapter  14  of  the  Manual 
with  the  exception  of  those  that  are  being  presented  under  Assignments  2b 
and  6a. 

2.  Classification   yards,   collaborating'   with   Committee   16. 

a.  Rollability  of  freight  cars. 

The  work  that  should  have  done  this  year  was  not  accomplished  due 
to  the  fact  that  no  funds  were  allocated  for  research  and  testing.  Request 
for  these  funds  has  been  included  again  in   the  budget  in   1963. 

b.  Design  of  classification  yard  gradients. 

Progress  report,  with  recommendations  submitted  for  adoption  and 
publication  in  the  Manual   page  161 


159 


160  Yards    and    Terminals 

3.  Scales  used  in  railway  service,  collaborating  with  Committee  18. 

a.  Specifications    governing    the    manufacture    and   installation    of   electronic 

track  scales. 

Considerable  work  has  been  done  on  this  subject,  and  it  is  hoped  that  a 

final  report  can  be  submitted  in  1964. 

b.  Specifications   governing   the   manufacture  and    installation   of  automatic, 
indicating  and  recording  elements  for  large-capacity  scales. 
Considerable   work    has   been   completed   on   this  subject,   and  a   progress 
report  should  be  presented  in  1964. 

c.  Studies  of  the  accuracies  obtained  in  motion  weighing. 
Considerable  data   have  been   received  from   tests  in   various  sections  of 
the   country,   which    will   be   tabulated   and   presented   as   information   in 
1964. 

4.  Facilities  for  freight  car  cleaning  and  washing,  collaborating  with  Com- 
mittee 6. 

Final   report,   submitted   as   information    page  164 

5.  Mechanized  and  electronic  mail  handling  facilities. 

Final   report,   submitted   as   information    page  168 

6.  Facilities  for  loading  and  unloading  rail-truck  freight  equipment,  col- 
laborating with  Committee  6  and  the  AAR  Motor  Transportation  Advisory 
Committee. 

a.  Facilities  for  loading  and  unloading  rail-truck  freight  equipment. 
Progress   report  submitted  with  the  recommendation  that  it   be  adopted 

and  published  in  the  Manual   page  173 

b.  Facilities  for  loading  and  unloading  multi-level  automobile  cars. 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that 
the  subject  be  continued  and  that  material  suitable  for  publication  in  the 
Manual  be  presented  in   1964   page  173 

7.  Water  front  terminals. 

Final   report,  submitted   as  information    page  180 

8.  Present  trends  in  yard  maintenance. 

Final   report,   submitted  as  information    page  183 

The  Committee  on  Yards  and  Terminals, 

D.  C.  Hastings,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  574,  November  1962. 


Yards    and    Terminals  161 

Report   on  Assignment   2b 

Design    of    Classification    Yard    Gradients 

R.  0.  Balsters  (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  H.  Aldrich,  A.  E.  Biermann,  W.  Binzen, 
B.  E.  Buterbaugh,  H.  P.  Clapp,  V.  R.  Copp,  B.  E.  Crumpler,  H.  M.  Ualziel,  A.  V. 
Dasburg,  C.  M.  Frazier,  VV.  H  Goold,  C.  W.  Hamilton,  D.  C.  Hastings,  B.  Lauben- 
fels,  G.  Lichtenwalner,  S.  N.  Maclsaac,  H.  J.  McNally,  H.  L.  Pepper,  L.  F. 
Pohl.  L.  W.  Robinson,  R.  A.  Skooglun,  E.  B.  Sonnheim,  T.  D.  Styles,  W.  A.  Wood. 

Your  committee  submits  for  adoption  the  following  recommendations  with  respect 
to   material   on   design   of   classification   yard  gradients  in   Chapter   14   of   the   Manual: 

Pages    14-3-1    to    14-3-18,   incl. 

FREIGHT  TERMINALS 

Page  14-3-7,  Art.  3-b.  Rolling  Resistance:  Add  after  first  sentence  in  last  para- 
graph: "Strong  head  winds  may  increase  maximum  rolling  resistance  of  empty  cars  to 
2.0  percent." 

Art.  3-c.  Theory:  At  end  of  last  line  on  page  change  "Fig.  1"  to  read  "Fig.  1-a" 
Add   the   following:    "The   expressions  for  velocity  head  do   not  take  into  account 

the  storage    of    energy   in   the   rotating  car   wheels  and,   therefore,   are  approximations. 

When  a  more  precise  solution  is  desired,  the  following  expressions  may  be  used: 
he  =  0.0334  F2_g_or  he  =  0.0155   v2  g 

go  go 

wherein  he  represents  the  total  energy  head  of  the  car  including  the  rotational  head. 
The  g  is  gravitational  acceleration  and  g0  is  an  apparent  value  of  gravitational  accelera- 
tion which  accounts  for  the  fact  the  acceleration  of  the  car  is  slower  because  energy  is 
being  stored  in  rotating  wheels. 


1  +  K/W 
wherein  A'  is  a  constant  for  the  wheels  and  W  is  the  gross  weight  of  the  car  in  tons. 
An  average  value  for  K  is  1.6.  See  Fig.  1-b." 

Page  14-3-8,  Art.  3-d.  Design:  Change  the  last  sentence  of  the  third  paragraph  to 
read:  "Cars  with  inner  axle  centers  greater  than  the  length  of  the  track  circuit  will 
require  special  handling." 

Eliminate  the  last  sentence  of  the  fourth  pargraph  and  add  the  following:  "The 
trend  toward  full  automation  in  hump  yards  necessitates  the  provision  of  tangent  and 
curve  rolling  resistance  measuring  sections  to  be  located  between  the  crest  of  the  hump 
and  the  group  retarder.  Recent  yard  installations  have  used  an  accelerating  grade  not 
t<>  exceed  6.0  percent  for  a  distance  of  70  ft,  more  or  less,  at  the  crest  of  the  hump  to 
assist  in  providing  the  proper  separation  of  car-.  The  resistance  measuring  section  then 
is  provided  on  an  accelerating  grade  of  2.0  percent,  mine  or  less,  to  the  master  retarder, 
which  may  also  I"-  placed  on  a  grade  not  i"  exceed  6.0  percent  Retarders  tnaj  In- 
constructed  with  a  vertical  curve-  at  the  lower  end  which  facilitates  placing  the  first 
switch  beyond  the  leaving  end  of  both  master  and  group  retarders  as  close  to  the 
retarders  as  possible." 

In  the  first  sentence  of  item  (1),  change  "0J  percent"  to  ''0.15  percent." 

Page  14-3-9:   Change  "Fig.   1"  to  read  'Tig.   I   a". 

Insert   new  Fig.   1-b,  presented   herewith,  between   Fig.    1   a   and   Fig.   2. 


162 


Yards    and    Terminals 


00% 


Boiling     fi»itlonc«    Ion 


Fig.  1-b. 


—  he«  Cntrgy 

H«od 


Page    14-3-10:    In    the   second   line    of   item    (3),    change   "0.3    percent"    to    "0.15 
percent." 

Page  14-3-11:   In  the  first  sentence  of  the  second  pargraph  below  item  (2),  change 
"0.12  percent"  to  "0.08  percent." 

Page   14-3-12:    Under  Design  Data,  change  "Rye  =  0.3'%"  to  "Rle  —  0.l5'%",  and 
change  "J?2e  =  0.12%"  to   "RSe  =  0.08%". 

Under  Solution: 

In  the  4th  line  change  "(0.0012)"  to  "(0.0008)." 

In  the  5th  line  change  "0.76  ft"  to  "0.55    ft." 

In  the  6th  line  change  ".0.76"  to  "0.55"  and  change  "17.39  ft"  to  "17.60  ft". 

Change  11th  line  to  read:   "(VH)s+a=  11.60+  0.21  —  (815)  (0.0015)  —  (22.6S) 

(0.025)  =  16.02  ft." 

Change  12th  line  to  read:  "Let  (VH)a  =  6.24  ft,  then  (VH)u  —  9.78  ft. 

Change  15th  line  to  read:   "Elevation  of  point  D  =  —  9.78  —  (395)    (0.0015) —3.34 
+  0.21  =  —  13.50  ft." 

In  16th  line  change  "0.3"  to  "0.15." 

In  17th  line  change  "0.12  percent"  to  "0.08  percent." 

In  18th  line  change  "0.3  percent"  to  "0.15  percent." 

In  21st  line  change  figures  after  the  words  "total  retardation  required  is",  to  read 
"6.24  ft+  9.78  ft  =16.02  ft." 

In  22nd  line  change  "14.59  ft"  to  "16.02  ft". 

Page  14-3-12.1:   Insert  revised  Fig.  3,  presented  herewith,  in  lieu  of  present  Fig.  3. 


Yards    and    Terminals 


163 


II     'II 

t 

t     t 

s 

c5?l 

3* 

r 

(\J<» 

0    CO 

■O    K>  rQ    r*l 

CD  O 
IrO  ^ 

d 

1  | 

OOI 

Pi 

Ol 

0D 
O 

6 

3 

1 1 

?! 

."1 

Si 

i 

O 

1 

1 

t-C+EI 

|U|»eJ 

1 1 

T] 

T 

II                 •3UDJ0»|3 

! 

^7 

<  1 

o 

/ 

1 

tf 

/ 

/ 

< 

r         / 

'SI 

1 

nil  1  1 1 

■-; 

Tft' 

0>l    1 

• 
E 
E 

■ 

f 

1     /// 

i 

5i 

• 

c 
o 

//oo+zi 

i 

*1 

1 

f 

T    //// 

•  i 

* 

M 
• 

cr 

i      wO 

oOO       \l                  o 

c 

1  *"s? 

c      u         \j     1            - 
°"2                 1                  " 

- 

o 

i 

1 1               ill 

o 

1    «^ 
Em 

—  *>^o              ■      1 
-■oS?            1 

m 
on 

<-> 

<fr 

I 

"II                  1 lh- 

o 

"°6D 

1 

o 

> 
• 

Ul 

1      vdo 

•tO           i 

t!o         I 

i 
.    I 

5? 

CD 

o 

d 

2 

• 

O 
O 

03  r\    «;0 

o 

a 

6 

^iV^ 

">                      *    "O 

1 

3 

o 

V,  N 

-                   SlK 

T              1  'T 

*l 

■j 

CD 

.     - 

n*  Sl+9 

? 
.  i 
—  i 

1 

».i 

-|     •X    9/1 

ad 

h 

'r      rr 

H* 

I    00+Z 

T 

\.           c\j  /  u 

t 

1                  fVl/ 

► 

1 

'             5/ 

U-B- 

Z 

1 
1 
( 

oBo 
■ z 

< 

f 
1 
J 

ujf 

1 

_J 

1 

/                   / 

/            / 

«- 

_IB 

1 

0. 

* 

5 

/            / 

"«>/        °  / 
-/         in/ 

c 
o 

lZi 

?J 

o'l           2/ 

; 

oB 

■ 

\ 

•jj          *1 

c 

K, 

S6+C 

Y 
1 

1 

E  - 

1 
1 

/ 

spy              z 

o 

3    ° 
I   X 

a 

3 

,'  "a 

AS 

# 

'-' 

1. 

in 

OC  +  2 

t 

1 
1 

jy 

Id 

o 

1 

oZ 

o/7 

*>// 

a 

// 

u 

CO 

<N 

1 

duuni]    jo    |t*o 

_3 

i 

1 

00  +  0 

bo 

in 
'> 


164  Yards    and    Terminals 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Facilities   for  Freight   Car   Cleaning   and   Washing 

M.  H.  Aldrich  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  E.  Biermann,  H.  R.  Beckmann,  W.  Binzen, 
W.  O.  Boessneck,  E.  G.  Brisbin,  B.  E.  Butterbaugh,  E.  H.  Cook,  V.  R.  Copp,  W.  H. 
Giles,  W.  H.  Goold,  C.  W.  Hamilton,  D.  C.  Hastings,  F.  S.  King,  A.  S.  Krefting, 
B.  Laubenfels,  G.  Lichtenwalner,  S.  N.  Maclsaac,  H.  J.  McNallv,  B.  G.  Packard, 
R.  H.  Peak,  Jr.,  W.  H.  Pollard,  L.  J.  Riekenberg,  L.  W.  Robinson,  H.  T.  Roebuck, 
E.  B.  Sonnheim,  J.  G.  Sutherland,  J.  B.  Sutton,  J.  J.  Tibbits,  L.  G.  Tieman,  C.  E. 
Zeman. 

One-Spot   Freight   Car   Cleaning   Facilities 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  as  information  with  the  recommenda- 
tion that   the  subject   be  discontinued. 

Several  railroads  have  recently  installed  facilities  for  freight  car  cleaning  in  which 
cuts  of  from  10  to  35  cars  are  moved  through  a  concentrated  working  area  by  means 
of  a  car  puller.  Details  of  the  operation  vary  considerably.  At  some  highly  mechanized 
installations  a  string  of  cars  is  moved  one  car  length  at  a  time  on  a  quite  definite  time 
schedule  with  a  single  type  of  operation  performed  at  each  of  three  or  four  successive 
locations.  At  another  installation,  however,  the  cuts  are  worked  on  in  groups  of  about 
10  cars  at  a  time  alongside  a  working  platform  and  employing  more  ordinary  tools  and 
conventional  equipment.  In  one  instance,  spot  car  cleaning  is  combined  with  the  car 
repair  facility.  A  typical  installation  illustrating  each  of  these  variations  is  described 
below  in  some  detail. 

Great  Northern  Car  Cleaning  Facility 

The  highly  mechanized  facility  of  the  Great  Northern  Railway  at  Grand  Forks, 
N.  D.,  consists  of  2  stub-end  tracks  2300  ft  long  with  the  cleaning  area  occupying  about 
250  ft  of  length  near  the  midpoint  of  these  two  tracks.  This  provides  space  for  about 
20  to  25  cars  at  the  stub  end  of  each  track  and  a  like  capacity  for  these  cars  after 
they  have  passed  through  the  cleaning  area.  A  double-drum  reversing  car  puller  is 
located  on  the  outside  of  each  track.  The  cable  is  2650  ft  long  and  arranged  so  that 
25  empty  cars  can  be  pulled  off  the  stub  track  past  the  car  cleaning  machinery. 

At  the  first  location  there  is  a  30-ft-long  refuse  hopper  between  the  tracks  from 
which  a  30-in-wide  conveyor  belt  moves  refuse  parallel  to  the  tracks  and  to  a  height 
of  21  ft.  The  debris  drops  into  a  hopper  and  down  into  a  hog  where  it  is  chopped  and 
deposited  on  a  24-in-wide  belt  conveyor.  This  elevates  the  refuse  to  a  swivel-mounted 
discharge  nozzle  from  which  it  is  discharged  into  one  of  two  12-cu-yd  load-lugger  type 
containers.  When  the  containers  are  full,  they  are  lifted  onto  a  24,000-lb  capacity  truck 
by  a  hydraulic-operated  cradle,  and  trucked  to  a  dumping  area. 

At  the  second  location  there  is  a  54-ft-long  platform  covered  with  metal  grating 
extending  between  the  tracks.  This  is  at  car-floor  height  and  on  it  is  located  the  car 
vacuum  and  the  control  panel  for  the  entire  facility.  The  car  vacuum  consists  of  a  fan 
driven  by  a  15-hp  motor,  debris  hopper  and  dual  cyclone  dust  collector.  One  end  of  a 
7 -in  flexible  hose  30  ft  long  is  connected  to  the  car  vacuum  hopper  and  on  the  other 
end  there  is  an  aluminum  nozzle  18  in  wide  used  for  vacuuming  the  car  floors.  (See 
accompanying  illustration.) 

The  third  location  is  a  station  for  performing  inspections  and  making  minor  repairs. 


Yards    and    Terminals 


16S 


Car   vacuum  used  by  the  Great  Northern  Railway  at  its  Grand  Fork, 
N.  D.,  car  cleaning  facility. 


At  the  fourth  location  there  is  a  washing  unit.  This  consists  ol  an  air-operated  tele 
scopic  boom  mounted  on  a  dolly  which  can  be  moved  by  remote  control  on  an  auxilian 
track  between  the  two  parallel  car  cleaning  tracks.  The  boom  can  be  rotated  180  deg 
so  that  cars  on  either  track  can  be  washed.  Winn  the  boom  enters  the  car,  the  water  i- 
automatically  turned  on  and  the  multi-nozzled  washer  head  oscillates  for  J  min  with 
water  flowing  through  the  specially  designed  nozzle  at  200  gpm  under  200  lb  pressure. 
At  the  end  of  the  washing  period,  the  washer  automatically  retracts  and  awaits  the 
positioning  of   the   next   car. 

To  start  the  cleanine.  operations,  a  cut  of  20  to  25  cars  is  switched  into  one  of  the 
2  stub  tracks  past  the  cleaninc  area  so  that  the  first  car  out  will  be  adjacent  to  the 
refuse  hopper.  The  car  puller  is  then  attached  to  a  rear  car.   Practically  everything  is 


166  Yards   and   Terminals 

thrown  into  the  hopper  to  be  hogged,  including  broken  grain  doors  and  pallets,  timbers 
up  to  12  ft  long,  old  ties,  banding  straps,  etc.  Material  such  as  tile,  brick  and  concrete 
blocks  is  thrown  into  a  container  and  hauled  directly  to  the  dump  without  hogging. 
After  the  debris  has  been  cleaned  out  of  the  first  car,  warning  is  given  on  several 
klaxon-type  horns  strategically  located,  and  the  cut  is  moved  forward  one  car  length. 
The  first  car  will  then  be  adjacent  to  the  vacuum  cleaner  and  the  second  car  adjacent 
to  the  hopper.  On  the  next  move,  the  first  car  will  be  at  the  inspection  station.  Minor 
repairs  are  made  here,  including  patching  of  lining  and  floor  and  application  of  brake 
shoes.  The  car  is  then  carded  for  highest  commodity.  On  the  next  move,  the  first  car 
reaches  the  fourth  and  last  station  where  the  washing  is  done. 

Since  the  work  at  each  station  requires  about  4  min,  approximately  12  cars  can  be 
cleaned  each  hour.  If  the  condition  of  a  car  is  such  that  an  operation  cannot  be  com- 
pleted in  the  allotted  time,  that  car  is  returned  for  further  cleaning  with  another  group 
of  cars.  Before  cleaning  operations  have  been  completed  on  a  string  of  cars  on  one  track, 
a  switch  engine  spots  another  cut  on  the  other  track.  In  this  way  there  is  no  interrup- 
tion to  the  cleaning  operations. 

The  seven-man  crew  consists  of  one  carman  doing  preliminary  work,  two  carmen 
making  minor  repairs  and  classifying  cars,  three  laborers  handling  debris,  and  one  laborer 
operating  the  vacuum  cleaner,  car  puller  and  car  washer.  Up  to  95  cars  are  cleaned 
during  an  8-hr  shift. 

The  Great  Northern  has  a  similar  cleaning  facility  at  Everett,  Wash.,  with  the 
following  major  differences.  There  are  three  incoming  tracks  which  converge  to  a  single 
track  through  the  cleaning  area.  The  elevating  rubbish  conveyor  is  at  right  angles  to  the 
track,  and  a  horizontal  retractable  conveyor  carries  the  debris  from  the  car  to  this 
elevating  one.  Rubbish  from  the  elevating  conveyor  drops  onto  a  cantilever  conveyor. 
This  can  swing  over  either  one  of  two  incinerators.  A  "king-size"  vacuum  cleaner  with 
a  S-ft-wide  nozzle  is  used  to  clean  the  floors.  After  cleaning  and  washing,  the  cars  are 
moved  to  one  of  three  outgoing  tracks.  Most  go  to  the  ready  track,  but  if  they  require 
steam  cleaning  they  are  moved  to  a  second  track.  The  third  track  is  used  for  cars 
requiring  light  repairs. 

A  six-man  crew  is  required  for  this  operation  not  including  men  used  on  the 
outgoing  tracks.  The  facility  operates  two  8-hr  shifts  and  about  100  cars  are  cleaned 
per  shift. 

New  York  Central  Facility 

The  New  York  Central  Railroad  facility  at  Elkhart,  Ind.,  consists  of  2  parallel 
tracks  on  60-ft  centers  and  about  3200  ft  in  length.  The  working  area  is  about  midway 
along  these  tracks  and  consists  of  a  reinforced  concrete  pavement  400  ft  long.  The 
pavement  is  84  ft  wide  and  consequently  extends  12  ft  beyond  the  center  line  of  each 
of  the  2  tracks.  The  transverse  slope  is  %  inch  to  the  foot  from  each  outside  edge 
toward  the  center.  The  top  of  rail  is  flush  with  the  pavement  surface.  Drainage  is  pro- 
vided by  inlets  with  ^-in  mesh  screens  on  about  60-ft  centers  along  the  low  points  of 
the  pavement. 

A  short  spur  off  the  inside  of  each  track  at  the  incoming  end  of  the  working  area 
permits  the  placing  of  two  gondolas.  An  incinerator  is  also  located  near  this  end  of  the 
pavement.  A  service  building  is  located  within  the  paved  area,  and  there  is  also  a  small 
shed  used  to  store  tools  and  supplies  for  making  minor  repairs.  A  3-ft-wide  platform  at 
car-floor  height  with  a  metal  grating  surface  extends  along  the  inside  of  each  track 
throughout  the  length  of  the  working  area.  Water  is  furnished  to  the  working  area  under 


Yards    and    Terminals 167 

yard  line  pressure.  Service  hydrants  along  the  tracks  provide  for  the  use  of  a  hose 
equipped  with  a  nozzle  for  washing  the  car  interiors.  Two  horizontal-drum  electric  car 
pullers  are  located  along  the  inside  of  each  track.  They  have  a  starting  pull  of  15,000  lb 
and  are  capable  of  handling  40  cars  at  a  speed  of  40  ft  per  min. 

A  ;-\vitch  engine  brings  in  a  cut  of  35  cars  on  each  one  of  the  tracks  so  that  the 
first  9  or  10  cars  in  each  cut  are  adjacent  to  the  400-ft  pavement.  A  commodity  inspec- 
tor goes  down  one  side  of  a  string  and  back  the  other,  carding  cars  as  to  what  is  to  be 
done.  Carmen  start  right  in  on  running  repairs  and  on  any  upgrading  work  that  can  be 
done  before  washing.  Nails  and  cleats  are  removed  and  rubbish  taken  out  by  laborers 
and  piled  in  aluminum  trash  carts.  These  trash  carts  are  8  ft  long  by  il/2  ft  wide  and 
have  12-in-diameter  hard-rubber  wheels.  When  filled,  they  are  hauled  with  a  fork  lift 
truck  to  a  spot  close  to  the  incinerator  where  a  man  separates  the  burnable  material  and 
tosses  the  remainder  into  one  of  the  gondolas.  After  the  rubbish  is  removed,  cars  are 
swept  out  with  brooms.  This  is  followed  by  the  washing  out  of  any  cars  carded  for  this 
operation,  and  finally  by  any  upgrading  still  remaining  to  be  done. 

When  all  work  is  completed,  the  car  puller  cable  is  hauled  back  by  a  truck  and 
attached  to  a  car  in  the  cut.  Warning  is  given  over  the  paging  system,  and  the  cut  of 
cars  is  moved  forward  about  9  car  lengths.  The  same  cleaning  procedure  is  then  repeated. 
About  4  hr  are  required  to  complete  the  2  strings  of  cars.  A  switching  crew  brings  in 

2  more  cuts  of  cars  during  the  lunch  period. 

The  crew  of  19  men  consists  of  a  foreman,  2  carmen  for  commodity  inspecting, 
5  carmen  upgrading  and  running  repairs,  8  laborers  cleaning  and  washing,  1  man  on  the 
incinerator  and  2  motor  truckers.  Production  for  an  8-hr  shift  averages  about  130  cars. 

St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Facility 

At  its  Cherokee  Yard  in  Tulsa,  Okla.,  the  St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway  has 
provided  for  spot  car  cleaning  on  the  3  light  repair  tracks  through  the  repair  shed.  The 

3  inbound  leads  have  a  total  capacity  of  about  50  cars.  Two  cars  at  a  time  are  moved 
by  a  self-contained  mobile  unit  to  an  area  at  the  approach  end  of  the  repair  shed.  Here 
rubbish  is  cleaned  from  the  cars  and  loaded  on  a  stake-bed  rack-type  truck  and  hauled 
to  an  area  for  burning.  Metal  material  is  separated  and  put  in  bins  that  are  supplied 
and  collected  by  a  local  salvage  dealer.  The  2  cars  are  then  moved  into  the  160-ft-long 
shed  where  end  straightening  running  repairs  and  lining  or  coopering  is  completed.  On 
the  outgoing  side  of  the  repair  shed  there  are  80-ft-long  washing  platforms,  each 
equipped  with  an  adjustable  nozzle  spray  gun  on  a  50-ft  hose.  A  piston-type  pump 
furnishes  7  gpm  of  water  at  450  lb  pressure  to  the  washing  system. 

SUMMARY 

The  one  spot  car  cleaning  method  is  reported  as  now  being  used  at  the  following 
locations:  Great  Northern  at  Grand  Forks  and  Everett;  Louisville  &  Nashville  at  \t 
lanta,  Ga.,  Pensacola,  Fla.,  and  Birmingham,  Ala.;  New  York  Central  at  Elkhart,  and 
the  Frisco  at  Tulsa.  Track  arrangements  used  include:  (1)  a  single  track  for  incoming, 
cleaning  and  outgoing;  (2)  two  tracks,  either  stub  or  through,  for  incoming,  cleaning 
and  outgoing;  (3)  three  tracks  for  incoming  cars,  converging  to  one  track  through  the 
cleaning  area,  then  diverging  to  three  tracks  for  outgoing  cars.  In  most  instances  a  level 
grade  is  used  for  all  tracks  of  each  car  cleaning  facility.  A  departure  from  this  is  the 
Everett  Yard  where  the  3  inbound  tracks  are  on  an  ascending  0.2  percent  grade.  The 
(leaning  track  is  level,  but  there  is  a  descending  0.35  percent  grade  to  the  3  outgoing 
tracks.  The  tracks  through  the  washing  areas  are  tilted  transversely  in  order  to  facilitate 


168 Yards    and    Terminals 

the  drainage  of  the  wash  water  from  the  inside  of  the  cars.  The  rail  superelevation  in 
the  various  installations  ranges  from  1%  in  to  4  in.  Drainage  lines  with  inlets,  catch 
basins  or  gutters  at  the  washing  platform  are  provided  to  dispose  of  the  wash  water. 
Proper  maintenance  of  this  drainage  system  is  an  important  feature  and  should  not  be 
neglected.  Facilities  should  be  provided  for  cleaning  the  drains  periodically. 

General  lighting  is  obtained  by  either  mercury  vapor  or  incandescent  floodlights. 
Some  supplementary  lighting  may  be  employed.  For  example,  at  Elkhart  poles  spaced 
about  75  ft  apart  along  the  400-ft  working  platform  support  a  cable.  An  incandescent 
lamp  is  attached  to  one  end  of  a  telescopic  rod,  and  a  ring  at  the  other  end  permits 
the  device  to  slide  along  the  cable.  A  man  standing  on  the  metal  platform  can  reach 
one  of  the  lamps,  slide  it  opposite  a  car  door  and  extend  it  to  hook  over  the  edge  of 
the  door.  The  interior  of  the  car  is  thus  illuminated  while  cleaning  or  washing. 

At  all  installations  some  upgrading  and  light  repair  work  is  done.  Where  a  single 
type  of  operation  is  handled  at  each  spot,  the  upgrading  and  repair  work  is  done  after 
cleaning  but  before  washing,  except  at  Everett.  There,  cars  carded  for  repairs  are 
handled  to  an  outgoing  track  reserved  for  this  work. 

Production  of  clean  cars  varies  somewhat  depending  upon  the  size  and  character 
of  the  facility  and  the  extent  of  repair  work  done.  In  all  cases  where  comparisons  with 
former  methods  are  available  there  is  increased  production  with  the  spot  method.  Using 
the  same  size  of  crew  as  with  the  older  methods,  the  reported  increase  ranges  from  25 
percent  for  a  small  single-track  cleaning  yard  up  to  400  percent  for  a  larger  highly 
mechanized  facility. 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Mechanized   and   Electronic   Mail   Handling   Facilities 

C.  E.  Stoecker  (chairman,  subcommittee),  F.  E.  Austerman,  R.  O.  Balsters,  A.  E.  Bier- 
mann,  W.  O.  Boessneck,  E.  H.  Cook,  C.  M.  Frazier,  D.  C.  Hastings,  E.  T.  Lucey, 
G.  W.  Mahn,  Jr.,  H.  J.  McNally,  R.  E.  Robinson. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  as  information  with  the  recommenda- 
tion that   the  subject  be  discontinued. 

In  order  to  improve  the  operations  of  sorting  and  handling  U.  S.  sacked  mail  and 
parcels  at  terminals  with  sufficient  volume  to  justify  the  change,  railroads  are  installing 
mechanical  and  electronic  facilities,  thereby  eliminating  much  of  the  labor  involved  with 
the  conventional  saw-tooth  type  of  sorting  platform  where  mail  is  manually  carried  or 
dragged  to  the  individual  carts  parked  around  the  periphery  of  the  platform. 

An  automatic  mail-handling  system  is  developed  and  tailored  specifically  for  a 
facility  after  extensive  investigation  and  study  of  the  problems  peculiar  to  that  par- 
ticular site.  Such  a  system  can  be  divided,  for  descriptive  purposes,  into: 

1.  Receiving 

Conveyor  belts,  chutes  and  platform  trucks  are  used  to  receive  mail  bags  and  parcels 
inbound  from  mail  cars,  highway  trucks,  publishing  houses,  mail  order  houses  and 
United  States  Post  Offices. 

Storage  of  mail  before  sortation  (pre-sort  storage)  is  necessary  in  the  event  of  any 
surge  of  mail  which  cannot  be  immediately  worked  through  the  sortation  section.  This 
storage  can  be  made  on  chutes  and  slides;  however,  a  slow-moving  storage  belt,  nor- 
mally 42  in  wide  at  a  speed  of  60  ft  per  min,  will  permit  stacking  of  mail  for  greater 


Yards    and    Terminals 


169 


Fig.   1 — Coding  station  and  gate-type  deflectors,  Louisville  &  Nashville 
Railroad,  Nashville,  Tenn. 


capacity.  The  diversion  of  mail  into  pre-sort  storage  can  be  accomplished  either  by  an 
operator  activating  the  mechanism  or  by  a  load-limit  switch  just  ahead  of  the  sortation 
section.  Recall  from  pre-sort  storage  can  be  made  by  the  operator  when  he  sees  that 
the  mail  can  be  properly  handled.  Capacity  of  pre-sort  storage  is  determined  by  a  study 
of  the  number  of  sources  of  incoming  mail  along  with  the  time  of  arrival  and  quantity 
of  seasonal  mail,  such  as  catalogs,  the  exceptionally  heavy  volume  of  mail  just  prior 
to  the  Christmas  season,  future  growth  and  the  amount  of  mail  which  can  be  handled 
through   the  sortation   section  per  hour. 


2.  Sortation 

Two  main  considerations  in  the  design  of  a  sortation  system  are: 

a.  The   necessary   number  of  classifications  to   be  made. 

b.  The  maximum   number  of  units  to  be  handled  in  one  hour. 

Each  operator  has  a  keyboard  at  his  coding  station,  which  establishes  a  pre- 
determined routing  of  each  unit  of  mail  to  its  designated  station.  He  places  the  unit  of 
mail  into  the  loading  mechanism  as  he  reads  and  interprets  its  destination  and  then 
enters  a  corresponding  number  on  the  keyboard  (sec  Fig.  1  and  Fig.  2.)  The  loading 
mechanism  places  the  unit  on  one  of  the  following  types  of  conveyors  and  the  mail  is 
carried  to  its  designated  station:  (1)  belt,  (2)  tilt  tray  on  chain  drive,  and  (3)  dump 
cart  on   continuous  track. 

Present  reports  indicate  that  one  coding  station  can  generally  handle  600  to  720 
units  of  mail  per  hour. 

Two  of  the  methods  for  coding  the  mail  for  removal  from  conveyor  into  the  desired 
station  are: 

a.  The  number  entered  into  the  keyboard  is  stored  in  a  memory  unit.  This 
memory  unit  relates  this  number  to  the  motion  of  the  conveyor  so  a-  to  cause 
the  mail  to  be  removed  from  the  conveyor  at   the  designated  Nation. 

b.  The  number  entered  into  the  keyboard  imposes  B  magnetii  pulse  on  the  con- 
veyor. This  magnetic  signal  actuates  a  proximity  switch,  which,  in  turn,  start- 


170 


Yards    and    Terminals 


Fig.  2 — Four-position  coding  station  with  storage  slide,  Terminal  Railroad 
Association  of  St.  Louis,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 


the  mechanism  for  the  removal  of  the  mail  from  the  conveyor  at  the  designated 
station. 

The  actual  removal  of  the  sorted  mail  from  the  conveyor  at  the  designated  station 
can  be  accomplished  by  use  of:  (1)  tilting  tray,  (2)  dumping  cart,  (3)  horizontal 
pusher,   (4)    overhead  paddle,  and   (5)   gate-type  deflector. 

These  stations  can  consist  of: 

a.  A  chute  which  empties  into  a  platform  truck.  This  chute  has  a  gate  located 
at  the  bottom  for  the  operator  to  close  when  he  interchanges  a  full  truck 
with  an  empty  one  (see  Fig.  3.) 

b.  A  slow-moving  inclined  storage  belt  usually  held  for  units  to  be  loaded  directly 
into  mail  cars.  This  belt  can  have  an  electric  eye  at  its  discharge  end.  The 
stacked  mail  on  the  belt  intercepts  the  eye  and  automatically  stops  the  feeding 
of  additional  mail  onto  the  belt  and  signals  the  operator  that  the  belt  is  full 
(see  Fig.  4.) 

3.  Departure 

The  sorted  mail  can  be  carried  by  platform  trucks,  carts  or  conveyors  to  the  point 
of  loading.  Units  for  direct  loading  into  cars  can  be  carried  over  a  series  of  belts  to 
the  loading  track.  As  the  mail  approaches  the  designated  car,  a  deflector,  extended  across 
the  conveyor  belt,  diverts  the  mail  from  the  conveyor  down  a  chute  and  into  the  car 
door.  These  deflectors  and  chutes  are  movable  along  the  length  of  the  conveyor  (see 
Fig.  5.) 


Yards    and    Terminals 


171 


Fig.   3 — Sorted  mail   chutes  and  overhead  paddle-type  deflectors, 
TRRA,  St.  Louis. 


Fig.  4 — Inclined  storage  belts   for  holding  sorted  mail,  TRRA,  St.  Louis. 


172 


Yards    and    Terminals 


Fig.   5 — Outbound  mail  loading  belt  conveyor  on  car-floor-height  platform, 
with  loading  chute  shown  in  place  in  car  door,  TRRA,  St.  Louis. 


4.  Control  Room 

This  is  the  hub  of  the  facility  and  may  be  so  located  that  an  unobstructed  view 
can  be  had  of  the  entire  operation.  This  room  can  contain: 

a.  Motor  controls. 

b.  Electronic  controls. 

c.  Manual-operation  control. 

d.  Communication  center. 

Color-coded  signal  lights  on  motor  controls  and  also  on  manual-operation  controls 
are  an  advantage.  Adequate  lighting,  heat  and  ventilation  are  necessary  in  the  control 
room  while  air  conditioning  may  be  desirable. 

General  Remarks 

Cat-walks  and  adequate  lighting  are  necessary  over  the  entire  system  to  permit 
complete   access   to    working  parts   for  inspection,   lubrication   and  maintenance. 


Yards    and    Terminals  173 


Report  on  Assignment  6a 

Facilities   for   Loading   and   Unloading    Rail-Truck 
Freight  Equipment 

Collaborating  with  Committee  6  and  the  AAR  Motor  Transportation 
Advisory   Committee 

F.  A.  Hess  (chairman,  subcommittee),  H.  R.  Beckmann,  A.  E.  Biermann,  W.  O.  Boess- 
neck,  B.  E.  Butterbaugh,  G.  H.  Chabot,  J.  F.  Chandler,  E.  H.  Cook,  Vern  Copp, 
B.  E.  Crumpler,  C.  M.  Frazier,  W.  H.  Goold,  C.  W.  Hamilton,  D.  C.  Hastings,  Wm. 
J.  Hedley,  J.  E.  Hoving,  B.  Laubenfels,  G.  Lichtenwalner,  E.  T.  Lucey,  G.  W. 
Mahn,  Jr.,  T.  F.  Maloney,  Jr.,  H.  J.  McNally,  J.  C.  Miller,  B.  G.  Packard,  R.  H. 
Peak,  Jr.,  H.  L.  Pepper,  L.  J.  Riekenberg,  L.  VV.  Robinson,  R.  A.  Skooglun, 
E.  B.  Sonnheim,  C.  E.  Stoecker,  R.  F.  Straw,  T.  De  VV.  Styles,  J.  G.  Sutherland, 
J.  B.  Sutton,  J.  J.  Tibbits,  J.  VV.  Tucker,  W.  E.  Webster,  Jr.,  C.  E.  Zeman. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  material  covering  rail-truck  loading  and 
unloading  facilities,  with  the  recommendation  that  it  be  adopted  and  published  in  the 
Manual,  adding  it  after  the  present  material  on  page  14-3-18: 

"The  four  types  of  facilities  described  above  are  illustrated  by  Figs.  4  to  7,  incl." 
(These  figures  are  presented  herewith  on  pages  174  to   177,  incl.). 


Report  on  Assignment  6b 

Facilities    for    Loading    and    Unloading    Multi-Level 
Automobile  Cars 

This  report  covers  track  arrangements  and  special  facilities  for  the  loading  and 
unloading  of  multi-level  automobile-  and  truck-carrying  cars.  This  report  is  submitted 
as  information   with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject  be  continued. 

Two  typical  layouts  are  illustrated.  Fig.  1  shows  a  very  simple  one.  The  adjustable 
ramp  with  adjustable  movement  can  be  mounted  on  a  flat  car  or  on  a  car-level  dock. 
A   ramp  is  then   provided    to   reach   the  ground.   If  a   flat   car  is  used,  the  ramp  from   tin 

ground  to  the  car  is  of  a  portable  type  so  it  can  lie  removed  it'  Deeded.  Fig.  2  shows 
an  adjustable  ramp   serving  several    tracks,  The  adjustable  ramp  operates  on   rails  so 

that  it  can  be  moved  in  line  with  any  of  tin-  tracks  t"  be  unloaded  or  loaded.   In  some 
Cases  a   fixed   dock  extends  along   the  end  of  the  multiple  tracks  and  an  adjustable  ramp 

i-  provided  on  tin   dock  so  that  multi-level  cars  can  be  loaded  or  unloaded. 

The  drawings  show  supporting  facilities  desired  or  required  'Sir  page  178  for  Fig  i 
and  page   179  for  Fig.  2). 


174 


Yards    and    Terminals 


Yards    and    Terminals 


175 


Hull.   .'.7  1 


176 


Yards    and    Terminals 


Yards    and    Terminals 


177 


178 


Yards    and    Terminals 


Yards    and    Terminals 


179 


180 Yards    and    Terminals 

Report  on  Assignment  7 

Water  Front   Terminals 

VV.  H.  Pollard  (chairman,  subcommittee),  F.  E.  Austerman,  A.  E.  Biermann,  W.  Binzen, 
E.  G.  Brisbin,  G.  H.  Chabot,  B.  E.  Crumpler,  A.  V.  Dasburg,  D.  C.  Hastings.  J.  E. 
Hoving,  F.  S.  King,  T.  F.  Maloncv,  Jr.,  H.  J.  McNally,  J.  C.  Miller,  B.  G.  Packard, 
H.  T.  Roebuck,   R.  F.   Straw,  J.  J.  Tibbits,  L.  Tieman,  W.  E.  Webster,  Jr. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  the  following  report  covering  loading  and 
unloading  facilities  for  ore  on  the  Great  Lakes  and  the  St.  Lawrence  River,  including 
its  rail  movement,  as  a  phase  of  the  assignment  on  water  front  terminals,  with  the 
recommendation    that   the  subject  be  discontinued. 

Ore  mined  in  the  Great  Lakes  region  of  the  United  States  and  in  Canada  which  is 
chiefly  destined  to  blast  furnaces  of  steel  mills  located  in  the  United  States  requires 
numerous  port  facilities  to  load  and  unload  the  ore  to  and  from  vessels  for  its  trans- 
portation by  water  and  rail  in  the  route  of  destination. 

The  accompanying  table  provides  pertinent  information  on  ore  loading  docks  on 
the  Great  Lakes,  includng  two  of  importance  on  the  Canadian  side  of  the  St.  Lawrence 
River. 

A  brief  description  of  one  of  the  facilities  listed  in  the  table,  and  its  operation, 
including  rail  movement  of  ore,  is  given  below. 

IRON  ORE  COMPANY  OF  CANADA,  SEPT-ILES  DOCK  TERMINAL 
ORE  HANDLING  FACILITIES 

Ore  trains  consisting  of  125  ore  cars  are  transported  over  the  Quebec  North  Shore 
&  Labrador  Railway  from  the  ore  mines  at  Schefferville,  Que.,  to  the  loading  dock  at 
Sept-Iles,  Que.  Sept-IIes  is  located  on  the  St.  Lawrence  River  approximately  600  miles 
east  of  Montreal,  Que.  Each  ore  car  has  a  design  capacity  of  87  long  tons  of  ore,  and 
as  they  are  loaded  at  Schefferville,  a  sample  is  taken  out  of  each  car  to  determine  the 
grade  of  ore. 

The  ore  trains  arriving  from  the  mines  are  brought  to  a  five-track  receiving  yard. 
A  yard  switcher  then  pushes  the  125  cars  over  a  hump  where  each  car  is  weighed  by 
an  electronic  scale  at  the  rate  of  one  car  every  15>  sec.  The  cars  then  flow  into  a  12- 
track  classification  yard,  and  are  separated  according  to  the  grade  of  ore  as  determined 
from  the  samples  taken. 

As  a  certain  grade  of  ore  is  required  for  a  ship,  side-arm  pushers  running  on  a  3 -ft 
6-in  gage  track  between  the  tracks  of  the  classification  yard  push  the  cars  onto  a  single- 
track  lead.  A  barney  hoist  then  pushes  the  cars,  two  at  a  time,  into  a  tandem  rotary 
dumper  where  the  ore  passes  through  grissley  beams  which  divert  the  oversize  particles 
into  roll  crushers,  and  the  whole  is  then  fed  onto  two  72-in  conveyor  belts. 

If  ore  is  to  go  directly  to  a  ship,  the  two  72-in  conveyor  belts  move  the  ore  to 
two  60-in  conveyors  which  carry  the  ore  to  the  mix-bins,  each  of  which  has  a  capacity 
of  900  long  tons.  From  the  mix-bins,  the  ore  travels  by  two  60-in  conveyors  with  a 
maximum  capacity  of  5500  long  tons  per  hour  each  to  the  two  traveling  shiploaders 
which  dump  directly  into  the  holds  of  the  ship  at  the  loading  dock. 

The  dock  is  1600  ft  in  length,  allowing  800  ft  for  a  ship  loading  berth  and  an  800 
ft  mooring  dock,  and  affords  a  draft  of  37  ft  at  low  tide. 

If  ore  is  not  to  go  directly  to  a  ship,  the  ore  when  dumped  is  transferred  to  two 
48-in  conveyor  systems  and  deposited  in  a  stockpile  by  a  system  of  underground  con- 


Yards    and    Terminals 


181 


jo   »■»«(! 


■JBJIJOd 
JO 


vr\  o  J>  r 


*       5?} 


s^a 


8.8. 

o  o 


4    2 


^00(1 
JO 


sinodc 
jo 


looa  jo 

(josa  o-, 

J»4*f.   -li, 


*Suj„ 

JO    -4-J3    0, 

MWtH 


^*>iOd     J63 


jo  -on 
•ON  HOOC 


8    352    gg      382       283         8    8       8 

CT»        r^n«         <^C\  N  .-I  CO  %0  ■*  >3  Ov        flO  c5 


J     J??     J?       ?JJ 

w-*      C^  *^i  -*       >o>o  ^)  Co -» 


•>     "v  ji 


9  n*  l1 


o-  o  6     6  6 


-    3  Z 


■O   rH   W^ 

U-f  «-i  .-< 


797 
33S 


O  Q  Q 


7    <? 


3    ij 


J       c  o 


?  j; 

r-      «c « 


£8. 

11 


o  ooo  o  c  8  o  §  ooo  cc  2 

*J  *J    »J    *»  *»**  41^^  «J    -»J    *>  V*>  *J 

R  RRR  RR  RRR  RRR  £R  R 

O  <#  £  V  4.  •  0M9  "»  4J  «K  •  «  «t 


■    2   fi 

I  5  >, 


R*  88 


.  JJI-a     -a    .  .  .-a 

-c  a:  5:  a;  «j  «■>      ooo**       o  **  ♦>  *i 

.*  |ii   as 

«  *  3  3       ^jr" 

s  =x=    SS 

5  £21     21 


8.8.8. 


1 


1?  - 

H 

£  | 

z  • 

m  2 

5  a 

s  is 


s  -   sfi 

I  I  s 

2  ft 

5  3    £ 


I    3 


I     3  5 


2    5- 


is. 


&  = 


2     5 

.     5 


§       6 

5  I 


5    i    3 


k  •  H    • 

•  U  «    K 

t  v.    «,  ^    o 

3  s«s  a. 

•    •    o    « 

o  a:  k  **  o 

I  HHBS 


182 Yards   and    Terminals 

veyors  and  two  60-ft-high  self-propelled  stackers  which  cover  an  area  of  120  ft  by 
2000  ft  on  each  side  of  each  conveyor  belt.  Over  3,000,000  long  tons  of  ore  can  be 
stored  in  stockpile. 

When  ore  is  shipped  from  stockpile,  it  is  reloaded  into  cars,  using  6-cu-yd  electric 
shovels.  The  contents  are  then  analyzed  and  the  cars  go  through  the  weighing  and 
dumping  cycles  outlined  above. 

The  ore  cars,  after  being  emptied  in  the  rotary  dumper,  are  run  by  gravity  to  a 
four-track  empty  yard  controlled  by  retarders  and  tower  switching.  One-hundred  and 
twenty-five  cars  are  placed  in  each  track,  and  bad  order  cars  are  run  to  a  bad-order 
track.  The  Quebec  North  Shore  &  Labrador  Railway  picks  up  trains  of  125  cars  from 
this  yard   for   transportation   to   Schefferville. 

UNLOADING  DOCKS 

There  are  several  different  types  of  ore  dock  unloading  facilities  which  are  chiefly 
located  at  ports  along  the  southern  shores  of  the  Great  Lakes  or  their  tributaries.  One 
of  the  unloaders  designated  as  an  ore  bridge  can  unload  a  vessel,  stockpile  and  reload 
the  ore  into  suspended  twin  receiving  hoppers  which  dump  their  load  into  an  ore  car 
below  for  its  transfer  to  the  blast  furnace.  A  bridge  of  this  type  operates  on  runway 
tracks  that  are  laid  parallel  to  the  face  of  the  dock  and  on  350-ft  centers.  The  bridge 
is  of  the  Warren  truss  type,  40  ft  in  depth,  with  V-shaped  dock  legs  and  plain  shear 
legs.  The  bridge  from  dock  legs  to  end  is  120  ft  and  from  the  shear  legs  to  end  75  ft. 
When  unloading  and  stockpiling  ore  that  requires  a  35-ft  hoist  and  130-ft  travel,  a  12- 
gross-ton  clamshell-type  ore  bucket  is  operated  from  a  trolley  on  the  bridge  which  has 
an  operating  cycle  of  41  sec.  The  capacity  of  this  operation  is  1054  gross  tons  per  hour. 
In  the  operation  of  transferring  the  ore  from  stockpile  to  the  receiving  hoppers  for  the 
loading  of  ore  cars,  a  hoist  of  35  ft  and  190  ft  travel  is  required-  The  cycle  for  this 
operation  is  48  sec  with  a  capacity  of  900  gross  tons  per  hr.  An  ore  dock  facility  of  this 
type  usually  has  two  bridges. 

Another  ore  unloading  facility  employed  extensively  on  the  Great  Lakes  is  the  elec- 
tric Hulett.  This  unloader  operates  on  a  traveling  gantry  under  which  some  have  as 
many  as  six  tracks  for  cars  to  be  placed  and  loaded  by  a  weigh  lorry  for  rail  movement 
of  the  ore  to  storage  area  or  directly  to  the  steel  mills.  The  gantry  operates  on  runway 
tracks  that  are  laid  parallel  to  the  face  of  the  dock  and  may  be  of  any  desired  length. 
Some  of  these  facilities  have  a  maximum  outboard  reach  of  55  ft  from  face  of  dock  to 
the  center  line  of  rotation  of  the  vertical  leg  on  which  a  20-ton  clamshell-type  ore 
bucket  is  attached  to  the  lower  end.  The  bucket  in  open  position  measures  23  ft  9^4  in, 
lip  to  lip,  and  can  be  rotated  360  deg  for  convenience  in  digging  the  ore  from  the  ves- 
sels' holds.  The  Hulett  operates  on  the  gantry  in  a  shuttle  movement,  removing  ore 
from  the  vessel  and  discharging  it  in  the  weigh  lorry.  Any  number  of  these  unloaders 
may  be  employed  at  a  dock  site. 


Yards    and    Terminals  183 

Report  on  Assignment  8 

Present  Trends  in  Yard  Maintenance 

F.  S.  King  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  F.  Beck,  A.  E.  Biermann,  E.  G.  Brisbin, 
H.  M.  Dalziel,  A.  V.  Dasburg,  W.  H.  Giles,  D.  C.  Hastings,  Wm.  J.  Hedlev,  F.  A. 
Hess,  T.  F.  Malonev,  Jr.,  H.  J.  McNally,  R.  H.  Peak.  Jr.,  H.  L.  Pepper,  L.  F. 
Pohl,  W.  H.  Pollard,  L.  J.  Riekenberg,  C.  E.  Stoecker,  L.  Tieman,  W.  E.  Webster,  Jr. 

The  preliminary  report  on  Present  Trends  in  Yard  Maintenance  was  published  in 
the  Proceedings,  Vol.  61,  1960,  page  267,  and  indicated  that  improved  maintenance  of 
yard  tracks  is  being  accomplished  by: 

(a)  Use  of  better  track  materials. 

(b)  Increased  mechanization  of  maintenance  operations. 

(c)  More  programming  of  maintenance  work. 

(d)  Better  deployment  of  yard  maintenance  forces. 

(e)  Fuller  cooperation  from  operating  personnel. 

Items  (a)  and  (b)  are  discussed  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  62,  1961,  page  283.  This 
report  elaborates  on  the  remaining  three  of  the  above  items,  and  is  presented  as  infor- 
mation with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject  be  discontinued. 

MORE  PROGRAMMING  OF  MAINTENANCE  WORK 

Safe  and  efficient  yard  operation  requires  adequate  yard  maintenance.  This  can  be 
achieved  most  economically  by  the  proper  programming  of  yard  maintenance  work. 
Generally,  most  railroads  are  programming  some,  if  not  all,  of  the  following  types  of 
this  work: 

1.  Turnout  and  ladder  renewals. 

2.  Rail  laying. 

3.  Cross  tie  and  switch  timber  renewals. 

4.  Raising  and  reballasting  of  running  and  body  tracks. 

5.  Surfacing  and  lining  of   running,  body   tracks  and  ladders. 

6.  Rail  end  welding. 

7.  Frog  welding. 

8.  Frog  and  switch  grinding. 

9.  Joint  bar  renewals. 

10.  Bolt  tightening. 

1 1.  Weed  control. 

12.  Yard  cleaning. 

13.  Road  crossing  maintenance. 

14.  Maintenance  of  access  roads  and  walkways. 

Usually  these  work  programs  are  set  up  on  an  annual  basis  with  enough  flexibility 
to  meet  emergencies  or  changing  conditions,  Where  «li\  i-i<>n,  district  or  system  mechan- 
ized gangs  are  used  to  perform  any  of  this  yard  work,  the  yard  program  is  "dove 
tailed"  into  the  main-track  program.  Yard  work  programs  are  usually  sel  up  1>>  the 
local  yard  supervision,  amended  and  approved  by  division  or  district  maintenance 
officers  ainl.  mi  some  roads,  approved  by  regional  or  system  maintenance  offii 

The  approved  annual  program,   sel   up  into  monthly   work   schedules,  permits  pro 
gramming   of   material   procurement   on   an   annual   basis.   This   practice   is    followed    on 


184 Yards    and    Terminals 

some  roads.  Others  carry  a  sufficient  inventory  of  materials  at  storehouses,  making 
necessary  material  readily  available  for  delivery  on  the  order  of  local  or  division 
supervision. 

Successful  completion  of  yard  work  programs,  as  with  all  work  programs,  requires 
careful  planning  and  execution  by  responsible  supervision.  Usually,  division,  district, 
regional  and  system  officers  follow  up  the  programs  by  means  of  weekly  or  monthly 
work  progress  reports  originated   by   the  local  supervision. 

BETTER  DEPLOYMENT  OF  YARD  MAINTENANCE  FORCES 

During  the  past  few  years,  the  organization  of  yard  maintenance  forces  has  under- 
gone considerable  change.  Section  gang  territories  have  been  considerably  increased,  and 
in  many  instances  the  number  of  men  in  the  remaining  section  gangs  reduced.  Some 
railroads  have  eliminated  all  section  gangs  in  yards  and  terminals,  replacing  them  with 
floating  or  extra  gangs  with  track  inspectors  or  track  patrol  foremen.  Wide  variation 
is  found  in  the  size  of  yard  trackgangs,  whether  they  be  classified  as  section  or  extra 
gangs.  The  larger  gangs  usually  have  one  or  more  assistant  foremen,  making  it  possible 
to  break  the  gang  into  smaller  sizes  to  work  in  more  than  one  location.  These  forces 
are  usually  supplemented  with  specialists  such  as  rail  welders,  frog  welders,  switch  point, 
rail  and  frog  grinders,  truck  drivers  and  other  equipment  operators. 

Where  section  gangs  have  been  eliminated,  track  inspectors  or  trad*  patrol  foremen 
are  assigned  continually  to  patrol  the  yard.  They  check  for  conditions  requiring  atten- 
tion and,  in  some  cases,  make  minor  repairs  such  as  renewing  an  insulated  joint,  replac- 
ing a  broken  splice  bar,  readjusting  a  switch,  etc.  Other  conditions  requiring  the  atten- 
tion of  more  than  one  man,  such  as  poor  gage,  surface  or  line,  defective  rails,  frogs  or 
switch  points,  are  reported  to  the  yard  maintenance  supervision  who  arranges  for  neces- 
sary correction.  With  the  exception  of  emergencies  or  conditions  requiring  immediate 
attention,  the  extra  or  floating  gang  or  gangs  are  assigned  on  a  daily  basis.  The  small 
gang  handles  the  routine  maintenance  work  such  as  spotting  in  an  occasional  tie  or 
switch  timber,  spot  gaging,  spot  surfacing,  renewing  broken  or  defective  rails,  switch 
points  and  frogs,  correcting  guard  rail  gage,  renewing  defective  splice  bars,  repairing 
run-through  switches  and  handling  the  many  other  odd  jobs  that  must  be  done  to 
keep  the  yard  operating.  In  yards  where  the  larger  gangs  are  employed,  they  perform 
this  same  work  as  well  as  some  or  all  of  the  programmed  out-of-face  work.  One  or 
more  track  laborers  are  assigned  to  service  switch  lamps  and  to  clean  and  lubricate 
switches.  In  the  larger  yards  this  is  a  continual  five-day-a-week  job. 

In  many  of  the  larger  yards  the  heavy  programmed  work  is  performed  by  mecha- 
nized gangs  organized  specifically  for  the  work  to  be  performed.  In  some  cases  these 
gangs  were  established  and  are  used  primarily  for  yard  maintenance  work.  However,  as 
a  result  of  curtailed  maintenance  expenditures  caused  by  rising  costs  without  compara- 
tive increases  in  gross  revenue,  many  roads  have  found  it  necessary  to  utilize  their 
mechanized  trackwork  gangs,  which  were  originally  organized  for  main  track  work,  to 
perform  some,  if  not  all,   of  the  heavy  programmed  trackwork  in  yards. 

Frog  welders  and  grinder  operators  prolong  the  life  of  frogs  and  switches,  reducing 
the  frequency  of  renewal  of  these  expensive  track  materials.  Many  roads  have  found 
that  the  efficiency  of  welders  and  grinder  operators,  as  well  as  other  machine  operators, 
can  be  increased  by  careful  planning  and  scheduling  of  their  work. 

In  recent  years,  yard  maintenance  forces  have  been  considerably  reduced.  Mech- 
anization and  better  utilization  of  the  available  forces  have  made  it  possible  to  offset 
some  of  these  force  reductions.  Careful  planning,  organizing  and  assigning  of  the  avail- 


Yards   and    Terminals 185 

able  forces  is  necessary  in  order  to  accomplish  maximum  constructive  maintenance 
work.  The  larger  size  gangs  are  assigned  to  heavy  programmed  work.  In  order  to  keep 
them  on  their  assigned  job,  specialists  and  small  section  or  extra  gang  forces  are  avail- 
able to  handle  the  day-to-day  emergencies  that  develop  in  large,  busy  yards.  Material 
is  delivered  to  work  sites  in  advance  by  track-mounted  or  off-track  cranes,  work  trains 
or  automobile  trucks,  and  wornout  materials  are  picked  up  in  the  same  manner.  Actual 
working  time  and  efficiency  of  yard  track  forces  has  been  increased  by  the  use  of  buses 
or  man-hauling  automobile  trucks  to  transport  these  men,  as  rapidly  as  possible,  directly 
from  their  headquarters  to  the  work  locations,  between  work  locations  when  necessary, 
and  back  to  headquarters.  Every  effort  is  being  made  to  obtain  the  maximum  mainte- 
nance work  from  the  limited  forces  available. 

FULLER  COOPERATION  FROM  OPERATING  PERSONNEL 

With  the  present  curtailed  yard  forces  and  the  necessity  of  using  highly  mechanized 
specialist  gangs  to  perform  yard  maintenance  work,  it  is  imperative  that  maximum 
exclusive  use  of  tracks  or  ladders  be  obtained  efficiently  to  accomplish  heavy  out-of-face 
work.  Operating  or  transportation  departments  are  aware  of  this  situation  and  are 
making  definite  efforts  to  provide  their  cooperation.  When  proper  advance  notice  is 
given  to  operating  department  supervision,  one  or  two  adjacent  body  tracks  in  a  yard 
are  given  up  to  the  maintenance  department.  In  most  cases  mechanized  tieing  and  rais- 
ing equipment  requires  the  use  of  two  tracks,  the  one  being  worked  and  an  adjacent 
one.  In  some  yards  mechanized  gangs  are  permitted  to  hold  one  or  more  tracks  from 
the  time  the  job  is  started  until  it  is  completed  without  clearing  at  the  close  of  each 
day's  work,  bringing  about  additional  efficiency. 

Heavy  renewal  or  surfacing  work  on  ladders,  running  tracks,  hump  tracks  and 
switches  and  car  retarders  presents  a  more  complicated  problem.  Nevertheless,  when 
this  work  is  planned  well  in  advance  to  take  advantage  of  light-traffic  periods,  operating 
supervision  is  generally  cooperating  either  by  holding  up  yard  movements  or  working 
around  the  affected  area.  Track  usage  by  maintenance  forces  of  these  types  of  facilities 
varies  in  duration,  depending  on  the  traffic  and  physical  characteristics  of  the  respective 
yard.  Some  roads,  in  an  effort  to  minimize  yard  delays,  and  at  the  same  time  keep 
their  maintenance  costs  as  low  as  possible,  are  renewing  turnouts  by  constructing  them 
off-track.  However,  this  is  not  a  widespread   practice. 

In  many  yards  operating  officers  are  now  providing  a  maximum  of  cooperation  in 
the  handling  of  emergencies  such  as  derailments,  snow  storms,  etc.  Considering  the 
limited  forces  available  for  this  work,  this  is  a  practical  necessity.  The  substitution  of 
mechanized  snow-fighting  equipment  such  as  snow  blowers  and  burners  for  track  gangs 
with  brooms  and  shovels,  requires  track  usage  between  yard  movements.  In  most  cases, 
full  cooperation  between  the  operating  and  maintenance  departments  has  proven  that 
emergencies  can  be  handled  more  economically  with  a  minimum  of  delay  to  yard 
operations. 

Generally,  the  former  routine  non-emergency  services  provided  by  the  yard  main- 
tenance forces  for  the  operating  department  have  been  eliminated  or  great!}  reduced, 
with  some  exceptions.  Track  forces  are  called  upon  to  clean  up  debris  -m  h  as  spilled 
lading,  broken  drawbars,  brake  riggings,  etc.  In  some  yards  car  cleaning  work  is  also 
performed  by  these  forces.  However,  reduced  track  forces  have  materially  cut  down 
on  the  many  other  odd  jobs  formerly  performed  at  the  request  "i  operating  personnel. 
Generally,  where  this  type  of  work  i-  performed,  it   is  now   being  <l<me  at  a  time  con- 


186 Yards    and    Terminals 

venient    to   the    maintenance   department   rather   than    making   the   job   an   "immediate" 
emergency  which  was  a  former  common  practice. 

Reduced  yard  maintenance  budgets  and  the  advent  of  the  highly  mechanized  special- 
ist gangs  demand  full  cooperation  between  the  operating  and  maintenance  departments 
in  all  respects.  On  most  roads  the  operating  department  is  as  aware  of  this  as  the 
maintenance  department. 


Report   of   Committee   20 — Contract   Forms 


D.  F.  Lyons,  Chairman 


].  L.  Perrier, 

F.  M.  Jones 

Vice  Chairman 

\\     I).  Kirkpatrick 

D.  G.   West,  Secretary 

J.    S.    LlLLlE    (E) 

C.  L.  Gatton 

L.    W.    LlNDBERG 

J.  F.  Halpin 

W.  J.  Malone 

R.  C.  Heckel 

F.  J.  McMahon 

E.  W.   Smith 

J.  C.  Miller 

F.  B.  Mallas 

P.  A.   Moffitt 

K.  I.  Silvey 

W.  G.  Nusz   (E) 

J.  J.  Baffa 

G.  W.  Patterson   (E) 

E.  E.  Brady 

C.  M.  Sherman 

H.  F.  Brockett 

\V.  B.  Small 

R.    F.    CORRELL 

C.  W.  Smith 

A.  B.  Costic 

W.  R.  Swatosh   (E) 

C.  R.  DuBose 

D.  S.  Taylor 

C.  E.  Gipe 

J.  D.  Taylor 

E.  A.  Graham 

W.  B.  Tittsworth    Jr. 

E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr. 

J.  W.  Wallenius 

A.    F.  Hughes 

H.  L.  Zouck 

Committee 

(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names    are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 20. 

To   the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Brief  progress  report,  presented  as  information    page  188 

2.  Form  of  agreement  covering  purchase  and  application  of  weed-control 
chemicals  on   railway  property,  collaborating  with  Committee   1. 

Status  report,  presented  as  information    page  188 

3.  Form  of  agreement  for  placing  commercial  advertising  on  railway  bridges. 
Preliminary  report,  presented   for  review  and  comments   page  188 

4.  Form  of  agreement  to  cover  disposal  of  surplus  railway  property. 

Progress  report,  with  recommendations  submitted  for  adoption    page  191 

5.  Form  of  lease  for  railway  property  used  for  unloading  and  storing  liquified 
petroleum  gases,  anhydrous  ammonia,  and  other  flammable  or  dangerous 
materials. 

Preliminary   report,   submitted   for   review   and  comments    page  191 

7.  Bibliography  on  subjects  pertaining  to  contract  forms. 

Progress   report,  presented  as  information    page  195 

The  Cum mii  in    on  Contract    Forms, 

Donald  F.  Lyons,  Chairman. 

AREA  Bulletin  574,  November  1962. 


187 


188  Contract    Forms 


Report  on  Assignment   1 

Revision  of  Manual 

C.   L.   Gatton    (chairman,  subcommittee),   H.  F.   Brockett,  E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr.,  W.   J. 
Malone,  G.  W.  Patterson,  W.  R.  Swatosh,  J.  D.  Taylor,  W.  B.  Tittsworth,  Jr. 

Last  year  your  committee  submitted  comprehensive  recommendations  with  respect 
to  Chapter  20  of  the  Manual,  which  were  adopted  and  published  in  the  1962  Manual 
Supplement.  During  the  past  year  the  committee  made  a  further  review  of  its  Chapter, 
but  has  no   recommendations  to  suggest  at   this   time. 

Report  on  Assignment  2 

Form  of  Agreement  Covering  Purchase  and  Application 
of  Weed-Control  Chemicals  on  Railway  Property 

Collaborating  with  Committee   1 

J.  F.  Halpin   (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  J.  Baffa,  A.  B.  Costic,  R.  C.  Heckel,  VV.  D. 
Kirkpatrick,  F.  J.   McMahon,  W.  B.  Small. 

Your   committee   reports   the   following  progress  in  carrying  out  its  Assignment   2. 

No  railroad  company  that  the  committee  is  aware  of  has  a  contract  form  which 
it  specifically  uses  for  purchasing  and  applying  weed-control  chemicals.  Most  of  the 
contracts  are  written  on  forms  furnished  by  the  chemical  company  involved.  The  con- 
tracts vary  greatly  in  regard  to  supplying  the  material,  either  liquid  or  solid,  furnishing 
equipment  for  the  application  of  the  material,  and  operation  of  this  equipment.  Also, 
insurance  requirements  were  found  to  vary  greatly  depending  on  the  part  of  the  country 
where  the  weed  killer  is  being  furnished. 

Just  recently  the  committee  discovered  that  weed  killers  are  getting  into  reservoirs 
used  by  communities  for  drinking  water,  and  the  communities  are  contemplating  laws 
limiting   the  use  of  weed   killers  in   certain  areas. 

The  committee  will  continue  to  work  on  this  assignment. 

Report  on  Assignment  3 

Form  of  Agreement  for  Placing  Commercial  Advertising 
on  Railway  Bridges 

R.  C.  Heckel  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  E.  Brady,  C.  E.  Gipe,  F.  M.  Jones,  W.  D. 
Kirkpatrick,   C.  W.  Smith,  J.  W.  Wallenius,  D.  G.  West. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  a  tentative  draft  of  a  form  to  cover  this 
assignment,  and  would  be  glad  to  receive  any  comments  and  criticisms. 

FORM   OF  AGREEMENT  FOR  PLACING  COMMERCIAL 
ADVERTISING  ON    RAILWAY  BRIDGES 

THIS  AGREEMENT,  made  this   day  of   ,  19   ..... 

by  and  between    ,  a   corporation  organized  and 

existing  under  the  laws  of  the  State  of   hereinafter 


Contract    Forms  189 


called  the  Railway   Company,  and    ,  hereinafter 

called   the   Advertising    Company. 

WITNESSETH! 

Whereas,  the  Advertising  Company  is  engaged  in  the  advertising  business  and 
desires  to  solicit  and  execute  in  its  own  name,  not  in  the  name  of  or  on  behalf  of  the 
Railway   Company,   agreements   of   license   covering   the   placement  and   maintenance   of 

advertising  on   the  sides  of  the   Railway   Company's  bridge    , 

situated  at    and  substantially  as  shown 

on  the  plan  and  in  the  specifications  hereto  attached  designated  as   

dated    and  made  a  part 

hereof,  and 

Whereas,  the  Railway  Company  is  agreeable  to  said  placement,  maintenance  and 
use; 

Now,  Therefore,  in  consideration  of  the  mutual  covenants  herein  stipulated  to  be 
kept  by  the  parties  hereto,  it  is  agreed  as  follows: 

1.  License 

The  Railway  Company  gives  permission  to  the  Advertising  Company  to  place, 
maintain  and  use  advertising  matter  on  the  sides  of  the  Railway  Company's  bridge  in 
accordance  with  said  plan,  and  specifications  forming  a  part  thereof,  subject  to  the 
requirements  of  the  Railway  Company. 

2.  Advertising  Matter 

The  permission  herein  given  is  upon  the  express  condition  that  any  advertising 
placed   thereon  during  the  term  of  this  agreement  shall  be  in  substance,  form,  nature, 

wording,  kind  and  character  satisfactory  to  and  approved  by  the   

of  the  Railway  Company  and  upon  any  breach  of  this  condition  by  Advertising  Com- 
pany such  license  shall  terminate  at  once. 

3.  Permits  and  Taxes 

Prior  to  the  placement  of  the  advertising  the  Advertising  Company  shall,  at  its 
sole  cost  and  expense,  procure  all  necessary  approvals,  permits,  or  licenses  required  by 
any  governmental  bodies  or  public  authorities  and  shall  pay  all  license  fee  and  taxes, 
or  increase  of  taxes,  assessed  against  or  imposed  by  reason  of  the  placement  and  main- 
tenance of  said    advertising. 

4.  Cost  and   Maintenance 

The   Advertising   Company    shall,   at   its   sole   cost   and   expense   and,   in   a   manner 

satisfactory  to  the    of  the   Railway  Company, 

place  and  maintain   the  advertising  during  the  continuance  of  this  Agreement. 

If  the  Railway  Company  should,  in  the  course  of  its  work  in  maintaniing.  repair- 
ing, renewing,  altering,  relocating  or  removing  the  bridge,  find  it  necessary  to  damage, 
deface,  obliterate,  mutilate  or  totally  remove  any  advertising,  the  Railway  Company 
shall  not  be  liable  to  Advertising  Company  or  to  it ^  advertisers  for  any  such  damage 
or  removal. 


190  Contract    Forms 


5.  Removal 

Upon  notice  of  termination  of  the  license,  the  Advertising  Company  shall  at  once, 
at  its  own  cost  and  expense,  remove  the  advertising  and  restore  the  Railway  Company's 

bridge  to  its  former  condition  and  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  

of  the  Railway  Company.  If  the  Advertising   Company  within    days 

shall  fail  to  do  so,  the  Railway  Company  may  remove  the  advertising  and  restore  the 
bridge  to  its  former  condition  at  the  sole  cost  and  expense  of  the  Advertising  Company, 
which  cost  and  expense  the  Advertising  Company  shall  pay  upon  demand. 

6.  Rentals 

The  Advertising   Company  shall  pay  as  rental  therefor  $ per 

annum,  in  advance,  for  each  year  and  at  the  same  rate  for  any  part  of  a  year  unexpired 
at  the   termination  of  this  license. 

7.  Indemnification 

The  Advertising  Company  shall  not  in  any  way  or  at  any  time  interfere  with  the 
safe  passage  of  the  Railway  Company's  trains;  and  Advertising  Company  agrees  to 
indemnify,  protect  and  save  harmless  the  Railway  Company  from  and  against  all  loss 
of  and  damage  to  any  property  whatsoever  (including  property  of  the  parties  hereto 
and  of  all  other  persons  whomever),  and  all  loss  and  damage  on  account  of  injury 
to  or  death  of  any  person  whomsoever  (including  employees  and  patrons  of  the  parties 
hereto  and  all  other  persons  whomsoever),  and  all  claims  and  liability  for  such  loss  and 
damage  and  cost  and  expenses  thereof,  caused  by  or  growing  out  of  operations  of  this 
agreement  or  the  presence,  construction,  maintenance,  use  or  existence  of  said  adver- 
tising, whether  caused  by  the  fault,  failure  or  negligence  of  the  Railway  Company  or 
otherwise. 

8.  Term 

This  agreement  shall  continue  in  force  for   years,  and  thereafter 

from  year  to  year  until  terminated  by  either  party  giving  to  the  other  day's 

notice  in  writing  at  the  last  known  address,  of  its  intention  so  to  do,  and  upon  the 
expiration  of  the  time  mentioned  in  such  notice  this  agreement  shall  terminate. 

9.  Assignment 

This  agreement   shall   not  be  assigned   or  in   any   manner   transferred   without   the 

written  consent  of  the   of  the 

Railway   Company. 

Until  terminated  as  herein  provided,  this  agreement  shall  inure  to  the  benefit  of 
and  be  binding  upon  the  legal  representatives  and  successors  of  the  parties  respectively. 

In  Witness  Whereof,  the  parties  hereto  have  executed  this  agreement  in  

,  the  day  and  year  first  above  written. 


Attest    By 

Secretary 

Witness   By 


Contract    Forms  191 


Report  on  Assignment  4 

Form  of  Agreement  to  Cover  Disposal  of  Surplus 
Railway  Property 

E.  W.  Smith   (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  F.  Correll,  E.  A.  Graham,  E.  M.  Hastings, 

Jr.,  F.  M.  Jones,  F.  B.  Mallas,  J.  L.  Perrier,  J.  D.  Taylor,  J.  W.  Wallenius. 

Last  year  your  committee  presented  as  information  a  tentative  draft  of  a  proposed 
"short  form"  agreement  to  cover  disposal  of  surplus  railway  property.  This  draft,  as 
presented  in  Bulletin  567,  November  1961,  page  174,  is  now  submitted  for  adoption 
and  publication  in  the  Manual. 

It  is  planned  to  present  at  a  later  date  a  more  comprehensive  form  to  cover  large 
or  high-value  items  and  structures,  or  where  there  is  a  considerable  hazard. 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Form  of  Lease  for  Railway  Property  Used  for  Unloading 

and  Storing  Liquified  Petroleum  Gases,  Anhydrous 

Ammonia  and   Other  Flammable  or 

Dangerous  Materials 

F.  B.   Mallas   (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  F.  Correll,  F.  M.  Jones,  F.  J.  McMahon, 

P.  A.  Moffitt,  J.  L.  Perrier,  C.  W.  Smith,  J.  D.  Taylor. 

Your  committee  submits,  as  a  progress  report,  for  information,  a  draft  of  the 
above-named  form. 

The  Manual  at  present  does  not  contain  a  form  of  lease  covering  railway  property 
to  be  used  for  these  specific  products.  Generally  in  use  by  railways  is  the  industrial 
site  type  of  lease  form  which  covers  most  types  of  industry,  with  the  purpose  of  the 
lease  being  written  in.  The  lease  as  written  below  is  an  attempt  to  separate  these 
products,  because  of  their  dangerous  nature,  from  those  covered  by  the  general  type 
of  lease. 

Members  of  the  Association  are  requested  to  give  the  committee  the  benefit  of 
their  suggestions  and  criticisms. 

FORM    OF   LEASE    FOR    RAILWAY   PROPERTY    USED    FOR 

UNLOADING  AND   STORING   LIQUIFIED   PETROLEUM 

GASES,    ANHYDROUS    AMMONIA    AND    OTHER 

FLAMMABLE   OR   DANGEROUS    MATERIALS 

THIS  LEASE,  made  this   day  of   

19    .  .  .  .,  by  and  between   a  corporation 

organized   and    existing  under   the   laws  of  the  State  of    

hereinafter  called  the  Railway  Company  and    

hereinafter  called  Lessee. 

WITNESSETH: 

Whereas,  the  Railway   Company  owns  certain  premises  situated  in    

County   of    State   of    

further   described   as    follows:     


192  Contract    Forms 


in   accordance  with  plat   hereto  attached,  marked  Exhibit  "A"  and  dated   

,  19   . .  .  . ,  and  made  a  part  hereof,  and 

Whereas,  the  Lessee  desires  to  lease  said  premises  from  the  Railway  Company  for 
the  purpose  of  constructing  and  maintaining  thereon  facilities  for  the  unloading,  storing 

and   handling  of    

and  for  no   other  purpose,  and 

Whereas,  the  Railway  Company  is  agreeable  to  such  lease,  construction  and  main- 
tenance thereon,  subject   to  conditions  herein   set  forth; 

Now,  Therefore,  in  consideration  of  the  mutual  covenants  herein  stipulated  to  be 
kept  by  the  parties  hereto,  it  is  agreed  as  follows: 

1.  Term 

Lease  shall  be  effective   ,  19   and  shall  extend 

to    19    .  . .  . ,  unless  sooner  terminated  as 

herein  provided. 

2.  Rental 

Lessee  shall  pay  to  the  Railway  Company  a  rental  of  $ 

per    ,  payable    in  advance, 

beginning    ,   19    

3.  Improvement 

Lessee  shall,  within    months  of  the  effective  date  of 

this  lease,  begin  the  construction  of  said  facilities  and  complete  same  within    

months  of  said  date  according  to  plans  and  specifications 

submitted  to   and  approved  by   the  Railway   Comapny  in  advance  of  construction.  In 

event  of  destruction  thereof  in   whole   or  part,  Lessee  shall  within    

months  thereafter  commence  the  work  of  rebuilding  or  repairing  and  complete  same 
within   months  of  said  date  of  destruction. 

4.  Laws  and  Regulations 

Lessee   is   permitted  to  and  shall  use  premises  for  unloading,  storing  and  handling 

of    ,   which    product   is   of   a   dangerous   and 

flammable  nature,  and  lighting  of  premises,  pump  houses  or  other  enclosures  shall  be 
by  electricity.  Lessee  shall  comply  with  all  Federal,  State  and  local  regulations  and 
ordinances  and  with  all  regulations  prescribed  from  time  to  time  by  any  public  author- 
ity having  jurisdiction  or  by  the  Railway  Company,  relating  to  the  unloading,  storing 
and  handling  of  said  product. 

5.  Clearance 

Lessee  shall  not  place  or  permit  to  be  placed,  or  to  remain,  any  material,  struc- 
ture or  pole  or  other  obstruction  within   feet  laterally  of 

the  center  line  of  track  or  within    feet  vertically  from  the  top 

of   rail   of   any   track. 

6.  Unloading  Device 

Lessee  is  permitted  to  construct,  maintain  and  operate  at  a  point  opposite  the 
leased  premises  near  the  track  serving  them,  a  device  for  unloading  


Contract    Forms  193 


from   railroad   cars,   together  with   pipelines 

extending  from  a  connection  with  said  unloading  device  to  Lessee's  tanks  located  on 
said  leased  premises,  said  unloading  device  to  be  constructed,  maintained  and  operated 
in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  Railway  Company,  and  no  portion  thereof  to  be  closer 

than    feet  to  the  center  line  of  any  track  when  said  device 

is  not  in  use. 

7.  Condition  of  Premises 

Lessee  shall  at  all  time  keep  the  premises  in  a  safe,  clean  and  sanitary  condition, 
and  shall  not  mutilate,  damage,  misuse,  alter  or  permit  waste  thereon. 

8.  Taxes 

The  Lessee  shall  pay  all  taxes,  licenses  and  other  charges  which  may  be  assessed  or 
levied  upon  said  premises,  including  improvements  thereon,  and  upon  the  business  of 
the  Lessee  upon  said  premises,  or  against  the  Railway  Company  by  reason  of  occupation 
or  use  of  said  premises  by  the  Lessee. 

9.  Termination 

Either  party  hereto  may  terminate  this  lease  at  any  time,   by  giving  to  the  other 

party    days  written  notice  to   that  effect.  Acceptance  of  rent 

in  advance  by  the  Railway  Company  shall  not  act  as  a  waiver  of  the  right  to  terminate 
this  lease. 

10.  Notice 

Any  written  notice  given  by  the  Railway  Company  to  the  Lessee  shall  be  deemed 
to  be  properly  served  if  the  same  be  delivered  to  the  Lessee,  or  one  of  the  Lessee's 
agents,  or  if  posted  on  said  premises,  or  if  mailed,  postpaid,  addressed  to  the  Lessee  at 
the  Lessee's  last  known  place  of  business. 

11.  Refund 

Rent  paid  in  advance  for  a  period  extending  beyond  the  termination  of  this  lease 
shall  be  refunded  to  the  Lessee,  unless  such  termination  shall  be  on  account  of  violation 
or  non-fulfillment  of  any  of  the  terms  of  this  lease  by  the  Lessee,  or  on  account  of 
abandonment  of  said  premises  by  the  Lessee,  in  which  case  the  amount  paid  as  rental 
shall  be  retained  by  the  Railway  Company. 

12.  Liability 

Lessee  covenants  and  agrees  to  indemnify,  protect,  and  forever  hold  harmless  the 
Railway  Company  from  any  and  all  claims,  liabilities,  and  expenses  which  the  Railway 
Company  shall  incur  by  reason  of  any  real  or  alleged  injury  (including  injury  resulting 
in  death)  to  any  person  or  persons  whomsoever  (including  the  employees  of  the  parties 
hereto),  and  from  all  loss,  claims  liabilities  and  expenses  by  reason  of  any  real  or  alleged 
damage  to  or  destruction  of  property  (including  the  property  of  the  parties  hereto)] 
arising  out  of,  or  in  any  way  attributable  to  the  use  of  said  premises  by  the  Lessee, 
or  in  any  way  attributable  to  the  unloading,  storing  or  handling  of  said  product  by  the 
Lessee,  regardless  of  whether  or  not  such  injury  or  damage  is  caused  by  negligence  of 
the  Railway  Company,  its  agents  or  employees. 


194  Contract    Forms 


13.  Abandonment 

The  failure  of   the   Lessee  to   occupy   or   use  said  premises   for  the  purpose  herein 

stated  for  days  at  any  one  time  shall  be  deemed  an  abandonment 

thereof.  An  abandonment  of  said  premises  shall,  at  the  option  of  the  Railway  Company, 
operate  as  an  absolute  and  immediate  termination  of   this  lease  without  notice. 

14.  Removal  of  Improvements 

Upon  the  termination  of  this  lease  in  any  manner,  the  Lessee  shall  deliver  to  the 
Railway   Company    the  possession   of  said  premises  to   substantially  their  former  state. 

Should  the  Lessee  fail,  within   days  after  the  date  of  termination 

of  this  lease,  to  make  such  removal  or  restoration,  then  the  Railway  Company  may, 
at  its  election,  either  remove  said  improvement  and  restore  said  premises  to  substantially 
their  former  state  at  the  sole  cost  of  the  Lessee,  or  may  take  and  hold  the  said 
improvements  as  its  sole  property. 

15.  Forfeiture 

Any  breach  of  any  covenant,  stipulation  or  condition  herein  contained  to  be  kept 
and  performed  by  the  Lessee,  shall  be  sufficient  cause  for  the  immediate  termination 
of  this  lease. 

16.  Renewal 

A   lawful  continuance   of  the  tenacy  beyond  said  term  shall  be  deemed  a  renewal 

thereof   for  the   further   term   of    to  end  at 

the  expiration  thereof,  without  further  notice;  and  every  further  lawful  continuance 
shall  be  deemed  a  further  renewal  for  a  like  term,  to  end  in  a  like  manner,  and  every 
renewal  or  holding  over  shall  be  subject  to  the  provisions  of  this  lease. 

17.  Assignment 

This  lease  shall  not  be  assigned  or  in  any  manner  transferred,  nor  shall  said  prem- 
ises or  any  part  thereof  be  sublet,  used  or  occupied  by  any  party  other  than  the  Lessee, 
nor  for  any  purpose  other  than  specified  herein,  without  written  consent  of  the  Railway 
Company. 

18.  Successors 

Until  terminated  as  hereinbefore  provided,  this  lease  shall  inure  to  the  benefit  of 
and  be  binding  upon  the  parties  hereto,  their  heirs,  executors,  administrators,  successors 
and  assigns. 

In  Witness  Whereof,   the  parties  hereto   executed  this  lease  in    

,  as  of  the  day  and  year  first  above  written. 


Witness 


Witness 


By   

Lessee 

Bv  

Contract    Forms  195 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Bibliography  on  Subjects  Pertaining  to  Contract  Forms 

K.   J.   Silvey    (chairman,   subcommittee),   A.   F.   Hughes,   J.   S.   Lillie,   L.   \V.   Lindberg, 
J.  C  Miller,  W.  G.  Nusz,  C  M.  Sherman,  D.  S.  Taylor,  H.  L.  Zouck. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  list  of  reference  books  for  the  guidance  of 
engineers  involved  in  the  handling  of  contracts: 

1.  Engineering   Contracts   and   Specifications,   3rd  ed.,    (by   R.  W.  Abbett),   pub- 
lished by  Wiley,  New  York. 

2.  Contracts,   Specifications,   and    Law    for    Engineers    (by   Clarence   W.   Dunham 
and  Robert  D.  Young),  published  by  McGraw-Hill,  New  York. 

3.  The   Specifications    and  Law  on   Engineering  Works    (by  Walter    C.  Sadler), 
published  by   John  Wiley   &  Sons,  New  York. 

4.  Legal  Phases  of  Engineering — Contracts  and  Specifications  (by  Ivan  C.  Craw- 
ford),  published  by   the  Macmillan   Co.,  New  York. 

5.  Legal  Aspects  of  Engineering  (by  Walter  C.  Sadler),  published  by  John  Wiley 
&  Sons,  New  York. 


Report   of   Committee   25 — Waterways  and   Harbors 


F.  J.  Olsen,  Chairman 


R.  J.  Clarke, 

Vice  Chairman 
J.   G.  Miller 
M.  A.  Michel 
J.  C.  Fenno 

L.  E.  Bates 
G.  W.  Becker 
E.  A.   Beekley 
G.  W.  Benson 
R.  L.  Bostian 


B.  M.  Dornblatt 
B.  Elkind  (E) 

D.  GULLATT 

L.  W.  Haydon 
H.  F.   Kimball 

E.  S.  Laws 
Shu-t'ien  Li 

M.  S.  Patterson 
J.  F.  Piper 
A.  L.  Sams 

Committee 


(E)  Member  Emeritus 


Those    whose    names    are    set    in    fold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 25. 


To   the  American    Railway   Engineering  Association: 
Your  Committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Brief  progress  statement,  submitted  as  information   page  198 

2.  Current  policies,  practices  and  developments  dealing  with  navigation  proj- 
ects, collaborating  with  AAR  Competitive  Transportation  Division —  Water- 
ways. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  198 

3.  Bibliography  relating  to  benefits  and  costs  of  inland  waterway  projects 
involving  navigation. 

Progress  report  presenting  four  additional  references  with  annotations   ....   page  199 

4.  The  use  of  hydraulic  models  for  the  study  and  resolution  of  waterway 
problems. 

No  report. 

6.  Planning,  construction  and   maintenance  of  rail-water  transfer  facilities 
Progress   report  submitted  as  information   on   the  study  of  roll-on,   roll-off, 

lift-on,   lift-off  and   conveyor-type   operations    page  202 

7.  Relative  merits  and  economics  of  construction  materials  used  in  waterfront 
facilities. 

Progress   report,   submitted   as   information,   on    high-strength   steel   and   box 

sections  in  heavy-duty   fender   piling  of   waterfront   facilities   page  205 

The  Committee  on  Waterways  \m>  Harbors, 

F.  J.  Olsen,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  574.  November  1962. 


197 


198 Waterways   and    Harbors 

Report  on  Assignment   1 

Revision  of  Manual 

J.  G.  Miller   (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  L.  Sams. 

Your   committee   submits  as  information   the   following   report  of  progress  in   con- 
nection with   revising  Parts  2,  3  and  4  of  Chapter  25  of  the  Manual: 

Part  2 — Lands  Subject  to  Servitude  of   Navigation  as  Affecting  Protection 
of  Roadbeds  Built  or  to  Be  Built  on  Proposed  Dam  Pool  Areas 

Study  is  under  way   looking  to  revising  this  part  of  the  Manual  to   reflect   court 
decisions  since  1941. 

Part    3 — Bridges    Over    Navigable    Waterways 

Study  is  being  made  looking  to    revising   this   part   of   the   Manual   to   reflect   the 
provisions  of  the  Truman-Hobbs  Act. 

Part  4 — Clearances 

The   committee   is  making  a  study   of   the   published  clearances  established  by   the 
Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  Army. 

Report  on  Assignment  2 

Current   Policies,   Practices,   and   Developments   Dealing 
with    Navigation   Projects 

Collaborating  with  AAR  Competitive  Transportation  Division — Waterways 

B.  M.  Dornblatt  (chairman,  subcommittee),  G.  W.  Becker,  G.  W.  Benson. 

Your  committee  lists  as  information  the  following  documents  pertaining  to  naviga- 
tion projects  which  may   prove  of  interest  and  serve  as  a  guide  for  future  reference: 

1.  National  Transportation  Policy,  preliminary  draft  of  a  report  prepared  for  the 
Committee  on  Interstate  and  Foreign  Commerce,  U.  S.  Senate,  by  the  Special 
Study  Group  on  Transportation  Policies  in  the  U.  S.,  1-3-61.  U.  S.  Printing 
Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C  Price  $2.00) 

2.  Report  No.  29.  Report  of  the  Select  Committee  on  National  Water  Resources. 
(U.  S.  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.) 

3.  Committee  Print  No.  11.  Water  Resource  Activities  in  the  U.  S.  (U.  S.  Print- 
ing Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.) 

4.  Committee  Print.  Supplemental  Information  on  Subjects  Covered  by  the  Com- 
mittee's Studies,  Select  Committee  on  National  Water  Resources,  U.  S.  Senate, 
Pursuant  to  Senate  Report  No.  48,  86th  Congress.  (U.  S.  Printing  Office, 
Washington  25,  D.  C.) 

5.  Cross-Florida  Barge  Canal  Project  (T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Zone  3,  Committee  on 
Waterways,  AAR,  chief  engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond,  Va.) 

6.  The  Economic  Prospects  of  Cross-Florida  Barge  Canal  Project.  (Charles  A. 
Welsh,  director,  Graduate  Program  in  Business  Administration,  Rollins  College, 
Winter  Park,  Fla.) 


Waterways   and   Harbors 199 

7.  Hydraulics  of  River  Channels  as  Related  to  Navigability,  Geological  Survey 
Water-Supply  Paper  1539-W  (U.  S.  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.) 

8.  Senate  Document  97,  89th  Congress,  Second  Session,  Policies,  Standards  and 
Procedures  in  the  Formulation,  Evaluation  and  Review  of  Plans  for  Use  and 
Development  of   Water  and  Related   Land  Resources,  May   1962. 

News  reports  under  date  of  September  16,  1962,  indicate  that  the  proposed  Tennes- 
see-Tombigbee  Canal,  which  would  link  these  already  developed  rivers,  and  shorten  the 
distance  between  some  inland  ports  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  by  650  miles,  has  been 
apparently  by-passed  by  Congress  for  actual  construction  money.  This  project  is  esti- 
mated to  cost  $262,244,000  and  calls  for  253  miles  of  canalized  waterways  between  the 
two  rivers.  The  channel  would  be  partly  9  ft  and  partly  12  ft  deep.  The  Corps  of  Engi- 
neers has  requested  $225,000  of  additional  funds  to  complete  the  planning. 

A  hearing  was  held  on  Oct.  4  by  the  Chicago  District,  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S. 
Army,  on  plans  to  build  a  deep  harbor  at  Burns  Ditch,  east  of  Gary,  Ind. 

The  Florida  Waterway  Association  has  actively  embarked  on  a  campaign  for  secur- 
ing endorsement  of  a  cross-Florida  barge  canal  above  Tampa  and  below  Jacksonville, 
Fla.  This  proposed  canal  would  service  Cape  Canaveral. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

Bibliography  Relating  to  Benefits  and   Costs  of  Inland 
Waterway   Projects   Involving   Navigation 

M.  A.  Michel   (chairman,  subcommittee),  G.  W.  Becker,  B.  M.  Dornblatt,  H.  W.  Kim- 
ball, M.  S.  Patterson. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  which  presents  four 
additional  references  with  annotations. 

1961 

1.  January  3,  1961,  87th  Congress,  1st  Session — Committee  Print  "National  Trans- 
portation Policy — Preliminary  Draft  of  a  Report  Prepared  for  the  Committee  on  Inter- 
state and  Foreign  Commerce  by  the  Special  Group  on  Transportation  Policies  in  the 
United  States.  (Pursuant  to  S.  Res.  29,  151  and  244  of  86th  Congress.)" 

This  report  is  commonly  known  as  the  Doyle  Report  and  is  very  ably  prepared. 
It  contains  an  excellent  section  on  "user  charges"  and  is  adequately  documented. 

2.  August  1961,  "Economic  Evaluation  of  Inland  Waterway  Projects",  by  Shu-t'ien 
Li  and  Eric  E.  Bottoms.  Journal  of  the  Waterways  and  Harbors  Division.  Proc.  ASCE. 

This  paper  points  out   that  the  adverse  effects  due  to  displacement   of  competitive 
transportation  by  diversion  of  traffic  to  waterways  should  be  recognized.  It  also  points 
out  a  number  of  additional  negative  benefits  which  should  be  observed  in  determination 
on  a  benefit-to-cost  ratio.  Appended  to  the  paper  is  a  selected  bibliography  of  220  rein 
ences  in   chronological  order,  dating  from   1874  to   1961. 

3.  Permanent  International  Association  of  Navigation  Congress  XX th  International 
Navigation  Congress — Baltimore,  September  1961.  Section  1.  Subject  1  "Criteria  for 
Economic  Justification  of  New  Inland  Navigable  Waterways,  etc." 


200 Waterways   and    Harbors 

A  total  of  13  excellent  papers  were  presented  which  dealt  with  economic  justifica- 
tion. They  are  covered  in  a  brief  General  Report  by  Thomas  J.  Fratar  for  P.I.A.N.C. 

a.  Germany  (Federal  Republic) — The  paper  lauds  the  many-sided  influence  of  in- 
land waterways  on  the  economic  development  of  the  regions  through  which  they  pass. 
The  summary,  however,  contains  the  following,  which  is  most  interesting  (page  29): 

"Where,  however,  the  development  of  the  inland  waterways  is  to  the  economic 
advantage  of  several  parties,  it  is  appropriate  to  regard  the  internal  waterway  as  an 
economic  complex  and  to  amalgamate  the  profit-making  capacity  of  the  various  interests. 
For  this  purpose  the  incorporation  of  joint-stock  companies  has  proved  the  most 
efficient  solution." 

b.  Belgium — This  paper  is  forcefully  in  favor  of  public  waterways;  however,  it 
does  state  (page  44)  that:  "Taxes  levied  on  water  traffic  in  Belgium  do  not  exceed  10-15 
percent  of  freight  rates  and  cover  expenses."  (This  would  be  equivalent  to  a  user 
charge.) 

c.  Brazil — The  use  of  various  cost  formulas  in  the  selection  of  new  ways  of  trans- 
portation are  indicated.  It  is  pointed  out  that  the  waterway  improvement  results  in 
multiple  benefits,  such  as  flood  control,  irrigation,  municipal  and  industrial  water  sup- 
ply, hydroelectric  power,  sewage  disposal  and  recreation.  General  statements  in  the 
summary    (page   79)    of  interest  are: 

"It  should  be  remembered  that  water  transport  is  economical;  frequently,  however, 
the  means  for  rendering  transport  profitable  is  expensive. 

"When  there  is  no  navigable  waterway  and  the  area  is  in  course  of  development 
or  about  to  be  developed,  necessitating  the  transport  of  large  quantities  of  ore  and  coal 
and  other  bulk  merchandise,  it  is  the  railway  which  is  the  preferable  means  of  transport." 

d.  France — The  crux  of  the  economic  considerations  in  the  French  paper  (page  85) 
is  covered  by  Reporter  Thomas  J.  Fratar  in  the  General  Report   (page  8)   as  follows: 

It  is  concluded  that  the  problems  involved  in  evaluating  the  economic  justification 
of  a  waterway  where  a  major  stimulation  of  industrial  development  is  involved  cannot 
be  solved  by  simplified  patterns  that  consider  only  value,  but  that  they  involve  planning 
decisions  on  the  highest  level  of  the  State.  The  large  investments  involved  raise  problems 
of  choice  between  different  areas  of  the  country.  The  enrichment  of  a  region  by  the 
creation  of  a  new  waterway  of  high  capital  cost  may  have  as  a  corollary  a  decrease  in 
the  gain  or  even  an  impoverishment  of  other  regions.  A  basic  question  then,  is  to  what 
extent  an  investment  considered  for  one  region  constitutes  an  increase  in  wealth  or 
merely  a  displacement  of  wealth." 

e.  Great  Britain — The  British  paper  deals  extensively  with  improvements  to  exist- 
ing waterway  facilities  and  does  not  treat  on  economic  justification. 

f.  Italy — The  Italian  paper  points  out  that  their  waterways  are  fairly  straight  and 
have  little  rise  or  fall  but  that  these  conditions  would  result  in  minimum  cost  for  other 
forms  of  transportation  as  well.  "Due  to  high  cost  of  transshipment,  water  transporta- 
tion can  usually  compete  only  where  origin  and  destination  of  shipments  is  along  or 
extremely  close  to  the  waterway." — Fratar  General  Report,  page  10. 

g.  Poland — The  Polish  paper  considers  waterway  improvements  cheaper  than  rail- 
road construction  and  of  greater  capacity.  Following  are  some  waterway  advantages 
mentioned:  lower  cost  labor,  better  ratio  of  weight  of  equipment  to  weight  of  load;  less 
fuel  consumption,  greater  equipment  life;  lesser  maintenance  costs;  better  adapted  to 
carry  fragile  and  very  large  articles;  better  adapted  to  international  trade,  enhancing 
earning  of  foreign  currency.  The  principal  disadvantages  include:  dependence  on  weather 


Waterways    and    Harb  o  rs 201 


and   hydrologic    conditions;    slow    speed;    greater   length    of   circuitous   route;    need   for 
transfer  to  other  means  of  transportation. 

h.  Portugal — The  following  two  hypotheses  for  determining  economic  project  justi- 
fication    are  made: 

(1)  The  annual  cost  for  construction  and  operation  of  a  state  waterway  would 
be  covered  by  taxes  on  navigation,  tolls  and,  indirectly,  by  additional  taxes 
from   expanded   economic  activities  stimulated   by   the  new   waterway. 

(2)  If  constructed  and  operated  by  a  private  corporation,  repayment  for  annual 
costs  would  come  through  tolls  or  operation  of  a  barge  company  by  investors 
and  the  retention  of  revenues  therefrom. 

Economic  evaluations  note  that  diversion  of  traffic  would  aggravate  present  railway 
deficits.  It  is  recommended  that  this  be  considered  in  waterway  project  evaluation. 

i.  Switzerland — The  Swiss  paper  deals  principally  with  the  comparison  of  cost  of 
shipping  petroleum  by  waterway  and  by  pipeline  in  Switzerland. 

j.  Sweden — The  Swedish  paper  describes  economic  steps  suited  to  a  country  where 
competing  transportation  systems  are  government  owned,  ignoring  free  enterprise. 

k.  United  States — This  paper  covers  analyses  usually  adhered  to  by  U.  S.  Federal 
agencies,  concluding  with  the  benefit-cost  ratio  principle  as  a  virtuous  method  of  de- 
termining economic  justification  for  waterway  projects.  It  avoids,  however,  losses  to 
land  carriers  through  diversion  of  traffic  to  the  waterways  as  a  negative  benefit.  It  also 
falls  short  on  that  controversial  issue  "interest  rate",  wherein  the  Federal  Agencies  use 
something  of  the  order  of  2l/2  percent  to  2%  percent,  while  current  market  yields  in 
the  financing  of  long  term  Treasury  Bonds  is  in  the  neighborhood  of  4  percent.  Further, 
it  indicates  that  "savings  in  transportation  costs  are  usually  considered  as  general  bene- 
fits to  the  public" — Fratar;  although  it  is  factual  that  the  user  of  the  waterway  is  the 
prime  beneficiary. 

1.  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics — This  paper  presents  a  socialistic  method 
of  economic  comparison  studies  wherein  all  means  of  production,  including  transport 
methods,  are  state-owned. 

m.  Yugoslavia — This  paper  deals  essentially  with  an  authorized  and  proposed  in- 
land navigation  system  for  an  area  in  the  northeastern  section  of  Yugoslavia  which 
includes  portions  of  the  Danube  and  Sava  rivers.  Promotion  of  inland  waterway  naviga- 
tion is  a  strong  national  policy  in  lieu  of  continued  development  of  the  existing  railway 
system.  Major  factors  in  justifying  the  project  were:  (1)  poor  conditions  and  insuffi- 
cient capacity  of  existing  railway  network,  (2)  seasonal  agricultural  production  un- 
favorable for  economical  rail  transport  and  (3)  annual  maintenance,  equipment  and 
transportation  costs  on  waterways  considered  to  be  30  to  50  percent   lower  than  rail. 

The  foregoing  are  not  necessarily  national  policies  of  the  countries  represented  at  the 
P  I.A.X.C.  meeting,  but  the  expression  of  the  authors  of  the  papers.  A  number  of  the 
authors  conclude  that  to  a  very  large  degree  the  decision  to  build  a  waterway  is  a  po- 
litical one   and  involves   planning  decision   at    the  hitrhest    level. 

1962 

4.  May  29,  1962 — Senate  Document  No.  97,  87th  Congress,  2nd  Session:  "Policies, 
Standards  and  Procedures  in  the  Formulation,  Evaluation  and  Review  of  Plans  for  Use 
and  Development   of  Water  and  Related  Lund  Resources."  Prepared  under  the  direction 

of  The  President'';  Water  Resourcei  Council,  c   S    Government  Printing  Office,  Wash- 
ington, D.  C 


202 Waterways   and    Harbors 

This  document  was  approved  by  President  Kennedy  on  May  15,  1962,  for  applica- 
tion by  the  Interior,  Agriculture,  Health,  Education  and  Welfare  and  the  Army  Depart- 
ments, also,  the  Bureau  of  Budget. 

Of  considerable  concern  is  the  section  on  interest  which  ".  .  .  shall  be  based  upon 
the  average  rate  of  interest  payable  by  the  Treasury  on  interest-bearing  marketable 
securities  of  the  United  States  outstanding  at  the  end  of  the  fiscal  year  preceding  such 
computation  which,  upon  original  issue,  had  terms  to  maturity  of  15  years  or  more." 

The  document  further  indicates  that  a  detailed  section  on  cost  bearing  factors,  which 
will  include  navigation,  is  in  the  course   of  preparation. 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Planning,    Construction   and    Maintenance 
of   Rail-Water  Transfer  Facilities 

J.   C.  Fenno    (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  A.  Beekley,  G.  W.  Benson,  R.  L.  Bostian, 
R.  J.   Clarke,  L.   W.  Haydon,  E.  S.  Laws,  J.  G.   Miller. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  report  of  progress  on  the 
study   of  roll-on,  roll-off,   lift-on,  lift-off  and  conveyor  type  operations. 

The  distinctive  feature  of  roll-on,  roll-off,  lift-on,  lift-off  and  similar  types  of  ship- 
ping services  is  the  transfer  between  land  carriers  and  ships  of  loaded  rail  cars,  highway 
trailers  or  containers  instead  of  individual  pieces  of  cargo.  Great  interest  in  these  types 
of  operations  has  developed  in  recent  years  as  a  result  of  the  rising  cost  of  conventional 
cargo  handling  methods.  The  growth  and  development  of  piggyback,  containerization 
and  other  special  equipment  on  the  railroads,  while  not  devised  particularly  for  tran- 
shipment by  water,  lends  itself  well  to  such  service.  Vessels  of  special  design  to  handle 
prepackaged  cargo  are  being  constructed  to  reduce  terminal  and  ship  cargo  handling 
time  and  to  radically  reduce  the  high  cost  of  manual  labor. 

The  design  of  facilities  for  a  specialized  terminal  will  be  influenced  largely  by  the 
variation  of  the  water  level  in  the  ship  berth.  In  the  United  States,  for  example,  mean 
high  tides  vary  from  1  ft  at  Galveston,  Tex.,  to  29.6  ft  at  Anchorage,  Alaska.  At  New 
Orleans,  the  mean  range  of  river  stage  is  13  ft  and  the  extreme  range,  21  ft.  These  varia- 
tions will  obviously  affect  the  design  of  transfer  facilities,  particularly  for  the  roll-on, 
roll-off  type  of  operation. 

Listed  below  is  an  outline  and  discussion  for  further  study. 

GENERAL 

1.  Type  of  Facility  Required 

a.  Roll-on,  roll-off. 

b.  Lift-on,  lift-off. 

c.  Conveyor. 

d.  Combinations  of  the  above. 

2.  Location  Considerations 

a.  Type  of  terminal. 

b.  Dock  facilities. 

c.  Rail  facilities. 

d.  Highway  facilities. 

e.  Utilities. 

f.  Nature  of  waterway. 


Waterways    and    Harbors 203 

DISCUSSION 

1.  Type  of  Facility  Required 

a.  Roll-on,  Roll-off.  This  type  of  facility  includes  ferries  or  barge-type  operation  in 
which  freight  cars  are  rolled  directly  onto  and  off  of  the  water  carrier,  and  transfer  of 
cargo  is  not  necessary.  The  major  problem  is  fluctuation  in  water  level  with  consequent 
complications  in  design  of  transfer  bridges. 

b.  Lift -on,  Lift-off.  This  type  of  facility  involves  the  use  of  cranes  of  sufficient 
capacity  to  handle  the  cargo  involved.  The  cranes  transfer  cargo  from  freight  car  to 
hold  or  deck  of  vessel  and  vice  versa.  The  cranes  could  be  on  shore,  on  the  vessel,  or 
both.   Containers  lend   themselves   well   to   this  type   of   operation. 

c.  Conveyor.  Where  bulk  commodities  are  to  be  handled,  the  conveyor  system  ap- 
pears to  be  the  solution.  There  are  in  operation  today,  particularly  at  large  coal  han- 
dling facilities,  terminals  employing  car  dumpers  and  direct  conveyor  loading  to  the 
vessel.  This  type  of  operation  lends  itself  well  to  automation.  Also  under  this  heading 
would  be  the  handling  of  materials  through  pipelines. 

d.  Combinations.  A  general  cargo  handling  facility  would  embody  the  use  of  several 
of  the  above,  and  possibly  all  of  the  separate  types. 

2.  Location  Considerations 

a.  Type  of  terminal.  Of  prime  consideration  is  the  nature  of  the  cargo  to  be 
handled.  Flammable  materials  or  materials  of  a  corrosive  nature  would  entail  special 
consideration.  The  choice  of  a  location  would  be  influenced  by  several  factors,  including 
the  inland  origins  and  destinations  of  the  cargo  units  moving  through  the  terminal  and 
the  ease  of  access  to  the  site  by  land  carriers. 

b.  Dock  Facilities.  The  size  and  number  of  vessels,  and  local  conditions  of  tide,  wind- 
current  and  accessibility  will  influence  the  type  of  berth.  Ship  berthing  facilities  may  be 
grouped  into  five  general  types:  (1)  wharves  located  on  slips  dredged  into  the  shore, 
(2)  finger  piers  projecting  out  from  the  shore,  (3)  marginal  wharves  paralleling  the 
shore,  (4)  ferry-type  slips,  and  (5)  offshore  berths. 

Slip-type  wharves  and  finger  piers  are  suitable  for  either  end  or  side-loading  ves- 
sels. Docking  is  usually  difficult,  and  adequate  clearances  are  required  beyond  a  finger 
pier  or  a  slip  to  permit  maneuvering  of  a  vessel.  This  type  of  pier  makes  good  use  of 
restricted  water  frontage  and  facilitates  docking  in  strong  currents.  They  are  highly 
susceptible  to  silting. 

Marginal  wharves  are  suitable  for  side-loading  vessels  and  can  be  used  for  end- 
loading  vessels  if  offshore  structures  or  pontoons  are  provided  to  support  the  end  transfei 
bridge.  Docking  is  rapid.  This  construction  is  particularly  suitable  where  the  waterway  is 
relatively  narrow.  There  is  less  interference  with  currents  and  maintenance  costs  are 
reduced. 

Ferry-type  slips  are  suitable  largely  for  end-loading  vessels.  Docking  i-  rapid.  but 
adequate  clearance  is  desirable  in  front  of  the  slip  for  maneuvering  the  vessel. 

Off-shore  berths  are  suitable  for  end  loading  or  side-loading  vessels,  and  usually 
consist  of  breasting  and  mooring  dolphins  and  may  be  constructed  in  deep  water  to 
minimize  dredging.  This  construction  usually  requires  a  long,  over-water  approach. 
Necessary  literage  makes  for  higher  cost  of  operation,  but  this  type  of  construction  may 
be  required  where  water  adjacent  to  the  shore  is  shallow.  Off-shore  berths  can  well  be 
used  for  transfer  of  liquid  materials  through  pipelines. 

c.  Rail  Facilities.  The  terminal  should  be  located  within  the  switching  district  limits 
of  the  port  where  possible,  and  with  access  to  all  railroad-  serving  the  port    M.udialling 


204 Waterways    and    Harbors 

facilities  are  desirable  with  a  sufficient  capacity  to  accumulate  rail  cars  for  loading  on 
ship,  and  storage  for  the  cars  unloaded.  The  location  should  be  as  close  as  possible  to 
the  ship  berth  to  minimize  the  number  of  hauling  units  needed.  The  total  area  for 
marshalling  is  determined  by  the  capacity  of  the  vessels,  frequency  of  sailings  and  the 
shape  and  arrangement  of  the  terminal  area  as  it  relates  to  the  effective  use  of  space 
available.  The  design  should  follow  accepted  practices  as  to  grade,  curvature,  track  cen- 
ters, etc.  Space  permitting,  it  would  follow  that  the  rail  facilities  should  be  as  complete 
as  possible,  including  repair  facilities,  classification  yard,  fueling  facilities,  loading  ramps, 
interchange  yard,  and  possibly  offices  and  warehousing.  The  latter  would  not  necessarily 
have  to  be  located  on  the  terminal  itself,  but  should  be  in  the  immediate  vicinity.  The 
number,  location  and  size  of  transfer  bridges  and  cranes  would  be  a  function  of  the  type 
of  facility,  as  would  be  the  design  of  conveyors.  Some  provision  should  be  made  for 
weighing  cars,  but  again  this  need  not  be  on  the  terminal  itself  if  scales  are  available  in 
the  vicinity. 

The  criteria  for  marshalling  facilities  and  receiving  and  delivery  facilities  for  roll-on, 
roll-off  and  lift-on,  lift-off  services  is  quite  similar.  The  design  of  conveyor-type  opera- 
tion should  be  coordinated  with  the  method  by  which  the  cargo  is  stowed  in  the  ship. 
Conveyors  can  be  used  for  stern,  bow,  hatch  or  side  loading.  Several  eastern  railroads 
employ  automated  conveyor  systems  for  unloading  coal  direct  from  hopper  cars  into 
vessels.  These  systems  embody  a  hump  yard,  car  dumpers,  and  miles  of  conveyors,  and 
are  capable  of  accommodating  several  thousands  cars  per  day.  Terminals  of  such  capacity 
require  a  thoroughly  complete  and  modern  communication  system.  Similar  systems  may 
well  be  utilized  for  the  handling  of  other  bulk  commodities,  such  as  grain  or  sugar,  pro- 
viding sanitation  controls  are  utilized. 

Handling  of  liquid  materials,  particularly  flammable  liquids  such  as  petroleum  prod- 
ucts, introduce  special  problems.  There  is  not  only  the  constant  danger  of  fire,  but  con- 
tamination of  the  waterway  should  be  avoided.  Large  storage  areas  for  the  material 
itself  are  desirable,  as  well  as  transhipment  facilities.  The  pollution  of  the  waterway 
through  leakage  and  spillage  should  be  a  matter  of  particular  concern  where  the  facility 
is  located  on  inland  waters,  but  is  also  a  major  problem  in  large  coastal  ports,  as  evi- 
denced by  the  activity  of  the  commissions  of  governments  all  over  the  world. 

d.  Highway  Facilities.  Highway  access  to  the  terminal  should  be  adequate  for  the 
rapid  movement  of  trucks  to  and  from  the  terminal.  Special  study  will  be  required  to 
determine  the  improvements  which  would  be  needed  to  facilitate  traffic  flow  on  access 
roads,  which  may  include  such  features  as  widening,  channelization,  provision  for  sepa- 
rate turning  lanes,  traffic  light  control  or  grade  separations.  It  is  desirable  to  reduce  the 
conflict  between  truck  and  rail  movements.  Applicable  standards  of  the  American  Asso- 
ciation of  State  Highway  Officials  should  be  adhered  to.  Adequate  facilities  for  storage 
is  desirable,  as  well  as  transfer  facilities,  surfaced  with  a  high-type  pavement  with  ade- 
quate structural  strength.  A  classification  system  should  be  provided  where  trailers  are 
to  be  rolled  or  lifted  onto  the  vessel  without  transfer  of  cargo.  Some  sort  of  a  delivery 
and  receiving  area  is  desirable,  including  a  gate  house  where  trucks  are  checked  and 
space  for  trucks  awaiting  clearance. 

e.  Utilities.  Adequate  public  utilities  should  be  available,  including  power,  water, 
sewers,  communication  and  fire-fighting  equipment.  Not  to  be  overlooked  are  facilities 
for  replenishing  of  ships  stores. 

/.  Nature  of  Waterway.  The  nature  of  the  waterway  will  influence  to  a  large  extent 
the  design  of  the  terminal.  Tidal  range  or  river  stage  should  be  considered  in  the  design 
of  transfer  bridges.  Currents,  susceptibility  to  silting,  depth  of  waterway  and  area  avail- 


Waterways   and    Harbors 205 

able  for  maneuvering  of  vessels  will  determine  to  a  large  extent  the  design  of  piers. 
Operating  costs  would  be  affected  considerably  by  the  necessity  and  frequency  of  dredg- 
ing operations.  Depth  of  waterway  will  affect  the  size  of  vessel  and  the  amount  of  cargo 
which  can  be  carried.  Climatic  conditions  are  also  a  factor,  particularly  where  there  is  a 
possibility  of  ice  closing  the  waterway.  Corrosive  effects  of  salt  water,  and  presence  of 
marine  borers  should  be  considered  in  the  choice  of  materials  for  docks  and  piers. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Relative   Merits   and   Economics  of   Construction 
Materials    Used   in   Waterfront   Facilities 

Shu-t'ien  Li  (chairman,  subcommittee),  B.  M.  Dornblatt. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  on  "Relative  Merits  of  High-Strength 
Steels  and  Box  Sections  in  Heavy-Duty  Fender  Piling  of  Waterfront  Facilities." 

Relative   Merits    of    High-Strength    Steels   and    Box 

Sections   in   Heavy-Duty   Fender   Piling 

of   Waterfront   Facilities 

By  SHU-T'IEN  LI 
Chairman,   Subcommittee   7,    Committee  25 — Waterways  and   Harbors 

Introduction 

The  development  of  "Energy  Design  Criteria  for  Fender  Piling  and  Relative  Merits 
of  Different  Materials"1  was  undertaken  by  the  writer  in  1960  and  presented  at  the  1961 
Annual  Convention  of  the  Association.  These  criteria  were  primarily  aimed  to  apply 
to  general-purpose  wharves  for  berthing  general-cargo  ships  of  not  much  over  20,000 
gross-ton  displacement  capacity. 

For  much  heavier  duty  wharves  requiring  much  more  energy-absorbing  capacity 
in  their  fender  piling,  comparative  economic  studies  for  specific  projects  should  take  into 
consideration  the  advantages  of  using  high-strength  steels  and  adopting  more  efficient 
box  sections,  as  the  spacing  of  the  largest  and  strongest  obtainable  natural  timber  pile, 
such  as  greenheart,  becomes  too  close  for  efficient  driving  into,  and  holding  by,  the  sub- 
merged underground,  although  dolphins  of  pile  clusters  may  be  resorted  to. 

These  concepts  are  adapted  and  extended  from  ideas  that  came  mainly  from  the 
other  side  of  the  Atlantic.  In  their  written  discussions  of  the  writer's  paper  on  "Opera- 
tive Energy   Concept  in   Marine  Fendering,'"-'  John   E.  G.  Palmer,'  MICE.,  partner  of 


1  Li,  Shu-t'ien:  "Energy  Design  Criteria  for  Fendering  Tiling  and  Relative  Merit-  of  Different 
Materials,"  AREA-Bulletin,  Vol.  62,  November  1"60.  pp.  394-406;  Prm  \KI  V  Vol.  <>2,  1961.  pp. 
394-406. 

3  Li,    Shu-t'ien:    "Operative    Energy    Concept    in    Marine    Fendering."    Proc.,    ASCE,    Vol.    87      \ 
\V\V3,   Journal   of   the  Waterways  and  Harbor-   Division,   August    1961,    Paper  2875,   pp.    1-28. 

3  Palmer,   John    E.    G.:    Discussion   of    the   above   paper  by   Shu-t'ien    Li,    Proi        VS(  1      Vd     U     N 
\V\V1.    Journal   of   the  Waterways  and   Harbor-   Division,    February   1962,   Paper  3068,  pp.    159-160. 


206 Waterways    and    Harbors 

Rendel,  Palmer  &  Tritton,  chartered  consulting  engineers  of  London,  England,  advocates 
the  use  of  high-strength  steels  and  cylindrical  or  tubular  sections  for  heavy-duty  fender 
piles;  and  Paul  Leimdorfer,1  head,  Department  of  Quays  and  Docks,  the  Harbor  Board 
of  Stockholm,  Sweden,  stresses  the  use  of  steel  pipes  and  box  piles,  especially  with  diffi- 
cult ground  conditions. 

In  the  writer's  closure17  responsive  to  their  discussions,  the  merits  of  using  high- 
strength  steels  and  tubular  sections  in  heavy-duty  fender  piling  was  further  investigated. 
The  results  are  summarized  as  follows  under: 

A.  Theoretical  development 

B.  Inherent    demerits  of  cylindrical  fender  piles 

C.  Advantages  of  using  high-strength  steels 

D.  Shortcomings  of  high-strength  steels  to  be  avoided 

E.  Merits  and  versatilities  of  high-strength  steel  fender  piles  of  box  sections 

A.  THEORETICAL  DEVELOPMENT 

The  maximum  kinetic  energy  due  to  impact  that  may  be  delivered  to  a  fender  pile 
from  a  berthing  or  berthed  ship  and  temporarily  stored  as  internal  strain  energy  in  the 
former  at  allowable  working  flexural  stress  in  conventional  rigid-wharf  and  jetty  types 
of  fender-pile  construction  may  be  determined  by: 

2(12)3  IL. 


W 


<-f)    «> 


where  W  =  total  internal  strain  energy  of  each  fender  pile  as  represented  by  its  internal 
work  in   foot-kips  due  to   flexure  at  allowable  working   flexural  stress, 
=  maximum  limit  of  kinetic  energy  due  to  impact, 

/=  moment  of  inertia  in  feet4  of  the  cross  section  of  the  fender  pile  about  the 
neutral  plane  of  bending. 

c  —  most   remote  fiber  distance   from  the  neutral  axis  in  feet. 

L  =  vertical  span  in  feet  of  fender  pile  between  points  of  top  and  bottom  sup- 
ports for  rigid-wharf  and  jetty  types. 
£:=  Young's   modulus   of   elasticity   of   the    fender-pile   material  =  418  (10)  *  kips 
per  sq  ft  for  all  grades  of  structural  steel,  and  =  461(10)3  kips  per  sq  ft  for 
greenheart  at  re-saturation  moisture  content  of  25  percent. 

/  =  allowable  working  flexural  stress  of  material  in  kips  per  square  inch,  =  20 
ksi  for  ASTM  A  36  steel;  27.8  ksi  for  ASTM  A  242,  A  440,  and  A  441 
high-strength  steels  of  SO  ksi  yield  point ;  and  6.9  ksi  for  greenheart  under 
transient  loading. 

In  Eq.  (1),  the  right-hand  member  represents  the  entire  internal  strain  energy  due 
to  flexure  alone  between  points  of  top  and  bottom  supports  of  the  fender  pile,  as  the 
insignificant  amount  (generally  less  than  1  percent  and  rarely  more  than  2  percent  of 
internal  strain  energy  due  to  simultaneous  shear  deformation  has  been  neglected  in  the 
derivation. 


4  Leimdorfer,  Paul:  Discussion  of  the  above  cited  Paper  by  Shu-t'ien  Li,  Proc.  ASCE,  Vol.  88,  No. 
WW2,   Journal   of   the   Waterways   and   Harbors  Division,   May    1962,   Paper   3153,   pp.    159-162. 

BLi,  Shu-t'ien:  Author's  closure  of  Paper  cited  in  Footnote  2,  Proc,  ASCE,  Vol.  88,  No.  WW4, 
Journal   of   the  Waterways  and   Harbors  Division,   November   1962. 


Waterways    and    Harbors 


207 


B.  INHERENT  DEMERITS  OF  CYLINDRICAL  FENDER  PILES 

Using  Eq.  (1),  the  allowable  working-energy-storing  capacities  of  each  fender 
pile  of:  (1)  12-  by  12-in  greenheart;  (2)  12  WF  190  of  A  36  steel,  the  heaviest  of  12  WF 
sections  of  the  same  nominal  overall  dimensions  as  the  12-  by  12-in  greenheart;  and 
(3)  34l/2-in  diameter  by  y^-'m  wall  thickness  cylindrical  section  of  A  36  steel,  having  an 
area  of  53.41  sq  in  which  is  approximately  the  same  as  that  of  55.86  sq  in  for  the  12 
WF  190;  all  50  ft  long  in  vertical  span  between  supports,  have  been  computed  with  the 
following  results: 

Table   1 — Energy  Capacity  of  Cylindrical  Pile  vs.  Some  Other  Piles 


Material 

Section 

Energy  Capacity 
in  Ft-  Kips 

Greenheart 

12  x  12 

6.00 

ASTM  A  36  steel 

12  WF  190 » 

4.69 

Cylindrical  Section2 
34  Yi-\r\.  dia.  by 
J4-in.  wall  thickness 

2.98 

Sectional   areas:    1SS.86  sq    in,   -53.41   sq   in. 


Without  further  calculation,  the  inherent  demerits  of  cylindrical  fender  piles  may 
be  stated  as: 

(1)  Much  less  energy  capacity,  as  shown  in  Table  1,  being  less  than  two-thirds 
that  of  an  equal-weight  wide-flange  section. 

(2)  Higher  mill  price  due  to  additional  fabrication. 

(3)  Higher  shipping  charge  on  account  of  its  bulky  character. 

(4)  Large  exterior  and   interior  exposed   surfaces  that   will   be  subjected   to  sea- 
water  corrosion. 

The  reason  for  having  much  less  energy  capacity  in  the  large-diameter  cylindrical 
fender  pile  of  approximately  the  same  area  as  the  wide  flange  section  is  obvious  from 
the  flexural  formula.  It  is  the  "form  factor"  of  the  cylindrical  pile  that  offers  a  signifi- 
cant disadvantage,  as  is  evident  from  the  fact  that  in  the  wide-flange  section  a  large 
amount  of  material  is  concentrated  in  the  flanges,  while  in  the  cylindrical  section  the 
two  most  remote  fibers  are  stressed  to  the  allowable  working  value. 

By  virtue  of  its  much  less  efficient  form,  the  use  of  cylindrical  sections  in  fender 
piling  must  be  conclusively  removed  from  further  consideration,  though  such  sections 
may  be  advantageously   used  in  long-column  piles  under  vertical  loads. 

C.  ADVANTAGES  OF  USING  HIGH-STRENGTH  STEELS 

Table  1  shows  decisively  the  superiority  of  greenheart  fender  piles.  Their  use  is 
definitely  recommended  for  general-purpose  wharves  that  will  serve  general-cargo  or 
similar  ships.  In  cases  requiring  much  more  energy  capacity  for  much  heavier-duty 
wharves,  the  use  of  greenheart  fender  piles  will  be  eventually  limited  by  its  available 
sizes  as  produced  from  its  existing  stands  in  British  Guiana,  South  America. 

At  present,  greenheart  of  16  by  16  in  by  40  ft  is  readily  available.  Round  green- 
heart piles  are  available  in  lengths  up  to  75   It.  and  to  85   ft  on  an  accumulative  basis. 

Itull.  574 


208 


Waterways    and    Harbors 


In  general,  lengths  of  80  ft  and  over  are  available  upon  special  order,  and  extremely 
long  piles  can  be  built  up  in  the  field  by  splicing  because  of  the  hi^'li  strength  possessed 
by  greenheart. 

Beyond  these  limits  of  available  sizes,  or  as  soon  as  it  becomes  less  economical  to 
use  greenheart  on  account  of  premium  for  larger  sizes  or  excessive  freight  in  too  distant 
projects,  resorting  to  steel  or  high-strength  steels  may  offer  better  economy.  A  com- 
munication to  the  writer  from  G.  A.  Wilson,  chief  engineer  of  the  Port  cf  London 
Authority,  dated  January  2,  1962,  states:  " — on  the  last  occasion  some  six  months  ago 
when  I  considered  its  use  the  relative  costs  of  greenheart  and  steel  were  such  that  it  was 
cheaper  to  design  in  steel."  Of  course,  this  may  not  be  the  case  for  waterfront  facilities 
on  the  Gulf,  Atlantic,  and  Pacific  coasts  of  the  United  States. 

To  show  the  advantages  of  using  high-strength  steels  of  SO-ksi  yield  point,  an  allow- 
able extreme  fiber  stress  in  flexure  of  27.8  ksi  will  be  used  so  that  it  will  provide  a 
factor  of  safety  of  50.0/27.8=1.8,  the  same  as  36.0/20.0=1.8  for  A  36  steel.  Thus, 
using  Eq.  (1)  and  the  same  50-ft  vertical  span  length,  the  following  results  have  been 
obtained: 

Table   2. — Energy   Capacity   of  High-Strength  Steel  Wide-Flange 
Section  vs.  That  of  A  36  Steel 


Steel 

Section 

(Nominal  Sizes) 

Energy  Capacity 
in  Ft-  Kips 

ASTM 

A  36                                  

12  x  12  WF  190 

4.T.9 

A  242_                                      

12  x  12  WF  190 

A  440                                               

9.0(i 

A  441...             

A  242                                                    

14  x  If,  WF  426 

A440._                          

16.79 

A  441.                                      .- 

The  pronounced  increase  in  energy  capacity  of  the  same  12  WF  190  section  pro- 
vided by  the  50-ksi-yield-point  steel  over  that  by  A  36  steel  is  due  to  the  fact  that  in 
Eq.  (1),  other  things  being  equal,  the  energy  capacities  are  directly  proportional  to  the 
square  of  the  allowable  working  stress  in  flexure. 

Thus,  the  use  of  high-strength  steel,  wide-flange  sections,  for  fender  piles  offer  such 
advantages  as: 

(1)  Ready  means  of  meeting  heavy-duty  requirements. 

(2)  Much  higher  increase  in  energy  capacity,  which  is  proportional  to  the  square 
of  allowable  flexural  stress,  than  the  slight  increase  in  mill  price  for  higher 
yield  point. 

(3)  Great  variety  of  standard  sections  available  from  8  WF  17  to  14  WF  426, 
and  again  from  16  WF  36  to  36  WF  300. 

(4)  Being  well  adapted  to  welding  additional  cover  plates  of  desired  thicknesses 
to  increase  their  energy  capacity. 


D.   SHORTCOMINGS  OF   HIGH-STRENGTH  STEELS  TO  BE  AVOIDED 

Despite  the   advantages  of  high-strength  steels,  due  heed  must  be  taken,  however, 
in  their  use  as  a  material  for  fender  piling.  This  can  be  easily  comprehended  by  referring 


Waterways    and    Harbors  209 


to  the  definition  of  toughness  which  denotes  the  ability  of  the  materia]  to  absorb  energy 
during  plastic  deformation.  This  energy  is  represented  by  the  area  under  the  tensile 
test  diagram  which  shows  that  in  order  to  have  high  toughness  the  material  must  have 
high  strength  and  at  the  same  time  large  ductility. 

Higher-strength  steels  have  smaller  plastic  deformation  before  fracture,  and  hence 
they  become  less  tough  and  more  brittle.  The  use  of  such  materials  in  structural  com- 
ponents subject  to  impact,  as  fender  piles  are,  may  become  dangerous  if  extremely  high- 
strength  steels  are  used,  since  fracture  may  occur  suddenly  without  any  noticeable 
deformation. 

For  the  above  reason,  among  the  commercially  produced  high-strength  steels  in  the 
United  States,  while  the  SO-ksi-yield-point  ASTM  A  242  and  A  440  may  be  used  for 
rolled  fender  piles  and  A  441  for  welded  fender  piles,  the  writer  does  not  recommend 
using  heat-treated  constructional  alloy  steel  of  100-ksi  yield  point  (0.2  percent  offset 
strength  yield),  for  the  marginal  difference  between  its  tensile  strength  of  115  ksi  and 
its  yield  point  is  only  15  ksi  versus  a  much  wider  margin  of  60  —  36  =  24  ksi  for  the 
ASTM  A  36  steel. 

Another  limitation  for  high-strength  steels  is  their  lower  yield  point  for  thicknesses 
over  yA  in.  and  hence  lower  allowable  stresses.  It  is,  therefore,  always  an  economically 
worthwhile  precaution  to  avoid  the  penalty  of  using  high-strength  steel  shapes  and  plates 
thicker  than  the  above  limit  in  built-up  sections  such  as  large-dimension  steel  box 
fender  piles. 

E.  MERITS  AND  VERSATILITIES  OF  HIGH-STRENGTH-STEEL 
FENDER  PILES  OF  BOX  SECTIONS 
For  heavy-duty  fender  piles  and  dolphins,  by  combining  the  noteworthy  suggestion 
of  John  E.  G.  Palmer  of  London.  England,  in  taking  the  advantage  of  high-strength 
steels,  and  of  Dr.  Paul  LeimdOrfer  of  Stockholm,  Sweden,  in  using  steel  units  of  box 
piles,  a  variety  of  bigh-energy-absorbing  fender  piling  and  dolphin  clusters  may  be 
economically  constructed.  High-strength-steel  box  sections  have  the  following  inherent 
merits  and  versatilities: 

(1)  They  possess  the  advantage  of  being  tubular  but  are  not  subject  to  the  low 
flexural  resistance  of  the  cylindrical  form. 

(2)  They  have  higher  torsional  resistance  than  open  sections  when  the  applied 
impact  load  does  not  coincide  with  the  plane   of  symmetry  of  the   section. 

(3)  They  may  have  cover  plates  of  desired  thicknesses  welded  to  opposite  walls 
perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  loads  in  order  to  increase  their  flexural 
resistance  and  hence  strain-energy  capacity. 

(4)  They  may  be  spaced  at  desired  spacings  throng!,  narrowed-down  spaces;  even 
adjacent  to  each  other  in  a  row,  or  in  matrix  cluster,  respectively,  for 
extremely  heavy-duty  fenders  and  dolphins. 

(5)  Their  resistance  can  also  be  increased  by  placing  more  wales  as  far  as  flex- 
ibility is  not  much  impaired 

(6)  Their    energy    absorbing    capacity    call    be    further    enhanced    by    stuffing    its 

inside  with  resilient   rubber  material. 

(7)  Though  the  maximum  size  and  length  of  hot-rolled  hollow  square  and  ret 
tangular  structural  tubings  are  governed  by  the  quantitj  ol  steel  in  an  ingot, 
extra-sixe  box  piles  may  always  be  built  up  from  shapes  and  plates 


210 Waterways    and    Harbors 

Since  1961,  hot-rolled  carbon-steel  hollow  structural  tubings"  up  to  10  by  10  in 
square,  and  6  by  10  in  rectangular,  have  become  available  in  the  United  States,  Euro- 
pean producers  being  much  earlier  pioneers  in  such  products.  Standard  range  of  lengths 
is  42  ft  maximum  and  under,  but  longer  sections  may  be  had  by  splicing.  Hollow  struc- 
tural tubing  of  larger  sizes  (but  necessarily  shorter  lengths),  and  of  low-alloy,  high- 
strength  steels,  may  be  rolled  to  order.  In  fact,  the  producer  has  definite  plans  for  the 
latter. 

POSTSCRIPT,   AND   FURTHER   REFERENCES  TO  THE  WRITERS   OTHER 
PAPERS   ON  MATERIALS   USED   IN  WATERFRONT  FACILITIES 

An  exhaustive  treatment  of  the  problem  of  relative  merits  and  economics  of  con- 
struction materials  used  in  marine  fendering  naturally  has  to  include  considerations  of 
the  materials  themselves,  the  form  or  shape  factor,  size  and  length  limitations  of  natural 
and  manufactured  products,  longevity  of  different  materials  in  sea  water,  and  economic 
comparison  of  capitalized  or  annual  costs.  While  this  paper  has  conclusively  revealed: 
(1)  the  demerits  of  the  cylindrical  form  in  fender  piling,  (3)  advantages  of  using  high- 
strength  steels,  (3)  shortcomings  of  high-strength  steels,  (4)  merits  and  versatilities  of 
high-strength-steel  fender  piles  of  box  sections  for  heavy-duty  service;  and  while  eco- 
nomic comparison  as  a  common  basic  deliberation  in  all  engineering  projects  requires  no 
special  emphasis  here,  further  references  to  the  writer's  other  papers  on  materials  used  in 
waterfront  facilities  are  enumerated  below: 

1.  "Method  for  Ascertaining  When  a  Tie  Should  be  Treated  and  When  It  Should 
be  Protected  with  Tie  Plates  and  Improved  Fastenings";  Proceedings,  World 
Engineering  Congress,  Tokyo,  Japan,  1929,  Vol.  14,  pp.  1-11. 

2.  "A  Proposed  Method  for  Ascertaining  When  a  Tie  Should  be  Treated  and 
When  It  Should  be  Protected  with  Tie  Plates  and  Improved  Fastenings"; 
Engineering,  Chinese  Engineering  Society,  Vol.  5,  No.  1,  December  1929,  pp. 
18-29. 

3.  "Relative  Merits  and  Economics  of  Construction  Materials  Used  in  Waterfront 
Facilities";  AREA-Bulletin,  Vol.  59,  No.  539,  November  1957,  pp.  519,  523- 
546;   Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  59,   1958,  pp.  519,   523-546,  discussion  pp.   1159-1160. 

4.  Discussion  of  "Use  of  Concrete  in  Marine  Environments";  Journal,  ACI,  Vol. 
30,  No.  6,  December  1958,  Part  II,  discussion  54-46,  pp.  1327-1336;  Proc, 
ACI,  Vol.   54,   1957-1958,  discussion   54-16,  pp.   1327-1336. 

5.  "Greenheart  (Nectandra  Rodioei) — Its  Outstanding  Merits,  Properties,  and 
Economics  in  Waterfront  Facilities";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol.  61,  No.  553,  Novem- 
ber 1959,  pp.  311-330;  Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  61,  1960,  pp.  311-330,  Convention 
presentation  and  discussion,  p.    1077. 

6.  "Damage  to  Timber  Used  for  Wharf  Construction";  invited  paper,  Symposium 
on  Materials  for  Wharf  Construction,  ASCE  1960  Annual  Convention — Boston, 
Mass.,  October  10-14,  1960. 

7.  "Recommended  Practice  of  Conducting  Periodic  Inspection  and  Maintaining 
Progressive  Service  Performance  Records  of  Piling  Materials  Used  in  Water- 
front Facilities";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol.  62,  No.  560,  November  1960,  pp.  383- 
385;  Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  62,  1961,  pp.  383-385;  adopted  as  Part  6,  Chapter  25 
of  AREA  Manual  in  1961,  Vol.  II,  pp.  25-6-1  to  25-6-3. 


6  "National   Hot-Rolled   Carbon   Steel   Hollow  Structural   Tubing,   The   Shape   for  Things  to  Come,: 
1961,   National   Tube   Division,   U.    S.   Steel   Corporation,   Pittsburgh,   Pa. 


Waterways    and    Harbors  211 

8.  "Mechanical  Properties  of  Greenheart  and  Determination  of  Recommended 
Allowable  Values  for  Design  of  Waterfront  Facilities";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol. 
62,  No.  560,  November  1960,  pp.  386-393;  Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  62,  1961,  pp. 
386-393. 

9.  "Energy  Design  Criteria  for  Fender  Piling  and  Relative  Merits  of  Different 
Materials";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol.  62,  No.  560,  November  1960,  pp.  394-406; 
Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  62,   1961,  pp.  394-406. 

10.  "Greenheart  Timber  Has  Long  Service  Record";  ASCE,  Civil  Engineering, 
Vol.  31,  No.  5,  May  1961,  p.  76. 

11.  "Depredation  of  Timber  in  Marine  Construction,  I — Marine  Borers  (with  Par- 
ticular Reference  to  Their  Distribution  in  USA  Waters)";  The  Dock  &  Harbor 
Authority   (London),  Vol.  XLII,  No.  489,  July  1961,  pp.  85-89. 

12.  "Depredation  of  Timber  in  Marine  Construction,  II — Physical  and  Biological 
Damage  (Other  than  by  Marine  Borers)";  The  Dock  &  Harbor  Authority 
(London),  Vol.  XLII,  No.  490,  August   1961,  pp.   127-130. 

13.  "Operative  Energy  Concept  in  Marine  Fendering";  Proc,  ASCE,  Vol.  87,  No 
WW3,  Journal  of  the  Waterways  and  Harbors  Division,  August  1961,  Paper 
2875,  pp.  1-28. 

14.  "Service  Performance  Records  of  Greenheart  in  Docks  and  Harbors  of  the 
United  Kingdom";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol.  63,  No.  568,  December  1961,  p.  345; 
Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  63,  1962,  p.  345. 

15.  "Azobe  as  a  Construction  Material  and  Its  Comparison  with  Greenheart  in 
Waterfront  Facilities";  AREA  Bulletin,  Vol.  63,  No.  568,  December  1961,  pp. 
345-350;   Proc,  AREA,  Vol.  63,  1962,  pp.  345-350. 

16.  Discussion  of  "Berthing  and  Mooring  Forces";  Proc,  ASCE,  Vol.  88,  No. 
WW3,  Journal  of  the  Waterways  and  Harbors  Division,  August   1962. 

17.  Author's  closing  discussion  of  "Operative  Energy  Concept  in  Marine  Fender- 
ing"; Proc,  ASCE.  Vol.  88,  No.  WW4,  Journal  of  the  Waterways  and  Harbors 
Division,  November  1962. 

18.  "Evaluation  of  Mooring  Forces";  Proc.  ASCE,  Vol.  88,  No.  WW4,  Journal 
of  the  Waterways  and  Harbors  Division,  November   1962. 


Report    of    Committee    6 — Buildings 


K.  E.  Horning,  Chairman 
J.  W.  Hayes, 

Vice  Chairman 
D.  J.  Murray,  Secretary 
W.   G.  Harding 
H.  T.  Seal 
G.  A.  Mobison 

J.    W.    GwYN 


J.  H.  Adams,  Jr. 

J.  L.  Agee 

\V.  F.  Armstrong 

F.  R.  Bartlett 
I).   A.   Bessey 
S.  M.  Biei.ski 

G.  J.  Bluel 
J.  R.  Bowman 
W.  L.  Burgess 
R.  R.  Cahal 

R.  L.  Charlow 
H.  M.  Church  (E) 
D.  \Y.  Converse 
J.  S.  Cooper 

F.  D.  Day 

A.  G.  Dorland   (E) 
V.  E.  Elshoff 
R.  L.  Fletcher 
I.  G.  Forbes 
C.  S.  Graves 

G.  W.  Guinn,  Jr. 
A.  T.  Hawk  (E) 
H.  R.  Helker 

W.  C.  Humphreys 
W.  R.  Hyma 
E.  J.  Hynes 


B.  J.  Johnson,  Jr. 

S.   E.    KVENBERG 
A.    F.    Lwi.MI.YER 
R.    E.    LlLLISTON 

G.  H.  McMillan 

I.  A.  Moore 

J.  D.  Moore,  Jr. 

C.  W.  Morrison 
L.  S.  Newman 
L.  J.  Nichols 
W.  H.  Pahl,  Jr. 
W.  C.  Panarese 
C.  L.  Robinson 
J.  T.  Rowan 

J.  B.  Schaub  (E) 

T.  H.  Seep 

H.  A.   Shannon,  Jr. 

Loren  Shedd 

E.  R.  Shultz 

R.  C.  Smith 

M.  L.  Thornbrough 

R.  C.  Turnbell 

S.  G.  Urban 

O.  G.  Wilbur  (E) 

T.  S.  Williams 

Committee 


(E)  Members  Emeritus. 
mitteeh6SC    ^^^    "ameS   ***   ^    '"    bold"face    type    constitute    the   Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Progress  report,   with   recommendations  submitted   for  adoption    page  214 

2.  Specification  for  railway  buildings. 

There  were  no  developments  during  the  year  calling  for  new  specifications, 
>u  the  committee  has  no  report 

3.  Wind  loading  for  railway  building  structures. 

The  committee  has  found  it  inadvisable  to  continue  its  study  of  this  assign- 
ment, supplementing  its  1960  report  presented  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  62, 
1961,  page  133,  dealing  with  tests  on  a  120-ft  floodlight  tower  on  the  Santa 
Fe  at  Clovis,  X.  Mix.  Accordingly,  no  report.  Subject  to  be  discontinued. 

8.  Infra-red  ray  heating,  collaborating  with   Committee    18. 
Progress  in  study  but  no  report. 

Tin   Committee  on  Bulpi\..n. 

K.  E    HoRNi  \...  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  5  74,  November  1962. 


213 


214  Buildings 

Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision  of  Manual 

W  G  Harding  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  H.  Adams,  Jr.,  W.  F  Armstrong  F  R. 
'  Bartlett,  S.  M.  Bielski,  J.  R.  Bowman,  W.  L.  Burgess,  R.  R  Cahal,  R.  L  Charlow, 
D.  W.  Converse,  J.  S.  Cooper,  I.  G.  Forbes,  R.  L.  Fletcher,  G.  W.  Guinn,  Jr., 
H  R  Helker,  W.  C.  Humphreys,  S.  E.  Kvenberg,  A.  F.  Langmeyer  G  H .Mc- 
Millan, L.  W.  Newman,  W.  H.  Pahl,  Jr.,  H.  A.  Shannon,  Jr.,  Loren  Shedd,  R.  C 
Smith,  R.  C.  Turnbell,  T.  S.  Williams. 

Your  committee  submits  for  adoption  the  following  recommendations  with  respect 

to  Chapter  6  of  the  Manual: 

Pages  6-4-14  to  6-4-16,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  CLAY  HOLLOW  TILE 

Delete,   substituting   therefor   the   following: 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR   STRUCTURAL  CLAY  TILE-STRUCTURAL 
CLAY    FACING   TILE— CERAMIC   VENEER 

1.  General 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  all  labor,  materials,  tools,  scaffolding  and  equipment, 
except  as  otherwise  noted,  necessary  to  entirely  complete  any  or  all  classes  of  structural 
clay  tile,  structural  clay  tile  facing  and  ceramic  veneer  work  herein  specified  and  as 
shown  on  the  drawings. 

2.  Materials  and  Workmanship 

Structural  clay  tile,  structural  clay  tile  facing  and  ceramic  veneer  shall  conform  to 
the  Specifications  for  Clay  Masonry  Construction  of  the  Structural  Clay  Products 
Institute,  current  edition. 

3.  General  Conditions 

All  materials  entering  into  the  work  and  all  methods  used  by  the  contractor  shall 
be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  engineer  and  no  part  of  the  work  will  be  considered 
as  finally  accepted  until  all  work  is  completed  and  accepted. 

The  General  Conditions  as  given  in  Part  1,  this  Chapter,  shall  be  considered  to 
apply  with  equal  force  to  this  specification. 

Pages  6-9-34  to  6-9-38,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  ASPHALTIC   CONCRETE  PAVEMENTS 

Reapprove  without  change. 

Pages  6-9-39  to  6-9-41,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  ASPHALT   MACADAM    PAVEMENTS 
Reapprove  without  change. 

Your  committee  recommends  for  adoption  and  publication  in  Part  9,  Chapter  6, 
of  the  Manual,  the  following  Specifications  for  Bituminous  Road  Mix  Surface: 


Buildings 215 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  BITUMINOUS  ROAD  MIX  SURFACE 

1.  Description 

This  work  shall  consist  of  the  consrtuction  of  a  surface  course  composed  of  aggre- 
gate and  asphalt  or  asphaltic  road  oil  mixed  in  place  on  the  prepared  subgrade  in  con- 
formity with  lines,  grades  and  cross  sections  shown   on  the  plans. 

2.  Materials 

The  class,  type  and  grade  of  bituminous  material  to  be  used  will  be  as  specified  in 
the  contract.  The  aggregates,  including  the  mineral  filler,  shall  be  of  approved  quality 
and  shall  be  well  graded  between  limits  specified  in  the  contract. 

3.  Composition  and  Mixture 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  representative  samples  of  the  aggregate  he  proposes  to 
use.  The  amount  of  bituminous  material  to  be  used  in  proportion  to  the  aggregate  will 
then   be  determined  by  laboratory  or  field  tests. 

4.  Construction  Methods 

The  aggregate  shall  be  delivered  to  the  site  reasonably  free  from  moisture  and  shall 
be  placed  in  windrows  on  the  subgrade  to  be  surfaced.  The  bituminous  material  shall 
be  added  to  the  aggregate  only  when  air  temperature  is  plus  50  deg  F  or  higher  and  the 
aggregate  and  subgrade  are  dry.  It  shall  not  be  applied  when  the  weather  is  foggy  or 
rainy  or  prior  to  impending  rains  in  order  that  the  mixture  will  not  be  exposed  to 
moisture  prior  to  final  compaction. 

The  bituminous  material  shall  be  applied  by  means  of  a  pressure  distributor.  The 
application  shall  be  made  in  successive  increments  of  approximately  %  to  Vk  of  the 
total  quantity  required  for  the  volume  of  aggregate.  Immediately  following  each  appli- 
cation, sufficient  initial  mixing  shall  be  done  so  as  to  leave  as  little  free  bituminous 
material  as  practicable  on  the  aggregate. 

After  the  last  application  of  bituminous  material,  the  entire  mass  shall  be  mixed  by 
blading  or  other  approved  manipulation  until  the  mass  has  a  uniform  color  and  is  sub- 
stantially free  from  balls  and  uncoated  particles.  Should  the  mixture  show  an  excess  or 
deficiency  of  bituminous  material,  the  condition  shall  be  corrected  by  addition  of 
aggregate  or  bituminous  material  as  necessary  and  by  remixing. 

The  mixed  material  after  sufficient  drying  and  loss  of  volatile  elements  shall  be 
spread  across  the  subgrade  to  the  required  width  to  produce  a  uniform  layer  of  specified 
depth  and  cross  section.  After  the  mat  has  been  laid  and  shaped,  it  shall  be  compacted 
by  means  approved  by  the  engineer  in  charge,  commencing  at  the  outer  edges  and 
progressing  towards  the  center. 

If  the  contractor  so  elects,  it  will  be  permissible  to  mix  the  materials  :tt  a  mixing 
plant;  however,  before  the  mixture  is  spread  to  final  grade,  it  shall  lie  examined  b>  tin 
engineer  in  charge  to  determine,  to  the  best  of  his  ability,  whether  all  conditions  have 
been  met  to  permit  satisfactory  compaction. 

5.  Defects   Before  Acceptance 

The   contractor  shall  be  responsible   for   tin-  work   until   final   acceptance   thereof, 
Before  final  acceptance,  the  contractor  shall  be  required  to  tear  up.  rework  and  replace 
all  areas  which  have  a  tendency  to  bleed  or  become  displaced  under  traffii  due  to  Insuffi 
cient  aggregate   or  are   deficient    in   bituminous   materials   and    tend    towards   excessive 


216 Buildings 

segregation,  rough  spots  or  raveling  or  defects  due  to  improper  drying  and  aeratii  n  of 
the  materials  before  compaction.  Such  work  will  he  done  by  the  contractor  without 
extra  compensation. 

Pages  6-13-1   to  6-13-3,  incl. 

PAINTS  FOR  RAILWAY  BUILDINGS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revisions: 

Page  6-13-2:   Change  Par.   11   to  read  as  follows: 

11.  When  applied,  paint  should  be  brushed  or  sprayed  to  a  smooth  coating  of 
uniform  thickness  so  as  to  get  the  maximum  spreading  capacity  of  the  paint  consistent 
with  a  film  of  the  thickness  to  wear  well  and  give  the  desired  protection.  Exterior  oil- 
base  paints  applied  to  give  a  minimum  thickness  of  0.005  in  provide  optimum 
durability. 

Page  6-13-2:  Change  Par.  13  to  read  as  follows: 

13.  Paints  should  be  furnished  preferably  in  cans  and  mixed  to  the  proper  con- 
sistency for  direct  application.  Under  certain  conditions,  paints  will  require  some  thin- 
ning, which  should  be  done  only  with  turpentine,  linseed  oil,  or  approved  thinners  as 
recommended  by  the  finish  manufacturers. 


Delete  the  Specifications  for  Sprinkler  System,  Manual  pages  6-14-8  to  6-14-11, 
substituting   therefor   the   following  rewritten   version: 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR   SPRINKLER   SYSTEMS 

1.  Special  Note 

The  General  Conditions  as  given  in  Part  1,  this  Chapter,  shall  be  considered  to 
apply  with  equal  force  to  this  specification,  and  the  contractor  shall  consult  them  in 
detail  for   instructions  pertaining  to  his  work. 

2.  Scope  of  Work 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  all  labor,  materials,  tools,  scaffolding  and  equipment, 
unless  otherwise  noted,  necessary  for  and  reasonably  incidental  to  the  furnishing  and 
complete  installation  of  an  automatic  sprinkler  system  as  hereinafter  specified  or  as 
shown  or  implied  on  the  drawings. 

3.  Classification  of  Sprinkler  Systems 

The  types  of  automatic  sprinkler  systems  are: 

a.  Wet-Pipe  System — A  system  employing  automatic  sprinklers  attached  to  a  piping 
system  containing  water  and  connected  to  a  water  supply  so  that  water  discharges  imme- 
diately from  sprinklers  opened  by  a  fire. 

b.  Dry-Pipe  System — A  system  employing  automatic  sprinklers  attached  to  a  piping 
system  containing  air  under  pressure,  the  release  of  which,  as  from  the  opening  of 
sprinklers,  permits  the  water  pressure  to  open  a  valve  known  as  a  "dry  pipe  valve.'1 
The  water  then  flows  into  the  piping  system  and  out  the  opened  sprinklers. 

c.  Pre-action  System — A  system  employing  automatic  sprinklers  attached  to  a  piping 
system  containing  air  that  may  or  may  not  be  under  pressure,  with  a  supplemental  heat- 
responsive     system    of     generally    more    sensitive    characteristics    than    the    automatic 


Buildings 217 

sprinklers  themselves,  installed  in  the  same  areas  as  the  sprinklers;  actuation  of  the 
heat -responsive  system,  as  from  a  fire,  opens  a  valve  which  permits  water  to  flow  into 
the  sprinkler  piping  system  and  to  be  discharged  from  any  sprinklers  which  may 
be  open. 

d.  Deluge  System— A  system  employing  open  sprinklers  attached  to  a  piping  system 
connected  to  a  water  supply  through  a  valve  which  is  opened  by  the  operation  of  a 
heat-responsive  system  installed  in  the  same  areas  as  the  sprinklers.  Whin  this  valve 
opens,  water  flows  into  the  piping  system  and  discharges  from  all  sprinklers  attached 
thereto. 

e.  Combined  Dry-Pipe  and  /'re-action  Sprinkler  System — A  system  employing  auto- 
matic sprinklers  attached  to  a  piping  system  containing  air  under  pressure  with  a  supple- 
mental heat-responsive  system  of  generally  more  sensitive  characteristics  than  the  auto- 
matic sprinklers  themselves,  installed  in  the  same  area  as  the  sprinklers;  operation  of 
the  heat-responsive  system,  as  from  a  fire,  actuates  tripping  devices  which  open  dry-pipe 
valves  simultaneously  and  without  loss  of  air  pressure  in  the  system.  Operation  of  the 
heat-responsive  system  also  opens  approved  air  exhaust  valves  at  the  end  of  the  feed 
main  which  facilitates  the  filling  of  the  system  with  water  which  usually  precedes  the 
opening  of  sprinklers.  The  heat-responsive  system  also  serves  as  an  automatic  fire-alarm 
system. 

f.  Special  Types — Sprinkler  systems  employing  limited  water  supplies,  reduced  pipe 
sizes  and  other  departures  from  the  requirements  for  standard  sprinkler  systems  shall 
not  be  classified  as  standard  sprinkler  systems.  The  authority  having  juridiction  may. 
however,  recognize  the  degree  of  protection  afforded  by  special  types  of  sprinkler  systems 
when  installed  and  maintained  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  listing  thereof 
by  a  nationally   recognized  testing  laboratory. 

4.  System  Selection 

The  sprinkler  system  to  be  used  shall  be  one  of  the  above  classifications  best  suited 
to  the  building  in  which  it  is  to  be  installed  and  the  hazard  to  be  protected 

5.  Preparation  of  Plans 

Before  any  equipment  is  installed,  in  order  to  avoid  error  or  subsequent  misunder- 
standing, preliminary  layouts  shall  be  submitted  for  approval  to  the  authority  having 
jurisdiction.  Any  material  deviation  from  approved  plans  will  require  special  permission. 

Submission  of  working  plans  for  approval  before  starting  the  installation  will  avoid 
subsequent  expensive  changes  and  give  owners  and  contractors  the  benefit  of  the  latesl 
fire  protection  engineering  experience. 

6.  Design  and   Installation 

Sprinkk-r  system  layout  and  installation  shall  lie  entrusted  to  oo  one  but  fully 
experienced   and    responsible   parties.  Sprinkler  system   installation   is  a   trade  in   itsell 

It  shall  be  designed  and  installed  in  accordance  with  the  "Standards  for  the  Installa- 
tion of  Sprinkler  Systems"  adopted  bj  the  National  Fire  Protection  Association,  latest 
issue,  or  the  rules  and  regulations  >>t  the  inspection  Bureau  having  jurisdiction  in  the 

locality   in    which    the  sprinkler   system   IS   t"   be   installed, 

7.  Tests 

The    contractor    shall    conduct    the    tests    required    mi    the    sprinkler    system    in    the 
presence  of  the  representatives  of  the  company  and  ol  the  underwriters  having  jurisdii 
tion.  Equipment  required  t"  make  the  testa  shall  be  furnished  by  the  contractor. 


218 Buildings 

The  sprinkler  system  shall  be  accepted  only  after  all  leaks  and  defects  have  been 
repaired  and  all  conditions  of  the  specifications  and  requirements  of  the  underwriters 
have  been  fully  complied  with. 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  a  complete  set  of  written  instructions,  neatly  framed 
and  glazed,  covering  operation   of  the  system,  for  reference  purposes. 

8.  Painting 

All  equipment  and  piping  installed  in  connection  with  the  sprinkler  system  shall  be 
painted  with  two  coats  of  paint.  Color  of  paint  to  be  selected  by  the  engineer. 

9.  Guarantee 

Contractor  must  guarantee  the  perfect  operation  of  the  system  heretofore  described, 
that  it  will  be  capable  of  fulfilling  the  requirements  of  the  underwriters  having  jurisdic- 
tion. Any  omission  in  these  specifications  or  the  drawings  accompanying  same  do  not 
relieve  the  contractor  of  fulfilling  his  obligations  to  install  the  system  complete  in  every 
respect,  and  fulfilling  his  guarantee. 

The  guarantee  shall  be  for  not  less  than  one  year  of  time  after  acceptance  of  the 
work  by  the  engineer.  The  contractor  shall  furnish  and  reinstall  without  cost  to  the 
owners,  any  part  or  parts  of  the  work  which  may  prove  during  that  time  to  have  been 
faulty  or  defective. 

10.  Cleaning 

At  the  completion  of  the  work,  the  contractor  shall  remove  all  construction  equip- 
ment, scaffolding,  staging,  erection  platforms  and  all  surplus  material  from  the  premises, 
leaving  the  premises  in  a  clean  and  acceptable  condition.  If  any  equipment  or  debris  is 
not  removed  promptly,  such  material  may  be  removed  at  the  expense  of  the  contractor. 

11.  General  Conditions 

All  materials  entering  into  the  work  and  all  methods  used  by  the  contractor  shall 
be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  engineer,  and  no  part  of  the  work  will  be  considered 
as  finally  accepted  until  all  of  the  work  is  completed  and  accepted. 


Delete  the  material  on  Ice  Houses  and  Icing  Stations,  Manual  pages  6-26-1  and 
6-26-2,   substituting   therefor   the  following  rewritten   version: 

ICE  HOUSES  AND  ICING  STATIONS 

A.  GENERAL 

There  are  numerous  methods  of  providing  icing  facilities  for  refrigerator  cars,  but 
basically  they  consist  of  production,  storage  and  loading. 

B.  PRODUCTION 

Modern  methods  of  ice  manufacture  make  the  use  of  natural  ice  uneconomical 
except  in  locations  having  cold  winters  and  where  harvesting  is  favorable.  For  this  rea- 
son most  car  icing  today  is  done  with  manufactured  ice,  either  direct  from  day  storage 
of  the  manufacturing  plant  or  from  refrigerated  reserve  storage  of  the  manufacturiing 
plant.  Ice  houses  at  manufacturing  plants  are  usually  designed  for  sufficient  capacity  to 
balance  off  the  manufacturing  capacity  during  the  months  of  peak  demand.  With  a 
proper  balance  between  manufacturing  capacity  and  storage  capacity  it  is  possible  to 
operate  the  manufacturing  plant  year  around  on  an  economical  basis. 


Buildings 219 

Ice  manufacturing  plants  generally  consist  of  a  machinery  room,  tank  room,  day- 
storage  room  and  winter  storage  room.  The  machinery  and  tank  rooms  should  provide 
for  a  practicable  degree  of  automatic  operation  and  mechanical  harvesting  of  ice.  The 
day  storage  room  may  be  about  12  ft  in  height  and  capable  of  accommodating  at  least 
two  days'  manufacture. 

C.  STORAGE 

Houses  for  natural  or  lake  cut  ice  are  seldom  mechanically  refrigerated.  They  depend 
upon  the  melting  ice  for  refrigeration.  Adequate  insulation  should  be  provided. 

Houses  for  manufactured  ice  storage  adjacent  to  manufacturing  plant  are  always 
mechanically  refrigerated.  When  located  away  from  the  manufacturing  plant  they  are 
usually  designed  to  retain  a  hauled-in  supply  to  meet  requirements  between  shipments 
from  the  manufacturing  plant,  and  may  or  may  not  be  refrigerated. 

The  size  and  arrangement  of  the  house  should  be  determined  by  seasonal  require- 
ments. Houses  for  natural  ice  are  usually  large  enough  to  hold  a  full  season's  require- 
ments. Otherwise,  it  becomes  necessary  to   buy   and  ship  in  ice  at  the   most  expensive 
season.  Where  large  capacity  is  required  it  is  desirable  to  build  the  house  higher  rather 
than  to  spread  it  out.  Heights  from  18  to  36  ft  are  generally  used. 

To  prevent  rise  of  temperature,  due  to  heat  passing  through  the  ground,  some  of 
the  storage  space  is  usually  below  the  grade  line,  extending  about  1  ft  below  frost  line. 
The  floor  may  be  located  at  ground  level  if  the  foundation  is  properly  insulated. 

Ice  houses  are  generally  of  frame  construction  with  a  gable  roof.  The  side  walls 
of  the  storage  house  should  be  so  constructed  as  to  afford  maximum  insulation.  If  a 
concrete  foundation  is  not  provided  the  walls  should  be  tied  together  at  the  bottom 
with  rods  to  prevent  spreading.  These  rods  should  be  below  the  floor  line  to  avoid 
obstruction.  The  use  of  interior  supporting  members  should  be  avoided  as  they  interfere 
with  the  handling  of  the  ice.  The  floor  may  be  wood  plank  on  sleepers  set  in  a  gravel 
bed,  or  concrete  on  gravel.  Floors  should  pitch  slightly  toward  the  center  so  that  when 
the  house  is  filled  the  ice  will  not  cause  any  stress  on  the  outside  walls.  A  drain  tile 
should  be  laid  through  the  center  of  the   house. 

A  typical  sidewall  construction  consists  of  3-  by  10-in  studs  spaced  24  in  on  centers, 
1  in  exterior  sheathing  and  corrugated  aluminum  siding,  1  in  interior  sheathing,  4  in  of 
foam-glass-type  insulation  and  Y^  in  exterior  plywood  and  4-  by  4-in  vertical  timbers 
spaced  24  in  on  centers  to  hold  the  foam  glass  in  place. 

Where  ice  is  delivered  to  house  in  cars,  a  car-floor-height  platform  is  used  for 
unloading  cars.  Ice  is  conveyed  and  elevated  by  use  of  motor-driven  handling  equipment. 

D.  loadim; 

1.  Top   Icing 

Top  icing  consists  of  the  use  of  crushers  and  stingers  to  place  snow  ice  directly  on 
the  lading  via  the  doors  on  the  sides  of  the  cars.  Cars  can  be  iced  bj  (a)  highway 
trucks  operating  on  ground  level  equipped  with  crushers  and  slingers,  (b)  crusher  stinger 
machines  operating  on  a  car-floor-level  platform,  or  (c)  crusher-slinger  machines 
operating  on   tracks  at  track  level. 

2.  Bunker  Icing 

Bunker  icing  consists  of  the  placing  of  cake  or  crushed  ice  into  the  bunker  doors 
on  the  roof  of  the  car.  This  can  be  done  by   (a)   highway  trucks,  (b)   high-level  plat- 


220 Buildings 

forms,   (c)   machines  operating  on  high-level   platforms,   (d)   machines  operating  on  car- 
floor-level  platforms  or  on  track   level. 

(a)  A  highway  truck  with  a  lift  or  elevating  body  provides  the  simplest  type  of 
icing  facility.  The  truck  drives  on  a  roadway  parallel  to  the  cars,  the  ice  is  raised  on 
the  elevating  body  and  placed  into  the  bunker.  An  arrangement  of  this  type  is  satis- 
factory where  there  is  not  enough  car  icing  done  to  justify  a  car  top  high  platform. 
It  is  also  an  economical  way  to  handle  re-icing  of  cars  spotted  in  yards  that  require 
additional  ice  because  of  unloading  delays  or  extremely  hot  weather. 

(b)  Most  high-level  icing  platforms  have  a  single  level  approximately  14  ft  to  16  ft 
above  top  of  rail  and  from  12  to  16  ft  wide.  Platforms  are  usually  of  timber  construc- 
tion and  may  serve  one  or  two  tracks  depending  on  the  number  of  cars  to  be  iced.  At 
important  stations  a  mechanically  operated  endless-chain  platform  conveyor  is  used  to 
move  the  ice  to  proper  locations  on  the  platform.  Provisions  should  be  made  on  the 
platforms  for  a  supply  of  salt.  Railings  are  provided  where  required. 

(c)  Bunker  icing  machines  are  available  that  operate  on  rails  on  the  high-level 
platform.  These  self-propelled  machines  pick  up  the  ice  cakes  from  the  endless  chain 
conveyor,  can  crush  ice  if  desired,  and  place  ice  and  salt  in  the  bunker. 

(d)  Bunker  icing  machines  are  available  that  operate  on  rails  on  a  car-floor-height 
platform  or  from  rails  at  ground  level  that  operate  in  a  similar  manner  to  the  machines 
on  the  high-level  platforms.  This  type  of  machine  can  be  obtained  with  devices  for  top 
icing  also. 

3.  General 

Adequate  drainage  should  be  provided  for  the  icing  facility  area.  An  adequate  light- 
ing system  should  be  installed  for  use  when  icing  is  to  be  performed  at  night.  A  com- 
munication system  should  be  installed  so  that  icing  can  be  coordinated  with  the  yard 
operations. 

Pages  6-26-3  and  6-26-4 

REST  HOUSES 

Delete  in  its  entirety. 


Delete  the  material  on  Storehouses  for  Shops  and  Locomotive  Terminals,  Manual 
pages    6-26-5    to    6-26-8,    incl.,    substituting    therefor    the    following    rewritten    version: 

STOREHOUSES  FOR  SHOPS  AND  LOCOMOTIVE  TERMINALS 

1.  Arrangement 

The  primary  consideration  in  designing  a  storehouse  is  the  economical  handling  of 
material.  The  arrangement  should  provide  for  convenient  handling  and  checking  of 
materials  and  ease  of  supervision. 

Storehouse  floors  may  be  at  ground  level  or  car-floor-height  level  depending  on  use 
and  operation  of  the  facility. 

Racks  should  be  so  located  that  the  handling  of  materials  will  be  reduced  to  a 
minimum.  Main  aisles  of  ample  width  should  be  provided  to  allow  for  the  handling 
of  material  by  motorized  equipment 

A  one-story  house  possesses  advantages  for  easy  and  short  trucking  but  where  very 
large  floor  area  is  required,  a  two  or  three-story  building  may  be  more  suitable.  The 
use  of  multiple  stories  would  also  be  dependent  upon  the  availability  and  value  of  the 


Buildings 221 

ground  area.   Where  more  than  one  story  is  used,  the  upper  Boors  are  general!}    used 
for  offices,   for  slow-moving  and  lightweight   materials. 

The  office  should  be  of  sufficient  size  to  accommodate  the  personnel,  together  with 
space  for  files  and  possibly  a  private  office  for  the  storekeeper.  Office  may  be  con- 
solidated with  other  departments.  In  one-story  buildings  the  office  is  usually  at  one  end. 
In  multi-story  buildings  the  office  is  generally  on  an  upper  floor. 

2.  Construction 

Storehouses  should  be  of  fire-resistant  construction  excepl   for  small  storehouses  or 

auxiliary  buildings  which  could  be  of  noncombustible  construction  such  as  metal. 

Interior  columns  should  be  avoided  in  one-story  buildings.  In  buildings  of  more 
than  one  story  the  column  and  rack  spacing  should  be  coordinated  so  as  to  provide  a 
maximum  of  storage  space. 

3.  Floor  Loading 

Recommended  minimum  floor  loading  for  first  floor  is  300  lb  per  sq  ft  and  for 
upper  floors,  250  lb  per  sq  ft. 

4.  Platforms 

Concrete  platforms  are  usually  provided  on  the  track  side  along  the  entire  length  of 
storehouse.  Where  motorized  equipment  and  trailers  are  used  a  14-ft  wide  platform  is 
recommended.  Platform  should  have  a  ramp  at  the  end  with  a  maximum  recommended 
slope  of  10  percent. 

5.  Elevators 

In  multi-story  buildings  elevators  should  be  of  sufficient  size  and  capacity  to  handle 
motorized  equipment.  The  self-leveling  type  of  automatic  elevator  with  push-button 
control  is  recommended.  Elevator  hatchway  should  be  constructed  to  meet  local  code 
requirements. 

6.  Ramps 

Instead  of  elevators,  ramps  inside  of  buildings  have  been  found  to  be  satisfactory 
in  some  operations.  Maximum  recommended  slope  is   10  percent, 

7.  Chutes,  Conveyors  and  Pallets 

Package  chutes  or  conveyors  from  upper  floors  to  the  lower  floor  are  very  con- 
venient in  the  larger-size  storehouses.  They  are  generally  located  near  the  elevator.  Pallet 
handling  with  self-propelled  lift  trucks  for  transporting  and  stacking  is  desirable  in 
many  storehouse  operations. 

8.  Lighting 

Natural  lighting  may  be  provided  through  window-  or  tool  panels.  Electric  lighting 
should  be  provided,  with  the  lamps  over  the  aisles.  Receptacles  are  often  provided  at 
the  ends  of  the  racks. 

9.  Ventilation 

Ventilation  should  be  provided  in  the  storage  and  office  sections.  Material  should 
be  kept  in  a  dry  location. 

10.  Fire  Protection 

An  adequate  interior  automatic  sprinkler  system  is  preferable,  the  nexl  choice  for 
inside  the  building  being  water  pipe  lines  with  hydrants  and  hose  reds.  A  sufficient  num- 


222 Buildings 

ber  of  fire  hydrants  with  hose  cart  protection  should  also  be  installed  outside  of  the 
building.  Fire  extinguishers  should  be  distributed  throughout  the  storehouse  in  accessible 
and  plainly  marked  locations.  Fire  alarm  boxes,  where  warranted,  should  be  located  at 
convenient  points  both   within  and  without  the  storehouse. 

11.  Racks 

The  open  type  of  rack,  preferably  of  steel  with  adjustable  shelves,  is  recommended. 


Delete  the  material  on  oil  houses,  Manual  pages  6-26-8  and  6-26-9,  substituting 
therefore  the  following  rewritten  version: 

OIL  HOUSES 
1.  General 

Oil  houses  shall  be  designed  and  constructed  in  accordance  with  local,  state  or 
national  building  cedes,  recommended  by  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters,  and 
"Standards  of  the  National  Board  of  Fire  Underwriters  for  Storage,  Handling  and  Use 
of  Flammable  Liquids",  Pamphlet   No.  30. 

Page  6-25-9 

LUMBER  SHED 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revision: 

Add  the  words:  "or  metal"  following  the  word  "frame"  in  the  first  line  of  the 
first  paragraph. 


MODEL  441 

Developed  and  Built 
for  Railroad  Maintenance 

180°  BOOM  SWING 

D0£$  ALL  JOBS! 


ROOTS  AND  LOADS  TIES 


LAYING  WELDED  RAIL 


CUTS     MAINTENANCE     COSTS 


12  FAST  CHANGE  ATTACHMENTS 


•  Forks 

•  IU   Cu.  Yd.  Bucket 

•  Tote   Hook 

•  18'  Boom   Extension 

•  Fork   Tie   Baler 

•  Track   Cleaning   Bucket 


•  Back  Hoe 

•  Clamshell 

•  Back   Filler  Blade 

•  Pull   Drag   Bucket 

•  4  Cu.  Yd.   Snow  Bucket 

•  Pile  Hammer 


Optional   Attachment 
Flanged   Wheels,   Hydraulically   Controlled 


PETTIBONE  MULLIKEN  CORPORATION 


RAILROAD 

141    W.  JACKSON 


DIVISION 

CHICAGO  4,   ILL 


9'   WIDE  TRACK   CLEANING   BUCKET" 


80   /ears  of  Service 
to  the  Railroad  Industry 


at 

your 

service 


for 

all    types   of   cranes 

diesel   wreckers 

pile   drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608       S  .       DEARBORN      ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.  COVELLI 

President 
Representatives    in    Principal    Cities 


J 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  arc  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Cleaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  well 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rail 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  for 
better  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  lor  —  and  more 


c/^l^~/7s/<>  fife  £at£z#ads  yna^naae  usec&  as/ 


Lllllll 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


306  North  Cayuga  Si. 
Ithaca.  N.  V. 


. . .  to  be  sure 


Today,  one  rail  test  service  stands  out  ...  for  its  ability  to  detect  more 
known  types  of  defects  ...  for  lowest  cost  per  defect ...  for  years  of  experi- 
ence .  .  .  and  for  assurance  in  the  reduction  of  costly  service  failures. 

Sperry  . . .  "first  in  rail  testing"  . . .  invites  comparisons  of  its  ability,  know- 
ing that  no  other  rail  service  can  match  it  for  accuracy  and  thoroughness. 
Sperry  Rail  Service,  Danbury,  Connecticut.  (203)  Pioneer  8-9243. 


SPERRY  RAIL  SERVICE 

DIVISION  OF  HOWE  SOUND  COMPANY 


VEGETATION  CONTROL 

CHEMICALS 


# 


READE  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  INC. 

Jersey  City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas 
City — Birmingham — Stockton 

SERVING  RAILROADS  OF  AMERICA  FOR 
MORE   THAN   FORTY  YEARS 


W 

E 
E 

D 

A 
N 
D 

B 

R 

u 

S 
H 

C 
O 
N 
T 
R 
O 
L 


P.  O.  Box   10378  LOgan  6-7922 

GREENHEART,    INC. 

1431    N.  E.  26th  Street 
FORT  LAUDERDALE,  FLORIDA 

President — John   L  McEwen — Quarter  Century  Experience 

IMPORTERS: 

Greenheart  Piles,  Lumber,  Timbers  Long  Length 
MORA  EXCELSA — Lumber  and  Timbers 

Teak  and   other  Woods  from   Burma,  Siam,  Australia, 
Africa  and  South  America 


OO  WOODINGS-VERONA  TOOL  WORKS 

^^f  Pioneer  Manufacturers 

of 
HIGH  GRADE  TRACK  TOOLS 

and 

SPRING  WASHERS  FOR  TRACK 

Since  1873 

VERONA.  PA.  CHICAGO.  ILL. 


w 

WOODINGS  FORGE  <&  TOOL  COMPANY 

Makers 

oi 

WOODINGS  RAIL  ANCHORS 

VERONA,  PA. 

CHICAGO,  ILL. 

Model  N  U  Tie  Cutter 


HERE  IS  THE  WINNING  TEAM 

The  Woolery  NU  Tie  Cutter  and  the  Woolery  Tie-end  Remover  preserve  the  line  and  surface 
of  the  track  and  at  the  same  time  reduce  the  cost  of  tie  renewals.  Ties  can  be  removed 
without  trenching,  jacking  up  track  or  adzing  tops  of  rail-cut  ties.  With  this  team  you  simply 
cut  both  ends  of  tie,  pry  out  center  piece,  insert  in  its  place  the  tie-end  remover  and  out 
go  the  tie  ends  pushed  by  the  double  acting,  double  ended  hydraulic  cylinder  of  the  Tie- 
end  remover. 


FOR  HIGHEST  EFFICIENCY  USE  TWO  TIE  CUTTERS  WITH  ONE  TIE-END  REMOVER 


WOOLERY  MACHINE  COMPANY 

MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN. 


AREA  Publications — Price  List 

The   following  include   some   of  the  Association  publications  available  from  the 
secretary's  office  on  order.  Prices  shown  are  for  Members  only: 

Member 
Price 
Manual  of  Recommended  Practice,  complete  in  2  volumes,  including  binders 

(first   copy)     $18.00 

Extra  binders,  each   4.50 

Annual  Supplements    (first  copy)    1-00 

Separate  Chapters 

1-Roadway  and  Ballast    1-50 

3-Ties    25 

4-Rail    75 

5-Track     75 

6-Buildings     I-50 

7— Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles   1-00 

8-Masonry     100 

9-Highways    0.50 

11— Engineering  and  Valuation  Records   1-25 

13— Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services 100 

14— Yards  and  Terminals    1-00 

15— Iron  and  Steel  Structures 1-25 

16— Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation   0.75 

17— Wood   Preservation    50 

20-Contract  Forms   1.25 

22— Economics  of  Railway  Labor   0.50 

25— Waterways   and   Harbors    0.25 

27— Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment 0.50 

28-Clearances     0.25 

29- Waterproofing     0.25 

Flexible-cover,  loose-leaf  binder  for  separate  chapters,  each   0.40 

Portfolio   of  Trackwork  Plans— 119  plans,   8  sheets  of  specifications,  5  sheets 

definitions  of  terms,   complete  with  leadierette  cover    $12.50 

Track  Scale  Pamphlet— 109  pages,  flexible   cover   100 

Federal  Valuation  of  Railroads-87  pages,  flexible  cover LOO 

Instructions  for  Mixing  and  Placing  Concrete-24  pages,  flexible  cover 0.40 

Notes  on  Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures  from  the  School  of 

Experience-43  pages,  flexible  cover   0.50 

Handbook  of  Instructions  for  the  Care  and  Operation  of  Maintenance  of  Way 

Equipment-149  pages,  hard  cover  0.85 

Instructions  for  Care  and  Safe  Operation  of  Welding  and  Grinding  Equip- 

ment-23  pages,  flexible  cover   0.30 

Specifications    for    Steel    Railway    Bridges    (fixed    spans) -70    pages,    flexible 

cover    u- '  ° 

Specifications  for  Movable  Railway  Bridges-73  pages,  punched  sheets 1.00 


AUTOJACK 
ELECTROMATIC 


The  only  completely 
automatic  track  surfacing 
machine  on  the  market 


Proven  in  operation  by  North  America's 
leading  railroads.  Complete  and  auto- 
matic control  of  surface  and  cross  level 
through  tangent  and  curve  territory 
regardless  of  height  of  lift. 

•  Combination  of  Autojack  and  Electromatic 
equals  or  improves  production  of  Electro- 
matic alone. 

•  Precision  of  lift  and  uniformity  of  compaction 
controlled  automatically. 


•  All  variations  in  lift,  level  and  run-out  con- 
trolled from  operator's  panel. 

•  Beam  "sighting"  for  utmost  precision. 

•  Front  buggy  self-propelled  ahead  of  tamper. 


TA  M  P  E  R     I  N  C.    53  Court  St.,  Pittsburgh,  N.Y. 

SALES    AND    SERVICE:    2 147  University  Avenue 
St.  Paul  1  4,  Minnesota 
Phone:  645-5055 
IN   CANADA    160  St.  Joseph  Blvd., 

Lachine  (Montreal),  P.O. 
Phone:  637-5531 
Your  enquiries  for  detailed  information  or  brochures  on 
Autojack  Electromatic  and  other  track  machines  are  invited. 


Hubbard  Super  Service  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Super  Steel  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Track  Tools 

Hubbard  Tool  Division 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

New  York  Pittsburgh  Chicago 


% 


Unit  Rail  Anchor 


UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  DIVISION 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 
NEW  YORK  PITTSBURGH  CHICAGO 


HYKIL 


WEED 
KILLERS 

•  Nationally  Available!       •  Madeto-order! 

Now  .  .  .  HYKIL  Weed  Killers  are  available  from  distribution  points 
throughout  U.S.  Regardless  of  your  local  weed  problem,  HYKIL  can  solve 
it  with  a  made-to-order  weed  killer  and  supply  you  .  .  .  quickly  and 
economically.  Having  years  of  experience  in  the  field  of  specialized  railroad 
vegetation-control,  HYKIL  can  supply  you  with  the  correct  aromatic,  oil- 
based  herbicide  for  your  problem;  can  apply  it  for  you  under  contract 
.  .  .  using  the  finest  equipment;  or  can  build  for  your  specific  needs,  the 
proper  equipment  to  do  the  job. 


Whatever  your  weed  problem 


call,  write  or  wire  for  a  quick  solution. 


INCORPORATED 


1021    FRUIT  STREET 
SANTA  ANA,  CALIF. 

12406 


2200  WEST  75,H  STREET 
KANSAS  CITY  15,  MO. 


HVKIL 


vegetation  control 

and 

railway  work  equipment 


mxmm: 


*mmmxx*amxmmmm 


Assure  lower  maintenance  costs, 
better  performance  with... 

mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm. 


1 


TEXACO 

Railroad  Lubricants 

and  Systematic 

Engineering  Service 


TEXACO  inc. 

RAILWAY  SALES  DIVISION 


135  East  42nd  St.,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 
NEW  YORK   •   C  IICAGO   •   SAN  FRANCISCO   •   ST.  LOUIS   •   ST.  PAUL   •   ATLANTA 


RAIL     JOINTS 


THE  STRONGEST 

ARE 

THE  MOST  ECONOMICAL 


Rail   Joint  Company 

Division  of  Poor  &  Company,    (Inc.) 
New  York  7,   N.  Y. 


THE  DOUBLE  U  RAIL  ANCHOR 


ACHUFF  RAILWAY  SUPPLY  CO. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


with  America's  most  complete  line  of 
special  trackwork:  For  Railroads, 
Mines  and  Industries — A  complete 
line  of  frogs,  switches  and  crossings  • 
Track  work  for  installation  in  paved 
areas  •  Manganese  steel  guard  rails 
•  Automatic  switch  stands  •  Samson 
switch  points  •  Snow- Blowers  •  Switch 
point  guards  •  Rail  and  flange  lubri- 
cators •  Tie  pads  •  Racor  studs  •  Dual 
spike  setters  •  Dual  spike  drivers  • 
Car  retarders. 

with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  manufacturing  facilities:  (oust 
to  coast  to  serve  your  needs. 


►   RACOR  PLANTS: 

Buffalo  •  Chicago  Heights  •  Los  Angeles  • 
Niagara  Falls,  Ontario.  Canada  •    Pueblo 

•  Superior. 

•  RACOR  SALES  AND  ENGINEERING 

Chicago  •  Cleveland  •  Denver  •  Houston  • 
Los  Angeles  •  Louisville  •  New  York  • 
Philadelphia  •  Richmond  •  San  Francisco 
St.  Louis  •  St.  Paul.  In  Canada:  Dominion 
Brake  Shoe  Co.,  Ltd.,  Montreal,  Quebec 

•  Niagara  Falls,  Ontario  •  Winnipeg, 
Manitoba   •   Vancouver,  B.  C. 

*  RACOR  RESEARCH: 
Chicago  •    Mahwah,  N.  J. 


with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  engineering  service:  This  lies  in 
making  available  to  our  customers 
Racor's  engineering  experience — 
practical  experience  from  years  of 
designing  and  manufacturing  .  .  . 
advanced  experience  solving  tomor- 
row's trackwork  problems  today  in 
Racor  research  laboratories. 

Why  not  let  us  help  you  with  your 
trackwork  problems? 


-<t22>- 


RAILROAD  PRODUCTS  DIVISION 
530  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  36,  New  York 


Brake  Shoe 


A  COMPLETE  LINE 
OF  SPRING  WASHERS 


THE   NATIONAL  LOCK  WASHER  CO. 

Newark  N.  J  .    USA 


Notes  on 

Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures 
from  the  School  of  Experience 

By  J.  A.   Given 

A  series  of  notes,  comments,  short-cut  methods  and  "tricks  of  the 
trade"  written  by  a  railroad  location  engineer  of  many  years  of 
practical   experience  for  the   benefit  of  young   engineers. 

Price  $0.50 

AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 

59   East  Van   Buren   Street 

Chicago  5,  III. 


£-x-t-e-n-d    f-i-e  jL-i-fi-e! 
•Hold  (faael 

USE  TIE  PLATE 
LOCK  SPIKES 


One-piece  Design 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  tie  plates  firmly  in  place  on 
cross-ties  and  bridge  timbers. 

LOCK  SPIKES  are  quickly  and  easily  driven, 
or  removed,  with  standard  track  tools. 

Driven  to  refusal,  the  spread  shank  is  com- 
pressed by  the  walls  of  the  hole.  Tie  plates  are  held 
against  horizontal  and  vertical  movement  under 
spring  pressure.  Play  between  the  spike  and  the 
hole  is  eliminated — abrasion  and  seating  of  tie 
plates  is  overcome. 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  their  position  in  the  tie, 
and  redriving  to  tighten  the  plate  is  not  required. 
They  provide  a  quiet  and  strengthened  track. 

Annual  cost  of  ties  and  maintenance  expense  is 
reduced  by  extending  the  life  of  ties  and  holding 
gage.  Here  is  one  answer  to  conservation  of  ma- 
terials and  labor.  Write  for  free  folder. 

BERNUTH,   LEMBCKE   CO.,  INC. 

420  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York   17,  N.  Y. 


Actual 
Size 


6RS  Announces  ...ROLKODE 


WITH  SOLID 


A  New  Communication  System  state  units 


for  centralized 

traffic  control 

for  supervisory 

control  systems 

Advantages  of  the  System: 

•  ROLKODE  is  up  to  50% 
faster  than  time  coded  sys- 
tems. 

•  When  combined  with  other 
services,  ROLKODE  sim- 
plifies line  circuit  require- 
ments. 

•  ROLKODE  operates  on  line 
wire,  cable,  microwave,  or 
telephone  company  facili- 
ties. 

•  ROLKODE  eliminates 
need  for  line  battery  or 
stand-by  a-c. 


-     -  *»*ffpMMHPHH 


Control  office  solid  state  counter. 


ROLKODE  is  simple,  fast,  and 
economical.  Its  advanced  electronic 
circuitry,  solid  state  units,  new  and 
improved  relays,  and  unusual  adapt- 
ability will  make  your  next  cTc 
installation  the  most  efficient  avail- 
able today. 


Typical  coding  unit. 

FOR    MORE  INFORMATION    ASK    FOR    PUBLICATION    D04.0303 

3 

GENERAL  RAILWAY    SIGNAL    COMPANY 

ROCHESTER  2,  NEW  YORK  NEW  YORK  17,  NEW  YORK            CHICAGO  1,  ILLINOIS            ST.  LOUIS  1,  MISSOURI 


THE  TRASCO 
AUTONOMIC  CAR  RETARDER 

CLAMPS  IN  PLACE 
ANYWHERE  IN  TRACK 

SIMPLE  —  EFFECTIVE  —  INEXPENSIVE 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  CO 

GENERAL   MOTORS    BLDG. 
NEW  YORK   19,  N.  Y. 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 

Vol.  64,  No.  575  December  1962 


REPORTS  OF  COMMITTEES 

8 — Masonry 223 

3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation 241 

22 — Economics  of  Railway  Labor 263 

27 — Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment 305 

30 — Impact  and   Bridge  Stresses 327 

28 — Clearances    333 


The  reports  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  will  be  presented  to  the  1963  Busi- 
ness Meeting  of  the  Association  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  March 
15-16.  Comments  and  discussion  with  respect  to  any  of  the  reports  are  solicited, 
and  should  be  addressed  to  the  chairman  of  the  committee  involved,  in  writing 
in  advance  of  the  Meeting,  or  from  the  floor  during  the  Meeting. 


Copyright    1962,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    AuoclaHon 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 

1962-1963 

President 
C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Vice  Presidents 
L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines, 

Houston  1,  Tex. 
T.  F.  Burris,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 

Past  Presidents 

E.  J.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  Chicago  6. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 

Directors 

C.  J.  Henry,  Chief  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

J.  M.  Trissal,  Vice  President  and  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

W.  B.  Throckmorton,  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chi- 
cago 5. 

J.  A.  Bunjer,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  Omaha  2,  Nebr. 

J.  H.  Brown,  Assistant  General  Manager — Eastern  District,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco 
Railway,  Springfield  2,  Mo. 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Rail- 
way, Amarillo,  Tex. 

W.  H.  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,  Chicago  6. 

F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  L.  Young,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Defendorf,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 
Denver  17,  Colo. 

Treasurer 
A.  B.  Hhxman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 
Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

Executive  Secretary 

Neal  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  111. 

Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November   and   December;    Bi-Monthly,    June- July,    and  September-October,   at   2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

S9  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5,  111. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  for  in  Section   1103,  Act  of  October  3,    1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,   1918. 

Subscription   $10  per  annum. 


Report   of   Committee   8 — Masonry 


L.  B.  Boyd  L.  M.  Morris  (E) 

J.  VV.  Briscoe  L.  P.  Nicholson 

H.  C.  Brown  R.  F.  Noll 

M.  W.  Bruns  M.  S.  Norris 

A.  W.  Carlson  R.  E.  Pearson 

1G.  W.  Clarvoe  R.  B.  Peck 

Maurice  Coburn  (E)  J.  E.  Peterson 

G.  W.  Cooke  Milton  Pikarsky 

L.  F.  Currier  E.  D.  Ripple 

E.  J.  Daily  W.  H.  Robertson 

B.  M.  Dornblatt  R.  I.  Rollings 
W.  J.  Eney  D.  B.  Roth 
J.  A.  Erskine  F.  A.  Russ,  Jr. 
J.  U.  Estes  J.  H.  Sawyer,  Jr. 
W.  J.  Galloway  M.   Schifalacqua 
X.  O.  Geuder,  Sr.  Everett  Scroggie 
J.  M.  Gilmore  B.  J.  Shadrake 

D.  H.  Dowe,  Chairman        R.  W.  Gilmore   (E)  C.  H.  Splitstone  (E) 

T    p  G.  P.  Hayes,  Jr.  S.  A.  Stutes 

J.  K.   Williams,  s    fi    HoLT  Anton  Tedesko 

Vice  Chairman  R    w    HoPK1NS  R    A    Ullery 

W.  R.  Wilson  H.  R.  Hutchens  G.  R.  Vanderpool 

I      \.  Kempe,  Jr.  J.  R.  Iwinski  Neil  Van  Eenam 

I  .    \.   \I(  Leod"  A.  C.  Johnson  J.  W.  Weber 

W  .  E.  Brakensiek  T.  R.  Kealey  D.  V.  Wigal 

I.  \\ .  Dolson  R.  E.  Kleist  J.  M.  Williams 

R.    |.   Bin  i  ski  R.  J.   Klueh  S.  G.  Wintoniak 

W.  P.  Hexdrix  A.  P.  Kouba  G.  A.  Wolf 

A.  N.  Laird  (E)  K.  B.Woods 

\    I..  Becker  E.  F.  Manley  R.  J.  Wright 

I     !<    Blewitt  P.  R.  Matthews  K.  B.  Woods 

Committee 

Member  Emeritus. 
Died  September  21,  1962. 
Chose  ishn^c  names  are  set  in  bold-face  type  constitute  the  Engineering  Division,  AAR,  Committee  8. 

in  tin-  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  >ul>jo  i 

l    ki  \  ision  oi  Manual. 

Progress   report,  including  recommended  revisions   page  225 

Design   of   masonry   structures,   collaborating   with    Committees    1,   5.   6,   7, 

15,  28  and  30. 

Progress     report,     including    recommended    addition     to    Manual     material 

covering  specifications  for  elastomeric  bearing  pads   page  225 

idations  and  earth  pressures,  collaborating  with   Committees   1,  6,  7, 
IS    uid  30. 

Progress  report  recommending  reapproval  with  revisions  of  Manual  mate 
rial  covering  specifications  for  pile  foundations  page  226 

•    Deterioration  and  repair  >>!  masonry  structures. 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  Information   page  237 

223 

Mull     7.7.-. 


224 Masonry 

6.  Prestressed  concrete  for  railway  structures,  collaborating  with  Committee  6. 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  237 

7.  Quality  of  concrete  and  mortars,  collaborating  with  Committee  6. 

Part    1 — Bibliography   of   important  articles   from   Proceedings   relative   to 

quality  of   concrete    page  238 

Part  2 — Revision  of  ASTM  specification  references   page  239 

8.  Waterproofing    for    railway    structures,    collaborating   with    Committees   6, 
7  and  IS. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  240 

10.  Methods   of    construction   with   precast   concrete    structural   members,   col- 
laborating with  Committee  8. 

A  report  is  being  prepared  on  the  various  types  of  connections  used  to 
join  the  elements  in  precast  concrete  construction.  This  will  be  presented 
as  information  next  year. 

The  Committee  on  Masonry, 

D.  H.  Dowe,  Chairman. 

AREA  Bulletin  575,  December  1962. 


MEMOIR 

€me£rt  Splitter  ffltlLtob 

Ernest  Aylmer  McLeod  passed  away  on  September  21,  1962,  in  Detroit,  Mich.,  after 
a  short  illness.  He  is  survived  by  his  wife  Alice,  a  daughter,  Mrs.  Judith  Hlavenka  of 
Elmhurst,  111.,  and  a  son,  Daniel,  who  is  a  student  at  Wayne  State  University. 

Mr.  McLeod  was  born  in  Cleveland,  Ohio,  on  July  12,  1901.  He  attended  Case 
Institute  of  Technology  where  he  received  the  Bachelor  of  Science,  Civil  Engineer  and 
Master  of  Science  degrees  in  civil  engineering.  After  graduation  he  worked  successively 
for  the  Nickel  Plate  Railroad,  U.  S.  Corps  of  Engineers,  and  the  Union  Carbide  Co. 
In  1937  he  entered  the  engineering  department  of  the  New  York  Central  Railroad  at 
Chicago  as  an  engineering  draftsman.  He  advanced  to  assistant  engineer,  assistant  engi- 
neer of  structures,  assistant  bridge  engineer  and  district  engineer  of  structures,  which 
position  he  held  at  the  time  of  his  death. 

Mr.  McLeod  joined  the  AREA  in  1944  and  served  on  Committee  8—  Masonry,  from 
1947  until  his  death.  He  was  vice  chairman  from  1955  to  1957,  and  chairman  of  the 
committee  from  1958  to  1960,  and  since  then  served  as  subcommittee  chairman. 

In  addition  to  belonging  to  the  Methodist  Church,  he  was  a  member  of  the  Cleve- 
land Engineer  Society,  Sigma  Xi  honorary  fraternity  and  Phi  Kappa  Tau. 

Mr.  McLeod's  passing  will  be  a  distinct  loss  to  Committee  8;  his  wise  counsel,  his 
technical  knowledge,  and  his  enthusiastic  cooperation  in  all  phases  of  the  committee's 
work  will  be  missed.  The  Committee  expresses  its  sympathy  and  sorrow  in  his  death. 

W.  R.  Wilson, 

J.  M.   GlLMORE, 

Committee  on  Memoir. 


Masonry 225 

Report  on  Assignment   1 

Revision  of  Manual 

W.  R.  Wilson  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  E.  Brakensiek,  R.  J.  Brueske,  G.  W.  Cooke, 
J.  W.  Dolson,  W.  P.  Hendrix,  F.  A.  Kempe,  Jr.,  J.  R.  Williams. 

Your  committee   recommends   the   adoption   of   the   revisions   to   the  Manual  as  set 
forth  in  the  reports  on  Assignments  2,  3  and  7. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Design  of  Masonry  Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committees  1,  5,  6,  7,  15,  28,  29  and  30 

F.  A.  Kempe,  Jr.  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  W.  Briscoe,  H.  C.  Brown,  A.  W.  Carl- 
son, E.  J.  Daily,  J.  U.  Estes,  N.  O.  Geuder,  Sr.,  A.  N.  Laird,  R.  E.  Pearson,  F.  A. 
Russ,  Jr.,  E.  Scroggie,  B.  J.  Shadrake,  A.  Tedesko. 

Your  committee  recommends  that  Part  18,  Chapter  8,  of  the  Manual  be  renum- 
bered as  Part  19  and  recommends  for  adoption  and  publication  in  the  Manual  a  new 
Part   18 — Elastomeric  Bearing  Pads,  with  the  following  specifications: 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  DESIGN  AND  MATERIALS  OF  NEOPRENE 

BEARING  PADS 

1.  Design 

(a)  Unit  pressure  shall  not  exceed  800  psi  under  combined  dead  load,  live  load  and 
impact,  and  500  psi  under  dead  load  only. 

(b)  Relationship  between  the  loaded  face  and  side  areas  expressed  as  a  "Shape 
Factor"  shall  not  be  less  than  1.25. 

ab 
2t(a  +  b) 
where  5  =  Shape  factor 
a  =  Length 
b  =  Width 
/  =  Thickness 

(c)  The  total  expected  movement  at  the  bearing  shall  not  exceed  one-half  o!  the 
pad  thickness. 

2.  Material 

(a)  Pads  shall  be  made  of  neoprene  cast  in  molds  under  pressure  and  heat  in  a 
single  integral  layer.  To  restrain  deformation  in  thick  pads,  multiple  layers  bonded  to 
l>ut  separated  by  nonelastic  sheets  may  be  permitted. 

I.-  Composition  shall  meet  the  following  requirements,  Test  specimens  shall  be  in 
accordance  with    \ST\1    Method  D  15,  Part    B. 


226  Masonry 


Grade  (Durumeter) 

60  70 

Original  Physical  Properties: 

Hardness,  ASTM  D  676 60  ±  S  70  ±  5 

Tensile  strength,  minimum  psi,  ASTM  D  412 2500  2500 

Elongation  at  break,  minimum  percent    350  300 

Accelerated  Tests  to  Determine  Long-Term  Aging  Characteris- 
tics. Oven  Aged,  70  hr/212  deg  F,  ASTM  D  573: 

Hardness,  points  change,  maximum   0  to  +15  0  to  +15 

Tensile  strength,  percent  change,  maximum ±15  ±15 

Elongation  at  break,  percent  change,  maximum    —  40  —  40 

Ozone,   1   ppm   in  Air  by  Volume,  20  percent  strain,   100  +  2 

deg  F,  ASTM  D  1149*: 

100   hr    No  cracks         No  cracks 

Compression  Set,  22  hr/158  deg  F,  ASTM  D  395,  Method  B: 

Percent  maximum    25  25 

Low  Temperature  Stiffness,  ASTM  D  797: 

At  — 40  deg  F,  Young's  Modulus,  maximum  psi    10,000  10.000 

Tear  Test,  ASTM  D  624,  Die  "C": 

Lb/lin  in,  minimum   250  225 

•Samples   to  be  solvent  wiped  before  test  to  remove  any  traces  of  surface  impurities. 

(c)   The  variation  in  thickness  measured  along  either  major  axis   (taper)   shall  not 
exceed  5  percent. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

Foundations  and  Earth  Pressures 

Collaborating  with  Committees  1,  6,  7,  15  and  30 

G.  W.  Cooke  (chairman,  subcommittee),  B.  M.  Dornblatt,  J.  A.  Erskine,  T.  R.  Kealey, 
E.  F.  Manley,  R.  F.  Noll,  R.  B.  Peck,  Milton  Pikarsky,  W.  H.  Robertson,  Neil 
Van  Eenam. 

Your  committee  submits  for  adoption  the  following  recommendations  with  respect 
to  Chapter  8  of  the  Manual: 

Delete  the  Specifications  for  Pile  Foundations,  pages  8-4-1  to  8-4-12,  inch,  sub- 
stituting therefor  the   following  rewritten  version: 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  PILE  FOUNDATIONS 

A.  GENERAL 

1.  Scope 

These  specifications  cover  the  investigation,  design  and  construction  of  pile  founda- 
tions. The  design  of  trestle  piles  shall  conform  to  the  AREA  Specifications  For  Design 
and  Construction  of  Reinforced  Concrete  Trestles  For  Railway  Loading,  Part  9,  this 
chapter. 

2.  Purpose  and  Necessity 

Pile  foundations  are  used  primarily  to  transmit  loads  through  soil  formations  hav- 
ing poor  supporting  properties  into  or  onto  formations  that  are  capable  of  supporting 


Masonry 227 

the  loads,  or  where  the  possibility  of  scour  or  other  disturbance  of  the  soil  may  cause 
a  change  in  the  underlying  foundation  condition. 

Depending  on  subsoil  conditions  the  pile  loads  may  be  transmitted  to  the  supporting 
soil  either  through  end  bearing,  or  friction,  or  a  combination  of  end  bearing  and  friction. 
Piles  may  also  be  used  to  compact  loose  beds  of  cohesionless  material. 

B.  DESIGN 

1.  Loads 

Pile  foundations  shall  be  designed  for  that  combination  of  the  following  forces  which 
produces  maximum  load  and  in  accordance  with   Sec.  C. 

Primary 

(a)  Dead 

(b)  Live 

(c)  Centrifugal  force 

(d)  Earth  pressure 

(e)  Buoyancy 

Secondary 

(f)  Wind  and  other  lateral  forces 

(g)  Longitudinal  forces 

2.  Increased  Load  on  Piles 

When  pile  foundations  are  designed  for  both  primary  and  secondary  forces,  as  de- 
fined above,  the  allowable  load  on  the  piles  may  be  increased  by  25  percent,  but  the 
number  of  piles  shall  not  be  less  than  is  required  for  primary  forces  alone.  With  a  group 
of  friction  piles,  the  load  on  the  piles  from  primary  forces  shall  not  be  increased  by 
secondary  loads  beyond  the  shear  value  of  the  soil  as  determined  under  Sec.  C,  with  a 
reasonable   factor  of   safety. 

3.  Eccentricity  of  Loads 

The  maximum  pile  load  under  eccentric  loading  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  load 
as  determined  under  Sec.  C.  The  piles  shall  be  spaced  so  that  the  eccentric  load  on  the 
foundation  will   be  distributed  as   equally  as  possible  to  the  piles  in   the  group. 

4.  Uplift  on  Piles 

In  special  cases  when  piles  are  subjected  to  continuous  uplift,  or  to  uplift  from 
horizontal  loads  other  than  earth  and  hydrostatic  pressures,  and  sufficient  bond  and 
anchorage  can  be  provided  between  the  pile  and  the  superimposed  structure,  the  uplift 
may  be  considered  in  the  design  of  the  pile  foundation.  The  uplift  force  considered  in 
the  design  shall  not  exceed  the  value  of  friction  between  earth  and  pile  or  the  shear 
value  of  the  soil,  with  an  ample  safety  factor.  The  ultimate  uplift  value  may  besl  be 
determined  by  jacking  test  piles  of  identical  type  and  dimension  to  be  used  in  the  design, 
and  measuring  the  pull  required  per  square  foot  of  embedded  area  to  raise  the  pile 

5.  Spacing  of  Piles 

Piles  shall  be  spaced  to  equalize  their  load  as  far  as  possible  consistent  with  eco- 
nomical design  of  the  footings.  The  spacing  of  piles  shall  depend  upon  the  type  of  pile; 
that  is,  whether  friction,  end  bearing  or  compaction  piles;  upon  their  structural  and 
crushing  strength;  and  upon  the  type   of  material  sustaining  the  pile.    The  spacing  ol 


228 Masonry 

compaction  piles  can  be  determined  only  from  test,  as  provided  in  Sec.  C,  Generally, 
piles  should  not  be  spaced  less  than  two  and  one-half  diameters  (or  sides  of  a  square 
pile),  and  in  friction  bearing  materials  piles  should  be  spaced  three  to  four-and-one- 
half  diameters  of  the  pile,  depending  upon  the  allowable  load  determined  in  accordance 
with  Sec.  C.  In  small  groups  the  piles  may  be  battered  to  enlarge  the  area  sustaining 
the  group,  thereby  increasing  the  load-carrying  capacity  of  the  group  without  increas- 
ing the  size  of  the  foundation  unreasonably.  End-bearing  piles  may  be  spaced  in 
accordance  with  the  capacity  of  the  pile  and  the  end-bearing  stratum  to  carry  the  design 
load.  Piles  should  be  spaced  far  enough  apart,  or  other  suitable  means  used,  to  prevent 
excessive   heaving  or   uplifting   of  adjacent   piles. 

6.   Batter  Piles 

Piles  may  be  battered  to  help  resist  longitudinal  and  lateral  forces  inadequately 
resisted  by  the  footing  against  the  soil.  Where  longitudinal  or  lateral  loads  are  large, 
a  sufficient  number  of  piles  should  be  battered  to  take  these  loads.  Such  piles  shall  be 
designed  to  carry  horizontal  forces  combined  with  their  share  of  the  vertical  loads. 
Where  space  permits,  piles  may  be  added  to  the  group  with  a  batter  making  a  large 
angle  between  the  pile  and  the  vertical  to  resist  large  longitudinal  or  lateral  loads. 

C.  ALLOWABLE   LOAD  ON   PILES 

1.  Soil  Investigation 

Test  borings  or  soundings  shall  be  made  at  enough  locations  and  to  a  sufficient 
depth  below  the  tips  of  the  piles  to  determine  adequately  the  character  of  the  material 
through  which  the  piles  are  to  be  driven  and  of  the  materials  underlying  the  tips  of 
the  piles.  The  results  of  the  borings,  soundings  and  soil  tests,  taken  into  consideration 
with  the  function  of  the  piles  in  service,  will  determine  the  type,  spacing  and  length 
of  piles  that  should  be  used  and  whether  the  piles  will  be  end  bearing,  friction  bearing 
or  a  combination  of   both   types. 

Sufficient  borings  or  soundings  should  be  made  to  determine  the  thickness  of  any 
material  that  may  provide  end  bearing.  If  the  bearing  stratum  is  of  doubtful  thickness, 
the  exploration  should  be  extended  below  it  to  determine  the  capacity  of  the  underlying 
material  to  support  the  load  transmitted  to  it. 

The  borings  or  soundings  should  be  of  such  a  character  as  to  disclose  the  loose- 
ness or  denseness  of  cohesionless  soils  and  the  strength  and  compressibility  of  cohesive 
soils.  The  latter  shall  preferably  be  determined  on  the  basis  of  laboratory  tests. 

2.  Allowable  Load  on  End-Bearing  Piles 

A  pile  may  be  considered  end  bearing  when  it  passes  through  soil  having  no  ap- 
preciable frictional  resistance,  and  has  its  tip  resting  on  impenetrable  material  such  as 
rock  or  enters  other  material  that  offers  rapidly  increasing  resistance  to  further  pene- 
tration. The  capacity  of  end-bearing  piles  depends  on  the  structural  strength  of  the 
piles  and  the  bearing  capacity  of  the  material  underlying  the  piles.  The  structural 
strength  of  the  pile  depends  on  the  pile  type  and  shall  be  determined  in  accordance 
with  the  allowable  stresses  provided  by  AREA  specifications.  If  the  end-bearing  stratum 
is  of  sufficient  thickness  the  capacity  of  a  pile  in  a  group  is  equal  to  the  capacity  of  a 
single  pile.  When  end-bearing  piles  pass  through  unconsolidated  materials,  such  as  new 
embankment,  consideration  should  be  given  in  design  to  the  additional  load  that  may 
be  imposed    on   the   pile   as  the   material  consolidates  above   the  bearing  stratum.  The 


Masonry  229 

design  load  shall  preferably  be  determined  by  loading  test  piles  unless  the  end  bearing 
stratum  consists  of  a  sufficient  thickness  of  sound  rock.  Where  end-bearing  capacity  is 
not  determined  by  test  piles,  the  allowable  load  at  the  tip  of  the  pile  shall  not  exceed 
the  bearing  capacity  of  the  supporting  material,  with  a  reasonable  factor  of  safety. 

3.  Allowable  Load  on  Friction  Piles 

A  friction  pile  derives  its  support  principally  from  the  surrounding  soil  through 
the  development  of  shearing  or  frictional  resistance.  The  capacity  of  friction  piles  de- 
pends upon  the  ability  of  the  soil  to  carry  the  load  distributed  by  the  piles  within  the 
limits  of  settlement  that  can  be  tolerated  by  the  structure. 

The  design  load  shall  preferably  be  determined  by  loading  test  piles  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  Sec.  D,  Art.  8.  Where  groups  of  piles  are  driven  into  plastic 
materials,  consideration  should  be  given  not  only  to  the  allowable  load  per  pile,  but 
also  to  the  total  load  that  can  be  safely  assigned  to  the  group.  The  design  load  shall 
be  determined  by  loading  a  group  of  piles  or  by  making  an  allowance  for  the  differ- 
ence between  the  capacity  of  a  single  pile  and  a  group  of  piles.  A  single  row  of  piles 
shall  not  be  considered  as  a  group  provided  the  piles  are  spaced  not  less  than  two-and- 
one-half  times  their  nominal  butt  diameter. 

In  many  cases  a  study  of  the  borings  will  determine  the  ability  of  the  soil  to  carry 
the  distributed  loads.  In  doubtful  cases,  involving  cohesive  soils,  the  load-settlement 
relationship  should  be  investigated  by  recognized  soil-mechanics  methods  and  procedures. 

4.  Combination   End-   and   Friction-Bearing   Piles 

Where  the  pile  penetrates  material  having  substantial  friction  value  and  has  its 
point  driven  on  or  into  end-bearing  stratum,  the  pile  may  be  designed  for  a  combina- 
tion of  friction  and  end  bearing.  The  allowable  load  per  pile  may  be  estimated  on  the 
basis  of  the  soil  exploration.  If  the  information  is  inadequate,  it  may  be  supplemented 
by  a  load  test  of  a  group  of  piles  having  their  points  several  feet  above  the  end-bearing 
stratum  and  a  second  group  driven  to  bearing  in  the  stratum.  The  soil  exploration  shall 
also  include  an  investigation  of  the  material  underlying  an  end-bearing  stratum  that  is 
limited  in  depth.  For  the  purpose  of  structural  analysis  of  a  pile,  the  dead  and  per- 
manent load  may  be  considered  as  carried  by  end  bearing  if  the  pile  reaches  a  firm 
Stratum,  and  either  all.  or  that  part  of  live  load  up  to  the  working  value  of  the  -kin 
friction  tor  the  soil  and  pile,  may  be  considered  to  be  carried  by  friction  bearing. 

5.  Compaction  Piles 

Piles  driven  into  In,  -,  granular  material  for  the  purpose  of  compacting  the  soil  are 
considered  to  in-  compaction  piles.  The  pile-  should  be  driven  to  a  specified  resistance 

and    will    generally    have    different    lengths. 

6.  Lateral   Support 

\  pile  -hall  be  considered  fully  supported  laterally  except  that  portion  which  i.-,  or 
may  be  as  a  result  Of  scour,  in  air  or  water,  or  which  may  !><•  in  muck,  peat,  thin  mud 
or  fluid  material.  Where  a  portion  of  the  pile  is  not  supported  lateralis  as  a  short 
Column,    that    portion   shall    be   considered   as  a   long  column   and   proper   allowance   made 

in  the  design.  Wherr  conditions  warrant,  special  investigations  should  be  carried  out  to 
determine  the  extent  to  which  tin-  vertical  capadt)  of  the  pile  i-  reduced  by  the  presence 
"i   -"it   materials. 


-MO Masonry 

7.  Pile  Formula 

When  the  cost  of  load  tests  or  laboratory  analyses  is  excessive  in  comparison  with  the 
cost  of  the  project,  the  pile  capacity  in  granular  material  may  be  determined  by  the 
Engineering  News  formula,  but  in  any  event  the  value  of  the  material  supporting  the 
pile,  as  disclosed  by  the  test  borings,  shall  be  adequate.  Under  no  circumstances  shall 
a  pile  formula  be  used  to  determine  the  capacity  of  a  pile  driven  to  rock,  or  of  a  friction 
pile  in  silt  or  clay. 

D.  LOADING  TESTS 

1.  Damaged  Piles 

Shattered,  broomed  or  otherwise  damaged  pile  heads  shall  be  cut  back  to  sound 
material  before  the  test  is  made. 

2.  Curing  Cast-in-Place  Piles 

Unless  otherwise  provided,  shells  or  tubes  which  in  service  are  to  be  filled  with 
concrete,  shall  be  filled  with  concrete  with  time  for  adequate  curing  before  the  test  is 
made.  High-early-strength  cement  may  be  used. 

3.  Application  of  Loads 

Following  completion  of  driving  by  not  less  than  48  hr  for  tests  of  Class  A,  nor 
72  hr  for  those  of  Class  B,  the  test  load  shall  be  applied  concentrically  as  near  the 
ground  as  practicable,  by  direct  weight  or  by  hydraulic  jack  pressure  that  is  auto- 
matically maintained.  If  anchor  piles  or  devices  are  used  to  provide  reaction,  the  axis 
of  the  nearest  such  pile  or  device  shall  be  located  at  least  S  ft  from  the  loaded  pile. 
The  initial  and  subsequent  increments  shall  be  applied  gradually.  The  test  load  and  its 
application  shall  be  so  arranged  that  readings  can  be  taken  by  the  engineers  directly  on 
the  pile  and  a  record  made  of  the  load  and  settlement  simultaneously  at  any  time. 

4.  Amount  of  Load 

The  piles  to  be  tested  shall  be  loaded  to  at  least  twice  the  proposed  working  load. 
The  initial  load  shall  not  exceed  two-thirds  and  the  increments  shall  not  exceed  one-third 
of  the  proposed  or  anticipated   working  load. 

5.  Records 

Records  shall  be  made  of  the  load,  time  and  settlement  as  accurately  as  practicable 
immediately  before  and  following  a  change  of  load.  While  noticeable  settlement  is  taking 
place,  readings  shall  be  at  10-min  intervals  or  less;  otherwise  at  hourly  intervals. 

6.  Loading  Tests 

Loading  tests  may  be  of  two  classes: 

Class  A — Construction  test  to  gage  compliance  with  plans  and  specifications. 
Class  B — Predesign  test,  to  aid  the  designer. 

Since  more  time  is  usually  available  under  Class  B,  and  there  is  larger  opportunity 
to  make  use  of  revealed  data,  such  tests  can  justify  a  more  extended  procedure  than 
those  under    Class  A. 


Masonry 231 

7.  Class  A  Test 

In  making  Class  A  tests,  at  least  4  hr  shall  elapse  between  the  applications  of  suc- 
cessive increments.  When  the  total  load  equals  twice  the  proposed  working  load,  it  shall 
be  left  in  place  at  least  48  hr,  the  last  24  of  which  shall  be  free  from  settlement.  If 
after  deducting  rebound  following  the  total  release  of  this  load,  the  net  settlement  at 
the  top  of  the  pile  does  not  exceed  %  in,  the  pile  shall  be  considered  adequate  to  support 
safely  the  proposed  working  load. 

8.  Class    B   Test   (Predesign) 

In  Class  B  tests,  the  loading  shall,  if  feasible,  be  carried  to  failure  of  the  soil  or 
pile.  After  reaching  the  anticipated  working  load,  at  least  12  hr  shall  elapse  between 
the  applications  of  successive  increments. 

(a)  For  at  least  three  values  of  test  load  (say  100,  166%  and  200  percent  of 
the  anticipated  working  load),  the  load  shall  be  released  and  remain  off  at 
least  6  hr.  The  previous  load  shall  then  be  restored  and  maintained  until  the 
gross  settlement  equals  that  existing  at  the  time  of  the  previous  release, 
whereupon   the  succeeding  increments  shall  be  added. 

(b)  As  the  approach  of  failure  is  sensed,  the  load  shall  be  carefully  adjusted  in 
order  to  obtain  gradual  settlement,  if  possible,  until  failure  is  complete. 

(c)  Curves  shall  be  plotted,  relating  the  load,  settlement  and  time  for  the  com- 
plete period  of  the  test. 

(d)  The  load  value  where  the  load-settlement  curve  begins  to  show  an  accelerated 
deviation  from  its  previous  trend,  may  be  considered  the  "yield  point"  for 
the  given  soil  and  pile,  and  one-half  of  this  value  or  one-half  of  the  value 
at  which  the  net  settlement  is  estimated  as  %  in,  whichever  is  the  smaller, 
may  be  considered  a  safe  working  load  for  this  pile,  acting  singly. 

(e)  Where  Class  B  tests  are  intended  to  govern  the  design  of  pile  groups,  a  test 
shall  be  made  on  a  group  which  is  typical  of  the  contemplated  design,  if 
such  a  test  is  feasible.  In  the  absence  of  such  a  group  test,  the  capacity  of 
the  proposed  group  should  be  studied  in  the  light  of  the  shearing  value  and 
settlement  behavior  of  the  soil  as  revealed  by  the  test  of  single  piles. 

9.  Rebound 

In  determining  net  settlement  of  a  tested  pile,  deduction  shall  be  made  for  the 
allowable  elastic  recovery  of  the  pile  as  indicated  by  the  rebound  within  12  hr  following 
the   release  of  the  test  load. 


E.  TIMBER  PILES 
1.  Specifications 

Timber  piles  shall  conform  to  the  AREA  Specifications  for  Wood  Piles,  Chapter  7. 
Parts  1  and  3.  If  treatment  is  required,  it  shall  conform  to  AREA  Specifications  for 
Wood   Preservation.    Chapter    17. 

F.  STEEL  BEARING  PILES 
1.  Types 

This  type  ol   piling  shall  include  all  steel   H  section   piles  and  open-end  steel  pipe 

pile- 


232 Masonry 

2.  Material 

All  steel  used  for  the  piles  shall  conform  to  the  AREA  Specifications  for  Steel  Rail- 
way Bridges,  Chapter  15,  Part   1. 

3.  Size 

The  minimum  depth  of  a  steel  H  section  shall  lie  8  in.  The  minimum  thickness  i>! 
metal  in  the  flange  or  web  shall  be  •>£  in-  The  flange  width  shall  be  not  less  than  85 
percent  of  the  depth  of  the  section. 

The  minimum  outside  diameter  of  open-end  pipe  piles  shall  be  10?^  in.  The  mini- 
mum wall  thickness  shall  be  Y%  in. 

4.  Splicing 

Full-length  piles  shall  be  used  wherever  practicable,  but  if  splices  cannot  be  avoided, 
an  approved  method  of  splicing  shall  be  used  which  will  develop  the  full  strength  of  the 
pile.  Piles  shall  not  be  spliced  except  by  permission  of  the  engineer. 

5.  Capping 

Where  steel  bearing  caps  are  required  they  shall  be  suitably  fastened  to  the  top  of 
the  pile  so  as  to  avoid  displacement  and  to  provide  as  practically  as  possible  an  even 
bearing  on  the  pile,  with  at  least  50  percent  of  the  pile  top  in  contact  with  the  bearing 
cap.  The  bearing  cap  shall  be  of  such  size  that  the  pressure  on  the  footing  will  not 
exceed  the  allowable  bearing  pressure  of  the  concrete  used  in  the  footing. 

Steel  bearing  caps  will  not  be  required  where  piles  are  adequately  bonded  to  the 
concrete  by  means  of  a  mat  of  reinforcing  bars  running  through  holes  in  the  piles,  or 
encased  by  a  reinforcing  steel  cage  designed  to  resist  the  shearing  off  of  the  perimeter 
of  the  footing. 

6.  Protection  Against  Corrosion 

Piles  which  will  be  exposed  shall  be  protected  from  corrosion  by  concrete  encase- 
ment or  other  suitable  means.  Protection  at  ground  surfaces  or  normal  water  lines  shall 
be  provided  and  shall  extend  at  least  1  ft  above  the  ground  surface  or  normal  water 
line  and  3  ft  below  the  ground  surface  or  low-water  line.  Concrete  protection,  where 
provided,  shall  have  a  minimum  thickness  of  3  in. 

Structural  steel  piles  shall  not  be  used  through  active  corrosion-inducing  material 
or  where  electrolysis  may  occur  without  adequate  provision  for  the  protection  of 
such  piles. 

7.  Allowable  Stresses 

The  allowable  load  per  pile  shall  be  determined  as  specified  in  Sec.  C  and  D,  but 
the  unit  stresses  shall  not  exceed  12,000  psi  for  ASTM  A  7  steel.  In  computing  the 
effective  area  of  the  steel  where  corrosion  may  be  expected  and  protection  has  not  been 
provided,  the  outer  tV  in  of  thickness  at  surfaces  subject  to  corrosion  shall  be  deducted. 
Due  allowance  shall  be  made  for  any  bending  or  column  action. 

G.  PRECAST  CONCRETE  PILES 

1.  General 

The  workmanship,  material  and  proportioning  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
specified  in  the  AREA  Specifications  for  Concrete  and  Reinforced  Concrete,  Part  1,  this 
Chapter. 


Masonry 233 

2.  Design 

Piles  of  constant  cross  section  shall  have  a  least  diameter  or  lateral  dimension  of 
14  in  for  piles  up  to  35  ft  in  length  and  not  less  than  16  in  for  lengths  over  35  ft  and 
not  over  50  ft.  Piles  over  50  ft  in  length  shall  be  of  a  size  and  design  approved  by  the 
engineer.  Piles  may  be  pointed  or  not  as  directed  by  the  engineer. 

Piles  with  a  uniform  taper  shall  have  a  minimum  lateral  dimension  of  not  less  than 
8  in  at  the  tip  and  an  average  diameter  of  not  less  than  12  in  for  lengths  not  over 
40  ft.  Piles  over  40  ft  shall  have  a  minimum  taper  of  1  in.  in  8  ft  and  a  lateral 
dimension  at  the  tip  of  not  less  than   10  in. 

The  reinforcement  shall  consist  of  longitudinal  bars,  supported  by  lateral  reinforce- 
ment in  the  form  of  hoops  or  spirals.  The  longitudinal  reinforcement  shall  be  designed 
for  handling  stresses  and  shall  normally  consist  of  8  bars,  uniformly  spaced,  and  not 
smaller  than  Xo.  4  nor  larger  than  No.  11.  The  cross-sectional  area  of  the  longitudinal 
reinforcement  shall  be  not  less  than  1  percent  nor  more  than  4  percent  of  the  average 
cross-sectional  area  of  the  pile.  The  lateral  reinforcement  shall  consist  of  not  less  than 
Xo.  7  steel  wire,  spaced  not  more  than  8  in  center  to  center  throughout  the  length  of  the 
pile,  except  that  for  not  less  than  2  ft  at  each  end  the  spacing  shall  not  exceed  3  in 
center  to  center.  The  reinforcement  shall  be  placed  with  a  cover  of  not  less  than  \l/2  in 
and  greater  cover   as  conditions  require. 

3.  Manufacture 

(a)  Aggregates — The  maximum  size  of  the  coarse  aggregate  shall  be  not  more  than 
1  in  nor  more  than  three-fourths  of  the  minimum  clear  spacing  of  reinforcement  or 
the  minimum  distance  from  reinforcement  to  the  forms. 

(b)  Strength  of  Concrete — The  concrete  shall  have  a  minimum  compressive  strength 
of  3700  psi  at  28  days,  using  not  more  than  5^2  gal  of  water  per  bag  of  cement. 

(c)  Workability  and  Placement — The  concrete  shall  be  of  a  workable  consistency 
dependent  on  the  method  of  placement  to  insure  complete  embedment  of  reinforcement 
and  to  prevent  honeycombing.  Vibrating  equipment  shall  preferably  be  used,  and  it 
shall  be  of  a  type  approved  by  the  engineer. 

(d)  Curing — Moist  curing  shall  begin  as  soon  as  possible  after  completion  of  place- 
mint  of  the  concrete.  The  surface  of  the  concrete  shall  be  kept  continually  wet  during 
the  curing  period.  Curing  shall  be  continued  until  the  concrete  has  attained  a  strength 
of  2500  psi.  as  shown  by  test  cylinders  under  like  curing  or  as  specified  by  the  engineer. 
Substitutes  for  moist  curing  will  be  accepted  only  upon  specific  permission  of  the 
engineer. 

(e)  Marking — Each  pile  shall  be  Stamped  <>r  marked  with  the  date  of  its  manufac- 
ture.  Lifting  points  indicated  on   the  plans  shall  be  plainly  marked. 

(j)  Handling — Piles  may  be  handled  and  driven  only  when  the  concrete  has  at- 
tained ;i  tompressive  strength  of  3700  psi.  unless  special  provision  is  made  for  handling 
that  will  reduce  the  stresses  in  proportion  to  the  strength  of  the  concrete  as  shown  by 
test  cylinders  cured  under  external  conditions  like  those  pertaining  to  the  concrete  in  the 
piles.  Piles  shall  be  carefully  handled,  avoiding  dropping  or  severe  jarring  while  in  a 
horizontal   position 

4.  Cut-Off 

Precast   pile-  shall  be  driven  to  or  cul  off  within  2  in  of  the  elevation  shown  on 

the  plans,   hut    in   all  cases   the  CUt-off   shall   he  below  anv   indication   of  fracture.   It    piles 


234 Masonry 

are  cut  off  or  driven  below  the  required  elevation,  they  shall  be  built  up  to  the  cut-off 
line  in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  engineer. 

5.  Allowable  Stresses 

The  allowable  load  per  pile  shall  be  determined  as  specified  in  Sees.  C  and  D,  but 
the  unit  stresses  shall  not  exceed  the  allowable  stresses  specified  in  the  AREA  Specifica- 
tions for  Design  of  Plain  and  Reinforced  Concrete  Members,  Part  2,  this  Chapter. 

H.   CAST-IN-PLACE    CONCRETE  PILES 

1.  Types 

Cast-in-place  piles  shall  be  cast  in  previously  driven  metal  casings  or  shells  which 
shall  remain  permanently  in  place.  They  may  be  tapered  or  cylindrical,  or  a  combination 
of  tapered  and  cylindrical  shapes. 

2.  Tapered  Piles 

Tapered  piles  shall  be  not  less  than  8  in.  in  diameter  at  the  tip  and  shall  be  uni- 
formly tapered  at  the  rate  of  not  less  than  1  in.  in  8  ft. 

3.  Cylindrical  Piles 

Cylindrical  piles  shall  be  of  a  size  and  design  approved  by  the  engineer. 

4.  Minimum  Butt  Dimensions 

The  butt  diameter  for  tapered  and  cylindrical  piles  shall  be  not  less  than  1024  in  f°r 
end-bearing  piles,  nor  less  than  12  in  for  friction  piles  and  combination  end-  and  friction- 
bearing  piles,  as  denned  in  Sec.  C,  unless  otherwise  authorized  by  the  engineer. 

5.  Metal  Casings  and  Shells 

The  metal  casings  or  shells  shall  be  formed  of  basic  open-hearth  steel.  The  mini- 
mum tensile  yield  strength  of  the  steel  in  the  fabricated  element  shall  be  certified  as 
not  less  than  35,000  psi. 

Shells  driven  with  a  mandrel  shall  have  a  thickness  of  not  less  than  No.  18  Usmsg. 
Casings  driven  directly  shall  have  a  thickness  of  not  less  than  No.  7  Usmsg,  except  that 
where  fluted  casings  are  used  the  minimum  thickness  may  be  No.  9  Usmsg.  The  shells 
or  casings  shall  be  in  one  integral  piece  or  adequately  spliced,  and  shall  be  of  sufficient 
thickness  to  withstand  installational  pressures  without  harmful  distortion.  The  casings 
of  directly  driven  piles  shall  be  seamless  or  butt  seam  welded  tubes. 

All  piles  shall  be  equipped  with  approved  conical  steel  driving  points  or  flat  plates 
welded  to  the  casing.  The  end  closures  approved  for  cylindrical  piles  shall  not  project 
beyond  the  diameter  of  the  pile  casing  when  used  on  friction  piles. 

6.  Placing  Concrete 

Casings  or  shells  shall  be  inspected  and  approved  by  the  engineer  immediately  before 
any  concrete  is  placed.  Any  accumulated  water  or  foreign  matter  shall  be  removed  before 
the  concrete  is  placed.  Concrete  having  a  minimum  compressive  strength  of  at  least 
2500  psi  at  28  days  shall  be  used  to  fill  the  shell.  The  placing  of  the  concrete  shall  be 
carried  out  as  a  continuous  operation  from  the  tip  to  the  cut-off  elevation,  and  shall  be 
performed  in  such  a  manner  as  to  minimize  segregation. 

No  piling  shall  be  driven  within  15  ft  of  a  piling  that  has  been  filled  with  concrete 
for  less  than   12  hr.  The  driving  procedure  for  any  particular  project  shall  be  discussed 


Masonry 235 

with  the  engineer  in  charge  before  commencing  work;  the  engineer  shall  consider  the 
character  of  the  soil,  depth  of  pile  penetration  and  other  factors  in  determining  the  best 
driving  sequence  to  minimize  heaving  of  the  pile,  collapse  of  the  shell,  and  injury  to 
previously  placed  concrete. 

7.  Allowable  Stresses 

The  allowable  load  per  pile  shall  be  determined  as  specified  in  Sees.  C  and  D,  but 
the  unit  stresses  shall  not  exceed  the  following: 

Concrete:  0.25  of  the  ultimate  compressive  unit  strength  of  the  concrete  used. 
Steel:  0.30  of  the  tensile  yield  point  of  the  steel  in  the  fabricated  casing,  pro- 
vided that  the  casing  is  %  in  or  more  in  thickness.  Where  corrosion 
may  be  expected  &  in  shall  be  deducted  from  the  casing  thickness  in 
computing  the  effective  area  of  steel. 

Where  a  portion  of  the  pile  passes  through  soils  providing  inadequate  lateral  sup- 
port, as  described  in  Sec.  C,  Art.  6,  that  portion  of  the  pile  shall  be  designed  as  a 
column  in  accordance  with  Part  2,  Sec.  H,  of  this  Chapter. 

8.  Protection  Against  Corrosion 

(To  apply  if  the  steel  casing  is  used  in  computing  the  strength  of  the  pile) 
Piles  that  will  be  exposed  shall  be  protected  from  corrosion  by  means  of  concrete 
encasement  extending  at  least  1  ft  above  the  ground  surface  or  normal  water  line  and 
3  ft  below  the  ground  surface  or  low-water  line.  The  minimum  concrete  cover  shall  be 
3  in.  As  an  alternative  the  section  of  pile  subject  to  corrosion  may  be  reinforced  to 
compensate  for  the  expected  loss  of  casing  thickness. 

If  the  strength  of  the  steel  is  considered  in  computing  the  strength  of  the  pile,  the 
pile  shall  not  be  used  through  active  rust-inducing  material  or  where  electrolysis  may 
occur  without  adequate  provision  for  the  protection  of  such  pile. 

I.  DRIVING  PILES 

1.  Equipment 

Piles  shall  be  driven  with  the  heaviest  hammer  that,  in  the  judgment  of  the  engineer, 
can  l)e  used  to  secure  maximum  penetration  without  damage  to  the  pile.  The  energy 
rating  of  the  pile  hammer  to  be  used  shall  be  determined  by  the  engineer  taking  into 
account  the  weight  of  the  pile,  type  of  soil,  length  of  the  pile,  and  any  other  factors 
he  may  deem  important. 

The  boiler  or  compressor  used  to  supply  steam  or  air  for  the  operation  of  a  ham- 
mer -hall  have  a  capacity  sufficient  to  maintain  full  rated  pressure  at  least  equal  to  that 
recommended  by  the  manufacturer  of  the  hammer  being  used,  throughout  the  driving 

period    hi    any   pile. 

2.  Cushion  Cap 

All  piles  shall  preferably  be  protected  with  approved  cushioning  material  to  prevent 
damaue  to  the  pile  butt  during  driving. 

3.  Splicing 

Driving  shall  be  continued  until  the  plan  cut-off  is  reached  or  until  the  rate  of 
penetration  specified  is  obtained.  If  the  proper  resistance  to  driving  is  not  attained  at 
the  plan  mi  off.  the  driving  -hall  he  continued  and  the  additional  length  of  pile  required 


236 Masonry 

shall  be  supplied  by  splicing  in  such  a  way  as  to  develop  the  lull  strength  of  the  section 
of  the  pile.  The  splice  shall  be  made  a  sufficient  distance,  but  not  less  than  6  in,  above 
the  ground  or  water  surface  so  that  the  splice  can  be  observed  during  subsequent 
driving. 

4.  Jetting 

Piles  may  be  jetted,  when  permitted  by  the  engineer,  either  by  use  of  water  jets 
alone  or  in  combination  with  the  hammer.  The  volume  and  pressure  of  the  water  at  the 
jet  nozzles  shall  be  sufficient  to  freely  erode  the  material  adjacent  to  the  pile.  Before  the 
desired  penetration  is  reached  the  jets  shall  be  withdrawn  and  the  piles  driven  to 
required  penetration  or  resistance. 

5.  Preboring 

Where  piles  must  be  installed  through  strata  offering  high  resistance  to  driving, 
where  jetting  would  cause  damage,  to  prevent  excessive  heaving  of  cohesive  soils,  for 
driving  through  compressible  material  or  for  other  valid  reasons,  the  engineer  may  re- 
quire or  permit  holes  to  be  bored  with  a  power  auger  or  other  equipment  especially 
designed  for  the  purpose.  Dependent  on  the  reasons  for  preboring,  the  diameter  of  the 
hole  shall  be  as  directed  by  the  engineer  to  obtain  the  proper  pile  penetration  and  car- 
rying capacity.  The  pile  shall  be  inserted  into  the  hole  immediately  after  boring  and  be 
driven  to  required  penetration  or  resistance. 

6.  Improperly  Driven  and  Damaged  Piles 

Piles  shall  be  driven  within  3  in  of  the  plan  location.  Variations  of  more  than  %  in 
per  ft  from  the  vertical,  or  from  the  batter  line  when  batter  piles  are  required,  may  be 
subject  to  rejection  by  the  engineer.  Any  pile  so  out  of  line  or  plumb  as  to  impair  its 
usefulness  shall  be  pulled  and  redriven  or  an  additional  pile  driven,  as  required  by  the 
engineer.  Any  pile  so  injured  in  driving  or  handling  as  to  impair  its  structural  capacity 
as  a  pile  under  the  conditions  of  use  shall  be  replaced  by  a  new  pile,  or  the  injured 
part  shall  be  replaced  by  splicing  or  other  remedial  measures — all  as  directed  by  the 
engineer. 

7.  Redriving  of  Heaved  Piles 

Previously  driven  piles  shall  be  carefully  checked  during  the  driving  of  adjacent 
piles  and,  if  any  uplift  occurs,  they  shall  be  redriven  to  the  required  penetration  or 
resistance. 

8.  Interrupted  Driving 

When  driving  is  interrupted  or  the  rate  of  blows  retarded  for  any  reason,  a  careful 
record  shall  be  kept  of  the  extent  of  the  delay  or  retardation.  Any  decrease  in  the  pene- 
tration per  blow  immediately  following  such  instances,  shall  be  disregarded  in  estimating 
by  formula  the  bearing  capacity  of  the  pile. 


Masonry  237 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Deterioration   and    Repair   of   Masonry   Structures 

\\  I.  Brakensiek  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  R.  BIcwitt,  L.  B.  Boyd,  J.  M.  Gilmore, 
H.  W.  Hopkins,  R.  J.  Klueh,  P.  R.  Matthews,  J.  E.  Peterson,  J.  H.  Sawyer,  Jr., 
M.  Schifalacqua. 

Your  committee  has  started  revising  Part  13,  Sec.  B — Shotcrete  on  Masonry,  to 
include  the  use  of  epoxy  resin  compounds  as  bonding  agents.  As  soon  as  this  assignment 
is  completed  it  is  planned  to  commence  work  on  revising  Part  14 — Repairing  and 
Solidifying  Masonry  Structures,  to  include  the  use  of  epoxy  resins. 

Concurrently  your  committee  is  studying  the  various  uses  of  epoxy  resins  in  the 
repair  of  concrete.  In  this  connection  Committee  7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles,  has 
published  a  report  on  the  technology,  railroad  applications,  formulations,  and  general 
instructions  for  the  use  of  epoxy  resins  under  one  of  its  assignments.  The  report  appears 
in  VoL  64,  Bulletin  573. 


Report  on  Assignment  6 

Prestressed    Concrete   for   Railway   Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committee  6 

J.  R.  Williams  (chairman,  subcommittee),  L.  F.  Currier,  W.  J.  Eney,  R.  W.  Gilmore, 
H.  R.  Hutchens.  L.  P.  Nicholson,  E.  D.  Ripple,  S.  A.  Stutes,  G.  R.  Vanderpool, 
W.  R.  Wilson,  G.  A.  Wolf,  R.  J.  Wright. 

Your  committee  is  now  completing  the  design  and  detail  drawings  of  a  recom- 
mended prestressed  concrete  trestle.  In  addition  to  the  drawings,  specifications  for  the 
design  and  construction  of  prestressed  concrete  trestles  for  railway  loading  using  box- 
type  beams  are  currently  being  prepared.  These  specifications  together  with  the  drawings 
will  be  proposed  as  a  new  part  of  Chapter  8. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Quality    of    Concrete    and    Mortars 

Collaborating  with  Committee  6 

J  VY  Dolson  (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  W.  Bruns,  VV.  J.  Galloway,  S.  B.  Holt, 
A.  C.  Johnson,  R.  E.  Kleist,  L.  M.  Morris,  M.  S.  N'orris,  R.  I.  Rolling  R  \ 
Unerj 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  in  two  parts.  Pari  l  i-  a  bibliographj 

on  quality   ol   concrete,  submitted  as  information;  Part   2   is  a  revision  oi    WI"\I   refer- 
ences in  the  Manual,  submitted  for  adoption. 


238 Masonry 

Part   1 — Bibliography  of   Important  Articles  in  AREA 

Proceedings    (Vols.   40-63)    Relative   to 

Quality  of  Concrete 

Volume    Page 

40  416     Standard  Portland  Cement  Compared  with  Standard  High-Early-Strength 

Portland  Cement.  Discussion  page  766. 

41  363     Progress   in   the   Science   and   Art   of   Concrete  Manufacture:    Autoclave 

Test  of  Portland  Cement,  Its  Significance  and  Present  Status  of  Pro- 
posed Method  of  Test  and  Specification  Requirement. 

41  378    Progress   in    Cement  Manufacture   and  Testing.  Manufacture   and   Con- 

stitution, Relation  of  Chemical  Composition  to  Physical  Characteristics, 
Nature  of  Hydrated  Cement,   Classes  of  Cement,  Tests. 

42  305     Progress  in  Science  and  Art  of  Concrete  Manufacture:   Needed  Adjust- 

ments in  Field  Practice  to  Use  Present-Day  Cements  to  Best  Advantage. 
42         310    Progress   in    Cement    Manufacture   and   Testing.   "Revisions   in   Cement 
Specifications" 

42  335     Durability  of   Concrete:    Factors  Affecting  Durability  from   the  Stand- 

point of  Materials  and  Manufacture,  Principal  Defects  in  Concrete  which 
Lead  to  Disintegration,  Principal  Weathering  Actions  and  Other  Disin- 
tegrating Forces  Affecting  the  Durability  of  Concrete  Other  than  design 
loads  and  Abrasion,  Tests  for  Predicting  Durability. 

43  317    Progress  in  the  Science  and  Art  of  Concrete  Manufacture.  "Revision  in 

Cement  Specifications" 
46         438    Progress  in   the  Science  and  Art  of   Concrete  Manufacture.  Design    of 
Concrete  Mixes. 

48  454     Air-Entraining  Concrete:   Principles  of  Air  Entrainment,  Materials,  Air- 

Entraining  Portland  Cement,  Air-Entraining  Admixtures,  Natural  Ce- 
ments, Aggregates,  Various  Effects  of  Air-Entrainment  on  the  Properties 
of  Concrete,  Air-Entraining  Cements  or  Admixtures — Advantages  and 
Disadvantages,  Design  Problems,  Precautions. 

49  634     Concrete  Deterioration,  By  Dr.  Ruth  D.  Terzaghi. 

50  320    Proportioning  Concrete   Mixes  for  Field  Use,  Instructions  for  Selection 

of  Trial  Mix,  Fundamentals  of  Concrete  Making. 

51  372     The  Influence  of  Aggregate  Characteristics  on  the  Proportioning  of  Con- 

crete, Types  of  Aggregates,  Characteristics  of  Combined  Aggregate  Par- 
ticles, Effect  of  Aggregate  on  the  Design  of  Mixes. 
51         389     Guide  to  Water-Cement  Ratio  Method  of  Making  Concrete:  Basic  Prin- 
ciples,   Proportioning    Concrete,    Instructions    to    Field    Men;    Materials, 
Workmanship. 

51  899     Concrete  Performance,  By  G.  H.  Paris,  railroad  representative,  PCA. 

52  394     Ready-Mixed  Concrete:   History,  Advantages.  Methods  of  Manufacture, 

Quality  of  Concrete,  Measuring  Materials,  Allowance  for  Surface  Mois- 
ture, Mixing  and  Delivery,  Discharging  Truck  Mixers  and  Agitators, 
Cold  Weather  Concrete,  Inspection  and  Tests. 

53  1051     Durable    Concrete  Costs  Less,  by  G.  H.  Paris,  railroad   representative, 

PCA. 


Masonry 239 

Volume    Page 

55  486  Alkali — Aggregate  Reaction  in  Concrete:  History,  Identification  of  Re- 
active Aggregates,  Theories  on  Mechanism  of  Alkali — Aggregate  Reac- 
tion, Means  of  Avoiding  Deterioration  due  to  Alkali — Aggregate 
Reaction. 

55  1010  Alkali — Aggregate  Reaction  in  Concrete,  by  P.  D.  Miesenhelder,  research 
engineer  concrete,  Engineering  Division,  AAR. 

Bibliography  on  Admixtures  for  Concrete:  General,  Air-Entraining 
Agents,  Retarders,  Pozzolans,  Accelerators,  Acid  and  Alkali-Resisting 
Agents,  Waterproofers,  Workability  Agents. 

59  678     Lightweight    Aggregates    for    Concrete;    Classification,    Advantages    and 

Uses,  Disadvantages,  Types. 

59  683     The    Measurement    of    Air    Content    of    Plastic    Concrete:     Gravimetric 

Method,  Volumetric  Method,  Pressure  Method. 

60  494     Use  of  Fly  Ash  in  Concrete:   Pozzolanic  Action,  Use,  Producers   Claims 

and  Observations,  Precautions. 
63         690    Use   of  Lightweight  Concrete  in   Railroad  Work,   by  H.  R.  Hutchens, 
general  manager,  Concrete  Products  Division,  Carter-Waters  Corp. 


Part  2— Revision  of  ASTM   References 

Your   committee   offers  for   adoption   the   following  editorial  revisions  with   respect 
to  the  Manual: 

Pages   8-18-1   and  8-18-2 

ASTM   SPECIFICATIONS  AND  DESIGNATIONS 

Change  Part  18  to  Part  19. 

Make  the  following  revisions  and  additions  to  the  ASTM  specifications  and  desig- 
nations listed: 

A  6-61  T  to  A  6-62  T 
\  H-58T  to  A  15-62  T 
\  16-59  T  to  A  16-62  T 
A  82-61  T  to  A  82-62  T 
A  160-57  T  to  A  160-62  T 
A  408-58  T  to  A  408-62  T 
A  431-59  T  to  A  431-62  T 
\  432-59  T  to  A  432-62  T 

C  31-59  to  C  31-62  T,  add  "(Tentative)''  after  description  of  specification. 
C  76-61  T  to  C  76-62  T 
C  87-58  T  to  C  87-62  T 
('  144-52  T  to  C  144-62  T 
('  ISO  61  to  C  150-62 

C  192-59  to  C  192-62  T,  add  "(Tentative)"  after  description  of  specification. 
C  205-61  T  to  C  205-62  T 
l    60  to  C  231-62 

r  to  C  235-62  T 
i '   1 1"   58  T  to  C  340-62  T 


240 Masonry 

After  "Designation  ('  342-61  T"  add  the  following  new  items: 

C  360-55  T  Ball  Penetration  in  Fresh  Portland  Cemenl  Concrete  (Tentative) 
D   15-60  T  Sample  Preparation  for  Physical  Testing  of  Rubber  Products  (Tin 

tativ  e 

After  "Designation    I)  75  59"  add  the  following  new    items: 
D  395-61  Compression  Set  of  Vulcanized  Rubber 
D  412-62  T  Tension  Testing  of  Vulcanized  Rubber  (Tentative) 
D  573-53  Accelerated  Aging  of  Vulcanized  Rubber  by  the  Oven  Method 
D  624-54  Tear  Resistance  of  Vulcanized  Rubber 

D  676-59  T  Indentation  of  Rubber  by  Means  of  Durometer  (Tentative) 
D  797-58  Young's  Modulus  in   Flexure   of  Natural  and   Synthetic   Elastomers  at 

Normal  and  Subnormal  Temperatures 
D   1149-60  T  Accelerated  Ozone  Cracking  of  Vulcanized  Rubber   (Tentative) 


Report  on  Assignment  8 

Waterproofing    for    Railway    Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committees  6,  7  and   15 

R.  J.  Brueske   (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  L.  Becker,  G.  W.   Clarvoe,  J.  R.  Iwinski, 
M.  Pikarsky,  D.  B.  Roth,  D.  V.  Wigal,  J.  M.  Williams,  K.  B.  Woods. 

Your  committee  makes  the  following  progress  report. 

Last  year  the  subject  matter  shown  in  Part  3,  Chapter  29,  "Coatings  for  Damp- 
proofing"  was  withdrawn  from  the  Manual.  The  material  then  specified  was  no  longer 
available  commercially,  and  the  specification  did  not  cover  new  materials  that  may  now 
be  available  and  that  may  become  available  in  the  future. 

It  is  our  opinion  that  a  performance  test  for  dampproofing  coatings  should  be 
made  and  also  a  test  for  the  effect  of  bacteria  and  other  deleterious  substances  in  the 
soil  on  various  dampproofing  coatings.  One  of  the  results  that  we  expected  to  obtain 
from  the  tests  was  the  minimum  amount  of  water  a  dampproofing  coating  should  repel 
in  order  to  be  considered  effective. 

Due  to  the  reduced  budget  funds  being  allotted,  it  is  not  possible  to  allocate  funds 
for  this  work  in  1963.  Therefore,  since  there  will  undoubtedly  be  a  long  delay  before 
any  research  can  be  performed,  we  have  decided  to  revise  the  specification  removed 
from  the  Manual  last  year  to  permit  the  use  of  available  materials.  It  is  hoped  that 
this  can  be  completed  in  1963. 

This  committee  will  continue  its  work  on  waterproofing  qualities  of  epoxy  resins 
and  related  materials.  Committee  7  has  been  requested  to  continue  its  investigation  of 
the  waterproofing  qualities  of  epoxy  resins  during  the  coming  year.  In  this  connection 
Committee  7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles,  has  prepared  a  report  on  epoxy  resins  under 
its  Assignment  6,  which  appears  in  Vol.  64,  Bulletin  573. 


Report    of    Committee    3 — Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 


R.  B.  Radkey,  Chairman 
W.  E.  Fchr, 
Vice  Chairman 

C.  S.  Burt 
H.  F.  Kanute 
W.  W.  Barger 


L.    C.    G'OLLISTER 

W.  L.  Kahler 

P.  D.  Brentlinger 

M.    J.     HUBBARD 

G.  A.   Williams 

\Y.   F.  Akksey 
A    B.   Baker 
R.  S.   Belcher   (E) 
R.  G.  Brohaugh 
\Y.   Buehler    (E) 

C.  M.  Burpkk 

W.  J.  Burtox   (E) 
G.  B.   Campbkll* 
R.  W.  Cook 

E.  M.     CUMMINGS 

D.  L.  Davies 
C.  E.DeGeer 

R.  F.  Dreitzler 
H.   R.  Duncan 
K.  C.  Edscorn 
T.  H.  Friedlin  (E) 
A.  K.  Frost 

F.  J.  Fudge 

H.  M.  Harlow 


F.  F.  Hornic 

M.   S.   Hudson 
R.  P.  Hughis 
F.  S.  Hunter 
H.  E.  Hurst 
W.  R.  Jacobson 
H.  \V.  Jenson 

I..     \V.     KlSTI.KR 

W.   E.  Laird 
R.  W.  Orr 
T.  H.  Patrick 
C.  A.  Peebles 
R.  R.  Poux 
A.  P.  Richards 
H.  S.  Ross 
N.  A.  Salzano 
J.  T.  Slocomb 
O.  W.  Smith 
R.  B.  Smith 
E.  F.  Snyder 
L.  S.  Strohl 
H.  K.  Wyant 

R.    G.    ZlETLOW 

Committee 


i  K  )  Member  Emeritus. 

Died  February  10,  1962. 
Those    who>e    names   are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 3. 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subject^: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Manual  Chapters   3   and   17   were  revised  last   year  in   considerable  detail. 
At  this  time  no  further  revision  is  required. 

2.  Cross  and  switch  ties, 

a.  Extent     of    adherence     to     specifications.     Report     of     inspection    of    an 
Arkansas   treating  plant   presented  as  information    page  24.* 

b.  Study  on  possible  revision  (if  cross  design  and  or  spacing,  collaborating 

with  Committee  ;.  Progress  reporl   presented  as  information   page  244 

feasibility  and   economics   of   re-using  recovered   ties,  with   or  without 
additional   treatment,   collaborating  with   Committee   22. 

ress  reporl   presented  as  information    page  -'44 

H 1  preservath 

No  i  hanges  in  the  current  specifications  for  preservatives  have  been  found 
necessary  during  the  lasl  year.  A  new  type  of  Boliden  salts  (CZA)  known 
is  K        i-  being  studied.  This  salt   contains  a  copper  silt   thai   is  not  in 

241 


242 Ties   and    Wood    Preservation ^^__ 

the  Boliden  salts  (CZA)  or  in  the  copperized  Boliden  salts  (CuCZA).  This 
study  will  be  continued.  A  new  creosote-coal  tar  solution  specification  for 
use  in   marine  piles  is  being  studied. 

4.  Conditioning  and  preservative  treatment  of  forest  products. 

Monograph,  presented  as  information   page  246 

5.  Service  records. 

a.  Report  on  tie  renewals  and  cost  per  mile  of  maintained  track  as  furnished 
by  the  AAR,  Bureau  of  Railway  Economics,  from  annual  reports  of 
Class  I  Railways  to  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  was  published 
in  Bulletin  572,  June-July  1962,  page  831.  Members  are  urged  to  study 
the  approach  in  utilizing  this  information  set  forth  in  the  address  "Aver- 
age Tie  Life — An  Interpretation"  by  President  C.  J.  Code  as  published 
in  Bulletin  573,  September-October  1962,  p.  95. 

b.  Termite  control  investigation.  A  report  on  the  inspection  of  specimens 
after  52  months  of  exposure  was  published  in  Bulletin  573,  September- 
Ocotber  1962,  page  19.  In  1963  this  test  will  be  5  years  old  and  will  be 
reported  on  in  detail. 

c.  Report  presented  as  information  on  cross  tie  service  records  of  certain 
test-ties  installed  in  the  Missouri  Pacific  and  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroads  page  252 

6.  Methods  of  prolonging  service  life  of  ties. 

Progress  report,  presented  as  information    page  257 

7.  Substitutes  for  wood  ties. 

Progress  report,   presented  as  information    page  259 

8.  Making  charcoal  from  used  ties. 

Final  report,  presented  as  information    page  260 

The  Committek  on  Ties  and  Wood  Preservation, 

R.  B.  Radkey,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  575,  December  1962. 

MEMOIR 

George  JS.  Campbell 

George  Campbell,  retired  tie  and  timber  agent,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  died  at 
his  home  in  St.  Louis,  Mo.  on  February  10,  1962.  Committee  3  expresses  its  sorrow  at 
the  loss  of  its  honored  member  and  friend.  He  is  survived  by  his  widow,  the  former 
Sessie  Mae  Cowart,  who  makes  her  home  in  St.  Louis,  and  three  children:  George 
Campbell  of  Tiller  Tie  &  Lumber  Company,  Inc.,  Little  Rock,  Ark.;  W.  J.  Campbell 
with  Bache  &  Company,  Investments,  Tulsa,  Okla.;  and  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Campbell 
Williams  of  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

George,  as  he  was  always  known  by  his  friends,  was  born  in  Ironton,  Mo.,  on  May 
6,  1891.  Following  an  elementary  school  education,  he  went  to  work  for  the  Frisco  Rail- 
road;  thence  to  the  Southern  Pacific  on  a  branch  line  with  the  improbable  name  The 


Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 243 

Rabbit.  From  there  he  went  with  a  small  logging  railroad  owned  by  W.  T.  Carter  and 
Brothers  Lumber  Company  of  Camden,  Tex.;  then  back  to  the  Southern  Pacific.  Thence, 
a  short  hitch  with  National  Lumber  &  Creosoting  Company,  Houston,  Tex.,  and  then 
to  the  Gulf  Coast  Lines.  Mr.  Campbell  became  connected  with  the  Missouri  Pacific  in 
1926  as  tie  and  timber  agent  in  Houston.  In  1936  he  moved  to  Little  Rock  as  general 
inspector  for  the  Missouri  Pacific  and  in  1935  to  St.  Louis  as  tie  and  timber  agent  with 
the  same  railroad.  He  retired  in  1959. 

Mr.  Campbell  became  a  member  of  Committee  17 — Wood  Preservation  during  1932 
and  continued  membership  on  that  committee  through  1960.  He  was  chairman  of  this 
important  committee  during  the  years  1949  through  1951.  He  became  a  member  of 
Committee  3 — Ties  during  1947  and  was  an  active  member  of  this  committee  through 
1960.  He  became  a  member  of  Committee  3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation  when  these 
two  committees  were  consolidated  at  the  beginning  of  1961. 

In  addition  to  George's  capacity  for  work,  he  had  an  attractive  and  pleasing  per- 
sonality, plus  a  keen  sense  of  humor.  Truly,  it  can  be  said  that  he  lived  a  full  and 
useful  life,  devoted  to  his  family,  his  church,  and  his  work.  His  sound  knowledge,  judg- 
ment, counsel,  and  genial  ways  will  be  greatly  missed  during  the  years  ahead. 

Clarence  S.  Burt,  Chairman, 
Robert  B.  Radkey, 
H.  R.  Duncan, 

Committee   on   Memoir. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Cross  and   Switch   Ties 

H.  F.  Kanute  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  F.  Arksey,  P.  D.  Brentlinger,  R.  W.  Cook, 
E.  M.  Cummings.  A.  K.  Frost,  F.  J.  Fudge,  F.  F.  Hornig,  W.  R.  Jacobson,  H.  W. 
Jensen,  L.  W.  Kistler.  W.  E.  Laird.  H.  S.  Ross.  X.  A.  Salzano,  J.  T.  Slocomb, 
H.  K.  Wyant. 

a.  Extent  of  Adherence  to  Specifications 

The   following  report  is  submitted  as   information. 

iHning  the  summer  of  1962,  Committee  3  inspected  cross  ties  at  one  treating  plant, 
and  other  ties  stored  in  two  different  railroad  yards,  all  in  Arkansas.  The  ties  observed 
were  nearly  all  oak  and  gum,  with  only  a  few  pine  ties  in  one  railroad  yard.  The  ties 
ucic    produced    in    Arkansas.    Louisiana,    and    Missouri    and   all    were   "I    excellent    quality. 

Wither  railroad  did  any  incising  nor  wire  iron-  or  dowels  used  in  any  of  the  gum 
ties.  Each  railroad  used  it>  own  system  of  marking  ties.  One  railroad  purchased  oak  ties 
without  anti-splitting  devices  and  did  -elective  dowelling.  This  road  permitted  ties  to 
be  1  in  over  the  specified  length,  but  none  under.  The  other  railroad  purchased  oak  ties 
with  two  "('"  iron-  in  each  end  of  every  tie.  and  permitted  the  tie-  to  lie  2  in  over 
the  specified   length  and   1   in  shorter. 

Sizing  of   tie-   was   L'ood.   Ties   were   neatly    -tacked   and   each    tie   wa-   well    -paced    in 

the  stacks.  Good  housekeeping,  good  drainage  and  general  cleanliness  wen-  observed  in 
both  tic-  yards. 

The  committee  also  observed  the  construction  of  treated  highwaj   crossing  sections 

which   were  made   up  of  tie-   sized    and   bolted   together. 


244 Ties   and   Wood    Preservation 

b.  Study  of  Possible  Revision  of  Cross  Tie  Design  and/or  Spacing, 
Collaborating  with  Committee  5 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  report  based  on  data  obtained 
from  a  questionnaire  submitted  to  several  railroads  represented  by  Committee  3 
membership. 

Main  Track 

The  ties  being  used  by  the  reporting  roads  are  dimensioned  7  in  by  9  in  by  8  ft 
6  in  or  7  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  with  one  road  using  7-  in  by  8-in  by  9-ft  ties.  Spacing 
of  ties  varies  from  19^  in  to  21  in,  with  the  majority  using  19J^-in  spacing.  One  rail- 
road reported  that  it  uses  9-ft  to  10-ft  ties  in  areas  having  poor  subgrade  conditions. 
Several  reported  that  they  feel  they  could  go  to  21  to  2  2 -in  centers  without  increasing 
maintenance  costs  because  of  the  use  of  heavier  rail  and  less  concentration  of  load  by 
diesel  locomotives  than  steam  locomotives. 

Secondary  Main  Track 

The  ties  being  used  are  7  in  by  9  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  7  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  and 
6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  with  spacing  varying  from  19^  to  2 2 ]/2 -in  centers,  the 
majority  of  the  roads  using  a  spacing  of  20  to  21J^-in  centers. 

Branch  Lines 

The  ties  being  used  are  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  one  railroad  reporting  uses  6-in 
by  8-in  by  8-ft  0-in  ties.  The  spacing  varies  from  19^  to  24  in,  with  the  majority  using 
21  to   22^  in  center-to-center  spacing. 

Yard  Tracks 

The  ties  being  used  are  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in;  one  railroad  reported  using  6-in 
by  8-in  by  8-ft  0-in  ties;  another  is  using  6-in  by  6-in  by  8-ft  6-in  ties.  Spacing  varies 
from  20  to  25  in,  with  the  majority  using  24-  to  25-in  spacing.  Most  of  the  roads 
reporting  were  of  the  opinion  that  ties  in  yards  could  be  spaced  at  24-  to  25-in  centers 
without  increasing  maintenance  costs  because  of  the  less  concentration  of  load  by  diesel 
locomotives  than  by  the  steam  locomotive. 

One  railroad  has  a  test  section  of  24  ties,  9  in  by  12  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  spaced  at  30-in 
centers,  which  appears  to  be  satisfactory.  However,  the  test  section  has  been  in  service 
only  one  year. 

In  addition  to  the  test  sections  of  concrete  ties  previously  reported  on  in  Bulletin 
568,  December  1961,  pages  330  to  335,  another  railroad  installed  in  1962  one-half  mile 
of  concrete  ties  spaced  at  30-in  centers  with  one-half  mile  of  new  wood  ties,  7  in  by 
9  in  by  8  ft  6  in,  spaced  at  22^-in  centers,  adjacent  to  and  on  each  end  of  the  con- 
crete tie  section.  The  wood  ties  and  the  concrete  ties  arc  on  both  tangent  and  curved 
track.  The  rail  section  is   132  RE,  welded. 

c.  Feasibility  and  Economics  of  Reusing  Recovered  Ties,  With  or  Without 
Additional  Treatment,   Collaborating  with  Committee  22 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  report  based  on  information 
received  from  several   railroads  represented  by   Committee  3  membership. 

All  the  railroads  contacted  salvage  ties  from  abandoned  lines.  Very  few  railroads 
salvage  any  ties  from  cycled  timber  or  surfacing  operations.  Switch  ties  are  also  sal- 
vaged   from    abandoned   lines   and   are   sometimes   salvaged   from    main-track   renewals. 


Ties   and   Wood    Preservation  245 

Almost  never  arc  they  salvaged  in  connection   with  branch  line  or  siding  or  yard  track 
tie   renewal   operations. 

A  few  railroads  salvage  ties  with  5  years  or  more  expected  life,  hut  most  railroad- 
do  not  salvage  ties  with  less  than  10  years  expected  life,  as  so  judged  by  the  inspector, 
who  is  usually  a  tie  inspector,  roadmaster  or  track  supervisor.  Jn  a  few  instances  the 
inspection  is  left  up  to  the  section  foreman,  hut  this  is  the  exception  rather  than  tin 
rule.  The  amount  of  mechanical  wear  and  extent  of  decay  and  splits  are  the  prime 
Factors  in  determining  whether  a  tie  should  be  reused  or  culled. 

Of  the  17  railroads  reporting,  2  are  giving  the  salvaged  ties  additional  treatment. 
A  few  are  adzing  and  plugging  ties,  and  a  few  more  are  adding  anti-splitting  devices 
where  needed.  However,  the  majority  are  culling  ties  needing  anti-splitting  devices.  Ties 
not  salvaged  are  sold  where  possible,  given  away  or  burned.  Means  of  disposal  of  non- 
salvagable  ties  vary  widely  with  the  situation,  as  each  location  presents  a  different  prob- 
lem; thus  no  general  plan  can  be  worked  out.  One  railroad  has  contracted  removal  of 
all  ties  from  the  rismt-of-way  at  SO. 26  each  and  buys  back  from  the  contractor  after 
inspection  salvaged  ties  at  $0.85  to  $1.00  per  tie. 

In  salvage  of  ties,  one  reporting  railroad  culls  only  pine  ties,  the  others  salvage  any 
type  of  wood  and  base  salvage  value  on  the  expected  life  of  the  ties. 

The  majority  of  the  reporting  railroads  use  salvaged  ties  for  spot  replacements  in 
any  class  of  track  where  needed.  Salvaged  ties  are  usually  used  in  the  same  class  of 
track  as  they  were  salvaged  from.  All  railroads  reported  use  of  salvaged  ties  for  crib- 
bing. Salvaged  ties  in  good  condition  are  usually  replaced  with  normal  side  up.  However, 
several  roads  turn  salvaged  ties  if  they  are  plate  cut,  and  some  railroads  turn  all  sal- 
vaged ties,  thus  eliminating  the  necessity  to  plug  spike  holes. 

The  cost  to  gather,  bundle  and  pick  up  ties  for  salvage  ranges  from  $0.56  to  $1.12 
per  tie.  Salvagable  tics  from  abandoned  tracks  range  from  10  to  75  percent  of  the  total 
lies.  Most  railroads  report  no  salvage  of  ties  from  surfacing  and  retimbering  cycles  for 
any  class  of  track. 


246 Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Conditioning    and    Preservative    Treatment 
of  Forest   Products 

L.  C.  Collistcr  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  F.  Arkscy,  D.  L.  Davies,  R.  F.  Dreitzler. 
H.  R.  Duncan,  W.  E.  Fuhr,  M.  S.  Hudson,  F.  S.  Hunter,  H.  E.  Hurst,  R.  VV.  Orr, 
T.  H.  Patrick,  R.  R.  Poux,  R.  B.  Radkey,  R.  B.  Smith,  R.  G.  Zietlow. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  monograph  in  which  forced- 
air  drying  and  covered  air  seasoning  of  oak  cross  ties  are  evaluated. 

An  Evaluation  of   Forced-Air  Drying  and   Covered 
Air   Seasoning  of   Oak   Cross  Ties 

By  J.  B.  HUFFMAN  and  DON   M.  POST 

School  of  Forestry,  University  of  Florida 
Gainesville,  Fla. 

Following  a  preliminary  study  on  the  forced-air  drying  of  several  hundred  gum  and 
oak  cross  ties  in  1959,  the  School  of  Forestry,  University  of  Florida  entered  into  an 
agreement  with  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad  and  several  treating  companies1  to  ex- 
plore and  compare  the  seasonal  drying  of  oak  cross  ties  by  three  different  methods, 
namely,  forced-air  drying,  air  seasoning  under  covers  and  conventional  air  seasoning 
without  covers. 

The  purpose  of  the  study  was  to  determine  what  seasoning  improvements  would 
result  if  cross  ties  were  protected  by  covers  to  prevent  wetting  by  rainwater,  and  also, 
if  large  quantities  of  relatively  dry  atmospheric  air  were  induced  to  move  through 
covered  stacks  of  cross  ties  to  accelerate  drying.  The  study  was  designed  to  provide 
information  on  numerous  factors  that  affect  seasoning  times,  seasoning  defects,  preserva- 
tive treatment,  service  life,  design  of  equipment,  and  costs.  It  was  not  expected  that  the 
results  of  this  first  study  would  provide  answers  to  all  questions  raised. 

More  complete  descriptions  of  the  procedure  and  results  have  been  given  in  the 
reference  list  at  the  end  of  this  report.  A  brief  summary  of  the  work  is  presented  below. 

PROCEDURE 

A  total  of  15,493  red  and  white  oak  cross  ties  from  the  Piedmont  area  of  North 
Carolina  was  shipped  to  Gainesville,  Fla.,  for  processing,  seasoning  and  treating.  The 
ties  were  incised,  adzed  and  bored  prior  to  seasoning.  Six  shipments  at  two-month  inter- 
vals permitted  an  evaluation  of  seasonal  effects  on  drying.  From  each  shipment  three 
groups  of  approximately  500  ties  each  were  selected  for  seasoning  by  the  three  methods 
to  be  tested. 

Two  of  the  groups  were  piled  side  by  side  using  the  l-by-8  method  of  stacking; 
one  group  was  left  uncovered,  while  the  other  was  fitted  with  a  simple,  disposable  cover 
of  black  polyethylene  sheeting  fastened  to  the  top  layer  of  cross  ties  as  illustrated  in 
Fig.  1.  The  third  matching  group  was  piled  nearby  in  a  fan-drying  unit  as  illustrated 
in  Fig.  2. 


1  Atlantic    Creosoting    Company,    Eppinger    and    Russell    Company,    Koppers    Company   and   Southern 
Wood   Preserving   Company. 


Ties    and    Wood    Preservation 


247 


Fig.    1 — Covered   and  uncovered   test   groups   of   oak    cross   ties 
stacked  for  air  seasoning. 


Fig.  2 — A  test  group  of  oak  ties  stacked  for  forced-air  drying.  Canva 
baffle  has  not  yet  been  placed  on  the  side  of  the  stacks  to  control  air  flow. 
Numbers  denote  the  positioning  of  sample  ties. 


248 


Tics    and    Wood    Preservation 


Fig. 


3 — A   forced-air-drying  unit  in  operation;   the  unit  contains 
480   cross   ties. 


Fig.    4 — Three    test    groups    of    oak    cross   ties    being    fan    dried.    The    cost 
averaged  about  6  cents  per  tie  for  fan  units,  covers,  baffles  and  electricity. 


Ties   and    Wood   Preservation 


249 


Fig.  5 — A  covered  "indicator  package"  of  64  red  oak  cross  ities  being 
weighed.  Indicator  packages  representing  each  of  the  18  test  groups  were 
weighed  every  two  weeks  during  seasoning  to  determine  water  loss. 


The  forced-air  drying  unit  consisted  of  two  stacks  of  cross  ties  placed  in  line  with 
an  8-ft  space  between  them.  Rough-sawn  1-  by  4-in  stickers  separated  courses;  spacing 
between  adjacent  ties  was  approximately  3  in.  An  8-  by  8^-ft  portable  fan  house  con- 
taining a  42-in  fan  (]4-hp  motor)  was  placed  over  the  space  (plenum  chamber)  formed 
by  the  ends  of  the  two  stacks.  The  stacks  were  then  roofed  and  baffled  along  the  sides 
Fig.  3)  so  that  the  air  was  drawn  across  the  ties  into  the  plenum  chamber  and  out 
through  the  fan  at  a  rate  of  350  ft  per  min.  A  humidity  controller  was  employed  to 
operate  the  fans  only  during  periods  below  80  percent  relative  humidity.  Fan  operation 
averaged  approximately  9  hr  per  day.  Fig.  4  shows  three  groups  or  charges  of  cross  ties 
being  dried  in  the  forced-air-drying  unit. 

As  indicated  previously,  both  red  and  white  oak  ties  were  included  in  all  shipments; 
however,  detailed  data  required  for  this  study  were  collected  on  red  oak  species  only. 
The  drying  of  each  group  of  ties  was  terminated  when  the  average  calculated  moisture 
content  of  64  red  oak  ties  seasoned  together  in  an  "indicator  package"  reached  52.S  per- 
cent  The  calculated  moisture  contents  were  based  on  the  initial  moisture  content  of  bor- 
ing taken  from  each  of  the  64  tie-  and  the  biweekly  weights  of  each  indicator  package 
(Fig.  S). 

On  reaching  the  desired  moisture  content  level,  each  group  of  cross  ties  was  treated 
in  a  full  cylinder  charge  made  up  of  approximately  500  ties.  Insofar  as  possible  the 
treating  schedule  for  all  IS  charge-  followed  the  same  pattern;  that  is,  40  psi  initial  air 
and   a    7J/-hr  pressure  period  at   190  psi. 


250 Ties   and   Wood   Preservation 

In  each  of  the  18  seasonal  groups,  32,  7-  by  9-in,  red  oak  sample  ties  were  ran- 
domly selected  and  distributed  to  determine  treatment  affects,  differences  in  variations 
within  and  between  the  various  groups.  A  complete  physical  record  was  compiled  for 
each  of  the  576  sample  ties  before  and  after  seasoning  and  preservative  treatment.  These 
ties  were  placed  in  a  main-line  track  near  Hawthorne,  Fla.,  in  April  1962,  to  permit  the 
collection  of  service-life  data  in  future  years. 

RESULTS 

Based  on  averages,  the  results  of  this  study  indicate  that  the  red  oak  cross  ties  sea- 
soned by  all  three  methods  started  with  approximately  the  same  moisure  content,  were 
dried  to  the  same  final  moisture  content  and  received  creosote  treatments  of  the  same 
quantity  and  quality.  Summary  drying  and  treating  data  are  presented  in  Table  1. 

Primary  differences  between  the  three  groups  tested  included  the  length  of  time 
required  for  seasoning,  the  number  of  ties  with  decay  and  the  number  of  ties  with  splits. 


Seasoning  Time 

Seasoning  the  red  oak  ties  to  a  common  moisture  level  required  an  average  of  121 
days  by  forced-air  drying,  170  days  by  covered  seasoning  and  240  days  by  uncovered  air 
seasoning.  The  average  difference  of  70  days  between  the  covered  and  uncovered  groups 
was  due  to  the  amount  of  rain  water  that  fell  on  the  uncovered  stacks.  Stacked  side  by 
side,  the  matched  groups  were  exposed  to  the  same  temperatures,  humidities  and  wind 
movements,  but  the  six  uncovered  groups  were  subjected  to  20  to  50  in  of  rain  during 
their  respective  seasoning  periods.  The  average  difference  of  49  days  in  the  drying  times 
of  the  covered  ties  and  the  forced-air-dried  ties  was  primarily  due  to  greater  air  move- 
ment across  the  latter,  since  both  groups  were  under  cover. 

A  wide  variation  in  the  length  of  seasoning  periods  for  all  three  methods  will  be 
noted  in  Table  1.  The  minimum  and  maximum  times  were  98  and  154  days  for  forced- 
air  drying,  126  and  224  for  covered  air  seasoning  and  210  and  280  for  conventional  air 
seasoning.  Generally,  drying  rates  decreased  during  the  cooler,  wetter  months  of  the 
year.  For  seasoning  procedures  that  depend  on  weather,  and  with  weather  conditions  so 
variable,  it  is  unwise  and  uneconomical  to  select  a  single  optimal  seasoning  period  for 
cross  ties. 

Moisture  contents  of  about  59  percent  may  seem  high  for  the  seasoned  sample  ties; 
however,  one  should  recall  that  the  percentage  is  not  the  moisture  content  of  cross  ties 
but  of  borings  taken  from  the  "wettest"  part  of  the  ties  (see  footnote  1,  Table  1).  An 
indicated  moisture  content  of  59  percent  for  borings  may  correspond  to  actual  moisture 
contents  of  42  percent2  for  ties  from  which  the  borings  are  taken.  Thus  the  moisture 
content  of  a  boring  is  only  an  indicator  of  the  actual  moisture  content  of  a  cross  tie; 
relatively  speaking,  an  easily  obtained  indicator.  Numerous  moisture  determinations  of 
borings  taken  from  red  oak  ties  seasoned  12  months  or  longer  have  shown  similar  mois- 
ture content  levels.  The  preservative  treatment  of  cross  ties  with  indicated  moisture  con- 
tents of  59  percent  resulted  in  retentions  and  penetrations  well  within  the  range  of 
commercial  acceptability. 

Decay 

After  seasoning,  the  576  sample  ties  which  had  been  distributed  throughout  the 
different  seasoning  stacks  were  observed  and  rated  for  decay.  The  number  of  sample 
ties  which  exhibited  decay  among  the  uncovered  air-seasoned  groups  averaged  18.7  ties, 


2  Based   on   the  density   of    1152   seasoned   red   oak   ties  and   a  specific  gravity   of   0.59. 


Ties    and    Wood    Preservation 


251 


Table  l — Selected  Drying  and  Treating  Data  Averages  tor  32  Sampli 
Ties  In  Each  Group 


\    I  inlii  r 

DaU 

Drying 
Began 

A  a  mlii  r 

of  Days 

l>  ied 

Muisttiri  Content^ 

CreosoU 

h'i  h  nl inn  -' 

(Lb/CuFl) 

/'.  i-ri  ni 
nl  Rings 
Treated 

X ti lulu  i 
oj  7 
with  !>■  cay 

Orei  n 

Dried 

>ned : 
1            

July     6 
Aug.  31 
Oct.    26 
Dec.  21 

Feb.    i:> 

April  12 

266 
238 
210 
280 

224 
22 1 

83 . 3 
83   i 
84.7 

88.(1 
88.3 
87.3 

57.9 

58.  1 
57  .  2 
58.8 
(ill.  1 
61.2 

6.92 

6.  19 

5 .  79 
6.22 

5 .  28 

5.05 

75.0 
78.3 
86.2 
86  9 
81.0 
71  .7 

16 

26 
6 

4 

5 .    -    

6              

23 

19 

22 

240 
224 

1S2 
182 
168 
126 
140 

85   9 

84.8 
81  .3 
85.0 
88.9 
86.1 
83.0 

58.9 

59 . 1 

59.5 

59.6 
62.3 

59 .  1 
59.9 

5  -  9 1 

6.34 
6.67 
5.83 
5.  19 

5.70 
1.96 

79.9 

84.7 
8(1.(1 

81'.  7 

78.6 
81.5 

79 . 3 

18.7 

( Covered  Air  Seasoned  - 

7                         

8                    

g 

July     6 
Aug.  31 
Oct.    26 
Dec.  21 
Feb.   15 
April  12 

8 

1 

10.. 

n          

12          

1 
3 

4 

170 

1  12 
112 
154 
140 
112 
98 

84.9 

85.(1 
82.4 
82.5 
87.2 
86.9 
84.0 

59.9 

59.3 
60.0 
56.5 
61.4 

58.2 
(10.0 

5.61 

6.15 
6.22 

(1.15 
5.61 

4 .  85 
5.(18 

82.2 

77.  1 
86.9 

82.5 
84 . 2 
85.9 
70.(1 

4.2 

Forced  Air  Dried : 

13 __ 

1  1 

LS                   -    

L6 

17 

18 

Julv      6 
Auk.  31 
Oc1     26 
Dec.  21 
Feb.   15 
April  12 

0 
0 

0 

0 
0 

0 

121 

84  .  8 

59 . 2 

5.78 

81.2 

0 

1  Based  on  percentage  of  oven-dry  weight  of  a  3}£-in  boring  removed  from  midpoint,  broad  face  of 
each  tie;  oven  set  at  212  I ■'. 

-Based  on  individual  weights  and  dimensions  of  each  tie  before  and  after  treatment. 


or  58.3  percent,  showed  light  to  heavy  decay.  The  comparable  figure  for  the  covered  ties 
was  4.2,  or  13.0  percent.  The  forced-air-dried  ties  exhibited  no  decay.  A  further  analysis 
nl"  the  occurrence  of  decay  reveals  the  following  percentages  of  ties  in  each  decay-rating 
group: 

Air  Covered 

Decay  Rating                                                                  Seasoned  Mr  Seasoned 

1.  None   (no  evidence  of  fungus  decay)    41.7%  87.0% 

2.  Light  (slight  but  less  than  65  sq  in)   36.5  11.5            i 

3.  Medium   (between  65  and  130  sq  in)    14.5          58.3%  1.5              13.0r; 

4.  Heavy  (over  130  sq  in  of  decay)    7.3       '  0           J 

100.0%  100.0% 


An  average  decay  rating  of  1.85  for  the  air-seasoned  ties  and  1.13  for  the  covered 
ties  indicate  that  for  both  methods  the  occurrence  of  decay  was  not  an  extremely  serious 
problem   considering   the   rating  system   employed. 


End  Splitting 

The  number  of  sample  ties  with  splits  was  limited;  therefore,  the  evaluation  of  split- 
tin?  was  based  on  all  of  the  red  and  white  oak  ties  in  the  different  seasoning  groups. 
Of  the  3120  air-seasoned  ties  without  covers,  11.3  percent  had  splits  over  J^-in  wide  and 
On  -me  or  both  ends;  of  the  3120  covered  tics,  7.1  percent  had  splits;  and  of  the  2880 


252 Ties    and    Wood    Preservation 

forced-air-dried  tics,  5.3  percent  were  splitters.  These  data  indicate  that  less  splitting 
will  occur  when  the  seasoning  of  oak  cross  ties  is  accelerated  by  employing  fans  and 
covers. 

Results  still  to  be  gleaned  from  this  study  involve  an  analysis  of  the  variation  of 
moisture  content  among  the  cross  ties  seasoned  by  various  methods  and  in  different  loca- 
tions within  stacks,  an  analysis  of  information  on  the  optimum  moisture  content  for 
well  seasoned  cross  ties,  recommendations  for  the  length  of  seasoning  periods  for  oak  at 
different  times  of  the  year,  and  the  possible  development  of  a  method  to  determine  when 
ties   are    ready    for   preservative   treatment. 

CONCLUSIONS 

Information  gained  during  this  study  shows  that  the  use  of  covers  and  fans  to 
protect  and  accelerate  the  seasoning  of  oak  cross  ties  results  in  a  reduction  of  seasoning 
time  and  seasoning  defects.  The  study  also  indicated  that  during  different  times  of  the 
year,  the  seasoning  periods  required  to  reach  specific  moisture  content  levels  will  vary 
with  climatic  conditions.  More  study  and  information  is  needed  to  improve,  compare 
and  fully  evaluate  these  methods  of  handling  cross  ties. 

REFERENCES 

Huffman,  J.  B.  and  D.  M.  Post.  1962.  Practical  Covers  for  Protecting  Cross  Ties  Dur- 
ing Air  Seasoning.  University  of  Florida,  School  of  Forestry,  Research  Report  No.  8. 
8  pp. 

Huffman.  J.  B.  and  D.  M.  Post.  1962.  The  Use  of  Covers  and  Fans  To  Improve  the 
Seasoning  of  Oak  Cross  Ties.  (Presented  RTA  Meeting,  October  25,  1962,  Minne- 
apolis, Minn.,  and  to  be  published  in   Cross  Tie  Bulletin). 

Huffman,  J.  B.  and  Don  M.  Post.  I960.  Forced-Air  Drying  of  Gum  and  Oak  Cross  Ties. 
Southern  Lumberman   200    (2500)  :33-37. 


Report  on  Assignment  5 

Service  Records 

W.  L.  Kahler  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  B.  Baker,  W.  Buehler,  C.  M.  Burpee,  C.  E. 
De  Geer,  W.  E.  Fuhr,  F.  J.  Fudge,  H.  M.  Harlow,  R.  P.  Hughes,  R.  B.  Radkey, 
A.  P.  Richards,  J.  T.  Slocomb. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  service  records  of  certain 
test  ties  installed  on  the  Missouri  Pacific  and  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroads. 

Missouri  Pacific  Railroad 

A  service  test  including  200  7-in  by  9-in  by  8-ft  cross  ties  was  inserted  in  August 
1940  by  the  Missouri  Pacific  in  the  east  main  track  starting  at  mile  post  282-20  in  the 
vicinity  of  Leeds,  between  Kansas  City,  Mo.,  and  Dodson,  Mo.  This  test  included  100 
each  oak  and  pine  cross  ties  treated  as  follows: 

Oak 

Rueping  process.  Initial  air  pressure,  30  lb 
Preservative:  50/50  creosote-coal  tar  solution 
Net  retention:  0.785  gal  per  cu  ft 


Ties   and    Wood    Preservation  253 


Pine 
Rueping  process.  Initial  air  pressure,  100  M> 
Preservative:  SO  50  creosote  coal  tar  solution 
Net  retention:  0.746  gal  per  cu  ft 

In  1947  four  of  the  red  oak  and  six  of  the  pine  ties  were  removed  because  of  a 
derailment. 

Three  inspections  have  been  made,  the  most  recent  on  December  8,  1961.  This  inspec- 
tion developed  that  two  of  the  pine  ties  were  pretty  badfj  plate  cut  and  probably  would 
be  removed  in  a  short  time.  The  balance  o!  the  pine  ties  were  in  good  condition,  indi- 
cating possibly  10  to  12  years  or  more  additional  service  life.  The  oak  ties  were  in  good 
condition,  showing  only  a  normal  amount  of  checking,  indicating  an  additional  12  to 
15  years  or  more  service  life. 

Baltimore   &   Ohio   Railroad 

In  the  years  1927  and  1928,  a  series  of  49  test  panels  of  treated  wood  ties  were 
inserted  under  double  trackage  between  Germantown  and  Barnesville,  Md.  Some  23,394 
ties  were  involved.  All  of  the  better  known  preservatives  of  that  time  (in  several  mix- 
tures and  proportions)  were  used  in  treating  three  species  groups  (in  various  retentions) 
to  determine  relative  longevity.  The  test  was  made  possible  because  all  ties  were  to  be 
renewed  in  a  track-straightening  project  between  Germantown  and  Barnesville  involving 
Mime  six  miles  of  double  track. 

Air-dried  main-line  ties,  separated  into  the  three  species  groups,  were  treated  at  the 
Green  Spring  Plant  with  five  different  preservatives  in  the  various  mixtures,  proportions 
and  retentions.  Charge  sheets  and  preservative  analyses,  describing  the  treatment  in 
detail,  were  carefully  prepared  and  made  a  part  of  the  test  permanent  records.  In  gen- 
eral, ties  were  seasoned  ten  months  to  a  year  and  then  treated  by  the  Lowry  process 
to  desired  retentions.  Treating  pressure  was  175  psi  and  temperature  did  not  exceed 
200  F.  Tics  were  neither  bored  nor  incised.  All  ties  were  S-ironed  upon  arrival  at 
the  plant. 

The  treated  ties,  properly  identified,  were  then  moved  to  Germantown  for  insertion 
The  physical  and  environmental  conditions  at  the  test  site  which  would  influence  average 
useful   tie   life  were  as  follows: 

1.  Grade — 1  percent  ascending  to  1  percent  descending. 

2.  Kail— 131  lb. 

3.  Curvature— Not   over  1    deg   19   min, 

4.  Tie   plates — 8  by    12   in,   three-   and    lour  holed 

5.  Traffic— 12,500,000  tons   per   year   westbound. 

12,800,000  tons  pel'  year  eastbound 

6.  Precipitation-   33  in  annually. 

7.  Temperature — Minimum,   winter,   0  deg   F.,   maximum,  summer.  OS  deg    F 

8.  Ballast — Fairly    clean    stone,    evenly    tamped    and    well    drained    except    in    areas 

of  50/50  and  70/30  creosote  coal  tar  panels. 
9    Soil     Red  clay  and  shale. 

10.  Latitude — 39  deg  12  min.  longitude  77  deg  20  min. 

11.  Elevation-  -580  it  above  sea  level. 

Tables    1.    2.    and    3    presented    herewith    evaluate    each    species    as    of    the    sear    10(,1. 

33  years  after  insertion. 


J  54 


Ties   and   Wood   Preservation 


QEffi!.AKTCW?3  TC  BAKIESVI1.LE,  i-'ARYLAND 
LEi.'GTH  OF  Tli  T  -  J3  Yeara 
IUjORT  FOR  1961  -  KiSi.iALS 
ITlSTrtl.LED  SUW&l  1923 

T\T3ITS  /■! 


nil 

Code 

S  CAK 

Treatment 

Tio3 

Placed 

In 
Test 

Removed 
to  Date 
Mo.     % 

Average 
Life 
To  Date 

Condition 

Indicator 

Aver  .~o 
Life 

4 

5*  Creo-Tar  50/50 

300 

68 

232    77 

23.8  jrrs 

Surfaco  Crumble 
Split,  Chock, 
Plate  Crush 

27  yra 

7 

7./  Crco-Tar  60/40 

300 

62 

238    79 

22.3 

Same 

27 

10 

7;/  iVatop-Gaa  Tar  1002 

300 

0 

3 CO  100 

20.0 

- 

- 

13 

7;  Crco-?et-7.'G  Tar 
30/^0/40 

300 

23 

272    91 

21.5 

Checks,  Split 
Rett  ins  "•','ithir. 

24 

16 
13 

6//  Creosote  1C02 

£,!■'  Creosote  1002 

3  CO 
300 

9 
0 

291    96 
300  100 

19.8 
21.2 

Crur.ble-Leached      22 
Sp.,Ck.,P.ot  V/ithin 

21 

£,;  Crco-Y.'.G.Tar  50/50 

300 

0 

3^0  ICO 

21.0 

- 

- 

24 
27 

7ff  Greo-VT.G.Tar  40/60 
8//  Creo-".V.G.?ar  30/70 

300 
300 

29 
49 

271    91 
251     83 

21.3 
22.7 

Cks.,Sp. Hearts         24 
Rotting  Out 
Cks.,Sp., Plate        25 
Crush, Sur . Crumble 
Rotting  '.Vithin 

50 

5#  Creo-Pct  .".'.G. 
30/50/20 

300 

0 

300  i:o 

20.5 

- 

- 

33 
33 

7,;  Crco-Pet.-V,'.G.Tar 
40/30/30 

41:/  Zinc  Chlorido- 
2.32J  Pet. 

300 

300 

52 

0 

243     32 

300  i;o 

22.9 

19.0 

Plate  Crash 
Rot  Within 
Cks.,Sp. 

25 

40 

7#  Croo-Tar  30/20 

3CO 

51 

249    33 

23.0 

Sp.,Cks.,V-Coring  25 
Dotor.  at  Rail 
Scat 

43 

7.5,?  Creo-Tar  70/30 

300 

127 

173     53 

25.9 

Sams 

30 

45 

7.v;  Creo-Pct.     50/50 

300 

39 

261    .58 

22.3 

Saco 

23 

43 

13  Creo-Pct.     40/60 

3C0 

39 

261     38 

22.3 

Sarao 

23 

;c  o"':  -  General  Charaet 

'.rir.tics: 

Deep  chocking  and  splitting. 
Crashed  roil  sc  :J  s 
Rotten  interior 

V— Coring 

Surface  crunble  ;'ron  pro:  crv.tivc  leaching 

Decay  working  back  '.vithin  center  of  ties  fran  spiko 

holes  and  coco  checks. 


Ties   and    Wood   Preservation 


255 


..".  :1T0  :;  TO  BV.V.  KVILLf,  JI.VRYLAND 

LEKOTll  of  r..,T  ~  33  l--ar» 
REPORT  ?0R  1901  »  REM  .'ALS 

it:  tmi,'.:;~-  rir?.-  a  r#3 


TASK     2 

)  OMC 
Code              Treit-.ent 

Ties 

Placed 

In 

Tost 

Rc.-aovecl 
To  D&to 

•  r.o.     5; 

Ave  rage 
Ufa 

Condition, 

Indie  ::tod 

Avora,;e 
Iifo 

1 

S^  Croo-Pot.  50/50 

300 

23 

277     %■ 

2C.3  yre 

Doop  Chocks, Plate  Crush 

25   JT3 

2 
5 

e 

9/7  Croo-Pot.  50/50 
9/7  Creo-Tar     50/50 

10//  Crco-Tar  60/40 

900 
900 

900 

226 
277 

116 

674    75 
623    69 

704    87 

24.9 

24.1 

21.3 

Splits, Checks, Plate 

Crush 

Surface  Cnrable 

Splits  &  Cliecka 

Plate  Crush 

Sane  -  Also  Knots 

Rotting  Cut 

27 

29 
25 

r. 

E;  Hater  Gas  Tor  100? 

9C0 

0 

900  100 

17.3 

All  Gone 

- 

14 

91  Creo-Pot-V.'.G.Tar 
3C/3C/40 

900 

0 

900  100 

18.9 

All  Gone 

- 

19 

8^  Creosote    100? 

9CO 

0 

900  100 

20  3 

All  Gone 

- 

20 

ft?  Crco-7/.G.Tar  50/50 

900 

0 

900  100 

20.8 

All  Gone 

- 

23 

9,?  Crco-VJ.G.Tar  40/60 

900 

0 

900  100 

20.0 

All  Gone 

- 

26 

10J  C.5O-::.C.Tar30/70 

900 

0 

900  100 

20.9 

All  Gone 

- 

29 

8#  Creo-Pot...'.G.Tar 
30/50/20 

900 

0 

900  100 

21.6 

AH  Gone 

- 

32 

100  Creo-Pet.v;.G.Tar 

900 

0 

900  100 

21.2 

All  Gone 

- 

35 

6.!'  Crcor.ote    ICO? 

900 

53 

847    94 

20.9 

Crumble,  L.ached, Split, 
Chocked, Plate  Crush 

23 

36 

.47;?  Zir.c  Chloride  - 
3.75/  Pot. 

600 

0 

600  100 

15.6 

All  Gone 

- 

37 

.313.,'   Zinc  C  l^rido 
4.70/,'  Pet. 

600 

0 

600  100 

16.1 

All  Gone 

- 

39 

10,?  Crco-Tar    CO/20 

900 

322 

573  64.2 

25.1 

Crunblo, Rotting  Knots 
Splits ,Chkg., Plate  Cut 

30 

42 

9/  Creo-Tar      70/30 

9CO 

241 

659  73.2 

23.5 

Dad  Splits,  V-Coring, 
Split, Checked, Plate  Cut 

23 

47 

9.7  Cr=c-?ct.     43/60 

900 

40 

860  95.5 

2>.l 

Sana 

23 

'  -  .  - 

■y.  -  General  Character! 

.tics: 

Docp  chec!:in£  al  n  ;  wood  rays 

Splitting,  surface  c:.-unble,  plato  cutting,  crushing 

Knots  rotting 

Decay  .-orldjig  back  rr.thin  ties  doop  within  from  chocks  and 

especially  froa  spik.t  holes. 


Hull.  B7B 


256 


Ties    and    Wood    Preservation 


CSRMAMTO  i!  TO  B  E  Z  W1U& ,  "UiYLAilD 
LM.'CTH-OF  T.KT  -  33  years 
RErORT  FOR  "1961  -    ?.:::je.;als 
I?.'ST'.U.1S  .'i.,;r-  :r  1?28 


TARI 

E  |f? 

H.i".D 

;-;rr-S 

Ties 
fl.-iced 

In 

Tnrti 

Reaovsd 

To  D  .to 

Average 

LiTe 
Tn   n-ta 

(VmrilMnn 

Indie  ;.tcd 

CVde 

Tre-lfriysft 

.".vcrrfea 
Ufa 

3 

S0  Croc-Tar    50/50 

300 

227 

73 

2'+ 

29.7  yrs 

Sp.,Ck.,-Good  ror  Age 

30  ;ts 

6 

BS  Crec-Tar    60/40 

300 

223 

77 

25 

29.6 

Hick.,  Ash,  Chorry, 
liiplo,-Look  Good,  Some 

35 
i 

9 

93  Water  Gas  Tar  100* 

300 

0 

300  103 

20.4 

Chock  and  Split 

- 

12 

10^  Crco-Pot.  W.G. 
30/30/40 

300 

126 

174 

53 

25.4 

Som  Sorfaco  Crunble 
Cka.  and  Splits 

31 

15 

7.6#  Creosoto  1C02 

300 

67 

233 

11 

22.1 

Good  for  Ago 
Splits  and  Chcclis 

27 

17 

8,i?  Creosote    100£ 

300 

77 

223 

74 

25.0 

Saao 

20 

22 

8fl  Croo.W.G.Tar  50/50 

294 

60 

234 

7? 

22.9 

Zz=a  -  liapla  and 
Hickory  Outstanding 

26.5 

25 

9.5i?  Croo-W.G.Tar  40/60  300 

74 

226 

75 

23.9 

Per:  Bocch  Decay  Within  27 

23 

10//  Crco-W.G.Tar  30/70 

300 

a 

259 

86 

22.6 

Sp.,C!:s.,  Good  Hickory  25 
Locust  is  Excellent 
Scao  Surface  Crucblo 

31 

9,7  Croc-Pet  .W.G. Tar 
30/50/20 

300 

HI 

169 

63 

26.5 

Good  for  ago  in  this 
orders  Ash,  Hickory, 
H.  Uapla,  Gua,  Beech 

29 

34 

9.5//  Crco-Pot. Y.'.G.Tar 
40/30/30 

300 

59 

241 

SO 

23.3 

S£E3 

26.5 

41 

9;/  Creo-Tar    60/20 

300 

153 

142 

47 

27.1 

Good  -  $p.t  Cks. 

32 

44 

7.5#  Crco-Tar  70/30 

300 

143 

152 

51 

26.6 

Scrio.  Ferr  should  be 
out 

31 

46 

8j?  Creo-Pet.     50/50 

300 

137 

163 

54 

26.5 

Sar.a  -  Eccch  Sobs  plato31 
cut,  Hickory  split,  under 
bridge  10Ctf  inl 

49 
Mij:a< 

9-7  Croo-Pct.    40/60 
i  Hardv.-oods  -  Gcncr.il  Chi 

300 

-.r-.ctcri 

10? 

sties 

191 

64 

25.3 

Sana  -  H.  l!aplo  and 
Hickory  Outstanding 

29 

Sor.o  Chocking  and  splitting.     Hard'.;ood3  aro  not  ao  much  plate  cut  as  oaks.     Splitting 
and  checiting  is  not  as  aovcre  ao  in  oak.;.     Rot  has  not  set  in  beneath  pi -.to  from  spiko 
holes  as  much  as  in  tho  oak3.     .•"pocics  lifted  in  ordor  of  condition  at  33  years 
(Best)  Hard  Maple,  ash,  hickory,  cherry,  gum,  birch,   (Poorest)  Beech. 


Ties   and    Wood   Preservation 257 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Methods   of   Prolonging   Service   Life  of   Ties 

P.  D.  Brentlinger  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  S.  Belcher,  R.  G.  Brohaugh,  C.  S.  Burt, 
L.  C.  Collister,  E.  M.  Cummings,  T.  H.  Friedlin,  A.  K.  Frost,  W.  E.  Fuhr,  F.  F. 
Hornig,  H.  E.  Hurst,  H.  W.  Jensen,  H.  F.  Kanute,  C.  A.  Peebles,  R.  B.  Radkey, 
H.  S.  Ross,  O.  W.  Smith,  E.  F.  Snyder,  G.  A.  Williams,  H.  K.  Wyant,  R.  G.  Zeitlow. 

The  following  is  a  progress  report,  submitted  as  information: 

Splitting  of  Cross  and  Switch  Ties 

The  studies  on  splitting  of  cross  and  switch  ties  are  being  conducted  in  collaboration 
with  the  A\R  Research  Department.  In  addition  to  test  sections  installed  by  various 
railroads,  on  which  reports  on  splitting  have  been  previously  submitted,  field  tests  under 
the  supervision  of  the  AAR  research  staff  have  been  installed  to  measure  the  effect  of 
various  anti-splitting  devices.  These  tests  are  too  recent  to  develop  factual  data,  and 
will  be  reported  on  in  the  future.  The  test  as  a  whole  comprises  500  ties  in  the  following 
categories:  (1)  control  ties,  (2)  ties  with  saw  kerf,  (3)  doweled  seasoned  ties,  (4) 
doweled  green  ties,  (5)   selectively  doweled  seasoned  ties. 

The  AAR  research  staff  recently  tested  the  holding  power  of  two  types  of  nails  in 
green  oak  ties: 

1.  Heat-Treated  Twisted  Nails  Made  from  a  %-In-Square  Rod — -The  method  of 
testing  was  the  same  as  described  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  61,  1960,  pages  1  to  12, 
incl.  Two  nails  were  driven  in  each  end  of  a  divided  tie,  22  in  long,  that  had  been  sawn 
at  midwidth  and  provided  with  special  bolts  so  the  two  parts  could  be  pulled  apart  in 
the  testing  machine,  as  was  done  in  the  earlier  tests  previously  reported.  The  holding 
power  of  one  twisted  nail  was  found  to  be  2000  lb. 

2.  Gang  Nails,  1962  Design — One  gang  nail  was  placed  in  each  end  of  a  divided  tie 
22  in.  in  length.  The  holding  power  of  one  gang  nail  was  found  to  be  9850  lb.  We  have 
two  additional  specimens  prepared  with  the  gang  nails  which  will  be  tested  after  the 
wood  is  seasoned  to  determine  what  change  if  any  the  seasoning  has  on  holding  strength. 
Failure  occurred  by  the  gang  nail  breaking  along  the  division  line  in  the  wood  tie  rather 
than  by  the  individual  "nails''  breaking  or  pulling  out  of  the  wood. 

Evaluate  and   Report  Data  on  Tie  Coatings 

Xo  new  treatment  of  ties  in  track  with  bituminous  coatings  was  reported  to  the 
committee  this  year.  The  AAR-L&X  test  installed  in  1950  near  London,  Ky.,  is  reported 
on  periodically.  The  ties  were  recoated  on  August  7,  1958.  During  1962  seven  of  the 
coated  and  two  of  the  uncoated  ties  in  the  test  were  removed  because  of  splitting. 

Extent  of  Use  of  Incising 

A  recent  poll  of  railroads  to  determine  the  extent,  and  purpose,  ol  incising  gave 
data  for  the  following  report: 

Of  the  17  roads  reporting,  8  railroads  follow  the  practice  of  basing  their  ties,  the 

main  purpose  of  the  incising  being  to  obtain  a  more  uniform  distribution  of  the  preser- 
vatve   in   the  tic.   Three  of  these    roads  reported   that    they  incise   their  ties  before  sea- 
soning to  take-  advantage  of  the  reduction  of  the  large  checks  in  the  ties  during  the 
oning  period,  especiall)    in   the  mixed   hardwoods. 


258 Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 

Three  of  the  railroads  which  reported  that  they  did  not  incise  their  ties  stated  that 
in  the  past  they  have  run  incising  tests  which  showed  results  favorable  to  incising.  One 
of  these  roads  stated  that  their  incising  test  before  seasoning  showed  20  percent  of  sea- 
soning splits  in  the  non-incised  ties  against  12  percent  seasoning  splits  in  the  incised 
material.  The  cost  of  the  incising  at  the  time  of  the  test  was  6  cents  per  tie,  and  this  road 
felt  that  this  cost  could  not  be  justified  by  the  results  obtained. 

The  second  road  reported  that  a  test  installation  of  incised  ties  was  made  in  1944. 
These  ties  are  at  the  present  in  track  and  appear  to  be  in  excellent  condition. 

The  third  road  reported  a  test  on  incising  of  mixed  hardwoods,  namely,  maple, 
beech  and  birch,  and  concluded  that  the  incising  did  not  materially  reduce  the  checking 
of  the  ties  other  than  distributing  the  checking  more  evenly  over  the  surface.  Apparently 
the  incising  has  increased  the  life  of  these  ties  by  deeper  and  better  distribution  of  the 
preservative. 

Of  the  eight  roads  reporting  use  of  the  practice  of  tie  incising,  the  general  conclusion 
on  incising  is  that  it  is  definitely  beneficial  in  obtaining  a  more  uniform  distribution  of 
preservative  in  the  tie. 

Laminated  Ties 

This  is  a  progress  report  submitted  as  information  covering  the  service  test  of 
laminated  wood  ties  in  main  track  in  the  Altoona  district  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad. 

Introduction 

Under  the  joint  sponsorship  of  the  National  Lumber  Manufacturers  Association  and 
the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  120  laminated  cross  ties  7  in  deep,  9  in  wide 
and  8%  ft  long  were  fabricated  in  the  Timber  Engineering  Company  research  laboratory. 
Fifty  of  the  laminated  ties  had  tupelo  gum  faces  with  Douglas  fir  inner  laminations, 
and  50  had  tupelo  gum  faces  with  southern  yellow  pine  inner  laminations.  For  these 
ties  the  gum  faces  were  1  in  thick  and  the  three  inner  laminations  were  1§4  in  thick. 
The  20  ties  made  entirely  of  red  oak  had  seven  laminations  of  1  in  thicknesses.  The 
laminations  were  glued  with  a  two-component,  rescorcinol-phenol  formaldehyde  water- 
proof resin  cured  at   150  F  for  from  6  to  10  hr. 

After  fabrication  the  ties  were  creosote  treated  and  placed  in  service  on  the  Penn- 
sylvania Railroad  east  of  Altoona,  Pa.  The  20  all-red-oak  ties  were  installed  in  1953  in 
track  No.  1,  Middle  Division,  No.  3  curve  at  Mile  Post  215.6,  and  the  remaining  100 
ties  were  placed  in  tangent,  track  No.  2,  at  Baree,  Pa.,  in  July  1954. 

Inspection  Report 

Results  of  an  inspection  of   the  ties  by  L.  W.  Neville,  assistant  engineer  of  the 
Pennsylvania,  in  May  1962,  are  given  below. 
Conditions  observed  on  curve  No.  3: 

Tie  No.  Condition 

1  Split  from  end  to  end 

2  Good  condition 

3  Split  from  end  to  end 

4  Split  from  end  to  center  of  tie 

5  Checked  from  one  end  to  center  of  tie 

6  Good  condition 

7  Good  condition 


Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 259 

8  Checked  from  one  end  to  center  of  tie 

9  Checked  from  one  end  to  center  of  tie 

10  Checked  from  one  end  to  center  of  tie 

1 1  Good  Condition 

12  Checked  from  one  end  to  center  of  tie 

13  Good  condition 

14  Good  condition 

15  Good  condition 

16  Good  condition 
1  7  Good  condition 

18  South  end  splitting  upper  west  corner  from  some  sort  of  blow 

19  Split  from  end  to  end 

20  Split  one  end  only 

Derailment  damage  in  the  center  of  these  ties  may  have  caused  some  of  the  condi- 
tions listed  above  to  develop  prematurely. 

At  Baree  the  laminated  ties  are  in  much  better  condition  than  the  comparative  ties. 
The  only  exception  to  the  excellent  condition  of  the  laminated  ties  was  in  tie  No.  36 
which  has  a  split  in  the  north  end  which  appeared  to  be  caused  by  some  type  of  heavy 
blow,  and  tie  No.  72,  which  has  a  split  in  the  north  end  located  under  a  joint. 

Acknowledgment 

The  Association  is  indebted  to  the  Pennsylvania  for  its  continued  interest  in  this 
investigation  and  for  furnishing  the  report  covering  the  inspection  of  the  ties. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Substitutes  for  Wood  Ties 

M.  J.  Hubbard  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  J.  Burton,  K.  C.  Edscorn,  W.  E.  Fuhr. 
F.  S.  Hunter,  W.  E.  Laird,  R.  W.  Orr,  C.  A.  Peebles,  R.  B.  Radkev,  O.  W.  Smith. 
L.  S.  Strohl. 

Your  committee  submitted,  as  information,  in  December  1961,  Vol.  63,  AREA  Bul- 
letin 568,  summary  of  a  report  prepared  by  the  Research  Department,  Association  of 
American  Railroads,  covering  investigation  of  prestressed  concrete  ties.  At  this  time,  the 
committee  has  no  additional  information  to  report  on  test  installations  of  prestressed 
concrete  ties. 

A  tentative  study  has  been  made  at  the  AAR  Research  Center  on  the  possibility  of 
using  Fiberglas  for  making  ties  as  a  wood  substitute.  The  Fiberglas  material  itself  costs 
approximately  $70  per  cu  ft.  Since  this  material  would  have  a  strength  approximating 
that  of  structural  grade  of  steel,  the  German  steel-trough-type  tie  design  was  used  as 
probably  being  the  most  efficient  from  the  standpoint  of  providing  requisite  flexure! 
strength  with  the  minimum  amount  of  metal.  On  this  basis,  the  estimated  cost  of  a 
Fiberglas  tie  would  be  approximately  $45  for  material  alone,  exclusive  of  labor  charge  foi 
fabrication,  which  eliminates  its  use  from  an  economical  standpoint. 

In  August  1961,  the  Illinois  Central  Railroad  installed  24  special  experimental  7-in 
bj  12-in  by  8  ft  6-in  ties  on  a  heavy-tonnage  freight  main.  Each  tic  consisted  of  two 
6-  by  7-in   timber--  doweled  together,  using  three  schemes  of  4,  5,  and  7  dowels  per  tie. 


260 Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 

and  then  treated.  These  ties  were  installed  on  30-in  centers  without  any  difficulty,  using 
conventional  tie  installation  equipment.  The  track  was  then  surfaced  using  an  on-track 
production  tamping  machine  with  no  difficulty  due  to  size  of  tie.  After  one  year  of 
service,  the  ties  are  in  excellent  condition,  showing  no  tie  plate  cutting.  There  has  been 
a  small  amount  of  tamping  required,  attributed  to  rail  condition  rather  than  the  special 
ties,  as  similar  tamping  was  required  on  adjoining  sections  of  standard  ties. 


Report  on  Assignment  8 

Making  Charcoal  From  Used  Ties 

G.  A.  Williams  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  B.  Baker,  R.  G.  Brohaugh,  L.  P.  Drew, 
W.  E.  Fuhr,  H.  M.  Harlow,  M.  J.  Hubbard,  W.  R.  Jacobson,  W.  L.  Kahler,  R.  B. 
Radkey,  L.  S.  Strohl 

Last  year  your  committee  presented  as  information  a  progress  report  on  our  studies 
to  determine  the  feasibility  of  making  charcoal  from  used  ties.  Further  studies  indicate 
such  a  lack  of  interest  on  the  part  of  the  producers  to  enter  this  field,  as  well  as  com- 
plications which  they  can  visualize  if  they  would  enter  it,  that  your  committee  now 
submits  this  as  a  final  report  and  recommends  that  the  subject  be  closed. 

There  are  253  plants  making  charcoal  in  the  United  States.  Considerably  more  than 
half  of  the  producers  are  farmers  or  small  concerns,  each  of  which  manufactures  less 
than  100  tons  a  year.  Six  producers  account  for  more  than  60  percent  of  the  entire 
production  of  charcoal,  which  is  produced  as  a  by-product  of  wood  distillation  for  the 
recovery  of  chemicals. 

While  it  was  impossible  for  your  committee  to  contact  all  producers,  an  adequate 
sampling  was  taken  of  producers  in  seven  states.  None  of  these  gave  us  any 
encouragement 

Most  of  the  small  producers  are  located  in  isolated  areas  primarily  in  the  East, 
Southeast,  and  Midwest,  where  abundant  supplies  of  good  timber  are  available  at  low 
cost,  approximately  $2  to  $4  per  ton. 

Most  of  the  kilns  of  these  producers,  as  well  as  the  larger  ones,  are  constructed  to 
handle  wood  of  cord-wood  size,  and  cutting  and  handling  of  ties  would  be  far  too  costly. 

Of  the  larger  producers  whose  primary  object  is  wood  distillation  for  the  recovery 
of  chemicals,  typical  reasons  for  their  lack  of  interest  are  indicated  in  the  following 
quotes  from  their  replies: 

"Creosote  is  objectionable,  but  even  more  so  would  be  the  chunks  of  iron  which 
inevitably  find  their  way  into  the  process.  In  our  opinion  the  cost  of  handling  and 
cutting  to  size  and  eliminating  foreign  materials  would  make  the  use  of  old  ties 
uneconomical." 

"As  far  as  wood  distillation  plants  such  as  ours  are  concerned,  use  of  such  ties  is 
not  feasible  because  the  coal  tar  creosote  would  contaminate  the  regular  chemical 
production. 

"A  large  number  of  kiln  charcoal  plants  do  not  attempt  chemical  recovery,  so  their 
main  problems  would  be  residual  coal  tar  odor  of  the  charcoal  and  the  possibility  of  a 
health  hazard  from  the  smoke  coming  off  the  kiln.  The  latter  factor  should  not  be  taken 
lightly." 


Ties   and    Wood   Preservation  261 


Robert  Woesner  who  conducted  the  experiments  on  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  in 
1959,  when  questioned  as  to  his  reasons  for  giving  up  his  experiments  for  used  ties  in 
large-size,  specially  prepared  kilns,   replied: 

"Charcoal  that  I  produced  was  produced  at  a  loss." 

For  all  of  these  reasons  it  is  evident  the  production  of  charcoal  from  used  ties  is 
impracticable.  The  negative  attitude  of  producers  is  so  near  unanimous  that  no  interest 
in   the  subject   can   be  generated. 

Under  the  circumstances,  there  appears  to  be  no  further  point  in  progressing  the 
study.  Your  committee,  therefore,  recommends  the  subject  be  dropped. 


Report  of  Committee  22 — Economics  of  Railway  Labor 


Lem  Adams  (E) 
A.  D.  Alderson 
M.  B.  Allen 
J.  A.  Barnes 
J.  F.  Beaver 
O.  C.  Benson 
E.  J.  Brown 
R.  F.  Bush 
J.  L.  Cann 
R.  H.  Carpenter 
J.  A.  Cay  wood 
J.  L.  Chafin 
W.  E.  Chapmw 
R.  E.  Clancy 
S.  A.  Cooper 
P.  A.  Cosgrove 
C.  G.  Crawford 
C.  G.  Davis 
M.  H.  Dick 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chairman     L-  E-  Donovan 

W.  M.  S.  Dunn 
J.  S.  Snyder, 

Vice   Chairman, 


L.  C.  Gilbert,  Secretary 

E.  J.  Sierleja 
H.  J.  Fast 
H.   W.  Seeley 
John   Stang 
T.  L.  Kanan 
W.  J.  Jones 


J.  L.  Fergus 
R.  L.  Fox 

R.     R.     GUNDERSON 

K.  A.  Hanger  (E) 
V.  C.  Hanna 
Gene  L.  Harris 
W.  W.  Hay 
K.  E.  Henderson 
Claude  Johnston 
R.  H.  Jordan 


H.  w.  Kellogg 

H.  E.  Kirby 
L.  A.  Loggins 
J.   M.  Lowry 

V.    L.    LjUNGRKN 

T.  D.  Mason 
R.  L.  Mays 

F.  H.  McGuigan    <KD 
J.  R.  Miller 

H.  C.  Minteer 

G.  M.  O'Rourke  (E) 
Hal  B.  Orr* 

C.  W.  Owens 
R.  W.  Pember 

C.  T.  Popma 

R.  W.  Priesendefer 
Griffith  Ray 
M.  S.  Reid 

D.  E.  Rudisill 
R.  G.  Simmons 
N.  E.  Smith 

J.    T.    SULLrVAN 

W.  B.  Throckmorton- 

John  T.  Ward 

G.  E.  Warfel 

H.  J.  Weccheider 

N.  H.  Williams 

H.  E.  Wilson 

F.  R.  Woolford 

C.  R.  Wright   (E) 

D.  H.  Yazell 

Committee 


•  1      Member  Emeritus. 

'  Died  May  9,  1962. 

Those    whtee    names    are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 


mittee  22 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association : 

Your  committee  reports  on   the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

In  view  of  the  complete  overhaul  of  Chapter  22  last  year,  there  is  no  report 
this  year. 

2.  Analysis  of  operations  of  railways  that  have  substantially  reduced  the  cost 
of  labor  required  in  maintenance  of  way  work. 

Progress  report,   submitted  as  information    page  265 

I    Labor  economies  to  be  derived  from  work  measurement  standards  for  com- 
parison of  work  performance  among  various  gangs  or  divisions. 
Final  report,  submitted  as  information    page  271 

4.  bailor  economies  to  be  derived  from  cropping  rail  in  track  versus  building 
up  rail  ends  by  welding. 
Final  report,  submitted  as  information   page  274 

ibor   economics   inherent    to    various   methods   of   taking    up   track. 
Final  report,  submitted  as  information    page  278 

263 


264 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

7.  Labor  economies  in  track  maintenance  to  be  derived  through  the  use  of 
combination   on-off-track    equipment   vs.   on-track   equipment   only. 

Final   report,    submitted   as  information    page  300 

8.  Labor  economies  to  be  derived  from  the  welding,  distributing,  laying,  and 
maintenance  of  continuous  welded  rail,  collaborating  with  the  Special  Com- 
mittee on  Continuous  Welded  Rail.  Final  report,  submitted  as  information  page  302 

The  Committee  on  Economics  of  Railway  Labor, 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chairman. 

AREA  Bulletin  575,  December  1962. 


MEMOIR 
J^al  IBrarcljam  <^rr 

Hal  Branham  Orr,  assistant  chief  engineer,  Northern  Region,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio 
Railway,  Detroit,  Mich.,  died  suddenly  following  a  heart  attack  at  his  home,  May  9, 
1962.  He  is  survived  by  his  wife,  Jessie  Taylor  Orr;  his  son,  Harry;  his  daughter, 
Margaret;  twins,  George  and  Catherine;  his  mother,  Mrs.  Harrye  Branham  Orr,  and 
his  sister,  Mrs.  R.  C.  Curtis,  both  of  Muncie,  Ind.;  and  one  brother,  R.  VV.  Orr,  of 
Cleveland,  Ohio. 

Mr.  Orr  was  born  June  10,  1914,  in  Muncie,  Ind.,  the  son  of  Harry  Helm  and 
Harrye  Branham  Orr.  He  received  his  education  in  the  Muncie  public  schools,  Penning- 
ton College  Preparatory  School  at  Pennington,  N.  J.,  and  Purdue  University,  graduating 
in  1936  with  a  B.S.  degree  in  Civil  Engineering. 

Mr.  Orr  entered  railroad  service  in  1936  with  the  engineering  corps,  Wabash  Rail- 
road and  in  the  same  year  resigned  to  accept  a  position  as  chainman  with  the  Chesa- 
peake &  Ohio.  He  was  promoted  successively  to  rodman,  draftsman,  assistant  cost  engi- 
neer, assistant  supervisor  of  track,  supervisor  of  track,  assistant  division  engineer,  divi- 
sion engineer  and  assistant  chief  engineer,  which  position  he  held  at  the  time  of  his  death. 

He  was  a  member  of  Saint  James  Episcopal  Church  of  Birmingham,  Mich,  and 
Masonic  Lodge  No.  166  of  Clifton  Forge,  Va.  He  also  held  membership  in  the  American 
Association  of  Railroad  Superintendents,  Roadmasters  and  Maintenance  of  Way  Asso- 
ciation, Kentucky  Board  of  Professional  Engineers,  Economic  Club  of  Detroit  and  the 
Maintenance  of  Way  Club  of  Detroit. 

Mr.  Orr  became  a  member  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association  in 
1939.  He  was  appointed  to  Committee  16 — Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Opera- 
tion, in  1941  and  was  a  member  of  Committee  3 — Ties,  from  1957  through  1960.  In 
March  1962  he  became  a  member  of  Committee  22.  His  interest  in  the  work  of  the 
Association  as  well  as  his  humor  and  friendliness  among  its  members  will  long  be  re- 
membered, and  it  is  with  a  deep  sense  of  appreciation  by  those  who  knew  and  worked 
with  Mr.  Orr  that  this  tribute  to  his  memory  is  recorded  with  the  American  Railway 
Engineering  Association. 

H.  W.  Kellogg,  Chairman, 
W.  M.  S.  Dunn, 
J.  E.  Eisemann, 

Committee  on  Memoir, 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor  265 

Report  on  Assignment  2 

Analysis  of  Operations  of  Railways  That  Have 

Substantially    Reduced    the    Cost    of    Labor 

Required  in  Maintenance  of  Way  Work 

E.  J.  Sierleja  (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  B.  Allen,  O.  C.  Benson,  E.  J.  Brown, 
J.  L.  Cann,  J.  L.  Chafin,  R.  E.  Clancy,  S.  A.  Cooper,  C.  G.  Crawford,  S.  B.  Culli- 
ford,  L.  E.  Donovan,  J.  L.  Fergus,  R.  R.  Gunderson,  Gene  L.  Harris,  K.  E.  Hen- 
derson, Claude  Johnston,  R.  H.  Jordan,  H.  W.  Kellog,  H.  E.  Kirby,  J.  M.  Lowry, 
F.  H.  McGuigan,  J.  R.  Miller,  H.  C.  Minteer,  H.  B.  Orr,  C.  W.  Owens,  C.  f. 
Popma,  R.  W.  Preisendefer,  Griffith  Ray,  J.  T.  Sullivan,  H.  J.  Weccheider,  N.  H. 
Williams,  H.  E.  Wilson,  D.  H.  Yazell. 

This  report,  submitted  as  information,  is  the  21st  report  of  a  series  on  this  subject, 
which  has  been  reassigned  annually  since  1935. 

This  analysis  is  of  the  rail  renewal  process  currently  being  used  by  the  Chesapeake 
&  Ohio  Railway.  On  July  24  the  committee  inspected  the  organization  renewing  rail  on 
the  main  line  of  the  Northern  District  of  the  Russell  Division  at  a  point  approximately 
15  miles  north  of  the  Ohio  River.  Later,  on  the  same  date,  the  committee  rode  the  track 
inspection  car,  RI-2,  on  the  rear  of  train  No.  6  from  Huntington,  W.  Va.,  to  Clifton 
Forge,  Va.  A  description  of  the  track  inspection  car  is  not  included  in  this  report  because 
such  a  description  was  presented  by  T.  Fred  Burris,  chief  engineer,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio 
Railway,  at  the  1962  AREA  Annual  Meeting  and  is  printed  on  pages  758  to  767  in 
Bulletin   572,  June-July   1962. 

Track  Specifications 

The  track  before  rail  renewal  had  132-lb  RE  rail  with  conventional  six-hole  joints, 
two  rail-holding  spikes  per  tie  plate,  web  bonds,  hardwood  treated  ties,  22  per  39-ft 
rail,  stone  ballast  section  generally  at  or  slightly  below  top  of  tie,  and  rail  anchors  boxed 
on  every  third  tie.  The  tie  plates,  14^4-in  double-shoulder,  were  removed  but  reused 
under  the  new  rail. 

The  new  rail  was  1320-ft  welded  132-lb  RE  strings  placed  with  two  rail-holding 
spikes  per  tie  plate.  Insulated  joints  were  installed  by  cutting  rail,  and  all  closure  joints 
between  strings  were  welded  by  an  aluminum  iron-oxide  process.  Rail  anchors  were 
boxed  on  each  tie  for  a  distance  of  200  ties  on  each  side  of  all  insulated  joints,  and 
boxed  on  alternate  ties  at  all  other  locations. 

Material  Distribution  and  Recovery 

The  rail  strings  were  pre-distributed  in  the  center  ditch  and  shoulder.  Other  track 
materials  were  pre-distributed  in  conventional  cans  and  bags  at  appropriate  intervals. 
The  rail  being  removed  was  placed  outside  of  the  distributed  new  rail.  Tie  plates 
removed  were  placed  in  center  of  track  for  reuse  after  adzing.  The  labor  source  for 
material   distribution  and  recovery  after  renewal  was  the  division  organization. 

Labor  and  Equipment  Organization 

The  rail  renewal  was  conducted  by  a  system  organization  with  minor  support  from 
the  division  organization.  The  details  of  operation  descriptions,  equipment,  and  labor  are 
shown  in  Table  1.  The  procedure  observed  was  the  renewal  of  the  north  rail  in  the 
Westward  main  track  with  the  renewal  of  the  south  rail  at  a  later  date. 


266 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


M 

a> 

* 

h& 

c\t 

^* 

CM 

-* 

CN 

CN 

lu 

* 

1 
3 

1$ 

O  a) 

1 

« 

l.   ^ 

o  B 

fc.   1 

s 

rH 

t>» 

H 

p 

1 

©  • 

1 

B 

O  H 

,M 

«  o 

o 

s 

c5 

g 

i-i 

8. 

p 

■p 

c 

C 

o 

■rt 

• 

3 

D 

8 

fi 

B 

o 

fi 

P 

Tj 

T3 

9 

-r- 

L 

+5      C 

■si 

a 

0    tD 

5*8 

3 

I 

■ 

43 
i-.no 

E 

0 

si 

i-t 

8. 

a 

rH 

n 
H 

0 
a 

4    L,    aj 
o  a)  B 

fe 

§> 

a 

-i 

Q 

s 

8 

O 
Q 

8 

o 

a 

o 

a 

P 

p 

Motor 

Push 

spare 

h 

c 

« 

$ 

o 
Ou 

43 

a 

£ 

■E 

0    Li 
CO    O 

1 

i 

§ 

3   V 

M 

33 

•-  (V 

c\t 

CM 

" 

" 

3 

S 

~3 

a8 

S3 

H   g 

0   T3 

■a  « 

o 

1 

. 

■til 

g 

M 

a 
o 

^9 

p 

o 
a) 

►J 

M 

O    g 

Vn 

Li 

l-t 

■l-i 

o 

p 

2S 

8  CM 
1    — 
—     1 

s  • 

Li 

« 
O 

Li 

O. 

« 

■a 
S 
n 

n 
o 

o 

rH 

P 

Li 

0    03 

T3   a) 
H 

3   rH 

O  -H 

u 
0 
p 

B 
0 

o 

P 

n 
0 

O 

CO 

-C     cS 

o 

JS 

c 

o  c 

-P 

•g 

n   L, 

•H 

C 

o 

•H    O 

0 

o 

o. 

o 

•rt 

P    -rH 

B 

© 

Li 

5? 

*> 

00 

•H 

•P 

«  P 

rH 

60 

© 

+J 

a 

L,     01 

V 

r-\ 

4 

p 

•H 

p 

g 

t 

0    Li 

H 

> 
g 

n 

s. 

5 

4 
* 

O    Q. 

0  a 

0 
n 

05 
L. 

1 

n 

E 

•P 

C 
•H 

n 

CO 

4 
n 

b3 

p  3 

1 

O 

o 

2 
3 

a 

c*   « 

n 

O 

to 

p 

•H 

a.  0 

cd 

B 

o  c 

Li 

T"3 

3 

3 

n 

1 

r-t 

a) 

■ 

■H    O 

O 

rH 

C 

P 

S  -a 

n 

n  -h 

X 

g 

a 

B 

■H 

L,   a) 

0 

0 

1" 

O 

o 

B 

•H 

Li 

p 

0) 

^ 

a 

Li 

0 

©   a 

O 

T3 

<m   J3 

rH 

P 

•H 

« 

<M 

« 

■H 

N    0) 

T3 

rH 

a 

n 

© 

P 

O     L, 

00 

l-l    » 

a 

O 

a 

M 

•-< 

CO 

3t 

C? 

iH 

B 

•H  rH 

J3 

3 

•5) 

p 

•H 

o 

■H 

•H 

a]  -H 

0 

B 

rH 

O. 

p 

at 

P 

Li     q) 

•r( 

8 

a 

u 

a 

3 

»H  e 

L. 

5 

L, 

P 

a  Lt 

3- 

* 

■°    w 

Li     0 

■a 

0 

■ 

«> 

o 

•H 

o  o 

© 

•H 

H    * 

0 

53 

•r) 

Ll    o 

> 

> 

Li 

43 

> 

Li 

O    0 

> 

0 

P 

0  e 

o 

0 

P 

c 

o 

P 

B 

O 

3 

> 

c  l, 

a 

a 

a 

11 

a 

CO 

P 

a 

■o  o 

•H 

P 

5  Q 

» 

c 

c 

•H 

<D 

•H 

0   <H 

0 

H  J= 

Li 

0 

K 

£E 

pS 

o 

03 

Q 

CO    O 

a 

O   0 

a 

CO 

c 

CV 

en 

-* 

UN 

>o 

O 

c- 

00 

o~- 

o 

_ 

2 

*~ 

"~ 

Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


267 


i •» 

4 



- 

c\ 

CM 

cm 

cm 

CM 

CM 

i^ 

»j 

— 

* 

- 

• 

- 

- 

s 

.  1 

0 

3  £ 

o 

x: 

m   0 

TJ 
S 

C 
0   -H 
C 

is 

o  c 

B33| 

S 

Ih 

d* 

0    CfJ* 

rH   P 

SI 

5 
4 
r-t 

oChc 

.* 

*> 

c 

c 

1] 

9 

■P  tH    O 
O  TJ    0 

§5^ 

•I 

0  X?  o 

Ih           -P 

O 

4 

Ih 

c 

It* 

■H 

0    P 

O. 

3d 

3  8. 

ij  TJ 

•P 

1 

H- 

i 

M 

■a 

Id   c 

Ih    no 

TJ    *H 

g 

P    fi  X!    0 
4    0    0 

c 

i 

a) 

o 

XX  TJ 

is 

■P 

O    0     Ih   XI 

o 

1 

c 

0    -H 

TJ 

•OP© 

TJ 

XI  TJ   XI 

TJ 

I 
c 

n  x! 
a 

0 

i 

pr ope lie 
cator  wi 
ne  mount 

St 

0 

Ih    O 

TJ    Ih   C- 

rack  rub 
rail  gui 
n  power 
webs  and 

0 

•A 

! 

p 

1 
& 

O   -J 

8.H 

28 

0.-P 

ng  and 
•d  by 
ation 

0) 
rH 
0 
0 
P 

8. 
1 

x> 

■H  -H 

■H 

p       0 

TJ 
C 
4 

X 

■3  5 
«3S 

<M 
l-t 

9 
CO 

Self 
appl 
mach 

O  JZ 

8.5 

<M  TJ 

0    3 

CO   -C 

Gagi 
pull 
oper 

■s 

4 

X 

Off 
with 
driv 
rail 

H 

0 
CO 

1 

i 

II 

-1 

B 

3  J 

*■ 

en 

8 

c 

a 

4) 

■g 

•rl 

o 

Ih  hH 

0  -p 

•32 

0 

•rl 

Ih 
0 

— 

9) 

*  a 

P 

0 

s 

Ih 

■s° 

10 
00 

x: 
■p 

•H 

-P 

8 

U 

•H  P 

3 

-* 

X 

C 

Ih    n 

.-( 

XI 

to 

•rl 

QO-rH 

a 

b 

C 

m 

-* 

E 

•H 

•  to 

0 

© 

£ 

-i 

8 

l 

0  •< 

n) 

o 

Ih 

c<-\ 

1 

CM 

1 

£ 

4 

0 

D. 

CO 

0 

> 

p 

CM 

J. 

Ih    m 

o 

0 

0 

o 

<N 

a 

3  TJ 

a) 

0 

rH 

0 

n 

TJ 

CO 

4) 

n  a 

<M 

o 

c 

Ih 

& 

to         0 

5 

s 
o 

g 

s 

0 

n  x: 

3 

3 
XI 

x: 

•H 

TJ 

o 

•iH 

s    | 

•H 

•H 

■ 

0 

■ 

•H 

00 

0 

*> 

■p      tr 

■H 

P 

P 

-rl    l. 

In 

3 

DO 

■ 

4 

P 

0. 

a) 

■H 

p   0 

T) 

■P 

rH 

3 

0 

K 

4          0 

4 

o 

• 

u 

H 

0 

■ 

a 

rH 

P 

a 

o 

Ih             Ih 

E 
I 

a. 

o 

5 

tj  tj 
0  « 

H 

TJ    C 

4  -h 

■ 
TJ 

i 
c 

0 

3 

a. 

s 

i 

4 

c 

8.           0 

O         4 

c 

ID 

o 

0 

TJ 

•H 

o 

s     -^ 

o 

a 

o  n 

P 

a 

■H 

O          0 

n 

•H 

n 

P    4-> 

•H 

a 
0 

a 

■ 

o 

rH 
•H 

0 

8. 
g 

•H           Ih 
0 

60 

5 

E 

<tj   n 
x.   o 

•H 

0   XI   TJ 
P            0 
O    0.  U 

p 

Q. 

3 

4 

> 

Ih 

4 

"E          5 

a 

8. 

X>  P 

•H 

creos 
set  u 
re  qui 

a. 

•H 
P 

TJ 

* 
0 

8     | 

• 

•H 

g 

o  o 

n 

0 

0 

•rl 

& 

o 

■s 

C 

8     1 

P 

•H 

p 

hH 

01 

r* 

i-i 

t> 

»  o. 

P 

• 

*> 

4 

p     0 

5 

>  o 

>,    -  m 

0 

Ml 

0 

■H 

E 

5     I 

o 

O  P 

0 

r-l    n    « 

O 

0 

o 

-P 

0 

t 

5 

is 

O.P 
0.-H  -«o 

fl 

1 

to 

3 

5 

■p 

0 

3 

o 

Q 

«  o 

«< 

■<  Xi  - 

Ou 

OU 

CO 

a       z 

c 

cm 

Q 

f\ 

-3" 

u-\ 

vO 

(V 

o 

a 

2 

"■ 

•" 

" 

~" 

~ 

*~ 

to 

"" 

C4 

6h         »• 
CM 

268 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


U 

• 

* 

u 

ii 

CM 

cv 

cv 

lf\ 

>o 

-» 

CV 

rr\ 

vO 

" 

m           -* 

1 

3 

£  l. 

n 

1  „ 

» 

0  B 

6u 

■0 

€> 

■ 

5£ 

•3  »►. 

09 

0  p 

C 

Supplies 
Tools 

Extra  mach 
Joint  spra 
equipment 

a 
0 

B 
Li 

a 

L, 
0 

> 

* 

Each  compr 
hanism  con 
er 

• 
a 

0 

■H 

11 

■p 

c 

I 

.3 
ti 

■H 

8L 

0 

1 

Li 

Li 

13 

B 

s. 

n 

'     & 

3 

0 

•H 

•2 

Li 

0  > 

a       -o 

•0 

0 

39 

i 

B 
• 

3 

•P 

0 

I 

0 

rH 
rH 

31 

Q 

a  u        a 

a)    0    u    3 

a 

H 

8 

0 

8 

8. 
0 

h 

O 
1 

Is 

Li     bC 
O    CTJ 
B  -A    3 
B  rH    © 
O    H  rH 

B 
rH 

8 

2 

§•1     a 

Kl,        ° 

O    .     •  O 

-p 

■p 

O 

O 

♦» 

a 

(-.  H 

*> 

Li     O 

O             Li 

X    O  -H  X 

TJ 

»H 

C 

Li 

a 

lis 

8    L.    Li 

O     0.*H 

T3 

<M 

*H  J5             O 
rH    O           <i 

a  E       0 
co  a      x 

3 

.'    1^ 

•J  -P    «    ■ 

£££1 

s 

B 
a) 

X 

I-l 
O 

co 

2 

O 

X 
CO 

t 

C 
a) 
X 

rH 
0 
CO 

1 

IS 

0 

-3 

CV 

c\ 

o 

-   -   (M«0 

•" 

u> 

a 

3 

p 
4 
0 
n 

O 
a 

% 

rH 
■H 

2 

Li 

1 

0) 

C 
O 
■H 

a 

1 

a 

c 

•rt 

0 
a 

3 

rH 

■rt 

2 

B 
O 

a 
-P 

O 

T3 

H 
H 

5 

s 

g 

•H 

0 

■P 

■P 

L. 
■P 

a 

a 

Li 

Li 
O 

5 

•rH 
■P 

■J 

•H 

5 

0. 

3 
a 

8. 

0 

■a 

B 

0 

JB 

0 

•P 

s 

■a 

(4 

M 

0 

n) 

J= 

B 

Li                   OS 

s 

a 

5 

-p 

c" 

a 

O 

B 

0) 

1? 

O 
X                r-t 

0 

5 

B 

0 

B 

a 

a) 

l-i 

■H 

O                 Ti 

0 

O. 

«> 

a 

•H 

0 

.* 

•H 

■s 

c          a 

a 

j«s 

0 

a 

n 

X 

•H 

rH 

a 

«                 Li 

■P 

5 

0 

■H 

rH 

•H 

0 

•H 

a 

•H 

Li 

•H 

c 

i 

■H 

■P 

a 

O 

X 

& 

i 

a 

B 

e 

g 

B 

Li 

•O 

a     a 

•H 

C 

V 

0 

& 

a. 

09 

rH 

■p 

c 

V 

O 

O 

!     5 

•H 

<d 

O 

-p 

M 

3 

•3 

u 

•H 

P 

*> 

P 

1 

Li 

■P 

2 

03 

rH 
■rt 

O 

5 

•rt 

a 

5 

B 

-P 

•H 

m 

•P 

« 

•rt 

a 

tH 

a 

■H 

Li 

0 

Li 

0 

V 

Li 

L, 

? 

• 

3 

* 

■P 

0 

s 

> 

> 

P 

1 

P 

O 

■•-» 

Li 

s 

Li 

■P 

i 

•H 

a 

« 

5 

■rt                -P 

•O 

■p 

O 

•rt 

O 

Li 

■H 

£ 

£       c3 

X 

«< 

CO 

a 

CQ 

O 

CO 

a 

a 

a 

Q 

£ 

SI 

CV 

tf 

cv 

» 

O 

Kr 

8 

8? 

0 

Cr\ 

X 

CV              CN 

i 

Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


269 


H 


O    €> 


I- 


I 


5 

St 


It 

1* 


£    O 


3  «, 


is   "  cv  -*  —  —  CV-* 

3& 


~    > 

Mr 


H— 


L,    m    o    3    Q    o  £ 
o   m   ©   £    o   5   a 


ar 


I  i 


la 


270 Economics    of   Railway    Labor 

It  was  noted  that  the  personnel  in  the  organization  were  well  trained  and  the  work 
progressed  in  an  orderly  unconfused  manner.  The  spacing  between  operations  was  main- 
tained so  that  there  was  little,  if  any,  delay  encountered  by  the  various  operations. 

Planning  and  Scheduling 

The  schedule  of  the  work  at  this  particular  place  was  planned  to  coincide  with  the 
low  traffic  volume  period  which  resulted  because  of  the  miners'  holiday.  This  scheduling 
permitted  the  absolute  use  of  track  for  24  hours  per  day  for  the  duration  of  the  job. 
As  a  result,  at  the  close  of  work  each  operation  stopped  independent  of  the  other 
operations  and  started  at  the  same  point  the  next  day  with  no  delay  time  for  opening 
and  closing. 

The  camp  cars  were  stored  on  the  westward  main  track  at  the  west  end  of  the 
renewal  job,  minimizing  the  distance  required  to  travel  from  and  to  the  work  site. 

Production  Costs 

The  organization  as  outlined  is  capable  of  laying  2  miles  of  welded  rail  in  one  day. 
The  actual  average  this  year  has  been  1 .52  miles  of  rail  (welded  and  conventional) 
per  day. 

The  current  labor  cost  history  of  renewing  rail  in  the  Southern  Region  in  1962 
through  June  8  is  as  follows: 

Production  Quantities  Cost  In 

Track  Miles  Man-Hours 

Location  Welded      Conventional  Total  Turnouts        Per  Mile 

A        1.4                   4.1  5.5  1  1365 

B        3.0  3.0  2  1375 

C        3.6  3.6  1  1299 

D        1.5                     1.2  2.7  6  1955 

E        5.9                    0.3  6.2  6  1501 

F         4.2  4.2  3  1700 

G         4.2                     0.2  4.4  0  1664 

The  above  cost  includes  the  distribution  of  new  material  and  the  picking  up  of 
released  material. 

CONCLUSIONS 

The  C&O  has  a  rail  renewal  organization  which  is  effective  and  is  producing  at  high 
volume  and  low  cost.  This  may  be  attributed  to: 

1.  Well  trained  labor. 

2.  Effective  gang  supervision. 

3.  Maximizing  track  use  by  scheduling  gang  into  job  during  low  traffic  volume. 

4.  Development  and  use  of  labor  saving  devices  such  as: 

a.  Special  hand  tools  for  handling  tie  plates. 

b.  Hydraulic-motor-driven  brushes  which  remove  dirt  and  ballast  from  the 
web  and  base  of  the  new  rail  as  it  is  being  lifted  up  and  guided  into  the 
tie  plates. 

c.  Control  device  on  the  spike  drivers  which  enables  the  lead  driver  operator 
to  control  the  propelling  mechanism  of  the  trailing  compressor. 

d.  Propelling  mechanism  installed  on  push  trucks  used  for  distributing 
material. 

e.  Propelling  unit  to  push  and  haul  the  gaging  equipment. 

f.  Self-propelled  dual-wheel  cribber  which  operates  unattended. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 271 

Report,  on  Assignment  3 

Labor  Economies  to  be  Derived  from  Work  Measurement 

Standards  for  Comparison  of  Work  Performance 

Among  Various  Gangs  or  Divisions 

H.  J.  Fast  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  D.  Alderson,  M.  B.  Allen,  J.  A.  Barnes,  J.  F. 
Beaver,  E.  J.  Brown,  R.  F.  Bush,  J.  L.  Cann,  R.  H.  Carpenter,  J.  A.  Caywood, 
\V.  E.  Chapman,  S.  A.  Cooper,  S.  B.  Culliford,  \V.  M.  S.  Dunn,  J.  L.  Fergus, 
R.  L.  Fox,  K.  E.  Henderson,  Claude  Johnston,  R.  H.  Jordan,  Vernon  L.  Ljungren, 
C.  T.  Popma,  R.  W.  Preisendefer,  D.  E.  Rudisill,  N.  E.  Smith,  W.  B.  Throckmorton, 
G.  E.  Warfel,  N.  H.  Williams,  D.  H.  Yazell. 

Definition 

The  assignment  as  worded  is  very  broad.  On  searching  into  the  field  of  work  meas- 
urement as  applied  to  maintenance  of  track  and  structures  by  railways  in  North  America, 
it  soon  became  evident  that  it  might  be  more  properly  re-stated  as  "Survey  of  Work 
Measurement  in  Maintenance  of  Track  and  Structures  on  Railways  in  North  America." 

Historical  Background 

The  subject  of  work  measurement  was  dealt  with  in  a  report  by  M.  C.  Bitner 
during  the  Annual  Meeting  of  the  AREA  in  March  1958  and  reported  in  AREA  Pro- 
ceedings, Vol.  59,  page  1249.  The  assignment  of  the  subject  to  Committee  22  was  made 
in  1961,  and  a  progress  report,  published  in  Bulletin  568,  Vol.  63,  December  1961, 
page  268. 

Procedure  of  Investigation 

A  circular  was  sent  out  to  chief  engineers  of  52  railways,  of  which  33  made  a  reply. 
The  circular  generally  sought  a  reply  to  control  systems  presently  employed  to  assess  and 
evaluate  productivity  in  maintenance  work.  It  further  asked  that  such  control  systems 
be  separately  reported  on  work  performed  by  extra  gangs  and  work  by  regular  track 
forces.  The  replies  indicated  that  considerable  progress  has  been  made  in  assessing  pro- 
ductivity of  mechanized  extra  gangs,  but  only  a  few  railways  reported  on  an  attempt 
at  assessing  productivity  of  regular  track  forces.  It  was  evident  that  a  start  had  been 
made  but  much  was  left  to  be  done  by  way  of  refinement. 

Comments  and  Analyses  Arising  out   of  the  Investigation 

Before  making  specific  comments  on  the  replies  received,  a  general  statement  on  the 
problem  of  productivity  control  is  indicated.  The  basic  objective  in  measuring  work 
must  be  as  a  part  of  a  control  system  aimed  at  minimizing  total  cost  and  maintaining 
this  minimum  in  the  face  of  changing  circumstances.  To  do  this,  measures  have  to  be 
established  for  the  performance  of  the  most  effective  methods  of  using  labor  and  capital. 
These  measures  can  then  be  used  to  evaluate  present  performance  and.  if  necessary, 
action  taken  to  raise  performance  to  the  required  level.  The  feasibility  of  this  action, 
plus  the  cost  of  control,  will  determine  the  required  accuracy  of  the  measurements. 

If  the  organization  is  already  operating  at  a  high  level  of  productivity  in  a  stable 
situation,  then  a  simple  low-cost  control  system  is  probablj  adequate.  In  other  situations 
it  may  not  be  possible,  for  obvious  reasons,  to  obtain  higher  levels  of  productivity. 

In  general,  the  more  critical  the  control  system,  the  greater  the  accuracj    required: 


272 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

e.g.,  a  labor  control  system  using  a  monetary  incentive  scheme  requires  equitable  and 
accurate  standards.  However,  since  traditionally  labor  incentives  are  not  employed,  it  is 
not  necessary  to  have  as  tight  a  control  system  and  still  benefit  from  measured 
productivity. 

Basically,  control  systems  must  be  tailored  to  the  needs  of  the  organization  and 
within  the  framework  practicality.  We  all  know  that  maintenance  operations  vary 
throughout  the  year  because  of  climate  and  traffic  variation.  The  "within  year"  variation 
is  dealt  with  by  the  mixture  of  extra  and  permanent  labor  forces.  The  temporary  labor 
forces  are  generally  organized  in  extra  gangs  and  highly  mechanized.  The  labor  cost, 
when  reviewed  as  part  of  the  total  cost,  is  the  smaller  portion.  Material  and  machine 
costs  usually  exceed  labor  costs  in  such  gangs.  The  regular  forces,  consisting  of  section, 
bridge  and  building  and  various  other  men  are  usually  responsible  for  the  greater  part 
of  the  total  maintenance  cost,  of  which  labor  is  the  greater  portion. 

Thus,  for  extra  gangs,  the  measurement  system  needs  to  be  aimed  at  both  machine 
utilization  and  labor  productivity,  but  for  section  and  other  forces,  it  must  be  concen- 
trated on  examining  labor  productivity.  This  latter  examination  is  the  most  difficult  and 
in  which  not  too  much  is  being  done  as  of  this  date. 

Now,  to  be  more  specific:  One  large  railway  established  a  cost  control  system  in 
1926.  However,  with  the  advent  of  mechanization,  the  system  as  originally  structured 
and  employed  is  not  being  used  to  its  full  potential.  The  railway  in  question  is  conscious 
of  the  situation  and,  at  the  moment,  is  measuring  performance  against  historical  unit 
costs.  The  information  enables  this  railway  to  at  least  check  performance  that  is  con- 
siderably out  of  line  from  historical  averages.  Employing  such  a  system  is  better  than 
none  at  all,  but  does  require  considerable  refinement. 

Another  railway  started  a  cost  control  system  in  recent  years.  It  is  a  smaller  railway 
and,  hence,  has  the  advantage  of  being  able  to  control  costs  more  readily  than  would 
be  the  case  in  a  large  complex  system.  Relatively  good  progress  has  been  made  in  con- 
trolling costs  against  standards  in  more  than  50  percent  of  routine  track  work.  The  sys- 
tem is  being  reviewed  constantly  for  refinement.  One  of  the  difficulties  on  this  road  is 
the  rather  short-term  adjustment  of  working  forces  related  to  variation  in  volume  of 
traffic.  Nevertheless,  this  road  is  making  progress  in  spite  of  the  somewhat  adverse 
conditions. 

Regardless  of  the  control  system  employed  in  measuring  work,  the  first  step  to  be 
taken  should  be  a  review  of  methods  and  organization.  Too  little  would  be  gained  in 
measuring  performance  under  methods  which  have  not  been  reviewed  and  might  be 
found  lacking  in  optimum  use  of  labor,  material  and  plant. 

Conclusions 

(a)   Based  on  formal  replies  received: 

1.  Considerable  progress  has  been  made  in  measuring  the  performance  of 
mechanized  extra  gangs. 

2.  Limited  progress  was  reported   on  measuring  routine  maintenance  work. 

3.  Considerable  variation   exists  in  reporting  systems. 

4.  No  evidence  was  submitted  that  a  periodic  audit  of  the  reporting  system  is 
being  made  as  to  the  cost  of  producing  information  and  its  real  value  for 
information  and  control  purposes. 

5.  Limited  employment  of  staff  trained  and  competent  in  design  and  supervision 
of  a  meaningful  cost  and  production  control  system, 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 273 

6.  No  information  was  submitted  on  establishing  quality  standards  against 
which  performance  can  be  measured, 
(b)  Based  on  informal  conversations  with  numerous  railway  officers  it  would  appear 
that  lack  of  progress  in  work  measurement  and  productivity  control  has  been 
influenced  by  situations  considered  beyond  the  control  of  engineering  officers. 
Repeated  statements  were  made  that  it  is  difficult  to  plan  and  control  a  seasonal 
or  annual  work  task  because  budgetary  approvals  are  revised  with  variations  in 
traffic  volume.  Some  railway  officers  stated  that  they  have  to  adjust  their 
maintenance  expenditures  month  by  month.  This  situation  denies  an  efficient 
design  of  maintenance  work.  In  addition,  some  officers  reported  restrictions  as 
a  result  of  working  agreements.  Still  others  faced  the  constant  problem  of 
climatic  conditions. 

Recommendations 

As  stated  in  the  remarks  above  under  the  heading  of  "Comments  and  Analyses", 
any  approach  to  work  methods  and  work  measurement  must  be  structured  to  meet  and 
cope  with  realistic  restrictions.  It  is  realized  that  each  company  has  its  own  peculiar 
problems,  but  this  should  not  be  an  excuse  to  lag  in  implementing  efficient  administra- 
tive measures.  Industry  as  a  whole  is  too  prone  to  look  for  "goats"  on  which  to  blame 
performance  which  is  short  of  the  optimum  possible  in  the  face  of  restrictive  situations. 
It  has  been  proven  over  the  years  that  a  professional  approach  in  analyzing  any  problem 
has  led  to  negotiations  or  policy  changes  which  eliminated  restrictions  and  obstacles 
thought  impossible  of  correction. 

The  AREA  is  a  body  essentially  of  professional  men  and  its  members  must  dedicate 
themselves  to  a  professional  and  vigorous  attack  on  situations  which  deny  efficient 
maintenance  methods. 

It  is  therefore  recommended  that  serious  consideration  be  given  to: 

(a)  Recruiting  or  training  personnel  competent  in  industrial  and  production  engi- 
neering. Competency  in  civil  engineering  does  not  necessarily  mean  competency 
in  production  methods.  An  industrial  engineer  trained  in  production  methods 
should  be  teamed  up  with  a  civil  engineer  trained  in  design  and  quality 
standards. 

(b)  Whereas  considerable  progress  can  be  made  in  a  review  of  methods  and  engi- 
neered performance  standards,  an  optimum  control  system  would  require  that 
quality  standards  be  developed  against  which  performance  can  be  realistically 
measured. 

(c)  A  suggested  sequence  in  the  field   of  methods  and  measurement  is  as  follows: 

1.  A  review  and  description  of  methods  employed  on  all  significant  jobs. 

2.  A  refinement  in  work  methods  where  indicated. 

3.  Establishment  of  realistic  performance  targets  to  do  the  work  within  the 
accepted  methods. 

4.  A  simple  but  effective  reporting  system  to  supervise  performance  and,  when 
established,  the  need  for  immediate  and  current  action  in  each  case  where 
performance   falls  significantly  below  acceptable  limits. 

5.  A  constant  review  of  methods  with  a  view  toward  greater  production  and 
adjustment  of  measured  standards  accordingly. 

The  above  is  submitted  as  information  with  the  recommendation  that  this  assign- 
ment be  discontinued  and  reconsidered  for  further  study  in  a  few  years. 


274 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Labor   Economies  to  be  Derived   from  Cropping   Rail 
In  Track  Versus  Building  Up  Rail  Ends  by  Welding 

H.  VV.  Seeley  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  D.  Alderson,  M.  B.  Allen,  J.  A.  Barnes, 
O.  C.  Benson,  E.  J.  Brown,  J.  A.  Caywood,  J.  L.  Chafin,  VV.  E.  Chapman,  R.  E. 
Clancy,  P.  A.  Cosgrove,  C.  G.  Crawford,  C.  G.  Davis,  M.  H.  Dick,  W.  M.  S.  Dunn, 
H.  VV.  Kellogg,  H.  E.  Kirby,  V.  L.  Ljungren,  L.  A.  Loggins,  J.  M.  Lowry,  R.  L. 
Mays,  F.  H.  McGuigan,  J.  R.  Miller,  H.  C.  Minteer,  R.  VV.  Pember,  C.  T.  Popma, 
Griffith  Ray,  M.  S.  Reid,  D.  E.  Rudisill,  R.  G.  Simmons,  J.  T.  Sullivan,  VV.  B. 
Throckmorton,  John  T.  Ward,  H.  J.  Weccheider,  F.  R.  Woolford. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  report  comparing  the  cropping 
of  rail  in  track  with  the  building  up  of  rail  ends  by  welding: 

Committee  4 — Rail,  on  page  4-M-8  of  the  Manual,  under  the  heading  Recondition- 
ing Rail  Ends,  makes  the  following  recommendation:  "Reconditioning  of  rail  ends  by 
welding,  grinding  or  cropping  is  recommended  as  good  practice." 

Building  up  battered  or  chipped  rail  ends  by  acetylene  or  electric  welding  has  been 
practiced  by  most  railroads  for  a  long  time.  Some  roads  have  confined  this  work  to 
repairing  badly  chipped  or  unusually  heavily  battered  rail  ends  on  a  "spot"  basis.  Others 
have  programmed  the  out-of-face  building  up  of  rail  ends  over  long  stretches  of  track, 
much  the  same  as  they  have  programmed  rail  renewals,  tie  renewals  and  surfacing.  The 
purpose  of  this  work  is  to  upgrade  the  condition  of  the  joints  and  extend  the  economical 
useful  life  of  the  rail  in  track.  It  is  this  programmed  out-of-face  rail  end  welding  that 
is  considered  in  this  report. 

The  cropping  or  sawing  off  of  rail  ends  to  eliminate  battered  ends,  worn  fishing 
space  in  the  joint  bar  area  and  other  defects  in  the  rail  end  or  joint  area,  has  also 
been  practiced  on  some  railroads  for  many  years.  Primarily  it  was  a  method  of  recon- 
ditioning and  upgrading  rail  which  had  been  removed  as  a  result  of  rail  renewal  pro- 
grams to  provide  a  higher  grade  relay  rail  for  use  in  other  tracks,  usually  in  secondary 
main  line  and  branch  lines.  Since  the  rail  was  out  of  track,  it  was  not  uneconomical  to 
transport  it  to  a  central  reclamation  or  cropping  plant  where  permanently  installed 
cropping  equipment,  such  as  saws,  drills,  etc.,  were  available. 

In  recent  years,  certain  developments  have  caused  railroad  maintenance  people  to 
look  for  a  method  of  reconditioning  and  upgrading  rail  in  track,  thus  eliminating  the 
cost  of  removing  the  rail  from  track,  loading  it,  transporting  it  to  and  from  a  central 
reclamation  plant,  distributing  it  and  relaying  it.  A  few  of  these  factors  were: 

1.  The  cycle  of  replacing  light-section  rail  with  heavier  section  rail  on  most  main- 
line tracks  and  many  branch-line  tracks  was   completed. 

2.  Smaller  maintenance  of  way  budgets  made  it  necessary  to  reduce  the  expendi- 
tures for  new  rail  and  to  use  more  relay  rail. 

3.  At  some  locations,  deferred  maintenance,  as  a  result  of  lack  of  funds  for  rail 
renewals,  had  progressed  to  the  point  where  it  was  necessary  to  extend  the 
service  life  of  some  of  the  rail  in  track  for  a  few  years  until  money  became 
available  to  replace  it. 

4.  With  the  reduced  mileage  of  rail  renewals  on  main  line  tracks,  less  relay  rail 
was  available  for  secondary  main  line  and  branch  line  tracks.  It  became  neces- 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 275 

sary  to  find  a  way  to  recondition  and  upgrade  the  rail  in  track  to  avoid  the 
excessive  maintenance  costs  and  unsatisfactory  track  conditions  that  result 
from  badly   battered  joints  and  worn  joint  conditions. 

As  early  as  1937,  attempts  were  made  to  crop  rail  in  track,  using  the  portable  power 
saws  and  drills  that  were  available  at  the  time.  The  results  were  moderately  good,  but 
the  work  was  slow.  While  the  costs  could  be  justified  under  some  conditions,  the  eco- 
nomies of  cropping  rail  in  track  were  not  sufficient  to  be  accepted  by  most  railroads. 
The  development  of  the  portable  abrasive-wheel  rail  cutter  and  the  portable  multiple- 
spindle  rail  drills,  in  recent  years,  resulted  in  increased  production  and  reduced  the 
amount  of  manpower  required  for  the  two  primary  operations  in  cropping  rail  in  track. 
As  a  result,  many  railroads  have  become  interested  in  this  method  of  reconditioning  rail. 


BUILDING  UP   RAIL  ENDS  BY  WELDING 
Purpose 

The  purposes  of  building  up  rail  ends  by  welding  are  to  correct  excessive  rail  head 
batter  at  the  joints,  and  repair  badly  chipped  rail  ends,  which  conditions  cause: 

1.  Damage  to  joint  bars,  bolts  and  nut  locks. 

2.  Excessive  wear  in  the  fishing  space  at  the  joint  location. 

3.  Bolt  hole  failures  and  rail  failures  in  the  joint  area. 

4.  Damage  to  the  joint  ties. 

5.  Disturbance  of  the  track  surface  at  the  joints,  which  results  in  excessive  sur- 
facing costs. 

6.  Surface-bent  rail. 

7.  Muddy  ballast  in  the  vicinity  of  the  joint. 

The  amount  of  rail  end  batter  considered  excessive  varies  on  individual  railroads 
between  0.020  and  0.048  in,  with  most  roads  considering  welding  when  the  batter  exceeds 
0.030  to  0.03S  in. 

Factors  to  be  Considered 

The  building  up  of  rail  ends  by  welding  may  be  economically  justified  when  the 
following  conditions  exist: 

1.  Rail  section  is  adequate  for  the  traffic. 

2.  General  condition  of  rail  is  good: 

(a)  Rail  is  not  surface  or  line  bent. 

(b)  Rail  head  wear  is  not  excessive. 

(c)  Engine  burns  or  other  surface  defects  are  not  excessive. 

3.  Wear  in  fishing  space  within  the  limits  of  the  joint  bars  is  not  beyond  tin- 
point  where  the  joint  bars  do  not  support  the  joint;  or  in  excess  of  an  amount 
that  can  be  compensated  for  by  the  application  of  new  splices,  new  over-size 
splices,  or  splices  reformed  to  original  size  or  over  size. 

4.  Joint  batter  is  not  excessive.  The  maximum  amount  of  batter  that  may  be 
built  up  varies  on  the  individual  railroad.  It  cannot  be  above  the  amount  that 
can   be   economically   and   successfully   welded   without  excessive   heating 

5.  Rail  ends  have  not  been  previously  built  up  by  welding.  Mosl  railroads  rlo  not 
re-weld  joints. 


276 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

Cost 

Building  up  rail  ends  by  welding  is  performed  by  an  organization  which  consists 
of  the  following: 

1  foreman  or  lead  welder 

2  to  4  welders 

2  to  4  welder-helpers 

1  to  2  machine  or  grinder  operators 

2  to  4  laborers 

This  force  builds  up  the  joints  by  welding,  surface  grinds  the  welds  and  slots  or 
cross-grinds  the  rail  ends.  Some  roads  report  that  they  also  have  a  signalman  on  the 
job  to  renew  rail  bonds  that  may  be  damaged  by  the  heat.  The  labor  cost  varies  between 
225  and  450  man-hours  per  mile,  depending  upon  whether  a  full  head  weld  or  strip  weld 
is  used,  the  length  of  the  individual  welds,  the  number  of  rail  ends  per  mile  to  be 
welded,  the  amount  of  traffic  interference,  and  the  travel  time  to  and  from  the  point 
of  work.  The  total  cost  of  welding  rail  ends  is  in  the  range  of  $0.25  to  .$0.35  per  inch 
of  weld. 

Most  roads  condition  the  joints  to  be  welded  by  surfacing  and  replacing  the  worn 
splices  with  new  or  reformed  splices,  either  ahead  of  the  welding  operation  or  between 
the  welding  and  the  grinding  operations.  The  labor  cost  for  doing  this  work  is  in  addi- 
tion to  the  welding  force  and  varies  between  100  and  300  man-hours  per  mile,  depending 
upon  traffic  interference  and  travel  time. 

CROPPING  RAIL  IN  TRACK 
Purpose 

The  purpose  of  cropping  rail  in  track  is  to  eliminate  the  following  conditions  or 
defects  in  the  rail  joint  area: 

1.  Rail  end  batter  that  is  in  excess  of  the  amount  that  can  be  economically  cor- 
rected by  welding. 

2.  Rail  end  batter  that  has  developed  in  previously  welded  joints. 

3.  Worn  fishing  space  in  the  joint  bar  area  in  excess  of  that  which  can  be  com- 
pensated for  by  new,  over-size,  or  reformed  splices. 

4.  Joint  defects  such  as  bolt-hole  cracks,  head-artd-web  separations  and  split-web 
failures. 

5.  Surface  bends  or  "droop"  in  the  ends  of  rails. 

Factors  to  be  Considered 

The  cropping  of  rail  in  track  may  be  justified  when  the  following  conditions  exist: 

1.  Rail  section  is  adequate  for  the  traffic. 

2.  General  condition  of  rail  is  good  except  for  the  ends: 

(a)  Rail  is  not  surface  or  line  bent. 

(b)  Rail  head  wear  is  not  excessive. 

(c)  Engine  burns  or  other  surface  defects  are  not  excessive. 

3.  Wear  in  fishing  space  has  developed  to  the  point  where  joint  bars  do  not 
properly  support  the  joint  and  this  wear  cannot  be  compensated  for  by  renew- 
ing the  splices. 

4.  Rail  end  batter  cannot  be  corrected  by  welding  or  surface  grinding. 

5.  It  is  desired  to  change  the  rail  end  drilling  or  to  replace  splices  with  longer  or 
shorter  splice  bars. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 277 

Cost 

A   typical   organization    for  cropping  rail   in    track  is   as   follows: 

Labor 

1  foreman 

6  to  7  machine  operators 

6  to  8  laborers 
Equipment 

1  or  2  portable  abrasive  rail  cutters 

1  portable  multiple-spindle  rail  drill 

1  or  2  power  wrenches 

1  power  spike  puller 

1  grinder  for  dressing  bolt  holes  and 
slotting  or  beveling  rail  ends 

1  crane  or  power  winch  for  shifting 
rail  and  placing  fill-in  rails 

Labor  cost  for  the  cropping  operation  varies  between  385  and  640  man-hours  per 
mile,  depending  upon  the  amount  of  actual  working  time  available  during  the  tour  of 
duty.  This  includes  cutting  and  drilling  the  rails,  dressing  the  bolt  holes,  beveling  the 
rail  ends,  shifting  the  rails,  installing  fill-in  rails,  applying  the  splices  and  rail  anchors, 
and  replacing  the  spikes.  In  addition  to  this,  there  must  be  considered  the  labor  and 
other  expense  to  deliver  the  fill-in  rails  which  most  roads  crop  at  a  reclamation  plant 
or  other  central  location  and  to  pick  up  the  cropped  rail  ends.  In  track-circuit  territory, 
signal  forces  will  be  required  to  install  rail  bonds.  Some  roads  also  lubricate  the  new 
joints  and  end  harden  the  new  rail  ends. 

CONCLUSIONS 

While  your  committee's  assignment  is  to  compare  the  labor  economies  of  "cropping 
rail  in  track"  against  "building  up  rail  ends  by  welding",  such  a  comparison  is  very 
difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  make.  The  purpose  of  both  methods  of  reconditioning 
rail  ends  is  to  improve  the  condition  of  the  rail,  in  order  to  reduce  the  cost  of  main- 
taining the  track  in  satisfactory  condition  for  the  traffic  it  is  to  carry.  The  determina- 
tion of  which  method  to  use  will  not  depend  upon  the  relative  labor  costs,  but  will 
depend  upon  the  condition  of  the  rail  and  the  unsatisfactory  conditions  that  are  to  be 
corrected.  Therefore,  your  committee  has  summarized  the  factors  that  must  be  con- 
sidered to  justify  each  of  the  two  methods  of  reconditioning  rail.  We  have  indicated  the 
approximate  labor  costs,  and  since  equipment  costs  are  an  important  consideration  in 
cropping  rail  in  track,  we  have  indicated  the  type  and  quantity  of  machines  that  are 
being  used  for  this  purpose. 

The  maintenance  people  who  have  the  responsibility  for  making  the  decision  must 
consider  the  individual  situation  to  determine  which  method  of  reconditioning  rail  is 
required  and  economical  for  that  particular  location.  They  must  not  overlook  the  fact 
that  other  methods  of  reconditioning  rail,  such  as  rail  head  surface  grinding,  are  available 
and  must  be  considered. 

This  report  is  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  thai  the  subject 
be  discontinued. 


278 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Labor   Economies   Inherent   to   Various   Methods 
of    Taking    Up    Track 

John  Stang  (chairman,  subcommittee),  A.  D.  Alderson,  J.  A.  Barnes,  J.  L.  Cann,  R.  H. 
Carpenter,  S.  A.  Cooper,  C.  G.  Crawford,  S.  B.  Culliford,  M.  H.  Dick,  L.  E.  Dono- 
van, L.  C.  Gilbert,  V.  C.  Hanna,  R.  H.  Jordan,  L.  A.  Loggins,  J.  M.  Lowry,  T.  D. 
Mason,  F.  H.  McGuigan,  J.  R.  Miller,  H.  C.  Minteer,  C.  W.  Owens,  R.  W.  Pember, 
D.  E.  Rudisill,  R.  G.  Simmons,  N.  E.  Smith,  J.  T.  Sullivan,  W.  B.  Throckmorton, 
G.  E.  Warfel,  H.  J.  VVeccheider. 

In  the  last  10  years  tremendous  changes  have  been  taking  place  on  the  railroads 
of  the  United  States  and  Canada.  There  are  many  forces  at  work.  Some  are  economic, 
others  are  political,  and  still  others  exist  because  of  mechanization,  automation,  and  the 
development  of  new  products  used  in  the  modernization  of  the  North  American  rail- 
road plant.  Changing  traffic  patterns,  reduction  of  passenger  train  miles,  centralized 
traffic  control,  tax  savings,  longer  trains  and  consequent  reductions  in  the  number  of 
trains,  and  mergers,  all  have  had  a  vigorous  effect  on  the  retirement  of  excess  or  obsolete 
tracks  and  facilities. 

The  methods  used  to  tear  up  track  vary  widely,  depending  on  the  condition  of  the 
material  to  be  retained  and  the  use  to  be  made  of  it,  together  with  the  location  of  track, 
that  is,  single  track,  yard  track,  or  one  track  or  multiple  tracks.  So  many  different 
methods  and  equipment  have  been  used  that  it  does  not  seem  desirable  to  list  the  details 
of  all  of  them.  Instead,  we  shall  briefly  outline  the  methods  used  for  some 
particular  jobs. 

One  railroad  states  that  there  are  two  general  methods  of  taking  up  track — the 
method  to  be  used  will  depend  on  the  need  a  particular  railroad  has  for  the  material 
to  be  salvaged.  Below  are  factors  to  be  considered  under  these  two  methods: 

Method  1 — Dismantling  in  Field  (Conventional  and  Ripping) 

(a)  Where  ties,  rail,  etc.,  are  required  for  immediate  normal  maintenance  renew- 
als, the  ties  and  rail  can  be  shipped  direct  to  the  locations  where  these  materials  are 
required. 

(b)  Where  light  rail  sections  are  being  retired  from  abandoned  branch  line  or  yards, 
and  where  the  material  will  be  sold  for  scrap.  This  will  permit  prompt  and  immediate  sale. 

(c)  On  smaller  railroads  this  method  would  give  quicker  utilization  of  released 
material  before  further  deterioration  occurs,  and  eliminates  the  need  to  purchase  new 
material. 

Method  2 — Panelized  Track 

(a)  Where  extensive  yards,  new  main  branch  line,  or  passing  tracks  are  to  be  con- 
structed in  the  immediate  or  near  future,   the  track  panel  method  is  more  economical. 

(b)  On  larger  railroads  where  relatively  small  retirements  are  being  made  and  there 
is  a  constant  need  for  new  industrial  tracks,  a  certain  amount  of  panel  track  can  be 
stored  for  future  use.  This  is  assuming  that  there  would  be  frequent  turnover  before 
further  deterioration  occurs. 

While  each  line  is  confronted  with  different  problems  in  gang  setups,  which  depend 
on  the  layout  of  the  highway  system  in  the  surrounding  country,  the  topography  of  the 
land  and  the  number  of  bridges  and  ties  that  are  to  be  salvaged,  the  setups  of  the  gangs 
mentioned  in  this  report  can  be  considered  as  representative. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 279 

The  price  of  scrap  has  a  decided  influence  on  the  method  used  in  retiring  track. 
If  the  price  of  scrap  is  high,  it  would  be  of  advantage  to  obtain  as  much  scrap  as 
possible,  irrespective  of  apparent  inherent  inefficiency  in  the  method  used  to  obtain  this 
scrap.  Also,  approaching  seasonal  weather  conditions  which  could  restrict  or  postpone 
actual  salvage  operations  influence  the  need  of  expediency  in  the  removal  of  track. 

In  this  report  three  methods  of  taking  up  track  are  described — conventional,  ripping, 
and  panelizing. 

CONVENTIONAL  METHOD 

So  many  railroads  use  this  general  method  of  taking  up  track  that  it  would  be 
impossible  to  describe  all  the  variations.  Instead,  the  operations  applicable  to  three 
different  situations  are  outlined.  (Figs.  1  and  2). 

(a)  Single  Track  Only.  Two  power  spike  pullers  operated  by  four  laborers  remove 
the  track  spikes.  Approximately  ll/2  miles  of  spikes  are  pulled  at  one  time,  leaving  on 
the  average  6-10  spikes  per  rail  at  joints  and  centers  to  hold  gage.  This  is  done  because 
the  rail  is  to  be  recovered  by  push  cars  towed  by  a  heavy-duty  motor  car  to  the  loading 
point.  The  number  of  gage-holding  spikes  left  per  rail  is  determined  by  the  track  curva- 
ture and  tie  condition.  The  spike  pullers  are  followed  by  two  laborers  burning  bolts  from 
the  angle  bars.  The  number  of  bolts  left  per  joint  is  governed  by  the  size  and  curvature 
of  the  rail.  The  next  operation  is  picking  up  and  loading  the  rail  on  two  heavy-duty 
push  cars  towed  by  a  heavy-duty  motor  car.  The  bolt  burner,  operated  from  the  motor 
car,  burns  the  remaining  bolts  from  the  joints  just  ahead  of  the  motor  car.  Two  laborers 
equipped  with  a  claw  bar  and  spike  maul,  which  are  carried  on  the  rear  push  car,  pull 
the  remaining  spikes  and  knock  off  the  angle  bars.  One  of  these  laborers  then  positions 
the  rail  tongs  on  the  rail  to  be  removed,  and  it  is  loaded  by  a  suitable  off-track  or 
on-track  crane.  A  suitable  off-track  crane  provides  the  most  rapid  method  of  loading, 
as  it  has  to  move  forward  only  one-half  rail  length  to  deposit  the  rail  on  the  push  cars. 
Small  scrap  is  piled  by  three  laborers  on  on  side  of  the  roadbed.  As  the  cross  ties  are 
graded,  the  salvageable  ties  are  pulled  to  the  same  side  of  the  roadbed  as  the  scap  by 
the  three  additional  laborers.  A  bulldozer  then  plows  the  bad  ties  to  the  opposite  side 
of  the  roadbed,  and  at  the  same  time  builds  a  roadway  for  dump  trucks  to  operate 
over  in  removing  the  salvage  material  to  the  loading  point.  In  this  operation,  involving 
18  men,  an  a%rerage  of  1060  lin  ft  of  track  per  day  can  be  recovered. 

(b)  Double  or  Multiple  Track.  The  track  to  be  retired  is  first  jacked  out  of  the 
ballast,  and  the  metal  materials  are  completely  dismantled  and  loaded.  The  scrap  ties 
are  then  removed,  piled  and  burned,  while  the  salvageable  ties  are  bundled,  banded  and 
loaded  for  shipment  to  a  sorting  and  storage  location  for  future  shipment  orders.  Some 
of  the  equipment  used  in  this  operation  are:  power  jack,  power  spike  pullers,  bolt 
machines,  speed  swings,  etc.  The  entire  field  operation  requires  a  gang  of  44  men  and 
results  in  an  average  production  of  4600  lin  ft  of  track  per  day. 

(c)  Bath  Double  or  Multiple  Truck  <in<l  Single  Truck.  Power  spike  pullers  begin, 
one  on  each  rail,  pulling  all  spikes  and  removing  all  tie  plates.  Three  ties  per  rail  art- 
then  respiked  to  allow  machinery  and  cars  to  pass  over  the  track.  Holt  machines  and 
oxyacetylene  burning  outfits  are  used  to  take  off  the  bolts.  If  the  bolts  come  off  easil} 
there  will  be  less  need  to  cut  the  bolts  with  a  cutting  torch.  One  bolt  per  angle  bar  is 
left  to  allow  machinery  and  cranes  to  pass  over  this  track.  One  assistant  foreman  .mil 
15  laborers  are  Used  to  remove  tie  plate-,  re-spike  track  and  load  tie  plates  .mil  hum  el 
laneous  scrap.  The   tie   plates  are   loaded   into    the   bucket    ol    a    power   shovel   and    then 


280 


Economics    of    R  a  i  1  w  a  y    Labor 


«95^ 


°< 


O     q; 

< 


Z 
< 

o 

O 

z 
< 


o 


en 

o 

z 

> 
o 

2 

UJ 

or 


o 


co 
o 

M 


wo  5 

I- h-  *■ 


>o§< 


°  z 

El 

-i      er 

JO< 
3  2  O 

0.  UJ  2 

<f>  cc  5 

u  O  u 

Sf!5 

or  ^  <*- 


uj  2 
^  O 


<  uj  H 


o  9, 


o 
<  CO 


Z  K   o 


2  a  z 


u.  < 

o  s 

UJ 

o  o 

O  U. 


<r  z 


z  o 

</>  <J  u. 
UJ 

E  o  o 

r  z  w 

O  7  CD 

o  §  i 

O  o  o 

»  k  * 

?  9  ^ 


>  ►- 


<I   O   o 


o  <»  o 


O    2   tt    Zff 

u.  uj  S  S  Jr. 


<r  <r  tr  tr  < 

o  o  o  o  2 

CD  CD  CD  00  |_ 

<  <  <  <I  X 

J  J    J  J  LU 

<T  C\J    —  —  — 


2 
9:    O 


uj   <    uj   uj   i: 


O  O  ut 


_  2 
*f?  O  i  S 
10   CD   z> 

O  O 


*"   *    h  ^* 

o  a.  g  to 
<d  3  tr  co 
•looto 


J    <     J    Id   h     < 

ro   —  rO   — 


NlOlJi/llCNCOcJlO 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


281 


£•<*< 


-|C 


mO 

"'   '    o 

£     »-tou. 

Ul          bJ  _  uj 

1 

tt  10  >  *-  _JUJ 

s 

Q  *  2,  ,oz 

oo  Su'z< 

<  <  UJ  -J  31 

fc 

jtito.  odo 

■    i    •    . 

A 

£!  *  *  <r 

»- 

o 

If 

o 

5 

o^< 


<  _  10 


5  °- 
uj  -  w 
5:  tr  o. 

s  5  °-  UJ 
a  oc  o  r 
aco 


crx'S* 
<fc<£ 

oosg 

houico 

<3fe< 


V) 

Z       UJ 

o     ^ 


o  < 


t 


fc  a  ui 

</>  cr  0. 

6  if  j 

< 

I    0-  UJ 

x   0  1 
to 

UJ 

10  0.  |_ 

1-  to  5 

-J  to 

FASTEN - 
ONTAINERS 
JOINT  BARS 
TIES  GONDO 
RAIL   HOOK 

a.  0 

UT   BOL 
PULL 
BAR  0 

PICK  U 
RY  TO 
OOSEN 
STACK 
•  APPLY 
CABLE 

0  10  CO 

to  5    •   to  10  uj 
tr  S  tr  tr  tr  _i 

UJ        Ul  UJ  UJ  0 

•   <r  <r 

1,1  SEK« 

tr  cO  a:  tr  tr  7 

Q   O  0U 

LABO 

INGS 

LABO 

LABO 

LABO 

a  HA 

J    ID    11 

UJ    <    <  c 

J    _)    _l(t 

CVV 


5£ 


CM    CJ         fO  —    CM  CM 


<  <0    _)  to 

o<r  »-    . 

ZOD« 
111  CD  O  t 


to 

UJ 

or* 
uj  a. 
or  to 

gu. 

<  d 

_i  a 


uj  a 

I  K 


< 

N 

Z 
< 

<r 
o 

z 
< 

(9 


< 
cr 

Q. 

o 

Q. 


bx> 


<     zz 

or      ui  uj 
uj       22 

CL  Q.   Q. 

0      55 

ui""  O  O 

7  tr  uj  uj 

-   UJ 

r  o  *  * 

o  -1  tc  <* 

4  uj  o  O 

5  *  *  * 


-    J^   (M  CM  fO  CM 


5* 

<   UJ 

2  cr 

ui  O 


u  <C  1-  tr 


282 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

are  dumped  into  a  gondola  car.  Spikes,  bolts,  anchors  and  miscellaenous  scrap  are 
thrown  into  their  respective  gondola  cars  towed  by  a  150-hp  rubber-tired  tractor. 
Moving  back  to  the  rear  gang,  which  consists  of  1  extra  gang  foreman  and  10  laborers, 
1  mechanic  and  various  machines;  the  remaining  bolts  in  the  angle  bars  are  cut  off,  and 
the  remaining  spikes  from  the  ties  are  pulled.  Spikes,  bolts  and  angle  bars  are  loaded 
on  one  of  two  push  cars  behind  a  30-ton  crane.  The  other  push  car  behind  the  crane 
carries  the  cutting  torch  and  oxygen  and  acetylene  tanks.  On  the  cable  of  the  crane  are 
two  sets  of  rail  tongs  and  three  feet  of  chain  to  allow  for  the  picking  up  of  two  rails 
at  a  time.  The  crane  swings  around  and  loads  rails  on  a  car  in  front  of  the  crane.  In  the 
salvaging  of  the  ties,  the  first  thing  that  is  done  is  to  pull  out  the  ties  that  are  not 
usable.  One  man  does  this  operation.  With  forks  attached  to  large  power  shovels  the 
operators  pick  up  anywhere  from  30  to  60  ties,  depending  on  the  size  of  the  shovel. 
The  operators  then  go  back  to  the  gondola  cars  situated  behind  the  crane  and  dump 
the  ties  in  these  cars.  If  the  ties  are  to  be  stockpiled,  pre-made  cable  slings,  %  in  by  30 
ft,  are  placed  for  each  group  of  60  ties.  This  number  is  handled  quite  easily  by  a  small 
dragline  at  the  stockpile.  After  the  day's  work  is  finished,  a  work  train  comes  in  and 
takes  out  all  the  loads  and  respots  the  empty  cars  for  the  next  day's  program.  Approxi- 
mately two  miles  of  track  are  recovered  each  day,  involving  an  expenditure  of  800 
man-hours. 

RIPPING  METHOD 

The  basis  of  this  method  is  the  use  of  a  specially  designed  "ripper"  or  "sled"  which. 
when  pulled  by  an  engine  or  some  other  power  means,  quickly  separates  the  rails  from 
the  ties,  and  also  makes  other  operations  easier.  One  railroad's  operation  in  track  removal 
using  the  above  method  is  described  below. 

Preparatory  to  the  operation  of  the  rippers,  two  men  with  power  wrenches  remove 
two  of  the  four  bolts  from  each  joint.  They  also  loosen  the  other  two  bolts  for  expe- 
diting complete  removal  later  by  hand.  At  the  same  time,  other  trackmen  remove  all 
rail  anchors  from  the  rails.  When  CTC  projects  are  involved,  turnouts  for  passing  tracks 
are  also  installed  at  this  time. 

The  track  is  now  ready  for  operation  of  the  ripper.  The  ripper  consists  of  a  heavy 
structural  steel  frame  from  the  rear  of  which  a  large-diameter  round  steel  bar  extends 
outward  from  each  side.  The  frame,  which  is  narrow  enough  to  fit  between  the  running 
rails,  is  open  at  the  top  and  bottom  and  has  a  short  nose  at  the  front  end  to  which 
towing  cables  are  fastened. 

The  ripper  is  used  with  a  work  train  consisting  of  a  caboose,  a  locomotive,  a  work 
car  on  which  the  ripper  is  transported,  and  a  30-ton  diesel  locomotive  crane.  The  ripper 
is  placed  on  the  track  to  be  removed,  with  the  frame  resting  between  the  rails,  and  the 
towing  cables  are  attached  to  the  crane.  Spikes  are  then  pulled  by  hand  from  each  run- 
ning rail  for  a  distance  of  one-half  rail  length.  A  pair  of  joint  bars  is  removed  from  each 
rail  and  the  rails  are  raised  high  enough  to  permit  the  side  extensions  of  the  ripper  to 
be  pulled  beneath  them. 

The  work  train  then  moves  ahead  at  a  speed  of  about  3  mph.  The  lower  flanges 
of  the  frame  hold  the  ties  down  while  the  side  extensions  raise  the  rails,  causing  the 
spikes  to  be  pulled  by  the  base  of  the  rail  (Fig.  3).  About  60  percent  of  the  spikes  are 
pulled  out  by  the  ripper.  The  other  spikes,  having  been  driven  into  ties  renewed  within 
the  last  few  years,  resist  pulling.  This  causes  the  ties  to  move  along  and  bunch  until 
the  spikes  are  either  ejected  or  the  spike  heads  bend  sufficiently  to  allow  the  rails  to 
be  lifted  and  freed, 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


283 


Fig.   3 — Ripping  track  with  a  sled. 


It  is  now  relatively  easy  for  the  trackmen  to  remove  the  remaining  two  bolts  from 
the  joints.  They  also  pull  any  spikes  not  already  pulled,  and  pile  the  bars,  bolts,  anchors, 
tie  plates  and  spikes  for  magnet  loading.  A  foreman  and  two  trackmen  classify  and 
mark  the  rails  for  loading,  after  which  a  work  train  follows  and  loads  the  rails  and 
bars.  A  second  pass  of  the  work   train  loads  the  other  track  materials. 

Also,  with  the  ties  now  up  where  they  can  be  inspected,  the  ones  found  not  suitable 
for  reuse  are  piled  and  either  burned  or  given  to  neighboring  farmers.  The  usable  ties 
are  picked  up  by  a  suitable  off-track  loader  equipped  with  a  two-prong  fork  and  piled 
on  the  embankment  shoulder.  Later,  these  ties  are  loaded  into  cars  by  a  crane  and 
shipped  to  other  points. 

There  are  numerous  other  variations  on  the  ripping  method  of  taking  up  track. 
Some  of  these  arc:  (1)  Use  of  a  rail  sled  in  removing  spikes  without  the  aid  of  an\ 
type  of  individual  spike  pullers.  A  joint  bar  is  removed  and  the  rail  threaded  through 
the  nose  and  over  the  roller  of  the  sled.  The  sled  is  then  pulled  along  by  attaching  a 
cable  to  it  and  a  bulldozer.  This  method  is  applicable  to  single-track  only.  (2)  A  gang 
of  approximately  11  men  is  assigned  to  prepare  the  tracks  and  do  the  oecessarj  hand 
work  involved   with  the  retirements. 

After  this  preliminary  work  is  completed  all  of  the  remaining  work  is  performed 
by  machine  operators  and  equipment.  A  bulldozer  pulls  the  sled  to  loosen  the  rail  from 
the    tics.   The   rail    so    freed    is    burned    into    strings    "i    10    rail    lengths    each,    which    are 


284 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

dragged  by  the  bulldozer  to  a  highway  grade  crossing  loading  location.  At  this  point 
the  rails  are  loaded  onto  a  tractor  trailer  and  taken  to  a  loading  site.  If  the  loading  site 
is  adjacent  to  a  track  where  a  gondola  car  can  be  placed,  the  tractor  trailer  is  not 
used  and  the  rail  is  loaded  directly  into  the  cars.  All  of  the  bolts  and  bars  are  burned 
off  at  the  loading  location  and  handled  into  cars  via  a  dump  truck  to  a  loading  location. 
Miscellaneous  other  track  materials  are  loaded  onto  a  home-made  sled,  and  as  the  bull- 
dozer pulls  the  sled  the  small  materials  are  loaded  by  hand  or  with  a  front-end  loader. 
The  operation,  which  is  applicable  to  single  or  multiple  track,  requires  a  total  of  17 
men  and  permits  recovery  of  approximately  2000  lin  ft  of  track  per  day. 

PANELIZING  METHOD 

Panelizing  methods  can  be  considered  to  be  made  up  of  four  steps.  These  are: 
(1)  panelizing,  (2)  recovery  of  the  panels,  (3)  disassembly  of  the  panels,  and  (4)  load- 
ing the  component  parts  that  make  up  the  panel.  After  steps  (1)  and  (2)  have  been 
completed,  the  panels  are  usually  shipped  in  gondola  cars  to  a  central  location  where 
they  are  either  dismantled  on  the  ground  or  dismantled  by  means  of  a  mechanized 
dismantling  operation. 

The   following  is  a   general  description  of  one  panel-track  recovery  method. 

The  bolts  and  joint  bars  of  the  abandoned  track  are  removed.  The  joint  bars  re- 
moved are  spiked  to  the  ties  on  the  end  of  the  panel.  The  rail  anchors  are  removed  and 
one  rail  is  pulled  to  square  the  joints  to  make  a  39-ft  panel.  The  bolts  and  nuts  are 
hung  on  the  end  of  the  rail,  where  the  bars  are  removed  with  a  hand  wrench.  An  as- 
sistant foreman  and  three  men,  with  a  power  bolt  machine,  hydraulic  spike  puller,  spike 
mall,  clawbar,  etc.,  are  used  in  this  operation.  A  bulldozer  and  an  operator  are  used  to 
pull  the  rail  to  square  the  joints  (Fig.  4).  Sixty  to  70  panels  are  prepared  per  day  by 
this  force,  the  higher  figures  being  obtained  on  tangent  track  and  lower  figures  where 
the  curvature  is  heavy. 

The  actual  loading  of  the  panels  is  done  by  a  gang  consisting  of  a  foreman  and 
four  men,  one  of  whom  is  a  crane  operator.  A  25-ton  truck-crane  is  used  to  load  the 
panels  in  a  work  train.  Three  panels  are  loaded  in  each  gondola  car.  On  one  job  the 
average  number  of  panels  loaded  per  day  was  48,  while  the  maximum  number  loaded 
was  90.  Track  occupancy,  which  averaged  about  2^4  hr  per  day,  was  the  controlling 
factor  in  this  operation.  A  panel  lifting  device  (Fig.  5)  materially  speeds  up  the  loading 
operations.  This  panel  lifting  device  automatically  clamps  on  the  rails  on  each  panel  and 
the  panel  lifter  is  automatically  released  when  the  panel  is  laid  in  the  gondola  car  and 
the  strain  on  the  cable  is  released.  The  cars  are  then  sent  to  a  central  dismantling  plant. 

One  dismantling  plant  is  set  up  under  an  overhead  craneway  (Fig.  7).  The  stripping 
bed  consists  of  two  rows  of  scrap  ties  set  on  the  ground  workwise,  and  extends  for 
360  ft  parallel  to  the  craneway  and  parallel  to  the  track  on  which  the  cars  are  unloaded, 
and  on  which  the  cars  loaded  with  panels  are  placed  for  unloading.  A  tie-handler  ma- 
chine sorts  and  piles  the  times  from  the  stripping  operation.  Two  classifications  of  ties 
are  made,  relay  and  scrap.  The  gang  doing  this  work  consists  of  a  foreman,  seven  track- 
men, a  track-equipment  operator  who  operates  the  tie  handler,  and  an  operator  for  the 
overhead  crane.  This  totals  10  men.  The  gang  is  equipped  with  special  tools,  including 
a  hydraulic  spike  puller,  electric  impact  wrenches,  and  air-operated  banding  tools.  The 
work  is  organized  on  a  production-line  basis.  The  average  number  of  panels  being  dis- 
mantled per  day  is  29.  The  tie  plates  and  angle  bars  recovered  are  tossed  to  one  side 


Economics   of    Railway    Labor 


285 


Fig.  4 — Squaring  joints  in  a  panelizing  operation. 


Fig.  5 — Loading  panels  with  a  25-ton  truck  crane. 


>86 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


Fig.    6 — (Not   referred   to    in   text) — Panelizing   single   track   retirement 
using  demountable  trucks  with  attached  rail   rack. 


Fig.  7 — Centralized  panel-dismantling  plant  with  overhead  crane. 


Economics    of    Railway   Labor 287 

of  the  stripping  bed,  while  the  spikes,  bolts,  nuts,  nutlocks,  screw  spikes,  rail  anchors, 
etc.,  are  dropped  into  the  stripping  bed  between  the  ties  in  the  panel  being  dismantled. 
All  other  track  material  is  handled  by  a  magnet  attached  to  the  overhead  crane,  and 
the  relay  ties  are  bundled  10  to  a  bundle  and  bound  together  with  a  single  steel  band. 

Sorting  of  other  track  material  is  done  by  the  stores  department.  Material  to  be 
reclaimed  is  sorted  into  piles,  separating  it  from  usable  material  that  can  be  used  upon 
requests.  The  scrap  ties  are  loaded  on  a  push  car  by  the  tie  handler  and  the  push  car 
is  towed  by  the  same  machine.  While  panels  to  be  stripped  are  being  placed  on  the 
stripping  bed  by  the  overhead  crane,  the  tie  handler  transfers  the  scrap  ties  from  the 
push  car  to  a  dump  truck  for  disposal.  The  banded  relay  ties  are  loaded  into  drop-end 
gondolas  by  the  overhead  crane  for  distribution  to  locations  where  tie  renewals  are 
scheduled  for  the  following  working  season. 

Where  turnouts  are  removed,  the  portion  of  the  turnout  from  stock  rail  joints 
ahead  of  the  switch  points  for  a  distance  of  39  ft  from  these  stock  rail  joints,  is  sal- 
vaged intact.  This  is  so  that  the  switch  plates,  rods,  points,  stock  rails,  etc.,  can  be 
salvaged  for  re-use  as  a  unit. 


A  recently  developed  hydraulically  operated  straddle  crane  (Fig.  8)  is  expected  to 
be  used  by  one  railroad  for  picking  up  retired  single  track  in  panels.  Although  final 
plans  have  not  been  completed,  tentative  plans  are  as  follows: 

A  crew  comprised  of  an  assistant  foreman,  machine  operator  and  six  trackmen  will 
first  square  up  the  joints  to  form  track  panels,  covering  about  one  mile  per  day.  Two 
power  wrenches  will  be  used,  one  for  unbolting  and  the  other  for  rebolting  one  bolt 
per  joint.  A  tractor  will  be  used  to  pull  one  of  the  rails  to  square  the  joints,  and  four 
trackmen  will  restore  the  bars  as  well  as  loosen  the  spikes  on  tight  ties  which  resist  rail 
movement. 

The  shoulders  of  the  ballast  and  roadbed  section  will  be  plowed  down  to  permit 
the  straddle  crane,  with  its  wheels  at  about  17J/  ft  centers,  to  straddle  the  track  without 
sliding  one  way  or  the  other  and  crowd  the  cars  being  loaded.  The  straddle  crane  will 
then  lift  a  track  panel  and  carry  it  back  to  a  gondola  car.  A  locomotive  crane  will  be 
used  to  move  the  train  of  cars  as  well  as  for  lifting  the  straddle  crane,  which  weighs 
about  7  tons,  over  bridges.  It  is  anticipated  that  48  track  panels  will  be  loaded  daily 
by  this  method. 


The  following  is  a  brief  outline  of  another  centralized  highly  mechanized  dismantling 
operation  (Fig.  9). 

Panels  arrive  at  a  central  location,  such  as  the  scrap  and  reclamation  plant,  on 
regularly  scheduled  trains,  and  are  stored  in  the  yard.  The  required  number  of  cars  are 
switched  into  the  scrap  and  reclamation  plant  and  placed  on  the  proper  track  at  the 
dismantling  area.  This  is  done  each  night  by  a  regular  yard  engine.  A  40-ton  locomotive 
crane,  stored  at  the  working  site,  unloads  the  panels  from  the  gondola  cars  and  then 
flips  or  turns  them  over  onto  the  dismantling  machine  with  the  rails  down  (Fig.  10). 
The  panels,  by  means  of  rollers,  are  then  moved  toward  the  front  end  of  the  machine 
where  the  movement  of  the  rails  are  stopped  by  a  steel  post.  A  cable  driven  spring 
loaded  accumulator  mechanism  or  "rabbit"  (Fig.  11)  is  then  senl  out.  which  travels 
under  the  ties  until  it  reaches  the  end  of  the  pane]  and  then  is  brought  back,  pushing 
the  ties  with  it  while  leaving  the  rail  in  place.  The  rails  t In  1 1  slide  down   ramps  on  both 

sides  ol   'he  machine  and  are  later  picked  up  by  tin    crane  and  placed  in  nearby  cars. 


288 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


Fig.  8 — Handling  panels  with  a  straddle  crane. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


289 


h- 

O 

h- 

z 

O 
U 

-1 

-> 

1- 

U 

S 

z 

< 

o\ 

z 

10 

z 
o 

bib 

o 

t- 
< 

to 

a 

or 

UJ 

UJ 

N 

a. 
o 

Z 

< 

I 

o 

UJ 

2E 

in 

z 

o 

o 

_l 

< 

K 

290 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

The  tics,  one  by  one,  are  accepted  by  the  dismantling  machine  which  has  knife  blades 
that  pry  the  tie  plates  from  the  tics  (Fig.  12).  The  tie  plates  and  spikes  fall  down  onto 
a  conveyor,  while  the  ties  are  conveyed  and  dumped  into  one  of  two  groups  (Fig.  13). 
The  crane  picks  up  these  bundles  of  ties  and  places  the  good  ties  into  unloaded  gondola 
cars,  and  the  bad  ones  into  a  pile  where  they  are  later  burned  toward  the  end  of  each 
trick  (this  is  a  two-trick  operation).  After  each  trick  there  is  a  general  cleaning  of  the 
site  and  the  debris  in  the  gondola  cars.  This  operation  uses  a  total  of  13  men  for  the 
2  shifts,  and  handles  an  average  of  over  65  panels  a  day. 


The  greater  the  degree  of  mechanization  in  these  methods  the  lower  the  man-hour 
costs.  From  the  sampling  of  man-hours  and  unit  costs  secured  from  many  representa- 
tive railroads,  the  following  figures  show  the  range  in  labor  costs  for  the  three  methods 
described: 

Man-Hours/ 
Method  Track-Mile 

Conventional    400-1200 

Ripping     300-  500 

Panelizing      250-  400 

Some  railroads  in  their  track-removal  programs  have  found  it  more  economical  to 
put  this  work  out  to  bid,  selling  the  track  in  place  and  retaining  certain  material  for 
re-use  on  the  property  rather  than  performing  this  work  with  their  own  forces. 

The  specifications  for  the  removal  of  tracks  by  a  contractor  vary  according  to  the 
amount  of  material  to  be  retained  by  the  railroad  and  the  number  and  type  of  struc- 
tures involved  within  the  limits  of  the  retirement.  In  general,  the  railroad  retains  all 
rail  of  sections  suitable  for  relay,  and  such  other  track  material  as  turnouts,  angle  bars, 
compromise  joints,  tie  plates,  rail  anchors,  and  treated  ties,  which  can  be  utilized  in 
normal  construction  and  maintenance  of  the  railroad's  tracks.  The  contractor  takes  all 
scrap  rail,  unsalvagable  ties,  and  track  fastenings  of  the  lighter  weight  rail  sections. 
In  addition,  the  contractor  normally  takes  all  lumber  and  bridge  timbers  of  such  condi- 
tion that  reclaiming  and  treatment  would  not  be  economical  to  the  railroad. 

In  some  instances  there  are  decided  advantages  in  selling  abandoned  lines  on  the 
"as-is,  where-is"  basis.  However,  it  is  suggested  that  the  railroads  who  sell  on  an  "as-is, 
where-is"  basis  take  a  good  look  at  the  spread  in  prices  between  scrap  sold  on  that 
basis  compared  to   current  prices  obtainable  for  classified  scrap. 


(Text  continued  on  page  293) 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


291 


Fig.   10 — Inverted  panels  being  placed  on  dismantling  machine  rack. 


Fig.    11 — "Kabbit'    separating  ties  from  rail. 


292 


Economics    o  1    Railway    Labor 


Fig.  12— Prying  blades  and  hydraulic  action  separate  tie  plates  from  ties. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


29.* 


Fig.   13 — Tie   sorter  at  mechanized  panel-dismantling  plant. 


TIE  LOADING 

Many  railroads  have  devised  various  ingenious  methods  for  the  loading  of  ties 
(Figs.  14  to  18  incl.).  In  this  report  one  method  is  described  below  as  a  representative 
sample. 

The  tie  conveyor-loader  is  basically  a  bulldozer  without  a  blade,  two  hydraulically 
driven  conveyors  and  two  rooters  in  front  of  the  machine.  The  rooters  plow  up  the 
cross  ties  from  the  roadbed,  and  then  convey  them  up  to  a  height  of  approximate^  12 
ft  and  onto  a  cross  conveyor,  which  sends  them  into  waiting  gondola  cars.  The  machine 
is  used  in  conjunction  with  a  work  train  containing  a  number  of  open  gondola  cars. 
The  work  train  is  positioned  on  the  track  adjacent  to  the  location  where  the  ties  are 
to  be  removed  and  remains  stationary.  The  tie  conveyor  loading  machine  is  then  sel  in 
motion  and  loads  ties  into  cars  as  it  travels  alongside  the  work  train  (Fig.  18).  When 
the  full  length  of  the  train  has  been  traversed  the  tie  conveyor-loading  machine  is  then 
halted  while  the  work  train  is  positioned  once  again  for  loading.  When  the  train  is 
again  ready  for  loading  the  tie  conveyor-loading  machine  is  set  in  motion  and  the  opera- 
tion is  repeated.  Approximately  6  to  7  passes  are  mule  before  a  car  is  fully  loaded. 
Approximately  28  to  30  ties  are  put  into  each  ear  on  each  pass.  The  average  number 
of  ties  loaded  per  hour  is  500.  An  average  of  4  hr  of  work  train  time  has  been  obtained 
tor  an  average  daily  production  of  -7000  loaded  ties.  A  foreman,  one  operator,  two  men 
in  fronl  of  the  machine  to  straighten  the  ties,  and  three  men  in  the  cars  are  required 
for  this  operation.  Salvaged  ties  are  haded  in  ear-,  for  4  percent  of  the  new  tie  cost. 
This  includes  the  cost  of  classifying,  plugging  --pike  hole-  and  work  train  expenses 

Text  continued  on  page  2^7) 


294 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


Fig.  14 — Tie  rooter  and  bundler. 


**.  ■■■ 


Fig.   15 — Tie  loading  machine. 


Economics    of    R  a  i  1  w  a  y    L  a  l>  o  r 


296 


E  c  i)  n  (i  in  i  (  -    o  i    Rail  \\  :i  \     L  a  li  o  r 


Fig.  17 — Rubber-tired  tie-loading  crane  at  work. 


Fig.    18 — Crawler  tie  conveyor-loader. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


297 


Fig.  19 — Ballast  loader  section  of  ballast  reclaimer. 


BALLAST  RECLAIMING 

Because  there  are  many  ballast-reclaiming  operations  now  in  use  by  various  rail- 
roads, it  would  be  impossible  to  describe  all  the  different  methods  used.  One  method 
of  ballast  reclaiming  involves  the  use  of  three  separate  off-track  pieces  of  machinery: 
(1)  a  road  grader,  (2)  a  ballast  loader  (Fig.  19),  and  (3)  a  ballast  cleaner.  The  grader 
windrows  the  ballast  by  making  two  passes.  The  windrow  generally  forms  a  parabola 
of  material  18  in  deep  with  a  base  of  Al/2  ft,  which  gives  6.5  cu  yd  of  ballast  to  the  rail 
length.  The  grader  can  windrow   1    mile  an  hour  with  ease. 

Basically,  the  off-track  ballast  cleaner  consists  of  a  vibrating  4-  by  8-ft  rod-deck 
screen  which  is  mounted  on  a  stripped-down  truck  body  (Fig.  20).  The  power  take-off 
from  the  trucks'  engine  drives  variable-volume  pumps  for  the  several  hydraulic  motors. 
A  set  of  hydraulic  valves  for  controlling  the  screen  and  conveyors  is  located  on  each 
side  of  the  cleaner. 

In  operation,  the  cleaner  is  towed  backwards  by  the  loader  which  feeds  the  ballast 
into  the  screen's  hopper.  After  vibrating  and  shaking  out  the  fouled  material  from  the 
ballast,  the  clean  ballast  travels  up  the  main  elevator  conveyor  and  is  placed  in  the  6-ft 
between  two  adjacent  tracks  (Fig.  21)  or  on  the  outside  of  the  ties  across  two  adjacent 
tracks  by  means  of  a  delivery  chute  attachment.  The  reclaimed  ballast  can  also  be 
loaded  into  dump  trucks  or  hopper  cars.  An  8-ft  wasting  conveyor  is  used  to  cast  the 
<lirt  and  fines  that  are  screened  out  to  either  side.  The  machine  can  operate  at  the  rate 
of  150  tons  per  hour. 

Placing  reclaimed  ballast    on   adjacent    tracks  produces  a    saving  of   approximately 

twice  the  cost  of  purchasing  and  distributing  new  ballast  with  ;i  work  train.  The  savings 


298 


Economics   of    Railway    Labor 


Fig.  20 — Ballast  cleaner  section  of  ballast  reclaimer. 


Fig.  21 — Ballast  reclaimer  placing  screened  ballast  on  adjacent  track. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


299 


Fig.  22 — Another  type  of  ballast  reclaimer  placing  ballast  in  hopper  cars. 


involved  in  switching,  road  haul  and  other  intangible  costs  make  this  method  of  ballast 
recovery  especially  desirable. 

Another  type  of  ballast  loader-reclaimer  with  a  shaker  screen  for  cleaning  the  stone 
(having  a  capacity  of  200  to  250  tons  per  hour)  is  in  use  on  several  other  railroads 
(Fig.  22).  A  bulldozer  windrows  the  stone,  making  as  many  passes  as  necessary  depend- 
ing on  the  depth  of  ballast  to  be  recovered.  The  ballast-reclaiming  machine  powers  its 
way  into  the  windrowed  stone,  picking  up  the  stone  on  belt  conveyors,  and  dropping 
it  on  a  shaker  screen  for  cleaning.  The  machine  then  places  the  cleaned  stone  on  a  belt 
conveyor  which  discharges  the  stone  into  a  hopper  car.  The  dirt  and  fines  from  the 
cleaning  operation  are  wasted  on  slopes  of  the  roadway  adjacent  to  the  remaining  track 
or  tracks.  This  machine  is  also  utilized  to  place  ballast  on  adjacent  tracks  scheduled 
for  surfacing. 

On  the  basis  of  new  stone  costing  $1.50  per  ton  and  a  labor  cost  of  $3.00  per  hour, 
the  total  cost  of  placing  this  stone  in  track  amounts  to  $3.50  a  ton.  Where  the  salvaged 
ballast  can  be  immediately  recovered  from  an  adjacent  track,  a  savings  as  high  as  $2.60 
per  ton  can  be  realized. 

This  report  is  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be  discontinued. 


300 Economics   of    Railway    Labor 

Report  on  Assignment  7 

Labor  Economies  in  Track  Maintenance  to  Be  Derived 

Through  Use  of  Combination  On-Off-Track 

Equipment  Vs.  On-Track  Equipment 

Only 

T.  L.  Kanan  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  F.  Beaver,  0.  C.  Benson,  R.  F.  Bush,  \Y.  E. 
Chapman,  P.  A.  Cosgrove,  C.  G.  Davis,  M.  H.  Dick,  R.  L.  Fox,  L.  G.  Gilbert, 
R.  R.  Gunderson,  G.  L.  Harris,  K.  E.  Henderson,  H.  W.  Kellogg,  L.  A.  Loggins, 
V.  L.  Ljungren,  T.  D.  Mason,  R.  L.  Mays,  M.  S.  Reid,  R.  G.  Simmons,  N.  E. 
Smith,  J.  T.  Ward,  N.  H.  Williams,  H.  E.  Wilson,  F.  R.  Woolford. 

A  number  of  railroads  are  realizing  the  real  economies  to  be  gained  by  replacing 
strictly  on-track  work  equipment  with  combination  on-off-track  equipment  to  obtain 
diversification   and   more   flexible   operations. 

On-track  equipment,  such  as  rail  layers,  clam  shovels,  locomotive  cranes,  bridge 
derricks,  pile  drivers,  etc.,  are  being  replaced  with  combination  on-off-track  machines 
such  as  special-swing,  light-  and  heavy-duty  full-revolving  cranes  with  self-compensating 
guide  wheels,  giving  highway  mobility  on  track.  Operated  by  one  man,  this  equipment 
has  various  attachments,  including  telescoping  line  hydraulic  boom ;  positive  hydraulic 
rail  tongs  which  eliminate  all  labor  in  lifting  and  guiding  rail;  ditching  bucket  with 
ripper  teeth;  magnet;  forks;  tote  hooks;  snow  thrower;  fork  tie  bailer;  and  rail 
threader.  Savings  of  up  to  25  percent  can  be  realized  with  this  type  of  equipment. 

As  an  example,  one  railroad  has  the  problem  of  cleaning  ditches  in  mountainous 
territory.  For  years  a  work  train  and  steam  ditcher  worked  up  and  down  the  main  line, 
loading  material  which  rolled  off  mountain  sides  into  railway  ditches.  The  time  came 
when  this  outfit  had  an  average  track  occupancy  of  only  2  hr  in  a  10  hr  day,  making 
the  operation  very  expensive.  Upon  consulting  with  manufacturers,  a  machine  with  both 
flanged  wheels  and  rubber-tired  wheels  was  designed.  The  wide  axles  and  larger  tires 
made  it  possible  for  this  machine  to  move  along  the  track,  spanning  both  rails,  that  is, 
the  tires  move  on  the  ties  just  outside  of  the  two  rails.  The  larger  tires  also  enabled 
the  machine  to  "walk"  over  the  track  without  the  aid  of  crossing  planks.  In  some  in- 
sances  the  retractable  flanged  wheels  were  used  for  locomotion  where  conditions  required. 
One  operator,  a  helper,  and  protection  consistent  with  local  conditions  and  rules  are 
used.  On  most  sections  of  mountainous  territory,  it  is  permissible  to  give  protection  by 
train  order  and  thus  eliminate  manual  flagging.  To  make  the  machine  even  more  ver- 
satile, it  was  equipped  with  a  telescopic  boom  which  can  rotate  360  deg,  so  it  could  be 
used  for  rock  scaling,  shovel,  or  backhoe  work. 

Later,  trucks  equipped  with  side-dump  boxes  were  acquired  to  assist  the  above 
described  equipment.  These  trucks  are  equipped  with  retractable  flanged  wheels  and  can 
be  used  both  on  and  off  track.  Savings  in  the  neighborhood  of  $18,000  per  year,  not 
counting  the  investment   in  work   train  locomotives  and  air-dump  cars,   were   realized. 

One  man  operates  the  equipment,  with  remote  control  when  crane  is  in  use.  A 
portable  set-off  device  is  provided  for  this  machine  to  permit  quick  set-off  for  passing 
trains.  The  crane  can  be  used  to  lay  rail,  both  welded  and  conventional.  Quick-change 
attachments  provide  efficient  handling  of  all  types  of  work  assignments.  One  road  states 
that  one  on-off-track  crane  can  replace  two  on-track  machines,  paying  for  itself  with 
just  one  year's  work. 


Economics    of    Railway    Labor 301 

Handling  of  pre-assembled  turnouts  and  panelled  track  has  resulted  in  reduced  labor 
to  handle  materials.  Savings  of  from  30  to  40  percent  have  been  cited. 

Trucks  of  various  kinds  have  been  equipped  with  4-wheel  friction  drive  and  retrac- 
table Banged  wheels  which  raise  and  lower  hydraulically ;  also  aerial  work  equipment, 
a  derrick  and  catwalk  make  for  safer  operation.  They  have  been  used  for  clearing  train 
wrecks  quickly,  working  on  or  off  track,  depending  on  whether  a  roadway  parallels  the 
track.  Sometimes  50  percent  of  labor  is  saved  by   using  this  type  of  equipment. 

Some  railroads  have  equipped  these  same  trucks  with  spraying  attachments  for 
bridge  painting.  In  one  case  two  bridges  were  painted  in  one  day,  where  this  could  not 
have  been  done  before  because  of  the  time  necessary  to  move  from  one  work  site  to 
another.  The  savings  in  this  instance  were  stated  to  be  tremendous. 

One  railroad,  recently,  with  outside  technical  help,  designed  a  new  weed-spray  truck 
with  flanged  guide  wheels  which  are  hydraulically  retractable  to  permit  use  on  or  off 
track.  Built  on  a  basic  truck  frame,  the  outfit  is  equipped  with  steel-cord  tires,  heavy- 
duty  battery,  a  maximum-output  generator,  hydraulic  system  from  power  take-off  for 
activating  spray  room,  and  a  3-in,  300-gpm  at  16  psi  refilling  and  recirculating  pump. 
On  the  truck  frame  is  mounted  a  3000-gal-capacity  oval  steel  tank.  An  expanded-metal 
platform  was  built  over  the  entire  top  for  handling  chemicals  through  an  ample  man- 
hole in  the  top.  A  3-in  perforated  pipe  was  run  the  full  length  near  the  bottom  of  the 
tank  for  jet  agitation  and  recirculating  from  the  pump.  Mechanical  agitators  complete 
end-to-end  movement  of  the  chemicals  in  the  tank.  The  boom  arrangements,  permit 
selective  spraying  over  seven  areas,  controlled  by  a  12v  electric  solenoid  valve  operated 
from  push-button  panels  in  the  truck  cab.  For  brush  spraying  a  turret  that  swings  from 
one  side  of  the  truck  to  the  other  on  a  universal  movement  head  is  used.  It  has  three 
pressure  trigger-operated  guns  with  an  adjustable  pattern.  Two  power-operated  hose 
reels,  one  on  each  side,  carry  100  ft  of  1  in  hose  and  adjustable  pattern  guns  for  off-track 
-praying. 

The  use  of  weed-spray  trucks  has  enabled  railroads  to  bring  under  control  its  weed 
problem  both  on  main  line  and  yard  tracks  because  more  flexible  programs  can  be  set 
up,  permitting  spraying  when  conditions  require.  In  many  instances  this  has  reduced 
weed  growth  to  the  point  that  control  can  be  attained  by  using  low  maintenance  dosages 
of  chemicals,  reducing  the  cost  of  the  work.  One  truck  driver  and  one  operator  are 
needed  to   operate  the  spray  equipment. 

Numerous  pickup  trucks  and  jeeps  have  been  provided  with  flanged  wheels  for  on- 
or  off-track  snow-plowing  work,  producing  savings  of  25  percent  labor  in  terminals. 
The  economies  in  having  equipment  ready  for  emergencies  in  insolated  places  during 
storms  has  not  been  ascertained  at  this  time. 

SUMMARY 

In  -ummarizing  this  report,  on-off-track  equipment,  which  can  clear  for  trains  in 
moments,  with  the  aid  of  portable  setoffs  when-  parallel  roads  are  not  available,  has 
produced  savings  up  to  50  percent.  It  can  be  used  interchangeably  tor  bridge  and  build- 
ing work  anfl  track  work,  providing  increased  efficiency  and  economies. 

Thi>  report  is  furnished  :i-  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be  discontinued. 


302  Economics    of    Railway    Labor 


Report  on  Assignment  8 

Labor   Economies   to    Be   Derived    from   the    Welding, 

Distributing,  Laying  and  Maintenance  of 

Continuous  Welded  Rail 

W.  J.  Jones  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  F.  Beaver,  R.  F.  Bush,  R.  H.  Carpenter, 
J.  A.  Caywood,  J.  F.  Chafin,  P.  A.  Cosgrove,  C.  G.  Davis,  L.  E.  Donovan,  W.  M. 
S.  Dunn,  R.  L.  Fox,  R.  R.  Gunderson,  V.  C.  Hanna,  G.  L.  Harris,  C.  W.  Owens, 
T.  D.  Mason,  R.  L.  Mays,  R.  W.  Preisendefer,  M.  S.  Reid,  J.  T.  Ward,  G.  E. 
Warfel,  H.  E.  Wilson,  F.  R.  Woolford,  D.  H.  Yazell. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  on  the  labor  economies  to  be  derived 
from  the  welding,  distributing,  laying  and  maintenance  of  continuous  welded  rail.  This 
study  was  made  in  collaboration  with  the  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail. 

Foreword 

Earlier  reports  dealing  with  the  economics  of  welded  rail  appear  in  the  Proceedings, 
Vol.  54,  1953,  pages  1170-1173,  and  Vol.  58,  1957,  pages  1064-1066. 

To  obtain  quantitative  data  essential  to  the  preparation  of  this  report,  a  question- 
naire was  sent  to  35  committee  members.  There  were  23  returns,  representing  20  railroads. 
Of  those  reporting,  65  percent  use  continuous  welded  rail.  Most  of  the  returns,  however, 
were  statistically  incomplete,  indicating  that  not  all  users  of  welded  rail  really  know 
what  it  costs  them  to  handle,  lay  or  maintain  continuous  welded  rail.  In  some  cases  it 
was  explained  that  the  railroad  reporting  had  not  had  welded  rail  in  track,  long  enough, 
or  in  sufficient  quantity,  to  provide  meaningful  information.  Yet,  there  is  ample  evidence 
to  show  that  labor  economies  to  be  derived  from  the  use  of  welded  rail  are  real,  and 
relatively  substantial,  even  if  such  economies  cannot  be  stated  precisely,  on  an  industry- 
wide basis,  in  this  report. 

General 

The  returns  to  the  questionnaire  contained  miscellaenous  information  which  should 
be  of  general  interest  to  anyone  making  a  study  of  the  economics  of  welded  rail. 

Selected  pertinent  items  follow: 

Approximately  one-half  the  using  railroads  get  their  rail  welded  by  contract,  off 
property.  Use  of  the  gas  pressure  method  outnumbers  the  electric  method  two  to  one, 
but  the  trend  is  toward  the  electric.  Actually,  beginning  in  1958,  a  majority  of  rail  welded 
annually  has  been  by  the  electric-flash  butt  process.  New  rail  (high  carbon,  silicon,  and 
alloy  steels),  as  well  as  second-hand  rail,  are  weldable  by  either  process. 

The  length  of  finished  welded  rail  varies  among  railroads  from  a  few  hundred  feet 
to  2400  ft,  with  1440  ft  still  by  far  the  most  common  length.  At  least  one  railroad  field 
welds  1440-ft  ribbons  together.  There  is  no  minimum  length  of  rail  used  in  welding, 
such  length  being  governed  by  the  "shorts"  supplied  by  the  mill. 

Welded  rail  is  laid  on  tangents  and  light  curves,  generally  up  to  3  deg.  A  few  rail- 
roads lay  continuous  welded  rail  on  6-deg  curves,  with  one  road  reporting  no  curvature 
restriction.  Transposing  welded  rail  on  curves  presents  no  unusual  problem. 


Economics   of    Railway    Labor 303 

Welding 

Of  all  computable  savings  associated  with  the  use  of  welded  rail,  the  initial  savings 
are  the  quickest  and  simmplest  to  determine.  Furthermore,  they  are  probably  the  most 
accurate.  Since  they  represent  the  difference  in  cost  of  a  weld  and  the  joint  assembly 
replaced,  it  might  be  argued  that,  in  the  strictest  sense  of  the  term,  there  are  no  labor 
economies  to  be  realized  from  the  sheer  act  of  welding.  For  the  purpose  of  this  assign- 
ment, however,  your  committee  considers  the  initial  savings  as  a  credit  to  labor,  since 
labor  makes  up  the  largest  part  of  the  cost  of  producing  a  weld  and  is  controllable. 

Obviously,  the  initial  savings  are  not  the  same  for  all  railroads,  due  to  the  differ- 
ences in  rail  sections,  joint  designs  and  welding  costs.  Reported  values  of  joints  installed 
ranged  from  $11.34  to  $15.75,  while  welding  costs  varied  from  $5.04  to  $14.50,  with  an 
unweighted  average  of  $10.32.  Correlating  welding  costs  and  joint  costs,  savings  were 
calculated  to  be  as  much  as  $7.00  or  more  per  weld.  We  can  reasonably  expect  that 
these  economies  will  become  even  greater  as  material  prices  increase  on  account  of  wage 
push-ups  and   welding  costs  decrease   through   improved   welding  techniques. 

Distributing 

Handling  continuous  welded  rail  by  use  of  specially  equipped  cars  permits  welded 
rail  to  be  disrtibuted  faster,  safer  and  more  economically  than  conventional  rail. 
Originally,  single-tiered  cars  carrying  twelve  1440-ft  strings  were  the  universal  design. 
Now.  multitiered  cars  of  greater  rail  carrying  capacity  are  commonplace,  as  it  is  recog- 
nized that  labor  savings  are  approximately  directly  proportional  to  the  number  of 
welded  rails  in  the  load. 

Unloading  the  first  pair  of  strings  usually  takes  20-30  min ;  subsequent  pairs  half 
this  time.  According  to  the  information  received,  welded  rail  can  be  disrtibuted  with  45 
to  50  percent  fewer  man-hours  than  consumed  in  distributing  39-ft  lengths.  All  respond- 
ents were  in  very  close  agreement  regarding  comparative  rail  unloading  costs  and  the 
extent  of  labor-reduction  possibilities.  But  wide  disagreement  appeared,  between  rail- 
roads, in  regard  to  how  much  labor  was  used  in  unloading  welded  rail,  ranging  from 
JS   to   150  man-hours  per   mile. 

Laying 

Virtually  the  same  equipment  and  labor  organization  arc  engaged  in  laying  either 
welded  rail  or  conventional  rail.  The  replies  indicate  that  the  cost  of  laying  is  about 
the  same  in  either  case,  but  the  extreme  variances  reported  cast  doubt  upon  their  reli- 
ability. Consequently,  no  cost  figures  are  given,  to  prevent  misleading  conclusions  being 
drawn. 

Maintenance 

Maintenance  savings  were  furnished  by  only  three  roads.  Others  explained  that  they 
have  not  had  welded  rail  in  service  long  enough  to  produce  dependable  data.  Based 
<>n  information  received,  a  maintenance  saving  of  around  S200  per  mile  per  year  is 
indicated. 

Other  Economic  Factors 

Other  economic  factors  commented  on  in  return-  to  the  questionnaire  dealt  with 
additional    rail    anchors   and    bigger   ballast    section    requirement-,    reduced    joint    mainte- 


J04 Economics    of    Railway    Labor 

nance  (cross  slotting,  rail  end  welding,  cropping,  bolt  tightening,  etc.),  increased  tie  life, 
reduced  spotting,  extended  surfacing  cycles,  reduced  hazard  of  rail  end  failures,  smoother 
riding  track  and  decreased  equipment  wear. 

CONCLUSIONS 

Real  and  attractive  labor  economies  result  from  the  use  of  welded  rail,  and  such 
economies  are  being  enjoyed  by  an  increasing  number  of  American  railroads.  It  is 
expected  that  future  welds  will  become  better  in  quality,  lower  in  cost.  Economies  from 
welding  will  become  more  substantial  as  material  prices  rise  and  welding  costs  drop 
on  account  of  technological  developments. 

It  is  recommended  that  no  further  studies  be  made  on  this  subject  until  continuous 
welded  rail  has  been  in  track  long  enough  for  maintenance  cost  data  to  be  meaningful. 
Further,  your  committee  urges  the  using  railroads  to  develop  significant  statistics  toward 
the  end  of  keeping  the  railroad  industry  informed. 


Report   of    Committee   27 — Maintenance   of   Way 
Work  Equipment 


R.  S.  Radspinner, 

Chairman 
R.  W.  Railey, 

Vice  Chairman 
R.  M.  Johnson,  Secretary 
S.  E.  Tracy 
J.  O.  Elliott 
H.  E.  Keniston 
L.  E.  Conner 
M.  E.  Kerns 


R.  O.  Cassini 
R.  M.  Baldock 
T.  S.  Bean 
R.  E.  Berggren 
R.  E.  Buss 
L.  B.  Cann,  Jr. 
G.  R.  Collier 
B.  E.  Cors 

D.  E.  Cowell 

J.  W.   Cum  mings 
A.  C.  Danks,  Jr. 
K.  J.  De  Camp 
V.  L.  Emal 

E.  H.  Fisher 
W.  T.  Friedline 
Wm.   Glavin 

H.  D.  Hahn 
S.  E.  Haines,  Jr. 
\V.   T.   Hammond 
E.  W.  Hodgkins,  Jr. 
Haynie  Hornbuckle 
R.  A.  Hostetter 
X.  W.  Hutchison 
\V.  R.  Jacobs 
R.   K.  Johnson 
\V.   F.   Kohl 
\V.   E.   Kropp 
Jack  Largent 


William  Lenco 

C.  F.  Lewis 

H.  J.  Lieser 

H.  F.  Longhi.it 

W.   M.   Lutts 

G.  J.  Lyon 

C.  E.  McEntee 

C.  F.  Montague 

A.  \V.  Munt 

V.  W.  Oswalt,  Sr. 

H.  C.  Pottsmith 

J.  E.  Reynolds 

T.  R.  Rigsby 

J.  W.  Risk 

G.  E.  Roberts 

F.  E.  Short 

F.  N.  Snyder 

M.   M.    Stansbury 

J.  E.  Sunderland,  Jr. 

M.   C.  Taylor 

T.  H.  Taylor 

H.  A.  Thyng 

C.  R.  Turner 

Alfred  Wisman.  Jr. 

F.  E.   Yockey 

G.  L.  Zippikian 

Committee 


Those   whose    names   are   set   in    bold-face    type   constitute   the   Engineering    Division,    AAR,    C"iii- 
mittee  27. 

To   The  American   Railway  Engineering  Association: 

Your  Committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Study  was  continued,   hut   no  report  is  submitted  this  year 

1.  (a)   Revision  of  Handbook  of  Instructions  for  Care  and  Operation  of  Main- 
tenance of  Way  Equipment. 
Progress  report,  including  recommended  additions   pag< 

improvements  to  be  made  to  existing  work  equipment. 

Committee  is  assembling  information   to   be  included   in   report    lor    191 

3.  Standardization    of   parts  and  accessories  for  work   equipment. 

No  report  this  year.  Studies  are  being  completed  on  hydraulic  tanks  and 
their  component  parts.  Other  systems  are  to  be  studied  for  the  develop 
ment  of  specifications  and  Manual  material. 

4.  Reclaiming   and    extending   sendee    life    of   machine    parts   by    metallizing, 
plating  and  welding. 

Final  report,  presented  as  information    pag 

305 


306 Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 

5.  Maintaining,    testing   and    repairing    hydraulic    equipment   and    other   com- 
ponents used  on  work  equipment. 

Final  report,  presented  as  information    page  316 

6.  Procurement   and  stocking  of   parts  and  materials  for  the   repair  of  work 
equipment. 

Final  report,  presented  as  information    page  324 

S.  Equipment  for  the  control  and  performance  of  jacking  in  surfacing  opera- 
tions. 

Additional  research,  including  studies  of  new  equipment,  is  being  conducted. 
Final   report  will  be  presented  in   1963, 

The  Committee  on  Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment, 

R.  S.  Radspinner,  Chairman. 


AREA   Bulletin   575,   December   1962. 

Report  on  Assignment  1   (a) 

Revision   of   Handbook   of   Instructions   for   Care 

and   Operation  of   Maintenance  of  Way 

Equipment 

S.  E.  Tracy  (chairman,  sbcommittee) ,  T.  S.  Bean,  R.  E.  Berggren,  R.  O.  Cassinj,  D.  E. 
Cowell,  A.  C  Danks,  J.  O.  Elliott,  W.  T.  Hammond. 

Investigation  has  developed  that  four  more  machines  now  have  sufficient  distribution 
and  use  to  warrant  writing  instructions  covering  their  care  and  operation.  These 
machines  are: 

1.  Ballast  Distributor — Cleaner 

2.  Tie  Spacer— Type  2 

3.  Air  Compressors — Rotary  Type 

4.  Tie   Tamper — Multi-Tool,   Mechanical,   Vibratory 

It  is  recommended  that  these  instructions  be  included  in  the  next  edition  of  the 
Handbook. 

BALLAST  DISTRIBUTOR-CLEANER 

1963 

DESCRIPTION:  A  self-propelled,  four-wheel,  track-mounted  unit 
consisting  of  a  diesel  engine  driving  an  ain  brake  compressor  and 
three  single  pumps  (three  double  pumps  with  cleaning  attachment), 
for  hydraulic  propulsion  through  6-speed  transmission,  two  hy- 
draulically  driven  bucket  conveyors,  and  hydraulic  cylinders  for  ver- 
tical control  of  conveyors  and  ballast  hopper.  Adjustable  scoops 
funnel  ballast  into  bucket  conveyors  which  deposit  this  material  in  a 
1^2-cu-yd-capacity  ballast  hopper  equipped  with  ports  to  properly 
position  ballast  and  vertical  control  to  obtain  desired  depth.  Controls 
are  located  in  a  cab  for  one-man  operation.  (Cleaning  attachment 
includes,  in  addition,  two  vibrating  screens  actuated  by  hydraulic 
motors,  and  a  hydraulically  driven  reversible  dirt  conveyor  belt) . 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment  307 

USE:    To    pick   up  new   or   exisitng   ballast   from   center-ditch    and 

shoulder   and   place  in   proper   position   and   depth   for   tamping.   To 

dress    and    equalize  ballast    behind    surfacing    operation.    (To    clean 

ballast  and  convey  dirt  to   berm   if  equipped  with  clenaing  attach- 
ment). 

APPROXIMATE  WEIGHT:   24,000  lb 

26,8501b  (with  cleaner) 

DIMENSIONS:   Height:   9  ft  0  in   (working),  12  ft  0  in  (traveling) 
Length:    18  ft  0  in 

Width:   10  ft  0  in  (conveyors  retracted) 
12  ft  0  in  (conveyors  working) 

SPEEDS:   6,   18  and  30  mph   (traveling) 
800  to  1500  ft  per  hr  (working) 

MANUFACTURER'S    RECOMMENDED    SPEED:     Engine,     1800 
rpm  (under  load) 

CAPACITIES:  Ballast  hopper:  44  cu  ft  (standard  machine) 

33  cu  ft  (with  cleaner) 
Hydraulic  reservoir:   50  gal 
Diesel  fuel  tank:   50  gal 
Sanders:  250  lb  each 

CARE  AND  OPERATION: 

3.2.50  Daily  inspection  shall  be  made  of  the  following: 

a  Engine  water  coolant. 

b   Crankcase  oil  level. 

c  Hydraulic  oil  tank  level. 

d  Air  brake  compressor  oil  level. 

e  Engine  air  niters. 

f  Sand  level  in  sanders. 

Hydraulic  System 

3.2.51  Sixty-gallon  tank  should  be  filled  to  sight  gage,  or  50  gal 
of  approved  hydraulic  oil. 

3.2.52  Use   SAE    10   for  temperatures   between   zero   and  30  deg; 
SAE  20  for  30-70  deg,  and  SAE  30  for  70  to  100  deg  F. 

Pressure  Adjustments 

3.2.53  Shim   relief   valve  at  rear  of  valve   bank  to   1200  psi. 

3.2.54  Adjust  all  other   relief   valves  to    1150  psi. 

General 

3.2.55  Valves  in  pump  intake  lines  must  la-  open  before  starting. 

3.2.56  Oil    filters    should    be   cleaned    when    chancing   oil   or    more 
often  when   necessary. 

3.2.57  Oil   tank   vent   filter  shall   lie  (leaned   weekly. 


308 Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 

3.2.58  Check  frequently  for  loose  connections,  leaking  motor 
seals  and  cylinder  packing,  and  defective  hoses. 

Transmissions 

3.2.59  Fill   to    proper   level   with   SAE   90  lubricant 

Brakes 

3.2.60  Check  oil  level  in  compressor. 

3.2.61  Check  belt  tension  daily. 

3.2.62  Keep  brake  shoes  in  adjustment  to  prevent  over-travel  of 
brake  diaphragms. 

3.2.63  Set   parking  brake  when  machine  is  unattended. 

Conveyors 

3.2.64  Hard  surface  or  cutting  edge  of  buckets  should  be  renewed 
in  place  on  machine  by  electric  welding. 

3.2.65  Slack  in  conveyor  chain  is  taken  up  at  bottom  of  frame, 
and  should  measure  4J4  to  Sy2  in  from  underside  of  conveyor  frame 
at  center  pin.  When  take-up  exceeds  4  in,  one  link  should  be  removed. 

3.2.66  Keep  lower  idler  sprocket  in  line  with  chain.  Special  tool 
furnished  for  attaching  buckets. 

3.2.67  Replace  wear  plates  on  top  side  of  conveyor  frame  before 
chain  wears  frame. 

Ballast  Scoops 

3.2.68  Replace  wear  plates  when  worn  to  protect  scoops. 

Hopper  and  Chute 

3.2.69  Replace  wear  plates  when  worn  to  protect  hopper  and 
chutes. 

Lubrication 

3.2.70  Apply  grease  to  conveyor  bearing,  drive  chain  idler  sprock- 
ets and  hopper  guides  daily. 

3.2.71  Pack  journals  with  wheel  bearing  grease  yearly. 

3.2.72  Remove  plug  and  grease  transmission  jack  shaft  pillow 
blocks  yearly. 

TIE  SPACER— TYPE  2 

1963 

DESCRIPTION:  A  self-propelled,  four-wheel,  track-mounted 
unit,  hydraulically  operated,  with  independently  operating  tong  as- 
semblies, one  on  each  side  of  the  machine.  The  tong  assemblies  are 
lowered,  clamped  and  raised  hydraulically.  The  spacer  is  moved  by 
a  hydraulic  cylinder  connected  to  an  electric  rail  brake  for  tie  spac- 
ing. It  is  powered  by  an  air  cooled  gasoline-powered  unit,  with 
an  automotive  type  transmission  used  to  connect  the  hydraulic  mo- 
tor  to   the  chain  drive  axle.  Brakes  are  electric-rail-brake  type. 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 309 

USE:  Spacing  ties  and  correcting  slewed  tie  conditions  ahead  ol 
power  jacks  or  hand  jacks  in  a  surfacing  gang,  where  the  track 
has  been  skeletonized. 

WEIGHT:   8000  lb 

LENGTH:   16  ft  0  in.  HEIGHT:   S  ft   10,  WIDTH:   8  ft  .V/i  in 

TRAVEL  SPEED:    25   mph 

MANUFACTURER'S  RECOMMENDED  SPEED:  Engine,  1800  rpm 

GENERATOR   CAPACITY:    36   v.   20   amp,   750  w 

CAPACITIES:   Hydraulic  system:   30  gal 
Pump  pressure:    800  psi 

CARE   AND   OPERATION: 

Power  Unit 

3.30.30  The  operator  must  make  daily  inspection  of: 
a  Crankcase  oil  level 

b  Hydraulic  tank   oil  level 

Hydraulic  System 

3.30.31  Check  oil-level  sight  gage  on  oil  reservoir  and  keep  filled 
to   middle   of   sight   gage,  or  as  specified  by  manufacturer. 

3.30.32  Hydraulic  oil  should   be  changed  before  each  season. 

3.30.33  Daily  inspection  should  be  made  of  all  hose  and  connec- 
tions and  defects  promptly   corrected. 

Brakes 

3.30.34  Emergency    hand    brake    must    be    set    when    machine    is 
unattended. 

3.30.35  Brake    clamping   devices   are   in   proper   adjustment    when 
there  is  y»  in  between  wear  strip  and  top  of  rail. 

Transmission 

3.30.36  Keep   filled   to  proper  operating  level,  use  SAE  90  below 
32  deg  and  SAE  140  above  32  deg  F. 

Lubrication 

3.30.37  See    that    machine    is    properlj     lubricated    in    accordance 
with    manufacturer's    recommendations. 

Traveling 

3.30.38  Make   sure   that    spacer   tongs   are   secured   in    the   raised 
position. 

3.30.39  Do  not  apply  the  electric  brake  while  traveling  at  or  near 

the  maximum   authorized  speed. 

Electric  Generator 

3.30.40  The  generator  should  be  kept  clean. 


310 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

AIR   COMPRESSORS— ROTARY  TYPE 
1963 

CARE  AND  OPERATION: 

General 

3.5.25  Operators  and  others  concerned  in  the  operation  of  this 
type  of  air  compressor  shall  be  governed  by  the  applicable  rules 
covering   Air   Compressors — All   Types. 

3.5.26  After  engine  has  stopped,  this  type  of  compressor  must 
not  stand  idle   with  pressure  in   the  separator-receiver. 

Starting  Engine 

3.5.27  Before  starting  the  engine,   be  governed  by  the   following; 

a  Open  all  service  and  relief  valves  to  relieve  pressure  in 
the  separator-receiver. 

b  Close  all  service  and  relief  valves  immediately  after 
engine  starts  to  build  up  full  air  pressure  and  provide  proper 
lubrication. 

c  Set  manual  throttle  controls  for  fast  idle  and  leave  in 
that  position  until  engine  and  compressor  have  reached 
operating  temperatures. 

d  When  the  above  temperatures  have  been  reached,  re- 
lease and  lock  out  manual  controls,  thereby  permitting  auto- 
matic controls  to  govern  engine  speed. 

e  If  unit  has  clutch  between  engine  and  compressor,  the 
engine  must  be  stopped  before  clutch  is  engaged  to  prevent 
damage  to  sliding  vanes  in  the  compressor. 

Stopping  the  Engine 

3.5.28  When  stopping  the  engine,  or  if  it  stops  for  some  reason, 
open  all  service  and  relief  valves  immediately. 

Safety  Devices 

3.5.29  Safety  valves  on  separator-receiver  shall  be  operated  by 
hand  every  day   to  insure   that  it  is  in  operating   condition. 

3.5.30  Shutdown  devices  on  these  units  and  the  power  plant  which 
drives  them  shall  not  be  disconnected  or  otherwise  made  ineffective. 

3.5.31  If  unit  is  shut  down  by  such  devices,  determine  cause  and 
correct  it  before  attempting  to  operate  the  unit. 

Connecting  the  Header 

3.5.32  This  type  of  compressor  must  not  be  connected  to  a  com- 
mon header  with  any  other  units  of  any  type,  or  to  any  other 
source  of  compressed  air  unless  an  approved  type  of  check  valve  is 
connected  between  the  header  and  the  compressor. 

3.5.33  This  type  of  compressor  should  not  be  operated  against 
zero  or  low  line  pressures,  except  as  follows: 

3.5.34  When    used   on    pump-up   jobs,   partially   close   the   service 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 311 

valves  to  maintain  a  minimum  of  60  psi  until  line  pressure  is  equal 
to  this  pressure,  after   which  the  service  valve  may  be  fully  opened. 

Lubrication 

3.5.35  It  is  important  that  only  an  approved   type  <>!   oil  he  used 
in   the   separator-receiver. 

Filters — Strainers 

3.5.36  Filters  and  strainers  should  be  cleaned  or  replaced  at  regu- 
lar intervals  in  accordance  with  the  manufacturer's  recommendations. 

3.5.37  The    secondary    oil    separator    element    should    be    replaced 
alter   one  vear  of  service. 


TIE   TAMPER— TYPE   2,    MULTI-TOOL, 

MECHANICAL,   VIBRATORY 

1963 

DESCRIPTION:  A  self-propelled,  four-wheel,  track-mounted  unit 
consisting  of  a  diesel  engine  power  unit  for  propulsion  and  drive 
of  air  compressor  and  hydraulic  pumps.  Tamper  consists  of  an  in- 
dependent unit  over  each  rail  forward  of  the  front  axle  on  which 
are  mounted  four  hydraulic  cylinders  which  support  two  tamping 
tools  each.  Mechanical  vibration  by  eccentric  action  is  imparted  to 
the  tamping  tools.  A  pilot  air  system  provides  control  of  the  ma- 
chine's hydraulic  functions.  Machine  has  rail  clamps  and  four  hy- 
draulic jacks  for  setting  off.  The  controls  are  for  one-man  operation. 
A  four-wheel  hydraulic  brake  system  and  a  cable-operated  hand 
brake  are   provided. 

USE:   As  a  production  tamper,  a  spot  tamper,  or  a  jack  tamper. 

WEIGHT:  31,000  lb 

DIMENSIONS:  Length,  21  ft  4  in 
Height,  8  ft  10  in 
Width,  8  ft  8  in 

TRAVEL  SPEED:   First    gear,  2.74  mph 

Second   gear,  5.04      " 

Third   gear,  8.82      " 

Fourth  gear,  15.10      " 

Fifth    gear,  23.95      " 

MANUFACTURER'S  RECOMMENDED  SPEED:   Endue.  1700  rpm 

I    OPACITIES:   Fuel   tank.  45^    ga] 

Tampinc  units,   23    gal  hydraulic  oil  each    ride 
Raising  and  lowering  system,  54.4  nal  hydraulic  oil 


312 Maintenance    of   Way   Work    Equipment 

CARE  AND  OPERATION 

Starting  Power  Unit 

3.31.100  Before  starting  engine,  the  operator  must  make  inspec- 
tion of: 

a  Engine  water  coolant. 

b  Crankcase  oil  level. 

c  Oil  level  in  the  three   hydraulic  oil  tanks. 

Hydraulic  Systems 

3.31.101  Reservoirs  must  be  kept  filled  to  operating  levels  with 
approved   hydraulic   oil. 

3.31.102  Oil  must  be  changed  once  a  year,  or  season. 

3.31.103  Daily  inspection  must  be  made  of  all  piping  and  hose 
connections  and  all  defects  corrected  promptly. 

Brakes 

3.31.104  Emergency  brake  must  be  set  when  machine  is  unat- 
tended, or  off  track. 

Transmission  and  Gear   Boxes 

3.31.105  Keep  filled  to  proper  level  with  SAE  90  gear  lubricant. 

Tamping  Head 

3.31.106  Safety  suspension  pins  of  the  tamping  units  must  be 
positively  secured  when  machine  is  in  traveling  position,  or  when 
men  are  performing  work  under  the  tamping  heads. 

3.31.107  Tamping  heads  should  be  in  raised  locked  position  when 
traveling,  or  when   machine  is  being  set  off  track. 

Set-Off 

3.31.108  Safety  pins  must  be  inserted  when  machine  is  being  set 
off  the  track. 

3.31.109  Set-off  rail  pedestals  must  be  properly  blocked  to  prevent 
machine   from  tipping. 

3.31.110  When  stored,  the  machine  hand  brake  must  be  set  and 
machine  secured  to  set-off  rails  with  chain  and  locked. 

Lubrication 

3.31.111  Manufacturer's  lubrication  chart  outlining  points  for 
lubrication  at  intervals  of  5  hr,  10  hr,  20  hr,  50  hr,  100  hr,  and 
200  hr  must  be  followed. 

While  Tamping 

3.31.112  Operators,  and  others,  shall  keep  clear  of  the  work  heads 
while  machine  is  tamping. 

3.31.113  All  belt  guards  and  other  protective  shields  must  be  in 
place  before  tamping  is  commenced  after  machine  repairs. 

3.31.114  Do  not  actuate  tamping  units  with  safety  latch  removed 
when  machine  is  on  set-off. 


Maintenance    of   Way    Work    Equipment 313 

Cleanliness 

3.31.115  Employees  assigned  to  operate  this  machine  must  keep 
it  as  clean  as  consistent  with  the  work  being  performed  in  order  that 
leaks  may  be  detected  and  bearing  temperatures  noted  to  prevent 
loss  in   production   speed   and  premature   failures. 


Report  on  Assignment  4 

Reclaiming    and    Extending    Service    Life   of   Machine 
Parts   by   Metallizing,   Plating   and   Welding 

L.  E.  Conner  (chairman,  subcommittee),  H.  E.  Keniston,  R.  M.  Baldock,  J.  W.  Cum- 
mings,  V.  L.  Emal,  H.  Hornbuckle,  R.  K.  Johnson,  C  F.  Lewis,  C  F.  Montague, 
T.  R.  Rigsby,  J.  W.  Risk,  F.  N.  Snyder,  F.  E.  Yockey,  G.  L.  Zipperian. 

This  is  a  final  report,  presented  as  information. 

While  several  processes  or  methods  are  used  in  the  reclamation  of  various  work 
equipment  machine  parts,  the  three  most  commonly  used  are  welding,  metallizing  and 
plating.  Quite  a  number  of  railroads  use  one  or  more  of  these  processes  in  their  reclama- 
tion work  and  report  considerable  savings  as  a  result. 

Spray  metallizing  was  first  used  more  than  20  years  ago,  and  the  method  of  appli- 
cation has  progressively  improved  to  the  extent  that  today  very  satisfactory  results  are 
obtained.  Proper  preparation  of  the  surface  prior  to  metallizing  has  always  been 
stressed  in  order  to  insure  a  permanent  bond. 

Industrial  hard  chrome  plating  of  various  parts  has  been  in  use  for  a  number  of 
years,  and  this  process  has  been  found  to  be  economical  and  satisfactory,  and  materially 
increases  the  service  life  of  the  reclaimed  parts  many  times  over. 

The  welding  process  has  been  in  use  for  reclaiming  cracked  or  broken  parts  of 
various  machines  and  castings  for  just  about  as  long  as  the  art  of  welding  has  been  in 
existence.  Welding  has  also  been  used  extensively  in  building  up  and  restoring  worn  parts. 

Metallizing 

About  25  years  ago,  a  process  for  reclaiming  certain  worn  parts  was  developed 
which  involved  the  use  of  coil  wire  fed  through  a  gun,  melted  by  oxygen  and  acetylene 
gas,  and  blown  onto  the  part  by  compressed  air.  This  is  known  as  metallizing  by  the 
spray  method.  Since  the  original  development  of  this  process  rapid  strides  have  been 
made  in  the  further  development  of  the  equipment  and  materials  used  in  the  process. 
It  is  now  possible  to  obtain  metals  of  almost  any  desired  analysis  for  application  by 
this  -pray  method.  In  addition  to  solid  wires,  there  lias  also  been  developed  around 
this  basic  principal  a  group  of  metal  powders  in  various  screen  sizes  to  be  sprayed  on  a 
part  to  the  desired  dimensions.  After  the  powder  is  sprayed,  it  i-  bonded  to  the  part  by 
heating  to  the  diffusion  point  with  an  oxyacetylene  torch,  or  heating  in  a  furnace.  There 
are  several  grades  and  analyses  of  this  powder  available,  primarily  of  high  alloys  con- 
sisting principally  of  tungsten  carbide  aggregate,  nickel,  chromium,  carbon,  silicon,  boron. 
copper  and  molybdenum. 

Particular  care  must  be  used  in  preparing  ;i  part  to  be  reclaimed  1  > >  metal  spraying. 
There  arc  two  methods  of  doing  this.  One  involves,  first,  the  reduction  of  the  area  ol 
the  part,  leaving  a  threaded  surface,  next,  shol  cleaning  the  surface  with  small  steel  shot, 


314 Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 

then  spraying  with  commercially  available  molybdenum  to  a  thickness  of  0.001  to 
0.002  in.  On  highly  stressed  parts,  reduction  in  part  size  must  be  held  to  a  minimum. 
\  good  machine  finish  sprayed  with  a  0.001-  to  0.002-in  layer  of  molybdenum  will 
usually  give  a  Rood  mechanical  bond;  however,  the  threaded  method  is  preferred. 

When  the  metallizing  spray  method  is  used  in  the  reclamation  of  crank  shafts,  it  is 
entirely  satisfactory  for  babbitt  bearings;  however,  when  copper-lead  or  aluminum  bear- 
ings are  used  it  is  necessary  to  seal  the  sprayed  metal  with  a  high  temperature  wax  or 
plastic  material.  Plastic  material,  because  of  its  high  melting  point,  is  preferred. 

When  the  metallizing  method  is  used  to  reclaim  piston  rods  or  internal  parts  subject 
to  high  pressure,  as  in  hydraulic  systems,  the  sealing  of  these  parts  with  the  plastic 
material  must  be  done  to  prevent  pressures  working  behind  the  sprayed  material  and 
damaging  it.  Parts  subjected  to  impact  should  not    be  metallized. 

Chrome  Plating 

Many  parts  used  in  work  equipment  can  be  reclaimed  by  the  use  of  hard  chrome 
plating.  Chrome  plating  will  not  only  reclaim  the  part  and  make  it  serviceable,  but  in 
practically  all  instances  where  chrome  plating  is  suitable  as  a  reclamation  process,  the 
service  life  of  the  part  will  be  increased  from  a  minimum  of  two  up  to  five  or  six  times 
its  original  service  life. 

The  following  is  a  partial  list  of  work  equipment  parts  suitable  for  reclamation  by 
plating:  hydraulic  cylinder  piston  rods,  pneumatic  cylinders  and  pistons,  paving  breakers, 
tamping  tools  and  impact  wrenches,  worn  surfaces  on  shafting,  bearing  fits  on  shafting, 
guide  bars  and  shafts  subjected  to  sliding  motions,  and  gasoline  and  diesel  engine  crank 
shafts  of  all   sizes. 

Hard  chromium,  as  differentiated  from  decorative  chromium,  is  applied  for  func- 
tional reasons,  regardless  of  thickness.  If  a  0.00005 -in  deposit  is  applied  over  a  part 
with  a  hardness  of  63  Rockwell  C  scale,  then  it  is  a  hard  film  only  because  the  base 
metal  is  hard.  If  this  same  thickness  is  applied  over  a  part  with  an  unhardened  surface, 
then  this  coating  of  chromium  will  not  be  any  harder  than  the  base.  If,  however,  a 
deposit  of  0.0015  to  0.002  in  is  applied  over  this  same  unhardened  part,  a  really  hard 
surface  will  be  obtained.  In  short,  a  deposit  over  0.001  in  thick  is  essential  before 
chromium  will  assume  its  true  hardness  characteristics  when  used  over  unhardened  base 
metals,  whereas,  over  a  hardened  base,  such  thickness  is  not  necessary  because  of  the 
substantial  backing  provided. 

Chromium  plate  is  hard  and  dense,  has  a  lower  coefficient  of  friction  than  any  other 
metal,  gives  good  corrosion  resistance  to  most  materials,  and  has  good  antigalling  proper- 
ties as  long  as  it  is  not  used  against  itself.  Despite  its  hardness,  it  should  not  be  used 
as  a  general  substitute  for  hardening  but  only  when  properly  engineered  for  this  pur- 
pose. Chromium's  main  attribute  is  its  low  coefficient  of  friction  and  should  be  the  main 
reason   for  fitting  it  into  most  programs. 

One  of  the  most  frequent  and  successful  uses  of  hard  chromium  is  on  shafts  of  all 
sizes  and  descriptions.  Both  new  and  old  shafts  can  be  conditioned  by  depositing  0.005 
to  0.006  in  of  chromium  and  regrinding  to  size,  leaving  a  residual  thickness  of  0.003  in. 
Where  salvage  operations  warrant,  it  is  not  unusual  to  apply  0.060  to  0.090  in  of 
chromium  and  regrind. 

Applying  deposits  up  to  as  much  as  %  in  thick  are  now  standard  procedures  in  the 
salvage  of  diesel  shafts.  Some  roads  are  now  first  applying  a  heavy  nickel  undercoat 
followed  by  machining,  and  then  finishing  up  the  last  0.005  to  0.010  in  with  chromium, 
thereby  eliminating  the  heavy  pitted  conditions  that  can  occur  in  extra-heavy  deposits. 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 315 

One  of  hard  chromium's  little-discussed  attributes  is  its  ability  to  dampen  vibra- 
tion. This  is  more  useful  in  bearing  seats  in  critical  operations  that  must  be  vibration 
free. 

Most  parts  to  be  hard  chrome  plated  have  been  either  machined  or  ground,  which 
means  that  cold-working  stresses  and  strains  are  usually  present.  These  should  be 
alleviated  by  a  heat  treatment  prior  to  putting  on  the  hard,  brittle  chromium  deposit 
that  will  greatly  accentuate  the  stress  factors.  The  proper  stress-relieving  temperature 
should  be  determined  by  the  type  and  hardness  of  the  metal  used  in  the  part.  If  the 
part  is  made  of  an  unhardened  material,  then  .<50  deg  F  can  be  used  as  a  good  stress- 
relieving  temperature.  The  time  of  bake  can  be  determined  by  the  cross  section  of  mate- 
rial in  the  part  being  handled.  For  example,  a  small  part,  say  J4  by  2  in,  can  be  uni- 
formly heated  through  very  quickly,  whereas  a  large  shaft  requires  up  to  several  hours 
before  proper  heating  for  the  required  stress  relief.  After  plating,  almost  everything 
that  has  a  hard  chrome  deposit  of  any  thickness  should  be  baked  at  350  deg  F  to  remove 
the  occluded  hydrogen  from  the  deposit. 

Welding 

There  are  several  methods  of  welding  by  which  work  equipment  parts  may  be  re- 
claimed. The  oxyacetylene  process  and  the  several  electric  processes,  i.e.,  flux-coated  stick 
electrodes,  hand-held  semi-automatic  units,  submerged  arc  welding,  and  inert  gas  shielded 
open  arc  are  among  the  methods  most  frequently  used. 

One  or  more  of  these  processes  may  be  used  in  hard  facing,  or  building  up  and 
hard-facing  track  rails,  crawler  pads,  rollers,  sprockets,  buckets,  bucket  teeth,  cutting 
plates,  digging  picks,  cones,  tamper  bits,  etc. 

Many  machine  parts,  such  as  shafting,  turntable  rollers,  and  castings  can  be  re- 
claimed by  the  use  of  one  of  the  welding  processes.  However,  care  should  be  used  when 
attempting  to  reclaim  alloy  heat-treated  parts  to  keep  temperature  of  part  as  low  as 
possible.  In  some  cases  low  temperature  welding  rods  may  be  preferable. 

A  large  variety  of  welding  rods  is  available  today,  and  almost  any  analysis  can  be 
obtained. 

Summary 

.Many  parts  u>ed  in  work  equipment  can  be  reclaimed  by  one  of  the  three  processes 
described  in  this  report.  Normally  these  parts  may  then  be  put  back  in  service  with  a 
greatly  extended  service  life,  in  some  instances,  with  a  longer  service  life  than  when  the 
part   was  new. 

An  investigation  should  be  made  by  the  supervisor  or  foreman  in  charge  to  develop 
the  most  practical  and  economical  method  of  reclaiming  the  part  involved.  In  most 
instances  a  part  may  be  reclaimed  at  a  considerable  savings  over  the  cost  of  a  new 
part;  however,  there  are  times  when  it  would  be  more  economical  to  buy  a  new  part. 
The  cost  and  the  availability  of  the  new  material  or  COSl  of  down-time  of  the  machine 
on  (vhich  the  part  is  used  would  determine  whether  or  not  it  should  be  reclaimed  or 
replai  ed. 


M6 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Maintaining,   Testing   and   Repairing   Hydraulic 

Equipment    and    Other    Components    Used 

on   Work    Equipment 

M.  E.  Kerns  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  M.  Johnson,  S.  E.  Tracy,  L.  E.  Conner, 
R.  E.  Buss,  G.  R.  Collier,  K.  J.  DeCamp,  E.  VV.  Hodgkins,  N.  W.  Hutchinson, 
Wm.  Lenco. 

This  is  a  final  report,  submitted  as  information. 

In  recent  years  the  use  of  fluid  power  for  railroad  work  equipment  has  greatly 
increased.  Hydraulic  systems  permit  the  application  of  power  and  integration  of  machine 
functions  in   a   compact,  economical  manner. 

We  are  now  confronted  with  a  maintenance  lag  that  usually  follows  the  introduction 
of  a  new  application.  The  design  engineer  has  found  the  best  solution  to  his  problem, 
but  the  maintenance  problems  are  just  coming  to  the  foreground.  They  can  be  identified 
and  acted  upon  by  taking  positive  steps  in  the  direction  of — 

(1)  Detection 

(2)  Prevention 

The  following  is  a  discussion  of  these  steps. 

DETECTION 

How  do  we  detect  the  factors  that  affect  the  ability  of  a  hydraulically  operated 
machine  to  do  work? 

The  visible  problems  can  be  located  by  observation.  When  the  problem  is  invisible 
or  obscure,  the  faulty  component  or  components  can  be  found  if  flow,  pressure  and 
temperature  can  be  measured  by  test  at  every  point  in  a  hydraulic  circuit. 

Such  a  test  can  be  performed  with  a  portable  hydraulic  circuit  tester.  This  tool 
incorporates  in  one  enclosure  flow,  pressure  and  temperature  gages,  safety  devices  and 
a  manual  valve  to  apply  a  load  as  desired.  Two  types  of  these  units  are  available: 

(1)  One  model  employs  a  fixed  orifice.  In  this  type  of  portable  test  unit,  a  pres- 
sure drop  across  the  selected  orifice  is  created  by  the  flow  that  is  offered  to  it. 
This  pressure  drop,  in  turn,  is  calibrated  on  a  gage  in  terms  of  gallons  per 
minute  with  accuracies  to  ±  3  percent.  There  are  no  continuously  moving 
parts. 

(2)  The  second  model  employs  a  hydraulic  motor.  In  this  type  of  portable  test 
unit,  flow  is  offered  to  a  hydraulic  motor,  and  the  varying  speed  of  the  motor 
shaft  is  read  by  a  tachometer  calibrated  in  gallons  per  minute. 

(See  Fig.  1) 

Keep  in  mind  that  hydraulic  horsepower  is  equal  to  flow  times  pressure. 

In  a  hydraulic  circuit  the  aim  is  to  transmit  all  available  fluid  to  the  work  end 
of  the  circuit  at  the  demand  pressure.  Temperature  affects  this  aim  by  increasing  or 
decreasing  the  ease  with  which  the  fluid  flows.  However,  fluids  being  lazy,  when  the 
resistance  to  flow  is  less  than  demand  pressure,  as  much  of  the  flow  as  is  able  will  slide 
past  the  clearances  that  are  open  to  it.  As  wear  increases  initial  component  clearances, 
more  fluid  bypasses. 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 


317 


Fig.   1. 


The  "Supply  System  Test"  and  "Tee  Test"  are  the  basic  methods  for  determining 
the  loss  of  horsepower  from  internal  component  slippage.  The  use  of  this  portable  tesi 
equipment  will  add  to  the  operating;  efficiency  of  those  concerned  with  machine  main- 
tenance. It  will: 

(1)  Eliminate  unnecessary  machine  downtime. 

(2)  Reduce  the  amount  of  service  time  on  trouble-shooting;  calls,  particularly 
when  there  are  considerable  distances  involved  between  the  central  shop  and 
the  machine  location. 

(3)  Eliminate  the  necessity  of  trial  and  error  component  replacement  when 
hydraulic    system    problems    exist. 


It  is  important   to   remember   when   setting  up  a   hydraulic   system   maintenance   pro- 
gram based  on  gages  instead  of  guesses,  that   one  can  not  depend  on  memory. 

(1)  Machines  must  be  analyzed  and  equipped  with  suitable  fittings  to  enable 
the  user  to  readily  connect  portable  test  equipment  and  perform  his  test. 
Manufacturers  should  be  required  to  incorporate  test  "Tees"  in  their  hydrauhi 
sj  ^tems. 

(2)  Adequate  records  must  be  maintained  in  a  central  location  showing  test 
methods  and  ratings  of  hydraulic  system  and  components 


318 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

(3)  When  faulty  units  are  located,  removed  and  repaired,  establish  a  shop  pro- 
cedure for  checking  the  quality  of  repair  before  returning  the  component  to 
the  shelf. 

Such  a  program  planned  properly  will  facilitate  trouble-shooting  and  preventive 
maintenance  tests  both  in  the  field  and  in  the  shop. 

The  matter  of  field  testing  has  been  covered  above.  In  shop  testing  the  same  prin- 
ciples,  using  portable  test  equipment,  apply  when  checking  out  a  hydraulic  system  on 
the  machine. 

Just  as  important  in  completing  the  component  test  cycle  is  bench  test  equipment. 
When  a  component  is  not  mounted  on  the  machine,  and  its  condition  is  not  positivelj 
established,  either  before  or  after  repair,  a  test  bench  is  required  to  confirm  whether  it  is 
in  first-rate  condition. 

The  test  bench  incorporates  the  necessary  horsepower,  mountings  and  connections 
to  realistically  operate  the  component  in  terms  of  flow,  pressure  and  temperature  in  its 
simulated  function  on  the  machine.  (See  Fig.  2) 

There  are  two  forms  of  hydraulic  test  bench: 

(1)  A  universal  bench  which  incorporates  facilities  for  testing  pumps,  valves, 
cylinders  and  pressure  switches  as  well  as  motors.  One  of  the  pumps  on  this 
unit  can  be  used  as  a  load  pump.  Thus  the  test  bench  can  be  a  dynamometer 
and  motors  can  be  accurately  tested.  The  universal  bench  includes  its  own 
instrumentation  with  integral  manometer,  pressure  gages  and  load  valves. 

(2)  A  barrel  bench  using  a  portable  tester  as  the  instrumentation  and  loading 
device.  This  unit  cannot  be  used  to  test  motors. 

PREVENTION 

Because  the  fluid  in  a  hydraulic  system  functions  both  as  a  lubricant  and  the  means 
of  transferring  power,  it  follows  that  the  major  maintenance  efforts  should  be  directed 
toward  the  fluid.  The  fluid  used  should,  therefore,  be  carefully  considered.  Its  quality 
will  have  an  over-riding  effect  on  all  factors  of  good  hydraulic  system  maintenance. 

Poor  fluid  condition  is  most  commonly  caused  by  water  and  dirt.  Generally,  when 
water  exists  the  color  of  the  oil  will  become  milky  and  the  water  should  be  removed. 

There  are  three  hydraulic  system  factors  that,  when  present,  will  help  to  reduce 
problems  from  water: 

(1)  Water  is  evaporating  at  all  temperatures,  and  at  normal  operating  tempera- 
tures  (120  to   140  deg  F)   it  will  tend  to  steam  off. 

(2)  Fluids  with  de-emulsifiers  wiil  settle  the  water  to  the  bottom  of  the  reservoir 
where  it  can  be  drained  off. 

(3)  Filters  with  absorptive-type  elements  will  contribute  to  the  removal  of  water. 

Dirt,  being  more  frequent,  is  the  more  serious  problem.  A  large  percentage  of  system 
inefficiency  is  caused  by  wear  from  dirt  particles  suspended  in  the  fluid.  The  presence 
of  dirt  results  in  filter,  strainer,  separator,  reservoir  or  air  breather  problems.  The  specific 
benefits  and  pitfalls  of  hydraulic  system  dirt  control  are  realized. 

In  hydraulic  filtration  we  speak  of  filters,  strainers  and  separators.  The  difference  is 
in  the  degree  they  perform  their  job.  A  strainer  is  usually  rated  in  terms  of  mesh.  A 
filter  is  usually  rated  in  terms  of  microns.  A  separator  usually  has  a  quantitative  rather 
than   qualitative  rating. 


M  a  i  ntenance   of    Way   Work   Equipment 


319 


1 

! 

»        ! 

Mag|i 

^r^ 

| 

. 

! 

9         * 

ism 

gfi 

J —                                J      - 

* 

Fig.  2. 


Most  hydraulic  systems  presently  have  a  strainer  attached  to  the  suction  line  with 
a  probable  100-mesh  rating  when  used  with  petroleum  Quids.  They  should  be  sized  to 
strain  more  than  double  the  intake  capacity  of  the  pump.  On  occasions  the  suction 
strainer  will  be  eliminated.  The  reason  for  this  omission  is  usually  that  the  manufacturer 
or  user  has  found  that  clogged  strainers  have  caused  pump  failure  from  cavitation.  The 
pressure  drop  in  the  pump   intake   line  should   not    exceed   S   in   of   mercury   al    any   time. 

A  recent  development  in  suction-line  protection  is  the  magnetic  suction  separator. 
Where  medium  to  heavy  dirt  loading  make-  the  conventional  suction  strainer  undesir- 
able, these  separators  provide  a  "superhighway"  from  the  tank  to  the  pump.  The  "nuts 
and  bolts"  are  kept  out  of  the  system  by  the  outer  screen,  and  the  magnets  remove  all 
of  the  magnetic  particles  from  the  tluid  regardless  ol  size.  Magnets  are  also  available  for 
standard   suction   strainer-. 


Note:    Pump   cavitation    problem    ran    also    be    the    result    of   too    Small  a    "Suction 
Line";   atl    abrupt    bend   or  crease;   Of  a    hole  in   the   Miction   line   of  loose    titling*   causing 


.V20 Maintenance    of   Way   Work    Equipment 

ait  entrainment.  Still  another  cause  of  pump  cavitation  is  the  change  to  fire-resistant 

fluids,  which  have  different  viscosity  indexes  and  usually  higher  specific  gravities  than 
petroleum-base  fluids.  Most  manufacturers  of  these  fluids  recommend  a  strainer  that  is 
more  coarse  than  100  mesh.  It  is  advisable  to  consult  with  the  fluid  manufacturer  when 
such  a  changeover  is  contemplated. 

The  reservoir  also  has  its  part  in  fluid  conditioning.  It  is  usually  designed  to  prevent 
the  entry  of  foreign  matter  with  the  following  specific  features  as  outlined  by  J.I.C. 
specifications:  (1)  breather  holes  protected  with  an  air  cleaner  of  sufficient  capacity, 
and  (2)  a  proper-size  strainer  to  help  clean  the  fluid  when  the  reservoir  is  filled. 

Experience  shows  that  strainers  and  properly  designed  reservoirs  are  frequently  not 
enough  to  insure  satisfactory  hydraulic  system  life  even  when  they  arc  regularly  in- 
spected and  cleaned.  Dirt  continues  to  be  circulated  throughout  the  system,  wearing  the 
hydraulic  components.  All  of  it  is  not  selected  by  the  strainer  and  after  having  settled 
in  the  reservoir  it  can  be  jarred  back  into  the  fluid. 

This  leads  to  three  questions  regarding  dirt  in  hydraulic  systems: 

(1)  Where  does  it  come  from? 

(2)  How  much  dirt  is  harmful? 

(3)  How  large  are  the  particles  that  cause  wear? 

Work  equipment  hydraulic  power  systems  are  commonly  operating  in  a  dirty 
atmosphere,  some  considerably  worse  than  others.  Although  hydraulic  systems  are 
"closed",  they  are  not  impervious  to  dirt.  Dirt  will  find  its  way  into  the  system  from 
the  outside.  In  addition,  the  moving  parts  will  manufacture  their  own  dirt.  Each  of  these 
dirt  particles  also  has  the  potential  of  creating  more  dirt  through  abrasive  action. 

How  much  dirt  can  be  harmful? — y>  of  1  percent  by  volume  is  a  lot.  For  example, 
after  initial  machine  cleaning  one  might  expect  to  find  that  in  one  month's  service  a  25 
micro  filter  element  with   1250  sq  in  of  filtering  area  had  collected  2  oz  of  dirt.  This  is 
sufficient  to  affect  the  performance  of  the  system. 

The  next  consideration  should  be  what  size  contaminant  is  harmful.  In  a  vane 
pump,  vane-to-cam-ring  clearance  is  about  equal  to  the  thickness  of  an  oil  film  and 
rotor-to-face-plate  clearances  are  approximately  0.001  in.  Common  valve  clearances, 
spool  to  housing,  run  0.0002  in. 

So,  in  determining  what  size  of  dirt  particle  is  harmful,  consideration  should  be 
given  to: 

(1)  The  particle  that  is  larger  than  the  mating  part  tolerances,  which  may  jam 
between  them. 

(2)  The  particle  that  is  smaller  than  mating  part  tolerances  but  larger  than  oil 
film  thickness,  which  may  score  the  mating  surfaces. 

(3)  The  particles  that  are  smaller  than  oil  film  thickness.  When  this  size  of  par- 
ticle is  present  in  sufficient  quantities  the  oil  film  will  no  longer  contain  all 
of  them.  The  result  is  a  mixture  of  fluid  and  dirt  that  acts  on  the  mating 
surfaces  like  a  honing  compound. 

Still  another  factor  in  the  consideration  of  dirt  and  its  effect  on  hydraulic  systems 
is  the  formation  of  sludge.  Certain  kinds  of  solids  will  cause  the  hydraulic  fluid  to 
oxidize  and  form  sludge,  resulting  in  sticky  valves  and  corroded  components. 

There  are  three  ways  of  filtering  hydraulic  systems — 

(1)  Continuous  full  flow  filtration  in  which  all  of  the  oil  in  a  hydraulic  system 
flows  through   the   filter. 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 321 

Continuous  bypass  filtration  in  which  a  percentage  of  the  total  oil  in  a 
hydraulic  system  flows  through  the  filter. 

Maintenance  cycle  filtration  in  which  a  portable  unit  (Fig.  3)  is  connected  to 
the  hydraulic  system  on  a  scheduled  basis  and  the  fluid  is  filtered  for  a  given 
period  of  time. 

NoU  :    Maintenance   cycle   filtration    is    very   applicable   to    hydraulic   system    cleanup 
after  a   machine  has  been  rebuilt  and  before  its  return  to  duty.   This  will  eliminate  ma 
chine  chips,  iceld  scale  and  other  dirt  introduced  during   the  rebuild. 

At  this  point  a  caution  should  be  put  forth  regarding  filtration  on  the  "suction 
line."  Thi>  should  be  avoided  unless  the  filter  is  supercharged  with  another  pump  to 
prevent   the  change  of  cavitation. 

Filter  elements  used  in  a  hydraulic  system  should  not  have  adsorptive  properties. 
This  type  of  element  will  remove  chemical  additives  placed  in  the  oil  for  better  fluid 
qualities.  Filter  elements  of  the  mechanical  or  absorptive  type  are  recommended.  These 
element-  fall  into  three  general  categories: 

(1)   Surface  elements  which  use  an  exposed  surface  as  the  filter  medium,  such  as 

metal  cloth. 

Depth  elements  which  use  the  thickness  of  a  mass  as  the  filter  medium,  such 

as  felt. 
(3)   Combination  elements  which  use  the  characteristics  of  both  surface  and  depth 

elements,  such  as  pleated  paper  or  combination  surface  and  depth  media. 

A  recent  addition  to  element  design  is  the  use  of  magnets.  They  can  be  added  to 
any  of  the  basic  categories  of  elements  mentioned  above  and  will  improve  the  quan- 
titative and  qualitative  rating  of  any   given  element  in  the  removal  of   ferrous  metal. 

Maintenance  of  filters  is  an  old  problem.  If  hydraulic  filters  are  to  remain  effective 
they  must  be  serviced  properly.  There  seems  to  be  no  pattern  as  to  how  long  an  ele- 
ment will  collect  dirt  at  an  acceptable  pressure  drop.  Element  life  in  two  machines 
running   -ide   by   side   may   be    quite   different. 

The  potential  pressure  build-up  across  a  filter  element  is  equal  to  the  mechanical 
-tren^th  of  the  element,  and  this  strength  will  vary  for  different  elements.  When  this 
point  i?  reached  the  element  will  collapse  and  either  send  its  debris  into  the  system  or 
block  it.  In  addition,  the  pressure  drop  before  element  collapse  may  be  high  enough  to 
interfere  with  proper  machine  operation.  For  this  reason  any  hydraulic  system  filler 
should  incorporate  a  differential  relief  valve  which  will  bypass  the  fluid  at  a  sufficiently 
low    prc-.-ure  drop  to  avoid  system  interference. 

The  question  still  remains — when  to  change  element---'  This  can  be  solved  in  two 
wa\  -.  First,  changeover  can  be  set  up  on  a  schedule  that  is  established  from  experience 
record-;  or  second,  "dirt  alarms"  may  be  incorporated  in  the  filter  housing  or  remotely 
mounted  to  indicate  when  the  filter  element  needs  changing.  These  "dirt  alarm-"  operate 
when  the  pressure  drop  across  the  element  reaches  an  established  figure  and  indicate 
by  the  movement  of  a  spinner  or  an  arm.  They  can  also  be  arranged  to  activate  an 

electric  -witch  which  will  light  a  light  or  even  -hut  down  a  motor.  "Dirt  alarm-"  are 
becoming  more  popular.  They  tell  the  machine  operator  when  the  filter  needs  to  be 
changed  and  also  allow  tor  easj  supervisors  control.  It  i-  better  to  mount  them  where 
they  are  readily  visible. 

One  caution  on  the  use  of  indicator — thej  are  set  to  operate  at  a  pressure  drop 
based  •<--■    i  -pecific  SSU.  When  the  Quid  SSC  i-  higher  than  that  on  which  their  PS1 


322 


Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 


Fig.  3. 


Maintenance   of   Way   Work    Equipment 323 

setting  was  based,  such  as  on  a  cold  morning,  they  may  give  a  false  indication  !>ut  will 
reset  when  the  fluid  SSU  falls  to  normal,  provided  the  element  does  not  need  changing. 

It  is  good  practice  to  set  the  point  of  indication  slightly  under  the  pressure  figure 
at  which  it  is  desirable  to  change  the  filter  element.  This  gives  the  operator  a  little  lead 
time  to  accomplish  the  change. 

When  selecting  a   filter,  all  the  factors  listed  below  should  be  considered: 

(1)  Flow  in  gallons  per  minute 

(2)  Allowable  pressure  drop 

(3)  Fluid  viscosities 

(4)  Amount  of  dirt 

(5)  Element  life 

(6)  Degree  of  filtration  required 

(7)  Pressure  requirements 

Then  choose  a  filter  around  these  considerations  that  has  sufficient  area  to  give 
reasonable  element  life  within  practical  pressure  drops.  Keep  in  mind  that  all  factors 
(excepting  line  pressure)  are  interdependent  and  a  decision  with  respect  to  one  will  affect 
the  other. 

Flow 

Pump  output  does  not  always  give  correct  flow  data  for  sizing  filters.  Return-line 
filters  are  often  the  most  economical  selection,  but  watch  for  high  flow  rates  back  to 
tank  from: 

(a)  the  large  side  of  double-acting  cylinders, 

(b)  single  acting  cylinder  exhausting  to  tank  at  high  speeds, 

(c)  combination  of  two  or  more  circuits  for  some  function  of  the  machine, 

(d)  over-riding  loads  on  hydraulic  motors  where  high  flow  rates  may  result  from 
make  up  lines. 

Pressure  Drop 

The  pressure  drop  across  the  filter  must  be  considered  in  the  light  of  its  effect  on 
other  circuit  components  and  system  efficiency.  For  instance,  motor  shaft  seals  and 
valve  spool  seals  frequently  will  stand  little  or  no  back  pressure  and  more  frequently  no 
pressure  surges.  Return-line  filters  should  be  selected  with  this  in  mind.  Back  pressures 
of  less  than   25  psi  are  frequently  required. 

Dirt  Loading 

Element  life  will  vary  widely  with  the  amount  of  dirt  already  in  or  introduced  into 
the  circuit.  It  is  desirable  to  use  a  filter  with  a  higher  flow  rating  than  apparently  neces- 
sary in  order  to  have  greater  dirt  capacity  in  the  elements. 

In   any   discussion    of   hydraulic-system    maintenance,   external    leakage   mu-t    be   eon 
sidered.  This  condition  usually  resolves  itself  to  a  fit  or  fitting  problem.  Where  pipe  and 
metal  tubing  are  breaking,  they  should  be  replaced  with  flexible  hose  and  fittings. 

Manufacturers  of  work  equipment  should  furnish  parts  books  identifying'  all  com- 
ponent parts  of  hydraulic  systems,  and  all  hydraulic  circuits  should  be  printed  in  color 
showing  pressures.  To  accomplish  the  desired  results,  however,  another  ingredient  must 
be  added— Education.  Without  it  the  best  of  plans  will  go  astray.  It  must  penetrate. 
to  a  satisfactory  degree,  all  worker*  and  supervisory  personnel  involved  in  the  business 
hi    operating  and   maintaining   hydraulic  equipment. 


324 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Procurement   and   Stocking    of   Parts   and   Materials 
for   the    Repair   of   Work    Equipment 

R.  O.  Cassini  (chairman,  subcommittee),  B.  E.  Cors,  J.  O.  Elliot,  N.  W.  Hutchison, 
R.  M.  Johnson,  S.  H.  Knight,  G.  S.  Lyon,  H.  C.  Pottsmith,  J.  W.  Risk,  M.  M. 
Stansbury,  T.  H.  Taylor,  C.  R.  Turner,  Alfred  Wisman,  Jr. 

This  is  a  final  report,  submitted  as  information. 

Of  all  the  problems  besetting  maintenance  of  way  officers,  probably  the  most  frus- 
trating, costly  and  wasteful  is  to  have  a  key  high-production  machine  break  down  and 
lay  idle  while  efforts  are  made  to  secure  replacement  parts.  Of  course,  the  immediate 
and  absurd  answer  is  to  have  two  of  everything.  The  reduction  of  this  absurdity  to  the 
practical  limits  dictated  by  experience  and  present-day  railroad  economics  requires  the 
most  careful  consideration  and  planning  on  the  part  of  work  equipment  supervisors  as 
well  as  the  full  cooperation  of  the  purchasing  and  stores  departments  and  top  main- 
tenance officers  of  the  railroad.  It  is  in  this  area  that  the  benefits  of  standardization 
can  be  most  fully  realized. 

A  study  of  the  problems  relating  to  the  procurement  and  stocking  of  repair  parts 
and  materials  for  the  maintenance  of  work  equipment  must  of  necessity  take  into  con- 
sideration the  organization  of  the  repair  forces,  the  number  and  diversification  of  the 
machines,  and  the  degree  to  which  unit  replacement  methods  are  used.  Previous  studies 
indicate  that  there  is  a  wide  variation  among  the  railroads  in  the  organizational  setup 
for  handling  machine  repairs.  The  functions  of  these  organizations,  however,  can  gen- 
erally be  broken  down  into  two  basic  categories — field  or  on-line  repairs,  and  shop 
repairs. 

This  report  is  limited  to  the  study  of  the  problems  involved  in  the  procurement 
and  maintenance  of  an  adequate  supply  of  materials  and  parts  for  the  typical  field 
repair  forces  and  for  large  centrally  located  shops  equipped  to  handle  all  types  of  repairs, 
overhauls   and   conversions   commonly   undertaken   by   railroad  equipment   repair   forces. 

It  is  neecssary  that  work  equipment  repair  parts  and  supplies  be  secured  to  take 
care  of  the  following  situations: 

1.  Material  that  is  regularly  used  and  stocked  on   a  consumption  basis. 

2.  Material  needed   for   running   repairs   and   preventive   maintenance. 

3.  Material  needed   for   scheduled   or  seasonal   overhaul. 

4.  Material  needed  for  on-line-of-road  emergency  repairs. 

In  general,  annual  requirements  for  the  materials  in  categories  1  and  2  are  estab- 
lished by  experience.  Stocks  of  these  materials  should  be  maintained  in  a  centralized 
store  room  and  distributed  on  the  basis  of  requirement  to  all  levels  of  equipment  repair 
units.  Control  of  inventory  and  purchase  of  these  items  should  be  under  direct  control 
of  the  chief  work  equipment  maintenance  officer  with  the  full  cooperation  of  the  pur- 
chasing and  stores  departments. 

Based  on  field  inspection  reports  and  experience,  the  requirement  of  material  in 
category  3  can,  to  some  extent,  be  anticipated  in  relation  to  the  schedule  set  up.  The 
superintendent  of  the  shops  or  corresponding  officer  should  have  standing  blanket  pur- 
chase orders  on  local  suppliers  and  equipment  manufacturers  to  meet  his  needs.  To  mini- 


Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment  32S 

mize  paper  work,  billing  on  these  orders  should  be  handled  <>n  a  monthly  l»a-i-  instead 
of  by   individual  purchase. 

Parts  and  materials  needed  for  on-line-of-road  repairs  should  be  obtained  insofar  as 

possible  by  furnishing  on-line-of-road  equipment  supervisors  with  blanket  local  purchase 
orders  on  suppliers  at  various  points  on  his  territory.  He  should  have  unrestricted  access 
to  any  parts  or  materials  which  may  be  on  hand  at  storehouses  and  in  addition  should 
have  authority  to  contact  equipment  manufacturers  direct  to  obtain  parts  not  available 
from  local  sources. 

Every  effort  must  be  made  in  this  situation  to  use  the  best  lines  of  communication 
and  the  fastest  means  of  transportation  to  reduce  the  time  that  a  machine  is  out  of 
service. 

National  credit  cards  should  be  used  for  the  purchase  of  fuels  and  lubricants  re- 
quired for  automotive  vehicles  and  work  equipment,  and  also  for  the  purchase  of  tires 
and  batteries,  with  the  approval  of  the  division  work  equipment  supervisors. 

The  principal  advantages  of  the  procedure  for  the  procurement  of  parts  and 
materials  outlined   above  are  as  follows: 

1.  Reduces  down  time  on  on-line  machines  needing  repairs  because  the  personnel 
responsible  for  making  the  repairs  has  the  authority  to  obtain  the  needed  parts 
and  materials  from  the  closest  possible  source.  Unnecessary  paper  work  is 
reduced  to  the  minimum. 

2.  Eliminates  the  necessity  of  maintaining  large  inventory  of  repair  parts  and 
materials  at  central  storehouses  and  other  distribution  and  repair  centers. 

In  a  system  where  widespread  use  is  made  of  blanket  purchase  orders  to  procure 
repair  parts  and  supplies,  it  is  necessary  that  the  orders  be  reviewed  periodically  to 
assure  that  quality,  service  and  prices  are  maintained  at  levels  commensurate  with  pre- 
vailing market  conditions  This  is  the  responsibility  of  equipment  maintenance  super- 
visorj    personnel. 


Report   of   Committee   30 — Impact   and    Bridge    Stresses 


J.  \V.  Davidson, 
Chairman, 

N.  E.  Ekrem, 
Vice  Chairman 


E.    S.    BlRKENWALD 

J.  A.  Erskine 

P.  L.  Montgomery 

C.  V.  Lund 

E.  R.  Andrlik 
A.  R.  Harris 

D.  S.  Bechly 

E.  R.  Bretsciiik 
J.  S.  Carter 

K.  L.  DeBlois 
VV.  E.  Dowlixc 
C.   E.  Ekberg,  Jr. 
I).  J.  Engle 
R.  J.  Fisher 
A.  T.  Granger 
J.  F.  Hoss,  Jr. 
R.  E.  Kuban 
K.  H.  Lenzen 
J.  F.  Marsh 

J  amis    MlCHALOS 

VV.  H.  Munse 
I).    W.   Musser 
C.  H.  Xt.wux 


V     M.     Xl.WMARK 

M.  XOyszewski 
L.  P.  Nicholson 

A.    L.    PlEPMEIER 

M.  J.  Plumb 
E.  W.  Prentiss 

E.  D.  Ripple 
C.  A.  Roberts 
M.  B.  Scott 
A.  P.  Smith 
C.  B.  Smith 
J.  E.  South 
L.  F.  Spaine 
C.  A.  Stile 

F.  \V.  Thompson 

G.  S.  Vincent 
J.  R.  Williams 
E.  X.  Wilson 
L.  W.  Wood 

J.   D.   Woodward 
L.  T.  Wvi.v 

Committee 


Those    whose   names   are   set   in   bold-face    type   constitute   the   Engineering   Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 30. 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 

Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

2.  Steel  truss  spans. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    


page  328 


3.  Viaduct  columns. 

Investigation  of  these  members  has  generally  been  handled  in  conjunction 
with  tests  on  other  subjects.  Due  to  lack  of  suitable  tests,  no  progress  has 
been  made  on  this  assignment  in   1962. 

4.  Longitudinal  forces  in  bridge  structures,   collaborating  with   Committees   7 
8  and  15. 

Field  tests  will  have  been  made  by  the  end  of  this  year  on  a  prestressed 
concrete  trestle  on  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  to  evaluate  effect  of 
traction  and  braking  stresses  on  this  type  of  construction. 

5.  Distribution  of  live  load  in  bridge  floor- : 

(a)  Floors  consisting  of  transverse  beams. 

(b)  Floors  consisting  of  longitudinal  beams. 

The  equations  developed  by  the  University  of  Illinois  were  transmitted 
to  Committee  IS  for  consideration  as  specification  material.  Study  continues 
on  application  of  these  equations  to  certain  unusual  types  of  bridge  Boor 
construction. 


6.  Concrete  structures,  collaborating  with  Committee  8, 
Progress  report,   presented  as  information    


327 


328  Impact   and    Bridge    Stresses 

7.  Timber  structures,  collaborating  with  Committee  7. 

There   has   been   no   progress  on   this  assignment    in   the   lasl    year   flue   Lo 
budgeting  limitations  on  research  funds. 

8.  Vibrational  characteristics  of  bridges  affecting  deflections  and  depth  ratios. 
A  method  of  investigating  this  problem  by  using  an  electronic  computer 
has  been  developed  by  New  York  University.  However,  this  investigation 
has  been  dormant   in  the  past  year  due  to  lack  of  research   funds. 

9.  Use  of  electronic  computers  for  railroad  bridge  problems. 

Due   to   lack   of   funds,   no   additional   work    has   been    done   on    plans   to 
develop  a  computer  program   for  design  and  rating  of  truss  spans. 

10.  Steel  continuous  structures,  collaborating  with   Committee   15. 

Progress  report,  presented  as  information    page  330 

11.  Composite   design    of   steel   structures   having  concrete   decks,    collaborating 
with  Committees  8  and  15. 

Progress   report,   presented  as  information    page  33 1 

The  Committee  on  Impact  and  Bridge  Stresses, 

J.  VV.  Davidson,  Chairman. 


ARKA  Bulletin  575,  December  1962. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Steel  Truss  Spans 

E.  S.  Birkenwald  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  R.  Andrlik,  A.  T.  Granger,  A.  R.  Harris, 
W.  H.  Munse,  D.  W.  Musser,  M.  Noyszewski,  M.  B.  Scott,  F.  W.  Thompson, 
G.  S.  Vincent,  L.  T.  Wyly. 

A  limited  number  of  truss  spans  have  been  tested  in  past  years,  generally  in  response 
to  requests  of  the  owning  railroad.  A  program  of  additional  tests  involving  varying 
span  lengths  and  train  speeds  is  contemplated,  but  has  been  held  in  abeyance  due  to 
restricted   research   appropriations. 

At  the  request  and  expense  of  the  Rock  Island  Railroad  the  AAR  Research  Center 
staff  has  been  assisting  in  determining  the  cause  of  operational  failures  of  a  vertical 
lift  span.  This  span  has  at  times  become  inoperative  in  an  open  position,  most  fre- 
quently during  the  hot  summer  months.  Strain  gage  oscillograph  recordings  have  been 
taken  of  strain  in  the  main  drive  shafts  during  opening  and  closing  of  the  bridge  over 
a  wide  range   of  temperature   conditions. 

A  310-ft  through  truss  on  the  New  York  Central  Railroad  having  all  field  connec- 
tions made  with  high-strength  bolts  was  investigated  to  determine  if  any  slippage  of 
these  joints  had  occurred  in  service.  Mechanical  strain  gage  readings  made  immediately 
after  erection  were  compared  with  those  after  nearly  two  years  of  service.  These  indicated 
that  no  joints  had  slipped,  and  levels  indicated  that  there  had  been  no  loss  of  camber 
in  service. 


_^__ Impact   and    Bridge   Stresses 329 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Concrete  Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committee  8 

P.  L.  Montgomery  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  \V.  Davidson,  \V.  E.  Dowling,  C.  E. 
Ekberg.  Jr..  X.  E.  Ekrem.  J.  A.  Erskine,  J.  F.  Hoss.  Jr.,  R.  E.  Kuban.  K.  H. 
Lcnzcn,  C.  V.  Lund.  J.  Michalos,  X.  M.  Xewmark,  L.  P.  Xicholson,  M.  Xovszewski, 
A.  L.  Piepmcier,  E.  D.  Ripple,  C.  A.  Still,  F.  W.  Thompson,  J.  R.  William-.  J.  D. 
Woodward. 

Field  data  are  urgently  needed  to  form  a  basis  for  an  impact  equation  for  pre- 
stressed  concrete  design.  The  current  investigations  being  carried  out  under  this  assign- 
ment, as  well  as  the  previous  ones  conducted  by  the  AAR,  have  provided  considerable 
information,  but  additional  data  are  needed  before  a  suitable  design  equation  can  be 
developed  to   replace   that   presently  specified. 

The  results  of  the  field  investigation  by  the  AAR  research  staff  on  two  30-ft  6-in 
prestressed  concrete  spans  of  a  Florida  East  Coast  Railway  bridge  near  Pompano  Beach, 
Fla.,  were  published  in  June  1962  as  Report  Xo.  ER-21.*  An  abstract  of  this  report 
was  published  in   Bulletin  573,  September-October  1962. 

The  purpose  of  this  investigation  was  to  compare  the  static  and  dynamic  effect  on 
spans  with  and  without  shear  keys  before  and  after  transverse  post  tensioning  under  the 
passage  of  diesel  locomotives  and  cars.  Each  span  consisted  of  six  rectangular  beams  per 
track  and  each  span  was  identical  except  for  the  use  of  shear  keys  in  one  span.  Trans- 
verse post-tensioning  was  accomplished  by  use  of  high-strength  steel  bars,  but  these  bars 
were  left  loose  until  a  series  of  runs  with  the  test  trains  had  been  recorded.  These  bars 
were  then  tensioned  and  another  series  of  runs  made  with  the  same  test  train. 

It   was   concluded   from   this  investigation   that: 

1.  Either  shear  keys  or  transverse  post  tensioning  is  effective  in  distributing  the 
load  across  the  deck. 

2.  Recorded  static  strains  in  all  beams  after  post  tensioning  were  less  than  cal- 
culated, but  in  several  instances  before  post  tensioning  the  recorded  static 
strains  were  more  than  calculated.  The  best  distribution  was  for  the  span  with 
shear  keys  and  after  post  tensioning. 

3.  Above  50  mph  recorded  strains  increased  with  speed,  yet  the  maximum  values 
did  not  exceed  the  calculated  values,  which  included  the  AREA  impact  allow- 
ance for  masonry  structures.  A^ain,  the  best  distribution  was  for  the  span 
with  shear  keys  and  after  post  tensioning. 

4.  The  lowest  impact  values  occurred  in  the  span  with  shear  keys  and  alter  post 
tensioning.  Maximum  recorded  locomotive  total  impact  in  both  -pans  did  not 
exceed   that   specified    by    the   current    AREA   Specifications. 

A  report  on  another  field  investigation  by  the  AAR  staff  on  two  prestressed  con- 
crete  -pan-   on    the   Southern   Pacific   near   Houston.   Tex.,   was   published   as    Report    ER 
25*.  An  abstract  of  this  report    wa-  also  published  in   Bulletin  573.  The  30-ft  span  con- 
-i-t-   of   4    I-shaped   precast    girders    with    a    cast  in-place   concrete   deck,   while   the   Other- 


Copies   <<i   these   reports   may  be  obtained   from   the  director  of  onRinorrinE   research,   A iatkn 

of  American   Railroad-.  A 1 40  South   Federal  Strict,  Chicago  in. 


330 Impact   and    Bridge   Stresses 

wise  similar  55-ft  span  has  5  girders.  It  was  found  that  composite  action   occurred   be 
tween  the  precast    girders   and  the  cast-in-place  deck,  and  that  actual  recorded  strains 
did   not   exceed   calculated    values.   The   live   load   was   spread   more   uniformly   among 
the  5  girders  in  the  55-ft  span  than  among  the  4  girders  in  the  30  ft  span. 

This  committee  has  reported  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  60,  1959,  page  1,  on  "Statu 
and  Fatigue  Tests  on  Prestressed  Concrete  Railway  Slabs."  This  work  was  performed 
at  Lehigh  University  on  beams  I6y2  in  wide,  18  in  deep,  and  19  ft  long.  For  this  study 
concrete  strength  was  the  principal  variable.  As  an  extension  of  this  work,  the  AAR 
conducted  a  laboratory  investigation  using  similar  pretensioned  beams  to  demonstrate 
the  effect  of  size  of  strand  and  level  of  prestress  on  the  static  and  fatigue  strength  of 
the  beams. 

Twenty-four  beams  were  included  in  this  study.  They  were  furnished  by  the  Port- 
land Cement  Association  and  fabricated  in  its  Research  and  Development  Laboratories 
at  Skokie,  111.  Four  groups  of  beams  were  made,  as  follows: 

1.  ->6-in  strands  with  initial  tension  of  0.7  /'„. 

2.  i7s-in  strands  with  initial  tension  of  0.7  /',. 

3.  y2 -in  strands  with  initial  tension  of  0.7  /'.,. 

4.  ^2-in  strands  with  initial  tension  of  0.5  /'.,. 

As  was  the  case  with  the  Lehigh  beams,  static  loading  produced  compressive  failures 
and  repeated  loading  produced  tensile  strand  failures. 

These  data  are  being  analyzed  by  the  Research  Center  staff  and  will  comprise  a 
report  of  this  committee  early  next  year. 

Additional  tests  are  scheduled  to  be  made  late  this  year  on  two  concrete  bridges 
on  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad.  One  of  these  is  a  6-span  trestle  comprised  of  24-ft 
prestressed  concrete  slab  spans  with  rectangular  voids.  A  full  range  of  speeds  will  be 
used  to  determine  the  recorded  impact  in  this  type  of  span  to  supply  much-needed  data 
in  support  of  a  revised  impact  equation.  In  addition  to  stresses  in  the  slabs,  stresses  will 
be  measured  in  the  prestressed  concrete  piles.  The  other  bridge  is  a  7-span  trestle  com- 
prised of  15-ft  6-in  and  21-ft  reinforced  concrete  slab  spans.  A  full  range  of  speeds  will 
also  be  used  here  to  determine  recorded  impacts. 


Report  on  Assignment  10 

Steel  Continuous  Structures 

Collaborating  with  Committee   15 

A.  R.  Harris  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  W.  Davidson,  E.  R.  Andrlik,  E.  S.  Birken- 
wald,  J.  S.  Carter,  D.  J.  Engle,  R.  J.  Fisher,  A.  T.  Granger,  J.  F.  Marsh,  VV.  H. 
Munse,  D.  W.  Musser,  M.  Noyszewski,  E.  D.  Ripple,  C.  B.  Smith,  J.  D.  Woodward. 

A  study  has  been  made  of  the  information  to  be  looked  for  in  testing  existing 
continuous  railroad  bridges.  However,  actual  testing  has  been  deferred  due  to  restricted 
research  appropriations. 

At  the  request  and  expense  of  Iowa  State  University  the  AAR  Research  Center 
staff  conducted  an  investigation  to  determine  the  flexural  fatigue  strength  of  two  pre- 


I  m  pa  ct   and    Bridge    Stresses 331 

stressed-steel  beams.  These  two  beams  simulated  the  negative  moment  region  of  a  con- 
tinuous beam  span. 

The  beams  were  prestressed  by  deflecting  them  under  the  action  <>f  a  concentrated 
load  at  the  center  of  a  simple  span,  then  welding  unstressed  high  strength  steel  plate-  to 
the  top  and  bottom  flanges  to  retain  a  predetermined  amount  of  prestress.  The  beams 
were  rolled  sections  of  A  S6  steel  and  the  plates  were  USS  "T-l"  steel. 

Each  of  the  two  test  specimens  were  subjected  to  an  identical  repeated  loading  until 
a  fatigue  failure  occurred.  The  loading  was  designed  to  produce  stresses  equivalent  to 
those  which  would  have  occurred  in  a  simulated  bridge  and  amounted  to  84  percent  of 
a  standard  H-15  live  load  including  impact.  One  of  the  beams  sustained  2,469,100  repeti- 
tions of  load  to  failure  and  the  other  sustained  2,756,100  cycles. 

Following  the  fatigue  tests,  an  experimental  study  was  made  to  determine  the  state 
of  stress  that  had  been  retained  in  the  prestressed  steel  beams.  This  information,  upon 
which  the  calculated  stresses  of  the  test  could  be  superimposed,  provided  a  method  of 
correlating  the  fatigue  strength  of  the  beams  with  the  fatigue  information  available  on 
the   two   steels   involved. 


Report  on  Assignment    11 

Composite    Design    of    Steel    Structures    Having 
Concrete  Decks 

Collaborating  with  Committees  8  and   15 

N'.  E.  Ekrem  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  R.  Bretscher,  J.  S.  Carter,  C.  E.  Ekberg, 
Jr.,  J.  A.  Erskine,  R.  E.  Kuban,  K.  H.  Lenzen,  P.  L.  Montgomery,  W.  H.  Munse, 
D.  W.  Musser,  L.  P.  Nicholson,  A.  L.  Piepmeier,  A.  P.  Smith,  C.  B.  Smith,  J.  E. 
South.  L.  F.  Spaine,  J.  D.  Woodward. 

At  the  request  and  expense  of  the  Western  Pacific  an  investigation  was  conducted 
by  the  AAR  Research  Center  staff  to  determine  the  stresses  in  a  skewed  concrete-encased 
steel  beam  span  in  Sacramento,  Calif.  The  data  obtained  will  be  used  to  determine  the 
load  distribution  to  the  beams  and  the  effect  of  the  concrete  encasement  on  stresses  in 
the  steel  beams.  The  data  indicate  that  the  concrete  was  acting  with  the  steel  to  form 
a  composite  section. 

At  the  request  and  expense  of  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad  field  tests  will  be 
made  this  year  on  a  60-ft  steel  girder  span  having  a  cast-in-place  concrete  deck.  Stresses 
will  be  measured  in  the  steel  beams  and  in  the  concrete  deck  to  determine  the  degree 
of  participation  of  the  deck  in  producing  a  composite  section. 

Field  tests  will  be  made  this  year  on  a  28-ft  concrete-encased  beam  span  of  the 
Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad  at  their  expense.  Stresses  will  be  measured  in  the  concrete 
and  in   the   steel   to  determine  the  composite  effeel    <>t'   the  concrete  and  steel. 


Report    of    Committee    28 — Clearance 


H.  L.  Williams, 

C.  \V.  Hamilton 

Vice  Chairman 

A.  R.  Harris   (E) 

"*■  'BBI^^X 

B.  Bhistow 

W.   F.   Hart   (E) 

^Hv 

J.    F.    Smith 

C.  F.   [ntlekofer 

^H 

E.  E.  Mills 

M.  L.  Koeiilhk 

JjK*^ 

W.    P.    KOBAT 

J.  R.  Moore 

J.  A.  Crawford 

R.  C.  X'issi  \ 

M.     E.    VOSSELLER 

J.  F.  Pearce 

J.  D.  Batch elder 

C.   E.  Peterson 

J.  E.  Beran 

R.  C.  Rankin 

C.  0.  Bird 

W.  S.  Ray 

E.    S.    BlRKENWAI.D 

R.  A.  Skooglun 

I).  H.  Brown 

J.  \V.  Wagner 

S.  M.  Dun. 

J.   \V.   Wai.i.enius 

R.   D.   Erhardt 

H.  G.  Whittet,  Jr. 

J.  G.  Gbeenlee, 

J.  E.  Fanning   (E) 

M.  A.  Wohlschlaeger 

Chairman 

J.  E.  Good 

Committee 

i  E  i  Member  Emeritus. 

rhose    whose    names    are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee     ! 


To   The  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 

Your  committee  reports  on  the   following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

No  report.  Review  of  Chapter  28  has  been  completed. 

2.  Compilation    of    the   railroad   clearance    requirements   of    the    various   states 

Status  report,  submitted  as  information    page  334 

3.  Review  clearance  diagrams  for  recommended  practice,  collaborating  with 
AREA  committees  concerned,  and  the  AAR  Joint  Committee  on  Clearances. 
No  report  this  year.  This  assignment  will  be  discontinued  for  the  lime 
being  and   will  be   replaced  with  a   new  assignment. 

5.  Clearance  allowances  to  provide  for  vertical  and  horizontal  movements  of 
equipment    due    to    lateral    play,    wear    and    spring    deflection,    collaborating 

with  the  Mechanical  Division.  AAR. 

Status    report,   submitted   as   information    page    v^4 

(>.  Compilation  in  table  form  of  offsets  for  overhanging  loads  on  curves. 

This  assignment  has  been  completed  and  will  be  replaced  with  a  new  assign- 
ment. 

s.  Review    present    methods  of   presenting  published  clearance  information   to 

determine  how  this  can  be  simplified   and  or  standardized. 

Status    report,   submitted   as   information    page   335 


334 Clearances 

9.  Review    clearance    records    of    various    railroads,    looking    to    developing    a 
standardized  method  for  charting  all   obstructions. 
Status  report,  submitted  as  information    page  358 

The  Committee  on  Clearances, 

J.  (;.  Greenlee,  Chairman. 


ARKA  Bulletin  575.  December  1962. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Compilation    of    the    Railroad    Clearance    Requirements 
of  the   Various   States 

J.  F.  Smith  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  D.  Batchelder,  J.  G.  Greenlee,  W.  F.  Hart, 
E.  E.  Mills,  J.  R.  Moore,  W.  S.  Ray,  R.  A.  Skooglun.  M.  A.  Wohlschleager,  R.  L. 
Williams. 

Your  committee  last  year  (Bulletin  568,  December  1961,  pages  338-339)  submitted 
the  clearance  requirements  for  the  state  of  New  York,  effective  April  20,  1961,  which 
were  to  be  added  to  the  clearance  chart  dated  July  20,  1961.  A  new  canvass  is  being 
made  for  any  recent  changes  to  the  clearance  requirements  of  the  various  states  looking 
to  revising  the  clearance  chart  further  when  deemed  necessary. 


Report  on  Assignment  5 

Clearance  Allowances  to  Provide  for  Vertical  and 

Horizontal   Movements   of   Equipment   Due   to 

Lateral   Play,   Wear  and   Spring   Deflection 

Collaborating  with  the  Mechanical   Division,  AAR 

E.  E.  Mills  (chairman,  subcommittee),  C  O.  Bird,  J.  E.  Beran,  B.  Bristow,  D.  H. 
Brown,  J.  A.  Crawford,  S.  M.  Dahl,  J.  E.  Fanning,  J.  G.  Greenlee,  C.  W.  Hamilton, 
A.  R.  Harris,  C  F.  Intlekofer,  W.  P.  Kobat,  R.  C  Nissen,  C  E.  Peterson,  R.  C. 
Rankin,  M.  E  Vosseller,  J.  W.  Wagner,  R.  L.  Williams. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  the  following  report  on  Effect  of  Spring 
Travel,  Height  of  Center  of  Gravity,  and  Speed  on  Freight  Car  Clearance  Requirements 
on  Curved  and  Tangent  Track. 

An  earlier  report  on  this  same  subject  was  published  in  the  Proceedings.  Vol.  59, 
1958,   page  305. 

The  cars  used  in  the  tests  described  in  the  earlier  report  were  overloaded,  which 
may  have  restricted  movement  of  the  car  bodies.  The  present  report  covers  tests  made 
with  cars  half  loaded  and  with  cars  fully  loaded.  The  tests  were  run  on  the  Delaware, 
Lackawanna  &  Western  Railroad,  now  the  Erie-Lackawanna  Railroad,  in  October  and 
November   1959. 


Clearances  335 

Effect    of    Spring    Travel,    Height    of    Center   of    Gravity 

and  Speed  on  Freight  Car  Clearance  Requirements 

on   Curved   and   Tangent   Track 

Introduction 

These  tests  are  a  continuation  of  those  run  in  1955.'  These  additional  tests  were 
made  to  investigate  the  effects  of  partially  loaded  cars  and  branch-line  standards  of  track 
maintenance  on  clearance  requirements.  Cars  in  the  1955  tests  were  slightly  overloaded, 
and  it  was  thought  that  bottoming  of  the  springs  might  have  restricted  movement  of 
the  car  bodies.  This  report  covers  tests  on  one-half  and  fully  loaded  cars,  with  70  and 
85  in  combined  center  of  gravity  heights,  and  empty  cars,  which  were  run  on  the  Dela- 
ware, Lackawanna  &  Western  Railroad,  now  the  Erie-Lackawanna  Railroad,  in  October 
and  November  1959.  The  two  70-ton,  52J/£-ft  gondola  cars  tested  were  similar  to  those 
used  in  1955.  The  one  with  short-travel  springs  (lf^-in  travel)  was  designated  as  Car  A 
and  the  one  with  long-travel  springs  (3iJ-in  travel)  was  designated  as  Car  B.  The  tests 
on  main  line  were  at  speeds  from  20  to  60  mph  to  determine  the  effect  of  speed.  The 
tests  on  branch  line  were  with  85 -in  center  of  gravity  height  at  20  or  40  mph  to  deter- 
mine the  effect  of  track   quality. 

The  program  was  conducted  as  a  part  of  the  research  activities  of  the  Association 
of  American  Railroads.  Research  Department,  W.  M.  Keller,  vice  president,  under  the 
sponsorship  of  the  Joint  Committee  on  Relation  between  Track  and  Equipment  (C.  J. 
Code,  chairman)  and  Committee  28 — Clearances  (J.  G.  Greenlee,  chairman).  The  work 
was  under  the  general  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  and 
in  the  direct  charge  of  Randon  Ferguson,  electrical  engineer.  This  report  was  prepared 
by  Ralph  Schinke,  stress  analyst.  The  tests  were  greatly  aided  by  the  former  Delaware. 
Lackawanna  &  Western  chief  engineer,  R.  F.  Bush,  in  providing  cars,  loading  them  to 
the  various  center  of  gravity  heights  and  running  the  special  test  train.  Active  participa- 
tion by  C.  M.  Segraves,  engineer  of  structures,  expedited  the  work. 

Procedure 

The  different  center-of-gravity  heights  were  obtained  by  varying  the  heights  of  rail 
loads  carried  by  timber  frameworks  in  the  gondolas.  Tests  were  made  with  a  special 
train  running  between  Hoboken  and  Denville,  N.  J.,  for  the  main-line  runs  and  between 
Port  Morris  and  Washington,  N.  J.,  for  the  branch-line  runs.  The  Brush  pen-writing 
oscillographs,  driving  amplifiers  and  engine  generator  power  supply  were  carried  in  a 
combination  coach-baggage  car. 

Static  values  of  average  roll  angle  were  obtained  on  three  curves  of  different  ele- 
vation by  means  of  plumb  lines  and  scales  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the  1955  tests. 
Dynamic  values  of  average  roll  angle  were  obtained  with  a  gyroscope  providing  the 
necessary  vertical  reference.  Vertical  accelerations,  and  lateral  accelerations  at  floor  level 
and  at  9  ft  above  floor  level,  were  measured  with  Statham  accelerometers.  Dynamic  ver- 
tical and  lateral  displacements  were  derived  by  double  electronic  integration  of  the  accel- 
eration signals.  Roll-angle  oscillations  were  calculated  from  the  difference  of  the  lateral 
displacement  channels  at  the  two  heights. 

Fig.  15  shows  some  details  of  the  method  of  measuring  dynamic  vertical  and  lateral 
displacements  of  a  car  by  means  of  electronic  double  integration  of  accelerometer  sig- 
nals.  This   method   does   not   require   any   fixed    reference  points  attached   to   the   track 

1  AREA   Proceedings,   Vol.   59,    1958,  page  305. 


336 Clearances 

The  block  diagram  shows  the  novel  means  of  using  a  signal  from  the  vertical  gyroscope 
to  balance  out  the  error  due  to  inclination  of  the  lateral  accelerometer  attached  to  the 
car  body  and  the  resulting  gravity  component  acting  along  its  lateral  axis.  Fig.  16 
shows  the  effectiveness  of  this  error-balancing  signal.  It  also  shows  the  very  low 
frequency   response  obtained. 

Results 

Table  1  and  Fig.  1  show  the  relation  between  average  roll  angle  and  unbalance. 
Dynamic  average  roll  angle  is  the  steady  value  of  the  roll  of  a  car  on  a  curve;  that  is. 
with  the  roll  oscillations  averaged  out.  Table  1  shows  poor  agreement  with  the  1955 
data.  This  is  no  doubt  due  to  instrument  errors  in  the  roll-angle  data  as  evidenced  by 
the  wide  scatter  of  points  in  the  average  roll  angle  versus  unbalance  plots  which  are 
not  shown. 

Table  2  gives  the  maximum  values  of  the  recorded  variables.  The  values  of  average 
roll  angle  given  are  those  marked  with  an  asterisk  in  Table  1,  which  are  considered  the 
most  accurate.  The  frequency  values  given  for  roll  and  vertical  modes  of  car  vibration 
were  read  from  places  on  the  recordings  where  the  cars'  motion  was  nearly  simple 
harmonic.  In  other  words,  no  attempt  was  made  to  read  the  higher  harmonics  which 
were  present  at  some  times. 

The  relations  between  roll  angle  oscillations  and  speed  are  given  in  Figs.  2  to  S. 
They  show  that  the  roll  oscillations  of  both  cars  with  70-  and  85-in  center-of-gravity 
heights  at  full  load  were  slightly  less  than  the  comparable  1955  loadings.  They  were 
probably  smaller  because  of  some  attenuation  in  the  integrating  circuits  at  low  frequen- 
cies. For  almost  all  loadings  the  maximum  roll  oscillations  of  car  B  were  about  the 
same  as  Car  A.  Also,  the  maximum  roll  oscillations  of  the  empty  cars  were  about  as 
large  as  the  loaded  cars.  The  maximum  roll  oscillations  of  the  35-ton  loads  were  slightly 
larger  than  the  70-ton  loads  for  the  70-in  center-of-gravity  height,  while  they  were 
about  the  same  for  the  85-in  height.  The  maximum  roll  oscillations  of  the  branch  line 
runs  for  85-in  center-of-gravity  heights  were  larger  than  the  comparable  main-line  runs 
except  for  the  70-ton  load  in  Car  B.  The  maximum  roll  angle  oscillations  for  Car  A 
occurred  at  most  any  speed  above  about  IS  mph,  while  those  for  Car  B  were  generally 
less  above  about  25  mph. 

Plots  of  maximum  vertical  and  lateral  accelerations  are  given  in  Figs.  9  to  12.  The 
plots  of  vertical  acceleration  are  not  directly  comparable  with  the  1955  plots,  which  gave 
average  values,  but  they  appear  to  be  of  the  same  order  of  magnitude.  Figs.  9  to  12 
show  for  both  vertical  and  lateral  accelerations  an  increase  with  speed — Car  A  values 
greater  than  Car  B  values  and  branch-line  values  greater  than  main-line  values. 

Conclusions 

The  results  of  these  tests  are  summarized  in  Table  3.  Due  to  the  wide  scatter  in 
the  roll-angle  data,  a  value  of  30  percent  of  the  average  roll  displacement  for  6  in  un- 
balance as  found  in  the  1955  tests  has  been  used  for  the  spread  of  average  roll  dis- 
placement in  this  table.  Comparison  of  this  table  with  Table  4  on  page  325  of  Refer- 
ence 1  shows  that  bottoming  of  the  springs  due  to  the  slight  overload  did  not  unduly 
restrict  movement  of  the  car  bodies  in  the  1955  tests.  In  comparing  these  tables  it 
should  be  kept  in  mind  that  Table  3  of  this  report  makes  no  allowance  for  lateral  play 
due  to  clearance  in  the  truck  parts,  wear  or  wheel-to-rail  play,  while  the  1955  table  does. 
Also,  the  roll  oscillations  in  Table  3  may  be  slightly  small  due  to  a  small  amount  of 
attenuation  at  low  frequencies  in  the  integration  circuits.  The  table  shows  a  larger  total 


Clearances 


! 


for  the  branch-line  runs  than  for  the  comparable  main-line  runs  except  for  the  70-ton 
85-in  loading  of  Car  B,  because  of  the  larger  roll  oscillations  on  the  branch  line.  The 
runs  with  partial  loads  show  lower  totals  than  the  full  load  runs.  The  empty  runs  with 
Car   B  show  large  roll  oscillations. 

It  is  recommended  that  Table  4  of  Reference  1  be  considered  as  representative  of 
the  maximum  lateral  clearance  required  for  track  with  a  main-line  standard  of  mainte- 
nance. As  discussed  on  page  Ml  of  Reference  1.  an  additional  1  in  should  be  allowed 
for  badly  worn  cars.  It  should  be  kept  in  mind  that  these  displacements  are  due  to  car 
body  roll  and  lateral  play  movements  only,  and  are  requirements  for  clearance  beyond 
those  due  to  curvature,  track  elevation  and  equipment  dimensions. 

Table  2  gives  values  for  the  vertical  clearance  (displacement)  requirement  of  2.2  in 
for  Car  A  and  1.8  inches  for  Car  B. 


TABLE  l 
COMPARISON  OF  AVERAGE  ROLL  ANGLE  VALUES 
Ml  values  are  in  degrees  for  6  inches  unbalanced  elevation 

CAR    A 


1955  Test 

1955  Test 

Weight,  lbs. 

Empty 

122,000 

127 

,000 

192,000 

214,000 

195 

,000 

221,000 

Center  of  Gravity  Height,   inches 

36.0 

71.6 

86.9 

70.8 

70.9 

86.8 

8  4.7 

Roll  Angle,  Static  Lean  Test 

.038* 

.  13 

.  18 

.12 

.35 

.  16 

.53 

Roll  Angle,  Dynamic 

.21 

.23* 

.24* 

.38* 

.36 

39 

.51* 

Roll  Angle,  Theoretical 

.030 

.20 

.28 

.32 
CAR    B 

.36 
1955  Test 

43 

.46 
1955  Test 

Weight,  lbs. 

Empty 

120,000 

125 

,000 

190,000 

211,000 

193 

,000 

218.000 

Center  of  Gravity  Height,   inches 

35.75 

70.2 

85.7 

70.2 

71.  1 

85.4 

85.2 

Roll  Angle,  Static  Lean  Test 

.12 

.33* 

.34 

.55 

.52 

.63 

.79 

Roll  Angle,  Dynamic 

.062* 

.52 

.35* 

.007 

.90* 

.65 

1.  10* 

Roll  Angle,  Theoretical 

.092 

.64 

.91 

1.09 

1.26 

1.52 

1.78 

Car  A,   1-5/8  in.  spring  travel,  55,  100  lbs.  lightweight 
Car  B,  3-11/16  in.   spring  travel,  55,  000  lbs.  lightweight 
*    Considered  most  accurate 


$38 


Clearances 


>  Q 


a>  h  (c  01  n  o  oo 

O     rH     O     O     CM*     i-J     rH 


00     O     t-     O     CO     00     © 
r-i     H     ©     r-J     rH     O     1-5 


ft 


■*  in  o  h  oo  ^  m 
co  im'  cm'  co  cm'  cm'  cm' 


t:  n  n  ffl  ■*  o  it 

CM*    CM*    CM*    CM*    CM*    CM*    CM 


i<  oi   oo  ^  't  N   ^ 

CM     r-i     r-I     rH     CM*    CM     CM 


c-  cm   co   lo   o   co 


g? 


O     CO 


P5 


iH  o   o   o   o  o 


o  o  o  o  o  o  o 


#       CD 

CO 

0) 

> 

CO 
CD 

rH 

c^ 

>* 

DO 

rH 

3 

U 

o 

CM 

<M 

i 

CO 

m 

l 

CD    — . 

U 

be 

CD 

< 

o 

O 

© 

o 

g 

p 

ffi 

< 

O 

TJ 

W 

■V 

rH 

CM 

-H 

-f 

CO 

CM 

pj 

en 

s 

CO 

cr 

m 

-* 

CD 

cr^ 

■* 

CD    CO 

IO 

O    CO 

CO 

pq 

o* 

© 

K 

< 

O 

,   -c*  -a  co 

W      -r-      ^3        (J) 


u 


osS 


O    (D    O)    0)    CO    00    OO 


C-    CM    C-    t>    CM    Tj<    ■*« 


>    .5 

X    CO 


5    rH    H 


t>   c-   c- 


ft 

c  io  m  io 
p  co  co  co 
W 


CD     CD     CD    "-. 


2  S  £ 

'^  U  U 

;2  .2  .2 

'cc!  « 


c  c  c  c 
*  '5  '3  "* 


to    to"    co    ^    co    co    £ 


CD  CD  CD  -T.  CD  CD  -~ 

C  C  O  rH  C  C  rH 

3  Hi  WI  rg  Hi  'k4  rg 

c  0  c  fl  c  c  c 

■I*  •*-  -r-  ^  •*-  -^  pj 

d  ri  n  ^  co  ra  ^ 

g  §  S  «  g  §  « 


•  r.     T-j 


e  3 

Ed 

co    co 

-H        rt 

jj 

<  § 

en 

Clearances 


339 


0)    OT 

So 


£o 


N    H    00    o    (C    *    O 

n  t-  e  li  oo  n  oo 
n   n  to  h  n  n  n 


O)    O    «>    CO    CO    H 


f0    CO    N    N   N    N    N 


t-H    LO    CO    CO    CO    >-l    in 

oo   t-   co   o   t>  r-   r- 


O     O    O     rH    o    O    O 


o  o  o  o  o  o  o 


O    O    O    O    .-I    o    o 


o  o  o  o  o  o  o 


o    co    O    O   CM    LO    o 

»    C    O    1-    C    CO    o 


O    O    O    O    O    O    i-l 


< 

u 

o 
a 

bo 

CO 
CO 

o 

CD 

in 

o 

CO 

CD 

0> 

LO 

CO 

in 

33 

-J" 

LO 

-r 

LO 

-v 

- 

< 

o 

o 

- 

s 

o 

O 

o 

o 

o 

O 

o 

o 

o 

© 

< 

< 

u 

O 

9 

K 

01 

a 

rn 

CM 

CO 

-r 
in 

CO 

CN 

CO 

EC 

CO 

CN 

CO 

EC 

in 

co 

CO 

cr 

co 
•* 

l,   -^  -H    to 

H     '-     J!       B 

<D     >     bO  ^ 

«os£ 


O    CO    Ol    O    CO    CD    CO 


t—   CM    t>    l>    CM    -r    f 


% 


CO    W    C5    l>     t*    t* 


J    _1    _)   J3    J    J  JC 

o  □ 

e   dd  oflfl  I 

rt    n    r;    ^    ^    w  ^ 

~.  S  £  pq  ^  ;?  a 


C    i-J    c    c 


,J  J  J  J=  J  J  J= 
o  o 

C     C     C     C     E     C     = 


§n 


^  §  s 


340 


Clearances 


TABLE  3 
MAXIMUM  DYNAMIC  LATERAL  CLEARANCE  REQUIREMENTS 
Does  not  include  lateral  play  due  to  clearances  in  truck  parts  or  wheel-to-rail  play. 
Values  are  given  in  inches  for  a  point  15  ft.  above  top  of  rail. 


Three   Inches    Unbalance 


Main  Line  or  Branch  Line 
Nominal  Load,  Tons 
Center  of  Gravity  Height,  Inches 
Average  Roll  Displacement 
Spread  of  Ave.  Roll  Disp.  *  + 
Maximum  Roll  Oscillation  * 
TOTAL 


Main  Line  or  Branch  Line 
Nominal  Load,  Tons 
Center  of  Gravity  Height,  Inches 
Average  Roll  Displacement 
Spread  of  Ave.  Roll  Disp.  *  + 
Maximum  Roll  Oscillation  * 
TOTAL 


Main  Line  or  Branch  Line 
Nominal  Load,  Tons 
Center  of  Gravity  Height,  Inches 
Average  Roll  Displacement 
Spread  of  Ave.  Roll  Disp.  *•+ 
Maximum  Roll  Oscillation  * 
TOTAL 

Main  Line  or  Branch  Line 
Nominal  Load,  Tons 
Center  of  Gravity  Height,  Inches 
Average  Roll  Displacement 
Spread  of  Ave.  Roll  Disp.  *  + 
Maximum  Roll  Oscillation  * 
TOTAL 


CAR    A 

Main 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Empty 

35 

35 

35 

70 

70 

70 

36.0 

71.6 

86.9 

86.9 

70.8 

86.8 

86.8 

0.1 

0.4 

0.4 

0.4 

0.6 

0.7 

0.7 

0 

0.2 

0.2 

0.2 

0.3 

0.4 

0.4 

3.1 

2.5 

2.1 

2.8 

1.6 

1.6 

3.5 

3.2 

3.1 

2.7 

3.4 
CAR    B 

2.5 

2.7 

4.6 

Main 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Empty 

35 

35 

35 

70 

70 

70 

35.75 

70.2 

85.7 

85.7 

70.2 

85.4 

85.4 

0.1 

0.4 

0.5 

0.5 

1.2 

1.6 

1.6 

0.1 

0.8 

0.3 

0.3 

0.8 

0.9 

0.9 

2.7 

2.4 

2.2 

2.5 

1.8 

2.6 

2.2 

2.9 

3.  1 

3.0 

3.3 

3.8 

5.1 

4.7 

ix   Inc 

hes   Unb 

alanc  e 

CAR    A 

Main 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Empty 

35 

35 

35 

70 

70 

70 

36.0 

71.6 

86.9 

86.9 

70.8 

86.8 

86.8 

0.1 

0.7 

0.7 

0.7 

1.1 

1.4 

1.4 

0 

0.2 

0.2 

0.2 

0.3 

0.4 

0.4 

3.1 

2.5 

2.1 

2.8 

1.6 

1.6 

3.5 

3.2 

3.4 

3.0 

3.7 
CAR    B 

3.0 

3.4 

5.3 

Main 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Main 

Main 

Branch 

Empty 

35 

35 

35 

70 

70 

70 

35.75 

70.2 

85.7 

85.7 

70.2 

85.4 

85.4 

0.2 

0.9 

1.0 

1.0 

2.5 

3.1 

3.  1 

0.1 

0.3 

0.3 

0.3 

0.8 

0.9 

0.9 

2.7 

2.4 

2.2 

2.5 

1.8 

2.6 

2.2 

3.0 

3.6 

3.5 

3.8 

5.1 

6.6 

6.2 

Plus  and  minus  values. 

Taken  as  30  percent  of  average  roll  displacement  for  6  in.  unbalance. 

Roll  center  height  taken  at  top  of  car  spring  groups. 


Clearances 


341 


LATERAL     DISPLACEMENT     IN     INCHES    AT     15     FEET    ABOVE      TOP    OF     RAIL 
-2.83  -141  0  1.41  2.83 


-3 


to 
111 

X 

U    -6 


CAR  A 


•  EMPTY  CAR 

o  70  INCH  C.G.  -  35  TON 

x  85    INCH  C.G.  -  35  TON 

*  70   INCH  C.G.  -   70  TON 
o  85    INCH  C.G.  -   70  TON 


■05  0  0.5 

CAR    BODY    ROLL     IN     DEGREES 


FIG.  1     STATIC     LEAN     TESTS 


342 


Clearances 


\A 

•  CURVES 
o  TANGENTS 

CAR  A 

1.2 

1.0 

• 

1 
• 

• 

0.8 

•     • 

'0 

<n    0.6 

Ul 

Id 

OL 

8    0.4 

a 

°      - 

{       0 

• 

• 

>  • 

• 

• 
• 

ft 

> 

° 

■H 

! 

o 
>• 

0 

•• 

• 
• 

• 

• 

• 

2 

—     0.2 

</) 

2 
O 

h       o 

i-.v 

• 

• 

•              • 

m 

•  • 
• 

• 

• 
• 

• 

• 
• 

O 

• 

< 

O 

o 

•   CURVES 
©  TANG-ENTS 

CAR   B 

L2 
Ul 

-1 

S       10 

1 

_l 
_l 
O 
&    as 

• 

• 

1 

0.6 

• 

1 

« 

■ 

>•• 
•• 

• 

0.4 

•    • 

• 

< 
1 

• 
• 

•  •  • 

•  • 

i 

• 

1 

• 
V 

•• 

•• 

•     •# 

•  •  • 

• 

• 

• 

10 


60 


70 


20  50  40  50 

SPEED    IN    MPH 

FIG.  2      RELATION    OF    ROLL    ANG-LE    OSCILLATIONS    TO   SPEED 
EMPTY    CAR   -  MAIN    LINE 


Clearances 


343 


\A 

•   CURVES 
o   TANGENTS 

CAR  A 

1.2 

< 

i 

0.8 

0.6 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

t/> 
UJ 

Uj   o.4 
0 

UJ 

a 

• 

" 

;      * 

• 

• 
• 

o 

•  • 

'8 

II 
•  1 ,    ■  • 

< 
• 
•  4 

) 

l 

i 

•• 

i 

•  • 

i 
i 

• 
• 

i 

0.2 

z 

I/) 
?      n 

• 

■1 

• 
< 

•  • 

• 

• 

• 
• 

i  i 
'  i 

<      1.4 


u 

CO 

o 

1.2 

UJ 

_i 

3 

z 

< 

1.0 

_i 

_i 

o 

a. 

0.8 

06 


0.4 


0.2 


•    CURVES 
0    TANGENTS 


">> 


CAR  B 


10 


60 


3.5 


3.0  _J 
< 
K 

2.5  u. 
O 

a. 

P 

UJ 

> 
o 

CO 

< 

U. 

< 

UJ 

I 

u 

z 

3.5 


2.0 


1.0 


5.0 


2.5 


20     £ 


1.5 


UJ 


TO 


20  SO  40  SO 

SPEED    IN    MPH 
FIG.  3     RELATION   OF   ROLL  ANGLE   OSCILLATIONS    TO    SPEED 

35  TON   LOAD,  70   INCH   CENTER   OF    GRAVITY-  MAIN    LINE 


344 


Clearances 


1.4 


1.2 


1.0 


0.6 


06 


3 


u 

0.4 

HI 

a 

2 

0.2 

to 

2 

O 

(- 

O 

< 

_1 

1.4 

-1 

o 

10 

o 

Ul 

1.2 

-1 

c!> 

2 

< 

1.0 

-1 

-I 

O 

a. 

as 

o.fe 


0.4 


0.2 


I 
•    CURVES 

CAR  A 

o    TANG 

ENTS 

> 

o 

i 

•  • 

>18 

0 

0 

• 

' 

•• 

o 

1 

0 

P8» 

0             1 

t 

•     • 
•             • 

• 
» 

>       o     • 

0* 

• 

V 

:. 

• 

2. 

• 

• 
• 

• 

4 

o 

1  • 

I           »  i      •       i  ■ 

1 ■■■■ 

•   CURVES 

CAR    B 

o   TANC 

JENTS 

O 



0 

0 

• 

)  *° 

c 

o 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

•  • 

• 

>• 

> 

o 

• 

• 
• 

tt' 



•• 

I* 
to 

•• 

t 

1 

• 

• 

• 

• 

10 


20  30  40  50 

SPEED   IN   MPH 


60 


13.5 


3.0 


2.5     i 


Z.O    o 


1.5 


1-0     § 


0.5     U. 


0        H 


hi 

Z 
3.5     3 


3.0 


111 

25     5 

U 

o 
< 

-I 


2.0 


..5      2 
Ul 

Sc 

1.0     J 


0.5 


70 


FIG-.4   RELATION    OF    ROLL    ANGLE    OSCILLATIONS    TO    SPEED 

35    TON    LOAD,    85    INCH   CENTER    OF    GRAVITY    -     MAIN    LINE 


Clearances 


345 


1.4 


1.0 


as 


0.6 


0.4 


0.2 


I    o 

5    1.4 

-I 

o 

8  u 


1.0 


0^ 


0.6 


0.4 


0.2 


30  40 

SPEED    IN     MPH 


70 


•   CURVES 
o  TANGENTS 

CAR  A 

0 

> 

i 

i 

; 

*> 

o 

• 

1 
1 

: 

i 

•• 

• 
• 

o 

o 

r. 

1 

0 

» 

! 

• 

• 

•    CURVES 
o   TANGENTS 

CAR  B 

• 

0 

i 

u 

>• 

* 

<4 

[ 

0 

• 

o 

• 

• 
• 

• 

' 

• 

5: 

5j5 


SO 


2.5 

< 

or 

2.0 

o 

1.5 

0. 

1.0 

g 

CO 

< 

05 

u. 

If) 

uj 

I 
o 

is    2 


3.0  h- 
Z 
111 

< 
-i 

a. 

2.0    <2 

a 


1.5 


FIG.  5    RELATION    OF   ROLL   ANGLE    OSCILLATIONS    TO    SPEED 

35   TON    LOAD,    SS    INCH    CENTER    OF   GRAVITY-  BRANCH    LINE 


346 


Clearances 


10 


20 


50 


60 


!.4 
1.2 
1.0 
0.8 
0.6 

O 

III 

£    0.4 
t» 

Id 

a 

Z    0.2 

«0 

0        0 

•    CURVES 
o    TANGENTS 

CAR  A 

— 

o 

• 

0 

o 

•           — 

■ 

• 

o 

I 

•          • 

o     o 

• 

• 
• 

• 
• 

1 

i 

••       • 

•:  • 

• 

• 

:« 

< 

• 

•• 

•  . 

' 

$       14 

<  I.I 

-1 

0 

K> 

°      1.2 
u 

a! 

<  1.0 

_i 
_i 

o 

a     0.8 
0.6 
0.4 

0.2 

•    CURVES 
o    TANGENTS 

CAR  B 

( 

>  • 

• 
• 
• 
• 

• 
• 

• 
• 

o 

• 
•o              • 

• 
1    •      •      • 

i 

•  • 

* 

• 
• 

•                • 

• 
• 

• 
• 

i 

< 
• 

i 

• 

• 

•        • 
• 

3L5 

30 

_i 

2-5 

i 

If. 

2.0 

0 

a 

o 

P 

1.5 

LU 

i 

m 

1.0 

< 

05 


O 
3.5     S 


3X3 


2.5 


2.0 


1.5 


1.0 


0.5 


70 


30  40 

SPEED  IN  MPH 

FIG.  6    RELATION    OF    ROLL    ANGLE    OSCILLATIONS  TO    SPEED 

70  TON     LOAD,  70   INCH    CENTER    OF    GRAVITY-  MAIN   LINE 


Clearances 


347 


1.4 


U 


IX) 


o8 


</)    0.6* 

u 
5 

li    04 
UJ 

a 


-    0,2 

Z 

o 


•   CURVES 

o   TANGENTS 


14 


1.2 


<     1J0 

d 

o 

a:    as 


a6 


04 


0.2 


1A 


•    CURVES 
o   TANGENTS 


•  •• 


*r 


CAR  A 


•    °  o 


A., 


CARB 


W 


10 


20 


50 


60 


£•5 


2.5 


n 

p 

2.0    h 

U 

1.5     O 

ID 
< 

to   ^ 


05 


h 
3.0    2 
Ul 


111 

25    U 

< 


2.0  a 


LU 
I- 
< 


7C 


30  40 

SPEED     IN    MPH 

FIG-. 7    RELATION     OF    ROLL    ANG-LE      OSCILLATIONS  TO     SPEED 

70    TON    LOAD,    85    INCH    CENTER    OF   GRAVITY  -  MAIN    LINE 


348 


Clearances 


1.4 

1.2 
1.0 
0.8 
0.6 

a  0.4 

DC 

0 

UJ 

°  a2 

z 

•   CURVES 
o  TANGENTS 

• 

CAR  A 

• 

o 

o 

• 

o 
J 

•   • 

p 
• 

< 

•  • 

•  • 

'A 

1                »o 

• 

o 

1 

< 

• 
• 
•• 

• 

_l 
-1 
O 

0     1.2 

UJ 

-J 
li 

5     1-0 

<*   as 
a6 

o4 
a2 

•    CURVES 

o    TANGENTS 

CAR   B 



• 
< 

i  • 

°   . 
o 
( 

oo 

•  • 

U 

o 

• 

*•• 
8  *        o 

• 

••o     , 

• 

>• 
• 

•• 

• 
• 
• 

• 

1 

; 

10 


20 


50 


60 


|5.5 


2.5 


za 


1.5 


10 


0.5 


35 


3.0 


2.5 


70 


30  40 

SPEED    IN   MPH 

FIG. 8     RELATION    OF   ROLL    ANGLE    OSCILLATIONS  TO    SPEED 

70   TON    LOAD,    85    INCH    CENTER   OF  GRAVITY  -  BRANCH    LINE 


Clearances 


349 


0.7 


0.6 


0.5 


0.4 


0,3 


z 

2 
O 

H 
< 

Ul 

_l 
u 
o 
o 
< 


-      0.5 

< 

0.4 


02 


0.1 


0.7 


0.6 


CAR    A 

: 

t   # 

4 

3 

□a  aV° 

) 

X 

v        X 

( 

* 

, 

A      if" 

( 

> 

J| 

■ 

• 

o 

□ 

L     X 

o 

X 

r     a 

A/ 

•  * 

ya 

D 

• 

A 



0.3 


0.2 


O.I 


CAR     B 

• 
o 

X 

EMPTY 
70    INCH 
85   INCH 

CAR 
C.G. 

C.G. 

-  35 

-  35 

TON 
TON 

*     70  INCH    C.G. 
o    85  INCH    C.G. 

a                     • 

-  70    TON 

-  70    TON 

D        C*              

* 

n                     *    aO 

f 

• 

a  ,. 

•j 

A 

SL 

o 

a 

Ux 

> 

( 

s»    A 

• 

10  20  30  40 

SPEED     IN     M.P.H 


50 


60 


70 


FIG. 


9      RELATION     OF    MAXIMUM     LATERAL   ACCELERATIONS 

AT    FLOOR    LEVEL   TO    SPEED    -    MAIKJ    LlkJE 


S50 


Clearances 


Z 

o 

h 
< 

UJ 

J 

ui 
o 
o 
< 

D 
I 
X 
< 

5 


0.7 

CAR  A 

«■ 

0.6 

X 

X 

IS 

0-5 
0-4 

X 

i  a 
oB° 

a 

'x 

D 

B 

a 

D 

! 

0.3 
02. 

X 

0.1 

0 

0.7 

CAR  B 

X  S5    INCH    C.G.    - 
o  85    INCH    C.G.    - 

35    TON 
70    TON 

0.6 

X 

0.5 

i 

j—     _j 

: 

1 

• 

0.4 

] 

C 

t 

1 

X 

1 

IX 

6 

a 

03 

j 

0.2 

0.1 

n 

0  10  20  30  40  SO  60  70 

SPEED    IN    M.P.H 
FIG.  10     RELATION    OF    MAXIMUM    LATERAL  ACCELERATIONS 

AT   FLOOI?   LEVEL  TO    SPEED  -  BRANCH   LINE 


Clearances 


351 


IX 

CAR 

A 

OA 
A    <f° 

•    |  X" 

□  9» 

A   A 
V    * 

o.e 

o 

• 

0 
X 

1  • 

jl 

A              BAX       • 

X 

X 

A 

0 
•       0, 

0* 

X 

OA 

• 

D 

1 
X 
A 

A 
A 

xx*: 

a 

a     ai 

i 

Cl9 

1 

•   EMPTY   CAR 

o   TO   INCH    C.G.    -    35  TON 

x  &5    INCH    C.G.    -    35  TON 

O 

*  70    INCH    C.G.    - 
°  85    INCH    C.G.    • 

70  TON 
-  70  TON 

)X> 


OA 


0.6 


OA 


o.z 


CAR       B 


IO 


20 


60 


70 


30  <*0  SO 

SPEED     IN    M.RH 

FIG.ll     RELATION     OF    MAXIMUM     VERTICAL     ACCELERATIONS 
TO    SPEED    -     MAIN     LINE 


Hull.  571 


352 


Clearances 


1.0 


O.A 


0.6 


0.2 
w 

2      o 

i.o 
z 
g 

K 

Ui        0.8 

_l 
U 
O 


0.6 


0.4- 


0.2 


CAR     A 

i 
x     , 

1 

a 
a 

° 

X   1 

*    X 

( 
c 

a       i 

t 

i 

0 

i 
a 

: 

X 

X 
X 

1 

{  ° 

X 

; 

c 

CAR    B 

x  85    INCH     C.G.  -    35  TON 
a  S5    INCH    C.G-  -    70  TON 

^ 

i 

1 

X 

i  a 

a 
a     : 

:    * 

X 

X 

:  * 

X 

I 

:x 
: 

10 


20 


60 


70 


30  AO  50 

SPEED     IN    M.P.H 

FIG.12     RELATION    OF    MAXIMUM     VERTICAL    ACCELERATIONS 
TO    SPEED    -    BRANCH     LINE 


Clearances 


3  S3 


Fig.  13 — Car  A,  1^8-in  spring  travel  with  35-ton  load,  85-in  combined 
center-of-gravity  height. 


Fig.    14 — Car   B,   3    11/16-in  spring  travel  with  35-ton   load, 
85-in    combined    center-of-gravity   height. 


354 

Clearances 

CARRIER 
AMPLIFIER 

LOW- PASS 
FILTER 

LATERAL 

COMPENSATION 
SIGNAL 

LATERAL 
ACCEL 

DC 
AMPLIFIER 

LATERAL 
WSP 

, 

*  ERROR  OUE  TO 
INCLINATION  OF 

ACCELEROMETER) 

INTEGRATING 
AMPLIFIERS 

r~\ 

CARRIER 
AMPLIFIER 

SCILLOGRAPH 

(H) 

V       J 

►■TO  0 

IPEN  WRITINGI 

v_y 

V 

OSCILLOGRAPH 

GYROSCOPE 

INTEGRATING 
AMPLIFIERS 

OSCILLOSCOPE 

DC 
AMPLIFIER 

VERTICAL 
DtSP 

VERTICAL 
ACCEL 

L 

1 

J 

r 

CARRIER 
AMPLIFIER 

LOW- PASS 
FILTER 

L 

VERTICAL 
ACCELEROMETER 

Fig. 


15 — Block    diagram   of  acceleration  and   displacement 
measurement  circuits. 


1.5 


1.0 


•  NO  ROLL 

O  ROLL,    NO   COMPENSATION 

a  POLL,  COMPENSATED 


1         1  1°  ROLL       ' 
15  Q    STATHAM   ACCELEC0METE1? 


g°  ±1.19    INCH 
DISPLACEMENT 


-ERROR    DUE   TO   INCLINATION 
OF   LATERAL    ACCELEROMETER 


0.5 


0  12  3  4 

FREQUENCY    IN    C.RS. 
FIG.  16..    LATERAL    DISPLACEMENT    CIRCUIT    FREQUENCY    RESPONSE 


Clearances 355 

Report  on  Assignment  8 

Review    Present    Methods    of    Presenting    Published 

Clearance    Information   to   Determine   How   This 

Can   Be   Simplified   and  or   Standardized 

I.  A.  Crawford  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  D.  Batchelder,  J.  E.  Beran,  B.  Bristovv, 
D.  H.  Brown,  R.  D.  Erhardt,  J.  E.  Good,  J.  G.  Greenlee,  W.  P.  Kobat,  R.  C. 
Xissen.  C.  E.  Petersen,  R.  C.  Rankin,  W.  S.  Ray,  R.  A.  Skooglun,  J.  F.  Smith, 
R.  L.  Williams. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  the  following  progress  report,  together  with 
a  proposed  method  of  presenting  published  clearance  information  to  be  considered  for 
adoption   in   the   future 

The  work  of  this  subcommittee  was  started  by  canvassing  its  members  as  to  how 
their  respective  roads  make  use  of  present  published  clearance  information,  and  for 
suggestions.  We  as  engineers  do  not  use  published  clearance  information  very  much  as 
we  are  more  intimately  concerned  with  the  movement  of  oversize  shipments  which 
exceed  the  published  clearances  on  our  roads.  However,  other  people  on  our  roads  (and 
also  shippers)  make  extensive  use  of  published  clearances  in  determining  whether  a 
shipment  can  be  moved  on  our  roads.  These  persons  on  our  roads  who  use  the  pub- 
lished clearances  the  most  were  of  great  assistance  to  us  in  the  initial  stage  of  our 
assignment  by  letting  us  know  which  representations  they  find  the  most,  and  the  least, 
helpful,  and  why. 

Analysis  and  evaluation  of  the  replies  of  members  of  the  subcommittee  with  respect 
to  their  thoughts  and  those  of  their  respective  transportation  people  concerning  the 
present  methods  of  presenting  published  clearances  and  how  this  can  be  simplified 
and/or  standardized  indicate  the  following  consensus: 

1.  A  representation  like  that  of  the  EJ&E  is  a  good  and  helpful  set-up.  However, 
it  is  believed  that  the  larger  roads  could  not  publish  their  clearances  in  this 
manner. 

2.  The  method  used  by  the  SP  is  well  liked,  but  it  was  also  suggested  that  if 
each  railroad  could  publish  its  clearances  in  a  manner  like  the  Southern  Pacific's 
Line  Clearance  Circular,  issued  annually,  the  publication  Railway  Line  Clear- 
ances could  be  discontinued.  However,  it  was  evident  that  many  railroads,  es- 
pecially the  smaller  ones,  could  not  justify  and/or  afford  the  expense  of  such 
a  representation  in  Railway  Line  Clearances  or  the  cost  of  printing  and  dis- 
tributing a  publication  similar  to  the  SP's  Line  Clearance  Circular. 

3.  It  is  apparent  the  majority  are  of  the  opinion  that  an  ideal  method  should 
include  (a)  clearances  (and  weight  limits)  for  routes  between  interchange  or 
junction  or  major  points  on  the  railroad,  (b)  an  index  in  alphabetical  order 
for  the  routes,  (c)  a  column  number  assigned  to  each  route,  (d)  a  small  map 
showing  the  lines  and  interchange  or  junction  or  major  point-  involved  in  the 
routes,  and  (e)  clearances  based  upon  cars  55  ft  long  with  truck  centers  of 
44  ft. 

A  mock-up  of  a  representation  for  a   fictitious  railway  for  Railway  Line  Clearances 
is   presented   herewith.   This   mock-up   was    prepared    to   illustrate    a    representation    which 

includes  all  five  of  the  items  referred  to  in  item  3  above.  It  was  kept  relatively  basi( 


356 


Clearances 


RAILWAY    LINE    CLEARANCES      jtOl 


CLEARANCE    AND   WEIGHT    LIMITS 


EXWYEZEE      RAILWAY 


These    clearances    are    based   on    single    loads,    with   no  overhangs    beyond  ends    of 
car.    and   on   using   cars   not   exceeding  55    feet    long   and   having    truck  centers   not    ex- 
ceeding  kh    feet.    Shipments   which   are    loaded   on    heavy  capacity   and/or    special    type 
cars,    or    shipments    of    pivoted   or    rotating   or    swinging  machinery  on    their   own 
wheels   or    loaded  on  cars,    and   cars   and    ladings   exceeding   published   clearances   or 
weights,    or   with    the   height    or    the   combined    center   of   gravity  exceeding  8^    inches 
above    top  of    rail,    or  with   the  center   of   gravity  of    the    lading   not   on    the    longi- 
tudinal   center    line  of   the   car  will    not    be  accepted  unless   authority   is   obtained 
in   advance    from  General    Superintendent   Transportation,    Exwyezee  Railway,   Aberdeen. 


Maxi- 
mum 
Gross 
Weight 
of   Car  t 
Ladi  ng 


LIST   OF   ROUTES 
Use    figures    shown    in   col- 
umn   indicated    by  numbers 
at    the   right    for    Points 
Between 


Col umn 

Num- 
bered 


Maxi- 
mum 
Gross 
Weiqht 
of   Car  6 
Ladi  nq 


LIST    OF    ROUTES 
Use    figures    shown    in   col- 
umn   indicated   by  numbers 
at    the   right    for    Points 
Between 


Refer 

to 

Co  I umn 

Num- 
bered 


220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 


THROUGH 
Aberdeen       an 


ROUTES 

d  Brimestone 
Camas 
Del  ta 
Evergreen 
Fernwood 
Aberdeen 
Camas 
Delta 
Evergreen 
Fernwood 
Aberdeen 
Brimestone 
Oel  ta 
Evergreen 
Fernwood 


No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 


No. 
No. 
No. 


220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 
220,000 


THROUGH   ROUTES 
Delta  and  Aberdeen 

Br  imestone 
Camas 
Evergreen 
Fernwood 
Evergreen        "      Aberdeen 

Brimestone 

Camas 

Delta 

Fernwood 

Aberdeen 

Brimestone 

Camas 

Delta 

Evergreen 


No. 
No. 

No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 


No.  10 

No.  5 

No.  5 

No.  8 

No.  8 


ABERDEEN 


MAP   SHOWING  MAIN    OR    PRIMARY    LINES 

AND    INTERCHANGE    OR   JUNCTIONS   CR 

MAJOR    POINTS   ON 

EXWYEZEE      RAILWAY 


Clearances 


357 


*+02  RAI  LWAY  LINE  CLEARANCES 


CLEARANCE  AND  WEIGHT  LIMITS 


EXWYEZEE      RAILWAY 


Height 

Above 

Top  of 

Rai  I 


THROUGH  CLEARANCES 


idth 


No  6 
Width 
ft. in. 


He  ight 

Above 

Top  of 

Rai  I 


Width 
ft. in. 


No.  3 

Width 


No.  5 
Width 
ft. in. 


o.  7 

idth 


No 6 
Width 
ft. in. 


No.  9 
Width 
ft. in. 


No.  10 
Width 

ft.  in. 


No.  I  I 
Width 


19 

9 

19 

6 

19 

3 

19 

0 

lb 

9 

It 

6 

IS 

3 

1  1 

9 

l  1 

6 

1 1 

3 

II 

0 

10 

9 

10 

6 

10 

3 

10 

0 

1 

9 

1 

6 

1 

3 

1 

0 

0 

9 

0 

6 

0 

3 

0 

0 

9 

9 

tJ 

0 

1 1 

6 

1 1 

6 

1 1 

3 

1 1 

0 

1 1 

0 

10 

9 

10 

6 

10 

3 

10 

0 

NCTE ;  Maximun  gross  weighr  of  car  and  lading  is  shown  in  List  of  Routes 
Railway's  representation. 


358  Clearances 

and  includes  only  a  small  number  of  routes;  however,  this  method  can  be  used  for  any 
number  of  routes  that  might  be  required  for  a  particular  railroad's  representation. 

The  mock-up  is  illustrative  only.  If  a  representation  of  this  method  were  used  in 
Railway  Line  Clearances,  the  size  and  style  of  type  would  be  what  this  publication  nor- 
mally uses;  thus  as  many  as  44  columns  could  be  printed  on  one  page  or  22  if  it  were 
desired  to  have  the  columns  the  full  length  of  the  page. 

Many  railroads  are  satisfied  with  their  representations  in  Railway  Line  Clearances; 
also,  the  governing  factors  which  dictate  the  representation  for  each  individual  railroad 
vary  greatly.  For  these  reasons  it  does  not  seem  that  it  will  be  possible  to  develop  a 
single  method  of  presenting  published  clearance  information  which  would  be  acceptable 
to  all  railroads.  Also,  some  railroads  because  of  their  personal  whims  will  not  consider 
using  any  method  except  that  which  they  are  presently  using. 

However,  it  is  our  opinion  that  the  method  illustrated  by  the  mock-up  is  better 
than  that  now  being  used  by  many  railroads  and  that  it  could  be  recommended  to  any 
railroad  which  was  interested  in  making  a  change  in  its  method  of  presenting  published 
clearance  information. 


Report  on  Assignment  9 

Review  Clearance  Records  of  Various  Railroads,  Looking 

To   Develop   a   Standardized   Method   For 

Charting   All   Obstructions 

M.  E.  Vosseller  (chairman,  subcommittee),  C.  O.  Bird,  E.  S.  Birkenwald,  B.  Bristow, 
J.  A.  Crawford,  J.  G.  Greenlee,  C  W.  Hamilton,  C.  F.  Intlekofer,  J.  R.  Moore, 
J.  F.  Pearce,  C.  E.  Peterson,  R.  C.  Rankin,  J.  F.  Smith,  J.  W.  Wagner,  R.  L. 
Williams,  M.  A.  Wohlschleager. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  a  progress  report  on  the  status  of  this 
assignment. 

A  sample  clearance  diagram  has  been  prepared  combining  methods  used  by  various 
roads.  This  sample  diagram  has  been  sent  to  committee  members  for  comments  and 
recommendations.  After  all  recommendations  have  been  received,  a  final  diagram  will  be 
prepared,  looking  to  submitting  it  for  publication  in  the  1963  report. 


TIBON 


ROOTS  AND  LOADS  TIES 


LAYING  WELDED  RAIL 


MODEL  441 

Developed  and  Built 
for  Railroad  Maintenance 

180°  BOOM  SWING 

DOES  ALL  JOBS! 


12  FAST  CHANGE  ATTACHMENTS 


•  Forks 

•  tU   Cu.  Yd.  Bucket 

•  Tote   Hook 

•  18'  Boom   Extension 

•  Fork  Tie   Baler 

•  Track   Cleaning   Bucket 


•  Back  Hoe 

•  Clamshell 

•  Back  Filler  Blade 

•  Pull    Drag   Bucket 

•  4  Cu.  Yd.   Snow  Bucket 

•  Pile  Hammer 


Optional  Attachment 
Flanged   Wheels,   Hydraulically   Controlled 


PETTIBONE  MDLLIKEN  CORPORATION 


RAILROAD  ^^^ll^    DIVISION 


141    W.    JACKSON  "l*'"  CHICAGO    4,    III 

80   Years  of  Service 
to  the  Railroad  Industry 


for  effective 
weed  control... 


Concentrated  BORASCU 
POLYBOR-CHLORATE® 
UREABOR® 

MONOBOR-CHLORATE 


These  borate  weed  killers  are  proving  best 
for  roads  in  every  way . . .  efficiency,  safety, 
economy,  convenience,  easy  application. 


Today's  use  of  borates  for  maximum  control  of 
vegetation  began  years  ago  with  our  pioneer 
work  in  the  field.  Continued  research  has 
developed  the  group  of  herbicides,  listed  above, 
which  most  roads  now  favor  for  every  phase  of 
weed  control.  These  four  weed  killers  are 
nonselective.  They  are  widely  used  for  year- 
round  maintenance  of  weed-free  conditions 
about  trestles,  tie  piles,  yards,  signals,  switches, 
and  rights  of  way.  Find  out  how  you,  too,  can 
do  a  better  job  on  weeds . . .  write  today . 


AGRICULTURAL  SALES  DEPARTMENT 


>i  WW  %>>»  >»***»  V 


BORAX 


630    SHATTO    PLACE     •     LOS    ANGELES    5,    CALIFORNIA 


Assure  lower  maintenance  costs, 
better  performance  with... 


iSSSSSK:  WMZM 


TEXACO 

Railroad  Lubricants 

and  Systematic 

Engineering  Service 


TEXACO  inc. 

RAILWAY  SALES  DIVISION 

135  East  42nd  St.,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 


NEW  YORK   •   CHICAGO   •    SAN  FRANCISCO   •   ST.  LOUIS   •   ST.  PAUL   •   ATLANTA 


at 

your 

service 


for 

a  1 1    types   of   cranes 

diesel   wreckers 

pile   drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608      S.      DEARBORN      ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.  COVELLI 
Pr**/rf«nf 

R«pr«i«ntaliv«t  in  Principal   CitUi 


iPM 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  are  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Cleaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  we 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rail 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand. 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  for 
better  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  lor  —  and  more 


c/ud£~/7St4>  ^te  &at&UKids  y%<2£~na</e  uset& as/ 


CEO 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


306  North  Coyuqo  Si 
llhoco.  N    T 


CONTINUOUS  RAIL 

—  Quickly,  Economically  with  the 

RAIL  WELDING 


A  typical  transformer  sub-station  furnish- 
ing commercial  power  for  NCG  Automatic 
Rail  Welding  System. 


When  "Flashing"  stops,  the  weld  upset  is 
sheared.  The  weld  is  then  ground  with 
abrasive  belts  to  a  smooth  surface. 


Now  small  work  crews  do  a  big,  fast 
job  with  the  continuous,  highly 
automated  NCG  Rail  Weldirtg  System 
using  commercial  electricity. 
Time-wasting  annealing  and 
normalizing  are  eliminated.  All 
operations  are  automatic,  under 
push-button  control. 

The  NCG  Rail  Welding  System  brings 
the  highly  desired  advantages  of 
continuous  rail  to  many  roads  which 
previously  deemed  it  beyond  budget 
acceptance.  It  may  be  purchased 
or  leased.  Write  for  details  now. 
NATIONAL  CYLINDER  GAS,  DIVISION 
OF  CHEMETRON  CORPORATION 
840  N.  Michigan  Ave.,  Chicago  11,  111. 


NCG 


A  pusher  moves  strings  of  welded  rail 
onto  flat  cars  ready  for  shipment. 


NATIONAL  CYLINDER  GAS 

7)  (Ana  con,  off-  j  CHEMETaON  J  CoY?<yid?Zd7i, 


©1961  Chemetron  Corporation 


VEGETATION  CONTROL 

CHEMICALS 


# 


READE  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  INC. 

Jersey  City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas 
City — Birmingham — Stockton 

SERVING  RAILROADS  OF  AMERICA  FOR 
MORE  THAN  FORTY  YEARS 


W 
E 

E 
D 

A 
N 
D 

B 

R 
U 
S 
H 

C 
O 
N 
T 
R 
O 
L 


£-x-t-e-n-d  Tie  JZ-l-$-*l 
11  old.    Cfaqe! 

USE  TIE  PLATE 
LOCK  SPIKES 


One-piece  Design 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  tie  plates  firmly  in  place  on 
cross-ties  and  bridge  timbers. 

LOCK  SPIKES  are  quickly  and  easily  driven, 
or  removed,  with  standard  track  tools. 

Driven  to  refusal,  the  spread  shank  is  com- 
pressed by  the  walls  of  the  hole.  Tie  plates  are  held 
against  horizontal  and  vertical  movement  under 
spring  pressure.  Play  between  the  spike  and  the 
hole  is  eliminated — abrasion  and  seating  of  tie 
plates  is  overcome. 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  their  position  in  the  tie, 
and  redriving  to  tighten  the  plate  is  not  required. 
They  provide  a  quiet  and  strengthened  track. 

Annual  cost  of  ties  and  maintenance  expense  is 
reduced  by  extending  the  life  of  ties  and  holding 
gage.  Here  is  one  answer  to  conservation  of  ma- 
terials and  labor.  Write  for  free  folder. 

BERNUTH,  LEMBCKE   CO.,  INC. 

420  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 


Actual 
Size 


The  custom-built  assembly  shown 
above  and  to  the  right  is  an  all-purpose 
rig  designed  to  give  maximum  flexibility 
in  coating  and  painting  work.  It  was 
designed  for  field  application  of  paints, 
lacquers,  vinyls,  cutback  asphalts, 
creosotes,  heavy  oils  and  greases. 
-  It  uses  the  economical  Graco  Hydra- 
Spray  Process,  and  proves  once  again, 
you  get  the  job  done  faster  and  better 
with  Graco  than  with  any  other  coat- 
ing system. 

If  speed  of  coating  application,  and 
material  savings  are  important  to  you, 
write  today  for  all  the  details  of  the 
Graco  Hydra-Spray  Process. 


FREE! 


Graco  Engineers  are  prepared  to  help  you  in  the  design  of  your 
paint  and  material  spray  assemblies.  Your  Graco  Railway  Rep- 
resentative will  be  glad  to  explain  the  many  benefits  of  this 
service.  Write  or  call  him  .  .  .  today.' 


Graco 

GRAY  COMPANY,  INC. 

MINNEAPOLIS  13,  MINNESOTA 


RAILWAY  DEPARTMENT 

JOHN  P.  McADAMS,  Eastern  Sales  Representative 
2304  Wilson  Boulevard,  Arlington,  Virginia 


CHICAGO— (Broadview,  III.) 

R.  D.  Worley 

3030  South  25th  Ave. 

CLEVELAND 

M.  H.  Frank  Company,  Inc. 
1202  Marshall  Building 

HOUSTON 

Hous'on  Railroad  Supply  Co. 
1610  Dumble  Street 


PHILADELPHIA 

The  A.  R.  Kidd  Co. 

1036  Suburban  Station  Bldg. 

LOUISVILLE 

T.  F.  &  H.  H.  Going 

6308  Limewood  Circle 

ST.  LOUIS 

The  Carriers  Supply  Company 
81  8  Olive  Street 


NEW   YORK  — Newark,  New  Jersey 

R.  A.  Corley 
744  Broad  Street 

SAN  FRANCISCO 

The  Barnes  Supply  Company 
Rm  504,  74  Montgomery  Street 

TWIN   CITIES  — St.  Paul,  Minn. 

The  Daniel  L.  O'Brien  Supply  Compory 
Endicott-On-Fourth  Bldg. 


WASHINGTON— Arlington,  Va. 

Southeastern  Railway  Supply,  Inc. 
2304  Wilson  Blvd. 


MONTREAL  — Ontario,  Canada 

International  Equipment  Co.,  Ltd. 
360  St.  James  Street  West 


Hubbard  Super  Service  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Super  Steel  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Track  Tools 

Hubbard  Tool  Division 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

New  York  Pittsburgh  Chicago 

W>      Unit  Rail  Anchor      W 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  DIVISION 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

NEW  YORK  PITTSBURGH  CHICAGO 


RAIL  JOINTS 

STANDARD 

COMPROMISE 

INSULATED 


FIBRE  RENEWAL  PARTS 


*  *  * 


Rail  Joint  Company 

Division  of  Poor  &   Company,   (Inc.) 
New  York  7,   N.  Y. 


AUTOJACK 
ELECTROMATIC 


The  only  completely 
automatic  track  surfacing 
machine  on  the  market 


Proven  in  operation  by  North  America's 
leading  railroads.  Complete  and  auto- 
matic control  of  surface  and  cross  level 
through  tangent  and  curve  territory 
regardless  of  height  of  lift. 

•  Combination  of  Autojack  and  Electromatic 
equals  or  improves  production  of  Electro- 
matic alone. 

•  Precision  of  lift  and  uniformity  of  compaction 
controlled  automatically. 


All  variations  in  lift,  level  and  run-out  con- 
trolled from  operator's  panel. 

Beam  "sighting"  for  utmost  precision. 

Front  buggy  self-propelled  ahead  of  tamper. 


TAMPER     INC.    53  Court  St.,  Pittsburgh,  N.Y. 

SALES   AND   SERVICE:    2 1  47  University  Avenue 
St.  Paul  1  4,  Minnesota 
Phone:  645-5055 
IN   CANADA    160  St.  Joseph  Blvd., 

Lachine  (Montreal),  P.Q. 
Phone:  637-5531 
Your  enquiries  for  detailed  information  or  brochures  on 
Autojack  Electromatic  and  other  track  ma  chines  a  re  invited. 


the  world's  largest 
selling  rail  anchor 


876R 


IMPROVED 
FAIR 

RAIL  ANCHOR 


POWER 

DESIGN  MEANS 

P  longer  service  Hie 
/  •  Greater  holding  power 
W Faster,  easier  installation 


1±!EP.*M.22: 

Division  of  Poor  and  Company 
CHICAGO.  NEW  YORK,  DENVER,  ST.  LOUIS,  BOSTON,  ST.  PAUL. WASHINGTON,  SAN  FRANCISCO.  MEXICO  CITY 


Notes  on 

Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures 
from  the  School  of  Experience 


By  J.  A.  Given 

A  series  of  notes,  comments,  short-cut  methods  and  "tricks  of  the 
trade"  written  by  a  railroad  location  engineer  of  many  years  of 
practical   experience  for  the   benefit  of  young  engineers. 

Price  $0.50 

AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 

59  East  Van   Buren  Street 
Chicago  5,  III. 


The  only  man  on  his  feet... 


He's  the  pin  puller — uncoupling  cars.  He 
could  be  in  any  of  the  GRS-equipped  auto- 
matic yards.  Once  a  car  is  free,  its  speed  is 
controlled  automatically  by  Class-Matic*, 
the  GRS  system  of  yard  automation.  At 
the  crest,  the  conductor  pushes  a  button  on 
his  console  for  each  cut,  to  route  the  cars 
automatically  to  the  proper  tracks.  In  the 
retarder  tower,  the  operator  merely  moni- 
tors the  system. 

The  free-rolling  cars  are  judged  individ- 


ually as  to  rollability,  weight,  route,  dis- 
tance to  coupling,  and  other  factors  which 
are  fed  to  the  analog  computer.  This  con- 
trols the  retardation  automatically  so  the 
cars  glide  gently  to  coupling. 

What  a  saving  in  manpower!  And  con- 
sider the  safety  factor — only  one  man  near 
the  cars  at  any  time.  The  saving  in  freight 
time  alone  will  vindicate  your  choice  of 
GRS  Class-Matic,  the  system  that  pays 
for  itself  in  short  order. 


GENERAL   RAILWAY    SIGNAL   COMPANY 


ROCHESTER   2,   NEW  YORK 
NEW  YORK  17,  NEW  YORK  CHICAGO  I,  ILLINOIS 


ST.  LOUIS  1,  MISSOURI 


P.  O.   Box    10378  LOgan   6-7922 

GREENHEART,    INC. 

1431    N.  E.  26th   Street 
FORT  LAUDERDALE,  FLORIDA 

President — John   L.  McEwen — Quarter  Century  Experience 

IMPORTERS: 


Greenheart  Piles,  Lumber,  Timbers  Long  Length 
MORA  EXCELSA— Lumber  and  Timbers 

Teak  and   other  Woods  from   Burma,  Siam,  Australia, 
Africa  and   South  America 


OO  WOODINGS-VERONA  TOOL  WORKS 

^LJ  Pioneer  Manufacturers 

oi 

HIGH  GRADE  TRACK  TOOLS 

and 
SPRING  WASHERS  FOR  TRACK 

Since  1873 

VERONA.  PA.  CHICAGO,  ILL. 


WOODENGS  FORGE  <£  TOOL  COMPANY 

VERONA.  PA. 

Makers 
of 

WOODINGS  RAIL  ANCHORS 

CHICAGO,  ILL. 

but 


•  cross  tamping  as  Jackson  Utility  Tampers 
use  it  provides  by  far  the  best,  most 
practical  method  of  spot-tamping.  General  thinking  has  been  that  a  secondary 
or  "spot-tamper"  should  be  small,  light  and  inexpensive.  We  agree,  yet  such 
machines  have  to  work  in  really  difficult  applications  where  ballast  is  usually 
fouled,  cemented  and  normally  difficult  of  penetration.  To  really  do  the  job, 
power  that  approaches  that  of  mainline  production  tampers  is  needed.  And 
that  is  what  you  will  find  in  the  Jackson  Utility  Tampers.  With  exceedingly  power- 
ful motors  of  the  production  tamper  type  and  their  3-dimensional  vibratory  action 
they  achieve  thorough  consolidation  of  the  ballast  directly  under  the  rail  and  in 
a  wide  area  under  the  tie.  Obviously  cross  tampers,  having  half  the  number  of 
tampers  used  in  mainline  production  tampers,  are  less  speedy;  but  quality  of 
tamping  can  be  to  any  standard  desired.  And  by  any  comparison  of  quality  and 
speed,  these  Jackson  Utility  Tampers  will  skin  the  tail  off  any  lightweight  spot 
tamper  of  the  4-face  variety.  Let  us  demonstrate  under  your  own  conditions. 


IflfUHflN  VIBRATORS 

JflUliUUI    I      IU0INGT0N  MICHIGA 


INC 

CHIGAN  USA 


IMFMOVIE© 


A  COMPLETE  LINE 
OF  SPRING  WASHERS 


THE  NATIONAL  LOCK  WASHER  CO 

Newark  N.  J.,  V.  S.  A. 


THE  DOUBLE  U  RAIL  ANCHOR 


ACHUFF  RAILWAY  SUPPLY  CO. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


Model  N  U  Tie  Cutter 


HERE  IS  THE  WINNING  TEAM 

The  Woolery  NU  Tie  Cutter  and  the  Woolery  Tie-end  Remover  preserve  the  line  and  surface 
of  the  track  and  at  the  same  time  reduce  the  cost  of  tie  renewals.  Ties  can  be  removed 
without  trenching,  jacking  up  track  or  adzing  tops  of  rail-cut  ties.  With  this  team  you  simply 
cut  both  ends  of  tie,  pry  out  center  piece,  insert  in  its  place  the  tie-end  remover  and  out 
go  the  tie  ends  pushed  by  the  double  acting,  double  ended  hydraulic  cylinder  of  the  Tie- 
end  remover. 


FOR  HIGHEST  EFFICIENCY  USE  TWO  TIE  CUTTERS  WITH  ONE  TIE-END  REMOVE! 


WOOLERY  MACHINE  COMPANY 


MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN. 


Kershaw  Trackwork  Machines 


Designed,  Tested,  and   Proven 
on  America's  Railroads 


Kershaw 


MANUFACTURING  CO.  m 


M0NT60MERY 


ALABAMA 


Trackwork  Equipment  Developed  and  Proven  On  the  Job 

Heavy  Duty  Ballast  Regulator,  Scarifier  and  Plow,  Standard  Ballast  Regulator,  Scarifier 
and  Plow,  Track  Broom,  Super  Jack-All,  Standard  Jack-All  Kershaw  Kribber,  Two- 
Wheel  Kribber,  Tie  Bed  Cleaner,  Track  Undercutter-Skeletonizer,  Ballast  Cleaner, 
Multiple  (Spot)  Tamper,  Foreman's  Sight  Car,  Crib-Adze,  Rail  Re-Layer,  Mocar 
Crane,  Track  Crane  and  Tie  Inserter,  Utility  Derrick,  Two-Ton  Rail  Derrick,  Chemical 
Spreader  Car,  Tie  Replacer,  and  Universe'  Side  Set-Off  Assembly. 


THE  TRASCO 
AUTONOMIC  CAR  RETARDER 

CLAMPS  IN  PLACE 
ANYWHERE  IN  TRACK 

SIMPLE  —  EFFECTIVE  —  INEXPENSIVE 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  CO. 

GENERAL   MOTORS   BLDG. 
NEW  YORK  19,  N.  Y. 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 

Vol.  64,  No.  576  January  1963 


REPORTS  OF  COMMITTEES 

15 — Iron  and  Steel  Structures 359 

7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles 371 

11 — Engineering  and  Valuation   Records 387 

24 — Cooperative  Relations  with   Universities 397 

18 — Electricity    407 


The  reports  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  will  be  presented  to  the  1963  Busi- 
ness Meeting  of  the  Association  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  March 
15—16.  Comments  and  discussion  with  respect  to  any  of  the  reports  are  solicited, 
and  should  be  addressed  to  the  chairman  of  the  committee  involved,  in  writing 
in  advance  of  the  Meeting,  or  from  the  floor  during  the  Meeting. 


Copyright    196/3,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    Asiociation 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 
1962-1963 

President 
C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Vice  Presidents 
L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines, 

Houston  1,  Tex. 
T.  F.  Burris,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 

Past  Presidents 

E.  J.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  Chicago  6. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 

Directors 

C.  J.  Henry,  Chief  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

J.  M.  Trissal,  Vice  President  and  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

W.  B.  Throckmorton,  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chi- 
cago 5. 

J.  A.  Bunjer,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  Omaha  2,  Nebr. 

J.  H.  Brown,  Assistant  General  Manager — Eastern  District,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco 
Railway,  Springfield  2,  Mo. 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Rail- 
way, Amarillo,  Tex. 

W.  H.  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,  Chicago  6. 

F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  L.  Young,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Defendorf,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 
Denver  17,  Colo. 

Treasurer 

A.  B.  Htllman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 
Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

Executive  Secretary 
Neal  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  HI. 

Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November   and   December;    Bi-Monthly,    June-July,    and   September-October,   at    2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

59  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5,  HI. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  for  in  Section   1103,  Act  of  October  3,   1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,  1918. 

Subscription    $10  per  annum. 


Report    of    Committee    15 — Iron    and    Steel    Structures 


(Nil  kki.d.  Chairman 

G.   W.    S  viMos. 
Vice  Chairman 

J  M    11  u  ;  -.  Secretary 

I     S.  Bran  \«  alu 

J.     E.    SOITH 

E.  T.  Franzes 
A.   R.   Harris 
R.  C.  Baker 

H.    \\  .    GlSTAFSON 
J.    C.    Kl\(. 


11        \       BALKE 

J.  L.  Beckei 

1..   S.    Hi  idle 
R,  S.   Hi  nnett 
J.  E.   Bernhardt 

E.    D.     Bit. I.MEYER 

R.  T.  Blewitt 
H.   F.   Bober 
E.  T.  Bond,  Jr. 

J.    ('.     BRIDGI  I  ARMI.R 

R,  \.   Hkodie 
E.  E.  Burgh 
I.  \\  .  Davidson 
J.  G.  Clark 
R.  P.  Davis 

W.    E.    DOWLING 

C.   E.  Kkberg 
T.  L.  Fuller 
G.  K.  Gillan 
C.  D.   Hanover,  Jr. 
Alfred  Hedefine 
W.  C.  Howe 
W.  H.  Jameson 
E.  A.  Johnson 
B.  G.  Johnston 
E.  \V.  Kieckers 
M.  L.   Koehler 
K.  H.  Lenzen 
Shu-t'ien  Li 
J.  F.  Marsh 
M.  L.  McCauley 


I).  V.  Messman 

J  Wll  s    MirilALOS 

W.  G.  Mitchell 

R.    F.    Mol.INE 

\Y.  H.  Munse 

\.     M.    Xl.WMARK 

J.  C  Nichols 

13.    L.   NORD 
R.  D.  Xordstrom 
T.  G.  OX  li  i 
Ellis  E.  Paul 
G.  H.   Perkins 
R.  A.  Peteritas 
A.  G.  Rankin 

C.  A.  Roberts 
W.  E.  Robey 
G.  E.  Robinson 

D.  D.  Rosen- 
Henry  Seitz 

R.    I.    SlMKINS 

A.  E.  Smith 
R.  D.  Spellman 
W.  M.  Thatcher 
L.  E.  Titlow 
H.  T.  Weltv  (E) 
H.  X.  Wilcox 
A.  R.  Wilson  (E) 
A.  J.  Wood 
M.  O.  Woxland 
L.  T.  Wyly 

Committee 


Member  Emeritus. 
Thii-<-    whose    namr~    are    -t-i    in    bold-face    type   constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR.    Com- 
mittee 15. 

To  the  American   Railway  Engineering   Association: 

Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Ri  \  ision   of   specifications,   submitted  for  adoption    page  361 

Anti-friction  bearings  for  movable-bridge  applications,  submitted  as  infor- 
mation        page  363 

teel    and    concrete   spans;    non-ferrous   metal    bridges,   collab- 
orating with  Committees  8  and  30. 

Final  report  on  composite  steel  and  concrete  spans,  submitted  for  adoption,  page  364 
Final   report   on   Don-ferrous  metal   bridges,  submitted  as  information    page    $65 

1  urn. -ion  of  de<  k  plati 

The  details  of  the  tests  of  plate  specimens  of  l-1  different  metals  at  the  As- 
ition  i  i  American  Railroads'  Research  Center  and  on  the  Huey  P.  Long 
bridge  al  New  Orleans,  to  determine  their  relative  resistance  to  corrosion, 
were  reported  in  I960  Proceedings,  Vol.  61,  pa  Uso,  refer  to  progress 

report  in  1<>61  Proceedings,  Vol.  62,  page  549. 


lull.    "I. 


359 


360 Iron   and   Steel   Structures 

Members  of  committee  present  at  the  meeting  in  New  Orleans,  October  24 
and  25,  visited  the  Huey  P.  Long  bridge  and  inspected  the  test  plates 
installed  at  this  location.  It  was  the  consensus  that  with  the  exception  of 
the  aluminum  and  stainless  steel  little  difference  in  the  condition  of  the 
various  types  of  specimens  could  be  determined  by  visual  examination. 
The  tests  will  be  continued  for  future  evaluation. 

4.  Stress  distribution  in  bridge  frames. 
(a)   Floorbeam  hangers. 

Final  report,  submitted  for  adoption   page  367 

(c)   Truss  bridge  research  project 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  367 

5.  Design  of  steel  bridge  details. 

Final  report.  The  Board  Committee  on  Assignments  has  approved  your 
committee's  recommendation  that  this  subject  be  discontinued  as  an  As- 
sociation assignment.  The  review  of  various  articles  and  the  investigations 
outlined  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  page  380,  will  be  continued,  how- 
ever, and  any  revisions  or  additions  to  Manual  material  resulting  therefrom 
will  be  submitted  under  Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

6.  Preparation  and  painting  of  steel  surfaces;  synthetic  resins  and  other 
adhesive  materials  for  protective  coating  and  reinforcement,  collaborating 
with  Committee  7. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  368 

7.  Bibliography  and  technical  explanation  of  various  requirements  in  AREA 
specifications  relating  to  iron  and  steel  structures. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  369 

8.  Specifications  for  the  design  of  structural  plate  pipe  with  diameters  greater 
than  IS  ft.  Your  committee  has  prepared  a  list  of  installations  based  on 
information  from  various  publications  reporting  on  projects  in  the  United 
States  and  Canada.  The  installations  cover  structural  plate  pipes  IS  ft  in 
diameter  and  over,  supporting  both  rail  and  highway  loading,  with  covers 
varying  from  3  to  112  ft.  The  pipes  were  designed  in  accordance  with  the 
ring  compression  theory  and  the  flexibility  factor  for  handling  and  erecting 
the  pipe.  Data  will  be  secured  in  connection  with  construction  specifications 
and  on  the  behavior  of  the  pipes  after  a  period  of  service. 

10.  Effect  of  continuous  welded  rail  on  bridges,  collaborating  with  the  Special 
Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail. 

Your  committee  is  continuing  its  investigations  and  compiling  information 
on  current  practice  on  foreign  as  well  as  United  States  and  Canadian  rail- 
roads. Such  information,  together  with  experience  records  of  actual  installa- 
tions, will  form  the  basis  for  a  future  report. 

The  Committee  on  Iron  and  Steel  Structures, 

C  Neufeld,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin   576,  January  1963. 


Iron    and   Steel   Structures 361 

Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision  of  Manual 

E.  S.  Birkenwald  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  L.  Beckel,  R.  P.  Davis,  A.  R.  Harris, 
J.  M.  Hayes,  W.  H.  Jameson,  J.  F.  Marsh,  D.  V.  Messman,  E.  E.  Paul,  D.  D. 
Rosen,  G.  VV.  Salmon,  R.  D.  Spellmaa 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  revisions  of  specifications  for  adoption  and 
publication  in  the  Manual: 

Pages  15-1-1  to  15-1-58,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STEEL  RAILWAY  BRIDGES 

Revise  in   accordance   with   the   recommendations   published  in   AREA  Proceedings, 
Vol.  63,  pages  387  to  390,  incl.,  except  that: 

(1)  On  page  388  in  the  third  and  seventh  lines  the  words,  "net  section",  shall  be 
inserted  after  the  word,  "bending." 

(2)  On  page  388,  revise  the  line  reading,  "bearing  on  pins  and  power  driven  rivets 

27,000",  to  read,  "bearing  on  power  driven  rivets  in  single  shear 

and  pins  27,000." 

(3)  On  page  388,  insert  a  new  line  reading,  "bearing  on  power  driven  rivets  in 
double  shear 36,000",  immediately  under  the  line  reading,  "bear- 
ing on  milled  stiffeners  and  other  steel  parts  in  contact  30,000." 

(4)  On  page  389,  in  the  line  starting,  "Carbon,  max  percent",  substitute  0.26  for 
0.28  under  the  column  captioned  Ladle  Analysis,  and  0.30  for  0.32  under  the 
column  captioned  Check  Analysis. 

(5)  On  page  389,  in  the  line  starting,  "Tensile  strength,  psi",  substitute  58,000 
for  60,000  under  the  column  captioned  Structural  Steel. 

Pages  15-7-3  to  15-7-8,  incl. 

RULES  FOR  RATING  EXISTING  IRON  AND  STEEL  BRIDGES 

Page  15-7-6,  Art.  14: 
Revise  the  first  paragraph  to  read: 

The  permissible   unit  stresses  resulting  from   the  loads  and  forces  described  in   the 
preceding  articles  are  the  following,  in  which 

k  =  0.&  of  the  yield  point  for  open-hearth  steel;  A  7,  A  36  and  A  141  steels  in 

accordance  with  ASTM  Specifications;   and  wrought  iron 
k  :=  0.7  of  the  yield  point  for  bessemer,  silicon  and  high-strength  steel 
k  =  0.65  of  the  yield  point  for  nickel  steel 

Revise  the  third  paragraph  to  read: 

Axial  tension,  net  section    k 

Tension,  in  floorbeam  hangers,  including  bending,  mi   section: 

using  rivets  in  end  connections   0.75* 

but  not  to  exceed  21,600  psi 

using  high-strength  bolts  in  end  connections   k 

but  not  to  exceed  28,800  psi 


362 Iron    and    Steel   Structures 

Tension  in  extreme  fibers  of  rolled  shapes,  girders  and  built  sections, 

subject   to   bending,   net  section    k 

Delete  the  words,  "in  pounds  per  square  inch",  from  the  first  line  of  fourth  para- 
graph. 

Revise  the  second  line  of  the  fourth  paragraph  by  inserting  after  the  word,  "for", 
the  following:  "A  7." 

Revise  the  third  line  of  the  fourth  paragraph  by  inserting  after  the  words,  "silicon 
steel",  the  following:  "or  A  36  steel." 

Page  15-7-7,  Art.  14:  Substitute  in  the  first  full  line  for  the  words,  "open-hearth 
or  bessemer  steel",  the  words  "A   7,  open-hearth  or  bessemer  steel". 

Insert  a  new  third  line  between  the  lines  beginning,  "wrought  iron",  and  "silicon 
steel",  as  follows: 

A  36  steel  "^OO^17'000-  0J1  ~ )  lo^i17'000-0-43  IT ) 

In  the  first  full  paragraph  where  /—  1.20,  revise  the  words,  "open-hearth  steel  and 
wrought  iron",  to  read:   "A  7  steel,  open-hearth  steel  and  wrought  iron." 

In  the  first  full  paragraph,  insert  a  new  fifth  line,  as  follows:  "=  1.18  for  A  36 
steel." 

Delete  the  words,  "in  pounds  per  square  inch",  from  the  second  line  of  the  sec- 
ond paragraph. 

In  the  third  line  of  the  second  paragraph  revise  the  words,  "open-hearth  or  bes- 
semer steel",  to   read:    "A   7,  open-hearth  or  bessemer  steel." 

Insert  a  new  line  in  the  second  paragraph  between,  "Wrought  Iron",  and,  "Silicon 
steel",  as  follows: 

A36steel Ib^O0'000-6"^) 

Delete  the  words,  "in  pounds  per  square  inch",  from  the  first  line  of  the  third 
paragraph. 

In  the  third  paragraph,  third  line,  add  the  words:   A  7,  or  A  36  steel. 

Page  15-7-8,  Art.  14:  In  the  second  line  insert  after  the  word,  "for",  the  following: 
"A  7,  A  36  or." 

Revise  the  fifth  through  tenth  lines  to  read: 

Shear  in  webs  of  plate  girders  and  rolled  beams  0.75& 

Shear  in  rivets  and  pins   0.9fc 

Pages    15-M-27   to    15-M-29,   incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   STRUCTURAL   JOINTS    USING   HIGH- 
STRENGTH   STEEL   BOLTS   IN   STEEL 
RAILWAY  BRIDGES 

Revise   in   accordance   with   the   recommendations  published  in   AREA  Proceedings, 

Vol.  63,  pages  390  to  398,  inch,  except  that: 

(1)  On  page  390,  Par.  3,  Sec.  A,  Scope,  shall  be  revised  to  read: 

"3.  Joints  required  to   resist  shear  between  their  connected  parts  are  designated  as 

either  friction-type  or  bearing-type  connections.  Shear  connections  shall  be  friction-type 

when  subjected  to  stress  reversal,  severe  stress  fluctuation  or  where  slippage  would  be 

undesirable." 


Iron   and   Steel   Structures  363 

(2)  On  page  392,  Par.  2,  Sec.  D,  Allowable  Working  Stresses,  substitute,  "18,000", 
for   "20,000",   in   the   last   line; 

(3)  On  page  393,  Par.   1,  Sec.  E,  Assembly,  substitute  the  following: 

"1.  Heavy  hexagon  structural  bolts  with  heavy  semi-finished  hexagon  nuts  shall  be 
installed  with  a  hardened  washer  under  the  turned  element. 

"When  the  outer  face  of  the  bolted  parts  has  a  slope  of  more  than  1:20,  a  smooth 
beveled  washer  shall  be  used  to  compensate  for  the  lack  of  parallelism. 

"Where  bolt  holes  are  oversize  and  where  bolts  are  subject  to  tensile  loads,  a  hard- 
ened  washer  shall  be  used  under  both  the  bolt  head  and  nut." 

(4)  On   page  397,  under  the  caption,  "Installation",  delete  the  first  paragraph. 


Your  committee  presents  as  information  the  following  report  concerning  anti- 
friction  bearings   for   movable-bridge  applications: 

In  1958  one  of  the  manufacturers  of  anti-friction  bearings  raised  the  issue  that  the 
value  of  3000  d  lb  per  inch  of  roller  length  allowed  by  the  Specifications  for  Movable 
Railway  Bridges,  Art.  16,  Sec.  C,  is  too  conservative  and  results  in  the  use  of  bearings 
that  are  oversized  and  unnecessarily  expensive. 

Since  that  time  members  of  the  committee  and  major  bearing  manufacturers  have 
given  this  matter  considerable  study.  In  summary,  ratings  recommended  by  various 
bearing  manufacturers  are  as  follows: 

Manufacturer  A(a>    C=  1.5  P 

Manufacturer    B(h)     1 7,500  d 

Manufacturer    C    5,000  d 

Manufacturer   D    3,000  d 

»'  Manufacturer  A  relates  allowable  load  to  dynamic  capacity  C.  This  formula  gives  the  required 
capacity  for  which  <)7  percent  of  a  group  of  identical  bearings  will  not  fail  after  500,000  revolutions 
under   the   applied    load   P. 

''  '  Manufacturer   B    recommends   five   times   its  basic  catalog  rating  of  about  3500  d. 

Evidently,  even  among  major  bearing  manufacturers  there  is  a  considerable  differ- 
ence of  opinion  about  the  safe  load  values  for  anti-friction  bearings  used  in  movablc- 
bridge  applications. 

The  sheave  bearings  of  vertical  lift  bridges  and  the  trunnion  bearings  of  bascule 
bridges  are  major  components.  A  failure  of  these  bearings  makes  the  bridge  inoperable, 
and  the  replacement  of  such  a  bearing  is  a  long,  difficult  and  extremely  costly  operation. 
These  bearings  must  therefore  be  selected  so  that  there  is  the  least  possibility  of  their 
failure  during  the  useful  life  of  the  structure. 

Anti-friction  bearings  are  industry  rated  on  the  probability  of  survival  of  90  percent 
ot  a  group  of  presumably  identical  bearings  loaded  with  the  rated  load  for  a  given  num 
ber  of  revolutions.  When'  the  number  of  revolutions  is  1,000,000,  the  rated  load  is  defined 
on  the  dynamic  capacity  by   the  Anti-Friction    Bearing  Manufacturers  Association.  This 
dynamic  capacity  is  the  value  C  shown  above  in  Manufacturer  As  formula. 

Obviously,  a  10  percent  probability  of  failure  is  intolerable  for  movable-bridge  ap- 
plications. In  its  recommendation  Manufacturer  A  has  proposed  a  formula  to  reduce  the 
probability   to  about  3  percent,  based  on  500,000  revolutions. 

For  a  vertical-lift  bridge,  for  example,   which  operates  on  an  average  of  about  6 

times  a  day.  the  main  sheave  bearings  will  make  500,000  revolutions  in  about  50  years. 

ling  to  the  rating  suggested   by   Manufacturer  A.  one  bearing  in  every  30  could 

be  expected    to    fail    within    this    time.    It    then    becomes   a    question    of   economics   as    to 

whether  the  cost  of  replacing  a  bearing  at  that  time  would  be  greater  than  the  amount 


364 Iron    and   Steel   Structures 

plus  interest  which  was  saved  in  the  original  construction  by  the  use  of  a  bearing  which 
was  rated  for  this  life.  The  most  economic  size  of  bearing  will  be  different  for  every 
bridge  and  will  vary  with  the  importance  of  the  structure  to  marine  and  railway  traffic, 
and  to  the  cost  of  delays  and  outages.  In  most  actual  installations,  the  cost  of  detouring 
railway  traffic  or  the  cost  of  demurrage  on  marine  commerce  would  be  many  times  the 
additional  cost  of  using  a  larger  bearing  in  the  initial  installation. 

It  must  also  be  kept  in  mind  that  movable  bridges  will  have  several  major  bearings; 
a  heavy  lift  bridge  could  have  as  many  as  16,  the  failure  of  any  one  of  which  would 
put  the  bridge  out  of  operation.  Also,  if  one  bearing  in  30  would  fail  in  30  years,  there 
is  also  a  probability  that  a  lesser  percentage  of  the  bearings  would  fail  at  an  earlier  time 
so  that  the  probability  of  an  earlier  failure  by  any  one  of  a  large  group  of  bearings  is 
increased. 

There  are,  of  course,  bridges  which  make  a  greater  or  a  lesser  number  of  openings 
than  the  six  assumed  above  and  the  life  would  vary  accordingly.  Also,  particular  struc- 
tures vary  in  their  usefulness  to  both  the  railway  and  the  waterway.  Where  there  are 
special  or  unique  applications,  it  would  be  expected  that  the  selection  of  the  bearing  size 
should  be  influenced  accordingly,  and  that  the  standard  specifications  cannot  cover  every 
condition  of  use. 

There  is  no  mathematical  relationship  between  the  dynamic  capacity  C  and  the  load 
per  inch  of  roller  diameter.  However,  decreasing  the  allowable  load  per  inch  of  diameter 
in  effect  increases  the  required  size  of  the  bearing  and  therefore  increases  the  dynamic 
capacity.  If  the  specified  value  of  3000  d  is  used,  the  dynamic  capacity  will  be  about 
four  to  five  times  the  applied  load  for  the  large  size  of  roller  bearings  here  considered. 
Thus,  with  the  specified  allowable  load,  the  expected  life  of  an  anti-friction  bearing  will 
be  several  million  revolutions  with  a  probability  of  failure  of  a  fraction  of  one  percent. 

Your  committee  therefore  recommends  that  no  change  be  made  in  the  current  spec- 
ifications governing  the  selection  of  anti-friction  bearings. 

Various  bearing  manufacturers  have  made  other  suggestions  as  to  the  particular 
type  of  roller  bearings  which  should  be  used:  cylindrical,  spherical  or  tapered.  The 
AREA  movable  bridge  specifications  do  not  place  any  restriction  on  the  type  of  bearing 
to  be  used  and  the  selection  of  type  is  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  designer.  Because  all 
types  of  bearings  can  be  so  designed  that  they  will  function  satisfactorily,  the  committee 
is  of  the  opinion  that  the  specifications  should  not  restrict  the  selection  of  the  type  of 
bearing  considered  most  suitable  for  the  particular  application. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Composite    Steel    and    Concrete    Spans;    Non-Ferrous 

Metal  Bridges 

Collaborating  with  Committees  8  and  30 

Ellis  E.  Paul  (chairman,  subcommittee),  L.  S.  Beedle,  H.  F.  Bober,  A.  Hedefine,  M.  L. 
Koehler,  K.  H.  Lenzen,  Shu-t'ien  Li,  J.  Michalos,  W.  H.  Munse,  D.  L.  Nord,  R.  D. 
Nordstrom,  T.  G.  O'Neil,  D.  D.  Rosen,  H.  N.  Wilcox. 

Last   year   your   committee   presented,   as   information,    tentative   Specifications   for 
Composite  Steel  and  Concrete  Spans   (Proceedings,   Vol.  63,   1962  pages  398  and  399). 


Iron   and    Steel    Structures 365 

These  specifications  are  now  submitted  with  the   recommendation  that  they  be  adopted 
and  published  in   the  Manual  as  a  new   Part  8 — Composite  Steel  and  Concrete  Spans. 


Your  committee  also  submits  the  following  anal  report  on  nonferrous  metal  bridges. 

During  the  past  year  our  investigation  proceeded  along  the  lines  set  forth  in  the 
Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  page  380,  namely,  the  correlation  of  existing  information  on  alum- 
inum bridges  with  reference  to  railway  bridges  and  the  study  of  data  on  research  to 
date  on  the  use   of  aluminum   for  structures. 

It  has  become  evident  ihat  a  comprehensive  program  of  basic  and  applied  research 
on  the  use  of  aluminum  for  railway  bridges  would  need  to  be  carried  out  before 
attempting  any   economic   studies  of  the  problem. 

Representatives  of  the  aluminum  industry  expressed  great  interest  in  our  studies 
but  are  apparently  unwilling  to  spend  money  on  research.  Aluminum  railway  bridges  do 
not  appear  to  hold  much  promise  in  view  of  the  results  of  research  on  other  types  of 
aluminum  bridges. 

At  the  Jannary  \^b2  meeting  of  the  Highway  Research  Board  in  Washington,  D.  C, 
extremely  interesting  papers  were  presented  on  welded  aluminum  highway  structures. 
The  problems  encountered  in  welding  and  the  strength  limitations  resulting  therefrom 
were  pointed  out.  A  review  of  the  articles  would  seem  to  indicate  rather  clearly  that, 
from  a  cost  basis  alone,  aluminum  cannot  compete  with  structural  steel  on  large  bridge 
structures. 

Your  committee  considered  the  proposal  that  some  research  work  might  be  under- 
taken by  graduate  and  undergraduate  students  at  some  of  our  universities  and  colleges. 
University  representatives  on  the  committee  indicated  that  this  probably  was  not  feasible 
since  the  graduate  student  expects  to  be  paid  for  his  work,  and  it  was  unlikely  that 
funds  would  be  made  available  by  the  AAR  for  this  purpose.  Also,  it  probably  would 
be  difficult  to  find  an  undergraduate  who  was  particularly  interested  in  this  subject,  and 
any  expenses  in  connection  with  the  study  would  have  to  be  paid  by  someone.  In  addi- 
tion, someone  would  have  to  carefully  lay  out  and  follow  up  on  the  study  being  made. 

In  view  of  the  above,  it  would  appear  that  this  subject  matter  as  a  whole  is  not 
attractive  at  this  time  and  that  the  interests  of  the  members  of  your  committee  could 
better  be  served  in  devoting  their  time  and  effort  to  other  matters.  Therefore,  in  Novem- 
ber 1962,  the  Board  Committee  on  Assignments  approved  your  committee's  recommenda- 
tion that  the  assignment  be  withdrawn  until  such  later  date  when  greater  interest  might 
be  evidenced  and  funds  are  available  for  carrying  out  the  necessary  studies. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

First  Welded  Aluminum  Girder  Bridge  Spans  Interstate  Highway  in  Iowa — Ned  L.  Ash- 
ton    (M-ASCE)    Civil   Engineering,   Oct.    1958,  Vol.   p.   761-762. 

Tests  of  Aluminum  and  Steel  Railway  Bridge  Girders — E.  C.  Hartman,  R.  L.  Moore  & 
F.  E.  Rebhun;  AREA  Bulletin  484,  Dec.  1949. 

Laboratory   Testing   of    Full-size   Aluminum   Bridge — James   Michalos,   Gerald   G.   Kubo 
and   Charles   Birnstiel;    Department   of   Civil    Engineering,    New   York   University; 
presented   at   Sixth    Congress — International   Association    for    Bridge   and    Structural 
ineering,    Stockholm;    June   27-July    1,    1960. 

Specifications   for  Structures  of  Aluminum   Alloy  6061-T6,  Journal  of  Structural   Divi- 
sion, ASCE;   Second  Progress   Report  of  the  Committee  of   the   Structural   Division 
on  Design   in   Lightweight  Structural  Alloys,  Vol.  82,  No.  ST  3,  May   1956,  pa 
970-1   to   970-34. 


366 Iron    and    Steel    Structures 

Specifications  for  Structures  of  Aluminum  Alloy  2014-T6,  Journal  of  Structural  Division, 

ASCE;    Third   Progress   Report   of   the    Committee   of   the   Structural   Division   on 

Design  in  Lightweight  Structural  Alloys,  Vol.  82,  No.  ST  3,  May  1956,  pages  971-1 

to  971-32. 
Aluminum  Span  for  E  60  Railroad  Bridge,  Engineering  News-Record,  Vol.  p.  714-716, 

Nov.  28,  1946. 
All-Aluminum  Span  Carriers  Rail  Traffic  Over  Grasse  River  Bridge — Shortridge  Hardesty 

(M-ASCE  and  J.  M.  Garrelts  (M-ASCE),  Civil  Engineering,  Vol.  16,  No.  12,  Dec. 

1946. 
Heavy  Bridge  Floor  Replaced  with  Aluminum— J.  P.  Growdon  (M-ASCE);  R.  L.  Tem- 

pli    (M-ASCE)    and  Ross  M.  Riegel   (M-ASCE)  ;    Civil   Engineering,   1934,  March, 

page  113. 
Huey  Long  Bridge  Gets  Aluminum  Deck — Railway  Age,  Dec.  9,  1950.  Material  for  ar- 
ticle furnished  by  E.  J.  Garland,  general  manager,  and  E.  L.  Mire,  chief  engineer, 

of   the  New   Orleans  Public   Belt   Railroad,   in   conjunction   with   representatives  of 

various  lines,  the  Aluminum  Company  of  America,  and  Frank  M.  Masters  and  C.  W. 

Hanson  of  Modjeski  &  Masters. 
Design  of  Welded  Aluminum  Structures— H.  N.  Hill  (F-ASCE),  J.  W.  Clark  (M-ASCE) 

and   R.  H.   Brungraber    (AM-ASCE).  Paper  presented  at   ASCE   Annual  Meeting, 

Washington,  D.   C,  Oct.   19-23,   1959. 
Welded   Aluminum   Structures — J.    Robert    Stemler,   J.   W.    Clark   and   G.   O.   Hoglund. 

Paper   presented   at   1962    Highway   Research   Board   Annual  Meeting,   Washington, 

D.   C,  January   1962. 
Alcoa  Aluminum  Alloys  6070  and  6071 — Alcoa  Green  Letter — H.  H.  Nuernberger,  Sales 

Development  Div.,   Aluminum  Company  of  America,  June  15,   1962.   (Not  released 

for  publication). 
Relative   Maintenance   Costs   of  Highway  Hardware  and  Their  Effect  on  Total  Cost — 

Rudolph  Hofer,  Jr.,  Aluminum  Company  of  America,  Dec.  28,  1961. 
How  and  When  to  Use  Aluminum  Alloys — R.  L.  Moore,  Engineering  News-Record,  Vol. 

p.  518,  Oct.  18,  1945. 
Design   Specifications   for   Bridges   and   Structures   of  Aluminum   Alloy   27S-T — Leon   S. 

Moisseiff   (M-ASCE)   deceased,  Aluminum  Company  of  America,  1940. 
Suggested   Specifications   for   Structures    of   Aluminum   Alloy   6063-T5   and   T6   Revised 

Draft  March   7,   1962,  Aluminum  Company  of  America.  Will  replace  Paper  970  of 

Structural  Division  of  ASCE.   (Not  released  for  publication). 
Suggested   Specifications    for    Structures   of   Aluminum   Alloys    6061-T6   and   6062-T6 — 

Revised   March   7,    1962,   Aluminum   Company   of   America.  Will  replace  Paper  970 

of  Structural  Division  of  ASCE.(  Not  released  for  publication). 
Alcoa   Aluminum   Handbook — Aluminum   Company   of   America — A   Design   Manual   for 

Aluminum,   1956. 
Structural  Aluminum   Design — Karl  Angermayer,  chief  design   engineer,  Reynolds  Metal 

Company,  August   1959. 
Straight   Line   Column   Formulas  for  Aluminum   Alloys — H.  N.   Hill  and  J.  W.   Clark, 

Aluminum  Company  of  America,  Technical  Paper  No.  12,  1955. 
Procedure   Handbook  of   Arc  Welding  Design  and  Practice,  Lincoln  Electric  Company, 

Eleventh  Edition,   1957. 
Welding  Handbook — American   Welding  Society,  Fourth   Edition,    1957. 


Iron    and    Steel    Structures 367 

Cumulative  Index  of  ASCE  Publications — American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers,   1961, — 

ASCE  Proceedings,  page  6 — Aluminum;  ASCE  Transactions,  page  183 — Aluminum; 

Civil  Engineering,  page  548 — Aluminum. 
Research   at   Alcoa — Aluminum    Company   of   America,    1954.   This   publication   lists   the 

bibliography  of  all  publications  from  the  laboratories  of  Alcoa  and  includes  7  books, 

10   technical   papers,    14   pages   of   articles   on   Aluminum   Alloys   and   35    pages   on 

engineering  design-. 
Progress  Reports  on  a  Fairchild  type  bridge  tested  at  Lehigh  University  in  1959 — W.  J. 

Eney,  director  of  Fritz   Engineering  Laboratory,  Lehigh   University. 
Twelve  miscellaneous  pamphlets  on  aluminum  products — their  welding,  riveting,  brazing, 

etc.   Reynolds  Metal  Company. 


Report  on  Assignment  4 

Stress   Distribution   in   Bridge   Frames 

E.  T.  Franzen  (chairman,  subcommittee),  L.  S.  Beedle,  E.  S.  Birkenwald,  R.  P.  Davis, 
G.  K.  Gillan,  J.  M.  Hayes,  W.  H.  Jameson,  K.  H.  Lenzen,  J.  Michalos,  W.  H. 
Munse,  L.  T.  VVyly. 

(a)   Floorbeam  Hangers 

Last  year  your  committee  presented  as  information  a  tentative  draft  of  an  amend- 
ment to  become  new  Par.  3  of  Art.  1,  page  15-7-12,  Sec.  D.  Trusses,  of  Methods  of 
Strengthening  Existing  Bridges,  Part  7,  Chapter  15.  The  amendment,  as  follows,  is  now 
submitted  with  the  recommendation  that  it  be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual. 
Adoption  of  this  amendment  completes  the  work  on  this  assignment. 

"Floorbeam  hangers  are  frequently  highly  stressed  from  a  combination  of  bending 
and  direct  axial  tension.  To  reduce  the  possibility  of  fatigue  cracking  in  these  highly 
stressed  hangers,  sharp  copes  or  re-entrant  cuts  should  be  eliminated  or  modified.  The 
use  of  high-strength  bolts  at  the  top  connections  of  the  floorbeam  hangers  to  replace 
all  rivets  should  also  be  considered  to  improve  the  load  transfer  to  the  gusset  plates." 

(c)   Truss  Bridge  Research  Project 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  on  work  done  in  the 
period  November  1,  1961.  to  November  1,  1962,  on  the  Truss  Bridge  Research  Project 
it   Northwestern  University. 

During  the  past  year   work   has   progressed  on   investigation  and   testing   to   deter 
mine  the  ultimate  carrying  capacity  of  the  truss  span  with  a  damaged  end  post.  Two 
complete  series  of  tests  have  now  been  made  of  a  damaged  end  post  in  Truss  A  (angles 
of  members  turned  out).  The  second  series  of  these  tests  gave  results  approximately  6 

at  lower  than  the  first  series,  which  is  good  correlation  of  data.  A  second  series  of 
tests  will  be  started  on  Truss  B  (angles  of  members  turned  in)  as  soon  as  the  damaged 
end  post  in  Truss  A  is  replaced  with  a  high-strength  steel  member.  It  is  anticipated  that 
the  tests  on  Truss  B  will  be  completed  in  1962.  From  the  three  series  of  tests  on  dam- 
aged  end  posts,  it  has  been  found  that  the  capacity  of  the  end  posts  of  A  and  B  trusses 
ipproximatery  equal  for  the  straight  condition  and  for  the  severel)  damaged  con- 
dition   For   -mail  amounts  of  initial  bend,  the  A  end   post   showed  a  greater  strength. 


368  Iron   and   Steel   Structures 

A  report  is  being  prepared  by  Dr.  John  F.  Ely  to  cover  all  work  on  the  non-destruc- 
tive tests  or  up  to  the  point  at  which  testing  of  damaged  end  posts  was  started.  Be- 
cause of  the  cooperative  nature  of  the  investigation,  the  first  report  will  be  submitted 
to  ASCE  for  publication.  Another  report  will  be  prepared  on  the  damaged  end  post 
tests,  which  report  is  anticipated  to  be  ready  for  publication  by  May  1963.  A  meeting 
of  the  Advisory  Committee  is  scheduled  for  Nov.  27,  1962,  at  which  time  the  report  on 
non-destructive  tests  will  be  reviewed  and  future  testing  programs  discussed. 


Report  on  Assignment  6 

Preparation   and    Painting   of   Steel    Surfaces;    Synthetic 

Resins  and  Other  Adhesive  Materials  for  Protective 

Coating  and  Reinforcement 

Collaborating  with  Committee   7 

R.  C  Baker  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  D.  Billmeyer,  E.  W.  Kieckers,  M.  L.  Koehler, 
R.  F.  Moline,  G.  H.  Perkins,  R.  A.  Peteritas,  A.  G.  Rankin,  D.  D.  Rosen,  H.  Seitz, 
R.  I.  Simkins,  A.  E.  Smith,  A.  J.  Wood. 

No   paint  tests  have   been  initiated   this  past  year. 

Progress  reports  on  four  projects  were  mailed  to  chief  engineers  of  Member  Roads 
and  to  members  of  Committee  15.  These  were  prepared  by  the  director  of  research 
for  the   Steel  Structures  Painting  Council  and  are: 

1.  Protecting  Load  Bearing  Surfaces  of  Bridges 

This  test  was  initiated  in  1958  on  the  Chicago  Great  Western  Railway  Bridge  C- 
87-29  across  the  Rock  River  near  Byron,  111.  This  is  a  12-span  open-deck  plate-girder 
bridge  786  ft  long  of  shop-welded  design ;  all  field  connections  were  made  with  high- 
strength   steel   bolts. 

Five  spans,  each  70  ft  long,  were  selected  for  testing  the  protective  systems.  Two  of 
these  spans  were  sandblasted,  two  were  hand  cleaned,  and  one  was  hand  cleaned  and 
painted  with  the  specified  oil  base  primer  before  application  of  the  additional  pro- 
tective systems.  The  experimental  area  was  confined  to  the  tops  and  edges  of  the  top 
flange,  being  16  in  wide.  The  majority  of  the  protective  systems  were  applied  in  the 
shop  with  repairs  made  in  the  field  where  damage  occurred  due  to  handling. 

All  of  the  systems  are  giving  good  protection  between  the  ties,  but  only  a  few  are 
still  in  excellent  condition  under  the  ties. 

2.  Santa  Fe  Bridge  Painting  Test 

This  test  was  initiated  in  1953  by  the  Santa  Fe  Railway  and  the  Steel  Structures 
Painting  Council.  Several  of  the  most  promising  bridge  paints  currently  in  use  on  the 
Santa  Fe  were  selected  with  emphasis  on  those  suitable  for  hand-cleaned  steel,  and  in 
relatively   mild   environments. 

Since  many  proprietary  paints  and  coatings  were  used  on  this  test,  the  actual  results 
cannot  be  set  forth  in  this  report. 


Iron    and    Steel   Structures 369 

3.  Paints   for   Hand-Cleaned   Railroad   Bridges 

This  test  was  initiated  in  1955  by  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad  and  the  Steel 
Structures  Painting  Council,  with  assistance  from  the  AAR.  The  purpose  of  this  test 
was  to  evaluate  the  performance  of  chemically  resistant  synthetic  resin  maintenance 
paints  on  the  floor  systems  of  steel  railroad  bridges  exposed  to  brine  drippings  without 
blast  cleaning  or  steam  cleaning. 

The  floorbeams  of  the  Ashley  River  bridge  at  Charleston,  S.  C,  and  the  bottom 
chords  and  end  posts  of  the  truss  bridge  over  the  Santee  River  at  Jamestown,  S.  C, 
were  included  in  this  test. 

The  report  on  this  test  shows  that  the  paint  systems  have  continued  to  deteriorate 
between  the  fourth  and  sixth  year  after  painting.  Only  1  system  out  of  8  was  giving 
protection  on  the  floorbeams,  but  on  the  bottom  chords  5  of  the  16  systems  were  fur- 
nishing proper  protection. 

4.  Brine-Resistant    Bridge   Paints 

This  test  was  initiated  in  1953  by  the  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  the  Steel  Struc- 
tures Painting  Council,  and  the  AAR  on  Bridges  69  and  94  near  Roots  and  Chester, 
111.  The  description  and  purpose  of  these  tests  were  described  by  Dr.  Joseph  Bigos  in 
his  address  published  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  55,  1954,  page  1021.  A  progress  report 
was  published  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  60,  1959,  page  509.  On  hand-cleaned  Bridge  94 
it  was  necessary  to  retouch  the  test  areas  after  the  first  three  years  of  exposure. 

On  sand-blasted  Bridge  59  some  of  the  paint  systems  gave  excellent  service  for 
eight  years. 


Your  committee  submits  the  following  brief  progress  report  as  information  con- 
cerning synthetic  resins  and  other  adhesives: 

The  report  of  Committee  7  on  its  Assignment  6,  Bulletin  573,  September-October 
1962,  pages  1  to  17,  incl.,  is  referred  to  for  general  information  regarding  technology 
of  epoxy  resins  and  application  of  epoxy  resins  to  structures.  Section  C  of  that  report 
lists  several  applications  under  Committee  15 — Iron  and  Steel  Structures,  as  information. 

All  projects  involving  the  use  of  epoxies  on  steel  bridge  structures  are  being 
reviewed  for  a  possible  future  report. 

Report  on  Assignment  7 

Bibliography   and   Technical   Explanations   of   Various 

Requirements   in   AREA   Specifications    Relating 

to    Iron    and    Steel    Structures 

J.  G.  Clark  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  N.  Brodie,  R.  P.  Davis,  J.  M.  Hayes,  B.  (',. 
Johnston,  D.  V.  Messman,  E.  E.  Paul,  Henry  Seitz,  J.  E.  South. 

Your  committee  continues  to  work  toward  completing  the  review  of  all  articles 
in  Chapter  15  of  the  Manual.  In  addition,  your  committee  receives  special  requests 
for  explanation  of  various  terms  and  specification  requirements.  Among  these  was  B 
request  to  define  the  basic-oxygen  process.  The  following  definition  is  submitted  as 
information: 


370  Iron    and   Steel   Structures 

The   Basic-Oxygen   Process 

In  the  United  States  and  Canada  the  term  basic-oxygen  steel  making  is  used  gen- 
erically  to  describe  a  process  in  which  molten  iron  is  refined  to  steel  under  a  basic  slag 
in  a  cylindrical  furnace  lined  with  basic  refractories,  by  directing  a  jet  of  high-purity 
gaseous  oxygen  onto  the  surface  of  the  hot  metal  bath. 

With  respect  to  its  essential  chemical  composition  and  metallurgical  characteristics, 
steel  which  has  been  made  by  the  basic-oxygen  process  is  quite  similar  to  basic  open- 
hearth  steel  of  the  same  grade.  The  differences  between  the  two  processes  lie  chiefly  in 
the  design  of  the  furnaces  employed  and  in  the  relative  extent  to  which  high-purity 
manufactured  oxygen  is  used  as  a  refining  agent. 


Report  of  Committee  7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles 


K.  L.  DeBlois,  Chairman 
B.  E.  Daniels, 

Vice  Chairman 
J.  W.  Chambers, 

Secretary 
D.  V.  Sartore 


R.    E.    Kl'EHNER 

W.  L.  Anderson 
A.  L.  Leach 

J.    A.    GUSTAFSON 

L.  R.  Kubacki 
C.  V.  Lund 

J.     F.    HOLMBERG 

C.  E.  Atwater 

R.  E.  Anderson 
J.  W.  Brent 
T.  P.  Burgess 
A.  W.  Carlson 
H.  M.  Church  (E) 
F.  H.  Cramer  (E) 

D.  J.  Engle 
J.  T.  Evans 

YV.  A.  Genereux 
S.  L.  Goldberg 
S.  F.  Grear  (E) 
R.  YV.  Gunther 
F.  J.  Hanraiian 
YV.  C.  Howe 


r.  h.  hunsinger 
Milton  Jarrell 
\Y'.  I).  Keen)  \ 
YV.  B.  Mackenzie 

L.  J.  Mahkwakdi 
W.  H.  Martin 

E.  A.  Matnev 
T.  K.  May 

J.  YV.  N.  Mays 

I).    H.   McKlBBEN,   Sr. 
C.  A.  Meadows 

C.  H.  Newlin 
YV.  H.  O'Brien 
YV.  A.  Oliver 

F.  E.  Schneider 
J.  G.  Shope 

J.  D.  Tapp,  Jr. 

YV.  A.  Thompson,  Jr. 

YV.  D.  Turner 

D.  L.  Walker 
L.  YV.  YVood 

( 'ommittee 


(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names   are   set    in    bold-face    type   constitute    the   Engineering    Division1,    AAK.    Com- 
mittee  7. 

'/'<<   the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  Committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

No  report,  since  the  only  items  requiring  changes  are  currently  under  study 
by  Subcommittees  2,  3,  and  5. 

2.  Grading  rules  and  classification  of  lumber  for  railway  uses;  specifications 
for   structural   timber,   collaborating  with   other  organizations  interested. 
Progress  report  on  proposed  grading  rules  and  recommended  unit  working 
stresses  for  hardwood  structural   timbers  submitted  as  information,  to   be 
considered  for  adoption  one  year  hence   page  372 

3.  Specifications  for  design  of  wood  bridges  and  trestles. 

The  present  allowable  horizontal  shear  design  stresses  and  positioning  oi 
loads  for  maximum  shear  may  require  revision  as  a  result  of  the  repeated 
loading  tests  now  in  progress  (Assignment  7),  but  no  changes  in  the 
specifications  for  design  are  recommended  at  this  time. 

4.  Methods  of  fireproofing  wood  bridges  and  trestles,  includiim  fire  retardanl 
paints,  collaborating  with   Committees  3  and  6. 

Progress  report,  with  specifications  submitted  for  adoption    page  373 

5.  Design  of  structural  glued  laminiated  wood   bridges  and  trestles. 

No  report.  Progress  is  being  made  on  plans  and  tables  Eor  laminated  girders 
and  trestle  members. 


371 


372 Wood   Bridges   and   Trestles 

6.  Applications  of  synthetic  resins  and  adhesives  to  wood  bridges  and  trestles, 
collaborating  with   Committees  8  and  15. 

Advance  report,  in  four  parts,  presented  as  information  in  Bulletin  573, 
September-October  1962,  pages  1  to  17,  incl. 

7.  Repeated  loading  of  timber  structures. 

First  progress  report  on  a  program  of  tests  of  full-size  bridge  stringers  in 
repeated    loading    page  383 

8.  Protection  of  pile  cut-offs. 

The  committee  is  not  prepared  to  make  a  report  at  this  time. 

10.  Non-destructive  testing  of  wood. 

A  laboratory  investigation  on  the  use  of  a  commercially  available  device 
for  determining  decay  in  timber  by  use  of  gamma  rays  was  made  during 
the  past  year.  Field  tests  on  timber  trestles  dusing  this  device  will  be  made 
in  1963. 

The  Committee  on  Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles, 

K.  L.  DeBlois,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin   576,  January   1963. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Grading  Rules  and  Classification  of  Lumber  For  Railway 
Uses;  Specifications  for  Structural  Timber 

Collaborating  with  Other   Organizations  Interested 

R.  E.  Kuehner  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  L.  Anderson,  A.  W.  Carlson,  E.  M.  Cum- 
mings,  D.  J.  Engle,  S.  L.  Goldberg,  W.  C.  Howe,  W.  D.  Keeney,  A.  L.  Leach,  C.  V. 
Lund,  L.  J.  Markwardt,  T.  K.  May,  W.  H.  Martin,  C.  H.  Newlin,  W.  H.  O'Brien, 
L.  W.  Wood. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  a  proposed  grading  rule  for  hardwood  struc- 
tural timbers  and  recommended  working  unit  stresses  for  the  grade  in  three  hardwood 
species  groups  for  various  conditions.  This  action  has  become  necessary  as  a  result  of 
the  discontinued  publication  of  the  National  Hardwood  Lumber  Association  Structural 
Grading  Rules.  The  AREA  Manual  presently  uses  the  discontinued  NHLA  Grading 
Rules  as  a  reference  in  the  tables  published  on  pages  7-1-19,  7-1-20,  and  7-2-7. 

Next  year  it  is  proposed  to  submit  revised  tables  for  the  above  pages,  substituting 
the  proposed  grading  rule  and  working  unit  stresses  where  necessary,  with  the  recom- 
mendation that  they  be  adopted  and  published. 

HARDWOOD   STRUCTURAL  TIMBERS— PROPOSED   GRADING  RULES 

Hardwood  structural  timbers  shall  comply  with  the  requirements  for  "Select  Car 
Stock-Select  Dimension  or  Common  Dimension"  as  described  on  pages  78  to  80  of  the 
1960  Rules  of  the  National  Hardwood  Lumber  Association,  with  the  following  additional 
requirements: 


Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles 


373 


Limiting  slope  of  grain  on  any  face,  1  in  8.  The  slope  of  grain  is  measured  over  a 
distance  sufficient  to  define  the  general  slope,  disregarding  local  deviations,  as  around 
knots. 

Knots  in  narrow  faces  or  at  the  edges  of  wide  faces  at  any  point  in  the  length  of 
the  piece  shall  be  limited  to  sizes  of  1  in.  in  pieces  2  or  3  in  thick,  2  in.  in  pieces  4  or 
5  in  thick,  3  in.  in  pieces  6  or  7  in  thick,  2,]/2  in.  in  pieces  8  to  10  in  thick,  and  4J4 
in.  in  pieces  12  in  or  thicker.  Such  knots  shall  be  measured  and  limited  between  lines 
parallel  to  the  edges  of  the  piece. 

End  shakes  or  season  checks  in  the  center  half  of  the  width  measured  between 
lines  parallel  to  the  wide  faces  shall  not  exceed  two-fifths  the  thickness  of  the  timber  in 
size.  End  splits  in  the  center  half  of  the  width  shall  be  limited  to  an  average  length  not 
exceeding  the  thickness  of  the  timber.  A  combination  of  maximum  shakes,  checks,  or 
splits  in  either  end  of  any  piece  will  not  be  permitted. 

Recommended  Working  Unit  Stresses 


Property 


hong-Time  Loading 


Dry 


Decay 
Hazard 


Ten-Year  Loading 


Dry 


Wet 


Decay 
Hazard 


Black  Gum,  Red  Gum,  Tupelo 

Bending,  tension psi 

Shear . psi 

Compression  perpendicular psi 

Compression  parallel psi 

Modulus  of  elasticity 1000  psi 

Red  Oak  and  White  Oak 

Bending,  tension psi 

Shear psi 

Compression  perpendicular psi 

Compression  parallel psi 

Modulus  of  elasticity 1000  psi 

White  Ash 

Bending,  tension psi 

Shear . psi 

Compression  perpendicular psi 

Compression  parallel psi 

Modulus  of  elasticity 1000  psi 


850 
100 
330 

r,oo 

1320 


1050 
1 25 
550 
750 

1650 


1050 
125 
550 
850 

1650 


850 

90 

220 

550 

1200 


1050 
110 
365 
700 

1500 


1050 
110 
365 

750 
1500 


750 

90 

220 

500 

1200 


950 
110 
365 
650 

1500 


950 
110 
365 
650 
1500 


900 
110 
365 

C50 
1320 


1150 

1  10 

605 
800 
1650 


1150 

I  id 
605 

•1(10 
1650 


900 
100 
240 
600 
1200 


1150 
120 
400 
750 

1500 


1150 

L20 
400 
800 
1500 


800 
100 
240 
550 

1 200 


1050 
120 

400 
700 

I  :,(  >(  i 


1050 
120 

Kill 

750 

1500 


Report  on  Assignment  4 


Methods   of  Fireproofing   Wood   Bridges  and   Trestles, 
Including    Fire-Retardant    Paints 

Collaborating  with  Committees  3  and  6 

A.  L.  Leach  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  E.  Anderson,  J.  W.  Brent,  B.  E.  Daniels, 
W.  A.  Genereux,  R.  W.  Gunther,  J.  A.  Gustafson,  R.  H.  Hunsinger,  \Y  I)  KLeeney, 
W.  B.  Mackenzie,  C.  A.  Meadows,  L.  J.  Markwardt,  E.  A.  Matney,  J.  W.  X.  Mays, 
D.  H.  McKibben,  Sr.,  F.  E.  Schneider,  W.  A.  Thompson,  Jr.,  D.  L.  Walker. 

Your  committee  submits  for  adoption  and  publication  in  the  Manual  the  following 
specifications  for  fire-retardant  coatings  fur  CROSOted  wood.  These  specifications  were 
published  as  information   in   Bulletin   562,  January   1961, 


J74 Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles ^_^ 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  FIRE-RETARDANT   COATINGS   FOR 
CREOSOTED  WOOD 

A.  SCOPE 

These  specifications  apply  to: 

a.  Performance  requirements  of  fire-retardant  coating  compositions  for  use  with 
wood  treated  with  creosote  or  mixture  of  creosote  with  coal  tar  or  petroleum,  and 

b.  Methods  for  the  acceptance  testing  of  such  fire-retardant  coatings. 

These  specifications  are  intended  primarily  for  use  with  coatings  of  the  film-forming 
classification,  such  as  paints  and  mastics.  Any  material  other  than  a  film-forming  type 
shall  conform  to  these  specifications  except  where  film-forming  qualities  are  required  for 
fulfillment  of  the  specification. 

B.  GENERAL  PRODUCT  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  Uniformity 

a.  All  component  raw  materials  of  the  product  shall  be  thoroughly  mixed  and  dis- 
persed during  its  manufacture,  unless  the  product  is  a  multi-component  system  which 
sets  or  polymerizes  rapidly  and  requires  mixing  immediately  prior  to  application. 

b.  The  formulation  and  quality  of  the  product  shall  be  maintained  constant  by  the 
manufacturer  and  shall  not  be  varied  without  notice. 

2.  Stability  in  Storage 

The  product  shall  maintain  stability  at  temperatures  above  32  deg  F,  shall  not  re- 
quire unusual  storage  conditions,  and  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  of  the  following 
paragraphs: 

a.  In  a  freshly  opened  container  the  product  shall  reveal  no  curdling,  livering,  lump- 
ing, decomposition,  gelling  or  any  other  objectionable  characteristic  within  12  months 
after  delivery. 

b.  Separated,  settled,  caked  or  thickened  materials  shall  be  easily  and  adequately 
dispersable  with  a  paddle  without  change  in  the  quality  or  properties  of  the  product. 

3.  Applied  Coating 

A  dry  film  of  the  product  shall  exhibit  the  following  properties: 

a.  Adhesion:  The  product  shall  be  cohesive  and  shall  adhere  to  the  primary  surface 
or  to  any  secondary  supporting  surface. 

b.  Durability:  The  product  shall  resist  water,  brine,  creosote,  mixtures  of  creosote 
with  petroleum  or  coal  tar,  sunlight,  freezing  and  thawing,  and  general  temperature 
extremes. 

c.  Foot  Traffic:  The  product  shall  resist  damage  when  applied  on  traffic  areas. 

d.  Fire  Retardancy :  The  product  shall  withstand  heat  or  flames  originated  by  mis- 
cellaneous heat  sources,  including  ignited  fusees,  hot  brake  shoe  splinters,  sparks,  hot 
coals  or  cinders,  drops  of  molten  metal,  and  burning  debris. 

4.  Flammability  of  Wet  Films 

a.  The  evaporation  of  solvents  or  other  materials  from  a  wet  film  of  the  product 
shall  cease  to  constitute  a  flammable  hazard  within  4  hr  after  application. 

b.  A  film  of  the  product,  applied  so  as  to  achieve  the  minimum  total  dry  thickness 
recommended  by  the  manufacturer,  shall  cease  to  support  combustion  within  48  hr 
after  application  of  the  final  coat. 


Wood    Bridges   and    Trestles 375 

5.  Drying  Time 

A  film  of  the  product,  applied  at  the  maximum  wet  thickness  recommended  by  the 
manufacturer,  within  36  hr  after  application  and  without  forced  drying,  shall  be  hard 
enough  to  allow  firm  pressure  of  the  thumb  against  the  coated  object  without  rupture 
of  the  film  or  adherence  of  coating  to   the  thumb. 

C.  APPLICATION   REQUIREMENTS  AND  INSTRUCTIONS 

1.  Handling  Instructions 

All  precautions  for  storage  and  handling  prior  to  and  during  application  of  the  prod- 
uct shall  be  stated  clearly  in  an  accompanying  instruction  leaflet  prominently  displayed 
on  each  container,  together  with  complete  information  and  instructions  for  recommended 
equipment  and  materials  for  surface  preparation,  thinning,  and  application. 

2.  Product  Information 

All  information  and  physical  measurements  not  specified  elsewhere  in  these  specifica- 
tions, which  might  assist  in  the  proper  handling  or  testing  of  the  product,  shall  accom- 
pany the  instructions  and  shall  include  the  following: 

a.  Specific  gravity,  and  weight  in  pounds  per  gallon,  or  weight  to  the  nearest  0.1  g 
of  1  pint  of  the  coating. 

b.  Recommended  maximum  wet  thickness  and  calculated  coverage  of  a  single-coat 
application  of  the  coating,  unthinned  and  thinned  with  recommended  proportions  of 
thinner. 

c.  Measured  resultant  dry  thickness  of  the  recommended  maximum  wet  thickness 
of  a  single-coat  application. 

d.  Recommended   minimum   dry   thickness  required  for  fire-retardancy  effectiveness. 

e.  Drying   time   required   between   applications,   thinned  and  unthinned. 

f.  Duration  of  solvent  fire  hazard  during  the  drying  time  of  a  single-coat  applica- 
tion, thinned  and  unthinned. 

g.  Drying  or  curing  time  required  to  attain  maximum  fire  retardancy. 

h.  Recommended  spray  equipment  (gun  type,  orifice  size,  spray  pattern,  pressure, 
etc.) 

i.   Solvents  and  materials  which  may  be  used  to   clean  application  equipment. 

j.   Corrosiveness  of   product   to   container  and  spray  equipment. 

k.  Toxicity  to  humans  and  animals  of  the  product  in  the  wet  and  dried  conditions. 

3.  Working  Properties 

a.  The  product  shall  be  applicable  by  brushing,  spraying  and,  if  it  is  a  mastic,  by 
trowelling,  or  it  shall  be  adaptable  for  spraying,  without  loss  of  quality,  by  addition 
of  a  thinner  recommended  by  the  manufacturer. 

b.  A  wet  film  of  the  product,  when  applied  at  the  thickness  recommended  by  the 
manufacturer,  shall  not  show  sagging,  running,  pinholing  or  other  objectionable  features. 

4.  Surface  Preparation 

Timber  surface  preparation  or  treatment  shall  not  be  extensive  and  shall  not  require 
unusual  equipment,  materials  or  operations. 


376 Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles 

D.  TESTING 

1.  Specimen  Preparation 

a.  Wood  Selection:  The  wood  shall  be  selected  from  well-seasoned  nominal  2-  by 
6-in  boards  of  Grade  B  &  Btr  edge-grained  southern  yellow  pine  containing  no  more 
than  10  percent  heartwood,  at  least  14  ft  in  length,  dressed  on  four  sides  andj  free  from 
knots,  stains,  pitch  pockets  and  bark.  The  maximum  width  of  the  annual  growth  rings 
shall  be  no  greater  than  tV  in.  Edge-grained  shall  mean  that  at  both  ends  of  a  board, 
where  the  wood  has  been  cut  cross  sectionally,  at  least  half  of  the  acute  angles  between 
lines  drawn  tangential  to  the  annual  rings  and  lines  drawn  perpendicular  to  the  broad 
surfaces  of  the  board  shall  be  no  greater  than  45  deg. 

b.  Sectioning:  The  first  6  in  of  the  ends  of  each  board  shall  be  discarded,  and  the 
remainder  shall  be  cut  laterally  into  18-in  sections.  Each  section  shall  be  identified  by 
the  board  number  and  by  its  own  number  from  one  end  of  the  board.  Each  section 
shall  be  tested  for  moisture  content  at  6-in  intervals  along  its  longitudinal  axis  with  an 
electrical  moisture  meter  employing  metal  probes  which  are  no  shorter  than  %  in.  The 
moisture  content  of  a  section  shall  be  greater  than  8  percent  and  less  than  15  percent. 
The  sections  shall  be  protected  from  checking  or  loss  of  moisture,  preferably  by  storage 
in  a  cold,  humidified  atmosphere.  A  section  which  has  checked  shall  not  be  used  as  a 
test  specimen. 

c.  Preservative  Treatment:  The  dimensions  of  an  18-in  section  shall  be  measured 
to  the  nearest  0.01  in  and  the  volume  calculated  to  the  nearest  0.001  cu  ft.  Each  section 
shall  be  weighed  to  the  nearest  gram  before  preservative  treatment.  The  creosote  solu- 
tions and  treating  methods  employed  for  impregnation  of  the  sections  shall  be  prescribed 
by  the  purchaser.  After  preservative  treatment,  each  section  shall  be  allowed  to  drain 
freely  for  24  hr,  wiped  clean,  and  weighed  to  the  nearest  gram.  The  preservative  reten- 
tion shall  be  calculated  in  pounds  per  cubic  foot  to  the  nearest  0.01  lb  per  cu  ft,  using 
the  previously  obtained  dimensions  and  volume  calculations,  and  the  resultant  figure 
shall  be  called  "initial  retention."  The  treated  sections  shall  be  stored  for  a  minimum 
of  30  days  or  a  maximum  of  60  days,  at  approximately  75  deg  F  and  50  percent  relative 
humidity,  prior  to  a  coating  application  or  any  form  of  testing.  Immediately  prior  to 
preparation  of  a  section  for  use  in  testing  procedures,  the  section  shall  be  weighed  to 
the  nearest  gram,  the  net  preservative  retention  shall  be  calculated;  the  resultant  figure 
shall  be  called  "test  retention."  The  test  retention  of  any  specimen  shall  be  no  less  than 
10  lb  per  cu  ft.  All  treated  or  untreated  specimens  used  in  a  test  shall  be  subjected  to 
identical  pre-test  storage  conditions. 

2.  Fire  Tests 

a.  Testing  In  Fire-Test  Cabinet 

(1)  Apparatus:  The  fire-test  cabinet  shall  be  a  rectangular  insulated  chamber  meas- 
uring 31  in  high,  10  in  wide  and  12  in  deep.  In  order  to  suspend  the  specimen  in  the 
fire-test  cabinet,  a  supporting  rod  shall  be  affixed  horizontally  1  in  from  the  tops  of 
opposite  walls  of  the  cabinet.  For  draft  control,  the  2-in  bottom  section  of  the  cabinet 
shall  consist  of  louvers  which  can  be  raised  90  deg.  Two  pairs  of  ungalvanized  iron  pipe 
with  %  in  internal  diameter,  each  pair  vertically  parallel  and  separated  by  3  in  between 
their  longitudinal  axes,  shall  be  fastened  to  opposite  sides  of  the  cabinet.  Orifices  of 
3*2  in  diameter  shall  be  located  in  a  straight  line  at  1-in  intervals,  for  20  in  along  each 
pipe,  beginning  at  y2  in  from  the  cap.  The  cabinet  shall  be  equipped  with  a  removable 


Wood   Bridges   and   Trestles 


377 


,     5ft      1|,      5ft 


'«i 


r~u-  ,  r~&_ 


PIN   HINGES 
CAPPED  ROD 

J  ANGLE    IRON 

_ 20  GAUGE  UNGALVANIZED 

SHEET  STEEL 

f  DIA.  NOTCHED  HANGER  ROD 

FOR  SUSPENDING  TEST 
SPECIMENS 

~-±  ASBESTOS  MILLBOARD 


—  PRESSURE  CLASPS  FOR 
HOLDING  DOOR 


|  ANGLE  IRON 


T~ V 


LOUVER    HANDLES 
OPENING  FOR  GAS  INLET   TUBE 
FRONT    VIEW 

FIRE  TEST    CABINET 

\  ASBESTOS   MILLBOARD 
I  ANGLE  IRON 
I  x  i  BAR  STOCK 

PIN  HINGES 
DOOR  HANDLE 


TOP    VIEW 
"4 


VIEW  PORT  COVERED 
WITH   MICA    SHEET 


FRONT    VIEW 


DOOR  HANDLE 


FIRE    TEST   CABINET  DOOR 


{  ASBESTOS  MILLBOARD 
SIDE    VIEW 


PRESSURE  CLASPS 


SIDE    VIEW 


,U8 


Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles 


h-  -  H 


O: 


J 


TOP   VIEW 


□ 


*i 


p 


x=x 


: — p 


-     |  O.D.  PIPE 


CJ^AJ 

FRONT  VIEW 


^  DIA   ORIFICES  ON   INSIDE 
OF  ALL  4  BURNER   PIPES 


.1 I 

GAS   INLET 


-*=£ 


SECTION  AA 


FIRE  TEST  CABINET  BURNER 


METAL  STRAPS  TO  SUPPORT 
TOPS  OF   BURNER  PIPES 


IT 
TOP    VIEW 
FIRE  TEST  CABINET  WITH  DOOR    AND  BURNER  IN   PLACE 


Wood    Bridges    and    Trestles 379 

door  fitted   with   viewing  ports  covered  with  mica  sheet.  A  pilot-flame  orifice  shall  be 
installed  at   the  bottom  of  one  pipe  at  each  side  of  the  cabinet. 

(2)  Fuel:  Bottled  liquid-petroleum  gas,  with  a  minimum  propane  content  of  95 
percent,  shall  be  supplied  to  the  burner  pipes  at  the  rate  of  0.4  cu  ft  per  min  or  ap- 
proximately 60,000  Btu  per  hr  during  the  course  of  a  specimen  ignition.  The  flames  shall 
extend  approximately  4  in  horizontally  from  the  orifices  and  shall  be  of  a  definite  yellow 
color. 

(3)  Specimen  Section  and  Position:  The  test  specimen  shall  be  selected  by  the 
procedures  specified  under  Sec.  D,  Art.  1,  coated  with  a  film  of  uniform  thickness, 
allowed  to  dry  or  cure  completely,  and  shall  be  suspended  vertically  in  the  fire-test 
cabinet  at  the  initiation  of  the  test.  The  broad  faces  of  the  specimen  shall  parallel  the 
two  pairs  of  burner  pipes  at  a  distance  of  3  in  from  the  orifices,  with  the  top  end  of 
the  specimen  on  a  level  with  the  top  orifices. 

(4)  Test  Procedure:  A  specimen  shall  be  positioned  in  the  fire-test  cabinet  with  the 
door  closed  and  the  pilot  flames  lit.  The  ignition  of  the  specimen  shall  be  effected  by 
quickly  opening  the  fuel  valve  to  the  required  setting  and  allowing  the  flames  of  the 
ignited  gas  to  be  directed  against  the  specimen  for  5  min.  The  duration  of  self-sustained 
flaming  after  ignition  shall  be  recorded  and  designated  as  "free-burning  time."  The 
period  after  which  flaming  has  stopped  and  glowing  occurs  shall  be  recorded  and  desig- 
nated as  "glow  time."  The  free-burning  interval  shall  be  terminated  for  one  of  the 
following  reasons: 

(a)  A  maximum  free-burning  time  of  30  min  shall  have  passed. 

(b)  During  the  30-min  free-burning  period  it  is  judged  that  the  flames  are  merely 
flickering  or  flashing  and  constitute  practical  self-extinguishment,  or  that  small 
flames  are  being  sustained  only  at  the  ends  of   the  specimen. 

If  at  the  end  of  the  30-min  free-burning  period  flaming  continues  at  a  rate  requiring 
the  use  of  an  accessory  extinguishing  agent,  the  flames  shall  be  extinguished  with  a  fire- 
extinguishing  gas. 

The  test  may  be  conducted  in  a  well  insulated  laboratory  fume  hood  or  on  a  table 
placed  under  an  insulated  canopy.  Both  the  fume  hood  and  the  canopy  shall  be  equipped 
with  efficient,  safe,  smoke-exhaust  fans.  The  exhaust  fans  shall  be  operating  prior  to 
ignition  of  the  specimen. 

(5)  Observations:  The  specimen  shall  be  attentively  observed  during  the  ignition 
and  the  free-burning  periods,  and  specimen  appearance,  coating  condition  and  flame 
activity  shall  be  recorded.  Relative  flame  activity  during  the  free-burning  period  and 
at  its  termination   shall  be   described  with  the  following  terminology. 

Vigorous — Entire  specimen  flaming  with  little  or  no  apparent  diminishment  of 
combustion  rate. 

Very  Strong — Approximately  75  percent  of  specimen  flaming,  with  apparent  com- 
bustion rate  slowly  decreasing. 

Strong — Approximately  50  percent  of  specimen  flaming,  with  apparent  combustion 
rate  decreasing. 

Mild— Approximately  25  percent  of  specimen  flaming,  with  apparent  combustion 
rate  decreasing  rapidly. 

Scattered — Small  areas  of  flaming  win  re  creosote  wricking  maj  lie  occurring  <>r 
a  heat  trap  may  be  located. 


380 Wood   Bridges   and   Trestles 

Torching — Flames  occurring  with  jet-like  activity  at  points  of  coating  rupture 
or  specimen  checking. 

Flickering — Small,   virtually  extinguished,  flames  at  a  few  discrete  points. 

Flashing — Spontaneous  extinguishment  and  reignition   of  an  area. 

After  the  free-burning  period,  the  specimen  shall  be  allowed  to  remain  in  the  fire- 
test  cabinet,  with  the  door  removed,  until  glowing  has  ceased.  The  time  required  for 
the  cessation  of  glowing  shall  be  recorded  as  "glow  time." 

The  burned  specimen  shall  be  weighed  to  the  nearest  gram,  with  the  coating  re- 
moved and  wood  char  intact,  not  less  than  24  nor  more  than  36  hr  after  the  free-burning 
period.  The  specimen  shall  be  cleaned  of  char  immediately,  without  damage  to  the  wood, 
and  weighed  again.  The  differences  between  the  two  weighings  shall  be  recorded  as  the 
weight  of  the  char,  and  shall  be  calculated  in  pounds  per  cubic  foot  of  volume  of  the 
unburned  specimen.  The  difference  of  weight  of  the  specimen  before  burning  and  after 
being  burned  and  cleaned  shall  be  recorded  as  its  total  weight  loss,  and  shall  be  calcu- 
lated in  pounds  per  cubic  foot  by  volume  of  the  unburned  specimen. 

The  thickness  of  the  burned,  cleaned  specimen  shall  be  measured  to  the  nearest 
b1?  in  on  its  longitudinal  axis  at  a  point  6  in  from  the  end  which  was  topmost  in  the 
fire-test  cabinet.  The  difference  between  the  thickness  of  the  specimen  before  and  after 
cleaning  shall  be  divided  by  two  and  recorded  as  char  depth. 

Other  observations  which  shall  be  recorded  are. 

(a)  Coating  thickness  and  weight,  wet. 

(b)  All  defects  found  in  a  coated  or  uncoated  specimen  before  a  fire  test. 

(c)  Blistering,  Assuring,  rupturing,  intumescence,  sloughing  or  other  effects  ex- 
hibited by  a  coating  during  a  test,  and  the  elapsed  time  before  their  occur- 
rence. 

(d)  Relative  extent  of  preservative  bleeding  during  a  fire  test. 

(e)  Relative  amount  of  smoke  production  during  a  fire  test. 

(6)  Acceptance   Criteria: 

(a)  The  specimen  shall  be  totally  self-extinguished  within  the  30-min  free-burning 
period,  or  shall  exhibit  only  flickering  flames. 

(b)  The  total  weight  loss  of  the  specimen,  with  char  removed,  shall  not  exceed 
30  percent,  or  15  lb  per  cu  ft  by  volume  of  the  unburned  specimen. 

(c)  The  char  depth  shall  not  exceed  %  in.  The  char  shall  be  evenly  distributed 
with  no  occurrence  of  cupped  areas. 

(d)  The  quantity  of  char  shall  not  exceed  2.5  lb  cu  ft  by  volume  of  the  unburned 
specimen. 

(e)  Glowing  shall  cease  within  1  hr  after  termination  of  the  free-burning  period. 

(f)  The  coating  shall  remain  intact  upon  the  specimen  throughout  the  ignition, 
free-burning  and  glow  periods,  and  shall  exhibit  no  sloughing,  spalling  or 
peeling. 

(g)  The  performance  of  a  minimum  of  three  specimens,  prepared  in  an  identical 
manner,  shall  conform  to  the  stipulations  of  the  acceptance  criteria. 

b.  Fusee  Test 

(1)  Construction:  The  fusee  test  apparatus  shall  consist  of  two  specimens  selected 
by  the  procedures  specified  under  Sec.  D,  Art.  1,  and  a  section  of  gypsum  or  other  fire- 
proof insulating  board  measuring  18  by  16  by  1  in.  The  two  wood  specimens  shall  be 


Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles 381 

coated  uniformly  with  the  same  thickness  used  for  specimens  tested  in  the  fire-test 
cabinet,  and  allowed  to  dry  or  cure  completely.  The  coated  specimens  shall  be  joined 
together  lengthwise  in  the  shape  of  an  "L",  forming  one  side  and  the  bottom  of  a  flat- 
bottomed  trough.  The  trough  shall  be  completed  in  a  "U"  shape  by  joining  the  insula- 
tion board  to  the  bottom  specimen.  The  specimens  need  not  be  nailed  or  fastened  to- 
gether. The  bottom  specimen  may  be  laid  flat,  with  the  other  coated  specimen  and  the 
insulation  board  standing  on  their  edges  and  placed  flush  against  the  edges  of  the  bottom 
specimen. 

(2)  Procedure:  The  trough  shall  be  situated  in  a  laboratory  fume  hood,  with  the 
exhaust  fan  operating.  A  10-min  fusee  shall  be  ignited  and  laid  snugly  in  the  corner 
formed  by  the  junction  of  the  two  coated  specimens.  When  the  fusee  has  been  con- 
sumed the  duration  and  intensi'y  of  residual  flame  activity  shall  be  recorded. 

(3)  Acceptance  Criteria: 

(a)  Flames  shall  be  totally  or  virtually  self-extinguished  within  10  min  after  the 
fusee  has  stopped  burning. 

(b)  The  coating  shall  not  flake,  peel,  crumble,  slough  or  exhibit  any  other  effects 
which  result  in  the  exposure  of  the  wood  substrate. 

(c)  Glowing  shall  have   ceased   within    30  min  after  flaming  has  stopped. 

c.  Accelerated  Weathering  Test 

(1)  Apparatus  and  Specimens:  When  a  coating  shall  have  conformed  to  the  stand- 
ards of  the  first  tests  during  initial  testing,  it  shall  be  used  to  prepare  five  additional 
specimens  which  shall  be  approximately  identical  to  those  which  had  been  tested.  After 
thorough  drying  or  curing,  the  specimens  shall  be  exposed  to  artificial  sunlight  and 
simulated  rainfall  in  a  weathering  device  described  in  ASTM  Specifications,  designation 
E  42. 

(2)  Procedure:  Each  specimen  shall  be  positioned  vertically  in  the  weathering  de- 
vice, with  one  of  its  broad  surfaces  facing  the  light  source.  The  same  surface  shall  face 
the  light  throughout  the  test.  The  test  shall  be  terminated  after  an  accumulated  light- 
exposure  time  of  1000  hr  or  when,  at  any  prior  time,  the  coating  is  judged  to  have 
failed.  The  decision  of  apparent  coating  failure  shall  be  subjective  and  shall  be  based 
on  the  appearance  of  excessive  blistering  or  softening,  or  exposure  of  wood  by  slough- 
ing, peeling,  flaking,  cracking  or  other  effects.  The  test  shall  be  conducted  in  accordance 
with  the  following  program: 

(a)  The  specimen  shall  be  exposed  to  artificial  sunlight  at  all  times  during  tin 
operation  of  the  weathering  device,  except  for  such  time  as  shall  be  re- 
required  for  the  restriking  of  the  carbon  arc. 

(b)  The  specimens  shall  be  mounted,  with  a  face-to-face  diameter  of  >o  in,  on  a 
circular  rack  which  rotates  at  the  rate  of  I  rpm.  A  water  spray  in  the  weath- 
ering device  shall  operate  for  18  min  at  intervals  of  102  min,  so  thai  dur- 
ing each  2  hr  of  light  radiation  the  specimens  shall  be  exposed  to  water  for 
18  min.  In  this  manner  each  specimen  shall  receive  approximately  2.5-3.0 
min  direct  water  spraj    during  each  2-hr  radiation  period. 

Exposure  ill  the  artificial  weathering  device  shall  be  undertaken  daily,  for  a 
total  of  90  hr  within  5  days.  At  the  end  of  each  00  hr  of  exposure,  tin- 
specimens  shall  l>e  allowed  to  cool  at  room  temperature  for  a  minimum  of 
2   hr  and  then  placed  for  65  hr  in  a  cold  chamber  adjusted   to   maintain  a 


382 Wood    Bridges   and    Trestles 

temperature  of  — 20  deg  F.  At  the  end  of  the  cold  period,  the  specimens 
shall  be  allowed  to  warm  at  room  temperature  for  a  minimum  of  2  hr  before 
again  placing  them  in  the  weathering  device.  Extreme  caution  shall  be  ob- 
served during  all  handling  and  transfer  operations  involving  a  specimen  so  as 
not  to  modify  its  condition. 

(3)  Acceptance  Criteria:  At  the  termination  of  the  weathering  program,  if  failure 
has  not  occurred,  the  specimens  shall  be  subjected  to  the  fire  tests  and  shall  be  rated 
by  the  acceptance  criteria  of  those  tests. 

d.  Brine  Resistance  Tests 

(1)  Apparatus:  An  assembly  shall  be  arranged  consisting  of  a  stop-cock-controlled 
funnel  and  a  small  container  equipped  with  an  overflow  outlet.  The  container  shall 
measure  4  in  on  all  sides,  with  an  overflow  tube  of  a  minimum  %  in  diameter  leading 
out  from  a  point  1  in  below  the  top  edge,  and  shall  be  composed  of  waterproof  and 
chemical-resistant  materials,  such  as  glass,  rubber  or  plastics.  The  funnel  shall  be  large 
enough  to  contain  a  minimum  of  500  ml  of  liquid  and  shall  be  placed  vertically  over 
the  container. 

(2)  Specimen  Selection  and  Preparation:  An  18-in  preservative-treated  specimen 
shall  be  selected  by  the  procedures  outlined  under  Sec.  D,  Art.  1,  discarding  4*^  in  of 
each  end  of  the  specimen.  The  remainder  of  the  specimen  shall  be  sawn  laterally  at  2-in 
intervals,  yielding  four  sections,  each  of  which  shall  be  weighed  to  the  nearest  0.1  g. 
A  uniform  continuous  coating  film  of  the  same  thickness  used  for  the  fire-test  specimens 
shall  be  applied  to  all  surfaces  of  the  section,  beginning  at  a  point  1  in  from  one  end. 
The  thickness  and  weight  of  the  wet  coating  application  shall  be  recorded,  and  the 
coating  shall  be  allowed  to  dry  or  cure  completely. 

(3)  Test  Procedure:  The  container  shall  be  filled  to  the  overflow  outlet  with  a  10 
percent  sodium  chloride  brine  solution.  The  funnel  also  shall  be  filled  with  the  brine 
solution.  The  test  shall  be  conducted  at  room  temperature,  75  to  80  deg  F,  and  the 
brine  shall  be  maintained  at  that  temperature  throughout  the  test.  The  coated  end  of  a 
specimen  shall  be  immersed  at  approximately  a  45-deg  angle  in  the  container,  with  the 
wider  side  facing  upward,  and  with  the  uncoated  area  of  the  opposite  side  resting  on 
the  edge  of  the  container.  No  more  than  4  nor  less  than  2>y2  in  of  a  coated  side  shall 
be  below  the  surface  of  the  solution.  The  tip  of  the  funnel  shall  be  positioned  1  in  above 
the  center  of  the  line  between  the  coated  and  uncoated  areas  of  the  specimen.  At  the 
start  of  the  test,  the  stop  cock  shall  be  opened  sufficiently  to  allow  drops  of  brine  to  fall 
at  the  rate  of  approximately  10  drops  per  min,  striking  the  specimen  at  the  midpoint 
of  the  line  between  the  coated  and  uncoated  areas.  Dripping  and  immersion  shall  be 
continuous  for  300  hr.  The  effluent  from  the  specimen  container  shall  be  collected  in 
any  suitable  container  and  discarded.  At  the  end  of  300  hr,  the  brine  solution  in  the 
specimen  container  shall  be  examined  for  discoloration  and  for  materials  which  have 
separated  from  the  coating.  The  specimen  shall  be  observed  for  blistering,  Assuring, 
crumbling  or  other  effects. 

(4)  Acceptance  Criteria:  The  specimen  shall  be  examined  immediately  at  the  end  of 
a  test  and  at  a  time  one  week  after  the  test.  Fissures  in  the  coating  shall  be  no  wider 
than  hairline  cracks.  Blisters  shall  be  no  larger  than  %  in.  in  diameter.  Gentle  teasing 
of  the  coating  with  a  knife  point  shall  not  result  in  easy  dislodgement  of  coating  par- 
ticles. The  dry  thickness  of  the  coating  at  any  location  on  the  specimen  shall  not  have 


Wood    Bridges   and   Trestles 383 

decreased  by  more  than  l/s,  of  the  original  dry  thickness.  Discoloration  of  the  brine  solu- 
tion and  the  presence  of  coating  particles  in  the  container  shall  indicate  possible  leaching 
or  solvation  of  the  fire-retardant  constituents  of  the  coating. 

e.  Foot  Traffic  Test 

A  specimen  shall  be  selected  and  prepared  in  the  same  manner  as  the  specimens 
used  for  the  fire  tests,  with  the  same  thickness  of  coating  applied.  The  coating  shall  be 
allowed  to  dry  or  cure  completely. 

(1)  Procedure:  The  specimen  shall  be  heated  for  1  hr  at  140  deg  F  in  an  electric 
oven.  The  specimen  shall  then  be  removed  from  the  oven  and  immediately  laid  flat 
on  one  of  its  broad  surfaces  on  a  protected  area  of  the  floor.  The  uppermost  surface 
shall  be  stepped  upon  with  one  foot  by  a  person  weighing  no  less  than  ISO  lb.  His 
entire  weight  shall  be  concentrated  on  the  specimen  for  1  min,  at  the  end  of  which 
time  he  shall  execute  a  45-deg  twisting  movement  of  the  ball  of  his  foot  upon  the 
coating  and  then  step  off  the  specimen. 

(2)  Acceptance  Criteria:  The  coating  shall  not  exhibit  tearing  and  shall  not  be 
lifted  from  the  wood  substrate  by  adhesion  to  the  shoe  used  to  exert  pressure.  Should 
these  or  other  objectionable  effects  occur,  the  test  shall  be  repeated,  using  mineral 
aggregate  or  similar  material  spread  over  the  specimen  surface  while  the  coating  is 
still  wet. 

When  a  surfacing  material  is  used  in  conjunction  with  a  coating,  it  shall  not  be 
sufficiently   dislodged   to   require  resurfacing  the  specimen. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Repeated    Loading   of   Timber    Structures 

C.  V.  Lund  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  E.  Anderson,  W.  L.  Anderson,  C.  E.  Atwater, 
A.  VV.  Carlson,  B.  E.  Daniels,  D.  J.  Engle,  W.  A.  Genereux,  F.  J.  Hanrahan,  J.  F. 
Holmberg,  W.  C.  Howe,  L.  R.  Kubacki,  W.  H.  Martin,  T.  K.  May,  W.  A.  Oliver, 
F.  E.  Schneider,  J.  G.  Shope,  J.  D.  Tapp,  Jr.,  W.  D.  Turner,  L.  W.  Wood. 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  the  following  synopsis  of  Report  No.  ER- 
26*  released  during  the  year  by  the  Engineering  Research  Division,  Association  of  Amer- 
ican Railroads.  This  is  the  first  progress  report  of  a  program  of  tests  of  full-size  bridge 
stringers  in   repeated  loading. 

Laboratory  Investigation  to  Determine  Static  and 

Repeated-Load  Strength  of  Full-Size  Douglas 

Fir  Glued-Laminated  Stringers 

In  1960  the  AAR  Research  Center  initiated  a  program  of  tests  on  the  strength  of 
full-size  timber  bridge  stringers  in  -tatic  and  repeated  loading,  to  obtain  needed  data  for 
use  in  re-evaluating  allowable  working  stresses.  The  program  is  being  carried  out  in 
cooperation  with  the  lumber  manufacturing,  fabricating  and  treating  industries,  and  the 
Forest   Products  Laboratory   of   the  United  States  Department    of   Agriculture. 

'Copies  of  the  complete  report  may  be  obtained  from  the  director  of  engineering  research,  \\K. 
3140  S.   Federal   St.,   Chicago   16. 


384 


Wood    Bridges   and    Trestles 


Testing  full-size  glued-laminated  Douglas  fir  stringer  at 
AAR  Research  Center. 


The  initial  tests  were  conducted  on  24  untreated  glued-laminated  Douglas  fir 
stringers  7  in  by  16^4  in,  14  ft  long,  fabricated  to  a  selected  commercial  standard. 
Three  stringers  were  tested  statically  and  21  in  repeated  loading.  The  tests  were  designed 
with  particular  emphasis  on  the  determination  of  horizontal  shear  strengths  and  the 
effect  of  load  position  on  shear  resistance.  Two  equal  loads  were  applied,  spaced  4  ft 
8  in  apart,  on  a  span  length  of  12  ft  10  in.  The  first  load  was  placed  at  either  1%,  2^, 
or  3  times  the  depth  of  the  stringer  from  one  end  support.  Tests  were  carried  to  failure 
or  to  approximately  2  million  cycles  of  maximum  stress,  whichever  occurred  first. 

The  results  of  this  first  series  have  been  published  as  Report  No.  ER-26.  The  report 
includes  the  test  data  obtained  at  the  AAR  Laboratory,  also  data  on  the  physical  proper- 
ties of  the  stringers  as  determined  by  the  Forest  Products  Laboratory. 

Nine  stringers  failed  in  horizontal  shear  under  repeated  loading  and  S  in  tension; 
7  stringers  did  not  fail.  Failure  of  each  of  3  stringers  tested  in  static  loading  at  the 
several  load  position  was  in  tensioa 


Wood    Bridges    and    Trestles 


385 


FIG.    1 
LABORATORY      INVESTIGATION    OF    CLUED    LAMINATED      S7R\NGERS 

EFFECT  OF    LOAD     POSITION    ON     STATIC    &  REPEATED   LOAD    SHEAR     STRENGTH 


IOOO 


BOO 


5 


400 


200 


-       0 


T 

T" 

STATIC    LOADS 

>T 

1 _______ 

-REPEATED     LOADS 

i 

DESIGN 

STREP'S 

1.00  d  150  d  2  25  d  3  00  d 

POSITION      OF      LOAD 

(V  BEING     \b     INCHES) 

NOTE'-       VALUES       SHOWN    FOR     REPEATED    LOADS    ARE    THOSE 

WH\CH     WERE      SUSTA\N_D      FOR       2,000,000     CYCLES. 
.t- TENSION     FAILURE 


4-OOd 


The  results  indicate  that  as  the  loads  approach  the  support  and  the  end  shear  in- 
creases, the  unit  shear  resistance  also  tends  to  increase.  Conversely,  as  the  loads  approach 
the  center  of  the  span  both  the  end  shear  and  shear  resistance  tend  to  increase.  This 
suggests  that  horizontal  shear  may  be  related  to  deflection. 

The  horizontal  shear  strength  of  the  beams  in  this  series  in  repeated  loading  at  2 
million  cycles  is  estimated  to  approximate  350  psi  when  the  first  load  is  located  at  _5_ 
times  the  depth  of  the  beam  from  the  support;  300  psi  when  located  at  2%  times  the 
depth  of  the  beam  from  the  support,  and  275  psi  when  located  at  3  times  the  depth 
of  the  beam  from  the  support,  as  shown  on  Fig.  1.  Current  allowable  working  stress  is 
150  psi,  based,  however,  on  long-time  duration   of  static  loading. 

No  consistent  relationship  was  found  between  measured  shearing  strains  and  man- 
ner of  failure  in  repeated  loading,  nor  was  there  any  change  in  strain  with  cycling  from 
which  imminent  failure  could  be  predicted. 

The  tests  of  physical  properties  conducted  by  the  Forest  Products  Laboratory 
failed  to  establish  any  correlation  between  strength  in  repeated  loading  and  rate  of 
growth  (percent  summerwood),  or  spedfii  gravity,  which  properties  are  known  t<>  beat 
a  relationship  in  static  loading.  Examination  showed  that  failures  in  horizontal  shear 
tended  to  follow  annular  growth  rings  of  the  wood,  as  illustrated  on  Fig.  J. 

In  an   Appendix  to  the   main   report  information   is  presented   on   exploratory   tests 
of  16  similar  full-size  stringers  thai  preceded  the  current  program.  These  tests  wen 
ducted  in  like  manner,  but  with  loads  spaced  3  ft  1   in  apart  symmetrically  about  the 


386 


Wood    Bridges    and    Trestles 


0.44 


\    25 

0.47 

-26 

048 

|=3§5%J 

«.yb*3 

0.4/ 

r 

0.46 

BEAM  17 


LEFT 
BEAM  18 


Fig.  2 — Ends  of  beams  17  and  18  as  viewed  toward  center  of  span. 
Both  beams  failed  in  shear  at  the  left  end  in  the  approximate  area  indicated. 
The  figures  on  the  laminations  indicate  percent  summerwood  and  specific 
gravity. 

center  of  span  (except  for  two  stringers)  to  produce  increments  of  design  stresses  in 
both  shear  and  flexure  simultaneously,  and  provided  information  from  which  the  cur- 
rent program  was  planned.  The  shear  strengths  developed  in  these  stringers  were  gen- 
erally lower  with  but  one  failure  in  tension  under  repeated  loading.  Examination  of 
sections  of  these  stringers  after  testing  revealed  considerable  interior  checking  in  many 
of  the  laminations,  the  cause  for  which  was  not  determined,  but  which  may  have  had 
bearing  on  the  shear  strengths  developed.  In  these  exploratory  tests  the  first  load  was 
located  3.7  times  the  depth  of  the  beam  from  the  near  support,  and  this  also  may  have 
had  bearing  on  the  lower  shear  values.  The  estimated  horizontal  shear  strength  in 
repeated  loading  for  these  stringers  at  2  million  cycles  was  determined  to  be  approxi- 
mately  180  psi. 


Report   of    Committee    11 — Engineering   and 
Valuation   Records 


fl 


M.  C.  Wolf,  Chairman 

H.  R.  Williams, 
\7/ce  Chairman 

W.  S.  Gates,  Secretary 
W.  A.  Krauska 
J.  Bert  Byars 
E.  W.  Smith 


W.  J.  Pease 
C.  R.  Dolan 
M.  M.  Cerber 
C.  F.  Olson 
F.  A.  Rorerts 
R.  B  Aldridge 

F.  B.  Baldwin   (E) 

G.  R.   Berquist 

B.  A.  Bertenshaw  (E) 
H.  C.  Boley 

C.  E.  Bynane 
J.  R.  Clayton 

B.  J.  Cook 

F.  O.  Crosgrove 
F.  H.  DeMoyer 
R.  L.  Ealy 
A.  L.  Engwall 
Morton  Friedman 
R.  F.  Garner 
E.  W.  Gibson 
\Y.  M.  Hager 

C.  C.  Haire  (E) 
H.  N.  Halper 
Nelson  Hammond 
J.  H.  Hande  (E) 
M.  J.  Hebert 


J.   W.   HlGGINS 

J.  A.  L.  Houston 
L.  W.  Howard 
R.  D.  Igou 
W.  H.  Kieiil 
R.  A.  Larivtere 
C.  E.  Lex,  Jr. 
J.  L.  Mantiiey 

C.  W.  Meyer 
B.  H.  Moore 

B.  F.  Nauert 
F.  H.  Neely 

D.  E.  Pergrin 

C.  H.  Rapp 
H.  L.  Restall 
C.  S.  Robey 

E.  J.  Rockefeller 
H.  B.  Sampson 

R.  L.  Samuell 
R.  S.  Shaw,  Jr. 
J.  N.  Smeaton 
Joel  E.  Stein 
J.  B.  Styles 
J.  R.  Traylor 
W.  C.  Wieters 
Louis  Wolf  (E) 

Committee 


(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names   are   set    in    bold-face    type   constitute    the    Engineering   Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee   11. 

To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  Committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision    of   Manual. 

Xo  recommendations  for  revision  of  manual.  Study  of  Chapter  11  has  been 
completed  for  the  time  being. 

2.  Bibliography   on   subjects    pertaining   to   engineering  and   valuation   records. 
Progress  report,   submitted  as  information    page  388 

3.  Office  and  drafting  practices. 

A  >tudy  of  microfilming  of  records  and  reports  is  in  progress,  but  no  report 
is  submitted. 

5.  Use  of  statistics   and  data  processing  in   railway   engineering. 

A   study   is   in    progress,    but    report   is    withheld    pending    revision    of    ICC 
requirements  for  valuation   reports. 

6.  Valuation  and  depreciation. 

(a)   Current  developments  in  connection  with  regulatory  bodies  and  courts. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  391 


387 


388 Engineering   and   Valuation    Records 

(b)  ICC  valuation  orders  and  reports. 
No  report. 

(c)  Development  of  depreciation  data. 
No  report. 

7.  Revisions  and  interpretations  of  ICC  accounting  classifications. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  393 

8.  Suggested  instructions  for  making  field  checks  and  their  application  to  com- 
pletion reports. 

A  study  is  in  progress,  but  report  is  withheld  pending  revision  of  ICC  re- 
quirements for  valuation  reports. 

9.  Simplification  of  annual  reports  on  Form  588  to  the  Interstate  Commerce 
Commission,  and  underlying  Completion  Reports. 

No  report  because  this  assignment  is  dependent  on  the  disposition  of  Valu- 
ation Order  30  of  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission. 

The  Committee  on  Engineering  and  Valuation  Records, 

M.  C.  Wolf,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin   576,  January   1963. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Bibliography   on    Subjects   Pertaining   to   Engineering 
and   Valuation   Records 

J.  B.  Byars  (chairman,  subcommittee),  C.  R.  Dolan,  M.  Friedman,  R.  F.  Garner,  H.  N. 
Halper,  L.  W.  Howard,  J.  A.  Houston,  R.  D.  Igou,  B.  H.  Moore,  F.  H.  Neely, 
C.  F.  Olson,  W.  J.  Pease,  E.  J.  Rockefeller,  H.  R.  Williams,  M.  C.  Wolf. 

Depreciation 

Railway  Age,  Nov.  6,  1961,  p.  10 

"Watching  Washington" — Presentation  of  new  depreciation  terms  to  the  Government. 

Railway  Age,  April  9,  1962,  p.  11 

President  calls  for  transport  reforms.  Review  of  depreciation,  "will  be  to  give  full 
recognition  to  current  economic  forces,  including  obsolescence,  which  in  their  impact 
upon  the  lives  of  appreciable  assets  may  affect  quite  differently  different  modes  of  trans- 
portation and,  therefore,   their  competitive  relationships." 

Railway  Age,  July  16-23,  1962,  p.  9 

What  depreciation  rules  mean  to  railroads — Rolling  stock,  communication  systems, 
signaling  facilities,  roadway  machines,  small  tools  and  shop  machinery  may  now  be 
written  off  in  14  years  for  tax  purposes. 

Modem  Railroads,  Dec.  1961,  pp.  24  and  SI 

Report  from  Washington.  "Depreciation  relief  coming?" 

Editorial   comment.    "Turning  point   on   depreciation?" 


Engineering   and   Valuation    Records  389 

Modern  Railroads,  Aug.  1961,  p.  42 

Report  from  Washington.  "Liberalized  depreciation  here  at  last." 

The  Accounting  Review,  July  1962,  p.  452 

"A  System  of  Retirement  Frequencies  for  Depreciable  Assets" — A  general  method 
for  deriving  the  survival  coefficients  (or  their  counterparts,  the  retirement  coefficients) 
for  depreciable  physical  property. 

The  Accounting  Review,  Aug.  1961,  p.  539 

"The  Tax  Depreciation  Muddle" — A  discussion  which  primarily  concerns  those  busi- 
nesses which  require  a  large  investment  in  relatively  long-lived  plant  and  equipment 
facilities. 

The  Accounting  Digest,  March  1962,  p.  147 

"Industrial  Obsolescence  Danger" — Important  machines  become  obsolete  long  before 
the  tax  life  as  assigned  by  the  Treasury  Department  has  ended. 

The  Accounting  Digest,  June  1962,  p.  215 

An  evaluation  of  the  new  rules  on  depreciation  as  proposed  by  the  Kennedy  Ad- 
ministration. 

Weekly  Information  Bulletin  (The  American  Short  Line  Railroad  Association) 
July    16,    1962.  pp.   291-293. 

Depreciation  Schedules  and  Procedures  Revised — Summary  of  Treasury  Depart- 
ment's new  Depreciation  Guidelines  and  Rules  as  it  affects  each  railroad  account. 
(Procedure  62-21) 

Weekly  Information  Bulletin  (The  American  Short  Line  Railroad  Association) 
July   16,    1962,  pp.  293-294. 

Reprint  of  editorial  appearing  in  The  Wall  Street  Journal  of  Aug.  13,  1962,  called 
"A  Reduction  of  Absurdity"  commenting  on  the  misconceptions  of  the  new  reform. 
To  quote,  "The  depreciation  overhaul  is  indeed  a  long-overdue  step  in  the  right  direc- 
tion. It  is  no  depreciation  of  the  Treasury's  careful  work  to  say  that  many  more  steps 
must   be  taken   on   the  road  to  sound  economic  growth." 

Standard  Federal  Tax  Reports,  No.  32,  July  11,  1962 

New  Depreciation  Rules  with  Explanation.  This  booklet  includes  U.  S.  Treasury 
Department  IRS  Publication  No.  456,  "Depreciation  Guidelines  and  Rules",  for  Revenue 
Procedure  62-21,  with  a  comprehensive  explanation  of  the  new  procedure. 

Standard  Federal  Tax  Reports,  No.  37,  August  16,  1962 

Official  Tables  for  New  Depreciation  Rules.  This  booklet  includes  U.  S.  Treasury 
Department  IRS  Publication  No.  457,  "Tables  for  Applying  Revenue  Procedure  62-21" 
together  with  a  new  complete  text  of  Part  III  of  the  new  procedure. 

Standard  Federal  Tax  Reports,  No.  43,  Oct.  1,  1962 

Additional  IRS  questions  and  answers  on  new  depreciation  guide   lines  and   rules. 


Taxes 


Railway  Age,  April  9,  1962,  pp.  8-11 

"President  Calls  for  Transport  Reforms" — Revision  of  transportation  taxes. 

Railway  Age,  April  16,  1962,  pp.  14-15 
President  Kennedy's  Message  to  Congress. 
Discussion  of  various  taxes:   excise,  property,  income. 


390 Engineering   and   Valuation    Records 

Saturday  Review,  April  14,  9162,  pp.  19-21 

A  good  summary  of  railroad  ills,  including  an  explanation  of  tax  inequalities  and 
needed  changes. 

U.  S.  News  &  World  Report,  Sept.  11,  1961,  pp.  76-77 

"What  Will  Really  Be  Done  to  Help  Transportation?" — Recommends  giving  rail- 
roads new  tax  breaks  on  money  invested  in  equipment. 

Office  Procedure 

Railway  Age,  Sept.  4,  1961,  p.  15 

Kardex  filing  system  for  computer  instructions  for  use  with  electronic  data  processing 
systems. 

Railway  Age,  Nov.  27,  1961,  p.  53 
Computer  Role: 

1.  Management  information   and   control. 

2.  Interdepartmental  cooperation. 

Railway   Age,  June  18,  1962,  p.  31 
Cost-cutting  tools,  methods,  and  records. 

Railway  Age,  July  9,  1962,  pp.  20-21 

1.  How  I.C.  Billing  System  Saves  Time  and  Money. 

2.  Systems  Approach  Offers  Big  Payoff. 

Modern  Railroads,  Sept.  1961,  p.  129 
New  High-Speed  "Solid  State"  Computer. 

Modern  Railroads,  Jan.  1962,  p.  44 

1.  Electronics  in   data  processing. 

2.  Role  of  better  cost  rinding. 

3.  Why   not  share  computers? 

Modern  Railroads,  July  1962,  p.  63 
Uses  of  data  processing  equipment. 

Modern  Railroads,  Aug.  1962,  p.  75 

CN's  high  speed  data  processing  network  links  officers,  regional  centers,  and  system 
headquarters. 

Reproduction    Methods,    Dec.    1961 

"Microfilm  Is  in  the  Cards  at  ARMA."  A  card  system  for  storing  microfilmed  engi- 
neering drawings,  permitting  handling,  reproduction  and  distribution  of  engineering  data 
at  lower  cost  and  greater  speed  than  conventional  methods. 

Accounting 

Railway  Age,  June  18,  1962,  p.  31 

Accounting  data  provides  management  with  accurate,  timely  and  pertinent  infor- 
mation on  which  to  base  decision-making. 

Modern  Railroads,  Nov.  1961,  p.  113 

Timely  reports  from  a  centralized,  mechanized,  accounting  department  provide 
Frisco  management  with  needed  statistics  for  sound  control. 


Engineering   and   Valuation    Records  391 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Valuation  and  Depreciation 

(a)  Current  Developments  in  Connection  with  Regulatory  Bodies  and  Courts 

C.  R.  Dolan  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  B.  Aldridge,  G.  R.  Berquist,  J.  B.  Byars, 
J.  R.  Clayton,  C.  E.  Clonts,  F.  H.  DeMoyer,  R.  L.  Ealy,  A.  L.  Engwall,  R.  F. 
Garner,  VV.  S.  Gates,  Jr.,  E.  W.  Gibson,  H.  N.  Halper,  M.  J.  Hebert,  J.  VV.  Higgins, 
L.  W.  Howard,  R.  D.  Igou,  R.  A.  Lariviere,  J.  L.  Manthey,  B.  H.  Moore,  C.  F. 
Olson,  C.  H.  Rapp,  Jr.,  H.  L.  Restall,  C.  S.  Robey,  E.  J.  Rockefeller,  J.  B.  Styles, 
H.  R.  Williams. 

ICC   Bureau  of  Accounts 

The  Section  of  Valuation  was  engaged  principally  during  the  year  in  railroad  and 
pipeline  work..  Tentative  and  final  valuation  reports  were  prepared  for  pipeline  carriers, 
and  by  the  end  of  the  year  statements  will  be  completed  showing  the  elements  of  value 
for  all  Class  I  line-haul  and  switching  and  terminal  companies  as  of  December  31,  1961. 

During  the  year  1961,  Class  I  line-haul  carriers  charged  to  Account  459 — Valuation 
Expenses,  $743,899  contrasted  with  $824,352  for  the  year   1960. 

As  of  October  1,  1962,  pipeline  and  rail  carriers  were  delinquent  in  the  filing  of 
valuation  reports  with  the  Bureau  as  follows:  4  line-haul  companies  for  1959,  and  16 
line-haul  and  2  switching  and  terminal  companies  for  1960.  Valuation  reports  covering 
property  changes  for  the  year  1961  have  been  received  from  30  line-haul  and  switching 
and   terminal  companies  and  57   pipeline  carriers. 

The  total  authorized  personnel  for  valuation  and  depreciation  work  in  the  Section 
of  Valuation  on  October  1,  1962  was  30. 

During  the  year  the  Commission  released  the  Schedule  of  Annual  Indices  for  Car- 
riers by  Railroad,  and  the  Schedule  of  Annual  and  Period  Indices  for  Carriers  by  Pipe- 
line for  the  year  1961. 

Simplification  of  BV-588  returns:  Further  progress  in  this  matter  has  been  sus- 
pended pending  the  outcome  of  legislation  introduced  in  the  87th  Congress  amending 
the  Valuation  Act  to  relieve  the  Commission  of  the  mandatory  reporting  by  carriers  of 
quantities  in   reporting  changes  in  their  properties. 

Report  of  the  Committee  on  Valuation, 

National  Association  of   Railroad  and   Utilities   Commissioners 

In  previous  reports  the  committee  has  presented  a  review  of  the  annual  report 
of  the  Committee  on  Valuation  of  the  National  Association  of  Railroad  and  Utilities 
Commissioners.  A  review  of  this  year's  report  of  the  Committee  on  Engineering,  De- 
preciation and  Valuation  of  the  association  discloses  that  the  Committee  on  Valuation 
has  been  combined  with  the  Committee  on  Engineering,  likewise  the  Committee  on 
Depreciation.  Special  subcommittees  of  the  enlarged  committee  will  report  on  these 
two  subjects.  At  the  time  of  the  preparation  of  the  report,  the  valuation  group  had 
not  been  established.  The  Committee  on  Engineering  has  a  rather  broad  agenda  and  is 
dealing  with  proposed  service  rules  for  gas,  electric,  telephone  and  water  utilities.  Sev- 
eral subcommittees  are  keeping  abreast  of  developments  in  the  fields  of  gas  safety,  rail- 
road highway  grade  crossing  protection  and  the  use  of  nuclear  energy  in  power  produc- 
tion, and  sample  testing  of  electric  meters.  The  depreciation  group  is  considering: 

1.  Review  accomplishments  of  former  Committee  on  Depreciation. 

2.  Review  unfinished   plans   of    former   Committee   on   Depreciation 

Hull.  576 


392 Engineering    and    Valuation    Records 

3.  Consider  and  select: 

a.  Long-range  program   for  the  Subcommittee  on  Depreciation. 

b.  Activities  for   1962-1963   which   will  implement   the  long-range  program. 

4.  Suggested  projects  for  long-range  program: 

a.  Revise  and  expand  the   1943   report  of  the  Committee  on  Depreciation. 

b.  Prepare  manual  for  use  of  commission  staff  in  conducting  depreciation 
studies.  This  could  include  specific  methods  and  examples  of  accumulation 
of  data  and  computation  of  depreciation  rates.  It  could  also  include  a  bibli- 
ography of  recommended  books  and  articles. 

c.  Study  of  historical  data  required  for  depreciation  studies  of  group  proper- 
ties of  utilities  and  preparation  of  recommended  procedures  for  utilities  to 
acquire   these   data. 

d.  Accumulation  of  actual  mortality  data  for  various  classes  of  group  proper- 
ties of  utilities.  This  would  provide  typical  life  tables  that  would  be  used 
in  depreciation  studies  of  smaller  utilities  and  those  that  have  accumulated 
only  limited  mortality  data. 

Revision  of  Depreciation  Rules  and 
Investment   Credit  for   Income  Tax  Purposes 

The  U.  S.  Treasury  Department  Internal  Revenue  Service  issued  Publication  No.  456 
(7-62),  officially  denominated  I.R.S.  Revenue  Procedure  62-21,  in  July  1962.  This  Rev- 
enue Procedure  provides  basic  reforms  in  the  guideline  lines  for  depreciation  and  in  the 
administration  of  depreciation  for  tax  purposes. 

The  new  guidelines  for  depreciation  involve  a  major  departure  from  past  practices. 
Most  significantly,  in  pursuing  the  achievement  of  the  law's  objective  of  permitting  a 
reasonable  allowance  for  depreciation,  they  seek  a  reasonable  overall  result  in  measuring 
depreciation,  rather  than  approaching  depreciation  on  an  item-by-item  basis.  In  lieu  of 
Bulletin  F's  5000  separate  categories  of  depreciable  business  property,  the  new  guide- 
lines and  rules  group  all  such  property  into  approximately  75  broad  classes  of  depreci- 
able assets,  divided  among  four  groups.  Use  of  the  new  guideline  lives  is  not  mandatory, 
and  depreciation  methods  and  procedures  currently  in  use  by  any  taxpayer  may  con- 
tinue to  be  used  without  alteration.  Effective,  however,  for  all  taxable  years  for  which 
a  tax  return  is  due  on  or  after  July  12,  1962,  any  taxpayer  may  voluntarily  elect  to 
compute  depreciation  in  accordance  with  the  new  guidelines  and  rules.  Thus,  for  rail- 
roads the  new  guidelines  and  rules  can  first  be  employed  in  the  Federal  income  tax 
returns  for  1962,  due  March  15,  1963. 

Section  2  of  the  Revenue  Act  of  1962,  which  became  law  on  October  16,  1962, 
provides   for  an  investment  credit. 

The  investment  credit  provisions  of  the  Act  allow  a  taxpayer's  liability  for  income 
tax,  for  the  year  1962  or  any  year  thereafter,  to  be  reduced  by  an  amount  equal  to 
7   percent  of   the  "qualified  investment"  in  depreciable  property  for  the  year. 

The  amount  of  the  credit  so  allowed  is  subject  to  the  limitation,  however,  that  it 
may  not  exceed  so  much  of  the  taxpayer's  liability  for  income  tax  for  the  year  as  does 
not  exceed  $25,000  plus  25  percent  of  any  liability  over  $25,000. 

The  "qualified  investment,"  to  which  the  7  percent  is  applied,  is  determined  by 
multiplying   the   "basis"   of   "new"   property,   or   the   "cost"   of   "used"   property,   by   a 


Engineering    and    Valuation    Records 393 

specified  percentage  which  depends  on  the  estimated  useful  life  of  the  property  at  the 
time  it  is  placed  in  service  by  the  taxpayer.  This  percentage  is  100  percent  if  the  esti- 
mated useful  life  of  the  property  is  8  years  or  more;  66%  percent  if  the  estimated  useful 
life  is  6  or  more  but  less  than  8  years;  33 Mi  percent  if  the  estimated  useful  life  is  4  or 
more  but  less  than  6  years.  No  investment  credit  is  allowed  for  an  investment  in  any 
depreciable  property  whose  estimated  useful  life  at  the  time  it  is  placed  in  service  is 
less  than  4  years. 

In  the  case  of  "used"  property  only,  there  is  a  further  limit  which  prevents  more 
than  $50,000  of  the  cost  of  such  property  from  being  included  in  "qualified  investment" 
for  any  one  year. 

The  property  with  respect  to  which  the  credit  is  allowed — referred  to  by  the  Act 
as  "section  38  property" — must  be  depreciable  or  amortizablc  property  which  is  either 
(A)  "tangible  personal  property,"  or  (B)  "other  tangible  property  (not  including  a 
building  and  its  structural  components)"  which  is  "(i)  used  as  an  integral  part  of 
manufacturing,  production,  or  extraction  or  of  furnishing  transportation,  communica- 
tions, electrical  energy,  gas,  water,  or  sewage  disposal  service,  or  (ii)  constitutes  a  re- 
search or  storage  facility  used  in  connection  with  any  of  the  activities"  just  referred  to. 
Railroad  tracks  and  signals  have  been  determined  as  being  section  38  property. 

The  Act  contains  the  provision  which  requires  a  taxpayer  to  reduce  the  basis  of 
any  section  38  property  by  an  amount  equal  to  7  percent  of  the  qualified  investment 
with  respect  to  such  property.  This  provision,  it  should  be  noted,  requires  the  basis  of 
section  38  property  to  be  reduced  by  the  full  amount  of  7  percent  of  the  qualified  invest- 
ment, even  though  the  taxpayer  may  not  have  been  able  to  use  the  credit  because  of 
the  limitations  which  prevent  the  credit  from  exceeding  the  first  $25,000  of  his  tax 
liability  plus  25  percent  of  any  such  liability  in  excess  of  $25,000.  Since  the  amount  of 
the  required  downward  adjustment  in  basis  may  in  some  cases  be  larger  than  the 
amount  of  the  credit  actually  usable  by  a  taxpayer — notably,  where  the  taxpayer  has 
no  tax  liability — the  Act  contains  a  provision  which  allows  a  special  deduction  for  any 
portion  of  the  credit  which  remains  unused  even  after  application  of  the  3-year  carry- 
back and  5-year  carry-forward  provisions.  Subject  to  certain  exceptions,  this  deduction 
is  generally  allowed  to  be  taken  in  the  first  year  after  the  last  year  to  which  the  unused 
credit  could  have  been  carried  forward. 


Report  on  Assignment   7 

Revisions    and    Interpretations    of    ICC    Accounting 
Classifications 

M.  M.  Gerber  (chairman,  subcommittee).  C.  E.  Clonts,  C.  R.  Dolan,  A  I.  Engwall, 
\V.  S.  Gates,  Jr..  W.  M.  Eager,  C.  W.  Meyer,  H.  II.  Moore,  W.  J.  Pease,  C.  H. 
Rapp,  F.  A.  Roberts,  C.  S.  Robey,  H.   B.  Sampson.  J.  R.  Traylor. 

This  is   a  progress  report,  presented  as  information. 

The  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  by  order  of  November  8,  l°6l.  adopted  a 
revised  issue  of  the  Uniform  System  of  Accounts  for  Railroad  Companies  as  amended 
to.  and  effective  as  of,  January  1.  1962,  known  as  the  Issue  of  1962,  This  revised  issue 
incorporates  former  ICC  subject  I'm  Acquisition  of  Railwaj  Operating  Property,  and 
ICC  Subject  471 — Rearrangement   and   Revision,  of  the  General  and  Special   Instructions 


394 Engineering    and   Valuation    Records 

in   the  Uniform  System  of  Accounts  for   Railroad  Companies,  which  were  reported  in 
the  1960,  1961  and  1962  Proceedings. 

The  more  important  changes  appearing  in  the  new  issue  are  as  follows: 

1.    Instructions   For   Proper   Accounts 

(a)  Merger,  Consolidation  and  Purchase  of  a  Railway  Operating  Entity  or  System: 

Formerly,  Account  733 — Acquisition  Adjustment,  dealt  with  all  costs  of  railroad 
property  acquisitions,  purchases,  mergers,  consolidations,  reorganizations,  receivership 
sales  or  transfers  or  otherwise,  and  the  amounts  recorded  in  the  road  and  equipment 
account  were  the  original  costs  or  estimated  original  costs. 

Account  733  has  now  been  cancelled  and  a  new  Account  80 — Other  Elements  of 
Investment,  has  been  added,  in  which  are  includible  amounts  formerly  carried  in  Account 
733  and  not  otherwise  disposed  of. 

The  new  instructions  separate  the  acquisitions  of  railway  property  as  between 
pooling  of  interests,  purchase  or  merger  of  subsidiaries. 

Amounts  recorded  in  the  road  and  equipment  accounts  in  connection  with  pooling 
of  interests  shall  be  at  the  amounts  shown  in  the  accounts  of  the  predecessor  company, 
adjusted  to  conform  with  the  Accounting  rules  of  the  Commission. 

In  regard  to  purchases,  the  new  instructions  specify  that  amounts  includible  in  the 
road  and  equipment  accounts  shall  be  the  actual  cost  to  the  purchaser  of  the  transporta- 
tion property  acquired,  distributed  to  the  primary  accounts  (except  land)  by  using  the 
percentage  relationship  between  purchase  price  and  the  original  cost  of  the  property  as 
shown  in  the  valuation  records  prepared  in  accordance  with  the  orders  of  the  Commis- 
sion. Land  is  to  be  recorded,  as  formerly,  at  original  cost  as  reported  in  basic  valuation 
reports  under  Valuation  Order  No.  7.  Land  reported  without  cost,  except  land  donated, 
shall  be  computed  at  its  estimated  original  cost.  Land  subsequently  acquired  shall  be 
added  at  original  cost,  at  time  of  dedication,  to  transportation  purposes. 

The  new  instructions  provide  that  acquisitions  and  merger  of  property  of  sub- 
sidiaries are  to  be  considered  either  as  a  pooling  of  interests  or  as  a  purchase,  depending 
on  whether  control  was  initially  acquired  through  issuance  of  capital  stock,  when  it  is 
to  be  accounted  for  as  a  pooling  of  interests;  or  if  acquired  through  purchase,  when 
it  is  to  be  accounted  for  as  such. 

In  the  case  of  consummation  of  a  reorganization  or  receivership  the  amounts  in- 
cludible in  the  road  and  equipment  accounts  shall  be  recorded  (as  formerly)  at 
original  cost. 

ICC  Accounting  Series  Circular  No.  129  issued  May  31,  1962,  provides  that  when 
property  is  retired  from  service,  an  equitable  proportion  of  the  balance  in  Account  80 — 
Other  Elements  of  Investment,  applicable  to  that  property  arising  from  a  merger,  pur- 
chase or  reorganization,  is  to  be  cleared  therefrom  on  a  consistent  basis. 

(b)  Construction  Projects  In  Which  Governmental  Agencies,  Individuals,  or  Others, 
and  the  Carrier  Participate: 

Formerly  only  the  cost  borne  by  the  carrier  in  connection  with  construction  projects 
involving  joint  use  of  facilities  by  the  carrier  and  others,  was  recorded  in  the  property 
accounts;  whereas  the  entire  cost  of  constructing  facilities  exclusively  used  and  owned 
by  the  carrier,  was  included  in  the  property  accounts  without  deduction  on  account 
of  contributions  received  from  others;  the  amount  representing  the  value  of  donations 
being  credited  to  account  734 — Donations  and  Grants. 


Engineering   and   Valuation    Records 395 

Also,  formerly  amounts  billed  against  a  lessee  company  for  a  proportion  of  the 
cost  of  constructing  facilities  under  a  contract  which  covers  the  joint  use  of  such  facil- 
ities but  does  not  transfer  title,  was  credited  by  the  owning  company  to  account  508 — 
Joint  Facility  Rent  Income.  The  entire  cost  of  the  facilities  was  charged  by  the  owning 
company  to  its  property  accounts. 

The  new  instructions  specify  that  the  amount  includible  in  the  property  account  for 
construction  projects  in  which  governmental  agencies,  individuals,  or  others,  and  tin- 
carrier  participate,  shall  be: 

(1)  The  payment  made  by  the  carrier  for  its  share  of  the  cost  of  construction, 
plus 

(2)  The  recorded  cost  (estimated  if  unknown)  of  property  relinquished  as  a 
direct  result  of  the  arrangement  and  retired  from  srevice,  less  the  value  of 
salvage  recovered  therefrom  by  the  carrier,  and  less  depreciation  accrued  on 
depreciable  property,  which  is  part  of  the  carriers  cost  of  the  project.  The 
property  account  shall  not  include  any  cost  or  value  for  facilities  or  land 
contributed  or  paid  for  by  governmental  agencies,  individuals  or  others. 

Former  Account  734 — Donations  and  Grants,  is  now  eliminated.  Balances  carried 
in  this  account  shall  be  cleared.  ICC  Accouting  Series  Circular  No.  128,  dated  March 
20,  1962,  provides  that  amounts  carried  in  former  Account  734 — Donations  and  Grants, 
may  be  transferred,  temporarily,  to  Account  80 — Other  Elements  of  Investment,  to  be 
disposed  of  later  in  the  manner  authorized  or  directed  by  the  Commission. 

2.  Instructions   for   Depreciation  Accounts 

The  new  instructions  specify  that  when  abandonment  of  a  branch  line  or  other 
important  segment  of  the  track  structure  or  other  part  of  the  plant  for  which  deprecia- 
tion charges  are  not  includible  in  the  accounts  is  foreseeable  within  a  reasonable  period 
of  time  due  to  exhaustion  of  traffic,  obsolescence  or  other  causes,  application  may  be 
made  to  the  Commission  for  authority  to  create  a  suitable  reserve  in  anticipation  of 
probable  loss. 

3.  Property  Accounts — Road 

Account  9:  Former  instructions  require  that  when  lighter  rail  is  used  to  replace 
heavier  rail,  this  account  shall  be  credited  at  "current  prices  at  time  of  removal"  of  the 
replaced  rail.  The  new  instructions  provide  that  this  account  is  to  be  credited  the  cost, 
estimated,  if  actual  is  not  known,  of  the  excess  weight  of  heavier  rails  replaced  with 
lighter  rails. 

ICC  Subject  No.  468 — Redistribution  of  Amounts  to  Primary  Road  and  Equip- 
ment Accounts,  is  continued  on  the  docket  of  the  General  Committee,  Accounting  Divi- 
sion AAR,  awaiting  advice  as  to  further  developments. 

Interpretations  of  the  Accounting  Classification  Accounting  Bulletin  No.  15.  and 
amendments  thereto,  are  cancelled  effective  September  1.  1962,  by  ICC  Order  oi  Vugusl 
2,  1962.  The  ICC  Bureau  of  Accounts  will  soon  issue  a  publication  of  the  "A"  Cases 
and  such  of  Bulletin  15  Cases  as  are  still  of  current  interest,  revised  or  consolidated 
where  required,  to  conform  to  the  current  Accounting  Classification. 


Report    of    Committee    24 — Cooperative    Relations 
with  Universities 


W.  \V.  Hay,  Chairman 
J.   F.   Davison, 
Vice  Chairman 

E.     J.     FlESENHEISER, 

Secretary 


H.  E.  Hurst 
Jerry  Neben 
G.  B.  Pruden 

J.     L.    Ai.VORD 

B.  G.  Anderson 
H.  C.  Archdeacon 
YV.  S.  AUTREV 

J.  B.  Babcock  (E) 
George  Baylor 
R.  H.  Beeder 
J.  B.  Clark 
L.  B.  Clark 
R.  P.  Davis  (E) 
R.  J.  Fisher 

C.  E.  R.  Haight 
C.  L.  Heimbacii 
L.  J.  Hoffman 
R.  P.  Howell 

W.    H.    HUFFMAN 

S.  R.  Hursh  (E) 
A.  V.  Johnston 
Claude  Johnston 
Frank  Kerekes 


W.  S.  Kerr 
H.  E.  Kirby  (E) 
E.  C.  Lawson 
B.  B.  Lewis 
RE.  Loomis 

R.   W.    MlDDLETON 

G.  W.  Miller 

H.  R.  Moore 

R.  C.  Nissen 

W.  A.  Oliver 

J.  F.  Pearce 

J.  E.  Perry 

R.  B.  Rice 

R.  VV.  Ripley 

V.  J.  Roggeveen 

J.  A.  Rust 

P.  S.  Settle,  Jr. 

H.  O.  Sharp 

E.  R.  Shultz 

R.  J.  Stone 

Egons  Tons 

T.  D.  Wofeord,  Jr. 

Committee 


(  E  i   Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names   are    set    in    bold-face   type  constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR.    Com- 
mittee 24. 

To   the   American    Railway    Engineering    Association 

Your   committee   reports  on   the   following  subjects: 

1.  Stimulate  greater  appreciation  on  the  part  of  railway  managements  of 
(a)   the  importance  of  bringing  into  the  service  selected  graduates  of  colleges 

universities,  and 
(Id   the  necessity  for  providing  adequate  means  for  recruiting  such  graduates 

and  of  retaining  them  in  the  service. 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  398 

2.  Stimulate  among  college  and  university  students  a  greater  interest  in  the 
science  of  transportation  and  its  importance  in  the  national  economic  struc- 
ture by 

(a)  cooperating   with   and   contributing   to   the  activities  of  student   organi- 
zations in  colleges  and  universities,  and 

(b)  presenting  to  students  and   their  counselors  a  positive  approach   to   the 
attractive  and   interesting   features   of   the   railroad   industry   and   the   ad 
vantages  of  choosing  railroading  as  a  career. 

Progress   report,  submitted   as  information    page  ■;''1' 

3.  The  cooperative  system  of  education,  including  summer  employment  in  rail- 
way servit  e 

Progress  report,  submitted   as   information    page  401 


397 


398 Cooperative    Relations   with    Universities 

4.  Revise  the  recruiting  brochure  "A  Challenge  and  Opportunity  for  Engineer- 
ing Graduates — The  Railroad  Field." 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  402 

5.  Ways  in   which  railroads  can  cooperate  with   universities  in  developing  re- 
search, including  the   revising  of  "Suggested  Topics   for  Theses  on  Railroad 

Subjects." 
Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  403 

6.  Procedures     for     orienting     and     developing     newly     employed     engineering 
personnel. 

The  procedures  for  orienting  and  developing  newly  employed  engineering 
personnel  will  require  considerable  study  and  will  involve  data  concerning 
procedures  now  being  employed  on  a  variety  of  railroads  within  the  indus- 
try. The  ultimate  objective,  after  compilation  of  data,  will  be  to  suggest 
training  procedures  consistent  with  modern  requirements  of  railroads  and 
the  current  trends  in  engineering  education. 

7.  Stimulate  an   interest   by   college   and   university   staff   members   in   current 
railroad  problems  and  practices,  including  AREA  membership. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  404 

The  Committee  on  Cooperative  Relations  with  Universities, 

W.  W.  Hay,  Chairman. 


AREA  Bulletin  576,  January  1963. 

Report  on  Assignment   1 

Stimulate   Greater   Appreciation  on  the   Part   of 
Railway  Managements  of 

(a)  the  importance  of  bringing  into  the  service  selected  graduates  of 
colleges  and  universities,  and 

(b)  the    necessity    of   providing   adequate   means    for    recruiting   such 
graduates  and  retaining  them  in  service 

J.  F.  Davison  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  H.  Beeder,  L.  B.  Clark,  R.  J.  Fisher,  W.  W. 
Hay,  L.  J.  Hoffman,  R.  P.  Howell,  H.  E.  Hurst,  Claude  Johnston,  Frank  Kerekes, 
H.  R.  Moore,  J.  F.  Pearce,  G.  B.  Pruden,  R.  W.  Ripley. 

The  current  activity  of  your  committee  on  this  assignment  is  directed  toward  deter- 
mining what  common  patterns  of  opinion  there  may  be  among  graduate  engineers  em- 
ployed in  the  railway  industry.  A  proposed  questionnaire  was  developed  for  circulation 
among  graduate  engineers  in  all  departments  of  the  railroads  requesting  their  opinions 
on  such  matters  as  employment  conditions,  effectiveness  of  their  university  curricula, 
post-graduate   training  requirements  and   other  similar  information. 

Due  to  the  magnitude  of  the  undertaking,  the  nature  of  the  information  requested 
and  the  cooperative  effort  required  on  the  part  of  the  railroads  if  the  proposed  ques- 
tionnaire is  to  reach  all  pertinent  personnel,  the  Board  of  Direction  requested  an  oppor- 
tunity to  review  this  project  in  relation  to  the  benefits  which  would  result.  Consequently, 
a  special  submission  was  made  to  the  Board  Committee  on  Assignments,  following  which 
the  Board  of  Direction  gave  its  consent  at  its  November  1962  meeting,  subject  to  a  few 
minor  changes. 


Cooperative    Relations   with   Universities 399 

Now  that  approval  in  principle  has  been  received,  this  assignment  will  be  carried  to 
conclusion.  Upon  return  of  completed  questionnaires,  the  information  will  be  transferred 
to  punch  cards  so  it  can  be  summarized  for  use  in  many  different  assignments  of  Com- 
mittee 24. 

This  is  a  progress  report,  submitted  as  information 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Stimulate    Among    College    and    University    Students 

a  Greater  Interest  in  the  Science  of  Transportation 

and  Its  Importance  in  the  National  Economic 

Structure  by: 

(a)  cooperating  with  and  contributing  to  the  activities  of  student 
organizations   in   colleges   and   universities,   and 

(b)  presenting  to  students  and  their  counselors  a  positive  approach 
to  the  attractive  and  interesting  feature  of  the  railroad  industry 
and    the   advantages   of   choosing  railroading  as  a  career 

B.  B.  Lewis  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  L.  Alvord,  B.  G.  Anderson,  J.  B.  Clark,  T.  P. 
Cunningham,  J.  F.  Davison,  W.  W.  Hay,  R.  P.  Howell,  S.  R.  Hursh,  A.  V.  Johnston, 
G.  VV.  Miller,   H.  R.  Moore,  Jerry  Neben,  J.  F.  Pearce,  J.  A.  Rust,  Egons  Tons. 

The  activities  of  your  committee  on  this  assignment  are  indicated  by  the  following 
excerpts  from  letters  of  committee  members. 

D.  B.  Jenks,  president,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  addressed  the  senior  civil  engi- 
neering students  at  the  University  of  Illinois  on  the  subject,  "Careers  in  the  Railroad 
Industry." 

R.  H.  Beeder,  chief  engineer  system,  Atchison,  Topeka  and  Santa  Fe  Railway,  ad- 
dressed the  senior  civil  engineering  students  at  the  University  of  Illinois  on  the  Skull 
Valley  line  change  in  Arizona.  He  illustrated  his  presentation  with  a  color  film  of  the 
project.  His  subject  was  "Railroad  Engineering  Progress." 

H.  E.  Kirby,  retired  cost  engineer  system,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  attended 
the  spring  ASCE  meeting  of  the  West  Virginia  Section  in  Huntington,  and  while  there, 
spoke  upon  the  railroad  situation  and  gave  a  description  of  a  few  of  the  atttractive  and 
interesting  features  of  the  railroad  field. 

W.  W.  Hay,  professor  of  railway  civil  engineering,  University  of  Illinois,  reports 
that: 

(a)  Inspection  trips  were  made  during  the  summer  by  graduate  students  in  railway 
civil  engineering  over  the  Santa  Fe,  Southern  Pacific,  and  Pennsylvania  railroads. 

(b)  The  AAR's  film,  "Science  Rides  the  High  Iron,"  was  shown  to  the  senior  civil 
engineering  students. 

(c)  The  Illinois  Central  Railroad  cooperated  with  the  Civil  Engineering  Depart- 
ment and  the  College  of  Engineering  in  making  exhibits  available  for  the  Engineering 
Open  House  held  on  the  Campus  each  March.  The  road's  on-track  exhibit  included  a 
diesel-electric  locomotive,  airbrake  instruction  car,  coach,  caboose,  ballast  regulator  and 
rail  detector  car.  It  also  provided  a  scale  model  of  a  highway  flashing  signal  with  an 
automatic  gate  arm. 


400 Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 

(d)  The  Union  Switch  and  Signal  Division  of  Westinghouse  Airbrake  Company 
furnished  a  CTC  panel  board  and  a  model  of  its  Train  Identification  and  Automatic 
Switching  system. 

(e)  Various  pictures,  standards  and  other  materials  for  use  in  railway  engineering 
classroom  presentation  were  received  from  the  Pittsburgh  &  Lake  Erie,  Canadian  Na- 
tional, Missouri  Pacific,  Santa  Fe,  Quebec  North  Shore  &  Labrador,  and  Chesapeake  & 
Ohio  railways. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  chief  engineer  system,  Santa  Fe,  W.  H.  Huffman,  assistant  chief 
engineer — construction,  North  Western,  and  A.  V.  Johnston,  chief  engineer,  Canadian 
National,  members  of  this  committee,  gave  presentations  at  the  Transportation  Engineer- 
ing Conference  of  ASCE  at  the  Statler-Hilton  Hotel,  Detroit,  Mich.,  on  October  9.  Mr. 
Beeder  presented  a  film  on  the  Santa  Fe's  44-mile  line  change  in  Northern  Arizona;  Mr. 
Huffman  showed  a  large  number  of  color  slides  depicting  modern  mechanized  mainte- 
nance of  way  operations;  and  Mr.  Johnston  gave  an  illustrated  talk  on  automated  freight 
classification  yards. 

B.  B.  Lewis,  professor  of  railway  engineering,  Purdue  University,  reports  that  92 
seniors,  civil  engineering  students,  inspected  the  Illinois   Central's  Markham  Yards. 

R.  W.  Middleton,  assistant  engineer,  Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul,  &  Pacific  Rail- 
road, addressed  the  Southwest  Section  of  the  Wisconsin  Society  of  Professional  Engi- 
neers at  Madison,  Wis.,  on  the  subject  "New  Railroad  Transportation  Techniques." 

J.  F.  Pearce,  office  engineer,  Western  Pacific  Railroad,  corresponded  and  discussed 
with  junior  engineers,  both  in  and  out  of  his  organization,  that  at  all  cost  they  should 
continue  their  schooling  so  as  to  secure  their  degree  in  engineering  which  would  be  of 
immense  value  to  them  in  their  future  in  the  transportation  industry. 

P.  S.  Settle,  president,  Railway  Maintenance  Corporation,  recommended  from  time 
to  time  certain  boys  to  railroads  for  their  consideration  as  prospective  employees. 

Egons  Tons,  assistant  professor  of  transportation  engineering,  Massachusetts  Insti- 
tute of  Technology,  reports: 

(a)  that  he  had  a  conference  with  the  members  of  their  Railroaders'  Group  and 
that  they  have  decided  to  have  regular  meetings  with  speakers  or  movies  once  every 
two  weeks.  The  Railroaders'  Group  is  also  considering  establishment  of  regular  weekly 
seminars. 

(b)  that  he  has  one  student  working  on  a  thesis  on  high-speed  track  design,  and 
that  Professor  Bone  has  two  students  who  propose  to  work  on  railroad  theses. 

(c)  that  announcements  have  been  made  in  classes  about  student  affiliates  of  AREA. 


It  is  our  pleasure  to  report  there  are  now  35  student  affiliates  of  AREA  on  20  col- 
lege campuses  who  have  paid  the  student  affiliate  fee  for  the  current  year — October  1, 
1962,  through  September  30,  1963.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  since  the  status  of  stu- 
dent affiliates  was  established  in  the  fall  of  1960,  we  have  had,  including  present  mem- 
bers, a  total  of  99  student  affiliates  to  date. 

Your  committee  wishes  to  report  progress  on  the  possibility  of  establishing  a  list  of 
speakers  on  railway  engineering  for  distribution  to  colleges  and  universities.  After  con- 
sideration, it  was  also  decided  that  the  executive  secretary,  AREA,  would  write  to  the 
chief  engineers  and  maintenance  officers  of  selected  railways  requesting  permission  to  re- 
fer to  them  requests  from  colleges  for  speakers  on  essentially  railway  engineering,  main- 
tenance, and  related  subjects. 


Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 401 

This  procedure  was  approved  by  the  Board  of  Direction  and  a  letter  was  prepared 
by  the  secretary  and  sent  to  49  selected  railways.  Favorable  replies  were  received  from 
40  railways,  following  which  the  secretary  addressed  a  letter  to  50  colleges  offering  the 
service  of  railway  speakers.  As  this  report  goes  to  press,  addresses  have  been  presented 
before,  or  lined  up  for.  student  groups  at  the  following  schools:  University  of  Arizona, 
Catholic  University,  Duke  University,  University  of  Kentucky,  University  of  Maryland, 
University  of  Michigan,  University  of  New  Mexico,  University  of  Tennessee,  and  Vir- 
ginia Polytechnic  Institute. 

The  committee  recognizes  that  considerable  additional  work  in  volume  of  corre- 
spondence and  difficulty  in  lining  up  speakers  for  specific  dates  and  subjects  is  involved. 
However,  the  project  is  considered  highly  worthwhile  and  will,  it  is  hoped,  enhance  the 
professional  stature  of  railroad  engineering  among  students  and  faculty. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

The    Cooperative   System   of   Education,    Including 
Summer    Employment    in    Railway    Service 

W.  A.  Oliver  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  L.  Alvord,  H.  C.  Archdeacon,  George  Bavlor, 
J.  B.  Clark,  R.  P.  Davis,  J.  F.  Davison,  E.  I.  Fiesenheiser,  VV.  W.  Hav,  S.  R.  Hursh, 
H.  E.  Kirbv.  R.  W.  Middleton,  G.  W.  Miller,  R.  C.  Nissen,  R.  B.  Rice,  P.  S.  Settle, 
R.  J.  Stone. 

In  fulfilling  its  assignment  in  1962,  the  committee  followed  essentially  the  same  pro- 
cedures used  in  the  preceding  years.  A  questionnaire  was  sent  to  the  chief  engineering 
and  maintenance  officers  of  the  railroads  in  late  February  requesting  information  con- 
cerning their  summer  employment  needs.  The  replies  to  the  questionnaire  were  returned 
to  the  subcommittee  chairman,  the  information  was  tabulated,  reproduced  in  the  AREA 
secretary's  office,  and  sent  to  some  125  engineering  colleges  in  late  March. 

A  similar  program  is  planned  for  1963.  Because  of  the  heavy  correspondence  in- 
volved in  answering  the  many  applications  for  summer  employment,  the  committee  is 
continuing  to  attempt  to  spread  this  load  by  having  applications  sent  to  several  officials 
along  the  railroad  rather  than  to  any  one  individual.  It  is  also  endeavoring  again  to  im- 
prove the  questionnaire. 

A  brief  statement  of  the  response  obtained  from  the  railroads  for  the  summer  of 
1962  shows  the  following: 

Offering  employment  in  1961  and  1962     6 

Offering  employment  in  1962  but  not  1961    4 

Offering  employment  in  1961  but  not  1062    9 

No  employment  in  1961  or  1962    31 

Total  replies    50 

It  should  be  noted  that  a  total  of  10  railroads  offered  summer  employment  in  1962 
through  the  efforts  of  this  subcommittee.  Furthermore,  it  should  be  reiterated  that  the 
number  of  college  students  given  summer  employment  by  the  railroads  as  a  result  of  this 
Committee  24  project  constitutes  only  a  small  part  of  the  total  number  employed.  Main 
railroads  have  for  a  long  period  of  time  recruited  summer  employees  directly  from  the 
campuses  along  their  properties. 

Committee  24  has  indicated  by  a  general  expression  of  opinion  among  the  member- 
ship that  it  considers  this  project  to  be  worth  while.  The  committee  has  become  aware  of 


402 Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 

the  fact  that  a  number  of  young  engineers  have  learned  from  experience  obtained 
through  summer  employment  with  a  railroad  that  there  are  satisfactory  careers  to  be 
had  in  the  railroad  field.  Consequently,  as  stated  above,  the  project  is  going  forward 
again  this  year,  and  the  committee  requests  your  continued  cooperation. 

Your  attention  is  called  to  an  article  in  the  October  1962  issue  of  the  Illinois  Central 
Magazine  entitled,  "Blueprinting  a  Future."  The  article  describes  the  experience  with  the 
IC  of  eight  engineering  students  during  the  summer  of  1962.  These  young  men  came  from 
engineering  colleges  scattered  throughout  the  mid-western  and  eastern  United  States.  They 
all  enjoyed  the  opportunity  to  experience  some  of  the  problems  that  must  be  solved  by 
the  practicing  engineer,  particularly  the  railroad  engineer.  This  article  emphasizes  the 
value  of  and  justification  for  the  continuation  of  this  project  by  Committee  24. 


Report  on  Assignment  4 

Revise   the   Recruiting   Brochure   "A   Challenge  and 

Opportunity    for    Engineering    Graduates — the 

Railroad  Field" 

Jerry  Neben  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  B.  Babcock,  George  Baylor,  J.  F.  Davison, 
W.  W.  Hay,  A.  V.  Johnston,  Claude  Johnston,  H.  E.  Kirby,  B.  B.  Lewis,  J.  E. 
Perry,  R.  B.  Rice,  H.  0.  Sharp,  E.  R.  Shultz,  T.  D.  Wofford,  Jr.,  P.  S.  Settle,  Jr. 

Your  committee  submits  this  progress  report  as  information. 

The  current  second  edition  of  the  brochure,  produced  in  1959,  was  cited  by  the 
Eastern  Colleges  Personnel  Officers  as  one  of  11  for  outstanding  material.  "American 
Railway  Engineering  Association — 'The  Railroad  Field'  was  felt  to  be  a  highly  effective, 
interesting,  modern  portrait  of  careers  for  college  graduates  in  railroading.  Contrary  to 
the  concept  held  by  many  in  the  East  that  the  railroad  is  a  decadent  industry  whose 
days  are  numbered,  this  brochure  depicts  railroading  as  a  dynamic,  expanding,  modern- 
growth  industry."  The  text  of  the  brochure  may  be  found  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  60, 
1959,  pages  621  to  630,  incl. 

In  developing  the  basic  premise  for  the  revision,  it  was  decided  that  the  original 
format  and  art  work  remain  the  same  and  the  only  changes,  as  required,  would  be  in 
the  text  and  photographs;  the  purpose  being  to  keep  the  high  quality  of  the  brochure 
intact,  the  contents  up  to  date  and  the  publication  costs  down.  On  this  basis  the  Board 
of  Direction  has  authorized  the  publication  in  1963  of  20,000  copies  of  the  third  edition 
for  distribution  by  the  AREA,  plus  any  additional  copies  the  AAR  might  order  for 
distribution. 

The  majority  of  the  recommended  changes  are  in  the  photographs.  Pictures  of  more 
modern  equipment  and  facilities  are  being  contemplated.  Text  changes  will  be  few  and 
of  an  editorial  nature.  A  new  section  will  be  added  to  cover  industrial  engineering. 

The  work  of  Subcommittee  4  will  be  completed  by  the  printing  of  the  1963  edition 
of  the  brochure. 


Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 403 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Ways    In    Which    Railroads    Can    Cooperate   With 

Universities   in   Developing    Research,    Including 

The   Revision   of   "Suggested    Topics   For 

Theses   on   "Railroad   Subjects" 

H.  E.  Hurst  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  S.  Autrey,  L.  B.  Clark,  J.  F.  Davison,  E.  I. 
Fiesenheiser,  R.  J.  Fisher,  VV.  W.  Hay,  C.  L.  Heimbach,  Frank  Kerekes,  W.  S.  Kerr, 
H.  E.  Kirby,  R.  VV.  Loomis,  E.  C.  Lawson,  V.  J.  Roggeveen,  H.  O.  Sharp,  Egons 
Tons. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  as  information. 

It  was  felt  by  your  committee  that  one  of  the  most  immediate  and  effective  means 
of  implementing  student  interest  that  might  be  developed  by  the  "Suggested  Topics  for 
Theses  on  Railroad  Subjects",  could  best  be  served  by  providing  a  source  of  funds  not 
usually  available  from  the  student's  or  school's  own  resources,  or  from  research  funds 
earmarked  for  work  in  other  areas  of  engineering. 

With  the  assistance  of  the  Association's  executive  secretary  and  the  director  of  en- 
gineering research  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  a  request  for  funds  has 
been  included  in  the  Engineering  Research  Division  Budget  for  1963  for  consideration 
by  the  AREA  Research  Committee  and  Board  of  Direction. 

Your  committee  believes  that  a  yearly  appropriation  in  the  amount  of  $1000  to 
$5000  will  provide,  on  a  continuing  basis,  both  financial  support  and  evidence  of  the 
railroads'  interest  in  students. 

Obviously,  the  funds  are  not  being  requested  to  cover  major  research  sponsorship; 
rather,  the  funds  are  intended  to  provide  a  means  by  which  the  railroad  industry  can 
provide  assistance  to  students  in  their  study  and  research  activities  in  connection  with 
current  problems  and,  thereby,  promote  the  interest  of  the  students  and  faculty  members 
in  these  problems  and  the  railroad  story. 

It  is  also  expected  that  funds,  readily  available,  will  influence  students'  interest 
towards  choosing  railroading  as  a  career,  in  addition  to  the  development  of  reports  and 
theses  containing  material  of  value  to  the  railroads. 

Your  committee  believes  that  a  notice  concerning  the  availability  of  a  fund,  when  it 
has  been  provided,  may  best  be  brought  to  the  attention  of  the  schools  and  students  by 
including  such  a  notice  with  the  distribution  of  the  "Suggested  Topics  for  Theses  on 
Railroad  Subjects." 

The  notice  concerning  the  availability  of  the  fund  will  also  contain  pertinent  infor- 
mation concerning  the  rules  under  which  the  grants  will  be  handled  and  administrative 
procedure. 

Experience  may  require  modification  of  the  rules  and  procedure  for  administering 
the  fund;  however,  the  following  requirements  and  arrangements  appear  appropriate  to 
your  committee  at  this  time: 

1.  Students  desiring  to  avail  themselves  of  assistance  from  the  fund  will  address 
a  letter  of  request  for  a  grant  to  the  director  of  engineering  research  of  the 
Association  of  American  Railroads,  3140  South  Federal  Street,  Chicago  16. 
Such  letters  will  have  an  appropriate  endorsement  by  one  of  the  student's 
professors. 

2.  In  their  letters,  students  will  acree  to  provide  an  itemized  accounting  of  the 
expenditures  involved  and  a  copy  or  summarized  abstract  of  the  report  on  the 


404 Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 

completed  study  or  research  project.  In  addition,  the  letter  of  request  will  in- 
clude an  agreement  to  comply  with  the  rules  and  administrative  procedures  set 
forth  in  the  notice  concerning  the  availability  of  the  fund. 
.*.  The  grants  and  payments  will  be  made  directly  to  the  students,  thereby  elimi- 
nating any  necessity  for  university  overhead  research  charges. 

4.  Any  one  grant   will  be  limited  to  a  maximum  of  $100. 

5.  Approved  letters  of  request  will  normally  be  vouchered  for  payment  within 
two  weeks  when  funds  are  available. 

6.  Any  project  related   to  a  "Railroad  Subject"  will  be  considered  for  approval. 

7.  Funds  will  not  be  used  to  cover  the  normal  expenses  associated  with  the 
preparation  of  theses,  such  as  report  typing. 

8.  The  director  of  engineering  research,  in  handling  requests  for  grants,  will  be 
provided  with  an  advisory  committee  consisting  of  one  member  each  from  the 
professorial  and  railroad  membership  of  the  AREA,  to  be  selected  by  Com- 
mittee 24. 

9.  The  director  of  engineering  research  will  keep  Committee  24  advised  of  grants 
made  and  such  other  information  concerning  them  and  their  administration  as 
may  be  deemed  appropriate. 

In  addition  to  rendering  whatever  assistance  may  be  required  towards  establishing 
an  active  Student  Aid  Research  Fund,  your  committee  will  continue  to  consider,  evalu- 
ate, and  develop  ways  in  which  railroads  can  cooperate  in  the  promotion  and  develop- 
ment of  interest  in  study  and  research  oriented  towards  railroad  subjects. 


Report  on  Assignment  7 

Stimulate   An   Interest    By   College    and    University 

Staff  Members  In  Current  Railroad  Problems  And 

Practices,  Including  AREA  Membership 

C.  L.  Heimbach  (chairman,  subcommittee),  B.  G.  Anderson,  J.  B.  Babcock,  R.  P.  Davis, 
J.  F.  Davison,  W.  S.  Gates,  Jr.,  W.  W.  Hay,  W.  H.  Huffman,  J.  E.  Perry,  R.  W. 
Ripley,  V.  J.  Roggeveen,  J.  A.  Rust,  R.  J.  Stone,  T.  D.  Wofford,  Jr. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  as  information. 

The  assignment  is  interpreted  as  an  investigation  into  ways  and  means  of  engaging 
the  attention  of  college  and  university  teachers,  and  through  such  attention,  to  cause 
action  by  these  teachers  so  as  to  produce  an  overall  beneficial  result  to  the  railroads. 
Implementation  of  this  objective  can  be  accomplished  in  a  variety  of  ways.  Some  are 
positive  and  direct;  others  are  more  subtle.  But  all  will  accomplish  the  desired  end.  Your 
committee  felt  that  the  following  suggestions  are  worthy  of  further  consideration  and 
investigation. 

1.  Faculty  Summer  Employment  Programs — Many  faculty  members  have  no  con- 
cept of  the  magnitude  and  scope  of  the  engineering,  business,  and  management  prob- 
lems facing  the  railroad  supervisor.  One  of  the  best  ways  in  which  to  acquaint  teaching 
personnel  with  these  problems  is  to  give  them  a  challenging  summer  assignment  in  rail- 
road industry.  To  succeed,  such  employment  should  be  approached  by  both  parties  on 
the  basis  that  the  faculty  member  would  provide  a  full  measure  of  contribution  for  the 
remuneration  involved,  and  the  railroad  would  provide  an  opportunity  where  the  creative 


Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 405 

talents  of  the  faculty  member  could  be  constructively  employed — just  as  is  now  the  case 
in  consulting  work  or  in  many  other  industries  with  similar  programs. 

2.  Sponsorship  of  a  Technical  Paper  and  a  Prize  for  a  Topic  in  the  Field  of  Rail- 
road Engineering — The  cost  could  be  modest  and  the  results  potentially  worthwhile  in 
stimulating  both  faculty  and  student  interest.  It  might  be  made  especially  attractive  by 
arranging  to  have  the  first-prize  winner  present  the  paper  at  an  AREA  Annual  Meeting, 
expenses  paid,  and  receiving  his  prize  money  there.  This  would  not  only  give  the  faculty 
and  students  exposure  to  railroad  engineering  people,  but  would  also  give  the  railroad 
engineering  people  attending  the  meeting  an  opportunity  to  hear  about  current  campus 
work. 

3.  Sponsorship  of  Research  on  College  Campuses — This  can  be  accomplished  by 
means  of  a  direct  grant-in-aid  to  a  specific  department  within  the  University,  or  to  a 
particular  faculty  member.  When  an  individual  railroad  employs  this  technique,  the 
monies  could  be  allocated  to  those  colleges  located  on  or  near  the  railroad's  physical 
property.  Topics  for  consideration  should  permit  participation  by  contestants  from  all 
branches  in   colleges  of  engineering  and   business  administration. 

4.  Sponsorship  of  Field  Trips  and  Tours  for  Faculty  Members  to  Railroad 
Installations. 

5.  Sponsorship  of  Seminars  at  Various  Universities  to  Discuss  Specific  Problems 
Facing  Railroad  Management — Invite  faculty  participants  to  speak  on  these  problems. 

These  and  other  means  as  may  be  later  suggested  will  be  examined  in  depth  in  later 
reports. 


Report   of    Committee    18 — Electricity 


P.  B.  Burley,  Chairman 
J.  J.  Schmidt, 
Vice  Chairman 

W.   O.   MULLER 

T.  F.  Jelnick 


E.  D.  Feak 

E.  B.  Hacer 

F.  T.  Snider 
B.  D.  Allison 
L.  B.  Curtis 

E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr. 
B.  Anderhous 
R.  J.  Berti 
L.  W.  Birch 
\V.  F.  Bovvers 

E.  H.  Brown 
H.  F.  Brown 
K.  A.  Browne 
Robert  Burn 

G.  N.  Burwei.l 

F.  J.  Corporon 
A.  B.  Costic 
H.  C.  Cross 

J.  H.  Deckert 
H.  H.  Duehne 
H.  W.  Dunn 
D.  F.  Dunsmore 


\V.  B.  Grimes 

B.  C.  Hallow  el i 
G.  B.  Hauser 
R.  E.  Hauss 
R.  B.  Hendrickson 
R.  H.  Holmes 
R.  L.  Kimball 
P.  O.  Lautz 

D.  R.  MacLeod 
F.  B.  McConnel 

B.  F.  McGowan 
A.  B.  Miller 

J.  J.  Miller 
H.  R.  Morgan 
R.  F.  Pownall 

E.  B.  Shew 

R.  H.  Stocksdale 

C.  A.  Stokes 

C.  M.  Summers 
E.  L.  Tennyson 
E.  H.  Werner 
M.  I.  Yasuna 

Committee 


Those    whose    names    are   set    in    bold-face   type   constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR,    Com- 
mittee 18. 

To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 

Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual  (Electrical  Manual,  AAR),  collaborating  with  Mechani- 
ical  Division,  AAR. 

Recommendations  with  respect  to  the  Electrical  Manual,  submitted  for 
adoption    page  408 

4.  and  8.  Power   supply,   motors   and   controls,    collaborating   with    Mechani- 
cal Division,  AAR. 

The  committee  has  been  assembling  information  on  the  newer  power  sources 
such  as  the  fuel  cells,  magneto-hydrodynamic  (MHD)  generation,  thermo- 
electric air  conditioning  and  results  of  their  applications.  Also,  the  commit- 
tee has  been  gathering  information  on  solid-state  rectifiers,  specifically  the 
silicon  cell,  which  will  be  employed  on  some  of  the  newer  Pennsylvania 
Railroad  electric  locomotives.  Information  should  be  available  for  a  report 
in  the  near  future. 

5.  Illumination,    collaborating    with    Committee    6    and    Mechanical    Division. 
AAR. 

Studies  are  in  progress  on  lighting  for  railroad  yards,  TOFC,  tri-level  load- 
ing, container  loading,  and  closed  circuit  television  installations.  A  report 
should  be  ready  for  publication  next  yen 

9.  Electrolysis  and  electrolytic  corrosion. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  409 


407 


Hull.  576 


408 Electricity 

10.  Wire,  cable  and  insulating  materials,  collaborating  with  Mechanical  Divi- 
sion, AAR. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  409 

11.  Electric  heating,  collaborating  with  Committee  6  and  Mechanical  Division, 
AAR. 

Studies  are  in  progress  on  the  application  of  electric  heaters  for  space  heat- 
ing, snow  melting,  car  thawing  (coal  and  ore,  etc.),  water  heating  and  pre- 
heating of  oil  and  paint. 

13.  Railway   electrification,    collaborating   with   Mechanical   Division,   AAR. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  414 

IS.  Relations  with   public   utilities,   collaborating  with    Committee   20. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  418 

The  Committee  on  Electricity, 

P.  B.  Burley,  Chairman. 


Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision   of   Manual    (Electrical   Manual,   AAR) 

Collborating   with   Mechanical   Division,  AAR 

W.   O.   Muller   (chairman,  subcommittee),   J.  J.   Schmidt,   B.  D.  Allison,   L.   B.    Curtis, 
H.  W.  Dunn. 

At  the  1962  annual  meeting  of  the  Association,  upon  the  recommendation  of  Com- 
mittee 18,  Section  14  of  the  AAR  Electrical  Manual,  with  the  title  "Safety",  was  re- 
moved from  the  Manual,  with  the  understanding  that  the  material  in  this  Section  would 
be  put  back  in  the  manual  at  a  later  date  under  a  more  appropriate  heading  or  headings. 
This  Section  contained  the  following  two  documents: 

Part  1 — Recommended  Practice  for  the  Prevention  of  Electric  Sparks  That  May 
Cause  Fire  During  the  Transfer  of  Flammable  Liquids  or  Flammable 
Compressed  Gases  To  or  From  Rail  Equipment  and  Storage  Tanks 
page  1-1-1 

Part  2 — Recommended  Practice  for  the  Prevention  of  Electric  Sparks  That 
May  Cause  Fires  in  Tanks  or  Tank  Cars  Containing  Flammable 
Liquids  or  Flammable  Compressed  Gases,  Due  to  Proximity  of  Wire 
Lines   page  1-2-1 

Your  committee  now  recommends  that  Section  14,  in  full,  be  reinstated  in  the  Elec- 
trical Manual,  without  revision,  except  to  change  its  title  from  "Safety"  to  "Grounding". 


Electricity 409 

Report  on  Assignment  9 

Electrolysis   and    Electrolytic    Corrosion 

E.  B.   Hager   (chairman,  subcommittee),   B.  D.  Allison,  A.  B.   Costic,  B.  C.  Hallow  til, 

R.  H.  Holmes,  J.  J.  Schmidt,  E.  H.  Werner. 

Possible    Effects   of    Cathodic   Protection    Installations 

for   Underground    Structures    on   Adjacent 

Railroad   Signal   Systems 

The  following  report  is  submitted  as  information. 

Your  committee  circularized  its  members,  requesting  them  to  furnish  any  informa- 
tion available  on  their  respective  railroads  having  to  do  with  interference  with  signal 
circuits  caused  by  cathodic  protection  systems.  Information  was  received  from  11  rail- 
roads, three  of  which  had  experienced  cathodic  protection  interference.  Of  the  eight 
which  had  not  experienced  such  interference,  one  railroad  uses  coded  track  circuits. 
Three  others  are  acutely  aware  of  the  possibility  of  interference  and,  therefore,  work  in 
close  coordination  with  the  installing  companies  to  avoid  it.  The  remaining  four  had 
presumably  not  been  exposed  to  this  interference. 

Of  the  three  railroads  reporting  interference  experience,  one  cited  two  cases  of  false 
signal  indication  caused  by  cathodic  protection  interference,  one  resulting  in  the  derail- 
ment of  a  caboose.  Another  railroad  reported  having  experienced  interference  from  time 
to  time.  Solution  of  attendant  problems  ranged  from  changing  track  circuit  relays  to  re- 
ducing output  of  the  cathodic  protection  rectifier.  The  third  railroad  had  signal  difficul- 
ties when  an  adjacent  pipeline  cathodic  protection  rectifier  was  increased  from  10  to 
18  amp.  This  case  was  solved  by  the  installation  of  a  pulsing  track  circuit. 

Attention  is  invited  to  the  AAR  Signal  Section  Proceedings  XL,  153A  (1942)  (Item 
19,  Selected  Bibliography  on  Cathodic  Protection,  page  4-6  of  Section  9,  AAR  Manual). 

The  cases  of  cathodic  protection  interference  cited  emphasize  the  need  for  constant 
alertness  to  avoid  trouble  from  this  source. 

Report  on  Assignment   10 

Wire,    Cable   and    Insulating    Materials 

Collaborating   with    Mechanical    Division,    AAR 

F.  T.  Snider   (chairman,  subcommittee),   B.  Anderhous,  R.  Burn,  W.  B.   Grimes. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  on  information  pertaining  to  wire, 
cable  and  insulating  materials: 

A.  WIRE,  CABLE  AND   INSULATING  MATERIAL  STANDARDS 
OF  INTEREST  TO  THE  AREA 

Revisions  have  been  made  to  numerous  standards  during  the  past  year.  There  has 
been  no  complete  revision  of  any  major  standard  and  the  detailed  changes  are  too 
voluminous  to  list  in  this  report.  All  changes  are  available  from  the  various  Standards 
organizations. 

The  National  Fire  Protection  Association  published  in  September  the  1962  Edition 
of  the  National  Electrical  Code  and  copies  are  available  from  them.  There  have  been  a 


410 Electricity 

number  of  changes  from  the  1959  Code.  The  following  are  of  particular  interest  to  the 
railroads  and  are  identified  by  article  and  section  reference  from  the  Code. 

Art.  210 — Branch  Circuits 

Sec.  210-5 — Color  Code 

The  use  of  green-colored  insulated  conductors  has  been  clarified.  In  branch  circuits 
the  color  green  is  reserved  for  use  in  the  identification  of  grounding  conductors  only 
and  it  may  not  be  used  for  any  other  purpose.  This  requirement  is  not  intended  to  pro- 
hibit the  use  of  green  colored  internal  wiring  of  equipment  except  where  such  internal 
wiring  serves  also  as  lead  wires  to  which  branch  circuit  conductors  are  directly  attached. 

Sec.  210-21  (b) 

The  1962  National  Electrical  Code  will  require  all  receptacles  installed  on  15-  and 
20-amp  branch  circuits  to  be  of  the  grounding  type.  While  it  is  not  mandatory  that 
equipment  served  by  these  grounding-type  outlets  must  be  equipped  with  a  third  ground- 
ing-wire and  a  grounding  blade  in  the  plug,  it  nevertheless  indicates  the  trend  is  toward 
greater  use  of  grounding  in  portable  equipment.  This  will  have  a  bearing  on  the  produc- 
tion of  portable  cords  and  will  automatically  eliminate  practically  all  use  of  two- 
conductor-type  UF  cable.  This  rule  is  not  retroactive  but  is  applicable  to  rewiring  of 
existing  occupancies. 

Art.  230 — Services 

Sec.  230-23 

The  minimum  size  of  service  drop  conductor  has  been  increased  to  No.  8  copper 
or  equivalent  from  the  previous  No.  10  copper  or  equivalent  to  be  consistent  with  serv- 
ice entrance  cable. 

Art.  250 — Grounding 

Sec.   250-45   (c) 

Tools  and  appliances  protected  by  an  approved  system  of  double  insulation  or  its 
equivalent  need  not  be  grounded.  This  eliminates  the  necessity  of  a  third  conductor 
for  grounding.  This  will  reduce  the  number  of  tools  and  appliances  requiring  three- 
conductor  cords. 

Sec.    250-57    (b)    (3) 

This  permits  grounding  of  fixed  equipment  by  the  use  of  the  grounding  conductor 
in  the  supply  cord  when  cords  are  used  to  provide  more  mobility  or  to  prevent  trans- 
mission of  vibration. 

Sec.  250-91— Table  250-94b  and  250-95 

Covers  aluminum  grounding  conductor  sizes. 

Art.    300 — Wiring   Methods — General   Requirements 

Sec.  300-3   (c) 

Permits  secondary  wiring  of  electric  discharge  lamps  1000  v  or  less  to  occupy  the 
same  fixture  enclosure  as  the  branch  circuit  conductors. 

Sec.   300-3   (d) 

Permits  primary  leads  of  electric  discharge  lamp  ballasts  to  occupy  same  fixture 
enclosure  as  the  branch   circuit  conductors. 

Sec.   300-19   (a) 

The  lighter  weight  of  aluminum  as  a  conductor  is  recognized  in  the  1962  Code  by 
permitting  aluminum  to  have  greater  spacing  between  the  supports  of  vertically 
mounted  conductors  than  is  permitted  for  copper. 


E  lee  t  r  i  c i  t  y  411 

Sec.  300-20 

Revision  covers  induced  currents  in  metal  enclosures;  now  makes  reference  to 
aluminum. 

Art.   310 — Conductors   for   General  Wiring 

Table  310-2  (a) 

Type  SB  Slow  Burning  Wire  for  90  C.  is  deleted.  This  required  the  eight  columns 
in  Table  300-13  and  300-15  to  have  the  heading  changed  to  "Bare  and  Covered  Con- 
ductors." 

Table  310-2   (b) 

This  will  now  permit  Type  THW  to  be  used  up  through  2000  MCM.  Former  limit 
was  500  MCM.  It  also  has  a  new  note  which  permits  outer  coverings  to  be  omitted 
over  rubber  insulations  which  have  been  specifically  approved  for  the  purpose.  This  note 
refers  to  Types  R,  RH,  RHH,  RYV,  RH-RvV.  and  RHYV.  This  provides  for  insulations 
that  do  not  require  any  protective  covers. 

Sec.   310-2    (d)    (2)   and   (3) 

"Outer  fibrous  covering"  is  changed  to  "outer-non-metallic  covering".  This  up-dates 
the  Code  to  agree  with  present  practice  to  recognize  other  coverings,  such  as  neoprene. 

Table  310-12,  Note  8 

For  a  number  of  years  there  have  been  derating  factors  for  the  situation  where 
more  than  three  conductors  are  installed  in  raceway  or  are  assembled  together  into  a 
cable.  In  the  1962  Code  this  same  requirement  with  the  same  derating  factors  is  made 
applicable  to  single-conductor  or  multi-conductor  cables  which  are  stacked  or  bundled 
without  maintained  spacing  and  where  they  are  not  installed  in  raceways. 

Art.   318 — Continuous   Rigid  Cable    Supports 

An  entirely  new  article  covering  Continuous  Rigid  Cable  Supports  has  been  added 
to  the  Code  to  take  care  of  reported  misapplication  of  cable  racks  and  cable  troughs. 
Sec.  318-7  specifies  the  cable  types  that  are  permitted.  Single-conductor  building  wire 
types  are  not,  such  as  RHW  or  THW. 

Art.    331 — Aluminum    Sheathed    Cable 

A  new  article  will  appear  in  the  1962  Code  covering  Type  ALS  aluminum-sheathed 
cable.  The  material  is  "a  factory-assembled  cable  consisting  of  one  or  more  insulated 
conductors  enclosed  in  an  impervious,  closely  fitting,  continuous,  seamless  tube  of  alum- 
inum." This  cable  may  be  used  in  both  exposed  and  concealed  work  in  dry  and  wet 
locations.  When  exposed  to  strong  chlorides,  caustic  alkalies,  hydrochloric  acid  or  chlo- 
rine vapors,  the  cable  must  have  a  protective  covering.  Its  use  underground  is  limited; 
it  cannot  be  buried  directly  in  the  ground.  The  outer  sheath  shall  not  be  used  as  a  cur- 
rent-carrying conductor.  Special  approved  fittings  are  required  for  the  connection  of 
Type  ALS  cable  to  boxes  or  equipment.  The  ((inductors  may  be  either  copper  or  Type 
EC  grade  aluminum,  solid  or  stranded.  In  general  the  conductors  and  their  insulation 
are  the  same  as  is  now  permitted   for   lead-sheathed  cable. 

Art.    334 — Metal-Clad    Cable 

Recognizes  interlocked  armored  and  corrugated-metal-sheathed  power  cable  as  Type 

MC.   Sizes   are   4    AWG    and    larger    for    copper.    2    AWG   and    larger    for   aluminum.   The 

article  still  includes  Types  AC  and  ACT  armored  cable 


412 Electricity 

Art.   336 

Sec.  336-2 

Non-metallic  sheathed  cable  previously  was  limited  to  No.  4  AWG,  The  1962  Code 
increases  this  to  No.  2  AWG. 

Art.   339 — Underground   Feeder   and   Branch   Circuit   Cable 

Sec.  339-3  (c) 

Requires  Type  UF  Cable  to  be  buried  at  least  18  in.  in  the  ground  if  supplementary 
protection  is  not  provided. 

Sec.  339-3  (d) 

Permits  single   conductor  Type   UF  Cable  to   be  used  for  heating  cables   (422-27). 
Sec.   339-3   (e) 

Adds  a  restriction  to  the  use  of  Type  UF  Cable  when  exposed  to  sunlight  unless 
it  is  specifically  approved. 

Art.   342 — Non-Metallic  Extension 

This  article  covers  non-metallic  surface  extensions,  a  material  not  in  very  wide  use. 
The  scope  and  coverage  of  the  article  has  been  extended  to  include  a  type  in  which 
the  assembly  of  conductors,  insulation  and  jacket  is  extended  to  include  a  messenger 
cable  so  that  the  assembly  may  be  used  as  an  aerial  cable.  It  can  be  used  when  the 
building  is  for  industrial  purposes  and  the  nature  of  occupancy  requires  a  highly  flexible 
means  for  connecting  equipment.  Limited  to  IS-  and  20-amp  branch  circuits. 

Art.  347 — Rigid  Non-Metallic  Conduit 

Perhaps  the  most  important  new  material  added  to  the  1962  Code  is  rigid  non- 
metallic  conduit  for  use  above  ground.  This  article  rather  completely  cover  the  per- 
mitted uses  and  installation  procedures  required  for  rigid  non-metallic  conduit  made  of 
fibers,  plastics  or  other  non-metallic  material.  It  is  prohibited  above  ground  out  of  doors, 
in  hazardous  locations,  in  the  concealed  spaces  of  combustible  construction  and  may  not 
be  used  for  the  support  of  fixtures  or  other  equipment.  It  is  permitted  to  be  used  at 
not  over  600  v  for  direct  burial,  for  imbedding  in  concrete  walls,  floors  and  ceilings,  in 
locations  subject  to  severe  corrosive  influences  for  chemicals  for  which  specific  approval 
must  be  obtained,  in  cinder  fill,  and  in  wet  locations  where  corrosion  is  not  a  problem. 
Of  particular  interest  to  the  wire  and  cable  application  engineers  is  the  fact  that  in 
practically  all  installations  of  this  new  conduit  system  a  grounding  conductor  will  need 
to  be  included  with  the  circuit  conductors,  for  the  raceway  is  no  longer  available  as 
the  grounding  conductor. 

Art.  384 — Switchboards  and  Panel   Boards 
Sec.  384-9 
Type  ALS  Aluminum  Sheathed  Cable  is  included. 

Art.  630 — Electric  Welders 

Sec.  630-11 

A  multiplying  factor  is  added  which  recognizes  that  electric  welders  do  not  impose 
a  single  value  of  current,  but  impose  a  varying  current  depending  upon  the  load  cycle. 
This  will  permit  smaller  conductors,  depending  upon  the  rated  percent  duty  cycle. 


Electricity 413 

Art.    725 — Remote    Control,    Low    Energy   Power, 
Low- Voltage   Power   and   Signal   Circuits 

Sec.  725-42  (c) 

In  previous  codes  very  little  attention  has  been  paid  to  the  conductor  insulation  on 
those  conductors  which  are  used  in  remote  control,  low-energy  power,  or  low-voltage 
power  and  signal  circuits.  The  1962  Code  in  considerable  detail  delineates  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  insulation  and  the  jacket  of  cable  for  remote  control  and  signal  circuits 
and  thereby  sets  up  automatically  the  listing  or  labeling  of  these  conductors  by  Under- 
writers  Laboratories. 

NFPA  Standard  No.  75— Standard  for  the 
Protection    of   Electronic   Computer   Systems 

Sec.  4302  for  interconnecting  cables  refers  to  approved  cables  which  places  con- 
structions in   the  hands  of  Underwriters  Laboratories. 


A  new  handbook  on  current-carrying  capacities  is  now  available.  It  is  titled  "Power 
Cable  Ampacities",  AIEE-IPCEA:  Volume  I — Copper,  Volume  II — Aluminum.  These 
books  can  be  ordered  from  the  Order  Service  Department,  AIEE,  345  East  47th  Street, 
New  York   17. 

B.  REPORT  ON  NEW  TYPES  OF  WIRE,  CABLE  AND  INSULATING  MATERIALS 

Cross-Linked  Polyethylene 

A  most  significant  advance  in  wire  and  cable  technology  is  the  development  and 
introduction  of  chemically  cross-linked  polyethylene  insulation.  The  cross-linking  over- 
comes the  chief  weakness  of  polyethylene — its  low  melting  point — and  converts  it  from 
thermoplastic  material  to  a  thermosetting  material  while  retaining  polyethylene's  out- 
standing electrical  and  physical  properties. 

Chemically  cross-linked  polyethylene  provides  a  family  of  insulation  that  can  be 
compounded  to  give  excellent  heat,  moisture,  sunlight  and  flame  resisting  properties, 
and  resistance  to  deformation  at  elevated  temperatures  without  the  use  of  the  protective 
covers. 

Some  typical  wire  and  cable  products  in  which  chemically  cross-linked  polyethylene 
has  been  introduced  are: 

Power  cables  up  through  15  kv 

Control  cables 

Service  drop  cable 

Type  SIS  switchboard  wire 

Type  RHW-RHH  for  general  wiring 

Type  SE  service  entrance  cable 

The   latter  three  are  recognized  and   listed  by   Underwriters  Laboratories.   Inc. 

This  material  appears  to  overcome  some  of  the  disadvantages  of  rubber  insulation 
in  that  it  is  easier  to  pull  into  conduit,  requires  no  protective  covering,  is  resistant  to 
oils  and  sunlight,  is  rated  at  90  C  and  is  less  costly.  It  is  presently  available  from 
several  manufacturers. 

C.  REVISION'  OF  MANUAL 

Considerable  progress  has  been  made  on  revising  the  AAR  Electrical  Manual  so 
that  all  specifications  and  constructions  referred  to  will  be  standard  with  the  industry. 


414 Electricity 

Report  on  Assignment  13 

Railway  Electrification 

Collaborating  with   Mechanical   Division,   AAR 

L.  B.  Curtis  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  J.  Berti,  L.  VV.  Birch,  W.  F.  Bowers,  H.  F. 
Brown,  K.  A.  Browne,  R.  Burn,  F.  J.  Corporon,  A.  B.  Costic,  B.  C.  Hallowell, 
G.  B.  Hauser,  R.  B.  Hendrickson,  R.  L.  Kimball,  D.  R.  MacLeod,  F.  B.  McConnel, 
H.  R.  Morgan,  P.  F.  Pownall,  E.  B.  Shew,  E.  L.  Tennyson.  E.  H.  Werner. 

Your  committee  reports,  as  information,  on  the  general  subject  of  railway  elec- 
trification. The  work  on  this  assignment  is  divided  among  six  sub-subcommittees,  but, 
because  of  economic  pressures  and  the  heavy  work  load  carried  by  the  committee's 
members,  only  one  of  the  six  will  report  this  year. 

There  has  been  no  collaboration  with  the  International  Union  of  Railroads  this  year. 

The  report  follows. 

Report  on  Assignment   13  D 

Developments    in    the    Field   of   Electrification 
(Domestic  and   Foreign) 

L.  W.  Birch,  Chairman 

UNITED  STATES  DEVELOPMENTS 

The  nation's  first  silicon  rectifier  locomotive,  No.  4460,  was  delivered  to  the  Penn- 
sylvania Railroad  on  July  3,   1962.  This  locomotive  was  included  in  an  order  for  66 
units,    60    of    which    will   have   ignitron    rectifiers.    Completion    of    the    entire    order   is 
expected  in  1963. 

Electric  operation  on  134  miles  of  the  Norfolk  &  Western  (Virginian  Railway  sec- 
tion) ended  on  July  1,  1062 .  This  electrification  had  been  in  continuous  operation  with 
11-kv  overhead  since  1924.  The  removal  of  the  electrification  followed  the  merger  of 
the  Norfolk  &  Western  and  the  Virginian  railroads. 

At  the  present  time  the  Niagara  Junction  Railway  is  electrifying  a  new  yard  at 
Niagara  Falls,  N.   Y.  Light  catenary  has  been  installed.  The  voltage  will  be  600,  d-c. 

Commuter  and  Rapid  Transit 

Owing  to  the  similarity  of  equipment  and  operation  of  commuter  and  rapid  transit 
systems,  this  committee  has  been  alert  to  the  developments  which  have  taken  place  in 
this  field.  Presently  such  communities  as  will  be  served  by  the  Delaware  River  Port 
Authority,  the  San  Francisco  Bay  Area  Rapid  Transit  District,  Los  Angeles  Metropolitan 
Transit  Authority,  and  The  National  Capital  Transportation  Agency,  are  under  con- 
sideration  and  reports  will  be  made  as  developments  take  place. 

Electrification  an  "Angel  to   U.  S.  Railroads" 

An  AIEE  paper  entitled  "Electrification — Devil  or  Angel?"  was  delivered  by  L.  B. 
Curtis,  chairman  of  Subcommittee  13  of  Committee  18,  at  the  Winter  General  Meeting 
of  the  Institute  in  New  York,  February  1,  1962.  Based  on  answers  from  a  question- 
naire  distributed  by  Mr.   Curtis,  inductive  reasoning  indicated  that  the  least  expensive 


Electricity 


415 


Pennsylvania   Railroad's  silicon  rectifier  locomotive. 


system  of  electrification  is  the  commercial-frequency  high-voltage  system.  The  question- 
naire was  not  limited  to  the  United  States  but  included  such  countries  as  England, 
Japan,  the  International  Union  of  Railroads  in  Europe  and  other  groups. 


FOREIGN  DEVELOPMENTS 


India 


The  third  successive  contract  since  1958  for  electrification  of  another  section  01  the 
Eastern  Railway  System  in  India  called  for  23S  miles  of  25-kv,  50-cycle  distribution. 
Also,  an  additional  185-mile  route  of  the  Southeastern  Railway  of  India  has  been  opened 
for  operation  of  freight  service.  This  system  now  totals  600  route  miles  of  electrification, 
all  of   which   is  high -voltage  commercial   frequency. 

Europe 

Electrification  continues  to  progress  in  both  Germany  and  Russia.  In  Great  Britain 
the  Transport  Ministry  has  approved  new  clearances  to  ground,  permitting  the  electrifi- 
cation of  the  London-Midland  Region  at  25  kv. 

During  the  past  year  English  electrification,  as  reported  previously,  continues  i" 
several  sections. 

Hull    576 


416 Electricity 

The  Swiss  continue  to  electrify  sections  of  railroad,  owing  particularly  to  severe 
grades. 

For  approximately  the  past  year  the  Trans-European  Express  Service  has  been 
operating  between  Zurich  and  Milan  and  between  Milan  and  Paris  with  new  5-coach 
electric  trains  equipped  for  running  on  four  different  systems  of  supply.  Between  Milan 
and  Paris  the  trains  use  3000  v  d-c;  in  Switzerland  they  are  supplied  with  15-kv,  16% 
cycles  a-c;  in  France  they  use  25-kv,  SO  cycles  and  ultimately  are  supplied  with  1500  v 
d-c  just   before  reaching  the  Paris  station. 

Japan 

Work  is  progressing  on  the  construction  of  the  new  high-speed  Tokaido  Trunk 
Line.  This  is  a  standard-gage  25-kv,  50-cycle  electrification.  A  large  amount  of  research 
was  necessary  to  coordinate  current  collection,  catenary  design,  signaling  and  rolling 
equipment,  for  operation  up  to  130  mph. 

Katanga 

The  B.C.K.  Railroad  in  Katanga  will  soon  electrify  another  section  in  this  copper- 
producing  area.  The  section  is  between  Kolwezi  and  Mutshatsha,  a  distance  of  approxi- 
mately 100  miles.  The  catenary  will  feed  25-kv,  60-cycle  energy  to  the  trains. 

GENERAL  ELECTRIFICATION  ECONOMICS 

(Collaborating  with   Committee   16  and  AAR   Mechanical  Division  Committee 
on   Electrification  Equipment — Rolling  Stock) 

When  considering  electrification,  emphasis  is  frequently  placed  on  the  additional 
investment  in  fixed  property  necessary  to  supply  electric  energy  from  central  power 
stations.  There  is  no  economy,  per  se,  in  contact  systems,  substations,  or  in  the  type 
of  electric  power  supplied,  a-c  or  d-c.  The  economy  is  in  the  motive  power.  Electric 
motive  power  is  the  only  unit  which  entirely  eliminates  the  necessity  of  hauling  the 
prime  mover.  This  advantage  permits  larger  concentrations  of  horsepower  for  faster 
accelerations  and  higher  speeds,  at  lower  investment  and  operating  costs.  This  economy 
in  motive  power  must  be  sufficiently  great,  not  only  to  prove  the  superiority  of  electric 
motive  power  over  all  other  types,  but  also  to  pay  for  the  additional  investment  and 
operating  costs  of  the  fixed  property  requirements  for  its  use. 

From  our  more  than  half-century  of  experience  with  electric  operation  we  recog- 
nize the  basic  economic  requirements.  The  two  most  important  requirements  for  its 
application  are  traffic  density  and  the  ability  to  purchase  reliable  electric  power  from 
systems  of  suitable  capacity  at  reasonable  rates. 

The  type  of  electric  motive  power  which  can  be  built  and  maintained  at  the  lowest 
cost,  together  with  the  fixed  property  system  of  electrification  which  also  can  be  built 
and  maintained  at  the  lowest  cost,  will  show  the  greatest  economy  over  other  types  of 
motive  power,  beyond  a  certain  point  where  traffic  on  a  given  line  becomes  sufficiently 
dense.  This  is  the  whole  theory  of  railway  electrification,  or  rather,  electric  motive 
power  using  central-station  energy. 

CONDENSED  REPORT 

In  an  attempt  to  meet  the  demand  for  a  condensation  of  the  past  seven  years  of 
electrification  reports  produced  by  this  committee  and  by  Committee  13  of  the  former 
AAR  Electrical  Section,  the  fifth  draft  of  the  condensation  was  distributed  to  the  com- 


Electricity 417 

mittee  in  September.  Many  good  comments  have  been  received,  and  it  is  now  planned 
that  the  final  draft  will  be  ready  for  next  year's  report,  the  method  of  printing  and 
distribution  to  be  determined  in  the  meantime.  This  brochure  will  probably  be  produced 
in  small  form — approximately  one-half  the  size  of  the  regular  reports. 

SEMI-CONDUCTOR  RECTIFIERS  FOR  RAILWAY  ELECTRIC  POWER  SUPPLY 

High-current  germanium  rectifier  cells  of  the  diode  type  were  introduced  into  elec- 
trochemical service  in  the  United  States  during  the  year  1952 ;  its  use  in  Europe  followed 
about  two  years  later.  Awaiting  the  refinement  of  silicon,  germanium  was  promoted 
aggressively  for  rectifier  cells  until  the  year  1957,  when  the  development  of  a  satisfactory 
silicon  product  was  accomplished.  At  that  time,  the  technological  effort  was  directed 
toward  the  better  development  of  the  silicon  power  rectifier,  and  such  development  is 
still  continuing  as  of  this  time. 

The  silicon  rectifier  is  a  semi-conductor  diode  having  two  terminals,  the  anode  (the 
stud  end)  and  the  cathode  (the  braided  cable  end).  The  device  possesses  rectifying 
characteristics  similar  to  an  ignitron  tube.  A  silicon  rectifier  blocks  current  in  only  one 
direction  and  has  a  low  forward  voltage  drop  in  the  other.  High-current  silicon  rectifiers 
have  been  developed  as  of  today,  for  example,  to  a  current  range  of  150  to  250  amp, 
600  peak  reverse  voltage  repetitive,  and  800  peak  reverse  voltage  transient;  such  a  cell 
weighs  8  oz,  is  less  than  7  in  long,  and  can  be  easily  held  in  the  hand. 

The  foregoing  description,  incidently,  is  of  the  silicon  rectifier  used  in  the  recently 
delivered  Pennsylvania  Railroad  locomotive  Number  4460,  a  picture  of  which  is  printed 
on  page  415. 

Silicon  rectifier  equipment  possesses  higher  overall  electrical  efficiency  than  motor- 
generator,  ignitron,  mercury-arc,  germanium,  or  even  mechanical  rectifiers.  Silicon  rec- 
tifier equipment  costs  are  lower  than  mercury-arc  rectifiers,  for  instance,  because  anode 
breakers  and  firing  circuits  are  eliminated.  Installation  costs  for  silicon  rectifier  equip- 
ment is  less;  one  reason  is  that  the  equipment  is  small  and  the  space  required  for  both 
the  rectifier  assembly  and  transformer  is  less. 

Semi-conductor  rectifier  units  are  by  far  the  simplest  type  of  conversion  equipment 
thus  far  conceived.  Vacuum  systems,  firing  circuits,  anode  breakers,  heavy  rotating  parts, 
commutators,  brushes,  arc-backs,  replacement  and  retiming  of  contacts  are  all  com- 
plicated features  of  other  types  of  conversion  equipment  that  can  be  forgotten  when 
a  silicon  rectifier  is  installed.  Experience  thus  far  obtained  has  indicated  that  silicon  rec- 
tifiers have  the  same  high  degree  of  service  dependability  as  motor  generators  and 
mercury-arc  rectifiers. 

A  summation  of  the  several  distinct  advantages  inherently  realized  by  the  utilization 
of  silicon  rectifiers  include  the  following1. 

1.  Low  first  cost 

2.  High  efficiency. 

3.  Completely  static,  except  for  small  cooling  fan. 

4.  Minimum  control  circuitry. 

5.  Simplicity  of  operation. 

6.  Minimum  maintenance: 

a.  Elimination  of  firing  and  other  excitation  circuits, 

b.  Water  cooling  not  required. 

c.  Replacement  of  diodes  a  very  minor  operation. 

d.  Silicon  diode  failure  rate  less  than  l/2  percent  per  year. 


418 Electricity 

7.  Low  installation  costs. 

8.  Less  floor  space  required. 

9.  Maximum  reliability. 

This  modern  trend  in  power  conversion  equipment  is  reflected  in  actuality  by  the 
installation  of  silicon  rectifier  apparatus  for  power  conversion  in  three  transportation 
substations  presently  in  service  in  the  United  States.  The  first  was  installed  in  July 
1961,  the  second  was  installed  in  March  1962,  and  the  third  was  placed  in  service  in 
April  1962.  Two  of  the  substations  are  located  in  Niagara  Falls,  N.  Y.,  while  the  third 
is  located  in  Chicago.  The  two  in  Niagara  Falls  are  rated  at  1500  kw,  and  the  one  in 
Chicago  is  rated  at  2500  kw.  The  nominal  d-c  voltage  is  600.  Each  of  the  substations 
located  in  the  Niagara  Falls  area  contains  480  silicon  rectifier  cells. 

In  addition  to  the  above-mentioned  substations  already  in  service,  three  additional 
railway  transportation  service  substations  are  scheduled  to  be  installed  within  the  next 
six  months;  two  of  these  will  be  rated  at  2500  kw,  600  v,  d-c,  while  the  third  will  be 
rated  3000  kw,  625  v,  d-c. 

Operating  experience  and  service  requirements  for  the  aforementioned  transporta- 
tion substations  were  not  available  at  the  time  of  the  writing  of  this  report  because  of 
the  short  time  that  has  elapsed  since  these  substations  were  placed  in  service.  It  is  an- 
ticipated that  specification  standards  and  testing  procedures  can  be  prepared  for  silicon 
rectifier  units  as  applied  to  transportation  service  as  soon  as  sufficient  operating 
experience  is  acquired. 


Report  on  Assignment  15 

Relations   With   Public   Utilities 

E.   M.   Hastings,   Jr.    (chairman,   subcommittee),   E.   H.   Brown,   A.   B.   Miller,   R.   F. 
Pownall,  C.  A.  Stokes,  M.  I.  Yasuna. 

For  several  years  your  committee  has  been  working  on  a  schedule  of  fees  and  rentals 
for  occupancy  of  railway  property  by  electric  supply  lines  under  7500  v,  that  could  be 
recommended  for  adoption  by  the  railroads. 

It  has  become  evident  to  your  committee  that  an  acceptable  schedule  of  this  kind 
cannot  be  formulated  because  of  the  many  unusual  circumstances  that  prevail  in  differ- 
ent parts  of  the  country  on  different  railroads.  It  is  recommended,  therefore,  that  this 
phase  of  the  assignment  be  discontinued. 


at 

your 

service 


for 

all    types   of    cranes 

d  iese I   wreckers 

pile    drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608       S.       DEARBORN       ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.   COVELLI 

President 
Representatives    in    Principal    Cities 


Why  not  let  us  help? 

Your  GRS  representative 

will  be  glad  to 

supply  the  details. 


Any  way  you  do  it  is  fine  with  us 

—a  jacknife,  a  wood  chisel, 

a  new  motor-driven  gadget. 

But  how  you  use  your  pencil  is  another  matter. 

When  it  comes  to  classification  yard  design, 

why  not  let  us  sharpen  OUR  pencils— our  engineers 

can  use  pencils  too— and  they  have  had 

lots  of  experience  in  the  best  way  to  design  a  yard 

—the  way  that  can  mean  real  savings  to  you. 


Y 

hmmmI 


GENERAL  RAILWAY    SIGNAL    COMPAN 


ROCHESTER    2,    NEV 


MONTREAL   2,    CANADA 


MODEL  441 

Developed  and  Built 
for  Railroad  Maintenance 

180°  BOOM  SWING 

DOBS  ALL  JOBS! 


ROOTS  AND  LOADS  TIES 


LAYING  WELDED  RAIL 


CUTS     MAINTENANCE     COSTS 


72  FAST  CHANGE  ATTACHMENTS 


•  Forks 

•  IVi  Cu.  Yd.  Bucket 

•  Tote  Hook 

•  18'  Boom   Extension 

•  Fork  Tie   Baler 

•  Track   Cleaning   Bucket 


•  Back  Hoe 

•  Clamshell 

•  Back  Filler  Blade 

•  Pull   Drag   Bucket 

•  4  Cu.  Yd.  Snow  Bucket 

•  Pile  Hammer 


Optional   Attachment 
Flanged   Wheels,   Hydraulically  Controlled 


9'   WIDE   TRACK   CLEANING   BUCKET' 


PETTIBONE  MULLIKEN  CORPORATION 

RAILROAD^fejDIVISION 

1  4 1    W.   JACKSON^^JM^  CHICAGO  4,   III. 

80   Years  of  Service 
to  the   Railroad  Industry 


AREA  Publications — Price  List 

The  following  include  some  of  the  Association  publications   available  from  the 
secretary's  office  on  order.  Prices  shown  are  for  Members  only: 

Member 
Price 
Manual  of  Recommended  Practice,  complete  in  2  volumes,  including  binders 

(first   copy)     $18.00 

Extra  binders,  each 4.50 

Annual  Supplements    (first  copy)    1.00 

Separate  Chapters 

1— Roadway  and  Ballast   1.50 

3-Ties    25 

4-Rail    75 

5-Track     75 

6-Buildings     1.50 

7— Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles   1.00 

8-Masonry    1.00 

9-Highways    0.50 

11— Engineering  and  Valuation  Records 1.25 

13— Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services 1.00 

14— Yards  and  Terminals    1.00 

15— Iron  and  Steel  Structures 1.25 

16— Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation   0.75 

17— Wood  Preservation    50 

20-Contract  Forms    1.25 

22— Economics  of  Railway  Labor    0.50 

25— Waterways   and  Harbors    0.25 

27— Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment 0.50 

28— Clearances     0.25 

29— Waterproofing     0.25 

Flexible-cover,  loose-leaf  binder  for  separate  chapters,  each   0.40 

Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans— 119  plans,  8  sheets  of  specifications,  5  sheets 

definitions  of  terms,  complete  with  leatherette  cover   $12.50 

Track  Scale  Pamphlet— 109  pages,  flexible  cover   1.00 

Federal  Valuation  of  Railroads— 87  pages,  flexible  cover 1.00 

Instructions  for  Mixing  and  Placing  Concrete-24  pages,  flexible  cover 0.40 

Notes  on  Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures  from  the  School  of 

Experience— 43  pages,  flexible  cover   0.50 

Handbook  of  Instructions  for  the  Care  and  Operation  of  Maintenance  of  Way 

Equipment— 149  pages,  hard  cover  0.85 

Instructions  for  Care  and  Safe  Operation  of  Welding  and  Grinding  Equip- 
ment—23  pages,  flexible  cover  0.30 

Specifications    for    Steel    Railway    Bridges    (fixed    spans)— 70    pages,    flexible 

cover    0.75 

Specifications  for  Movable  Railway  Bridges— 73  pages,  punched  sheets 1.00 


3 


outstanding 

tampers 

for  the  price  of  ONE! 


A  YARD  TAMPER  that  is  downright 
revolutionary  in  character  .  .  .  that 
will  fulfill  the  majority  of  your  yard 
tamping  requirements  faster  and  bet- 
ter than  it  has  ever  been  done  before 
.  .  .  with  just  about  half  of  the 
normal  crew. 

A  JACK  TAMPER:  By  simply  sub- 
stituting the  regulation  double-bar 
JACKSON  tamping  units  for  the  extra 
long  single  units  used  in  the  YARD 
TAMPER  you  have  a  powerful  Jack 
Tamper  that  is  exceptionally  fast, 
and  accurate  .  .  .  that  can  be  used 
with  existing  surfacing  devices  and 
easily  keeps  ahead  of  production 
tampers.  Or,  you  can  leave  the  long 
blades  on  when  jack  tamping  and 
catch  your  switches  as  you  go. 

A  UTILITY  TAMPER  of  exceptional 
speed  and  power  for  spotting  and 
smoothing  in  all  ballasts  in  all  con- 
ditions ...  and  tamping  of  finest 
quality  in  all  moderate  to  high  raises. 
Split  workhead  permits  tamping  a 
much  larger  portion  of  turnouts  as 
well  as  maintaining  proper  adjust- 
ment on  curves. 


Let  us  demonstrate  the  multiple 
advantages  of  this  machine  under 
your  own  conditions. 


lAPKCnN  VIBRATORS 

JflUllUUI   I  LUDINGTON.  MICHIGA 


INC. 

MICHIGAN,  U.S.A. 


OCV  WOODLNGS-VERONA  TOOL  WORKS 

^^F  Pioneer  Manufacturers 

of 

HIGH  GRADE  TRACK  TOOLS 

and 

SPRING  WASHERS  FOR  TRACK 

Sine*  1873 

VERONA.  PA.  CHICAGO.  ILL. 


w 

WOODINGS  FORGE  &  TOOL  COMPANY 

Makers 

of 

WOODINGS  RAIL  ANCHORS 

VERONA. 

PA. 

CHICAGO, 

ILL. 

Notes  on 

Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures 
from  the  School  of  Experience 

By  J.  A.   Given 

A  series  of  notes,  comments,  short-cut  methods  and  "tricks  of  the 
trade"  written  by  a  railroad  location  engineer  of  many  years  of 
practical   experience  for  the   benefit  of  young  engineers. 

Price  $0.50 

AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 

59   East  Van   Buren   Street 

Chicago  5,  III. 


fro 


RACOR 


m 
coast 
to 

oast— 

• 

*. 

igbsciEmi 

\ 


> 


stgfiooSlS 


with  America's  most  complete  line  of 
special  track  work:  For  Railroads, 
Mines  and  Industries — A  complete 
line  of  frogs,  switches  and  crossings  • 
Trackwork  for  installation  in  paved 
areas  •  Manganese  steel  guard  rails 
•  Automatic  switch  stands  •  Samson 
switch  points  •  Snow-Blowers  •  Switch 
point  guards  •  Rail  and  flange  lubri- 
cators •  Tie  pads  •  Racor  studs  •  Dual 
spike  setters  •  Dual  spike  drivers  • 
Car  retarders. 

with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  manufacturing  facilities:  Coast 
to  coast  to  serve  your  needs. 


*-    RACOR  PLANTS: 

Buffalo  •  Chicago  Heights  •  Los  Angeles  ■ 
Niagara  Falls,  Ontario,  Canada  •    Pueblo 

•  Superior. 

*  RACOR  SALES  AND  ENGINEERING 

Chicago  •  Cleveland  •  Denver  •  Houston  • 
Los  Angeles  •  Louisville  ■  New  York  • 
Philadelphia  •  Richmond  •  San  Francisco 
St.  Louis  •  St.  Paul.  In  Canada:  Dominion 
Brake  Shoe  Co.,  Ltd.,  Montreal,  Quebec 

•  Niagara  Falls,  Ontario  •  Winnipeg, 
Manitoba   ■   Vancouver,  B.  C. 

*  RACOR  RESEARCH: 

Chicago   •    Mahwah,  N.  J. 


with  America's  most  complete  track- 
work  engineering  service:  This  lies  in 
making  available  to  our  customers 
Racor*s  engineering  experience — 
practical  experience  from  years  of 
designing  and  manufacturing  .  .  . 
advanced  experience  solving  tomor- 
row's trackwork  problems  today  in 
Racor  research  laboratories. 

Why  not  let  us  help  you  with  your 
Hackwork  problems? 


RAILROAD  PRODUCTS  DIVISION 
-<ZS2>~  530  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  36,  New  York 


AMItlCAN 

RTake  Shoe 

S«f*NT 


IMF^OVISP  HIPOWER 


A  COMPLETE  LINE 
OF  SPRING  WASHERS 


THE  NATIONAL  LOCK  WASHER  CO. 

Newark  N.  J..  U.  S.  A. 


THE  DOUBLE  U  RAIL  ANCHOR 


ACHUFF  RAILWAY  SUPPLY  CO. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


for  effective 
weed  control... 


Concentrated  BORASCU 
POLYBOR-CHLORATE 
UREABOR® 
MONOBOR-CHLORATE 


These  borate  weed  killers  are  proving  best 
for  roads  in  every  way . . .  efficiency,  safety, 
economy,  convenience,  easy  application. 


Today's  use  of  borates  for  maximum  control  of 
vegetation  began  years  ago  with  our  pioneer 
work  in  the  field.  Continued  research  has 
developed  the  group  of  herbicides,  listed  above, 
which  most  roads  now  favor  for  every  phase  of 
weed  control.  These  four  weed  killers  are 
nonselective.  They  are  widely  used  for  year- 
round  maintenance  of  weed-free  conditions 
about  trestles,  tie  piles,  yards,  signals,  switches, 
and  rights  of  way.  Find  out  how  you,  too,  can 
do  a  better  job  on  weeds . . .  write  today . 


AGRICULTURAL  SALES  DEPARTMENT 


BORAX 


630    SHATTO    PLACE     •     LOS    ANGELES    5,    CALIFORNIA 


i 

Hubbard  Super  Service  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Super  Steel  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Track  Tools 

Hubbard  Tool  Division 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

New  York  Pittsburgh  Chicago 

W^      Unit  Rail  Anchor       w^ 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  DIVISION 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

NEW  YORK  PITTSBURGH  CHICAGO 


Assure  lower  maintenance  costs, 
better  performance  with... 

1 


TEXACO 

Petroleum  Products  and 

Systematic  Engineering 

Service 

;;;  A  -n..     ,__ 


TEXACO  inc. 

RAILWAY  SALES  DIVISION 

135  East  42nd  St.,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 
NEW  YORK   •   CHICAGO   •   SAN  FRANCISCO   •   ST.  LOUIS  •  ST.  PAUL  •  ATLANTA 


m    AGK  A 
ELECTROMATIC 


The  only  completely 
automatic  track  surfacing 
machine  on  the  market 


Proven  in  operation  by  North  America's 
leading  railroads.  Complete  and  auto- 
matic control  of  surface  and  cross  level 
through  tangent  and  curve  territory 
regardless  of  height  of  lift. 

•  Combination  of  Autojack  and  Electromatic 
equals  or  improves  production  of  Electro- 
matic alone. 

•  Precision  of  lift  and  uniformity  of  compaction 
controlled  automatically. 


•  All  variations  in  lift,  level  and  run-out  con- 
trolled from  operator's  panel. 

•  Beam  "sighting"  for  utmost  precision. 

•  Front  buggy  self-propelled  ahead  of  tamper. 


T  A  M  P  E  R     I  N  C.    53  Court  St.,  Pittsburgh,  N.Y. 

SALES    AND    SERVICE:    2  1  47  University  Avenue 
St.  Poul  14,  Minnesota 
Phone:  645-5055 
IN   CANADA    160  St.  Joseph  Blvd., 

Lachine  (Montreal),  P.Q. 
Phone:  637-5531 
Your  enquiries  for  detailed  information  or  brochures  on 
Autojack  Electromatic  and  other  track  machines  are  invited. 


VEGETATION  CONTROL 

CHEMICALS 


READE  MANUFACTURING  COMPANY,  INC. 

Jersey  City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas 
City — Birmingham — Stockton 

SERVING  RAILROADS  OF  AMERICA  FOR 
MORE  THAN  FORTY  YEARS 


W 
E 

E 
D 

A 
N 
D 

B 

R 

u 

S 
H 

C 
O 
N 
T 
R 
O 
L 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  are  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Cleaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  well 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rail 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand. 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  for 
better  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  for  —  and  more 


c/uj£~/7St4>  ZTie  '^acfoizds  Jn#£~Aat/e  useds  as. 


cfib 

Liinr 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


306  North  Cayuga  Si. 
Ithaca    N    Y 


THE  TRASCO 
AUTONOMIC  CAR  RETARDER 

CLAMPS  IN  PLACE 
ANYWHERE  IN  TRACK 

SIMPLE  —  EFFECTIVE  —  INEXPENSIVE 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  CO, 

GENERAL   MOTORS   BLDG. 
NEW  YORK  19,  N.  Y. 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 

Vol.  64,  No.  577  February  1963 


REPORTS  OF  COMMITTEES 

5— Track 419 

Continuous  Welded  Rail 449 

A — Rail 497 

1  — Roadway  and  Ballast 543 


The  reports  in  this  issue  of  the  Bulletin  will  be  presented  to  the  1963  Busi- 
ness Meeting  of  the  Association  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  March 
15-16.  Comments  and  discussion  with  respect  to  any  of  the  reports  are  solicited, 
and  should  be  addressed  to  the  chairman  of  the  committee  involved,  in  writing 
in  advance  of  the  Meeting,  or  from  the  floor  during  the  Meeting. 


Copyright    1963,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    Attoclation 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 
1962-1963 

President 
C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Vice  Presidents 
L.  A.  Loccins,   Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines, 

Houston  1,  Tex. 
T.  F.  Burris,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 

Past  Presidents 

E.  J.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  Chicago  6. 

R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 

Directors 

C.  J.  Henry,  Chief  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

J.  M.  Trissal,  Vice  President  and  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

W.  B.  Throckmorton,  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chi- 
cago 5. 

J.  A.  Bxjnjer,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  Omaha  2,  Nebr. 

J.  H.  Brown,  Assistant  General  Manager — Eastern  District,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco 
Railway,  Springfield  2,  Mo. 

J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Rail- 
way, Amarillo,  Tex. 

W.  H.  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,  Chicago  4  North  Western 
Railway,  Chicago  6. 

F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  L.  Yotjno,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Htttcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Deeendore,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 
Denver  17,  Colo. 

Treasurer 
A.  B.  Hhxman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 
Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 

Executive  Secretary 
Neal  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  St.,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  HI. 


Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November   and   December;    Bi-Monthly,    June- July,    and   September-October,   at   2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

59  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5,  111. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  for  in  Section  1103,  Act  of  October  3,    1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,  1918. 

Subscription   $10  per  annum. 


Report   of   Committee   5 — Track 


^y 


S.   II.  Poore,  Chairman 
J.   M.   Sai  MON,  Jr., 

Vice  Chairman 
J.  P.  Barker,  Secretary 

R.   J.   HOLLINGSWOBTH 
(.'.   E.  Peterson 

C.     J.     M<   COM   UCIIY 

I  .  W.  Green 
L.  A.  Pelton 
\    (  .  Kieffer,  Jr. 


H. 

G. 

Garland 

R .   E.   K  i  >  i "  \ 

V. 

\l 

.   Si  iiw  i\<. 

E.  J.  Lisv,  Jr. 

L. 

II. 

Jentoft 

J.  E.  Martin 

II 

w 

'.  Jensen 

R.  E.  Mismi; 

V. 

B. 

I  III.  I.MAN,  Jr. 

M.  P.  Moore 

T. 

L. 

BlGGAR 

K.    J.    OSTERMAM 

M 

.  C. 

BlTNER 

A.  C.  Parker,  Jr. 

W 

.   R 

BjORKXTJND 

B.  E.  Pearson 

E. 

E. 

BRADY 

A.    D.    QUACKENBUSH 

J. 

H. 

Brow  \ 

Ross  P.  Rodin 

E. 

W 

.  Caruthers   (E) 

M.   K.  RriM'hRT* 

G. 

P. 

Chandler 

R.  X.  Schmidt 

\\ 

.  E 

Cornell 

R.  D.  Simpson 

E. 

D. 

CoWl.lN 

J.  F.  Smti  ii 

F. 

\\. 

Creedle 

T.  R.  Snodgrass 

\ 

1) 

De  Moss 

G.  R.  Sproles 

K. 

E. 

DUNM 

J.  R.  Talbott,  Jr. 

J. 

W. 

FlI.MKR 

R.  E.  Tew 

\\ 

E. 

Griffiths 

K.  H.  von  Kampen 

L. 

R. 

Hail 

C.  W.  Wagner 

M 

J 

II  ASS \\ 

S.  J.  Watson 

A. 

E. 

H  W  WOOD 

Troy  West  (E) 

A. 

E. 

1  ll\SON 

I.   V.   WlLEl 

E. 

('. 

HoNATH 

J.  B.  Wilson 

A. 

F. 

HUBER    (E) 

G.  S.  Wooding 

C. 

II 

Johnson 

B.     J.    WORLEY 

R. 

J. 

D.  Kei.i.y 

M.  J.  Zeeman   (E) 

C. 

\. 

King 

Committee 

I     Member  Emeritus. 

1  -ased. 
Those    whose   names    are    sel    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR    Com- 
mittee S. 


To  The  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee   reports  on  the  following  subjects: 
1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Revisions  of  specifications  for  tie  plates,  both  high  and  low  carbon,  track 
spikes,  both  high  and  low  carbon,  and  steel  drive  spikes  are  offered  for 
adoption    page  420 

l    nk   tools,  collaborating  with   Purchases  and  Stores  Division  AAR. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information   page  432 

indardization  of  trackwork  plans,  collaborating  with  Communication  and 
Se<  tion,   \  \l< 

Progress  report,  submitted  a-  information    page  433 

4.  Prevention  of  damage  resulting  from  brine  drippings  on  track  and  struc- 
ture-. Collaborating  with  Committee  Is  and  Mechanical  Division.  AAR. 
This  assignment  covers  the  laboratory  phase  oi  the  investigation  of  brine 
orion  Work  has  been  temporarily  interrupted  due  to  lack  oi  funds, 
I  progress  to  dati  see  \kl  \  Proceedings,  Vol.  60,  page  793,  and  Vol. 
62,  page  663. 

419 

Hull.   .-.77 


420 Track 

5.  Design  of  tie  plates  collaborating  with  Committees  3  and  4. 

Final  report  on  the  service  test  on  the  CNO&TP  approximately   12   miles 

north   of  Chattanooga.  Tenn.,  presented  as  information    page  434 

6.  Hold  down  fastenings  for  tie  plates,  including  pads  under  plates;  their 
effect  on  tie  wear;  collaborating  with  Committee  3. 

Advance  report  on  rail  slippage  tests  on  concrete  ties  was  published  in 
Bulletin  573,  page  3°.  Progress  report  on  the  London,  Ky.,  test  submitted 
herein  as  information    page  440 

7.  Effect  of  lubrication  in  preventing  frozen  rail  joints  and  retarding  corrosion 
of  rail  and  fastenings. 

Inspection  of  the  Low  Moor,  Iowa,  test  on  the  C&NW  was  made  July 
18,  1962,  at  which  time  certain  butt  welded  areas  were  flame  cleaned  and 
wire  brushed  and  some  special  coatings  were  applied.  Your  committee  is 
not  offering  any  further  report  this  year,  as  it  has  no  conclusions. 

8.  Laying  rail  tight  with  frozen  joints. 

As  stated  in  the  committee's  1962  report  (Vol.  63,  page  486)  no  work  was 
done  on  this  assignment  in  1962  due  to  lack  of  funds.  It  is  hoped  that 
work  can  be  resumed  in  1963. 

9.  Critical  review  of  the  subject  of  speed  on  curves,  collaborating  with  the 
AAR  Joint  Committee  on  Relation  Between  Track  and  Equipment. 

Progress  statement,  submitted  as  information    page  446 

10.  Methods  of  heat  treatment,  including  flame  hardening,  of  bolted  rail  frogs 
and  split  switches,  together  with  methods  of  repair  by  welding;  explosive 
hardening  of  manganese  steel  trackwork. 

Progress  statement,  submitted  as  information    page  446 

11.  Practicability  of  using  reflex  units  for  switch  lamps  and  targets,  collaborat- 
ing with   Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR. 

Study  in  progress;  however,  the  committee  does  not  feel  it  has  sufficient 
information  at  hand  to  justify  a  report  at  this  time. 

The  Committee  on  Track, 
Stuart  H.  Poore,  Chairman. 


AREA    Bulletin    577,    February    1963. 


Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision  of  Manual 

R.  J.  Hollingsworth  (chairman,  subcommittee),  L.  R.  Hall,  M.  J.  Hassan,  A.  F.  Huber, 
H.  W.  Jensen,  L.  A.  Pelton,  S.  H.  Poore,  A.  D.  Quackenbush,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr., 
G.  R.  Sproles,  M.  J.  Zeeman. 

Your  committee  has  completed  the  task  of  collaborating  with  ASTM  Committee 
A-l  to  make  ASTM  and  AREA  specifications  for  low-carbon  steel  tie  plates,  hot-worked 
high-carbon  steel  tie  plates,  and  soft-steel  track  spikes  the  same  in  requirements  and 
similar   in    format. 


Track 421 

At  the  same  time  it  was  decided  to  rearrange  the  AREA  specifications  for  hiph- 
carbon  steel  track  spikes  and  steel  drive  spikes  (which  the  ASTM  does  not  have)  to 
make  them  conform  also  to  the  new  format. 

In  addition  to  their  rearrangement,  all  these  specifications  have  been  revised  to 
permit   the  use  of  steel  made  by  the  basic-oxygen  process. 


The  specific  recommendations  of  your  committee  are  as  follows: 

Delete  the  Specifications  for  Low-Carbon  Steel  Tie  Plates,  Manual  pages  5-1-1  to 
5-1-3,  incl..  substituting  therefor  the  following  revised  version: 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   LOW-CARBON   STEEL  TIE   PLATES 

1.  Scope 

(a)  These  specifications  cover  low-carbon  steel  tie  plates  for  use  in  railroad  track. 

(b)  A  supplementary  requirement,  Art.  Si,  of  an  optional  nature  is  provided.  It 
shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the  purchaser. 

2.  Process 

The  steel  shall  be  made  by  one  or  more  of  the  following  processes:  open-hearth, 
electric-furnace,  acid-bessemer,  basic-oxygen. 

3.  Chemical  Composition 

The  steel  shall  conform  to  the  following  requirements  as  to  chemical  composition: 

Other 

Acid-  Processes 

Bessemer  (Art.  2) 

Carbon,  min,   percent    0.08  0.15 

Phosphorus,    max.    percent    0.1 1  0.05 

Copper,  when  specified  under  supplementary  requirement  Si.  min, 

percent     0.20  0.20 

4.  Ladle  Analysis 

(a)  An  analysis  of  each  heat  of  open-hearth,  electric-furnace  or  basic-oxygen  steel 
shall  be  made  to  determine  the  percentages  of  carbon  and  phosphorus,  and  also  copper, 
whin  copper  is  specified. 

(b)  Carbon  and  manganese  determinations,  and  copper  when  specified,  shall  be 
made  of  each  blow  of  bessemer  steel,  and  determinations  for  phosphorus  and  sulfur 
shall  be  at  intervals  not  greater  than  each  10  blows,  and  the  next  previous  determination 
may  be  reported. 

(c)  The  analysis  prescribed  in  Arts.  4  (a)  and  4  (b)  shall  be  made  by  the  manu- 
facturer from  a  test  ingot  taken  during  the  pouring  of  the  heat.  The  chemical  composi- 
tion thus  determined  -hall  lie  reported  to  the  purchaser  or  his  representative,  and  the 
percentages  of  carbon  and  phosphorus,  and  also  copper,  when  copper  is  specified,  shall 
conform  to  the  requirements  specified  in  Art.  s. 

5.  Check   Analysis 

narysis  may  be  made  by  the  purchaser  from  a  finished  tie  plate  representing 
•  oh  heat  of  open-hearth,  electric  furnace  or  basic-oxygen  steel,  anil  each  blow  or  lot 
of   10  tons  of   bessemer  steel.  The  carbon  content,  and  also  copper,  when  copper  is 


422 Track 

specified,  thus  determined  shall  not   be  less  than  that  specified  in  Art.  3,  and  the  phos- 
phorus content  shall  not  exceed   that  specified  in  Art.  3  by  more  than   25   percent. 

6.  Bending  Properties 

(a)  Bend  Tests — The  bend  test  specimen  specified  in  Art.  7  shall  stand  being  bent 
cold  through  180  deg  around  a  pin  the  diameter  of  which  is  not  greater  than  the  thick- 
ness of  the  specimen   without  cracking  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

(b)  Optional  Bend  Tests — If  preferred  by  the  manufacturer  the  following  bend  test 
may  be  substituted  for  that  described  in  Art.  6  (a) :  A  piece  of  the  rolled  bar  shall 
stand  being  bent  cold  through  90  deg  around  a  pin  the  diameter  of  which  is  not 
greater  than  the  thickness  of  the  section  where  bent,  without  cracking  on  the  outside 
of  the  bent  portion.  The  term  "thickness"  includes  vertical  height  of  ribs  and  shoulder 
where  they  are  transverse   to   direction   of  pin. 

7.  Test  Specimens 

Bend  test  specimens  shall  be  taken  from  the  finished  tie  plates,  or  from  the  rolled 
bars,  and  longitudinally  with  the  direction  of  rolling.  They  shall  be  rectangular  in  sec- 
tion, not  less  than  y2  in.  in  width  between  the  planed  sides,  and  shall  have  two  faces 
as  rolled.  They  shall  be  free  from  ribs  or  projections.  Where  the  design  of  the  tie  plates 
is  such  that  the  specimen  cannot  be  taken  between  the  ribs  or  projections,  these  ribs  or 
projections  shall,  in  preparing  the  specimen,  be  planed  off  even  with  the  main  surface 
of  the  tie  plate. 

8.  Number  of  Tests 

(a)  One  bend  test  shall  be  made  from  each  heat  of  open-hearth,  electric-furnace  or 
basic-oxygen  steel,  or  from  each  25  tons  where  heats  are  not  identified,  or  from  each 
blow  or  lot   of   10   tons  of  bessemer  steel. 

(b)  If  any  test  specimen  shows  defective  machining  or  develops  flaws,  it  may  be 
discarded  and  other   specimen  substituted. 

9.  Permissible  Variations  in  Dimensions 

The  tie  plates  shall  conform  to  the  dimensions  specified  by  the  purchaser,  subject 
to  the  following  permissible  variations: 

(a)  For  tie  plates  with  shoulders  parallel  to  the  direction  of  rolling,  a  variation  of 
jfe   in.  in  thickness,  l/$  in.  in  rolled  width  and  &  in.  in  sheared  length  will  be  permitted. 

(b)  A  variation  of  0.025  in.  in   flatness  of  the  rail  seat  will  be  permitted. 

(c)  A  tolerance  of  iV  in  over  the  minimum  dimension  specified  for  distance  between 
the   shoulders  of   double-shoulder  tie  plates  will  be   permitted. 

(d)  A  variation  of  not  more  than  3*2  in.  in  the  location  of  spike  holes  and  in  the 
length  of  their  sides  will  be  permited. 

(e)  A  variation  of  s"a  in  under  and  xh  in  over  in  the  height  of  the  shoulders  will 
be  permitted. 

(f)  Tie  plates  shall  be  paid  for  on  the  basis  of  actual  weight  as  applied  to  the  entire 
order,  except  that  payment  shall  not  be  made  for  any  weight  in  excess  of  3  percent 
over  the  weight   calculated   from   the  specified  dimensions. 

10.  Finish 

The  tie  plates  shall  be  smoothly  rolled  and  free  from  injurious  warp  and  other 
imperfections  in  surface  and  projecting  fins  of  metal  caused  by  shearing  and  punching. 


Track 423 

11.  Marking 

The  tic  plate  section  designation,  the  name  or  brand  of  the  manufacturer,  and  the 
last  two  digits  of  the  year  of  manufacture  shall  be  rolled  in  raised  letters  and  figures 
on  the  top  of  the  plate  to  the  outside  of  the  shoulders,  and  a  portion  of  this  marking 
shall  appear  on   each   finished  tie  plate. 

12.  Inspection 

The  inspector  representing  the  purchaser  shall  have  free  entry,  at  all  times  while 
work  on  the  contract  of  the  purchaser  is  being  performed,  to  all  parts  of  the  manufac- 
turer's works  that  concern  the  manufacture  of  the  materia]  ordered.  The  manufacturer 
shall  afford  the  inspector,  without  charge,  all  reasonable  facilities  to  satisfy  him  that 
the  material  is  being  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifications.  All  tests,  except 
check  analysis,  and  inspection  shall  be  made  at  the  place  of  manufacture  prior  to  ship- 
ment, unless  otherwise  specified,  and  shall  be  so  conducted  as  not  to  interfere  unneces- 
sarily with  the  operation  of  the  works. 

13.  Rejection 

(a)  Unless  otherwise  specified,  any  rejection  based  on  tests  made  in  accordance 
with  Art.  5  shall  be  reported  to  the  manufacturer  within  five  working  days  from  the 
receipt  of  samples  by   the  purchaser. 

(b)  Material  that  shows  injurious  defects  subsequent  to  its  acceptance  at  the  manu- 
facturer's works  will    be   rejected,  and  the   manufacturer  shall  be  notified. 

14.  Rehearing 

Samples  tested  in  accordance  with  Art.  5  that  represent  rejected  material  shall  be 
preserved  for  two  weeks  from  the  date  of  the  test  report.  In  case  of  dissatisfaction 
with  the  results  of  the  tests,  the  manufacturer  may  make  claim  for  a  rehearing  within 
that  time. 

SUPPLEMENTARY  REQUIREMENT 

The  following  supplementary  requirement  shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the 
purchaser  in   the  inquiry,   order  and  contract. 

Si.  Copper  may  be  specified  as  shown  in  Arts.  3  and  4. 


Delete   the   Specifications    for    Hot-Worked,    High-Carbon    Steel   Tie    Plates.    Manual 
5-1-4    to   5-1-6,   incl.,   substituting    therefor   the   following: 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    HOT-WORKED,    HIGH-CARBON 
STEEL  TIE  PLATES 

1.  Scope 

IIh ae    specifications   cover    hot-worked   high-carbon   steel   tie    plates   for   use  in 
railroad  tra<  k 

(b)   A  supplementary    requirement,  An    Si,  of  an  optional  nature  is  provided.   It 
shall  apply  only    when   specified   by   the   purchaser. 

2.  Process 

(a)   The    steel    -hall    be    made    by    one    or    more    of    the    following    processes:    open 

Dearth,  electric-furnace,   basic-oxygen. 


424 Track 

(b)  Cold  steel  accumulated  in  the  form  of  ingots  or  billets  which  conform  to  the 
requirements  of    Art.   4   may  be   used. 

3.  Manufacture 

The  tie  plates  shall  be  punched,  slotted,  and  sheared  hot  at  a  temperature  which 
will  give  the  best  results,  and  immediately  thereafter  placed  in  an  enclosure  to  assure 
slow  cooling  from  the  initial  heat. 

4.  Chemical  Composition 

The  steel  shall  conform   to   the   following  requirements  as  to  chemical  composition: 

Carbon,    percent    0.35  to  0.82 

Phosphorous,  max,  percent    0.050 

Copper,  when  specified  under  supplementary  requirement  Si,  min,  percent   ..        0.20 

5.  Ladle  Analysis 

(a)  An  analysis  of  each  heat  of  open-hearth,  electric-furnace  or  basic-oxygen  steel 
shall  be  made  by  the  manufacturer  to  determine  the  percentages  of  carbon  and  phos- 
phorus;  also  copper  when  copper  is  specified. 

(b)  The  analysis  prescribed  in  Art.  5  (a)  shall  be  made  from  a  test  ingot  taken 
during  the  pouring  of  the  heat.  The  chemical  composition  thus  determined  shall  be 
reported  to  the  purchaser  or  his  representative,  and  the  percentages  of  carbon  and  phos- 
phorus, and  copper  when  copper  is  specified,  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  specified 
in   Art.  4. 

(c)  Ladle  analysis  of  cold  steel  correctly  identified  by  heat  number  may  be  taken 
from  the  mill  record. 

6.  Bending  Properties 

fa)  Bend  Tests — The  bend  test  specimen  specified  in  Art.  7  shall  stand  being  bent 
cold  through  30  deg  around  a  pin  the  diameter  of  which  is  not  greater  than  three  times 
the  thickness  of  the  specimen  without  cracking  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

(b)  Optional  Bend  Tests — If  preferred  by  the  manufacturer,  the  following  bend 
test  may  be  substituted  for  that  described  in  Art.  6  (a) :  A  finished  tie  plate  which 
may  be  bent  in  either  direction  shall  stand  being  bent  cold  through  30  deg  around  a 
pin  the  diameter  of  which  is  not  greater  than  three  times  the  thickness  of  the  section 
where  bent,  without  cracking  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion.  The  term  "thickness" 
includes  vertical  height  of  ribs  and  shoulder  where  they  are  transverse  to  direction 
of  pin. 

7.  Test  Specimens 

The  bend  test  specimen  specified  in  Art.  6  (a)  shall  be  taken  from  the  finished  tie 
plate,  longitudinally  with  the  direction  of  rolling.  It  shall  be  rectangular  in  section,  not 
less  than  y2  in.  in  width  between  the  planed  sides  and  shall  have  two  faces  as  rolled. 
It  shall  be  free  from  ribs  or  projections.  Where  the  design  of  the  tie  plate  is  such  that 
the  specimen  cannot  be  taken  between  the  ribs  or  projections,  these  ribs  or  projections 
shall,  in  preparing  the  specimen,  be  planed  off  even  with  the  main  surface  of  the 
tie  plate. 

8.  Number  of  Tests 

One  bend  test  shall  be  made  from  each  identified  heat,  or  from  each  25  tons 
where  heats  are  not  identified. 


Track 425 

9.  Retests 

Tii'  plates  represented  by  bend  tests  failing  to  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  in 
Ail.  6  (a)  or  6  (b)  may  be  re-annealed  not  more  than  twice  and  resubmitted.  If  tie 
plates  fail  to  meet   the  third  test  they  shall  be  rejected. 

10.  Permissible  Variations   In  Dimensions 

The  tie  plates  shall  conform  to  the  dimensions  specified  by  the  purchaser,  subject 
to   the    following   permissible   variations: 

(a)  For   tie   plates  with  shoulders  parallel  to   the  direction   of   rolling,  a   variation 
in.    in    thickness.    's    in.    in    rolled   width,    and    ft    in.   in   sheared   length    will   be 

permitted. 

(b)  A  variation  of  0.025  in.  in  flatness  of  rail  seat  will  be  permitted. 

\    tolerance  of    ft    in   shall   be  permitted  in   excess  of  the  minimum  dimension 
specified  for  distance  between  the  shoulders  of  double  shoulder  tie  plates. 

(d)  A  variation  of  not  more  than  g'a  in.  in  the  location  of  spike  holes  and  in  the 
length   of  their  sides  will  be  permitted. 

A  variation  of    •'-  in  under  and  ,;\  in  over  in  the  height  of  the  shoulders  will  be 
permitted. 

tf)  Tie  plates  shall  be  paid  for  on  the  basis  of  actual  weight  as  applied  to  the 
entire  order,  except  that  payment  shall  not  be  made  for  any  weight  in  excess  of  3 
percent   over  the  weight   calculated  from   the  specified  dimensions. 

11.  Finish 

The  tie  plates  shall  be  smoothly  rolled,  and  free  from  injurious  warp  and  other 
imperfections  in  surface  and  projecting  fins  of  metal  caused  by  shearing  and  punching. 

12.  Marking 

The  tie  plate  section  designation,  the  name  or  brand  of  the  manufacturer,  the  last 
two  digits  of  the  year  of  manufacture,  and  the  letters  "HW"  indicating  hot  worked, 
-hall  be  rolled  in  raised  letters  and  figures  on  the  top  of  the  plate  to  the  outside  of  the 
shoulders,  and  a  portion  of  this  marking  shall  appear  on  each  finished  tie  plate. 

13.  Inspection 

The  inspector  representing  the  purchaser  shall  have  free  entry  at  all  times  while 
work  on  the  contract  of  the  purchaser  is  being  performed,  to  all  parts  of  the  manufac- 
turer's works  thai  concern  the  manufacture  of  the  material  ordered.  The  manufacturer 
-hill  afford  the  ins|>ector,  without  charge,  all  reasonable  facilities  to  satisfy  him  that 
the  material  U  being  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifications.  All  tests  and 
inspection  shall  be  made  at  the  place  of  manufacture  prior  to  shipment,  unless  other- 
wise specified,  and  shall  l><-  so  conducted  as  not  to  interfere  unnecessarily  with  the 
i  Deration  of  the  works. 

14.  Rejection 

il  failing  to  meet  the  requirements  of  these  specifications  will  be  rejected 
Material  that  shows  injurious  defects  subsequent  to  its  acceptance  at  the  manu- 
facturer's  works   will    be    rejected,  and   the  manufacture!   shall   be   notified. 


426 Track 

SUPPLEMENTARY  REQUIREMENT 

The   following   supplementary    requirement    shall   apply   only   when   specified   by   the 
purchaser  in   the  inquiry,  order   and  contract. 

Si.  Copper  may  be  specified  as  shown  in  Arts.  4  and  5. 


Delete  the  Specifications  for  Soft  Steel  Cut  Track  Spikes,  Manual  pages  5-2-1  and 
5-2-2,  substituting  therefor  the   following: 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   SOFT-STEEL    TRACK   SPIKES 

1.  Scope 

(a)  These   specifica :ions   cover   soft-steel   track  spikes. 

(b)  A  supplementary  requirement,  Art.  Si,  of  an  optional  nature  is  provided.  It 
shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the  purchaser. 

2.  Process 

The  steel  shall  be  made  by  one  or  mere  the  following  processes:  open-hearth, 
electric-furnace,   acid-bessemer,   basic-oxygen. 

3.  Chemical  Composition 

The  steel  shall  conform  to  the  following  requirements  as  to  chemical  composition: 

Carbon,  min,  percent: 

Acid    bessemer     0.06 

Open-hearth,    electric-furnace,    basic-oxygen    0.12 

Copper,  when  specified  under  supplementary  requirement  Si,  min,  percent    0.20 

4.  Ladle  Analysis 

(a)  A  determination  for  carbon  and  copper,  when  copper  is  specified,  shall  be  made 
of  each  heat  of  steel.  This  analysis  shall  be  made  by  the  manufacturer  from  a  test  ingot 
taken  during  the  pouring  of  the  heat.  The  chemical  composition  thus  determined  shall 
be  reported  to  the  purchaser  or  his  representative,  and  shall  conform  to  the  requirements 
specified  in  Art.  3. 

(b)  When  ladle  analysis  cannot  be  furnished,  the  manufacturer  shall  submit  a  report 
of  the  chemical  analysis  made  on  three  spikes  selected  at  random  from  each  10-ton  lot. 

5.  Tensile  Properties 

The  manufacturer  may,  at  his  option,  substitute  tension  tests  for  the  chemical 
analysis  specified  in  Art.  3,  in  which  case  the  finished  spikes  shall  conform  to  the 
following   requirements  as   to   tensile   properties: 

Tensile  strength,  min,  psi    55,000 

Yield    point,    min,    psi    0.5  tensile  strength 

Elongation  in   2  in,  min,  percent    25 

6.  Bending  Properties 

(a)  The  body  of  a  full-size  finished  spike  shall  stand  being  bent  cold  through  180 
deg  flat  on  itself  without   cracking  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

(b)  The  head  of  a  full-size  finished  spike  shall  stand  being  bent  backward  to  the 
line  of  the  face  of  the  spike  without  showing  evidence  of  forging  laps  on  the  surface 
of   the   bent   portion. 


Track 427 

7.  Number  of  Tests 

(a)  When  the  option  in  Art.  5  is  exercised,  one  tension  test  shall  be  made  from 
each    10-ton   lot   or   fraction   thereof. 

(b)  One  bend  test  of  each  kind  specified  in  Arts.  6  (a)  and  6  (b)  shall  be  made 
from  each   lot  of  5   tons  or  fraction   thereof. 

8.  Retests 

Spikes   represented    by    bend    tests    failing   to    meet    the    requirements    prescribed   in 

Arts.  6   (a)   or  6   (b)   may  be  annealed  and  resubmitted.  If  the  spikes  fail  to  meet  the 
third  test  they  shall  be  rejected. 

9.  Permissible  Variations  in  Dimensions 

The  finished  spikes  shall  conform  to  the  dimensions  specified  by  the  purchaser, 
subject  to  the  permissible  variations  specified  in  Table  1. 

Table   1 — Permissible  Variations  in  Dimensions 

Permissible 

Variations 

From  Specified 

Dimensions,  Inches 

Over  Under 

Cross   section    ■.'_,  ,;' , 

Head      &  i. 

Length,  under  head  to   point   %  % 

Angle,  under  side  of   head    1  deg  1  deg 

10.  Finish 

The  material  shall  be  free  from  injurious  defects  and  shall  have  a  workmanlike 
finish. 

11.  Inspection 

The  inspector  representing  the  purchaser  shall  have  free  entry  at  all  times  while 
work  on  the  contract  of  the  purchaser  is  being  performed,  to  all  parts  of  the  manufac- 
turer's works  which  concern  the  manufacture  of  the  material  ordered.  The  manufac- 
turer shall  afford  the  inspector,  without  charge,  all  reasonable  facilities  to  satisfy  him 
that  the  material  is  being  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifications.  All  tests  and 
inspection  shall  be  made  at  the  place  of  manufacture  prior  to  shipment,  unless  other- 
wise specified,  and  shall  be  so  conducted  as  not  to  interfere  unnecessarily  with  the 
operation  of  the  works. 

12.  Rejection 

Material  that  shows  injurious  defects  subsequent  to  its  acceptance  at  the  manu- 
facturer's  works  will   be    rejected,  and   the  manufacturer  shall  be  notified. 

SUPPLEMENTARY  REQUIREMENT 

The  following  supplementary  requirement  shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the 
purchaser  in   the   inquiry,  order  and  contract. 

Si.  Copper  may  be  specified  as  shown  in  Arts.  3  and  4. 


Delete  the  Specification-   for   Hiidi-Carbon  Steel   Track   Spike-.   Manual   pagi 
and  S— 2— 4,  substituting  therefor  the  following: 


428 Track 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  HIGH-CARBON  STEEL  TRACK  SPIKES 

1.  Scope 

(a)  These    specifications    cover    high-carbon    steel    track   spikes. 

(b)  A  supplementary  requirement,  Art.  Si,  of  an  optional  nature  is  provided. 
It  shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the  purchaser. 

2.  Process 

The  steel  shall  be  made  by  one  or  more  of  the  following  processes:  open-hearth, 
acid-bessemer,  electric-furnace,   basic-oxygen. 

3.  Chemical  Composition 

The  steel  shall  conform  to   the  following  requirements  as  to  chemical  composition: 

Other 
Acid-         Processes 
Bessmer        (Art.  2) 

Carbon,   min,   percent    0.20  0.30 

Copper,    when    specified   under   supplementary    requirement   Si,   min, 

percent     .  .  •. 0.20  0.20 

4.  Ladle  Analysis 

A  determination  for  carbon  and  copper,  when  copper  is  specified,  shall  be  made 
of  each  heat  of  steel.  This  analysis  shall  be  made  from  a  test  ingot  taken  during  the 
pouring  of  the  heat.  The  chemical  composition  thus  determined  shall  be  reported  to  the 
purchaser  or  his  representative,  and  shall  conform  to  the  requirements  specified  in 
Art.  3. 

5.  Tensile  Properties 

The  manufacturer  may,  at  his  option,  substitute  tension  tests  for  the  chemical 
analysis  specified  in  Art.  3,  in  which  case  the  finished  spikes  shall  conform  to  the 
following  requirements  as  to  tensile  properties: 

Tensile  strength,  min,  psi   70,000 

Yield  point,  min,  psi   0.5  tensile  strength 

Elongation    in    2    in,   min,   percent    25 

6.  Bending  Properties 

(a)  The  body  of  a  full-size  finished  spike  shall  stand  being  bent  cold  through  120 
deg  around  a  pin,  the  diameter  of  which  is  not  greater  than  the  thickness  of  the  spike 
without  cracking  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

(b)  One  bend  test  of  each  kind  specified  in  Art.  6  (a)  and  6  (b)  shall  be  made 
angle  of  55  deg  with  the  line  of  the  face  of  the  spike,  without  cracking  on  the  outside 
of  the  bent  portion. 

7.  Number  of  Tests 

(a)  When  the  option  in  Art.  5  is  exercised,  one  tension  test  shall  be  made  from 
each  10-ton  lot  or  fraction  thereof. 

(b)  One  bend  test  of  each  kind  specified  in  Arts.  6  (a)  and  6  (b)  shall  be  made 
from  each  lot  of  5  tons  or  fraction  thereof. 


Track 420 

8.  Retests 

Spikes  represented  by  bend  tests  failing  to  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  in 
Art.  6  (a)  or  6  (b)  may  be  annealed  and  resubmitted.  If  the  spikes  fail  to  meet  the 
third  test,  they  shall  be  rejected. 

9.  Permissible  Variations  in  Dimensions 

The  finished  spikes  shall  conform  to  the  dimensions  specified  by  the  purchaser, 
subject   to   the  permissible  variations  specified  in  Table   1. 

Table   1 — Permissible  Variations   in   Dimensions 

Permissible 

Variations 

From  Specified 

Dimensions,  Indus 

Over  Under 

Cross   section    fa  fa 

Head   fa  fa 

Length,  under  head  to  point    Ms  % 

Angle,  under  side  of  head   1  deg  1  deg 

10.  Finish 

All  finished  spikes  shall  be  smocth  and  straight,  with  well  formed  heads,  sharp 
points,  and  be  free  from  nicks,  checks,  cracks,  or  ragged  edges,  and  shall  be  finished  in 
a   workmanlike  manner. 

11.  Marking 

A  letter  or  brand  indicating  the  manufacturing  and  also  the  letters  "HC",  indicating 
hiyh  carbon,  shall  be  pressed  on  the  head  of  each  spike  while  it  is  being  formed.  When 
copper  is  specified,  the  letters  "CU"  shall  be  added. 

12.  Inspection 

The  inspector  representing  the  purchaser  shall  have  free  entry  at  all  times  while 
work  on  the  contract  of  the  purchaser  is  being  performed,  to  all  parts  of  the  manufac- 
turer's works  which  concern  the  manufacture  of  the  material  ordered.  The  manufacturer 
shall  afford  the  inspector,  without  charge,  all  reasonable  facilities  to  satisfy  himself  that 
the  material  is  being  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifications.  All  tests  and 
inspections  shall  be  made  at  the  place  of  manufacture,  prior  to  shipment,  unless  other- 
wise specified,  and  shall  be  so  conducted  as  not  to  interfere  unnecessarily  with  the 
operation  of  the  works. 

13.  Rejection 

Materia]  failing  to  meet  the  requirements  of  these  specifications  will  be  rejected. 
Material    that    shows    injurious   defects    subsequent    to    its    acceptance    at    the 
manufacturer's   works   will   be  rejected  and   the  manufacturer  shall   be   notified. 

SUPPLEMENTARY  REQUIREMENT 

The  following  supplementary  requirement  shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the 
purchaser  in  the  inquiry,  order  and  contract. 

Si.  Copper  may   lie   specified   as  shown   in   Arts.  3   and  4. 


Delete   the  Specification^  for  Steel   Drive   Spike-.   Manual   pages   S   M    1   and   5-M-2, 
substituting  therefor  the  following: 


430 Track 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR   STEEL   DRIVE   SPIKES 

1.  Scope 

(a)  These   specifications  cover  steel   drive   spikes. 

(b)  A  supplementary  requirement,  Art.  Si,  of  an  optional  nature  is  provided.  It 
shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the  purchaser. 

2.  Process 

The  steel  shall  be  made  by  one  or  more  of  the  following  processes:  open-hearth, 
electric-furnace,  acid-bessemer,  basic-oxygen. 

3.  Manufacture 

The  heads  of  the  spikes  shall  be  formed  and  the  threads  rolled  hot  or  cold. 

4.  Chemical  Composition 

The  steel  shall  conform  to  the  following  requirements  as  to  chemical  composition: 

Carbon,  min,  percent    0.18 

Copper,  when  specified  under  supplementary  requirement  Si,  min,  percent   0.20 

5.  Tensile  Properties 

The  full-size  finished  spikes  shall  conform  to  the  following  minimum  requirements 
as    to   tensile   properties: 

Tensile   strength,   psi    60,000 

Yield   point,   psi    0.5  tensile  strength 

Elongation  in   2  in  min,   percent    18 

6.  Bending  Properties 

The  body  of  a  full-size  finished  spike  shall  stand  being  bent  cold  through  90  deg 
around  a  pin  the  diameter  of  which  is  not  greater  than  three  times  the  diameter  of  the 
spike  without  cracking  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

7.  Number  of  Tests 

(a)  One  tension  test  and  one  bend  test  shall  be  made  from  each  lot  of  100  kegs  or 
fraction  thereof. 

(b)  If  any  test  specimen  develops  flaws,  it  may  be  discarded  and  another  specimen 
substituted. 

8.  Retests 

If  the  percentage  of  elongation  of  any  tension  test  specimen  is  less  than  specified 

in  Art.  5  and  any  part  of  the  fracture  is  more  than  Y^  in  from  the  center  of  the  gage 

length,  as  indicated  by  scribe  scratches  marked  on  the  specimen  before  testing,  a  retest 
shall  be  allowed. 

9.  Permissible  Variations  in  Dimensions 

(a)    The   purchaser  shall  specify  in  the  inquiry  and  order,  the  plan  to  which  the 
spikes  are  to  be  manufactured.  The  following  plans  cover  designs  of  steel  drive  spikes: 
Plan  1M — AREA  cone-neck  drive  spike 
Plan  2M — AREA  washer-head  timber  drive  spike 
Plan  .1M — AREA  timber  drive  spike 


Track 431 

(b)  The  finished  -pikes  shall  conform  to  the  dimensions  and  permissible  variations 
in  dimensions  specified  in  the  plan.  The  design  and  depth  of  the  threads  shall  be  as 
indicated   on   the   plan. 

10.  Finish 

The  head  shall  be  concentric  with  and  firmly  joined  to  the  body  of  the  spike.  The 
material  shall  be  free  from  injurious  defects  and  shall  have  a   workmanlike  finish. 

11.  Marking 

A  letter  or  brand  indicating  the  manufacturer  shall  be  located  on  the  top  of  washer 
part  of  the  spike  head  as  shown  on  plans. 

12.  Inspection 

(a)  The  inspector  representing  the  purchaser  shall  have  free  entry,  at  all  times 
while  work  on  the  contract  of  the  purchaser  is  being  performed,  to  all  parts  of  the 
manufacturer's  works  which  concern  the  manufacture  of  the  material  ordered.  The 
manufacturer  shall  afford  the  inspector,  without  charge,  all  reasonable  facilities  to 
satisfy  himself  that  the  material  is  being  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifica- 
tions. All  tests  and  inspections  shall  be  made  at  the  place  of  manufacture,  prior  to 
shipment,  unless  otherwise  specified,  and  shall  be  so  conducted  as  not  to  interfere 
unnecessarily   with   the  operation  of   the  works. 

13.  Rejection 

(a)  Material  that  does  not  meet  the  requirements  of  these  specifications  will  be 
rejected. 

(b)  Material  that  shows  injurious  defects  subsequent  to  its  acceptance  at  the  manu- 
facturer's works   will   be   rejected  and   the  manufacturer  shall   be  notified. 

SUPPLEMENTARY  REQUIREMENT 

The  following  supplementary  requirement  shall  apply  only  when  specified  by  the 
purchaser  in  the  inquiry,   order  and  contract. 

Si.  Copper  may  be  specified  as  shown  in  Art.  4. 


The  following  editorial  change  is  recommended  in  the  numbering  of  plans  for  drive 
spikes  on  pages  S-M-3  and  5-M-4  of  the  Manual.  In  order  to  avoid  confusion  between 
these  plans  and  the  sequence  of  plans  covering  track  tools,  the  plan  numbers  should  be 
changed  to   read  as   follows: 

Plan  1M — AREA  cone-neck  drive  spike 

Plan  2M — AREA  washer  bead  timber  drive  -pike 

Plan   <M      \Rf.  \  limber  drive  spike 

These  plans  are  referred  to  bj  these  revised  numbers  in  the  bodj  of  the  specifica- 
tions for  drive  spikes. 


432 Track 

Report  on  Assignment  2 

Track  Tools 

Collaborating  with  Purchases  and  Stores  Division,  AAR 

C.  E.  Peterson  (chairman,  subcommittee),  T.  L.  Biggar,  VV.  R.  Bjorklund,  E.  E.  Brady, 
W.  E.  Cornell,  A.  D.  De  Moss,  C.  H.  Johnson,  C.  M.  King,  J.  E.  Martin,  C.  J. 
McConaughy,  S.  M.  Poore,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr.,  J.  R.  Talbot,  Jr.,  B.  J.  Worley. 

This  is  a   progress   report,   submitted  as  information: 

Your  committee  is  making  a  study  of  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Snap-on   Ratchet  Track   Wrench 

From  experience  gained  in  the  field,  it  was  found  that  the  shoulders  on  the  joint 
bars,  especially  on  reformed  bars,  do  not  permit  the  socket  of  this  tool  to  get  up  tight. 
Also,  it  has  too  much  allowance  for  over  length  of  the  track  bolts.  The  handle  is  located 
too  far  from  the  socket  end,  resulting  in  a  twisting  action  which  does  not  allow  max- 
imum torque  to  be  applied  to  the  nut.  It  is  not  durable  enough,  as  the  ratchet  wears 
out  too  fast.  The  wrench  works  well  for  a  specific  job,  but  for  general  work  it  should 
be  redesigned. 

The  committee  suggests  that  it  be  designed  as  a  double-end  socket  wrench  having 
a  thin-wall  socket  with  a  single-action  ratchet  in  one  direction.  The  ratchet  should  be 
fitted  around  the  center  of  the  double-end  socket  where  the  handle  will  engage  it. 

2.  Track    Jacks — Aluminum    Housing 

It  has  been  called  to  the  attention  of  the  committee  that  there  have  been  a  number 
of  failures  of  aluminum  track  jacks.  Therefore,  a  canvass  is  being  conducted  of  the 
Class  I  Railroads  to  determine  the  number  and  kind  of  failures  that  have  occurred. 
From  the  data  received,  a  study  will  be  made  to  determine  necessary  changes  in  design, 
metallurgy,  specifications,   etc.,  to  correct  the  situation. 

3.  Aluminum   Track  Level   and  Gage 

An  investigation  will  be  made  on  the  use  of  lightweight  metals  for  the  AREA  track 
level  and  gage. 

4.  Wear   Limit   on   Striking   and   Cutting   Tools 

A  study  will  be  made  on  the  economy  of  reclaiming  tools  that  have  worn  down  to 
the  specified  wear  limit. 


Track 433 

Report  on  Assignment  3 

Standardization   of   Trackwork   Plans 

Collaborating  with  Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR 

C.  J.  McConaughy  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  P.  Barker,  M.  C.  Bitner,  \V.  R.  Bjork- 
lund,  E.  \V.  Caruthers,  W.  E.  Cornell,  E.  D.  Covvlin,  F.  W.  Creedle,  A.  D.  DeMoss, 
J.  W.  Fulmer,  M.  J.  Hassan,  R.  J.  Hollingsworth,  E.  C.  Honath,  A.  F.  Huber,  H.  VY. 
Jensen.  C.  H.  Johnson,  R.  J.  D.  Kelly,  N.  C.  Kieffer,  Jr.,  C.  N.  Kin-.  R.  E. 
Kuston.  E.  J.  Lisy,  Jr.,  R.  E.  Misner,  W.  L.  O'Dell,  E.  J.  Osterman,  A.  C.  Parker, 
Jr.,  B.  E.  Pearson.  C.  E.  Peterson,  S.  H.  Poore,  B.  Post,  A.  D.  Quackenbush,  Ross 
P.  Roden,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr.,  R.  N.  Schmidt,  R.  D.  Simpson,  T.  R.  Snodgrass, 
G.  R.  Sproles,  K.  H.  von  Kampen,  S.  J.  Watson,  Troy  West,  I.  V.  Wiley,  G.  S. 
Woodings,   B.  J.   Worley,  M.  J.  Zecman. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  of  progress  in  connection  with  the 
standardization  of  trackwork  plans. 

At  the  1962  Annual  Meeting  of  the  Association,  plans  for  the  five  new  standard 
turnouts  as  covered  in  Bulletin  570,  Parts  1  and  2,  were  submitted  and  approved  for 
recommended  practice.  These  plans  have  since  been  published  and  issued  for  insertion 
in  the  Manual  (Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans).  Also  published  and  issued  for  inclusion 
in  the  Manual  were  the  various  other  AREA  plans  incorporating  revisions  in  switch 
details  as  outlined  in  Bulletin  570,  which  were  approved  at  the  March  1962  annual 
meeting. 

Since  the  adoption  of  the  five  standard  turnouts,  your  committee  has  approved 
the  recommendation  that  the  plans  in  back  of  the  blue  divider  sheet  in  the  Portfolio 
of  Trackwork  Plans  be  kept  up  to  date  with  revisions  and  changes  in  construction 
details  that  may  be  approved  for  their  betterment. 

The  use  of  an  auxiliary  throwing  device  for  39-ft  switch  points  was  discussed. 
While  the  operation  of  such  a  device  may  affect  switch  maintenance,  it  is  a  detail  that 
is  handled  by  the  signal  department.  An  investigation  was  made  by  C.  J.  R.  Taylor  of 
the  Erie-Lackawanna,  collaborator  from  the  AAR  Communication  and  Signal  Section. 
He  made  a  complete,  detailed  report,  a  summary  of  which  was  passed  to  each  committee 
member.  Xo  action  was  taken  as  to  including  it  in  our  plans. 

The  plans  for  track  crossings,  their  tie  layout,  base  plate  construction,  etc.,  were 
investigated  and  a  report  was  submitted  showing  what  plans  would  be  affected.  After 
discussion  it  was  decided  that  further  study  should  be  made,  as  no  recommendations 
were   made  as  to  how  to  handle  this   involved  problem. 

Speeds  Through  Turnouts 

Your  committee  has  made  a  study  of  the  method  used  in  calculating  the  recom- 
mended maximum  speeds  of  trains  through  level  turnouts  as  shown  in  the  Manual  on 
pages  5-3-11  and  5-3-12.  For  curved  switches,  this  method  does  not  take  into  consid- 
eration the  ancle  of  impingement  at  the  point  of  -witch,  and  for  straight  switches  tlii- 
angle  is  used  in  an  empirical  formula  not  based  on  true  mathematical  principles.  In  an 
effort  to  develop  a  more  logical  method  of  using  thi-  angle  a-  a  criteria  in  determining 
permissible  speeds,  the  AAR  research  staff  mafle  a  study  as  a  result  of  our  investigation 
on  standardization  of  turnout-  The  results  of  their  investigation  is  contained  in  their 
Report  No  KR  14.  which  was  published  in  AREA  Bulletin  566  for  September-October 
1961.  The  formula  developed  by  them  used  this  angle  and  an  experimentally  determined 
maximum   lateral   acceleration   for  comfortable   riding,   to   develop  the   permissible  speed 


434 Track 

through  the  switch.  Speeds  calculated  by  this  method  for  all  recommended  AREA  turn- 
outs were  compared  to  the  recommended  speeds  now  in  the  Manual  and  were  found 
to  be  similar.  In  view  of  these  and  other  considerations,  it  was  recommended  and 
approved  by  your  committee  that  no  change  be  made  in  the  present  speeds  given  in 
the  Manual.  However,  the  funds  approved  for  this  work  were  recommended  to  be 
applied  to  the  investigation  of  speeds  on  curves.  Any  change  in  the  recommended  speeds 
on   curves  would   very    likely    affect    our   present    recommended   turnout  speeds. 

Plan  for  Switch  Stands 

Revision  of  our  Plan  251-55  covering  switch  stands  was  recommended  in  view  of 
the  decision  of  the  Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR,  to  eliminate  from  its 
Manual  Plans  Nos.  1440B,  1443B  and  1460B  pertaining  to  switch  lamps,  which  plans 
are  referred  to  in  Note  14  of  our  Plan  No.  251-55.  It  was  also  suggested  that  Par.  7 
of  Note  11  on  this  plan  be  revised  to  cover  the  use  of  reflective  sheet  material  on 
targets  as  an  alternate  to  painting  them.  Furthermore,  a  separate  proposal  has  been 
made  that  the  three  details  of  the  single  vane  targets  now  shown  be  removed  and  that 
Note  11  be  further  revised  to  specify  that  all  target  details  be  furnished  by  purchaser. 


Report  on  Assignment  5 

Design   of  Tie   Plates 

Collaborating  with  Committees  3  and  4 

L.  A.  Pelton  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  P.  Barker,  G.  P.  Chandler,  J.  W.  Fulmer, 
A.  B.  Hillman,  Jr.,  R.  J.  D.  Kelly,  C.  N.  King,  S.  H.  Poore,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr., 
R.  D.  Simpson,  J.  F.  Smith,  C.  W.  Wagner,   G.  S.  Woodings,  M.  J.  Zeeman. 

This  is  a  final  report,  offered  as  information,  on  the  service  test  on  the  CNO&TP,  in 
which  seven  designs  of  tie  plates  for  the  rail  base  of  6  in  were  subjected  to  379  million 
gross  tons  of  traffic. 

The  investigation  was  conducted  by  the  AAR  research  staff  under  the  general  direc- 
tion of  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  with  direct  supervision  by  H.  E. 
Durham,  research  engineer  track,  aided  by  L.  R.  Lamport,  assistant  research  engineer 
track. 

Foreword 

The  test  was  installed  in  November  1944  on  Mile  326  of  the  single-track  main  line 
of  the  Cincinnati,  New  Orleans  &  Texas  Pacific  Railway  (Southern  Railway  System), 
approximately  12  miles  north  of  Chattanooga,  Tenn.  The  installation  consisted  of  7  de- 
signs of  tie  plates  in  22  panels  of  track  laid  with  new  creosoted  ties,  stone  ballast  and 
131  RE  rail.  Eight  of  the  panels  were  on  a  short  6-deg  curve  having  6  in  elevation,  with 
the  remaining  14  panels  on  tangent  track  and  equaly  divided  between  oak  and  pine  ties. 
Stress  measurements  under  traffic  were  made  in  1945  and  published  in  the  Proceedings, 
Vol.  47,  1946,  pages  491-514.  The  latest  progress  report  was  published  in  Vol.  59,  1958, 
pages  1028-1033. 

The  curve  was  relaid  in  December  1952  and  subsequent  regaging  was  done  in  March 
1958  by  lining  the  low  rail  only  with  a  minimum  of  adzing  on  the  gage  side  to  permit 
shifting  of  the  tie  plates.  Final  test  measurements  were  taken  in  May  1962  as  the 
Southern  was  laying  continuous  welded  132  RE  rail  through  the  test  area  with  heavy 


Track 435 

tie  renewals  and  adzing  of  the  remaining  ties,  thereby  destroying  the  basis  for  further 
test  data  on  tie  wear,  gage  and  rail  wear.  The  tie  plates  were  restored  to  their  original 
position  and  it  is  hoped  that  at  some  later  date  some  more  tie  plate  deflection  readings 

will   be   available   for  evaluation. 

Gross  tons  of  traffic  during  the  last  service  period,  June  1957  to  May  1962,  increased 
from  278  to  379  million.  All  trains  have  been  hauled  by  diesel  power  since  June   1953. 

Tie  Abrasion 

A  summary  of  tie  plate  cutting  measurements  for  the  17.5-year  service  period, 
November  1944  to  May  1962,  is  shown  in  Table  1.  During  the  last  test  period  of  4.92 
years  there  has  been  an  increase  in  rate  of  plate  cutting  on  the  6-deg  curve  amounting 
to  approximately  35  percent.  On  the  oak  tangent  the  rate  of  cutting  decreased  11  per- 
cent and  increased  13  percent  on  the  pine  tangent.  There  was  little  difference  in  the 
average  rate  of  cutting  for  all  panels  in  each  section  compared  with  the  average  of  the 
four  panels  with  14-in  plates.  Acceleration  of  the  plate  cutting  had  not  been  apparent 
in  prior  test  periods. 

The  size  of  tie  plate  does  not  appear  to  be  a  factor  in  the  average  plate  cutting. 
Omitting  Sec.  405-A  with  ribbed  plates  on  the  6-deg  curve,  the  average  penetration  of 
seven  panels  in  each  test  section  was  practically  identical  to  the  average  of  the  14-in 
plates  in  the  same  section.  This  average  cutting  is  probably  not  significant  because  of  the 
limited  number  of  panels  involved  and  the  fact  that  the  variation  in  plate  area  is  only 
about  15  percent. 

On  the  inner  rail  of  the  6-deg  curve,  it  will  be  noted  that  the  tie  abrasion  was 
nearly  equallized  under  the  14^4-in  plates  in  Sec.  831.  This  plate  also  gave  the  best 
performance  on  the  outer  rail.  The  average  of  the  four  14-in  plate  sections  and  of  the 
section  with  13-in  plates  shows  reasonably  good  results  with  the  poorest  performance 
in  Sec.  405  with  12-in  plates.  On  the  tangent  with  oak  ties  there  was  generally  good 
uniformity  in  plate  cutting  with  the  best  results  being  obtained  in  the  sections  with 
13-in  and  14-in  plates.  On  the  pine  ties  all  sections  showed  relatively  heavy  cutting  on 
the  sage  end  of  the  plates  with  the  poorest  performance  being  in  the  sections  with 
14^-in  and  12-in  plates. 

Tie  Plate  Bending 

Field  measurements  of  tie  plate  deflection  were  inconclusive  in  determining  any 
appreciable  tie  plate  bending,  although  a  few  plates  indicated  that  some  deflection  had 
taken  place.  Eight  such  plates,  three  of  which  were  from  Sec.  83 IX  of  ->4  in  thick- 
ness, were  shipped  to  the  laboratory  for  careful  examination  which  failed  to  develop 
evidence  of  bending.  As  previously  stated  the  test  plates  were  left  in  track  under  the 
new  rail  and  it  is  hoped  that  they  may  be  checked  again,  but  the  performance  under 
379  million  tons  of  traffic  is  considered  very  good. 

Gage  of  Track 

Figs,  1  and  2  are  graphs  of  track  gage  for  the  curve  since  regaging  in  March 
1958  and  for  the  tangent  sections  since  the  beginning  of  the  test,  with  all  intervening 
years  except  1957  omitted  for  clarity.  The  6-deg  curve  had  an  average  of  0.37  in  wide 
gage,  of  which  0.08  in  was  due  to  wear  on  the  high  rail,  when  regaged  in  March  1958  l>\ 
shifting  the  tie  plates  and  lining  the  low  rail.  Since  regaging,  the  average  widening  in 
4.2  years  was  0.20  in,  of  which  0.04  in  was  due  to  rail  wear.  The  greatest  change  0< 
(lined  in  Sec.  405   with    12-in  plates,  with  the  minimum  in  Sec,  831    and   U!j  in  plates, 


4.<6 


Track 


< 
a 
o 

§ 


2  OS 

2  < 


S3  M 

5£ 


K  U 
<  53 
U  fc- 


5  w 

o  a 

«  >< 

o  £ 


ja  j2 

/' 

CO 

CM 

CM 

^T- 

-o   to 

5  '5 
«  03 

CO 

' 

9) 

r- 

c 

< 

n 

CO 

eg 

CM 

CO 

eg 

o 

•»• 

W 

m 

CO 

CO 

O 

Ji 

00 

00    CM 

o 

o 

en 

01 

h- 

«l" 

CO 

CO 

CO 

BQ 

CO 

CO 

CM 

CI 

c 

X 

-/j 

0) 

is 

-o 

■0 

a 
w 

in 

in 

T* 

m 

CO 

CO 

(N 

o 

00 

in 

^ 

DO 

^ 

co   m 

ssfS 

O 

O 

^ 

0 

£ 

<* 

^ 

■* 

"* 

<* 

■"J" 

* 

•* 

H 

CM 

eg 

eg 

CM 

C) 

CM 

eg 

Cl 

o   <~ 
~    o 

3 

<e*     co 

n 

s;  c 

IN 

00 

T 

03 

r- 

o>    o 

o 

O 

00 

Q 

f- 

OS 

03 

en 

o 

w 

CM 

N 

OJ 

cl 

CI 

Cg 

rt 

CO 

CM 

a 

^ 

eg 

** 

^ 

H 

W 

>    in 
o    o 
23    <~ 

S    a 

^H 

m 

o 

o 

CO 

CO 

iO 

-r 

CO 

co 

o 

CM    o 

n 

o 

c  '2 
o   c 

'S 

< 

a) 

Cl 

CM 

a 

Ci 

eg 

CO 

CO 

<u 

H 

■a 

o 

CM 

Cl 

eg 

eg 

H 

CO 

2  ™ 

ii   co 

D9 

w 

Cfi 

TJ 

■a 

o 

lO 

«* 

CO 

■* 

CO 

01 

c 

s 

00 

O 

en 

CO 

o 

oo   m 

•a 

in 

in 

in 

9 

c; 

CO 

c-l 

-a 

CM 

11 

a. 

0 

a 

W 

cj 

CO 

CN 

CO 

eg 

CO 

CO 

«* 

XJ 
CO 

CM 

eg 

eg 

eg 

1-1 

eg 

Tf 

■* 

in 
o 

CD 

u 
O 

CO 

o 

CO 

u 

o 

GO 

O 

a> 

TJ 

•a 

CO 

to 

o 

Cg 

^ 

■* 

r^ 

t 

•H 

m 

CM 

CO 

00 

en 

co    m 

oi 

£ 

Ul 

cm 

CM 

CM 

CO 

IN 

CN 

CM 

CO 

eg 

iH 

f-i 

I 

CM 

H 

01 

"2 

bo 

3 

0 

O 

CO 

& 

u 

& 

H 

& 

u 

M 

1-. 

H 

i-, 

u 

cVcl 

(-■ 

Ih      Ih 

gcj 

nj 

Cl! 

cl 

cl 

Rj 

cit 

a 

cd 

rt 

3 

3 

a 

3 

9 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

o 

■I 

<■> 

O     CJ 

Fh 

Ih 

u 

Ih 

Fh 

U 

Ch 

u 

h 

u 

G 

^3 

U 

U 

U 

u 

u 

u 

u 

U 

U 

0 

u 

U 

u 

U 

U 

U 

O  U 

« 

^ 

T1 

Tl 

•n 

XI 

Tl 

TJ 

T) 

Tl 

Tl 

Tl 

"8 

TJ 

T3 

T3 

TJ 

Tl 

•o  XJ 

11 

cc 

o 

pq 

0 

X 

O 

o 

P3 

« 

0 

X 

o 

« 

D 

S 

a 

X 

E 

o 

K 

O 

K 

O 

pfl 

K 

PC 

£ 

S   (X 

N 

CM 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CO 

v 

-s 

~v 

v. 

V 

-N. 

-N 

■v. 

V 

^> 

-v 

v. 

■v. 

CO 

CO 

CO 

r^ 

CO 

r- 

I>     CO 

rt 

CO 

CO 

eg 

a 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X    X 

^ 

-r 

■2    *     g 

d 

CO 

T 

CO 

CO 

■^1 

^ 

CO 

<# 

-t* 

f 

CO     CM 

t-H 

a 

X 

X 

X 

IN 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 
eg 

eg 

X 

■0" 
•v. 

X 

X 

CM 

CM 

X 

X 

X 

X    X 

H 

H 

CO 

CO 

H 

H 

H 

H 

°? 

CO 

H 

H 

■"* 

T 

'V 

t«- 

c~ 

t" 

*" 

t" 

c- 

CO 

00 

'- 

*" 

l> 

t" 

o 

t> 

00 

^ 

l> 

t- 

i> 

^ 

t-    OO 

N 

>< 

X 

.O 

< 

N 

!x 

X 

^> 

N 

^ 

X 

m 

o 

J!, 

^ 

^ 

M 

in 

H 

,1, 

^ 

^ 

D 

4 

in 

H 

rH 

,!< 

H 

o 

fc   « 

w   Q 

S 

o 

S^i 

co 

CD 

CO 

■/j 

-V 

•# 

00 

«# 

■* 

yf 

"SI 


Track 437 

It  will  be  noted  in  Fig.  1  for  the  6-deg  curve  that  the  sections  divide  at  the  joints  in 
the  outer  rail  and  generally  have  wider  gage  at  those  points.  This  gage  pattern  on  the 
curves  prevailed  in  other  service  tests.  As  during  previous  test  periods,  Sec.  40S-A  with 
12-in  rib-bottom  plates  has  resisted  gage  widening  better  than  similar  plates  without  ribs 
in  Sec.  405,  but  the  difference  is  due  primarily  to  Sec.  405-A  being  on  the  spiral  where 
the  rail  wear  is  practically  nil. 

On  the  two  tangent  sections  there  has  been  relatively  little  change  in  gage  during 
the  17.5-year  test  period.  The  average  reduction  in  gage  is  only  0.04  in  for  the  oak  tie 
section  and  0.10  in  for  the   pine  tie  section. 

As  a  whole  the  gage  has  held  reasonably  well,  including  the  section  on  the  curve 
where  the  operating  speeds  are  predominantly  above  the  equilibrium  speed  of  38  mph. 

Cant  of  Rail 

In  connection  with  the  tie  abrasion  data  presented  in  Table  1,  an  analysis  has  been 
made  of  the  rail  cant  change  from  1:40  because  of  the  unequal  plate  cutting  at  the 
ends  of  the  tie   plates. 

The  following  table  includes  the  rail-cant  data  based  on  the  initial  1:40  cant  and 
the  final  tie  wear  measurements.  It  will  be  noted  that,  generally,  the  cant  of  the  outer 
rail  was  appreciably  smaller  than  1:40.  The  14)4-in  plate  with  y^-'m  eccentricity  retained 
a  cant  of  1:65.  In  general,  the  inner  rail  retained  its  initial  cant  or  increased  slightly. 
On  tangent  with  pine  ties  the  cant  for  the  12-in  and  14^4-in  tie  plates  increased  on 
both  rails.  For  the  same  two  designs  of  tie  plates  on  tangent  with  oak  ties  there  was 
an  increase  in  cant  but  slightly  less  than  on  the  pine  ties. 

Rail  Cant  at  Exd  of  Test 

Plate  Designation  East  or 

1 :40  Cant  Inner  Rail 

6-Deg  Curve,  Oak  Ties 

405         12  in        1:31 

831  14-K  in    1:39 

831-Z     14  in        1:36 

402  14  in        1:38 

Tangent,  Pine  Ties 

831  14^  in    1:26 

405         12  in        1:26 

Tangent,  Oak  Ties 

831  14}4  in    1:33 

405  12  in        1:35 

Tie  Renewals 

The  fir>t  Ik-  renewals  in  the  test  sections  were  made  during  March  1°58  after  13.3 
years  of  service,  when  11  were  in-tailed  in  the  6-deg  curve.  7  in  the  oak  tangent  and 
23  in  the  pine  tangent.  When  test  measurements  were  made  on  May  14,  1062,  39  addi- 
tional ties  had  been  renewed  on  the  curve  lor  a  total  of  50,  or  28  percent  of  those  in 
the  8  test  panels,  Tin-  heaviest  renewals  were  in  Sec.  405  where  14  of  the  22  ties  had 
been  renewed.  Many  of  the  lit-  remaining  in  track  in  all  test  sections  were  found  to  be 
(rushing  in  the  plate  area  and  others  were  splitting  badly.  New  ties  distributed  indicated 
that  the  Southern  Railwaj  expected  to  make  heavy  renewals  following  the  laying  of  the 
continuous  welded  rail. 


West  or 

Outer  Rail 

Eccentricity 

1:310 

1:65 

V2  in 

1:110 

V»  in 

1:130 

H  in 

1:27 

Vz  in 

1:31 

H  in 

1:39 

V2  in 

1:32 

H  in 

438 


Track 


"-.■"•« 

^ 

Lu  lu 

OJ 

\ 

k 

-l<»row 

1 

/ 

<r  ■* 

< 

i 

/ 

\ 

in 
O 

X 

-< 

\ 

O        0 

o  * 

o 

C7> 

/ 

Sp 

/ 

LU    UJ 

OJ 
1 

O 
O 

c 
o 

V 

V 

^1 

/ 

toft1 

m 
o 

o 

.c 
o 

V 

A 

«      e 

N 

o 

1- 

ft 

< 

CD    — 

If)  iri 

— -»~ 

~v. 

UJ    UJ 

1 

-~x>. 

r 

r) 

in  m 

if) 

c 
o 

/ 

0. 

/ 

' 

A 

a      o 
(X)   N 

iri  ^" 

UJ 

OJ 

V 

\ 

i 

UJ    UJ 

1 

o 

s 

in  to 

J* 
o 
O 

OJ 

,^- 

<*- 

< 

/ 

0        0 

CO  — 

■o 

a> 

If) 

7\ 

m  io 

o 

U) 

o 
a> 

O 

V 

<s 

nV 

*4 

LU    UJ 

i 

X 

>h 

m  co 

1 

to 
oo 

< 

0        0 

o  o 

0> 

2 

*r 

/ 

m  in 

o 

a 

"■^ 

*n 

uj    LU 

V 

^   > 

r"(»tiola> 

CO 

i 

>- 
i 

\ 

s 

in  u> 

CD 

c 

»>-'* 

oo  2d 

rO 

1 

m  m 

V 

M 

o 

V 

7 

UJ    UJ 

-lou 

ID   LO 

fo 

03 

cvi 

c 
o 

c 

o 

-   o  - 

1- 

<"* 

/ 

5° 

a 

2 

^ 

o 

CD    i- 

iri  id 

io|* 

"  r 

^ 

*X 

,\ 

LU    UJ 

■        l*>t* 

<*• 

00 

-> 

'    03 

in  m 

If) 

if) 

1 

-C 

// 

J» 

JZ 

jn  to 

ro 

(J 

O 

rO  in 

03 

o 

^ 

o 

m  of) 

-' 

*f   m 

"ml*     !n|a>    '-\ot    "ro|a>     -|»      -|»       Q      *-|" 


8P!M 
96D9 


>pOJJ. 


pjopuojs 


—    a) 

2g 


£     E  S 


«2     UJ 

1  a" 


-E  <i>       «*- 


*-  o 


>-  m 
a)  O 

c 


t*:ffl    S         3i 


0)   «>  u> 


£        c 


en  3 
ro 

JZ     • 

a;  «,  £ 
Q.-^  CO 

jt  a>    I 


=  o         = 


o>^        *i 


LUOJJ        U0IJ0IA3Q 


Track 


439 


— — 

V 

\      < 

v.. 

45 

\ 

CM 

( 

t) 

m 
O 

// 
ft 

f 

/ 

\ 

4 

/ 

f\ 

o 

C7> 

o 

S 

fJI 



1 

o 
c 
o 

j 

k. 

%i 

\ 

■" 

\ 

\ 

o 
o 

m 

/ 

\ 

i) 

o 

c 
o 

Q. 

^ 

it 

\    <■ 

* 

16 

oH: 

xs 

~~*1 

1 

O 

<# 

1    **■ 

^ 

CM 

\,\ 

V 

X 

in 

1/ 

C 
0) 

)\ 

J 

c 
a> 

<3> 

(1 

c 

1 

<s 

o 
H 

1 

*\ ) 

a 

P 

V 

(D 

i- 

i 

( 

0 

o 

, 

'"A 

c 

CO 

V 

o 

/  y 

a. 

* 

i; 

K 

T3 
0) 
O 

o 

a> 

\ 

-o 
a> 
o 

VI 

o 

01 

\)> 

y. 

\ 

V 

y 

O 

/\ 

\ 

o 

1 

> 

s 

''A' 

\ 

> 

f 

ro 

\ 

; 

./ 

CD 

o 

J 

( 

t 

\ 

<"* 

.    \ 

V 

L._ 

CM 

V 

1 

(O 
CO 

Is 

Is 

CJ 

1 

N 

o 

<M 

o 

c 

c 

>< 

o 

S 

\ 

\ 

k 

o 
c 
(J 

%, 

> 

*"Vl 

* 

A 

> 

nK 
t 

fi 

in 

\J  ■: 

f 

*     / 

\ 

\ 
.-») 

Jo 

CO 

, 

0> 

c 

3 
-> 

'Is 

Lz 

\ 
I 

' 

r' 

si 

- 

si 

/ 

\ 

f 

a 

a 

a 

in 

•"• 

U 

-J 

_ 

CJ 

U 

M 

a 

<D 

r 

■a 

a 

•o 

a 

en 

a> 

o 

*- 

^i 

0J 

c 

(i 

o 

UJ 

a 

•*•      -1* 

-loo         O         -Ho       '-!■»                      -|~ 

K>|<D          -|« 

-1" 

tJ          -1" 

»P!M 

8D09    >p0Jl     PJ0PU0IS    UJ0V( 

SP!M 

U0||0|A3Q 

Wt"l 

440  Track 


Conclusions 


The  test  results  indicate  good  uniformity  in  plate  cutting  under  the  14-in  and 
14^4-in  plates  on  the  inner  rail  of  the  6-deg  curve,  but  that  the  14->^-in  plates  with 
y2-'m  eccentricity  had  the  best  performance  on  the  outer  rail.  Better  performance  on 
the  outer  rail  might  be  expected  from  the  use  of  the  special  16-in  tie  plates  with  lJ4-in 
eccentricity  for  use  on  curves  per  AREA  Plan  21.  The  14-in  plate,  AREA  Plan  12, 
with  j^-in  eccentricity  for  6-in  rail  base,  should  be  adequate  for  the  inner  rail  of  the 
curve  and  also  the  tangent  where  it  has  performed  well  in  the  test.  The  13-in  plates 
have  performed  reasonably  well  and  should  be  adequate,  particularly  under  medium 
traffic  or  with  SJ^-in  base  rail.  The  12-in  plate  is  indicated  to  be  inferior  for  heavy 
traffic,   particularly  on  the  curve  and   tangent  with  softwood  ties. 

The  test  results  do  not  permit  any  conclusions  regarding  tie  plate  bending,  but  it  is 
believed  that  the  thickness  of  the  various  designs  of  plates  in  the  AREA  Manual  are 
adequate  to  provide  good  service  under  all  traffic  conditions.  No  revisions  to  the  tie 
plate  designs  in  the  AREA  Manual  are  recommended. 

This  report  supplements  the  conclusions  in  the  final  report  on  tie  plates  tested  with 
the  53^-in  rail  base  on  the  Illinois  Central  Railroad   (See  Vol.  56,  page  824). 

Acknowledgment 

The  Association  gratefully  extends  its  thanks  to  the  Southern  Railway  for  its  coop- 
eration and  assistance  which  made  possible  the  obtaining  of  field  data  for  this  report. 


Report  on  Assignment  6 

Hold-Down   Fastenings   for   Tie   Plates,   Including   Pads 
Under   Plates — Their   Effect   on   Tie    Wear 

Collaborating  with  Committee  3 

N.  C.  Kieffer,  Jr.  (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  C.  Bitner,  E.  W.  Caruthers,  E.  D. 
Cowlin,  F.  W.  Creedle,  R.  G.  Garland,  L.  R.  Hall,  A.  E.  Hinson,  R.  J.  Hollings- 
worth,  L.  H.  Jentoft,  C.  H.  Johnson,  R.  J.  D.  Kelly,  E.  J.  Lisy,  Jr.,  J.  E.  Martin, 
C.  J.  McConaughy,  S.  H.  Poore,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr.,  R.  N.  Schmidt,  T.  R.  Snod- 
grass,  R.  E.  Tew,  C.  W.  Wagner,  Troy  West,  I.  V.  Wiley. 

TESTS  ON  THE   LOUISVILLE   &   NASHVILLE   RAILROAD 

This  progress  report,  submitted  as  information,  covers  the  committee's  inspection 
of  the  AAR-L&N  installations  of  tie  pads,  anchor  spikes,  etc.,  near  London,  Ky.,  on 
June  6,   1962. 

Introduction 

These  tests  were  begun  in  1947  for  the  purpose  of  developing  information  for  de- 
termining the  most  effective  and  economical  methods  for  increasing  the  service  life  of 
ties  by  minimizing  plate  cutting  and  reducing  the  frequency  of  regaging  and  readzing 
curves  by  the  use  of  special  hold-down  fastenings,  tie  pads,  etc.  All  of  the  test  installa- 
tions are  located  in  the  northbound  track  carrying  loaded  coal  car  tonnage  near 
London,  Ky. 


Track 


441 


The  inspection  was  attended  by  20  members  and  guests,  including  three  representa- 
tives of  the  AAR  research  staff.  Nine  tie  plates  were  removed  to  examine  the  condition 
of  the  pads,  fastenings,  etc.   (See  Figs.  1   to  9,  incl.) 

Change   in   Operation   of   the   Existing   Double-Track   Main  Line 

The  L&N  plans  to  convert  to  single  track  CTC  and  will  retain  the  southbound 
track.  All  of  the  test  sections  are  located  in  the  northward  main.  In  view  of  these 
changes,  it  is  planned  to  take  readings  in  all  of  the  test  installations  in  1963.  The 
correlating  tie  wear  machine  tests  of  the  installations  on  the  L&N  will  be  reported, 
as  well  as  the  other  tests  made  with  tie  pads  and  two  species  of  wood  and  two  sizes 
of    tie    plates. 

Acknowledgment 

The  Association  is  indebted  to  the  L&N  for  their  cooperation  and  assistance  in 
making   the   inspection   and   furnishing   transportation    for   the   visitors. 


Fig.  1 — Control  section  37  with  14-in  tie  plates  and  2  each  of  cut  line 
and  anchor  spikes,  inner  rail  5-deg  curve.  Plate  cutting  noted  for  143  months 
of  service,  creosoted  oak  tie:  field  side  3/16  in,  gage  side  3/16  in,  average 
3/16  in.  Inner  rail  plates  were  removed  because  the  tie  wear  was  greater 
than   for  the  outer  rail. 


442 


Track 


Fig.  2 — North  portion  section  46,  14-in  Racor  tie  pad,  uncoated,  127 
months  of  service,  inner  rail,  joint  tie.  Some  sand,  dampness  and  wood 
compression  were  noted. 


Fig.  3 — South  portion  section  46,  14-in  Racor  tie  pad,  coated,  127  months 
of  service,  inner  rail  5-deg  curve.  There  was  little  difference  in  the  condi- 
tions noted  for  the  coated  vs.  the  uncoated  pad. 


Track 


443 


Fig.  4 — Middle  portion  section  41,  14-in  by  *4-in  Fabco  pad  coated  with 
asphalt  on  the  bottom  side,  131  months  of  service,  inner  rail  5-deg  curve. 
Under-plate  area  was  wet,  with  some  sand  present.  Pad  was  in  moderately 
good  condition. 


Fig-  5 — South  portion  section  56,  14-in  by  J^-in  Fabco  pad,  bottom 
coated,  inner  rail  5-deg  curve,  32  months  of  service.  This  specimen  was 
removed  primarily  to  check  the  seal  with  the  tie.  The  pad  had  a  strong  seal, 
most  of  the  coating  adhering  to  the  wood. 


444 


Track 


Fig.  6 — Control  section  9  with  13-in  tie  plates  and  2  each  of  cut  line 
and  anchor  spikes,  outer  rail  long  4^4-deg  curve.  Plate  cutting  measured  for 
178  months  of  service,  creosoted  oak  tie:  field  side,  l/%  in,  gage  side  3/16  in, 
average  5/32  in.  Outer  rail  plates  were  removed  because  of  the  larger  tie 
wear  under  them. 


Fig.  7 — North  portion  section  28,  14-in  by  3/16-in  Konvex  tie  pad  (tire 
carcass)  coated  both  sides,  outer  rail  long  4^2-deg  curve,  32  months  of 
service.  This  pad  had  a  strong  seal  and  a  clean  area  under  it.  In  a  previous 
inspection  it  was  found  that  the  seal  with  the  tie  plate  was  almost  as  strong 
as  the  seal  with  the  tie.  A  sheet  of  polyethylene  was  placed  next  to  the  tie 
plate  to  avoid  disturbing  the  seal  with  the  wood. 


Track 


445 


Fig.  8 — South  portion  section  28,  14-in  by  3/16-in  Konvex  tie  pad  coated 
on  both  sides,  outer  rail  long  4^2-deg  curve,  46  months  of  service.  The  bond 
with  the  tie  was  weaker  than  in  the  case  of  the  pad  shown  in  Fig.  7,  but 
the  under-plate  area  was   clean. 


Fig.  9 — Section  5,  Bird  7-ply  13-in  duck-felt  coated  pad,  outer  rail  long 
4!/2-deg  curve,  178  months  of  service.  The  pad  had  a  strong  bond  with  the 
tie,  but  a  little  wood  compression  was  noted. 


446 Track 

Report  on  Assignment  9 

Critical    Review   of   the    Subject   of   Speed   on   Curves 
as   Affected   by   Present-Day   Equipment 

Collaborating  with  the  AAR  Joint  Committee  on  Relation  Between 
Track  and  Equipment 

L.  H.  Jentoft  (chairman,  subcommittee),  VV.  R.  Bjorklund,  A.  D.  DeMoss,  R.  G. 
Garland,  L.  W.  Green,  R.  J.  Hollingsworth,  H.  W.  Jensen,  R.  E.  Kuston,  J.  E. 
Martin.  S.  H.  Poore,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr.,  J.  R.  Talbott,  Jr.,  R.  E.  Tew,  G.  S. 
Woodings. 

For  several  years  field  tests  had  been  planned  to  check  the  validity  of  analyses 
relative  to  the  design  of  spiral  easement  curves,  for  the  purpose  of  arriving  at  a  more 
logical  formula  for  the  Manual,  but  because  of  various  difficulties  such  tests  have  had 
to  be  deferred.  In  June  1962,  however,  through  the  cooperation  of  the  Pennsylvania 
Railroad,  it  was  possible  to  make  an  extensive  set  of  runs  on  curves  up  to  7  deg  and 
at  speeds  up  to  100  mph.  A  diesel  locomotive  and  a  modern  passenger  car  were  fur- 
nished by  the  railroad  and  extensively  instrumented  by  the  AAR  research  staff  with 
improved  types  of  equipment  and  circuits  not  previously  used. 

Committee  members  and  other  interested  persons  were  invited  to  participate  in 
the  tests  and  acted  as  observers  to  rate  the  quality  of  the  ride  in  the  coach  while 
traversing  the  spiral  easements.  The  large  amount  of  data  recorded  are  being  reduced 
and  will  form  the  basis  for  a  future  report  and  recommendations  on  the  subject. 


Report  on  Assignment   10 

Methods  of  Heat  Treatment,  Including  Flame  Hardening, 

of  Bolted  Rail  Frogs  and  Split  Switches,  Together 

with  Methods  of  Repair  by  Welding;  Explosive 

Hardening  of  Manganese  Steel  Trackwork 

H.  W.  Jensen  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  P.  Barker,  M.  C.  Bitner,  F.  W.  Creedle, 
W.  E.  Griffiths,  A.  E.  Haywood,  M.  J.  Hassan,  A.  E.  Hinson,  A.  F.  Huber,  L.  H. 
Jentoft,  C.  H.  Johnson,  R.  E.  Kuston,  E.  J.  Lisy,  Jr.,  E.  J.  Osterman,  A.  C. 
Parker,  Jr.,  S.  H.  Poore,  R.  P.  Roden,  J.  M.  Salmon,  Jr.,  R.  D.  Simpson,  J.  F. 
Smith,  T.  R.  Snodgrass,  C.  W.  Wagner,  K.  H.  von  Kampen,  I.  V.  Wiley,  M.  J. 
Zeeman. 

Service  Test  of   Simulated  Crossings 

The  service  test  of  the  24  simulated  flangevvay  intersection  units  of  bolted  rail  con- 
struction in  the  Milwaukee  Road's  westward  freight  main  leading  to  the  Bensenville 
hump  yard  was  inspected  periodically  during  the  year.  From  the  measurements  of  the 
tread  corner  batter  made  in  April  1962,  some  of  the  units  will  require  welding  next 
year.  There  was  no  grinding  on  the  corners  in  1062.  The  total  gross  tonnage  carried 
by  the  units  from  April  13,  1954,  to  April  .50,  1962,  was  252  million;  91  million  prior 
to  the  first  welding  September  11,   1957,  and  161  million  after  welding. 

A  subsequent  inspection  in  November  1962  indicated  little  change  in  six  months 
except  some  surface  chipping  and  fine  cracks  in  the  OHCC  unit  of  the  west  panel. 
The  defects  are  not  as  yet  of  sufficient  magnitude  to   require  immediate   repairs. 


Track 447 

Explosive  Hardening  of  Hadfield  Manganese 
Steel   Trackwork — Service   Testa 

At  East  Clinton,  111.,  the  C&NW  installed  a  115  RE  insert  (70-deg  angle)  crossing 
at  the  intersection  of  its  eastward  main  track  and  a  CB&Q  branch  line  in  September 
1950.  The  north  half  of  the  crossing  was  hammer  hardened  on  the  treads  and  the 
south  half  was  explosively  hardened  with  one  2-gram,  two  4-gram  shots  on  the  treads, 
and  one  2-gram  shot  in  the  flangeways.  In  July  1962  the  average  batter  on  the  east- 
bound  receiving  corners  was  0.085  in  for  each  method  of  depth  hardening.  No  measure- 
ments were  taken  on  the  CB&Q  receiving  corners  because  of  the  light  traffic. 

The  object  of  this  phase  of  the  investigation  is  to  determine  if  the  occurrence 
of  flangeway  fillet  cracks  can  be  reduced  or  eliminated  in  Hadfield  manganese  crossing 
castings  having  the  flangeways  explosively  hardened.  One  2-gram  shot  was  used  to 
harden    the   flangeways. 

On  April  16,  1062,  the  B&OCT  replaced  two  of  the  old  solid-type  (75-deg  48-min 
angle)  crossings  of  the  AT&SF-B&O  double-track  main  lines  at  McCook,  111.,  with  U6 
RE  insert  crossings.  The  new  crossings  were  also  hardened  on  the  treads  by  the  same 
process.  Both  crossings  carry  the  fast  traffic  on  the  eastward  main  of  the  AT&SF.  At 
present  all  of  the  inserts  in  the  Santa  Fe's  south  rail  have  hardened  flangeways  and 
those  in  the  north  rail  are  not  hardened.  All  of  the  castings  are  numbered  for 
identification. 

The  test  crossings  were  inspected  November  13,  1962,  and  no  cracks  were  noted 
in  any  of  the  inserts. 

The  committee  is  indebted  to  the  cooperating  railroads  for  their  assistance. 


Report    of    Special    Committee    on    Continuous 
Welded  Rail 

M.  S.  Reid  II    \\ .  Jenkins 

C.  R.  Merriman  A.  C.  Junks,  Jr. 

J.  F.  Reaver  A.  J.  Kozak 

M.  P.  Anderson  W.  Ledyard 

S.   H.   Barlow  A.  B.  Lewis 

R.  F.  Beck  C.  P.  Martini 

E.   J.   Brown  A.   S.  McRae 

J.  A.   Bunjer  B.   M.   Monaghan 

J.  E.  Campbell  C.  E.  Morgan 

J.  D.  Case  L.  W.  Neville,  Jr. 

C.    O.    CONATSER  W.    XlJETZEL 

L.  S.  Crane  S.  H.  Poore 

\V.  J.  Cruse  B.  R.  Prusak 

R.  E.  Dove  F.  L.  Rees 

O.  E.  Fort  J.  R.  Rymer 

R.   G.   Garland  R.  A.  Shaw 

B.  J.  Gordon  T.  C.  Shedd 

ht    t    t~  nv.   '  J.  H.  Greason,  Jr.  H.  W.  Smith 

W.  J.  Jones,  Chairman  -L    ,,    „  '  J  ,,    T     _, 

J    J  E.  M.  Hodges  G.  L.  Todd 

D.  T.  Fames,  j    l    Hodgkinson  C.  W.  Wagner 

Vice  Chairman  R   A    Hostetter  C.  E.  Weller 

A.  H.  Galbraith  T.   B.  Hutcheson  Committee 

Those    whose    names    are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR    Com- 
mittee  on   Continuous  Welded   Rail. 

To   the   American  Railway   Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Fabrication. 

Part  1 — Development    of    specifications    for    fabricating    continuous    welded 

rail    page  450 

Part  2 — Investigation  of   failures  of  welded  rails    page  451 

Part  3 — Monograph   on   the   future   for  fixed  commercial  continuous   welded 

rail    plants    page  460 

2.  Laying. 

Part  1 — Statistics    page  464 

Part  2 — Definition  of  continuous  welded   rail,  submitted  for  adoption    page  465 

Part  3 — Monograph  on  single-  and  multiple-track  laying,  using  continuous 
welded  rail  in  1440-ft  strings,  as  done  by  the  Atchison,  Topeka  & 
Santa   Fe   Railway   on   new   line   construction    page  465 

3.  Fastenings. 
Recommendations  with   respect   to   number  and   position   of   rail  anchors   for 
continuous  welded   rail,   submitted    for  adoption    page  47') 

I     Maintenance. 
Progress  report,  submitted  a-  information    page  480 

5.  Economics. 

Progress  report,  submitted  ;h  information    page  481 

449 


450 Continuous    Welded    Rail 

6.  Welding  second-hand  rail. 

Progress  report,   submitted  as  information    page  483 

Monograph  on  continuous  welded  rail  in  Europe   page  483 

The  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail, 

W.  J.  Jones,  Chairman. 


AREA    Bulletin    57  7.    February    1963. 


Report  on  Assignment   1 

Fabrication 

A.  H.  Galbraith  (chairman,  subcommittee),  S.  H.  Barlow,  J.  E.  Campbell,  C.  O.  Conat- 
ser,  L.  S.  Crane,  W.  J.  Cruse,  R.  E.  Dove,  D.  T.  Faries,  J.  L.  Hodgkinson,  W.  J. 
Jones,  A.  B.  Lewis,  A.  S.  McRae,  C.  E.  Morgan,  S.  H.  Poore,  B.  R.  Prusak. 

Your  committee  presents  its  report  on  Assignment  1  in  three  parts,  all  as  informa- 
tion. Part  1  deals  with  the  committee's  efforts  to  develop  specifications  for  fabricating 
continuous  welded  rail ;  Part  2  describes  an  investigation  of  failures  of  welded  rail ;  and 
Part  3  is  a  monograph  on  the  future  for  fixed  commercial  plants  for  fabricating 
welded  rail. 


Part  1 

Development    of    Specifications    for    Fabricating 
Continuous    Welded   Rail 

Your  committee  is  continuing  its  efforts  to  establish  a  set  of  recommended  aline- 
ment  and  finishing  tolerances  for  continuous  welded  rail  which  are  economically  possible 
to  attain  with  presently  used  welding  and  finishing  machinery,  and  using  rail  as  rolled 
by  the  mills  under  present  finishing  specifications.  It  is  now  the  decision  of  the  com- 
mittee, after  consultation  with  Committee  4 — Rail,  that  some  investigative  groundwork 
be  done  on  some  of  the  factors  affecting  alinement  tolerances  of  continuous  welded 
rail.  Initially,  your  committee  plans  to  make  some  inspection  trips  to  rail  rolling  mills, 
in  company  with  AISI  representatives,  to  view  the  finishing  operations  and  to  review 
with  the  steel  people  the  current  finishing  specifications  for  rail  as  they  apply  to  rail 
for   butt   welding. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail  451 

Part  2 
Investigation   of   Failures   of   Welded    Rails 

By   R.   E.   CRAMER 

Research    Associate    Professor,    University   of    Illinois 

Organization  and  Acknowledgment 

This  investigation  is  financed  by  the  Research  Department  of  the  Association  of 
American   Railroads,   starting  January   1,   1962. 

Failed  Welds  Received  for  Examination 

Only  six  failed  welds  were  sent  to  this  laboratory  to  September  1,  1962.  They  arc 
all  listed  in  Table  1  with  information  on  size  of  rail  section,  mill  and  date  of  rolling. 

Description  of  Weld  No.   1075 

This  electric-flash  butt  weld  failed  after  about  two  years  in  service  because  of  a 
fatigue  fracture  starting  at  near  midheight  of  the  rail  web.  The  starting  point  is  indi- 
cated by  arrows  in  Figs,  la  and  lb.  This  small  dimple  on  the  fracture  was  not  very 
noticeable  and  would  ordinarily  be  unnoticed  on  most  fractures,  but  when  magnified 
about  5l/2  times,  as  in  Fig.  lb,  it  has  a  different  appearance  than  regular  rail  steel. 
When  polished,  etched  and  examined  at  about  270  X  magnification,  as  in  Fig.  lc,  it  is 
evident  that  this  small  area  is  burned  steel.  It  is  assumed  that  this  was  a  small  ball  of 
the  molted  sparks  which  ordinarily  fly  away  as  the  rails  are  being  heated  but  which 
in  this  case  became  trapped  in  the  weld.  This  probably  happens  quite  often  in  electric- 
flash  welding  of  rails  but  has  not  been  the  cause  of  many  failures.  It  should  be  con- 
sidered  when  examining  future   failures  of  electric-flash  butt  welds 

Description  of  Weld  No.   1076 

This  electric-flash  butt  weld  had  also  been  in  service  about  two  years  when  it 
failed  because  of  a  fatigue  fracture  starting  in  the  rail  web  about  24  m  above  the  rail 
base.  In  Fig.  2  there  are  some  dark  oxide  spots  in  this  area  indicated  by  the  arrows. 
These  dark  spots  were  found  to  have  no  depth  in  the  steel  and  are  thought  to  be 
areas  which  were  not  completely  fused  together  during  welding. 

Discussion  of  Welds  Nos.   1075  and   1076 

Both  welds  1075  and  1076  failed  on  the  same  day  when  the  temperature  dropped 
to  12  deg  below  zero.  One  fracture  opened  up  with  a  gap  between  fracture  faces  of 
3)4  inches  and  the  other  had  a  gap  of  1  in.  Both  rails  had  small  ridges  of  flash  metal 
on  the  under  side  of  the  rail  bases,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2c.  Most  of  the  contact  of  the  rail 
with  the  tie  plate  was  on  these  ridges,  which  on  one  rail  was  0.015  in  high  and  on  the 
second  rail,  0.033  in  high. 

It  appears  that  these  two  failures  can  be  attributed  to  a  combination  of  three 
circumstances: 

1.  High  tensile  stresses  due  to  cold  weather. 

2.  Stress  concentration  at  the  small  imperfections  in  the  welds. 

3.  Stress  concentration  due  to  the  Hash  under  the  rail  bases. 

Hull.  R77 


452 


Continuous    \V  e  1  d  e  d    Rail 


O 


o2 


3  o» 
03 


~    O  ffj 


.2   o   « 


3Z 


bo 

•D.S 

td  ? 


w-r 


^      | 


CO    0J 

^£ 

N   " 
S3 


U    o3 
O    U 

.3.3 


H        H 


■P  Pn 

o 


E-P 

-p  _ 
to  t> 

H 

•S 

*£ 

£-1  "O 


<D    bO 


B 
CO     0 

•H  rt 


to 

to 

Bh 

c3 

Z 

c 

«j   iS 

X) 

oa  ^ 

bO 

0)   bo 

—    to 

C 

£.5 

3    03 

)H 

-H        O 

a:  &- 

03 

«r°, 

to  xi 

Oh  U 

o  c 

<U  ^ 

C    SP 

Q.  l-i 

u  o 

-3  c 

01    u 

a 

h£ 

B.    n) 

2  Q 

13 

O    0) 

„        > 

3  2 

Oh    a 

I* 

O  c 

&0  0) 

bo  <U 

Vh 

a  ^ 

l-i    > 

(II 

Vh   u 

03    O 

3^3 

O    O 

HZ 

+>  a) 


to  x: 

"Ah 

a>  H 

s 

-p    R) 

«)    HP 

k 

■P  H 

u  a> 

■8J 

■p 


x:i? 


O     0) 

■g    • 

bD 

(0    G 


x:  h 

Eh  -H 

♦     Co 
Li 


Continuous   Welded    Rail 


453 


Fig.  1— Failed  Weld  No.  1075. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Arrow  shows  nucleus  at  about  SJ^X  magnification. 

c.  Photomicrograph    of    burned    steel    at    nucleus,    magnification    about    270X? 
etched  in   2  percent  nital. 


Description  of  Weld  No.   1079 

Fig.  3a  shows  the  fracture  of  weld  1079  which  has  a  vertical  crack  in  the  rail 
web  indicating  that  there  was  a  defect  in  the  rail  web  before  welding.  Fig.  3b  is  an 
etched  cross  section  of  the  same  rail  web  showing  a  fish-tail  defect  with  vertical 
cracks.  It  is  obvious  that  this  web  defect  made  a  defective  weld  which  failed  after  six 
months  of  service  in  track.  The  failure  developed  when  the  temperature  was  20  deg 
below  zero  and  the  fracture  opened  up  2l/2  in. 


Description  of  Weld  No.   1080 

Fig.  4  shows  the   fracture  of   this  weld.  The  arrow  points  to  a  small   fatigue  spot 
in  the  web  which  was  where  the  fracture  started.  This  weld   was  in    service  8  months 


1-1 


Continuous   Welded    Rail 


I 


1 

i    • 

^ti^pn 

b 

1    \ 
c 

Fig.  2— Failed  Weld  No.  1076. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Nucleus  area  at  about   4X   magnification. 

c.  Flash  metal  under  rail  base. 


before  failing  when  the  temperature  was  16  deg  below  zero.  The  fracture  opened  up 
3  in.  The  large  dark  spot  on  the  base  of  the  rail  was  a  mar  caused  by  a  claw  bar  when 
the  rail  was  being  pried  up  for  sawing. 

There  was  no  nucleus  or  starting  point  found  for  the  small  fatigue  area,  but  it 
maly  have  started  at  a  trapped  spark,  as  in  weld  1075,  which  was  not  located.  The 
cross  section  of  the  rail  was  etched  and  found  to  be  good  quality  steel.  The  exact 
cause  of  this  weld  failure  was  not  determined. 

Description  of  Weld  No.   1081 

This  failed  weld  is  shown  in  Fig.  5,  a  photograph  furnished  by  the  railroad  labora- 
tory. It  was  an  electric-flash  butt  weld  which  failed  the  same  day  it  was  laid.  The 
large  dark  area  in  the  rail  web  shows  that  the  rail  apparently  contained  this  large 
crack,  which  had  developed  as  the  rail  cooled  after  inspection  on  the  weld  line,  when 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


455 


Fig.  3— Failed  Weld  No.  1079. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Etched   cross   section   showing   fishtail   defect   in   rail. 


the  rail  was  laid  in  track.  The  fracture  has  a  woody  appearance  at  the  weld  area 
Cross  sections  of  the  rails  were  examined  and  found  to  be  good  quality  rail  steel 
The  exact  cause  of  the  large  web  rupture  could  be  determined. 

Description  of  Weld  No.   1082 

The   fracture  of  this  weld  is  shown  in   Fig.  6,  a  picture   furnished   bj    the   railroad 

This  electric-flash  butt   weld  also  failed  00  the  day  it  was  laid.  The  white  arrow  points 

to  an  unwelded  zone  on  the  top  edge  of  the  rail  base  which  was  a  tt  rch-cui  area  which 

had   not   been    removed   by   flashing   during   the    final  welding   operation     The   torch    cut 


1-56 


C  o  n  tinu  o  us    Welded    Rail 


Fig.  4 — Failed  Weld  No.  1080.  Arrow  points  to  fatigue  area.  Large  black  spot 
on  base  was  made  by  claw  bar  when  raising  rail  for  sawing. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


457 


Fig.   5 — Failed  Weld   No.   1081.  Large  rupture  in  web  apparently   developed 
during  cooling  after  welding. 


was  made  to  remove  a  previous  unsatisfactory  weld.  The  writer  believes  the  wide  black 
mar  Oil  the  fracture  of  the  rail  base  was  made  by  a  daw  bar  in  raising  the  weld  for 
sawing.  It  seems  that  the  unwelded  area  on  the  top  of  the  rail  base  should  have  been 
located    when    the   weld    was    inspected    and    before   the   rail    was   laid   in    track. 


Bend  Tests  of  Welded   Rails 

Previous  reports  by  the  writer  have  contained  the  results  of  bend  tests  of  welded 
rails.  Eleven  more  bend  tests  are  given  in  Table  2.  These  tests  are  made  on  full  mi  turn 
rails  on  supports  48  in  apart  and  loaded  at  two  places  6  in  on  each  side  of  the  weld  line. 

The  first  four  specimens  wen-  basic-oxygen  steel  welded  bj  both  electrii  Bash  and 
acetylene  pressure  welds.  Three  of  the  tests  gave  good  results.  One  acetylene  weld  was 
low  due  to  oxidized  areas  al  edge  ol  rail  base 


458 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


■ 


Fig.  6 — Failed  Weld  No.  1082.  White  arrow  points  to  unwelded  area  on 
base  due  to  irregular  torch  cut  before  final  weld.  Large  black  area  at  middle 
of  base  made  by  claw  bar  when  raising  rail  for   sawing. 


One  test  was  a  flame-hardened  rail  welded  by  electric  flash.  Apparently  the  flame 
hardening  did  not  affect  the  weld. 

The  next  two  welds  were  furnished  by  Mobil  Weld  Inc.  on  standard  140  lb  rails. 
One  gave  good  results  and  one  was  low  due  to  an  electrode  burn. 

The  next  four  welds  were  in  small  rails,  about  100  lb  section,  made  by  a  continuous 
casting  process  in  France.  The  two  electric-flash  welds  gave  better  tests  than  the 
acetylene   pressure   welds. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


459 


Bend   Tebts    of    Welds    Made    in    1962 


Kind  of  Specimen 


133  lb.  Basic  Oxygen 
Steel  Elec.  Flash  Weld 


133  lb.  Basic  Oxygen 
Steel -Elec.  Flash  Weld 


130  lb.  Basic  Oxygen 
Steel -Acetylene  Weld 


lbs. 


Fracture  Fracture 

Ft.   -  lb.  Inches 


485,000  103,333 

346,000  23,333 

247,000  4,600 


Fracture  on  Weld  Line 
Good  Grain  Structure. 


Fracture  on  Weld  Line 
Good  Grain  Structure. 


Fracture  on  Weld  Line, 
Oxidized  Area  Edge  Rail 


136  lb.  Basic  Oxygen 
Steel -Acetylene  Weld 


130  lb.  Std.  Rail  Flame 
Hardened-Elect.   Flash 
Weld 

140  lb.  Std.  Rail 
Mobil  Weld  Electric 

140  lb.  Std.  Rail 
Mobil  Weld  Electric 

100  lb.  French  Cont. 
Cast  Rail -Acetylene  Weld 

100  lb.  French  Cont.  Cast 
Rail -Acetylene  Weld 

100  1b.  French  Cont.  Cast 
Rati -Elec.  Flash  Weld 

100  lb.  French  Cont.  Cast 
Rail-Elec.   Flash  Weld 


195.000 


104,000 
1  S3, 000 
[88,000 


33,300 

55,400 

24,600 
r,500 
5,  120 


Fractured  Away  from 
Welding  Good  Grain 
Structure. 

Fracture  on  Weld  Line, 
Grain  Structure  Good. 


Fractured  on  Weld  Line, 
Grain  Structure  Good. 

Electrode  Burn  on  Base, 
Fracture  Started  at  Burn. 

Fractured  Away  from  Weld 
Line,  Grain  Structure  Good. 

Fractured  at  Weld  Line. 
Oxide  on  Edge  of  Rail  Base. 

Fractured  on  Weld  Line, 
Not  Complete  Fusion. 

Fractured  Away  From  Weld 

Line  Grain  Structure  Good. 


Tested  on  supports  4*  inches  apart  and  loaded  at  two  place 
side  of  the  weld  line. 


460  Continuous    Welded    Kail 


Part  3 

Monograph — The    Future    For    Fixed    Commercial 
Continuous   Welded    Rail   Plants 

By   EDWARD   T.   MYERS 

Engineering  Editor,    Modern   Railroads 

The  future  for  fixed  commercial  welding  plants  looks  grim,  today.  This  statement 
is  not  fabricated  out  of  the  dark  air  of  pessimism.  It  is  based  on  the  experiences  of 
three  plants  that  are  currently  in  operation  as  well  as  on  some  that  have  opened  and 
closed   .   .   .  and   on  some  that  were  planned  but   never  opened. 

To  examine  the  facts  behind  the  current  collapse  of  the  fixed  welding  plant  idea, 
the  author  sent  a  questionnaire  to  five  rail  welding  companies,1  three  leading  steel  com- 
panies, and  one  railroad.  As  might  be  expected,  certain  information  was  highly  confi- 
dential. Nevertheless,  the  opinions  expressed  and  the  more  or  less  concrete  data  cited 
give  a  very  realistic  picture  of  the  fixed  commercial  plant.  The  future  of  such  under- 
takings will  depend  largely  upon  the  action  of  the  railroads.  Suggestions  for  a  course 
of  action  are  outlined  at  the  conclusion  of  this  monograph. 

Everyone  replying  plus  those  interviewed  agreed  that  there  was  a  place  for  such 
fixed  plants  but  that  their  survival  under  present  conditions  depends  upon  railroad 
support.  Of  the  four  most  successful  plants,  three2  are  still  in  operation  while  the  fourth 
is  temporarily  shut  down.  At  least  two  other  companies  that  had  planned  to  enter  this 
phase  of  the  welding  business  have  dropped  the  idea.  In  addition  two  contractors  have 
been  forced  out  of  the  business.  From  this  it  would  appear  that  the  rail  welding  busi- 
ness in  general  is  rugged  and  that  few,  if  any,  of  the  fixed  plants  have  been  or  are 
great    money   makers. 

One  welding  executive  had  this  to  say:  "I  have  been  informed  that  there  is  a 
demand  for  this  type  of  plant,  but  at  this  time  I  would  say  that  the  desire  of  the  rail- 
roads to  have  this  service  has  apparently  not  been  sufficient  to  produce  real  cooperation 
and  action.  We  have  tried  to  persuade  the  various  railroads  to  act  together  in  pooling 
their  rail  for  scheduling  purposes  with  little  results.  Quite  frankly,  the  smaller  railroads 
are  going  to  be  shut  out  of  the  opportunity  to  obtain  low-cost  rail  welding  unless  some 
concerted   cooperative  action  is  taken   by  the  railroads  themselves." 

Trends  in  the  rail  welding  business  were  pointed  out  by  a  welder:  "Most  of  the 
steel  mill  people  have  indicated  no  desire  to  enter  into  the  welding  business.  Further- 
more, the  trend  for  the  future  seems  to  be  toward  contract  welding  on  railroad  property 
in  an  area  centrally  located  to  the  rail  laying  site.  It  is  understandable  that  such  contract 
services  are  attractive  to  the  railroads;  however,  unless  sizable  rail  welding  programs 
are  planned,  the  economics  are  not  necessarily  in  favor  of  such  welding  points  remote 
from   fixed  welding  installations." 

Attitudes  of  the  steel  companies  are  generally  favorable  to  fixed  commercial  plants; 


1  Companies  queried:  Linde  Company,  Oxweld  Railroad  Dept.,  Thermex  Metallurgical  Co.,  Inc., 
Matisa  Railvveld  Inc.,  N-ti-nal  Cylinder  Gas.  Division  of  Chemetron  Corp.,  and  Mobilweld,  Inc.,  U.  S. 
Steel  Corp.,   Bethlehem   Steel    Co..   Colorado   Fuel   and  Iron   Corp.,   and   the   New  York   Central  System. 

-  Plants  now  operating:  Harrisburg,  Pa.,  and  Ensley  (Birmingham},  Ala.,  by  Linde  Compnay, 
Division  of  Union  Carbide  Co.,  Summit  (Argo),  III.,  and  Birmingham,  Ala.,  by  Matsisa  Railvveld  Inc. 
The  latter  plant    has  been   temporarily  shut   down,   I   understand. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 461 

however,  none  of  the  steel  companies  has  expressed  an  interest  in  doing  welding  or  in 
supplying   extra-long    rails    themselves. 

One  steel  executive  says,  "Initial  concepts  of  fixed  welding  plants  and,  more 
specifically,  those  located  at  or  near  a  mill  source  for  rail  were,  in  my  opinion,  excellent 
from  the  standpoint  of  providing  the  entire  railroad  industry  with  an  efficient  means 
of  securing  rail  welded  into  lengths  longer  than  39  ft.  This  enables  each  individual  road 
to   meet   what  is  generally   considered  standard    for  an   economic  basic  track  structure. " 

Another  steel  official  states,  "We  do  know  that  the  location  of  welding  plants  close 
to  our  mills  has  been  very  beneficial  to  small  railroads,  contractors,  and  industrial  users 
who  could  not  otherwise  afford  to  have  their  rail  welded.  This  has  been  an  excellent 
innovation  and  without  question  has  increased  the  amount  of  welded  rail  used  by  the 
industry.  In  summary,  we  are  most  pleased  with  our  neighbor  welding  plants  and  can 
see  absolutely  no  advantage  to  us  or  to  our  customers  in  establishing  a  plant  of 
our  own." 

A  major  Eastern  railroad  has  done  commercial  rail  welding  at  one  of  the  fixed 
plants  which  is  still  in  operation.  This  welding  proved  entirely  satisfactory,  according  to 
a  spokesman  for  the  engineering  department  of  that  railroad.  It  should  be  noted  that 
the  plant  is  conveniently  located  on  an  affiliated  line  of  the  railroad.  Currently  this 
railroad  is  running  a  "double-line"  gas  plant  at  a  central  location  on  its  property. 

Economics  of  Fixed  Plants 

It  appears  to  be  unfair  to  compare  the  costs  at  a  fixed  plant  with  those  of  a  mobile 
plant.  Rather,  the  cost  to  a  particular  railroad  for  a  given  quantity  of  rail  produced 
at  the  fixed  plant  must  be  compared  to  the  cost  of  a  similar  quantity  produced  by  any 
other  method  for  the  same  railroad. 

According  to  the  proponents  of  the  fixed  contract  plants,  they  enable  small  roads 
to  avail  themselves  of  continuous  welded  rail  at  less  cost  than  would  otherwise  be 
possible.  It  appears,  however,  that  any  fixed  plant  requires  sufficient  orders  to  maintain 
volume  production.  High  production  keeps  costs  per  welded  joint  down,  thus  making 
it  feasible  to  operate  a  fixed  plant.  Examples  are  cited  of  fixed  commercial  plants  that 
are  said  to  produce  welds  at  lower  costs  to  the  railroad  than  the  railroad's  own 
mobile  plant. 

Some  steel  mill  men  see  a  problem  in  coordinating  mill  production  with  the  demands 
of  the  welding  plant.  Offhand  this  would  seem  to  be  a  scheduling  and  storage  problem. 

Says  one  steel  man,  "Obviously,  any  mill  has  the  ability  to  provide  rail  tonnages 
exceeding  the  capacity  of  the  welding  plant,  and  must,  to  meet  the  inherent  demands 
of  an  integrated  steel  mill,  so  schedule  its  production.  While  this  fact  presents  problems, 
I  am  sure  coordinated  planning  and  scheduling  can  overcome  the  difficulties  presented 
and  assure  mutual  benefits  for  both  operations.  Beyond  this  factor,  the  transit  equip- 
ment and  AAR  loading  requirements  to  which  shipments  of  welded  rail  are  subject 
affected  the  ability  of  an  off-line  welding  facility  to  load  and  ship  in  a  manner  similar 
to   that  possible   when    welding   was  done   on   and    for  an    individual   railroad." 

It   seems   reasonable    to   assume    that    until    the    railroad    industry    as   a    whole    can 
coordinate  their  efforts  and  adjust  the  car  and  loading  requirements  u<  adequately  sat 
isfv   intermediate  lines,  the  overall   value  of  a   fixed   welding  plant    is  limited.   Unfor- 
tunately,  this   failure  has  a   major  affect   on   the   smaller   lines   who.   by   virtue   of   their 
size,  are  unable  to  take  advantage  of  welded  rail. 

The  basic  problem  is  in  scheduling.  The  onlj  successful  way  a  fixed  welding  plant 
can  in-  operated   i-  to  have  volume  spread  evenlj   over  the  month-    You  can  not   gel 


462  Continuous   Welded    Rail 


this  unless  the  railroads  are  willing  to  cooperate  and  schedule  both  their  welding  and 
their  rail  deliveries  over  the  year. 

"With  very  few  exceptions,  the  cooperation  has  been  mainly  in  spirit  rather  than 
in  fact,"  states  one  man. 

"There  is  a  striking  disadvantage,"  says  the  New  York  Central,  "in-so-far  as  any 
particular  railroad  is  concerned  in  having  a  fixed  commercial  plant  on  its  lines  to  serve 
other  railroads.  Extraordinary  switching  service  must  be  provided  to  serve  these  com- 
mercial welding  plants.  When  a  quarter-mile  train  load  of  rail  has  been  welded  com- 
plete, the  full  train  must  be  switched  out  and  an  empty  train  set  in  quickly  in  order  to 
avoid  shutting  down  at  the  welding  machine.  Also  the  switching  of  rails  from  the  steel 
mill  into  the  contract  welder,  storing  empty  train  sets  one-quarter  mile  long  presents 
transportation  problems  and  expense.  One  particular  railroad  must  stand  these  expenses 
while  only  receiving  a  nominal  switching  charge  for  the  service." 

Problems   Confronting   the   Welding   Company 

Companies  which  had  been  interested  in  fixed  plant  welding  list  a  number  of 
reasons  for  their  disenchantment: 

1.  A  fixed  plant  is  tied  to  a  single  railroad  in  which  switching  service  to  the  plant 
leads  to  rate  conflicts. 

2.  Operating  employees  at  the  permanent  site  become  tied  to  the  working  conditions 
of  the  nearby  large  steel  mill.  The  small  plant  cannot  support  this. 

3.  Fixed  plants  require  permanent  structures  which  are  more  susbtantial  and  more 
costly  than  the  mobile  plants.  The  investment  in  these  can  not  be  overcome  by 
equivalent  increases  in  welding  charges. 

4.  Real  estate  and  property  taxes  skyrocket  on  the  fixed  plant. 

5.  Railroads  fail  to  schedule  welding  over  the  entire  calendar  year.  Instead  they 
adhere  to   seasonal   work  demands.  This  policy  does  not  justify  fixed  plants. 

6.  The  customers  of  the  fixed  plant  are  frequently  competitive  railroads.  All  want 
their  work  at  the  same  time.  This  requires  that  the  welding  plant  switch  alternately 
from  one  job  to  another  with  the  attendant  problems  of  upsetting  production  routines. 

7.  It  is  said  to  be  uneconomical  to  build  and  operate  a  welding  plant  large  enough 
to  keep  pace  with  the  mill  output.  Therefore  the  welding  plant  must  face  high  demur- 
rage and/or  high  storage  costs.  At  a  mobile  plant  on  a  railroad,  the  individual  railroad 
uses  its  own  cars  and  lets  them  wait. 

While  both  a  steel  producer  and  a  welder  mention  this  item,  it  appears  to  be  a 
storage  and  scheduling  problem.  Doubtlessly  when  the  plant  is  run  by  the  welder  using 
leased  property  and  leased  railroad  cars,  the  operation  does  become  expensive.  Presum- 
ably, the  railroads  use  their  own  facilities  and  their  own  cars  when  welding  is  done  on 
their  own  lines.  Thus,  the  railroads  absorb  a  cost  that  looms  significantly  large  to  the 
outside  fixed  welding  plant. 

8.  Excessive  cost  of  welding  inspection  which  must  be  performed  on  the  welding 
site  by  either  a  railroad  man  or  a  representative  of  an  inspection  firm.  The  representa- 
tive must  live  near  the  site.  Welding  companies  would  not  want  to  assume  the 
rseponsibility   of  making  the   inspections. 

9.  While  the  fixed  commercial  plant  works  out  very  well  for  the  smaller  railroads, 
it  poses  problems  for  the  larger  roads.  These  must  often  satisfy  their  traffic  depart- 
ments by  buying  rail  from  one  or  more  particular  steel  mills.  To  prevent  excessive 
cross  hauling,  the   large  road  needs  more  than  one  welding  site. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail  463 


10.  Railroads  have  shifted  their  freight  rates  after  plants  have  been  established, 
charging  more  for  one  length  of  rail  than  for  another  length.  In  the  case  of  one  plant, 
the  freight  increase  was  so  great  as  to  affect  materially  the  cost-profit  ratio. 

11.  Competition  among  the  mobile  plants  is  said  to  be  so  great  that  the  fixed 
plants  can  not  charge  adequately  to  meet  their  added  expenses.  While  the  small  rail- 
roads which  require  only  a  relatively  small  mileage  of  welded  rail  in  any  given  year 
would  gladly  pay  an  extra  charge  for  their  welded  rail,  the  economics  of  welding  are 
such  that  only  the  big  orders  can  sustain  the  plant. 

12.  Further  upsets  in  the  economics  of  continuous  welded  rail  are  coming  as  more 
and  more  roads  construct  CTC  (centralized  traffic  control)  installations,  releasing  quan- 
tities of  used  rail.  Much  of  this  rail  will  be  in  satisfactory  shape  for  cropping  and 
welding  into  long  lengths.  Mobile  welding  plants  will  greatly  minimize  the  cross  hauling 
of  this  rail. 

Summary 

In  summary,  it  can  be  said  that  a  good  mobile  plant  appears  to  be  more  profitable 
to  its  operator  than  a  fixed  plant.  If  the  railroads  feel  there  is  a  need  for  fixed  plants, 
they  must  give  some  encouragement,  even  to  the  extent  of  helping  plants  which  serve 
some  other  railroad.  Aids  to  the  operators  and,  hence,  to  the  railroad  industry  take  the 
form  of:  (1)  Simple,  favorable  freight  rates  and  switching  charges.  (2)  Cooperation  in 
scheduling  rail  to  be  welded.  (3)  A  method  for  avoiding  per  diem,  demurrage,  and 
storage  costs.  (4)  Joint  operation  of  a  fixed  plant  with  a  group  of  other  railroads, 
thus  spreading  support   costs  and  risks. 

In  short,  inter-railroad  cooperation  appears  to  be  necessary  if  all  railroads  are  to 
enjoy  the  maximum  benefits  of  welded  rail  ...  in  fact,  if  fixed  commercial  continuous 
rail  welding  plants  are  to  survive. 


464 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Laying 

M.  S.  Reid  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  J.  Brown,  R.  E.  Dove,  D.  T.  Faries,  O.  E. 
Fort,  E.  M.  Hodges,  T.  B.  Hutcheson,  H.  W.  Jenkins,  A.  C.  Jones,  Jr.,  W.  J. 
Jones,  A.  B.  Lewis,  B.  M.  Monaghan,  L.  W.  Neville,  Jr.,  J.  R.  Rymer,  R.  A.  Shaw. 

Your  committee  presents  its  report  on  Assignment  2  in  three  parts.  Part  1  presents 
statistics  on  mileage  of  continuous  welded  rail  laid  since  1933.  Part  2  presents  for  adop- 
tion and  publication  in  the  Glossary  of  the  Manual  a  definition  for  continuous  welded 
rail.  Part  3  is  a  monograph  on  the  laying  of  continuous  welded  rail  on  new-line  con- 
struction as  done  on  the  Santa  Fe  Railway. 


Part  1 
Statistics 


Track  Miles  of  Continuous  Welded  Rail  Laid,  by  Years,  1933-1962 


1933 
1934 
1935 
1936 


0.16 
0.95 
4.06 
1.52 


1937  31.23 


1939 
1942 
1943 
1944 
1945 
1946 


6.04 
5.48 
6.29 
12.88 
4.81 
3.91 


1947  18.70 

1948  29.93 

1949  33.05 

1950 50.25 

1951  37.25 


1952  40.00 

1953  80.00 

1954  87.00 


Oxy- 


1955  194.50 

1956  372.33 

1957  390.47 

1958  148.11 

1959  378.65 

1960  299.42 

1961  94.13 

1962  310.59 


Electric- 


acetylene       Flash         Total 


72 

89.10 
159.65 
312.13 
691.92 
961.20 
926.50 
1183.34     1493.93 


266.50 

461.43 

550.12 

460.24 

1070.57 

1260.62 

1020.63 


7037.55 


Break -Down  of  Continuous  Welded  Rail  Laid  in  1962 — Track  Miles 


Oxyacetylene 

Electric  Flash 

Totals 

New 

Second- 
Hand 

New 

Second- 
Hand 

Main  Track 

151.79 
1.21 

154.12 
3.47 

768.19 

397 . 66 
17.49 

1471.76 
22.17 

153.00 

157.59 

768.19 

415.15 

1493.93 

Continuous    Welded    Rail 465 

Part  2 
Definition   of   Continuous    Welded    Rail 

Having  given  the  matter  considerable  study  and  thought  during  the  past  year,  your 
committee  has  developed  a  definition  for  continuous  welded  rail  which  it  now  submits 
for  adoption  and  publication  in  the  Glossary  of  the  Manual. 

The  definition  is  as  follows: 

Continuous  Welded  Rail. — A  number  of  rails  welded  together  in  lengths  of  400  ft  or 
longer.   CWR 

Part  3 

Monograph — Single-  and   Multiple-Track   Laying,   Using 

Continuous    Welded    Rail    in    1440-Ft    Strings, 

as   Done   by   the   Atchison,   Topeka 

&  Santa  Fe  Railway  on  New 

Line  Construction 

By  R.  A.  STANE 

Construction  Engineer,   Coast   Lines 
Atchison,   Topeka   &   Santa   Fe   Railway 

The  methods  used  in  the  construction  of  the  first  track  of  a  double-track  railroad 
and  the  second  track  of  a  double-track  railroad  are  basically  the  same  as  those  employed 
in  the  construction  of  a  single-track  railroad,  modified,  however,  so  as  to  take  advan- 
tage of  the  second-track  roadbed  which  may  be  used  for  trucking  ties  for  the  first  track 
and  making  use  of  the  first  track  constructed  for  the  distribution  of  ties  for  the  second 
track.  The  center  of  the  force  and  equipment  organization  in  either  case  is  a  machine 
called   the  "straddle  buggy."  designed  and  built  by  the  Santa  Fe. 

SINGLE  TRACK  CONSTRUCTION 
Distribution  of   Materials  Prior  To  Track  Laying 

The  Santa  Fe  anchors  its  tie  plates  with  studs  and  has  found  it  to  be  economical 
to  secure  the  plates  to  the  ties  at  the  treating  plant.  Ties  are  banded  in  bundles  of  16 
and  loaded  ino  gondolas — the  bands  being  of  sufficient  strength  to  permit  the  handling 
of  the  bundles  without  the  use  of  slings.  The  tie  gondolas  are  spotted  for  transloading 
the  ties  to  trucks  as  near  the  railhead  as  practicable;  12  bundles  of  ties  are  transferred 
by  a  12-ton  crane  to  each  20-ton  flatbed  truck.  The  ties  are  then  trucked  along  a 
maintenance  road  alongside  the  roadbed  to  a  ramp  beyond  the  tie  head.  The  truck  is 
backed  down  the  roadbed  to  a  second  12-ton  truck  crane  which  transfers  the  ties,  a 
bundle  at  a  time,  to  a  sled  which  it  draws  along  the  roadbed  center  line  marked  by 
yellow-headed  track  spikes  so  spaced  as  to  accommodate  .1  bundles  between  spikes.  The 
bands  are  cut.  and  as  the  sled  is  drawn  along  the  center  line  the  ties  are  crowded  off 
the  sled  onto  the  subgrade.  Approximately  16  loads  may  be  placed  on  the  ground  in 
an  8-hr  day.  Using  .'4  cross  ties  per  39-fl  panel,  one  force  can  place  4<i  miles  of  ties 


466 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Distribution  of  ties  for  the  first  track. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


467 


Distribution  of  ties   for  the  second  track. 


468 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Rear  view  of  straddle  buggy  just  before  making  a  pull. 
Note  roller  slide  ramps. 


each  5-day  week.  Normally,  this  will  create  a  bottleneck,  as  it  is  possible,  with  equip- 
ment now  in  use  by  the  Santa  Fe,  to  lay  8  miles  of  track  each  S-day  week.  Therefore, 
if  a  high  rate  of  production  is  desired,  two  such  tie  unloading  operations  will  be  neces- 
sary. However,  in  the  event  the  line  under  construction  is  comparatively  short,  it  might 
be  more  practicable  to  permit  a  single  tie-unloading  force  to  start  sufficiently  in  advance 
of  the  track-laying  operation  to  maintain  a  lead  to  the  end  of  the  job.  Consideration 
should  be  given  the  extended  length  of  haul  which  may  result  in  this  handling. 

All  other  materials  are  distributed  without  the  use  of  trucks  during  the  track  laying 
operation. 

Track  Laying  and  Distribution  of  Remaining  Materials 

In  the  future,  Santa  Fe  plans  to  unload,  distribute,  space,  and  aline  cross  ties  with 
machines  not  yet  developed,  but  until  this  mechanization  is  possible,  ties  will  be  alined 
and  spaced  manually  using  conventional  methods;  i.e.,  tie  tongs  with  spacers  and 
chalk  lines. 

Rails  welded  into  1440-ft  strings  are  pulled  off  in  pairs  by  the  straddle  buggy.  The 
leading  rail  ends  are  pulled  over  an  idler  car,  by  means  of  two  ^-in  by  80-ft  cables, 
until  the  deflection  is  such  that  a  direct  connection  can  be  made  at  the  rear  axle  of 
the  straddle  buggy.  A  spreader  is  then  clamped  on  the  rails,  approximately  60  ft  behind 
the  rail  ends,  to  hold  them  at  gage  distance  apart  and  to  prevent  them  from  rolling. 
Rollers  are  carried  on  the  deck  of  the  buggy  which  are  placed  on  the  ties  at  50-ft  inter- 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


469 


.A 


General  view  of  straddle  buggy  pulling  two  rails  from  cars.  Note  men, 
about  midway  between  the  straddle  buggy  and  cars,  attaching  spreader  to 
the  rails  to  prevent  their  rolling  over. 


vals  and  centered  on  the  plates  to  receive  the  rails  as  they  are  drawn  off  the  cars. 
A  second  spreader,  identical  in  design  to  the  one  at  the  head  end,  is  clamped  to  the 
rails  approximately  100  ft  ahead  of  their  trailing  ends  as,  otherwise,  the  rails  will  roll 
just  before  the  rail  ends  reach  the  end  of  the  idler  car. 

Joints  are  made  by  pulling  each  rail  slightly  past  the  one  previously  unloaded  and  then 
pushing  it  back  to  a  connection.  Occasionally  the  handling  will  be  inadvertently  rough; 
therefore,  neither  of  the  spreaders  is  removed  until  the  second  rail  has  been  pushed 
back,  to  its  connection.  As  the  joints  are  being  bolted,  the  buggy,  straddling  the  rails 
and  ties,  returns  to  the  railhead  where  it  picks  up,  by  means  of  hydraulic  lifts,  the 
rails  resting  on  the  rollers,  and  as  it  moves  forward  a  swell  is  created  in  the  rails 
slightly  ahead  of  the  straddle  buggy,  thus  making  possible  the  removal  of  the  rollers 
by  means  of  "rollerbarrows"  designed  for  this  purpose.  The  rollers  are  then  lifted  out 
of  the  rollerbarrows  and  raised  mechanically  to  the  straddle  buggy  deck  where  they  are 
stored  for  the  pulling  of  the  next  pair  of  rails.  As  this  operation  is  progressed,  the  rails 
descend  behind  the  buggy  onto  the  tie  plates  where  they  are  spiked  at  every  sixth  tie 
by  two  pneumatic  spike  hammers  powered  by  a  125-cfm  air  compressor  mounted  on 
the  front  end  of  the  idler  car  which  precedes  the  rail  car.  This  car  carries  a  one-day 
supply  of  track  spikes  for  every  sixth  tie,  joints,  bolts,  and  nut  locks.  The  compressoi 
also  supplies  air  for  the  wrench  used  on  the  track  bolts. 

Radio  communication  is  provided,  by  means  of  a  packset,  between  the  engineer  and 
the  brakeman  at  the  idler  car  so  as  to  safely  control  the  train's  movement  over  the 
newly   laid   track   immediately   behind   the   spiki 

The  rail  train  is  made  up  of  the  idler  car;  the  rail  cars;  a  box  car  carrying  track 
spikes  in  kegs;  the  engine;  the  caboose;  a  gondola  carrying  joints,  kegs  of  bolts,  and 


470 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Rollers  carrying  rails. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


471 


Buggy  moving  forward  lifting  rail  to  free  rollers.  Rails  descend  directly 
to  the  tie  plates  with  the  assistance  of  a  laborer. 


472 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Roller  freed  just  ahead  of  the  buggy  is  removed  by  a  rollerbarrow. 


nut  locks;  and  a  gondola  loaded  with  rail  anchors.  The  box  car  carrying  track  spikes  is 
equipped  with  pouches  hung  from  the  doors  on  both  sides,  and  these  pouches  are  loaded 
with  kegs  of  spikes  while  the  train  is  standing  as  the  rails  are  being  pulled  off.  Spikes 
are  distributed  from  these  kegs  as  the  train  moves  forward  keeping  pace  with  the  spikers 
ahead  of  the  idler  car.  The  gondola  carrying  rail  anchors  is  equipped  with  two  flumes 
hung  over  the  trailing  end  of  the  car  and  anchors  are  cast,  by  laborers  equipped  with 
ballast  forks,  into  the  flumes  which  discharge  onto  a  side-boarded  push  car  capable  of 
carrying  the  anchors  needed  for  1440-ft  of  track.  The  push  car  is  loaded  while  the 
train  is  standing,  and  anchors  are  distributed  from  the  push  car  as  the  train  is  moving 
forward   behind   the   spiking  operation. 

Spikes  are  driven  in  the  remaining  S  of  each  6  cross  ties  by  4  pneumatic  hammers 
powered  by  a  315-cfm  on-track  air  compressor  immediately  behind  the  distribution  of 
rail  anchors. 

Four  machines  fasten  the  rail  anchors  directly  behind  the  spiking  operation  to 
complete  the  track  laying. 

In  order  to  avoid  sun  kinks,  ballast  is  unloaded  directly  behind  the  last  anchor- 
setting  machine  and  in  such  quantity  as  to  provide  sufficient  ballast  for  the  first  4-in 
raise.  If  light  ballast  material  is  used,  the  track  is  raised  immediately  to  avoid  loss  of 
alinement   resulting  from   temperature   changes. 


Continue)  u  s    \V  e  1  d  e  d    Kail 


47.^ 


Roller  lifted  mechanically  to  deck  of  buggy. 


Force  and  Equipment 

Transloadtng  ami  Distribution  of  Cross  Ties 
1 — Extra  gang  fonman  in  charge  of  tie  work. 

Transloadinc  from  Gondolas  to  Tie  Trucks: 
3 — Laborers  in  gondola: 


474 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Driving  line  spikes  in  every  sixth  tie  just  ahead  of  the  slowly 
moving  rail  train. 


1 — Laborer  on  tie  truck. 
1 — Crane  operator. 

Distributing,  Spacing,  and  Alining  Ties: 
2 — Laborers  on  tie  truck. 
1— Crane  operator  transferring  ties  from  trucks  to  the  tie  sled  drawn  by  the  crane. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


475 


■:>■'■'     :  -    > 

Loading  spike  pouches  while  rail  train  stands  during  a  pull. 


2 — Laborers  crowding  ties  off  of  sled  to  roadbed. 
5 — Laborers  rough  spacing  and  rough  lining  ties. 
4 — Laborers  close  spacing  ties. 
4 — Laborers  close  lining  ties. 


Equipment: 


2— Truck  Cranes  (12  ton) 
1— Tie  sled. 


476 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Feeding  rail  anchor  flumes  while  the  rail  train  stands  during  a  pull, 


Variable — 20-ton    flatbed   trucks.   The   number   required   is   dependent    upon   the    length 
of  haul. 

The  above  force  and  equipment  will  handle  3072  cross  ties  per  8-hr  day. 
Track  Laying  and  Distribution   of  Remaining  Materials 

1 — Extra  gang  foreman. 

1 — Timekeeper. 

1 — Assistant  foreman  ahead  of  the  rail  train. 

1 — Assistant  foreman  directly  behind  the  rail  train. 

1 — Assistant   foreman   supervising   the   unloading   of    ballast    for   first   raise. 

1 — Machine  operator  on  the  Straddle  Buggy. 

8— Laborers  with  the  Straddle  Buggy. 

While  pulling  out  rails:  2  men  on  top  of  Buggy  moving  rollers  from  deck  to 
chutes;  4  men  removing  rollers  from  chutes  and  placing  them  under  rails  at 
SO-ft  intervals;  2  men  lining  rails  into  rollers  as  rails  descend.  While  recovering 
rollers:  2  men  on  rollerbarrows  pulling  rollers  out  from  rails  directly  ahead 
of  the  Straddle  Buggy ;  2  men  operating  hooks  suspended  from  mechanical 
roller  lifting  device;  2  men  on  top  of  Buggy  storing  rollers  on  deck;  2  men 
immediately   behind  the   Buggy  lining  the  descending  rail  into   the  tie  plates. 


Co  n  tin  u  o  u  s   \V  elded    Rail 


177 


Rail  anchor  flumes  loading  side  boarded  push  car  used  for  distribution. 


4 — Laborers  straightening  ties. 

2 — Laborers    with    push    car    distributing    spikes    fur    every    sixth    tie.    Push    car 

loaded  with  four  kegs  of  spikes  is  mounted  on  unspiked   rail  ahead  of  spike 

drivers. 
4 — Laborers  setting  up  spikes  for  every  sixth  tie. 
2 — Laborers  operating  pneumatic  spike  hammers.    (These  same  laborers  place  the 

track  joints  and  tighten    track   bolts  with  an  air  wrench.) 
2 — Laborers  nipping  ties. 
1 — Laborer  water  boy. 


The  gang  is  divided  at   this  point   bj    the  rail  work  train.  The  point   ol   the  train 
pushes  a  rail   ramp  designed  to  prevent   the  trailing  rail  ends  from  dropping  ofi  the  end 

of   the   idler   car.   The    ramp  is  equipped    with    flanged    wheel-   so   that    it    may   be   pushed 


478 Continuous    Welded    Rail 

along  the  track.  It  serves  a  dual  purpose  as  it  carries  a  pair  of  pipes  which  provides  air 
for  the  hammers  at  hose  connections  10  ft  ahead  of  the  leading  end  of  the  ramp — this 
lor  the  safety  of  the  spike  drivers  and  to  eliminate  the  need  for  hose  carriers. 

A  radio  packset  is  stationed  at  the  idler  car  to  provide  communication  between 
the  extra  gang  foreman  and  the  radio-equipped  straddle  buggy  during  the  pulling  opera- 
tion  and   between   the  brakeman   and   the  engineer  during   the  spike-driving  operation. 

1 — Laborer   releasing   rail   tie-down   anchors  in    middle   of   train.   All  anchors  are 

released  at  once  so  as  to  free  this  man  for  odd  jobs  behind  the  rail  train. 
2 — Laborers  loading  spike  car  pouches  and  distributing  spikes  for  the  remaining 

5  of  each  6  cross  ties. 
4 — Laborers  transloading  rail  anchors  from  gondola  to  side-boarded  push  car  and 

distributing  for  application. 
6 — Laborers  straightening  ties. 
6 — Laborers  setting  up  spikes. 

2 — Laborers  operating  double-headed  pneumatic  spike  drivers. 
2 — Laborers  nipping  ties. 

1 — Machine  operator  with  an  on-track  air  compressor. 
2 — Laborers    operating    two    double-headed    pneumatic    spike    hammers    or    twe 

single-headed  drivers. 
2 — Laborers  nipping  ties. 
4 — Laborers  positioning  rail  anchors. 
4 — Machine  operators  with  anchor-fastening  machines. 
1 — Laborer,  water  boy. 
2 — Laborers,  camp. 
1 — Machine   operator  with   pickup   truck  refueling   and  greasing  equipment — also 

used  for  starting  equipment. 
1 — Crane  operator  for  setting   equipment  on   and  off  at   the  beginning  and  end 

of  each  day.  Balance  of  day  man  fills  in  at  odd  jobs. 
2 — Equipment  maintainers. 
1 — Machine  operator  on  spreader. 
9 — Laborers  unloading  ballast. 

Equipment: 

1 — Straddle  Buggy — powered  by  a  diesel  engine  equipped  with  power  steering 
and  power  brakes.  Inside  clearance  between  tires  12  ft  4  in.  Minimum  clearance 
above  level  ground  2  ft  8  in.  Also  equipped  with  two-way  radio. 

2 — Rollerbarrows. 
60 — Rollers  (crawler  tractor  idlers  mounted  on  frames). 

1 — Push  car  for  distribution  of  track  spikes 

2 — Pneumatic  spike  hammers. 

1 — Air  wrench. 

1 — Ramp  pushed  by  idler  car. 

1 — 125-cfm  air  compressor  mounted  on  idler  car. 

1 — Radio  packset. 

1 — Rail  train  comprised  of  an  idler  car;  rail  cars  equipped  with  rollers;  a  box 
car  for  track  spikes  (equipped  with  pouches);  a  two-unit  diesel  engine;  a 
caboose ;  a  gondola  serving  as  a  supply  car ;  and  a  gondola  carrying  rail 
anchors  (gondola  equipped  with  two  flumes). 

1 — Push  car  for  distribution  of  anchors. 


Continuous   Welded   Rail 479 

1 — 315-cfm  air  compressor. 
4 — Pneumatic  spike  hammers. 
4 — Anchor-setting  machines. 

1 — 40-car  ballast  train  powered  by  a  four-unit  diesel  engine. 
1 — Spreader. 

1 — Air  wrench  for  winding  up  ballast  cars. 

1 — Truck  crane  for  setting  equipment  on  and  off  track  at  the  beginning  and  end 
of  each  day. 

FIRST   TRACK   OF   DOUBLE-TRACK    CONSTRUCTION 

Distribution  of  materials  and  construction  of  the  first  track  of  double-track  con- 
struction is  identical  to  that  of  single-track  construction  except  that  tie  trucks  may  use 
the  roadbed  for  the  second  track  as  a  roadway,  thus  shortening  the  haul  and  eliminating 
the  back-up  movement  to  the  crane  on  the  roadbed. 

The  first  track  cannot  be  given  more  than  its  first  4-in  raise  prior  to  pulling  out 
the  rail  for  the  second  track  as,  otherwise,  the  pulling  power  of  the  straddle  buggy 
will  be  lost  to  poor  traction  in  the  loose  ballast  spilling  over  into  areas  in  which  it 
must  operate. 

SECOND  TRACK  OF  DOUBLE-TRACK  CONSTRUCTION 

Distribution  of  materials  and  construction  of  the  second  track  of  double-track  con- 
struction is  identical  to  that  of  single-track  construction  except  that  ties  are  removed 
from  the  gondolas  directly  to  the  tie  sled  by  the  crane  pulling  the  sled,  thus  eliminating 
a  12-ton  crane  and  the  20-ton  flatbed  trucks  but  requiring  an  additional  work  train 
to  move  the  tie  gondolas  alongside  the  crane.  The  force,  reduced  by  the  number  of 
laborers  who  would  otherwise  work  on  the  trucks,  can  distribute  8  miles  of  ties  in  a 
6-day  week. 

Santa  Fe  schedules  its  work  to  lay  1.6  track  miles  per  day,  as  its  present  double- 
deck  rail  trains  are  equipped  to  carry  twenty-four  1440-ft  rails — a  2-day's  supply.  Other 
than  3.2  miles  per  day,  any  other  schedule  would  necessitate,  on  the  one  hand,  returning 
to  the  welding  plant  with  a  part  load  or,  on  the  other  hand,  attempting  to  switch  rail 
trains  through  the  gangs.  With  minor  modifications,  the  above  force  and  equipment  are 
capable  of  laying  daily  from  1.9  to  2.2  miles  of  track — the  principal  modification  being 
the  use  of  four-deck  cars.  At  the  same  time  the  capacity  of  the  welding  plant  would 
be  increased  from  120  welds  per  8-hr  shift  to  the  number  required  to  keep  pace  with 
the  track-laying  operation. 

Report  on  Assignment  3 

Fastenings 

C.  W.  Wagner  (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  P.  Anderson,  J.  D.  Case,  J.  E.  Campbell, 
O.  E.  Fort,  R.  G.  Garland,  B.  J.  Gordon,  R.  A.  Hostetter,  A.  J.  Kozak,  Wolters 
Ledyard,   C.  E.  Morgan,  G.  L.  Todd. 

Having  given  consideration  to  comments  and  criticisms  regarding  the  AREA  recom- 
mendation for  the  number  and  position  of  rail  anchors  on  continuous  welded  rail, 
adopted  at  the  1961  convention,  your  committee  submits  the  following  revision  with 
the  recommendation  that  it  be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual,  replacing  the 
present  document  on   page   5-5-4.2. 


480 Continuous    Welded    Rail 

RAIL   CREEPAGE— NUMBER   AND   POSITION   OF   RAIL  ANCHORS 
(CONTINUOUS  WELDED  RAIL) 

Effective  anchorage  for  continuous  welded  rail  must  provide  restraint  for  tempera- 
ture stresses  and  creepage  stresses  due  to  train  movement.  For  main  tracks  carrying  one- 
or  two-direction  traffic,  it  is  considered  that  the  anchorage  of  each  rail  at  alternate  ties 
to  restrain  its  movement  in  either  direction  throughout  the  length  of  the  continuous 
rail  will  provide  effective  anchorage.  Other  methods  of  providing  anchorage  have  also 
given  satisfactory  results. 

Through  buffer  rails,  turnouts,  or  other  special  trackwork  adjoining  continuous 
welded  rail,  the  rails  should  be  anchored  at  alternate  ties  against  movement  in  either 
direction. 

Sufficient  anchorage  should  be  provided  on  the  conventional  rail  adjoining  continu- 
ous welded  rail  to  prenvent  creepage  of  the  conventional  rail. 


Report  on  Assignment  4 

Maintenance 

C.  R.  Merriman  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  F.  Beck,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  R.  G.  Garland, 
B.  J.  Gordon,  J.  H.  Greason,  E.  M.  Hodges,  J.  L.  Hodgkinson,  H.  W.  Jenkins, 
A.  C.  Jones,  J.r,  C.  P.  Martini,  A.  S.  McRae,  L.  W.  Neville,  Jr.,  B.  R.  Prusak, 
F.  L.  Rees,  R.  A.  Shaw,  R.  E.  Dove,  D.  T.  Faries,  W.  J.  Jones. 

The  information  for  this  report,  which  is  submitted  as  information  was  obtained 
from  a  questionnaire  on  the  practices  used  in  timbering  and  surfacing  in  conjunction 
with  the  laying  of  welded  rail  on  the  railroads  represented  by  members  of  the  Special 
Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail. 

Timbering  seems  to  be  almost  universally  carried  out  before  the  surfacing  opera- 
tion, with  variations  in  time  and  methods  as  developed  by  individual  roads.  Some  ties 
are  installed  immediately  behind  a  ballast  sled,  others  during  an  out-of-face  lift,  still 
others  by  digging  them  in  ahead  of  the  lift  and  using  a  spot  tamper  only  on  those  ties 
installed;  in  this  case  the  track  is  surfaced  right  after  welded  rail  laying.  One  road 
reports  that  they  put  in  their  ties  during  an  out-of-face  lift  one  year  in  advance  of 
the  rail  laying.  The  track  is  then  spot  tamped  after  the  welded  rail  is  laid. 

Most  roads  agree  on  installing  ties  on  a  cycle  basis  with  variations  in  cycles  from 
3  to  10  years,  which  does  not  necessarily  coincide  with  a  particular  road's  resurfacing 
time.  Also,  in  some  cases  the  end  of  a  cycle  may  occur  so  close  to  the  laying  of  welded 
rail  that  no  ties  are  installed  ahead  of  the  surfacing  for  this  welded  rail. 

In  the  matter  of  spacing,  most  roads  use  24  ties  per  39-ft  rail,  making  no  attempt 
to  respace  ties,  other  than  those  badly  slewed,  bunched,  or  coming  under  a  bolted 
joint;   most  roads  use  a  3-tie  joint. 

Surfacing  on  most  roads  is  carried  out  before  the  welded  rail  is  laid  on  the  premise 
that  once  the  welded  rail  is  put  down  it  should  be  disturbed  only  for  reasons  of  abso- 
lute necessity  and  then  only  when  it  is  impractical  to  schedule  the  work  in  advance 
of  the  rail  laying. 

The  amount  of  the  raise  varies  from  a  "skin"  lift  to  a  4-in  out-of-face  lift,  and 
seems  to  be  determined  by  the  condition  and  cleanliness  of  the  ballast,  and  how  long 
it  has  been  since  the  track  was  last  surfaced.  The  road  reporting  the  4-in  lift  does  this 
after   using  a  ballast  sled;   they  also   then  follow  up  their   rail   relay  with  a   2-in  lift. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail  481 


Most  roads  think  that  future  surfacing  m  the  welded  rail  will  be  done  at  tempera- 
tures within  plus  or  minus  20  F  of  the  temperature  at  which  the  rail  was  laid.  One 
road  having  a  considerable  amount  of  welded  rail  gives  no  consideration  to  the  tem- 
perature, other  than  avoiding  extremes.  As  to  when  the  track  will  again  be  surfaced, 
such  things  as  condition  of  subgrade,  traffic  density,  maximum  train  speed,  rainfall  and 
other  climatic  conditions,  are  considered,  although  most  agree  that  it  will  be  at  least 
5  years  before  they  think  it  will  be  necessary.  Several  roads,  however,  pick  up  each  year 
any   low  spots  that  develop,  particularly  at  the  conventional  joints. 

Information  on  follow-up  surfacing  after  rail  is  laid  indicates  that  most  roads  do  so 
immediately  or  within  60  days.  This  may  be  a  skin  lift  or  spot  surfacing.  One  railroad 
reported  that  they  set  a  zero  lift  on  the  lead  buggy  or  target,  and  each  tie  is  tamped 
to  bring  it  up  to  grade  and  tighten  each  tie  plate. 

The  size  and  kind  of  ballast  used  in  welded  rail  territory  on  roads  reporting  do  not 
vary  from  that  used  on  conventional  rail.  Most  roads,  however,  try  to  maintain  a  full 
crib  to  the  top  of  the  tie,  with  the  ballast  section  6  in  beyond  the  end  of  the  tie,  on  a 
slope  of  2  to  1  to  the  sub-ballast.  Generally  the  ballast  is  unloaded  ahead  of  the  sur- 
facing,  with   more,  if  needed,  being  unloaded  after  the  surfacing. 

Information  gathered  for  this  report,  although  varying  from  road  to  road,  shows 
a  trend  toward  a  general  practice  that  is  being  followed  by  most  roads  in  timbering 
and  surfacing  welded  rail.  This  practice  is  to  do  most  of  the  work  ahead  of  the  rail 
laying,  including  timbering,  surfacing,  lining,  filling  cribs  and  widening  the  ballast 
section,   with   only   touch-up  work  performed  after  laying. 


Report  on  Assignment  5 

Economics 

T.  C.  Shedd  (chairman,  subcommittee),  S.  H.  Barlow,  J.  F.  Beaver,  R.  F.  Beck, 
W.  J.  Cruse,  J.  H.  Greason,  Wolters  Ledyard,  C.  P.  Martini,  B.  M.  Monaghan, 
S.  H.  Poore.  F.  L.   Rees,  J.  R.   Rymer,   G.  L.  Todd,  C.  E.  Weller. 

The  ultimate,  indeed  almost  the  only  real,  justification  for  the  use  of  continuous 
welded  rail  is  economic.  Railroads  would  not  use  welded  rail  if  they  did  not  believe 
it  would  produce  economic  benefits.  That  the  railroads  are  benefiting  is  shown  by  the 
rapidly  growing  use  of  welded  rail.  However,  the  exact  extent  of  those  benefits  is  not 
always  clear. 

With  this  in  mind,  Subcommittee  5  was  instructed  to  gather  as  much  detailed  infor- 
mation as  possible  on  the  maintenance  costs  of  continuous  welded  rail.  To  accomplish 
this,  the  subcommittee  prepared  a  questionnaire,  with  items  as  listed  in  Table  1. 

The  intention  was  to  make  this  questionnaire  practicable,  but  detailed  enough  so 
that  the  same  form  could  be  used  to  develop  consistent  and  reliable  figures  in  repeated 
surveys  over  a  period  of  years.  It  was  also  thought  that  some  railroads  not  now  keeping 
welded  rail  cost  records  mi^ht  wish  to  start  doing  so  in  a  manner  compatible  with  this 
questionnaire  form.  To  make  them  as  meaningful  as  possible,  labor  figures  are  called 
for  in  terms  of  average  annual  man-hours  per  track   mile. 

The  questionnaire  was  sent  to  80  railroads  known  or  believed  likely  to  have  con- 
tinuous welded  rail  in   service.   Replies   were   received    from   48. 

Not  very  surprisingly,  only  a   handful  of  the  railroads  which  answered  hail  kept 


482 Continuous    Welded    Rail 

detailed  records  of  comparative  stretches  of  welded  and  jointed  track.  Table  1  tabulates 
the  results  from  seven  railroads  which  did  report  in  some  detail. 

In  general,  these  railroads  are  maintaining  welded  track  with  anywhere  from  3 
percent  to  59  percent  fewer  man-hours  than  required  for  similar  jointed  track.  Com- 
monly, the  saving  seems  to  run  about  20  to  30  percent.  (One  short  stretch  on  the 
Western  Maryland  has,  so  far,  required  more  man-hours  than  a  similar  jointed  stretch.) 

The  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  although  unable  to  furnish  a  breakdown  as  called  for 
in  the  questionnaire,  did  report  382  man-hours  per  track  mile  to  maintain  6.75  miles 
of  133,  140  and  155-lb  welded  track,  compared  with  430  man-hours  per  track  mile  for 
4.84  miles  of  similar  jointed  track. 

It  is  also  apparent  that  railroads  having  welded  rail  are  using  less  track  material 
(except  anchors)  in  maintaining  welded  rail  than  is  required  for  comparable  jointed 
track.  Out-of-face  surfacing  cycles  are  being  lengthened,  as  is  the  expected  life  of  the 
rail  in  track. 

Question  11  requested  comment  on  the  differences,  if  any,  in  the  reasons  for  failure 
of  ties  in  welded  track  as  compared  with  jointed  track.  From  the  comments  received, 
it  appears  that  ties  fail  for  the  same  reasons  in  either  type  of  track ;  however,  most 
roads  noted  that  they  have  fewer  tie  failures  in  welded  track  due  to  fewer  joint  ties, 
which  usually  fail  first. 

Question  12  solicited  any  pertinent  comments  with  respect  to  the  maintenance  of 
welded  rail.  A  number  of  railroads,  including  some  which  could  not  complete  the 
questionnaire,  did  have  observations.  In  general,  these  comments  confirm  that  welded 
track  requires  less  spot  surfacing,  lining  and  tie  renewals.  Bolt  tightening,  joint  bar 
and  bond  replacements  are  greatly  reduced.  The  problems  stemming  from  rail  end 
batter  are  minimized.  More  attention  to  anchors  is  required. 

A  number  of  railroads  commented  on  the  expected  life  of  welded  rail  in  track  and 
the  anticipated  time  cycle  for  out-of-face  surfacing.  One  railroad  predicts  a  40  to  50 
percent  increase  in  the  surfacing  time  cycle ;  it  expects  rail  life  in  the  first  position  laid 
to  be  increased  by  50  percent  on  the  average,  with  a  100  percent  increase  on  tangent 
track. 

It  should  be  noted  that,  in  most  cases,  these  predictions  of  rail  life  and  surfacing 
cycle  can  be  only  informed  estimates  at  this  time,  due  to  the  relatively  short  time 
welded  rail  has  been  in  service. 

However,  the  Delaware  &  Hudson,  which  has  had  welded  rail  in  track  since  the 
1930's,  states,  "We  have  found  that  in  the  welded  rail  installations  which  we  have,  the 
life  of  the  rail  is  at  least  twice  that  of  rail  in  jointed  track  .  .  .  Out-of-face  surfacing 
is  not  required  as  frequently  ...  It  is  our  opinion  that  continuous  welded  rail  will  go 
twice   as  long  between   out-of-face  surfacings  as  jointed  track." 

Several  railroads  reported  that  while  they  do  not  have  figures  available  at  present, 
they  are  now  keeping  cost  comparison  records  and  will  make  the  results  available  to 
the  subcommittee  for  subsequent  reports. 

It  is  suggested  that  this  study  be  repeated  in  perhaps  two  or  three  years,  in  order 
to  obtain  more  complete  results  and  to  detect  any  trend  in  the  relationship  between 
maintenance  costs  of  welded  and  jointed  track. 

The  subcommittee  plans  to  conduct  a  similar  survey  on  rail  welding  costs,  com- 
pared with  the  cost  of  conventional  joint  assemblies,  during  1963. 

This  report  is  presented  as  information. 


American  Rat; 

Special  CommJ 

Subcc 


MAINTENANCE  <F   TRAC 
COMPARED  WITH 


1  Track  mileage  included  in 

2  Weight  of  rail 

3  Tear  laid  this  location 
h  New  or  second  hand?  If  S 
5  Gross  tonnage  this  track 
6a  Date  of  last  out-of-face 
6b  Amount  of  lift,   inches 

7  LABORi  ATerage  annual  —n 

7a  Inserting  tiee 

7*  Replacing  failed  rails 

7c  Checking  or  repairlnp  wel 

7d  Repairing  pullaparts 

7e  Installing  other  track  mat 

7f  Placing  ballast 

7g  Spot  surfacing 

7h  Out-of-face  surfacing 

7i  Lining  track 

7 J  Gaging  track 

7k  Adjusting  anchors 

71  DrlTing  down   spikes 

7«i  Tightening  and  renewing  b 

7n  Welding  battered  Joints 

7o  Repairing  insulated  Joint 

7p     Oiling  Joints 

7q     Other 

7r     Equipment  (Track  machines 

8  Materials  —  Merage  an 

8a  Ties 

8b  Rail 

8c  Joint  bars 

8d  Bolts 

8«  Spikes 

8f  Tie  plates 

8g  Anchors 

8h  Ballast 

81  Weld  battered  Joints 

9  Estimated  life  of  this 

10  Time  cycle  out-of-face 

11  Reasons  for  tie  failure 

12  Other  comments       (See  t 


No  S] 
posit 

Does 


Repaid 
Estliu 
A»eraC 


i  XeUiray   Knglneerlry?,   , 


:    SMIUR  .'OIjNTKD   TRACK 


Iwr  1.: 


Qross  tonnage  tbls  track  has  c. 
Bmte  of  Last  out-of-faee  ballai 


7        UBOR;   ATerege   i 


i     Inserting  ties 

BeplaciDg  railed  rails 

i     Eepairing      _    i;„r? 

i  Installing  otner  track  ne' 

:     Placing  ballast 

Spat  surfacing 
i     Out-of-fece  surfacing 

|     Gaging  track 
Adjusting  anchors 
DrlTing  down  spikes 
lightening  end  renewing  t 

.  Uridine  bettered  joints 
Repairing  insulted  Joinl 
Dlliag  joints 

Equipment  (Track  sucnine! 
t         Materials  —  "rerage  a 


SFlkea 


!  cycle  out-->f-f( 


Welded       J'td 

"elded 

chrield(a) 

Ml 

77*1 

mi„i 

.-72? 

W.ld  d     Jointed 

Weld  d  Jol  t  d 

eatern  Maryland 

keldad 

"£1T 

».,* 

"LntlT 

.3 

3.5 

Western  haryld 
'aided  'lolntd 

5.0         5.0 

12.7 

12.7 

27.5 

25.9 

ill 

20 

6-6 

6.6 

13.2 

10.1,5           10.5 

5.15 

5.0 

1.19 

1.0 

3.5 

2.75      3.0 

13!           13! 

132 

132 

115 

115 

132 

132 

132 

132 

115 

132                 131 

115 

100 

132 

132 

132 

132 

112          90 

12/17         1/50 

59-6! 

1957 

57.58 

53-56 

56-57 

55-56 

1960 

1,9-50 

1959 

1960             1959 

1960 

50-51 

1962 

11-19 

1961 

1950 

1961        1936 

New            New 

Ne. 

Ne. 

Km, 

New 

Be. 

Hew 

New 

Hew 

New 

New                New 

Hew 

SH  32-36 

He. 

New 

S.H. 

New 

SH  1,7 

151          119 

10.3  f 

lh.lt 

15  r 

15  1 

17 

17 

n 

" 

31 

29.35  )      29.35  j 

5.11  3 

5.U  J 

5.185 

p    5.165  p 

9.18  r 

2.01  r       2.01  r 

1951        1951 

I960 

57  k  61 

57-58 

53-56 

1960 

1961 

1960 

1962 

1959 

1961 

1961 

1962 

1960 

1962 

1958 

n 

81            H 

lju.! 

lj   to   2 

6 

6 

2 

2 

i 

U 

6 

a        a 

2i 

2j 

2i 

2i 

2i 

2j 

W6.3(c>  6U7(6j 

25. 

56. 

560.5 

6321.0 

153 

217 

58  a 

107. 

9 

623  a          782 

651 

677 

615. 

755  . 

569.75 

.665.5 

301  a       179 

16.2        9.1 
0.3 

5.1 

1.1        lli.6 

20.5 

36 

38 

30  L 
5 

30 
8 

3 

5 

> 

55               72 

30             30 

32 

27 
32 

55 
32 

32 

0.25 

37 

37 

Incl.  In  71 

" 

° 

2322 

5513 

32 

1,0 
50 

10 

25 

* 

151           173 

115 

210 

115 

118 
219 

166 

156 

112 
158 

80           128 

L52.1      612.6 
8.7          1.1 

0.6 

25 

56 

56 

In  7g 
590 

" 

6 

5 

8 
6 

n 

5 

, 

22               37 

n                96 

12 

96 
18 

16 
32 

i 

37 
96 

- 

18 
37 
91 

61 

25           31 
6 

1.6          3.5 

2li 

12 

6 

" 

" 

5 

3                   5 

3 

3 

5 

0.5 
3 

0.5 

5 

6.1,  (d> 

1 

w 

160  h 

2  m 

16  » 

30.3  (•)  31.2I. 

■ 

■ 

36.5 

81, 
30 

9 

70 

16 

26.25 

112               119 

76                    92 
39 

37 

37 

96 

103 

58 

81 

97 

79 
39 

8           11 

338          274 

31 

271 

175 

7 
232 

750 

20 

30 

n 

n 

119               212 

51 
13 

8 
132 

19 

3 

25 

250          250 

70 

117 

210 

350 

37               37 

37 

37 

15 

15 

37 

37 

35            28 

30 

25 

35 

20 

28 

» 

1,5  u 

12-15 

21 

20 

15 

IS 

17            111 

5 

3 

3                 3 



_7 

1 

poelte  ihlnking  of 


id*   equipment   {item   7r) 


Correcting  expansion 

CHI  MAS  applied  to  rail  and  fittings 

lnbor  for  repairinp  pullaparts  shoidc 
Slotting  Joints 

No  record,  or  figures  rot  avelleble 


Continuous   Welded   Rail 483 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Welding  Second-Hand  Rail 

J.   F.   Beaver    (chairman,  subcommittee),  M.  P.   Anderson,   S.  H.   Barlow,  J.  D.   Case, 
C.  O.  Conatser,  R.  E.  Dove,  D.  T.  Faries,  W.  J.  Jones. 

In  the  past,  the  continuous  welded  rail  laid  in  main  tracks  has  been  almost  entirely 
new  rail.  However,  experience  with  the  welded  relay  rail  in  the  past  two  or  three  years 
has  revealed  that  the  use  of  welded  rail  can  be  expanded  much  further  than  first 
anticipated. 

Economies  in  the  use  of  welded  relay  rail  are  comparable  to  those  realized  from 
the  welding  of  new  rail.  The  cost  of  preparing  relay  rail  for  welding  is  relatively  small, 
and  the  amount  of  new  rail  needed  can  be  greatly  reduced  by  the  use  of  relay  rail. 
Once  the  relay  rail  is  welded,  the  cost  of  laying  and  handling  is  no  more  than  for 
welded  new  rail 

Relay  rail  has  the  advantage  of  being  cold-rolled,  and  if  straightened,  cropped,  and 
welded  in  the  same  sequence  as  originally  positioned  in  track,  it  can  be  used  in  high- 
speed track.  Riding  qualities  will  be  equal  to  that  of  new  rail. 

There  is  a  use  for  most  any  class  of  rail  in  a  balanced  continuous  welded  rail  pro- 
gram, as  it  will  produce  maintenance  economies  in  most  any  class  of  track,  the  only 
limitation  being  the  amount  of  rail  available  for  the  various  classes  of  track. 

Properly  handled,  the  use  of  welded  relay  rail  makes  for  an  unusually  flexible  pro- 
gram. It  is  possible  to  upgrade  many  miles  of  main  track  with  the  use  of  a  compara- 
tively small  amount  of  new  rail.  Rail  released  when  new  rail  is  laid  can  be  cropped, 
straightened,  welded  and  relaid,  releasing  other  rail  for  reconditioning,  welding  and 
relaying.  This  process  can  be  repeated  until  the  loss  from  cropping  and  culling  reduces 
the  working  stock  to  the  point  where  further  laying  would  not  be  practicable. 


Monograph — Continuous   Welded   Rail   in   Europe* 

By  R.  E.  DOVE 

Associate   Editor,   Railway  Track  and   Structures 

Some  of  the  practices  used  by  European  railroads  with  regard  to  continuous  welded 
rails  may  seem  quite  unusual  to  American  railroaders.  Some  may  appear  to  be  quite 
daring.  Many  can  be  attributed  to  the  high  traffic  density  carried  and  the  need  to 
release  tracks  for  operation  as  quickly  as  possible. 

WELDED  RAIL  IS  STANDARD  IX  GERM  ANN 

The  German  Federal  Railway  has  carried  out  service  tests  of  welded  rail  sino  19  I 
and  extensive  tests  in  1949  and  1950.  Welded  rail  was  adopted  as  Standard  practice  in 
1954.  At  present  in  excess  of  one-third  of  all  main  lines  is  laid  with  continuous  welded 
rail.  The  road  is  adding  to  it  at  the  rate  of  1200  miles  of  track  per  year. 


*  From  Information  obtained  by  M.   H.  I>iik.  vice-president   and  editor,   Railway  Track  and  Struc- 
tures, (hiriim  a  visit   to  three  European  countries  in  April  1962. 

Hull.  .177 


484 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


The  use  of  welded  rail  is  standard  practice  in  Germany, 
along  with  concrete  ties. 


Continuous    Welded   Rail 485 

Fabrication  of  Welds 

Rail  for  the  German  railroads  is  presently  being  rolled  in  lengths  of  30  meters 
(98.4  ft).  When  these  are  to  be  laid  in  continuous  welded  rail  track,  they  generally  are 
joined  by  the  electric-flash  butt-welding  process  into  lengths  of  120  meters  (394  ft). 
However,  rails  45  meters  (103  ft)  and  60  meters  (197  ft)  in  length  are  laid  on  the 
sharper  curves. 

The  rails  (49  kg  per  meter  or  99  lb  per  yard)  are  welded  automatically  in  modern 
welding  machines  having  an  upset  force  of  25  to  3i  tons  and  a  gripping  force  of  about 
60  tons.  The  production-line  principle  is  used  for  welding  both  the  second-hand  (80-lb 
or  heavier)  and  new  rails,  and  storage  areas  are  provided  for  each.  Gantry  cranes  un- 
load the  new  rails  of  conventional  length  from  cars  onto  storage  beds  and  also  carry 
them  from  the  storage  bed  to  the  production  line.  In  the  case  of  second-hand  rails,  the 
lengths  first  go  to  a  point  where  they  are  straightened  by  means  of  a  four-sided  straight- 
ening press.  These  second-hand  rails  then  go  to  a  machine  which  removes  the  burrs, 
then  to  a  rail  cutter  where  they  are  cropped.  From  this  point  on,  the  new  and  cropped 
rails  follow  the  same  procedure,  another  gantry  crane  being  used  to  move  the  new 
rails  from  the  storage  bed  to  the  production  line. 

The  electrode  contact  points  on  the  rails  are  ground  by  a  machine,  then  powered 
rollers  convey  the  rail  to  the  welding  machine.  After  being  welded,  the  upset  weld 
metal  is  removed  from  the  head,  web  and  base  by  pneumatic  chipping  hammers  while 
still  red  hot.  At  this  point  the  welded  cropped  rails  will  go  through  a  mobile  saw  to 
cut  them  into  120-meter  lengths.  All  welded  joints  then  are  restraightened  in  a  four- 
sided  straightening  press  and  mechanically  planed  and  ground  at  a  grinding  station. 
They  are  then  loaded  directly  onto  a  train  of  flat  cars  either  by  means  of  several  gantry 
cranes  working  in  unison  through  a  central  electrical  control,  or  by  pulling  the  lengths 
one  by  one  on  the  cars  by  cable  winches.  The  average  production  of  the  welding  plant 
is  about  95  welds  in  an  8-hr  shift.  Some  plants  double  this  output  by  having  two 
welders  and  a  double-production  line. 

Laying  the  Long  Lengths 

The  rails  are  unloaded  from  the  flat  cars  of  the  rail  train  by  anchoring  the  ends  to 
the  track  and  moving  the  train  out  from  under  the  rails.  They  are  placed  between  the 
existing  running  rails. 

When  the  rails  being  laid  are  of  the  same  section  as  those  coming  out,  and  the 
plates  and  fastenings  are  suitable  for  reuse,  a  special  rail  layer  device  is  used.  It  is  com- 
prised of  two  roller  dollies,  connected  by  cables  about  30  ft  apart,  which  lifts  the  old 
rails  and  moves  them  outward  to  the  ends  of  the  ties,  and  lifts  the  new  rails  and  places 
them  on  the  tie  plates.  This  transposition  is  done  with  one  pass  of  the  dollies,  which 
are  pulled  by  a  heavy  gang  motor  car  at  about  2  mph.  The  leading  dolly  rides  on 
double  flanged  wheels  on  the  existing  rail  and  the  second  dolly  rolls  on  the  new  rail. 

The  rails  are  placed  without  joint  gaps,  regardless  of  the  rail  temperatures,  and 
welded  together  in  lengths  of  360  meters  (1180  ft).  The  field  welds  are  made  by  the 
aluminothermit  welding  process. 

Under  favorable  weather  conditions  the  360-meter  lengths  are  welded  together  as 
laid,  otherwise  they  are  temporarily  joined  by  make-shift  joint  bars  supported  by  wood 
blocking  or  by  special  joint  connections  that  require  no  joint  bar  bolts.  As  soon  as  a 
so-called  "neutral  temperature"  prevails,  the  fastenings  on  the  360-meter  lengths  are 
loosened  and  the  rails  arc  hammered  by  heavy  mallets  to  permit  them  to  elongate  natu- 


486 Continuous   Welded    Rail 

rally  to  ''no-stress."  The  rail  sections  are  then  joined  by  closure  welds  and  the  fasten- 
ings screwed  tight,  section  for  section,  almost  at  the  same  time.  Xo  expansion  tapered 
rails  are  used  where  the  ends  of  the  long  welded  rails  join  the  conventional  jointed  track. 

The  temperatures  in  Central  Europe  range  from  -30  to  60  C  (-22  to  140  F).  The 
mean  of  these  temperatures  is  15  C  (59  F).  The  German  Federal  Railway  prefers  to 
have  the  rail  in  a  tensile  state  during  the  winter  weather  rather  than  to  chance  track 
buckling  in  the  summer.  For  this  reason  they  place  the  "neutral  temperature"  5  C 
higher  than  the  mean,  i.e.,  at  20  C,  and  allow  a  variation  of  3  C  above  and  below  this 
adjusted  mean.  In  other  words,  the  neutral-temperature  zone  is  established  as  from  17 
to  23  C  (62  to  74  F).  Its  experience  has  been  that  when  fractures  do  occur  in  low  freez- 
ing temperatures,  when  the  sections  are  welded  at  neutral  temperature,  the  pull-apart 
^aps  with  their  standard  rail  fastenings  range  only  from  20  to  22  mm.  (51/64  to  %  in), 
which  is  considered  harmless. 

When  it  is  not  desired  to  hold  up  the  field  closure  welds  until  favorable  weather 
creates  the  neutral  temperature,  the  road  frequently  changes  the  temperature  of  the  rail 
artificially.  For  raising  the  temperature  two  men  shove  a  push-car,  holding  huge  con- 
tainers of  propane  and  oxygen  gas  and  towing  a  heating  manifold  over  each  rail,  along 
the  rails  while  they  are  in  an  unloosened  condition.  For  lowering  the  rail  temperature,  a 
cooling  agent  of  some  kind  is  used. 

Recently,  a  new  quick  thermit  welding  process  has  been  introduced  that  consider- 
ably reduces  the  preheating  time.  The  previous  method  involved  the  casting  of  a  mold 
of  plastic  refractory  clay  for  each  weld  and  required  24  min  for  preheating  the  rail  ends 
to  1000  C  and  35  min  for  the  entire  weld.  The  new  weld  method  makes  use  of  prefabri- 
cated molds  and  a  special  preheating  burner.  With  the  improved  equipment  the  pre- 
heating time  is  reduced  to  4J^  min  and  total  welding  time  to  12  min.  The  thermit  weld- 
ing is  carried  out  by  two-man  welding  gangs  with  each  man  carrying  out  two  such 
welds  simultaneously.  Weld  failures  are  reported  to  be  only  few  in  number. 

Fastenings  Are  GEO  Type 

The  German  Federal  Railway  insists  upon  using  a  rail  fastening  that  secures  the 
rail  elastically  to  the  tie  and  with  a  high  resistance  to  torsion  and  resistance  to  longi- 
tudinal movement.  For  this  purpose  it  has  adopted  the  "K"  fastening  system  (known  as 
GEO  in  this  country) .  This  fastening  includes  the  tie  plate  and  anchor  in  one  device. 
The  tie  plate  is  canted,  double-shouldered,  and  is  attached  to  the  tie  by  hold-down  screw 
spikes  in  wood  ties  and  pre-set  bolts  in  concrete  ties.  A  U-shaped  clip  fits  over  each 
tie  plate  shoulder  and  bears  on  the  plate  on  one  side  and  the  rail  flange  on  the  other. 
It  is  held  in  place  by  a  bolt  with  a  special  head  which  is  inserted  into  a  receptacle  in 
the  tie  plate  shoulder  and  turned  to  have  the  underside  of  the  head  engage  the  metal  of 
the  shoulder.  A  nut  with  spring  washer  completes  the  assembly. 

The  same  general  type  of  fastening  is  used  for  both  concrete  and  wood  ties.  With 
concrete  ties,  however,  a  thin  poplar  wood  pad  is  placed  between  the  tie  and  tie  plate. 

Maintains  Full  Ballast  Shoulders 

Welded  rail  is  laid  only  in  track  with  a  stabilized  subsoil.  The  jointed  rails  are  laid 
at  locations  subject  to  landslides,  unstable  subsoil  and  mining  areas  where  subsidence 
occurs. 

Ties  are  spaced  at  about  24.6-in  centers,  providing  2620  ties  per  mile.  Hard  stone 
ballast  from  1%  to  2l/2  in.  in  size  is  standard,  except  in  station  grounds  where  gravel 
may  be  used.  The  ballast  section  is  12  in  deep  under  the  ties,  level  with  the  top  of  ties 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 487 

(except  in  signal  territory  white  ballast  is  maintained  about  1  in  below),  and  has  14-in 
shoulders  with  concrete  ties  hut  heaped  shoulders  with  wood  ties.  The  latest  survey 
showed  that,  in  January  1959,  51  percent  of  all  ties  in  track  were  wood,  40  percent  were 
steel,  and  9  percent  concrete.  However,  the  concrete  and  wood  ties  are  presently  being 
installed  on  about  a  50/50  basis.  The  purchase  of  steel  ties  was  discontinued  in   1938, 

The  German  Federal  Railway  believes  that  the  mere  track  is  disturbed  while  being 
maintained,  the  more  chance  there  is  for  it  to  buckle  in  summer.  The  road  also  insists 
that  maintenance  forces  must  keep  the  fastenings  tighl  and  that  special  care  be  given  to 
maintaining  the  large  ballast  shoulders. 

In  the  event  of  a  pull-apart  during  cold  temperatures  while  the  rail  is  in  tension, 
the  maintenance  crew  installs,  over  a  distance  of  5  meters  (16.4  ft)  on  both  sides  of  the 
break.  10  anti-creeper  devices  to  witshtand  tensile  and  compressive  forces.  This  is  re- 
ported to  prevent  widening  of  the  gap  under  traffic.  If  a  pull-apart  occurs  when  tem- 
perature conditions  are  neutral,  this  measure  of  protection  is  not  considered  necessary. 

Breaks  in  rails  are  welded  when  a  neutral  rail  temperature  is  reached.  Prior  to 
welding,  however,  the  fastenings  are  loosened  for  a  certain  distance  on  each  side  of  the 
break.  For  temporary  connections  while  waiting  for  the  rail  temperature  to  reach  the 
neutral  zone,  makeshift  joint  bars  supported  by  wood  blocking  or  by  special  connections 
that  require  no  bolts  through  the  rail  are  used. 

In  general,  it  is  permissible  in  Germany  to  lay  welded  rail  on  curves  down  to  a 
radius  of  500  meters  (1640  ft  or  3  deg  30  min  curve).  This  is  considered  the  limit  outside 
of  the  station  areas. 

Maximum  Train  Speed  to   Be  Raised 

Top  train  speed  is  now  about  87  mph.  It  is  planned  to  raise  maximum  train  speed 
to  100  mph  in  1962  with  the  objective  of  setting  it  at  124  mph  in  3  years.  This  is  being 
done  to  compete  with  the  air  lines  between  cities  that  are  about  185  to  310  miles  apart. 

Because  of  this,  German  engineering  officers  are  contemplating  stepping  up  the 
surfacing  cycle  on  the  lines  involved.  Present  practice  is  to  surface  main  tracks  on  a 
cycle  of  two  to  six  years,  depending  on  the  amounts  of  traffic  carried.  It  is  expected 
that  the  surfacing  cycle  will  have  to  be  put  on  a  six-month  basis  when  the  higher  speeds 
have  been  placed  in  effect. 

Rehabilitates  Track  Completely 

It  has  been  traditional  practice  in  Germany  to  make  a  complete  renewal  of  main- 
line tracks  on  an  average  of  about  25  years.  At  this  time  the  rails,  fastenings  and  ties 
are  replaced  with  new  material  and  the  entire  ballast  section  cleaned.  New  track  i-  ex 
changed  with  the  old  by  the  track-panel  method  with  the  joints  left  square.  However, 
because  of  the  greater  weight  of  concrete  ties  compared  with  wood  ties,  and  the  long 
lengths    of    welded   rails,    certain    modifications   in    the    track-laying   method    were    made. 

In  rebuilding  tracks  German  engineers  may  use  any  one  of  six  different  procedures, 
depending  largely  upon  traffic  and  operating  conditions.  At  one  extreme  is  the  situation 
where  complete  cessation  of  traffic  is  permissible  on  a  section  of  track  between  stations 
over  a  distance  of  about  4  kilometer-  (2.S  miles).  Under  these  circumstances  the  rebuild- 
ing work  can  be  fully  mechanized  and  is  carried  oul  in  two  shifts,  Production  avei 
slightly  less  than  one  hall   mile  of  track  per  shift. 

\t  the  other  extreme  i-  the  situation  where  no  traffic  interruption  is  permissible, 
requiring  the  work  to  be  done  under  traffic  Under  SUCfa  conditions  it  i-  not  possible  to 
use  much  machinery.  This  procedure   i-   followed   OIUJ    in   exceptional  cases 


488 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Track  is  completely  rebuilt  in  Germany  every  20  to  25  years.  After 
welded  strings  are  unloaded  the  ballast  is  thoroughly  cleaned  by  under- 
track  ballast  cleaner. 


According  to  German  engineers,  they  are  able  to  obtain  complete  possession  of  the 
track  in  carrying  out  about  78  percent  of  all  track-rebuilding  work.  For  10  percent  of 
the  work  they  have  possession  of  the  track  for  one  work  shift.  The  remaining  12  percent 
is  rebuilt  under  traffic. 

The  K-l  System  of  Rebuilding  Track 

When  they  have  full  possession  of  the  track,  German  engineers  have  adopted  a 
standard  procedure  which  they  call  the  K-l  system.  The  120-meter  welded-rail  lengths 
are  unloaded  between  the  existing  running  rails.  The  entire  ballast  section  is  then  cleaned 
by  machines.  One  type  of  the  latter  removes  the  material  from  underneath  the  track, 
cleans  it  and  returns  the  cleaned  stone  to  the  track.  Another  type  of  ballast  cleaner 
used  does  its  work  after  the  old  track  has  been  taken  up. 

The  next  work  operation  is  the  construction  of  a  working  track  with  the  rails  at 
a  gage  of  3.28  meters  (about  10  ft  9  in).  A  special  machine  follows  behind  the  ballast 
cleaner  and  digs  holes  to  receive  pedestals  for  supporting  the  working-track  rails.  The 
pedestals  are  adjustable  for  height  and  lateral  displacement.  After  the  pedestals  are  in- 
stalled, the  new  120-meter  welded  rails  are  set  on  them  and  are  carefully  positioned  as 
to  gage,  line  and  level.  Special  manually  operated  gantries  are  used  to  pick  up  and  set 
the  rails  on  the  pedestals. 

With  the  welded  rails  out  of  the  way,  the  old  track  is  taken  up.  This  is  done  by 
separating  the  track  into  30-meter  panels  which  are  then  lifted,  moved  back  and  loaded 
onto  cars  by  a  series  of  connected  motorized  gantries  operating  on  the  working  track. 

The  next  operation  is  the  preparation  of  the  ballast  surface  to  receive  the  concrete 
ties.  A  special  tractor-bulldozer,  guided  and  positioned  by  rollers  operating  on  the  work- 
ing rails,  removes  the  excess  ballast  from  between  the  work  rails.  A  transverse  conveyor 
behind   the  blade  of  this  machine  discharges  the  excess  ballast  to  the  track  shoulders. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


489 


Hydraulically   operated  ballast-cleaning  machine  digs  holes  for  the  installa- 
tion of  pedestals  on  which  to  set  the  120-meter  welded  rail  strings. 


The  smoothed  roadbed  is  packed  down  by  a  crawler-mounted  vibratory  com- 
pactor. Following  this  operation  the  roadbed  is  prepared  for  receiving  the  ties  by  a 
special  machine  which,  operating  on  the  work  rails,  lays  down  and  compacts  two  "rib- 
bons" of  ballast.  These  are  2Y%  in  deep  and  3.28  ft  wide  and  are  separated  by  a  gap 
of  about  8  in  at  the  center  line  The  machine  picks  up  the  ballast  it  needs  from  the 
track  shoulders.  By  following  this  roadbed  compaction  procedure,  the  road  is  enabled 
to  permit  train  operation  at  normal  speeds  immediately  after  the  track  renewal  is 
complete.  Xo  tamping  work  is  necessary  for  a  year. 

The  concrete  ties  are  then  placed  by  a  tie  layer  machine,  operating  on  the  working 
rails,  that  lowers  the  ties  individually  to  the  roadbed.  This  machine  is  served  by  a  tie 
transporter  which  carries  18  ties  per  trip  from  a  work  train  to  the  layer.  The  trans- 
porter, towed  by  an  inspection-type  motor  car,  travels  on  temporary  rails  laid  at  stand- 
ard  gage   on   the  concrete  ties. 

The  next  operation  is  the  transposition  of  the  welded  rails  from  the  working  track 
to  their  final  standard-gage  position  on  the  new  ties.  Manually  operated  gantries  are 
used  for  this  purpose.  The  120-meter  lengths  are  then  joined  by  thermit  welds,  this 
work  being  done  with  due  regard  to  the  neutral  rail  temperature  previously  described. 
A  ballast  distributor  then  fills  the  tie  cribs,  and  another  machine,  called  a  ballast  rake, 
pulls  the  ballast  for  rebuilding  the  shoulders  and  the  slopes. 

Another   System  of   Rebuilding  Track 

Where  heavy  traffic  prevails  and  the  trackmen  are  allowed  possession  of  the  track 
for  from  3  to  6  hr,  another  rehabilitation  procedure  is  followed. 

Ballast  cleaning  i-  a  separate  operation  and  is  carried  out  in  advance  of  other  work. 
The  working  track  also  is  constructed. 


490 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Welded  rails  are  carefully  positioned  on  the  pedestal  supports  at  an 
exact  gage  of  10  ft  9  in  and  true  surface.  These  work  rails  serve  as  guides 
for  subsequent  work. 


Old  track  panels  are  picked  up  by  powered  mobile  gantry  cranes,  rolled  back 
and  placed  on  cars  of  work  train. 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


491 


Crawler  bulldozer  removes  excess  ballast  from  between  the  work  rails  and 
deposits  it  on  the  sides  by  a  cross  conveyor  behind  the  blade. 


Ballast  is  compacted  by  a  vibratory  tamper  after  which  two  ribbons  of 
ballast  are  spread  by  a  machine  to  provide  even  bearing  for  the  support  of 
the  concrete  ties. 


4<>  2 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


Concrete  ties  are  lowered  individually  onto  the  roadbed  by  a  tie  layer 
operating  on  the  work  rails. 


The  ties  are  distributed  by  a  work  train  and  temporarily  stored  alongside  the  track. 
A  special  gantry-type  machine,  operating  on  rails  on  each  edge  of  the  flatcar  loaded 
with  the  ties,  unloads  them.  The  same  machine,  extended  to  working-track  rail  gage, 
is  used  to   install  the  ties   later  on. 

At  the  first  3-hr  train  interval  after  the  ties  have  been  distributed,  the  old  track 
is  removed  and  packed  as  described  with  the  K-l  system.  The  gantry-type  tie  machine 
then  installs  the  ties,  the  welded  rails  are  transposed  from  the  working  track  to  standard 
gage,  the  cribs  are  filled,  and  the  track  is  restored  to  service  at  a  limited  speed  of  30 
mph.  Tamping  is  done  during  the  next  interval  between  trains.  Using  this  procedure, 
engineers  report  that  it  is  possible  to  lay  500  meters  (1640  ft)  of  track  in  a  6-hr 
traffic  break. 

Also  Uses  Track-Panel  Method 

Still  another  track  rebuilding  procedure  makes  use  of  the  track-panel  method.  Panels 
of  track,  varying  from  39  to  78  ft  in  length,  are  preassembled  using  concrete  ties  and 
temporary  rails.  They  are  loaded  four  panels  high  on  flat  cars.  Meanwhile,  the  working 
track  is  built  using  the  long  welded  rails. 

As  soon  as  a  traffic  interval  occurs,  a  set  of  gantry  cranes  starts  picking  up  and 
loading  the  old  track  panels  onto  empty  flat  cars.  Right  after  the  first  old  panel  is 
removed,  a  bulldozer  and  the  vibratory  packer  machine  are  unloaded  from  their  track 
carts  and  commence  working  the  roadbed.  After  60  meters  of  roadbed  have  been  com- 
pleted, the  new  track  panels  are  laid  by  a  second  set  of  gantry  cranes  moving  on  the 
working  track. 

When  240  meters  (787  ft)  of  new  track  have  been  laid,  the  welded  working  rails 
are    exchanged    for    the    temporary    panel    rails.    Ballast    distributors   and    ballast    rakes 


Continuous    Welded    Rail 


493 


When  welded  rail  is  laid  at  temperatures  below  the  "neutral"  tempera- 
ture zone  it  will  be  heated  artificially  and  hammered  with  mauls  to  make  it 
assume  its  normal  length.  The  fastenings  are  then  tightened  promptly  on 
entire   string. 


When  relaying  rail  in  kind,  the  old  rail  is  lifted  off  the  plates  and  placed 
along  the  ends  of  the  ties  while  the  new  welded-rail  strings  are  deposited 
on  the  old  plates  in  one  pass  of  two  transfer  buggies. 


494  Continuous   Welded   Rail 

complete  the  ballast  section.  The  track  is  then  listened  to  traffic  under  orders  restricting 
speeds  to  20  to  30  mph.  The  next  day,  power  tampers  consolidate  the  ballast,  after 
which  trains  are  permitted  to  operate  at  full  speed.  The  welded  rails  are  joined  by 
thermit   field  welds  on  the  third  day. 

Uses   Shims   for   Minor   Surface    Corrections 

After  the  new  track  has  been  in  service  for  three  weeks,  the  trackmen  find  that, 
despite  the  great  care  used  when  rebuilding  the  track,  minor  errors  in  level  will  fre- 
quently develop.  The  size  of  the  stone  ballast  (1  to  2l/2  in)  discourages  the  shovel 
packing  method  of  surfacing  refinement  so  the  road  uses  thin  poplar  wood  shims. 

The  GEO-type  fastening  makes  use  of  a  wood  shim  anyway  between  the  rail  base 
and  the  rail  seat  of  the  tie  plate,  and  the  plate  is  built  to  retain  these  shims.  Trackmen 
merely  add  another  thin  shim,  from  2  to  10  mm  (5/64  to  -J  3  in.)  in  thickness,  to  cor- 
rect any  discrepancy  in  level.  This  is  done  by  unloosening  the  nuts  of  the  rail  fastenings, 
raising  the  rail,  slipping  the  shim  in  and  retightening  the  fastening. 

Experience  on  the  German  Federal  Railway  has  been  that  the  tamping  cycle  has 
been  extended  from  four  years  required  for  jointed  track  to  six  yars  for  the  continuous 
track.  Also,  engineers  estimate  that  the  service  life  of  rail  and  ties  is  increased  in 
continuous  track  by  20  percent. 

MODERN  TRACK  IN  FRANCE 

The  latest  form  of  track  construction  in  France,  called  "modern  track",  consists  of 
elastic  fastenings,  concrete  or  wood  ties  and  continuous  welded  rail. 

Rails  are  rolled  in  lengths  of  18  meters  (slightly  more  than  59  ft).  These  are  welded 
by  the  electric-flash  method  into  either  double  lengths  or  strings  ranging  up  to  945  ft 
in  length,  which  is  the  limit  of  the  space  available  at  welding  plants.  The  double  lengths 
are  installed  on  sharp  curves  and  at  other  locations  where  it  is  not  practicable  to  install 
the  longer  lengths. 

At  the  end  of  1961  the  French  National  Railways  Company  (Societe  Nationale  des 
Chemins  de  Fer  Francais)  had  4500  track  miles  of  continuous  rail  in  the  track.  The 
SNCF  system  totals  about  25,000  miles  of  line  and  approximately  35,000  miles  of  main 
track,  including  about  11,000  miles  of  secondary  mains.  French  engineers  say  that  the 
use  of  welded  rail  has  cut  surfacing  costs  up  to  40  percent  and  overall  track-maintenance 
costs  20  percent. 

When  laying  welded  rails  the  long  strings  are  welded  together  in  the  field  by  either 
the  Boutet  or  Delachaux  systems.  Expansion  joints  are  installed  at  the  ends  of  the 
welded  sections.  If  possible,  the  long  rails  are  laid  when  the  temperature  is  between 
14  and  36  C.  If  laid  when  the  temperature  is  above  or  below  these  limits,  the  fastenings 
are  loosened  later,  when  temperatures  are  are  within  this  range,  to  allow  the  rail  to 
assume  a  no-stress  condition. 

The  elastic  fastenings  are  used  with  both  concrete  and  wood  ties.  One  element  of 
this  fastening  is  the  use  of  spring  clips  fastened  to  the  ties  by  bolts  or  screw  spikes. 
Another  is  the  use  of  a  grooved  rubber  pad,  tV  in  thick,  between  the  base  of  the  rail 
and  tie.  With  this  form  of  construction  the  clips  hold  the  rail  tightly  on  the  grooved 
pad,  which  compresses  under  traffic.  French  engineers  say  this  construction  stops  vibra- 
tion, slows  the  decay  of  the  thread  in  the  wood  of  wood  ties,  prevents  rail  creepage  and, 
with  continuous  welded  rail,  deals  with  the  rail  stresses  raised  by  variations  in 
temperature. 


Continuous   Welded    Rail 495 

French  engineers  say  this  fastening  is  of  such  design  that  a  visual  inspection  quickly 
reveals  whether  or  not  the  fastening  is  functioning  properly.  When  the  spring  clip  is 
placed  loosely  in  position,  it  has  only  one  bearing  on  the  rail — the  outer  edge.  When 
the  screw  spike  or  nut  of  the  bolt  has  been  tightened  sufficiently  to  produce  a  second 
point  of  bearing  nearer  the  edge  of  the  rail  base,  the  correct  pressure  has  been 
established. 

Surface  Adjusted  by   Shovel  Packing 

Track  maintenance  in  France  involves  two  important  rules:  To  make  corrections 
as  soon  as  possible;  and  to  disturb  the  fastenings  as  little  as  possible.  A  track-surfacing 
technique  that  complies  with  these  rules  is  the  shovel-packing  practice.  This  involves 
placing  a  precise  amount  of  ballast  chips  under  the  ties  to  bring  about,  after  settlement, 
the  exact  level  desired  with  a   1-mm  degree  of  precision. 

A  special  shovel  containing  a  small  hopper  is  used  for  shovel  packing.  A  measured 
amount  of  chips,  determined  by  the  amount  of  raise,  is  placed  in  the  hopper.  The  chips 
are  then  inserted  (not  tamped)  under  the  tie  by  movable  times  actuated  by  a  lever  on 
the  handle  of  the  shovel.  To  determine  the  amount  of  chips  needed,  the  track  is  first 
sighted  from  high  point  to  high  point  with  an  optical  instrument,  and  the  amount  of 
raise  is  marked  on  the  rail  over  each  tie.  The  track  is  then  jacked  up  \y2  in  to  permit 
the  chips  to  be  inserted  evenly.  The  first  train  to  pass  after  the  jacks  have  been  lowered 
presses  down  the  chips  and  gives  the  surfacing  its  final  touch. 

ENGLISH  ALSO  ADOPT  WELDED  RAIL 

The  British  Railways  made  exhaustive  studies  into  the  merits  of  using  continuous 
welded  rail.  These  indicated  that  a  financial  advantage,  although  a  narrow  one,  could 
be  realized  if  long  welded  rails,  supported  by  concrete  ties,  were  installed  on  many 
sections  of   the  system,   including   the   important  high-speed  lines. 

Rails  are  rolled  into  60-ft  lengths  in  England.  The  British  Railways  have  adopted 
the  110-lb  T-section  rail  as  standard.  All  continuous  welded  rails  produced  for  the  BR 
are  butt-welded  by  the  electric-flash  process.  A  welding  plant  has  been  established  on 
each  of  the  six  regions  comprising  this  system.  The  first  of  these  welding  plants  produced 
the  long  rails  in  300-ft  lengths,  but  some  of  the  others  are  turning  out  rails  in  600-ft 
lengths.  One  region  is  aiming  at  900-ft  lengths. 

After  being  laid  in  track  the  welded  rails  are  joined  by  site  welds.  Two  types  of 
field  welds  are  used.  One  is  known  as  the  "quick  thermit"  weld.  The  other  is  the  Philips 
metallic-arc  method  which  is  said  to  require  no  preparation  of  the  rail  ends  other  than 
providing  a  gap  between  them  and  establishing  the  correct  line  and  level. 

If  the  continuous  welded  rails  are  laid  in  the  track  at  temperatures  other  than  in 
the  range  65  to  75  F,  BR  policy  is  to  de-stress  them.  The  original  practice  was  to  wait 
until  the  rail  temperature  came  within  the  desired  ramie,  release  the  fastenings  and  run 
an  engine  slowly  over  the  track  to  assist  in  the  release  of  the  stress  in  the  rails.  Tin 
fastenings  are  then  retightened. 

More  recently  the  practice  lias  been  adopted  on  one  region  oi  raising  the  rail  tem 
perature  the  required  amount  by  usinj,'  propane-gas  burners  specially  developed  for  this 
purpose.  The  procedure  is  to  release  the  fastenings  throughout  the  length  to  \n-  de 
stressed  except  at  one  end.  Then,  raising  the  released  portion  on  special  rollers  placed 
on  the  rail  seats  at  10-yd  intervals,  the  rail  adjusts  it,  length.  The  rollers  are  then 
removed  and  the  fastening  retightened.  The  Hk  uses  "adjustment  switches"  at  the  ends 
of  the  long  welded  sections. 


496  Continuous    Welded    Rail 

The  concrete  ties  used  in  Great  Britain  are  prestressed  and  are  made  8  ft  3  in  long 
with  canted  rail  seats.  At  the  center  lines  of  the  rail  seats  the  ties  are  lOJHs  in  wide  at 
the  bottom,  S$s  in  at  the  top  and  are  8  in  deep.  The  width  at  the  bottom  is  uniform 
throughout  the  length  of  the  tie  but  at  the  center  the  depth  is  only  Sy2  in,  giving  a  top 
width  there  of  9  A  in. 

At  various  times  the  British  Railways  have  experimented  with  18  different  types 
of  fastenings  for  concrete  ties.  They  have  now  been  reduced  to  five,  all  of  which  have 
clips  or  bars  that  bear  on  the  top  of  the  rail  base  to  prevent  creepage.  Only  one  of  them 
entails  the  use  of  a  base  plate. 

In  the  past  when  jointed  track  with  wood  ties  was  being  replaced  with  similar 
construction  by  the  panel  method,  the  renewal  cycle  ranged  between  16  and  25  years. 
With  welded  rail  on  concrete  ties,  it  is  expected  that  the  life  of  the  rail  will  be  about 
20  years  and  that  of  the  ties  about  40  years. 


Report   of   Committee   4 — Rail 


W.  J.  Cruse,  Chairman 

J.    A.    BuNJER, 

Vice  Chairman 
O.  E.  Fort,  Secretary 
D.  T.  Faries 

R.    C.    POSTELS 


J.  C.  Jacobs 
Embert  Osland 
L.  S.  Crane 
T.  B.  Hutcheson 

A.  P.  Talbot 
VV.  D.  Almy 
S.  H.  Barlow 

G.  V.  Begany,  Jr. 
J.  M.  Bentham 
H.  B.  Berkshire 
T.  A.  Blair  (E) 

B.  Bristow 

C.  B.  Bronson  (E) 
R.  M.  Brown 

T.  F.  Burris 
R.  E.  Catlett,  Jr. 
J.  B.  Clark 
M.  VV.  Clark 
C.  J.  Code 

J.    T.    COLLINSON 
C.   A.    COLPITTS 

C.  O.  Conatser 
F.  L.  Etchison 
J.  H.  Greason,  Jr. 
J.  L.  Gressitt  (E) 
C.  E.  R.  Haight 


V.  E.  Hall 
C.  J.  Henry 
C.  C.  Herrick 
H.  W.  Jenkins 
K.  K.  Kessler 
R.  R.  Lawton 
Ray  Mc Brian 

B.  R.  Meyers 

F.  R.  Miciieal 
H.  R.  Moore 

C.  E.  Morgan 

L.  T.  Nuckols  (E) 
J.  S.  Parsons 

C.  F.  Parvin 

R.  H.  Patterson 

G.  L.  P.  Plow 
R.  B.  Rhode 
J.  G.  Roney 
H.  F.  Smith 
V.  R.  Terrell 
G.  L.  Todd 

J.  S.  Wearn 

D.  J.  White 

H.  M.  Williamson 
W.  L.  Young 

Committee 


(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names    are    set    in    bold-face    type    constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR    Com- 
mittee 4. 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering   Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Progress  report,  including  recommendations  submitted   for  adoption    page  498 

2.  Collaborate    with    AISI    Technical    Committee    on    Rail    and    Joint    Bars    in 
research  and  other  matters  of  mutual  interest 

Progress    report,   including   as   Appendix   2-a,    Report   on   Investigation   of 

Failures  in    Control-Cooled   Rails    page  499 

3.  Rail    failure   statistics,    covering    (a)    all    failures;    (b)    transverse   fissures; 
(c)  performance  of  control-cooled  rail 

Progress  report,  including  statistics  on  rail  failures  reported  up  to  Decem- 
ber 31,   1961   (on  net  ton  basis)    page  508 

4.  Rail  end  batter;  causes  and  remedies. 

Investigation  of  the  welding  of  battered  rail  ends  by  means  of  different 
welding  procedures  together  with  evaluation  of  welding  rods  and  electrodes 
has  been  completed  and  a  condensed  report  submitted  as  information   .  .  .   page  525 

5.  Economic  value  of  various  sizes  of  rail. 

Progress   report,  presented   as  information    page  526 

497 


498 Rail 

6.  Joint    liars:    design,  specifications,  service   tests,  including  insulated   joints 
and  compromise  joints. 
Progress   report,   presented  as  information    page  529 

8.  Causes  of   shelly   spots  and  head  checks  in   rail:    methods   for  their  preven- 
tion. 

Progress   report,   presented   as  information    page  529 

Appendix  8-a — Report  on   Service  Tests  of  Heat-Treated  and  Alloy  Steel 

Rails     page  530 

Appendix  S-b — Report  on  Shelly  Rail  Studies  at  University  of  Illinois  .  . .   page  534 

9.  Standardization  of  rail  sections. 

Progress  report,  presented  as  information    page  542 

10.  Service  performance  and  economics  of   78-ft  rail,  collaborating  with  com- 
mittee 5 ;  specification  for  78-ft  rail 

Progress  report,  presented  as  information   page  542 

The  Committee  on  Rail, 

W.  J.  Cruse,  Chairman. 

AREA    Bulletin    577,    February    1963. 

Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision  of  Manual 

J.  A.  Bunjer  (chairman,  subcommittee),  H.  B.  Berkshire,  R.  E.  Catlett,  Jr.,  J.  B.  Clark, 
W.  J  Cruse,  J.  T.  Collinson,  F.  L.  Etchison,  D.  T.  Faries,  O.  E.  Fort,  V.  E.  Hall, 
R.  R.  Lawton,  Ray  McBrian,  R.  H.  Patterson,  C.  F.  Parvin,  R.  C.  Postels,  G.  L. 
Todd,   J.  S.  Wearn,  H.  M.  Williamson. 

To  permit  the  use  of  steel  made  by  the  basic-oxygen  process  at  the  option  of  the 
purchaser  in  the  manufacture  of  rail,  joint  bars,  track  bolts  and  nuts,  and  spring  wash- 
ers, and  to  change  a  chemical  requirement  in  the  Specifications  for  Quenched  Carbon- 
Steel  Joint  Bars,  your  committee  submits  for  adoption  the  following  recommendations 
with   respect  to   Chapter  4  of  the  Manual. 

Pages  4-2-1   to  4-2-6,  inch 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    OPEN-HEARTH    STEEL   RAILS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revision: 

Change  the  title  of  these  specifications  to  read  as  follows: 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  OPEN-HEARTH  STEEL  RAILS  (BASIC- 
OXYGEN  PROCESS  MAY  BE  USED  AT  THE  OPTION 
OF  THE  PURCHASER) 

Pages  4-2-9  to  4-2-11,  inch 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   HIGH-CARBON   STEEL   JOINT   BARS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revision: 

On  page  4-2-9,  change  Art.  2.  Process,  to  read  as  follows:  "The  steel  shall  be  made 
by  either  or  both  of  the  following  processes:  open-hearth  or  electric-furnace.  (Basic- 
oxygen  process  may  be  used  at  the  option  of  the  purchaser)." 


Rail 499 

Pages  4-2-12  to  4-2-14,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  QUENCHED  CARBON  STEEL  JOINT  BARS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revisions: 

On  page  4-2-12,  change  Art.  2.  Process,  to  read  as  follows:  "The  steel  shall  be 
made  by  either  or  both  of  the  following  processes:  open-hearth  or  electric-furnace. 
(Basic-oxygen  process  may  be  used   at  the  option  of  the   purchaser)." 

In  Art.  5.  Chemical  Composition,  change  the  requirement  for  manganese  from  "Not 
over  1.00  percent"  to  "Not  over  1.20  percent." 

Pages  4-2-15  to  4-2-18,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR    HEAT-TREATED    CARBON-STEEL 
TRACK  BOLTS,  AND  CARBON-STEEL  NUTS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revisions: 

On  page  4-2-15,  change  Art.  2.  Process,  to  read  as  follows: 

"(a)  The  steel  for  the  bolts  shall  be  made  by  either  or  both  of  the  following  proc- 
esses: open-hearth  or  electric-furnace.  (Basic-oxygen  process  may  be  used  at  the  option 
of  the  purchaser). 

"(b)  The  steel  for  the  nuts  shall  be  made  by  one  or  more  of  the  following  proc- 
esses: open-hearth,  electric-furnace,  or  acid-bessemer.  (Basic-oxygen  process  may  be 
used  at  the  option  of  the  purchaser) ." 

Pages  4-2-19   to   4-2-21,   incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  SPRING  WASHERS 

Reapprove  with  the  following  revisions: 

On  page  4-2-19,  change  Art.  2.  Material,  to  read  as  follows:  "Material  for  spring 
washers  shall  be  of  steel,  manufactured  by  the  electric-furnace,  open-hearth,  or  crucible 
process.   (Basic-oxygen  process  may  be  used  at  the  option  of  the  purchaser)." 


Letter  ballots  covering  the  above  proposals  were  sent  out  to  all  members  of  the 
Rail  committee  and  were  approved  by  more  than  a  two-thirds  majority. 


Report  on  Assignment  2 

Collaborate  with  AISI   Technical   Committee  on   Rail 

and    Joint    Bars    in    Research    and    Other 

Matters    of   Mutual   Interest 

W.  J.  Cruse  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  A.  Bunjer,  T.  F.  Burris,  C.  J.  Code.  C.  A. 
Colpitts,  L.  S.  Crane.  O.  E.  Fort,  D.  T.  Faries,  C.  C.  Herrick,  T.  B.  Hutcheson, 
J.  C.  Jacobs,  Ray  McBrian.  B.  R.  Meyers,  Embert  Osland,  G.  L.  P.  Plow,  H.  M. 
Williamson. 

This   committee  sponsors  two   research   project*  at   the   University   of   Illinois,   both 
of   which   are   under   the   direction    of   Professor  R.   E.   Cramer.  The   report  on   the   first 


500 Rail 

project,  entitled  "Investigation  of  Failures  in  Control-Cooled  Rails",  is  presented  below 
as  Appendix  2-a. 

The  report  on  the  second  project,  entitled  "Shelly  Rail  Studies  at  the  University 
of   Illinois",  is  presented  as  Appendix  8-b  under  Assignment  8. 

An  investigation  of  the  physical  and  mechanical  properties  of  rail  and  joint  bars 
made  of  steel  produced  by  the  basic-oxygen  process  was  undertaken  in  conjunction  with 
the  Colorado  Fuel  and  Iron  Corporation.  A  report  on  this  investigation  has  been  pre- 
pared by  Kurt  Kannowski,  metallurgical  engineer,  AAR  Research  Department.  Copies 
of  the  report  may  be  obtained  from  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  AAR, 
3140  S.  Federal  St.,  Chicago  16. 


Appendix  2-a 

Investigation   of   Failures   in    Control-Cooled    Rails 

By   R.  E.  CRAMER 

Research    Associate    Professor    of    Engineering    Materials,    University    of    Illinois 

Organization  and  Acknowledgment 

This  investigation  is  financed  by  the  Research  Department  of  the  Association  of 
American  Railroads.  Student  assistant  Jerry  Crum  has  worked  on  this  investigation  on 
a  part-time  basis. 

Control-Cooled  Rails   Which   Failed  in  Service 

Since  our  last  report  of  October  1,  1961,  reports  have  been  prepared  on  16  control- 
cooled  rails  sent  to  this  laboratory  as  failed  rails.  These  reports  are  sent  to  the  railroad 
engineers  supplying  the  failed  rails,  and  copies  go  to  the  rail  manufacturer  and  the 
director  of  engineering  research,  AAR,  for  the  Association's  rail  failures  statistics. 

Table  1  summarizes  the  failures  and  Table  2  lists  each  rail  separately. 

Table    1 — Summary  of  Failed   Control- Cooled   Rails 

Transverse  Fissures  from  Shatter  Cracks   1 

Transverse  Fissures  from  Hot-Torn  Steel    5 

Transverse  Fissures  from    Inclusions    1 

Detailed  Fractures   from  Shelling   4 

Fracture  from  Welded  Engine  Burn   1 

Weeping  Cracks  from  Slot  Grinding  3 

Detailed  Fracture  from  Porous  Bond  Weld  1 

Total     16 

Transverse  Fissure  from  Shatter  Crack 

One  more  rail,  No.  1070  (see  Fig.  1),  rolled  before  1950  at  the  Algoma  Mill  devel- 
oped a  transverse  fissure  from  a  shatter  crack.  No  fissures  from  shatter  cracks  have 
developed  in  the  rails  from  this  mill  rolled  since  1950  when  changes  were  made  in  its 
control-cooling  process. 

Transverse   Fissures    from   Hot-Torn   Steel 

Five  rails,  Nos.  1073,  1077,  1078,  and  1083  from  the  Steelton  Mill  and  No.  1074 
horn   the  Algoma  Mill  developed  transverse  fissures  from  hot-torn  steel.  Fig.  2a  shows 


Rail 


501 


Z      . 


Q 


y  T3 

«   o 
as  — 

Q    O 


X  ai  = 


ja 

od 

5 

I:, 

3 

X. 

X) 

— 

-! 

-1 

ei 

<u  -a 

1 1 

o  * 
to  a. 


fc    ^< 


t/5      CO      CO      co      CO 


O     O     O 


bn 

o 

■d 

bo 

b/> 

u 

u 

u 

M 

u 

F 

F 

c 

- 

u 

c 

c 

O 

o 

0 

o 

0 

3 

-a 

'JZ 

2 

h 

h 

h 

h 

H 

u 

u 

l-l 

B 

c 

E 
o 

£ 

r. 

.c 

o 

0 

o 

0 

o 

^ 

^ 

M 

tfl 

00 

co 

CO 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

o 

n) 

cd 

o 

E 

0 

E 

0 

g 

o 

E 

O 

E 

0 

E 
o 

E 
o 

E 
o 

i-i 
U 

i-< 

•- 

u 

u 

(4 

M 

u 

u 

in 

)H 

M 

bo 

c 

bo 

c 

bo 

c 

b 

b 

o 

cd 

a, 

tL, 

b 

fc, 

tL, 

tL, 

tL, 

a, 

a 

a, 

a 

<u 

<u 

a> 

Q 

H 

a. 

h 

Q 

D 

H 

H 

h 

H 

H 

£ 

& 

£ 

£      bo 


—        3 


E     E 


a   q 


U")        ON        lO        ON 


On       On       m 


m     co     co     co     ro 


ON         -- 1         QN         >-M         ON         •— 1  — <         QN         QN         -H 


m     in     on 


— <      i—i      CO      — i      ^o      — I      — < 


—i     oo     m     in    in    —i 


■>*       nO       CN       ^       ^ 

W      Q      <      CQ      CO 


tL,      CQ      U 


tJ      00      \0 

^O      -h       CO 

W     -     -J 


ON         — I 


m     in     cn 


CN       CN       ^       — i 


m    co     m 


00       00       00 


u   <   9   < 


CN      cn      m      00 


Cd 


O     W     J5 


—     -^     o 


_o    _o     a> 


U     U     to 


ri 

cd 

aj 

a 

Q 

E 
o 

E 
o 

E 
o 

>> 

1-1 

3fl 

bo 

bo 

•J 

Oj_au<U      0)      i>.2JJ3i_2; 


cococo<:<<Olo 


\0      "O      vO 


00       00       OO       00 


O     £     O 

wtf      o#      aid 

u    z   u 


[L,  tL,  ■ 

CO  to  J 

O0  Q#  ^ 

5  5  - 


J     7     J  O     -1 


u   u    o 


o3     < 
U     to 


502 


Rail 


Fig.   1 — Rail   1070,  transverse  fissure 
from  shatter  crack. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Etched  slice  from  rail  head  showing  shatter 
cracks.  Etched  in  hot  SO  percent  hydrochloric 
acid. 


Rail 


503 


-*>: 


Fig.   2 — Rail    1073,   transverse  fissure 
from  hot-torn  steel. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Etched    slices    showing    porosity.    Etched    in 
hot  50  percent  hydrochloric  acid. 


the   fracture  of  rail   1073   as  received.  The  large  fissure  has  a  porous  nucleus  and   the 
etched  slices  shown  in  Fig.  2b  show  more  porosity  in  the  rail  head. 

Transverse   Fissure    from    Inclusion 

Rail   1068   from   the   Edgar  Thomson   Mill  developed   a   transverse   fissure   from   an 
inclusion.  Fig.   3a  shows  the  fissure  with  a  small   round   white  nucleus.  Fij;.   3b  shows 


504 


Rail 


a 


Fig.    3 — Rail    1068,   transverse   fissure    from   inclusion. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Longitudinal  saw  cut  through  nucleus  of  fissure.  Mag- 
nification  10X-  No  etch. 


the  inclusion  at  10X  magnification  after  sawing  through  the  nucleus  lengthwise  of  the 
rail  head.  It  is  assumed  that  this  inclusion  is  a  small  piece  of  refractory  entrapped  in 
the  steel,  as  it  did  not  elongate  much  during  rolling. 

Detail   Fractures   from  Shelling 

Four  detail  fractures  from  shelling  were  sent  to  the  laboratory  for  classification  of 
the  failures.  Rail  1067  is  shown  in  Figs.  4a  and  4b.  In  this  case  the  transverse  etched 
slice  pictured  in  4b  shows  the  shelling  crack.  Rails  1071  and  1072  were  opened  up  by 
sawing  to  observe  the  length  of  the  shelling  cracks.  Fig.  4c  shows   rail   1071   with   the 


Rail 


505 


;«:.*■•• 


p 


■ 


Fig.  4 — Rails   1067,   1071  and   1087,  detail  fractures  from  shelling. 

a.  Rail  1067  as  received. 

b.  Etched  slice  of   1067  showing  shelling  crack. 
Etched  in  hot  50  percent  hydrochloric  acid. 

c.  Rail  1071  with  shelling  crack  opened  up. 

d.  Fracture  of  Rail  1087  as  received. 

e.  Rail  1087  with  shelling  opened  up. 


shelling  crack  revealed.  Figs.  4d  and  4c  show  rail  1087  as  received  and  with  the  shelling 
crack  opened  up. 


Fracture   from   Welded   Engine   Burn 

Rail  1069  is  shown  in  Fig.  5a.  It  was  n<>t  evident  from  the  appearance  of  the  frac- 
ture what  was  the  cause  of  the  failure.  The  etched  transverse  slice  shown  in  Fig.  Sb 
proves  that  the  rail  had  been  built  up  by  welding,  as  the  weld -deported  metal  on  the 
rail  tread  is  distinctly  different  from  the  rail  Bteel. 


506 


Rail 


Fig.  5 — Rail   1069,  fracture  from  welded 
engine  burn. 

a.  Fracture  as  received. 

b.  Transverse    slice    etched    to    show    weld    deposited 
metal.  Etched  in  ammonium  persulfate  solution. 


Weeping  Cracks  in  Field  End-Hardened  Rails  1084,   1085,  and   1086 

Three  caps  from  the  ends  of  the  running  surface  of  three  rails,  field  end-hardened 
by  oxyacetylene  heating,  were  sent  in  for  examination.  Photographs  of  all  three  are 
shown  in  Fig.  6.  The  left  column  shows  the  tops  of  the  caps  and  the  right  column 
shows  the  under  side  or  fracture  side  of  the  caps.  All  three  pieces  had  been  slotted  by 
grinding  on  the  rail  ends.  Rockwell  tests  of  the  caps  showed  that  the  metal  was  over 
400  Brinell  hardness.  It  is  believed  that  grinding  cracks  were  developed  on  the  ends 
of  the  rails  during  the  grinding  when  the  hard  metal  was  over  heated  and  cracks  devel- 
oped as  the  metal  cooled  quickly.  These  small  grinding  cracks  then  spread  as  weeping 
cracks  by  many  heavy  wheel  loads. 

Failures  similar  to  these  were  described  in  our  "Failed  Rail  Reports"  printed  in 
AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  49,  page  494,  and  Vol.  45,  pages  484  to  488.  In  grinding  end- 
hardened  rails  more  care  is  necessary  than  on  rails  that  have  not  been  end-hardened, 
especially  when   the  hardness  is  above  400  Brinell. 


Rail 


507 


1086 


1086 


Fig.  6 — Caps  off  ends  of  rails  that  developed  weeping  cracks. 
Left  column — Tops  of  rail  heads  showing  ground  ends. 
Right  column — Under  side  of  caps. 


Detail  Fracture  from  Porous  Bond  Weld,  Rail  1088 

Fig.  7  shows  the  fracture  as  received.  The  dark  areas  in  the  center  of  the  rail  head 
were  caused  by  the  rail  ends  rubbing  together.  The  failure  is  the  detail  fracture  starting 
at  the  surface  of  the  bond  weld  and  extending  about  one  third  of  the  way  across  the 
rail  head.  The  black  spots  in  the  bond  weld  are  porosity.  They  occupy  about  one-half 
of  the  volume  of  the  bond  and  some  holes  are  very  close  to  surface  of  the  weld  metal. 
These  surface  holes  acted  as  stress  raisers,  causing  the  weld  metal  to  crack  and  this 
crack  then  extended  by  fatigue  action  into  and  across  the  rail  head,  resulting  in  a 
service  rail  failure.  Visual  examination  showed  that  the  under  side  of  the  weld  metal 
was  all  porosity,  and  could  have  been  seen  by  visual  examination  when  the  bond  weld 
wus  made.  This  is  the  first  rail  failure  reported  of  this  type,  hut  in  the  future  it  would 
be  well  to  watch  for  porosity  on  this  type  <>i  weld  and  reject  those'  welds  where  porosity 
can  be  seen. 

Summary 

Pictures  and  discussions  are  included  on  the  following  types  of  rail  failures: 
Transverse  fissure  from  shatter  crack. 
Transverse  fissure  from  hot-torn  steel. 


508 


Kail 


Fig.   7 — Detail   fracture   from  porous  bond  weld,  rail    1088. 


Transverse  fissure  from  inclusion. 
Detail  fractures  from  shelling. 
Fracture  from  welded  engine  burn. 
Three  weeping  cracks  from  grinding 
Detail  fracture  from  porous  bond  weld. 


Report  on  Assignment  3 

Statistics    Covering    (a)    All    Failures, 
Fissures,    (c)    Performance 


Rail    Failure 

(b)   Transverse 

of   Control-Cooled 


Rail 


D.  T.  Faries  (chairman,  subcommittee),  S.  H.  Barlow,  J.  M.  Bentham,  G.  V.  Beganv, 
B.  Bristow,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  J.  B.  Clark,  C.  J.  Code,  C.  0.  Conatser,  W.  J.  Cruse, 
O.  E.  Fort,  C.  E.  R.  Haight,  H.  W.  Jenkins,  K.  K.  Kessler,  F.  R.  Micheal,  Embert 
Osland,  H.  F.  Smith,  A.  P.  Talbot,  V.  R.  Terrill,  G.  L.  Todd,  J.  S.  Wearn,  D.  J. 
White,  W.  L.  Young. 

These  statistics  are  based  on  the  rail  failures  reported  to  December  31,  1961,  and 
are  submitted  as  information.  They  include  the  service  and  detected  failures  reported 
by  SO  railroads  on  all  of  their  main-track  mileage  which  constitutes  approximately  90 
percent  of  the  main  track  in  the  United  States  and  Canada.  This  report  is  a  technical 
service  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  Research  Department,  W.  M.  Keller, 
vice  president,  and  was  prepared  by  Kurt  Kannowski,  metallurgical  engineer,  under  the 
direction  of  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research. 

The  track  mileage  and  the  failures  reported  this  year  remain  essentially  the  same  as 
in  previous  years,  although  the  number  of  roads  reporting  has  decreased  from  54  last 
year  to  50  this  year.  Railroads  such  as  the  B&A,  CCC&StL,  P&E,  DL&W,  NC&StL, 
T&NO,  T&P  and  the  Virginian  are  not  reporting  as  individual  roads  anymore,  but  their 


Rail 


509 


reports  are  included  in  those  of  systems  of  which  they  were  already  a  part  or  have 
become  a  part  through  mergers.  An  additional  railroad  reporting  this  year  is  the  QNS&L 
which  has  extremely  severe  traffic  conditions  and  is  expected  to  show  interesting  failure 
incidences  in  relation  to  those  of  other  roads. 

The  accompanying  tables  and  diagrams  indicate  the  extent  of  control  of  the  trans- 
verse fissure  problem  that  has  been  obtained  by  the  use  of  control-cooled  rail  and  detec- 
tor car  testing,  give  data  on  the  quality  of  each  year's  rollings  for  the  various  mills,  and 
show  the  types  of  failures  that  are  occurring  on  the  various  railroads  as  related  to  the 
mill  producing  the  rail. 

Transverse  Fissure  Failures 

Data  on  service  transverse  fissure  failures  and  detected  transverse  defects  are  given 
in  Table  1  and  Fig.  1.  Table  1  shows  this  information  for  individual  roads  for  the  10- 
year  period  1952  to  1961,  incl.  Again  this  year  as  in  the  last  four  years  very  little  change 
in  the  number  of  service  failures  can  be  noted.  The  downward  trend  that  started  in 
1943  has  apparently  leveled  off  at  the  low  level  of  about  500.  However,  this  is  a  grati- 
fying reduction  from  the  high  of  7795  service  failures  reported  in  1943.  The  number 
of  detected  failures  increased  from  19,460  in  1960  to  21,831  in  1961.  The  number  of 
track  miles  tested  by  detector  cars  according  to  data  received  from  reporting  roads 
decreased  from  206,731  in  1960  to  193,516  this  year  as  indicated  in  the  following  table. 


Year  T,st<d 

No.  of  Hands 
Reporting 

Track  Miles 
Tested  by 

1),  1,  ctOT  Cars 

195.3 

59 
56 
56 

50 
57 
54 

53 
53 

48 

212 , 280 

!'.'•".  1        

201 . 134 

1955.. 

186,322 

L956 

lim.882 

1967                

212.082 

1958.                           

21(1.731 

1859 

212. 833 

I960 

206,731 

1961 

193,511, 

A  detailed  explanation  of  the  significance  of  Fig.  1  was  given  in  a  previous  report 
(Vol.  61,  page  845)  and  will  not  be  repeated  here. 


Mill  Performance 

The  number  of  service  and  detected  rail  failures  that  occur  during  the  first  five  years 
of  service  may  be  considered  a  good  criterion  of  mill  performance  and  the  quality  of 
rail  as  manufactured.  Fig.  2  shows  these  failures  for  1908  rollings  to  1956  rollings,  incl. 
The  large  decrease  in  failures  in  the  rollings  from  1908  to  1914  occurred  during  the 
change  over  from  Bessemer  to  open-hearth  production;  the  further  decrease  in  the  roll- 
ings to  1937  reflects  improvements  in  mill  practice  and  probably  increase  in  rail  size; 
the  decrease  after  1937  rollings  reflects  the  benefits  from  control-cooling,  and  since  the 
1948  rollings,  from  improved  design  incorporated  in  the  new  rail  sections.  The  low  failure 
rates  in  the  1954,  1955  and  1956  rollings  an-  believed  to  be  due  to  improvements  in 
open-hearth   practices  that   have  been   put  in  effect  in  recent  years. 

Fig.  3  shows  the  control-cooled  rail  failure  rates  cumulatively  for  the  rollings  from 
1951  to  1960,  incl.,  by  the  different  mills.  Because  of  the  difference  in  service  conditions 
on  roads  served  by  the  various  mills,   these   failure  data  should   not    lie  taken  as  net  es- 


510 Rail 

sarily  indicative  of  the  rail  quality.  As  explained  in  last  year's  report,  the  relatively  high 
failure  rate  for  the  Algoma  mill  was  largely  due  to  VSH,  Other  Head,  Web-in- Joint 
and  Base  failures  (Sec  Table  6).  The  high  rate  of  11.5  for  the  1959  rollings  reported 
last  year  decreased  to  7.3  this  year.  This  was  due  to  the  fact  that  in  the  first  year  of 
service  for  this  rolling,  7  VSH,  4  Other  Head,  and  20  Web-in-Joint  failures  occurred  in 
100  REHF  rail  on  the  Canadian  Pacific  and  in  the  second  year  of  service  3  VSH,  2 
HSH,  3  Other  Head,  and  3  Web-in-Joint  failures  occurred.  On  the  basis  of  track-mile- 
years  of  service,  the  failure  rate  was  reduced  accordingly.  Web-in- Joint  failures  are 
considered  to  be  due  to  service  conditions  rather  than  rail  quality.  The  failure  rate  for 
the  Carnegie-E.  T.  rollings  was  influenced  by  the  relatively  high  number  of  CF  and  DF 
failures  on  the  Norfolk  &  Western,  which  types  of  failures  are  also  considered  to  be  due 
to  service  conditions,  particularly  heavy  traffic  and  wheel  loads  and  sharp  curvature. 
The  Colorado  rollings  since  1954  show  a  low  failure  rate,  and  the  rate  for  previous 
years  was  influenced  to  a  large  extent  by  the  large  number  of  CF  and  DF  failures  that 
occurred  on  the  Union  Pacific  due  to  service  conditions.  The  failure  rate  for  the  Domin- 
ion rollings  to  1955  was  due  to  the  relatively  high  number  of  Web-in-Joint  failures  on 
the  Canadian  Pacific.  The  report  for  three  years  ago  contained  a  statement  from  C.  A. 
Colpitts,  chief  engineer  of  the  Canadian  Pacific,  giving  the  difference  in  service  and 
defect  detection  conditions  of  rail  from  the  Algoma  and  Dominion  mills.  The  high  failure 
rate  for  the  1959  Dominion  rolling  actually  represents  only  2  Web-in-Joint  failures  in 
10  track  miles  of  rail.  The  failure  rates  for  the  Dominion  mill  for  the  years  1952,  1953, 
and  1954  are  changed  somewhat  by  the  inclusion  this  year  for  the  first  time  of  345 
track  miles  of  Dominion  rail  laid  on  the  Quebec  North  Shore  &  Labrador.  The  failure 
rates  for  the  rollings  from  the  other  mills  require  no  comments.  Carnegie-E.  T.  stopped 
rolling  rail  in  1958  and  Inland  in  1957.  Dominion  rolled  no  rail  in  which  failures  were 
reported  for  the  railroads  included  in  these  statistics  in  1955,  1958,  and  1960;  Lacka- 
wanna in  1960;  and  Steelton  in  1960. 

A  comparison  of  Fig.  3  with  corresponding  data  in  the  report  of  12  years  ago  shows 
a  marked  reduction  in  failure  rate,  most  of  which  is  due  to  the  new  rail  sections  intro- 
duced in  1947.  This  is  further  shown  in  Fig.  4  which  gives  the  service  and  detected 
failures  for  100  track  miles  that  have  occurred  to  December  31,  1961,  for  each  year's 
rollings  from  1951  to  1960,  inclusive.  The  dashed  line  shows  the  corresponding  data  for 
the  old  sections,  1938-1947  rollings,  incl.  also  control-cooled  rail.  The  drop  off  in  failure 
rate  for  the  old  sections  for  the  tenth  year  of  service,  and  to  some  extent  for  the  ninth 
year,  should  be  disregarded  because  the  decrease  was  due  to  the  fact  that  considerable 
tonnage  of  the  original  rollings  having  the  highest  failure  rate  was  removed  from  track. 
It  should  also  be  pointed  out  that  the  record  for  the  new  sections  is  actually  better 
than  shown  because  many  of  the  failures  reported  actually  occurred  in  the  old  rail 
sections  rolled  after  1947,  as  will  be  discussed  more  fully  later. 

Types  of  Failures 

Table  5  shows  the  accumulated  service  and  detected  failures  per  100  track  miles  in 
rollings  1951  to  1960,  incl.,  that  have  occurred  to  December  31,  1961,  by  types  of  fail- 
ures and  by  mills.  This  table  is  helpful  in  assessing  the  relative  importance  of  the  differ- 
ent types  of  failures.  For  example,  the  CF  and  DF  classification  comprises  40  percent 
of  the  total  failures,  and  Web-in-Joint  failures,  27  percent.  Both  of  these  types  of 
failures  are  considered  to  be  due  to  service  conditions  and  to  some  extent  rail  design 
rather  than   to  mill  quality. 


Rail 


511 


To  give  some  indication  of  the  extent  to  which  the  "new  rail  sections"  adopted  in 
1947  have  affected  the  number  of  failures  of  each  type,  the  following  tabulation  shows 
the  accumulated  failures  in  the  "old  sections"  in  the  1938  to  1947  rollings,  incl.;  in  the 
1951  to  1960  rollings,  incl.,  which  include  mostly  new  but  some  of  the  old  sections;  and 
in  the  1951  to  1960  rollings,  incl.,  of  the  new  sections  only.  These  new  sections  include 
the  106  CF&I,  112  TR,  115  RE,  119  CF&I,  127  NYC  (Mod),  129  TR,  1.32  RE,  133  RE, 
136  RE,   136  NYC,   140  RE  and  155  PS. 


Accumulated  Failures  Per 
100  Track-Mile-Yeara 

Old  Sections 

.1//   Stiltons 

{1961    I960) 

.\ \  a-  St  ctions 
(1961    i960) 

0.02 
1.73 
0.58 
0.53 
0.52 
(1.7.') 
3 .  34 

1.47 
0.30 

1  .  !."> 
0.25 
0.14 
0.54 
0.05 
0.99 
0.10 
0.08 

11.01 

CF  ami  DF 

1  .69 

VSH 

0.09 

HSU 

0.10 

Other  Head 

0.31 
0.03 

Web-in-Joint. _.    

Web  -Other 

0.12 
0.05 

0.02 

All  Types     _    _          

9.24 

3.61 

2.40 

*Less  than  0.01. 


It  is  evident  from  the  above  comparison  that  little  improvement  has  been  effected 
in  the  CF  and  DF  classification  with  the  new  sections.  This  does  not  necessarily  mean 
that  the  new  rail  sections  are  not  equally  or  even  more  resistant  to  shelling,  because 
there  has  been  a  considerable  increase  in  wheel  loads  between  these  two  periods,  and 
wheel  load  is  thought  to  be  the  most  important  factor  in  producing  shelling.  There  has 
been  a  large  and  gratifying  reduction  in  the  number  of  web  failures.  In  this  connection 
it  should  be  noted  that  the  substantial  tonnage  of  welded  rail  being  laid  in  recent  years 
may  be  expected  to  reduce  still  further  the  number  of  Web-in-Joint  failures.  The 
changeover  to  diesel  power  has  probably  also  been  a  factor  in  the  reduction  of  Web- 
Other  failures.  The  substantial  reduction  in  VSH  and  HSH  failures  is  probably  to  be 
attributed  to  improved  mill  practices,  and  in  Broken  to  the  changeover  to  diesel  power, 
use  of  heavier  rail,  and  improved  maintenance  and  operating  practices.  The  gross  ton 
miles  of  traffic  has  been  only  about  8  percent  less  in  the  10  years  period  for  the  new 
sections  than  for  the  old  sections. 

A  comparison  of  failures  by  rail  sections  is  shown  in  Table  5A.  Generally,  tin- 
failure  rates  per  100  track-mile-years  are  quite  low.  The  very  high  failure  rate  in  the 
133  RE  section  is  due  to  the  large  number  of  CF  and  DF  and  Other  Head  failures  on 
the  Union  Pacific  and  it  is  believed  that  these  are  due  to  service  conditions  and  perhaps 
mill  quality   rather  than  rail  design. 

Table  6  is  of  interest  in  comparing  the  failures  by  type,  by  mill,  and  by  individual 
railroads.  It  will  be  noted  that  most  of  the  failures  reported  in  this  table  have  occurred 
on  a  relatively  few  railroads.  It  is  suggested  that  study  of  service  conditions  on  these 
railroads  might  be  worthwhile  in  an  effort  to  determine  whether  practical  measures 
might  be  found  to  reduce  the  failure  rate. 

Table  7  shows  the  service  and  detected  failures  in  the  rail  web,  within  joint  bar 
limits.  Comparing  these  results  with  those  reported  last  year,  it   will   be  noted  that  the 


512 


Rail 


number  of  joints  reported  inspected  with  defect-detecting  instruments  increased  from 
13,208,822  in  1960  to  16,125,298  in  1961.  The  number  of  detected  defects  in  control- 
cooled  rail  (rolled  after  1937)  decreased  from  9716  in  1960  to  9218  in  1961,  and  the 
number  of  service  failures  decreased  only  from  3206  in   1960  to  3202  in  1961. 

Professor  R.  E.  Cramer  at  the  University  of  Illinois  examines  every  year  rail  fail- 
ures submitted  by  some  of  the  railroads  which  are  thought  to  be  transverse  fissures. 
These  are  reported  in  Table  8  as  Accumulated  Transverse  Fissure  Failures  in  Control- 
Cooled  Rail  by  mill  and  year  rolled.  These  failures  are  classified  as  transverse  fissure 
failures  from  shatter  cracks,  from  inclusions  and  from  hot-torn  steel.  Transverse  fissures 
from  shatter  cracks  have  been  practically  eliminated  by  proper  control-cooling.  No 
transverse  fissure  from  shatter  cracks  has  been  reported  in  the  rollings  since  1951.  The 
transverse  fissures  from  inclusions  and  hot-torn  steel  are  due  to  mill  practices  and  can 
be  kept  to  a  minimum  by  proper  quality  control. 

Table  9  shows  the  number  of  welded  engine  burns  and  failures  that  occurred  during 
1961  for  certain  roads  that  make  a  practice  of  welding  engine  burns  and  were  able  to 
report  this  information.  Although  this  table  does  not  give  a  complete  picture  of  the 
welded  engine  burn  failures  it  is  felt  there  is  a  sufficient  sampling  of  the  railroads  using 
the  process  to  indicate  that  satisfactory  results  may  be  obtained. 


\ 

34O00 

I 

\ 

\ 

30000 

— 

1 

\ 

/ 

\ 

57  roods  tmct  1943,  Toble  1 
1      1      1     1      1      1      1      1     1      1      1      1     1 

\ 

/ 

\ 

1 

\ 

'B*  Unverified  Irontverte   defects  nmiid 

\ 

/ 

\ 

i 

\ 

and  heod  checks-  57  roods  ilncl  1943,  Tc 

I     1     1     1      1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1      1 

bit 

1 

\ 

/ 

■v 

\ 

'C'  Transverse  fissure   service  failure*  and 

1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     I 

! 

\ 

20000 
l»000 

V   Tromvtrie  fissure,  detected  failurei  lor 
25  roods  that  broke  detected  delecte  for 

\ 

1 

-d 

tc 

II 

9! 

8 

/ 

:« 

•-c 

et 

ct 

d 

tf 

/ 

^ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

''- 

K 

* 

L- 

/ 

/ 

■ 

■- 

Ssr 

1   T 

F 

> 

/ 

\ 

\ 

/ 

\ 
\ 

y 

-/ 

/ 

,- 

'' 

' 

s 

k- 

/ 

"C"- Service  IF  ' 

-- 

! 

1 

NSVERSE    DEFECTS   AS   REPORTED    BY  ALL  RAILROADS. 


Rail 


513 


YEAR    RAIL  ROLLED 
FIG. 2- SERVICE    AND  DETECTED   FAILURES  IN    UNITED    STATES    AND    CANADA 


YEAR 

CONTROL  COOLED  RAIL  FAILURES  PER  loo  TRACK  MILL 

1LAK 

■      EO  RAIL  FAILURES  PER  100  TRACK  MTU 

MILL 

ROLLED 

YEARS      ALL  TYPES  EXCEPT  ENGINE  BURN  FAILURES 

MILL 

"'"  "■" 

YEARS      ALL  1YI-LS  EXC1  IT  ENONE  BURN  FAILURES 

ltS2 
I9S0 

13   9 

i 

ID 

3 

193-1 

ALGOKA 

19SS 
ItS* 

"*a 

D  g 

1 
] 

im 

I   9 

!s58 

°.? 

1 

1»S» 

;; 

) 

1951 

1 3 

I9SI 

;     . 

a 

ItW 

l] ! 

\l'£ 

; ; 

3 
i 

CARNEGEE-E.T. 

"» 

15    3 

LACKAWANNA 

a  \ 

! ' 

ltST 

1    3 

3 

i 

1    a 

3 

its* 

!    1 

=3 

3 

ItSt 

D 

L9SS 

1M0 

IM 

un 

H  u 

itu 

. 

1 

i!u 

»  ' 

• 

Zl 

ltS4 

4-6 

19  W 

l.S 

3 

COLORADO 

ltS5 
ltS4 

its? 
itsa 

ii 

3 

3 
1 
) 

1»S^ 

: 

IMl 

21   0 

1951 

,  2 

3 

lt&2 

3 

itu 

TO 

~  — 1       | 

3 

DOMINION 

ins 

ItM 

I»S1 

its* 

;■; 

3 

3 

11  SM  M  I 

im« 

IM. 

i 

3 

1*S1 

ii 

3 

[Ml 

, 

itu 

3 

A   i 

ltS3 

>\ 

1 

1 

GARY 

its: 
its* 

IMO 

• » 
■  > 

1 
l 
1 

1 
i 

ALL  MILLS 

II>* 

3 
3 
I 
1 
3 
J 

■  CONTROL  OX>LI.D  RAIL   [All  I  HI  I 


m m  3i    ihi  in  mii  u 


I  M.IM     HI  HN   I  All  I  hi  s 


514 


Rail 


YEARS  SERVICE 
4  5  6 


V 

1938-1947  Roll 
Old  Sections 

* 

/ 

\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 

ngs 

\ 

V 

t 

\ 

> 

. 

/ 
/ 
/ 

t 

* 

.^'"" 

New  Sections         ' 

Some  Old 

Sections 

YEAR  ROLLED 

Fig.   4  -  Control  Cooled  Rail  Failures  to  December  31,    1961  Per  100  Track  Miles  -  All  Types 
Excluding  Engine  Burn  Fractures  -  Service  and  Detected. 


Rail 


515 


O  « 

x  w 


-J  .J 
3< 
t.  > 

D« 

o  S 
"  J 

W  O 


<< 


5    «5 

^  O 

CO   K 

3£ 


■ 
E 

3 

£ 

■o 

3 

o 

H 

11297 

6709 

7254 

18 

282 

CO     1» 

en   t*   to 

4308 
1738 
8657 
5844 
752 

7882 
4754 
1294 
1882 

s 

3347 

3506 

781 

982 

9950 

-r  cm  en  cm  co  © 

f    O    iO    iO    h    * 

© 

"<f*    CM    t»            OS 

«-  s 

cm  en   o 

cm  cm   en   cm 

©  en  oo  en 

s 

l-    ©    CM    0O    t^. 

m     i    co  ^  o   en 

o 

©  o  en  -h  cm 

~h  o 

cm  co  en 
<n  to   m 

H    Ul     00 

•-     3     t-     -<     f- 

en  en   n  co  h 

H     H    o     O    H 

en  en  oo  m 
c-  co  en  © 

'- 

©     r-    CM     rH     T 

•T     CM                rH     © 

rH  1  CM  ©  in  CM 
CM            f-             CM    CO 

en 

CO 

t*  n  S  h  ^ 

rH    O    CO             <-t 

S2 

^  ©  to 

to    ^   ©    r-    to 

f    0O    N    l"    O 
CO    rH    ©     CM 

©     CO     rH     CM 

*r  1-*               © 

cm  ©  co  m  ^  en 
o  en  co  cm  © 
© 

00 

en 

co  m  ©   co  oo 
**  in  © 

CO    CM 

©  o   m 

O     H    CO 
CM    tO 

c-   v  co  n  en 
en  m  co  en  to 

^    H    00     N 

en  oo  «*>  ©     i 

©     ©     rH     C-     CO 
rH     CO     ©     rH     00 

CO     ©    Ci     v    OO    t- 

en  in  «              iO 

en 

rH    ©    en 

55 

o    «    V 

cm  en  to 

©  co  m  in  © 

O     iO    [-     CM    © 
CM    CM    ©    OO 

•»T     ©     -3"     rH        1 
00     O     r-     rH 

©   m   c*   m   cm 

co  r-  oo  en   © 

cm    rH   i^    co   m   CM 

oo  c-   co         rH  r- 

s 

o  fl1  n  h  n 

N    Ol     iO            CO 

ss 

CM   co   to 

oo  m   cm 

CM     CM     ^ 

co  ©  t»  m  *r 
cm   co  ©  en  cm 

co  v  o  en     i 

en  ■*  v  h 

00     C-      rH     CM 

©      rH     C»     ©     © 

©      in     ^»     rH     ©     t- 

en 

CO    (D    O    N    U 

cm  co  © 

to    i    o  m  © 
OI         ©  c-  c- 

CO    CM    CO    CM    rH 

co  m  t-  cm  co 
co  .-<  t-  en 

©    CO    CO    C-      1 

rH  cm  co  en 

oo    in   rH 

^  ©  en  cm  **• 

rH     t>     CM     CO     rH 

m  cm  r-t        en 

o  CO  t-  »  uo  * 
n  oo  tc        rH  en 

CO 

'j* 

00    H    «5    n    N 

o  ift  en         cm 
en  oo  © 

©     i 

*•  m  r- 

00   o    to 

cm  ©  rH  ©   in 
©  ©   ©  *#  r- 
m  cm  oo  en 

00    CM    oo    if      1 

CM     rH     ©      rH 

en  t  co  co 

m  en   m  rj>  co 

TJ-     -M*     rH                -1 

CO     ©    OO    ©     ^«    CO 

en                          *h 

1 

o  co  to  ©   *r 

en  co  i/) 

CO 

N    t    O 

en  o 
cm  «n 

CO   o   ©    co   ao 

oo   in  co  v>  in 

©     »H    oo    *J« 

P»  '  «  ' 

i    tn  -<»«  ©  cm 

co  en  en  co 
tj«              en 

oo   in  en  oo  ©  oo 

CO     rH    CO                     © 

1 

o  t-  to 

£  ' 

h  m  o 

**    t-    t-     t-    CO 

oo  en   «-4  oq  in 
to        oo  to 

co   r-    cm   r-    t- 

co  co  ao  ©  m 

t-    in     rH    CO    CM 

i    en   ©  rH  m 
m  co  r-  cm 
■^«            in 

en  to  i"  co  cn  m 
r-   m  en         rH  © 

i 

3 

i 

■ 

0 

3 

0 

H 

m    to    CO    CO    CM 

t*    *    CD    lO 

<-i        en 

©   oo 

oo  ©  to 

m  co  ^ 

rH    CM 

oo   t-   r»   r-   © 
©   ao   r-   cm   rH 

f*  ©  co  o  m 

CM    CM 

00    CO    rH    co    r» 

rH                       CO 

C»    CM    ©    rH    r-    t- 

co  ©  *«              *n 

0) 

go  m  en  co  o 

r-t        m 

©   'ft 

H    00    o 

CO   ©   t-    ©    © 

rH                CM     rH 

m  co  cm  © 

o 

©  in  ©  ©  ^* 

^       1       ^T     ©     ©     rH 

o 
to 

<7> 

N    Cft    rt    (O    « 

f-t        © 

©    CO 

rH     tO     © 

CO    O    f-    t-     © 

©    CO    ©    © 

a 

©   CO   ©    ©    v 

m    i    ©  ©  ©   to 

01 

r-  to  in  to  © 

©     CJ 

©      O      -4 

cm  o  en  ©  © 

CM    00    CO    ©       i 

©  en  ©  cm   co 

©     O     CO    O     rn    CM 

1 

en  ia  n  en  o 
© 

O     pH 

r-  ©  © 

©  ©  c-   m  m* 

co        co 

'O     CO     rH     O        1 

in  ©  ©  oo   © 

rH                          CM 

©  en  cm  ©  rH  co 

en 

e-  cm  ©  ©  © 
to 

en  ©  © 

N     H     X    I-    C 

rH     CO     ©     ©        1 

©     CO    ©     rH     •* 

m  m  o  o   cm  co 

in 

m  co  ©  cm  © 

in  to  m 

•-*    CM 

en   rj*  co  oo  o 

rH      rH     CO 

rH     rH     rH     ©        1 

■f  io  o  en  en 

O     C-     CM     ©     ©     CM 

I 

u)  h  en  >n  o 

H      - 

3S* 

8^2° 

rH      CM     ©     ©        1 

CM    CM 

CO    ©     1"     ■*    CM 

©   r»   rH   ©   ©   ao 

35 

at 

CT»     **•     ©     M*     — < 

O      1 

-  —  - 

N    «    -< 

o  en  n  t*  in 

rH     rH     ©     rH 

©  e-  cm  ©     i 

CO    CM 

©  en  ©   ©   m 

in  en  ao  o  cm  cm 

CM 

Oi 

CO    h    O    NO 
rH            © 

m  o 

N    *•    ** 

-H    CO    CM     CO    CM 

CM     rH     IT-      CM 

5?  '  •"  ' 

i    en  ©  ©  r- 

CO     rH     ©     ©     ©     00 

1 

t    -*    -h   ©    © 
to         en 

CM      1 

s^: 

CO     rH     -*    ao 

in  o  *■  ©  »n 

'  «--■ 

Oft      ■*>     ©     rH     rH     © 

CM    rH                             CM 

T3 

a 

rt 
U. 
u 
■ 

r-« 

u.            H  § 
«             O  < 

fjJOO   a 

■<  <  «  S  fi 

u 

-J  < 
-a  -a 

2   CQ 

c 
woo 

a 

•              £ 
w       ^       C 

~«  Z  at  , 
q  w  v.  +a  r* 

5   ^   -d    «    !S 

o  o  o  o  o 

a. 

0.   0.  J3 
g  2  w  X 

m  x  -a,.j 

O   O   U   Q 

Q 

M 

<i  u  w  h  ^ 

8 

yy^33S 

516 


Rail 


-.  fH  rt  o    W 


- 

-r    X>    - 

H 

•1*   >n   en   ©    -r 

w    (I>    CI    M 

-h    CO    O     1- 

en 

o 

t"1 

*" 

I*              CO 

CM     CO    LQ 

co                <o 

m  t-   >n   -r 

-\ 

? 

lO  to   *> 

i-    •- 

S  S  S  '  2 

*P     M     O    O    «» 

SSJ3£ 

,      r-     —    t- 

rH 

- 

rt 

■"* 

1 

CM 

"   ■       Q) 

C  en  co  **<  rH 

t       rH     O     O     00 

o   cm   -— '  en 

O 

■tl  CO    O    OJ 

- 

^ 

_ 

""■ 

to 

2 

;J  3  j  ^ 

,—-  oo  en   o  r- 

1      I-    CM    O     C- 

o   oo  <n  i-o 

H 

H 

H 

00 

CO     ^    rH     rH     O 

£-  CO     CO    O    l- 

i    en   co  o    in 

r-    co    en    o 

■  O     rH     r-     CO 

rjD 

3 

CM                     rH 

u. 

n  M  M 

r-    r- 

rf    t-    CM    CM     00 

wO    CO    CO 

1       T     00     O     T 

en    CO    CO    CO 

31     CJ    1"    lO 

cn 

tO    CO 

t-             m     CO     rH 

to 

0) 

r^ 

CM      Ol       ■<!«       "T 

-1 

H 

-r 

CM 

lO 

00     CM 

1        rH      Tf     O      O) 

O     ^    CM    tO 

co   ^-  c-   m 

00 

s 

«  n  n 

*J<       r-l 

CM             O    CO    tO 

CM    O     CO    O    CM 

r-   cm         o 

o         •-* 

in 

" 

H 

*r 

-r 

CM     irt    0>     ^    CM 

i    o   m  o   to 

-r  oo  c^  oo 

in  co  rH  en 

to 

3     ^     ~     °> 

-1 

H 

CM 

m 

m 

lO     rH     <f> 

i    to   m  o  oo 

^.  m   cm   co 

o   cm   en  co 

00 

rH     rH      Tf     [- 

H 

H 

rH      rH 

**■ 

CM 

m  to  m 

00    cm 

t-    CO    ■*    C-    00 

i    in  ^«  o   o 

oo  o  o  en 

o   c-  in  to 

CO 

O      tO                rH 

1-1 

" 

* 

00    00 

N  ^  H  H 

Ol      CM      rH     CM 

CM 

"D 

0 

oi   to 

O     rH    00    tO    CM 

CM    CO    CM    CO 

CM     CM 

h   f   tt  n 

CO     t>      rH      CO 

CO 

H 

r~ 

C 

CO 

O    CO    CO 

*  N 

rH     S    CO       '       '° 

^V     O     H     O 

O    O    O     CM    O 

00  s  "=  2 

1      O     ^   CO 

o 
m 

CJ 

w 

o 

O    CO    CO 

T    o 

C  m  o  oo   o 

1      O    O    CM    O 

en  co  o   rH 

U5    O    *H 

to 

CG 
<• 

2 

H 

msrH 

1      O    O     CO    TT 

m  o  en   t> 

CM     CO    O    CO 

O 

H 

00 

CM    H 

SSg^H 

^n  t-  h  o 

1        Vi     O      CM      rH 

c-    co   to   ^ 

**  m  ©  o 

o 

w 

*-*              ^ 

~ 

j> 

oi  o   m 

rH     O      CO      -T     CM 

*  co  ^  m  o 

1      O    O     ^r    CO 

2SS° 

m    rH    t-    o 

en 

8 

3 

to  cm   m  to   t* 

1      O    O     CO    t- 

eo   oo   o    rH 

hi 

s 

CM 

rt 

en 

g 

CO 

0) 

5 

in 

H             ^ 

CO   o    o    O 

- 

<8 

1 

H    CM 

c- 

CO      rH      <«     Oi      -* 

to   -v  o  to  o 

i    o  o  cm  in 

CM     CO      rH     00 

(O    00    O     V 

„ 

H 

CO 

OO    CM    O    CM    O 

1      O     rH     CM     CO 

c-  en   co   m 

in  co  o  oo 

t. 

rH 

H 

^ 

CM 

o   co  rH  in  o 

1    o  o  o  o 

1-    lO    O    Ol 

r-   U?   *-t   <* 

o 

* 

H 

"■'              ^ 

r-t  r-  r-  t* 

rH              rH 

•" 

H 

T3 

^, 

CO 

Q 

H 

2     . 

co 

ft  h 

I  j  "  -5 

C    --j    co    V3    «x5 

J    55    w  <£6    E 

I   <*  u  o  *; 

£    «    r*    -    _J 
rf<     CU    ^     3    ^ 

SAL 

SP 

Southern 

9    . 

s  - 

a,       hi A 
oy  0i  .2    ■ 
H  P  >  ? 

< 
O 

pq 

j 

*    °3    * 

w  u: 

2  O  >"  ^  > 

S  z  z  z  z 

>>  <a  Oi  «   <* 

►J 

^t 

J   J   2 

»c  ^ 

Z  Z  2i  ft  0, 

©  K  K  K  co 

< 

§5 


u    a 
<u    a 

f? 

cfl  c 


i!3 

s  1 1  i  I 

5  a°-2? 


3  « 


3  •° 


IS 


E  S 


>£35  = 

1)    g    S    rt  « 

Z  :=  rt  PS  « 

23  S w  1  J 

■C  S  >    a>    2  cn 

g  5  C3  J2  3 


•g  «  a 

n     U     U     V      V     4) 

z  a  3  S  3  s 


Rail 


517 


TONS  OF  RAILS  AND  TRACK  MILES  OF  EACH  YEAR'S  ROLLINGS  1951 
REPORTED  BY  50  RAILROADS 


Year 
Rolled 

OH  CONTROL  COOLED  ONLY 

TONS 

TRACK  MILES 

1951 
1952 
1953 
1954 
1955 
1956 
1957 
1958 
1959 
1960 

1,229,261 
987,006 

1.207,782 
823. 831 
883,125 
865,017 
814,723 
401,532 
458,260 
364,097 

5,908.58 
4,796.63 
5,683.69 
3,833.60 
4,085.60 
4.024.40 
3,480.30 
1,855.90 
2,131.10 
1,674.60 

TOTAL 

8,034,634 

37,474.40 

TABLE  3  -  SERVICE  AND  DETECTED  FAILURES  OF  ALL  TYPES  EXCEPT  ENGINE  BURN  FAILURES 
ACCUMULATED  FROM  DATE  ROLLED  TO  DECEMBER  31,  1961,   PER  100  AVERAGE 
TRACK  MILES,  CONTROL  COOLED  RAIL  ONLY,  IN  ALL  ROLLINGS  FROM  ALL  MILLS 


Year 
Rolled 

YEARS  OF  SERVICE 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

1951 

2.0 

3.4 

5.0 

10.4 

16.3 

21.7 

27.5 

34.9 

42.7 

53.6 

1952 

2.0 

2.8 

4.3 

7.9 

13.2 

18.7 

25.3 

32.3 

39.3 

1953 

0.8 

2.0 

4.0 

9.2 

15.6 

22.5 

30.6 

33.1 

1954 

0.5 

1.3 

3.5 

6.1 

10.9 

15.9 

21.9 

1955 

0.7 

1.5 

2.3 

4.0 

6.9 

10.4 

1956 

0.4 

1.3 

3.3 

6.3 

10.1 

1957 

0.5 

1.3 

2.5 

4.3 

1958 

1.0 

1.8 

3.0 

1959 

2.0 

2.8 

1960 

0.5 

518 


Rail 


TABLE  4  -  TRACK  MILKS  AND  1981  FAILURES,  ALL  TYPES,  IN  ROLLINGS  tSSJ  TO  I 
OPJ  N  HEARTH  CONTROL-COOLED  HAIL  ONLY 


ROAD 

TRACK 

MILES  BY 

MILL 

I9S1    PA 

LURES 

ALG 

CARN 

COLO 

DOM 

GARY 

INLD 

LACKA 

STLTN 

TENN 

TOTAL 

EBFa  EXCL. 

EBPa  ONLY 

AT&SF 

ACL 

BbO 

ll&i  iCT 
B&LE 

300 

158] 

MS 

455 

175 

48 

24  1 

717 

1 292 
42 

3 
14 

3 

* 

Ban  Arooa 

1)&  M 

CP 

C     Ol  0.1 

C&OISys.) 

2984 
11 

11 

7  11. 

478 

■ 

33 

203 

74 
3708 

1483 

535 
11 

1 

c&ei 

C&NW 
CBiQ 

CI&L 

CMSIP6P 

626 

689 
62 

7C2 

11 
122 
129 

29 
220 

100 

81 

1444 
91 

13 

2 

CHI  (LP 
C&S 
D&H 
D&RGW 

Erie-Lock 

126 

US 
357 

298 

520 
307 

152 
15 

146 

817 
357 
146 

510 

45 

GTW 

ON 

IC 

KCS 

495 

182 
564 
807 
133 

63 

198 

29 

170 

15 

573 

12 

274 
1442 
1380 

105 

1 
5 
3 
6 

L&NE 
LV 

LI 
L&N 

51 

185 

16 
37 

1410 

16 
185 
37 

1401 

1 
36 

2 

MStPiSSIM 
MKT 

MP  Lines 
NYC 

11 

29 
556 

218 
614 

174 
15 

103 
71 

60 
10 

553 

3 

95 

413 
122 

1368 

1 

12 

35 

NYNH4H 

S4W 

NP 

PRR 

P&LE 

77 
663 

273 
85 

374 

307 
192 
12 

58 
44 

110 

221 
286 

350 

951 
849 
859 
97 

1 

228 
9 
2 

1 
1 

QNSSiL 

Reading 

RFSiP 

StL-SF 

SAL 

345 

225 
118 

281 

720 
602 

345 

118 
720 

883 

4 

4 

Southern 

UP 

W.    Md. 

90 

2458 
1395 

16 

71 

707 
187 

110 
1301 

2568 
2039 
1988 
277 

330 
39 
343 

25 

7 

TOTAL 

3006 

1673 

8314 

IOCI            8768 

2191 

1528 

3548 

5802 

we"?! 

1708 

44 

NOTE:    The  following  railroads  did  not  report  and  were  omitted  from  thiB  table:    1HB.  JCL  (NYiLB),  NYC&StL,   NYC  (Western  Dl 
The  NYC  Sys.  includes  the  B«iA,  NYCSouthern  District  (CCCiStL,   P&E),  NYC  (NY  District)  and  NYC  (Eastern  District). 
The  DLJ.W  merged  with  the  Erie  Railroad. 
The  NCSiStL  merged  with  the  L&N  Railroad. 
The  TfcNO  merged  with  the  SP  Railroad 
The  Virginian  merged  with  the  NSiW  Railroad. 


Rail 


519 


8? 


<o  —r 

So 

SS 

§2 
Z  w 

«    CJ 

W  t- 

i 

■J  <o 

9  " 
5« 


•n  a 


co      a 

W   <=>    *   r/l 

FAILUR 

PER  IC 

TRACK 

YEAR 

cj  r-   a>    po  t- 
cm   co   o    —  oo 

01 

OOIIO 
W    CD    C- 

t-    f-    <0     CO 

^          CO 

«3 

<;  -J  < 

en  n   to    u  -^ 

O 

O)    CO    O)     iflh 

BB 

m   —i   ao 

CO 

o 

«§£ 

CO    CM     1"     CD  <£> 

in 

o   -*   <o 

m  h  io        m 

H    M    CO 

ts 

St"    CO 

00    CM     OO     O   00 

**•  ^  to   <$  -^ 
CO   oo    to    o  co 

s 

H    to    00 
CM    CO    00 

<_0 

CO 

«  2 

co  ^h  ao    —  ao 

c-l 

r-l    CO    lO 

p- 

co 

00   CO    CO   t>-    to 

'XJ 

in   co  in 

CO 

rH    «-t    t>    m    ao 

LO     -*i    t> 

o 

h    Ol    (O    O    't 

f-t              CO     <-H 

H 

w 
3 

O     (0     A     H    00 

in 

O     — 1    CO 

ao 

CM                       CO 

CM 

o 

o 

m 

« 

w 

ao   m   i"  c-    ^ 

-4" 

CO    CO    o 

o 

9 

-*         co         ^ 

CM 

»* 

2 

H 

o 

""* 

CM 

s 

OQ 

0) 

w 

5 

o 

en    00    CO    rH 

e 

cm  o  o 

(Tv 

X 
w 

CM     -H     O     rH     tD 

n 

CO    CM    C- 

z 

ao         m  ao 

CO 
IN 

to 

55 

a> 

g 

t-    N    N    N    H 

:s 

O    Co    o 

o 

in 

^* 

Q 

rH            CM            CM 

,H 

CO 

M 

o 

CO 

m 

O 

w 

a 
o 

H 

O  B 

CM    -*    O    — :    CO 

co  iA  o  ao  m 

CO            IA            f-4 

ao 
r-l 

-H 1     C-     •-« 
in    CO    CO 

a 

CO 

H 

H 

B 

~i 

< 

X 

pi  t«  n  h  u) 

LO 

-h  o   in 

<t 

I 

rt    H    01     *     H 

•H     CO 

CO 

CO 

Q 

3 

9 

CO 

Ol     H    H     t*     rt 

te 

O     r-l     oO 

m 

04            l>    CO    CO 

d 

CO 

<o 

s 
p 

u 

< 

O  °*  Q 

en   oo   h  to   oo 

« 

ao   oo   ao 

H 

LO 

O     — I     -H      Co. 

a 

Co)    CO 

o 

ao  Co)         -h 

CM 

CO 

— 

E*  *  ~ 

o 

o 

p 

K 

w 

2       w 

£           CO 

o-     « 

•J 

a 

a  8  S5 

3"  <  g 
2  w  «  g 

Si  9  9£ 

O  «  —i  «  rx 
-J  3  o  o  •? 

<  O  CJ  Q  O 

| 

<  S  w 
o  2  Z 

<  H  W 
J  co  H 

CO 

1  *-> 

J  H  W 

2  °  « 
-S2S 

1  s 


c3  x 

CJ 
Co 

b  a 

h 

3  CO 

to 

Co 

n 

-1 

t:  2 

s 

>  a 

w 

33   fe 


520 


Rail 


u  < 

2  tv 


2  £ 

„,  Q 
io  Z 

2  ** 
o  o 

z3 


u  o 

<  w 


<  H 


^  Q 


CO 

w 

> 

O 
X 
H 
Z 

« 

K 

a 
j 

W 

CO 

5 

&H 

co 

8 

Q 

o> 

K 

2 

O 

< 

CO 

CO 

W 

K 

K 

W 

on         S3 

"  §   *5   CO 

10  A  tfi  w  n    r-  co  cm 

O    O    CO 

o 

FAILl) 

PER 

TRAC 

YEA 

a 
o 

H    (O    M    in   IB      foCO    CO 

O    CO    CM 

ooo^o    fjin  o 

O    O     -1 

X        co 

u  W  K 

= 

f  in  in  «   io    --  r-  co 

CO    CO    --r    CM    t>-     u  n   CO 

CO    t-    CM 

cm   ~<   en 

r-J 

<  J  < 

w  n  n  h  o    cj  o  m 

en   r- 

k  a  u 

O    CM    CM    CO     CM     CO  m    CO 

CO     -H 

•  s 

H  «*   >" 

M    t«                              ,/,  W 

H 

CO 

■X   CO 

O  U 

e 

o  o  co  en  -n    r-coio 

CO     O    Ol 

<J 

n 

en  r»   co   *  h    J^  f-   cm 

v  «i  «  «)  n    £m  » 

CM     C-     ■* 

fO 

<   J 

**    CM 

r~ 

gs 

—    O                             Si   CM     -l 

CM 

c-J 

■ 

CO 

-1  w 

r«OtOM»HHH 

CO     CM 

CO 

O 

-   0, 

*-l    ©             tp    H    O)     00    N 

CO     CM 

00 

»t 

lO                            CO     CO 

-H    CM 

*r 

P« 

W 
CO 

H    CD     CN    H            O0     V    *-* 

CO 

CM 

< 

'-c 

CO 

O 

03 

o 

K 

W 

O             CM             *J»    CO    CM 

m 

if* 

X 

CO                             CO    r-i 

00 

o 

H 

d 

£ 

« 

O 

w 

u 

H 

Hm«oncONN 

CO 

. 

CM 

>"a 

e-         -h        en  cm 

X 

2 

CM 

o 

_ 

CO 

Z 

OS 

9 

co         cm         in   -j- 

CO 

o 

CO 

JJ 

o 

CM                             CM 

CO 

© 

S 

pg 

d 

Q 

«  ~ 

C 
H 

CO 

w 

U  Q 

£  < 

o  K 

oaiHcuMooom 

t-H 

o         n         ©en 

>H                               iH    CM 

CM 

m 

3 

J 

< 

B 
co 
8 

■CP    C-    w                   CO    O    CM 

CM    c- 

CO 

o 

t* 

tj«                   o  tn 

00 

""J 

Q 
W 

o 

H 

3 

X 

H 

CM     r-t 

co 

C-            CO             H    <i    N 

CO     .* 

c» 

tr> 

5 

> 

m   i-< 

lO 

o 

O 
O 
< 

tx   .»  h 
C_>   «"    Q 

CO    CO            CM     CM    O     CM    t- 

Oi    TT 

00 

r 

CO                    t-i    Oi    C- 

CM 

ip 

rH                          Ol    en 

— < 

CO 

m  «  C 
H  g   ° 

•<r 

CO 

o 

o 
o 

o 

■o 

z 

3£ 

3 
En 

u 

o 
S 

3  o 
hkozhSSk 

X    W    CO 

a;  «  a. 

< 

H 
H 

2g 

Ho 

CO 

< 
w 
>< 
w 

a  H 

so 

CMiOcftt-aiCMCOCO 

o  o  m 

tJ 

W 

o 

HHHNNncon 

"0    ■<*•    CO 

s  1 

J 

Rail 


521 


Table  6 — Accumulated  Failures  of  All  Types  for  OH   Control-Cooled  Rail, 

Only  In  Rolling  1951-1960,  Incl.,  Accumulated  to  December  31,   1961, 

Service  and  Detected,  Segregated  by  Roads  and  Mills 


ROADS 

TF 
Vcr 

CF 

& 

VSH 

HSU 

Other 

Web 

Base 

FAILURE  T 

II  AI.S 

I-:i5Fs  Excl. 

EBFa  Only 

In 

Actum. 

Accum. 

Uof  I 

DF 

Bead 

Broken 

Jt. 

Othor 

Total 

1961 

Total 

1901 

ALGOMA 

CP 

1 

a 

329 

13 

381 

17 

829 

18 

120 

1717 

328 

6 

1 

CS.0  (Svs   ) 

0 

D 

1} 

n 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

u 

i 

TOTAL 

1 

y 

32.' 

l:; 

352 

17 

h2'< 

in 

120 

1718 

328 

B 

1 

CARNEGIE 

BfcO 

0 

3 

0 

2 

8 

0 

2 

0 

2 

17 

6 

4 

3 

B&LE 

0 

o 

0 

5 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

6 

3 

0 

B 

Erie-Lack 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

2 

0 

0 

3 

0 

5 

0 

XYXHfcH 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

2 

0 

N&W 

0 

803 

0 

a 

38 

1 

9 

5 

4 

868 

214 

8 

1 

PRR 

0 

2 

0 

J 

6 

0 

4 

0 

0 

14 

0 

0 

0 

W.  Md. 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

3 

0 

0 

II 

.    :  '.:. 

2 

BOS 

1 

17 

54 

2 

18 

6 

913 

223 

19 

; 

COLORADO 

ATfcSF 

0 

5 

6 

0 

10 

0 

23 

8 

3 

55 

3 

3 

u 

CB&Q 

0 

6 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

8 

3 

3 

2 

CRIfcP 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

C&S 

0 

0 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3 

0 

28 

0 

DfcRGW 

0 

79 

4 

25 

2 

0 

1 

0 

0 

111 

45 

0 

0 

GX 

0 

0 

1 

0 

4 

0 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

o 

MP  Lines 

0 

0 

3 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

5 

0 

7 

0 

XP 

0 

5 

4 

0 

19 

2 

4 

0 

0 

34 

7 

2 

0 

SP 

0 

140 

37 

112 

176 

17 

448 

139 

8 

1072 

322 

111 

25 

VP 

0 

1976 

15 

54 

286 

3 

25 

17 

3 

2379 

312 

10 

6 

TOTAL 

0 

2211 

71 

193 

500 

22 

503 

164 

9 

3673 

692 

104 

33 

DOMINION 

CP 

0 

3 

67 

4 

79 

1 

807 

3 

31 

995 

206 

0 

0 

.■.-•_:. 

0 

14 

0 

37 

2 

1 

4 

4 

0 

62 

0 

0 

0 

:     :.-.l 

0 

17 

07 

41 

81 

2 

811 

7 

31 

1057 

206 

0 

0 

GARY 

AT&SF 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

Li 

2 

0 

0 

3 

0 

0 

0 

BiiO 

0 

2 

3 

0 

5 

1 

7 

0 

0 

18 

; 

12 

0 

CiO  (Sys.) 

0 

U 

3 

1 

4 

2 

7 

i 

1 

30 

B 

2 

0 

CfcXW 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

u 

1 

1 

ii 

B 

0 

CB&Q 

0 

U 

1 

3 

0 

" 

2 

0 

1 

7 

2 

0 

0 

CMStP&P 

0 

0 

1 

I 

1 

u 

0 

o 

0 

3 

1 

1 

0 

CItliP 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

2 

1 

a 

4 

1 

2 

0 

Eric- Lack 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

o 

0 

1 

o 

s 

a 

CTW 

0 

0 

4 

1 

5 

5 

3 

0 

0 

18 

1 

0 

o 

GX 

0 

47 

2 

1 

62 

0 

11 

0 

1 

124 

2 

0 

0 

IC 

0 

3 

5 

0 

6 

3 

9 

1 

1 

28 

4 

1 

0 

LAN 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

u 

1 

0 

0 

0 

MSlP&SStM 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

2 

3 

0 

l 

8 

3 

0 

0 

MP  Lines 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

u 

u 

1 

0 

0 

0 

NYC  (Sys.) 

0 

2 

2 

0 

3 

2 

2 

b 

u 

24 

5 

2 

0 

NP 

0 

u 

4 

1 

11 

3 

5 

2 

0 

26 

2 

4 

o 

I"RH 

0 

2 

1 

1 

U 

3 

3 

0 

g 

10 

1 

6 

0 

Southern 

0 

u 

0 

0 

0 

B 

1 

0 

B 

1 

1 

0 

0 

UP 

0 

111 

3 

0 

53 

0 

2 

1 

« 

178 

23 

l, 

1 

TOTAL 

0 

178 

33 

15 

156  j 

21 

61 

14 

? 

486      ] 

61 

41 

1 

522 


Rail 


TADLE  C  -  CONTINUED 


ROADS 

TF 
Ver 

CF 

& 

VSII 

IISH 

Other 

Web 

Base 

FAILURE  TOTALS 

EBFS  Excl. 

EBFs  Only 

In 

Ac  cum. 

Accum. 

Uof  I 

DF 

Head 

Broken 

Jt. 

Other 

Total 

19G1 

Total 

19G1 

INLAND 

B&OCT 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

C&O  (Syr. 

2 

24 

2 

1 

2 

1 

5 

0 

1 

38 

8 

0 

0 

CSiEI 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

C&NW 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

CB&Q 

0 

12 

0 

0 

2 

0 

2 

0 

0 

16 

8 

0 

0 

CMStP&P 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

1 

1 

0 

0 

4 

2 

0 

0 

CRI&P 

0 

0 

0 

1 

1 

2 

1 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

GTW 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

GN 

0 

11 

1 

0 

7 

0 

0 

0 

2 

21 

1 

0 

0 

MStP&SStM 

0 

1 

3 

0 

0 

7 

12 

0 

2 

25 

9 

0 

0 

MP  Lines 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

NYC  (Sys.) 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

2 

0 

4 

1 

0 

0 

NP 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

2 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

PRR 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

UP 

0 

52 

0 

2 

3 

0 

0 

1 

0 

58 

8 

0 

0 

TOTAL 

2 

104 

6 

5 

18 

12 

30 

4 

5 

186 

37 

0 

0 

LACKAWANNA 

CP 

0 

0 

1 

0 

2 

0 

1 

0 

4 

8 

1 

0 

0 

C&O  (Sys.) 

0 

4 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

6 

1 

0 

0 

GTW 

0 

0 

16 

1 

0 

1 

2 

0 

0 

20 

1 

0 

0 

GN 

0 

P 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

0 

1 

6 

0 

0 

0 

LV 

0 

0 

U 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

Me.  Cent. 

0 

0 

1 

0 

1 

0 

2 

0 

0 

4 

1 

0 

0 

NYC  (Sys.) 

0 

4 

12 

0 

40 

G 

23 

6 

15 

106 

29 

2 

0 

NP 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

3 

0 

0 

4 

0 

1 

1 

TOTAL 

0 

8 

30 

1 

51 

7 

32 

6 

20 

155 

34 

3 

1 

STE ELTON 

ACL 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

B&O 

4 

5 

5 

0 

12 

1 

2 

0 

0 

29 

4 

8 

2 

Ban  &  Aroos 

0 

0 

1 

1 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

4 

0 

0 

0 

C&O  (Sys.) 

0 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

1 

0 

0 

6 

1 

0 

0 

D&H 

0 

1 

4 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

7 

2 

1 

0 

GN 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

LI 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

NYNH&H 

1 

0 

5 

1 

0 

0 

3 

0 

0 

10 

1 

12 

0 

N&W 

1 

119 

2 

1 

12 

0 

3 

1 

1 

140 

14 

1 

0 

PRR 

0 

3 

5 

0 

5 

1 

0 

1 

0 

15 

1 

24 

0 

RF81P 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

SAL 

0 

0 

4 

2 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

6 

1 

1 

0 

Southern 

0 

0 

2 

1 

0 

3 

9 

0 

0 

15 

8 

0 

0 

W.  Md. 

0 

0 

2 

1 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

1 

0 

TOTAL 

6 

128 

31 

10 

37 

7 

20 

3 

1 

243 

32 

53 

2 

TENNESSEE 

ACL 

0 

0 

1 

2 

2 

1 

4 

0 

0 

10 

0 

3 

0 

C.  of  Ga. 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

10 

0 

0 

0 

12 

11 

0 

0 

FEC 

0 

0 

2 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

3 

1 

0 

0 

IC 

0 

11 

4 

4 

5 

1 

3 

1 

0 

29 

2 

2 

0 

L&N 

0 

25 

18 

14 

9 

4 

23 

17 

2 

112 

36 

17 

2 

MP  Lines 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

2 

0 

1 

0 

StL-SF 

0 

0 

2 

3 

1 

5 

0 

1 

0 

12 

4 

0 

0 

SAL 

0 

1 

4 

1 

1 

1 

0 

0 

0 

8 

3 

0 

0 

SP 

0 

0 

1 

4 

0 

0 

5 

1 

0 

11 

8 

0 

0 

Southern 

0 

1 

11 

C 

13 

8 

33 

0 

1 

73 

30 

9 

0 

TOTAL 

0 

38 

45 

35 

31 

30 

70 

20 

3 

272 

95 

32 

2 

ALL  MILLS 

11 

3301 

613 

330 

1310 

120 

2374 

241 

203 

8703 

1708 

318 

■11 

Rail 


523 


TABLE  7 

RAIL  FAILURES  IN  THE  WEB  WITHIN  THE  JOINT  BAR  LIMITS  FOUND  IN  1961 

ON  RAIL  OF  100  LB.  AND  ALL  HEAVIER  SECTIONS 


Railroad 

Rail  Rolled  Previous  to  1937 

Rail  Ro 

lied  in  1937  and  Af 

er 

Joints  Inspected  with  Defect 
Detecting  Instruments 

Detected 

"ailures 

Service  F 

allures 

Detected  Failures 

Service  Failures 

Bolt  Hole 

Other 

Bolt  Hole 

Other 

Bolt  Hole 

Other 

Bolt  Hole 

Other 

ATSiSF 

36 

23 

22 

0 

210 

195 

131 

0 

2.310.047 

ACL 

316 

608 

90 

136 

215 

153 

43 

29 

37,857 

B&O 

726 

26 

1006 

84 

17 

3 

44 

15 

- 

BfcOCT 

0 

0 

23 

7 

2 

4 

7 

0 

19,500 

Ban  &  Aroos 

1 

0 

1 

1 

1 

0 

6 

0 

- 

B&LE 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

B&M 

70 

12 

65 

6 

11 

3 

4 

0 

381,353 

CP 

211 

136 

36 

7 

451 

710 

285 

120 

2,196,611 

C  of  G 

0 

0 

0 

0 

342 

0 

0 

0 

- 

C&O  (Sys.) 

19 

19 

26 

12 

11 

4 

7 

10 

306.180 

C&EI 

0 

0 

15 

0 

0 

0 

22 

0 

0 

CfcNW 

658 

94 

464 

45 

175 

180 

192 

37 

1,597,740 

CB&Q 

24 

4 

60 

9 

54 

29 

65 

67 

423.182 

CI&L 

0 

0 

45 

14 

0 

0 

1 

0 

- 

CMStPiP 

318 

3 

150 

1 

23 

0 

22 

1 

413,445 

CRI&P 

77 

104 

97 

101 

8 

0 

70 

35 

- 

C&S 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

D&H 

2 

0 

8 

0 

2 

0 

3 

3 

62,742 

D&RGW 

20 

7 

3 

6 

20 

18 

6 

4 

282,150 

Erie-Lack 

142 

100 

27 

18 

9 

20 

6 

5 

754.668 

FEC 

13 

1 

1 

0 

1 

2 

5 

4 

- 

GTW 

12 

2 

48 

0 

5 

0 

13 

0 

28.603 

GN 

53 

0 

18 

0 

215 

0 

44 

0 

148,943 

IC 

36 

8 

13 

9 

85 

61 

41 

17 

274,015 

KCS 

3 

0 

D 

0 

6 

1 

0 

4 

0 

L&HR 

13 

0 

11 

0 

9 

0 

7 

0 

9,600 

L&NE 

0 

0 

4 

0 

0 

0 

0 

2 

- 

LV 

13 

12 

41 

3 

10 

10 

2 

2 

40,360 

LI 

50 

23 

0 

0 

0 

5 

0 

0 

1,728 

L&N 

600 

476 

139 

0 

200 

257 

54 

0 

- 

Me.  Cent 

1 

2 

8 

16 

0 

0 

0 

3 

- 

MStP&SStM 

156 

0 

27 

0 

15 

0 

15 

0 

165,040 

MKT 

208 

25 

15 

4 

6 

3 

16 

1 

- 

MP  Lines 

7 

23 

3 

11 

13 

57 

8 

40 

1.500.000 

NYC  (Sys)(A) 

193 

882 

70 

87 

282 

511 

121 

113 

151,273 

NYNHfcH 

2 

94 

0 

147 

73 

345 

6 

45 

- 

NiW 

9 

11 

5 

2 

7 

35 

1 

0 

- 

NP 

3 

0 

136 

9 

0 

1 

230 

60 

- 

PRH 

777 

236 

2353 

329 

602 

304 

290 

136 

1,378,841 

PfcLE 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

QNSSiL 

0 

0 

0 

0 

4 

1 

0 

0 

47,520 

Reading 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

- 

RF&P 

0 

0 

0 

0 

4 

18 

0 

1 

- 

Rutland 

0 

0 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

StL-SF 

24 

16 

125 

66 

10 

22 

97 

129 

56.312 

SAL 

30 

0 

12 

4 

11 

0 

27 

2 

Southern 

799 

422 

0 

0 

712 

1410 

0 

0 

2,728.000 

SP 

130 

5 

9 

48 

542 

413 

121 

27  5 

809.588 

UP 

75 

59 

0 

1 

35 

42 

19 

8 

- 

W.   Md 

0 

0 

0 

0 

3 

0 

3 

0 

- 

Totals 

5.827 

3.433 

5.177 

1.183 

4.401 

4.817 

2.034 

1,168 

16,125.298 

(A)    Includes  BfcA,  NYC  Southern  District  (CCCtiStL;  PI.E),  NYC  (New  York  District)  and  NYCfEastcrn  District). 


524 


Rail 


< 

cm 

J 

in 

< 

'"■' 

K 

Q 

U 

It 

J 

W 

R 

g 

O 

H 

0 

8 

EC 

o 

K 

H 

n 

u 

w 

u 

p 

7, 

-i 

u 

71 

ft 

W 
X 
P 
-J 

ft 
< 

< 

i 

en 

•4  en 

cm  en 

o 

m 
en 

ea 

- 

in 
en 

eg 

- 

en 
m 
en 

2 

CO 

d 

CM 

m 
en 

en 

CO 

t- 

23 

CO 

CO 

en 

- 

o 
m 

05 

62 

CO     0) 

en 

en 

en 

O 

A 

23 

«r 

GO 

en 

A 

eo 

CO     CO 

>h  en 

us 

en 

A 

a 

CO      CO 
CO    CM 

- 

CO 

"Cf 
en 

CM 

CM 

cn 

CO 

in 

O) 

a 

CO 

CM 

en 

a 

ft 

ea 

$  2 

CO 

en 
•"Ji 
en 

23 

co 

CO     CO     u 
CM    CO    CM 

CO 

CM 

■»< 

en 

« 

CO     CO 

co  in 

CM 
CM 

en 

3      3 

a 

CO 

CO     o 
CD    i-l 

CO 

o 

Ol 

CM 

X)             CO 

r5          en 

o 

CO 

m 

CM 

en 

CO 

en 

JO    co    o 

CM     ^    •-< 

at 
en 

& 

t- 

CO 

en 

a 

s 

CM 

e'- 
en 

en 

u 

5   en 

en 

CM 

CO 
CO 

en 

1> 

CO    x> 
CM     .H 
CM 

© 

en 

m 
en 
en 

• 

CO 

CO 

m 

CO 

CO 

p 

U 

a>   o 

Sf  1 

o   P   o 
^r  a   o 
<  O  O 

□ 

o 

8      v 
c  h  a 

C     b     CO 

O     01    rj 

CO 

5  o  M 

#    o    M 

CO    -S     CB 

a   o   c 
3  w  H 

< 
S 

§  a 

8-2 

M  • 
J!  tx 
u     • 

2  H 

CJ    CO 

*  2 


II 
*j 

£  6 
|| 

ft,  _. 
w  ^ 
K  H 

U    CM 


I 

CO      £ 
2     CO 


6  H 

O  CM 

w  ' 

W  3 

U  W 
09 


Si  =3 

H    o  co 

P  h 

El  a 


Rail 


525 


TABLE  9 
WELDED  ENGINE  BURNS  AND  FAILURES 


Engine  Bums 

Bums 

Failed  Welded 

Welded  Prior 

Welded 

Engine  Burns 

Railroad 

To  1901 

In  1961 

During  1961 

AT&SF 

106,099 

7,487 

0 

B&O 

1,441 

3,350 

1 

C&O 

45,028 

3,  113 

3 

C&NW 

15,224 

1,503 

0 

D&H 

7 ,  984 

33 

3 

EJ&E 

55,154 

1,280 

0 

IC 

32,433 

11,562 

0 

PRR 

321,985 

15,300 

4 

RF&P 

17,941 

0 

0 

StL-SF 

3,432 

303 

0 

SAL 

21,698 

1,949 

1 

Southern  (Sys. ) 

No  Record 

Did  Not  Report 

Southern  (West.  Div.) 

145,591 

Discontinued  Keeping  This  Information 

SP 

543 

1,566 

0 

Total 

774,553 

47,446 

12 

Report  on  Assignment  4 

Rail   End   Batter;   Causes  and   Remedies 

R.  C.  Postels  (chairman,  subcommittee),  J.  M.  Bentham,  B.  Bristow,  R.  M.  Brown, 
J.  A.  Bunjer,  R.  E.  Catlett,  Jr.,  M.  W.  Clark,  W.  J.  Cruse,  F.  L.  Etchison,  O.  E. 
Fort,  J.  H.  Greason,  C.  C.  Herrick,  K.  K.  Kessler,  J.  C.  Jacobs,  R.  R.  Lawton, 
H.  R.  Moore,  J.  S.  Parsons,  C.  F.  Parvin,  R.  B.  Rhode.  J.  G.  Roney,  A.  P.  Talbot. 

The  building  up  of  battered  rail  ends  by  means  of  different  welding  procedures  and 
the  evaluation  of  welding  rods  and  electrodes  used  in  these  procedures  is  of  considerable 
importance  to  the  railroads.  An  investigation  on  this  subject  using  12-in-stroke  rolling 
load  machines  at  the  Research  Center  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads  has 
been  carried  on  under  the  general  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering 
research,  by  Kurt  Kannowski,  metallurgical  engineer. 

A  definite  program  was  outlined  and  followed  in  this  investigation.  For  this  pro- 
gram the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  supplied  50  matched  battered  rail  ends  of  131  RE 
section.  All  of  the  joints  had  at  least  0.040  in  batter  when  they  were  removed  from 
track.  The  identity  of  the  rail  ends  in  the  relation  to  each  joint  in  track  was  maintained 
during  the  test.  New  oversize  head-contact  6-hole  joint  bars  were  used  to  give  a  good 
fishing  surface  fit.  A  bolt  tension  of  15,000  lb  was  maintained  throughout  the  test. 
These  joints  rested  on  a  2-in  white-pine  plank  which  was  supported  solidly  on  the  bed 
of  the  12-in-stroke  rolling-load  machines.  A  30,000-11)  wheel  load  was  applied  after  an 
original  rail  profile  was  obtained  of  each  joint  after  it  had  been  built  up  by  welding.  This 


526 Rail 

profile  was  checked  every  1,000,000  cycles  up  to  and  including  5.000,000  cycles,  which 
was  considered  a  run  out.  Any  joint  that  developed  0.040  in  or  more  batter  prior  to 
the  5,000,000  cycles  had  to  be  removed  because  of  the  damage  it  caused  to  the 
equipment. 

The  program  in  this  investigation  covers  oxyacetylene  and  electric-arc  welding 
methods  and  variations  of  procedures  of  both.  All  of  the  previously  described  joints 
were  welded  by  experienced  railroad  welders  using  the  standard  methods  prescribed  by 
their  railroad  for  the  methods  and  welding  materials.  Duplicate  joints  were  used  for 
each  step  of  the  investigation. 

The  data  in  this  investigation  indicate  that,  in  spite  of  variations  in  rods  and  weld- 
ing procedures,  the  oxyacetylene  welding  method  performs  well  in  building  up  battered 
rail  ends.  The  occurrence  of  porosity  near  the  interface  of  the  weld  and  rail  metal  as 
well  as  the  sharp  demarcation  line  between  the  rail  and  weld  metal  have  caused  the 
failures  of  electric  arc  welds  rather  than  the  practice  of  not  pre-  or  post-heating. 

The  failures  of  electric-arc  welds  are  often  caused  by  a  variable  that  was  not  given 
consideration  in  this  investigation.  These  welds  are  subject  to  variations  due  to  differ- 
ences in  the  welders  depositing  the  metal.  This  effect  on  the  quality  of  the  weld  is 
gradually  being  eliminated  by  use  of  the  automatic  feed  and  wire  electrode  welding 
process.  Welds  produced  by  this  method  are  now  under  rolling-load  test  as  well  as  an 
extensive  service  test  on  the  New  York  Central  System.  Results  from  both  show 
considerable  promise. 

A  complete  report  describing  the  method  of  making  the  tests,  preparing  the  speci- 
mens, the  results  obtained,  and  metallurgical  examinations  of  the  specimens  after  the 
rolling  load  tests  is  contained  in  an  engineering  report  prepared  by  the  AAR  Research 
Center  and  a  copy  of  this  report  will  be  furnished  on  request. 


Report  on  Assignment  5 

Economic   Value   of   Various   Sizes   of   Rail 

J.  C.  Jacobs  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  D.  Almy,  S.  H.  Barlow,  H.  B.  Berkshire, 
T.  A.  Blair,  C.  B.  Bronson,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  T.  F.  Burris,  M.  \V.  Clark,  J.  T.  Collin- 
son,  C.  O.  Conatser,  W.  J.  Cruse,  D.  T.  Faries,  O.  E.  Fort,  J.  H.  Greason,  Jr., 
J.  L.  Gressitt,  C.  E.  R.  Haight,  R.  R.  Lawton,  F.  R.  Micheal,  H.  R.  Moore,  C.  E. 
Morgan,  R.  H.  Patterson,  C.  F.  Parvin,  H.  F.  Smith,  D.  J.  White. 

Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  as  information.  It  is  a  continuation 
of  Study  "A"  reflecting  changes  in  the  test  mileage  and  computed  to  show  averages  for 
18  years.  The  labor  and  material  averages  are  computed  to  compensate  for  the  decrease 
in   track  mileage. 


Rail 


527 


STl  1>\     \ 

Results  of  Study  of  Illinois  Central  Railroad  Northward  Track,  Mattoon  to 
Savoy,  III.,  Test  Sections  of  112-Lb  and  131-Lb  Rah 


lU-Lb  Hail 

tSl-IA)  Rati 

MP  L52.24  -172.00  laid  in  1942  and  19 

MP  132.00   152.24  hud  in  194  1 

<  Iriginal  t »•- 1  included : 

( Original  test  included: 

19.70  track  milee 

20.  -'  t    track  miles 

18         turnouts 

21        turnouts 

1          railroad  crossing 

:-i        railroad  cros 

22         public  road  ctobe 

_'_'        public  roa 

2        private  made  croat 

ii        pii\ ate  grade  crossings 

2  1-in  joint  bars 

36-in  joint  bars 

Changes  in  rail  mileage: 

( Shanges  in  rail  mileage: 

1950— MP  152.09-152.24  laid  in  115-lb, 

1950-    MP  152.09   152.24  laid  in  115-lb, 

0.15  milee  added  to  test. 

0.  1 5  miles  dropped  from  test . 

L952— MP  155.87  -160.52  relaid  in  132-lb, 

1     Ml'  1  12.82  152.09  laid  in  L32-lb, 

t.ii"i  milee  dropped  from  test. 

fi.27  miles  dropped  from  test. 

1953— MP  160.52-163.55  relaid  in  132-lb, 

3.03  miles  dropped  from  trst. 

1954-  MP  152.09   155.87  relaid  in  132-lb, 

3.78  milee  droppe  1  from  test. 

1956— MP  170.79-172.00  relaid  in  132-lb, 

1.21  milee  dropped  from  b  st. 

1957— MP  170.79-163.55  relaid  in  132-lb, 

7.24  miles  dropped  from  test. 

(completing  removal  of  112-lb  rail) 

Average  Annual  Traffic   Density — 28,000,000  gross  tons 
Comparison  of  the  Two  Sections — Cost  of  Investment,   1944  Prices 


/.''  lit 

/ 

argi  s  pi  i    Mil 

-Lb 

131-Lb 

Gross  cost — rail  and  other  track  material 
Less  estimated  salvage 

643 

i   28 1 

Ci 

$14,413 
5,011 

S  8.359 
1.338 

S  9, in  ' 

I  .  173 

$  9,097 

L5  years 

S      557 

839 

$10,875 

Estimated  life — based  on  1960  condition- 
Annual  cost — Hail  and  other  track  material 

Labor  to  lay 

Interest  al  6' ,  * 

20  years 

1        17(1 

71 

953 

Total  annual  investment  cos! 

S  1,485 

S  1,497 

*<  >n  gross  outlay  for  laboi  and  material. 


528 


Rail 


Maintenance  Labor  and  Material  Per  Mile 


US-Lb 

tSl-Lb 

Year 

\tiles 
Main- 
tained 

Man- 
Hows 

Cross 
Ties 

Cv  Yd 

Ballast 

Year 

1/  ili 
Main- 
lain  i  il 

Man- 
Hours 

Cross 

/'■■ 

Cu  Yd 

Ballast 

L943 

L9.76 

19.70 
19.70 
19.70 
19.70 
19.70 

19.76 

19.91 
19.91 
15.20 
1 2 .  23 
8.45 
8.  15 

7 .  24 
7.24 

2,  ISO 
113 
701 

1  ,166 

045 
1  .005 
1  .574 

094 

667 

748 

1,110 

543 

239 

401 

274 

12,000 

710 
5 

230 

410 

208 

ISO 

541 

174 

48 

30 

91 

44 

32 

8 

40 

2,775 

628 

17 
25 1 

579 
273 
294 
423 
159 
1  93 
140 

292 

83 

159 

0 

0 

3.491 

19  11        

20 . 2 1 
20.24 

20.21 

20 . 2 1 
20.24 

20 .  21 
20.09 
20.  OS 

20 .  09 
20.09 
20.09 

2(1.09 

20.09 
20.09 
20 .  09 
20.09 
10.82 
10.82 

2,606 

131 
370 
748 
245 
670 
1 ,642 
614 

1  .  1  14 

1  .(IS9 

392 

031 

535 

39  t 

242 
53 
97 

448 
12,051 

1,065 
0 

5 

172 

38 

LO 

402 

59 

02 

139 

0 

91 

10 

0 

78 

0 

20 

314 

2,471 

194  1         

647 

L945 

1915     

1946     

1917         

30 

1940 

1947             _ 

1  1  1 
301 

1948 

1948 

185 

1949 

19  19 

1  L6 

1950 

1 950     

323 

1951.. 

1951 . 

52 

[952 

L952 

304 

1953       

1953 

I'll 

1 954 

1954 

1955 

21 
04 

1956 

1957 

L956     

1957 

52 
0 

1958     . 

214 

1959 

1960 

1901 

0 

0 

200 

Total  18  Years. 

2.743 

Average  of  15  Years  for  112-Lb  and  18  Years  for  131 -Lb  Rail 


112-Lb 

t31-Lb 

Savings  by    Use  of 
131-Lb 

Chargi 

Percent 

i  'hargt 

Percent 

Charge 

Percent 

844 
$1,055 

185 
$      014 

233 
$     233 

56 
32 

12 

669 

$     830 
137 

$     455 
152 

$     152 

57 
32 
11 

175 

$  219 
48 

$   159 
81 

$     81 

Cost  at  $1.25* 

47 

Cost  at  $3.32* 

35 

Ballast  (stone  and  slag)  cu  yd 
Cost  at  $1.00* 

18 

Total  maintenance 

Percent .    

$1 . 902 

$1,485 
$3,387 

100 

$1,443 

$1,497 
$2 , 940 

100 

$  459 

$     12  Cr. 

$  447 

100 

13.1 

*  Average  prices  1943  1961. 


SUMMARY 

The  greater  savings  realized  through  the  use  of  131 -lb  rail  have  been  in  labor  and 
cross  ties,  partially  due  to  the  use  of  longer  joint  bars,  larger  tie  plates,  and  greater  rail 
rigidity. 

Similar  maintenance  standards  have  been  practiced  on  both  test  sections. 


Rail 529 

Report  on  Assignment  6 

Joint    Bars:    Design,    Specifications,    Service   Tests, 

Including    Insulated   Joints  and 

Compromise   Joints 

Embert  Osland  (.chairman,  subcommittee),  G.  Y.  Begany,  Jr.,  J.  M.  Bentham,  R.  M. 
Brown,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  R.  E.  Catlctt,  Jr.,  J.  B.  Clark,  C.  O.  Conatser,  W.  J.  (ruse. 
O.  E.  Fort,  C.  J.  Henry,  H.  W.  Jenkins,  K.  K  Kessler,  Ray  McBrian,  J.  S.  Parsons, 
R.  C.  Postels,  J.  G.  Roney,  A.  P.  Talbot,  V.  R.  Terrill,  G.  L.  Todd,  J.  S.  Wearn, 
\V.   L.   Young. 

As  mentioned  in  last  year's  report,  the  insulated  joint  designed  by  the  Research 
Department  of  the  AAR  has  been  installed  on  a  number  of  railroads  and  it  is  hoped 
to  submit  a  report  on  its  performance  next  year.  Research  and  testing  are  being  con- 
ducted on  several  materials  in  an  attempt  to  develop  an  insulation  with  a  longer  life 
than  the  conventional  fiber,  and  also  better  adapted  for  use  with  welded  rail. 

A  pilot  model  has  been  constructed  of  a  hydraulic  rail  expander  and  contractor  for 
closing  or  expanding  the  gap  between  the  rail  ends  of  welded  rail  at  insulated  joints  to 
facilitate  the  replacement  of  insulation.  The  prospect  of  joining  strings  of  welded  rail 
in  the  field  with  thermit  welding  is  being  tried  out  on  several  railroads,  and  a  clamping 
arrangement  to  hold  the  gap  between  rail  ends  at  the  proper  distance  during  the  fusion 
of  the  thermit  mixture  has  just  been  completed.  It  will  be  subjected  to  laboratory  tests 
early  in  1963  and  possibly  service  tests  later  in  the  year. 

The  final  field  inspection  of  test  joints  installed  on  the  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway  and  the  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway  in  1949  will  be  made  sometime 
this  summer. 


Report  on  Assignment  8 

Causes   of   Shelly   Spots   and   Head   Checks  in   Rail: 
Methods   for   Their   Prevention 

L.  S.  Crane  (chairman,  subcommittee),  \Y.  D.  Almy,  B.  Bristow,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  T.  F. 
Burris,  J.  B.  Clark,  C.  J.  Code,  C.  A.  Colpitis,  C.  O.  Conatser,  W.  J.  Cruse,  F.  L. 
Etchison,  D.  T.  Faries,  O.  E.  Fort,  C.  J.  Henry,  C.  C.  Herrick,  T.  B.  Hutcheson, 
Ray  McBrian,  B.  R.  Meyers,  G.  L.  P.  Plow,  R.  B.  Rhode,  H.  M.  Williamson. 
W.  L.  Young. 

During  the  past  year  this  investigation  was  progressed  both  bj  the  Research 
Department.  AAR,  and  the  University  of  Illinois. 

An  account  of  the  work  conducted  by  tin-  AAR  research  staff  i-  included  in  this 
report  as  Appendix  8-a.  It  gives  the  results  of  the  latest  inspection  of  service  test  instal- 
lations of  heat-treated  and  alloy  steel  rail  on  various  railroads.  In  this  inspection  a 
significant  difference  in  tin-  performance  of  high-silicon  steel  rail  compared  with  standard 
carbon-steel  rail  was  observed  the  former  showing  ;i  greater  resistance  to  shelling.  An 
additional  installation  consisting  of  rail  made  bj  the  basic-oxygen  process  was  inspected 
and  will  be  reported  on  next  year. 

The  AAR  research  staff  also  conducted  metallurgical  and  physical  examination-  of 
rails  flame-hardened  by  the  Santa  Fe  Railway  and  the  Union  Pacific  Railroad    Reports 


530 Rail 

describing  the  processes  and  presenting  the  test  results  have  been  prepared  by  Kurt 
Kannowski  of  the  AAR  research  staff.  Copies  of  the  reports  may  be  obtained  from 
G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  AAR,  3140  S.  Federal  St.,  Chicago  16. 
The  investigation  of  shelly  rail  conducted  at  the  University  of  Illinois  by  Professor 
R.  E.  Cramer  is  presented  herein  as  Appendix  8-b. 


Appendix  8-a 

Report   on    1962   Inspections   of   Service   Tests   of   Heat- 
Treated   and   Alloy-Steel   Rail 

By  K.  H.  KANNOWSKI 

Metallurgical    Engineer,    AAR    Research    Department 

Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway  Service  Test  of  132  RE  Heat-Treated  Rails 

This  test  installation  is  described  extensively  in  the  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  57, 
page  833. 

The  12  heat-treated  (oil-quenched)  and  the  12  non-heat-treated,  end-hardened  132 
RE  rails  near  Martha,  W.  Va.,  were  inspected  May  9,  1961.  These  rails  were  laid  in  the 
high  and  low  sides  of  the  northbound  (loaded)  track  in  a  3-deg  6-min  curve  on  May  2, 
1949.  The  test  rails  had  carried  approximately  321,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic  to 
May  1,  1961. 

Comparatively  speaking,  progression  of  the  service  developments  in  these  test  rails 
had  been  slow  through  the  1959  inspection.  However,  an  increase  in  the  gage  corner 
service  developments,  particularly  in  the  non-heat-treated  rails,  was  noted  at  the  time 
of  both  the  1960  and  1961  inspections. 

One  June  12,  1961,  after  more  than  12  years  of  service  and  after  carrying  approxi- 
mately 325,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic,  the  test  rails  were  transposed.  The  rails  from 
the  high  side  of  the  curve  were  laid  in  the  low  side  while  the  low  side  rails  were  turned 
end  for  end  and  laid  in  the  high  side  of  the  curve.  Flow  of  the  head  metal  toward  the 
field  side  in  the  low  rails  had  resulted  prior  to  transposition  in  a  mild  fin  on  the  corner 
of  the  head  in  the  heat-treated  rails  and  a  much  heavier  fin  in  the  case  of  the  non- 
heat-treated  rails.  However,  in  each  case  the  flow  was  less  toward  the  gage  side.  The 
rails  were  therefore  turned  around  so  as  to  use  the  corner  of  the  rail  head  showing  the 
least  fin  for  the  new  gage  side. 

At  the  time  of  the  May  1962  inspection  the  rails  in  their  new  locations  had  carried 
approximately  25,000,000  gross  tons  for  a  total  of  about  350,000,000  gross  tons.  In  each 
case  the  rails  appeared  to  be  in  excellent  condition  and  taking  the  transposition  in 
good  order. 

A  more  extensive  coverage  of  each  test  rail  will  be  made  next  year  after  watjehing 
them  in  their  transposed  positions. 

Norfolk  &   Western  Railway  Service  Test  of  132  RE  Heat-Treated 
Rail  at  Kermit,  W.  Va. 

A  final  report  on  the  service  test  of  the  132  RE  heat-treated  rail  at  Kermit,  W.  Va., 
was  given  in  1957  and  may  be  found  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  58,  pages  1030-1032. 
Since  8  of  the  original  12  heat-treated  rails  on  the  high  side  and  10  of  the  original  11 


Rail 531 

in  the  low  side  of  the  curve  are  still  in  service,  an  inspection  was  made  on  May  11, 
1960.  The  rails  in  this  test,  which  originally  consisted  of  23  heat-treated  and  24  non- 
heat-treated  rails  laid  in  both  the  high  and  low  sides  of  the  curve,  were  installed  May 
3,  1949. 

The  original  test  of  fully  heat-treated  versus  non-heat-treated  rails  in  the  6-deg 
curve  just  west  of  Kermit  was  partially  concluded  as  of  May  23,  1960.  As  mentioned 
in  the  report  of  the  May  11,  1960,  inspection  the  remaining  7  of  the  original  12  fully 
heat-treated  rails  in  the  high  side  of  the  curve  were  removed  on  May  23,  1960,  after 
more  than  11  years  of  service,  having  carried  449,600,000  gross  tons  of  traffic.  They 
were  replaced  with  new,  regular,  non-heat-treated  rails,  thereby,  in  effect,  establishing 
a  new  comparative  cycle  between  heat-treated  and  non-heat-treated  rails  in  this  service; 
the  third  set  of  comparative  non-heat-treated  rails  were  installed  during  the  life  of  the 
original  heat-treated  high-side  rails. 

Ten  of  the  original  11  heat-treated  rails  remained  in  the  low  side  of  this  curve. 
One  rail  was  removed  from  service  in  October  1953  because  of  a  bad  engine-wheel 
burn,  and  two  other  rails  were  badly  marked  by  wheel  burns  but  remained  in  service. 
By  May  1,  1962,  these  low-side  heat-treated  rails  had  carried  495,100,000  gross  tons  of 
traffic.  Their  appearance  is  better  than  the  adjacent  fifth  set  of  non-heat-treated  com- 
parative rails. 

Because  this  curve  is  included  in  a  rail  laying  program,  it  was  decided  that,  for  all 
practical  purposes,  the  test  could  be  concluded,  and  it  is  expected  that  the  low-side 
heat-treated  test  rails  will  give  way  to  new  fully   heat-treated  rail  in  the  near  future. 

Approximately  500,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic  will  have  passed  over  these  low-side 
heat-treated  rails  by  the  time  they  are  removed  from  service,  just  a  little  over  13  years 
after  installation.  This  reflects  a  service  life  ratio  approaching  6  to  1  in  favor  of  the 
fully  heat-treated  rails  over  non-heat-treated  rails  in  this  location. 

Pennsylvania  Railroad  Service   Test  of  140  RE  High-Silicon  Rail 

This  test  installation  of  high-silicon  140  RE  rail  is  located  in  the  Pennsylvania 
Railroad  Altoona  District  No.  4  track,  east  of  Mifflin,  Pa.,  between  M.P.  152  and  M.P. 
153  +  2530.  The  test  rails  are  installed  in  the  5-deg  Mifflin  Reverse  Curve  in  the  3-deg 
15-min  Stone  House  Curve  and  in  the  2-deg  Casners  Curve  in  alternating  groups  of 
three  high-silicon  and  three  standard  high-carbon  rails  on  both  the  high  and  low  sides 
of  the  curves.  This  installation  has  been  previously  reported  in  the  AREA  Proceedings, 
Vol.  63,  page  539. 

During  the  June  1962  inspection  it  was  noted  that  at  201,000,000  gross  tons  of 
traffic  there  was  no  difference  in  gage  corner  developments  comparing  the  high -silicon 
and  the  high-carbon  rail  steels  in  the  5-deg  Mifflin  Reverse  Curve  and  in  the  3-deg 
15-min  Stone  House  Curve.  Considerably  more  curve  wear  was  observed  in  equal 
amounts  on  both  types  of  rail.  The  2-deg  Casners  curve  had  gage  corner  developments 
of  interest  in  that  no  shelling  could  be  observed  on  the  high-silicon  rails  whereas  one 
high-carbon  rail  had  one  shell  observed  last  year,  one  high-carbon  rail  had  two  small 
shells,  two  high-carbon  rails  had  one  small  shell  each  and  another  high -carbon  rail 
had  three  small  shells.  It  is  of  interest  that  at  the  above  tonnage  a  distinct  difference 
between  the  high-silicon  and  high -carbon  rails  could  be  observed  in  that  the  high-silicon 
rails  had  no  shelling  and  the  high-carbon  rails  had  ;i  total  of  five  rail-  with  shells.  No 
lubrication  could  be  observed  on  any  of  the  above  curves 


532 Kail 

Pennsylvania  Railroad  Service   Test  of  155  PS  High-Silicon  Rails 

The  155  PS  high-silicon  rails  were  produced  at  Steelton  in  September  1953  and 
installed  by  the  PRR.  This  installation  is  extensively  described  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol. 
53,  page  1029. 

The  rails  were  laid  October  5-8,   1953,  in  the  No.   1  eastbound  track  in  the  2 
37-min    Bixler    Curve,   M.P.    164,   east   of   Lewiston,   Pa.    Alternate   groups   of    5    high- 
silicon  rails  and  5  rails  of  standard  analysis  (blue  ends)   were  installed  in  the  high  and 
low  sides  of  the   curve. 

The  previous  152  PS  rails  in  this  curve  had  shown  light  to  medium  flaking  with 
some  shelly  spots  in  the  high  side  rails  after  12  years  of  service. 

At  the  time  of  the  May  1958  inspection  light  to  medium  flaking  was  common  to 
both  the  high-silicon  and  the  standard  rails  in  the  portion  of  the  curve  at  full  elevation. 

The  test  rails  throughout  the  curve  were  transposed  in  conjunction  with  the  regular 
rail  program  in  January  1959.  The  high-side  rails  were  moved  to  the  low  side  and  vice 
versa.  A  total  of  184,770,000  gross  tons  of  traffic  had  been  carried  by  the  test  rails  to 
January  1,  1959. 

During  the  June  1962  inspection,  after  88,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic  since  the 
transposition  on  the  curve,  all  of  the  rails  showed  light  to  medium  flaking  continuously 
throughout  their  lengths.  There  were  a  few  spots  of  heavy  flaking  but  no  noticeable 
difference  could  be  seen  between  the  high-silicon  rails  and  the  standard  analysis  (blue 
end)  rails.  Some  flange  wear  was  noted  on  the  high  rail  but  it  did  not  appear  as  exten- 
sive as  that  noted  before  the  rails  were  transposed.  The  track  gage  was  found  to  be 
Y%  to   Yd,  in  wide.  There  was  no  noticeable   lubrication  on  the  high  rail  in  this  curve. 

Norfolk  &  Western  Service  Test  of  132  RE  Heat-Treated  Rail 
at  Maher  and  Looney's  Curve 

These  installations  are  on  a  6-deg  curve  near  Maher,  W.  Va.,  at  M.P.  481  +  210  ft 
and  on  the  4-deg,  7-deg,  12-deg  Looney's  Curve  at  M.P.  455+  582  ft,  and  are  described 
extensively  in  the  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  57,  pages  834-835. 

Sixty-six  heat-treated  rails  were  installed  in  both  the  high  and  low  sides  of  the 
6-deg  curve  at  Maher  on  August  2  and  9,  1954.  On  September  21,  1959,  after  the  rails 
were  in  service  over  five  years  and  had  carried  168,900,000  gross  tons  of  traffic,  they 
were  transposed,  high  rails  to  the  low  side  and  low  rails  to  the  high  side  of  the  curve. 

As  reported  previously  3  of  the  66  original  high-side  rails  were  removed  from 
service  prior  to  the  transposition  because  of  the  development  of  detailed  fractures  frcm 
shelling.  Thus  only  63  heat-treated  test  rails  were  relocated  to  the  low  side  of  the  curve. 
Two  low-side  rails  were  not  reinstalled  in  the  high  side  during  the  transposition.  They 
were  used  elsewhere.  By  the  time  of  the  May  23,  1962,  inspection  the  rails  in  their 
transposed  positions  had  carried  an  additional  86,100,000  gross  tons  of  traffic,  making 
a  total  of  255,000,000  gross  tons. 

The  field-side  corner  of  the  head  of  the  former  low  rails  had  developed  a  mild  fin 
of  plastically  deformed  metal  which,  of  course,  has  been  considerably  worked  on  since 
the  transposition.  This  fin  has  for  the  most  part  been  ground  away  by  the  wheels  and 
the  gage  corner  is  assuming  a  contour  normal  in   high-side  rails. 

At  the  time  of  the  1960  inspection  34  of  the  64  rails  in  the  high  side  were  clear 
of  gage  corner  service  developments.  Light  flaking  in  20  and  medium  flaking  in  10  was 
noted  in  the  other  30  high-side  rails.  By  the  time  of  the  1961  inspection,  curve  wear 
had    changed   these   conditions   so   that   46   rails   appeared   free   of   gage   corner   service 


Rail 533 

developments,  and  light  flaking  was  noted  in  17  rails  and  medium  Baking  in  one.  By 
the  time  of  this  1962  inspection  further  "cleaning  up"  of  the  gage  corner  of  the  high- 
side  rails  had  occurred  so  that  only  a  few  rails  were  noted  to  contain  flaking  areas. 
There  was  no  evidence  of  shelling  in  any  form. 

Previously  there  had  been  little  protection  from  wear  for  the  rails  in  this  curve, 
as  the  curve  oilers  had  been  ineffective.  However,  the  oilers  appeared  to  be  operating 
properly  at  the  time  of  this  inspection. 

It  now  appears  that  the  transposition  will  considerably  extend  the  life  of  these  fully 
heat-treated  rails  which,  prior  to  the  transposition,  had  given  better  than  two  times 
the  life  of   previous  regular  rails  in   this  curve. 

Fifty-five  fully  heat-treated  rails  were  laid  in  the  high  side  and  54  in  the  low  side 
of  the  compound  Looney's  curve  on  August  2  and  9,  1954.  The  report  of  the  May  11, 
1961,  inspection  reflected  progression  of  the  service  developments,  particularly  in  the 
high  side  of  the  curve. 

In  September  1961  the  test  rails  in  the  high  side  of  the  curve  were  replaced  with 
new  fully  heat-treated  rails.  Thus,  after  carrying  approximately  215,000,0000  gross  tons 
of  traffic  in  85  months,  the  service  life  of  these  heat-treated  test  rails  came  to  an  end 
in  this  location  where  previously  installed  non-heat-treated  rails  lasted  only  15  to  18 
months   (a  high-side  service-life  ratio  approaching  5  to  1). 

I'p  to  the  time  of  the  1961  inspection,  about  half  of  the  heat-treated  rails  in  the 
low  side  of  the  curve  had  resisted  the  heavy  crushing  common  in  such  locations,  while 
others  showed  deformation.  There  appeared  to  be  little  change  in  these  low  rails  to  the 
time  of  the  May  24,  1962,  inspection.  Approximately  233,600,000  gross  tons  of  traffic 
have  passed  over  these  rails  in  the  93  months  since  installation.  Previously  installed  non- 
heat-treated  rails  lasted  about  6  to  9  months  in  this  curve  (a  low-side  service-life  ratio 
of  over  10  to  1  to  date). 

Great  Northern   Railway  Service  Test  of  115  RE  Columbium-Treated  Rail 

The  test  of  the  115  RE  columbium-treated  rail  on  the  Great  Northern  Railway 
Curve  22  is  extensively  described  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  pages  533-535.  This 
4-deg  curve  had  a  previous  history  of  shelling  with  standard  rail.  Eight  of  the  colum- 
bium-treated rails  were  installed  on  the  high  side  and  seven  on  the  low  side.  At  the 
September  inspection  only  15,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic  had  passed  over  this  curve 
and   no   service  developments  were  observed. 

Great  Northern  Railway  Service  Test  of  115  RE  Heat-Treated  Rails 

This  installation  of  115  RE  fully  heat-treated  rail  on  the  Great  Northern  Railway 
Curve  20  is  extensively  described  in  the  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  57,  pages  837-850  and 
Vol.  63,  pages  540-543.  On  May  17,  1961,  after  384,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic,  tin- 
heat-treated  rail  on  curve  20  was  transposed.  The  low  rail  had  a  very  light  head  flow 
to  the  field  side  and  the  high  rail  had  gage  corner  wear.  During  the  September  1962 
inspection  it  was  observed  that  in  the  transposed  position  a  good-as-new  condition  of 
both  the  high  and  low  rail  bad  been  established.  In  this  condition  they  should  carry 
at  least  the  same  gross  tons  of  traffic  as  in  the  original  position. 

Duluth,  Missabe  &  Iron  Range  Railway  Service  Test  of  Chrome- 
Vanadium  Alloy  Rail 

This  test  of  115  RE  chrome-vanadium  alloy  rail  on  the  Duluth,  Missabe  &  Iron 
Range  Railway  has  been  described  extensively  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol  57,  page  833, 


534 Rail 

and  Vol.  63,  pages  535-536.  The  inspection  on  October  1962  showed  that  no  substantial 
change  in  the  rail  conditions  had  taken  place  at  either  the  Proctor  Hill  or  the  Two 
Harbor  installations  after   160,000,000  gross  tons  of  traffic. 


Appendix  8-b 

Shelly    Rail    Studies   at   the   University   of    Illinois 

By  R.  E.  CRAMER 

Research    Associate    Professor,    University   of    Illinois 

Organization  and  Acknowledgment 

The  shelly  rail  investigation  at  this  laboratory  is  financed  by  the  Research  Depart- 
ment of  The  Association  of  American  Railroads.  Jerry  Crum,  student  test  assistant,  has 
worked  on  a  part-time  basis,  and  Marion  Moore,  mechanic,  has  repaired  and  operated 
the  rolling-load  machines. 

Rolling-Load  Tests   to   Produce   Shelling  in  S-64-KG 
(132-Lb)   Abrasion-Resistant  German  Krupp  Rails 

When  the  writer  attended  the  world  metallurgical  congress  in  Dusseldorf,  Germany, 
in  1955  a  very  interesting  paper  on  railroad  rails  was  given  by  Dr.  Walter  Janiche, 
director  of  research  of  a  subsidiary  of  the  Krupp  Steel  Co.  in  Rheinhausen,  Germany. 
This  paper  was  reported  in  detail  to  the  members  of  the  rail  committee  at  that  time. 
In  November  1957,  Dr.  Janiche  attended  the  world  metallurgical  congress  held  in  Chi- 
cago at  which  time  he  visited  with  the  writer,  Mr.  Kannowski  and  Mr.  Magee  at  the 
AAR  Central  Research  Laboratory.  He  has  read  the  AREA  reports  on  shelly  rail  re- 
search for  many  years  and  said  he  would  be  interested  in  having  rolling-load  tests  made 
of  their  intermediate  manganese  abrasion-resistant  rails,  and  offered  to  furnish  sufficient 
specimens  for  such  tests. 

We  recommended  that  he  furnish  their  S-64-kg  section  which  is  quite  similar  to 
AREA  132-lb  section.  It  was  not  until  late  November  1961  that  the  test  rails  arrived. 
Mechanical  tests  are  listed  in  Table  1  on  two  of  these  specimens,  Nos.  1215  and  1216. 
Rolling-load  tests  are  completed  on  two  specimens  from  rail  1215  giving  1,787,700  and 
1,843,200  cycles  for  failure.  These  are  too  few  test  results  to  draw  any  conclusions,  and 
more  rolling-load  tests  will  be  made  when  cradle  rolling  machines  are  available. 

So  far  the  rolling-load  tests  of  these  specimens  show  results  that  are  not  much  better 
than  for  our  last  few  standard  steel  rails,  two  of  which  are  listed  in  Table  1,  Nos.  1222 
and  1228.  The  writer  would  point  out  that  the  carbon  content  of  the  abrasion-resistant 
rails  is  only  0.57  percent,  and  all  our  previous  tests  have  indicated  that  if  there  is  excess 
ferrite  around  the  pearlite  grains,  as  could  be  the  case  with  this  steel,  we  would  expect 
early  failures  in  our  rolling-load  tests  to  produce  shelling  failures.  The  cross  sections 
of  these  two  specimens  showing  the  shelling  cracks  produced  are  at  the  top  of  Fig.  1. 

Metallographic  examination  of  one  specimen  from  rail  1215  shows  excessively  large 
non-metallic  inclusions  in  that  one  specimen,  but  the  grain  structure  was  much  finer 
than  in  standard  American  rail  steel.  We  appreciate  the  cooperation  of  Dr.  Janiche  and 
his  company,  and  if  he  should  ever  make  a  heat  of  rails  of  intermediate  manganese 
with  higher  carbon  content  we  would  certainly  like  to  make  some  rolling-load  tests 
of  that  composition. 


Rail 


535 


a  K  o  - 


3  ?r~ 


^Z  o 


o  6? 


2  MS  3 

!>  g  O  Q- 


< 

_  c 

t  2 


to  «• 

hi  c* 

*  3  ft 

c  S  '~ 


o  o 

o  o 

in  o 

f»  cm 
cs  — 

r^"  CO 


I      X 

E_ 
<  t/5 


5  2 


2  til 


-  O  E 


i  x 

s 
oa  o 


536 


Rail 


.  T3 

o  o 

o  o 

O  O 

O  O 

o  o 

o 

oo 

•2  °-  S 

o  o 

o  o 

o  o 

O  O 

o  o 

o 

—1  .«• 

CN   O 

O  co 

1>     3   O     nj 

O   "H 

CN   CN 

oo  r~- 

V  o 

o  ■* 

CO 

-"iff 

—  -3  o  jj 

o  ^r 

GO    CO 

CO  ** 

— «  r^ 

O 

o  - 

U  U.  !?>  S 

O  CN 

ON  v© 

r»  (n 
^T  in 

ao  CN 

CO    00 

IT)  «^ 

o 

asg. 

o 

o 

o 
o 

O 

o 

o 
o 

O 

o 

8 

O 
O 

8 

in 

o 

o 

o 

o 

IT) 

i-j 

t> 

aT 

<s 

K 

w 

•o 

<Q 

00 

OO 

•o 

•a 

m 

V     >,  0) 

3»o 

CN 

vO 

o> 

""' 

o 

CN 

Ov 

o 

«  ^  i 

o 

TT 

■* 

> 

>>     _ 

°-     ■S 

Boa 

3  z  o 

rt 

CO 

00 

_ 

^O 

r^- 

h* 

o 

T 

o 

o 

o 

6    z 

-* 

"-1 

CO 

CO 

"* 

M 

"■ 

fc,« 

o 

•o   JJ 
OS  < 

- 

Ov 

- 

o 

■* 

- 

- 

o 

t> 

r^ 

CO* 

■* 

2 

o* 

h» 

°0       ^o 

en 

CO 

vO 

o 

o 

r> 

o 

o 

3.5  .s 

00 

00 

2 

2 

r^ 

r-^' 

oo' 

00 

v  £ 

O 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

8 

~    bo 

O 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

M    c    _ 

r^ 

r~- 

CO 

r^ 

o 

CO 

O 

c  <u  m 
,<u  b  a 
H  co 

o 

V 

co" 

o 

r^" 

CN 

■* 

co" 

CO 

CO 

*o 

*x> 

CO 

~ 

rt 

" 

- 

" 

5  ,  S 

2   bofc|   a 

•a  So- 

o 
o 

o 
o 

o 

o 

o 

o 

8 

o 

o 

8 

g 

r^ 

o 

r^ 

co 

>  b  e§  M 

"* 

CO 

o 

_r 

* 

^: 

in 

CO 

CO  CN 

r~ 

r^ 

CN 

00 

r^ 

r- 

r^ 

<U   .5    K 

o 

^O 

o 

o 

o 

a- 

o 

O 

3  ^  .3 

o 

•o 

CO 

r^ 

o 

r^ 

■» 

ao 

<  co  X 

CN 

CO 

CO 

CO 

CN 

(N 

CO 

s 

05 

o 

O  o 

m 

w    u 

K 

u  u 

a  c 

•a 

a> 
c 
i) 
■p 
h 

u 

c 
u 
■a 

CO 

tu 

CO 
—  °8 

2< 

c 

01 
00 

>. 

X 

o 

§Z 
XI     • 

13" 

Jz 
^    ■ 

co  O 

u    '3 

•a 

e 

c 

c 
■a  2 
co  "t! 

jj 
xi  to 

I- 

.    « 

-a  os 

CO 

XI   2 

X- 

•  3 

c  ^ 

—     OJ 

Xl'    9J 

d  -a 

°  "S 
u  « 

.  x: 
XI   f» 

p 

oa  o 
•a 

a  2 

■6    . 
c55  ^ 

.    O 

xj  u 

.  o 
■a  ** 
in  £• 

3  ° 

c  u 

O    V 

xi  u 

u  5 
xi  u. 

-  e 

—  c 

o 

a-  S. 

O       Q, 

^O     CB 

"  "3 

IT)  •- 

o  J) 

•^  ^  °- 

~  n 

Zi  a 

o  u 

CO      ™        . 

CO 

_i  x 

-i  OS 

-H    11. 

-  u 

_  OS 

_  OS 

a  [I. 

—  OS  CO 

5  to 

*o 

OO 

CO 

2 

<-» 

o 

2 

r~- 

in 

o 

~" : 

T 

r-J 

c 

<  _ 
"3  § 

en 

00 

r~ 

CN 

OO 

S 

r-- 

00 

LA 

o 

CO 

6 

2u 
u 

lO 

r^ 

S 

•J) 

r- 

•^, 

1-7 

8.d 

to  Z 

<  CQ 

<  cq 

<  do 

<  m 

<  CQ 

<  oa 

<  CQ 

<  00 

V0 

<   CO 

CO 

-<r 

lO 

■o 

s 

O 

CN 

CN 
(N 

s 

CN 

CN 

3 

CN 

CN 

CN 

co 

Rail 


537 


Fig.    1 — Shelly    failures   produced   in   rolling-load   tests. 


Specimen 

S  umber     Size  and  Kind  of  Rail 
1215A        S  64  Kg   (132-Lb)   Abrasion 


1215B  Resistant  German  Rail 

1219A  136-Lb  Basic-Oxygen, 

1219B  Colorado  Mill 

1220A  119-Lb  Basic-Oxyucn. 

1220B  Colorado  Mill 


A verage 

Brinell 

Hardness 

Cycles  of 

50,000-Lb 

Wheel  Load 

286     .. 

1,787,700 

1,843,200 

.      266     . . 

1,403,000 

1,575,700 

.       257      .. 

918,800 

1.107,200 


Rolling-Load  Tests  to  Produce  Shelling  in 
Basic-Oxygen  Steel  Rails  from  the  Colorado   Mill 

In  our  last  report  printed  in  AREA  Proceedings  Vol.  63,  1962,  pages  546-8,  we 
described  six  rolling-load  tests  of  basic-oxygcn-steel  112-lb  rails  produced  and  supplied 
by  the  Algoma  Mill.  The  data  from  the*  tests,  rails  Nos.  1206-08,  arc  repeated  by 
request  in  Table   1,  to  compare  them  with  the  results  of  six  new  rolling-load  tests  made 


538 


Rail 


Fig.  2 — Shelly  failures  produced  in  rolling-load  tests. 

Average  Cycles  of 

Brinell  50,000-Lb 

Hardness      Wheel  Load 
5,090,200 

269     

2,241,100 
1,982,100 

266     

1,632,400 


Specimen 

Number  Size  and  Kind  of  Rail 

1221A  136-Lb  Basic-Oxygen, 

122 IB  High-Si,  Colorado  Mill 

1222A  115-Lb  Std.  Carbon  Rail 


1222B        Steelton  for  LIRR 


on  three  basic-oxygen-steel  136-lb  and  119-lb  rails,  Nos.  1219,  1220  and  1226,  funished 
by  the  Colorado  Fuel  and  Iron  Corp.  The  Algoma  rails  averaged  3,106,600  cycles  and 
the  three  Colorado  rails  averaged,  1,389,300,  1,013,000  and  2,542,000  cycles.  The  etched 
cross  sections  of  rails  1219  and  1220  are  all  shown  in  Fig.  1,  and  rail  1226  in  Fig.  3. 
It  will  be  noted  that  there  is  some  segregation  shown  in  both  specimens  of  rail  1220 
which  may  account  for  the  two  low  rolling-load  tests  of  this  rail.  This  test  emphasizes 
what  the  writer  has  contended  for  many  years,  namely,  that  segregation  of  nonmetallic 
impurities  which  are  rolled  out  into  small  inclusions  in  the  heads  of  rails  play  a  very 
important  role  in  the  development  of  internal-type  shelling. 

Rolling-Load  Tests  to  Produce  Shelling 
In   Basic-Oxygen   High-Silicon   Steel   Rails 

The  Colorado  Mill  also  furnished  one  136-lb  basic-oxygen  rail,  No.  1221  in  Table  1 
and  Fig.  2,  of  high-silicon,  0.62  percent,  carbon  0.69  percent,  composition.  This  rail  has 
269  Brinell  hardness  with  good  tensile  properties  and  a  relatively  high  endurance  limit 
of  68,500  psi.  The  two  rolling-load  tests  ran  5,090,200  and  2,241,100  cycles. 

From  all  the  tests  the  writer  has  made  and  others  he  has  seen,  and  bend  tests  of 
welded  basic-oxygen  steel  rails  which  will  be  reported  on  by  Mr.  Kannowski,  the  writer 


Rail 


539 


1226A 


0 


1227A 


1229A 


I230A 

Fig.    3 — Shelling    failures   produced   in   rolling-load   tests. 

Average  Cycles  of 

Specimen  BrineU  50,000-Lb 

S  umber  Size  and  Kind  of  Rail  Hardness       Wheel  Load 

1225A  136-Lb  Flame-Hardened  by  AT&SF    350     4,738,200 

1226A  133-Lb  Basic-Oxygen,   Colorado   Mill    274     2,814,000 

1227A  115-Lb  Std.   Carbon,   Colorado   Mill    269     2,300,000 

1229A  100-Lb  Continuous-Cast  French   Rail    248     1,163,200 

1 230A  136-Lb  Flame-Hardened  for  S.P.  Co 3S0     1 .561 ,400 


floes  not  hesitate  to  recommend  the  use  of  basic-oxygen  steel  rails  for  all  types  ol  rail 
road  service. 


Rolling-Load  Tests   to   Produce  Shelling  of  Two 
115-Lb   Standard   Carbon-Steel   Rails 

The  AREA  Rail  committee  requested  that  rolling-load  tests  be  made  on  time  115  II' 
rails  of  recent  rollings  from  three  different  milk  to  compare  with  recent  tests  ol  basic- 
ozygen  steel  rails.  Two  tests  have  been  completed  on  rails  1222  and  1227  (see  Table  1 


540 Rail 

and  Figs.  2  and  3)  supplied  by  the  Long  Island  Railroad  and  the  Great  Northern  Rail- 
road. The  two  specimens  from  rail  1222  ran  1,982,100  and  1,632,400  cycles.  The  second 
rail  No.  1227  ran  2,300,200  and  2,840,000  cycles.  One  rail  No.  1228  remains  to  be  tested. 

Two   More  Induction-Hardened  Rails  Supplied  from  Japan 

In  our  report  printed  in  AREA  Proceedings  Vol.  61,  pages  874-7,  rolling-load  tests 
are  reported  to  produce  shelling  in  50-kg  (100-lb)  rails  induction-hardened  by  a  process 
described  in  that  report,  which  was  developed  in  Japan  by  the  Japanese  National  Rail- 
ways. Those  rolling-load  tests  ran  only  512,400  and  718,300  cycles  to  develop  shelling 
failures.  Those  small  rails  contained  only  0.65  percent  carbon,  and  the  writer  recom- 
mended that  better  results  would  be  obtained  on  larger  rails  with  higher  carbon  con- 
tent. Recently,  the  same  company,  The  Yawata  Iron  and  Steel  Co.,  Ltd.,  of  New  York, 
submitted  two  more  specimens  of  119-lb  section,  with  0.72  percent  carbon  content. 
They  were  induction-hardened  throughout  the  rail  head  the  same  as  the  previous  speci- 
mens. Brinell  tests  and  mechanical  tests  on  both  specimens  are  shown  in  Table  1,  speci- 
mens Nos.  1223  and  1224.  Rockwell  hardness  tests  are  shown  in  Fig.  4,  specimens  1223 
and  1224.  Whenever  a  cradle  rolling-load  machine  is  available,  rolling-load  tests  will  be 
made  on  these  new  test  specimens. 

Tests   of   Flame-Hardened   Rails 

In  last  year's  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  page  548,  rolling-load  tests  are  described 
of  rails  flame-hardened  by  the  Union  Pacific  Railroad.  Six  tests  averaged  about  5  mil- 
lion cycles  to  produce  failures  in  the  rolling-load  machines.  This  year,  one  flame- 
hardened  rail  was  supplied  by  the  Santa  Fe  Railway  No.  1225  in  Table  1,  and  Figs.  3 
and  4.  The  first  rolling-load  test  on  this  rail  failed  at  4,738,000  cycles  and  the  second 
test  at  5,247,000  cycles.  These  results  are  very  encouraging  for  the  Santa  Fe  method  of 
flame  hardening.  A  description  of  their  hardening  method  and  further  tests  of  their 
flame-hardened  rails  will  be  presented   by   Kurt  Kannowski. 

Recently  the  Southern  Pacific  Company  furnished  two  flame  hardened  rails,  one 
of  standard  carbon  rail  steel  and  the  second  of  high-silicon  rail  steel.  These  rails  were 
flame-hardened  by  a  commercial  firm.  Etched  cross  sections  of  them,  with  Rockwell  C 
hardness  readings,  are  shown  as  specimens  1230  and  1231  in  Fig.  4.  The  first  specimen 
of  the  standard  carbon  rail  failed  at  1,561,400  cycles,  as  shown  in  Table  1.  Other  rolling- 
load  tests  on  these  specimens  are  in  progress. 

Rolling-Load  Tests  of   100-Lb  Continuous-Cast  Rails  from  France 

Mr.  Kannowski  furnished  a  rail,  No.  1229  in  Table  1,  which  is  about  100-lb  section 
with  248  Brinell  hardness.  It  was  made  from  a  continuous-cast  ingot  produced  in  France 
and  sent  to  Germany  to  be  rolled  into  rails.  The  first  specimen  from  this  rail  failed  at 
1,163,200  cycles.  Other  rolling-load  tests  will  be  made  on  this  rail  when  rolling  machines 
are  available. 

Summary 

1.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  German  abrasion-resistant  rail. 

2.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  ten  specimens  of  basic-oxygen  standard  carbon- 
steel  rails. 

3.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  two  specimens  of  basic-oxygen  high-silicon 
steel  rails. 

4.  The  writer  recommends  the  use,  when  desired,  of  basic-oxygen  steel,  for  railroad 
rails  for  all  types  of  railway  service,  including  continuous  welded  track. 


Rail 


541 


,,.,.i4jtit  <l,        k   : 

M.     «  .1* 


3«  !]MII|I>I>1  1435 


1224 


1230 


1231 


Specimen 
Number 
1223 
1224 
1225 
1230 
1231 


Fig.  4 — Rockwell  C  hardness  of  flame-hardened  rails. 

Size  and  Kind  of  Rail 

119-Lb  Induction-Hardened  Rail  from  Japan 

119-Lb  Induction-Hardened  Rail  from  Japan 

136-Lb  Std.  Carbon  Rail,  Flame-Hardened  by  AT&SF 

136-Lb  Std.  Carbon  Rail,  Flame-Hardened  for  SP  Co. 

136-Lb  High-Si  Rail,  Flame-Hardened  for  SP  Co 


5.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  two   115-lb  standard  carbon  steel  rails. 

6.  Mechanical   tests  are  reported  of  two   Japanese  induction-hardened    119-lb   rails. 

7.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  on  rails  flame-hardened  by  the  Santa  Fe  Railway 
and   others   flame-hardened   by   a  commercial   firm    for   the   Southern   Pacific   Company. 

8.  One  rolling-load  test  was  made  of  B   rail   rolled  in   Germany   from  a  continuous 
cast  ingot  produced  in  France. 


542 Rail 

Report  on  Assignment  9 

Standardization    of    Rail    Sections 

T.  B.  Hutcheson  (chairman,  subcommittee),  S.  H.  Barlow,  B.  Bristow,  J.  A.  Bunjer, 
T.  F.  Burns,  M.  W.  Clark,  C.  J.  Code,  C.  A.  Colpitts,  L.  S.  Crane,  W.  J.  Cruse, 
O.  E.  Fort,  C.  E.  R.  Haight,  C.  J.  Henry,  C.  C.  Herrick,  B.  R.  Meyers,  E.  Osland, 
G.  L.  P.  Plow,  H.  F.  Smith,  H.  M.  Williamson. 

Following  approval  by  the  Association  of  the  Rail  committee's  recommendation 
that  Member  Roads  be  requested  to  restrict  purchases  of  new  rail  to  the  eight  sections 
listed  on  page  4-M-2  of  the  Manual  of  the  Engineering  Division,  AAR,  Subcommittee  9 
of  the  Rail  committee  informed  the  Purchases  and  Stores  Division  of  the  Association 
of  American  Railroads  of  the  action  of  the  Association,  and  requested  that  the  Pur- 
chases and  Stores  Division  bring  this  matter  to  the  attention  of  the  purchasing  depart- 
ments of  Member  Roads. 

In  November  1962  the  Purchases  and  Stores  Division  advised  the  subcommittee 
chairman  that  the  Rail  committee's  action  had  been  brought  to  the  attention  of  each  of 
its  regional  committees  at  regional  meetings  held  during  1962,  and  further  that  the  Pur- 
chases and  Stores  Division  was  fully  in  support  of  the  recommendation  that  purchases 
be  restricted  as  indicated.  The  Purchases  and  Stores  Division  is  further  of  the  opinion 
that  purchasing  departments  of  Member  Roads  will  require  the  full  cooperation  of  chief 
engineering  officers  in  furthering  this  program,  and  requests  such  cooperation. 


Report  on  Assignment  10 

Service   Performance  and   Economics  of   78-Ft   Rail; 
Specifications  for  78-Ft  Rail 

Collaborating  with  Committee  5 

A.  P.  Talbot  (chairman,  subcommittee),  W.  D.  Almy,  S.  H.  Barlow,  H.  B.  Berkshire, 
R.  M.  Brown,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  R.  E.  Catlett,  J.  T.  Collinson,  W.  J.  Cruse,  O.  E.  Fort, 
J.   H.   Greason,   V.   E.   Hall,   J.   C.  Jacobs,   H.   W.   Jenkins,  F.   R.  Micheal,  H.   R. 
Moore,  C.  E.  Morgan,  R.  H.  Patterson,  R.  C.  Postels,  R.  B.  Rhode,  J.  G.  Roney, 
D.  J.  White. 

This  is  a  progress  report,  submitted  as  information. 

Cost  data  are  being  kept  on  the  three  test  stretches  of  78-ft  rail  on  the  Pennsylvania 
Railroad.  As  noted  in  last  year's  report  the  bars  were  renewed  in  1961  on  the  140-lb 
rail  at  Coshocton,  Ohio,  after  approximately  303  million  gross  tons  of  traffic. 

In  1962  the  bars  were  renewed  on  the  155-lb  rail  at  Ryde,  Pa.,  after  approximately 
412  million  gross  tons  of  traffic. 

Inspection  of  the  joint  bars  on  the  133-lb  rail  near  Hamlet,  Ind.,  indicates  that  bar 
renewals  will  not  be  required  for  several  more  years. 

Field  measurements  of  joint  gap  openings  and  rail  end  batter  on  the  test  stretches 
are  scheduled  in  1963.  Cost  figures  will  be  compiled  to  the  end  of  1962,  which  will  be 
after  a  little  more  than  12  years  of  service,  and  will  be  included  in  the  next  report. 


Report    of   Committee    1 — Roadway   and    Ballast 


F.  N.  Beighley. 
Chairman 

L.  J.  Deno, 

Vice  Chairman 
R.  H.  Hi  Km  ii.  Secretary 

G.  B.  Harris 

W.    P.    ESHBAl'GH 

G.  W.  Becker 

G.  D.  Mayor 

K.  W.  Schoeneberg 

G.  F.  Nigh 

K.  W.  Bradley 


H.  G.  Johnson 
R.  D.  Baldwin 
T.  W.  Creighton 
C.  E.  Webb 

W.  T.  Adams 
R.  A.  Anderson 
C.  VV.  Bailey 

A.  S.  Barr 

K.  \Y.  Bauman 

C.  R.  Bergman 
L.  H.  Bond 

J.  G.  Campbell 
H.  \V.  Clarke 
R.  E.  Clemons 

D.  H.  Cook 
I.  P.  Cook 
M.  \V.  Cox 

B.  H.  Crosland 

A.  P.  Crosley  (E) 
H.  F.  Davenport 
G.  VV.  Deblin 
J.  W.  DeMoyer 
W.  M.  Dowdy 
J.  B.  Farris 
J.  S.  Felton 
J.  K.  Fisher 
J.  E.  Gray 
M.  B.  Hansen 
F.  VV.  Hillman  (E) 
H.  O.  Ireland 
R.  J.  Kemper 


H.  \V.  Lec.ro  (E) 
A.  E.  Lewis 
R.  R.  Manion 
A.  Mansun 
P.  G.  Martin 

W.    C.    MCCORMK  K 

E.  W.  McCuskey 
H.  E.  Moore 
Paul  McKay  (E) 
W.  G.  Murphy 

F.  R.  Naylor 
J.  E.  Newby 
S.  J.  Owens 

F.  S.  Patton 

G.  W.  Payne  (E) 

F.  L.  Peckover 
VV.  F.  Petteys 
S.  R.  Pettit 

J.    W.    POULTER 

L.  G.  Reichert 
X.  B.  Roberts 
E.  L.  Robinson 
R.  W.  Scott 

G.  E.  Shaw 
W.  M.  Snow 
S.  \V.  Sweet 

VV.  0.  Trieschman 
A.  J.  Wegmann 
R.  D.  White 
E.  L.  Woods 

Committee 


(E)  Member  Emeritus. 

Those    whose    names    are   set    in    bold-face    type   constitute    the    Engineering    Division,    AAR    Com- 
mittee   1. 


To  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association: 
Your  committee  reports  on  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Revision  of  Manual. 

Progress  report,  including  recommendations  submitted  for  adoption   page  545 

2.  Physical  properties  of  earth  materials: 

(a)  Roadbed.   Load   capacity.   Relation   to   ballast.  Allowable  pressures. 

(b)  Structural  foundation  beds,  collaborating  with  Committees  6  and  8. 
Progress  report  covering  both  (a)  and  (b),  submitted  as  information   ....   page  S46 

3.  Natural  waterways;  Prevention  of  erosion. 

Research  is  being  done  to  revise  present  Manual  material,  updating  it  t c . 
reflect  more  recent  data  in  determining  size  of  waterway  openings  and 
prevention  of  erosion. 

4.  Culverts. 

(a)   Erosion  control  for  outlet  structure^. 

Research   on   this  assignment   was    Started   in    1958   at    Colorado   State 


543 


544  Roadway    and    Ballast 

University  as  a  three-year  project.  Budget  curtailment  in  succeeding 
years  forced  cancellation  of  the  project  without  having  obtained 
enough  data  for  a  progress  report.  It  is  felt  the  project  is  of  enough 
importance  so  that  appropriations  will  be  forthcoming  to  resume  the 
work  at  the  University, 
(b)   Repair  of  short  pipe  sections  that  have  pulled  apart. 

Further  study  indicates  that  a  final  report  will  be  submitted  in  1964. 

5.  Specifications   for   pipelines   for   conveying   flammable   and   non-flammable 
substances,   collaborating  with    Committees   IS   and   20. 

Your  committee  is  also  collaborating  with  ASCE  and  AWWA  (American 
Water  Works  Association)    on  specifications  for  these  Associations. 

6.  Roadway:  Formation  and  protection: 

Report  on  grading  problems  encountered  during  relocation  of  Santa  Fe 
Railway's  main  line  between  Williams  and  Crookton,  Ariz.,  presented  as 
information  in   Bulletin    573,   September-October   1962. 

(a)  Roadbed  stabilization. 

Data  are  being  assembled  for  a  progress  report  to  be  presented  as 
information  at  a  later  date. 

(b)  Slope  protection. 

Manual  material  being  reviewed  to  up  date  it  in  line  with  present-day 
material  and  methods. 

(c)  Performance  of  filter  material  in  subdrains. 

Third   progress   report    on   performance   of   filter   materials,   submitted 

as   information    page  554 

(d)  Gypsum  and  lime  treatment  for  subgrade  improvement. 

No  additional  data  have  been  developed  on  this  subject  since  the  last 
report  published  in  Bulletin  570,  Part  1. 

7.  Tunnels. 

(a)  Ventilation,  changes  necessary  for  operation  of  diesel  power. 

Your  committee  has  previously  submitted  a  progress  report  on  this 
assignment,  and  is  continuing  its  study  to  develop  recommendations 
for  Manual  material. 

(b)  Clearance;  methods  used  to  increase,  collaboration  with  Committee  28. 
Pertinent  information  is  being  assembled  for  preparation  of  progress 
report  to  be  submitted  for  Manual  material. 

(c)  Methods  of  open  cutting. 

Studies  are  being  made  of  past  experiences  to  assemble  pertinent  data. 

8.  Fences. 

(a)  Metal  fence  to  check  drifting  snow  and  sand. 

This  being  a  new  assignment,  not  enough  data  have  yet  been  assembled 
to  make  a  report. 

9.  Roadway  Signs: 

(a)  Reflectorized  and  luminous  roadway  signs,  collaborating  with  Com- 
mittees 5  and  9,  and  with  the  Communication  and  Signal  Section, 
AAR. 


Roadway    and    Ballast 545 

Research  has  been  discontinued  temporarily  due  to  curtailment  of 
funds;  however,  the  committee  feels  the  subject  should  not  be 
dropped  as  new  products  are  constantly  being  developed,  some  of 
which  might  be  adaptable  for  this  purpose. 
(I))  Develop  standard  close  clearance  warning  sign,  collaborating  with 
Committee  28. 

This   work   has  been   completed   and   the  assignment   will   be   replaced 
with  a  new  one  for  the  coming  Association  year. 

10.  Ballast: 
(a)  Tests. 

Advance   report  on  conductivity   tests  of  open-hearth  slag  ballast  was 
presented  as  information  in  Bulletin  573,  September-October  1962. 
(c)  Special  types  of  ballast. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  565 

11.  Chemical    control    of    vegetation,    collaborating    with    Communication    and 
Signal  Section,  AAR. 

Progress  report,  submitted  as  information    page  570 

The  Committee  on  Roadway  and  Ballast, 

F.  N.  Beighley,  Chairman. 

AREA    Bulletin    577,    February    1963. 


Report  on  Assignment  1 

Revision  of  Manual 

G.  B.  Harris  (chairman,  subcommittee),  R.  D.  Baldwin,  G.  W.  Becker,  K.  W.  Bradlev, 
T.  W.  Creighton,  W.  P.  Eshbaugh,  H.  G.  Johnson,  G.  D.  Mayor,  G.  F.  Nigh, 
K.  W.  Schoeneberg,  C.  E.  Webb. 

Having  completed  its  study  of  Chapter  1  of  the  Manual,  your  committee  submits 
for  adoption  the  following  additional  recommendations: 

Pages   1-1-8  to   1-1-15,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  THE  FORMATION  OF  THE  ROADWAY 

Reapprove  without  change. 

Pages   1-6-10   to   1-6-14,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    RIGHT-OF-WAY   FENCES 
Reapprove  without  change. 

Pages   1-4-6  to   1-4-10,  incl. 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   CORRUGATED   METAL  CULVERTS 

In    making  its   study   of   Chapter    1    of   the  Manual,  your   committee   discovered   an 
error  in    these   specifications.  On   page   1-4-8,  Art.  9 — Gage  Determination^  and   Tolei 


546 Roadway    and    Ballast 

ance,  line  5,  reference  is  made   to  "Section   11"  of  the  specifications.  Since  there  is  no 
longer  any  Section  11,  this  reference  should  be  changed  to  read  "Sec.  B,  Art.  2." 


Your    committee    also    submits   the   following   definition    with    the   recommendation 
that  it  be  added  to  the  Glossary  under  the  definition  of  "Slag." 
— Open  Hearth. — A   slag  formed  simultaneously  when  producing  and  refining  steel  in 

open  hearth  furnaces  and  consisting  essentially  of  a  fused  mixture  of  oxides  and 

silicates.     1 

Report  on  Assignment  2 

Physical    Properties   of   Earth    Materials 

(a)  Roadbed.  Load  Capacity.  Relation  to  Ballast.  Allowable  Pressures 

(b)  Structural   Foundation  Beds 

W.  P.   Eshbaugh    (chairman,   subcommittee),  H.  F.  Davenport,  M.  B.  Hanson,  H.  W. 
Legro,  R.  R.  Manion,  F.  L.  Peckover,  J.  W.  Poulter,  S.  W.  Sweet. 

Under  this  assignment  your  committee  presents  as  information  a  report  on  the 
comparison  of  soil  density  and  water  content  determinations  with  conventional  and 
nuclear  equipment.  It  contains  material  which  applies  to  both  assignments  (a)   and  (b). 

The  work  reported  is  the  result  of  a  cooperative  project  between  the  Canadian 
National   Railways   and   the   Association    of   American   Railroads   Research   Department. 

Comparison   of   Soil   Density   and   Water   Content 

Determinations    with    Conventional    and 

Nuclear   Equipment 

Compaction  control  of  earth  fills  and  grades  is  based  on  density  and  water-content 
measurements  at  the  site  of  the  work.  For  many  years  such  measurements  have  been 
made  by  standardized  methods,  using  sand-cone  or  water-balloon  equipment.  The  recent 
introduction  of  nuclear  apparatus  has  provided  an  alternative  means  which  may  be 
particularly  valuable  on  large-scale  projects.  To  assist  in  appraising  the  relative  useful- 
ness to  the  railway  construction  engineer  of  both  conventional  and  nuclear  equipment, 
this  report  presents  the  results  of  an  investigation  in  which  their  performance  and 
economics  are  compared. 

It  should  be  mentioned  that  several  similar  investigations  have  been  made  by  other 
agencies  since  nuclear  equipment  was  introduced  on  the  market  in  the  late  1950's.  Some 
of  these  studies  were  on  a  considerable  scale  and  their  results  were  subjected  to  a  very 
detailed  analysis.  An  engineer  making  a  serious  study  of  inplace  soil  density  and  water 
content  test  procedures  should  review  some  of  the  existing  references  on  the  subject 
(1)    (2)    (3)*. 

The  field  portion  of  the  investigation  was  made  in  the  vicinity  of  the  new  Toronto 
Terminal  Project  of  the  Canadian  National  Railways  near  Concord,  10  miles  north  of 
Toronto,  Ont.  This  project  involves  the  construction  of  a  new  hump  yard  and  34  miles 
of  new  access  line,  and  upgrading  of  43  miles  of  existing  line.  Placement  and  compaction 
of  some  16,000,000  cu  yd  of  fill  are  required. 


The  references  indicated  by  the  numbers  in  parenthesis  are  listed  at  the  end  of  this  report. 


Roadway    and    Ballast 547 

Conventional  field  tests  were  made  bj  -•oil  technicians  \V.  E.  Cowie  and  T.  Loghi- 
ade,  under  the  supervision  of  VY.  VY.  Wong,  project  soil  engineer,  Canadian  National 
Railways.  Comparative  nuclear  tests  were  made  by  G.  L.  Hinueber,  engineering  labora- 
tory manager,  and  T.  C.  Madigan,  engineering  test  assistant,  of  the  Association  of 
American  Railroads  engineering  research  staff.  Tests  were  made  through  the  cooperation 
of  J.  L.  Cann,  project  director,  and  this  report  was  prepared  by  F.  L.  Peckovcr, 
engineer    of    soils    and    foundations.    Canadian    National    Railways. 

Equipment  Used 

The  two  conventional  types  of  tesl  mosl  commonly  used  to  find  soil  density  and 
water   content    to   control    fill    compaction    wen-   used   in    this   investigation. 

The  sand-cone  method  is  a  tentative  ASTM  standard  (4).  The  procedure  involves 
digging  a  hole  in  the  ground,  finding  its  volume  by  filling  it  with  calibrated  sand  and 
weighing  the  soil  removed  from  the  hole.  The  volume-weight  relationship  of  the  original 
soil  in  place  is  thus  measured.  Results  are  affected  by  many  factors  relating  to  equip- 
ment, its  operation,  and  the  soil  being  tested.  However,  if  the  test  is  carefully  done, 
results  are  generally  considered  well  within  the  range  of  accuracy  needed  for  compaction- 
control  purposes. 

The  water-balloon  method  of  test  is  also  commonly  used  and  a  standard  procedure 
has  been  suggested  (5).  As  with  the  sand-cone  test,  it  involves  digging  a  hole  in  the 
ground.  The  volume  is  found  by  expanding  a  balloon  into  the  hole  by  the  pressure  of 
water  from  a  calibrated  cylinder.  The  unit  weight  of  the  original  soil  in  place  is  found 
as  before.  Test   results  are  considered  adequately  accurate  for  control  purposes. 

In  both  the  sand-cone  and  water-balloon  tests,  soil-water  content  is  found  by  oven- 
drying  a  representative  sample  of  the  soil  removed  from  the  hole.  Apparatus  for  both 
test  methods  is  readily  available  for  purchase  or  rent  and  each  can  be  operated  efficiently 
by   a    team    of   two    technicians. 

The  nuclear  method  has  been  developed  in  the  past  few  years  and  more  than  one 
type  of  equipment  is  now  available.  In  AREA  Proceedings,  a  description  of  the  appara- 
tus, its  theory  and  operating  procedure  have  been  described  (6)  and  a  particular  appli- 
cation of  the  apparatus  reviewed  (7).  The  test  method  for  the  use  of  the  surface  mois- 
ture gage  or  surface  density  gage  invokes  placing  the  instrument  which  contains  the 
radioactive  source  and  detector  <>n  the  leveled  surface  of  the  ground,  depressing  a  handle 
which  removes  the  radioactive  source  from  its  shield  and  places  it  in  position  where 
its  rays  may  penetrate  the  soil,  and  measuring  the  radiation  backscattered  to  the  detector 
per  unit  of  time.  The  backscattcr  count  is  electrically  timed  and  recorded  automatically 
by  a  portable  scaler  which  is  used  in  ((injunction  with  the  gages.  Soil  density  and  water 
content  are  read  directly  from  calibration  curves.  As  with  the  conventional  test  methods. 
two   technicians  are  usually   used   to  operate   the  apparatus   efficiently. 

Equipment  used  in  this  investigation  for  the  three  methods  of  tesl  is  listed  at  tin- 
end  of  the  report   under  "Test   Equipment   Used." 

Procedure 

The   basic   soil    in    the   Toronto   area    i-   a    silly,   sand}    ida.ial    till    with    -mall   amount- 

of  gravel  and  clay  sizes  On  the  surface  ol  the  till,  posl  glacial  -and-,  silts  and  clays 
are  occasionally  found.  The  range  of  available  -oil  types  i-.  of  course,  not  typical  for 
all    geographical    area-,    but    i-    perhaps    representative    ol    soils    found    in    glaciated    areas 

of  the  United  State-  and  Canada    To  gel  a  comparison  ol  tests,  eighl  particular  loca 

lion-   were   chosen    for   testing,   Four   sites   were   in    various   till   -oil-  and   four  in   other   -dl 


548  Roadway    an  d    Ballast 

types   used   for   fill.   At   each   location   between   three  and   six   complete   tests   were   run 
within  a  distance  of  a  few   feet. 

Each  test  was  planned  to  measure  soil  density  and  water  content  with  all  three 
types  of  equipment  under  as  identical  conditions  as  possible.  A  complete  test  consisted 
of  the  following  steps: 

(1)  The  test  area  was  leveled  to  a  depth  of  up  to  6  in  below  ground  surface 
when  considered  necessary.  All  tests  require  an  even,  flat  surface. 

(2)  Nuclear  tests  for  density  and  water  content  were  run  on  the  prepared  area. 
No  soil  sampling  was  necessary. 

(3)  The  plate  for  the  water-balloon  test  was  seated,  the  initial  base  reading 
obtained,  the  hole  dug  and  test  run.  A  soil  sample  was  retained  for  water- 
content  determination. 

(4)  The  plate  for  the  sand-cone  test  was  seated,  the  hole  deepened  and  the  test 
run.  A  soil  sample  was  retained  for  water  content. 

(5)  Water-content   samples   were   dried   over  night   and  weighed. 

(6)  Calculations  for  the  nuclear  method  were  made  at  the  time  of  test.  Calcula- 
tions for  the  other  tests  were  made  when  the  dry  weight  of  the  soil  was 
available. 

The  procedure  of  testing  at  a  depth  varying  to  as  much  as  6  in  below  the  surface 
of  compacted  grade  is  used  to  get  below  surface  disturbance  and  irregularities  caused 
by  compaction  equipment  during  construction.  Smoothing  of  the  test  area  is  important, 
particularly  for  the  nuclear  test,  and  takes  considerable  time  in  soils  containing  stones. 

Analysis  of  Results 

Results  of  all  tests  are  shown  in  Table  1,  grouped  according  to  soil  type. 

Inspection  of  the  results  shows  that  the  range  of  soil  density  and  water  content 
may  vary  considerably  for  each  soil  type  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  tests  were  closely 
grouped  at  the  various  sites.  On  this  particular  project  the  compacted  soils  were  subject 
to  this  variation  in  much  the  same  degree  as  the  natural  soils,  and  ranges  of  12  lb  per 
cu  ft  in  density  and  5  percent  in  water  content  were  not  unusual.  From  the  test  results, 
it  is  apparent  that  construction  control  should  always  be  based  on  the  average  of  more 
than  one  test  whenever  possible. 

On  account  of  these  variations,  test  results  are  compared  at  each  specific  location 
rather  than  for  each  soil  type.  In  this  comparison,  results  from  conventional  methods 
of  test  are  taken  as  a  base  or  datum  because  of  their  general  use,  and  results  from  the 
nuclear  method  evaluated  accordingly.  It  is  recognized,  of  course,  that  the  conventional 
test  methods  involve  some  degree  of  error. 

The  results  of  this  comparison  are  shown  in  Table  2.  At  each  location,  the  results 
for  both  density  and  water  content  determinations  from  the  water-balloon  and  sand- 
cone  methods  are  compared  (Cols.  1  and  4).  If  the  results  show  reasonable  agreement, 
the  average  of  each  pair  of  values  (Cols.  2  and  5)  are  compared  with  the  results  from 
the  nuclear  method  (Cols.  3  and  6).  For  purposes  of  this  comparison,  a  "reasonable" 
agreement  of  results  is  arbitrarily  defined  as  being  within  4  lb  per  cu  ft.  for  soil  density 
and  within  1  percent  for  soil  water  content.  In  Table  2,  where  water-balloon  and  sand- 
cone  test  results  are  not  in  reasonable  agreement  as  defined,  the  figures  for  that  com- 
plete test  are  marked  with  an  asterisk  and  omitted  from  further  consideration. 

For  purposes  of  this  investigation  it  is  assumed  that  the  average  of  two  conventional 
test  results  in  reasonable  agreement  is  a  true  value.  Of  34  complete  tests,  the  results  of 


Roadway    and    Ballast 


549 


I  3  3 

H  H     - 


V    0> 
(  3    o- 


I  -J  t>  sO  vri  00  * 

■  tc  ^t  ia  to  a' 


■o  -J  a-  -J  cr-  oo  co 


3dS 


f~\  C"\  -4  en  -J 


00  CO  O  ~J  ir  O  i 


O  0^  0>  O  O  0s  0 


oo  -J  cr>  r- 


3! 


\  w\-0  r^ 


O^Oir 


33: 


4  Jn-4-i 


>  t>  vO  -o  r> 


CO  o  o  c-  o 


^•AO    -*    -4 


rH    H    r-j    rH     rH 


CO*  00  CO*  O   t>  00 


t>-  H  O  CO    CM 

rvnno  n 

rH    rH    »-4   rH     rH 


\HHHH 


o  o*>  oo  o  w 
«^"  oo  oo"  o 


o  o 

O  sO* 

34 


-4N  40h 


3  3-s 


to  oo  i^  c\  cn.  o  r 

ccVooVdc 


lrfji 


HH  rH    rH 


C\   CN   CV  rH   OJ 


■    CO    -4  rH  I 


vO  O 


O   C^OiACVJ 


O  CO  o  o  -i  to 


^5  c£  ^  5s  B 


rH   -^  O 
>-i    rH    rH    rH 


vOO^eocio 


t>  oo  *o  r-  o 


i:  ■-. 


5 


«  o 
>.  >- 

5  . 

«rH 

>,  o  ■ 

rH   T3 

31 


Sis- 

rH     >     >%" 
U     I.     I. 


>     U 

gft 


:•>  a 

"   >:  h 


L  s 


va 


3       O       (fl 


"rl. 


£l« 

t.     O    «J 

no  n    « 

I 

< 

a 

rH  CM  On  O  H  ( 


HNnffln  J'A-.O 


CO  On  o  f"\  -4  w> 

'  h  tvrj  rj  n 


550 


R  o  a  (1  w  a  y    a  n  <l    Hall  a  s  t 


TABLE  2 
Analysis  of  Results  of   Soil   Density  and  Water  Content  Teata 


Columns 

(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(M 

(5) 

(6) 

Test 

Soil 

Wet 

Density  Values    (p. 

c.f.) 

Water 

Content  Values 

Biff. 

Av'  ge 

Diff. 

Diff. 

At' (to 

Diff. 

No. 

Type 

(w-  s) 

£f*) 

N  -  At' Re 

(W-  S) 

£f3) 

N  -  Av'ge 

1 

1 

-  li.9* 

lULi.U* 

+  2.6* 

-2.0* 

9.8* 

-2.3* 

.2 

Till 

+  3.6 

lUi.6 

♦  2.1, 

0.0 

9.8 

-l.U 

o 

♦  9.1* 

11,7.5* 

+  1.2* 

+0.7 

10.2 

+U.5 

10 

♦  7.5* 

iue.7* 

-  0.5* 

♦  O.li 

10.1 

♦  5.5 

21 

-  o.), 

139.3 

+  7.2 

-0.1 

9.U 

-0.9 

22 

♦  3.2 

11,3.1 

-  3.1 

♦1.2* 

10.1* 

-1.3* 

11 

2 

♦  0.3 

135.3 

+  6.5 

+0.5 

8.8 

-1.2 

12 

Till 

♦  9.5* 

123.8* 

+17.7* 

♦  0.2 

9.3 

-0.9 

17 

-  3.0 

121.7 

+10.8 

0.0 

13.8 

-1.9 

31 

3 

-  5.5* 

U3.8* 

+  8.7* 

-o.a 

9.7 

-1.3 

32 

Till 

♦  2.8 

150.0 

♦  9.5 

♦1.9* 

8.6* 

-3.7* 

33 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

8 

♦  h.l* 

11*7.8* 

-  1.8* 

-0.1 

9.0 

-1.2 

13 

h 

-  3.9 

120.2 

+  2.8 

-0.5 

16.1, 

-1.2 

111 

Till 

-ho. 3* 

117.6* 

+  0.9* 

0.0 

16.7 

-1.1 

K 

-  7.3* 

99.2* 

+  3.8* 

-li.O* 

111. 3* 

+1.9* 

16 

♦  0.9 

106.8 

+  2.7 

-5.9* 

15J,* 

-1.8* 

26 

5 

♦  1.5 

133.6 

+  6.9 

-0.7 

6.0 

-1.3 

27 

Sand 

+  0.7 

136. h 

♦  5.1 

-0.3 

7.0 

-2.3 

28 

and 

-  0.5 

133.8 

♦  5.7 

-0.3 

6.6 

-2.0 

29 

gravel 

-  1.7 

130.8 

♦11.7 

0.0 

6.9 

-3.6 

30 

-  2.0 

11,3.0 

♦  1.0 

+0.9 

8.2 

-2.9 

3 

6 

+  1.5 

121.2 

♦  li.3 

-0.1 

6.2 

-1.1, 

b 

Sand 

-  0.7 

117.6 

♦10.6 

+  0.2 

6.3 

-1.1, 

5 

♦  1.5 

130.2 

+  3.3 

-0.8 

5.3 

-0.7 

6 

-  7.5* 

122. 2» 

+11.8* 

+  0.8 

5.3 

-l.U 

7 

+  2.7 

125.8 

+  lu5 

+0.3 

5.0 

-1.0 

18 

7 

-  1.9 

127.0 

+  8.5 

+0.8 

18.7 

-3. a 

19 

Sand 

-  0.7 

131.2 

+  5.3 

+0.2 

18.7 

-3.0 

20 

and 

+  li.O 

112.0 

+  3.0 

-0.2 

8.8 

♦0.7 

?3 

silt 

-  0.2 

108.1 

+16.3 

-0.2 

10.0 

-5.0 

2li 

+  0.9 

133.0 

+  5.1, 

+0.7 

18.2 

-3.8 

25 

♦  8.7* 

126. h* 

+12.8* 

-0.1, 

18.7 

-I..3 

3h 

8 

-2.9 

128.6 

+  5.h 

♦3.3* 

23.6* 

+7.7* 

35 

Silt, 

-17.1* 

137.1,* 

-  o.5» 

-2.3* 

22.0* 

-5.7* 

36 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

57 

- 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

38 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

Avera 

pe  Values: 

12^.3  p.c.f. 

+   5.9  p.c.f 

10.3? 

-l.lt* 

W  m  value  from  water  replacement  test. 

S  »  value  from  sand  replacement  test. 

N  »  value  from  nuclear  tent. 

*       indicates  result,  not  considered   valid  and  not   used  in  analysis. 


R  o  a  d  w  a  y    and    Ballast 


551 


Breakdown  of  Tine  Taken  for  Density  and  Water-Content  Tests 


Soil 

Type 

No.  of 
Testa 

Recorded 

Steps       in       Test 

w 

Total 

Time 

S 

N 

Preparing 
for  Test 
W             S 

N 

Reading 
Apparatus 
TV           S           N 

Weighing  and 
Calculations 
W           S          N 

1 

5 

22i50     29:50 

12:16 

2:2h     3:21*     9:55 

bi2l|     5:35    1:1*5 

29:38 

38:1*9 

23:56 

2 

1 

17:01*     22:38 

9:25 

3:58     3:17     7:25 

1*:33     5:11*     0:al 

25:1*5 

31:09 

17:31 

t| 

2 

12:57     16:11! 

7:17 

3:28     3:57     7:1*0 

1*:1C     5:1:1     1:00 

20:35 

25:53 

15:51* 

6 

1 

3:08      L:32 

1:25 

2:52     3:15  10:10 

3:1*5     1*:30     1:20 

9:1*5 

12:17 

13:25 

7 

1* 

6:36       9:13 

2:09 

2:01     3:07     6:39 

1*:1*9     5:09     1:15 

13:26 

17:29 

9:1*1* 

Weighted  Average  Time 

21:25 

27:37 

17:10 

Kotes:     W  =  ".Vater-Palloon  Tests,   S  =  Sand-Cone  Tests,  K  =  J!uclear  Tests. 

Times  are  given  in  minutes  and  seconds  of  elapsed  time- 

For  TYater-balloon  and  sand-cone  tests,  time  "preparing  for  test" 
includes  that  for  excavating  holes.     For  nuclear  tests,   time 
taken  for  occasional  "standard  count"  to  check  calibration 
is  not  included. 

68  percent  of  conventional  density  tests  and  7<)  percent  of  water-content  tests  are 
retained  for  consideration   by   this  procedure. 

Applying  the  same  criteria  of  reasonable  agreement,  it  is  found  in  Table  2  that 
30  percent  of  the  density  values  and  19  percent  of  the  water-content  values  obtained 
from  nuclear  tests  are  comparable  with  the  average  values  from  usable  conventional  tests. 
Results  show  no  trend  that  can  be  ascribed  to  soil  type. 

Results  from  the  nuclear  tests  are  generally  higher  in  density  and  lower  in  water 
content  than  the  averages  from  the  other  two  methods  when  in  a  reasonable  agreement. 
The  average  differences  amount  to  5.9  lb  per  cu  ft  and  1.4  percentage  points,  respect ivelj  . 

The  standard  calibration  curves  supplied  with  the  nuclear  apparatus  were  used  for 
all  tests.  Some  thought  has  been  given  to  the  use  of  calibration  curves  prepared  on  the 
basis  of  actual  field  comparisons  with  conventional  tests  to  possibly  produce  better 
agreement.  The  variations  in  density  and  water  content  between  conventional  tests  and 
nuclear  tests  are  not  always  consistent,  however,  a-  shown  in  this  investigation.  Unless 
comparisons  are  planned  and  made  with  a  great  deal  of  care,  this  lack  of  consistency 
may  cancel  any  advantage  of  field  calibration.  It  should  be  understood,  also,  that  the 
conventional  tests  which  would  be  used  in  field  calibration  can  involve  errors 

Time  Required  for  Tests 

The  time  taken  to  perforin  about  a  third  of  the  tests  ol  all  types  wa-  recorded. 
Table  3  shows  the  results  according  tn  -nil  types  and  operations  required  for  the  various 
test  method-   Elapsed  time-  only  were  recorded. 

Table  s  -how-  that  the  average  time  taken  for  nuclear,  water  replacement  and  -and 
replacement  tests,   respectively,  i^  in   the  ratio  of   ;   to  '>  to   s    it   also  -how-  th.it   the 
time    for   an)    of   the    three    tests   can    Vary    by   a-   much   a-   .'   or   3    to    1    in    various   -"il- 
As  this  difference   was   found   to   be  due   mainly   to   the   lime   taken   in   preparing   for   test, 

and  the  essential  difference  in  preparing  for  conventional  tests  a-  compared  with  nuclear 
is  in  excavating  the  hole  required  for  the  former,  it  follows  thai  the  time  saved  by  the 


Hull.  .'.77 


552 Roadway    and    Ballast 

use  of  nuclear  as  compared  with  conventional  apparatus  is  almost  entirely  due  to 
eliminating  the  need  for  digging  a  hole  in  the  ground.  Total  time  required  for  all  other 
operations  is  much  the  same  for  all  three  types  of  test. 

These  comments  are  based  on  records  of  elapsed  time  only  and  are  a  valid  com- 
parison where  density  and  water-content  tests  are  taken  for  purposes  of  record  and 
for  other  than  immediate  use  in  the  control  of  fill-compaction  operations.  In  the  latter 
instance  which  is  the  most  common,  the  nuclear  test  gains  a  considerable  time  advan- 
tage, as  all  results  are  available  on  the  spot.  The  results  of  conventional  tests  are  not 
available  until  soil  samples  are  dried  to  find  water  content.  The  total  time  taken  is, 
therefore,  at  least  4  or  5  hr  and  usually  over  night.  However,  rapid  methods  of  deter- 
mining soil  water  content  are  being  improved  in  accuracy  (8)  and  this  advantage  ol 
the  nuclear  method  may   be  reduced. 

Cost  and  Other  Factors 

As  expected,  a  complex  piece  of  equipment  like  the  nuclear  apparatus  costs  a  great 
deal  more  than  conventional  density  and  water-content  test  equipment.  Present  costs 
for  the  three  types  of  equipment  are  approximately  as  follows: 

Sand-cone  apparatus   $    100 

Water-balloon   apparatus    $    100 

Nuclear   apparatus    $5,000 

The  nuclear  apparatus  is  designed  as  a  piece  of  field  equipment.  However,  on  ac- 
count of  its  complexity  it  requires  careful  handling.  Repairs  are  expensive  and  may 
involve  interruptions  to  the  work.  It  should  be  mentioned  that  the  nuclear  equipment 
used  in  this  investigation  required  servicing  during  the  test.  As  service  was  available  in 
Toronto,  the  delay  amounted  to  one  day. 

Many  other  factors  could  be  reviewed  in  making  a  more  complete  comparison  ol 
the  various  types  of  equipment.  Test  techniques,  representative  nature  of  results,  size 
of  job  and  programming  of  tests,  could  all  be  discussed,  some  favoring  one  type  of  test 
and  some  another.  These  factors  are  considered  beyond  the  scope  of  this  investigation 
in   view  of  other  references  available. 

Discussion  of  Various  Methods 

Results  of  this  investigation  of  interest  to  railway  engineers  concerned  with  earth 
fill  operations  may  be  summarized  as  follows: 

(1)  Control  measurements  of  soil  density  and  water  content  can  be  made  by 
conventional   tests  or  by  relatively  new  nuclear  equipment. 

(2)  Conventional  test  equipment  is  of  low  first  cost  and  simple  construction. 
Nuclear  test  equipment  is  of  relatively  high  first  cost  and  requires  more  rare 
in  handling;   special  servicing  is  required  in  the  event  of  breakdown. 

(3)  The  nuclear  method  of  test  has  the  advantage  of  giving  final  test  results  on 
the  site.  Conventional  methods  of  tests,  although  requiring  little  extra  elapsed 
time  to  perform,  require  at  least  a  few  hours  for  final  results  due  to  the  need 
for  drying  soil  samples.  However,  this  disadvantage  may  be  reduced  by  recent 
test  developments. 

(4)  It  appears  that  the  density  and  water-content  results  obtained  with  nuclear 
and  conventional  equipment  may  possibly  be  brought  into  closer  agreement 
by  the  use  of  carefully  developed  field  calibration  curves.  It  should  be  noted 
that  these  conclusions  are  based  on  a  limited  number  of  tests. 


Roadway    and    Ballast 553 

Recommendations 

The  investigation  shows  that  the  method  of  test  for  control  purposes  should  be 
chosen  according  to  the  needs  of  each  individual  earth  fill  project.  Conventional  tests 
will  continue  to  serve  satisfactorily  for  routine  fill  operations,  particularly  those  involv- 
ing a  variety  of  soil  types.  Potential  advantages  of  the  nuclear  apparatus  merit  its 
consideration  on  large  projects. 

Further  investigation  into  relative  agreement  between  conventional  and  nuclear 
methods  of  determining  soil  density  and  water  content  may  prove  to  be  of  value. 
Another  approach  would  be  to  run  nuclear  and  conventional  tests  on  carefully  prepared 
and    controlled    laboratory    samples   of   known   density    and   moisture   content. 

Those  particularly  interested  in  the  subject  of  tests  for  the  control  of  earth  fills  are 
referred  to  existing  literature. 

Test  Equipment  Used 

Sand-Cone  Test:  Sand  density  apparatus  (6^-in  cone),  similar  to  Cat.  No.  CN- 
992,  Soiltest  Inc.,  Chicago. 

Water-Balloon  Test:  Yolumeasure  soil  density  apparatus,  similar  to  Cat.  No.  CN- 
980,  Soiltest  Inc.,  Chicago. 

Nuclear  Test:  Model  P21  surface  moisture  gage,  Model  P22  surface  density  gage, 
Model  280OA  portable  scaler,  manufactured  by  Nuclear-Chicago  Corporation,  Des 
Plaines,  111. 

References 

(1)  "Symposium    on    Nuclear   Methods    for   Measuring   Soil    Density   and  Moisture",   Sp. 
Tech.  Publ.  No.  293,  ASTM,  March,  1961. 

(2)  "A  Study  of  In-Place  Density  Determinations  for  Soils",  Tech.  Memo.  No.  3-415, 
Waterways  Experiment  Station,  U.  S.  Corps  of  Engineers,  October,  1955. 

(3)  A.   W.   Johnson  and  J.   R.   Sallberg,   "Factors  That  Influence  Field  Compaction  of 
Soils",  Bui.  272,  Highway  Research  Board,  1960. 

(4)  ASTM   Designation   D    1556-58T,  Tentative  Method  of  Test  for  Density  of  Soil  in 
Place  by  the  Sand-Cone  Method. 

(5)  "Suggested   Method   of   Test    for   Density    of   Soil   in   Place    by    the    Rubber-Balloon 
Method",  Procedures  for  Testing  Soils,  ASTM,  April  1958. 

(6)  "Nuclear   Moisture   and    Density    Measurements",   AREA   Proc,   Vol.   61:    652-658; 
1960. 

(7)  "Use  of  Nuclear  Soil  Moisture  and  Density  Equipment  for  Determination  of  Volume 
Change  from  Cut  to  Fill",  AREA  Proc.  Vol.  62:  697-685;   1961. 

(X)   J.  R.  Blystone,  A.  Pelyner  and  G.  P.  Steffens,  "Moisture  Content  Determination  by 
the  Calcium  Carbide  Gas  Pressure  Method",  Public  Roads,  31:    177-181;  June   1901. 


554 Roadway    and    Ballast 


Report  on  Assignment  6 

Roadway:    Formation   and    Protection 

(a)  Roadbed   Stabilization 

(b)  Slope  Protection 

(c)  Performance  of  Filter  Materials  in  Subdrains 

(d)  Gypsum  and  Lime  Treatment  for   Subgrade    Improvement 

G.  F.  Nigh  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  W.  Bauman,  I.  P.  Cook,  B.  H.  Crosland. 
J.  B.  Farris,  J.  E.  Grav,  H.  O.  Ireland,  W.  G.  Murphy,  J.  E.  Newbv,  S.  R.  Pettit. 
J.  W.  Poulter. 

Under    Assignment    6     (c),    your   committee    submits   as    information    the    following 
report  on  performance  of  filter  materials. 


Third   Progress   Report   on   Performance   of   Filter 

Materials 

By  JOHN   C.  GUILLOU 

Research    Associate    Professor    of    Hydraulic    Engineering,    University    of    Illinois 

INTRODUCTION 

This  is  the  third  and  final  progress  report  dealing  with  the  use  of  concrete  sand 
around  subsurface  drainage  pipes.  The  first  report  considered  the  hydraulic  capacity 
of  perforated  corrugated  metal  pipe,  both  with  and  without  bituminous  coating;  the 
general  operating  characteristics  of  concrete  sand  filters;  and  the  results  of  a  question- 
naire survey  of  subdrainage  practices  and  problems  (1).*  The  second  report  presented 
the  concept  of  "optimum  compaction"  of  the  filter  material;  indicated  a  calculation 
procedure  for  determination  of  maximum  rate  of  inflow  to  a  given  subdrain,  based  on 
precipitation  and  subsurface  conditions;  and  developed  a  hypothesis  of  filter  readjust 
ment  and  particle  migration    (2). 

The  purpose  of  this  report  is  to  present  further  substantiation  of  the  filter  read- 
justment hypothesis,  to  compare  the  action  of  corrugated  metal  subdrains  with  perfora- 
tions located  at  the  top  of  the  pipe  with  drains  having  the  holes  at  the  bottom  of  the 
pipe,  and  to  indicate  the  hydraulic  capacity  of  various  types  of  subsurface  drain  pipes. 

The  cooperative  research  program  "Performance  of  Filter  Materials"  was  activated 
July  1,  1958,  with  the  purpose  of  evaluating  the  requirements  of  filter  materials  around 
subsurface  perforated  or  open-joint  drains.  The  ultimate  aim  of  the  project  was  the 
development  of  definite  design  information  for  field  conditions.  Because  of  monetar) 
considerations  the  scope  of  the  project  has  been  limited  to  evaluation  of  general  operat- 
ing characteristics  of  concrete  sand  filters  with  different  pipe  materials.  The  project  is 
sponsored  by  the  Association  of  American  Railroads  and  is  being  conducted  in  conjunc- 
tion  with   Committee   1 — Roadway  and  Ballast,  of  the  AREA. 

Information  gained  from  earlier  phases  of  the  program  indicate  that  stability  of  the 
filter  adjacent  to  the  pipe  opening  is  not  created  by  removal  of  fine  materials  and 
bridging  of  the  remaining  larger  grain  sizes.  The  mechanics  of  stable  filter  development 


*  Numbers    in    parentheses    indicate    reference   listed    in    the   bibliography   at    the    end    of    this   report. 


Road  w  a  y    and    Ballast 


555 


has  been  studied  in  some  detail.  Freeze  tests  have  been  performed  using  the  original 
test  tank,  and  special  apparatus  has  been  constructed  to  demonstrate  that  particle 
readjustment  does  take  place  within  the  filter. 

Principal    conclusions    obtained    from    the    present    test    program    include: 

1.  Initial  compaction  is  a  major  factor  in  the  development  of  filter  stability. 
Over-compaction  of  a  concrete  sand  filter  may  lead  to  failure  of  the  bed,  and 
will  materially   reduce  the  infiltration   capacity   of   the  system. 

2.  Stability  of  the  filter  at  the  pipe  opening  is  not  established  by  washing  out 
the  fines  and  bridging  of  the  remaining  large  particles.  Stability  is  established 
by  the  binding  of  pore  spaces  near  the  opening  with  tine  particles  which  were 
moving  toward  the  opening. 

3.  Corrugated  metal  subdrains  should  be  installed  with  perforations  at  the  bottom 
of   the   pipe    for   maximum   security    from    filter   failure. 

4.  Concrete  sand  may  suitably  be  used  as  filter  material  with  either  clay  drain 
tile  or  plastic  pipe  if  the  conduit  is  properly  installed. 

TESTS  WITH   CORRUGATED  METAL  PIPE 

Apparatus  used  in  this  phase  of  the  work  is  described  in  detail  in  the  earlier  reports 
(1.  2).  In  general  the  test  tank  consists  of  a  filter  section  24  in  wide,  36  in  deep,  and 
48  in  long.  The  filter  section  is  bounded  by  water  surfaces  on  the  sides  and  bottom, 
but  not  at  the  ends.  Flow  is  introduced  to  the  water  chamber  through  a  constant  head 
device,  and  outflow  from  the  subdrain  is  measured  over  a   10-deg  Y-notch  weir. 

Studies  conducted  during  1961  included  tests  of  an  8-in-diameter  corrugated  metal 
drain  pipe  installed  with  perforations  upward  and  symmetrical  about  the  vertical.  This 
pipe  orientation  was  selected  for  two  reasons:  (1)  When  the  perforations  are  upward 
the  longitudinal  flow  through  the  drain  pipe  cannot  affect  filter  stability,  and  (2)  it  is 
difficult  to  compact  filter  material  beneath  the  spring  line  of  the  pipe,  and  compaction 
was  of  major  interest  at  the  time  of  the  study 

Tests  have  recently   been  completed  with   the  drain  pipe  perforations  in   the  down 
ward  position.  This  has  been  done  to  permit  comparison  with  the  earlier  work.  As  with 
the   1961   work  the  pipe  section   was  located  midway  between  the  sides  of  the  filter  sec- 
tion,  and   the   pipe   invert    was  8   in   above   the   bottom    of   the   filter  section. 

Ten  separate  test  runs  were  conducted  usin^'  commercially  available  concrete  sand 
with  moisture  content  adjusted  to  5  percent.  Pertinent  data  resulting  from  the  work  are 
shown   in  Table   1. 

Table  i — O.S-Fi   Head 


Flow 

( 'ompat 

Peak 

I  nl  a  in,  '  i 

Vo   ,.-  Blou 

It  eight 

Flint 

Flow 

in  : .'  lu- 

h'i  mat  I-  - 

PC/ 

0.0157 

O.OI t  1 

ffs-iir 

(i 

M      • 

0.0 

No  failure 

■i 

88  :; 

6.  1 

0.0181 

0.0101 

0.90 

68.  1  H>  sand  lost 

.-, 

92.  I 

9.  1 

O.OI7.'. 

0.0107 

0  96 

lb  Band  lost 

to 

94.7 

i  j  . :. 

0.0163 

o.otiio 

1.02 

13.3  11'  sand  lost 

12 

96  8 

15.0 

0.0139 

0.0087 

0  71 

1    7  lb  Band  lost 

-'■"i 

98    i 

16.9 

0.0119 

0.0090 

0.72 

No  failure 

♦Kate  after  7-'  In. 
♦♦Total  volume  in  7-'  In. 


556 


Roadway    and    Ballast 


Each  of  the  flow  tests  was  continued  for  72  hr  to  permit  evaluation  of  filter 
stability.  Four  of  the  tests  were  reruns  conducted  to  insure  reproducible  results,  or  were 
conducted  to  obtain  material  samples  from  the  filter. 

A  general  characteristic  of  the  run  was  very  turbid  flows  at  beginning  of  the  test. 
After  4  or  S  min  the  turbidity  cleared  and  the  filter  material  moving  through  the  pipe 
was  clearly  visible.  In  all  cases  the  movement  of  filter  material  virtually  ceased  after 
the   first   20  or  30  min  of  operation. 

Comparison  of  filter  stability  for  the  "holes  up"  and  "holes  down"  positions  show 
that  for  compactive  rates  less  than  about  15  percent,  the  "holes  up"  position  is  most 
stable.  When  the  compaction  is  over  15  percent  (specific  weights  of  97  lb  per  cu  ft  or 
greater)  the  "holes  down"  pipe  orientation  leads  to  a  more  stable  filter  bed.  This  action 
is  attributed  to  the  characteristics  of  the  test  equipment. 

When  sand  is  compacted  in  the  filter  section  it  is  virtually  impossible  to  obtain 
adequate  compaction  beneath  the  drain  pipe.  Thus,  when  water  is  introduced  to  the 
filter  any  "packing"  of  the  sand  beneath  the  pipe,  which  is  restrained  at  both  ends, 
causes  the  sand  to  move  vertically  downward  from  the  pipe  and  a  small  cavity  is 
created.  The  cavity  carries  flow  at  a  low  velocity,  when  compared  to  pore  velocity, 
and  as  a  result  little  material  is  carried  into  the  drain  pipe.  This  characteristic  places  a 
limitation   upon   quantitative  applicability   of  the  sand  movement  data. 

Comparison  of  the  flow  data  in  Table  1  with  corresponding  data  from  the  "holes 
up"  tests  indicates  that  perforated  corrugated  metal  drains  have  substantially  more  inter- 
ception ability  when  the  perforations  are  at  the  bottom,  rather  than  the  top,  of  the 
pipe.  This  corresponds  with  the  results  obtained  by   Shafer   (3). 

As  indicated  on  Fig.  1 — Optimum  Flow  Curves,  the  "holes  down"  pipe  orientation 
intercepted  almost  100  percent  more  flow  than  the  "holes  up"  orientation.  The  very 
substantial  increase  in  discharge  is  attributed  to  three  major  factors: 


30 
0.004 


OPTIMUM     FLOW    CURVES 

8"CORRUGATED    METAL   PIPE 
CONCRETE    SAND  FILTER 

DECEMBER     1962 


008  010  .012  014  016 

MAXIMUM      DISCHARGE    -CFS 


Fig.   1. 


Roadway    and    Ballast 


557 


Fig.  2— Surface  pattern  of  concrete  sand  filter  after  72  hr  of  test  with 
holes  at  bottom  of  pipe.  Head,  0.5  ft;  compaction,  6.1  percent;  specific 
weight,   89.3   pcf.   Compare   with   Fig.   3b   in    1961    report   (2) 


558 


Roadway    and    Ballast 


1.  When  the  holes  arc  at  the  bottom  of  the  pipe  substantially  more  filter  is  avail- 
able to  transmit   flow   from  the  water  chamber  to  the  pipe  perforation. 

2.  Settlement  of  sand  away  from  the  drain  pipe  results  in  effectively  greater  inter- 
ception ability.  Such  settlement  does  not  affect  the  flow  geometry  when  the 
holes  are  at  the  top  of  the  pipe. 

3.  In  the  present  test  program  the  contact  area  between  the  filter  bed  and  water 
chamber  was  4.7  sq  ft  per  foot  of  length  with  the  "holes  down"  pipe  position 
and  was  2.7  sq  ft  per  foot  of  length  with  the  "holes  up"  pipe  position. 

The  optimum  flow  curve  for  the  "holes  down"  position  also  indicates  that  maximum 
flow  interception  will  be  realized  from  a  concrete  sand  filter  compacted  to  a  specific 
weight  of  about  90  pcf.  Compaction  causing  unit  weights  either  greater  or  less  than 
this  amount  will  decrease  the  filter  efficiency.  It  is  apparent  from  the  data  that  over- 
compaction  has  a  more  serious  effect  on  the  filter  than  under-compaction. 

The  "holes  up"  curve  on  the  figure  indicates  an  optimum  compaction  of  about  15 
percent,  or  unit  weight  of  96.5  pcf.  Thus,  the  test  data  indicate  different  optimum  unit 
weights  for  the  two  pipe  positions.  It  is  believed  that  the  different  figures  are  the  result 
of  inability  to  properly  compact  the  filter  material  beneath  the  pipe  and  not  by  differ- 
ence in  flow  action.  Lack  of  proper  compaction  beneath  the  pipe  yields  a  lower  unit 
weight  figure  because  unit  weight  is  computed  as  the  total  sand  weight  divided  by 
volume  occupied  by  the  sand  before  flow  is  introduced  to  the  filter. 

It  is  significant  that  in  both  test  series  an  optimum  unit  weight  is  indicated  and 
that    over-compaction    causes    more    serious    reduction    in    flow    than    under-compaction. 

Table  2  has  been  prepared  to  aid  in  comparison  of  flow  and  unit  weight  values 
for  the  two  test  series.  The  insert  on  Fig.  1  is  a  graphical  representation  of  the  two 
compaction   relationships. 

Coincident  with  study  of  the  corrugated  metal  subdrain,  efforts  were  made  to  fur- 
ther substantiate  the  hypothesis  of  particle  migration.  After  several  of  the  flow  tests 
were  completed  a  portion  of  the  filter  bed  was  frozen  by  packing  the  discharge  pipe 
with  dry  ice.  After  the  sand  around  the  pipe  was  solidly  frozen  the  loose  sand  was 
removed  and  the  frozen  sample   was  broken  from  the  pipe. 

Examination  of  the  sample  showed  that  fine  materials  had  been  removed  from  the 
filter  immediately  adjacent  to  the  pipe  not  only  in  the  vicinity  of  the  holes,  but  also 
all  along  the  underside  of  the  conduit.  Removal  of  fines  was  most  marked  along  the 
depressions  in  the  frozen  cake  caused  by  the  pipe  corrugations.  Apparently  the  removal 
of  fines  was  limited  to  the  layer  of  filter  material  within  l/%  in  from  the  pipe  surface. 
Efforts   to    obtain   photographic   records   of   this   surface   were    only   partially   successful. 

Tablk  2 — Summary  Flow  Data 


No.  of  Blows 

Holes   t  'p  Position 

Holes  Down  Position 

Unit  Weight 

Peak  Flow 

fii  it   Weigh  1 

Peak  Flmt 

0 

8 
10 
25               -    - 

84.0  pcf 
91  .11 
94.6 
96.5 

98.5 
100.8 

0.0075  cfs 
0.0092 

0.0095 
0.0098 
0.0083 
0.0048 

83.8  pcf 

89.3 

92.5 

94.7 
98.4 

0.0170  cfs 

0.0181 

0.0179 

0.01(53 
0.0119 

R  o  a  d  w  a  y    a  n  d    B  a  1  I  a  .-  t 


550 


'.  .    ' .     


Am.v,,.,k»tWU»\«>A«,tWAuA»wl««VA*m\rtuW>A*ti«\wW 


Fig.    3— Sample    of    filter    material    from    frozen   section   of   filter   near   pipe 
opening.  All  material  was  located  within  2  in  of  the  pipe  perforation. 


Ll.Ii.  I  i  I,  i  I  i  1  i.l.i  li>  1  i  \  i  \  i  i*  \  i 


Fi&-  4 — Sample  of  filter   material  from  frozen   filter  cake  located  about 

6  in   from  pipe  wall. 


560 


Roadway   and    Ballast 


As  the  filter  cake  thawed,  material  from  close  to  a  pipe  perforation  was  removed 
with  a  spatula  and  a  sample  was  accumulated.  Fig.  3  is  a  photograph  of  the  accumulated 
sample.  Comparison  of  Fig.  3  and  Fig.  4,  which  is  a  similar  sample,  but  taken  some 
distance  from  the  pipe  perforation,  shows  a  definite  increase  in  fines  in  the  near-hole 
sample.  Efforts  to  obtain  sufficiently  large  samples  to  permit  sieve  analysis  were  aban- 
doned because  of  interference  with  the  test  program. 

COMPARISON  OF  TYPES  OF  CONDUIT 

It  was  decided  to  conduct  calibration  tests  on  at  least  two  additional  types  of 
subdrainage  conduit  in  order  to  obtain  maximum  results  with  the  laboratory  apparatus 
prior  to   termination   of  the  study. 

The  subsurface  drainage  conduit  used  most  frequently  by  Member  Roads  of  AAR 
is  corrugated  metal  pipe.  The  second  most  frequently  used  material  is  clay  drain  tile  (1). 
In  accordance  with  this  finding  tests  were  conducted  using  4-in-diameter  clay  drain 
tile  in  lengths  of  12  in.  Since  the  test  tank  was  48  in  long  it  was  necessary  to  have 
four  tile  joints  within  the  filter  bed.  The  tile  was  supported  from  a  thin  longitudinal 
bar  within  the  filter  bed,  to  simulate  the  rigid  trench  bottom,  and  was  backfilled  after 
binding  top  third  of  each  joint  with  roofing  felt.  Two  flow  tests  with  sand,  with  head 
on  the  pipe  equal  to  0.5  ft,  and  one  variable  head  test  without  sand  were  conducted. 
The  filter  test  data  are  summarized  in  Table  3. 

In  addition  to  the  drain  tile  tests  a  sample  of  plastic  drain  pipe  was  prepared. 
The  inside  diameter  of  the  pipe  was  2  in  and  the  wall  thickness  was  "%.  in.  The  bottom 
of  the  pipe  was  perforated  with  5  holes  per  cross  section  and  the  sections  were  1.5  in, 
center  to  center.  Within  any  section  rV-in  holes  were  drilled  at  the  horizontal  diameter 
points,  at  the  bottom  of  the  pipe,  and  on  each  side  of  the  pipe  midway  between  the 
bottom  and  horizontal  diameter  holes.  The  net  result  was  40  holes  per  foot  of  pipe  or 
160  holes  in  the  48-in  test  specimen.  Determination  of  hole  size  was  originally  calculated 
by  the  Bertram  (4)  criteria,  but  was  later  increased  to  fn  in  diameter  to  obtain  greater 
flow  area.  The  results  of  the  plastic  pipe  filter  tests,  again  with  head  equal  to  0.5  ft, 
are  presented  in  Table  3.  Also  included  is  information  abstracted  from  the  corrugated 
metal  pipe  studies. 

Table  3 — Comparison  of  Drain  Materials 


( 'ompac- 

Specific 

Peak 

Flair* 

Sum! 

Test  No. 

tur 

Weight 

Flow 

Volumi 

Last 

Pipe  Mat*  rial 

Blows 

pcf 

cfs 

cfs-hr 

lb 

1 

, 

94 . 3 

0.0103 

(1.593 

107 

8"cm.p. —  holes  up 

■> 

25 

100.8 

0 . 0048 

failed 

8"  cm. p.  -    holes  up 

3 

5 

92.8 

0.0183 

0.904 

22 

8"  cm. p.— holes  down 

t 

25 

98.  t 

0.0119 

0.720 

0 

8"  cm. p.      holes  dow  n 

,i 

.) 

96.0 

0.0153 

0.77(1 

2 

4"  clay  tile 

i; 

25 

97 .  3 

0.0118 

0.623 

0 

4"  clav  tile 

i 

.> 

97.9 

0.0163 

0.887 

0 

2"  plastic  pipe 

8  .    .                

25 

100.2 

0.0125 

0 .  769 

0 

2"  plastic  pipe 

Total  volume  in  72  hr. 


In  addition  to  tests  with  the  concrete  sand  filter,  calibration  tests  were  conducted 
to  permit  comparison  of  the  interception  ability  of  the  several  conduit  materials  without 
the  influence  of  the  sand  filter.  Data  resulting  from  these  tests,  and  material  presented 


Roadway    and    Ballast 561 

INFILTRATION    RATING    CURVES 
SELECTED    SUBDRAIN    CONDUITS 

30  DECEMBER      1962 


8"  CMP    WITH 
CONCRETE    SAND   FILTER 

1.0 

07    u 

/ 

05  Z 

0.4   O 
< 

PLASTIC    PIPE  f  <J 

i 


01 


RATE   OF    FLOW   -    CFS 
0002      003         005  001 


CLAY    DRAIN  TILE- 
4  JOINTS 


WITHOUT     rll  TER 
MATERIAL 


02  S?  /         8"C0RRUGATED    METAi     IMP! 


/    /    Ob      07      0.10  2  3       4      5.7 

Fig.  5. 


earlier  for  the  corrugated  metal  pipes,  arc  indicated  in  Fig.  5.  It  is  noted  that  the  three- 
conduits  exhibit  a  similar  head-discharge  relationship.  When  the  head  on  the  pipe  is  less 
than  0.5   ft  the  corrugated  metal  pipe   has  a   substantially  larger  interception   capacity. 

Comparison  of  the  calibration  curves  for  conduits  without  filter  material  and  the 
single  curve  for  corrugated  metal  pipe  with  filter  material  indicates  that  all  three  con- 
duits have  adequate  interception  ability.  Study  of  the  peak  flow  rates  listed  in  Table  3 
further  verifies  the  conclusion. 

SYNTHETIC   SAND   STUDIES 

Special  test  apparatus  was  constructed  to  obtain  detailed  qualitative  information 
about  particle  movement  using  a  synthetic  sand  mixture.  The  equipment  consisted  of  an 
entrance-head  tank.  8  in  by  11.5  in  by  S\  in  high,  equipped  with  a  constant-head  over- 
Bow  weir,  and  a  horizontal  sand  chamber  24  in  long  and  2  in  by  6  in.  in  cross  section. 
The  outlet  end  of  the  test  section  was  fitted  with  a  bevelled  slot  extending  across  the 
full  width  of  the  section.  The  clear  opening  of  the  slot  was  fa  in  vertically  and  2  in 
horizontally.  (See  Fig.  6.)  The  arrangement  of  the  test  section  caused  flow  through  the 
sand   to    be    virtually    two-dimensional.    Since    the   slot    was   located    at    mid-height    of   the 

test   section,   flow  paths  converged  on  the  slot  from  botb  the  t < >p  and  bottom  of  the 

section. 

The  synthetic  sand  used  in  the  experiment  was  a  blend  of  two  grades  of  Wausiu 
quartz.  As  indicated  on  Fig.  7,  both  the  coarse  and  fine  sands  were  gap-graded,  Analysis 
of  the  two  samples  indicated  that  a  mixture  composed  of  55  percent  fine  sample  and 
45  percent  coarse  sample  would  yield  the  most  dense  mixture  and  would  most  closel) 
satisfy  the  distribution  requirements  of  concrete  Band.  Because  of  the  gradation  of  the 
two  parent  materials  it  was  impossible  to  simulate  the  concrete  sand  main  sj/(-  ,|jv 
tribution.  The  size  distribution  curve  for  the  synthetic  sand   is  shown   on   Fig.   7. 


562 


R  o  a  d  \v  ay    and    Ballast 


Fig.  6 — Test  apparatus  for  synthetic  sand.  Flow  is  introduced  through 
hose  at  lower  right  of  entrance  tank.  Horizontal  test  section  bolts  to 
entrance  tank.  Note  keeper  grid  inside  the  right  end  of  test  section. 


SIEVE     NUMBER 
200  100  50      40     30      2  0       16 


GRAIN    SIZE  DISTRIBUTION  CURVES 
DECEMBER     1962 


ASTVI    LIMIT    FOR 
CONCRETE     SAND 


02        03  05        07      0.10  .2  3  .5        .7        10 

GRAIN   SIZE    -     MILLIMETERS 


Fig.  7. 


Roadwav    and    Ballast 


563 


SAND      LOSS  -  POUNDS 
2  3  4  5 


0.010  Oil  012  013  014  015  016  .017  018 

PERMEABILITY    -CM.    PER   SEC 

SYNTHETIC      SAND      PERMEABILITY    AND    LOSS    CURVES 

Fig.  8. 


13  o. 


10  o 


After  the  sand  samples  were  initially  blended  in  a  Lancaster  Type  PC  Batch  Mixer 
the  moisture  content  was  raised  to  2  percent  and  blending  was  continued  for  3  min.  The 
sand  mixture  was  then  loaded  into  the  test  chamber  in  6-in  layers.  The  test  chamber 
had  been  removed  from  the  entrance  tank  and  placed  in  a  vertical  position  in  a  specially 
made  compactor.  Each  6-in  layer  was  compacted  to  the  desired  degree,  and  the  process 
was  repeated  until  the  test  section  was  filled.  After  filling,  a  keeper  grid  was  bolted  in 
place  to  prevent  sand  from  spilling  out  of  the  test  section,  the  section  was  reinstalled 
<>n   the  entrance  tank  and  the  experiment   was  ready   to  proceed. 

Water  was  introduced  to  the  tank  at  the  rate  of  5  gpm  until  the  overflow  was  main- 
tained at  about  1  gpm.  Flow  tests  were  conducted  for  a  period  of  16  hr  and  rates  ol 
flow   through   the   filter  were  determined  volumetrically. 

The  effect  of  compaction  on  operating  characteristics  of  the  Biter  is  illustrated  on 
Fig,  8.  As  should  be  expected  the  permeability  decreases  with  increasing  compaction 
The  figure  also  indicates  that  sand  loss,  the  amount  of  material  carried  out  of  the  test 
section,   decreases  as  compaction   increases    A   minimum   value  IS  reached  al    14   percent   at 

compaction.  This   figure  is  comparable   to   the  values  obtained   in   the  two  large  scale 

corrugated   metal    pipe   tests.    (See  Fig.    1    and   Table   1) 

The  particle  migration  curve.  Fig.  9,  is  based  on  data  from  the  50  blow  compaction 
test  using  the  synthetic  sand.  The  curve  shows  the  change  in  grain  size  distribution 
effected  by  water  passing  through  the  filter  section  for  16  hr.  The  filter  sample  obtained 
after  the  test  is  composed  of  all  material  in  the  test  section  S  in  or  less  from  the  slotted 
end  plate.  The  particle  migration  curve  is  obtained  by  plotting  the  algebraic  difference 
between  the  percent  of  sample  passing  a  given  sieve  before  the  test  and  the  corresponding 
value  after  the  test 


Hull.   .177 


564 


R  o  a  d  \v  a  v    and    Ballast 


SIEVE     NUMBER 
3,0  5,0      40       30 


PARTICLE    MIGRATION    CURVE 
SYNTHETIC     SAND 

DECEMBER     1962 


COMPACTION   -    I4PCT 
SPECIFIC     WT-   75.3 


.3  3 

GRAIN   SIZE 


T^     1.0  TO" 

-  MILLIMETERS 

Fig.  9. 


The  curve  shows  a  marked  increase  in  percent  of  sample  smaller  than  0.3  mm  and 
a  marked  decrease  in  percent  of  sample  larger  than  0.3  mm.  It  is  apparent  that  the 
after-test  sample  contains  more  fines  than  the  pre-test  sample.  This  appears  to  be  con- 
clusive demonstration  of  the  particle  migration  hypothesis  for  this  particular  sand 
mixture. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 

This  study  is  being  conducted  on  a  cooperative  basis  by  the  Association  of  Amer- 
ican Railroads  and  the  University  of  Illinois.  The  contact  officer  for  the  AAR  is  G.  M. 
Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  and  for  the  University,  Professor  Ross  J.  Mar- 
tin, director   of  tbe  Engineering  Experiment  Station. 

Technical  and  operating  supervision  of  the  study  is  provided  by  Rockwell  Smith, 
research  engineer — roadway,  AAR,  and  by  John  C.  Guillou,  associate  professor  of 
hydraulic  engineering.  Special  appreciation  is  due  Mr.  Smith  for  his  interest  and  coop- 
eration in  the  prosecution  of  the  program. 


Roadway   and    Ballast 565 

The   project   has  been  conducted   in   the   Hydraulic   Engineering   Laboratory   under 
the  direction  of  the  writer.   Special  mention  is  due   Lonny   R.   Hoover  who   performed 

the  experimental  work   with   synthetic  filter   mixtures  as  a  special  problem  in  his  under- 
graduate  academic   program. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

(1)  Guillou,  John   ('.,  First  Progress  Report   on  Performance  of  Filter  Materials,  Pro 
ceedings  AREA,  Vol.  61,  pp.  677-602,  1960. 

(2)  Guillou,  John  C.  and  Lanyon,  Richard  F.,  Second  Progress  Report  on  Performance 
of  Filter  Materials.  Proceedings  AREA,  Vol.  63,  pp.   27-38,  1962. 

(3)  Shat'er,  George  E.,  Investigation  of  Position,  Size  and  X umber  of  Holes  in  Hel-Cor 
Subdrains,    Armco    Drainage    Products   Association,    Middletown,    Ohio.    Sept.,    1944. 

(4)  Bertram,  G.  E.,  An  Experimental  Investigation  of  Protective  Filters,  Soil  Mechanics 
Series  No.   7,  Harvard  University,  Cambridge,  Mass.,  Jan.   1940. 


Report  on   Assignment   10 

Ballast 

(a)   Tests 

(c)   Special  Types  of  Ballast 

T.  W.  Creighton  (chairman,  subcommittee),  E.  W.  Bauman,  J.  G.  Campbell,  J.  E.  Gray, 
W.  C.  McCormick,  E.  VY.   McCuskey.  E.  L.  Robinson,  C.   E.  Webb,  E.  L.  Woods. 

Under  Assignment  10  (c) — Special  Types  of  Ballast,  your  committee  presents  a 
progress  report  on  the  1962  condition  of  the  asphalt-treated-ballast  and  asphalt-treated- 
bridge-deck  test  sections  on  various  railroads.  These  treatments  were  applied  in  195° 
and  1960  under  a  cooperative  project  between  the  Asphalt  Institute,  the  Research  De- 
partment of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  and  participating  railroads.  This 
report  is  presented   as  information. 

The  1959  applications  were  reported  in  some  detail  in  the  AREA  Proceedings. 
Vol.  61,  1960,  page  715.  A  progress  report  on  these  projects  and  on  the  1960  work  was 
published  in  abstract  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  62,  1961,  page  707,  and  in  more  detail 
in  Report  ER-10  of  the  AAR  Research  Department.  A  second  progress  report  covering 
the  1959  and  1960  applications  was  published  in  AREA  Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  1962, 
page  593. 

The  report  was  prepared  for  the  committee  by  G.  L.  Hinueber,  engineering  labora- 
tory manager,  AAR. 

Asphalt    Treatments    of    Ballast    and    Bridge    Decks 

All  of  the  asphalt-treated-ballast  t » - 1  sections  applied  in  1959  and  1960  mi  various 
railroads  and  a  representative  number  of  the  bridge-deck  treatments  on  the  Pittsburgh 
&  West  Virginia  Railway  applied  in  i°59  and  1960  wen-  inspected  during  the  summer 
and  fall  of  1962  by  representatives  of  both  the  Vsphall  Institute  and  the  Association 
of  American  Railroads.  The  results  of  these  inspections  are  included  iii  the  following 
report. 


566 Roadway    and    Ballast 

1959   BALLAST  TREATMENTS 
Santa  Fe  Railway 

Daggett-Bar  stow,  Calif. — The  general  condition  of  this  test  section  varied  from  fair 
to  good.  Spotting  has  been  required  at  joints  and  in  signal  areas  at  the  west  end  of  the 
job  and  in  several  other  areas,  chiefly  for  line.  The  asphalt  coverage  and  the  adherence 
of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  ties  and  tie  plates  were  somewhat  spotty,  although 
generally  fair.  Some  little  disturbance  was  noted  in  cribs,  although  most  cribs  were 
fairly  tight.  There  was  also  some  disturbance  at  tie  ends  where  the  asphalt  coated  ballast 
was  working  up  in  a  number  of  places. 

Maintenance  records  show  that  a  nominal  amount  of  spotting  and  lining  has  been 
required  on  both  the  treated  section  and  the  adjacent  untreated  control  section.  The 
total  maintenance  required  on  the  test  section  to  date  has  been  slightly  higher  than  that 
on   the  control  section. 

It  is  believed  that  a  much  better  job  could  have  been  obtained  if  the  quantity  of 
the  asphalt  applied  had  been  somewhat  greater. 

Peach  Springs — Traxton,  Ariz. — The  condition  of  this  test  section  was  fair  to  good. 
There  was  considerable  disturbance  of  the  asphalt-treated  ballast  in  the  cribs  and  at 
tie  ends.  Pumping  was  evident  in  a  number  of  places,  some  of  which  had  to  be  spotted 
three  to  four  times  during  the  past  winter.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover 
aggregate  to  the  ties  and  tie  plates  was  only  fair. 

The  maintenance  records  show  that  the  treated  section  required  some  spotting  and 
lining  during  the  past  year  but  the  untreated  section  required  none.  The  total  spotting 
and  lining  requirements  to  date,  however,  are  somewhat  greater  for  the  control  section 
than  for  the  treated  section,  although  they  are  relatively  low  for  both. 

It  is  evident  that  an  insufficient  amount  of  asphalt  was  applied  on  this  job. 

Suwanee-Marmon,  TV.  M. — The  treated  section  on  the  eastward  track  exhibited 
severe  pumping  and  instability  and  was  removed  from  test  early  in  1961.  The  treated 
section  on  the  westward  track  was  removed  from  test  in  January  1962  for  similar  rea- 
sons. The  ballast  had  apparently  become  fouled  with  wind-blown  fine  sand  and  silt 
prior  to  the  asphalt  application.  Water  which  entered  the  poorly  draining  ballast  both 
before  and  after  the  asphalt  application  caused  severe  pumping  and  subsequent 
instability. 

The  quantity  of  asphalt  applied  seemed  deficient,  although  it  is  very  doubtful  that 
the  asphalt  treatment  could  have  been  successful  under  prevailing  conditions. 

Maintenance  records  show  that  the  asphalt-treated  section  required  about  twice  as 
much  maintenance  as  the  untreated  control  section  before  the  test  was  discontinued. 
The  maintenance  cost  on  the  test  section  includes  a  cost  for  digging  out  asphalt  to  allow 
drainage  in  addition   to  the  required  spotting  and  lining  costs. 

Lecompton-Topeka,  Kans. — In  1961  a  one-mile  stretch  of  the  asphalt-treated-ballast 
test  section  was  removed  and  the  track  was  relined  and  surfaced.  This  stretch  is  along 
a  river  and  has  long  been  an  area  of  chronic  instability.  A  curve  near  the  west  end  of 
the  job  has  required  spotting  and  lining  for  a  length  of  about  0.4  mile.  It  is  not  known 
if  the  track  at  this  location  was  out  of  line  before  application  of  the  asphalt  or  if  it 
kicked  out  of  line  following  the  test  application.  With  these  exceptions  and  some  minor 
cracking  along  the  shoulders,  the  general  condition  of  the  remainder  of  the  treated 
section  was  good.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  the  ties  and 
track  fittings  was  very  good. 

The  maintenance  costs  on  this  test  section  have  run  quite  high.  This  is  due  chiefly 
to  the  spotting  and  lining  required  on  the  unstable  section  alone  the  river  before  it  was 


Roadway    and    Ballast 567 


removed  from  the  test.  Despite  this,  it   will  be  noted  that   the  total  maintenance  cost 
to  date  on  the  adjacent  conrol  section  has  been  \l/z  times  that  on  the  test  section. 

BuckUn-Marcetine,  Mo. — The  condition  of  this  test  section  was  very  good.  There 
was  a  small  amount  of  disturbance  at  the  tie  ends  in  a  few  scattered  places,  but  the 
cribs  were  fairly  tight.  A  small  amount  of  pumping  has  occurred  in  some  cuts  and  at 
road  crossings.  The  line  and  grade  appeared  to  be  good.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt 
and  cover  aggregate   to  the  ties  and  tie  plates  was  excellent. 

The  maintenance  costs  to  date  on  the  test  section  have  been  very  low.  The  only 
maintenance  of  any  consequence  has  been  around  insulated  joints.  The  maintenance  costs 
on   the  adjacent  control  section  have  been  chiefly   for  spotting  and,  although   relatively 
low,  have  run   three  times  as  much  as  for  the  test  section. 

II  illiainsfield-Dahinda,  III. — This  test  section  was  in  excellent  condition.  The  cribs 
were  tight  and  only  a  small  amount  of  disturbance  was  noticeable  at  the  tie  ends.  The 
line  and  surface  were  good.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  ties 
and  track  fittings  was  excellent.  The  only  maintenance  required  on  the  test  has  been 
around  insulated  joints. 

The  maintenance  costs  for  the  control  section  have  been  double  those  for  the  test 
section  to  date.  However,  the  maintenance  costs  were  low  for  both  test  and  control 
sections. 

Yictorville  and  Oro  Grande,  Calif. — These  test  sections  were  treated  for  the  purpose 
of  keeping  dust  from  adjacent  cement  mills  from  fouling  the  ballast.  Both  sections  were 
in  excellent  condition  and  indications  are  that  the  treatments  have  been  very  successful 
for  the  purpose  intended. 

The  eastbound  track  at  Oro  Grande  has  been  surfaced  on  the  west  end  for  about 
200  ft.  The  condition  was  believed  to  have  existed  at  the  time  of  the  asphalt  applica- 
tion. There  has  been  some  movement  in  the  vicinity  of  the  switch  at  the  east  end  of 
the  Yictorville  job   which  has   required  some  maintenance. 

Both  tests  had  excellent  adherence  of  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  ties  and  tie 
plates.  The  cribs  were  generally  tight  and  there  was  little  or  no  disturbance  at  tie  ends. 
This  was  a  special  treatment  and  no  control  section  could  be  set  up  for  similar 
conditions. 

I960  BALLAST  TREATMENTS 

Norfolk  &   Western  Railway 

This  asphalt-treated-ballast  test  section  was  in  excellent  condition.  A  small  amount 
of  disturbance  was  noted  at  tie  ends  but  there  was  little  or  no  disturbance  at  the  insu- 
lated  or  other  joints. 

The  section  is  favorably  shaped  for  good  lateral  drainage.  Cribs  were  tight  and  ties 
and  track  fittings  have  retained  excellent  coverage  of  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate.  The 
test  track  has  ribbon  rail  except  for  curves,  which  have  78-  and  117-ft  rails.  It  was  in 
excellent  condition  at  the  time  of  application  and  no  maintenance  has  been  required 
since. 

The  control  section  has  39-ft  rails.  It  has  required  spotting  but  was  in  good  shape 
at  the  time  of  the  inspection.  The  control  track  was  not  up  to  full  standard  of  the  test 
section  at  the  time  of  treatment,  and  therefore,  the  difference  in  maintenance  COStS  i- 
shown  in  the  accompanying  table  does  not  entirely  reflect  the  merit  of  the  asphalt 
treatment. 


568 Roadway   and    Ballast 

Monon  Railroad 

This  test  section  was  in  excellent  condition.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover 
aggregate  to  the  ties  and  track  fittings  were  very  good.  The  cribs  were  tight  and  there 
was  little  or  no  disturbance  at  tie  ends.  The  section  was  well  dressed  and  crowned 
before   treatment   and  gives  excellent   lateral  drainage.   The   line  and  surface   were   good. 

No  maintenance  has  been  required  on  either  the  test  section  or  adjacent  control 
section   since  application. 

Texas  &  Pacific  Railway 

The  general  condition  of  this  asphalt-treated-ballast  test  section  was  very  good. 
There  was  little  evidence  of  disturbance  in  the  cribs  or  on  the  shoulders.  There  were  a 
few  pumping  ties  in  some  of  the  shallow  cuts.  The  test  section  was  apparently  holding 
line  and  surface  well.  The  adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  the  track 
fittings  and  ties  was  good. 

No  maintenance  has  been  required  on  either  the  test  section  or  the  adjacent  control 
section. 

Chicago  &   North  Western  Railway 

This  test  section  appeared  to  be  in  generally  good  condition.  The  line  and  grade 
were  good.  The  cribs  were  tight  and  there  was  very  little  disturbance  at  the  tie  ends. 
There  was  good  asphalt  coverage  and  adherence  to  the  ties  and  track  fittings  was  good. 
The  distribution  of  the  cover  aggregate  was  poor,  with  little  or  no  coverage  between 
the  rails. 

There  has  been  no  maintenance  work  performed  either  on  the  section  treated  with 
asphalt   or  on   the   untreated  control  section. 

1959   AND    1960   BRIDGE    DECK  TREATMENTS 
Pittsburgh   &  West  Virginia  Railway 

About  five  miles  of  bridge  decks  on  this  railway  were  treated  with  an  asphalt  and 
cover  aggregate  application  in  1959  and  1960.  A  representative  number  of  these  bridges 
were    inspected   in    1962. 

The  1959  treatments  were  generally  very  good  except  for  the  stripping  of  the  asphalt 
from  the  base  of  rail,  the  tie  plates  and  track  fittings.  The  asphalt  coverage  and  the 
adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  the  ties  were  satisfactory  for  all  bridges 
inspected.  The  treatments  which  were  applied  in  two  passes  at  4  mph  were  better  than 
those  applied  in  a  single  pass.  Those  applied  with  two  passes  at  2  mph  were  superior. 

The  1960  treatments  inspected  generally  showed  good  asphalt  coverage  and  good 
adherence  of  the  asphalt  and  cover  aggregate  to  the  ties,  base  of  rail,  and  track  fittings. 
The  poor  adherence  of  the  asphalt  to  the  metal  surfaces  in  the  1959  treatments  was 
probably  due  to  an  accumulation  of  rust  and  dirt  as  well  as  low  temperatures  at  the 
time  of  application.  The  metal  surfaces  were  primed  with  kerosene  prior  to  the  I960 
applications  and  the  air  temperatures  were  considerably  higher  during  the  1960  treat- 
ments. As  a  result  better  adherence  was  obtained. 

Most  of  the  1959  treatments  were  on  bridges  with  older  ties  and  were  made  with 
two  passes.  The  1960  treatments  were  on  bridges  with  newer  ties  and  a  single  application 
treatment  was  used  and  proved  to  be  adequate. 

Very  little  maintenance  has  been  required  on  either  the  treated  sections  or  adjacent 
untreated  control  sections  of  bridge  decks.  The  decks  that  were  chosen  for  treatment 
were  in  fairly  good  condition  and  any  bridge  decks  where  work  was  programmed  for 
the  near  future  were  not  coated. 


Roadway    and    Ballast 569 

Chicago,   Rock   Island   &   Pacific  Railroad 

The  test  bridges  on  this  road  treated  in  1960,  were  not  inspected  this  year  by  the 
Asphalt  Institute  and  AAR  representatives.  A  report  from  the  railway,  however,  indi- 
cates that  the  treatments  were  generally  in  good  condition.  To  date  a  few  treated  ties 
which  were  in  poor  condition  at  the  time  of  treatment  have  been  replaced.  None  of 
the  ties  in   the  adjacent  untreated  control  sections  have  been   removed. 

DISCUSSION'.   AND   COST  DATA 

It  was  noted  that  two  of  the  original  asphalt-treated-ballast  test  sections  and  part 
of  a  third  have  been  removed  from  the  test.  The  failures  of  these  sections  are  not 
attributable  to  the  failure  of  the  treatment  as  such,  but  rather  to  conditions  that  existed 
at  the  time  of  application,  such  as  fouled  ballast  and  unstable  subgradc.  This  points  up 
the  necessity  of  having  the  track  in  good  condition  at  the  time  of  treatment,  especially 
as  far  as  line,  surface,  ballast  and  subgrade  are  concerned.  It  is  not  only  desirable  to 
have  the  ballast  relatively  clean  but  the  ballast  section  should  be  shaped  to  give  good 
lateral  drainage. 

Several  of  the  jobs  are  deficient  in  asphalt.  These  applications  are  all  on  cinder 
ballast  which  absorbs  the  asphalt  more  readily  than  most  other  types  of  ballast.  This 
was  apparently  not  taken  into  consideration  when  required  quantities  were  estimated. 
A  greater  quantity  of  asphalt  was  required  than  was  estimated  and  applied.  This  has 
not  contributed  directly  to  any  of  the  failures,  but  is  definitely  a  factor  in  the  relatively 
poor  performance  of  several  of  the  test  sections. 

The  condition  of  the  test  sections  in  general,  with  the  few  exceptions  noted,  was 
very  good  and  results  are  encouraging. 

Sufficient  time  has  elapsed  since  the  installation  of  the  asphalt-treated-ballast  test 
sections  to  give  some  preliminary  maintenance  cost  data.  The  cost-of-application  data 
are  also  now  available  and  arc  shown  in  the  accompanying  cost-data  table. 

The  cost  of  application  of  the  various  asphalt-treated-ballast  test  sections  varies 
from  a  minimum  of  $880  per  mile  to  a  maximum  of  $1385  per  mile.  The  average  cost 
of  the  test   sections  is  $1028  per  mile. 

The  total  cost  of  installation  of  an  asphalt-treated-ballast  test  section  includes  work 
train  and  labor  expenses  as  well  as  material  costs.  Delays  due  to  malfunction  of  equip- 
ment increased  work  train  and  labor  expenses  on  some  of  the  jobs.  Lower  unit  cost  of 
asphalt  on  some  jobs  decreased  the  materials  cost. 

The  maintenance  costs  for  the  test  sections  and  the  adjacent  control  sections  as 
shown  in  the  cost-data  table  reflect  a  general  trend  toward  lower  maintenance  require- 
ments on  the  treated  sections,  with  a  few  minor  exceptions.  These  maintenance  costs 
cover  a  period  of  two  to  three  years  and  at  this  time  can  only  be  considered  as  giving 
preliminary  indications 

The  average  cost  of  bridge  treatments  on  the  Pittsburgh  &  Wesl  Virginia  ran  52.7 
cents  per  tie  for  the  1959  work  and  45.2  cents  per  tie  for  the  i960  work.  Difficulties 
were  encountered  with  the  asphalt-spreading  equipment  in  195(>  which  necessitated 
delays  and  additional  expense  for  reheating  the  asphalt.  This  resulted  in  the  higher 
cost  of  treatment  in  that  year. 

The  only  maintenance  cost  incurred  to  date  on  the  Pittsburgh  &  Wesl  Virginia 
treated  bridge  decks  is  a  total  of  $280  for  replacing  1 J  ties  which  were  in  such  pool 
condition  at  the  time  of  treatment  that  no  benefit  could  have  been  realized  in  coating 
them.  There  has  been  no  maintenance  required  on   the  adjacent   control  sections 


570 


Roadway    an  d    Ballast 


Tabic  of  Installation  and  Maintenance  Costs  for  Asphalt  Treatments 
Ballast  Treatments 


Length 

Location  of 

of 

Kailroad 

Test  Section 

Test 

AT&SF 

Daggett-Barstow. 
California 

2  mi. 

AT&SF 

Peach  Springs  - 
Truxton,  Arizona 

5.2  mi. 

"AT&SF 

Suwanec-Marmon, 
New  Mexico 

4.5  mi. 

Year  Cost  of 

Treated     Treatment/mi. 


Cost  of  Maintenance 

to  August  1962 

Test  Sec.      Control  Sec. 


Lecompton  -  Topcka , 
Kansas 


1959         $l,080.39/mi.        $     758.08  $     579.84 

1959           1,014.75/mi.              394.72  935.04 

1959                976.06/mi.          3,818.64  1,793.84 

♦Note:    MP  50.  5-53.  0  test  section  destroyed  March  1961 
MP  53.0-55.0  test  section  destroyed  January  1962 

4  mi.            1959           1,008.81/mi.         3,967.11  6,142.28 

♦Note:    MP  41.4-42.4  removed  from  test  1961 


AT&SF  Bucklin-Marceline,  4.15  mi.  1959 

Missouri 
AT&SF  Williamsfield-  3.5  mi.  1959 

Dahinda,  Illinois 
AT&SF  Victorville,   Calif.   &         4.5  mi.  1959 

Oro  Grande,   Calif. 
N&WRy.       Crewe,  Virginia  2.8  mi. 

Monon  Monon,  Indiana  4. 8  mi. 

♦L&N  North  of  Horse  Cave,  2  mi. 

Kentucky 
T&P  Big  Spring,   Texas  4  mi.  1960 


945.54/mi. 
879.70/mi. 
983.58/mi. 


435.01 
319.15 


1,308.86 
595.69 


2,883.20     No  control  sec. 


1960  1,204.68/mi.  0  1,185.00 

I960      Not  yet  available  0  0 

1960  1,025.00/mi.         ♦Removed  from  test  1961 


1,164.50/mi. 


0 


Bridge  Deck  Treatments 


P&WVa. 

Pennsylvania 

12,780  lin. 

ft. 

1959 

52.  It  /tie 

$280.00 

P&WVa. 

Pennsylvania 

12,990  lin. 

ft. 

1960 

45.2£/tie 

0 

CRI&  P 

Arkansas  and  La. 

36,372  lin. 

ft. 

1960 

42.9^/tie 

0 

The  average  cost  of  treatment  of  the  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  bridge  decks 
ran  about  42.9  cents  per  tie.  No  maintenance  of  any  consequence  has  been  required  to 
date  on  either  the  treated  or  adjacent  untreated  control  section. 


Report  on  Assignment   11 

Chemical   Control   of  Vegetation 

Collaborating  with  Communication  and  Signal   Section,  AAR 

C.  E.  Webb   (chairman,  subcommittee),  C.  W.  Bailey,  J.  W.  DeMoycr,  R.  J.   Kemper 
S.  J.  Owens,  W.  F.  Petteys. 

Because  of  budget  restrictions  affecting  the  work  of  the  AAR  research  staff,  it 
not  been  possible  to  gather  sufficient  data  on  this  subject  to  prepare  a  report  of  nation- 
wide significance.  However,  certain  information  on  new  products  and  chemical  com- 
binations is  being  assembled,  and  it  is  expected  that  a  significant  report  can  be  presented 
later  this  year. 


Taitf" 


AUTOJACK 
ELECTROMATIC 


The  only  completely 
automatic  track  surfacing 
machine  on  the  market 


Proven  in  operation  by  North  America's 
leading  railroads.  Complete  and  auto- 
matic control  of  surface  and  cross  level 
through  tangent  and  curve  territory 
regardless  of  height  of  lift. 

•  Combination  of  Autojack  and  Electromatic 
equals  or  improves  production  of  Electro- 
matic alone. 

•  Precision  of  lift  and  uniformity  of  compaction 
controlled  automatically. 


•  All  variations  in  lift,  level  and  run-out  con- 
trolled from  operator's  panel. 

•  Beam  "sighting"  for  utmost  precision. 

•  Front  buggy  self-propelled  ahead  of  tamper. 


TA  M  P  E  R     I  N  C.    53  Court  St.,  Plattsburgh,  N.Y. 

SALES   AND   SERVICE:    2  1  47  University  Avenue 
St.  Paul  1  4,  Minnesota 
Phone:  645-5055 
IN   CANADA    160  St.  Joseph  Blvd., 

Lachine  (Montreal),  P.Q. 
Phone:  637-5531 
Your  enquiries  for  detailed  information  or  brochures  on 
Autojack  Electromatic  and  other  track  machines  are  invited. 


Kill  more  weeds  per  mile.. .per  dollar 
,„ ,  Liquid  UROX  ! 

Liquid  Urox  Weed  Killer  is  the  first  liquid  —  substituted 
urea-type  herbicide  ever  developed  for  railroads.  It's  fast- 
acting  .  .  .  withers  annual  and  perennial  grasses  as  well  as 
broadleaved  weeds  within  12  hours  after  application,  re- 
gardless of  weather.  It's  long-lasting  .  .  .  just  one  applica- 
tion wipes  out  weeds  and  brush  for  8  to  18  months.  What's 
more,  control  can  be  continued  economically  each  year 
with  small  "booster"  doses. 

Liquid  Urox  is  ideal  for  railroad  spray  trains  . . .  doesn't 
need  continuous  agitation  .  .  .  won't  clog  spray  nozzles  .  .  . 
won't  settle  out . .  .  can  be  mixed  with  fuel  oil,  diesel  oil  or 
ordinary  weed  oils.  Write  today  for  the  complete  story  on 
railroad-proved  liquid  Urox  Weed  Killer. 


GENERAL  CHEMICAL  DIVISION 

P.O.  Box  353.  Morristown,  M.  J. 


CONTINUOUS  RAIL 

—Quickly,  Economically  with  the 


RAIL  WELDING 


A  typical  transformer  sub-station  furnish- 
ing commercial  power  for  NCG  Automatic 
Rail  Welding  System. 


When  "Flashing"  stops,  the  weld  upset  is 
sheared.  The  weld  is  then  ground  with 
abrasive  belts  to  a  smooth  surface. 


Now  small  work  crews  do  a  big,  fast 
job  with  the  continuous,  highly 
automated  NCG  Rail  Welding  System 
using  commercial  electricity. 
Time-wasting  annealing  and 
normalizing  are  eliminated.  All 
operations  are  automatic,  under 
push-button  control. 

The  NCG  Rail  Welding  System  brings 
the  highly  desired  advantages  of 
continuous  rail  to  many  roads  which 
previously  deemed  it  beyond  budget 
acceptance.  It  may  be  purchased 
or  leased.  Write  for  details  now. 
NATIONAL  CYLINDER  GAS,  DIVISION 
OF  CHEMETRON  CORPORATION 
840  N.  Michigan  Ave.,  Chicago  11,  111. 


NCG 


A  pusher  moves  strings  of  welded  rail 
onto  flat  cars  ready  for  shipment. 


NATIONAL  CYLINDER  GAS 


©1961  Chemetron  Corporation 


BIG  BENEFITS 

of  the  GRS  Wheel  Thermo-Scanner  Unit 


Viewing  the  wheel  hub  gives  you . . . 
The  truest  indication  of  bearing  heat 
— at  the  natural  heat  sink.  By  focus- 
ing on  this  hub  area,  abnormal  heat 
caused  by  dragging  brake  shoes  can 
also  be  detected,  as  well  as — and  these 
are  actual  instances — defective  trac- 
tion motor  suspension  bearings,  and  a 
wheel  loose  on  its  axle.  These  are 
extra  benefits  not  available  with  systems 
that  scan  the  journal  box. 


Right  angle  scanning  of  the  rolling  stock 
gives  you . . . 

Operation  with  traffic  in  both  direc- 
tions. No  additional  track  mounted  or 
wayside  equipment  required.  No  costly 
duplication. 


3 


No  special  analysis  required  for  cars  with 
roller  bearings . . . 

A  normal  bearing — plain  or  roller — 
presents  the  same  indication  on  the 
recording.  All  types  of  bearings  reg- 
ister the  same  relative  amount  of  pen 
deflection,  eliminating  confusion  be- 
tween plain  and  roller  bearings. 


The  Wheel  Thermo-Scanner  Unit  is 
built  for  railway  use  by  a  railway 
equipment  manufacturer.  It  com- 
bines more  practical  beneficial  fea- 
tures than  any  other  hot-box  detector. 


Install  Wheel  Thermo-Scanner  Units 
now,  at  strategic  points  along  your 
line — you'll  find  them  the  best  choice 
for  dependable  protection.  Ask  your 
GRS  representative  for  full  details. 


. 


GENERAL  RAILWAY  SIGNAL  COMPANY 


ROCHESTER  X  NEW  YORK 


NEW  YORK  17,  NEW  YORK 


CHICAGO  I,  ILLINOIS 


ST.  LOUIS  1,  MISSOURI 


for  effective 
weed  control... 


Concentrated  BORASCU 
POLYBOR-CHLORATE 
UREABOR® 
MONOBOR-CHLORATE 


These  borate  weed  killers  are  proving  best 
for  roads  in  every  way . . .  efficiency,  safety, 
economy,  convenience,  easy  application. 


Today's  use  of  borates  for  maximum  control  of 
vegetation  began  years  ago  with  our  pioneer 
work  in  the  field.  Continued  research  has 
developed  the  group  of  herbicides,  listed  above, 
which  most  roads  now  favor  for  every  phase  of 
weed  control.  These  four  weed  killers  are 
nonselective.  They  are  widely  used  for  year- 
round  maintenance  of  weed-free  conditions 
about  trestles,  tie  piles,  yards,  signals,  switches, 
and  rights  of  way.  Find  out  how  you,  too,  can 
do  a  better  job  on  weeds . . .  write  today . 


AGRICULTURAL  SALES  DEPARTMENT 


BORAX 


630    SHATTO    PLACE     •     LOS    ANGELES    5,    CALIFORNIA 


Model  N  U  Tie  Cutter 


W\  h. ffijfc/WHM 
r            1 

m 

1 

~*JSm 

-^#_H 

fJ__H 
» -H-SD 

'■■    _1rV____H_r___l 

' :' *;    Sag r  .   •  '•  ^  «P<_i 

Jj^ 

*^r»»" '  '--if ^» 

5"  ,^™11 

la                         ■  _S___i^ 

>*v.  JH 

-  — — 

sap    •  _ 

■j^S 

jri 

J 

U!^'^' "-  -•^■^ff  , 

1  ■ nil 

5?_j 

2L  i 

'"*"   _■     _■ 

...          M 
1    Ijg&L^ 

g    1    B 

■■'  i  H  _P^ 
"■**£-    ^^____H 

V  t 

^"^*~i**«j_^^_^,  1, 
-ffflfll 

HERE  IS  THE  WINNING  TEAM 

The  Woolery  NU  Tie  Cutter  and  the  Woolery  Tie-end  Remover  preserve  the  line  and  surface 
of  the  track  and  at  the  same  time  reduce  the  cost  of  tie  renewals.  Ties  can  be  removed 
without  trenching,  jacking  up  track  or  adzing  tops  of  rail-cut  ties.  With  this  team  you  simply 
cut  both  ends  of  tie,  pry  out  center  piece,  insert  in  its  place  the  tie-end  remover  and  out 
go  the  tie  ends  pushed  by  the  double  acting,  double  ended  hydraulic  cylinder  of  the  Tie- 
end  remover. 


FOR  HIGHEST  EFFICIENCY  USE  TWO  TIE  CUTTERS  WITH  ONE  TIE-END  REMOVER 


WOOLERY  MACHINE  COMPANY 

MINNEAPOLIS,  MINN. 


ROOTS  AND  LOADS  TIES 


LAYING  WELDED  RAIL 


MODEL  441 

Developed  and  Built 
for  Railroad  Maintenance 

180°  BOOM  SWING 

D0£S  ALL  JOBS! 


CUTS     MAINTENANCE     COSTS 


12  FAST  CHANGE  ATTACHMENTS 


•  Forks 

•  IK   Cu.   Yd.   Bucket 

•  Tote   Hook 

•  18'   Boom    Extension 

•  Fork   Tie   Baler 

•  Track   Cleaning   Bucket 


•  Back   Hoe 

•  Clamshell 

•  Back   Filler   Blade 

•  Pull   Drag   Bucket 

•  4  Cu.  Yd.   Snow   bucket 

•  Pile  Hammer 


Optional  Attachment 
Flanged   Wheels,   Hydraulically   Controlled 


WIDE   TRACK   CLEANING   BUCKET' 


PETTIBONE  MULLIKEN  CORPORATION 

RAILROAD    .^gj^DIVISION 

141    W.   JACKSON^s^"!?*^*  CHICAGO  4.   Ill 

80   Years  of  Service 
to  the  Railroad  Industry 


m  m 

Hubbard  Super  Service  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Super  Steel  Alloy  Spring  Washers 

Hubbard  Track  Tools 

Hubbard  Tool  Division 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 

New  York  Pittsburgh  Chicago 

ft      Unit  Rail  Anchor       w. 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  DIVISION 

UNIT  RAIL  ANCHOR  CORPORATION 
NEW  YORK  PITTSBURGH  CHICAGO 


Assure  lower  maintenance  costs, 
better  performance  with... 


TEXACO      1 

Petroleum  Products  and 

Systematic  Engineering 

Service 

H 

iwmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmsm 

TEXACO  inc. 

RAILWAY  SALES  DIVISION 

135  East  42nd  St.,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 
h  )RK   •   CHICAGO   •   SAN  FRANCISCO   •   ST.  LOUIS   •   ST.  PAUL  •   ATLANTA 


The  custom-built  assembly  shown 
above  and  to  the  right  is  an  all-purpose 
rig  designed  to  give  maximum  flexibility 
in  coating  and  painting  work.  It  was 
designed  for  field  application  of  paints, 
lacquers,  vinyls,  cutback  asphalts, 
creosotes,  heavy  oils  and  greases. 

It  uses  the  economical  Graco  Hydra- 
Spray  Process,  and  proves  once  again, 
you  get  the  job  done  faster  and  better 
with  Graco  than  with  any  other  coat- 
ing system. 

If  speed  of  coating  application,  and 
material  savings  are  important  to  you, 
write  today  for  all  the  details  of  the 
Graco  Hydra-Spray  Process. 


FREE! 


Graco  Engineers  are  prepared  to  help  you  in  the  design  of  your 
paint  and  material  spray  assemblies.  Your  Graco  Railway  Rep- 
resentative will  be  glad  to  explain  the  many  benefits  of  this 
service.  Write  or  call  him  .  .  .  ioday! 


Graco 

GRAY  COMPANY,  INC. 

MINNEAPOLIS  13,  MINNESOTA 


RAILWAY  DEPARTMENT 

JOHN  P.  McADAMS,  Eastern  Sales  Representative 
2304  Wilson  Boulevard,  Arlington,  Virginia 


CHICAGO  — (Broadview,  III.) 

R.  D.  Worley 

3030  South  25th  Ave. 

CLEVELAND 

M.  H.  Fronk  Company,  Inc. 
1202  Marshall  Building 

HOUSTON 

Houston  Railroad  Supply  Co. 
1610  Dumble  Street 


PHILADELPHIA 

The  A.  R.  Kidd  Co. 

1036  Suburban  Station  Bldg. 

LOUISVILLE 

T.  F.  &  H.  H.  Going 
6308  Limewood  Circle 

ST.  LOUIS 

The  Carriers  Supply  Company 
818  Olive  Street 


NEW   YORK  — Newark,  New  Jer.ey 
R.  A.  Corley 
744  Broad  Street 

SAN    FRANCISCO 

The  Barnes  Supply  Compony 
I  41   Eleventh  Street 

TWIN   CITIES  — SI.  Paul,  Minn. 

The  Daniel  L.  O'Brien  Supply  Company 

Endicott-On-Fourth  Bldg. 


WASHINGTON  — Arlington,  Vo. 

Southeastern  Railway  Supply,  Inc. 
2304  Wilson  Blvd. 


MONTREAL  — Ontario,  Canada 
International  Equipment  Co.,  Ltd. 
360  St.  James  Street  West 


I  POWER 


A  COMPLETE  LINE 
OE  SPRING  WASHERS 


THE   NATIONAL  LOCK  WASHER  CO 

Newark  N.  J.,   V.  S.  A- 


THE  DOUBLE  U  RAIL  ANCHOR 


ACHUFF  RAILWAY  SUPPLY  CO. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


The  illustration  above  very  closely  approximates  the  results  obtained  by  the  Jackson  Track  Maintainer. 


> 

ballast 

drastically  cuts 
maintenance  cost 


.  .  .  and  JACKSON  tampers  are  the  only  tampers  that  truly  KEY  the  ballast 
components!  Percussion  alone  won't  do  it.  Vibration  plus  squeezing 
doesn't  do  it.  Only  the  powerful,  vibratory,  3-dimensional  tamping  action 
of  JACKSON  TAMPING  so  thoroughly  consolidates  the  ballast,  so  com- 
pletely and  tightly  KEYS  the  ballast  components  together  that  the  tie  bed 
resembles  a  mosaic  floor.  And  it  does  so  right  in  the  vital  load  bearing 
area  directly  under  the  rail  and  in  a  wider  supporting  area  than  provided 
by  any  other  tamper. 

Tamping  of  this  character  is  bound  to  last  longer  .  .  .  bound  to  drastically 
reduce  maintenance  expense  .  .  .  one  of  the  major  reasons  why  most 
track  chiefs  prefer  the  JACKSON  TRACK  MAINTAINER. 


Let  us  give  you 

the  complete  details. 


JACKSON 


VIBRfltORS.  ~ 

LUDINGTON,  MICHIGAN,  U.S.A 


OO  WOODINGS- VERONA  TOOL  WORKS 

^X  Pioneer  Manufacturers 

of 
HIGH  GRADE  TRACK  TOOLS 

and 

SPRING  WASHERS  FOR  TRACK 

Since  1873 
VERONA.  PA.  CHICAGO.  ILL. 


w 

WOODINGS  FORGE  <&  TOOL  COMPANY 

Makers 

of 

WOODINGS  RAIL  ANCHORS 

VERONA.  PA. 

CHICAGO. 

ILL. 

Notes  on 

Railroad   Location  and  Construction  Procedures 
from  the  School  of  Experience 

By  J.  A.   Given 

A  series  of  notes,  comments,  short-cut  methods  and  "tricks  of  the 
trade"  written  by  a  railroad  location  engineer  of  many  years  of 
practical   experience  for  the   benefit  of  young  engineers. 

Price  $0.50 

AMERICAN   RAILWAY  ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 

59   East  Van   Buren   Street 
Chicago  5,  III. 


at 

your 

service 


for 

all    types   of   cranes 

d  iesel   wreckers 

pile   drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608       S  .       DEARBORN       ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.   COVELLI 

President 
Representatives    in    Principal    Cities 


£-x-t-e-n-d  T-i-e  JI-l-^-q! 
4-fold  Qaae! 

USE  TIE  PLATE 
LOCK  SPIKES 


One-piece  Design 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  tie  plates  firmly  in  place  on 
cross-ties  and  bridge  timbers. 

LOCK  SPIKES  are  quickly  and  easily  driven, 
or  removed,  with  standard  track  tools. 

Driven  to  refusal,  the  spread  shank  is  com- 
pressed by  the  walls  of  the  hole.  Tie  plates  are  held 
against  horizontal  and  vertical  movement  under 
spring  pressure.  Play  between  the  spike  and  the 
hole  is  eliminated — abrasion  and  seating  of  tie 
plates  is  overcome. 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  their  position  in  the  tie, 
and  redriving  to  tighten  the  plate  is  not  required. 
They  provide  a  quiet  and  strengthened  track. 

Annual  cost  of  ties  and  maintenance  expense  is 
reduced  by  extending  the  life  of  ties  and  holding 
gage.  Here  is  one  answer  to  conservation  of  ma- 
terials and  labor.  Write  for  free  folder. 

BERNUTH,  LEMBCKE   CO.,  INC. 

420  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 


Actual 
Size 


jjtjiwa  a> 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  are  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Ceaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  well 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rail 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand. 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  lor 
belter  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  for  —  and  more 


c/ud^~/7s^>  ^te  '^aSz&zds  y^z^~nac/e  xseds  as/ 


CEO 

Ui  1111 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


Clark  Street 
Eatt  Syracuse,  N    Y 


306  North  Cayuga  St. 
Ithaca.  N.  Y. 


THE  TRASCO 
AUTONOMIC  CAR  RETARDER 

CLAMPS  IN  PLACE 
ANYWHERE  IN  TRACK 

SIMPLE  —  EFFECTIVE  —  INEXPENSIVE 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  CO. 

GENERAL   MOTORS   BLDG. 
NEW  YORK  19,  N.  Y. 


American  Railway 

Engineering  Association— Bulletin 


Bulletin  579  June-July  1963 

Proceedings  Vol.  64* 


CONVENTION  ISSUE 


CONTENTS 


Report  of  the  62nd  Business  Meeting,  March  15-16, 
1963,  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  including  Ab- 
stracts of  All  Discussions,  All  Formal  Action  on 
Manual  Material,  Specific  Papers  and  Addresses 
Presented  in  Connection  with  Committee  Reports, 
and  Other  Official  Business  of  the  Association 579 

Report  of  the  Executive  Secretary 706 

Report  of  the  Treasurer 725 

Constitution     726 

Tie  Renewals  and  Costs  per  Mile  of  Maintained  Track  _  738 

Index  of  Proceedings,  Vol.  64,  1963 739 


*  The  contents  of  this  Bulletin  and  the  other  Bulletins  of  the  Association 
from  Bulletin  573,  September-October  1962,  to  and  including  Bulletin  579,  June- 
July  1963  (except  Bulletin  578,  March  1963),  constitute  the  Annual  Proceedings 
of  the  Association. 


Copyright    1963,    by    American    Railway    Engineering    Asiociation 


BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 
1963-1964 

President 
L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  and  Louisiana  Lines, 
Houston  1,  Tex. 

Vice  Presidents 
T.  F.  Burris,  General  Manager  of  Construction  and  Maintenance  of  Way,  Chesapeake 

&  Ohio  Railway — Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  Huntington,  W.  Va. 
A.  V.  Johnston,  Chief  Engineer,  Canadian  National  Railways,  Montreal,  Que 

Past  Presidents 
R.  H.  Beeder,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Chicago  4. 
C.  J  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadelphia  4,  Pa. 

Directors 
J.   H.   Brown,   Assistant   General  Manager — Eastern    District,   St   Louis-San   Francisco 

Railway,  Springfield,  Mo. 
J.  E.  Eisemann,  Chief  Engineer,  Western  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway, 

Amarillo,  Tex. 
W.  H  Huffman,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Construction,   Chicago   &  North  Western 

Railway,  Chicago  6 
F.  R.  Smith,  Chief  Engineer,  Union  Railroad,  East  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 
W.  L.  Young,  Chief  Engineer,  Norfolk  &  Western  Railway,  Roanoke  17,  Va. 
T.  B.  Hutcheson,  Chief  Engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  Richmond  13,  Va. 
C.  E.  Defendorf,  Chief  Engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 
John  Ayer,  Jr.,  Vice  President — Operations,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad, 

Denver  17,  Colo. 
A.  L.  Sams,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  5. 
J.  F.  Beaver,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Railway  System,  Washington  13,  D.  C. 
V.  C.  Hanna,  Chief  Engineer,  Terminal  Railroad  Association  of  St.  Louis, 

St.  Louis  3,  Mo. 
H.  M.  Whxiamson,  Chief  Engineer  System,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  San  Francisco  5, 

Calif. 

Treasurer 
A.  B.  Hhxman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago;  Chicago  &  Western 

Indiana  Railroad,  Chicago. 

Executive  Secretary 
N.  D.  Howard,  59  East  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5. 

Assistant  Secretary 
E.  G.  Gehrke,  59  East  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5. 

Secretary  Emeritus 
Walter  S.  Lacher,  407  East  Fuller  Road,  Hinsdale,  HI. 


Published  by  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  Monthly,  January,  February,  March, 

November   and    December;    Bi-Monthly,    June-July,    and  September-October,   at   2211    Fordem 

Avenue,    Madison,    Wis.;    Editorial    and    Executive    Offices, 

59  Van  Buren  Street,  Chicago  5,  111. 

Second  class  postage  paid  at  Madison,  Wis. 

Accepted  for  mailing  at  special  rate  of  postage  for  in  Section  1103,  Act  of  October  3,   1917, 

authorized  on  June  29,  1918. 

Subscription   $10  per  annum. 


AMERICAN  RAILWAY 
ENGINEERING  ASSOCIATION 


We  greatly  appreciate  your  cooperation  arranging  your  1963  meet- 
ing schedule  to  coincide  with  the  American  Railway  Progress 
Exposition  to  be  held  in  McCormick  Place  October  9-16,  1963. 

Exhibit 

An  important  part  of  this  exposition  will  be  the  largest,  most 
comprehensive  exhibit  of  labor-saving  equipment,  new  and  im- 
proved materials  and  advanced  proven  innovations  in  maintenance 
practices. 

Complimentary  Bus  Service 

Frequent  free  bus  service  has  been  arranged  for  you  from  your 
hotel  headquarters  to  your  meeting  rooms  in  McCormick  Place. 

We  extend  a  most  cordial  invitation  to  your  entire  membership 
to  visit  our  extensive  exhibits  as  your  time  permits. 

G.  R.   BETTS 
President 


National  Railway  Appliances 
Association 

332  South  Michigan  Avenue 
Chicago  4,  Illinois 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF  THE 


SIXTY-SECOND  ANNUAL  CONVENTION 


OF  THE 


American  Railway  Engineering 
Association 

Engineering  Division,  Association  of  American  Railroads 

HELD  AT 

CONRAD  HILTON  HOTEL,  CHICAGO 

March  15  and  16,  1963 


VOLUME  64 


S71 


OFFICERS,  1962-1963 


C.  J.  Code 
President 

Asst.    Chief    Engr. 
Penn.    RR. 


-Staff 


L.  A.  Loggins 
Sr.   Vice  President 

Chief    Engr. 

S.    I'.    Co.,    Tex.   & 

La.    Lines 


T.  F.  Burris 
//'.   Vice  President 

Gen.   Mgr.,   Const.  & 

M.W..C.&0.  Ry.- 

B.&O.    RR. 


E.  J.  Brown 

Past  President 

Chief  Engr. 
Burlington    Lines 


R.  H.  Beeder 

Past  President 

Chief   Engr.   Sys. 

A.T.&S.F.   Ry. 


A.    B.    HlLLMAN 

Treasurer 

Ret.    Chief    Engr. 
C.&W.I.  RR. 


Neal  D.  Howard 
Executive  Secretary 


572 


DIRECTORS,  1962-1963 


C.  J.  Henry 

1960-63 

Chief  Engr. 

Penn.  RR. 


1ST 

J.   A.   BUNJER 

J0r50-<53 

Chief  Engr. 

Union  Pacific  RR. 


J.  M.  Trissal 

1960-63 

Vice  Pres.  &  Chief  Engr. 

111.  Cent.  RR. 


J.  H.  Brown 
1961-64 

\     i     ('.en.    Mgr.- 

East.  Lines 
St.    L.-S.    F.    Ry. 


W.  B.  Throck- 
morton 
1960-63 
Chief  Engr. 
C.R.I.&P.  RR. 


J.    E.    ElSEMANN 

1961-64 

Chief   Engr..   West. 

Lines 
A.  T.  &   S.   F.   Ry. 


W.  H.  Huffman 

F.  R.  Smith 

W.  L.  Young 

1961-64 

1961-64 

1962-65 

Asst.    Ch.    Engr. -Const. 

Chief  Engr. 

Chief    Engr. 

C.&N'.W.  Ry. 

Union.    RR. 

N.&W.   Ry. 

T.  B.  Hutchesoh 

1962-65 

Chief    Kngr. 
-   \  I      RR. 


C.   E.   Defendorf 

1962  65 

Chiii    Engr. 


J i  ii i\  A\  i.r,  Jr. 
1962  65 

Xu  i 
D.&R.G.W    RR. 


573 


NUMERICAL  INDEX  TO  COMMITTEE  REPORTS 


i — Roadway  and  Ballast Bu 

3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation Bu 

4 — Rail    Bu 

5— Track Bu 

6 — Buildings    Bu 

7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles Bu 

8 — Masonry Bu 

9 — Highways Bu 

n — Engineering  and  Valuation 

Records    Bu 

13 — Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation 

Services    Bu 

14 — Yards  and  Terminals Bu 

15 — Iron  and  Steel  Structures Bu 

16 — Economics  of  Railway  Location 

and  Operation Bu 

18 — Electricity    Bu 

20 — Contract  Forms   Bu 

22 — Economics  of  Railway  Labor Bu 

24 — Cooperative  Relations  with 

Universities    Bu 

25 — Waterways  and  Harbors Bu 

27 — Maintenance  of  Way  Work 

Equipment     Bu 

28 — Clearances    Bu 

30 — Impact  and  Bridge  Stresses Bu 

Special  Committee  on  Continuous 

Welded  Rail  Bui. 


Report 

577-  P 

575-  P 

577,  P 

577,  P 

574,  P 
576,  P 

575,  P 
574,  P 


543 

241 

497 
419 

213 

37i 
223 

131 


574,  P-  i39 
574,  P-  159 
576,  P-  359 

574,  p.  in 
576,  p.  407 
574,  p.  187 

575-  P-  263 

576,  P-  397 

574,  p.  i97 

575-  P.  305 

575,  P-  333 
575,  P.  327 


Bu 
Bu 
Bu 
Bu 
Bu 
Bu 
Bu 
Bu 


576,  p.  387       Bu 


Bu 
Bu 
Bu 

Bu 
Bu 

Bu 
Bu 

Bu 

Bu 

Bu 
Bu 
Bu 


Discussion 

•  579,  P-  675 

■  579,  P-  669 

•  579,  P-  690 

■  579,  P-  682 

•  579,  P-  636 

•  579,  P-  620 

•  579,  P-  623 
.  597,  p.  648 

•  579,  P.  592 

•  579,  P-  638 

•  579,  P-  601 

•  579,  P-  630 

.  579,  p.  606 

•  579,  P-  644 

■  579-  P-  590 

•  579,  P-  655 

•  579,  P-  613 

•  579,  P-  574 

■  579-  P-  664 

•  579,  P-  589 

•  579,  P-  626 


577,  p.  499   Bui.  579,  p.  694 


S74 


PROGRAM 

Sixty-Second  Annual  Meeting 

Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago 

March   15-16,   1963 

Friday,   March    15 

Waldorf    Room — 9:30    to    12:00 

Invocation — Dr.   Kenneth   Hildebrand,   Minister,   Central   Church   of   Chicago. 
Introductions. 

Greetings  from  the  National  Railway  Appliances  Association,  G.  R.  Betts,  President. 
Greetings  from  the  Combined  Railway  Suppliers  Exhibit,  J.  P.  Kleinkort,  President. 
President's  Address — C.  J.  Code,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer — Staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad. 
Report  of   Executive  Secretary — Xeal  D.  Howard. 

Report  of  Treasurer— A.  B.  Hillman,  Retired  Chief  Engineer,  Chicago  &  Western  Indiana 
and  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago. 

Bulletin 
Reports  of  Committees  Numbers 

28— Clearances   (10:05)    575 

11 — Engineering  and  Valuation   Records    (10:25)    576 

20— Contract   Forms    (10:40)     574 

25 — Waterways  and  Harbors   (10:55)    574 

14— Yards  and  Terminals  (11:10)    574 

16 — Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation   (11:35)    574 

Association    Luncheon,    Williford    Room — 12:00    Noon 
Announcement  of  results  of  election  of  officers. 


Waldorf    Room — 1:25    to    5:15 

Bulletin 
Reports  of  Committees  Numbers 

24 — Cooperative   Relations  with   Universities    ( 1 : 25)    576 

7— Wood   Bridges  and  Trestles   ( 1 : 50)    576 

8— Masonry    (2:10)     575 

30 — Impact  and   Bridge  Stresses   (2:30)    SIS 

15 — Iron   and   Steel   Structures    (2:46)    576 

S7S 


6— Buildings   (3:05)    574 

13— Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services   (3:17)    574 

18— Electricity    (3:48)    576 

9— Highways    (4:03)     574 

22 — Economics  of  Railway  Labor   (4:23)    575 

27 — Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment   (4:53)    575 


Saturday,   March    16 

Waldorf    Room — 9:00    to    12:00 

Bulletin 
Reports   of   Committees  Numbers 

3— Ties  and  Wood  Preservation   (9:00)    575 

1— Roadway  and   Ballast    (9:25)    577 

5— Track    (9:55)     577 

4— Rail    (10:30)     577 

Continuous  Welded  Rail   (10:50)    577 

Closing  Business 

Installation  of  Officers. 
Adjournment. 


576 


Nominating    Committee — 1963    Election 

Past  Presidents  Elected  Members 

Ray   McBrian,   Chairman  A.   L.   Sams 

Dir.  of  Research,  D.&R.G.VV.  RR.  Asst.   Chief   Engr.,  I.C.  RR. 

B.  R.  Meyers  J.  F.  Beaver 

Vice  Pres.  and  Chief  Engr.,  C.&N.W.  Ry.  Chief   Engr.,   Southern   Ry.   Sys 

F.  R.  VVoolford  B.   B.  Lewis 

Chief  Engr.  VV.P.  RR.  Prof,  of  Ry.  Engrg.,  Purdue  Univ. 

E.  J.  Brown  J.  J.  Schmidt 

Chief   Engr.,   Burl.   Lines  Asst.   Dir.  of   Research,   D.&R.G.W.  RR. 

R.  H.  Beeder  E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr. 

Chief  Engr.  Sys.,  A.T.&S.F.  Ry.  Wire  Crossing  Engr.  Sys.,  C.&.O.  Ry. 

The  foregoing  committee,  the  consist  of  which  includes  the  five  latest  living  past 
presidents  of  the  Association  and  five  elected  members  of  the  Association  who  are  not 
past  presidents,  formulated  their  official  slate  of  nominations  at  a  meeting  in  Chicago 
on  September  10,  1962,  which  nominations  were  presented  to  letter  ballot  vote  of  the 
membership  with  the  January-February   1963   issue  of  the  AREA  News. 


Report  of  the  Tellers 
March  15,  1963 

We,  the  Committee  of  Tellers,  appointed  to  canvas  the  ballots  for  officers  and 
for  members  of  the  Nominating  Committee,  find  the  count  of  ballots  as  follows: 

No.  of 
Votes 
For  President 

L.  A.  Loggins,  Chief  Engineer,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  Texas  and 
Louisiana  Lines,  Houston,  Tex 1,531 

For  Senior  Vice  President* 

T.  F.  Burris,  General  Manager,  Construction  and  Maintenance  of  Way, 
Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway  and  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  Hunting- 
ton, W.  Va. 

For   junior  Vice  President 

A.  V.  Johnston,  Chief  Engineer,  Canadian  National  Railways,  Montreal, 
Que.,    Can 1,516 

lor   Directors  (first  four  men  elected) 

A.  L.  Sams,  Assistant  Chief  Engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago  .  .     867 
J.    F.    Beaver,    Chief    Engineer,    Southern    Railway    System,    Washington, 

D.  C 845 

V.  C.  Hanna,  Chief  Engineer,  Terminal   Railroad  Association  of  St.  Louis, 

St.  Louis,  Mo 836 

577 


No.  of 
Votes 
H.    M.    Williamson,    Chief   Engineer   System,    Southern    Pacific   Company, 
San   Francisco,    Calif 810 

B.  B.  Lewis,  Professor  of  Railway  Engineering,  Purdue  University,  Lafay- 
ette, Ind 801 

D.  T.  Faries,  Chief  Engineer,  Bessemer  &  Lake  Erie  Railroad,  Greenville, 

Pa 662 

S.   E.   Tracy,  Superintendent  of  Work  Equipment,  Chicago,  Burlington  & 

Quincy  Railroad,  Chicago    637 

A.  S.  Krefting,  Chief  Engineer,  Soo  Line  Railroad,  Minneapolis,  Minn.   .  .     584 

For  Members  of  Nominating  Committee  (first  five  men  elected) 

J.    S.    Parsons,    Chief    Engineer,    Erie-Lackawanna    Railroad,    Cleveland, 

Ohio   1,045 

V.  E.  Glosup,  Assistant  Vice  President— Chief  Engineer,  Chicago,  Milwau- 
kee, St.  Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chicago   885 

W.  A.  Oliver,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering,  University  of  Illinois,  Urbana, 
111 879 

E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr.,  Wire  Crossing  Engineer  System,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio 
Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va 850 

F.  N.    Beighley,    Roadway    Engineer,    St.    Louis-San    Francisco    Railway, 
Springfield,   Mo 780 

C.  E.  R.  Haight,  Chief  Engineer,  Delaware  &  Hudson  Railroad  Corpora- 
tion, Albany,  N.  Y 774 

D.  V.   Messman,   Assistant   to   Chief   Engineer,   Southern   Railway   System, 
Washington,   D.   C 695 

E.  C.  Harris,  Engineer  of  Tests,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  St.  Louis,  Mo..     682 
M.    C.    Wolf,    Valuation    Engineer,    Northern    Pacific    Railway,    St.    Paul, 

Minn 535 

L.  W.  Howard,  Land  and  Tax  Commissioner,  Belt  Railway  Company  of 
Chicago,    Chicago    364 

0  Under   the   provisions   of   the  Constitution,   T.   F.    Burris   advances   automatically   from   junioi 
vice    president    to    senior    vice    president. 

The  Committee  of  Tellers, 
J.  E.  Wiggins,  Jr.,  Chairman. 
Office  Engr.,  Southern  Ry.  Sys. 

R.  A.  Bard  well  H.  E.  Graham  R.  W.  Middleton 

H.  Beckmann  V.  E.  Hall  D.  J.  Moody 

D.  A.  Bessey  W.  R.  Hyma  C.  Muelder 

J.  E.  Beran  J.  E.  Inman  W.  J.  Murdock 

F.  Brandon  F.  M.  Jones  R.  E.  Pearson 

T.  W.  Brown  T.  D.  Kern  H.  L.  Read 

J.  Budztleni  R.  A.  Mather  D.  C.  Teal 

L.  A.  Cerrone  C.  A.  Meadows  W.  S.  Tuinstra 


578 


Proceedings 


Running   Report   of   the   62nd   Business   Meeting  of  the   American 
Railway   Engineering  Association    (Engineering   Division,   Asso- 
ciation   of    American    Railroads),    March    15-16,    1963,    Conrad 
Hilton   Hotel,   Chicago,   Including  Abstracts  of  All   Discus- 
sions,   All    Formal    Action    on    Committee    Presentations, 
Specific  Papers  and  Addresses  Presented  in  Connection 
with  Committee  Reports,  and  Other  Official  Business 
of  the  Association 

Opening    Session,    March    15,     1963 
President  C.  J.  Code*,  Presiding 

The  opening  session  of  the  62nd  Business  Meeting  convened  at  9:30  am. 

\Y.  M.  Keller  (vice  president — research,  AAR) :  Mr.  Chairman,  may  I  have  the 
privilege  of  the  floor? 

Gentlemen,  pood  morning.  I  have  the  happy  privilege  of  performing  a  little  cere- 
mony, and  I  want  to  describe  it  to  you.  E.  J.  Brown,  one  of  your  past  presidents, 
expressed  the  thought  that  it  would  be  nice  if  President  Code,  in  addition  to  all  of  the 
gavels  that  he  possesses  from  his  various  activities  over  the  years,  had  one  more,  and 
suggested  that  Mr.  Code's  friends  on  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  and  at  the  AAR  Re- 
search Center,  with  whom  he  has  collaborated  so  effectively  on  many  research  projects, 
might  like  to  give  him  one. 

In  thinking  this  over,  we  decided  that  Mr.  Brown  had  made  a  good  suggestion. 
Is  Mimetimes  happens,  however,  the  fellow  that  does  the  suggesting  does  the  work. 
His  tie  man,  C.  S.  Morton  [superintendent  of  timber  preservation,  Galesburg,  111.],  fur- 
nished us  with  a  piece  of  a  walnut  tie,  from  which  we  made  the  head  of  the  gavel. 
When  it  came  to  making  the  handle,  we  found  that  the  piece  of  walnut  wasn't  long 
enough ;  so  we  got  a  piece  of  Permali  from  Randon  Ferguson  at  the  AAR  Research 
Center  from  which  we  formed  the  handle.  This  is  a  laminated  resin-impregnated  wood 
ire  tested  for  use  as  material  for  insulated  rail  joints.  Hence,  the  gavel  symbolizes  both 
a   railroad  tie  and   an  insulated   rail  joint. 

This  is  a  pretty  husky  gavel,  so  if  President  Code  needs  to  get  order  he  can  cer- 
tainly gel  it  with  this.  He  can  develop  a  lot  of  foot-pounds  of  energy  when  he  throws  it 
around   in   an   arc. 

Mr.  Code,  it  gives  me  gnat  pleasure  to  present  to  you  this  gavel.  We  hope  you 
will   have  much   pleasure   in   using   it.    [Applause] 

Prksident  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Keller.  I  can't  tell  you  how  much  I  appreciate 
the  thought  and  effort  that  went  into  the  preparation  of  this  emblem  and  instrument 
of  office.  As  you  well  know,  the  officers  and  men  of  the  Research  Department  occupy 
a  warm  place  in  my  heart.  Their  cooperation  and  assistance  over  the  past  years  have 
been  most  helpful  and  inspiring.  The  same  can  be  said  for  my  friends  on  the  Penn- 
sylvania  Railroad,   where   I   first    made  your  acquaintance 


1  Assistant    Chief    Engineer — Staff,    Pennsylvania    Railroad,    Philadelphia,     Pa. 

S79 


580  Opening   Session 


That  the  head  of  the  gavel  was  made  from  a  Burlington  tie  is  also  most  appropriate 
since,  as  some  of  you  know,  my  father  spent  a  considerable  part  of  his  railroad  career 
on  the  Burlington.  Thanks  again.  I  shall  be  pleased  to  open  the  meeting  with  this  gavel. 

Gentlemen,  will  the  meeting  please  come  to  order.  [One  rap  with  the  gavel]  No 
matter  what  this  meeting  may  have  been  called  as  plans  for  it  have  been  changed  dur- 
ing the  past  year — annual  meeting,  business  meeting,  restricted  meeting,  executive  session, 
convention,  and  so  on — in  the  AREA  News,  and  by  you,  this  is,  for  the  record,  the 
constitutional  Sixty-Second  Annual  Convention  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering 
Association  and  concurrent  Annual  Meeting  of  the  Engineering  Division,  Association 
of  American  Railroads.  Accordingly,  I  declare  the  meeting  officially  opened  for  the 
transaction   of  Association  business. 

While  this  convention  will  be  curtailed  in  many  respects  as  compared  to  our  tradi- 
tional conventions,  one  thing  we  don't  want  to  omit  or  curtail  is  our  usual  practice 
of  beginning  our  convention  with  an  invocation.  We  have  invited  Dr.  Kenneth  Hilde- 
brandt,  minister  of  the  Central  Church  of  Chicago,  which  holds  regular  Sunday  morning 
services  in  the  Towers  of  this  hotel,  to  bring  this  invocation.  Dr.  Hildebrandt. 

Invocation 

Reverend  Kenneth  Hildebrandt:  Will  you  stand,  please.  Let  us  unite  our  hearts 
in  prayer. 

O  Lord  our  Lord,  how  excellent  is  Thy  Name  in  all  the  earth.  Before  the  moun- 
tains were  brought  forth  or  ever  Thou  hadst  formed  the  earth  and  the  world,  even 
from  everlasting  to  everlasting  Thou  Art  God. 

And  yet  Thou  art  as  near  as  our  deepest  need.  Therefore  we  turn  to  Thee  in 
quietness  and  new  confidence  at  the  beginning  of  these  sessions,  invoking  Thy  presence 
and  offering  Thee  our  praise. 

We  are  met  in  strangely  tangled  times,  O  God,  and  we  need  a  wisdom  beyond  our 
own.  We  who  gather  here  are  used  to  planning,  to  projection,  to  thinking  things 
through,  and  yet  our  own  thought  and  planning  can  take  us  only  so  far.  Therefore, 
we  ask  that  light,  that  guidance,  which  comes  only  from  Thee,  that  it  may  illumine 
our  minds  and  motivate  our  spirits  and  raise  our  sights  and  give  us  hope. 

Let  us  do  those  things  needful  in  these  sessions,  that  Thy  larger  purpose  may  be 
fulfilled,  that  purpose  under  which  all  men  live  and  labor,  that  tests  our  work,  whether 
it  be  enduring  or  as  the  chaff  which  the  wind  driveth  away.  Keep  us  ever  aware  of  our 
larger  opportunities  and  obligations;  and  if  we  feel  that  in  these  days  of  tension  we  are 
under  too  much  pressure,  let  us  remember  that  it  is  pressure  that  produces  the  diamond. 
So  may  it  be  for  our  leadership  and  our  work. 

To  Thee,  O  God,  be  the  glory  and  majesty,  dominion  and  praise,  both  now  and 
forever  more.  Amen. 


President  Code:  Thank  you,  Dr.  Hildebrandt.  We  appreciate  your  very  meaningful 
and  appropriate  invocation.  Through  your  ministry  and  your  having  met  before  with 
railroad  groups  on  a  number  of  occasions,  you  are  not  unknown  to  many  of  us;  but 
this,  I  believe,  is  the  first  time  you  have  met  with  our  Association.  We  appreciate  your 
coming,  and  hope  that  we  may  have  the  pleasure  of  your  meeting  with  us  on  another 
occasion. 


Address   of   President    Code 581 

While  it  is  hardly  necessary,  I  would  like  to  present  to  you  those  here  with  me  at 
the  speaker's  table.  Here  again,  as  at  last  year's  meeting,  we  have  "cut  corners."  Instead 
of  being  flanked  by  all  of  our  officers  and  directors,  past  presidents,  and  a  number  of 
special  guests,  as  has  been  our  usual  custom,  there  are  here  with  me  today  only  one 
vice  president,  your  executive  secretary  and  your  treasurer. 

First,  I  would  like  to  present  your  senior  vice  president,  L.  A.  Loggins,  chief 
engineer,   Southern   Pacific   Company,   Texas   &   Louisiana   Lines.    [Applause] 

Next,  I  had  hoped  to  introduce  your  junior  vice  president,  T.  Fred  Burris,  until 
recently  chief  engineer,  system,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  and  now  general  manager, 
construction  and  maintenance  of  way,  C&O-B&O.  Mr.  Burris  is  tied  up  with  floods  on 
his  railroad.  He  called  me  on  the  phone  yesterday  afternoon  and  told  me  he  has  about 
300  miles  of  railroad  either  washed  out  or  in  the  river,  1  train  and  17  cars  in  the  water, 
and  the  worst  flood  condition  he  has  ever  seen.  He  said  he  hoped  he  could  get  here 
Saturday  morning  but  that  it  was  doubtful.  I  am  sure  all  of  us  are  sorry  Fred  can't 
be  with  us. 

Next,   your   executive   secretary,   Neal   Howard.    [Applause] 

Your  treasurer,  A.  B.  Hillman,  retired  chief  engineer,  Chicago  &  Western  Indiana 
Railroad  and  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago.   [Applause] 

I  am  sure  I  will  have  occasion  to  call  on  all  of  these  men  for  reports  and  assistance 
throughout  our  meeting. 

In  limiting  the  number  here  with  me  this  morning  at  the  speaker's  table,  I  would 
not  have  you  feel  that  we  will  completely  overlook  members  of  our  Board  of  Direction 
and  those  of  our  past  presidents  who  can  be  with  us  at  this  convention.  Along  with 
several  special  guests,  they  will  all  be  at  the  main  speaker's  table  at  our  General  Lunch- 
eon this  noon,  when  I  will  have  the  pleasure  of  presenting  them  to  you.  Incidentally, 
if  you  have  not  already  purchased  your  tickets  for  this  luncheon,  may  I  ask  that  you 
excuse  yourself  from  the  room  and  do  so  without  further  delay.  The  chairman  of  our 
Luncheon  Committee  tells  me  that  he  has  to  make  a  firm  commitment  to  the  catering 
department  by   10  o'clock. 

The  first  item  of  official  business  on  our  program  is  approval  of  the  minutes  of 
our  1962  Annual  Convention,  which  were  published  in  the  June-July  Proceedings  Issue 
of  the  AREA  Bulletin,  No.  572 — a  copy  of  which  was  furnished  to  each  member.  Unless 
I  hear  some  objection  or  correction  to  these  minutes,  we  will  dispense  with  the  reading 
of  the  220  pages  contained  in  them. 

Hearing  no  objections  or  corrections,  I  declare  the  minutes  of  the  1962  Annual 
Convention  of  our  Association  approved  as  presented  in  the  Proceedings. 

Address  of  President  C.  J.  Code 

It  is  my  somewhat  doubtful  privilege  this  year  to  preside  over  a  different  type  of 
annual  meeting  of  our  Association,  different  in  many  respects  from  the  traditional  type 
of  AREA  convention,  and  different  in  some  respects  from  the  restricted  meeting  we 
held  in  1962.  For  various  reasons  that  meeting  was  curtailed  in  length  and  in  attendance. 
For  slightly  different  reasons,  this  meeting  is  also  curtailed  in  length,  in  attendance, 
in  type  of  program,  and  in  some  of  those  supplementary  sources  of  enjoyment  which 
have  been   traditional  in  connection  with   our  conventions. 

However,  in  this  case,  the  features  customarily  expected  in  connection  with  our 
annual  convention  are  being  postponed  rather  than  eliminated.  We  are,  in  effect,  carry- 
ing signals  today  for  the  full-scale  membership  meeting  which  will  be  held  in  October 


582  Opening   Session 


in  connection  with  the  1963  American  Railway  Progress  Exposition.  We  are  running  in 
two  sections.  This  is  the  advance  section  at  which  the  important  and  necessary  business 
of  the  Association  will  be  accomplished;  the  second  section  in  October  will  carry  the 
special  features  which  we  have  all  learned  to  look  forward  to,  the  social  features  and 
entertainment,  and  the  glamor  which  will  be  missing  to  a  large  extent  from  our  meetings 
today  and  tomorrow.  We  are  carrying  the  mail  and  the  coaches.  The  diner,  the  private 
room  cars,  and  the  club  car  will  follow  on  the  second  section. 

I  will  probably  go  down  in  history  as  the  first,  and  I  hope  the  only,  president  of 
the  AREA  who  ever  invited  the  supply  men,  other  than  those  having  important  business 
to  transact,  to  stay  away  from  our  meeting.  This  was  done  for  the  sole  purpose  of 
keeping  total  attendance  down  to  the  point  where  it  would  not  be  the  subject  of  criticism, 
while  permitting  the  fullest  possible  attendance  of  those  who  are  vitally  concerned  with 
the  business  to  be  transacted. 

As  most  of  you  know,  consideration  was  given  to  postponing  our  entire  meeting 
until  October  1963 ;  however,  unless  we  were  to  make  a  permanent  change  to  October 
meeting  dates,  such  a  procedure  would  have  made  a  hopeless  scramble  of  the  scheduling 
of  committee  operations  and  publication  of  reports  and  Bulletins,  and  would  have 
extended  the  term  of  one  president  to  one-and-one-half  years,  while  limiting  the  term 
of  the  next  to  six  months.  Many  of  us  think  that  a  permanent  change  to  fall  meeting 
dates  would  be  inadvisable.  Hence,  all  things  having  been  considered,  we  arrived  at  the 
present  plan  of  running,  so  to  speak,  in  two  sections.  An  even  more  restricted  type 
of  business  meeting  was  suggested  but  rejected. 

I  am  pleased  and  proud  to  say,  that  despite  the  interruption  of  the  normal  course 
of  our  conventions  for  two  successive  years,  committee  work  has  continued  on  schedule. 
While  there  have  been  a  few  less  meetings  than  in  previous  years,  a  sign,  no  doubt  of 
the  straitened  economic  circumstances  of  many  railroads,  the  enthusiasm  of  the  com- 
mittees has  shown  no  sign  of  slackening,  and  our  committees  continue  to  put  out  a 
volume  and  quality  of  progress  and  final  reports,  of  information,  and  of  Manual 
material  of  which  we  can  all  be  proud. 

The  mark  which  we  leave  on  history  as  an  Association  will  largely  be  the  printed 
word.  The  Association  also  leaves  its  mark  on  men's  minds,  and  on  their  hearts,  but 
men  pass  on  and  the  printed  word  remains. 

My  first  acquaintance  with  the  AREA  was  in  a  study  of  its  Proceedings  for  the 
purpose  of  preparing  a  college  seminar  paper.  A  review  of  10  years  of  the  work  of  one 
subcommittee  was  a  liberal  education  in  the  subject  I  had  chosen  and  has  been  of  value 
to  me  in  later  years.  I  have  since  had  many  occasions  to  direct  younger  men  to  this 
same  source  of  almost  unlimited  information.  No  railroad  engineering  library  is  complete 
without  a  full  set  of  AREA  proceedings,  and  I  know  of  no  more  important  reference 
work.  The  duty  and  obligation  of  maintaining  this  source  of  information  complete  and 
up  to  date  in  the  face  of  a  rapidly  changing  industry  falls  on  our  committees.  The  more 
than  1100  men  who  serve  on  these  committees  are  the  bones  and  muscles  and  the  brains 
of  this  association,  and  I  know  of  no  group  of  men  that  is  more  important  to  the  rail- 
road industry.  Committee  members,  and  committee  chairman  in  particular,  I  salute  you, 
and  urge  you  to  continue  to  carry  on  the  traditions  of  more  than  60  years,  as  you 
have  done  this  year,  annual  meeting  or  no  annual  meeting. 

Again  with  respect  to  annual  meetings,  or  conventions,  the  future  looks  brighter 
than  the  present.  There  seems  to  be  every  assurance  of  a  full  iy2  day  meeting  in  1964 
and  a  full  2|J^  day  meeting  with  an  exhibit  in  1965. 


Report    of   Executive   Secretary 583 

A  few  words  more  about  our  sessions  today  and  tomorrow.  I  have  made  a  strenu- 
ous, and  I  hope  successful,  effort  to  generate  some  discussion  from  the  floor  in  con- 
niption with  committee  reports.  My  fear  now  is  that  we  may  lack  time  for  all  the 
discussion  that  may  be  offered.  Nevertheless,  whether  you  have  been  specifically  re- 
quested to  present  some  discussion  or  not,  please  feel  free  to  ask  questions  or  to  com- 
ment at  the  proper  time  to  the  fullest  extent  that  the  schedule  permits. 


President  Code  [continuing] :  The  next  order  of  official  business  of  this  meeting 
is  the  report  of  our  executive  secretary,  Neal  Howard.  Mr.  Howard,  we  shall  be 
pleased   to  hear  your  report  at  this  time. 

Report    of    Executive    Secretary- 
Mr.   President,    members    of    the    American    Railway    Engineering   Association,    and 
guests: 

The  report  of  your  secretary  was  completed  more  than  a  month  ago,  with  the 
completion  of  membership  figures  and  other  data  as  of  February  1,  in  accordance  with 
past  practice,  and  as  a  whole,  covering  19  pages,  appears  in  the  March  Year-Book  Bul- 
letin of  the  Association,  which  was  mailed  to  members  at  the  earliest  possible  date,  early 
during  the  current  week.  Presumably,  few  of  you  have  received  your  copies,  and  thus 
have  not  seen  the  report,  but  I  have  a  copy  before  me  and  I  would  like  to  take  a  few 
minutes  to  highlight  some  of  the  secretary's  report. 

As  a  whole  the  report  covers,  in  quite  some  detail,  for  the  record,  all  aspects  of 
Association  activity   during   1962,  and  comments  on   the  prospects  for  the  year  ahead. 

It  says  that  in  all  respects,  except  one,  the  state  of  your  Association  at  the  close 
of  1962 — its  64th  year — was  good.  But  having  said  that,  it  would  be  less  than  honest 
not  to  say  that,  with  better  economic  conditions  generally,  and  especially  in  the  railroad 
industry,  things  could  have  been  better.  The  one  exception,  and  it  is  an  important  one, 
\ssociation  membership,  which  was  down  appreciably  for  the  second  successive 
year.  To  me,  this  is  so  important  that  I  want  to  comment  on  it  a  little  later  in  more 
detail. 

That  the  Association  had  a  good  year  generally  in  1962  is  documented  throughout 
the  report.  Membership,  although  down,  remains  relatively  high;  the  activities  and 
production  of  committees,  even  without  the  desired  financial  support  for  research  activi- 
ties, continued  at  a  high  level;  the  Association's  service  to  members  was  in  no  way 
reduced,  and  its  cooperation  with  other  groups  and  with  the  colleges  was  actually 
expanded;  and  even  though  the  Association  had  a  deficit  year  financially — to  achieve 
certain  desirable  ends — as  will  be  reported  to  you  by  your  treasurer,  its  total  assets 
remain  relatively  hi^h.  Most  important,  as  the  year  ended,  the  interest  of  committees 
and  the  membership  generally  remained  high  ;  the  Association  was  looking  forward  to 
two  important  meetings  in  1963 — this  one,  and  its  participation,  in  October,  in  the 
American  Railway  Progress  Exposition;  and  as  President  Code  has  just  told  you,  your 
Board  has  made  firm  plans  for  a  2^-day  convention  in  March  1964,  to  be  held  at  the 
Pick-Congress  Hotel,  Chicago,  and  for  another  2IX-day  convention  in  1965 — we  hope 
at  McCormick  Place.  Chicago,  accompanied  by  an  exhibit  of  the  National  Railway 
\|>pliances    Association. 

So.  the  Association  did  have  a  good  year  in  1962,  anil  i-  planning  ahead  in  a  big 
way,  but  as  I  stated  earlier,  then-  wa>  one  exception  to  the  generally  favorable  record 
of  1962 — a  drop  in  membership — which  must  be  dealt  with  in  the  year  ahead. 


584  Opening   Session 


For  several  years  your  secretary,  along  with  many  others,  I  am  sure,  has  been 
concerned  about  the  future  growth  of  the  Association — even  sustaining  the  current  mem- 
bership level.  What  has  happened  during  the  last  two  years  has  proved  that  concern 
was  justified.  After  an  unbroken  record  of  growth  in  membership  from  1944  through 
1957 — a  total  of  14  years — the  membership  of  the  Association  has  slipped  backward  in 
three  of  the  last  five  years — 1958,  1961,  and  1962 — and  might  have  slipped  backward 
in  the  other  two  years  had  losses  in  these  two  years  not  been  overcome  by  special 
circumstances  or  by  special  recruiting  effort  on  the  part  of  a  number  of  our  members 
on    their   respective    railroads. 

As  of  February  1,  1963,  the  total  membership  of  the  Association  stood  at  3261 — 
a  net  loss  of  86  members — compared  with  the  membership  of  3347  one  year  earlier, 
and  a  net  loss  of  146  from  the  membership  total  two  years  earlier.  This  net  loss  of 
membership  during  the  past  two  years  has  resulted  primarily  from  the  enrollment  of 
too  few  new  members,  in  conjunction  with  increased  losses  through  deaths,  resignations, 
and  being  dropped  for  non-payment  of  dues.  During  1962,  for  example,  the  Association 
took  in  only  153  new  members,  while  losing  263  members  through  various  causes. 

Obviously,  this  trend  must  not  continue.  The  maintenance  of  a  high  level  of  mem- 
bership is  essential  to  the  well  being  of  the  Association  and  to  the  contribution  which 
it  can  make  to  supervisory  officers  in  the  engineering  and  maintenance  of  way  depart- 
ment, and  to  the  railroad  industry.  The  only  alternative  to  the  maintenance  of  the  past 
high  level  of  membership  is  reduced  member  services  to  hold  down  costs,  or  higher 
annual  dues — neither  of  which  would  be  desirable. 

With  the  reduction  taking  place  in  the  total  number  of  technically  trained  employees 
in  the  engineering  and  maintenance  of  way  departments  of  the  railroads — a  trend  which 
can  be  expected  to  continue  with  further  increased  technology,  and  railroad  reorganiza- 
tions and  consolidations,  the  answer  to  the  Association's  membership  maintenance  prob- 
lem undoubtedly  lies  in  the  enrollment  of  a  larger  percentage  of  the  remaining  engineering 
and  maintenance  of  way  department  personnel,  both  old  employees  and  new  employees. 
This  solution  can  and  should  have  the  enthusiastic  endorsement  of  all  members  of  the 
Association,  and  of  their  railroads,  because  it  is  to  the  benefit  of  all  concerned. 

That  this  solution  offers  a  fertile  field  is  indicated  in  the  fact  that  Association 
memberships  on  many  railroads  represent  a  relatively  small  percentage  of  the  total 
number  of  supervisory  employees  in  their  engineering  and  maintenance  departments 
who  are  eligible  for  membership.  It  is  also  evident  in  the  fact  that  many  who  do  apply 
for  membership  do  not  do  so  until  they  have  accumulated  far  beyond  the  number  of 
years  of  experience  required  to  entitle  them  to  membership. 

In  this  connection,  I  would  remind  you  that  full  membership  in  the  Association  is 
available  to  railway  officers  and  engineering  and  maintenance-of-way  employees  who 
have  had  anything  more  than  five  years'  experience  in  location,  construction,  operation 
or  maintenance  (an  engineering  degree  counting  for  three  of  these  years),  and  that  every 
young  college  graduate  taken  on  by  your  railroad  in  its  engineering  department  is  imme- 
diately eligible  for  the  grade  of  junior  member — without  entrance  fee,  and  at  dues  of 
only  $5  a  year.  Furthermore,  junior  membership  may  be  had  or  retained  until  the  end 
of  the  year  in  which  a  man  becomes  30  years  of  age. 

Please  make  these  facts  known  on  your  respective  railroads  and  disabuse  any  of 
your  associates  of  the  thought  that  they  must  have  a  "special  invitation"  to  acquire 
membership.  It  is  true  that,  at  our  highest  level,  we  are  a  specification-writing  Associa- 
tion, which  requires  members  of  wide  knowledge  and  experience,  but  we  are  also  an 
Association  which   develops  younger  men  into  specification  writers.  Thus,  the  Associa- 


Report    of   Treasurer  585 


tion  has  a  place  in  its  membership  for  men  of  proper  caliber  anywhere  along  the  line 
in  their  railroad  careers — from  assistant  on  tht-  engineering  corps,  on  up. 

The  essential  high  level  of  Association  membership  in  the  future  can  be  obtained 
if  these  facts  are  made  known — and  if  we  can  secure  a  higher  degree  of  membership 
saturation  on  many  railroads.  This,  I  contend  can  be  secured,  to  the  benefit  of  all  con- 
cerned, by  interested  effort  on  the  part  of  the  present  membership,  and  especially  those 
in  higher  supervisory  capacity.  It  was  done  before — in  the  Golden  Jubilee  Year  of  the 
Association  between  February  1,  1948,  and  February  1,  1949,  when  through  the  con- 
certed effort  of  its  officers  and  members,  802  new  members  were  enrolled,  putting  the 
Association  on  the  solid  basis  it  has  retained  to  this  date.  It  can  be  done  again  in  1963, 
at  least  to  the  extent  of  recouping  the  membership  losses  of  the  past  two  years,  and 
of  offsetting  the  inevitable  losses  that  will  occur  during  the  year  due  to  deaths  and 
other  causes. 

If  this  is  done,  and  if  the  Association  can  continue  to  merit  the  continued  encourage- 
ment of  railroad  managements  that  it  has  had  for  many  years  in  the  past,  its  future 
will  be  secure — with  a  continued  high  level  of  service  to  its  members  and  to  the  rail- 
road industry — and  I  might  add  that  membership  application  forms  are  available  to  you, 
in  any  number  desired,  at  the  secretary's  desk  out  in  the  corridor.  Thank  you.  [Applause] 


President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Howard.  We  are  glad  that  your  report  of  Asso- 
ciation activities  during  the  past  year  is  so  generally  favorable,  because  we  are  all  aware 
that  this  has  been  another  year  of  considerable  stress  on  many  of  our  members  and  some 
restriction  on  our  activities.  I  share  your  concern  with  the  further  loss  in  membership 
during  the  year,  if  only  because  we,  as  an  Association,  cannot  do  the  most  good  for  the 
railroads  unless  there  is  the  greatest  possible  saturation  of  membership  among  those  on 
the  railroads  qualified  for  membership — and  I  am  sure  that  situation  does  not  prevail. 

Without  sustained  membership,  too,  we  would  not  long  have  the  necessary  funds 
to  continue  all  of  our  present  services  to  members — which  would  be  most  unfortunate. 
Unquestionably,  this  matter  will  be  given  top  priority  by  our  new  Board  of  Direction 
in  the  year  ahead.  Thank  you  again  for  your  report. 

The  next  order  of  business  is  the  report  of  our  treasurer,  A.  B.  Hillman,  retired 
chief  engineer,  Chicago  &  Western  Indiana  and  Belt  Railway  of  Chicago.  Mr.  Hillman. 
we  will  be  pleased  to  hear  your   report  at  this  time. 

Report  of  Treasurer 

Mr.  President,  members  and  guests:  I  will  not  attempt  to  detail  the  various  items 
of  receipts  and  disbursements  of  the  Association  during  1962,  suffice  it  to  say  that  they 
are  all  set  forth  in  the  financial  statement  for  the  year,  which  appears  in  the  March 
Bulletin,  and  have  all  been  vouched  for  by  our  Association's  auditors.  However,  I  would 
like  to  comment  briefly  on  the  finances  of  the  Association  for  the  past  year,  and  on  the 
prospect    for   the  year  ahead. 

Last  year  at  this  time  I  said  that  the  year  ahead  presented  a  difficult  financial  prob- 
lem flue  to  the  necessity  of  reprinting  the  Manual  in  its  entirety  in  order  to  replenish 
a  depleted  stock  on  hand,  and  at  the  same  time  the  issuance  oi  i  large  Supplement  to 
the  Manual,  even  larger  than  the  large  Supplemenl  published  in  1961.  In  fact,  it  was 
estimated  at  that  time  that  the  Association  would  incur  a  deficit  of  some  $13,000  in 
1962.  I  also  stated  that  if  the  then  anticipated  extensive  Supplement  to  the  Portfolio 
of  Trackwork   Plans  should   become  a   reality   in    1962     and   it    did    -then   the  anticipated 

deficit  would  be  considerably  larger, 


586  O p e n i ng   Session 


Now  I  am  happy  to  say,  if  one  can  be  happy  in  reporting  a  deficit,  that  through 
a  fortunate  series  of  circumstances,  such  as  extensive  drafting  assistance  made  available 
b)  three  railroads  and  two  trackwork  manufacturers,  which  materially  lessened  the  cost 
oi  completing  the  Track  Plan  Supplement,  sharp  printshop  economies,  and  most  im- 
portant, an  immediate  demand  by  non-member  holders  of  both  the  Portfolio  and  the 
Manual  for  the  large  1962  Supplements — with  subsequent  higher  revenues  to  the  Asso- 
ciation than  expected — the  1962  deficit  was  appreciably  less  than  anticipated,  and 
amounted  to  $11,246.84.  This  is  by  no  means  a  small  deficit,  but  under  less  favorable 
circumstances  it  could  well  have  been  some  $15,000  to  $16,000. 

While  this  deficit  was  brought  about  largely  by  unusually  heavy  publication  costs 
as  explained,  it  was  also  influenced  by  some  $3000  lower  receipts  due  primarily  to  the 
smaller  total  1962  convention  registration  fees  of  $1197,  compared  to  a  total  of  $4469 
collected  at  our  full  2J^-day  convention  in  1961 ;  also  by  some  $760  smaller  receipts 
in  our  membership  account.  To  the  extent  that  these  lower  receipts  reflect  less  member 
interest,  fewer  applications  for  membership,  and  a  smaller  number  of  dues-paying  mem- 
bers in  1962,  this  is  an  unhealthy  situation,  as  pointed  out  by  your  secretary. 

But,  thanks  to  the  large  build-up  in  inventory  of  saleable  publications  on  hand 
as  the  result  of  the  reprinting  of  the  Manual  during  the  year,  I  hasten  to  add  that  as 
of  the  end  of  1962  the  total  assets  of  the  Association  were  only  some  $2000  under  those 
of  a  year  earlier,  and  that  the  Association  is  in  a  sound  financial  condition. 

As  for  1963,  your  Board  of  Direction  has  approved  a  balanced  budget  by  curtailing 
some  expenditures  and  deferring  others,  but  I  would  point  out  at  the  same  time  that 
this  desirable  situation  contemplates  a  continued  heavy  demand  for  the  publications 
of  the  Association,  at  least  the  continuation  of  our  present  level  of  membership,  and 
continuing  interest  in  and  support  of  the  activities  of  the  Association  by  the  American 
railroads.  To  the  extent  that  each  of  you  can  in  any  way  influence  favorably  these  three 
important  factors,  your  fullest  cooperation  is  earnestly  solicited.    [Applause] 


President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hillman.  We  are  not  unaware  that  this  is  the 
eleventh  year  that  you  have  served  as  our  treasurer,  and  we  are  deeply  appreciative 
of  this  long  service.  I  am  sorry  you  had  to  report  a  substantial  deficit  during  my  year 
as  president,  but  I  am  sure  this  was  to  be  expected  in  a  year  of  exceptionally  high 
publications  costs  to  update  our  Manual  and  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans,  and  to 
replenish  our  stock  of  these  publications  for  future  sales. 

We  are  pleased  to  hear  that  the  prospects  are  for  a  balanced,  or  near-balanced, 
budget  in  the  year  ahead — which  would  appear  to  be  a  real  possibility  if  we  can  sustain 
our  membership.  Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Hillman. 

Gentlemen,  you  have  heard  the  reports  of  our  secretary  and  our  treasurer.  I  shall 
be  glad  to  entertain  a  motion  that  these  reports  be  accepted. 

[A  motion  that  the  reports  be  accepted  was  made,  was  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote, 
and  carried.] 

President  Code:  The  keynote  of  our  meeting  this  year  is  "Business" — the  official 
business  winding  up  our  Association  year.  It  being  unnecessary  for  anyone  to  elaborate 
on  or  stress  this,  other  than  your  officers,  we  have  no  keynote  speaker  for  this  meeting; 
but  there  are  two  men  in  our  audience  this  morning  whom  I  do  want  to  present  and 
give  an  opportunity  to  bring  us  a  few  words  of  greetings  from  their  respective  Asso- 
ciations. I  refer  to  G.  R.  Betts,  president  of  the  National  Railway  Appliances  Associa- 
tion, and  to  J.  P.   Kleinkort,   chairman  of  the  recently  organized  Combined  Railway 


Greetings   from    Supply   Associations 587 

Suppliers   Exhibit,    which    will   sponsor   the    exhibit   aspects    of   the   American    Railway 
Progress  Exposition   this   fall. 

Mr.  Betts,  if  you  will  come  to  the  microphone,  we  would  be  pleased  to  hear  a 
lew  words  from  you. 

Greetings  from  NRAA 

G.  R.  Betts:   President   Code,  directors  of  AREA  and  members: 

It  is  certainly  a  pleasure  to  represent  the  National  Railway  Appliances  Association 
and  its  156  members,  and  to  wish  you  well  in  your  deliberations  that  will  be  held  in 
the  next  day  and  a  half.  It  is  always  a  pleasant  duty  to  be  with  you  and  get  better 
acquainted. 

While  this  is  an  abbreviated  meeting,  I  am  sure  you  can  accomplish  a  great  deal 
in  a  short  space  of  time;  and  I  say  that  partly  because,  from  my  own  observation, 
railroad  men  have  uncanny  ability  to  reduce  their  communications  to  an  absolute  mini- 
mum. So,  if  you  are  hard  put  I  am  sure  you  will  get  an  awful  lot  done  in  this  next 
day  and  a  half. 

We  also  are  very  happy  to  know  that  you  are  going  to  return  to  a  somewhat  more 
normal  schedule  of  meetings  in  1964  and  1965.  We  feel  this  is  a  constructive  and  worth- 
while thing.  If  I  may  add  one  thought,  I  would  say  that  we  all  need  to  think  more 
positively  and  aggressively,  and  be  sure  that  out  of  these  problems  we  have  created,  or 
that  have  been  created  for  us,  we  don't  develop  a  negative  attitude.  I  think  it  is  en- 
couraging and  stimulating  that  you  are  going  to  try  to  go  back  to  full  sessions.  I  believe 
I  can  definitely  assure  you  that  in  1965  there  will  be  a  National  Railway  Appliances 
Exhibition  in  conjunction  with  your  meeting.  In  the  meantime  we  will  be  supporting 
you  at  your  meeting  next  year,  and  will  look  forward  to  a  full-blown  session,  rather 
than  the  1*2 -day  affair  which  has  been  forced  on  us  at  this  time. 

Thank   you   very  much,  gentlemen.    [Applause] 


President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Betts.  We  have  had  a  long  and  pleasant  rela- 
tionship with  your  Association.  We  recall  with  pleasure  the  oustanding  exhibit  put  on 
by  your  group  at  McCormick  Place  in  connection  with  our  1961  convention.  We  look 
forward  with  anticipation — beyond  the  combined  exhibit  this  fall — to  another  exhibit 
by  your  Association  in  conjunction  with  our  convention  in  1965.  Thank  you,  Mr.  Betts, 
for  meeting  with  us  here  this  morning,  and  for  your  good  wishes. 

We  would  now  be  pleased  if  Mr.  Kleinkort  would  say  a  few  words  to  us,  possibly 
bringing  us  up-to-date  on  plans  being  formulated  for  the  combined  suppliers'  exhibit 
this  coming  fall. 

Mr.  Kleinkort,  who  is  a  past  president  of  NRAA,  was  honored  in  his  selection  as 
chairman  of  the  Combined  Railway  Suppliers  Exhibit  which  will  put  on  the  exhibit 
thK  fall,  and  which,  if  I  am  correctly  informed,  will  be  the  largest  railroad  exhibit 
ever  staged  in  the  United  States. 

Mr.  Kleinkort,  I  am  pleased  to  turn  the  microphone  over  to  you. 

Greetings   from   Combined   Railway   Suppliers   Exhibit 

J.  P.  KLEINKORT:   Mr.  President,  officers,  numbers  and  guests: 

I  speak  for  four  railroad  supply  associations  and  bring  their  best  wishes  for  a 
successful  convention,  even  though  it  will  be  short. 


588  OpeningSession 


The  important  aspect  of  our  fall  show  is  to  try  to  develop  a  real,  sound  impact 
on  the  general  public,  to  create  a  strong  feeling  that  in  the  future  the  railroads  are 
going  to  grow  rather  than  recede. 

As  you  all  know,  there  is  a  possibility  of  further  reduction  in  employment  in  the 
railroad  industry.  However,  we  are  going  to  do  a  lot  more  with  less  people;  this  will 
have  a  beneficial  effect  on  the  financial  welfare  of  the  railroads  and  eventually  will 
create  more  employment  in  the  railroad  industry  and  in  the  supply  industry  that  serves 
the  railroads. 

The  size  of  the  exhibit  has  been  pointed  out  by  several  people.  We  are  quite  cer- 
tain it  will  have  great  size,  but  more  important  is  the  fact  that  you  will  see  more  than 
you  have  ever  seen  in  your  life  at  this  type  of  show.  We  do  hope  that  you  will  take 
advantage  of  the  opportunity,  because  the  possibilities  for  further  development  of 
machinery,  parts  and  supplies  can  be  enhanced  and  expanded  by  the  kind  of  con- 
tribution you  can  give  in  learning  to  use  the  material  that  will  be  exhibited  there,  and 
in  offering  suggestions  for  its  improvement. 

This  kind  of  an  activity  cannot  be  offered  frequently.  A  large  exhibit  like  this  is 
quite  costly.  It  is  possible  that  as  much  as  $1,500,000  might  be  spent  to  put  it  on, 
when  you  consider  the  expense  of  renting  the  space,  getting  the  equipment  there,  and 
getting  the  people  to  man  the  exhibits.  It  is  therefore  quite  important  that  the  exhibitors 
get  the  full  benefit  of  the  investment  they  make  to  bring  this  equipment  together.  We 
feel  that  many  of  you  here  in  the  railroad  industry  can  have  great  impact  on  the  way 
this  educational  exhibit  will  be  received,  for  your  own  benefit  and  for  the  benefit  of  the 
suppliers  who  will  be  there. 

I  sincerely  hope  you  will  make  it  possible  for  as  many  people  in  your  employ  as 
possible  to  attend.  The  educational  advantages  will  be  worth  while,  and  I  am  sure  they 
will  reach  farther  down  into  your  ranks  than  ever  before. 

Thank  you   for   this   opportunity   to   speak.    [Applause] 


President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Kleinkort.  We  appreciate  your  greetings,  your 
comments  on  the  October  exhibit,  and  your  invitation  to  our  members  to  participate 
in  it.  In  conjunction  with  our  one-day  full  membership  meeting  on  October  9,  I  can 
assure  you  that  we  will  view  your  exhibit  in  full  force. 

We  are  sorry  that  we  could  not  encourage  more  members  of  NRAA  and  your 
group  to  meet  with  us  here  during  this  March  business  meeting,  but  we  hope  to  make 
up  for  that  in  October. 

Gentlemen,  at  this  point  in  our  program  we  turn  to  the  meat  of  our  business 
meeting — the  presentation  of  the  reports  of  our  standing  and  special  committees,  and 
consideration  of  their  specific  recommendations. 

We  do  not  know  how  many  members  of  each  committee  are  here  or  will  be  here, 
but  we  have  tried  to  make  it  clear  that  there  was  no  restriction  on  the  attendance  of 
any  committee  members;  so  we  have,  we  hope,  provided  enough  seats  here  at  our  two 
speaker's  tables  to  take  care  of  all  committee  members  who  may  be  present.  We  hope, 
therefore,  that  as  the  different  committees  are  called,  all  members  present  will  take  their 
places  here  at  our  two  speaker's  tables. 

However,  in  the  interest  of  saving  time,  may  I  ask  that  the  chairmen,  vice  chair- 
men, secretaries,  and  all  subcommitteee  chairmen — especially  those  to  present  reports — 
take  their  places  at  the  main  speaker's  table,  and  that  other  members  of  committees  first 
fill  out  the  main  speaker's  table  and  then  overflow,  as  necessary,  at  the  lower  speaker's 
table.  This  will  shorten  the  time  necessary  for  subcommittee  chairmen  to  come  to  the 
microphone   to   present   their  reports. 


Discussion 589 

Discussion  on  Clearances 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  575,  pages  333-358] 

President  Code  [continuing] :  Again  this  year  our  first  committee  to  report  is 
Committee  28 — Clearances,  the  chairman  of  which  is  J.  G.  Greenlee,  clearance  engineer, 
Pennsylvania  Railroad.  Mr.  Greenlee,  I  shall  be  glad  if  you  and  the  members  of  your 
committee  will  come  to  the  platform — you  and  your  vice  chairman  to  take  places  imme- 
diately at  my  left,  where  a  microphone  has  been  provided  for  you. 

Mr.  Greenlee,  I  now  turn  this  microphone  over  to  you. 

Chairman  J.  G.  Greenlee:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and  guests: 

Your  Committee  28  reports  on  seven  assignments  for  the  year  1962.  Only  the  high- 
lights of  the  reports  will  be  given  now.  The  details  can  be  found  in  the  Association's 
Bulletin  575,  December  1062,  page  334. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Greenlee:  There  is  no  report  on  this  assignment,  as  our  review  of 
Chapter  28  has  been  completed  and  no  further  revisions  are  required  at  this  time. 
B.  Bristow,  principal  assistant  engineer,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific,  is  subcommittee 
chairman. 

Assignment  2 — Compilation  of  the  Railroad  Clearance  Requirements 
of   the   Various   States. 

Chairman  Greenlee:  In  Bulletin  568  of  December  1961,  pages  338-339,  this  com- 
mittee submitted  the  clearance  requirements  for  the  State  of  New  York,  which  were 
effective  April  20,  1961,  to  be  added  to  the  clearance  chart  dated  July  20,  1961.  A  can- 
vass  is  now  being  made  for  any  recent  changes  in  the  various  states,  and  the  clearance 
chart  will  be  revised  accordingly  when  deemed  necessary.  J.  F.  Smith,  inspector,  Illinois 
Central  Railroad,   Chicago,  is  subcommittee  chairman. 

Assignment  3 — Review  Clearance  Diagrams  for  Recommended  Practice. 

CHAIRMAN  Greenlee:  This  assignment  has  been  discontinued  and  replaced  with  a 
new  assignment  dealing  with  electronic  devices  for  recording  clearance  measurements 
of  structures  along  the  right-of-way  and  of  cars  and  loads  in  yards  and  at  interchange 
points.  C.  W.  Hamilton,  engineer  of  design,  Wabash  Railroad,  St.  Louis,  will  direct 
this  new  assignment. 

Assignment  5 — Clearance  Allowances  to  Provide  for  Vertical  and  Hori- 
zontal Movement  of  Equipment  Due  to  Lateral  Play,  Wear  and  Spring 
Deflection,    Collaborating   with    the   Mechanical  Division,   AAR. 

Chairman  Greenlee:  E.  E.  Mills,  design  draftsman,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Chi- 
is  subcommittee  chairman.  Due  to  the  fact  that  Mr.  Mills  has  recently  had  an  eye 
operation,  he  has  asked  me  to  present  his  report. 

Your  committee  submits  as  information  a  report  on  "Effect  of  Spring  Travel, 
Height  of  Center  of  Gravity  and  Speed  on  Freight  Car  Clearance  Requirements  on 
Curved  and  Tangent  Track."  It  can  be  found  in  Bulletin  575,  Vol.  64,  pages  335  to  354. 

These  tests  are  a  continuation  of  those  run  in  1955  and  reported  in  the  AREA  Pro- 
ceedings  Vol.  59,  195  c    These  additional  tests  were  made  to  investigate  the 

effect  of  partially  loaded  cars  and  branch  line  standards  of  track  maintenance  on  clear- 
ance requirements.  Cars  in  the  1955  tests  were  slightly  overloaded,  and  it  was  thought 
that  bottoming  of  the  springs  might  have  restricted  movement  of  the  car  bodies.  This 
report  covers  tests  on  one-half  and  fully  loaded  cars  with  70  and  85  in  combined  center 


590    Clearan  ces 

of  gravity  heights,  and  empty  cars,  which   were  run   on   the  Delaware,  Lackawanna  & 
Western  Railroad,  now  Erie-Lackawanna  Railroad,  in  October  and  November  1959. 

The  two  cars  tested  were  equipped  with  different  types  of  springs,  car  "A"  having 
short-travel  springs  (1-^  in  travel)  and  car  "B"  having  long-travel  springs  (3li  in 
travel) . 

The  long-travel  springs  for  freight  cars  were  put  into  service  to  reduce  vertical  and 
lateral  impacts  and  vibration  on  lading  at  higher  operating  speeds.  As  of  January  1. 
1956,  the  short-travel  spring  was  abandoned,  and  all  new  or  rebuilt  cars  were  to  have 
long-travel  springs.  It  is  estimated  that  as  of  January  1,  1963,  50  percent  of  all  freight 
cars  have  long-travel  springs  with  travel  of  more  than  \%  in. 

The  clearance  requirements  of  the  various  roads  were  established  at  a  time  when 
all  equipment  was  using  the  old  short-travel  springs,  therefore  it  is  imperative  that  we 
know  what  additional  clearance  is  required  for  equipment  with  the  long-travel  springs. 

The  results  of  these  tests  are  summarized  in  Table  3  of  the  report.  Due  to  the  wide 
scatter  in  the  roll  angle,  a  value  of  30  percent  of  the  average  roll  displacement  for  6  in 
unbalance  as  found  in  the  1955  tests,  has  been  used  for  the  spread  of  average  roll  dis- 
placement in  this  table.  Comparison  of  this  table  with  Table  4  on  page  325  of  the 
earlier  report  shows  that  bottoming  of  the  springs  due  to  slight  overloading  did  not 
unduly  restrict  movement  of  the  car  bodies  in  the  1955  tests. 

It  is  recommended  that  Table  4  of  the  1958  report  be  considered  as  representative 
of  the  maximum  lateral  clearance  required  for  track  with  a  main-line  standard  of  main- 
tenance. As  discussed  on  page  321  of  the  1958  report,  an  additional  1  in  should  be 
allowed  for  badly  worn  cars.  It  should  be  kept  in  mind  that  these  displacements  are 
due  to  car  body  roll  and  lateral  play  movements  only,  and  are  requirements  for  clear- 
ance beyond  those  due  to  curvature,  track  elevation  and  equipment  dimensions. 

The  additional  clearance  required  for  equipment  with  long-travel  springs  has  been 
discussed,  on  the  basis  of  these  reports,  with  members  of  this  committee  and  with 
clearance  men  of  various  roads,  and  to  date  we  have  been  unable  to  discover  a  single 
incident  that  has  been  brought  about  because  of  the  long  travel  springs;  however,  this 
situation  may  change  as  the  equipment  becomes  older  and  approaches  the  worn  condi- 
tion limits.  This  committee  intends  to  give  further  study  to  this  subject  in  order  to 
make  some  recommendation  in  the  near  future  as  to  additional  clearance  required  for 
long-travel  springs,  as  the  situation   progresses. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  tests  have  been  run  on  certain  piggyback  equipment. 
In  May  1961,  tests  were  made  on  the  Burlington  with  an  85-ft  TTX  car  with  two 
40-ft  trailers  mounted  on  the  car  and  an  85-ft  3-level  auto-carrier.  It  is  intended  to 
make  further  tests  on  this  type  of  equipment,  and  the  results  of  these  tests  will  be  the 
subject  of  future  reports. 

President   Code:    Thank  you,  Mr.  Mills.  Your  report  is  accepted  as  information. 

Assignment  6 — Compilation  in  Table  Form  of  Offsets  for  Overhanging 
Loads  on  Curves. 

Chairman  Greenlee:  Assignment  6  has  been  completed  and  will  be  replaced  with 
a  new  assignment  under  which  we  shall  try  to  formulate  a  more  complete  method  for 
reporting  loads  of  excessive  dimensions  for  use  of  the  transportation  departments.  J.  E. 
Beran,  draftsman,  Chicago,  Burlington  &  Quincy,  Chicago,  is  subcommittee  chairman 
for  the  new  assignment. 


Discussion 591 

Assignment  8 — Review  Present  Methods  of  Presenting  Published  Clear- 
ance Information  to  Determine  How  This  Can  Be  Simplified  and/or 
Standardized. 

Chairman  Greenlee:  J.  A.  Crawford,  assistant  engineer,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Rail- 
way,  Richmond,  Va.,  subcommittee  chairman,  will  give  his  report. 

J.  A.  Crawford:  Mr.  President,  Mr.  Chairman,  members  of  the  Association  and 
guests: 

A  glance  through  the  Railway  Line  Clearance  publication  will  show  that  there  are 
almost  as  many  methods  of  publishing  clearance  information  as  there  are  railroads.  You 
can  also  readily  see  how  difficult  it  would  be  for  a  clearance  man  to  check  the  clearance 
possibilities  of  a  shipment  from  coast  to  coast  over  the  various  railroads  involved.  Yet 
on  all  of  our  roads  today  there  are  clearance  men  spending  many  hours  every  day  doing 
just  that.  The  purpose  of  this  assignment  is  to  devise  a  method  to  eliminate  this  waste 
of  valuable  man-hours. 

It  has  been  concluded  that  any  standardized  clearance  publication  must  contain  the 
following  five  items: 

1.  Clearance   and   weight   limitations   for   routes   between   interchange   or  junction 
points  on  the  railroad. 

2.  An  index  in  alphabetical  order  for  the  routes. 

3.  A  column  number  assigned  to  each  route. 

4.  A  small   map  showing  the  lines  with   interchange  and  junction  points  of   the 
various  routes. 

5.  Clearances  based  on  cars  up  to  55  ft  long  with  truck  centers  up  to  44  ft. 

The  proposed  method  illustrated  by  a  mock-up  in  our  report  in  Bulletin  575  for  a 
fictitious  railroad  in  the  Railway  Line  Clearance  publication,  is  our  opinion  for  a  pro- 
posed method  far  superior  to  that  now  being  used  by  many  railroads. 

Many  railroads  are  satisfied  with  their  representation  in  the  Railway  Line  Clear- 
ance publication,  and  many  of  them  are  very  good.  The  governing  factors  which  dictate 
the  representation  for  each  individual  railroad  vary  greatly.  For  these  reasons  it  does 
not  seem  possible  to  develop  a  single  method  acceptable  to  all  roads. 

The  proposed  method  is  submitted  as  information  for  any  road  interested  in 
improving    their    method   of   publication. 

This  committee  would  be  pleased  to  receive  any  comments  or  criticisms  of  this  pro- 
posed method  in  order  that  we  might  present  with  next  years  report  an  optimum 
method   that   can   be   adopted   as   recommended   practice. 

I'm -mount  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Crawford.  Your  report  is  accepted  as  information, 
and  I  hope  you  yet  some  suggestions  from  the  members  during  the  coming  year. 

I-  t ru  re  any  discussion  of  Mr.  Crawford's  report,  or  a  question?  Mr.  Greenlee. 

Assignment  9 — Review  Clearance  Records  of  Various  Railroads,  Look- 
ing   to   Developing   a   Standardized   Method   for    Charting   all   Obstructions. 

Or \iR\i\v  Gbeeztlzx:  Sample  clearance  diagrams  of  structures  along  the  right- 
of-way  were  obtained  from  various  railroads.  From  these  diagrams  a  simple  clearance 
diagram  has  been  prepared,  combining  the  most  desirable  methods  used  by  the  various 
roads.  This  simple  diagram  lia^  been  sent  to  all  members  of  Committee  28  for  com- 
ments and  recommendation-  After  all  recommendation-,  have  been  received  a  final 
diagram  will  be  prepared,  looking  to  submitting  it  for  publication,  as  information,  in 
the  196.?  report,  for  consideration  b)    the  Association  as  recommended  practice.  M.  E. 


592 Engineering   and   Valuation    Records 

Vosseller,   draftsman,    Central   Railroad   of   New   Jersey,   Jersey    City,   is   subcommittee 
chairman. 


Chairman  Greenlee  [continuing] :  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of 
Committee  28.  Since  this  is  my  final  report  as  chairman  of  Committee  28,  I  would  like 
to  introduce  the  new  chairman  and  vice  chairman  of  this  committee.  J.  A.  Crawford, 
assistant  engineer,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  Richmond,  Va.,  is  the  new  vice  chair- 
man. R.  L.  Williams,  office  manager,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago,  is  the  new 
chairman. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Greenlee  and  members  of  your  committee,  for 
the  increasingly  important  work  which  your  committee  has  carried  on  during  the  last 
three  years  under  your  direction.  With  piggyback  operations,  bigger  and  longer  cars  on 
the  increase,  the  work  of  your  committee  becomes  increasingly  important.  We  wish 
that  time  permitted  a  more  detailed  description  of  some  of  the  work  which  has  been 
carried  out  by  the  AAR  research  staff  for  and  in  behalf  of  your  committee. 

Are  there  any  questions?  If  not,  we  thank  you,  Mr.  Greenlee,  for  your  very  able 
direction  of  the  work  of  Committee  28  during  the  past  three  years.  We  welcome  Mr. 
Crawford  as  the  new  vice  chairman  of  your  committee  and  Mr.  Williams  as  the  new 
chairman,  knowing  that  they  will  carry  forward  aggressively  the  unfinished  work  of 
your  committee. 

Mr.  Williams,  if  you  will  step  up  to  the  podium  I  would  like  to  present  you  with 
your  official  chairman's  gavel.  The  band  on  it  reads:  R.  L.  Williams,  Chairman,  Com- 
mittee 28 — Clearances,  1963-1965.  I  am  sure  you  will  use  it  effectively  and  wisely  in 
directing  the  meetings  of  your  committee  in   the  years  immediately  ahead.    [Applause] 

Thank  you  again,  Chairman  Greenlee.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with  the 
thanks   of   the  Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on   Engineering  and   Valuation   Records 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  576,  pages  387-395] 

President  Code:  The  second  committee  to  make  a  report  to  this  meeting  is  our 
Committee  11 — Engineering  and  Valuation  Records,  the  chairman  of  which  is  M.  C. 
Wolf,  valuation  engineer,  Northern  Pacific  Railway.  Mr.  Wolf,  if  you  and  the  members 
of  your  committee  will  come  to  the  platform,  I  shall  be  glad  to  turn  this  meeting 
over  to  you. 

Chairman   M.   C.   Wolf:    Mr.   President,   members  of   the  Association   and  guests: 
The  report  of  Committee   11 — Engineering  and  Valuation  Records,  appears  in  Bul- 
letin 576,  January   1963,  pages  387  to  395,  incl.  This  committee  has  eight  assignments, 
upon   which  I  should  like  to  comment  briefly. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Wolf:  An  extensive  revision  of  the  Manual  was  submitted  at  the  Annual 
Meeting  of  March  1962,  where  it  was  approved  for  adoption.  No  further  revisions  of 
our  chapter  of  the  Manual  now  are  proposed.  I  should  like  to  have  the  subcommittee 
chairman  rise  and  be  recognized.  He  is  John  L.  Manthey,  auditor  of  capital  expenditures, 
Elgin,   Joliet   &  Eastern   Railway. 

Assignment  2 — Bibliography  on  Subjects  Pertaining  to  Engineering  and 
Valuation  Records. 

Chairman  Wolf:  The  report  on  this  assignment  will  be  given  by  the  subcommittee 
chairman,  J.  Bert  Byars,  assistant  to  chief  engineer,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western 
Railroad. 


Discussion 593 

J.  Bert  Byars:  The  report  on  this  assignment  appears  on  pages  388  to  390  of  Bul- 
letin 576.  It  is  a  list  of  currently  published  articles  dealing  with  valuation,  depreciation, 
office  procedures  and  railroad  accounting,  with  brief  comments  regarding  their  content. 

This  list  and  the  lists  of  recent  years  are  recommended  to  the  attention  of  all 
officers  and  supervisors  whose  concern  with  economy  of  operation  results  in  their  need 
for  information  on  valuation  subjects. 

Assignment  3 — Office  and  Drafting  Practices. 

Chairman  Wolf:  A  study  of  microfilming  of  records  and  reports  is  in  progress, 
but  no  report  is  made.  I  should  like  to  have  the  subcommittee  chairman  rise  and  be 
recognized.  He  is  Walter  A.  Krauska,  assistant  engineer,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad. 

Assignment  5 — Use  of  Statistics  and  Data  Processing  in  Railway 
Engineering. 

Chairman  Wolf:  A  study  is  in  progress,  but  report  is  being  withheld  pending  revi- 
sion of  Interstate   Commerce  Commission  requirements  for  valuation  reports. 

This  subcommittee  has  two  co-chairmen.  I  should  like  to  have  co-chairman  William 
J.  Pease,  assistant  general  auditor,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  rise  and  be  recognized. 
I  regret  that  the  other  co-chairman,  Howard  R.  Williams,  valuation  engineer,  Union 
Pacific  Railroad,  is  unable  to  be  here  today.  Mr.  Williams  also  is  vice  chairman  of 
Committee  11. 

Assignment   6 — Valuation   and  Depreciation. 

Chairman  Wolf:  The  report  on  this  assignment  will  be  given  by  the  subcommittee 
chairman,  C.  R.  Dolan,  engineer — capital  expenditures,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad. 

C.  R.  Dolan:  One  of  the  items  covered  in  the  report  on  Assignment  6  is  the  Ele- 
ments of  Value  for  all  Class  I  line  haul  and  switching  and  terminal  companies  as  of 
December  31,  1961,  issued  by  the  ICC  Bureau  of  Accounts.  The  Elements  of  Value 
Statements  were  completed  and  issued  in  January  1963. 

Another  item  mentioned  in  the  report  referred  to  the  1962  Revision  of  Deprecia- 
tion Guidelines  and  Investment  Credit  for  Income  Tax  Purposes.  One  of  the  salient 
features  of  the  new  guidelines  for  depreciation  is  the  radical  reduction  from  Bulletin 
F's  5000  item-lives  to  Revenue  Procedure  62-21  providing  for  approximately  75  guide- 
line classes  and  lives  divided  among  four  groups,  which  in  itself  is  going  to  lend  itself 
to  greater  simplicity.  In  addition,  it  is  noted  that  the  guidelines  have  taken  into  account 
and  are  based  upon  a  new  approach;  that  is,  economic  life  rather  than  physical  life 
of  property  has  been  emphasized.  This  new  approach  is  borne  out  in  that  the  test  for 
reasonable  depreciation  allowances  will  be  determined  by  the  relationship  between  those 
allowances  and  future  replacement  practices.  This  relationship  will  be  determined  by 
the  ratio  of  the  accumulated  depreciation  reserve  to  the  depreciable  basis  of  the  assets 
being  depreciated. 

Another  item  covered  in  the  report  is  the  7  percent  investment  credit.  The  7  per- 
cent investment  credit  as  provided  for  under  Section  2  of  the  Revenue  Act  of  1962 
will  have  a  significant  impact  on  the  industry  in  that  it  has  both  favorable  and  unfavor- 
able effects.  The  investment  credit  provisions  allow  a  taxpayer's  liability  for  income  tax 
for  the  year  1962,  or  any  year  thereafter,  to  be  reduced  by  an  amount  equal  to  7  per- 
cent of  the  "qualified  investment"  in  depreciable  property  for  the  year.  The  investment 
credit  is  applicable  to  the  cost  of  tangible  personal  property— Otherwise  known  as  Sec- 
tion   38    property — with    a    useful    life    of    four    years    or    more,    not    including   B    building 

or  its  structural  components.  Railroad  tracks  and  signals  have  been  determined  as  being 
Section  38  property. 


594 Engineering   and    Valuation    Records 

The  Act  contains  the  provision  which  requires  that  the  basis  of  any  Section  38 
property  be  reduced  by  an  amount  equal  to  7  percent  of  the  qualified  investment  with 
respect  to  such  property.  Particular  note  should  be  made  of  this  provision  wherein  a 
carrier  even  though  it  has  no  tax  liability  must  reduce  the  basis  of  the  Section  38 
property  by  the  7  percent  investment  credit,  which  will  have  the  effect  of  reducing 
depreciation  allowances  in  subsequent  years. 

In  connection  with  these  revisions  it  should  be  pointed  out  that  it  will  be  very 
important  that  unit  records  of  costs  and  useful  lives  be  maintained  on  all  property 
subject  to  the  investment  credit  despite  the  fact  that  a  carrier  may  be  using  a  more 
generalized  depreciation  treatment  such  as  recommended  under  Revenue  Procedure 
62-21. 

The  report  is  submitted  as  information   only. 

G.  S.  Sowers  [Missouri  Pacific]:  May  I  ask  a  question  at  this  time?  If  these  new 
laws  and  regulations  permit  increased  charges  to  depreciation,  won't  this  result  in 
greater  charges  to  operating  expenses  and  also  increase  your  operating  ratio? 

Chairman  Wolf:  Thank  you,  sir.  That  is  a  question  that  has  raised  a  great  deal 
of  concern  among  operating  people — whether  the  tax  experts  will  ruin  the  operating 
ratio  by  greatly  increasing  the  depreciation  allowances  or  deductions.  The  tax  is  some- 
thing entirely  separate  from  the  books  and  budgets.  It  merely  represents  an  expediting 
of   the   depreciation   recovery  for  tax  purposes. 

A  couple  of  months  ago  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  did  reconsider  its 
policies  on  book  depreciation,  and  the  subject  was  tabled  for  the  time  being.  I  think 
we  can  be  confident  that  this  guideline  proposition  will  have  no  effect  at  all  on  the 
book   accounting. 

Assignment  7 — Revisions  and  Interpretations  of  ICC  Accounting 
Regulations. 

Chairman  Wolf:  The  report  on  this  assignment  will  be  given  by  the  subcommittee 
chairman,  M.  M.  Gerber,  who  until  recently  was  accounting  engineer,  Baltimore  &  Ohio, 
Chicago  Terminal  Railroad,  and  who  now  is  associated  with  Westenhoff  and  Novick, 
consulting  engineers. 

M.  M.  Gerber:   Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and  guests: 

The  report  on  Assignment  7  presents  the  more  important  changes  appearing  in  the 
revised  issue  of  the  Uniform  System  of  Accounts  For  Railroad  Companies  as  amended 
to,  and  effective  as  of,  January  1,  1962,  known  as  the  issue  of  1962. 

The  ICC  Bureau  of  Accounts  has  issued:  "Interpretations  of  the  Uniform  System 
of  Accounts  for  Railroad  Companies — Accounting  Series  Circular  No.  130 — Issue  of  1962, 
effective  September  1,  1962."  These  interpretations  represents  a  reissue  of  and  supersede 
cases  contained  in  Bulletin  No.  IS  cancelled  by  Commission  order  effective  September  1, 
1962  and  in  Accounting  Case  Series. 

ICC  Notice  of  Proposed  Rule  Making,  Docket  No.  32 153,  dated  January  7,  1963, 
advises  that  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission  has  under  consideration  amendment 
of  the  Uniform  System  of  Accounts  For  Railroad  Companies  requiring  that  amounts 
now  carried  in  primary  accounts  for  cost  of  road  and  equipment  property  shall  be 
redistributed  to  the  appropriate  primary  accounts  based  on  the  original  cost  of  property 
as  shown  in  valuation  records  of  each  carrier  and  summarized  in  the  Bureau  of  Ac- 
counts of  the  Commission,  subject  to  exceptions  described  therein  with  respect  to  land, 
rails,  other  track  material,  and  ballast. 

Railroad  companies  and  other  interested  parties  were  invited  to  present  written 
views  or  comments  for  consideration  on  or  before  March   1,   1963.  After  consideration 


Discussion  59S 

of  all  such  responses  and  presentations,  an  order,  as  may  be  found  appropriate,  will 
be  entered. 

The  proposed  rule  requires  that  journal  entries  distributing  the  amounts  to  primary 
accounts  pursuant  to  the  foregoing  instructions  shall  be  submitted  to  the  Commission 
for  consideration  as  soon  as  practicable  and  not  later  than  December  31,  1963. 

This  report  is  presented  as  information. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Gerber.  Are  there  any  questions  or  remarks  on 
Mr.   Gerber's  report? 

J.  H.  Robinson  [Burlington  Lines]:  The  report  on  Assignment  7  briefly  makes 
reference  to  ICC  Subject  468,  Redistribution  of  Amounts  to  Primary  Road  and  Equip- 
ment Accounts.  Isn't  this  a  very  important  subject  at  the  present  time? 

Chairman  Wolf:  Thank  you,  sir.  I  believe  it  is  a  question  of  importance  because 
some  roads  don't  realize  what  they  might  have  ahead  of  them.  Our  report  on  Assign- 
ment 7  merely  mentioned  that  the  subject  was  still  under  consideration  at  that  time, 
which  was  true;  but  on  January  7,  I  believe,  this  new  Notice  of  Rule  Making,  already 
discussed — Docket  32153 — proposes  the  ICC's  synthetic  cost  on  your  books  in  place 
of  the  amounts  that  are  now  carried  in  the  property  accounts. 

Careful  reading  of  that  indicates  that  there  may  be  a  great  deal  of  work  to  be 
done  in  the  engineering  department  if  the  redistribution  is  handled  there.  It  may  be 
extremely  expensive,  and  I  venture  to  say  that  hardly  anyone  would  be  able  to  finish 
it  by  the  end  of  this  year.  However,  the  final  orders  may  defer  the  date  of  filing. 

The  amount  of  work  could  be  tremendous,  depending  on  your  situation.  The  mere 
fact  that  yours  may  be  a  reorganized  road  does  not  mean  you  would  be  out  of  trouble. 
There  may  possibly  be  a  great  deal  of  trouble  for  everyone.  Many  roads  don't  care 
particularly  what  happens  to  the  total  amount  of  their  investment  account.  It  may  not 
require  parts  adjustment,  but  for  many  it  is  a  serious  problem  that  concerns  other  than 
engineers.  The  amount  of  engineer's  record  keeping  necessary  may  stun  them  when  they 
find  out  what  they  are  up  against. 


Chairman  Wolf  [continuing] :  Mr.  Gerber  has  tendered  his  resignation  from  the 
subcommittee  chairmanship,  effective  at  the  beginning  of  the  current  business  year.  His 
resignation  was  accepted  regretfully  by  Committee  11.  We  believe  that  there  has  been 
no  better  way  for  an  engineer  to  keep  abreast  of  the  effect  of  accounting  changes  on 
engineering  estimates  and  studies  than  to  read  the  reports  on  Assignment  7,  prepared 
under  the  direction  of  Mr.  Gerber. 

I  should  like  to  introduce  the  new  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  Robert  D.  Igou, 
engineer — capital  expenditures,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad.  Mr.  Igou  is 
a  modest  man,  but  we  know  he  will  continue  the  good  work. 

Assignment  8 — Instructions  for  Making  Engineer  Field  Checks  and 
Their  Application  to   Completion  Reports. 

Chairman  Wolf:  A  study  is  in  progress  but  report  is  being  withheld  pending  the 
revision  of  ICC  requirements  for  valuation  reports.  Unfortunately,  the  subcommittee 
chairman  cannot  be  with  us  today.  He  is  Carlton  F.  Olson,  valuation  engineer,  Great 
Northern  Railway. 

Assignment  9 — Simplification  of  Annual  Reports  on  Form  588  to  the 
Interstate   Commerce   Commission,  and   Underlying  Completion  Reports. 

Chairman  Wolf:  Xo  report  is  made  because  tlii-  assignment  is  dependent  on  the 
disposition  of  Valuation  Order  30  of  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission.  I  might  add 
that  the  proposed  changes  in  requirements  for  reporting  have  been  under  discussion  for 


596  Contract    Forms 


a  long  time,  and  this  subcommittee  has  made  some  valuable  contributions  to  these  dis- 
cussions. I  do  not  see  in  the  audience  the  subcommittee  chairman,  Frank  A.  Roberts, 
valuation   engineer,    Erie-Lackawanna   Railroad. 

I  should  also  like  to  have  our  very  resourceful  secretary  rise  and  be  recognized. 
He  is  William  S.  Gates,  Jr.,  assistant  to  auditor — valuation,  Chicago  &  Illinois  Midland 
Railway. 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes   the   report  of   Committee  11. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Wolf.  You  have  taken  hold  of  the  work  of  Com- 
mittee 11  in  fine  shape  in  your  first  year  as  chairman,  and  I  know  that  your  committee 
is  alert  to  the  important  changes  which  have  come  about  and  which  are  in  prospect  in 
accounting  requirements,  practices  and  procedures.  I  am  sure  that  you  have  some  inter- 
esting work  ahead  of  you. 

We  thank  you  and  your  committee  for  keeping  us  abreast  of  these  matters.  If  there 
are  no  further  questions  from  the  floor,  I  will  now  excuse  your  committee  with  the 
thanks  of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion  on   Contract   Forms 

[For  report  see  Bulletin  574,  pages  187-195] 

President  Code:  We  will  hear  next  from  our  Committee  20 — Contract  Forms,  the 
chairman  of  which  is  D.  F.  Lyons,  office  engineer,  Chicago  South  Shore  &  South  Bend 
Railroad,  at  Michigan  City,  Ind.  I  shall  appreciate  it  if  Mr.  Lyons  and  the  members 
of  his  committee  will  come  to  the  platform  at  this  time.  Mr.  Lyons,  I  am  pleased  to 
turn  the  microphone  over  to  you. 

A  few  weeks  ago  I  served  as  chief  range  officer  of  a  pistol  range,  and  so  if  I  get 
mixed  up  and  say,  "Will  the  next  relay  come  to  the  firing  line",  don't  be  too  much 
surprised. 

Mr.  Lyons,  you  have  the  floor. 

Chairman  D.  F.  Lyons:  President  Code,  fellow  members  and  guests: 

Committee  20  has  six  assignments  to  report  on  at  this  time.  We  shall  ask  for  action 
on  one  of  the  assignments,  and  present  progress  reports  on  the  remainder. 

Our  preliminary  report  is  in  Bulletin  574,  beginning  on  page  187.  If  you  have  any 
questions  during  the  presentation  of  the  reports,  please  feel  free  to  ask  them.  We  can't 
guarantee  to  answer  them  now  but  at  least  we  shall  take  note  of  them  and  try  to  answer 
them  later  for  you. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of   Manual. 

Chairman  Lyons:  The  chairman  of  the  subcommittee  handling  this  assignment  is 
C.  L.  Gatton,  engineer  of  construction,  Louisville  &  Nashville  Railroad,  DeCoursey,  Ky. 
Mr.  Gatton  has  informed  me  that  he  is  unable  to  be  present  because  of  other  com- 
mitments, so  I  shall  ask  J.  L.  Perrier,  division  engineer,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,   Chicago,   to  give  the  report  on  Assignment  1. 

J.  L.  Perrier:   Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

This  committee  completely  reviewed  all  the  Manual  material  in  Chapter  20  in  1961 
and  1962.  We  have  no  further  Manual  revisions  to  recommend  this  year. 

Assignment  2 — Form  of  Agreement  Covering  Purchase  and  Application 
of  Weed-Control  Chemicals  on  Railway  Property,  Collaborating  with 
Committee   1. 

Chairman  Lyons:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  2  is  J.  F.  Halpin,  assistant 
designing  engineer,  New  York  Central  System,  New  York.  Mr.  Halpin  is  not  here  today, 
so  again  I  ask  Mr.  Perrier  to  present  the  report  on  Assignment  2  for  him. 


Discussion  597 


J.  L.  Perrier:  Mr.  President  and  gentlemen:  This  assignment  is  to  develop  a  form 
covering  the  application  of  weed-control  chemicals  by  contract. 

As  indicated  on  page  188  of  Bulletin  574,  it  appears  that  few  railroads  have  their 
own  forms  for  this  situation,  so  we  can  perform  a  valuable  service  if  we  can  come  up 
with  a  form  that  any  railroad  could  use  as  is  or  as  a  pattern  for  making  up  their  own. 

We  shall  continue  to  work  on  this  assignment. 

Assignment  3 — Form  of  Agreement  for  Placing  Commercial  Advertising 
on  Railway  Bridges. 

Chairman  Lyons:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  3  is  R.  C.  Heckel,  assistant 
engineer  grade  crossings,  New  York  Central  System,  Chicago.  Mr.  Heckel. 

R.  C.  Heckel:  President  Code,  Chairman  Lyons,  and  members  of  AREA  and 
guests: 

The  assignment  of  Subcommittee  3  is  to  write  a  form  of  agreement  for  placing 
commercial  advertising  on  railway  bridges.  A  tentative  draft  of  such  an  agreement  is 
given  on  page  188  of  Bulletin  574  as  information.  We  would  appreciate  any  comments, 
either  written  or  oral. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Heckel.  Does  anyone  have  a  comment  from  the 
floor?   Continue,  Mr.  Lyons. 

Assignment  4 — Form  of  Agreement  to  Cover  Disposal  of  Surplus  Rail- 
way Property. 

Chairman  Lyons:  The  next  assignment  is  the  one  that  requires  Association  action. 
The  chairman  of  the  subcommittee,  E.  W.  Smith,  has  retired  from  his  position  as  assist- 
ant to  chief  engineer  of  the  St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway,  and  is  not  here,  so  I  shall 
ask  a  member  of  the  subcommittee,  F.  M.  Jones,  assistant  engineer,  Chicago,  Milwaukee, 
St.  Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chicago,  to  present  the  report  for  Mr.  Smith. 

F.  M.  Jones:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Last  year  your  committee  presented  as  information  a  tentative  draft  of  a  proposed 
"short  form"  agreement  to  cover  disposal  of  surplus  railway  property.  This  year  the 
draft,  as  presented  in  Bulletin  567,  November  1961,  page  174,  is  submitted  for  adoption 
and   publication   in   the  Manual. 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  the  Association  accept  this  agreement  as  Manual 
material  and  that  it  be  published  in  the  Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Mr.  Jones:  During  the  coming  year  this  subcommittee  will  continue  its  study  of  a 
"long  form"  agreement  for  the  disposal  of  surplus  railroad  property. 

Assignment  5 — Form  of  Lease  for  Railway  Property  Used  for  Unload- 
ing and  Storing  Liquified  Petroleum  Gases,  Anhydrous  Ammonia  and  Other 
Flammable  or  Dangerous  Materials. 

Chairman  Lyons:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  5,  F.  B.  Mallas,  division  engineer, 
Northern  Pacific  Railway,  is  not  present,  and  again  I  shall  call  upon  Mr.  Perrier  to 
present  the  report  on  this  assignment. 

J.   F.   Perrier:    Mr.  President,  gentlemen: 

It  is  considered  that  the  use  by  others  of  railroad  property  for  unloading  and 
storing  dangerous  materials  warrants  a  lease  form  separate  from  the  standard  industrial 
type  lease. 


598 Waterways   and    Harbors 

We  have  prepared  a  draft  of  such  a  lease  form  which  appears  on  pace  191  of 
Bulletin  574.  We  submit  this  draft  as  information  at  this  time.  Study  of  this  assignment 
will  be  continued. 

Assignment  7 — Bibliography  on  Subjects  Pertaining  to  Contract  Forms. 

Chairman  Lyons:  K.  J.  Silvey  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  7 ;  he  is  area  engineer 
of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad.  He  is  not  present,  so  Mr.  Perrier  will  make  the  report. 

J.  L.  Perrier:   Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

Your  committee  has  compiled  a  list  of  several  references  pertaining  to  contract 
forms.  You  will  find  these  on  page  195  of  Bulletin  594. 


Chairman  Lyons:  Committee  20  wishes  to  express  its  appreciation  to  its  officers 
who  served  during  1962  but  have  relinquished  their  posts  for  the  coming  Association 
year — D.  G.  West,  general  industrial  agent  of  the  Detroit,  Toledo  &  Ironton  Railroad, 
Dearborn,  Mich.,  who  served  as  secretary;  and  J.  F.  Halpin,  assistant  design  engineer, 
New  York  Central  System,  New  York,  who  served  as  chairman  of  Subcommittee  2. 
As  I  mentioned  before,  E.  W.  Smith,  retired  assistant  to  chief  engineer,  St.  Louis-San 
Francisco  Railway,  was  chairman  of  Subcommittee  4. 

At  this  time  I  would  like  to  recognize  the  new  subcommittee  chairmen  who  are 
present:  E.  A.  Graham,  assistant  chief  engineer  of  the  Colorado  &  Southern  Railway 
and  the  Fort  Worth  &  Denver  Railway;  and  F.  M.  Jones,  assistant  engineer,  Chicago, 
Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  &  Pacific,  who  is  going  to  take  over  Subcommittee  7. 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  20. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Lyons.  Your  committee  continues  to  carry 
forward  a  very  important  phase  of  our  Association's  work.  We  appreciate  the  diligence 
with  which  your  committee  has  kept  its  chapter  of  the  Manual  up  to  date,  and  its 
interest   in   developing   new   agreement   forms   as   the   need   for  additional   forms   arises. 

The  two  tentative  forms  which  your  committee  has  submitted  this  year  will,  I  am 
sure,  prove  very  helpful  to  the  railroads  in  dealing  with  the  matters  covered;  and  I  hope 
that,  as  requested,  interested  members  will  give  you  the  benefit  of  their  comments  and 
criticism  on  these  proposed  agreements,  looking  to  their  submission  and  adoption,  in 
the  best  possible  form,  a  year  hence. 

I  am  personally  looking  forward  to  the  results  of  your  efforts  to  coordinate  the 
various  types  of  contracts  used  for  weed  control,  and  I  know  you  will  not  let  the 
complications  and  difficulties  of  the  subject  divert  you  from  your  goal. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Lyons.  Your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks 
of   the   Association.    [Applause] 

Report  on  Waterways  and  Harbors 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  574,  pages  197-211] 

President  Code:  Our  next  committee  to  report  is  our  Committee  25 — Waterways 
and  Harbors,  the  chairman  of  which  is  F.  J.  Olsen,  resident  engineer,  Baltimore  &  Ohio 
Chicago  Terminal  Railroad,  with  headquarters  at  Blue  Island,  111.  Mr.  Olsen,  if  you 
and  the  members  of  your  committee  will  please  come  to  the  platform,  I  shall  be  glad 
to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you. 

Chatrman   F.   J.   Olsen:    Mr.   President,   members   of   the   Association   and   guests: 
Your  committee   is   reporting  briefly   on  all  but  one  of  its  assignments,  and  work 
is  in   progress   on   the  other  assignment.   The   report   of   Committee   25   is  published  in 
Bulletin  574,  starting  on  page  197. 


Discussion 599 

In  the  absence  of  the  subcommittee  chairmen  I  shall  present  the  reports  on  Assign- 
ments 1,  2,  3  and  7. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of  Manual. 

Chairman  Olsen:  J.  G.  Miller,  resident  engineer,  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  is 
chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  which  is  reviewing  Parts  2,  3  and  4  of  the  Manual,  and 
will  submit   recommendations  for  adoption   with  next  year's  report. 

Assignment  2 — Current  Policies,  Practices  and  Developments  Dealing 
with  Navigation  Projects,  Collaborating  with  AAR  Competitive  Transporta- 
tion Division — Waterways. 

Chairman  Olsen:  B.  M.  Dornblatt,  of  B.  M.  Dornblatt  and  Associates,  is  chair- 
man of  this  subcommittee,  which  submits  as  information,  eight  additional  documents 
pertaining  to  navigation  projects,  which  may  prove  of  interest  and  serve  as  a  guide 
for  future  reference.  These  documents  are  listed  in  Bulletin  574,  beginning  on  page  198. 

Assignment  3 — Bibliography  Relating  to  Benefits  and  Costs  of  Inland 
Waterway  Projects  Involving  Navigation. 

Chairman  Olsen:  M.  A.  Michel,  special  representative — staff,  Pittsburgh  &  Lake 
Erie  Railroad,  Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  is  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  which  has  been  anno- 
tating references  relating  to  benefits  and  cost  of  inland  waterway  projects.  Four  such 
annotated  references  are  published  in  Bulletin  574,  starting  on  page   199. 

Assignment  6 — Planning,  Construction  and  Maintenance  of  Rail — Water 
Transfer  Facilities. 

Chairman  Olsen:  J.  C.  Fenno,  assistant  engineer,  Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  & 
Pacific  Railroad,  Milwaukee,  Wis.,  is  chairman  of  this  subcommittee  and  will  give  the 
report.  Mr.  Fenno. 

J.  C.  Fenno:  Your  committee  submits  as  information  a  report  of  progress  in  the 
study  of  roll-on,  roll-off,  lift-on,  lift-off  and  conveyor-type  operations. 

The  distinctive  feature  of  roll-on,  roll-off,  lift-on,  lift-off  and  similar  types  of 
shipping  services  is  the  transfer  between  land  carriers  and  ships  of  loaded  rail  cars, 
highway  trailers  or  containers  instead  of  individual  pieces  of  cargo.  The  development 
of  piggyback,  containers  and  other  special  equipment  on  the  railroads,  while  not  designed 
particularly   for  trans-shipment  by  water,  lends  itself  well  to  such  service. 

The  design  of  a  specialized  terminal  will  be  influenced  to  a  large  extent  by  the 
variation  of  the  water  level.  This  variation  would  obviously  affect  the  design  of  transfer 
facilities,   particularly  for  the  roll-on,  roll-off  type  of  operation. 

The  study  will  be  divided  into  two  parts: 

1.  Type  of  facility  required,  including   roll-on,   roll-off,  lift-on,  lift-off,  conveyor, 
and  combinations  of  these  types. 

2.  Location   considerations,   including   type   of   terminal,   dock   facilities,   rail   facil- 
ities, highway  facilities,  utilities,  and  the  nature  of  the  waterways. 

Roll-on,  roll-off  facilities  would  include  ferries  or  barge-type  operation  in  which 
rail  cars  are  moved  directly  onto  and  off  of  the  water  carrier. 

Lift-on,  lift-off  facilities  involve  the  use  of  cranes  of  sufficient  capacity  to  handle 
the  cargo  involved.  Containers  lend  themselves  well  to  this  type  of  operation. 

Conveyor  facilities  are  particularly  adapted  to  the  handling  of  bulk  commodities. 
This  would  also  include   the  handling  of  materials  through  pipelines. 

Combinations  of  the  above  types  of  facilities  would  be  embodied  in  a  general  cargo 
handling  terminal. 


600 Waterways   and   Harbors 

The  nature  of  the  cargo  to  be  handled  would  influence  the  type  of  terminal.  The 
inland  origins  and  destinations,  and  access  from  land  and  sea,  will  influence  the  choice 
of  location. 

The  size  and  number  of  vessels,  and  local  conditions  of  tide,  wind,  current  and 
accessibility,  will  influence  the  type  of  ship  berth.  Ship  facilities  may  be  grouped  into 
five  general  types:  (1)  wharves  on  slips  dredged  into  the  shore,  (2)  finger  piers  project- 
ing out  from  the  shore,  (3)  marginal  wharves  paralleling  the  shore,  (4)  ferry  type  slips 
and   (S)   offshore  berths. 

Rail  facilities  should  be  as  complete  as  possible,  and  of  a  capacity  sufficient  to 
handle  the  inbound  and  outbound  cargoes  with  a  minimum  of  delay  and  additional 
switch  moves.  It  follows  that  accepted  practices  as  to  grade,  curvature,  track  centers, 
etc.,  should  be  followed.  The  criteria  for  the  roll-on,  roll-off,  lift-on  and  lift-off  facil- 
ities would  be  quite  similar  in  so  far  as  storage,  classification  and  other  rail  facilities 
are  concerned.  A  conveyor  type  of  operation  would  probably  require  radically  different 
rail  facilities,  such  as  hump  yards  and  car  dumpers,  and  lend  itself  well  to  automation. 

Pipeline  facilities,  particularly  with  respect  to  petroleum  products,  introduce  special 
problems,  including  fire  protection   and  contamination  of  the  waterway. 

Highway  access  should  be  adequate,  with  special  emphasis  on  reducing  the  conflict 
between  rail  and  truck  movements,  and  may  involve  widespread  improvements  of 
access  roads. 

Adequate  public  utilities  would  be  required,  including  power,  water,  sewer,  com- 
munication and  fire-fighting  equipment. 

The  nature  of  the  waterway  will  influence  the  design  of  the  terminal.  Conditions  of 
tides,  current,  depth  of  water,  silting  and  water  area  available  will  affect  the  type  of 
piers,  design  of  transfer  bridges,  and  other  loading  facilities,  as  well  as  controlling  the 
size  of  the  vessels  using  the  terminal.  Climatic  conditions  are  a  factor,  particularly  where 
ice  is  encountered,  and  corrosion  and  marine  borers  influence  choice  of  construction 
materials  for  docks  and  piers. 

Because  of  the  scope  of  the  assignment,  there  still  remains  a  great  deal  of  work 
to  be  done  by  your  committee,  and  it  is  our  opinion  that  the  study  should  definitely 
.  be  continued,  resulting  in  eventual  inclusion  in  the  Manual. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Fenno.  Your  report  will  be  received  as 
information. 

Assignment  7 — Relative  Merits  and  Economies  of  Construction  Mate- 
rials   Used  in    Waterfront  Facilities. 

Chairman  Olsen:  Dr.  Shu-t'ien  Li,  professor,  Department  of  Civil  Engineering, 
South  Dakota  School  of  Mines  and  Technology,  Rapid  City,  S.  Dak.,  is  chairman  of 
Subcommittee  7. 

To  conserve  convention  time,  Chairman  Li  has  requested  me  to  report  to  this  con- 
vention the  salient  features  of  this  year's  progress  report,  centered  on  "Relative  Merits 
of  High-Strength  Steels  and  Box  Sections  in  Heavy-Duty  Fender  Piling  of  Waterfront 
Facilities",  authored  by  Dr.  Li. 

This  report,  published  in  Bulletin  574,  pages  205-211,  extends  Dr.  Li's  development 
of  "Energy  Design  Criteria  for  Fender  Piling  and  Relative  Merits  of  Different  Materials", 
presented  at  the  1961  Annual  Convention,  to  the  domain  of  heavy-duty  fender  piling 
necessitated  by  the  rapid  growth  in  size  and  tonnage  of  general-cargo  ships  and  tankers. 
The  body  of  the  report  consists  of  (a)  theoretical  development  based  on  the  maxi- 
mum kinetic  energy  due  to  impact,  (b)  inherent  shortcomings  of  cylindrical  fender  piles, 


Discussion 601 

(c)  advantages  of  using  high-strength  steels,  (d)  shortcomings  of  high-strength  steels 
to  be  avoided,  and  (e)  merits  and  versatilities  of  high-strength-steel  fender  piles  of  box 
sections.  It  also  lists  18  other  papers  and  articles,  published  by  the  same  author,  having 
bearing  on  the  subject  matter  of  Assignment  7. 


Mr.  President,  this  concludes  Committee  25 's  report,  and  your  committee  invites 
comments  regarding  this  presentation.  We  will  be  glad  to  reply  to  any  questions  raised 
thereon. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Olsen.  Are  there  any  questions  from  the  floor 
concerning  the  report  of  Committee  25?  Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Olsen. 

We  were  glad  to  see  your  committee  strengthened  by  some  16  new  members  for 
the  year  ahead,  representing  13  additional  railroads,  because  we  continue  to  believe  there 
is  an  important  place  in  our  Association  for  your  committee,  handling  the  engineering 
and  construction  phases  of  waterway  and  waterfront  problems.  With  the  hundreds  of 
millions  of  dollars  which  the  railroads  have  invested  in  waterfront  properties,  the  newer 
types  of  shipments  to  be  handled,  and  new  developments  in  handling  methods,  your 
committee  has  the  responsibility  to  keep  the  Association  and  its  members  currently  and 
fully  informed  concerning  the  latest  developments  in  this  field,  and  we  hope  it  will. 

We  hope,  too,  that  during  the  coming  year  your  committee  will  clear  up  any 
questions  which  may  have  been  raised  with  respect  to  the  propriety,  or  adequacy, 
of  the  material  presently  in  Parts  2,  3  and  4  of  your  chapter  of  the  Manual. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Olsen.  Your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Yards  and  Terminals 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  574,  pages  159-186] 

President  Code:  Our  next  committee  to  report  is  Committee  14 — Yards  and  Ter- 
minals, the  chairman  of  which  is  D.  C.  Hastings,  general  manager,  Clinchfield  Railroad, 
at  Erwin,  Tenn.  Mr.  Hastings,  if  you  and  the  members  of  your  committee  will  come 
to  the  platform  promptly,  we  would  like  to  hear  your  report  at  this  time.  Again,  I 
hope  that  all  members  of  your  committee  present  will  take  their  places  at  our  speaker's 
table,  your  vice  chairman,  secretary,  and  subcommittee  chairmen  taking  their  places 
here  at  the  main  speaker's  table.  Again  I  would  remind  everyone  present  that  they  have 
the  privilege  of  the  floor  to  comment  on  or  ask  questions  with  respect  to  any  of  the 
recommendations  or  reports  presented  by  the  committee. 

Mr.   Hastings,   you   may   proceed. 

Chaibman  D.  C.  Hastings:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association,  and  guests: 

Committee  14  during  the  year  1962  was  actively  engaged  in  the  study  of  seven  very 
important  and  timely  subjects.  Reports  on  six  of  these  have  been  printed  in  Bulletin 
5  74.  beginning  on  page  159. 

The  chairmen  of  the  various  subcommittees  have  worked  faithfully  throughout  the 
year  in  order  to  present  reports  to  the  Association,  and  I  am  happy  that  they  are  here 
to  make  their  presentations. 

Assignment    1 — Revision   of   Manual. 

Chairman  Hastings:  There  are  no  recommendations  for  revisions  to  Chapter  14 
of  the  Manual,  with  the  exception  of  those  that  are  being  presented  under  Assignment- 
2b  and  6a. 


602 Yards   and   Terminals 

The  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  F.  E.  Austerman,  chief  engineer,  Chicago  Union 
Station  Company,  is  still  actively  engaged  in  the  job  of  keeping  Chapter  14  up  to  date, 
as  was  evidenced  by  the  work  performed  under  his  chairmanship  in  1961.  Mr.  Auster- 
man will  continue  as  chairman  of  this  subcommittee  in  1963. 

Assignment  2 — Classification   Yards:  a.  RoIIability  of  Freight  Cars. 

Chairman  Hastings:  Committee  14  has  by  no  means  lost  interest  in  the  subject 
of  rollability  of  freight  cars.  The  work  that  should  have  been  done  in  1962  was  not 
accomplished  due  to  the  fact  that  no  funds  were  allocated  for  research  and  testing. 
Request  for  these  funds  has  been  included  again  in  the  budget  in  1963  for  the  Joint 
Committee   on   Relation   Between   Track   and   Equipment. 

b.  Design  of  Classification   Yard  Gradients. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  this  assignment  will  be  presented  by  Subcom- 
mittee Chairman  R.  O.  Balsters,  assistant  engineer,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe 
Railway. 

R.  O.  Balsters:  Recent  developments  in  the  design  of  classification  yard  gradients 
indicate  that  revisions  should  be  made  in  portions  of  the  data,  design  formulas  and 
criteria  now  set  forth  in  the  Manual  in  Chapter  14,  Part  3,  under  Sec.  D,  Art.  3,  page 
14-3-7  to  page  14-3-12.1. 

The  present  Manual  material  is  the  result  of  a  report  on  Assignment  7,  Design  Data 
for  Classification  Yard  Gradients,  published  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  59,  and  adopted 
for  publication  in  the  Manual.  This  material  was  reviewed  and  brought  up-to-date  in 
1961  by  adoption  of  Manual  recommendations  presented  in  March  1961  by  Subcommittee 
1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Full  automation  has  brought  about  various  changes  in  the  design  of  modern  classi- 
fication yards.  In  his  address  to  the  annual  Association  meeting  in  March  1962,  A.  V. 
Johnston,  chief  engineer,  Canadian  National  Railways,  stated  that  body  track  gradients 
of  0.1  percent  or  less  (predominantly  0.08  percent)  were  used  in  four  major  fully  auto- 
matic classification  yards  on  the  Canadian  National  Railways.  The  trend  is  toward  a 
flat  body  track  gradient  except  in  areas  where  severe  winter  conditions  prevail.  Tests 
indicate  that  0.15  percent  resistance  more  nearly  represents  the  average  resistance  be- 
tween the  crest  and  the  leaving  end  of  the  group  retarder  for  the  easiest  running  car 
under  most  favorable  weather  conditions.  The  average  resistance  formerly  used  was 
0.30  percent. 

Following  a  study  of  current  trends  and  practices,  your  committee  recommends 
that  the  present  Manual  material  be  further  modified  again  this  year.  Continuing 
progress  in  research  and  practical  application  of  various  theories  will  undoubtedly  bring 
about  more  changes  in  the  near  future. 

Accordingly,  your  committee  submits  for  adoption  the  proposed  changes  with  respect 
to  Part  3 — Freight  Terminals,  appearing  on  pages  161,  162  and  163  of  Bulletin  574. 
Mr.  President,  I  so  move. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Assignment  3 — Scales  Used  in  Railway  Service,  Collaborating  with 
Committee   18. 

Chairman  Hastings:  Although  no  reports  will  be  presented  by  the  Scale  Subcom- 
mittee, we  feel  that  the  work  that  has  been  accomplished  by  them  in  1962  is  of  such 
importance  that  the  Association  should  be  advised  of  the  current  status  of  the  subjects 
being  studied.  I  would  like  to  ask  W.  P.  Buchanan,  supervisor  of  scale  inspectors,  Penn- 
sylvania Raflrdad,  to  comment  on  the  status  of  the  work  of  his  subcommittee. 


Discussion 603 

\Y    P.   Buchanan:    Mr.  President,  members  of  the   Association  and  guests: 
During    the    past    year    our    committee    has    been    studying    three    rather    lengthy 
assignments: 

a.  Specifications  Governing  the  Manufacture  and  Installation  of  Electronic  Track 
Scales — This  assignment  will  require  considerable  research  and  will  be  presented  in  more 
than  one  part.  Part  1,  Introduction,  is  expected  out  of  the  subcommittee  later  this  year 
and  it  is  hoped  that  a  final  report  on  this  matter  will  be  presented  in  1964. 

b.  Specifications  Governing  the  Manufacture  and  Installation  of  Automatic  Indi- 
cating and  Recording  Devices  for  Large-Capacity  Scales — Considerable  work  has  been 
done  on  this  assignment,  and  with  the  fine  assistance  on  the  part  of  the  Scale  Manu- 
facturers Association,  a  progress  report  on  this  assignment  is  expected  next  year. 

c.  Study  of  the  Accuracies  of  Weights  Obtained  in  Motion  Weighing — Data  have 
been  received  from  different  methods  of  motion  weighing  from  various  sections  of  the 
country.  It  is  our  plan  to  present  an  information  report  on  each  mode  of  motion 
weighing  as  the  data  are  compiled. 

In  addition,  our  committee  during  the  latter  part  of  the  year,  requested  the  execu- 
tive Secretary  of  the  National  Conference  of  Weights  and  Measures  to  present  to  their 
Committee  on  Specifications  and  Tolerances,  a  letter  of  protest  to  the  suggested  change 
of  the  National  Code,  shown  in  National  Bureau  of  Standards  Handbook  H.44.  This 
change  would  reduce  the  present  maintenance  tolerance  applicable  to  railway  track  scales 
from  0.2  to  0.1  percent.  This  protest  was  made  by  our  committee  because  we  feel  that 
an  accuracy  within  0.1  percent  for  railway  track  scales  is  not  realistic,  it  is  not  uni- 
formly obtainable  and  cannot  be  economically  maintained  by  the  railway  industry. 
Furthermore,  we  feel  that  such  a  tolerance  for  railway  track  scales  will  discourage  the 
developments  of  new  modes  of  weighing  and  devices  which  may  be  even  more  economical 
than  those  currently  in  use. 

Assignment   4 — Facilities    for   Freight-Car    Cleaning    and    Washing. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  Assignment  4  will  be  presented  by  Subcom- 
mittee Chairman  M.  H.  Aldrich,  senior  civil  engineer.  New  York  Central  System. 

M.  H.  Aldrich:  The  report  of  your  committee  on  Assignment  4  appears  in  Bulletin 
574,   November   1962. 

Several  railroads  have  recently  installed  facilities  for  freight  car  cleaning  in  which 
cuts  of  from  10  to  35  cars  are  moved  through  a  concentrated  working  area  by  means 
of  a  car  puller.  This  report  describes  in  detail  a  few  of  these  installations.  One  railroad 
has  built  a  mechanized  facility  where  a  single  operation  is  performed  at  each  of  four 
successive  locations.  The  cuts  of  cars  are  advanced  one  car  length  at  a  time  on  a  definite 
time  schedule.  Refuse  is  handled  by  belt  conveyors,  cleaning  is  done  with  vacuum  clean- 
ers having  nozzles  up  to  60  in  wide,  and  washing  is  accomplished  by  an  air-operated 
telescopic  boom  equipped  with  a  multi-nozzled  washer  head  and  operated  by  remote 
control. 

Another  railroad  has  installed  a  facility  using  very  little  special  equipment.  Cut^  ol 
about  35  cars  are  handled  by  a  car  puller  and  moved  about  Q  car  lengths  at  a  time  along 
a  400-ft  working  platform  where  cleaning  operations  are  performed.  Cleaning,  inspection, 
minor  repairs  and  necessary  washing  arc  completed  on  the  9  or  10  cars  before  the  cut 
is  moved  ahead. 

The  actual  rate  of  clean  car  production  varies  with  the  size  and  character  of  the 
facility  and  the  extent  of  the  repair  work  done.  Where  comparisons  with  former  methods 
of  car  cleaning  are  practicable,  a  substantial  increase  in  production  and  economy  of 
operation  is  reported  for  the  one-spot  method. 

Hull.    570 


604  Yards    and    Term  i  ii  ;i  I  •< 


This  report  is  presented  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be   discontinued. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Aldrich.  The  report  is  so  received  and  your 
recommendation  accepted. 

Assignment  5 — Mechanized  and  Electronic  Mail-Handling  Facilities. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  Assignment  S  will  be  presented  by  Subcom- 
mittee   Chairman    C.    E.   Stoecker,   special   engineer,    Louisville   and   Nashville    Railroad. 

C.   E.   Stoecker:    Mr.   President,   Mr.   Chairman,   members   of   AREA   and  guests: 

Our  report  on  mechanized  and  electronic  mail-handling  facilities  can  be  found  in 
the  November   1962   Bulletin   No.   574,  pages   168-172. 

Our  study  revealed  that  such  a  mail-handling  system  cannot  be  a  factory-made 
package  deal  but  must  be  planned,  developed  and  more  or  less  tailor-made  in  order  to 
satisfy  the  needs  peculiar  only  to  that  particular  mail  handling  site. 

Your  committee  submits  the  report  as  published  as  information  with  the  recom- 
mendation that  the  subject  be  discontinued. 

President  Code:  The  report  will  be  so  received,  Mr.  Stoecker. 

Assignment  6 — Facilities  for  Loading  and  Unloading  Rail-Truck  Freight 
Equipment. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  Assignment  6  will  be  presented  by  Subcom- 
mittee Chairman  F.  A.  Hess,  maintenance  of  way  engineer,  Indiana  Harbor  Belt  Railroad. 

F.  A.  Hess:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

The  two  reports  being  submitted:  Assignment  6a — Facilities  for  Loading  and  Un- 
loading Rail-Truck  Freight  Equipment,  and  Assignment  6b — Facilities  for  Loading  and 
Unloading  Multi-Level  Automobile  Cars,  cover  the  present  methods  of  handling  these 
items.  Because  of  the  many  variations,  the  layouts  shown  in  the  reports  are  of  a  very 
general  nature.  However,  we  should  not  become  complacent  and  accept  these  as  the 
ultimate,  but  rather  use  them  as  a  springboard  for  better  and  more  efficient  arrangements. 

Surely  someone  will  develop  an  idea  that  will  permit  faster  loading  and  unloading 
of  cars,  trucks  and  containers;  someone  will  design  an  improved  container;  and  some- 
one will  come  up  with  an  idea  that  will  reduce  the  pavement  widths  required  in  some 
of  the  schemes  so  as  to  allow  more  tracks  in  a  given  area  and  consequent  handling 
of   more   cars,   trucks  or   containers. 

Coal  is  being  loaded  and  shipped  in  integral  trains  and  unloaded  at  destination  as 
the  train  moves  through  the  terminal  plant.  Why  not  work  to  this  end  in  our  piggyback 
operations  ? 

Before  expanding  your  facilities  based  on  present  designs,  may  I  suggest  you 
explore  plans  for  more  advanced  operations.  You  may  otherwise  find  yourself  behind 
the  times. 

The  report  on  Assignment  6a  appears  on  pages  173-177  in  Bulletin  574.  This  assign- 
ment covers  the  four  types  of  facilities  described  in  the  Manual  on  pages  14-3-17  and 
14-3-18  which  are:  end  loading,  side  loading,  overhead  loading  and  the  combination 
rail-highway  vehicle.  Your  committee  recommends  that  the  drawings  appearing  in  the 
Bulletin  illustrating  the  four  types  of  facilities — Figs.  4  to  7,  incl.,  on  pages  174  to 
177  incl. — be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual,  adding  them  after  the  present 
material   on   page   14-3-18. 

Mr.  President,  I  so  move. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Mr.  Hess:  The  report  on  Assignment  6b,  covering  facilities  for  loading  and  unload- 
ing  multi-level   automobile   cars,   appears  on   page   173,   Bulletin   574,  and   the  drawings 


Discussion  605 


showing  the  supporting  facilities  are  shown  as  Fig.  1  on  page  178  and  Fig.  2  on  page 
179  of  the  Bulletin. 

This  report  is  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be  continued. 

President  Code:   Thank  you,  Mr.  Hess.  Your  report  will  be  so  received. 

Assignment  7 — Waterfront   Terminals. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  Assignment  7  will  be  presented  by  W.  H.  Pol- 
lard, division  engineer,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway. 

W.  H.  Pollard:   Mr.  President,  Mr.  Chairman,  members  and  guests: 

Your  committee  presents  as  information  under  Assignment  7  a  report  covering 
ship  loading  and  unloading  facilities  for  ore  on  the  Great  Lakes  and  the  St.  Lawrence 
River,  including  its  rail  movement,  which  is  published  in  Bulletin  574,  page  180, 
November    1962. 

The  report  describes  briefly  the  primary  components  and  operation  of  one  ship 
loading  and  two  unloading  facilities,  including  the  rail  movement  of  ore  from  mine  to 
dock  site  of  the  loading  facility.  Also  included  is  a  table  which  provides  pertinent 
information  on  ore  loading  docks  on  the  Great  Lakes  and  two  of  importance  on  the 
Canadian  side  of  the  St.  Lawrence  River. 

The  report  is  presented  as  information  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be  discontinued. 

President  Code:  The  report  will  be  so  received,  and  your  recommendation  has 
been  referred  to  the  Board  Committee    Thank  you. 

Assignment   8 — Present   Trends   in    Yard   Maintenance. 

Chairman  Hastings:  The  report  on  Assignment  8  will  be  presented  by  Subcom- 
mittee  Chairman   F.  S.  King,  district  engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad. 

F.  S.  King:  President  Code,  members  and  guests: 

The  report  of  Subcommittee  8  appears  in  Bulletin  574  and  is  presented  as  informa- 
tion with   the  recommendation  that  the  subject  be  discontinued. 

Improved  maintenance  of  yard  tracks  is  being  accomplished  by  the  use  of  better 
track  materials  and  increased  mechanization  of  maintenance  operations,  which  was  the 
subject  of  a  previous  report;  and  more  programming  of  maintenance  work,  better  de- 
ployment of  yard  maintenance  forces  and  fuller  cooperation  from  operating  personnel, 
which  are  covered  in  this  year's  report. 

Many  railroads,  in  an  effort  to  obtain  safe  and  efficient  yard  operation  and  main- 
tenance are  programming  most,  if  not  all,  of  their  major  yard  maintenance  work.  These 
programs  may  include  such  work  items  as  raising  and  tieing  of  body  and  running  tracks, 
turnout  renewals,  rail  renewals,  surfacing  and  lining,  welding  and  grinding,  weed  con- 
trol and  other  miscellaneous  maintenance  operations.  They  are  usually  set  up  on  an 
annual  basis  with  enough  flexibility  to  meet  emergencies  and  changing  conditions. 

During  the  past  few  years  the  organization  of  yard  maintenance  forces  has  under- 
gone considerable  change.  Economical  necessity  has  resulted  in  smaller  forces.  Section 
gang  sizes  have  been  reduced  and  territories  extended.  In  some  yards,  section  gang 
type  maintenance  has  been  entirely  eliminated. 

Mechanized  gangs  organized  specifically  for  the  work  to  be  performed  are  being 
utilized  on  the  heavy  type  work.  Day  to  da\  emergencies  and  routine  small  work  items 
are  being  handled  by  small  properly  equipped  gangs.  Augmenting  these  forces  are  spe- 
cialists such  as  welders,  grinder  operators,  lampmen,  etc.  Careful  planning  to  obtain 
optimum  utilization  of  available  forces  is  necessary  to  achieve  maximum  results. 


606 Economics   of    Railway    Location    and   Operation 

Top  efficiency  of  the  present-day  yard  maintenance  organization  depends,  to  a  great 
extent,  on  cooperation  from  operating  personnel.  As  an  example,  a  mechanized  raising 
and  tieing  gang  requires  absolute  use  of  at  least  one  track  and  preferably  two.  Most 
operating  department  officers  are  aware  of  this  situation  and  are  permitting  maintenance 
forces  to  hold  one  or  more  tracks  in  a  yard  for  limited  periods  of  time,  and  in  some 
cases,  from  the  time  a  job  is  started  until  it  is  completed. 

Reduced  budgets  and  mechanized  forces  require  full  cooperation  between  the  oper- 
ating and  maintenance  departments  in  all  matters  related  to  yard  maintenance. 


Chairman  Hastings:  Mr.  President,  we  made  up  three  minutes  on  our  schedule. 
This  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  14. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hastings.  We  appreciate  the  making  up  of  time 
You  have  done  a  good  job  in  directing  and  progressing  the  work  of  your  committee 
during  your  first  year  as  chairman,  which  is  evidenced  by  the  reports  that  have  been 
presented  here  this  morning,  and  the  progress  reported  on  your  other  assignments. 

With  yard  and  terminal  operations  of  all  kinds  becoming  increasingly  critical  in 
the  efforts  of  the  railroads  to  provide  the  most  expedited,  dependable  and  damage-free 
service  possible,  your  committee  has  a  heavy  responsibility  in  keeping  our  members 
fully  apprised  of  all  latest  developments  in  designs,  methods  and  practices  to  that  end. 
I  know  it  will  continue  to  do  this,  and  I  hope  that  it  will  make;  real  progress  on  its 
four  new  assignments  during  the  coming  year. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Hastings.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion    on    Economics    of    Railway    Location    and    Operation 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  574,  pages  111-129] 

Presdent  Code:  The  last  of  our  committees  to  make  a  report  this  morning  is  our 
Committee  16 — Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation,  the  chairman  of  which 
is  C.  L.  Towle,  vice  president — operations,  Detroit,  Toledo  &  Ironton  Railroad,  at 
Dearborn,  Mich. 

Due  to  the  recent  serious  illness  of  Mr.  Towle,  of  which  we  have  just  learned 
with  deep  regret,  the  presentation  of  the  report  of  this  committee  will  be  conducted 
by  the  capable  vice  chairman  of  the  committee,  T.  D.  Wofford,  Jr.,  staff  engineer, 
Illinois   Central  Railroad,   Chicago. 

Mr.  Wofford,  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  Committee  16  present  will  come 
to  the  speaker's  table,  I  shall  be  happy  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you.  Again,  I  solicit 
constructive  comments  and  questions  with  respect  to  any  of  the  reports  presented  by 
this    committee. 

Mr.   Wofford,  you  may  proceed. 

Vice  Chairman  T.  D.  Wofford:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and 
guests: 

Your  committee  is  reporting  on  three  of  its  eight  assignments.  These  are  presented 
on  pages  73  through  94  of  Bulletin  573  and  pages  111  through  129  of  Bulletin  574.  These 
three  reports  are  progress  reports  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  invites 
your  comments  regarding  its  presentations,  and  will  be  glad  to  reply  to  any  questions 
raised  thereon. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of   Manual. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  Subcommittee  1  is  continuing  its  work  with  the  aim  of 
completing  new  Manual  material  for  the   1963  report. 


Discussion 607 

Assignment  2— Study  of  Methods  of  Analyzing  the  Economics  of  Rail- 
way Engineering  Projects  Designed  Primarily  to  Improve  the  Quality  of 
Transportation  Service. 

Vice  Chairman  W'offord:  Subcommittee  2  is  progressing  Assignment  2  through 
assignment  of  its  various  phases  to  the  subcommittee  membership. 

Assignment  3 — Determination  of  Maintenance  of  Way  Expense  Varia- 
tion with  Various  Traffic  Volumes  and  Effect  of  Using  Such  Variations,  in 
Terms  of  Equated  Mileage  or  Other  Derived  Factors,  for  Allocation  of 
Available  Funds  to  Maintenance  of  Way,  Collaborating  with  Committees 
11  and  22. 

Vice  Chairman  W'offord:  L.  E.  Ward,  senior  industrial  engineer,  Pennsylvania 
Railroad,  Philadelphia,  will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  3. 

L.  E.  Ward:  Your  attention  is  called  to  the  progress  report  on  Assignment  3 
which  your  committee  submitted  and  which  was  published  as  information  in  Bulletin 
574,  pages  113,  114,  and   115. 

Some  of  the  factors,  other  than  traffic,  which  effect  costs  fall  under  the  general 
categories  of  (A)  Geographical,  (B)  Constructional,  (C)  Political,  (D)  Operational,  and 
(E)   Managerial. 

Without  specifically  defining  the  relative  importance  for  each  factor,  track  costs 
per  mile  of  track  was  plotted  against  traffic  density  over  a  wide  range  of  conditions  to 
plot  a  curve  from  which  the  formula  is  derived. 

Test  data  applied  against  the  formula  has  given  encouraging  results  to  date.  Still 
more  checks  are  desirable,  and  your  committee  would  appreciate  having  the  benefit  of 
any  analysis  you  may  make. 

You  will  note  the  formula  reflects  track  maintenance  costs  only.  Your  committee  is 
now  attempting  to  incorporate  signal  and  communication  costs  and  bridge  and 
building  costs. 

There  are  several  practical  applications  to  which  this  information  can  be  used  if 
properly  understood.  For  instance,  in  estimating  the  economics  involved  in  a  line  change, 
the  relative  effect  of  increasing  or  decreasing  tonnage  over  a  given  trackage  could  be 
projected.  Budgets  could  be  more  accurately  adjusted  with  change  in  traffic  volumes 
and  variances  from  normal  would  be  pointed  out. 

The  formula  was  developed  through  analysis  of  over  five  years  of  data  which 
related  costs  to  areas  of  known  traffic  density  or  cost  centers.  It  has  also  been  tested 
on  a  limited  basis  on  several  other  railroads.  As  I  indicated  previously,  we  would  like 
to  have  the  benefit  of  more  test  applications. 

Assignment  4 — Potential  Applications  of  Electronic  Computers  to 
Railway  Engineering  and  Maintenance  Problems  in  Research,  Design,  Inven- 
tory, etc. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  L.  P.  Diamond,  assistant  engineer — research,  Chesapeake 
&  Ohio  Railway,  Huntington,  W.  Va.,  will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  4. 

L.  P.  Diamond:  This  is  a  summary  of  two  papers  which  are  a  part  of  the  progress 
being  made  on  Assignment  4  in  Committee  16.  These  papers  were  published  in  Bulletin 
5  73  of  Volume  63  of  the  Proceedings  and  appear  on  pages  73  through  94.  The  first 
"i  these  papers  is  entitled  "Train  Performance  Calculator",  whose  author  is  Charles 
Sankey,  and  the  second  is  "A  Computer  Simulation  of  Railroad  CTC  Operations"  by 
C.  J.  Hudson.  Both  authors  are  associated  with  the  Operational  Research  Branch  of  the 
Research  and  Development  Department  of  the  Canadian  National  Railways. 


608 Economics   of    Railway    Location    and   Operation 

These  papers  are  being  presented  as  information  consistent  with  the  objective  of 
Assignment  4,  which  concerns  potential  application  of  electronic  computers  to  railway 
engineering  and  maintenance  problems.  I  would  like  to  emphasize  that  both  of  these 
reports  involve  procedures  intended  for  planning,  administrative  and  research  purposes 
and  are  not  designed  for  operation  of  trains  over  a  railroad  in  real  time.  It  is  inter- 
esting to  observe  how  they  highlight  the  importance  of  studying  train  operations  in 
detail  in  order  to  solve  complex  problems  in  the  design,  construction  and  maintenance 
of  the  railway  plant  which   facilitate  such  operation. 

Although  recognition  of  this  relationship  is  not  new — A.  M.  Wellington  wrote 
about  it  nearly  a  century  ago — the  use  of  high-speed  digital  computers  which  enable 
rapid  study  of  the  complexity  of  overall  railroad  operations  in  practical  detail  is 
relatively  new. 

Since  digital  computers  are  efficient  tools  to  simulate  actual  operations,  they  are  so 
employed  in  the  procedures  described  in  the  published  papers.  Perhaps  an  easy  way 
to  look  at   the  process  of  simulation  is  to  consider  it  as  mirroring  reality. 

The  Train  Performance  Calculator  as  developed  by  the  Canadian  National  is  a  pro- 
gram which  results  in  the  simulation  of  a  train's  movement  along  a  railroad.  This 
simulation  consists  of  introducing  into  the  computer,  via  punched  cards,  such  informa- 
tion as  tractive  forces,  train  resistance,  speed  limits,  track  profile  in  the  form  of  eleva- 
tions and  curvature,  temporary  slow  orders,  stations  at  which  information  is  required 
and  train  stops.  The  computer  involved  in  the  case  described  is  an  IBM  650  with  an 
accessory  IBM  407. 

A  program  which  processes  the  input  information  takes  into  account,  the  full  length 
of  the  train,  the  effect  of  track  curvature  and  elevation  on  train  retardation,  fore- 
casting brake  applications  for  reduced  speeds  or  stops  and  flexible  methods  for  calcu- 
lating locomotive  tractive  forces  and  train  resistance.  This  processing  is  performed  by 
means  of  a  step-by-step  solution  of  a  differential  equation  expressed  in  energy   terms. 

Resulting  therefrom  are  outputs  such  as  the  velocity  profile  which  graphs  the  speed 
of  the  train  at  various  stations  along  the  railroad,  tables  of  running  times,  station-to- 
station  times,  and  locomotive  power  factor.  These  results  can  be  put  to  good  advan- 
tage in  planning  optimum  routes,  grades,  and  curvatures  for  new  lines,  for  efficient  train 
scheduling,  in  assignment  of  power  to  accomplish  train  runs  in  specified  times,  to  deter- 
mine the  cost  of  extra  stops,  to  assess  the  effects  of  speed  restrictions,  and  to  determine 
the  effects  of  rolling  stock  and  power  on  schedules,  service  and  costs. 

The  Train  Performance  Calculator  is  also  used  in  the  larger  program  described  in 
the  paper  on  computer  simulation  of  CTC  operations.  Among  the  important  results  of 
this  simulation  is  the  determination  of  the  most  economic  number,  length  and  locations 
of  signalled  sidings  to  handle  present  and  future  traffic. 

The  principal  reason  for  a  computer  simulation  rather  than  a  manual  determination 
is  the  rapidity  with  which  an  optimum  answer  can  be  obtained  rather  than  a  workable 
answer  not  yielding  its  full  economic  potential  that  is  too  often  obtained  by  the 
laborious  and  slow  manual  method. 

In  evaluating  various  proposals  for  siding  configurations,  the  computer  program 
simulates  actuality  in  a  CTC  district  by  moving  trains,  predicting  meets,  deciding  train 
priorities  on  the  road,  arranges  meets  at  sidings,  evaluates  the  delays  to  trains,  and 
initiates   and   terminates  trains. 

The  logic  in  the  computer  program  is  that  which  a  good,  experienced  dispatcher 
would  use  in  his  every-day  work.  The  input  data  into  the  program  involves  complete 
specifications  of  all  trains  to  be  run  over  a  sample  period,  detailing  such  information 


Discussion  609 


as  schedules,  number  of  cars,  running  characteristics,  run  task-  enroute,  and  track  and 
train  running  time  data.  Track  data  are  supplied  in  detail  sufficient  to  specify  location 
of  signalled  sidings,  electric  lock  sidings,  and  the  car  capacity  and  switch  arrangement 
of  sidings  as  well  as  the  track  data  necessary  for  the  Train  Performance  Calculator 
previously  described..  The  Train  Performance  Calculator  outputs  arc  used  in  the  CTC 
simulation  figuratively  to  move  the  trains  over  the  road  and  to  extract  other  information 
typical  of  that  program. 

Due  to  the  nature  of  the  available  digital  computer,  the  logic  of  the  program  de- 
signed to  process  the  input  information  is  subdivided  into  three  parts.  The  first  is  an 
optimum  path  program  which  is  the  theoretical  trip  the  train  would  lake,  performing 
its  usual  work  along  the  way,  assuming  no  interference  from  any  other  trains.  Second, 
is  the  dispatching  program  initially  derived  from  the  optimum  path  program,  which 
initiates  and  terminates  trains  at  the  proper  stations.  At  first,  a  non-conflicting  path 
for  a  train  is  assumed  until  a  conflict  is  anticipated.  By  setting  horizons,  which  are  the 
earliest  times  any  train  in  the  system  will  reach  its  destination,  detecting  earliest  con- 
flicts and  moving  all  trains  prior  to  these  conflicts,  deciding  which  train  to  be  held  and 
resetting  horizons,  the  dispatcher's  program  logic  is  organized.  The  logic  of  meets  in- 
volves, among  other  things,  determination  of  train  occupancy  of  adjacent  sidings,  the 
availability  of  adequate  intermediate  sidings,  and  train  priorities.  This  logic,  which  is 
complex,  is  performed  and  evaluated  with  the  help  of  the  computer  quite  quickly. 

The  capacity  of  the  computer  determines  the  number  of  sidings  and  trains  over 
the  district  that  can  be  considered  in  the  CTC  simulation.  The  particular  program  for 
the  IBM  650  described  in  the  paper  can  handle  a  maximum  of  38  sidings  and  10  trains 
at  any  one  time.  These  limitations  could  be  exceeded  by  programming  for  a  more 
powerful  computer. 

The  third  part  of  the  CTC  simulation  program  involves  a  statistical  evaluation 
of  the  results  by  mathematical  distributions  of  the  number  and  duration  of  delays  at 
sidings,  delays  in  initiation  and  termination  of  trains,  traffic  peaking,  average  delay 
per  meet  or  pass,  distribution  of  system  activity,  and  distributions  of  interference  to 
each   class  of  train. 

The  program  yields  a  quick  evaluation  of  proposed  siding  configurations.  Deter- 
minations can  also  be  made  of  the  economic  significance  of  various  aspects  of  invest- 
ments in  CTC. 

The  proof  of  the  practicality  of  the  programs  described  in  both  papers  summarized 
lies  in  the  fact  that  the  computer  can  match  actual  operation  very  closely.  It  is  thus  a 
tool  for  rapid  evaluation  of  many  complex  railroad  proposals  for  the  best  and  most 
economical  aspects  without  interference  with  current  operations  and  the  expenditure 
of   relatively   small  sums  of  money. 

The  committee  wishes  to  extend  its  appreciation  to  Messrs.  Sankcy  and  Hudson  for 
their  cooperation  in  making  their  reports  available  for  AREA  use. 

Any  questions  or  comments  from  the  floor  on  these  papers  would  be  appreciated. 
If  any  of  you  wish  to  contact  the  authors  of  these  papers  direct,  I  am  sure  they  would 
be  glad  to  answer  any  questions  or  furnish  information  you  might  desire, 

Assignment  5 — Engineering  Methods  of  Reducing  Time  of  Freight  Cars 
Between  Loading  and  Unloading  Points. 

Vxce  Chaikm w  WOiioko:  Subcommit tee  S  has  received  approval  ol  the  Hoard  of 
Direction  to  continue  their  assignment  as  amended,  and  is  now  engaged  in  preparing 
a  program  of  investigation  and  report,  for  assignment  of  various  phases  to  the 
subcommittee  membership. 


610 Economics    of   Railway    Location    and   Operation 

Assignment  6 — Features  of  Economic  and  Engineering  Interest  in  the 
Study,  Design,  Construction  and  Operation  of  New  Railway  Line  Projects, 
or  Major  Line  Relocations,  Proposed,  in  Progress  or  Recently  Completed. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  In  the  absence  of  Chairman  H.  L.  Woldridge  of  Sub- 
committee 6,  the  report  on  Assignment  6  will  be  presented  by  G.  S.  Sowers,  research 
engineer,  Industrial  Engineering  Department,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  a  member  of  the 
subcommittee. 

G.  S.  Sowers:  Under  this  assignment  your  committee  presents  three  papers,  as 
follows:  Photogrammetry  as  Applied  to  Railway  Location,  by  J.  L.  Charles;  Keystone 
Dam  Relocation-St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway,  by  H.  L.  Woldridge,  assistant  chief 
engineer  of  that  road;  and  Abra-Skull  Valley  Relocation  in  Arizona-Atchison,  Topeka  & 
Santa  Fe  Railway,  by  George  Rugge,  assistant  engineer,  Santa  Fe.  These  papers  are 
published  with  our  report  in  Bulletin  574. 

[Mr.  Sowers  then  read  abstracts  from  each  of  the  three  papers,  concluding  as 
follows:] 

Mr.  Sowers:  The  committee  wishes  to  extend  its  appreciation  to  Members  Charles, 
Woldridge  and  Rugge  for  submitting  these  fine  papers  for  our  report.  Are  there  any 
questions  from  the  floor  on  these  three  monographs?  If  you  wish  to  contact  the  authors 
direct,  I  am  sure  that  they  would  be  happy  to  answer  any  questions  or  furnish  any 
information  you  might  desire. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Sowers,  for  your  interesting  summary  of  these 
reports.  Are  there  any  questions  on  these  reports?  Mr.  Wofford. 

Assignment   8 — Innovations   in   Railway   Operations. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  Subcommittee  8  is  currently  engaged  in  assembling  data 
for  a  progress  report  covering  various  aspects  and  ramifications  of  containerization. 

Assignment  11 — Review  of  Developments  in  New  Methods  and  Modes 
of    Transport. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  Subcommittee  11  is  gathering  data  and  studying  material 
for  possible  future  reports  on  the  economic  features  of  pipeline  operations,  air-flow 
vehicles,  and  high-voltage  transmission. 


Vice  Chairman  Wofford  [continuing]:  I  would  like  at  this  time  to  thank  the  sub- 
committee chairmen  responsible  for  these  assignments  for  their  efforts. 

R.  L.  Gray,  engineer  maintenance  of  way,  Great  Lakes  Region,  Canadian  National 
Railways,  Toronto,  Ont. 

K.  A.  Werden,  assistant  to  chief  engineer — staff,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Philadel- 
phia, Pa. 

W.  J.  Dixon,  director  of  industrial  engineering,  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  Balti- 
more, Md. 

A.   L.   Sams,  assistant  chief  engineer,   Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago. 

F.   J.   Richter,   Publisher,  Modern   Railroads,   Chicago. 

It  is  recommended  that  all  the  current  assignments  of  Committee  16  be  continued. 

President  Code:   Your  recommendation  will  be  accepted. 

Vice  Chairman  Wofford:  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  our  presentation  of  the 
report  of  Committee  16.  This  convention  concludes  the  term  of  C.  S.  Towle,  vice 
president — operations,  Detroit,  Toledo  &  Ironton  Railroad,  as  chairman.  It  is  most 
regrettable  that  illness  prevents  his  presence  here  today.  Mr.  Towle  has  given  out- 
standing leadership  to  Committee  16.  He  has  worked  diligently  and  tirelessly  to  further 


Association    Luncheon 611 

the  progress  of  committee  assignments  and  the  best  interest  of  the  Association.  The 
members  of  Committee  16  especially  want  to  express  their  appreciation  for  his  leader- 
ship, and  look  forward  to  many  more  years  of  working  with  him. 

Mr.  Towle  asked  me  to  express  his  appreciation  to  the  officers  and  directors  of 
AREA,  to  the  executive  secretary,  Neal  Howard,  and  to  all  members  of  Committee  16 
for  their  fine  assistance  and  cooperation. 

As  the  incoming  chairman  of  Committee  16,  I  should  like  to  introduce  the  new 
vice  chairman  of  the  committee,  who  is  unfortunately  unable  to  be  present  today — 
A.  S.  Lang,  director  of  data  systems,  New  York  Central  System. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Wofford.  We  deeply  regret  the  illness  which  has 
prevented  Chairman  Towle  from  meeting  with  us  here  today,  because  he  has  been  an 
exceptionally  good  chairman,  while  assuming  heavy  and  enlarged  responsibilities  on  his 
railroad,  and  I  wanted  to  tell  him  so.  But  your  committee  is  fortunate  in  having  you 
readily  available  to  step  in  and  conduct  this  presentation  this  morning,  and  you  have 
done  so  very  ably. 

We  are  pleased  with  the  appointment  of  Mr.  Lang  as  the  new  vice  chairman  of 
Committee  16,  and  welcome  you  as  the  new  chairman  for  the  next  three  years.  Mr. 
Wofford,  as  the  symbol  of  your  office  and  new  responsibilities,  I  am  pleased  to  present 
you   with   this  chairman's  gavel. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Wofford.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with  the  thanks 
of   the  Association.    [Applause] 

President  Code  [continuing] :  This  completes  the  program  of  our  morning  session 
today.  The  next  feature  of  our  program,  in  which  I  hope  all  of  you  will  participate, 
is  the  General  Association  Luncheon  in  the  Williford  Room,  directly  across  the  corridor 
from  this  room.  Before  you  leave,  I  would  like  to  remind  you  that  our  afternoon  ses- 
sion will  reconvene  in  this  room  at  1:25  pm,  to  continue  a  long  afternoon  of  committee 
reports,  beginning  with  the  report  of  our  Committee  24 — Cooperative  Relations  with 
Universities. 

I  now  declare  the  morning  session  recessed. 

[The  meeting  recessed  at   12:10  pml 


General    Association    Luncheon 
Friday,  March   15,   1963 

[The  General  Association  Luncheon  was  held  in  the  Williford  Room,  beginning  at 
12:15  pm.  At  the  main  speaker's  table  were  seated  the  officers  and  directors  of  the 
Association  and  several  special  guests.  At  a  long  table  immediately  in  front  of  the  main 
speaker's  table  were  seated  the  chairmen  of  the  Association's  22  standing  and  special 
committees.  In  greeting  those  at  the  luncheon,  President  Code  spoke  as  follow^:  | 

President  Code:  Members  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association  and 
guests:  like  the  size  of  our  business  session  this  year,  the  size  of  this  general  group 
luncheon  is  a  "far  cry"  from  the  size  of  our  usual  Annual  Association  Luncheons,  but 
I  am  sure  you  will  agree  that  it  provides  a  convenient  and  pleasant  interlude  between 
our  morning  and  afternoon  sessions.  If  it  does  this  and  satisfies  the  "inner  man,"  it  will 
have  served  entirely  as  intended  at  a  meeting,  every  social  phase  of  which  has  been 
strictly  limited  or  eliminated  in  deference  to  our  full  and  whole-hearted  participation 
in  the  American   Railway  Progress  Exposition  this  fall. 


612  Association    Luncheon 


Rut  we  have  chosen  this  occasion  to  recognize  here  at  our  speaker's  table  our 
officers  and  directors,  those  of  our  past  presidents  who  could  he  present,  and  a  few 
others  within  the  family,  as  it  were;  also  to  honor  our  committee  chairmen  at  the 
forward  speaker's  table  as  the  "real  special  guests"  on  this  occasion.  At  the  expense  of 
an  immediate  start  of  your  meal,  I  know  you  will  want  me  to  present  all  of  these  men 
to  you — which  I  shall  now  do  as  rapidly  and  informally  as  possible — and  you  will  help 
if  you  will  refrain  from  applause  until  the  last  guest  at  each  table  has  been  introduced. 
May  I  ask  that  our  guests  rise  when  presented  and  remain  standing  until  all  have  been 
introduced  so  we  can  get  a  good  look  at   them. 

[President   Code  then  introduced  those  at  the  two  speaker's  tables.] 

President  Code  [continuing] :  Under  the  Constitution  of  the  Association  as  amended 
last  year,  the  polls  for  the  election  of  officers  for  the  enusing  year  were  closed  at  12:00 
noon  today,  and  before  we  adjourn  this  luncheon  I  hope  to  be  able  to  announce  to  you 
the  results  of  that  election.  Awaiting  this  information,  I  hope  you  will  enjoy  our 
luncheon    together. 

[Luncheon   was  served.   After   the  luncheon  President   Code  spoke  as   follows:] 

President  Code:  During  the  course  of  our  luncheon  there  was  presented  to  me  by 
J.  E.  Wiggins,  office  engineer,  Southern  Railway  System,  and  chairman  of  our  Tellers 
Committee,  an  official  copy  of  the  Report  of  the  Tellers  [Printed  in  full  elsewhere  in 
this  issue  of  the  Bulletin]  on  the  results  of  our  1963  Election  of  Officers.  I  hold  this 
report  before  me,  and  I  would  like  to  read  therefrom  the  names  of  those  whom  you 
have  selected  to  direct  the  overall  policies  of  our  Association  for  the  coming  year. 
As  I  read  their  names  I  would  appreciate  their  standing  and  remaining  standing  until 
the  last  of  the  names  on  the  list  have  been  read. 

[President  Code  then  read  the  names  of  the  newly  elected  officers  and  directors, 
continuing  as  follows:] 

President  Code:  I  would  now  like  to  read  the  names  of  the  five  elected  members 
of  the  Nominating  Committee,  who,  together  with  the  five  most  recent  living  past 
presidents,  will  constitute  the  Nominating  Committee  as  a  whole  for  the  1964  election. 

[President   Code   then   read   the   names,   continuing   as   follows:] 

President  Code:  Our  new  officers  will  be  installed  at  the  Closing  Business  Session 
of  our  meeting  tomorrow,  which  we  expect  to  get  under  way  about  11:30  am  and  finish 
about  noon.  I  hope  that  many  of  you  will  be  present  for  that  ceremony.  Before  adjourn- 
ing this  luncheon,  I  would  like  to  remind  you  that  our  afternoon  session  will  reconvene 
immediately  in  the  Waldorf  Room.  We  have  a  long  program  ahead  of  us  this  afternoon, 
which  includes  hearing  the  reports  of  11  of  our  committees,  so  I  ask  you  to  assemble 
promptly.  The  luncheon  is  now  adjourned. 

Afternoon  Session,  March  15,  1963 

[The    meeting    reconvened    1:30   pm,    President    Code    presiding.] 

President  Code:  The  meeting  will  please  come  to  order.  We  have  a  long  program 
and  much  to  accomplish  in  this  afternoon  session,  so  it  is  important  that  we  get  started 
without   further   delay. 


Discussion 613 

Discussion  on   Cooperative  Relations  with  Universities 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin   576,  pages  397-405] 

Chairman  Code:  The  first  committee  to  report  this  afternoon  is  our  Committee  24 
—Cooperative  Relations  with  Universities,  the  chairman  of  which  for  the  past  three 
years  has  been  VV.  W.  Hay,  professor  of  railway  civil  engineering,  at  the  University 
of  Illinois.  If  Professor  Hay  and  the  other  members  of  his  committee  present  will  come 
to  the  speaker's  table,  I  shall  be  pleased  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  them. 

Again,  I  would  remind  you  that  you  have  the  privilege  of  the  floor  to  make  com- 
ments or  ask  questions,  and  I  hope  that  you  will  take  advantage  of  this  to  the  extent 
you  have  questions  to  ask  or  can  add  to  the  deliberations  of  this  meeting. 

Professor  Hay,  you  may  proceed. 

Chairman  W.  VV.  Hay:   President  Code,  members  and  guests: 

The  report  of  Committee  24  is  found  in  Bulletin  576,  pages  397  to  405,  incl.  The 
committee  is  working  currently  on  seven  subjects.  I  am  sure  that  the  reporting  subcom- 
mittee chairmen  will  welcome  questions  or  comments  on  their  reports. 

Assignment  1 — Stimulate  Greater  Appreciation  on  the  Part  of  Railway 
Managements  of  (a)  the  Importance  of  Bringing  into  the  Service  Selected 
Graduates  of  Colleges  and  Universities,  and  (b)  the  Necessary  for  Provid- 
ing Adequate  Means  for  Recruiting  Such  Graduates  and  Retaining  Them 
in  Service. 

Chairman  Hay:  The  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  J.  F.  Davison,  assistant  to 
the  system  chief  engineer,  Canadian  National  Railways,  will  present  the  report.  Mr. 
Davison. 

J  .  F.  Davison:  The  current  activity  of  your  committee  on  this  assignment  is  di- 
rected toward  determining  what  common  patterns  of  opinion  there  may  be  among  grad- 
uate engineers  employed  in  the  railway  industry.  A  questionnaire  has  been  developed 
for  circulation  among  railway-employed  engineers  requesting  their  opinions  on  such 
matters  as  employment  conditions,  effectiveness  of  their  university  curricula,  post- 
graduate  training   requirements   and   other   similar   information. 

Due  to  the  magnitude  of  the  undertaking,  the  nature  of  the  information  requested 
and  the  cooperative  effort  required  on  the  part  of  member  railway  organizations,  if  the 
proposed  questionnaire  is  to  reach  all  personnel  in  Engineering  and  Maintenance  Depart- 
ments, the  Board  of  Direction  requested  an  opportunity  to  review  this  project  in  rela- 
tion to  the  benefits  which  would  result.  Consequently,  a  special  submission  was  made 
to  the  Board  Committee  on  Assignments,  following  which  the  Board  of  Direction  gave 
its  consent  at  its  November  1962  meeting,  subject  to  a  few  minor  changes  being  made. 

Now  that  approval  in  principle  has  been  received,  this  assignment  will  be  carried 
to  its  conclusion.  Upon  return  of  completed  questionnaires,  the  information  will  be 
transferred  to  punch  cards  so  it  can  be  summarized  for  use  in  a  number  of  different 
assignments  of  Committee  24. 

This  progress  report  on  Assignment   1   is  submitted  as  information. 

B.  Bristow  [Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific]:  I  would  like  in  ask  Mi.  Davison 
a  question.  What  are  the  benefits  that  will  be  derived  from  the  <|iic>tionnaires  after 
they  have  been  received  and  analyzed? 

Mr.  Davison:  In  eliciting  the  support  of  the  AREA  Board  of  Direction,  Committee 
24   listed   the   following  benefit s: 


614 Cooperative    Relations    with    Universities 

1.  Provide    a    sound    background    for    Committee    24    activity,    particularly    those 
connected  with  Assignments  1  and  2. 

2.  Determine  the  type  of  industry  training  required  to  adapt  graduate  engineers 
to  industry  requirements   (Part  of  Assignment  6). 

3.  Determine  any  common  characteristics  which  may  identify  engineers  interested 
in   railway   work. 

4.  Determine   what  incentives  caused  engineers  to   accept  and  remain  in   railway 
employment. 

5.  Establish   any   pattern   of   opinion   which   may   be   associated   with   age   group, 
type   of  engineering  training  received,  etc. 

6.  Establish   the   range  and   extent   of   promotional  opportunities  for  engineers  in 
the  industry. 

This  is  an  incomplete  list,  but  does  indicate  some  of  the  purposes  for  which  the 
information  will  be  used.  Committee  24  requires  these  data  if  it  is  to  be  in  a  position 
to  recommend  the  action  which  should  be  taken  to  improve  the  reputation  of  the  rail- 
road industry  as  an  employer  of  graduate  engineers. 

President   Code:   Are  there  any  other  questions?  Thank  you,  Mr.  Davison. 

Chairman  Hay:  For  many  years  the  railroad  industry  has  been  represented  in  the 
Relations  with  Industry  Division  of  the  American  Society  for  Engineering  Education 
by  one  man  representing  jointly  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  the  American 
Railway  Engineering  Association,  and  Committee  24. 

J.  F.  Davison  ably  filled  that  role  until  recent  travel  restrictions  made  his  represen- 
tation difficult  to  continue.  He  was  represented  at  the  1962  meeting  of  ASEE,  held 
last  June  at  the  Air  Force  Academy,  by  E.  A.  Graham,  assistant  chief  engineer  of  the 
Colorado  &  Southern  and  the  Fort  Worth  &  Denver  Railways  through  the  courtesy 
of  the  Burlington  Lines,  which  hold  a  membership  in  their  own  name.  Mr.  Graham 
has  kindly  consented  to  present  a  brief  report  on  that  meeting  to  our  Association. 
Mr.  Graham. 

E.  A.  Graham:  The  70th  annual  meeting  of  the  American  Society  of  Engineering 
Education  was  held  during  the  week  of  June  17,  1962,  at  the  United  States  Air  Force 
Academy  near  Colorado  Springs,  Colo. 

The  program  theme  for  this  meeting  was  Interdisciplinary  Challenges  in  Engineering 
Education.  The  total  registration  for  the  meeting  reached  almost  3200  men,  women  and 
children,  which  made  it  the  third  consecutive  ASEE  annual  meeting  to  break  attendance 
records.  The  heavy  attendance  last  year  was  due  to  two  reasons:  first,  ASEE  activities 
and  the  programs  presented  at  its  annual  meetings  are  becoming  more  and  more  vital 
to  engineering  educators,  and,  second,  the  attractions  of  the  host  institution,  the  Air 
Force  Academy,  encouraged  ASEE  members  to  bring  their  families  and  tie  in  attendance 
at   the  meeting  with   vacation   plans. 

Due  to  the  imminent  departure  of  Major  General  W.  S.  Stone,  Academy  superin- 
tendent,  the  dean,  General  R.  F.  McDermott,  was  the  host  of  the  meeting. 

One  of  the  highlights  of  the  activities  connected  with  the  Relations  with  Industry 
portion  of  the  program  was  a  briefing  on  the  North  American  Air  Defense  activities. 
This  program  was  originally  scheduled  to  include  a  tour  of  NORAD  headquarters  at 
Ent  Air  Force  Base  in  Colorado  Springs,  but  due  to  the  extremely  large  attendance 
at  the  briefing,  the  tour  of  the  headquarters  was  cancelled.  Following  the  briefing,  the 
Relations  with  Industry  annual  dinner  and  business  meeting  was  held  at  the  Ent  Air 
Force  Base. 


Discussion 615 

There  were  many  other  interesting  and  constructive  meetings  on  engineering  educa- 
tion, and  attendance  at  this  meeting  was  time  well  spent. 

The  71st  annual  meeting  of  the  ASEE  will  be  held  June  17-21,  1%.$,  on  the 
University  of  Pennsylvania  campus  at  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Assignment  2 — Stimulate  Among  College  and  University  Students  a 
Greater  Interest  in  the  Science  of  Transportation  and  Its  Importance  in 
the  National  Economic  Structure  by  (a)  Cooperating  with  and  Contributing 
to  the  Activities  of  Student  Organizations  in  Colleges  and  Universities, 
and  (b)  Presenting  to  Students  and  Their  Counselors  a  Positive  Approach 
to  the  Attractive  and  Interesting  Features  of  the  Railroad  Industry  and  the 
Advantages  of  Choosing  Railroading  as  a  Career. 

Chairman  Hay:  Assignment  2  will  be  reported  on  by  its  chairman,  B.  B.  Lewis, 
professor  of  railway  engineering,  Purdue  University.  Professor  Lewis. 

B.  B.  Lewis:  This  committee  has  been  active,  and  with  the  cooperation  of  the 
members  and  the  officers  of  the  Association,  much  has  been  accomplished.  There  have 
been  several  formal  talks  by  members  to  student  organizations  at  various  universities. 
Inspections  of  railway  property  have  been  arranged  for  students,  and  there  have  been 
displays  of  railway  equipment  set  up  on   university  campuses. 

A  system  has  recently  been  set  up  by  the  committee  to  help  student  organizations 
obtain  good  speakers.  Our  executive  secretary,  Mr.  Howard,  in  his  usual  efficient  man- 
ner, has  made  this  project  possible  by:  (1)  contacting  and  obtaining  speakers  from 
various  railways,  (2)  advising  these  prospective  speakers  of  the  type  of  talks  the  com- 
mittee had  in  mind,  and  (3)  advising  the  deans  of  SO  selected  schools  as  to  the  avail- 
ability of  speakers.  The  response  to  this  project  has  been  encouraging. 

To  date,  12  railroad  addresses  have  been  arranged  on  12  different  campuses.  Eight 
of  these  addresses  have  already  been  made,  with  the  other  four  to  be  made  in  the  next 
couple  of  months.  Each  railroad  requested  to  provide  a  speaker  has  agreed  without 
exception.  I  would  like  to  extend  the  thanks  of  the  subcommittee  to  these  railroads  for 
this  splendid  cooperation. 

It  is  a  pleasure  to  report  that  there  are  43  student  affiliates  of  the  AREA  on  22 
college  campuses  who  have  paid  their  fees  for  the  current  year.  Since  the  status  of 
student  affiliates  was  established  in  the  fall  of  1960,  including  present  members,  there 
have  been  a  total  of  over  100  student  affiliates  to  date. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Professor  Lewis.  Are  there  any  questions  or  com- 
ments in  connection  with  Professor  Lewis'  presentation?  Mr.  Hay. 

Assignment  3 — The  Cooperative  System  of  Education,  Including  Sum- 
mer Employment  in   Railway  Service. 

CHAIRMAN  Hat:  The  report  on  Assignment  3  will  be  given  by  Subcommittee  Chair- 
man YV.  A.  Oliver,  professor  of  civil  engineering,  University  of  Illinois.  Professor  Oliver. 

\V.  A.  Oliver:  The  report  of  this  subcommittee  will  be  found  in  Bulletin  576. 
1  propose  making  here  just  a  brief  statement  as  to  the  method  this  subcommittee  has 
used  in  carrying  forward  its  assignment. 

The  subcommittee  has  followed  essentially  the  same  procedures  that  have  been 
used  during  the  several  years  that  the  projed  has  been  a  part  of  the  committee's  activity, 
with    only    minor   changes   from   year   to   year,   marie   in   the  hope  of   improvement. 


616  Cooperative    Relation  s    with    Universities 


A  questionnaire  has  been  sent  to  the  chief  engineering  officers  of  the  railroads, 
requesting  information  concerning  their  summer  employment  needs.  The  replies  were 
returned  to  the  subcommittee  chairman,  and  the  information  was  tabluated,  reproduced 
in  the  AREA  executive  secretary's  office,  and  sent  to  some  125  engineering  colleges. 
The  student   applying  for  the  employment   sent   his  application  directly  to  the   railroad. 

I  want  to  take  this  opportunity  to  thank  the  railroads  that  have  been  cooperative 
in   this  project. 

B.  Bristow  [CRI&P]:  I  would  like  to  ask  Prof.  Oliver  if  he  has  any  statistics  or 
information  as  to  the  percentage  of  summer  employees  who  finally  wind  up  as  regular 
railroad  employees. 

Prof.  Oliver:  I  am  afraid  I  can't  give  you  an  accurate  answer  to  that  question, 
Mr.  Bristow.  I  can  only  speak  in  generalities.  We  do  know  that  many  of  these  young 
men  who  have  had  this  experience  during  the  summer  months  with  the  railroads  have 
accepted  permanent  employment  upon  completion  of  their  work  at  college.  I  am  afraid 
that  is  about  as  exact  an  answer  as  I  can  give  you. 

E.  J.  Brown  [Burlington  Lines]:  I  would  like  to  ask  Prof.  Oliver  what  benefits 
the  railroads  derive  from  such  a  cooperative  program. 

Prof.  Oliver:  Mr.  Brown,  I  think  I  can  give  you  a  little  better  answer  to  this 
question  than  I  was  able  to  give  to  Mr.  Bristow.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  in  answering 
this  question  I  can  use  comments  obtained  from  the  railroads  themselves  with  regard 
to   the  benefits   which   they   have   obtained   through  this  program. 

As  a  result  of  this  annual  cooperative  venture,  many  embryo  engineers  have  ob- 
tained their  first  introduction  to  railroad  work  and  now  some  have  become  permanent 
employees.  Furthermore,  the  project  has  shown  these  young  men  that  there  are  excellent 
opportunities  for  an  engineering  career  in  the  railroad  field.  This,  of  course,  has  increased 
the  interest  of  the  engineering  colleges  in  encouraging  this  type  of  employment  among 
their  students. 

Summer  employment  also  gives  the  railroads  an  opportunity  to  observe  the  boys  and 
determine   whether   or   not   they   want   to   offer   them   employment   after   they  graduate. 

I  might  add  here  a  statement  which  is  primarily  my  own — that  any  activity  of  this 
kind  is  in  the  direction  of  good  public  relations. 

President  Code:  Thank  you.  I  would  like  to  attempt  to  answer  Mr.  Bristow's 
question.  We  have  used  summer  men  off  and  on  for  a  good  many  years,  and  my  guess 
is  that  50  to  75  percent  of  them  wind  up  as  permanent  employees.  I  started  out  as  a 
summer  man  myself  some  43  years  ago. 

Pat  King,  would  you  say  that  is  a  fair  estimate  on  our  railroad — that  50  to  75 
percent   of  the  summer  men  stay  with  us? 

F.  S.  King  [Pennsylvania]:    Yes,  sir,  judging  from  the  young  fellows  I  work  with. 

President  Code:    How  about  you,  Jim  Snyder? 

J.  S.  Snyder   [Pennsylvania] :   I  would  say   that  figure  is  very  close. 

Prof.  Oliver:  I  would  say  these  answers  are  in  support  of  the  opinion  of  this 
committee  that  this  program  should  go  forward. 

President  Code:   Thank  you,  Prof.  Oliver. 

Assignment    4 — Revise    the    Recruiting    Brochure,    "A     Challenge    and 
Opportunity   for   Engineering    Graduates — The   Railroad   Field". 

Chairman  Hay:  This  assignment  represents  one  of  Committee  24's  most  important 
responsibilities.  The  progress  on  the  latest   revision  was  to  have  been  presented  by  the 


Discussion 617 

assignment  chairman,  Jerry  Nebcn,  supervisor — track.  New  York  Central  System.  Mr. 
Neben  unfortunately  is  unable  to  be  here  today,  and  in  his  stead  I  wish  to  read  a  few 
sentences  from  his  report,  which  appears  on  page  402  of  Bulletin   576. 

Chairman  Hay  [for  Mr.  NebenJ:  In  developing  the  basic  premise  for  the  revision, 
it  was  decided  that  the  original  format  and  art  work  remain  the  same,  and  the  only 
changes,  as  required,  would  be  in  the  text  and  photographs,  the  purpose  being  to  keep 
the  high  quality  of  the  brochure  intact,  the  contents  up  to  date,  and  the  publication 
costs   down.    On    this   basis   the   Board   of    Direction   has   authorized   the   publication   in 

1963  of  20,000  copies  of  the  third  edition  for  distribution  by  the  AREA,  plus  any 
additional  copies  the  AAR   might  order  for  distribution. 

The  majority  of  the  recommended  changes  are  in  the  photographs.  Pictures  of 
more  modern  equipment  and  facilities  are  being  contemplated.  Text  changes  will  be  few 
and  of  an  editorial  nature.  A  new  section  will  be  added  to  cover  industrial  engineering. 

Chairman  Hay  [continuing] :  I  am  not  sure  of  the  exact  status  of  Mr.  Neben's 
work  on  photographs,  but  I  would  imagine  he  would  still  welcome  any  photographs 
that  anyone  can  make  available  to  him,  portraying  maintenance  of  way  and  other 
engineering  activities. 

This   is   presented   as   information,   Mr.  President. 

President  Code:  I  am  sure  additional  photographs  are  still  in  order.  I  don't  know 
whether   Prof.   Hay   has  been   informed,   but   the   Board   has  decided   to   postpone   until 

1964  the  republication  of  the  brochure,  the  secretary's  office  having  found  a  stock  of 
some  1800  copies.  That  will  give  the  committee  a  little  more  time  to  complete  their 
review  of  the  brochure. 

Chairman  Hay:   Thank  you,  Mr.  Code. 

Assignment  5 — Ways  in  Which  Railroads  Can  Cooperate  with  Univer- 
sities in  Developing  Research,  Including  the  Revision  of  "Suggested  Topics 
for   Theses   on  Railroad  Subjects". 

Chairman    Hay:    H.    E.    Hurst,    division    engineer,    The    Milwaukee    Railroad,   and 
chairman  of  Subcommittee  5,  will  report  on  Assignment  5.  Mr.  Hurst. 
H.  E.  Hurst:   Mr.  President,  members,  and  guests: 

We  are  happy  to  report  that  our  efforts  to  establish  a  petty  student  research  grant 
fund  has  been  accomplished,  largely  through  the  assistance  of  the  Association's  executive 
secretary  and  the  director  of  engineering  research  of  the  Association  of  American 
Railroads. 

The  following  rules  and  procedure  have  been  established  for  administering  the  fund: 

1.  Students  desiring  to  avail  themselves  of  assistance  from  the  fund  will  address 
a  letter  of  request  for  a  grant  to  the  director  of  engineering  research  of  the 
Association  of  American  Railroads,  U40  South  Federal  Street,  Chicago  16. 
Such  letters  will  have  an  appropriate  endorsement  by  one  of  tin-  student's 
professors. 

2.  In  their  letters,  students  will  agree  to  provide  an  itemized  accounting  of  the 
expenditures  involved  and  a  copy  or  summarized  abstract  of  the  report  on 
the  completed  study  or  research  project.  In  addition,  the  letter  of  request  will 
include  an  agreement  t<>  comply  with  the  rules  and  administrative  procedures 
set  forth  in  the  notice  concerning  the  availabititj  ot  the  fund. 


618  Cooperative    Relations   with    Universities 

3.  The  grants  and  payments  will  be  made  directly  to  the  students,  thereby 
eliminating   any   necessity   for   university   overhead   research   charges. 

4.  Any  one  grant  will  be  limited  to  a  maximum  of  $100. 

5.  Approved  letters  of  request  will  normally  be  vouchered  for  payment  within 
two  weeks  when  funds  are  available. 

6.  Any   project  related  to  a  "Railroad  Subject"  will  be  considered  for  approval. 

7.  Funds  will  not  be  used  to  cover  the  normal  expenses  associated  with  the 
preparation  of  theses,  such  as  report  typing. 

8.  The  director  of  engineering  research,  in  handling  requests  for  grants,  will  be 
provided  with  an  advisory  committee  consisting  of  one  member  each  from 
the  professorial  and  railroad  membership  of  the  AREA,  to  be  selected  by 
Committee  24. 

0.  The  director  of  engineering  research  will  keep  Committee  24  advised  of  grants 
made  and  such  other  information  concerning  them  and  their  administration  as 
may  be  deemed  appropriate. 

We  feel  that  experience  may  develop  a  requirement  for  some  modifications  or  addi- 
tions to  the  present  rules,  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  I  have  taken  the  time  to  bring 
them  to  your  immediate  attention  for  possible  discussion  or  suggestions  at  this  or  a 
later  time. 

This  is  a  progress  report  offered  for  your  information. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hurst.  You  may  be  interested  to  know  that  we 
are  making  a  very  modest  start  on  this  program,  with  an  appropriation  of  $1000  in 
the  research  budget.  Thank  you. 

Assignment  6 — Procedures  for  Orienting  and  Developing  Newly  Em- 
ployed Engineering  Personnel. 

Chairman  Hay:  Work  on  this  subject  is  continuing  under  the  chairmanship  of 
G.  B.  Pruden,  general  industrial  agent,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad.  Mr.  Pruden  unfor- 
tunately is  not  able  to  be  with  us  today.  The  ultimate  objective,  after  compilation  of 
data,  will  be  to  suggest  training  procedures  consistent  with  modern  requirements  of 
railroads  and  the  current  trends  in  engineering  education. 

Assignment  7 — Stimulate  an  Interest  by  College  and  University  Staff 
Members  in  Current  Railroad  Problems,  Including  AREA  Membership. 

Chatrman  Hay:  C.  L.  Heimbach,  lecturer,  Department  of  Civil  Engineering,  Uni- 
versity of  Michigan,  is  the  Chairman  of  Assignment  7.  Mr.  Heimbach  advised  me  by 
wire  that  his  train  from  Ann  Arbor  may  be  delayed.  There  may  be  some  connection 
between  his  absence  and  that  of  Mr.  Neben.  I  have  a  copy  of  Mr.  Heimbach's  report 
which  I  will  read  at  this  time. 

Chairman  Hay  [for  Mr.  Heimbach]:  The  purpose  of  Assignment  7  has  been 
specifically  interpreted  by  the  subcommittee  to  include  ways  and  means  of  engaging 
the  attention  of  college  and  university  teaching  personnel,  and  through  this  attention 
to  cause  action  on  the  part  of  the  teachers  that  will  result  in  a  beneficial  effect  to  the 
railroad  industry.  Your  subcommittee,  in  considering  the  numerous  ideas  advanced,  felt 
that  the  five  suggestions  listed  in  the  report  were  worthy  of  further  consideration  in 
implementing  the  subcommittee  assignment.  These  five  suggestions  included:  (1)  the 
instituting   of    faculty    summer   employment   programs:    (2)    sponsorship    of   a   technical 


Discussion 619 

paper  and  prize  for  college  students  writing  on  a  topic  in  the  field  of  railroad  engineer- 
ing;   (3)    sponsorship   of   research   on   college   campuses;    (4)    sponsorship   of   field  trips 
and  tours  for  faculty  members  to  railroad  installations;  and  (5)  sponsorship  of  seminars 
at  universities  to  discuss  specific  problems  facing  railroad  management. 
Mr.  Chairman,  this  is  presented  as  a  report  of  progress. 


Chairman  Hay  [continuing]:  This  concludes  the  presentation  of  reports  by  Com- 
mittee 24.  This  also  concludes  my  three-year  tenure  as  chairman  of  Committee  24. 
I  wish  to  express  my  sincere  appreciation  to  the  membership  of  the  committee,  especially 
the  subcommittee  chairmen  of  the  past  three  years,  for  their  loyal  support,  cooperation, 
and  willing  labors.  I  also  wish  to  express  deep  appreciation  for  the  close  and  whole- 
hearted cooperation  and  support  from  Secretary  Howard  and  his  staff.  The  several 
projects  of  Committee  24  require  an  intimate  association  of  effort  and  planning  with 
the  secretary.  He  has  been  unsparing  in  his  efforts  to  carry  out  his  portion  of  these 
responsibilities. 

My  remaining  duty  is  a  pleasant  one,  to  introduce  the  new  officers  of  this  com- 
mittee. First  I  would  like  to  present  the  secretary,  Professor  E.  I.  Fiesenheiser,  director, 
Department  of  Civil  Engineering,  Illinois  Institute  of  Technology.  Professor  Fiesenheiser: 

Our  new  vice  chairman  is  R.  H.  Beeder,  chief  engineer — system,  Atchison,  Topeka 
and  Santa   Fe  Railway.  Mr.  Beeder. 

Our  new  chairman  is  a  man  of  many  offices  and  works  in  Committee  24.  He  ad- 
vances from  vice  chairman  to  chairman  with  my  grateful  thanks  for  the  services  he  has 
rendered  in  the  past.  He  is  J.  F.  Davison,  assistant  to  the  system  chief  engineer, 
Canadian  National  Railways.  Mr.  Davison. 

This  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  24  and  I  hereby  relinquish  my  chairmanship. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Professor  Hay  and  your  committee,  for  another  year 
of  constructive  work,  and  another  group  of  interesting  and  helpful  reports,  which 
clearly  evidence  that  your  committee  is  in  close  tune  with  its  fundamental  purpose — 
cooperation  between  the  railroads  and  the  colleges,  to  their  mutual  benefit.  We  par- 
ticularly appreciate  the  continuing  interest  of  the  professorial  members  of  your  com- 
mittee, and  would  hope  that  a  way  could  be  found  to  interest  representatives  from  a 
number  of  other  campuses  in  your  work. 

During  your  term  as  chairman,  your  committee  has  initiated  a  number  of  highly 
worthwhile  projects,  which  I  am  sure  it  will  continue  to  carry  forward  in  the  future. 
In  this — to  the  extent  that  it  calls  for  assistance  from  our  membership  generally  in 
answering  questionnaires  or  taking  the  "railroad  story"  to  college  campuses — I  urge 
fullest  cooperation. 

We  deeply  appreciate  the  able  leadership  which  you  have  given  to  your  committee 
during  the  past  three  years,  and  are  sorry  to  see  your  tenure  come  to  a  close.  But  we 
have  every  confidence  in  your  successor,  Mr.  Davison,  and  think  your  committee  is 
especially  fortunate  in  its  selection  of  Pa-t  President  Beeder  as  its  vice  chairman.  Cer- 
tainly  Committee   24  will  be  in  good  hands  for  tin1  years  immediately  ahead. 

Mr.  Davison,  if  you  will  step  here,  I  would  like  to  present  JTOU  with  this  chairman's 
gavel  as  the  official  symbol  of  your  office. 

Thank   you   again,   Professor   Hay,   for  your  many   services  to  our  Association  and   to 

Committee   24.   Your  committee   is  now   excused   wiih   tin-  thanks   "i    the    Association 
[Applause] 


620  Wood    Bridges    and    Trest  les 


Discussion    on    Wood    Bridges    and    Trestles 
[For  report,  see   Bulletin   576,  pages  371-386] 

Presidknt  Code:  In  the  next  scries  of  reports  we  shall  hear  from  our  structural 
committees,  beginning  with  our  Committee  7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles.  The  chairman 
of  this  committee  is  K.  L.  DeBlois,  senior  structural  engineer,  New  York  Central  System, 
at  Chicago.  If  Mr.  DeBlois  and  the  members  of  his  committee  present  will  come  to  the 
platform,  I  shall  be  glad  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  them.  Throughout  their  presenta- 
tions, please  keep  in  mind  that  you  have  the  privilege  of  the  floor  to  comment  or  raise 
questions. 

Mr.  DeBlois,  you  may  proceed. 

Chairman  K.  L.  DeBlois:   Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and  guests: 

During  the  past  year  your  committee  received  notice  of  the  death  of  R.  P.  A. 
Johnson,  who  was  a  technical  adviser  to  Committee  7  for  many  years  and  a  member 
of  the  committee  from  1944  until  shortly  after  his  retirement  from  active  service  in 
1958.  Mr.  Johnson  died  on  April  22,  1962,  at  the  age  of  74. 

He  had  been  associated  with  the  U.  S.  Forest  Products  Laboratory  at  Madison, 
Wis.,  since  1918,  and  at  the  time  of  his  retirement  was  chief,  Division  of  Physics  and 
Engineering. 

As  a  recognized  authority  on  structural  properties  of  wood,  Mr.  Johnson  guided 
the  work  of  our  committee  with  respect  to  working  stresses.  He  was  most  pleasant  and 
cheerful,  and  enjoyed  numerous  associations  throughout  the  wood  engineering  profession 
and  the  lumber  industry. 

Your  committee  regrets  the  passing  of  an  outstanding  engineer  and  a  warm  friend. 

Committee  7 — Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles,  has  reported  on  three  assignments  in 
Bulletin  576,  commencing  on  page  371,  and  on  one  assignment  in  Bulletin  573,  com- 
mencing on  page  1.  One  of  these  assignments  includes  material  for  adoption  and  pub- 
lication in  the  Manual.  I  shall  call  upon  the  chairmen  of  the  subcommittees,  if  present, 
to  give  the  reports.  Your  questions  and  comments  are  invited  at  the  end  of  each 
presentation. 

Assignment  2 — Grading  Rules  and  Classification  of  Lumber  for  Rail- 
way Uses:  Specifications  for  Structural  Timber,  Collaborating  with  Other 
Organizations  Interested. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  The  subcommittee  chairman,  R.  E.  Kuehner,  structural  de- 
signer, New  York,  Chicago  &  St.  Louis  Railroad,  could  not  be  here  today,  so  I  shall 
present  the  report. 

Chairman  DeBlois  [for  Mr.  Kuehner]:  Subcommittee  2,  reporting  on  Grading 
Rules  and  Classification  of  Lumber  for  Railway  Uses,  submits  for  your  information 
proposed  grading  rules  for  hardwood  structural  timbers  and  recommended  unit  stresses, 
as  shown  on  pages  372  and  373  in  Bulletin  576.  This  action  became  necessary  because 
the  National  Hardwood  Lumber  Association  has  discontinued  publication  of  its 
Specifications  for  Structural  Stress  Grades  of  Hardwood. 

In  preparing  the  proposed  grading  rules,  the  committee  chose  two  standard  grades 
from  the  1960  rules  of  the  National  Hardwood  Lumber  Association  and  applied  addi- 
tional rules  for  selection  to  make  them  stress  grades.  This  was  acceptable  to  the  NHLA. 

In  accordance  with  ASTM  Specification  D  245,  tables  of  recommended  unit  working 
stresses  for  the  new  grade  were  prepared  in  three  hardwood  species  groups.  The  tables 


Discussion 62j 

were  published  as  information  in  our  report,  with  the  intention  of  submitting  the  new 
tables  for  pages  7-1-19,  7-1-20  and  7-2-7  of  the  Manual  at  the  1964  convention.  We 
invite  any  comments  you  may  have  to  offer. 

President  Code:  I  wonder  to  what  extent  hardwood  is  used  for  structural  pur- 
poses nowadays. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  It  is  used  a  good  deal  in  bridge  decks,  President  Code,  and 
for  bridge  ties,  and  it  is  generally  used  in  trestles  in  the  northeastern  and  central  parts 
of  the  country.  Since  the  National  Hardwood  Lumber  Association  has  discontinued 
publishing  its  stress  grade  data,  we  have  been  in  the  position  of  not  being  able  to  assign 
unit  stresses  for  structural  grades  of  hardwoods.  Subcommittee  2,  I  think,  has  done  a 
very  fine  job.  Lyman  Wood,  of  the  U.  S.  Forest  Products  Laboratories,  has  worked 
very  closely  with  us  in  assigning  these  stresses. 

President  Code:   Thank  you.  Are  there  any  questions  from  the  floor? 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  Mr.  DeBlois,  I  attended  one  of  your  meetings 
a  couple  of  years  ago  in  New  Orleans.  At  that  time  I  brought  up  the  question  of 
whether  we  could  increase  the  spacing  of  our  bridge  ties  on  open-deck  bridges.  Has 
there  been  any  study  or  any  consideration  given  to  that  matter  since  the  meeting  in 
New  Orleans? 

Chairman  DeBlois:    I  don't  believe  there  has,  Mr.  Woolford. 

Mr.  Woolford:  I  think  we  have  been  carrying  for  many  years  the  same  old  spacing 
for  open-deck  bridge  ties  that  was  applicable  for  light  rail  even  though  we  have  gone 
to  heavier  rail  sections  and  better  grades  of  timber.  It  appeared  at  the  time  of  your 
meeting  that  we  should  get  into  a  study  to  see  if  we  could  eliminate  some  bridge  ties 
by   spacing  them   wider  on   open-deck   trestles. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  That  is  a  worthwhile  subject,  Mr.  Woolford,  and  we  shall 
put  it  on  the  agenda.  On  our  road  we  use  the  12-in  spacing,  and  have  for  years,  on 
steel  beams  and  deck  girders.  We  also  use  4-in  brine  blocks. 

The  objection  our  people  have  to  widening  the  tie  spacing  is  that  if  the  ties  are 
too  far  apart,  the  wave  motion  in  the  rails  becomes  more  pronounced,  which  tends  to 
make  the  ties  rock  more,  causing  increased  wear. 

Mr.  Woolford:  I  think  those  brine  blocks  are  an  old  carry-over.  I  polled  most  of 
the  railroads  a  number  of  years  ago  to  find  out  whether  to  retain  the  brine  blocks  or 
not.  The  majority  of  those  I  got  answers  from  had  abandoned  the  brine  blocks  because 
of  the  increased  fire  hazard  they  cause. 

Assignment  4 — Methods  of  Fireproohng  Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles, 
including   Fire-Retardant  Paints. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  Our  next  report  is  on  Assignment  4  and  will  be  presented  by 
Subcommittee  Chairman  A.  L.  Leach,  assistant  engineer  of  bridges.  Illinois  Central 
Railroad. 

A.  L.  Leach:  Your  committee  submits,  for  adoption  and  publication  in  the  Manual. 
Specifications  for  Fire-Retardant  Coatings  for  Creosoted  Wood,  published  in  Bulletin 
576,  pages  373  to  383,  incl.  These  specifications  were  orginally  published  as  information 
in  Bulletin  562,  January  1961.  This  material  has  received  the  endorsement  of  the  com- 
mittee by  letter  ballot  in  compliance  with  the  regulations  of  the  Association, 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  these  specifications  be  adopted  and  published  in  the 
Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  pul  to  a  vote,  ;<n<]  was  carried  I 


622 Wood   Bridges   and   Trestles 

Assignment  6 — Applications  of  Synthetic  Resins  and  Adhesives  to 
Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles,  Collaborating  with  Committees  8  and  15. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  Our  next  report  is  on  Assignment  6.  It  will  be  presented  by 
the  Subcommittee  Chairman  L.  R.  Kubacki,  area  engineer — structures,  Pennsylvania 
Railroad. 

L.  R.  Kubacki:  The  uses  for  synthetic  resins  and  adhesives  covered  in  this  report 
were  selected  from  construction  and  maintenance  applications  which  could  not  be  com- 
pletely solved  with  other  available  products. 

In  the  epoxy  compounds  we  have  a  versatile  chemical  which  can  provide  products 
with  a  wide  range  of  properties.  When  accurately  proportioned  and  applied  in  accordance 
with  recommended  practice  they  can  be  useful  to  our  industry. 

This  committee  will  continue  its  study  to  secure  additional  formulations  to  meet 
our   construction   and  maintenance   requirements. 

Assignment  7 — Repeated  Loading  of   Timber  Structures. 

Chairman  DeBlois:  Our  last  report  is  on  Assignment  7  and  will  be  presented  by 
C.  V.  Lund,  assistant  to  chief  engineer,  Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad. 

C.  V.  Lund:  Bulletin  576  contains  a  synopsis  of  tests  conducted  at  the  AAR  Re- 
search Center  on  24  full-size  glued  laminated  Douglas  fir  stringers  in  repeated  loading, 
with  particular  reference  to  strengths  in  horizontal  shear.  These  tests  developed  average 
shear  strengths  at  2  million  cycles  in  the  range  of  275  to  350  psi  for  varying  position 
of  loads,  as  compared  to  150  psi  currently  allowed  in  design,  based  however  on  long 
duration  of  static  loading.  A  preceding  exploratory  group  developed  average  shear 
strength  of  about  180  psi  when  symmetrically  loaded.  The  results  indicate  that  unit 
shear  strength  varies  with  load  position,  and  is  not  a  definite  value  as  currently  assumed 
in  design. 

The  beams  used  in  these  tests  were  fabricated  to  a  selected  commercial  standard. 
Beams  of  higher  quality,  fabricated  to  more  rigid  specifications,  appear  to  be  needed 
for  economical   railway  trestle  construction. 

A  similar  series  of  tests  of  24  southern  pine  stringers  is  nearing  completion.  Both 
series  of  tests  are  part  of  a  more  extensive  program  planned  in  cooperation  with  the 
lumber  industry  and  the  Forest  Products  Laboratory.  Your  committee  regrets  that  due 
to  lack  of  funds  this  important  program  is  being  suspended. 

During  the  past  year  your  committee  received  the  report  of  the  Forest  Products 
Laboratory  on  its  research  on  basic  strengths  and  behavior  of  ^4 -scale-size  fir  and  pine 
stringers  in  repeated  loading.  This  extensive  investigation  was  initiated  in  1953,  in  coop- 
eration with  the  AAR  Research  Center,  and  completed  in  1961.  Report  No.  2236  of  the 
United  States  Department  of  Agriculture,  Forest  Products  Laboratory,  dated  January 
1962,  presents  the  results,  and  will  be  offered  for  AREA  publication.  Your  committee 
wishes  to  extend  its  appreciation  to  the  Forest  Products  Laboratory  for  this  outstanding 
constribution   to   original   research  in   the  strength  properties  of  wood. 

Mr.  Lund  [continuing] :  I  wish  to  call  attention  to  an  error  in  the  report  on  Assign- 
ment 7  as  printed  in  Bulletin  576.  The  last  word  in  the  second  sentence  of  the  first 
paragraph  appearing  on  page  385,  should  be  "decrease"  rather  than  "increase".  The 
sentence  should  read:  "Conversely,  as  the  loads  approach  the  center  of  the  span  both 
the  end  shear  and  shear  resistance  tend  to  decrease." 

This  completes  my   report,  Mr.  President. 


Discussion 623 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Lund.  Your  report  will  be  received  as  information 
and  the  correction  noted. 


Chairman   DeBlois:   Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  reports  on  our  assignments. 

President  Code:  Thank  you.  Mr.  DeBlois.  Wood  bridges  and  trestles  still  represent 
a  vast  investment  and  responsibility  on  the  railoads,  and  we  are  fortunate  that  over 
the  years  we  have  had  your  committee  to  keep  us  informed  relative  to  the  design, 
construction,  maintenance  and  protection  of  these  vital  structures. 

We  trust  that  your  committee  will  continue  its  good  work  of  the  past,  and  keep  us 
up  to  date  on  all  new  developments  in  your  field.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with 
the  thanks  of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Masonry 

[For  report,   see   Bulletin   575,   pages  223-240] 

President  Code:  We  will  next  hear  from  our  Committee  8 — Masonry,  the  chairman 
of  which  is  D.  H.  Dowe,  assistant  engineer  of  bridges,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  at 
Richmond,  Ya.  Mr.  Dowe,  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  your  committee  present 
will  come  to  the  platform,  I  shall  be  glad  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you. 

Chairman  D.  H.  Dowe:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and  guests: 

Before  proceedings  with  the  presentation  of  our  reports,  Committee  8  wishes  to 
express  its  sorrow  at  the  death  of  one  of  its  members  and  past  chairman,  Ernest  A. 
McLeod,  who  passed  away  on  September  21,  1962.  His  memoir  is  included  in  Bulletin 
575   with  our  annual  report. 

Your  Committee  on  Masonry  has  reported  on  six  assignments  in  Bulletin  575, 
pages  223  to  240,  incl.  Two  of  these  reports  include  Manual  revisions. 

Assignment  2 — Design  of  Masonry  Structures,  Collaborating  with  Com- 
mittees  1,  5,  6,  7,   15,  28  and  30. 

Chairman  Dowe:  Subcommittee  Chairman  F.  A.  Kempe,  Jr.,  assistant  bridge  engi- 
neer, Northern  Pacific  Railway,  St.  Paul,  Minn.,  is  unable  to  be  here  today,  and  in  his 
absence  I  shall  give  his  report  on  Assignment  2. 

Chairman  Dowe  [for  Mr.  Kempe]:  With  the  increasing  use  of  prestressed  concrete 
spans  it  became  apparent  that  a  specification  for  elastomeric  bearing  pads  was  necessary. 
Your  committee,  accordingly,  prepared  this  specification,  which  is  published  on  pages 
22$   and  226  of  Bulletin  575. 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  Part  18,  Chapter  8,  of  the  Manual  be  renumbered  as 
Part  19  and  that  a  new  Part  18,  entitled  "Elastomeric  Bearing  Pads",  with  specifications 
as  included  on  pages  22>  and  226  of  Bulletin  575.  be  adopted  and  placed  in  the  Manual 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded.] 

President  Code:  I  have  a  question.  Is  the  specification  for  elastomeric  bearings  pads 
specifically  for  a  pad  to  be  used  where  there  is  longitudinal  motion?  If  no  motion  Is 
contemplated,  is  this  type  of  pad  still  the  best?  It  seems  to  me  somewhat  different  from 
the  traditional  type  of  pad,  including  fabric. 

Chairman  Dowe:  The  AAR  Laboratory  has  made  tests,  including  longitudinal 
motion  tests,  on  various  types  of  pads,  and  this  specification  was  based  on  their  findings. 
This  is  not  the  final  answer.  Other  specifications,  no  doubt,  will  be  written. 


624 Masonry 

I  am  sorry  Mr.  Kempe  is  not  here  today,  because  I  am  not  too  familiar  with  the 
subject  myself. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Dowc.  Are  there  any  other  questions  or  com- 
ments on   this  item? 

[The  motion  was  put  to  a  vote  and  was  carried. | 

Assignment  3 — Foundations  and  Earth  Pressures,  Collaborating  with 
Committees  1,  6,  7 ,  15  and  30. 

Chairman  Dowe:  Subcommittee  Chairman  G.  W.  Cooke,  consulting  engineer, 
Columbus,  Ohio,  will  report  on  Assignment  3. 

G.  W.  Cooke:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Your  committee  has  completed  the  revision  of  Part  4.  Pile  Foundations,  of  Chapter 
8  of  the  Manual  and  recommends  that  the  revised  version,  as  published  in  Bulletin  575, 
be   approved   by   the   Association. 

I  so  move. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried.] 

Assignment  4 — Deterioration  and  Repair  of  Masonry  Structures. 

Chairman  Dowe:  W.  E.  Brakensiek,  assistant  engineer,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad, 
St.  Louis,  Mo.,  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  is  unable  to  be  present  today,  and  in 
his  absence  I  refer  you  to  the  progress  report  on  Assignment  4  as  shown  on  page  237 
of  Bulletin  575. 

Assignment  6 — Prestressed  Concrete  for  Railway  Structures,  Collabo- 
rating with   Committee  6. 

Chairman   Dowe:    Subcommittee    Chairman   J.   R.    Williams,   assistant   engineer   of 
bridges,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  Chicago,  will  report  on  Assignment  6. 
J.  R.  Williams:   Mr.  President,  Mr.  Chairman,  members  and  guests: 

Your  committee  has  completed  the  design  and  detail  drawings  of  a  recommended 
prestressed  concrete  box  beam  trestle.  In  addition  to  the  drawings,  specifications  for 
the  design  and  construction  of  prestressed  concrete  trestles  for  railway  loading  have 
also  been  prepared.  The  specifications  and  plans  for  this  trestle  will  be  published  as 
information  this  year. 

The  drawings  include  the  details  of  28-ft-long  single  prestressed  box  beams  in  both 
3 -ft  and  4-ft  widths.  Your  committee  is  now  proceeding  with  the  design  and  prepara- 
tion of  detail  plans  of  double-box  beams  for  28-ft  spans. 

Are  there  any  questions? 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  I  have  one  question.  At  a  meeting  you  had  a 
couple  of  years  ago  the  question  came  up  about  standardizing  prestressed  beams  so  that 
when  we  wanted  one  we  could  order  it  as  a  standard  piece  of  bridge  material.  Has  any- 
thing further  been  done  about  such  standardization? 

Mr.  Williams:  We  are  standardizing  in  that  the  geometry  of  the  block  sections 
conforms  with  actual  standards;  that  is,  the  wall  thicknesses,  sizes  of  the  voids,  and 
depths,  are  all  AASHO  standards,  so  anyone  who  can  cast  beams  for  a  highway  depart- 
ment can  also  cast  them  for  railroads.  The  number  that  will  be  stockpiled  will  depend 


Discussion 625 

on  how  many  the  railroads  will  he  buying.  The  pile  sections  als nform  to    \\SHO 

standard  prestressed  piles. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Have  you  any  idea  whether  thi^  standard  will  be  adopted  and 
used  by  the  railroads? 

Mr.  Williams:  Unfortunately,  the  few  prestressed  concrete  trestles  constructed 
since  we  started  to  prepare  these  plans  have  all  deviated  some  place  or  other  from  the 
plans  we  have  set  up.  Apparently  the  double-box  section  appears  to  be  the  most  eco- 
nomical, but  we  steered  clear  of  it  at  first  because  there  were  many  casting  yards  that 
couldn't  handle  it.  However,  1  understand  that  in  the  Southwest  and  Southeast  we  are 
getting  them  quite  economically.  This  is  one  reason  why  we  are  now  preparing  plans 
for  the  double-box  section. 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Subcommittee  6. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Williams.  Apparently  the  Rail  committee  is  not 
the  only  one  having  trouble  with  its  standards,  Frank. 

Assignment  7 — Quality  of  Concrete  and  Mortars,  Collaborating  with 
Committee  6. 

Chairman  Dowe:  Subcommittee  Chairman  J.  W.  Dolson,  assistant  to  chief  engineer, 
Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  will  report  on  Assignment  7. 

J.  W.  Dolson:  Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

Your  committee  has  prepared  a  "Bibliography  of  Important  Articles  in  AREA  Pro- 
ceedings (Vols.  40-63)  Relative  to  Quality  of  Concrete."  This  bibliography  was  published 
as  information  in   Bulletin  575,  page  238. 

This  subcommittee  has  the  continuing  assignment  of  maintaining  references  to 
ASTM  specifications  and  designations  in  Manual  Chapter  8  up  to  date.  Necessary 
editorial  revisions  have  been  made  and  were  published  in  Bulletin  575,  pages  239  and 
240.   Mr.  President,   I  move  that  these  revisions  be  accepted. 

[The  motion  was  regularly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Subcommittee  7,  at  the  direction  of  Committee  8,  prepared  a  nomenclature  and 
glossary  of  terms  and  symbols  appearing  throughout  Chapter  8  of  the  Manual  with  the 
thought  that  it  might  be  desirable  to  have  such  material  at  the  beginning  of  the  chapter. 
However,  the  list  was  so  voluminous  and  would  require  such  extensive  revision  of  tin- 
chapter  that  it  was  decided  to  defer  action  for  the  present. 

Currently,  subcommittee  7  is  revising  the  AREA  pamphlet,  "Instructions  for  Mixing 
and  Placing  Concrete." 

This  completes  the  report  of  Subcommittee  7. 

Assignment  8 — Waterproofing  for  Railway  Structures,  Collaborating 
with  Committees  6,  7  and  15. 

Chairman  Dowe:  Subcommittee  Chairman  R.  J.  Brueske,  assistant  division  engi- 
neer, Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad.  La  Crosse,  Wis  ,  will  report  on 
\-iu'nment  8. 

R.  J.  Brueske:   Mr.  President,  fellow  members,  and  guests: 

Last  year,  your  waterproofing  subcommittee  withdrew  the  specifications  i"i  damp- 
proofing  included  in  Part  3,  Chapter  29,  ol  the  Manual  The  material  specified  was  no 
longer  commercially  available,  and  the  specification  did  not  cover  new  materials  I  hat 
became  available. 


626     Impact   and    Bridge   Stresses 

We  requested  funds  for  the  1963  budget  to  prepare  a  performance  test  for  damp- 
proofing  coatings  and  to  study  the  effect  of  bacteria  and  other  deleterious  substances  in 
the  soil  on  various  dampproofing  coatings.  One  of  the  results  we  hoped  to  achieve  from 
the  tests  was  the  minimum  amount  of  water  a  dampproofing  coating  should  repel  to  be 
considered  satisfactory. 

Unfortunately,  due  to  the  reduced  budget,  funds  will  not  be  available  in  1963.  Since 
it  appears  there  will  be  considerable  delay  before  the  tests  can  be  made  and  results 
obtained,  we  are  in  the  process  of  revamping  the  specification  for  interim  use.  The 
revised  specification  will  most  likely  be  of  a  more  general  nature. 

We  are  also  continuing  our  investigation  of  the  use  of  epoxy  resins  as  a  water- 
proofing material  in  collaboration  with   Committee   7. 

For  1963  we  are  adding  a  new  assignment:  The  Investigation  of  Membrane  Water- 
proofing Joint  and  Edge  Sealers.  We  hope  to  be  able  to  do  some  preliminary  inves- 
tigation on   this  assignment  during   1963. 

Mr.  President,  this  report  is  presented  as  information. 


Chairman  Dowe:  Are  there  now  any  further  comments,  questions  or  suggestions 
regarding  our  report?  If  not,  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  8. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Dowe.  Your  committee  has  presented  a  number 
of  very  informative  reports,  which  indicate  that  it  is  keeping  abreast  of  all  new  devel- 
opments relating  to  masonry  structures.  We  appreciate,  too,  the  continuing  interest  of 
your  committee  in  keeping  its  chapter  of  the  Manual  up  to  date. 

If  there  are  no  further  questions  with  respect  to  the  reports  and  recommendations 
of  your  committee,  we  must  move  along,  so  I  will  excuse  your  committee  with  the 
thanks  of  the  Association.   [Applause! 

Discussion  on  Impact  and  Bridge  Stresses 

[For  report,   see  Bulletin    575,   pages  327-331] 

President  Code:  Our  next  structural  committee  to  report  is  Committee  30 — Impact 
and  Bridge  Stresses,  the  chairman  of  which  is  J.  W.  Davidson,  engineer  of  bridges, 
Chicago,  Burlington  &  Quincy  Railroad,  with  headquarters  here  in  Chicago.  Mr.  David- 
son, we  shall  be  glad  to  hear  the  report  of  your  committee  at  this  time. 

Chairman  J.  W.  Davidson:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association  and  guests: 

Unlike  most  AREA  committees,  Committee  30  is  not  responsible  for  preparation 
of  specifications  or  other  material  to  be  submitted  to  this  Association  for  adoption  and 
publication  in  the  Manual.  This  committee  is  instead  primarily  concerned  with  coordi- 
nating research,  and  testing  of  existing  structures  of  all  types  of  construction.  The  results 
of  such  field  testing  and  analysis  are  reviewed  by  this  committee.  When  tests  and 
analysis  have  progressed  to  the  point  where  they  appear  to  provide  information  which 
can  be  incorporated  in  specifications,  the  information  is  submitted  to  the  three  other 
structural  committees  for  their  consideration. 

As  all  members  of  the  AREA  are  aware,  its  research  is  financed  by  the  Association 
of  American  Railroads  out  of  railroad  earnings,  unlike  our  competition  whose  research 
is  largely  done  by  the  Government  with  tax  money.  The  AAR  has  found  it  necessary 
to  reduce  expenditures  in  recent  years,  and  this  has,  of  course,  been  reflected  in  the 
fact  that  it  has  been  necessary  to  defer  much  of  the  research  with  which  this  committee 
is  concerned.  Most  of  the  available  money  has  been  devoted  to  testing  prestressed  con- 


Discussion 627 

crete   spans,   since   it  is   the   committee's   feeling   that   research    in   that   area   of   rapidly 
developing  construction   techniques   should   be   given   preference. 

This  committee  is  reporting  on  five  of  its  ten  assignments  at  this  time.  These  arc 

presented  in  Bulletin  575,  pages  MS  through  331.  All  of  these  are  progress  reports  and 

are    presented    as    information.    I    shall    also    comment    briefly    on  some    of    our    other 
assignments. 

Assignment  2 — Steel  Truss  Spans. 

Chairman  Davidson:  The  AAR  research  staff  investigated  the  bolted  field  connec- 
tions in  a  310-ft  truss  span  on  the  New  York  Central  for  evidence  of  slippage.  This 
span,  over  the  Cal-Sag  canal  south  of  Chicago,  was  one  of  the  earliest  long-span  rail- 
way trusses  to  be  assembled  using  high-strengtb  bolts.  Strain-gage  readings  showed  that 
no  slippage  had  occurred  after  two  years  of  service,  and  there  has  been  no  loss  of 
camber. 

The  AAR  staff  also  assisted  the  Rock  Island  Railroad  in  investigating  a  vertical 
lift  span  which  tended  to  become  lodged  in  the  open  position  during  hot  weather.  Strains 
were  meausured  in  the  main  drive  shafts  during  operation  of  the  span  in  all  kinds  of 
weather. 

Assignment  4 — Longitudinal  Forces   in   Bridge  Structures. 

Chairman  Davidson:  In  the  last  year  tests  were  made  on  a  prestressed  concrete 
trestle  on  the  Seaboard  Air  Line  which  included  determination  of  traction  and  braking 
stresses.  The  AAR  research  staff  is  presently  preparing  an  analysis  of  these  strain  record- 
ings, to  be  published  sometime  later  this  year. 

Only  a  limited  amount  of  work  has  been  done  in  experimental  determination  of 
stresses  resulting  from  braking  and  traction  forces  acting  on  piers  and  pile  bents,  gen- 
erally in  connection  with  other  tests.  Evidence  so  far  available  indicates  that  the  present 
specification  requirements  for  longitudinal  forces  may  be  overly  conservative.  Further 
tests  are  necessary  to  prove  the  validity  of  these  data  but,  if  correct,  important  savings 
in  design  of  piers  and  abutments  could  result. 

Assignment  5 — Distribution  of  Live  Load  on  Bridge  Floors. 

Chairman  Davidson:  The  University  of  Illinois  study  of  this  problem,  based  upon 
the  data  presented  in  AAR  report  ER-S,  developed  equations  for  use  in  designing  steel 
bridges  having  monolithic  concrete  slab  decks.  This  report  and  the  proposed  equations 
have  been  transmitted  to  Committee  15  for  consideration  in  preparing  a  revision  of 
the  design  specifications. 

Assignment  6 — Concrete   Structures. 

Chairman  Davidson:  Beginning  in  1957  this  committee  has  periodically  reported 
on  field  tests  of  prestressed  concrete  girder  spans  ranging  in  length  from  20  to  72  ft. 
The  purpose  of  these  tests  is  to  develop  a  basis  for  an  unpad  equation  for  design  of 
prestressed  concrete  structures,  to  study  the  load  distribution  to  the  individual  girders 
of  such  spans  and  to  determine  the  distribution  of  stresses.  As  a  continuation  of  this 
program,  the  results  of  a  field  investigation  on  two  SO-ft  6-in  prestressed  concrete  spans 
of  the  Florida  East  Coast  bridge  near  Pompano  Beach,  Fla.,  appeared  in  report  ER-21 


628 Impact    and    Bridge    Stresses 

and  Bulletin  573.  The  purpose  of  this  investigation  was  to  compare  the  static  and 
dynamic  effect  on  spans  both  with  and  without  shear  keys  and  both  before  and  after 
transverse  post  tensioning  under  the  passage  of  diesel  locomotives  and  cars.  Each  span 
consisted  of  six  rectangular  hollow  beams  per  track.  The  two  spans  were  identical 
except  for  the  use  of  shear  keys  filled  with  cement  mortar  near  the  top  of  the  beams 
in  one  span.  Transverse  post  tensioning  was  accomplished  by  use  of  high-strength  steel 
bars  which  were  left  loose  until  a  series  of  runs  with  the  test  train  had  been  recorded. 
The  transverse  bars  were  then  tensioned  and  another  series  of  runs  made  with  the  same 
test  train.  This  investigation  showed  the  following: 

1.  Either  shear  keys  or  transverse  post  tensioning  is  effective  in  distributing  the 
load  across  the  deck. 

2.  Recorded  static  strains  in  all  beams  after  post  tensioning  were  less  than  cal- 
culated. Before  post  tensioning,  the  recorded  static  strains  in  some  beams  were 
more  than  calculated  while  the  outer  beams  without  shear  keys  carried  very 
little  load.  The  best  distribution  was  for  the  span  with  shear  keys  and  after 
post  tensioning,  although  the  improvement  over  use  of  shear  keys  alone  was 
small. 

3.  Above  50  mph  the  recorded  strains  increased  with  speed,  yet  the  maximum 
recorded  values  were  less  than  the  values  calculated  using  the  present  AREA 
impact    formula   for   masonry   structures. 

4.  The  lowest  impact  values  occurred  in  the  span  with  shear  keys  and  after  post 
tensioning.  The  maximum  recorded  total  impact  for  the  locomotive  in  both 
spans  was  less  than  that  specified  by  the  current  AREA  specifications. 

Another  investigation  by  the  AAR  research  staff  covering  tests  on  30-  and  55-ft 
prestressed  concrete  spans  on  the  Southern  Pacific  near  Houston,  Tex.,  is  also  presented 
in  report  ER-25  and  Bulletin  573. 

The  30-ft  span  consists  of  four  I-shaped  precast  girders  with  a  cast-in-place  con- 
crete deck.  The  55-ft  span  has  five  girders  of  the  same  cross  section,  also  with  a  cast- 
in-place  deck.  It  was  found  that  composite  action  occurred  between  the  precast  girders 
and  the  cast-in-place  deck,  and  that  actual  recorded  strains  did  not  exceed  calculated 
values.  The  live  load  was  spread  more  uniformly  among  the  five  girders  in  the  55-ft 
span  than  among  the  four  girders  in  the  30-ft  span. 

Except  for  the  72-ft  prestressed  concrete  girders  on  the  Santa  Fe  covered  in  Bul- 
letin 566  and  the  55-ft  spans  on  the  Southern  Pacific  just  mentioned,  almost  all  our 
tests  on  prestressed  concrete  bridges  have  been  limited  to  span  lengths  of  around  30  ft. 
This  committee  would  like  to  make  additional  tests  of  longer  spans,  particularly  in  the 
40-  to  50-ft  range,  subject  to  high-speed  train  operation,  but  so  far  has  been  unable 
to  locate  bridges  suitable  for  testing.  Any  information  on  such  spans  would  be 
appreciated. 

This  committee  has  previously  reported  on  "Static  and  Fatigue  Tests  on  Prestressed 
Concrete  Railway  Slabs"  based  on  work  performed  at  Lehigh  University.  For  this  study 
concrete  strength  was  the  principal  variable.  As  a  continuation  of  this  work,  the  AAR 
staff  conducted  a  laboratory  test  using  similar  pretensioned  beams  to  investigate  the 
effect  of  three  different  sizes  of  strands  and  two  different  levels  of  prestress  on  the 
static  and   fatigue   strength   of   the  beams. 

As  was  the  case  with  the  beams  tested  at  Lehigh  University,  static  loading  produced 
compressive  failures  in  the  concrete  and  repeated  loading  resulted  in  failure  of  the 
prestressing  strands. 


Discussion  629 


The  results  of  these  tests  are  being  analyzed  by  the  Research  Center  staff  and  will 
be  the  subject   of  a   report   by   this  committee  later  this  year. 

Assignment   7 — Timber  Structures. 

Chairman  Davidson:  In  1961  the  AAR  research  staff  prepared  report  ER-1  cover- 
ing tests  on  a  60-ft  glued  laminated  wood  girder  span,  which  at  that  time  was  the 
longest  such  span  carrying  railroad  traffic.  Since  that  time,  progress  in  "glu-lam"  con- 
struction  has  been  rapid. 

A  132-ft  glu-lam  girder  bridge  has  since  been  built  on  a  railroad  in  British  Colum- 
bia. It  is  hoped  to  make  a  series  of  tests  on  this  structure  later  this  year. 

Assignment    10 — Steel    Continuous   Structures. 

Chairman  Davidson:  At  the  expense  of  Iowa  State  University  the  AAR  research 
laboratory  investigated  the  fatigue  strength  in  bending  of  a  two-span  continuous  pre- 
stressed  steel  beam.  The  rolled  beams  were  prestressed  by  welding  on  high-strength  cover 
plates  while  the  beams  were  held  in  a  deflected  position.  The  prestressed  beams  carried 
well  over  2  million  cycles  of  loading  before  failure,  carrying  stresses  equal  to  those 
which   would  occur  in  a  bridge. 

Assignment  11 — Composite  Design  of  Steel  Structures  Having  Concrete 
Decks. 

Chairman  Davidson:  In  the  past  year  tests  were  made  of  a  concrete-encased  steel 
beam  span  on  the  Western  Pacific  to  determine  the  load  distribution  to  the  beams,  which 
showed  the  concrete  encasement  to  be  acting  with  the  steel  as  a  composite  section.  A 
similar  test  was  made  on  a  beam  span  on  the  Seaboard  Air  Line.  Stresses  were  also 
measured  on  a  60-ft  girder  span  having  a  cast-in-place  concrete  deck  to  determine  the 
degree  of  participation  of  the  deck  in  carrying  bending  stress.  Analysis  of  these  tt"-tv 
has  not  yet   been   completed. 


This  completes  the  resume  of  this  committee's  current  work,  and  I  should  know 
like  to  introduce  the  subcommittee  chairmen.  Will  each  chairman  please  stand  and  be 
recognized  as  I  read  his  name. 

E.   S.   Birkenwald,   engineer  of  bridges,  Western  Lines,   Southern    Railway,  chair- 
man of  Subcommittee  2. 

J.  A.  Erskine,  assistant  bridge  and  building  engineer,   Gulf,   Mobile  &  Ohio  Rail- 
road, Subcommittee  4. 

Professor  \.  M.  Xewmark,  University  of  Illinois,  Subcommittee  5. 

P.  L.  Montgomery,  division  engineer,   New  York,  Chicago  &  St.  Louis  Railroad, 
Subcommittee  6. 

C.  V.  Lund,  assistant  to  chief  engineer,  Chicago,   Milwaukee,  St    Paul  &   Pacini 
Railroad,  Subcommittee  7. 

Professor  James  Michalos,   New    York   University,  Subcommittee  8. 

K.  K.  Andrlik,  bridge  designer,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  Subcom 
mittee  9. 

\.  E.  Ekrem,  assistant   bridge  engineer,  Greal   Northern,  Subcommittee  11. 

|  Vice  President   L.  A.  Loggins  assumed   the  Chair.  | 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Are  there  any  questions  from  the  floor  reganlinu  tin- 
report  ? 


630 Iron   and   Steel   Structures 

Voice:  In  the  prcstressing  of  those  continuous  beams  you  were  talking  about,  was 
that  deflection   upward  before  you  welded  on  the  cover  plates? 

Chairman  Davidson:  The  centers  were  deflected  upward.  I  believe  a  description 
and  photograph  of  the  operation  are  shown  in  the  AAR  Research  Center  Annual  Report 
for   1961-1962. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Are  there  any  other  questions?  If  not,  we  thank  you, 
Mr.  Davidson.  Your  committee,  with  its  personnel  of  specialists  in  structural  design, 
both  railroad  men  and  college  professors,  and  with  the  help  of  the  AAR  research  staff, 
continues  to  render  invaluable  assistance  to  our  other  structural  committees,  which  they 
could  get  in  no  other  way. 

I  know  that  the  college  representatives  on  your  committee  make  a  vital  contribution 
to  your  work;  and  while  I  am  sure  you  are  fully  aware  of  this,  and  that  it  is  appre- 
ciated, I  would  like  to  take  this  opportunity  to  say  "thank  you"  to  these  men  on  behalf 
of  our  Association  as  a  whole. 

I  note,  in  several  places  in  your  reports,  references  to  restriction  of  research  activities 
because  of  a  lack  of  funds.  This  is  certainly  to  be  regretted,  but  it  is  something  we  are 
all  faced  with.  The  special  investigations  financed  by  individual  railroads  have  certainly 
been  helpful.  I  hope  we  can  look  forward  to  better  times  in  financing  of  research  work, 
but  I  must  confess  that  I  do  not  see  much  sunshine  in  the  immediate  future. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Davidson.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Iron  and  Steel  Structures 

[For   report,    see   Bulletin    576,   pages  359-370] 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Another  of  our  important  structural  committees  is  our 
Committee  IS — Iron  and  Steel  Structures,  which  we  will  hear  from  next.  The  chairman 
of  this  committee  is  C.  Neufeld,  engineer  of  bridges,  Canadian  Pacific  Railway,  at  Mon- 
treal. Mr.  Neufeld,  I  shall  be  glad  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  your  committee 
present  will  come  to  the  platform  and  present  your  report  at  this  time. 

Chairman  C.  Neufeld:  Mr.  Vice  President  and  members  of  the  Association: 

The  report  of  Committee  IS  is  published  in  Bulletin  576,  pages  359  to  370,  incl. 
The  reports  on  Assignments  1,  2,  4,  6  and  7  include  either  Manual  revisions  or  material 
to  be  published  as  information;  and  I  shall  call  upon  the  chairman  of  each  subcom- 
mittee, if  present,  to  present  these  reports.  Brief  progress  reports  on  Assignments  3,  5, 
8  and   10  are  published  on   pages  359  and  360. 

In  compliance  with  the  regulations  of  the  Association,  all  material  being  presented 
for  adoption  and  publication  in  the  Manual  has  received  the  endorsement  of  the  com- 
mittee by  letter  ballots,  in  the  form  of  an  affirmative  vote  of  at  least  two-thirds  of  the 
voting  membership. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Neufeld:  E.  S.  Birkenwald,  engineer  of  bridges,  Southern  Railway 
System,  chairman  of  Subcommittee  1,  will  present  the  report. 

E.  S.  Birkenwald:    Mr.  Vice  President  and  gentlemen: 

Your  committee  submits  for  adoption  Manual  material  found  in  Bulletin  576,  pages 
361  to  363,  incl.,  and  presents  as  information  on  pages  363  and  364  a  report  concerning 
antifriction  bearings  for  movable  bridge  applications. 


Discussion  631 


The  committee  submitted  to  the  Association  in  1962,  as  information,  revisions  to 
the  Specifications  for  Steel  Railway  Bridges  so  as  to  permit  the  use  of  A  36  steel  in 
place  of  A  7  steel.  The  A  36  steel  has  a  higher  yield  point,  permitting  use  of  20,000  psi 
instead  of  18,000  psi  basic  unit  stress,  and  costs  no  more  than  A  7  steel.  Hence,  adop- 
tion of  these  revisions,  found  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  63,  pages  387  to  390,  incl.,  will 
reduce  the  cost  of  steel  railway  bridges. 

Since  this  material  was  presented  as  information  in  Bulletin  569,  review  developed 
the  necessity  for  making  the  five  minor  revisions  listed  on  page  361  of  Bulletin  576. 
The  first  revision  resulted  from  an  omission;  the  second  and  third  revisions,  from  lump- 
ing too  much  together;  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  revisions,  from  changes  made  by  the 
ASTM  in  its  specifications  for  A  36  steel. 

The  revisions  published  in  Bulletin  576  for  Rules  for  Rating  Existing  Iron  and  Steel 
Bridges  are  necessitated  by  the  use  of  A  36  steel  in  the  Specifications  for  Steel  Railway 
Bridges. 

In  1962  the  committee  also  submitted  to  the  Association,  as  information,  the  sub- 
stitution of  Specifications  for  Structural  Joints  Using  High-Strength  Steel  Bolts  in  Steel 
Railway  Bridges  for  the  Specifications  for  Assembly  of  Structural  Joints  Using  High- 
Strength  Steel  Bolts  in  Steel  Railway  Bridges.  This  material  can  be  found  in  the  Pro- 
ceedings, Vol.  63,  pages  390  to  398,  incl. 

After  further  consideration,  the  committee  feels  that  the  Specifications  for  Structural 
Joints,  presented  as  information  in  1962,  should  be  amended  as  outlined  in  Bulletin  576, 
pages  362  and  363. 

Revision  (1)  is  for  clarification,  while  Revision  (2)  provides  a  unit  stress  con- 
sistent with  friction-type  joints.  Revision  (3)  resulted  from  the  fact  that  it  is  cheaper 
to  use  a  hardened  washer  under  the  turned  element  of  the  bolt  than  to  omit  such  a 
washer.  The  balance  of  Revision  (3)  is  an  editorial  change.  Revision  (4)  results  from 
requiring  the  use  of  a  hardened  washer  under  the  turned  element  of  the  bolt. 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  the  revisions  to  the  Specifications  for  Steel  Railway 
Bridges,  presented  as  information  in  1962  and  amended  in  Bulletin  576,  page  361;  the 
Rules  for  Rating  Existing  Iron  and  Steel  Bridges,  published  in  Bulletin  576,  pages  361 
and  362;  and  the  Specifications  for  Structural  Joints  Using  High-Strength  Steel  Bolts 
in  Steel  Railway  Bridges,  presented  as  information  in  1962  and  amended  in  Bulletin 
576,  pages  362  and  363,  be  adopted  for  publication  in  the  Manual  and  that,  with  these 
revisions,  these  parts  of  Chapter  15  of  the  Manual  be  reapproved. 

[The   motion   was   duly   seconded.] 

V|ce  President  Loggins:   Is  there  discussion  of  this  motion? 

D.  S.  Bechlv  [Illinois  Central |:  Mr.  Chairman,  A  36  steel  is  supposed  to  be  a 
stronger  steel  than  A  7,  and  this  presumably  is  the  reason  for  increasing  the  allowable 
design  stress  from  18,000  to  20,000  psi.  At  the  same  time  this  revision  propose-  to 
decrease  the  minimum  ultimate  tensile  strength  of  A  36  steel  to  58,000  psi  as  compared 
to  60,000  psi  for  A  7  steel.  This  appears  to  me  to  be  a  discrepancy,  and  I  wonder  i!  it 
can  be  explained. 

Mr.  Birkenwald:  First,  I  should  like  to  say  that  the  ASTM  specifications  for  A  7 
steel,  which  we  use  in  the  AREA,  guarantee  a  33,000  psi  yield  point.  It  is  true  that 
over  the  years  we  have  found  by  making  tests  that  actually  the  yield  point  of  the 
steel  may  range  somewhere  between  36,000  and  40,000  psi,  depending  on  the  thickness 
of  the  material.  There  is  some  hardening  due  to  rolling  on  thin  material  that  ha-  the 
effect   of  increasing   the  strength   of   relatively   thin   steel. 

I  don't  think  we  would  find  that  greater  strength  it  we  were  to  take  a  coupon 
out  of  the   flange  of  a  36-in  300-lb  beam,  which  is  V/2  in  thick.  I  think  we  would  get 


632 Iron    and    Steel   Structures 

very  close  to  the  33,000  psi  guaranteed.  If  it  is  more,  that  is  to  our  advantage.  We 
have  that  advantage  if  we  have  made  tests  and  we  want  to  take  the  higher  yield  point 
found  into  account  when  we  rate  a  structure. 

The  A  36  steel  is  guaranteed  to  have  36,000  psi  yield  point.  This  is  a  higher  guar- 
antee. If  it  should  turn  out  that  we  would  get  some  steel  that  would  have  a  yield  point 
less  than  36,000  psi,  using  the  A  36  specifications,  then  we  would  have  a  right  to  go 
back  to  the  manufacturer  and  get  some  redress.  We  feel  that  as  long  as  the  steel  is 
being  guaranteed  as  having  a  36,000  psi  yield  point,  then  we  are  justified  in  increasing 
our  basic  unit  stresses. 

Now,  as  to  the  ultimate  tensile  stress  being  reduced  from  60,000  to  58,000  psi:  it 
really  doesn't  make  a  great  deal  of  difference,  since  our  factors  of  safety  are  based  on 
the  yield  point  and  not  on  the  ultimate  strength.  As  a  means  of  comparison  between 
A  7  and  A  36  steel,  the  factor  of  safety  for  the  A  7  steel  in  tension  is  1.83  according 
to  our  present  specifications.  We  are  proposing  for  A  36  steel  to  make  it  1.80.  The  only 
reason  there  is  a  slight  decimal  difference  is  that  we  want  to  establish  the  figures  for 
our  basic  unit  stresses  in  even  thousands. 

For  compression,  the  factor  of  safety  for  A  7  steel  which  we  are  using  now  is  1.76. 
For  the  A  36  steel  it  will  become  1.69. 

I  trust  that  answers  the  question. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Birkenwald.  Does  that  answer  your 
question,  Mr.  Bechly? 

Mr.  Bechly:  Well,  it  answers  it  insofar  as  the  yield  point  is  concerned.  It  still 
doesn't  answer  it  as  far  as  the  ultimate  is  concerned.  Probably  it  is  an  unaswerable 
question.  I  don't  know  what  the  reason  was  for  lowering  it. 

Mr.  Birkenwald:  The  reason  for  lowering  it  was  simply  that  some  of  the  manu- 
facturers felt  they  could  not  guarantee  60,000  psi.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  ASTM 
specification  gives  a  range  up  to  as  much  as  80,000  psi.  I  am  quite  sure  we  are  going 
to  find,  when  tests  are  made,  that  the  ultimate  strength  will  be  well  over  60,000  psi, 
judging  by  the  chemistry  of  the  steel  that  is  provided  by  the  specifications. 

Vice  President  Loggins:   Is  there  any  further  discussion? 

D.  F.  Lyons  [Chicago  South  Shore  &  South  Bend]:  How  do  you  go  about  making 
a  test  of  the  steel  in  existing  bridges  for  rating  purposes?  What  procedure  do  you  use? 

Mr.  Birkenwald:  Most  of  the  steel  in  existing  bridges  was  tested  when  the  bridge 
was  initially  bought,  and  we  have  kept  the  test  records.  At  least  that  is  true  on  our 
railroad,  and   I  am  quite  sure  it  is  true  on  most  of  the  other  railroads. 

Mr.  Lyons:   It  is  not  true  on  ours. 

Mr.  Birkenwald:  Somebody  thought,  back  around  1900,  that  it  would  be  a  good 
idea  to  find  out  what  we  were  buying  and  to  see  what  we  were  getting.  Tests  were 
made  and  we  have  them  on  record.  So  we  know  what  the  yield  points  are,  and  because 
we  know  we  are  able  to  take  advantage  of  what  was  originally  found. 

If  you  do  not  have  any  record,  then  it  is  necessary  for  you  to  follow  what  is  in 
the  rating  rules,  which  provide  for  about  a  10  percent  reduction  in  the  yield  point, 
which  necessarily  affects  the  allowable  stress  that  you  can  use. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Birkenwald.  Is  there  any  further 
discussion  ? 

[The  motion  was  put  to  a  vote  and  was  carried.  | 

Mr.  Birkenwald:  On  pages  363  and  364  your  committee  presents  as  information 
a   report   concerning  anti-friction   bearings   for   movable   bridge   applications.   Exception 


Discussion 633 

to  the  Association's  Specifications  for  Movable  Bridges  in  regard  to  anti-friction  bearings 
was  taken  by  one  of  the  manufacturers  of  this  product.  A  thorough  review  was  made 
over  a  period  of  several  years,  with  the  conclusion  that  no  change  should  he  made  in 
the  Association's  specifications.  The  report  outlines  the  reasoning  for  this  conclusion. 
Mr.   Chairman,  this  concludes  the   report  on  Assignment   1. 

Assignment  2 — Composite  Steel  and  Concrete  Spans:  Non-Ferrous 
Metal  Bridges.  Collaborating  with  Committees  8  and  SO. 

Chairman  Neufeld:  Ellis  E.  Paul,  partner,  Howard,  Needles,  Tammen  &  Bergen- 
doff,  Consulting  Engineers,  chairman  of  Subcommittee  2,  is  unable  to  attend  this  meet- 
ing. I  will  ask  the  secretary  of  the  committee.  Professor  Hayes  of  Purdue  University, 
to  present  the  report. 

Prof.  J.  M.  Hayes  [reading  Mr.  Paul's  report  |:  Last  year  your  committee  pre- 
sented, as  information,  tentative  Specifications  for  Composite  Steel  and  Concrete  Spans 
(Proceedings.  Vol.  63,  1062,  pages  398  and  399).  These  specifications  are  now  submitted 
with  the  recommendation  that  they  be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual  as  a  new 
Part  8 — Composite  Steel  and   Concrete  Spans. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  so  move. 

[The  motion   was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried.  | 

Prof.  Hayes  [reading  Mr.  Paul's  report |:  Your  committee  also  submits  its  final 
report  on  non-ferrous  metal  bridges,  page  365,  Bulletin  5  76.  In  view  of  the  committee's 
findings,  it  would  appear  that  this  subject  matter  as  a  whole  is  not  attractive  at  this 
time,  and  that  the  interests  of  the  members  of  your  committee  could  better  be  served 
in  devoting  their  time  and  effort  to  other  matters.  Therefore,  in  November  1962  the 
Board  Committee  on  Assignments  approved  your  committee's  recommendation  that  the 
assignment  be  withdrawn  until  such  later  date  when  greater  interest  might  be  evidenced 
and  funds  are  available  for  carrying  out  the  necessary  studies. 

I  would  like  to  bring  to  your  attention  a  correction  which  should  be  made  in  the 
report.  On  page  366,  Bulletin  576,  the  third  reference  reads,  "All-Aluminum  Span  Car- 
riers Rail  Traffic  Over  Grasse  River  Bridge".  The  word  "Carriers"  should  be  changed 
to  "Carries". 

Are  there  any  questions  or  comments  from  the  floor?  If  not,  Mr.  Chairman,  this 
concludes  the  report   on  Assignment  2. 

Assignment  4 — Stress   Distribution   in  Bridge   Frames. 

Chairman  Neufeld:  E.  T.  Franzen,  engineer  of  bridges,  Chicago.  Rock  Island  & 
Pacific  Railroad,  chairman  of  the  Subcommittee  for  Assignment  4,  will  present  the  report 
on  "Stress  Distribution  in  Bridge  Frames:  (a)  Floorbeam  Hangers;  (c)  Truss  Bridge 
Research  Project." 

E.  T.  Franzen:    Mr.  Vice  President  and  members: 

The  work  on  Assignment  4  (a) — Floorbeam  Hangers,  is  complete  with  the  presen- 
tation of  the  amendment  as  shown  on  page  367  of  Bulletin  576,  which  amendment 
will  be  new  Par.  3  of  Art.  1.  page  15  712,  Sec.  I),  Trusses,  of  Methods  of  Strengthening 
Existing  Bridges,  Part  7,  Chapter  15. 

Mr.  Chairman,  I  move  that  this  amendment  be  adopted. 

[The  motion   was  duly  seconded,  was  put    to  a   vote,  and   was  carried.] 

Mr.  Franzen:  Assignment  4  (c)  pertains  to  the  Truss  Bridge  Research  Project  at 
Northwestern   University.   During   the  past    year  work  has  progressed  on   investigation 


634 Iron    and    Steel    Structures 

and    testing   to    determine    the    ultimate    carrying    capacity    of    the    truss   span    with    a 
damaged  end  post. 

Two  complete  series  of  tests  have  been  made  of  an  end  post  in  Truss  A,  which  is 
of  the  old  style,  having  the  angles  of  the  member  turned  out.  The  second  series  of 
tests  of  an  end  post  in  the  Type  A  truss  gave  results  which  are  approximately  6  per- 
cent lower  than  the  first  series  of  tests.  This  is  good  correlation  of  data,  considering 
the  difficulty  of  controlling  the  damage  to  the  specimen. 

A  second  series  of  tests  is  now  in  progress  on  an  end  post  in  Truss  B,  which  is 
of  a  modern  type,  with  angles  turned  in  and  having  a  perforated  bottom  cover  plate. 

From  the  three  series  of  tests  on  the  end  posts,  it  has  been  found  that  the  capacity 
of  end  posts  of  Type  A  and  B  Trusses  was  approximately  equal  for  the  straight  condi- 
tion and  for  the  severely  damaged  condition.  For  intermediate  conditions  of  initial 
bend  or  damage,  the  A  end  post  showed  a   greater  strength. 

A  report  has  been  prepared  by  Dr.  John  F.  Ely,  project  director,  to  cover  all  work 
on  the  nondestructive  tests  or  up  to  the  point  at  which  tests  of  damaged  end  posts 
were  started.  As  this  project  is  a  joint  venture  involving  several  organizations  in  addi- 
tion to  the  AREA,  this  first  report  will  be  submitted  to  the  American  Society  of  Civil 
Engineers  for  publication.  A  second  report  will  be  prepared  to  cover  testing  of  the  end 
posts,  which  report  is  anticipated  to  be  ready  for  publication  by  the  middle  of  this  year. 

The  future  work  of  the  Truss  Bridge  Project  will  depend  upon  availability  of 
funds.  Dr.  Ely  has  prepared  three  proposals  covering  work  that  will  give  much  new 
information  concerning  stresses  and  function  of  members  of  a  truss  span.  This  work  is 
estimated  to  cost  $160,000.  Committee  IS  voted  at  a  recent  meeting  to  request  the  AAR 
to  continue  to  support  the  project  with  contributions  of  $10,000  per  year  for  two  years. 
Other  supporting  organizations  are  being  canvassed  to  obtain  firm  commitments  for 
the  balance  of   the  money  needed. 

Dr.  E'y  is  attending  our  meeting  this  afternoon,  and  I  would  like  to  take  this 
opportunity  to  introduce  him.  Dr.  Ely,  director  of  the  Truss  Bridge  Research  Project 
at  Northwestern  University.  If  there  are  any  questions  pertaining  to  this  project,  either 
Dr.  Ely  or  I  will  be  glad  to  answer  them. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr,  Franzen.  Are  there  any  questions  from 
the  audience? 

K.  L.  DeBlois  [NYC]:  I  would  like  to  ask  Mr.  Franzen  a  question.  From  a  bridge 
engineer's  standpoint,  what  practical  use  can  be  made  of  this  research  data  in  the  case 
of  an  end  post  of  a  two-truss  span  that  has  been  damaged  by  a  derailment? 

Mr.  Franzen:  I  wouM  like  to  refer  the  question  to  Dr.  Ely.  He  is  probably  much 
more  able  than  I  to  answer  it. 

Dr.  Ely:  I  would  say,  as  I  have  just  learned,  that  there  already  has  been  some 
use  made  of  the  information  we  have  obtained.  I  believe  up  to  this  time  the  decisions 
were  based  on  how  the  bridge  engineer  felt  that  day,  and  on  no  real  analytical  data 
whatsoever.  There  was  no  experimental  verification  that  could  help  you  decide  whether 
you  were  one-half  off  or  that,  you  were  just  at  the  ultimate  capacity  of  the  bridge. 

However,  I  think  we  have  demonstrated  that  for  the  type  of  truss  bridge  which 
has  bolted  connections,  that  is,  not  a  pin-connected  structure,  the  damaged  truss  as  a 
whole  has  an  ability  to  carry  loads  which  most  people  who  have  observed  the  tests  felt 
were  much  larger  than  was  previously  thought  possible. 

As  far  as  solving  the  problem  analytically  and  exactly  is  concerned  for  the  torsion 
bending  and  inelastic  range  of  a  member  that  is  damaged,  I  would  say  this  is  going 
to  have  to  wait  for  several  years. 


Discussion 635 

Assignment  6 — Preparation  and  Painting  of  Steel  Surfaces:  Synthetic 
Resins  and  Other  Adhesive  Materials  for  Protective  Coating  and  Reinforce- 
ment, Collaborating  with  Committee  7. 

Chairman  Xeufeld:  R.  C.  Baker,  assistant  chief  engineer,  Chicago  &  Eastern 
Illinois   Railroad,   chairman   of   Subcommittee   6,   will   present   this   report. 

R.  C.  Baker:  Mr.  Vice  President:  The  report  on  Assignment  6  is  published  on 
pages  368  and  369  of  Bulletin  576  and  consists  of  a  brief  status  report  based  on  reports 
prepared  by  the  director  of  research  of  the  Steel  Structures  Painting  Council,  covering 
paint  tests  on  four  bridges.  These  tests  were  initiated  between  1953  and  1958. 

Your  committee  is  aware  of  the  limited  funds  available  for  research,  but  due  to 
the  large  expenditures  which  are  being  incurred  annually  by  the  railroads  in  the  United 
States  and  Canada  in  the  preservation  and  restoration  of  steel  structures,  it  is  the  view 
of  your  committee  that  substantial  savings  would  result  if  research  could  be  sponsored 
and  continued  on  this  assignment. 

The  portion  of  the  assignment  dealing  with  synthetic  resins  and  other  adhesive 
materials  is  a  joint  assignment  with  Committee  7.  Your  committee  is  in  the  process  of 
assembling  information  on  the  use  of  epoxies  on  steel  bridges  and  would  appreciate 
receiving  suggestions  and  experience  records  from  Association  members  so  that  these 
can  be  studied. 

Assignment  7 — Bibliography  and  Technical  Explanation  of  Various 
Requirements  in  AREA  Specifications  Relating  to  Iron  and  Steel  Structures. 

Chairman  Neufeld:  J.  G.  Clark,  of  Clark,  Daily  and  Deitz,  Consulting  Engineers, 
and  chairman  of  Subcommittee  7,  will  present  the  report  on  this  assignment. 

J.  G.  Clark:  A  progress  report  published  in  Bulletins  576,  pages  369  and  370  is 
submitted  as  information.  It  includes  a  definition  of  the  basic-oxygen  process  which 
defines  the  process  as  steelmaking  in  which  molten  iron  is  refined  to  steel  under  a  basic 
slag  by  directing  a  jet  of  high-purity  oxygen  onto  the  surface  of  the  hot  metal  bath 
to  produce  a  steel  similar  to   basic  open-hearth  steel. 


Chairman-  Xeufeld:  I  would  like  to  introduce  the  other  subcommittee  chairmen 
responsible  for  the  assignments  of  this   committee. 

J.  E.  South,  system  engineer — structures,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  chairman  of  Sub- 
committee 3  on  Corrosion  of  Deck  Plates. 

R.  W.  Gustafson,  bridge  engineer,  Great  Northern  Railway,  and  chairman  of  Sub- 
committee 8  on  Specifications  for  Design  of  Structural  Plate  Pipe  with  Diameters  Greater 
Than  15  Ft. 

A.  R.  Harris,  retired  engineer  of  bridges,  Chicago  &  Ninth  Western  Railway,  chair- 
man of  Subcommittee  5  on  Design  of  Steel  Bridge  Details. 

J.  C.  King,  assistant  engineer  of  bridges  and  structures,  Canadian  National  Rail- 
ways, chairman  of  Subcommittee  10  on  Effect  of  Continuous  Welded  Rail  on  Bridges, 
Collaborating  with   the  Special   Committee  on  Continuous  Welded    Rail. 

Mr.  Vice  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  15. 

Vice  President  Locgins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Neufeld,  and  your  committee,  lor  your 
work  of  another  year,  and  another  series  of  valuable  reports  and  Manual  recom- 
mendations. 

We  necessarily  look  to  your  committee  to  keep  our  Association  and  the  railroads 
completely   up   to   date   with    respect   to   new   developments   in    steel   structures,   design, 

Bull.   579 


636 Buildings 

construction  and  maintenance — and  not  only  our  own  railroads,  because  it  is  a  well- 
known  fact  that  railroad  bridge  engineers  on  many  railroads  throughout  the  world  look 
to  your  chapter  in  our  Manual  as  a  guide  in  the  solution  of  their  problems. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Neufeld,  for  the  continuing  good  work  of  your  committee 
under  your  direction.  You  are  now  excused,  with  the  thanks  of  the  Association. 
[Applause] 

Discussion  on  Buildings 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin   574,  pages  213-222] 

Vice  President  Loggins:  We  still  have  one  more  structural  committee  to  hear 
from — our  Committee  6 — Buildings.  The  chairman  of  this  committee  is  K.  E.  Hornung, 
architect,  Milwaukee  Road,  at  Chicago.  Mr.  Hornung,  I  shall  be  pleased  if  you  and 
the  other  members  of  your  committee  present  will  come  to  the  platform  and  present 
your  report  at   this   time. 

Chairman  K.  E.  Hornung:  The  report  of  Committee  6  on  the  activities  of  the 
past  year  is  not  exactly  glamorous,  as  our  efforts  have  been  concentrated  on  revision 
of  the  Manual.  Other  than  completing  revision  of  the  section  on  passenger  stations,  all 
of   Chapter  6  of  the  Manual  has  been  reviewed  and  revised,  deleted  or  supplemented. 

This  tremendous  task  has  been  accomplished  under  the  spirited  leadership  of 
W.  G.  Harding,  architect  of  the  Wabash  Railroad,  with  the  assistance  of  almost  every 
other  member  of  Committee  6. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Hornung:  We  will  now  have  the  report  of  our  Subcommittee  on  Revi- 
sion of  Manual.  In  the  absence  of  Mr.  Harding  the  report  will  be  presented  by  J.  W. 
Hayes,  vice  chairman  of  Committee  6. 

J.  W.  Hayes    [for  Mr.  Harding] :   Mr.  President,  members  of  the  Association,  and 

guests: 

In  accordance  with  its  assignments,  the  committee  has  continued  to  review  Chapter 
6  to  bring  up  to  date  those  specifications  not  completed  in  time  for  last  year's 
reprinting  of  the  Manual. 

Our  recommendations  are  printed  in  Bulletin  574,  pages  213  to  222,  and  may  be 
briefly   stated  as  follows: 

In  Part  4,  delete  "Specifications  for  Clay  Hollow  Tile"  and  substitute  therefor 
"Specifications  for  Structural  Clay  Tile — Structural  Clay  Facing  Tile — Ceramic  Veneer." 

In  Part  9,  reapprove  without  change  "Specifications  for  Asphaltic  Concrete  Pave- 
ments" and  "Specifications  for  Asphalt  Macadam  Pavements."  Add  "Specifications  for 
Bituminous  Road  Mix  Surface." 

In  Part  13,  revise  wording  of  paragraphs  11  and  13  of  "Paints  for  Railway  Build- 
ings," as  written  in  Bulletin  S74,  page  216. 

In  Part  14,  delete  the  present  "Specifications  for  Sprinkler  Systems"  and  substitute 
the  rewritten  version  on  pages  216-218  of  Bulletin  574. 

In  Part  26,  delete  the  material  on  "Ice  Houses"  and  "Icing  Stations"  substituting 
therefor  the  rewritten  version  appearing  on  pages  218  to  220;  delete  the  material  on 
"Rest  Houses";  delete  the  material  in  "Storehouses  for  Shops  and  Locomotive  Ter- 
minals", substituting  therefor  the  rewritten  version  on  pages  220  to  222;  delete  the 
material  on  "Oil  Houses"  substituting  the  rewritten  version  on  page  222  and  reapprove 
the  material  on  "Lumber  Shed"  with  the  revision  on  page  222. 


Discussion 637 

Mr.  President,  I  move  the  adoption  of  the  foregoing  deletions,  additions  and 
revisions  to  the  manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried.] 

Assignment  2 — Specifications   for  Railway   Buildings. 

Chairman  Hornung:  Subcommittee  2,  whose  assignment  is  the  preparation  of  new 
specifications,  has  as  its  chairman  W.  F.  Armstrong,  engineer  of  buildings,  Chicago  & 
Xorthwestern  Railway.  There  is  no  report  to  be  made  on  this  assignment  at  this  time. 

Assignment  8 — Infra-Red  Ray  Heating,  Collaborating  with  Com- 
mittee   18. 

Chairman  Hornung:  Leadership  of  Subcommittee  8  has  just  been  assumed  by 
D.  A.  Bessey,  assistant  architect,  Milwaukee  Road,  who  will  now  report. 

D.  A.  Bessey:  A  previous  report  on  this  assignment,  published  in  Bulletin  560, 
briefly  describes  various  uses  for  infra-red  ray  heating  in  railway  buildings.  To  date, 
operational  experience  to  determine  design  data  and  operational  cost  has  not  been  too 
readily  available,  either  from  railroads  or  from  manufacturers.  However,  additional 
installations  are  being  made  and  additional  design  information  is  being  developed  by 
manufacturers,  which  will  permit  your  committee  to  ultimately  formulate  another 
report. 


Chairman  Hornung:  For  the  coming  year  Committee  6  has  been  given  five  new 
subjects  which  will  be  of  particular  interest  to  the  membership  of  our  committee  and, 
we  believe,  to  the  entire  Association. 

New  Assignment  3  will  involve  a  study  of  the  use  of  synthetic  resins  for  adhesives 
and  coatings  in  railway  buildings.  This  subcommittee  will  be  headed  by  G.  J.  Bleul, 
engineer  of  buildings  for  the  Baltimore  &  Ohio. 

Under  new  Assignment  4  we  shall  review  new  advances  in  paint  products  for 
railway  buildings,  under  the  leadership  of  A.  F.  Langmeyer,  architect  for  the  Illinois 
Central. 

Under  new  Assignment  5  we  shall  collaborate  with  Committee  8  on  the  study  of 
prestressed  concrete;  the  chairman  will  be  YV.  R.  Hyma,  assistant  engineer  of  the 
Santa  Fe. 

New  Assignment  6  involves  studying  the  development  and  use  of  plastics  in  build- 
ings, and  will  be  under  the  chairmanship  of  H.  R.  Helker,  assistant  engineer,  Missouri 
Pacific. 

New  Assignment  7  is  about  the  application  of  curtain  wall  construction  to  railway 
buildings,  and  will  be  appraised  under  the  chairmanship  of  I.  G.  Forbes,  engineer  of 
buildings,  Illinois  Central. 

Chairman-  HoRNTTNG  [continuing]:  Mr.  Vice  President,  I  believe  we  stayed  within 
the  10  min  allotted  to  Committee  6  for  its  report.  This  concludes  our  report. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hornung;  and  thank  you,  Mr.  Harding, 
chairman  of  the  Subcommittee  on  Revision  of  Manual,  which  seems  to  have  headed  up 
much  of  the  work  of  your  committee  again  this  year. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  the  further  Manual  recommendations  you  have  presented 
this  year  could  not  have  been  incorporated  in  the  Manual  before  it  was  reprinted  during 
the  past  summer;  but  with  the  largest  chapter  in  the  Manual  and,  I  suspect,  the  largest 


638 Water,   Oil   and   Sanitation    Services 

number  of  documents  in  any  chapter,  I  know  your  committee  had  a  tremendous  job 
of  review  and  updating,  and  did  the  best  possible  to  complete  this  work  earlier. 

May  I  ask,  Mr.  Hornung,  how  much  more  of  Chapter  6  requires  review  and  up- 
dating, and  when  do  you  expect  this  additional  work  will  be  completed? 

Chairman  Hornung:  Presently  we  are  rewriting  the  remaining  material  on  pas- 
senger stations.  I  would  say   that  by  June  we  will  have  completed  everything. 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Reviewing  your  report  in  Bulletin  574,  I  was  somewhat 
surprised  to  find  that  specifications  for  bituminous  paving  come  under  Committee  6, 
and  by  reference  to  the  Manual  that  you  have  a  rather  complete  set  of  paving  specifica- 
tions. Possibly  I  should  not  thus  display  my  ignorance,  but  maybe  there  are  others 
who  did  not  know  where  to  look  for  this  material.  I  think  our  "General  Subjects 
Index"  could  be  more  complete  in  this  respect,  and  I  am  going  to  suggest  its  review 
some  time  in  the  not-too-distant  future. 

I  note,  as  you  have  stated,  that  your  committee  has  five  new  assignments  for  the 
year  ahead.  No  doubt  this  reflects  its  plan  to  get  its  teeth  into  some  new  subjects,  now 
that  Manual  review  is  largely  behind  it.  I  hope  so. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Hornung.  Your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin   574,  pages   139-157] 

Vice  President  Loggins:  Moving  on  to  the  next  item  on  our  program,  I  would 
like  to  invite  to  the  speaker's  table  the  members  of  our  Committee  13 — Water,  Oil,  and 
Sanitation  Services.  The  chairman  of  this  committee,  serving  for  his  first  year,  is  E.  C. 
Harris,  engineer  of  tests,  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad,  at  St.  Louis.  Mr.  Harris,  if  you 
and  the  members  of  your  committee  will  come  to  the  platform,  we  will  be  glad  to 
hear  your  report  at  this  time. 

Chairman  E.  C.  Harris:  Mr.  Vice  President,  members  of  the  Association  and 
guests: 

The  complete  report  of  Committee  13 — Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services,  for  the 
year   1962   appears  in  Bulletin  574,  pages   139-157. 

One  of  Committee  13's  most  esteemed  members,  Robert  M.  Stimmel,  died  on  July 
8,  1962.  We  express  our  deepest  sorrow  for  his  passing.  His  memoir  appears  on  page 
140  of  Bulletin  574. 

Formal  reports  have  been  prepared  on  5  of  the  10  subjects  which  our  committee 
has  had  under  study  during  the  past  year.  One  of  these  reports  will  be  recommended 
to  the  Association  today  for  approval  as  Manual  material. 

It  is  now  my  pleasure  to  introduce  the  chairmen  of  our  subcommittees  who  are 
present  today  for  presentation  of  their  reports. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Harris:  I  will  call  first  on  our  vice  chairman,  T.  A.  Tennyson,  engineer 
of  tests,  Cotton  Belt,  for  his  report  on  Revision  of  Chapter  13  of  the  Manual.  Mr. 
Tennyson,  will  you   please  take  the  podium? 

T.  A.  Tennyson:   Mr.  Vice  President,  Mr.  Chairman,  members  and  guests: 
In  conformity  with  the  assignment,  your  committee  continues  to  review  the  material 
published  in   Chapter   13   of  the  Manual.  This  year  the  recommended  revisions,  which 
have  been  duly  approved  by  the  membership  of  Committee  13,  are  described  fully  on 


Discussion 639 

pages  141-143,  of  Bulletin  574.  Unless  request  is  made  otherwise,  these  revisions  will 
not  be  read  in  detail  at  this  time.  I  would,  however,  like  to  comment  briefly  on  their 
nature. 

"Water  for  Drinking  Purposes",  Manual  page  13-8-1,  has  had  some  minor  revisions 
in  wording  to  bring  it  in  line  with  current  practice.  Two  paragraphs  have  been  added 
to  show  authoritative  references  and  tie  the  subject  more  closely  with  the  regulatory 
agencies  involved. 

"Railway  Sewage  Disposal  Facilities",  Manual  pages  13-8-2  through  13-8-20  has 
been  revised  to  delete  certain  material  no  longer  needed  in  the  text  of  this  section,  two 
new  paragraphs  have  been  added  to  cover  new  developments  in  this  field  which  are 
applicable  to  railroad  situations. 

Mr.  Vice  President,  I  now  move  that  the  Manual  Revisions  described  on  pages 
141-143  of  Bulletin  574,  involving  Manual  pages  13-8-1  through   13-8-20,  be  approved. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried.] 

Assignment  2 — Prevention  of  Corrosion  in  Hot  and  Cold  Water 
Systems. 

Chairman  Harris:  A  very  comprehensive  and  informative  report  on  "Corrosion 
Prevention  in  Hot  and  Cold  Water  Systems"  has  been  prepared  by  J.  J.  Dwyer,  chair- 
man of  Subcommittee  2.  Mr.  Dwyer  is  chief  chemist — system,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio.  Mr. 
Dwyer,  will  you  please  take  my  place  on  the  speaker's  stand  ? 

J.  J.  Dwyer:   Mr.  Vice  President,  members  of  AREA  and  guests: 

The  report  under  discussion  at  this  time  is  Corrosion  Prevention  in  Potable  Hot 
Water  Systems.  It  is  found  on  page  143  of  Bulletin  574  for  November  1962. 

This  report  has  been  written  for  railroads,  but  it  will  be  of  interest  to  most  indi- 
viduals because  it  has  to  do  with  just  such  water  systems  as  will  be  present  in  the  home. 
Our  paper  today  is  restricted  to  potable  hot-water  systems. 

Chemical  treatment,  as  a  corrosion  deterrent,  of  potable  or  drinking  water  supplies 
has  not  been  too  common,  mainly  because  of  the  tastes  imparted  to  the  water  by  chem- 
icals. But  increasing  costs  of  replacing  water  lines  have  necessitated  our  taking  another 
look — a   good   look — at   the   corrosion   problem. 

Copper  water  tube  has  been  found  generally  to  last  longer  than  other  common 
types,  and  is  now  in  general  use  for  the  smaller  pipe  sizes.  But  even  copper  tube  fails 
under  certain  conditions.  The  more  important  of  these  are  (1)  dissolved  oxygen,  (2) 
increased  carbon  dioxide,  (3)  increased  temperature,  (4)  increased  velocity,  and  (5)  soft 
water. 

Another  cause  of  hot-water  system  failure  is  the  galvanic  couple.  This  occurs  when 
two  different  metals  are  connected  to  each  other  in  the  system,  causing  a  current  to 
flow,  and  one  of  the  metals  to  go  into  solution. 

Sometimes  the  use  of  different  metals  cannot  be  avoided.  There  are  ways  to  get 
around  this,  however,  such  as  using  rubber  or  plastic  couplings,  so-called  dielectric 
unions,  bushings,  nipples,  or  gaskets  placed  between  the  two  different  metals  to  separate 
them,  and  opening  any  electrical  circuit  which   may  have  been  present. 

Corrosion  in  hot-water  tanks  has  been  stopped  by  the  use  of  magnesium  anodes. 
If  the  magnesium  bar  is  connected  to  the  tank  shell  through  a  high  resistance,  a  current 
will  flow  from  the  anode  to  the  tank,  protecting  it.  In  larger  tanks,  an  impressed  cur- 
rent anode  may  be  used,  and  in  this  case  may  be  of  mild  iron,  which  will  last  much 
longer  than   magnesium. 


640 Water,    Oil   and   Sanitation    Services 

Dissolved  gases,  such  as  oxygen  and  carbon  dioxide,  are  very  damaging  to  hot- 
water  lines.  Deaerating  the  water  to  remove  these  gases  is  a  means  of  extending  the 
life  of  such  lines. 

Temperature  is  most  important  in  corrosion  processes.  Each  17-deg  rise  in  tem- 
perature, up  to  about  180  deg,  will  double  the  corrosion  rate.  This  is  why  corrosion 
damage  is  much  more  frequent  in  hot-water  systems  than  in  cold.  Extremely  high 
temperatures  throughout  hot-water  systems  may  be  avoided  by  installing  booster 
heaters  for  extra  high  temperatures  just  at  the  points  where  required. 

Chemical  treatments  which  may  be  used  are  sodium  silicates  at  about  8  ppm,  and 
the  metaphosphates  at  2  to  5  ppm.  A  mixture  of  these  two  is  said  to  be  better  than 
either  separately. 

The  causes  of  hot-water-system  corrosion  may  be  summarized  as  follows: 

1.  Corrosive  dissolved  gases. 

2.  Dissolved  copper. 

3.  High  temperature. 

4.  High  velocity  and  turbulence. 

5.  Galvanic  couples. 

6.  Softwater. 

The  remedies  may  be  summarized  as  follows: 

1.  Use  deaerators  where  practicable. 

2.  Use  air  release  valves  at  high  points  in  system. 

3.  Do  not  use  pneumatic  tanks  in  hot-water  systems. 

4.  Use  Type  K  copper  tube  for  temperatures  up  to  140  deg  F. 

5.  Confine  temperatures  to  the  range  130-140  deg  F. 

6.  Where  higher  temperatures  are  required,  use  90/10  cupro-nickel  alloy. 

7.  Confine  velocities  to  5  fps,  and  preferably  4  fps. 

8.  Insulate  galvanic  couples. 

9.  Use  cathodic  protection  in  hot  water  tanks  when  practicable. 
10.  Use  appropriate  chemical  treatment. 

[President  Code   resumed   the  Chair.] 

Mr.  Dwyer  [continuing] :  Mr.  President,  your  committee  feels  that  the  foregoing 
information  should  be  useful  to  railroad  engineers  as  recommended  practice.  Therefore, 
Mr.  President,  I  move  that  this  report  be  adopted  for  inclusion  in  the  Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried. 1 

Assignment  3 — Design,  Construction  and  Operation  of  Coach-Servicing 
Facilities  to  Comply  with  Regulations  of  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service. 

Chairman  Harris:  One  of  our  better  known  standing  subcommittees  is  that  on 
Coach-Servicing  Facilities,  Subcommittee  3.  C.  F.  Muelder,  assistant  to  engineer  of 
buildings,  Chicago,  Burlington  &  Quincy  Railroad,  chairman  of  Subcommittee  3,  has 
constantly  kept  abreast  of  new  federal  regulations  and  developments  in  this  field.  He 
will  now  give  his  report  of  progress. 

C.  F.  Muelder:  President  Code,  Mr.  Harris,  members,  and  guests: 
This   committee   reports   to   the  Association   on   coach   servicing  facilities,   presenting 
information   relating  to   laws,   ordinances,   regulations,  and   decisions  of  various  govern- 
mental agencies  having  jurisdiction  over  public  health  and  sanitation. 


Discussion 641 

A  new  food  service  sanitation  manual  was  released  in  July  1962  by  the  U.  S. 
Public  Health  Service.  It  is  designated  as  Public  Health  Service  Publication  No.  934. 
It  supersedes  the  1959  revision  of  the  Handbook  on  Sanitation  of  Dining  Cars  in 
Operation.  The  new  manual  is  not  restricted  to  railroad  facilities  but  covers  all  phases 
of  food  service  and  sanitation  regulated  by  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service.  It  applies 
to  other  forms  of  transportation  and  those  engaged  in  interstate  commerce. 

In  our  report  to  you  last  year,  we  informed  you  of  the  revision  of  the  drinking 
water  standards  and  outlined  the  major  changes.  The  "1962  Drinking  Water  Standards" 
were  published  in  February  1963,  and  are  now  available  as  Public  Health  Service  Pub- 
lication No.  956.  In  addition  to  the  standards,  this  booklet  contains  a  valuable  appen- 
dix, which  includes  such  significant  items  as  the  reasons  and  discussion  behind  the 
decisions  to  change  the  standards  and  an  explanation  of  the  standard  itself.  There  is 
no  attempt  at  legal  interpretation. 

A  completely  revised  "Manual  of  Individual  Water  Supply  Systems"  is  now  avail- 
able. It  is  designated  as  Public  Health  Service  Publication  No.  24.  This  new  manual  is 
quite  comprehensive.  Information  is  mere  complete  on  water  treatment,  particularly 
on   chlorination.   Recommended   practices   incorpcrate  the  latest  developments. 

Revision  of  the  handbooks  on  (a)  Roadway  Servicing  Areas,  (b)  Railway  Pas- 
senger Car  Construction,  and  (c)  Sanitation  of  Dining  Cars  in  Operation  is  now  pro- 
ceeding. It  is  our  understanding  that  it  is  hoped  to  have  these  revisions  ready  for 
review  in  October  of  this  year.  This  committee  will  no  doubt  be  asked  to  participate 
in  the  review. 

There  have  been  no  new  developments  or  requirements  in  the  design,  construction, 
or  operation  of  railroad  coach  servicing  facilities.  Prime  emphasis  on  the  part  of  gov- 
ernmental authorities  has  been  shifting  from  that  of  equipment  to  inspection  of  the 
final  facility.  While  regulations  on  equipment  have  not  been  relaxed  or  changed,  major 
inspection  efforts  are  being  put  on  the  drinking  water,  food,  and  services  as  they  are 
offered  and  made  available  to  the  public.  Any  unacceptable  conditions  found  result  in 
immediate  complaint  and  request  to  take  the  equipment  or  facility  cut  of  service  until 
the  defects  are   corrected. 

This  committee  would  welcome  advice  from  the  membership  as  you  become 
acquainted  with  any  new  regulations  pertaining  to  public  health  and  sanitation  if  it  is 
of  significance  to  the  industry.  I  have  reference  to  state  or  county  laws  and  ordinances. 
This  will  aid   us  in   our  assignment   to  keep   the  association  advised. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Muelder.  Are  there  any  questions  in  connection 
with  Mr.  Muelder's  report?  Is  there  any  discussion?  The  report  will  be  received  as 
information. 

Assignment  4 — Cathodic  Protection  of  Pipe  Lines  and  Steel  Storage 
Tanks. 

Chairman-  Harris:  A  study  begun  in  1956  on  the  prevention  of  corrosion  of  steel 
tanks  and  pipelines  by  the  use  of  expendable  metals  in  an  electric  circuit  was  completed 
this  year  by  Subcommittee  4.  W.  F.  Arksey,  engineer  water  service  and  fuel  facilities. 
Great  Northern  Railway,  St.  Paul,  Minn.,  will  now  give  his  report  on  this  ingenious 
method   of   preventing   steel    from    rusting. 

W.  F.  Arksey:  The  committee  presents  its  final  report  on  this  subject.  We  plan  to 
consolidate  the  information  presented  in  all  reports  next  year  for  insertion  in  the 
Manual  in   1965. 


642 Water,   Oil   and    Sanitation    Services 

The  report  this  year  gives  results  of  an  installation  of  cathodic  protection  on  two 
underground  steel  tanks  using  magnesium  anodes.  A  practical  method  of  sizing  anodes 
according  to  the  type  of  soil  encountered  is  given  for  use  by  those  starting  out  in  this 
field.  We  are  only  covering  the  small  frequently  encountered  type  of  installation,  as  we 
feel  that  large  installations  justify  contracting  services  of  corrosion  engineers  specializing 
in  cathodic  protection  work.  One  can  obtain  a  good  working  knowledge  of  the  prin- 
ciples involved  by  installing  anodes  on  a  structure  and  then  measuring  results.  Each 
succeeding  installation   will  benefit   from   experiences  on   preceding  ones. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Arksey.  Are  there  any  questions  or  comments 
concerning  this  report  ? 

I  would  like  to  ask  you  a  question  myself,  Mr.  Arksey,  and  that  is  whether  there 
are  any  special  precautions  necessary  to  secure  adequate  protection  for  large  surface 
tanks  resting  on  a  gravel  bed  directly  on  the  ground.  I  am  thinking  of  large  oil  storage 
tanks. 

Mr.  Arksey:  I  don't  believe  you  would  get  protection  from  a  cathodic  protection 
system  in  such  a  situation,  as  you  would  not  have  enough  current  actually  flowing 
through  the  gravel  bed;  but  it  would  not  be  too  difficult  to  actually  measure  the  voltage 
between  the  tank  and  the  soil,  and  see  what  the  actual  conditions  are. 

President  Code:  You  think,  then,  that  the  gravel  bed  would  itself  constitute 
considerable  protection  ? 

Mr.  Arksey:  I  would  say  so.  If  you  remember  our  report,  we  put  our  anodes  in 
sandy  soil,  and  we  had  difficulty  detecting  much  current  flow  just  for  that  reason. 
Measuring  these  currents  gave  us  good  experience,  however.  This  is  something  we 
were  new  at,  and  it  gave  us  a  good  working  knowledge  which  we  can  use  in  checking 
an  installation  at  some  remote  point  and  save  paying  out  several  thousand  dollars  to  a 
consulting  firm. 

President  Code:  What  sort  of  structures  did  you  have  in  mind  when  you  referred 
to  "large"  structures? 

Mr.  Arksey:  I  was  thinking  of  long  pipelines,  and  even  very  large  tanks  where  a 
rectifier  type  of  system  would  be  required. 

President  Code:   Thank  you.  Are  there  any  other  questions?  Proceed,  Mr.  Harris. 

Assignment  6 — Railway   Waste  Disposal. 

Chairman  Harris:  Subcommittee  6  is  another  of  our  standing  subcommittees  that 
works  in  collaboration  with  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service  and  state  authorities  on 
public  health  services.  Chairman  F.  O.  Klemstine,  supervisor  water  service,  Pennsylvania 
Railroad,  reports  that  progress  is  being  made  on  the  study  of  systems  for  removing 
solids  and  oil  from  railway  waste  water,  with  special  emphasis  being  placed  on  the 
disposal  of  the  impurities  removed  from  such  water. 

Assignment  7 — Practical  Methods  for  Removing  Iron  and  Manganese 
from  Small   Water  Supplies. 

Chairman  Harris:  A  new  subject,  concerning  methods  of  economically  removing 
iron  and  manganese  compounds  from  small  domestic  water  supplies,  has  been  under 
study  during  the  past  year  by  Subcommittee  7.  One  of  our  younger  members  of  Com- 
mittee 13,  W.  E.  Billingsley,  mechanical  engineer,  Seaboard  Air  Line,  accepted  the  chair- 
manship of  this  subcommittee.  Unfortunately  Mr.  Billingsley  was  unable  to  be  here 
today  to  present  the  report,  so  I  shall  give  a  brief  resume  of  its  contents. 


Discussion 643 

The  presence  of  iron  and  manganese  in  domestic  water  supplies  causes  discoloring 
stains  in  laundered  clothing,  cooking  utensils,  etc.  These  impurities  also  give  the  water 
an  unpalatable  taste. 

Removal  of  these  objectionable  compounds  may  be  accomplished  by  controlled 
additions  of  proprietary  water-treating  chemicals  consisting  of  polyphosphates  and 
sodium  silicate.  If  excessive  amounts  of  the  impurities  are  present,  it  is  then  necessary 
to  add  oxidizing  agents,  such  as  sodium  hypochlorite,  for  their  removal. 

Methods  of  introducing  these  chemicals  into  the  water,  including  the  systems  of 
removing  the  impurities  by  filtration  through  small  resin  filter  beds,  are  described  in 
detail  in  the  report,  which  is  recommended  for  reading  by  all  those  present. 

Assignment  8 — Methods  of  Controlling  Spillage  of  Fuel  Oil  at  Diesel 
Fueling  and   Unloading  Stations. 

Chairman  Harris:  Another  of  our  subjects  of  continued  study  during  the  past 
few  years  has  been  that  of  Subcommittee  8,  on  methods  of  preventing  spillage  of  fuel 
oil  at  diesel  locomotive  fueling  stations  by  the  use  of  automatic  shut-off  fueling  nozzles. 
V.  C.  Barth,  chief  metallurgist  and  engineer  of  tests,  Chicago  &  North  Western  Railway, 
Chicago,  who  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  8,  will  now  give  his  report  of  progress. 

V.  C.  Barth:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests:  At  the  committee  meeting  held 
on  May  9,  1962,  this  subcommittee  was  directed  (1)  to  investigate  new  automatic  cut- 
off fueling  nozzles  being  developed  by  a  certain  manufacturer,  and  (2)  to  establish 
greater  interchangeability  between  the  various  types  of  nozzles  available.  To  date  we 
do  not  have  any  basic  information  that  any  new  devices  have  been  developed;  however, 
our  investigation  is  still  under  way. 

The  subcommittee  was  also  directed  to  make  a  survey  of  the  performance  of 
various  types  or  designs  of  automatic  shut-off  diesel  fueling  nozzles  and  designs  now  in 
service,  also  (if  possible)  the  savings  realized  through  their  use.  This  is  now  being 
pursued  and  information  is  still  coming  in.  But  it  is  entirely  too  early  to  have  drawn 
any  conclusions  to  report  on  at  this  session. 

Assignment   10 — Railroad  Aspects   of  Radioactive  Substances. 

Chairman  Harris:  The  problems  involved  in  the  shipping  of  radioactive  materials 
on  railroads  have  been  under  study  by  Subcommittee  10  for  the  past  five  years.  Since 
most  of  the  technical  data  on  the  handling  of  radioactive  substances  are  closely  guarded 
by  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission  for  reasons  of  national  security,  it  has  been  decided 
to  conclude  our  study  of  this  subject.  VV.  C.  Harsh,  chief  chemist,  New  York  Central, 
who  accepted  the  chairmanship  of  this  subcommittee  in  1962,  will  now  present  this 
concluding  report. 

W.  C.  Harsh:  Radioactive  materials  have  come  into  use  on  the  railroads  during 
the  past  few  years.  The  committee's  report  indicates  the  radioactive  materials  now  in 
use,  the  types  of  radiation  likely  to  be  encountered,  and  the  rules  to  be  followed  in 
handling  these  materials.  Your  committee  feels  that  its  report  is  adequate  for  present 
Deeds  and  submits  it  as  a  completed  assignment. 


Chairman-  Harris:  Before  leaving  the  platform,  I  wish  to  extend  my  thanks  to 
the  subcommittee  chairmen,  our  secretary,  and  ill  th<  members  of  Committee  13  who 
have  worked  faithfully  with  me  during  the  pasl  year.  President  Code,  I  wish  to  thank 
you  and  all  members  and  guests  of  the  Association  for  the  attention  you  have  given 
to  the  reports  and  discussions  today. 


644  Electricity 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  13. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Harris.  Your  committee,  with  its  broadened  scope 
in  recent  years,  continues  to  have  an  important  place  in  our  Association,  and  we  appre- 
ciate the  informative  reports  and  Manual  recommendations  which  you  have  presented 
this  year. 

If  there  are  no  comments  or  questions  from  the  floor,  I  shall  now  excuse  your 
committee,  with   the   thanks  of  the  Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Electricity 

[For   report,   see   Bulletin    576,   pages  407-418] 

President  Code:  We  shall  next  hear  from  our  Committee  18 — Electricity,  the  chair- 
man of  which  is  P.  B.  Burley,  superintendent  communications  and  electrical  engineer, 
Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago.  You  will  recall  that  this  committee  was  re-established 
early  in  1961  to  take  over  the  fixed-property  work  of  the  former  Electrical  Section, 
Engineering  and  Mechanical  Divisions,  AAR,  which  was  discontinued  as  of  the  end 
of   1960. 

Mr.  Burley,  we  will  be  pleased  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  your  committee 
present  will  come  to  the  platform  promptly  and  present  your  report. 

Chairman  P.  B.  Burley:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

The  report  of  Committee  18  will  be  found  starting  on  page  407  of  Bulletin  576, 
Vol.  64.  Committee  18  has  had  eight  assignments  during  the  past  year. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of  Manual. 

Chairman  Burley:  The  first  assignment  is  Revision  of  Manual.  In  the  absence 
of  W.  O.  Muller,  electrical  engineer,  Missouri  Pacific,  and  chairman  of  Subcommittee  1, 
I  shall  comment  on  this  matter. 

It  has  come  to  the  attention  of  the  committee  recently  that  Parts  1  and  2  of  Sec. 
14  of  the  AAR  Electrical  Manual,  both  relating  to  recommended  practices  for  the  pre- 
vention of  electric  sparks  and  referred  to  in  our  report  on  Assignment  1,  are  not  up  to 
date  with  respect  to  several  details  of  importance.  Therefore,  at  this  time  Committee  18 
is  withdrawing  its  published  recommendation  that  Section  14  be  reinstated  in  the  Elec- 
trical Manual,  so  that  appropriate  revisions  may  be  made  to  both  Parts  1   and  2. 

Assignments  4  and  8 — Power  Supply,  Motors  and  Controls,  Collabo- 
rating with   Mechanical  Division,   AAR. 

Chairman  Burley:  T.  F.  Jelnick,  electrical  engineer — line  property,  Burlington 
Lines,  and  chairman  of  this  subcommittee,  is  not  present  today.  His  report  of  progress 
deals  particularly  with  studies  that  are  under  way  on  such  subjects  as  fuel  cells,  mag- 
neto hydrodynamics,  thermoelectric  air  conditioning,  and  several  others  of  interest.  It  is 
expected  that  this  subcommittee  will  have  material  to  be  offered  to  the  full  committee 
later   this   year. 

Assignment  5 — Illumination,  Collaborating  with  Committee  6  and 
Mechanical  Division,  AAR. 

Chairman  Burley:  E.  D.  Feak,  assistant  signal  and  electrical  engineer  of  the  South- 
ern Railway,  is  chairman  of  this  subcommittee.  He  also  is  not  present  today.  Studies 
are  in  progress  on  recommended  lighting  standards  for  railroad  yards,  TOFC  and  for 


Discussion 645 

other  uses  around  railroad  property.  A  report  will  be  ready  for  publication   next  year 
on   this  assignment. 

Assignment   9 — Electrolysis   and   Electrolytic   Corrosion. 

Chairman  Burley:  This  assignment  is  being  handled  by  E.  B.  Hager,  assistant 
engineer,  Illinois  Central.  Mr.  Hager  is  present,  and  I  shall  ask  him  to  comment  on 
the  subject. 

E.  B.  Hager:   Mr.  President,  Mr.  Chairman,  members  and  guests: 

Under  its  assignment — Electrolysis  and  Electrolytic  Corrosion,  your  committee 
presents  a  report  for  information  entitled:  "Possible  Effects  of  Cathodic  Protection 
Installations   for  Underground  Structures  on  Adjacent   Railroad  Signal  Systems." 

The  use  of  cathodic  protection  to  prevent  corrosion  of  underground  metallic  struc- 
tures such  as  pipes,  cable  sheaths,  and  so  on,  is  increasing  constantly.  The  report  calls 
attention  to  the  need  for  testing  before  permitting  installations  of  cathodic  protection 
in  the  vicinity  of  railroad  track  circuits  so  that  interference,  if  present,  may  be  detected 
and  corrected. 

Assignment  10 — Wire,  Cable  and  Insulating  Materials,  Collaborating 
with  Mechanical  Division,  AAR. 

Chairman  Burley:  Assignment  10  has  been  in  the  charge  of  Fred  Snider,  foreman, 
Office  of  Electrical  Engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad.  Mr.  Snider  is  present  and  will 
present   comments  on   the  work  of  his  subcommittee. 

Fred  T.  Snider:  Your  committee  submits  the  following  report  as  information  on 
wire  cable  and  insulating  materials: 

Revisions  in  electrical  standards  of  interest  to  the  AREA  have  been  many  this  year 
— too  many  to  try  to  summarize  now,  so,  for  all  the  various  changes  I  refer  you  to 
the   individual   standards   organizations. 

The  National  Fire  Protection  Association  published  last  September  the  1962  Edition 
of  the  National  Electrical  Code,  and  copies  are  available  from  that  association.  There 
have  been  a  great  number  of  changes  from  the  1959  Code.  Changes  of  particular  interest 
to  the  railroads  are  shown  on  pages  410-413  of  Bulletin  576.  I  would  like  to  stress  one 
change  in  the  Code.  It  now  recognizes  rigid  non-metallic  conduit  made  of  fibers,  plastics 
and  similar  materials. 

A  new  handbook  on  current-carrying  capacities  is  now  available.  It  is  entitled, 
"Power  Cable  Ampacities",  and  is  published  in  two  volumes,  one  for  copper  and  the 
other  for  aluminum.  These  should  prove  quite  valuable  to  anyone  designing  cable  instal- 
lations. They  provide  for  the  various  variable  factors  such  as  temperature,  loadings,  etc. 

The  next  subject  covered  in  our  report  is  a  new  insulating  material  that  is  now 
available  from  certain  manufacturers — chemically  cross-linked  polyethylene,  a  most 
significant  advance  in  wire  and  cable  technology.  The  cross-linking  overcomes  the  chief 
weakness  of  polyethylene — its  low  melting  point — and  converts  it  from  a  thermoplastic 
material  to  a  thermosetting  material  while  retaining  polyethylene 's  outstanding  electrical 
and   physical   properties. 

Chemically  cross-linked  polyethylene  provides  a  family  of  insulation  that  can  be 
compounded  to  give  excellent  heat,  moisture,  sunlight  and  flame-resisting  properties,  ami 
resistance  to  deformation  at  elevated  temperatures  without  tin-  use  oi  tin-  protective 
covers. 

This  material  so  far  appears  to  overcome  some  of  the  disadvantages  of  rubber 
insulation,  in   that  it  is  easier  to  pull  into  conduit,  requires  no  protective   covering,  is 


646 Electricity 

resistant  to  oils  and  sunlight,  is  rated  at  90  C,  and  is  less  costly.  We  believe  it  has  a 
brilliant  future. 

Mr.    Chairman,    this    concludes   the   report   of    Subcommittee    10. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Snider.  Are  there  any  questions  concerning  the 
report  of  Subcommittee  10?  It  will  be  received  as  information. 

Assignment  11 — Electric  Heating,  Collaborating  with  Committee  6  and 
Mechanical  Division,  AAR. 

Chairman  Burley:  There  is  no  report  on  Assignment  11.  Progress  was  being  made 
on  several  items  under  the  chairmanship  of  B.  D.  Allison,  who  met  with  an  untimely 
death  earlier  this  year. 

Assignment  13 — Railway  Electrification,  Collaborating  with  Mechanical 
Division,  AAR. 

Chairman  Burley:  L.  B.  Curtis,  assistant  engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  who 
was  chairman  of  Subcommittee  13,  retired  recently.  He  has  been  succeeded  by  one  of 
his  co-workers  in  this  activity,  B.  C.  Hallowell,  engineer  of  electric  traction,  Long 
Island  Railroad.  Mr.  Hallowell  is  here  today  and  will  present  the  report  of  Subcom- 
mittee 13. 

B.  C.  Hallowell:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Under  this  assignment  one  of  our  subjects  is  Developments  in  the  Field  of  Elec- 
trification (Domestic  and  Foreign)  and  our  report  on  this  subject  states  that  the  nation's 
first  silicon  rectifier  locomotive,  No.  4460,  was  delivered  to  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad 
on  July  3,  1962.  This  locomotive  was  included  in  an  order  for  66  units,  60  of  which 
will  have  ignitron  rectifiers.  Completion  of  the  entire  order  is  expected  in  1963. 

The  report  also  states,  to  our  regret,  that  electric  operation  on  134  miles  of  the 
Norfolk  &  Western  (Virginian  Railway  section)  ended  on  July  1,  1962.  This  electrifica- 
tion had  been  in  continuous  operation  with  11 -kv  overhead  since  1924.  The  removal 
of  the  electrification  followed  the  merger  of  the  Norfolk  &  Western  and  the  Virginian 
railroads. 

At  the  present  time  the  Niagara  Junction  Railway  is  electrifying  a  new  yard  at 
Niagara  Falls,  N.   Y.   Light   catenary   has  been  installed.  The  voltage  will  be  600,  d-c. 

In  connection  with  commuter  and  rapid  transit,  the  subcommittee  is  investigating 
a  number  of  projects  that  are  taking  place  at  the  Delaware  River  Port  Authority,  the 
San  Francisco  Bay  Area  Rapid  Transit  District,  Los  Angeles  Metropolitan  Transit  Au- 
thority, and  the  National  Capita]  Transportation  Agency,  all  of  which  are  under  con- 
sideration, and  reports  will  be  made  as  developments  take  place. 

Our  former  chairman,  L.  B.  Curtis,  presented  an  AIEE  paper  entitled,  "Electrifica- 
tion— Devil  or  Angel?"  at  the  Winter  General  Meeting  of  the  Institute  in  New  York 
on  February  1,  1962.  Based  on  answers  from  a  questionnaire  distributed  by  Mr.  Curtis, 
inductive  reasoning  indicated  that  the  least  expensive  system  of  electrification  is  the 
commercial-frequency  high-voltage  system.  The  questionnaire  was  not  limited  to  the 
United  States  but  included  such  countries  as  England,  Japan,  the  International  Union 
of  Railroads  in   Europe,  and  other  groups. 

The  section  of  our  report  entitled  "Foreign  Developments",  states  that  in  India, 
Europe,  Japan  and  Katanga  there  are  a  number  of  extensive  electrification  systems 
being  installed,  most  of  them  at  25-kv  at  commercial  frequency. 

Our  report  also  includes  data  on  "General  Electrification  Economics."  When  con- 
sidering  electrification,   emphasis   is   frequently   placed   on   the   additional  investment  in 


Discussion 647 

fixed  property  necessary  to  supply  electric  energy  from  central  power  stations.  There 
is  no  economy,  per  se,  in  contact  systems,  substations,  or  in  the  type  of  electric  power 
supplied,  a-c  or  d-c.  The  economy  is  in  the  motive  power. 

Electric  motive  power  is  the  only  unit  which  entirely  eliminates  the  necessity  of 
hauling  the  prime  mover.  This  advantage  permits  larger  concentrations  of  horsepower 
for  faster  accelerations  and  higher  speeds,  at  lower  investment  and  operating  costs.  This 
economy  in  motive  power  must  be  sufficiently  fireat  not  only  to  prove  the  superiority 
of  electric  motive  power  over  all  other  types,  but  also  to  pay  for  the  additional  invest- 
ment and  operating  costs  of  the  fixed  property  requirements  for  its  use. 

A  condensed  report  will  be  presented  next  year  to  cover  the  past  seven  years  of 
electrification  reports  produced  by  this  committee  and  by  Committee  13  of  the  former 
AAR  Electrical  Section.  The  fifth  draft  of  the  condensation  was  distributed  to  the 
subcommittee  in  September.  Many  good  comments  have  been  received,  and  it  is  now 
planned  that  the   final  draft  will  be  ready  for  next  year's  report. 

Our  report  deals  with  one  other  subject — "Semi-Conductor  Rectifiers  for  Railway 
Electric  Power  Supply."  I  should  like  to  point  out  some  of  the  advantages  in  the  use 
of  the  silicon  rectifier  such  as  is  being  used  on  the  locomotives  on  the  Pennsylvania 
Railroad,  and  in  substations  in  many  locations,  such  as  right  here  in  Chicago,  on  the 
Chicago  Transit  Lines. 

In  summing  up  the  advantages,  we  have  the  following: 

1.  Low  first  cost. 

2.  High  efficiency. 

3.  Completely  static,  except  for  small  cooling  fan. 

4.  Minimum  control  circuitry. 

5.  Simplicity  of  operation. 

6.  Minimum  maintenance: 

(a)  Elimination  of  firing  and  other  excitation  circuits. 

(b)  Water  cooling  not  required. 

(c)  Replacement   of  diodes  a  very  minor  operation. 

(d)  Silicon  diode  failure  rate  less  than  0.5  percent  per  year. 

7.  Low  installation  costs. 

8.  Less  floor  space  required. 

9.  Maximum  reliability. 

Mr.   Chairman,   this  concludes  the  report  of  Subcommittee  13. 

Assignment   15 — Relations   with   Public   Utilities. 

Chairman-  Burley:  Next,  E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr.,  chairman  of  subcommittee  15,  is 
present  and  will  give  a  progress  report.  He  is  wire  crossing  engineer  system,  Chesapeake 
&  Ohio. 

E.  M.  Hastings,  Jr.:  Mr.  Code,  Mr.  Burley,  members  and  guests: 
Subcommittee  15  for  a  number  of  years  has  been  studying  the  possibility  of  estab- 
lishing a  system  of  uniform  rates  for  occupancy  of  railway  property  by  electric  supply 
lines  and  crossing  of  railway  property.  We  ran  into  B  -real  deal  of  difficulty  trying  to 
find  something  that  would  be  usable  by  the  railroads  generally,  because  of  differences 
in  terrain,  methods  of  operation,  etc.,  amonn  the  various  roads.  We  concluded  that 
setting  up  a  system  of  uniform  rates  was  not  feasible,  so  we  are  a-king  that  this  subject 
be  discontinued  and  that  the  matter  of  rale-  be  lefl   to  the  individual  railroads. 


648 Highways 

President    Code:    Thank   you,   Mr.   Hastings.   Any    questions   or   discussion?   Your 
recommendation  is  accepted. 

Please  continue,  Mr.  Burley. 


Chairman  Burley:  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  Committee  18; 
it  also  concludes  my  term  of  office  as  chairman  of  this  committee.  I  want  to  take  this 
opportunity  to  express  my  thanks  particularly  to  the  staff,  who  have  helped  both  me 
and  my  committee  get  our  roots  down  and  feel  at  home  here  in  the  AREA  in  these 
first  three  years  of  our  operation. 

At  this  time  I  would  like  to  present  to  you  the  new  chairman  of  Committee  18, 
J.   J.   Schmidt,  assistant   director  of  research,  Denver  &  Rio   Grande  Western   Railway. 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes  our  presentation. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Burley.  We  are  glad  to  have  your  group  in  our 
Association  as  our  Committee  18,  and  appreciate  the  reports  which  it  has  already 
brought  to  us.  Just  as  your  group  was  an  important  part  of  the  former  Electrical  Sec- 
tion, we  want  it  to  be  a  very  important  part  of  the  AREA,  keeping  us  fully  abreast 
of  all  developments  in   electrical  matters  affecting  the  fixed  properties. 

We  appreciate  your  service  as  chairman  of  Committee  18  for  the  past  two  years 
and  your  help  in   getting  the   committee   oriented  in   our  Association. 

We  are  pleased  to  welcome,  as  the  new  vice  chairman  of  your  committee,  F.  T. 
Snider  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad;  and  as  the  new  chairman,  Mr.  Schmidt,  knowing 
that  they  will  make  a  good  team  in  carrying  forward  the  work  of  the  committee  in 
the  years  immediately  ahead. 

Mr.  Schmidt,  if  you  will  please  step  here,  I  would  like  to  present  you  with  a  chair- 
man's gavel  as  the  symbol  of  authority  of  your  new  office.  I  congratulate  you  on  your 
selection   as  chairman,   and   wish  you  success  in   directing  the  work   of  the   committee. 

Mr.  Burley,  your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks  of  the  Association. 
[Applause  J 

Discussion  on  Highways 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  574,  pages  131-137] 

President  Code:  We  shall  next  deal  with  a  very  important  field  of  railroad  work 
in  which  several  groups  within  the  AAR  have  an  interest — possibly  more  than  neces- 
sary— the  Communication  and  Signal  Section;  the  AAR  Grade  Crossing  Committee; 
the  Grade  Crossing  Unit  of  Train  Operation  Control  and  Signals;  in  addition  to  the 
AREA.  I  refer  to  highway-railway  grade  crossings  and  their  protection. 

This  work,  insofar  as  the  AREA  is  concerned,  is  under  the  jurisdiction  of  our 
Committee  9 — Highways,  the  chairman  of  which  is  R.  W.  Mauer,  assistant  engineer,  At- 
chison, Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway.  Mr.  Mauer,  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  your 
committee  will  come  to  the  platform,  we  would  like  to  hear  your  report  at  this  time. 
You  may  proceed. 

Chairman  R.  W.  Mauer:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  AREA  and  guests: 
I  regret  to  announce  the  death  of  a  long-time  member  of  Committee  9,  Member 
Emeritus  Maro   Johnson,   retired   principal  assistant  engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad, 
who  passed  away  on  September  29,  1962.  A  memoir  to  Mr.  Johnson  is  being  submitted 
for  publication. 


Discussion 649 

MEMOIR 

jfttaro  Johnson 

Maro  Johnson,  retired  principal  assistant  engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  passed 
away  in  Dolton,  111.,  at  the  age  of  84  years  and  10  months. 

Mr.  Johnson  was  born  November  27,  1877,  at  Iowa  City,  Iowa.  He  was  graduated 
from  the  University  of  Iowa  with  a  B.S.  degree  in  Civil  Engineering  in  1898,  and 
received  a  C.E.  degree  in  1909.  Mr.  Johnson  began  his  career  with  the  Illinois  Central 
on  October  13,  1898,  as  a  masonry  inspector  at  Oilman,  111.,  and  was  appointed  principal 
assistant  engineer  in  the  vice  president  and  chief  engineer's  office  on  January  1,  1932. 
Between  those  dates  he  held  a  number  of  different  positions,  including  rodman,  drafts- 
man, instrumentman,  assistant  engineer,  assistant  engineer  bridges  and  buildings,  engineer 
bridges  and  buildings,  and  resident  engineer,  being  located  at  various  points  on  the  rail- 
road and  in  the  bridge  and  building  departments  in  Chicago.  He  worked  on  a  number 
of  important  construction  projects,  such  as  the  Albert  Lea,  Minn.,  track  extension,  the 
St.  Charles  Air  Line  bridge  and  the  Grand  Crossing  track  elevation  in  Chicago.  Mr. 
Johnson  retired  from  the  Illinois  Central  on  November  30,  1947,  at  the  age  of  70. 

Mr.  Johnson  was  an  active  member  of  the  AREA,  joining  the  Association  in  1911 
and  becoming  a  life  member  in  1947.  He  became  a  member  of  Committee  9 — Highways 
in  1914  and  was  elected  Member  Emeritus  in  1953.  He  served  as  vice  chairman  of 
Committee  9  in  1920  and  1921,  and  as  chairman  1922  through  1924.  He  also  was  a 
member  of  Committee  4 — Rail,  1937  to  1948,  and  Committee  26 — Standardization, 
1922   to   1924. 

Mr.  Johnson  was  preceded  in  death  by  his  wife,  Helen,  and  is  survived  by  two 
sons  and  one  daughter. 

Mr.  Johnson,  a  gentleman  of  the  old  school,  was  respected  and  greatly  admired 
by  all  who  had  the  privilege  of  working  with  him  and  will  be  remembered  by  his 
associates  and   friends   for  his  devotion,   loyalty   and  genial  personality. 

J.   M.   Trissal 

R.  E.  Skinner 

Committee  on  Memoir 


Chairman  Mauer:  The  report  of  Committee  9  is  published  in  Bulletin  S74,  starting 
on  page  131.  Your  committee  is  reporting  on  seven  assignments;  six  are  progress  reports, 
and  one  is  final.  As  these  reports  are  presented,  your  comments  or  questions  are  invited. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Mauer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  E.  R.  Englert,  cost  control  engineer, 
Louisville  &  Nashville  Railroad,  will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  1. 

E.  R.  Englkrt:  The  Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR,  has  eliminated  from 
its  Manual  drawings  showing  the  vertical  STOP  sign  on  flashing-light  and  wig-wag 
types  of  crossing  signals.  This  was  done  because  these  signs  are  no  longer  being  used 
for  new  installations  or  replacements.  Your  committee  believes  that  these  signs  should 
remain  in  the  AREA  Manual  for  the  time  being  to  protect  those  railroads  which  still 
have  them.  However,  since  they  are  no  longer  in  the  Signal  Manual,  the  notes  referring 
to  the  Signal  drawings  on  the  AREA  plans  should  be  deleted.  The  following  changes 
are  therefore  recommended: 


650 Highways 

Page  9-3-18,  Fig.  IS — Highway  Crossing  Signal,  Flashing-Light  Type  with  Stop 
Sign.  Delete  note  reading  "Details  shown  on  Signal  Drawing  1654." 

Page  9-3-20,  Fig.  17— Highway  Crossing  Signal,  Wig-Wag  Type  with  Stop  Sign. 
Delete   note   reading  "Details  shown   on   Signal  Drawing   1652." 

Are  there  any  questions? 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  these  recommendations  be  adopted. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  was  carried.] 

Assignment  2 — Merits  and  Economics  of  Prefabricated  Types  of 
Highway— Railway  Grade   Crossings. 

Chairman  Mauer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  J.  T.  Hoelzer,  regional  engineer,  Cen- 
tral Region,  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  2. 

J.  T.  Hoelzer:  Your  committee  continues  to  assemble  information  on  installation 
and  annual  maintenance  costs  of  the  various  types  of  prefabricated  crossings  for  further 
study  and  evaluation  of  their  merits  and  economics.  From  studies  to  date,  it  appears 
that  full-depth  creosoted-timber-panel  crossings  may,  in  many  circumstances,  result  in 
the  least  annual  expense. 

Assignment  3 — Merits  of  Various  Types  of  Highway-Railway  Grade 
Crossing  Protection. 

Chairman  Mauer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  J.  A.  Jorlett,  structural  engineer,  New 
York   Improvements,   Pennsylvania   Railroad,    will   present   a    report   on   Assignment   3. 

J.  A.  Jorlett:  Your  committee  has  previously  reported  on  the  completion  of  the 
report  "Analysis  of  Railroad  Crossings  and  Accident  Data  for  the  State  of  Ohio  During 
the  10-Year  Period,  1949  through  1958",  prepared  by  the  Armour  Research  Foundation 
of  the  Illinois  Institute  of  Technology,  with  funds  provided  through  the  Research 
Department   of   the  Association   of   American   Railroads. 

To  guard  against  misuse  of  the  report  and  acceptance  of  the  formulas  as  infallible 
when  it  is  released,  your  committee  has  prepared  a  foreword  to  be  bound  in  the  report 
which  points  out  the  danger  of  using  the  formulas  without  careful  consideration.  The 
recommended  foreword  is  as  follows: 

FOREWORD 

"This  analysis  covers  6011  accidents  that  occurred  at  7416  highway  crossings  of  12 
railroads  in  the  State  of  Ohio  during  the  10-year  period  1949  through  1958.  While  it 
includes  more  data  than  had  been  available  for  previous  similar  studies,  it  must  be 
understood  that  information  on  several  important  items  was  missing  from  the  accident 
reports.  Deficiencies  in  the  available  data  include  the  following: 

(1)  Highway  and  rail  traffic  were  not  recorded  by  hour  of  day  or  night.  As  a 
result,  it  was  not  possible  to  relate  properly  rail-highway  traffic  conflicts, 
or  exposure  to  accident,  in  the  analysis. 

(2)  The  accident  reports  do  not  cover  such  important  elements  as  season  of  the 
year,  weather  conditions,  pavement  surface  condition,  and  whether  accidents 
occurred  in   daylight  or  darkness. 

(3)  Data  were  not  available  on  the  speed  of  highway  traffic — an  important 
characteristic. 

(4)  Apparent  mental  and  physical  condition  of  drivers  of  highway  vehicles  in- 

volved in  accidents  was  not  recorded.  This  omission  is  characteristic  of  prac- 


Discussion 651 

tically  all  accident  reports  because  of  the  obvious  difficulty  or  impossibility 
of  determining  driver  condition. 

"Because  of  these  and  other  deficiencies  in  the  data  available  for  study,  it  is  em- 
phasized that  while  the  relationships  and  conclusions  developed  by  the  study  are  accept- 
able as  representative  of  the  Ohio  Data,  they  cannot  be  assumed  to  be  completely  reliable 
when  applied  to  other  railway-highway  grade  crossings.  If  used  as  a  guide  to  judgment, 
they  may  be  of  some  assistance  in  evaluating  risks  at  other  crossings." 

The  committee  wishes  to  correct  the  statement  on  page  186  of  Bulletin  567,  Novem- 
ber 1961,  to  the  effect  that  the  report  was  distributed  to  AAR  Member  Roads.  Dis- 
tribution of  the  report  has  been  confined  to  the  membership  of  Committee  9. 

Your  committee  feels  that  continuing  statistical  studies  should  be  made  with  addi- 
tional data  as  enumerated  in  the  foreword  and  for  crossings  where  the  type  of  protection 
has  been  changed  during  the  study  period. 

Assignment  4 — Factors  to  Be  Considered  for  Determining  the  Advan- 
tages of  Highway  Overpasses  as   Opposed  to   Underpasses. 

Chairman  Matjer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  C.  A.  Christensen,  engineer  of  public 
improvements,  Chicago,  Burlington  &  Quincy  Railroad,  will  present  a  final  report  on 
Assignment   4. 

C.  A.  Christensen:  Because  of  the  expanded  highway  program,  more  and  more 
grade  separation  structures  are  being  built  at  railway-highway  intersections.  These  struc- 
tures permanently  affect  the  railroad,  and  the  type  of  structure  to  be  installed  should 
be  carefully  considered. 

Generally,  the  selection  of  the  type  of  structure  will  be  governed  by  physical  con- 
ditions at  the  site.  If  the  normal  grade  line  of  a  highway  were  above  that  of  the  rail- 
road, the  highway  would  go  over  the  track.  Conversely,  if  the  highway  grade  were 
much  lower,  the  highway  would  be  carried  under  the  track  in  a  subway.  Where  grade 
lines  are  the  same,  or  nearly  so,  a  choice  of  type  of  structure  exists,  and  the  advantages 
of  overpass  construction  should  be  considered. 

Overpasses  often  can  be  built  at  less  cost  than  underpasses  because  of  the  lighter 
loads  carried.  Simpler  construction  procedures  resulting  in  cost  savings  are  possible  with 
overpasses  as  they  can  be  built  with  a  minimum  of  interference  with  rail  traffic  and 
involve  no  expensive  falsework  construction. 

An  overpass  offers  a  better  opportunity  for  stage  construction  with  minimum  im- 
pairment of  the  original  facility.  This  is  true  whether  the  original  structure  is  merely 
widened  or  if  additional  structures  and  roadways  arc  constructed  for  a  divided  lane 
highway.  If  additional  tracks  will  be  needed,  they  can  be  provided  for  in  the  original 
overpass  design,  often  without  additional  cost.  If  an  underpass  requires  widening  to 
provide  increased  track  capacity  or  space  for  off-track  maintenance  equipment,  extra 
sive  rebuilding  and  loss  of  a  great  part  of  the  original  facility  is  seldom  avoidable. 

Troublesome  drainage  problems  may  be  avoided  by  construction  of  an  overpass. 
In  some  locations  a  subway  would  require  expensive  drainage  systems  with  pumping 
plants  costly  to  maintain  and  operate  and  subject  to  failure  during  storms.  This  alone 
may  be  sufficient  reason  to  choose  an  overpass. 

Lateral  clearances  can  readily  be  provided  tor  railroad-'  off-track  equipment  when 
an  overpass  is  built,  but  provision  tor  such  equipment  at  an  underpass  i-  much  more 
difficult,  and  usually  must  be  at  railroad  expense  under  existing  policy  of  tin-  Rurcau 
of   Public   Roads. 


652 Highways    

There  are,  of  course,  some  disadvantages  in  overpass  construction.  In  yard  areas, 
overpass  structures  may  interfere  with  free  use  of  the  area  for  track  rearrangement. 
Piers  may  obstruct  the  view  of  switching  crews,  thus  hampering  their  operation.  Vertical 
and  lateral  clearances,  although  sufficient  for  operation  of  trains,  may  limit  the  use  of 
cranes  and  pile  drivers.  This  is  especially  serious  in  shop  areas  and  in  the  vicinity  of 
bridges. 

This  is  a  final  report  submitted  as  information.  Your  committee  recommends  that 
the  subject  be  discontinued. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Christensen.  Your  report  will  be  received  as 
information. 

Are  there  any  questions  from  the  floor? 

W.  R.  Wilson  [Santa  Fe] :  Mr.  President,  I  haven't  any  questions,  but  I  do  have 
a   comment. 

I  agree  with  the  premise  of  the  committee  that  overpasses  are  better  from  a  rail- 
road point  of  view  in  many  cases.  However,  when  the  railroads  receive  plans  from 
the  state  highway  department  on  these  overpasses  for  review,  there  are  a  few  things 
that   should  be  noted  particularly. 

One  is  that  many  times  the  plans  will  call  for  scuppers  through  the  curb  to  drain 
the  deck,  which  permit  the  water  to  fall  on  the  track  and  erode  the  ballast  section. 
That  should  be  watched  for.  Secondly,  where  concrete  piles  or  columns  are  placed  fairly 
close  to  the  track,  crash  walls  or  some  other  provision  should  be  installed  to  prevent 
the  overhead  structure  from  coming  down  on  top  of  a  derailment. 

In  some  cases  plans  for  skew  structures  might  call  for  a  single  column  with  a  rocker 
shoe  on  top  of  it.  I  have  seen  a  20-in  column  20  ft  high  and  about  14  ft  from  the 
track,  with  no  horizontal  support  at  the  top.  If  a  derailment  or  wide  load  should  strike 
such  a  column,  the  overhead  structure  is  in  danger  of  collapsing.  In  such  a  situation 
the  column  should  be  greatly  strengthened. 

Finally,  there  should  be  adequate  railings  and  curbs  on  the  highway  structure  to 
prevent  cars  from  coming  off  the  structure  down  onto  the  railroad  track.  We  have  had 
cases  where  that  has  happened. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Wilson.  Do  you  care  to  add  anything,  Mr. 
Christensen  ? 

Mr.  Christensen:    No,  Mr.  President. 

President  Code:  I  have  a  question  concerning  your  premise  that  overpass  con- 
struction is  the  better  deal  for  the  railroads.  How  does  this  apply  in  a  settled  community 
where  grade  separation  involves  a  series  of  streets  with  property  adjacent  to  the  right- 
of-way   fully  developed? 

Mr.  Christensen:  That  would  be  more  or  less  a  special  case.  Our  report  considered 
the  case  where  there  is  a  choice. 

President  Code:   Thank  you. 

Are  there  any  other  questions  or  comments? 

D.  F.  Lyons  [CSS&SB]:  I  have  a  comment  that  might  be  of  interest.  We  have 
an  overhead  structure  paralleling  our  track  carrying  a  toll  road.  We  are  having  a  prob- 
lem with  salt  being  sprayed  onto  our  telephone  and  signal  lines  during  the  winter  when 
salt  is  sprayed  on  the  highway.  It  causes  our  poles  to  catch  fire,  and  we  have  to 
replace  them. 

President  Code:   Do  you  have  a  solution  for  that  problem? 

Mr.  Lyons:  Not  yet. 

President  Code:   Any  other  comments?  Please  proceed,  Mr.  Mauer. 


Discussion 653 

Assignment  5 — Recommended  Method  of  Developing  Annual  Mainte- 
nance Cost  of  the  Various  Types  of  Highway-Railway  Grade  Crossing  Pro- 
tection,  Collaborating  with   Communication  and  Signal  Section,  AAR. 

Chairman  Mauer:  In  the  absence  of  Subcommittee  Chairman  F.  C.  Cunningham, 
division  engineer,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  due  to  flood  conditions  in  his  area  in 
Kentucky,  Vice  Chairman  Raymond  Dejaiffe,  chief  engineer,  Toledo  Terminal  Railroad, 
will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  5. 

R.  Dejaiffe  [for  Mr.  Cunningham]:  The  brief  progress  report  on  this  assign- 
ment published  in  the  Bulletin  was,  of  necessity,  prepared  in  October  1962.  That  report 
outlines  your  committee's  continuing  collaboration  with  Committee  8  of  the  Communica- 
tion and  Signal  Section,  AAR. 

Signal  Committee  8  has  now  completed  its  assignment  of  conducting  an  actual  cost 
record  study,  and  has  compiled  the  actual  costs  which  were  furnished  by  41  representa- 
tive railroads  of  the  United  States  and  Canada,  covering  27  states  and  3  provinces,  for 
a  period  of  one  year,  from  July  1,  1961,  to  June  30,  1962.  Its  report  has  been  approved 
by  the  members  of  Signal  Committee  8  and  the  Communication  and  Signal  Section 
Committee  of  Direction  and  will  be  published  in  the  Advance  Notice  as  information 
at  its  meeting  in  October  1963. 

From  the  cost  data  supplied,  Signal  Committee  8  has  found  that  the  average  annual 
maintenance  cost  of  flashing-light  signals,  including  installations  on  single  track,  multiple 
tracks,  signaled  and  non-signaled  territory,  is  $581 ;  also  that  the  average  annual  main- 
tenance cost  of  flashing-light  signals  and  gates,  grouped  in  similar  manner,  is  $1099, 
based  on  the  year  1961  costs;  and  recommends  that  these  costs  be  trended  to  subsequent 
years  by  ICC  Indices. 

Representatives  of  AREA  Committee  9  and  Signal  Committee  8  held  a  joint  meet- 
ing on  March  14,  1963,  and  discussed  this  subject.  Those  present  concurred  with  Signal 
Committee  8's  findings  as  to  the  overall  average  costs  and  method  recommended  for 
future  adjustments. 

Your  committee  acknowledges  with  appreciation  the  fine  cooperation  and  assistance 
received  from  Signal  Committee  8. 

These  average  annual  maintenance  costs  are  submitted  as  advance  information. 
Your  committee   recommends  that  the  assignment  be  continued. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Dejaiffe.  The  report  will  be  received  as 
information. 

Are  there  any  questions  or  comments  concerning  this  report?  If  not,  you  may 
proceed,  Mr.  Mauer. 

Assignment  6 — Methods  of  Providing  Additional  Advance  Warning  to 
Highway    Traffic  Approaching  a   Highway-Railway   Grade   Crossing. 

Chairman  Mauer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  C.  W.  Traister,  grade  crossing  engi- 
neer, Erie-Lackawanna   Railroad,   will  present   the  report   on  Assignment  6. 

C.  W.  Traister:  Your  committee  is  actively  engaged  in  obtaining  and  assembling 
data  reflecting  the  methods  of  the  various  states  for  providing  additional  advance  warn- 
ing to  highway  traffic  approaching  a  highway  railway  tirade  crossing.  In  response  to  a 
questionnaire  dated  November  1,  1962,  we  have  received  replies  from  44  Btate  highway 
departments,  some  of  which  have  been   very  pertinent  and  instructive. 

It  is  evident  from  our  preliminary  studies  th.it  the  interest  in  this  subject,  gen- 
erated   by    the    various    public   agencies   and    railroads,    warrants    a    comprehensive   and 


654 Highways 

thorough   analysis.   We   solicit   your   suggestions   as   to   how   and   what  your   committee 
should  investigate. 

President  Code:   Thank  you.  I  hope  you  will  receive  some  suggestions. 

Assignment  7 — Conduct  Study  With  the  View  Toward  Developing 
Alternate  Types  of  Automatic  Crossing  Protection. 

Chairman  Mauer:  Subcommittee  Chairman  C.  I.  Hartsell,  division  engineer,  Chesa- 
peake &  Ohio  Railway,  will  present  the  report  on  Assignment  7. 

C.  I.  Hartsell:  Your  committee  has  submitted  its  preliminary  findings  on  this 
subject,  which  indicate  that  a  great  many  people  are  attempting  to  develop  crossing 
protection  of  various  types  for  different  purposes  such  as: 

1.  Auxiliary  protection  to  standard  crossbuck  signs,  such  as  octagonal  highway 
stop  signs  with  or  without  lights,  rectangular  "Railroad  Crossing"  signs  with 
or  without  lights,  continuously  flashing  overhead  lights  and  regular  highway 
traffic  signals. 

2.  An  intermediate  protection  between  standard  crossbuck  signs  and  automatic 
flashing  lights.  One  proposed  type  is  the  so-called  Ohio  sign  which  consists  of  a 
special  30-  by  48-in  red  reflectorized-background  sign  with  white  reflectorized 
letters  "RR  and  X",  with  continuously  flashing  amber  lights  above  and  below 
the  sign  which  is  placed  in  close  proximity  to  the  crossing. 

3.  Substitution  of  an  electronic  system  for  the  normal  insulated-joint  track-circuit 
system  for  automatic  crossing  protection. 

It  appears  to  your  committee  that  considerable  reduction  in  future  investment  and 
maintenance  may  be  obtained  if  the  present  awakening  and  development  of  crossing 
protection  facilities  can  be  encouraged.  We  solicit  your  suggestions  as  to  possible 
alternate  types  of  protection  and  fields  of  investigation. 

President  Code:   Thank  you,  Mr.  Hartsell 

Are  there  any  questions  or  comments  from  the  floor? 

E.  F.  Snyder  [Illinois  Central] :  We  have  a  few  of  these  regular  highway  traffic 
signals  at  highway  intersections  with  railroads.  I  wonder  if  the  committee  has  developed 
any  information  as  to  the  number  that  have  been  installed  throughout  the  country, 
and  whether  the  committee  plans  a  survey  to  gage  their  efficiency. 

Mr.  Hartsell:  You  are  raising  a  "hot  potato."  There  are  scattered  installations, 
as  you  say.  I  know  of  others  up  in  our  own  area  in  Michigan, 

Actually,  we  had  not  planned  to  make  such  a  survey.  We  find  considerable  opposi- 
tion from  various  organizations  to  that  type  of  installation.  For  instance,  the  Uniform 
Traffic  Control  Committee  wishes  to  keep  certain  signs  and  signals  for  certain  things. 
However,  we  do  understand  that  there  is  a  joint  committee  that  will  be  formed  and 
that  will  make  a  study  of  the  relative  efficiency  of  various  kinds  of  protection  for  the 
prevention  of  accidents  at  railroad-highway  grade  crossings.  That  is  a  joint  committee 
between  the  AAR  and  the  Association  of  American  State  Highway  Officials.  That  is 
about  all  I  can  answer  you  on  that  question. 


Chairman  Mauer:   Mr.  President,  that  concludes  the  presentation  by  Committee  9. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Mauer.  I  don't  know  that  I  gave  the  committee 
a  chance  to  comment  on  Mr.  Lyons'  remarks. 

Does  the  committee  have  any  suggestions  or  comments  to  make  in  connection  with 
Mr.  Lyon's  difficulty  with  the  material  being  thrown  onto  his  wires? 


Discussion 655 

Chairman  Mauer:  I  would  like  to  ask  Mr.  Lyons  a  question:  What  was  the  result 
of  your  vigorous  protest  to  the  highway  department? 

Mr.  Lyons:  The  protest  has  been  recent,  and  we  have  had  no  results  yet. 

Chairman  Mauer:  How  close  is  that  structure  to  your  tracks? 

Mr.  Lyons:  About  25  to  30  ft.  It  even  extends  over  onto  our  right-of-way,  and 
an  agreement  has  not  been  drawn  up.  This  has  given  us  another  problem. 

Chairman  Mauer:    You  do  have  a  problem.    [Laughter] 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Mauer.  Your  committee  has  a  number  of  most 
interesting  and  important  studies  under  way,  and  we  hope  you  will  progress  them 
through  to  completion  as  rapidly  as  possible,  in  the  interest  of  all  concerned.  I  am  sure 
we  will  all  agree  that  there  should  be  the  closest  uniformity  possible  between  the  rec- 
ommendations contained  in  the  Signal  Manual,  the  AREA  Manual,  and  the  revised 
Bulletin  5  of  TOC&S,  and  I  am  sure  your  committee  is  working  to  that  end. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Mauer.  Your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on   Economics  of  Railway  Labor 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  575,  pages  263-304] 

President  Code:  From  the  important  matter  of  highway-railway  crossings  we  shall 
next  turn  our  attention  to  the  all-important  matter  of  economics  of  railway  labor, 
handled  by  our  committee  bearing  that  name — Committee  22 — Economics  of  Railway 
Labor.  The  chairman  of  this  committee  is  J.  E.  Eisemann,  chief  engineer,  Western  Lines 
of  the  Santa  Fe  System,  who  is  located  at  Amarillo,  Tex.  I  am  sure  this  committee  has 
several  interesting  reports  to  present,  and  we  shall  be  glad  to  hear  them  at  this  time. 
Mr.  Eisemann,  when  you  are  ready  you  may  proceed. 

Chairman  J.  E.  Eisemann:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 
Committee  22  reports  are  to  be  found  in  Bulletin  575,  starting  on  page  263,  issued 
in  December  1962. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Eisemann:  Assignment  1  is  handled  by  W.  W.  Hay,  professor  of  railway 
engineering,  University  of  Illinois.  In  view  of  the  overhaul  of  the  chapter  completed 
last  year,  there  is  no  report  this  year. 

Assignment  2 — Analysis  of  Operations  of  Railways  That  Have  Sub- 
stantially Reduced  the  Cost  of  Labor  Required  in  Maintenance  of  Way 
Work. 

Chairman-  Eiskmann:  Under  this  assignment  we  visited  the  Chesapeake  &  Olvo 
Railway  last  summer  at  Huntington,  W.  Va.,  and  saw  rail  relaying  and  related  work 
that  was  very  interesting.  The  details  of  the  operation  are  given  in  the  report  of  Sub- 
committee 2  prepared  under  the  direction  of  Subcommittee  Chairman  E.  J.  Sierleja, 
industrial   engineer   system,   Pennsylvania    Railroad,   who   is   unable    to    be   here    today. 

Assignment  3 — Labor  Economies  to  Be  Derived  from  Work  Measure- 
ment Standards  for  Comparison  of  Work  Performance  Among  Various 
Gangs  or  Divisions. 

Chairman  Eisemann:  H.  J.  Fast,  area  manager,  Canadian  National  Railways, 
and  chairman  of  Subcommittee  3,  could  not  be  present  today.  His  report  is  submitted 
as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject  be  discontinued  for  at  least 


656 Economics   of   Railway   Labor 

a  few  years  until  further  studies  can  be  better  warranted.  For  the  present  report  we  did 
not  get  enough  information   to  make  as  good  a  presentation  as  we  thought  we  should. 

Assignment  4 — Labor  Economics  to  Be  Derived  from  Cropping  Rail  in 
Track   Versus  Building  up  Rail  Ends  by   Welding. 

Chairman  Eisemann:  Assignment  4's  subcommittee  chairman  is  H.  W.  Seeley, 
chief  engineer,  Detroit,  Toledo  &  Ironton.  Unfortunately  he  could  not  be  here  today. 
His  report  is  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  assignment 
be  discontinued. 

Assignment  5 — Labor  Economies  Inherent  to  Various  Methods  of 
Taking  up  Track. 

Chairman  Eisemann:  The  report  on  Assignment  5  was  prepared  by  Subcommittee 
Chairman  John  Stang,  industry  planning  analyst  of  the  New  York  Central.  It  is  being 
submitted  as  a  final  report,  but  it  was  so  interesting  and  had  so  many  things  in  it  that 
we  thought  it  might  be  well  to  have  Mr.  Stang  give  a  summary  of  the  report,  along 
with  a  series  of  slides  showing  the  various  methods  of  taking  up  track.  As  Mr.  Stang 
talks,  you  might  pay  particular  attention  to  the  labor  figures  that  he  might  quote  for 
each   method. 

Mr.  Stang,  will  you  kindly  give  your  report? 

John  Stang:  Mr.  Code,  Mr.  Eisemann,  members  of  AREA  and  guests:  we  should 
like  to  present  some  of  the  highlights  of  Subcommittee  5  report  with  slides. 

Modern  technology  has  revolutionized  many  railroad  practices,  particularly  in  the 
methods  applied  to  track  retirement,  construction  and  maintenance.  Bold  original  think- 
ing has  developed  techniques  that  have  provided  for  greater  flexibility  and  speed  in 
meeting  the  demands  of  traffic  changes.  These  techniques  have  achieved  important  and 
substantial  labor  economies.  Centralized  traffic  control  installations  on  a  broad  scale 
have  enabled  the  railroads  to  decrease  their  physical  plant  while  creating  a  transportation 
network  of  greater  capacity. 

One  Eastern  railroad  during  the  last  10  years  has  physically  retired  in  excess  of 
4200  miles  of  track.  This  required  the  handling  of  approximately  170  million  pieces  of 
material  weighing  approximately  3l/2  million  tons.  Many  more  tons  of  ballast  were 
recovered.  There  are  approximately  40,000  individual  pieces  of  track  materials  in  each 
mile  of  track.  These  individual  components  may  have  been  handled  as  many  as  five  or 
six  times  before  being  reused,  or  salvaged.  By  developing  efficient  methods  of  salvaging 
the  material,  the  railroads  have  adopted  the  philosophy  of  Benjamin  Franklin  that  "a 
penny  saved  is  a  penny  earned."  As  a  result,  millions  of  dollars  worth  of  usable 
materials  have   been   salvaged  and  reused   economically. 

Retirement  methods  were  categorically  divided  by  the  committee  into  three  groups: 

1.  Conventional 

2.  Ripping 

3.  Panelizing 

The  greater  the  degree  of  mechanization  in  these  methods,  the  lower  the  man-hour 
costs.  From  a  sampling  of  man-hours  and  unit  costs  secured  from  many  representative 
railroads,  labor  costs  for  these  three  methods  are  as  follows: 

Man-Hours  Per 
Method  Track  Mile 

Conventional     400  to  1200 

Ripping     300  to     500 

Panelizing     250  to     400 

(Text  continued  on  page  626) 


Discussion 


657 


Skeletonized   track,   with  good   second-hand   ties  and   scrap   ties  piled 
adjacent  to  the  track. 


The  diesel  crane  pulls  the  strings  of  20  rails  1200  to  1500  ft  along  the 
skeletonized  track.  One  rail  string  is  pulled  into  the  6-ft  and  the  other  on 
the  outside  of  the  ties  on  the  field  side.  Production  rate  for  this  method 
was  3300  ft  per  day,  using  450  man-hours  per  day  (50  men). 


658 


Economics    of   Railway    Labor 


This  slide  shows  another  type  of  ripper.  The  distance  from  the  top  of 
the  roller  to  the  bottom  of  the  girder  is  8  in  to  allow  for  complete  extrac- 
tion of  the  track  spikes. 


The  most  economical  number  of  rails  to  be  handled  at  one  time 
was  determined  to  be  six. 


Discussion 


659 


This  stoneboat  and  magnet-equipped  tractor-crane  were  used  for 
handling  other  track  material  and  scrap.  The  stoneboat  can  be  pulled  from 
either  end. 


This  slide  shows  a  freight  car  truck  being  set  on  the  track  preparatory 

to  loading  panels. 


660 


Economics   of    Railway    Labor 


A  mobile,  centralized  dismantling  plant  was  devised,  and  was  con- 
structed on  top  of  four  steel  box  cars,  which  could  be  moved  over  the  road 
as  required,  thus  reducing  the  length  of  haul  of  the  track  panels. 


Track  panels  are  lifted  from  gondola  cars  by  a  hydraulic,  transverse 
traveling  crane,  as  shown  here,  and  are  set  on  a  chain  conveyor  on  the  roof 
deck  of  the  first  box  car.  The  diesel  engines,  hydraulic  pumps  and  genera- 
tors required  to  power  most  of  these  operations  are  in  the  first  two  box  cars. 


Discussion 


661 


Clamps  grasp  the  tie  plates  of  a  tie  and  hold  them  while  the  "stomper" 
at  each  end  of  the  tie  pushes  the  tie  down.  By  pressing  a  button  the  operator 
can  direct  the  falling  tie  to  the  right  or  left,  depending  on  whether  it  is 
scrap  or  second  hand. 


The  tie  plates  and  spikes  fall  on  to  a  chute  that  slides  them  into  a 
spotted  gon.  The  rails  continue  ,o  move  forward  on  rollers  on  the  third 
and  fourth  cars  where  they  are  removed  by  a  specially  built  gasoline- 
powered  hydraulic  crane. 


662 


E  c  o  n  o  mics   of   Railway   Labor 


The  crane  operator  loads  the  rails  into  any  one  of  four  gons  by  himself, 
without  any  assistance.  The  crane  has  a  telescopic  boom  and  a  specially 
designed  swivel  head  with  two  rail  clamps.  The  mobile  plant  is  capable  of 
dismantling  55  panels  per  day,  using  72  man-hours   (nine  men). 


The  method  of  track  retirement  depends  to  some  extent  on  the  end  use  of  the 
material.  For  instance,  the  ripping  method  is  usually  used  when  the  rail  is  sold  for 
scrap  or  reroller.  Since  any  one  of  these  methods  may  be  used,  a  comparison  of  all 
the  cost  factors  should  be  made  to  determine  the  most  economic  one. 

[Mr.  Stang  then  showed  and  commented  on  36  slides,  only  11  of  which  are 
presented  herewith.  Other  photographs  of  the  various  methods  of  taking  up  track  are 
reproduced  with  the  committee  report  on  pages  278  to  299  of  Bulletin  575.  After 
showing  the  slides,  Mr.  Stang  continued  as  follows:] 

Mr.  Stang:  No  doubt  you  gentlemen  have  developed  methods  or  adaptions  of 
these  methods  that  are  equally  satisfactory,  but  these  slides,  I  hope,  will  stimulate  us 
to  further  thinking. 

Now  what  does  the  future  hold  in  the  track  retirement  area?  Briefly,  I  think  we 
can  look  for  an  expansion  in  the  use  of  panel  track  and  the  handling  of  track  retire- 
ments in  larger  units,  even,  perhaps,  quarter-mile  lengths  of  welded  rail  panels.  Such 
long  panels,  of  course,  will  require  equipment  capable  of  handling  them.  The  size  of 
the  unit  and  the  way  it  is  removed,  transported,  or  installed  depends  upon  the  boldness 
and  the  creative  thinking  we  apply  to  this  end. 

Before  I  close,  on  behalf  of  Mr.  Eisemann  and  the  members  of  Committee  22,  I 
would  like  to  thank  all  the  railroads  and  their  people  for  the  splendid  cooperation  and 
information   they   provided  to   our  committee. 

In  closing  let  us  bear  in  mind:  The  most  successful  industry  or  railroad  company 
is  the  one  which  holds  on  to  the  old  just  as  long  as  it  is  good  and  grasps  the  new  just 
as   soon   as   it   is   better. 


Discussion 663 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Slang,  for  a  very  interesting  group  of  slides  and 
presentation. 

Are  there  any  questions  or  remarks  from  the  floor  on  this  important  subject? 

C.  L.  Holman  [Santa  Fe] :  Since  your  report  seems  to  have  shown  that  the  panel- 
ing type  of  removal  is  the  most  economical  thus  far  devised,  what  preparatory  steps 
are  required?  Do  you  have  to  hit  your  spikes  down  to  avoid  delaying  your  organ- 
izations by  ties  falling  when  you  lift  a  panel? 

Mr.  Stang:  I  didn't  show  any  of  the  squaring-of-thc-joints  operations  preparatory 
to  actually  making  the  panels,  because  I  didn't  have  any  slides.  I  wonder  if  there  is 
anyone  in   the  audience   who   would  care  to  answer  the  question. 

J.  S.  Snyder  [Pennsylvania]:  I  think  the  question  is:  What  do  you  do  with  the  tie 
that  doesn't  come  up  with  the  rail?  The  answer  is  that  you  leave  it.  If  you  lift  a  panel 
of  track  up  and  you  have  only  four  good  ties  that  hold  onto  the  rail,  that  is  still  the 
panel,  as  I  understand  it.  You  don't  attempt  to  try  to  fasten  the  old  ties  onto  the  rail 
when  you  take  up  your  panels. 

President  Code:   In  other  words,  if  they  fall  off  it's  good  riddance. 

Mr.  Stang:  Yes.  You  could  knock  the  spike  heads  down  onto  the  rail  to  help 
them  hold  the  ties  onto  the  rail,  but  if  a  tie  does  fall  off  you  just  have  to  pull  it  off 
to  the  side. 

D.  F.  Lyons  [CSS&SB]:  You  mentioned  four  gons  in  which  you  set  the  rail  after 
it  is  dismantled.  What  are  those  classifications? 

Mr.  Stang:  Mr.  Kerns,  would  you  venture  to  say? 

M.  E.  Kerns   [New  York  Central] :  It  is  a  little  out  of  my  category. 

Mr.  Stang:  This  is  the  man  responsible  for  the  development  of  the  dismantling 
plant. 

Mr.  Kerns:  Although  I  built  the  machines,  I  can't  answer  that  question.  However, 
as  I  understand  it,  the  classifications  vary  depending  upon  the  quality  of  the  track 
panels.  We  have  relay  rail,  and  rail  that  is  going  to  be  cropped  and  welded  together, 
side  track  rail  and  scrap  rail.  Wc  can  have  more  than  four  classifications,  but  usually 
we  don't  have  more  than  four  out  of  a  particular  quality  of  track  panels.  In  other 
words,  if  the  track  panels  are  bad  you  classify  them  from  scrap  upward,  and  if  they 
are  good  they   fall  into  the  various   classifications  of  relay  rail. 

President  Code:  Any  further  discussion?  Thank  you,  gentlemen,  for  your  dis- 
cussion. You  may  proceed,  Mr.  Eisemann. 

Assignment  7 — Labor  Economies  in  Track  Maintenance  to  Be  Derived 
Through  the  Use  of  Combination  On-Off-Track  Equipment  vs.  On-Track 
Equipment   Only. 

Chairman  Eisemann:  This  assignment  is  headed  by  T.  L.  Kanan,  assistant  engineer 
of  track,  Colorado  &  Southern  Railroad.  Will  Mr.  Kanan  please  stand  and  be  recog- 
nized? Thank  you. 

This  report  is  submitted  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  subject 
be  discontinued  for  the   time  being. 

Assignment  8 — Labor  Economies  to  Be  Derived  from  the  Welding. 
Distributing,  Laying  and  Maintenance  of  Continuous  Welded  Rail. 

Chairman  Eiskmaw:  This  subcommittee  is  collaborating  with  the  Special  Com- 
mittee on  Continuous  Welded  Rail.  The  report  was  written  by  Chairman  W.  J.  Jones, 
engineer  maintenance  of  way  and  structures — system.  Southern  Pacific.  Mr.  Jones,  will 
you  please  stand  and  be  recognized?  Thank  you. 


664 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

This  report  has  been  under  study  by  Committee  22  for  a  three-year  period,  and 
it  is  offered  as  information,  with  the  recommendation  that  the  assignment  be  discon- 
tinued for  the  time  being. 


Chairman  Eisemann  [continuing]:  Mr.  President,  this  completes  the  presentation 
of  the  report  of  Committee  22  for  the  current  year. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Eisemann,  for  the  continuing  good  work  of  your 
committee  in  bringing  us  information  and  recommendations  for  constantly  improving 
the  efficiency  of  carrying  out  our  various  maintenance  operations. 

I  note  that  your  committee  has  four  new  assignments  on  its  agenda  for  the  year 
ahead,  which  I  am  sure  will  assure  us  of  another  group  of  interesting  and  valuable 
reports  a  year  hence. 

Your   committee   is   now   excused,   with   the   thanks   of   the   Association.    [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  575,  pages  305-325] 

President  Code:  Closing  our  program  for  today,  we  shall  next  and  last — but  not 
least — hear  from  another  one  of  our  important  committees,  Committee  27 — Maintenance 
of  Way  Work  Equipment,  a  committee  which  has  become  increasingly  important  over 
the  years  with  the  extensive  developments  and  widespread  use  of  machines  and  equip- 
ment in  our  maintenance  of  way  and  structures  operations. 

The  chairman  of  this  committee  is  R.  S.  Radspinner,  assistant  superintendent,  work 
equipment  and  reclamation  system,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  at  Barboursville,  W. 
Va.,  who  is  completing  his  second  year  as  chairman. 

Mr.  Radspinner,  if  you  and  the  other  members  of  your  committee  will  assemble 
quickly  here  at  our  speaker's  table,  I  shall  be  glad  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you. 

Chairman  R.  S.  Radspinner:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  association,  and 
guests: 

We  are  reporting  on  eight  assignments;  one  is  a  progress  report,  four  are  continuing 
subjects,   and   three  are  final. 

Our  presentation  will  be  confined  to  a  brief  summary  of  the  published  reports;  but 
due  to  the  technical  nature  of  these  reports.  I  suggest  that  much  can  be  gained  by  read- 
ing the  complete  report  in  the  Bulletin.  Several  reports  include  good  pictures  to  illustrate 
the  equipment  or  items  discussed. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of  Manual. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  1  is  R.  W.  Bailey,  engineer 
— scales  and  work  equipment,  Chicago  &  North  Western  Railway.  Study  and  discussion 
was  conducted  by  the  subcommittee,  but  no  report  will  be  submitted  this  year. 

Assignment  1  (a) — Revision  of  Handbook  of  Instructions  for  Care  and 
Operation    of   Maintenance   of    Way   Equipment. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  This  is  a  progress  report,  including  recommended  addi- 
tions. The  report  will  be  presented  by  Subcommittee  Chairman  S.  E.  Tracy,  superin- 
tendent work  equipment,  Burlington  Lines. 

S.  E.  Tracy:  Since  the  Handbook  was  revised  in  1957,  your  committee  has  found 
that  18  units  of  equipment  had  reached  sufficient  distribution  and  use  to  warrant  the 
publication  of  instructions  in  this  and  past  Bulletins. 


Discussion 665 

It  is  thought  that  the  manner  in  which  this  material  is  arranged  in  the  Bulletin 
will  simplify  the  task  of  revision  if  and  when  authorized  by  the  Board  of  Direction. 
It  is  the  intention  of  the  committee  to  recommend  deletion  of  obsolete  material  from 
time  to  time  further  to  simplify  revision. 

The  material  as  published  in  Bulletin  575  is  presented  as  information,  but  it  is 
recommended  that  it  be  included  in  the  next  edition  of  the  Handbook. 

Assignment  2 — Improvements  To  Be  Made  To  Existing  Work  Equip- 
ment. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  J.  O.  Elliott,  division  engineer,  St.  Louis-San  Francisco 
Railway,  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  2,  which  is  assembling  information  to  be  included 
in  the  report  for  1963. 

Assignment  3 — Standardization  of  Parts  and  Accessories  for  Work 
Equipment. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  This  is  a  continuing  assignment  to  study  various  com- 
ponents or  accessories  used  in  mechanical,  hydraulic,  pneumatic  and  electrically  oper- 
ated work  equipment.  Xo  report  will  be  given  this  year.  Studies  are  being  completed 
on  hydraulic  tanks  and  their  component  parts.  Other  systems  are  to  be  included  for 
development   of   specifications  and   Manual   material. 

Assignment  4 — Reclaiming  and  Extending  Service  Life  of  Machine 
Parts  by  Metallizing,  Plating  and   Welding. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  This  is  an  excellent  final  report  presented  as  information. 
L.  E.  Conner,  supervisor  work  equipment,  Seaboard  Air  Line  Railroad,  subcommittee 
chairman,  was  unable  to  attend.  His  report  will  be  read  by  R.  M.  Johnson,  supervisor 
work  equipment.  Western  Maryland  Railway. 

R.  M.  Johnson  [for  Mr.  Conner] :  While  there  are  several  processes  or  methods 
used  in  the  reclamation  of  various  work  equipment  machine  parts,  three  commonly 
used  are  welding,  metalizing  and  plating.  Quite  a  number  of  railroads  use  one  or  more 
of  these  processes  in  their  reclamation  work  and  have  reported  considerable  savings 
in  their  use. 

Spray  metallizing  was  first  used  more  than  20  years  ago,  and  insofar  as  method 
of  application  is  concerned,  has  progressively  improved  to  the  extent  that  today  very 
satisfactory  results  are  obtained.  Proper  preparation  of  the  work  prior  to  metallizing  has 
always  been  stressed  in   order  to  insure  a  permanent  bond. 

Industrial  hard  chrome  plating  of  various  parts  has  been  in  use  for  a  number  of 
years,  and  this  process  has  been  found  to  be  very  economical,  very  satisfactory,  and 
materially   increases  the  service   life  of  the   reclaimed   parts  many   times  over. 

The  welding  process  has  been  in  use  for  reclaiming  cracked  or  broken  parts  of 
various  machines  and  castings  for  just  about  as  long  as  the  art  of  welding  has  been 
in  existence.  Welding  has  also  been  used  extensively  in  building  up  and  restoring 
worn   parts. 

There  arc  many  parts  used  in  work  equipment  that  can  be  reclaimed  by  one  of  the 
three  reclamation  processes  mentioned  in  this  report.  Normally,  these  parts  ma\  then 
be  reclaimed  for  service  with  a  greatly  extended  service  life  and  in  some  instances,  a 
longer  service  life  is  obtained  than  when  the  part  was  new. 

An  investigation  should  be  made  by  the  supervisor  or  foreman  in  charge  to  develop 
the  most  practical  and  economical  method  of  reclaiming  the  part  involved.  In  must 
instances,   a  part  may   be   reclaimed  at   a  considerable   saving  over  the  cost  of  a   new 


666 Maintenance    of    Way    Work    Equipment 

part;  however,  there  are  times  when  it  would  be  more  economical  to  buy  a  new  part. 
The  cost  and  the  availability  of  the  new  material  or  cost  of  down-time  of  the  machine 
on  which  the  part  is  used  would  determine  whether  or  not  it  should  be  reclaimed  or 
replaced. 

Assignment  5 — Maintaining,  Testing  and  Repairing  Hydraulic  Equip- 
ment and  Other  Components   Used  on   Work  Equipment. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  This  is  also  a  final  report  presented  as  information.  It  is 
a  very  complete  report  on  hydraulics  as  used  by  our  railroad  work  equipment  depart- 
ments. M.  E.  Kerns,  superintendent  maintenance  of  way  equipment — system,  New  York 
Central  System,  is  subcommittee  chairman  and  will  present  a  brief  summary  covering 
this  subject. 

M.  E.  Kerns:  The  growth  in  the  use  of  hydraulic  power  in  maintenance  of  way 
equipment  requires  that  we  take  the  necessary  steps  to  equip  ourselves  for  the  detec- 
tion and  prevention  of  problems  in  these  power  circuits  so  that  we  get  maximum  use 
of  the  dollars  we  are  investing  in  our  maintenance  of  way  equipment. 

With  respect  to  detecting  our  problems,  portable  and  bench  type  test  equipment 
will  give  us  the  necessary  data  in  terms  of  flow  pressure  and  temperature  to  analyze 
the  problems  that  exist  in  our  hydraulic  circuits  that  we  can't  see.  Most  commonly 
these  problems  are  caused  by  the  loss  of  power  due  to  internal  wear. 

Having  identified  the  problem  the  next  step  is  to  prevent  future  occurrence  to  the 
best  of  our  ability  through  the  elimination  of  external  leaks,  and  proper  conditioning 
of  the  hydraulic  fluid  on  a  continuous  basis.  External  leaks  are  a  fit-and-fittings  prob- 
lem and  require  analysis  of  the  available  fittings,  and  seals  for  use  in  hydraulic  systems. 
Fluid  conditioning  is  a  circuit-and-filter  problem  including  the  choice  of  quality 
hydraulic  fluid. 

The  circuit  should  be  analyzed  with  an  eye  to  keeping  its  temperature  within 
proper  limits.  Also  the  reservoir  should  be  so  constructed  that  it  will  keep  out  atmo- 
spheric dirt  and  provide  a  proper  flow  of  fluid  from  discharge  to  inlet  lines,  dissipating 
heat  and  settling  the  dirt  in  the  process.  The  intake  line  should  also  be  designed  so 
that  the  pressure  drop  between  the  reservoir  and  pump  will  not  exceed  5  in  of  mercury 
and  frequently  includes  a  strainer  or  separator  in  the  line  to  keep  the  larger  dirt 
particles  from  entering  the  pump. 

Hydraulic  component  clearances  are  commonly  as  fine  as  0.0002  in.  We  should 
therefore  take  additional  steps  to  provide  cleanliness  over  and  above  that  provided  by 
the  common  strainer  on  the  intake  line,  which  passes  particles  as  large  as  0.0OS9  in. 
Particles  of  this  size  in  the  systems  scratch,  jam  and  wear  the  mating  component  sur- 
faces and  provide  the  "seed"  for  additional  particles. 

To  remove  particles  of  this  size,  filters  with  micronic  ratings  are  necessary,  designed 
to  be  used  in  hydraulic  circuits  and  including  a  bypass  valve  for  system  protection  and 
an  indicator  to  tell  when  to  change  the  filter  element.  A  25-micron  rating  is  a  practical 
beginning  point,  using  finer  ratings  when  required.  Magnets  will  also  help  in  improved 
particle  selection. 

Overall,  a  preventative  maintenance  program  such  as  outlined  above  will  only  be 
as  successful  as  the  education  that  accompanies  it,  reaching  all  the  workers  that  are 
working  with  hydraulic  equipment. 

Assignment  6 — Procurement  and  Stocking  of  Parts  and  Materials  for 
the  Repair  of  Work  Equipment. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  This  is  a  final  report  presented  as  information.  Subcom- 
mittee   Chairman    R.    O.    Cassini,    assistant    engineer,    Baltimore   &   Ohio    Railroad,   was 


Discussion  667 

unable  to  attend.  His  report  will  be  summarized  by  R.  W.  Bailey,  engineer  scales  and 
work  equipment,  Chicago  &  North  Western  Railway. 

R.  W.  Bailey  [for  Mr.  Cassini] :  In  order  to  eliminate  costly  delays  in  the  procure- 
ment of  repair  parts  and  supplies  needed  by  the  equipment  repair  forces,  the  report 
outlines  a  system  based  on  the  widespread  use  of  local  purchase  orders,  blanket  orders 
and  national  credit  cards  by  equipment  repair  forces.  Only  minimal  stocks  of  materials 
needed  on  a  consumption  basis  and  those  needed  for  running  repairs  and  preventive 
maintenance  would  be  kept  at  centralized  storehouse  for  distribution  according  to  need. 

The  principal  advantages  resulting  from  such  a  system  would  be  to  reduce  down 
time  on  on-line  machines  needing  repairs  because  the  personnel  responsible  for  making 
the  repairs  has  the  authority  to  obtain  the  needed  parts  and  materials  from  the  closest 
possible  source.  Unnecessary  paper  work  is  reduced  to  the  minimum.  This  system  also 
eliminates  the  necessity  of  maintaining  large  inventory  of  repair  parts  and  materials  at 
central  storehouses  and  other  distribution  and  repair  centers. 

Assignment  8 — Equipment  for  the  Control  and  Performance  of  Jack- 
ing in  Surfacing   Operations. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  The  final  report  on  this  assignment  will  be  presented  in 
1964. 


Chairman*  Radspinner  fcontinuing] :  I  would  like  to  mention  two  important  sub- 
jects that  keep  coming  up  whenever  Committee  27  meets.  Most  of  us  on  Committee  27 
deal  directly  with  work  equipment  on  our  respective  railroads.  We  are  aware  of  our 
responsibility  to  the  Association  and  to  our  own  managements  on  this  important  sub- 
ject, and  we  feel  that  realistic  opinions  expressed  by  the  committee  might  be  of  more 
use  to  railroads  when  new  equipment  is  being  purchased  than  just  specifications.  The 
listing  of  various  types  of  equipment  is  fine,  but  if  we  could  rate  each  one  according 
to  its  performance  or  maintenance,  our  reports  might  be  of  greater  value  to  all  con- 
cerned. We  would  not  necessarily  criticize,  but  would  give  credit  to  the  most  efficient. 

Now.  turning  to  the  other  subject:  You  have  all  noticed  lately,  in  several  of  the 
current  trade  journals,  articles  on  the  growth  of  work  equipment  on  most  railroads. 
Each  year  the  number  of  units  and  size  of  the  equipment  increases.  We  hear  about 
utilization,  automation  and  machines  used  for  several  operations.  What  bothers  us  is 
what  appears  to  be  a  lack  of  interest  in  the  organization  and  facilities  to  maintain 
this  equipment. 

I  should  like  to  read  part  of  the  report  on  Assignment  5 — Organization,  Machinery 
and  Tools,  and  Repairing  Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment,  as  found  in  Bulletin 
456,  Vol.  47,  dated  December   1045. 

"In  its  investigation  of  this  subject,  your  committee  found  it  necessary  to  consider 
the  matter  of  organization  to  be  used  in  operating  and  maintaining  the  equipment 
Therefore,  a  considerable  portion  of  this  report  is  devoted  to  the  organization  necessary 
for  the  proper  application  of  machinery  and  tools  in  the  repair  of  work  equipment. 

"The  work  equipment  in  use  on  the  average  railroad  today  for  maintenance  of 
way  and  structures  represents  a  very  large  investment.  In  order  to  secure  the  proper 
return  from  this  investment,  the  equipment  must  be  kept  in  serviceable  condition  and 
properly  operated;  it  must  be  assigned  to  secure  the  maximum  use.  and  the  righl 
machine  used  for  a  given  job. 

"The  use  of  maintenance  of  way  work  equipment  has  increased  tremendous!)  in 
the  past  few  years,  but  the  organization  and  facilities  to  handle  the  operation  and 
maintenance  of  the  machines  have  not  kept  pace  with  this  rapid  expansion,  As  a  result, 
much  equipment  has  been  damaged  due  to  improper  operation  and  maintenance. 


668 Maintenance   of   Way    Work    Equipment 

"Equipment  is  idle  for  long  periods  awaiting  repairs.  Inadequate  repairs  are  made 
due  to  lack  of  facilities  and  trained  men.  Much  idleness  and  abuse  of  the  appliances 
have  resulted  from  a  failure  to  program  the  work  and  the  use  of  the  machines  for 
purposes  other  than  originally  intended." 

Edgar  Bennett,  who  was  chief  engineer,  maintenance  of  way  and  structures,  South- 
ern Railway  System,  spoke  on  "Organization  Needed  to  Handle  Work  Equipment"  at 
the  AREA  49th  Annual  Meeting  in   1950.  Here  is  part  of  what  he  said  at  that  time: 

"Organization  to  correctly  manage  the  use  and  repair  of  maintenance  of  way  work 
equipment  is  essential  if  economy  is  to  be  realized  from  the  equipment.  We  are  indeed 
glad  of  this  opportunity  to  stress  again  the  need  of  ample  organization,  with  the  hope 
that  you  who  are  charged  with  this  responsibility  will  see  that  equipment  placed  under 
your  direction  is  efficiently  handled  to  produce  expected  results. 

"Equipment  must  not  be  permitted  to  remain  idle  for  long  periods  as  a  result  of 
abuse,  the  lack  of  a  work  program,  or  the  lack  of  essential  facilities  and  trained  men 
to  make  repairs.  In  these  days  of  low  earnings  and  restricted  forces,  let  us  illustrate 
our  point. 

"Suppose  you  hired  a  man  at  a  fixed  salary,  to  be  paid  whether  he  worked  or  not. 
You  would  certainly  so  plan  his  work  that  he  would  have  little  idle  time.  If  a  machine 
is  idle,  you  are  losing  money  just  as  surely  as  though  your  hired  man  loafs  on  the  job. 
If  a  machine  is  being  operated  inefficiently,  you  not  only  are  losing  money  invested  in 
the  machine,  but  a  portion  of  the  wages  paid  to  its  operator  as  well. 

"The  many  benefits  to  be  derived  from  the  investment  in  work  equipment  and  its 
intensive  use  are  lost  unless  there  is  an  adequate  and  suitable  organization  to  supervise 
its  operation  and  maintenance.  Investing  huge  sums  in  work  equipment  and  then  failing 
to  provide  an  organization  to  supervise  it  may  be  likened  to  buying  an  ocean  finer  and 
failing  to  provide  a  captain  and  other  officers." 

Gentlemen,  this  was  important  in  1945,  in  1950,  and  is  even  more  important  now, 
due  to  the  increased  number  and  the  complexity  of  the  machines  being  manufactured. 
Now  is  the  time  for  action  if  the  work  equipment  departments  are  to  provide  the 
service  expected  of  us 

Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  presentation  of  reports  of  Committee  27. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Radspinner  and  your  committee,  for  these  addi- 
tional reports  to  our  Association.  Maintenance  officers  all  over  the  country  look  to  your 
committee  for  guidance  and  recommendations  with  respect  to  all  aspects  of  power  tools 
and  machines  used  in  their  work — from  purchase  and  operations  through  maintenance 
and  repair,  and  we  look  forward  to  continuing  valuable  reports  from  your  committee 
in  the  future. 

E.  R.  Englert  [Louisville  &  Nashville] :  I  think  what  Mr.  Radspinner  just  said 
points  up  the  need  for  getting  the  Handbook  of  Instructions  for  Care  and  Operation  of 
Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment  in  shape  promptly.  In  1957,  when  it  was  last 
revised,  I  was  very  thrilled  to  receive  it.  I  know  that  the  operator  has  probably  more 
to  do  with  the  success  or  failure  of  a  machine  than  anything  we  can  do  in  the  selection 
and  repairing  of  it.  But  I  found  that  the  1957  revision  wasn't  too  practical. 

Do  the  committee  members  thing  it  is  suitable  the  way  it  is  now  written  ?  I  think 
we  need  a  bible,  a  good  guide  for  the  operators.  We  ought  to  get  on  the  ball  and  get 
the  handbook  in  shape  so  that  it  is  really  worth  while. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  Mr.  Tracy  has  been  handling  this  particular  subject.  Mr. 
Tracy,  would  you  care  to  comment  on  that? 

S.  E.  Tracy  [Chicago,  Burlington  &  Quincy]:  The  question  you  bring  up  has  been 
brought  up  before.  If  I  understand  your  criticism,  it  is  that  the  book  does  not  satisfy 
the  requirements  of  your  particular  railroad.  It  is  quite  obvious  that  it  would  be 
impossible  for  a  committee,  representing  all  the  railroads  in  the  United  States  and 
Canada,  to  make  a  set  of  rules  that  would  be  satisfactory  to  each  and  every  railroad. 


Discussion  669 

What  we  had  in  mind  when  we  wrote  the  handbook  was  to  formulate  a  set  of 
instructions  upon  which  each  individual  road  could  base  its  own  instructions,  using  the 
handbook  as  a  part  of  or  as  a  guide  for  them  to  write  their  own  book. 

Mr.  Englert:  I  misunderstood  the  use  of  this  book.  It  makes  sense  to  me  if  I  can 
use  this  book  to  design  something  that  fits  our  road.  The  point  I  wanted  to  make  is 
that  the  operator  is  very  important,  and  wc  should  not  overlook  getting  instructions 
to  him. 

I  started  to  ask  if  anybody  on  the  committee  uses  this  book  as  a  guide  for  their 
operators.  Mr.  Tracy,  of  course,  killed  the  question  when  he  said  it  is  a  guide  for  me 
to  work  up  something  for  my  operator.   [Laughterl 

President  Code:   A  guide  from  which  you  can  make  a  guide. 

Mr.  Englert:  Yes.  I  didn't  mean  to  be  critical  of  the  committee,  however. 

President  Code:   Your  comments  are  very  much  appreciated,  Mr.  Englert. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  When  we  have  our  material  accumulated  and  when  we 
feel  the  present  book  warrants  replacement,  we  shall  do  what  we  can.  However,  many 
railroads  do  use  it  as  an  operator's  manual. 

Mr.  Englert:  That  is  what  happened  to  me.  It  was  sent  to  me  and  I  proceeded 
to  get  it  out  to  all  operators,  and  the  first  thing  I  knew  I  didn't  want  it  because  it 
didn't  fit. 

Chairman  Radspinner:  One  trouble  is  that  the  machines  are  not  identified  with 
respect  to  their  manufacturers. 

President  Code:  You  are  not  permitted  to  call  things  by  their  right  names,  and 
that  is  one  of  the  difficulties  faced  by  this  committee.   [Laughter] 

Are  there  any  further  questions  or  comments  from  the  floor?  If  not,  Mr.  Radspin- 
ner,  your   committee  is   now   excused,   with   the   thanks  of   the  Association.    [Applause] 


President  Code  [continuing] :  Gentlemen,  this  concludes  our  program  for  today. 
We  shall  go  back  at  it  again  tomorrow  morning  in  this  room  at  nine  o'clock  sharp  to 
hear,  in  order,  the  reports  of  our  Committees  on  Ties  and  Wood  Preservation ;  Road- 
way and  Ballast ;  Track ;  Rail ;  and  Continuous  Welded  Rail.  This  should  be  a  most 
interesting  session.  I  will  expect  you  all  here  right  on  time  in  the  morning. 

The  meeting  is  now  recessed  until  tomorrow  morning. 

[The  meeting  adjourned  at  5:40  pm] 

Morning  Session,   March   16,   1963 

[The  meeting  reconvened  at  9  am,  President  Code  presiding! 

President  Code:  The  meeting  will  please  come  to  order.  With  a  busy  schedule 
still  ahead  of  us,  ending  with  our  closing  business  session  about  noon,  it  is  important 
that  we  get  started  on  time  and  move  right  along, 

Discussion  on  Ties  and  Wood   Preservation 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  575,  pages  241-261] 

President  Code:  Our  first  committee  to  report  this  morning  is  Committee  3 — Ties 
and  Wood  Preservation,  the  chairman  of  which  is  R.  B.  Radkcy,  engineer  of  ties  and 
treatment,  Illinois  Central,  at  Chicago.  Mr.  Radkcy.  if  you  will  escort  the  numbers 
of  your  committee  up  here   I   -hall  turn  the   meeting  over  to  you. 


670  Ties   and    Wood    Preservation 

Again,  as  I  reminded  you  repeatedly  yesterday,  anyone  present  may  have  the 
privilege  of  the  floor  throughout  our  morning  session  to  ask  questions  or  supplement 
the  committee  presentations,  and  I  hope  you  will  avail  yourself  of  this  privilege. 

You  may  proceed,  Mr.  Radkey. 

Chairman  R.  B.  Radkey:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Committee  3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation,  is  responsible  for  Chapter  3  and  Chap- 
ter 17  of  the  Manual.  Our  1962  report  has  been  printed  in  Bulletins  572,  June-July; 
573,  September-October,  and  575,  December.  We  shall  limit  the  presentation  here  to 
the  high   points. 

Assignment   1 — Revision   of  Manual. 

Chairman  Radkey:  Assignment  1  is  headed  by  C.  S.  Burt,  assistant  to  vice  presi- 
dent, purchases  and  stores,  Illinois  Central  Railroad.  Manual  Chapter  3 — Ties,  and 
Chapter  17 — Wood  Preservation,  were  revised  last  year  in  considerable  detail.  No  fur- 
ther revision  is  required  at  this  time.  In  all  possibility  some  revisions  will  be  made 
next  year. 

Assignment  2 — Cross  and  Switch   Ties. 

Chairman  Radkey:  The  report  on  Assignment  2  will  be  presented  by  H.  F.  Kanute, 
engineer  layout  and  design,   St.   Louis-San  Francisco   Railway. 

H.  F.  Kanute:   Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

Subcommittee  2  has  been  active  on  three  subjects,  and  is  submitting  reports  on  them 
as  information. 

1.  Extent  of  Adherence  to  Specifications — During  the  summer  of  1962,  Committee  3 
inspected  cross  ties  at  an  Arkansas  treating  plant  which  serves  two  different  railroads. 
The  ties  were  of  excellent  quality.  Good  housekeeping,  good  drainage,  general  cleanliness, 
and  good  preservation  practices  were  being  observed.  One  of  the  functions  of  Com- 
mittee 3  is  to  visit  treating  plants  to  keep  abreast  of  latest  developments  and  to  make 
our  observations  of  local  practices  available  to  managements.  These  inspection  trips 
will  be  continued  insofar  as  practical,  being  limited  by  the  current  economic  situation. 

2.  Study  of  Possible  Revision  of  Cross  Tie  Design  and/ or  Spacing — During  the 
year,  we  circulated  a  questionnaire  amongst  our  own  committee  membership  concerning 
cross  tie  size  and  spacing  and  developed  that: 

a.  Main-track  cross  ties  vary  in  size  from  7  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  6  in  to  7  in  by 
9  in  by  9  ft.  Spacing  varies  from  19^  to  21  in.  Several  members  reported 
that  21-  to  22-in  centers  might  be  feasible  without  increasing  maintenance 
cost  because  of  the   use  of  heavier  rail. 

b.  Secondary  main-track  ties  vary  from  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  to  7  in  by  9  in  by 
8  ft  6  in,  spaced  from  19^  to  22%  in,  the  majority  of  roads  spacing  at  20 
to   20]/2  in. 

c.  Branch  line  ties  vary  from  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft  to  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft,  6  in, 
spaced  from  19J^  to  24  in. 

d.  Yard  track  ties  vary  from  6  in  by  6  in  by  8  ft  6  in  to  6  in  by  8  in  by  8  ft 
6  in,  spaced  from  20  to  25  in.  Most  members  feel  that  yard-track  ties  could 
be   spaced   24   to   25   in. 

3.  Feasibility  and  Economics  of  Reusing  Recovered  Ties  with  or  Without  Addi- 
tional Treatment — We  developed  the  following  information  from  our  own  committee 
membership.  All  railroads  salvage  ties  from  abandoned  lines.  Very  few  railroads  salvage 


Discussion 671 

ties  from  cycled  timber  or  surfacing  operations.  Switch  ties  are  salvaged  from  abandoned 
lines  and  sometimes  from  main-track  renewals.  Generally,  ties  are  salvaged  on  the  basis 
of  their  having  at  least  10  more  years  of  life.  Mechanical  wear,  decay,  and  splits  are 
the  prime  factors  involved.  At  least  two  railroads  were  giving  salvaged  ties  additional 
treatment.  Most  salvaged  ties  are  used  for  spot  replacements  in  any  class  of  track  where 
needed.  In  some  instances  they  are  used  in  construction  work.  Salvaged  ties  from  aban- 
doned tracks  range  from  10  percent  to  75  percent  of  the  total  ties,  with  a  cost  to 
gather,  bundle,  and  pick  up  ranging  from  $0.56  to  $1.12  per  tie. 

All  three  of  these  studies  are  of  continuing  interest,  with  further  work  anticipated 
next  year. 

Mr.  President,  this   report  is  submitted  for  information. 

President  Code:  It  is  so  accepted.  Thank  you. 

Are  there  any  questions  concerning  the  report  of  this  subcommittee? 

F.  N.  Beighley  [St.  Louis-San  Francisco]:  I  wonder,  in  view  of  the  economies 
that  might  be  realized  in  the  greater  spacing  of  ties  in  main-line  track  and  secondary 
main  track,  if  the  committee  is  considering  making  Manual  recommendations  to  increase 
the  spacing. 

Mr.  Kantjte:  The  information  we  have  developed  from  our  studies  indicates  that 
with  the  heavier  rail  we  might  increase  the  spacing  of  the  ties.  However,  I  feel  we  don't 
have  enough  information  as  to  what  the  greater  spacing  might  do  to  our  maintenance 
cost   and  we  should   continue  our  studies  further  before  making  any  recommendations. 

Assignment  3 — Wood  Preservation. 

Chairman  Radkey:  Assignment  3  is  headed  by  W.  W.  Barger,  chief  inspector,  Tie 
and  Timber  Treating  Department,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway.  A  new  type 
of  Boliden  salts  is  being  studied  and  may  be  offered  for  inclusion  in  the  Manual  next 
year.  A  new  creosote-coal  tar  solution  specification  for  use  in  marine  piles  is  also  being 
studied.  There  are  no  changes  in  the  current  specifications  for  preservatives. 

Assignment  4 — Conditioning  and  Preservative  Treatment  of  Forest 
Products. 

Chairman-  Radkkv:  Assignment  4  is  headed  by  L.  C.  Collister,  manager,  Tie  and 
Timber  Treating  Department,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway. 

This  year  we  included  in  our  report  a  monograph  by  Professor  Huffman  of  the 
University  of  Florida,  which  evaluates  forced-air  drying  and  covered  air  seasoning  oi 
oak  cross  ties.  Information  gained  during  this  study  shows  that  the  use  of  covers  and 
fans  to  protect  and  accelerate  the  seasoning  of  oak  cross  ties  results  in  a  reduction  of 
seasoning  time  and  seasoning  defects. 

This  study  also  indicated  that  during  different  times  of  the  year  the  seasoning 
period-  requited  to  reach  specific  moisture  content  levels  will  vary  with  the  climatic 
conditions.  More  study  and  information  is  needed  to  improve,  compare  and  fullj 
evaluate   these  methods   of   handling  cross   ties. 

Assignment  5 — Service  Records. 

Chairman  k\nkii:  Assignment  ;  Servici  Records,  was  headed  by  W.  L.  Kahler, 
general  inspector,  forest  products  and  treatment,  Missouri  Pacini  Railroad.  Mr.  Kahler 
has  retired  from  active  railroad  service,  and  the  committee  wishes  to  take  this  oppor- 
tunity to  thank  him  for  his  most  generous  efforts  in  our  behalf  in  the  years  past. 

W.  F.  Arksey,  engineer  water  service  and  fuel  facilities.  Great  Northern  Railway, 
who  will  head  this  subcommittee  next   year,  will  presenl   the  report 


672  Ties    and    Wood    Preservation 


W.  F.  Arksey:  Your  committee  report  this  year  again  included  the  annual  statistics 
on  tie  renewals  worked  up  by  the  AAR  Bureau  of  Railway  Economics.  These  statistics 
indicate  a  still  further  reduction  in  the  average  tie  renewals  per  mile  of  track,  which 
can  be  attributed  to  improved  treatment  and  track  structure  and  to  the  financial  situa- 
tion on  the  railroads. 

The  termite  stake  test  being  carried  out  at  Gainesville,  Fla.,  a  joint  venture  between 
the  AAR  Research  Department  and  the  University  of  Florida,  is  now  64  months  old 
and  beginning  to  show  trends.  The  annual  inspection  was  carried  out  February  4  and  5, 
1963,  the  results  of  which  will  be  published  by  the  Engineering  Research  Division,  AAR, 
later  this  year. 

The  results  of  tie  tests  by  the  Missouri  Pacific  Railroad  and  the  Baltimore  &  Ohio 
Railroad  are  given  in  the  December  issue  of  the  Bulletin.  The  first  test  was  started  in 
1940  with  oak  and  pine  ties  and  at  the  present  time  indicates  tie  life  of  34  and  32  years, 
for  these  species,  respectively.  The  latter  test  was  started  in  1927  and  1928  with  over 
23,000  ties  of  white  oak,  red  oak  and  mixed  hardwoods  treated  with  a  large  variety 
of  solutions.  The  results,  as  given  in  our  published  report,  are  very  interesting,  and 
I  would  draw  your  attention  to  them. 

President  Code:  Are  there  any  questions? 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  Mr.  Arksey,  don't  you  think  the  life  of  the  ties 
is  being  prolonged  more  by  better  protection  against  physical  damage  than  from  any 
benefits   derived    from    better   treatment? 

Mr.  Arksey:  I  think  it  is  a  combination  of  the  two,  actually.  Probably  the  treat- 
ment has  not  been  improved  greatly  in  the  last  few  years,  but  25  years  or  so  ago  there 
were  a  lot  of  railroads  that  weren't  using  as  good  methods  of  treatment  as  they  do  now. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Don't  your  studies  show  that  most  of  the  ties  are  now  being  taken 
out  for  reasons  other  than  destruction  from  decay? 

Mr.  Arksey:  I  am  not  positive  of  that,  but  I  think  that  is  true.  I  believe  there  is 
a  larger  percentage  that  do  come  out  from  other  causes. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Arksey.  Any  other  questions?  Continue,  Mr. 
Radkey. 

Assignment  6 — Methods   of  Prolonging  Service  Life  of   Ties. 

Chatrman  Radkey:  Assignment  6 — Methods  of  Prolonging  Service  Life  of  Ties, 
is  headed  up  P.  D.  Brentlinger,  forester,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  but  in  connection  with 
our  published  report,  I  feel  I  must  eat  a  little  crow.  In  the  report  on  laminated  ties 
on  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad  printed  on  pages  258  and  259  of  Bulletin  575,  the 
nomenclature  used  in  describing  the  defects  that  are  developing  is  misleading. 

The  report  shows  11  ties  either  checked  or  split,  using  the  teminology  "split  from 
end  to  end."  In  cross  tie  inspection  work  a  split  is  usually  defined  as  an  opening  in 
the  wood  extending  through  the  piece  from  one  face  to  another  face.  A  check  is  usually 
an  opening  starting  on  one  face  but  not  reaching  through  the  piece  to  any  other  face. 

In  order  to  present  a  more  accurate  picture,  six  ties  were  re-examined,  with  the 
following  results: 


Discussion  673 


Tie  Dimensions  of  Defect 

No.                                                                                      Width  Depth  Length 

1      H"  Va"  8'  6" 

3      Vs"  2"  4'  0" 

3     Vs"  Va"  4'  6" 

4     Vs"  Va"  4'  0" 

18     Corner  broken  off— V/s"  x  Ya"  x  8^" 

10     y2"  2"  4'  0" 

10     Vs"  VA"  10" 

10     Vs"  W  4'  6" 

20     V2"  2"  10" 

Actually,  none  of  the  ties  are  split.  Most  of  the  surface  checks  involved  arc  rela- 
tively shallow,  only  one  surface  check  penetrating  most  of  the  way  through  a  tie.  Thus, 
these  ties  after  nine  years  of  service  are  in  considerably  better  condition  than  our 
inspection  report  could  be  interpreted  to  indicate. 

I  might  say  that  the  error  in  the  printing  should  be  placed  on  my  shoulders,  not 
on  Mr.  Brentlinger,  the  subcommittee  chairman. 

Assignment   7 — Substitutes   for   Wood   Ties. 

Chairmax  Radkey:  This  subcommittee  is  headed  by  M.  J.  Hubbard,  assistant  chief 
engineer — system,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  and  reports  for  your  information  that 
the  AAR  Research  Center  has  considered  the  possibility  of  using  fiberglass  in  making 
ties.  Strength  characteristics  are  excellent,  but  material  cost  alone  would  be  $45  per  tie. 

The  24  experimental  7-in  by  12 -in  by  8-ft  6-in  timber  ties  in  track  at  30-in  centers 
are  in  excellent  condition  after  one  year  of  service. 

Next  year,  we  hope  to  have  some  data  regarding  maintenance  costs  of  prestressed 
concrete  ties. 

Assignment  8 — Making  Charcoal  from  Used  Ties. 

Chairman-  Radkey:  Assignment  8 — Making  Charcoal  from  Used  Ties,  is  headed  by 
G.  A.  Williams,  regional  engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad.  This  subcommittee  has  made 
a  comprehensive  study  of  the  possibility  of  making  charcoal  from  used  ties  and  finds 
it  impractical  at  this  time,  thus  recommending  that  this  subject  be  closed.  Reasons 
precluding  this  use  for  old  ties  include: 

1.  Other  supplies  of  good  timber  are  available   at  lower  cost, 

2.  Present  kilns  are  not  constructed  to  handle  cross  tie  lengths  and  the  cutting 
and  handling  of  ties  would  be  too  costly. 

3.  The   presence   of  creosote  is   quite   objectionable. 

4.  In  tests  using  old  ties  as  raw  material,  charcoal  was  produced  at  a  loss.  The 
negative  attitude  of  the  charcoal  producers  is  so  near  unanimous  that  no 
interest    in    the   subject   can   be   generated. 


Chairman  Radkey   [continuing!:   George  B.  Campbell,  retired  tic  and  timber  agent, 
Missouri  Pacific   Railroad,  died   at  his  home  in  St.  Louis,  Mo..  during  February   1962. 
Mr.    Campbell   had   been   associated   with    Committee   3   and   Committee    17   sine* 
and   we    feel   the   loss   of   this   honored    member   and    friend.   A    memoir   in    hi-   behalf   i- 
included  with  our  published  report. 

This  report  terminate-  my  chairmanship  of  this  committee.  It  has  been  a  pleasure 
to  work  with  and  tor  its  members.  My  sincere  thanks  and  appreciation  i-  tendered  to 
each  and  every  member  of  Committee  3  for  their  very  fine  assistance  and  just  plain 
hard  work  for  the  past  two  years. 


674 Ties   and   Wood   Preservation 

W.  E.  Fuhr,  assistant  chief  engineer,  signals  and  communications,  Chicago,  Mil- 
waukee, St.  Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad,  will  be  the  new  chairman  of  Committee  3.  We  are 
looking  forward  to  our  work  under  his  leadership  and  know  the  committee  will  be  in 
good  hands.  Mr.  Fuhr  is  asked  to  stand  up  and  be  recognized. 

K.  C.  Edscorn,  tie  and  timber  agent,  Missouri  Pacific  Railway,  will  be  our  new 
vice  chairman,  and  he  is  asked  to  stand  and  be  recognized. 

Mr.  President,  this  ends  our  report. 

President  Code:    Are  there  any  questions? 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  Mr.  Code,  before  Mr.  Radkey  sits  down  I 
would  like  to  ask  a  question. 

There  has  been  a  lot  of  development  work  in  the  research  laboatory  on  dowels. 
Your  committee  handles  dowels  for  ties,  I  take  it?  Are  you  in  a  position  to  make  a 
recommendation  from  your  studies  as  to  the  proper  length  and  flute  pattern  of  dowels? 

Chairman  Radkey:  I  can't  answer  that  from  a  committee  standpoint.  The  specifica- 
tion for  dowels  was  rewritten  for  the  Manual  last  year.  The  length  from  a  practical 
standpoint  is  a  rather  hard  thing  to  establish,  because  in  purchasing  ties  there  is  such 
variation  in  tie  size.  If  you  make  the  dowel  too  short,  you  lose  too  much  strength,  as 
it  takes  about  y2  in  along  the  dowel  to  develop  strength.  If  you  make  the  dowel  too 
long  so  that  it  sticks  out  the  side  of  the  tie,  you  have  a  personal  injury  hazard  in 
handling  it. 

It  is  a  problem  to  hit  at  a  length  which  will  practically  serve  all  of  the  ties. 

Mr.  Woolford:   What  about  the  flutes: 

Chairman  Radkey:   I  can't  answer  that,  sir.  I  am  sorry,  but  I  don't  know. 

G.  M.  Magee  [AAR] :  Mr.  Woolford,  we  have  made  some  withdrawal  tests  on  the 
three-flute  dowel  and  the  four-flute  dowel,  and  the  tests  indicated  that  the  three-flute 
dowel  has  a  somewhat  greater  withdrawal  resistance,  so  we  would  assume  that  in  service 
the  same  benefit  would  obtain.  We  would  be  inclined,  therefore,  to  recommend  the 
three-flute  rather  than  the  four-flute  dowel. 

As  to  the  length  of  the  dowel,  it  is  like  the  answer  attributed  to  Abraham  Lincoln 
when  asked  about  how  long  a  man's  legs  should  be.  He  said  they  should  be  long  enough 
to  reach  the  ground.  I  think  the  dowel  should  be  long  enough  to  reach  through  the  tie. 

Chairman  Radkey:  One  thing  about  the  strength  of  the  dowel  that  we  have 
noticed  from  a  practical  standpoint  is  that  a  dowel  placed  in  a  green  tie  seems  to  hold 
much  better  than  a  dowel  placed  in  a  dry  tie.  Whether  the  natural  juices  of  the  wood 
corrode  the  metal  and  set  up  a  better  bond,  I  don't  know;  but  on  our  railroad  we  are 
of  that  opinion. 

Mr.  Woolford:  I  think  that  is  only  reasonable.  But  you  have  to  take  into  con- 
sideration the  cost  of  doweling  all  unseasoned  ties  as  compared  to  a  selected  portion 
after  seasoning. 

Chairman  Radkey:  We  need  a  nice  little  electronic  indicator  that  we  could  hold  up 
to  the  green,  unsplit  ties,  which  would  indicate  whether  or  not  splitting  would  occur 
during  seasoning. 

Mr.  Magee:  Mr.  Woolford,  isn't  what  you  have  in  mind  whether  you  would  dowel 
on  a  selected  basis  after  seasoning?  At  that  time,  of  course,  you  will  know  which  ties 
have  split. 

Mr.  Woolford:  That  is  what  we  are  doing  now.  I  would  like  to  dowel  before 
seasoning,  but  it  is  purely  a  matter  of  cost. 

Chairman  Radkey:  We  think  the  dowel  put  into  the  tie  before  it  starts  to  split 
is  a  much  better  proposition  than  a  dowel  that  is  put  in  after  it  splits.  But  how  you 
can  pick  the  one  that  is  going  to  split,  is  beyond  me. 


Discussion  675 

Mr.  Woolford:    If  you  are  going  to  dowel  before  seasoning  you  must   dowel   100 

percent — you  never  know  which  ones  arc  going  to  split.  Mr.  Magee  should  come  up 
with  that  electronic  device  you  mentioned. 

President  Code:  Thank  you.  Mr.  Radkey.  Your  committee  has  been  well  reor- 
ganized to  carry  forward  the  former  work  of  Committees  3  and  17,  and  is  doing  a  fine 
job  in  keeping  the  Association  informed  both  with  respect  to  ties  and  wood 
preservation. 

We  welcome  Mr.  Edscorn  as  the  new  vice  chairman  of  your  committee,  and  Mr. 
Fuhr  as  the  new  chairman,  confident  that  they  will  see  that  your  committee  continues 
its  good  work  in  the  future. 

Mr.  Fuhr.  I  congratulate  you  upon  your  appointment  as  chairman  of  Committee  3, 
and  would  like  to  present  you  with  this  chairman's  gavel  as  the  symbol  of  your 
authority   for  the  next  three  years. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Radkey.  Your  committee  is  now  excused  with  the  thanks 
of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Roadway  and  Ballast 

|  For  report,   see  Bulletin  577,  pages  543-570] 

President  Code:  Moving  on  with  our  program,  we  shall  next  hear  from  our  Com- 
mittee 1 — Roadway  and  Ballast,  which  is  also  well  organized  and  which  carries  a  lot 
of  responsibility.  The  chairman  of  this  committee  is  F.  N.  Beighley,  roadway  engineer, 
St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway,  at  Springfield,  Mo.  Mr.  Beighley,  I  am  sure  your 
Committee  is  "rarin'  "  to  go,  so  as  soon  as  you  and  the  other  members  of  your  com- 
mittee present  get  up  here,  I  shall  be  glad  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you. 

Chairman  F.  X.  Beighley:  Mr.  President,  members  of  the  association,  ladies  and 
guests: 

During  the  past  year  Committee  1  held  two  regular  meetings,  during  which  each 
of  our  11  subcommittees  reported  progress  on  their  21  assignments.  We  are  submitting 
this  year  reports  on  only  6  of  the  assignments.  Information  is  being  gathered  on  all 
of  the  remaining  15,  but  sufficient  data  have  not  as  yet  been  collected  for  preparation 
of  reports  covering  them.  As  the  individual  reports  are  presented,  we  invite  your 
comments,  criticism  and  questions. 

Due  to  floods  and  other  things,  our  subcommittee  chairmen  are  conspicuous  b\ 
their  absence.  Six  of  them  are  unable  to  be  present  today. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Beighley:  Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual,  has  as  its  subcommittee 
chairman  G.  B.  Harris,  assistant  engineer  of  the  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway.  Because 
of  flood  conditions  on  the  C  &  0,  Mr.  Harris  is  unable  to  be  present.  His  report  will 
be  presented  by  L.  J.  Deno,  staff  engineer  maintenance,  Chicago  &  North  Western 
Railway,  vice  chairman  of  Committee  1. 

L.  J.  Deno  [for  Mr.  Harris]:  Your  committee  for  the  past  three  years  has  been 
making  a  study  of  it*  chapter  in  the  Manual,  and  now  submits  it-  final  recommenda- 
tions for  approval.  These  an-   found  on   pages  545-546  of   Bulletin   ^77. 

Two  documents:  "Specifications  for  the  Formation  of  the  Roadway"  ami  "Specifics 
tions  for  Righl  of  \V.i>  Fences",  arc  recommended  for  reapprova]  without  change.  Under 
"Specifications   for   Corrugated   Metal   Culverts",   we  have  discovered  a   slight   error  in 


676 Roadway   and   Ballast 

one  of  the  references  made  in  these  specifications.  This  is  spelled  out  in  the  subcom- 
mittee report.  It  is  the  recommendation  of  this  committee  that  the  action  referred  to 
be  approved. 

Mr.  President,  I  so  move. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Mr.  Deno:  In  addition,  your  committee  submits  a  new  definition  for  the  Glossary. 
This   covers   open-hearth    slag,    which   we   feel   should   be   adopted.   This   definition   is: 

"  \  slag  formed  simultaneously  when  producing  and  refining  steel  in  open-hearth 
furnaces  and  consisting  essentially  of  a  fused  mixture  of  oxides  and  silicates." 

Mr.   President,  I  move  that  this  definition  be  adopted. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Assignment   2 — Physical  Properties   of  Earth   Materials. 

Chairman  Beighley:  Assignment  2 — Physical  Properties  of  Earth  Materials  has 
as  its  subcommittee  chairman  W.  P.  Eshbaugh,  chief  engineer,  Genesee  &  Wyoming 
Railroad.  Due  to  conditions  beyond  his  control,  Mr.  Eshbaugh  is  unable  to  be  present, 
so  I  will  present  a  resume  of  the  report. 

Under  this  assignment,  your  committee  presents  as  information  a  report  on  Com- 
parison of  Soil  Density  and  Water  Content  Determinations  with  Conventional  and 
Nuclear  Equipment.  It  contains  material  which  applies  to  both  Assignments  (a),  Road- 
bed, Load  Capacity,  Relation  to  Ballast,  Allowable  Pressures,  and  (b),  Structural 
Foundation  Beds. 

The  work  reported  is  the  result  of  a  cooperative  project  between  the  Canadian 
National  Railways  and  the  Association  of  American  Railroads  Research  Department. 
It  is  a  very  concise  report  and  is  well  worth  everyone's  reading  of  it. 

Assignment   3 — Natural   Waterways:   Prevention   of  Erosion. 

Chairman  Beighley:  The  subcommittee  chairman  for  Assignment  3  is  G.  W. 
Becker,  special  engineer,  drainage,  Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad,  and  he  will 
comment  on  this  assignment. 

G.  W.  Becker:  The  subcommittee  in  the  past  year  has  been  active  principally 
in  procurement  of  material  relating  to  subjects  under  its  jurisdictional  needing  revision 
in  the  Manual. 

In  that  part  of  the  chapter  covering  determination  of  wave  heights,  some  modifica- 
tion is  indicated  in  view  of  recent  developments  reported  by  members  of  the  Beach 
Erosion  Board  and  the  Corps  of  Engineers.  Some  Districts  of  the  Corps  are  making  use 
of  newer  recommendations  at  this  time,  but  consideration  of  a  change  in  Manual  mate- 
rial on  the  subject  should  await  a  more  general  acceptance  of  findings  being  offered  by 
government  researchers. 

There  is  also  a  trend  away  from  the  requirement  for  filter  blankets  under  riprap 
by  some  Districts  of  the  Corps  on  dams,  levees  and  embankments.  Your  committee  is 
following  this  trend  as  it  relates  to  present  Manual  material  on  the  subject. 

Progress  in  the  field  of  determination  of  runoff  for  waterway  openings  is  being 
furthered  by  governmental  agencies  and  universities.  We  are  endeavoring  to  keep  up 
with  these  advances  for  later  use  in  offering  recommendations  for  changes  believed  to 
be  desirable. 

Revision  of  the  material  on  check  dams  also  is  under  consideration  in  view  of  new 
information  being  developed  on  the  subject  by  several  universities  and  the  Bureau 
of  Reclamation.  It  is  felt  that  present  Manual  material  should  be  revised  and  possibly 


Discussion 677 

expanded  to  include  the  more  common  use  of  check  dams  for  preventing  gullying  and 
progressive  erosion  upstream  which  may  endanger  bridge  foundations. 

The  subcommittee  will  continue  its  efforts  to  consolidate  information  being  devel- 
oped on  subjects  relating  to  our  assignments  for  eventual  use  in  making  constructive 
reports  and  recommendations  to  the  Association. 

Preshdent  Code:   Thank  you,  Mr.  Becker.  Are  there  any  questions? 

T.  B.  Hutcheson  [Seaboard  Air  Line] :  I  am  interested  in  what  you  said  about 
filter  blankets  under  riprap.  I  would  like  to  use  these  blankets  under  certain  circum- 
stances. Our  opinion  has  been  that  their  elimination  was  an  economy  move  on  the  part 
of  the  Corps  of  Engineers,  where  they  were  paying  part  of  the  cost. 

Has  the  committee  made  any  investigation  into  why  the  Corps  is  insisting,  in  some 
instances,  on  eliminating  filter  blankets? 

Mr.  Becker:  I  know  of  one  district,  the  Rock  Island  District,  which  is  not  using 
filter  blankets  on  the  entire  Red  Rock  project  on  the  Des  Moines  River  in  Red  Rock, 
Iowa.  They  are  working  on  the  assumption  that  the  material  which  is  being  protected 
is  fairly  non-erodable  and  the  use  of  the  filter  blanket  is  not  needed  if  good  graded 
material  is  used  as  protection. 

They  are  not  using  filter  blankets  on  the  dam  proper,  and  they  are  not  using  it  on 
the  levees  and  the  embankments  being  protected  down  there,  on  the  basis  of  that 
assumption.. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Hutcheson  and  Mr.  Becker. 

Assignment  4 — Culverts. 

Chairman  Beighley:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  4  is  G.  D.  Mayor,  engineer 
maintenance  of  way  standards,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway.  Due  to  high  water  on  the 
C  &  O,  Mr.  Mayor  is  also  not  present  this  morning.  I  would  like  to  read  a  brief 
summary  of  this  assignment. 

On  erosion  control  for  outlet  structure,  research  on  this  assignment  was  started  in 
1958  at  the  Colorado  State  University  as  a  three-year  project,  but  curtailment  in  suc- 
ceeding years  forced  cancellation  of  this  project  without  having  obtained  enough  data 
for  a  progress  report.  It  is  felt  that  the  project  is  of  enough  importance  so  that 
appropriations  will  be  forthcoming  to  resume  the  work  at  the  University. 

Assignment  5 — Specifications  for  Pipelines  Conveying  Flammable  and 
N on-Flammable  Substances,   Collaborating  with   Committees   15  and  20. 

Chairman  Beighley:  K.  \V.  Schoenebcrg.  chief  engineer,  Akron,  Canton  &  Youngs- 
town  Railroad,  is  subcommittee  chairman.  Mr.  Schoenebcrg  is  unable  to  be  present 
at  this  convention,  and  therefore  I  shall  give  his  report. 

Chairman  Beighley  [for  Mr.  Schoenebcrg]:  Study  and  consideration  of  certain 
items  of  the  rewritten  Specifications  for  Pipelines  for  Conveying  Flammable  and  Non- 
Flammable  Substances,  looking  to  their  revision,  is  being  conducted  by  your  committee, 
and  it  is  anticipated  that  by  next  year  the  study  will  be  completed  and  any  necessary 
revisions   will   be   presented   for  adoption. 

Your  committee  has  been  continually  active  in  its  collaboration  with  the  American 
Society  of  Civil  Engineers'  Committee  on  Pipeline  Crossings  of  Railroads  and  Highways, 
and  as  a  result  of  this  organization's  most  recent  meeting,  it  is  anticipated  that  within 
several  months,  an  interim  cro^int'  specification  will  be  published  and  sent  to  the 
sponsoring   organizations,   of   which    AREA   is  one,    for    their   consideration.    It    il   hoped 


678 Roadway   and    Ballast 

th.ii  tin-  document,  as  well  as  several  research  reports,  will  he  received  and  studied 
in  time  so  (hat   your  committee  can  present   a  progress  report  on  it  next  year. 

Your  committee  has  also  just  recently  completed  arrangements  for  collaboration 
with  the  American  Water  Works  Association  in  its  endeavor  to  write  specifications  for 
non-flammable  pipeline  crossings  of  railroads  and  highways,  with  particular  emphasis 
"ii   i  (instruction   methods  therefor. 

As  stated  several  years  ago  to  this  convention,  the  goal  of  these  organizations  in 
their  pipeline  studies,  particularly  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers,  is  a  specifica- 
tion for  pipeline  crossings  of  railroads  and  highways  that  will  be  acceptable,  adopted, 
and  used  by  all  the  parties  involved. 

Assignment   6 — Roadways:   Formation   and   Protection. 

Chairman  Beighley:  Assignment  6  has  a  new  subcommittee  chairman:  G.  F. 
Nigh,  division  engineer,  New  York,  Chicago  &  St.  Louis  Railway.  There  are  five 
subtopics  for  this  subcommittee  to  work  on.  Mr.  Nigh  will  give  the  report  for  this 
subcommittee. 

G.  F.  Nigh:  Your  committee  this  year  presents  reports  as  information  under 
Assignments  6  (a) — Roadbed  Stabilization,  and  6  (c) — Performance  of  Filter  Material 
in  Subdrains. 

The  report  under  Assignment  6  (a)  appears  in  Bulletin  573,  pages  25  to  34.  In  it 
R.  A.  Stane,  construction  engineer,  Coast  Lines,  of  the  Santa  Fe,  describes  grading 
problems  encountered  during  relocation  of  the  Santa  Fe  Railway's  main  line  between 
Williams  and  Crookton,  Ariz.  The  construction  of  this  44-mile  relocation  was  completed 
in  December  1960  and  involved  the  movement  of  8^2  million  yards  of  rock,  as  well  as 
5  million  yards  of  common  material.  Rock  as  large  as  3  to  4  ft  in  diameter  was  used 
in  embankments  and  required  special  compaction.  Although  special  provision  was  made 
for  culvert  backfill,  there  were  difficulties  encountered  in  the  case  of  culverts  with 
minimum  cover. 

The  report  under  6  (c)  appears  in  Bulletin  577,  pages  554  to  565.  This  is  the  third 
and  final  progress  report  of  Professor  John  C.  Guillou  of  the  University  of  Illinois 
concerning  the  use  of  concrete  sand  for  filter  material  and  was  prepared  from  research 
at  the  Hydraulic  Engineering  Laboratory  at  the  University  as  a  cooperative  research 
program  between  the  AAR  and  the  University  of  Illinois.  The  first  progress  report  was 
published  in  the  1960  AREA  Proceedings.  The  second  progress  report,  in  which  Richard 
F.   Lanyon   assisted   Professor   Guillou,   was   published   in   the    1962   AREA  Proceedings. 

This  third  and  final  report  concludes  that: 

1.  Initial  compaction  is  a  major  factor  in  the  development  of  filter  stability 
and  that  over-compaction  will  reduce  the  infiltration  capacity  and  may  cause 
failure  of  the  bed. 

2.  Stability  is  established  by  the  binding  of  pore  spaces  near  the  opening  with 
fine  particles. 

3.  Perforations  should   be   placed   on   the  bottom. 

4.  Concrete  sand  may  be  used  with  clay  drain  tile  or  plastic  pipe. 

This  subject  will  be  continued  for  other  types  of  materials. 

Under  6  (b) — Slope  Protection,  your  committee  is  in  the  process  of  reviewing  pages 
1-1-34  and  1-1-35  of  the  Manual  with  the  view  to  bring  it  in  line  with  present  day 
materials  and  methods  for  action  at  the  1964  convention.  It  has  also  started  work  on  a 
new  Assignment  6    (e) — Hydraulic  Fills,  in  collaboration  with   Committee  25. 


Discussion  679 

There  is  nothing  to  report  this  year  on  Assignment  6  (d) — Special  Treatment  for 
Subgrade  Improvement. 

Assignment  7 — Tunnels. 

Chairman  Beighley:  This  subcommittee  also  has  a  new  chairman,  K.  W.  Bradley, 
design  engineer,  Denver  &  Rio  Grande  Western  Railroad.  Mr.  Bradley  is  unable  to  be 
present  today  on  account  of  pressing  work  on  the  D&RGVY.  However,  he  advises  under 
subtopic  "Ventilation"  that  the  Rio  Grande  has  recently  constructed  a  7000-ft  tunnel 
on  its  Moab  line,  which  will  be  operated  with  drag  tonnage  ascending  a  1.2-percent 
grade  through  the  tunnel.  It  is  their  belief  that  adequate  cooling  will  be  provided  by 
radiator  spray.  No  definite  data  have  been  compiled  as  yet.  Under  "Clearances"  and 
"Methods   of   Under   Cutting",   data   are   being  collected    for  information   reports. 

Assignment  8 — Fences. 

Chairman  Beighley:  We  have  still  another  new  subcommittee  chairman,  P.  G. 
Martin,  district  engineer,  Union  Pacific  Railroad,  and  he  will  comment  on  Assignment 
8 — Fences. 

P.  G.  Martin:  Your  committee  is  currently  reviewing  the  Manual  with  respect  to 
Part  6,  Fencing,  pages  1-6-20  to  1-6-23,  incl.,  "Methods  of  Protecting  the  Roadway 
against   Drifting  Snow." 

A  new  type  of  snow  and  sand  fence  being  manufactured  commercially  has  been 
reviewed  and  studied  by  this  subcommittee.  This  fence  consists  of  galvanized  corrugated 
perforated  steel  panels  &Y>  in  wide  and  8  ft  4  in  long,  and  %-h\  by  3^-in  steel  posts 
in  lengths  from  S  ft  6  in  to  8  ft  4  in.  The  posts  are  driven  into  the  ground  approxi- 
mately 25  in,  depending  on  the  distance  wanted  below  the  lowest  panel  and  top  of 
ground.  The  distance  between  posts  varies  from  8  ft  2  in  to  8  ft  4  in.  The  panels  are 
inserted  in  slots  in  the  posts.  The  distance  from  the  bottom  panel  to  the  ground  is 
recommended  to  be  from  3  to  12  in,  depending  on  how  closely  the  drift  must  be  placed 
and   the  velocity  of  the  wind. 

This  type  of  fence  has  been  erected  by  several  railroads  up  to  the  present  time  and 
comments  received  by  this  subcommittee  have  been  favorable  as  to  initial  cost  of 
material  and  cost  of  erection. 

Holes  in  the  panels  and  posts  permit  the  material  to  be  secured  by  chain  and  lock 
to  prevent  pilfering  if  the  material  is  stacked  during  the  off  season. 

This  subject  is  being  studied  with  the  view  of  preparing  a  report  for  information 
in   the  near  future. 

President  Code:   Are  there  any  questions  or  comments  on  this  report,  gentlemen? 

Mr.  Woolford:  Mr.  Martin,  I  would  like  to  ask  if  the  committee  has  made  any 
economic  study   concerning  use  of  the  slat   fence   for  sand  protection. 

Mr.  Martin:   We  haven't  at   this  time.  We  shall  report  on  it  in  the  future,  though 

Mr.  Woolford:  Do  you  have  any  idea  of  the  life  that  ran  be  expected  from  a 
metal  fence? 

Mr.  Martin:    Not   at  the  present  time. 

Assignment  9 — Roadway  Signs. 

Chairman  Beighley:  Assignment  9 — Roadway  Signs,  has  R.  D.  Baldwin,  super- 
intendent, maintenance  of  way,  New  York  City  Transit  Authority,  as  subcommittee 
chairman.  Mr.  Baldwin  is  unable  to  attend  the  convention,  and  therefore  I  would  like 
to  read  a  few  remarks  on  this  subject. 


680 Roadway   and    Ballast 

Research  on  reflectorized  and  luminous  roadway  signs  has  been  discontinued  tem- 
porarily due  to  curtailment  of  funds;  however,  the  committee  feels  the  subject  should 
not  be  dropped,  as  new  products  are  constantly  being  developed,  some  of  which  might 
be  adaptable  for  railway  purposes. 

We  have  a  new  assignment  for  the  coming  year:  "Layout  of  Shop  for  Roadway 
Sign  Construction."  This  subject  has  been  progressed  to  the  point  that  a  suggested  plan 
will   be-  submitted   to   the  convention  in   1964   for  inclusion  in  the  Manual. 

Assignment   10 — Ballast. 

Chairman  Beighley:  T.  VV.  Creighton,  regional  engineer,  Canadian  Pacific  Railroad, 
is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  10 — Ballast,  and  will  present  the  report. 

T.  W.  Creighton:  Your  committee  presented,  under  assignment  10  (a) — Tests,  an 
advance  reports  on  conductivity  tests  of  open-hearth  slag  ballast  as  information  in 
Bulletin  573,  September-October  1962.  Further  tests  on  the  suitability  of  this  material 
as  ballast  in  other  respects  will  be  undertaken  as  funds  become  available. 

Under  assignment  10  (c),  a  progress  report  on  test  sections  of  asphalt-treated  bal- 
last and  asphalt-treated  bridge  decks  appears  as  information  in  Bulletin  577,  February 
1963. 

The  subcommittee  is  actively  engaged  in  revision  of  the  ballast  sections  illustrated 
on  pages  1-2-7  to  1-2-12  of  the  Manual.  These  ballast  sections  were  adopted  in  1938 
and  1939  and  have  been  reapproved  without  change  since  that  time.  During  the  inter- 
val, track  maintenance  procedures  have  been  revolutionized  by  the  introduction  of 
labor-saving  machinery  which  dictates  that  the  old  design  standards  based  on  hand 
labor  be  modified  to  reap  the  advantages  of  these  machines.  Consideration  must  be 
given  to  the  increased  stresses  introduced  into  the  track  structure  in  the  use  of  con- 
tinuous welded  rail  in  areas  with  a  wide  range  of  temperature.  The  use  for  other  pur- 
poses of  materials  which  have  hitherto  been  readily  available  as  ballast  has  made  it 
advisable  to  ensure  that,  while  ballast  sections  are  adequate,  they  are  not  over-designed. 
It  should  be  pointed  out  that  it  is  anticipated,  in  preparing  the  standard  plan,  that 
ballast  will  be  maintained  reasonably  close  to  the  theoretical  section  and  will  not  be 
allowed  to  become  depleted.  This  applies  especially  to  the  sections  designed  for  con- 
tinuous welded  rail. 

The  proposed  sections,  which  will  be  considerably  simplified  and  reduced  in  number, 
will  be  suitable  for  use  with  both  continuous  welded  rail  and  jointed  rail  and  for  all 
types  of  ballast  on  both  tangent  and  curved  track.  It  is  anticipated  that  the  revised 
sections  will  be  recommended  for  inclusion  in  the  Manual  in  1964. 

President   Code:    Thank   you,  Mr.   Creighton.  Any  questions? 

W.  E.  Fuhr  [Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  &  Pacific] :  One  of  our  assignments 
concerns  the  feasibility  of  increasing  the  spacing  of  timber  cross  ties.  I  don't  know  if 
you  have  gotten  into  the  subject,  but  I  wonder  if  you  have  investigated  it  and,  if  so, 
whether  you  have  reached  any  conclusions  as  to  the  possibility  of  overloading  the 
ballast  or  subgrade. 

Mr.  Creighton:  We  haven't  made  any  progress  on  that  as  yet. 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  I  think  one  assignment  your  committee  has 
had,  Mr.  Creighton,  is  the  comparative  desirability  of  ballast  from  the  steel  mills  versus 
precious  metal  ballast.  Are  you  in  a  position  to  give  any  opinion  as  to  the  conductivtiy 
and  holding  power  of  open-hearth  and  blast-furnace  slag  from  the  steel  mills  compared 
to  ballast  from  precious  metals  smelters. 


Discussion 681 

Mr.  Creighton:  As  far  as  open-hearth  ballast  is  concerned,  the  conductivity  tests 
conducted  last  year  indicate  that  it  has  a  slightly  higher  conductivity  when  dry  com- 
pared with  the  other  types  that  are  in  common  use,  including  limestone  and  blast- 
furnace slag,  and  about  the  same  conductivity  as  other  common  types  of  ballast 
when  wet. 

We  have  not  made  any  comparisons  so  far  with  smelter  slag.  The  holding  power 
of  the  various  types  has  not  been  tested;  but  from  observation  of  places  where  it  is 
in  use,  the  holding  power  of  smelter  slag  appears  to  be  superior  to  the  holding  power 
of  blast-furnace  slap. 

H.  F.  Kantjte  [Frisco]:  In  your  report  you  speak  about  treating  ballast  with 
asphalt,  and  also  you  speak  of  maintenance  of  spotty  track  that  has  developed  in  the 
asphalt-treated  sections.  Do  you  have  any  technique  of  preserving  that  treated  ballast 
when  you  have  to  spot  the  track,  or  is  your  treated  ballast  section  destroyed  when  you 
have  to  go  in  and  do  your  spotting? 

Mr.  Creighton:  To  the  best  of  my  knowledge,  it  is  destroyed  when  you  have  to 
surface  the  track.  I  can't  give  you  too  definite  an  answer  to  that  because  I  wasn't  able 
to  participate  in  the  inspections,  but  I  don't  see  how  you  can  preserve  it. 

G.  M.  Magee  [AAR]:  May  I  comment  on  that?  On  the  first  installation  put  in 
on  the  Illinois  Central  where  spotting  had  to  be  done,  the  asphalt  ballast  was  dug  out 
at  the  end  of  the  tie  and  the  rail  was  jacked  up  a  little  above  the  desired  height.  The 
tie  was  nipped  up  against  the  rail,  and  then  fine  material  was  shoved  in  under  the  end 
by  the  so-called  saw  blade  or  paddle  method,  that  is,  you  take  a  long,  thin  blade  and 
put  fine  material  on  it,  and  put  it  under  the  tie,  and  then  pull  it  out  quickly  so  that  the 
inertia  of  the  ballast  keeps  it  underneath.  Enough  material  was  put  in  under  the  tie  end 
to  bring  it  up  to  the  desired  height,  and  then  emulsified  asphalt  was  poured  at  the  end 
of  the  tie  to  re-seal  it. 

If  you  spot  just  an  occasional  tie  on  one  end,  it  would  be  economical  to  do  it 
that  way.  If  you  have  any  extensive  amount,  that  method  gets  pretty  expensive,  and 
it  probably  would  be  cheaper  to  surface  the  track  and  tamp  the  asphalt  mixture 
underneath  it  and  re-coat  if  desired. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Mr.  Creighton,  has  your  committee  given  any  thought  to  using 
asphalt-impregnated  ballast  under  railroad  crossings? 

Mr.  Creighton:  Xo,  we  have  not. 

Mr.  Woolford:  It  is  being  done  on  the  Southern  Railway.  Going  to  Atlanta,  Ga.  to 
a  committee  meeting,  I  had  occasion  to  ride  over  some.  We  were  having  tremendous 
problems  with  our  railroad  crossings.  After  seeing  what  they  had  done  down  there, 
I  did  some  experimenting  on  my  own  road,  and  I  find  that  we  can  maintain  railroad 
crossings  far  easier  and  in  a  far  better  condition  by  using  asphalt-impregnated  ballast 
under  the  ties,   rather  than  standard  ballast 

Chairman  Beighley:  Mr.  Woolford,  was  that  railroad  with  railroad,  or  railroad 
with  highway? 

Mr.  Woolford:   Railroad  with  railroad. 

Assignment   11 — Chemical  Control  of   Vegetation. 

Ciiaikmw  Hi  ii. in  ia:  The  chairman  of  Subcommittee  11  is  C.  E.  Webb,  engineer 
of  tests,  Southern  Railway.  Mr.  Webb  is  unable  to  be  here  today;  however,  he  advises 
that  because  of  budget  restrictions  affecting  the  work  of  the  AAR  research  staff,  it  has 
not  been  possible  to  gather  sufficient  data  on  this  subject  to  prepare  a  report  of  nation- 


682 Track 

wide  significance.  Certain  information,  though,  on  new  products  and  chemical  combina- 
tions is  being  assembled,  and  hi-  thought  a  significant  report  may  be  presented  next  year. 


Chairman  Biiciii.i.y  [continuing | :  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of 
Committee  1. 

Mr.   Woolford:    Mr.   Beighley,   before  you  sit   down  may   I  ask  another  question. 

On  your  last  subject,  on  chemical  control  of  vegetation,  has  your  committee  given 
any  study  to  supplementing  bulldozed  fire  guards  through  forest  areas  with  chemical 
treatment?  If  so,  what  do  you  recommend  in  the  way  of  chemical  treatment  through 
such  areas? 

Chairman  Beighley:  Mr.  Woolford,  we  haven't  as  yet  gotten  into  that  subject, 
but  it  is  one  that  is  of  much  interest  at  the  present  time.  On  railroads  all  over  the 
country  it  seems  that  diesel  engines  throw  out  fire  just  as  much  as  the  old  steam 
engines  did.  On  our  railroad  we  make  fire  guards  with  a  bulldozer,  and  I  myself  don't 
think  it  is  very  satisfactory,  because  you  get  regrowth  in  a  very  short  period  of  time. 

I  believe  the  Santa  Fe  has  done  some  work  with  regard  to  chemical  eradication 
of  vegetation  for  fire  guards,  and  I  think  we  shall  get  actively  into  the  matter  in  con- 
nection with  this  assignment. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Beighley,  and  your  committee  for  these  addi- 
tional valuable  reports.  From  your  comments  with  respect  to  some  of  your  assignments, 
it  is  evident  that  your  committee  has  a  lot  of  unfinished  business  to  progress  or  clean  up 
in  the  year  ahead.  We  know  it  will  do  this  to  the  fullest  extent  possible. 

I  know  your  committee  is  sorry  to  lose  its  very  efficient  secretary  for  the  past  two 
years — Rudy  Beeder — but  your  loss  is  a  great  gain  for  our  Committee  on  Cooperative 
Relations  with  Universities,  as  Mr.  Beeder  takes  over  the  vice  chairmanship  of  that 
committee. 

Thank  you  again,  Mr.  Beighley,  for  the  good  work  of  your  committee  during  the 
past  year.  You  are  now  excused,  with  the  thanks  of  the  Association.   [Applause] 

Discussion  on  Track 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  577,  pages  419-447] 

President  Code:  Quite  logically,  after  hearing  the  report  of  our  Committee  on 
Roadway  and  Ballast,  we  turn  to  the  report  of  our  Committee  5— Track,  which  is  the 
next  feature  on  our  program.  The  chairman  of  this  committee  for  the  past  three  years 
has  been  Stuart  Poore,  office  engineer  of  the  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,  and  I  would 
like  to  welcome  him  and  the  members  of  his  committee  to  the  platform  at  this  time. 
Mr.  Poore,  you  may  proceed. 

Chairman  S.  H.  Poore:  Mr.  President  and  members  of  the  AREA: 
The  report  of  the  Track  committee  will  be  found  in  Bulletin  577,  of  February 
1963.  We  have  11  assignments.  Progress  reports  on  3  of  them,  namely,  hold  down  fas- 
tenings for  tic  plates,  review  of  speed  on  curves,  and  methods  of  heat  treatment  of 
frogs  and  switches,  are  in  the  Bulletin.  I  do  not  believe  a  formal  presentation  is  war- 
ranted at  this  time. 

N.  C.  Kieffer,  Jr.,  assistant  to  director  of  industrial  development  of  the  Louisville 
&  Nashville  Railroad,  was  chairman  of  Subcommittee  6 — Hold  Down  Fastenings  for 
Tie  Plates.  Mr.  Kieffer  is  resigning  from  the  committee  because  of  a  change  in  jobs 
and  could  not  make  this  convention. 


Discussion 683 

L.  H.  Jentoft,  assistant  chief  engineer  maintenance  of  way  of  the  Erie-Lackawanna, 
is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  9 — Speed  on  Curves.  I  will  ask  him  to  stand  and  be 
recognized.   Incidentally.  Mr.  Jentoft  is  retiring   from  railroad  service. 

H.  W.  Jensen,  maintenance  engineer  of  the  Chicago  &  North  Western,  is  chairman 
of  Subcommtitee  10 — Heat  Treatment  of  Bolted  Rail  Frogs  and  Split  Switches.  Will 
you  please  stand,  Mr.  Jensen. 

Somewhat  more  detailed  reports  on  revision  of  the  Manual,  standardization  of 
Hackwork,  plans,  design  of  tie  plates,  and  track  tools,  are  offered  at  this  time.  No  report 
is  offered  on  prevention  of  damage  resulting  from  brine  drippings  on  track  and  struc- 
tures, effect  of  lubrication  in  preventing  frozen  rail  joints  and  retarding  corrosion  of 
rail  and  fastenings,  the  practicability  of  using  reflex  units  for  switch  lamps  and  targets, 
and  laying  rail  tight  with  frozen  joints. 

We  turn  now  to  the  assignments  on  which  we  are  making  detailed  reports. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Poore:  R.  J.  Hollingsworth,  engineer  roadway,  track  and  equipment, 
Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  1,  but  he  is  not  present.  It  so 
happens  that  I  am  familiar  with  this  work,  however,  and  I  shall  undertake  to  present 
the  report  myself. 

The  subcommittee  on  Revision  of  Manual  was  approached  a  year  or  more  ago 
with  a  proposal  to  revise  the  format  of  the  specifications  for  tie  plates  and  track  spikes, 
to  bring  them  into  line  with  the  comparable  specifications  of  the  ASTM.  This  revision 
has  been  accomplished.  There  were  modifications  both  in  the  ASTM  and  the  AREA 
specifications. 

At  the  same  time  we  included  in  the  specifications  provisions  to  permit  use  of 
basic-oxygen  steel  in  the  production  of  these  items. 

First,  I  move  that  the  Specifications  for  Low-Carbon  Steel  Tie  Plates,  printed 
beginning  on  page  421  of  Bulletin  577,  be  approved  for  adoption  and  printing  in  the 
Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Chairman  Poore:  Since  the  printing  of  this  Bulletin  my  attention  has  been  called 
to  some  editorial  changes.  Mr.  Hollingsworth  has  the  record  of  these,  and  my  notes 
do  not  cover  them  at  the  moment,  but  I  shall  advise  the  secretary's  office  of  them  prior 
to  the  printing  of  the  Manual  Supplement. 

The  next  specification  is  for  hot-worked,  high-carbon  steel  tie  plates  and  may  be 
found  on  page  423  of  Bulletin  577. 

I  move  it  be  adopted  and  printed  in  the  Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Chairman  Poore:  The  next  specifications  offered  for  approval  cover  soft-steel  track 
spikes  and  high-carbon  steel  track  spikes.  The  first  of  these  specifications  is  printed 
beginning  on   page  426  of  the  Bulletin  and  the  second  on   page  428. 

I    move  they  be  adopted  and  printed  in  the  Manual 

[The   motion   was  duly  seconded.  | 

President  Code:  The  motion  covers  two  different  specifications  for  track  spikes. 
Is  there  any  discussion? 

[The  motion  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried  | 

Chairman  Poore:  The  nexl  specification,  on  page  430  of  the  Bulletin,  for  steel 
drive  spikes,  has  no  ASTM  counterpart.  However,  at  the  time  we  were  revising  the 
aforementioned  specifications  we  brought  the  one  for  steel  drive  spikes  into  the  com- 
mon  format,  including  permission   to   use   basi<   oxygen  steel. 


684 Track 

I  move  its  adoption. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded,  was  put  to  a  vote,  and  carried.] 

Assignment  2 — Track  Tools. 

Chairman  Poore:  Assignment  2 — Track  Tools,  will  be  presented  by  C.  E.  Peterson, 
assistant  engineer,  Santa  Fe,  Chicago. 

C.  E.  Peterson:  Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

This  is  a  progress  report,  submitted  as  information. 

Your  committee  is  making  a  study  of  the  following  subjects: 

1.  Snap-on  Ratchet  Track  Wrench — From  experience  gained  in  the  field,  it  was 
found  that  the  shoulders  on  the  joint  bars,  especially  on  reformed  bars,  do  not  permit 
the  socket  of  this  tool  to  get  up  tight.  Also,  it  has  too  much  allowance  for  over-length 
of  the  track  bolts.  The  handle  is  located  too  far  from  the  socket  end,  resulting  in  a 
twisting  action  which  does  not  allow  maximum  torque  to  be  applied  to  the  nut.  It  is 
not  durable  enough,  as  the  ratchet  wears  out  too  fast.  The  wrench  works  well  for  a 
specific  job,  but  for  general  work  it  should  be  redesigned.  The  committee  suggests  that 
it  be  designed  as  a  double-end  socket  wrench  having  a  thin-wall  socket  with  a  single- 
action  ratchet  in  one  direction.  The  ratchet  should  be  fitted  around  the  center  of  the 
double-end  socket  where  the  handle  will  engage  it. 

2.  Track  Jacks  with  Aluminum  Alloy  Housings — It  was  called  to  our  attention  that 
there  have  been  a  number  of  failures  of  aluminum  alloy  track  jacks.  Therefore,  a  canvass 
has  been  conducted  of  the  Class  I  Railroads  to  determine  the  number  and  kind  of 
failures  that  have  occurred.  From  the  recent  data  received,  a  study  is  being  made  to 
determine  the  necessary  changes  in  design,  metallurgy,  specifications,  etc.,  to  correct  the 
situation. 

3.  Aluminum  Track  Level  and  Gage — An  investigation  will  be  made  on  the  use  of 
light-weight  metals  for  the  AREA  track  level  and  gage. 

4.  Wear  Limit  on  Striking  and  Cutting  Tools — A  study  will  be  made  on  the  econ- 
omy of  reclaiming  tools  that  have  worn  down  to  the  specified  wear  limit. 

Assignment  3 — Standardization   of   Trackwork  Plans. 

Chairman  Poore:  At  this  time  C.  J.  McConaughy,  track  designer,  of  the  Southern 
Pacific,  San  Francisco,  Calif.,  is  asked  to  report  on  Assignment  3. 

C.  J.  McConaughy:  Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

I  assume  all  of  you  have  read  the  article  in  the  AREA  News  of  November-Decem- 
ber 1962  entitled  "1962  Trackwork  Portfolio  Supplement,"  on  the  five  new  standard 
turnout  plans  which  are  self-contained  in  all  details  necessary  for  ordering  the  material 
and  installing  it  in  the  field.  However  I  would  like  to  briefly  review  the  event  leading 
up  to  the  adoption  of  these  plans.  It  took  considerable  time  and  hard  work  by  your 
committee  to  develop  them  to  the  point  where  they  were  acceptable,  making  it  possible 
to  proceed  with  the  preparation  of  the  basic  drawings.  After  their  adoption  in  March 
1962,  a  great  deal  more  work  was  required  to  put  them  into  the  form  necessary  for 
printing  them  in  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  the  Portfolio. 

In  1959  the  Track  committee  was  given  a  directive  to  standardize  the  AREA  plans. 
At  the  May  1959  meeting  this  matter  was  thoroughly  discussed  and  found  to  cover 
too  great  a  scope  for  action  by  the  entire  committee.  Consequently,  a  special  com- 
mtitee  was  appointed  to  make  a  study  and  recommend  what  turnouts  should  be  used. 

In  order  to  arrive  at  some  logical  basis,  the  special  committee  considered  the  fact 
that   most   railroads  base   their   turnouts   on   various  speed   requirements.   To   meet   the 


Discussion 685 

conditions  of  high,  medium  and  slow  speeds,  the  committee  recommended  the  No.  20, 
No.  15,  and  No.  10  turnouts  with  39-ft  curved  switch  points,  26-ft  curved  switch 
points,  and  16-ft  6-in  straight  switch  points,  respectively,  as  covered  in  detail  in  the 
Proceedings,  Vol.  61  of  1960.  It  was  their  considered  opinion  that  these  turnouts  were 
equally  divided  to  meet  the  speed  requirements  and  were  balanced,  with  respect  to 
both  switch  point  angle  and  closure  curvature.  The  committee's  recommendations  were 
presented  to  the  convention  in  March  1960,  at  which  time  they  were  thoroughly  dis- 
cussed and  reviewed.  This  included  a  round-table  discussion  by  various  members  of  the 
track  committee,  followed  by  an  open  question  and  answer  period,  before  the  recom- 
mendations were  approved. 

In  the  ensuing  two  years  there  were  many  controversies,  changes  and  reapprovals, 
but  your  committee  finally  presented  the  completed  plans  at  the  March  1962  convention, 
which  were  unanimously  approved.  With  additional  minor  editorial  changes  and  cor- 
rections, these  plans  were  finally  printed  for  the  Trackwork  Portfolio  and  issued  in  the 
latter  part  of  1962.  In  fact  the  first  sets  of  the  printed  AREA  plans  were  handed  to 
this  committee  during  its  September  1962  meeting.  These  were  given  at  that  time  to 
the  various  frog  and  switch  manufacturers  for  their  use,  as  some  of  the  railroads  were 
already   ordering  material  based  upon  the  preliminary  drawings. 

Why  was  this  assignment  requested  and  what  was  the  purpose  of  reducing  the 
standards  to  eliminate  the  alternates  and  the  number  of  turnouts  now  in  the  trackwork 
portfolio? — Economy,  savings  in  cost  of  production,  reduction  in  inventory,  inter- 
changeability  between  railroads  and  possibly  many  other  advantages.  At  the  time  this 
assignment  was  made  the  advantages  of  standardization  of  turnouts  may  have  appeared 
to  be  something  new;  however  some  of  you  may  recall  that  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  60 
of  1959,  page  870,  under  Assignment  11 — "Economy  To  Be  Gained  By  the  Railroad 
From  the  More  Extensive  Use  of  AREA  Plans,"  that  subcommittee  outlined  the  numer- 
ous advantages  to  be  gained  and  felt  that  the  greatest  economy  could  be  achieved  if  a 
set  of  recommended  plans  for  the  trackwork  portfolio  could  be  developed  that  would 
eliminate  alternates  which  affect  the  shop  work.  Alternates  should  be  indicated  only  for 
parts  not  basic  to  the  manufacture  of  turnout  materials. 

The  report  in  the  Proceedings,  Vol.  58  of  1957  by  the  committee  under  Assign- 
ment 11,  shows  that  of  the  railroads  with  over  1000  miles  of  trackage,  only  5  percent 
used  AREA  plans  in  general.  Of  smaller  railroads  with  less  than  1000  maintained  miles, 
25  to  38  percent  used  AREA  plans,  depending  upon  the  turnout  speeds.  Of  the  rail- 
roads having  over  1000  miles  not  using  these  plans  at  that  time,  25  percent  stated  they 
would  consider  recommending  the  AREA  plans  and  only  1.9  percent  of  the  roads  of 
less  than  1000  miles.  This  would  indicate  that  approximately  30  percent  on  a  mileage 
basis  of  railroads  with  over  1000  maintained  miles  would  possibly  use  the  new  AREA 
plans.  This  does  not  reflect  the  actual  number  of  railroads  but  it  does  provide  a  picture 
of  the  possible  percentage  of  production  to  the  new  plans.  On  the  construction  and 
production  side,  the  various  frog  and  switch  manufacturers  were  submitted  five  ques- 
tions covering  reduction  in  costs  for  one  set  of  plans  for  each  turnouts,  delivery  time, 
etc.  Their  answers  indicated  a  2  to  5  percent  saving  in  cost  and  reduction  in  delivery 
time  of  20  to  33  percent. 

With  the  continued  interest  in  the  need  of  standardization  from  the  time  of  these 
reports  to  the  adoption  of  the  five  standard  turnout  plans,  as  shown  at  our  previous 
conventions,  it  is  possible  that  a  larger  percentage  of  the  total  railroad  mileage  would 
now  consider  using  these  standard  plans.  However,  at  this  time  it  docs  not  appear  that 
there    is    the    interest    beint;    shown    tli.it    was    expected.    From    the    information    I    have 


686 Track 

received,  the  manufacturers  have  not  been  flooded  with  orders  for  these  standards. 
We  realize  that  these  plans  having  been  issued  in  the  latter  part  of  1962,  it  is  rather 
-non   for   the   railroads  to   complete   their  studies  as   to   the   use  of   the  standard  plans. 

To  accomplish  this  goal  of  standardization  will  take  considerable  time  and  hard 
work.  It  cannot  be  done  at  once  but  must  be  accomplished  on  a  gradual  basis.  The 
savings  will  not  be  available  on  a  number  of  railroads  until  some  of  the  alterations  are 
made  and  the  turnouts  gradually  converted  to  the  new  standard.  In  a  few  cases  the 
new  standards  may  be  similar  to  the  plans  now  being  used  and  their  adoption  would 
not  be  difficult  or  expensive  and  can  be  accomplished  within  a  very  short  time.  Other 
railroads  will  be  required  to  make  a  complete  changeout  in  order  to  use  these  plans, 
which  could  be  very  expensive  and  require  a  longer  period  of  time,  before  the  benefits 
of  standardization  would  be  realized.  Due  to  economic  conditions  and  increased  costs, 
it  is  possible  that  some  of  the  railroads  may  hesitate  to  make  these  changes  until  a  new 
rail  section  is  adopted  or  a  new  turnout  required. 

Your  committee  realizes  the  problems  that  will  be  encountered  in  the  adoption  of 
the  new  standards,  as  we  have  experienced  similar  difficulties  in  developing  and  pre- 
senting them  for  approval.  However,  it  is  felt  that  standardization  is  the  ultimate  goal 
we  should  work  toward  in  our  future  planning.  Your  committee  also  realizes  that  as 
time  goes  on  you  may  wish  some  revisions  and  changes  in  order  that  the  standards  will 
be  kept  up  to  date  to  cover  improvements  in  the  track  structure  that  may  be  developed. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  McConaughy.  Your  subcommittee  has  done  a 
very  worthwhile  and  monumental  piece  of  work,  and  I  am  sure  it  will  bear  fruit  for 
many  years  to  come. 

Are  there   any   comments  or  questions? 

F.  R.  Woolford  [Western  Pacific] :  Mr.  McConaughy,  do  you  actually  think  we 
will  ever  accomplish  standardization  of  track  materials?  We  used  the  No.  14  turnout 
for  a  number  of  years,  and  your  committee  came  out  and  recommended  the  No.  IS. 
We  tried  to  buy  No.  IS  turnouts,  but  one  frog  manufacturer  couldn't  make  them. 

Do  you  think  standardization  will  ever  be  adopted?  I  am  beginning  to  wonder 
whether  we  are  going  down  a  blind  road. 

Mr.  McConaughy:  Mr.  Woolford,  it  would  appear  that  way.  We  were  given  a  very 
large  assignment.  I  am  not  trying  to  pass  it  off,  but  I  think  we  went  at  it  so  quickly 
and  so  rapidly  that  there  are  possibly  changes  that  the  various  railroads  will  want 
to  make. 

To  answer  your  question,  there  has  not  been  enough  interest  shown  by  the  railroads 
to  warrant  the  manufacturers  at  this  time  making  new  patterns  for  the  new  standards. 
However,  you  raise  a  question  in  my  mind:  Are  the  manufacturers  really  interested  in 
making   this   standardization? 

Mr.  Woolford:  I  spoke  about  it  because  you  are  familiar  with  three  of  the  western 
railroads  that  tried  to  standardize.  We  thought  it  went  over,  but  it  fell  flat.  I  wonder 
if  the  same  thing  will  happen  to  our  new  standards. 

Mr.  McConaughy:  We  hope  not,  sir.  However,  in  my  opinion,  and  it  has  been 
expressed  by  the  committee,  there  is  one  step  toward  standardization  that  we  should 
particularly  strive  for,  and  that  is  to  reduce  the  number  of  turnouts  being  used.  I  think 
it  would  be  possible  that  we  could  eventually  reduce  them  to  where  the  people  now 
using  14's,  lS's,  16's  or  12's  could  eventually  use  the  15.  Most  of  us  use  a  No.  10  now. 
A  lot  of  us  use  a  No.  20. 

I  think  using  the  No.  IS  turnout,  if  that  could  be  accomplished,  would  be  a  step 
in  the  right  direction.  Then  the  rest  of  this  would  fall  into  line  eventually. 


Discussion  687 


B.  R.  Meyers  [Chicago  &  North  Western]:  If  it  is  of  any  comfort  to  the  com- 
mittee, I  am  in  complete  disagreement  with  Mr.  Woolford.  I  think  it  is  going  to  be 
accomplished.  It  may  take  several  years,  but  I  think  it  is  going  to  come. 

We  have  always  used  the  No.  14  as  our  standard  medium-speed  turnout,  and 
when  it  appeared  that  No.  IS  would  undoubtedly  be  adopted  we  changed,  and  we  didn't 
have  any  trouble  buying  No.  15's.  So,  Mr.  Woolford,  you  are  living  in  the  wrong  part 
of   the   country.    [Laughter] 

C.  I.  Hartsell   [Chesapeake   &   Ohio] :   I  have  three  questions  for  you. 

In  checking  over  your  rail-bound  manganese  frogs,  I  see  no  change  at  two  particu- 
larly important  parts.  There  is  a  weak  spot  in  the  manganese  insert  about  6  to  8  in 
back  of  the  point  where  it  drops  down.  That  is  where  there  is  a  first  failure  for  a  dis- 
tance that  varies,  but  is  usually  not  less  than  from  6  up  to  10  to  12  in.  Have  you 
re-designed  that  insert? 

Mr.  McConaughy:  Yes,  we  have.  The  point  of  weakness  is  characteristic,  I  believe, 
of  most  frogs.  You  will  find  that  same  wear  pattern  on  the  spring  rail  frog.  We  have 
designed  a  frog  that  was  supposed  to  be  a  happy  medium  between  the  heavy  2-in  wall 
on  one  side  and  the  %-'m  wall  on  the  other,  and  in  so  doing  I  believe  the  manufacturers 
with  whom  we  conferred  have  beefed  up  the  support  under  the  point. 

I  would  like  to  ask  Mr.  Hassan  if  he  has  any  comments  on  that.  He  was  most 
helpful  in  our  redesigning. 

M.  J.  Hassan  [Taylor-Wharton  Iron  &  Steel  Company]:  I  think  one  of  the  main 
purposes  of  redesigning  the  sections  of  the  frog  was  from  the  standpoint  of  the  casting 
of  it  by  the  foundry  people,  particularly  in  securing  the  soundness  of  the  metal,  which 
in  the  heavy  wall  at  times  showed  considerable  defects,  especially  around  that  point 
area. 

Mr.  Hartsell:   Have  we  strengthened  the  end  of  the  frog? 

Mr.  McConaughy:  Redesigning  this  casting  to  provide  more  uniform  shrinkage 
and  eliminate  some  of  the  stress  conditions  will,  I  believe,  help  the  overall  situation. 
Mr.   von   Kampen,  would  you  have  any  comments  to  add  to  this  problem? 

Karl  von  Kampen  [Pettibone  Mulliken  Corporation]:  The  basic  reason  for  rede- 
signing the  heavy  AREA  insert  frog  was  to  get  a  more  even  insert  section  and  better 
foundry  conditions.  Our  observations,  from  the  few  tests  we  have  made,  indicate  that 
that  has  been  accomplished.  I  am  just  wondering  whether  the  gentleman  is  talking 
about  the  old   AREA  620  series  design  with   the  heavier  wall. 

Mr.  Hartsell:  From  the  plan  it  is  not  obvious  that  there  has  been  too  much 
beefing. 

Mr.  von  Kampen:  It  is  a  case  of  trying  to  even  out  the  metal  section  to  get  better 
foundry  sections. 

Mr.  Hartsell:  In  your  heel  blocks  you  have  put  in  a  thimble,  or  a  shoulder  bolt; 
you  have  put  in  a  bent  angle  bar;  you  have  created  a  situation  that  is  going  to  cause 
considerable  increased  cost  in  the  installation  of  this  heel  block  as  compared  to  the 
free-floating  heel  block.  It  is  going  to  be  very  difficult  and  costly  to  install  this  heel 
block,  on  top  of  which  you  are  going  to  end  up  with  some  kinked  joints.  It  is  almost 
impossible  to  anchor  that  turnout  so  that  you  can  prevent  it  from  kinking.  What  do 
you  have  to  say  about  that? 

Mr.  McCovw  <ii\  :  You  really  have  put  me  on  the  spot  there.  I  will  have  to 
declare  that  I  don't  believe  these  plans  are  rounded  out  to  the  point  where  they  are 
equally   desirable   for  a   large,   high-speed   main-line   railroad  that   is  using   floating  heel 


688 Track 

block  designs;  there  arc  things  in  the  designs  that  are  more  adaptable  to  a  smaller 
railroad.  So,  I  would  like  to  air  this  question  right  here. 

In  designing  these  turnouts  the  committee,  when  I  was  given  the  chairmanship, 
had  the  problem  and  the  directive  of  making  one  set  of  turnouts  from  the  present  plans. 
I  think  that  while  the  endeavor  was  good,  because  of  the  pressure  on  the  committee, 
it  wasn't  realized  that  the  bolted  heel  block  with  the  shoulder  bolt  or  thimble  is  prob- 
ably more  suited  for  a  lot  of  yard  jobs,  little  industries  and  belt  line  railroads. 

I  believe  your  experience  is  like  that  of  the  Southern  Pacific  and  the  Soo  Line, 
the  Burlington,  etc.  They  have  had  floating  heel  blocks  for  years,  and  they  find  them 
very  advantageous.  So,  that  is  possibly  one  of  the  things  that  we  will  have  to  take 
care  of  if  complete  standardization  is  to  be  effective. 

I  would  like  to  comment  on  one  further  thing  concerning  the  casting  problem. 
We  are  hoping  that  the  manganese  casting,  with  this  redesign  to  eliminate  shrinkage 
stresses  and  castings  trouble,  will  beef  up  the  point.  However,  I  believe  the  breakdown 
mentioned  is  a  normal  wear  pattern,  and  that  is  why  so  many  people  have  gone  to 
the  spring  rail  frog,  to  eliminate  that  condition. 

Your  committee  has  been  given  another  subject  to  study,  namely,  the  economics 
of  these  various  frogs.  It  is  going  to  mean  quite  a  lengthy  investigation,  but  I  do  think 
it  is  going  to  answer  some  of  the  questions  about  the  economics  of  the  rail-bound  versus 
the  spring  rail  frog. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  McConaughy.  These  discussions  are  very  inter- 
esting, and  I  would  like  to  get  mixed  up  in  some  of  them  myself;  but  I  think  I  had 
better  keep  quiet. 

Assignment  5 — Design  of   Tie  Plates. 

Chadxman  Poore:  L.  A.  Pelton  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  S — Design  of  Tie 
Plates.  He  is  district  engineer  of  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  Harrisburg,  and  will  present 
his  report. 

L.  A.  Pelton:  This  is  a  final  report,  offered  as  information  on  the  service  test  on 
the  CNO  &  TP  (Southern  Railway)  in  which  seven  designs  of  tie  plates  for  6-in  rail 
base  were  subjected  to   379   million   gross  tons  of  traffic. 

The  investigation  was  conducted  by  the  AAR  research  staff  under  direct  supervision 
of  H.  E.  Durham,   research  engineer  track. 

The  test  was  installed  in  1944  on  the  CNO  &  TP  approximately  12  miles  north 
of  Chattanooga,  Tenn.  The  installation  consisted  of  7  designs  of  tie  plates  in  22-  39-ft 
panels  of  track  with  131 -lb  RE  rail.  Eight  of  the  panels  were  on  a  short  6-deg  curve 
with  6  in  elevation  and  the  remaining  14  panels  on  tangent  equally  divided  between  oak 
and  pine  ties. 

Final  test  measurements  were  taken  in  May  1962  prior  to  the  laying  of  continuous 
welded  132-lb  RE  rail  through  the  test  area  with  accompanying  tie  renewals  and  gaging, 
thereby  eliminating  further  data  on  tie  wear,  gage,  and  rail  wear. 

A  summary  of  tie  plate  cutting  data  for  the  17.5  year  test  period  is  shown  in 
Table  1.  There  was  little  difference  in  the  average  rate  of  cutting  on  any  of  the  sections 
which  indicates  that  the  size  of  tie  plate  is  not  a  factor  in  the  average  plate  cutting. 
The  average  rate  of  cutting,  however,  is  probably  not  too  significant  on  this  test  because 
of  the  limited  number  of  panels  used,  coupled  with  the  fact  that  tie  plate  area  varied 
only  about  IS  percent. 

The  test  data  did  indicate  less  differential  in  plate  cutting  between  the  gage  and 
field  side  for  both  the  inner  and  outer  rail  on  the  curve  using  the  14^4-in  plate. 


Discussion 689 

Measurements  of  tie  plate  deflection  were  not  conclusive  in  determining  any 
appreciable  tie  plate  bending.  The  test  plates  were  left  in  track  with  the  hope  that  tie 
plate  deflection  can  again  be  checked  at  some  future  date. 

As  a  whole  the  gage  has  held  fairly  well  throughout  the  test  section.  The  greatest 
change  in  gage  on  the  curve  occurred  with  the  12-in  unribbed  plate  and  the  least 
change  with  the  14^4-in  plate.  On  the  tangent  little  change  in  gage  occurred  on  any  of 
the  sections. 

In  conclusion,  the  test  data  indicate  a  uniformity  of  plate  cutting  under  the  14-in 
and  14^4-in  plates  on  the  inner  rail  of  the  6-deg  curve,  but  on  the  outer  rail  the  14^4-in 
plate  gave  a  better  performance.  Better  performance  yet  should  be  expected  from  the 
AREA  Plan  21  special  16-in  tie  plate  with  lj4-in  eccentricity.  For  a  6-in  rail  base  the 
AREA  Plan  12,  14-in  plate  with  JHs-in  eccentricity  should  be  adequate  for  the  inner 
rail  of  the  curve  and  also  on  tangent.  The  13-in  tie  plate  should  be  adequate  for  medium 
traffic  or  with  5^-in  rail  base.  The  12-in  plate  is  indicated  to  be  inferior  as  compared 
to  the  13,  14,  or  14-}^-in  plates,  especially  on  the  curve  and  tangent  with  soft  wood  ties. 

Test  results  do  not  offer  any  conclusions  regarding  the  tie  plate  bending  but  it  is 
the  opinion  that  tie  plate  thicknesses  in  the  AREA  Manual  are  adequate,  and  no  revision 
in  design  is  indicated  from  this  test. 

This  report  supplements  the  conclusions  of  the  test  made  with  5^2 -in  rail  base  on 
the  Illinois  Central  Railroad. 


Chairman  Poore:  Mr.  President,  this  concludes  the  report  of  the  Track  committee. 
At  this  time  my  office  as  chairman  expires.  If  this  committee  has  done  anything  during 
the  last  three  years,  these  are  the  fellows  who  have  done  it. 

I  would  like  to  present  the  new  vice  chairman,  C.  E.  Peterson,  assistant  engineer, 
Santa  Fe.  He  has  been  a  member  of  this  committee  for  many  years. 

The  incoming  chairman  is  J  W.  Salmon,  Jr.,  chief  engineer  of  the  Clinchfield 
Railroad 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Poore.  You  have  very  ably  handled  the  big  job 
of  conducting  the  work  of  committee  5  during  the  past  three  years,  and  we  want  you 
to  know  that  your  interest  and  effort  have  been  greatly  appreciated.  And  our  thanks, 
too,  to  Mr.  Magee  and  the  members  of  his  staff,  who  have  again  assisted  so  capably  in 
progressing  the  work  of  some  of  the  assignments  of  your  committee. 

And  thank  you,  Mr.  McConaughy,  for  the  fine  way  in  which  you  have  picked  up 
and  have  carried  forward,  as  chairman  of  Subcommittee  3,  the  work  on  standardization 
of  trackwork  plans,  so  ably  conducted  for  many  years  by  your  predecessor  Subcom- 
mittee Chairman  Martin  Zeman,  engineer  of  track  design  of  the  Santa  Fe,  now  retired, 
and  a  member  emeritus  of  your  committee. 

Mr.  Poore,  we  are  pleased  to  welcome  Mr.  Peterson  as  the  new  vice  chairman  of 
your  committee,  and  to  see  Mr.  Salmon  advance  to  the  chairmanship.  Mr  Salmon,  as 
the  symbol  of  the  authority  which  you  now  assume,  I  am  pleased  to  present  to  you, 
on  behalf  of  the  Association,  this  chairman's  gavel. 

Mr.  Poore,  your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks  of  the  Association. 
[Applause] 


690 Rail 

Discussion  on  Rail 
[For  report,  see  Bulletin  577,  pages  497  542] 

President  Code:  We  still  have  two  important  committees  to  hear  from;  so,  moving 
along,   Committee  4 — Rail,   is   next   invited   to   the  speaker's  table  to  present  its  report. 

The  able  chairman  of  this  committee,  who  is  completing  his  second  years  as  chair- 
man, is  W.  j.  Cruse,  engineer  maintenance  of  way,  Great  Northern  Railway,  at  St. 
Paul,  Minn.  Mr.  Cruse,  if  you  and  the  members  of  your  committee  will  come  up  here 
promptly,  I  shall  be  pleased  to  turn  the  meeting  over  to  you.  Mr.  Cruse. 

Chairman  W.  J.   Cruse:   Mr.  President  and  gentlemen: 

The  report  of  Committee  4  appears  on  pages  497-542,  inch,  Bulletin  577.  All  nine 
subcommittees  have  worked  diligently  on  their  reports,  but  time  does  not  permit  hearing 
from  each  of  them.  Brief  summaries  will  be  presented  of  three  subcommittee  reports, 
and  I  would  like  at  this  time  to  recognize  those  subcommittee  chairmen  who  will  not 
report   here  today. 

R.  C.  Postels,  assistant  chief  engineer  maintenance  of  way,  Soo  Line,  chairman 
of  Subcommittee  4. 

J.  C.  Jacobs,  retired  engineer  maintenance  of  way,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  chair- 
man of  Subcommittee  5.  I  would  also  like  to  thank  you,  Mr.  Jacobs,  for  your  fine  con- 
tributions and  your  efforts  given  to  the  Rail  committee  over  these  past  years. 

Embert  Osland,  office  engineer  of  the  Santa  Fe,  Subcommittee  6  chairman.  He  was 
here  earlier  this  morning  but  asked  to  be   excused. 

T.  B.  Hutcheson,  chief  engineer  of  the  Seaboard  Air  Line,  chairman  of  Subcom- 
mittee 9. 

A.  P.  Talbot,  assistant  engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  chairman  of  Subcom- 
mittee 10. 

Following  this  meeting  we  are  going  to  have  three  new  subcommittee  chairmen. 
They  will  be  C.  E.  Weller,  assistant  engineer  maintenance  of  way,  Illinois  Central  Rail- 
road, who  will  be  chairman  of  Subcommittee  5,  succeeding  Mr.  Jacobs. 

V.  E.  Hall,  assistant  engineer,  Santa  Fe,  will  be  chairman  of  Subcommittee  7,  a 
new   subcommittee   which   will  study  the  metallurgical   effect  of  rail  cropping  methods. 

C.  F.  Parvin,  engineer  maintenance  of  way  and  structures  for  the  Pennsylvania 
Railroad,  will  head  up  Subcommittee  8,  succeeding  L.  S.  Crane. 

Assignment  1 — Revision  of  Manual. 

Chairman  Cruse:  In  the  absence  of  our  vice  chairman,  J.  A.  Bunjer,  chief  engineer, 
Union  Pacific  Railroad,  I  shall  present  the  report  of  Subcommittee  1 — Revision  of 
Manual. 

Chairman  Cruse  [for  Mr.  Bunjer] :  To  permit  the  use  of  steel  made  by  the  basic- 
oxygen  process  at  the  option  of  the  purchaser  in  the  manufacture  of  rail,  joint  bars, 
track  bolts  and  nuts,  and  spring  washers,  and  to  change  a  chemical  requirement  in  the 
Specifications  for  Quenched  Carbon-Steel  Joint  Bars,  your  committee  submits  for  adop- 
tion the  following  recommendations  with  respect  to  Chapter  4  of  the  Manual. 

[Mr.  Cruse  then  read  the  committee's  recommendations  as  printed  on  pages  498 
and  499  of  Bulletin   577,  continuing  as  follows:] 

Chairman   Cruse:    I  move   that   these   recommendations  be  adopted. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded.] 

L.  W.  Green  [Pennsylvania]:  I  wonder  what  the  significance  is  of  putting  the 
words  "Basic-oxygen  process  may  be  used  at  the  option  of  the  purchaser"  in  parentheses, 


Discussion 691 

when  apparently  the  previous  specification  leaves  an  option  as  to  what  kind  of  steel 
can  be  used,  that  is,  bessemer  or  open  hearth,  without  parenthesis. 

Chairman  Cruse:  While  all  of  the  laboratory  work  and  certain  of  the  field  tests 
on  the  basic-oxygen  process  have  been  completed,  it  is  going  to  take  a  number  of  years 
to  run  out  the  full  tests,  particularly  with  rail  steel.  The  addition  to  the  specifications 
was  so  worded  that  the  purchaser  would  have  full  control  over  whether  he  wants  his 
materials  produced  by  the   basic-oxygen   process. 

Mr.  Green:   Wouldn't   he  have  that  anyhow? 

Chairman  Cruse:  Do  you  mean  why  the  parentheses  themselves  are  in  there? 
I   really  can't  answer  that.  Mr.   Howard,  can  you  give  us  any  light  on  that  ? 

Secretary  Howard:  They  were  put  in  at  the  request  of  the  committee.  [Laughter] 

President  Code:  I  think  it  is  an  editorial  matter  and  was  intended  to  keep  the 
basic-oxygen  process  somewhat  subordinate  until  it  has  attained  full  approval  in 
service. 

Mr.  Green:  In  reading  it,  I  had  the  idea  that  there  were  some  qualms  or  restric- 
tions in  the  use  of  the  process.  That  is  why  I  asked. 

Chairman  Cruse:  No,  it  is  entirely  up  to  the  purchaser  himself.  Probably  some 
railroads  will  prefer  to  wait  for  a  number  of  years  until  there  are  further  results  from 
the  field  installations. 

B.  R.  Meyers  [Chicago  &  North  Western]:  Maybe  my  understanding  of  it  will 
help. 

Wording  it  the  way  vvc  did,  it.  gives  the  manufacturer  the  choice  of  the  conventional 
methods  mentioned  in  the  specifications,  but  he  cannot  use  the  basic-oxygen  method 
unless  he  has  the  approval  of  the  purchaser.  That  is,  he  can  use  the  electric  or  the  open- 
hearth  method  without  asking  the  purchaser,  but  he  cannot  use  the  basic-oxygen  method 
unless  he  asks  the  purchaser  and  the  purchaser  says  it  is  okay. 

Chairman  Cruse:  I  think  the  question  was  why  we  used  the  parentheses.  We 
could  have  left  out  the  parentheses  and  it  would  still  have  the  same  meaning. 

Mr.  Green:  I  wondered  why  the  basic-oxygen  process  was  not  simply  included 
with   the  other  methods  already   given   in   the  specifications. 

Chairman  Cruse:  The  reason  for  that  is  that  it  was  held  aside.  There  is  some 
question  in  certain  people's  minds  as  to  whether  they  want  to  go  to  it.  If  it  were  put 
with  the  other  methods  without  qualification,  the  purchaser  would  have  to  accept  it 
if  the  supplier  wanted  to  use  it. 

Mr.  Green:  As  I  read  the  specifications,  an  individual  railroad  purchaser  could 
specify  cither  open-hearth  steel  or  bessemer  steel;   is  that   right? 

President  Code:  No.  The  manufacturer  can  offer  either  kind  of  steel,  open  hearth 
or  bessemer,  where  it  is  so  stated  without  qualification;  isn't  that  right,  Mr.  Cruse? 
Excuse  me  for  butting  in. 

F.  R.  WOOLFORD  [Western  Pacific! ;  Mr.  Cruse,  in  your  committee's  investigation 
of  the  open-hearth  process  versus  the  basic-oxygen  process,  would  you  say  the  studies 
you  have  made  show  that  they  are  equal,  or  that  the  basic-oxygen  process  is  superior? 

Chairman-  CRUSE:  I  wouldn't  say  it  is  superior.  I  would  say  they  are  equal.  All  of 
the  laboratory  tests  and  field  tests  to  date  have  shown  that  they  are  equal,  but  it  is 
too  early  to  say  that  there  is  an}  superior  quality  in  steel  produced  by  the  basic-oxygen 
process. 

Mr.  Woolford:    Nothing   would   lie   gained   by   going   to  the  basic-oxygen   process? 

Chairman  Cruse:  Nut  ;tt  this  time,  from  the  users'  point  of  view,  but  <>n  the  pari 
of   the   manufacturers,  probably  yes. 


692 Rail 

Mr.  Woolford:   How  about  price? 

CHAIRMAN  Cruse:  No.  The  price  is  the  same.  We  would  like  to  have  a  change, 
however. 

President  Core:   We  have  a  motion  on  the  floor.  Is  there  any   further  discussion? 
[The  motion  was  put  to  a  vote  and  was  carried] 

Assignment  3 — Rail  Failure  Statistics,  Covering  (a)  All  Failures: 
(b)    Transverse  Fissures:  (c)  Performance  of  Control-Cooled  Rail. 

Chairman  Cruse:  The  report  on  Assignment  3  will  be  presented  by  Subcommittee 
Chairman  D.  T.  Faries,  chief  engineer,  Bessemer  &  Lake  Erie  Railroad,  Greenville,  Pa. 
D.  T.  Faries:  The  report  on  Assignment  3  is  printed  beginning  on  page  508  of  the 
Bulletin  577.  This  report  is  submitted  as  information  and  is  a  technical  service  of  the 
Research  Department  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads.  It  was  prepared  by 
Kurt  Kannowski,  metallurgical  engineer,  under  the  direction  of  G.  M.  Magee,  director 
of  engineering  research, 

The   report   is   based   on   information   relative   to   service   and   detected    rail   failure 
as  submitted  by  50  railroads  covering  all  of  their  main  track  mileage,  which  constitutes 
approximately  90  percent  of  the  main-track  mileage  in  the  United  States  and  Canada. 
Included  in  the  report  are  4  charts  and  10  tables  which  break  down  the  information 
into  a  number  of  areas,  such  as- 
Total  rail  failures  by  years. 
Failure  rates  in  control-cooled  rail. 
Service  and  detected  failures  from  transverse  defects. 
Accumulated  failures  by   milL 

Accumulated  failures  by  rail  section,  including  all  types  of  failures  except  engine 
burn  fracture. 

It  is  gratifying  to  note  the  reduction  in  rail  failures  that  has  occurred  during  the 
last  12  or  14  years,  which  can  be  largely  attributed  to  the  introduction  of  the  new  rail 
sections  in  1947.  The  rate  of  failure  of  the  old  sections  compared  to  the  new  sections  is 
shown   on  page  511   of  the  Bulletin  and  is  quite  significant. 

Assignment  8 — Causes  of  Shelly  Spots  and  Head  Checks  in  Rail: 
Methods  for  Their  Prevention. 

Chairman  Cruse:  The  report  of  Subcommittee  8  will  be  given  by  C.  F.  Parvin, 
engineer  maintenance  of  way  and  structures,  Pennsylvania,  in  the  absence  of  Subcom- 
mittee Chairman  L.  S.  Crane,  assistant  chief  mechanical  officer,  Southern. 

C.  F.  Parvin  [for  Mr.  Crane] :  During  the  past  year  this  investigation  was  prog- 
ressed both  by  the  Research  Department,  AAR,  and  the  University  of  Illinois. 

An  account  of  the  work  conducted  by  the  AAR  research  staff  is  included  in  our 
report  as  Appendix  8-a.  It  gives  the  results  of  the  latest  inspection  of  service  test 
installations  of  heat-treated  and  alloy  steel  rail  on  various  railroads.  In  this  inspection 
a  significant  difference  in  the  performance  of  high-silicon-steel  rail  compared  with 
standard  carbon-steel  rail  was  observed — the  former  showing  a  greater  resistance  to 
shelling.  An  additional  installation  consisting  of  rail  made  by  the  basic-oxygen  process 
was  inspected  and  will  be  reported  on  next  year. 

The  AAR  research  staff  also  conducted  metallurgical  and  physical  examinations 
of  rails  flame-hardened  by  the  Santa  Fe  Railway  and  the  Union  Pacific  Railroad.  Re- 
ports describing  the  processes  and  presenting  the  test  results  have  been  prepared  by 
Kurt  Kannowski  of  the  AAR  research  staff.  Copies  of  the  reports  may  be  obtained  from 
G.  M.  Magee,  director  of  engineering  research,  AAR,  3140  S.  Federal  St.,  Chicago  16,  111. 


Discussion 693 

The  investigation  of  shelly  rail  conducted  at  the  University  of  Illinois  by  Professor 
R.  E.  Cramer  is  presented  in  our  printed  report  as  Appendix  8-b.  In  it: 

1.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  German    abrasion-resistant    rail. 

2.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  ten  specimens  of  basic-oxygen  standard  car- 
bon-steel rails. 

3.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  two  specimens  of  basic-oxygen  high-silicon 
steel  rails. 

4.  The  writer  recommends  the  use,  when  desired,  of  basic-oxygen  steel,  for  rail- 
road rails  for  all  types  of  railway  service,  including  continuous  welded  track. 

5.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  of  two  US-lb  standard  carbon  steel  rails. 

6.  Mechanical  tests  are  reported  of  two  Japanese  induction-hardened  119-lb  rails. 

7.  Rolling-load  tests  are  reported  on  rails  flame-hardened  by  the  Santa  Fc  Rail- 
way and  others  flame-hardened  by  a  commercial  firm  for  the  Southern  Pacific 
Company. 

8.  One  rolling-load  test  was  made  of  a  rail  rolled  in  Germany  from  a  continuous- 
cast  ingot  produced  in  France. 

President  Code:   Thank  you,  Mr.  Parvin. 

Mr.  Green:  Mr.  President,  to  return  once  more  to  my  question;  why  is  there  a 
difference  in  the  specifications  put  out  by  the  Track  committee  for  tie  plates  and  spikes, 
in  which  the  basic-oxygen  process  is  not  differentiated  from  the  other  methods,  as  it  is 
in  the  Rail  committee  specifications? 

President  Code:  May  I  answer  that,  Mr.  Cruse?  The  Track  committee,  I  gather, 
has  no  reservations  whatever  in  regard  to  basic-oxygen  steel,  while  the  Rail  committee, 
with  jurisdiction  over  rail  and  joint  bars,  which  are  somewhat  more  critical  from  a 
quality  standpoint  than  tie  plates  and  spikes,  felt  that  some  reservations  were  necessary. 


Chairman  Cruse:   This  completes  the  report  of  Committee  4,  Mr.  President. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Cruse.  As  a  member  of  your  committee,  and 
well  qualified  to  speak,  I  should  and  could  say  a  lot  of  nice  things  about  you  and  our 
committee  because  you  have  very  ably  conducted  its  work  during  the  past  year.  How- 
ever, necessarily  conserving  time,  I  shall  refrain  from  doing  so. 

However,  I  do  want  to  take  time  to  recognize  one  man  who  has  made  a  great 
contribution  to  the  work  of  your  committee  over  the  years,  and  who,  I  understand, 
will  retire  shortly  from  active  service.  I  refer  to  Ralph  E.  Cramer,  research  associate 
professor  of  engineering  materials  at  the  University  of  Illinois,  who,  since  the  fall  of 
1944,  has  directed  the  Cooperative  Rails  Investigation  of  the  Rail  committee  and  the 
rail  manufacturers  at  the  University  of  Illinois,  begun  under  the  late  Professor  H.  F. 
Moore  back  in    1931. 

Professor  Cramer's  work  throughout  the  years  has  been  most  helpful  in  many 
respects,  and  especially  in  connection  with  our  investigation  of  failures  in  control-cooled 
rail,  and  shelly  spot  studies,  on  both  of  which  he  has  submitted  reports  again  in  the 
current    rep<  it    of   the   Rail  committee. 

I  know  I  speak  for  the  committee,  and  for  the  Association  as  a  whole,  when  I  say 
thank  you,  Professor  Cramer,  and  express  the  hope  that  you  will  have  many  years  of 
health  and  happiness  in  your  retirement. 

Mr.  Cruse,  your  committee  is  now  excused,  with  the  thanks  of  the  Association. 
[Applause] 


694 Continuous   Welded   Rail 

President  Code  [continuing]:  I  should  like  to  give  you  the  attendance  figures  at 
this  convention:  254  railroad  men,  134  non-railroad  men  present,  totaling  388,  as 
compared  to  648  a  year  ago. 

Discussion  of  Continuous  Welded  Rail 

[For  report,  see  Bulletin  577,  pages  449-496] 

President  Code:  Gentlemen,  the  last  of  our  committees  to  report  to  this  meeting 
is  our  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail,  the  chairman  of  which  for  the 
past  year  has  been  W.  J.  Jones,  engineer  maintenance  of  way  and  structures,  system  of 
the  Southern  Pacific  Company,  at  San  Francisco,  Calif.  Mr.  Jones,  your  committee  has 
an  unusually  comprehensive  report  this  year,  and  we  shall  be  pleased  to  hear  it  at  this 
time.  You  may  proceed. 

Chairman  W.  J.  Jones:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Your  committee's  reports  on  its  six  assignments  are  printed  in  Bulletin  577,  Vol  64, 
pages  449-496,  inclusive. 

Assignment   1 — Fabrication. 

Chairman  Jones:  A.  H.  Galbraith,  welding  engineer,  Santa  Fe,  is  chairman  of 
Subcommittee  1.  Mr.  Galbraith,  will  you  please  stand  and  be  recognized?  Thank  you, 
sir. 

The  report  on  Assignment  1  is  presented  in  three  parts,  all  as  information.  Part  1 
concerns  the  development  of  specifications  for  fabricating  continuous  welded  rail.  Your 
committee  is  continuing  its  efforts  to  establish  a  set  of  recommended  alinement  and 
finishing  tolerances  for  continuous  welded  rail  which  are  economically  possible  to  attain 
with  presently  used  welding  and  finishing  machinery,  and  using  rail  as  rolled  by  the 
mills  under  present  finishing  specifications. 

Part  2  is  a  report  on  Investigation  of  Failures  of  Welded  Rails,  prepared  by  R.  E. 
Cramer,  research  associate  professor,  University  of  Illinois. 

Part  3  of  Assignment  1  is  an  interesting  and  informative  monograph  on  The  Future 
for  Fixed  Commercial  Continuous  Welded  Rail  Plants,  written  for  the  committee  by 
Edward  T.  Myers,  engineering  editor,  Modern  Railroads.  Mr.  Myers  will  give  a  resume 
of  his  study. 

Edward  T.  Myers:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

Last  year  the  Continuous  Welded  Rail  committee  became  aware  of  an  approaching 
crisis.  The  fixed  commercial  welded  rail  plants  were  threatened  with  collapse.  At  that 
time  only  three  were  operating. 

Looking  back  several  years  to  some  of  our  past  meetings,  you  may  recall  the  hopes 
in  the  minds  of  many  of  you  for  such  plants.  Here,  railroads  could  obtain  welded  rail 
in  either  large  or  small  lots  according  to  their  needs.  Small  roads  that  could  not  afford 
on-line  plants  could  now  obtain  a  few  miles  of  continuous  welded  rail  each  year.  It  was 
as  if  steel  mills  were  rolling  continuous  rail. 

Then  suddenly  all  this  was  threatened.  Plants  were  operating  at  deficits,  and  several 
of  them  closed.  Several  plants  that  were  projected  failed  to  open.  It  was  then  that  Mr. 
Jones  and  his  committee  asked  me  to  prepare  the  monograph  which  appears  in  Bulletin 
577,  beginning  on  page  460. 

Why  have  these  plants  run  into  economic  difficulties,  and  what  are  the  solutions? 
I  will  give  you  a  few  of  the  problems.  You  can  refer  to  the  monograph  for  the  details, 


Discussion 695 

1.  High  switching  and  shipping  costs.   This  one  is  caused  by  the  railroads  them 
selves. 

2.  High  cost  of  the  permanent  structures  required  for  the  welding  equipment. 

3.  Growing  real  estate  and  property   taxes  which  are  placed  on  these  plants. 

4.  Failure  of  railroads  to  schedule  welding  over  the  entire  calendar  year.  Instead, 
each  railroad  wants  its  welding  done  at  the  same  time. 

These  are  the  basic  problems,  though  there  are  many  others. 

In  closing,  I  might  say  that  if  all  railroads  are  to  benefit  from  this  service  they 
must  develop  inter-railroad  cooperation,  otherwise  the  fixed  continuous  rail  welding 
plants  may  fail  to  survive. 

Assignment  2 — Laying. 

Chairman  Jones:  M.  S.  Reid,  assistant  chief  engineer — maintenance,  Chicago  & 
North  Western  Railway,  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  2.  Mr.  Reid  will  present  his 
report. 

M.  S.  Reid:   Mr.  President,  members  and  guests: 

The  report  on  Assignment  2  is  contained  on  pages  464-47°  of  Bulletin  577.  In 
addition  to  the  usual  tabulation  of  continuous  welded  rail  laid  in  various  years,  a  separa- 
tion has  been  made  between  new  and  secondhand  and  main  track  and  side  track  for 
continuous  welded  rail  laid  in   1962. 

Mr.  President,  the  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail,  after  having  given  the 
matter  considerable  study  and  thought  during  the  past  year,  has  developed  a  definition 
for  continuous  welded  rail  which  it  now  submits  for  adoption  and  publication  in  the 
Glossary  of  the  Manual.  The  definition  is  as  follows: 

"Continuous  welded  rail — A  number  of  rails  welded  together  in  lengths  of  400  ft 
or  longer." 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  the  definition  as  read  be  adopted  and  included  in  the 
Glossary  of  the  Manual. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded.] 

President  Code:  Is  there  anyone  who  thinks  that  a  rail  380  ft  long  is  a  continuous 
welded  rail  and  therefore  should  not  be  excluded? 

S.  H.  Poure  [C&0|:  I  have  no  particular  quarrel  with  the  proposed  definition,  but 
it  might  be  interesting  to  ask  if  the  committee  has  considered  denning  rails  less  than 
400  ft  long,  and  giving  them  a  name. 

Mr.  Reid:  No,  sir.  This  came  up  rather  suddenly  at  a  meeting.  We  found  all  of  a 
sudden  that  we  had  no  definition  of  continuous  welded  rail,  and  thought  we  had  better 
do  something  about  it. 

After  that  I  discussed  with  Mr.  Magee  what  the  Research  Department  considered 
as  continuou>  welded  rail.  He  gave  me  his  opinion,  on  which  our  definition  i^  based, 
We  did  have  one  little  problem  that  we  looked  into,  and  that  was  the  reporting  of 
welded  rail  to  the  ICC,  which,  we  found  requires  (hat  any  two  rails  welded  together 
must  be  reported  as  welded  rail,  hut  it  makes  no  reference  to  continuous  welded  rail. 

Our  definition  is  based  on  the  fact  that  most  of  the  continuous  welded  rail  laid 
today  is  restrained  for  five  rail  lengths  at  each  end.  Mr.  Magee  stated  that  their  research 
work  has  shown  that  this  is  sufficient  fully  to  restrain  the  entire  length  oi  the  welded 
rail.  In  other  words,  if  live  rail  lengths  on  each  end  of  a  string,  making  a  total  of  ten, 
are  fully  restrained,  then  any  rail  lengths  longer  than  the  ten  raUs  would  be  full) 
restrained  as  long  as  it  had  the  same  anchorage. 


696 Continuous   Welded    Rail 

The  definition,  therefore,  is  based  on  the  ten  rail  lengths,  rounding  off  at  a  figure 
of  400  ft,  as  indicated  in  the  definition,  rather  than  just  saying  "ten  rails."  Ten  rails 
could  be  ten  38-ft  or  ten  39-ft  rails. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Mr.  Reid,  we  know  rails  are  rolled  in  approximately  39-ft  lengths. 
They  may  be  an  inch  shorter  or  longer.  Why  wouldn't  it  be  better  to  use  390  ft  rather 
than  400  ft   for  ten  rails?  Or  couldn't  you  say  "anything  longer  than  ten  39-ft  rails." 

President  Code:  If  you  put  ten  39-ft  rails  together,  Frank,  they  wouldn't  be 
390  ft  long. 

Mr.  Woolford:  They  wouldn't  be  400  ft  long,  either. 

President  Code:  Then,  if  I  understand  the  proposal  correctly,  if  this  goes  into 
effect  and  you  lay,  say,  300  ft  of  welded  rail  through  a  station  platform  or  through 
a  series  of  crossings,  it  would  not  be  reported  as  continuous  welded  rail  to  the  AREA? 

Mr.  Reid:   That's  right. 

[The  motion  was  put  to  a  vote  and  was  carried.] 

Mr.  Reid:  Subcommittee  2  was  very  fortunate  this  year  in  having  R.  A.  Stane, 
construction  engineer,  Coast  Lines,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  prepare  a 
report  on  laying  track  using  continuous  welded  rail  in  1440-ft  strings.  This  report  is 
printed  in  the  Bulletin  on  pages  465  through  479. 

Mr.  Stane  is  with  us  today,  and  will  show  the  moving  pictures  taken  during  the 
laying  of  the  continuous  welded  rail.  Mr.  Stane. 

R.  A.  Stane:  The  film  we  are  about  to  show  depicts  the  procedure  of  track  laying 
described  in  Bulletin  577,  beginning  on  page  465. 

[The  film  was  then  shown,  with  commentary  by  Mr.  Stane,  after  which  Mr.  Stane 
was  questioned,  as  follows:] 

C.  S.  Morton  [Burlington]:  Were  the  tie  plates  applied  at  the  tie  treating  plant? 
If  so,  were  they  applied  before  the  ties  were  treated,  or  did  they  wait  until  afterwards? 

Mr.  Stane:  Sir,  these  were  second-hand  ties  salvaged  from  the  Williams  line  change. 

Mr.  Morton:   Haven't  you  people  been  plating  ties  at  the  treating  plant? 

Mr.  Stane:  Yes,  we  have.  Our  new  ties  are  plated,  and  we  use  the  Racor  stud  to 
hold  the  plate  down.  It  works  out  very  satisfactorily. 

E.  R.  Englert  [Louisville  &  Nashville] :  Just  as  a  resume,  how  long  was  this  job, 
and  how  much  did  you  shorten  the  trackage.  How  many  maintenance  dollars  are  you 
saving? 

Mr.  Stane:  The  new  main  line  is  38  miles  in  length.  The  track  was  shortened  14 
miles.  The  summit  was  lowered  approximately  1100  ft.  As  I  said,  we  reduced  our 
curvature  from  a  maximum  of  12  deg  to  2  deg,  our  grades  from  3  percent  to  1  percent. 
I  am  sorry  I  don't  have  the  answer  to  your  other  question. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Mr.  Stane,  do  you  have  any  trouble  in  the  line  of  your  track,  in 
laying  welded  rail  around  curves  on  the  pre-plated  ties? 

Mr.  Stane:  No;  surprisingly,  we  do  not.  We  anticipated  this  problem  because  of 
possible  wide  gage  around  the  curves,  but  for  some  reason  we  haven't  found  too  much 
wide  gage.  In  the  maintenance  of  the  track  through  the  years  it  seems  to  have  all  been 
brought  to  standard  gage,  that  is,  without  any  widening  for  curves,  and  as  a  conse- 
quence the  rail  laid  in  good  line. 

President  Code:  Any  other  questions?  Thank  you,  Mr.  Stane,  for  a  very  inter- 
esting presentation. 

Chairman  Jones:  Thank  you,  Mr.  President.  I  would  like  to  add  the  appreciation 
of  the  committee  to  Mr.  Stane  for  his  very  excellent  report.  The  degree  of  attention 
and  the  nature  of  the  questions  submitted  by  the  audience  attests  to  the  interest  and 


Discussion  697 


appreciation   with   which   this  presentation   was   received.   We  are   most   happy   to   have 
had  the  opportunity  to  have  included  this  in  our  part  of  the  program. 

Assignment  3 — Fastenings. 

Chairman  Junes:  Assignment  3— Fastenings,  is  under  the  direction  of  C.  W.  Wag- 
ner, engineer  of  tests — system,  Canadian  National  Railways.  As  Mr.  Wagner  was  unable 
to  join  us  today,  I  shall  make  his  report. 

Having  given  consideration  to  comments  and  criticisms  regarding  the  AREA  rec- 
ommendation for  the  number  and  position  of  rail  anchors  on  continuous  welded  rail, 
adopted  at  the  1961  convention,  your  committee  submits  the  following  revision  with 
the  recommendation  that  it  be  adopted  and  published  in  the  Manual,  replacing  the 
present  document  on  page  5-5-4.2. 

Rail  Creepage — Number  and  Position  of  Rail  Anchors   (Continuous  Welded  Rail): 

"Effective  anchorage  for  continuous  welded  rail  must  provide  restraint  for  tem- 
perature stresses  and  creepage  stresses  due  to  train  movement.  For  main  tracks  carrying 
one-  or  two-direction  traffic,  it  is  considered  that  the  anchorage  of  each  rail  at  alternate 
ties  to  restrain  its  movement  in  either  direction  throughout  the  length  of  the  continuous 
rail  will  provide  effective  anchorage.  Other  methods  of  providing  anchorage  have  also 
given  satisfactory  results. 

"Through  buffer  rails,  turnouts,  or  other  special  trackwork  adjoining  continuous 
welded  rail,  the  rails  should  be  anchored  at  alternate  ties  against  movement  in  either 
direction. 

"Sufficient  anchorage  should  be  provided  on  the  conventional  rail  adjoining  con- 
tinuous welded  rail  to  prevent  creepage  of  the  conventional  rail." 

Mr.  President,  I  move  that  the  proposed  revision  be  adopted  and  published  in  the 
Manual,  replacing  the  present  document   on  page  5-5-4.2. 

[The  motion  was  duly  seconded.] 

Mr.  Woolford:  Mr.  Jones,  we  have  heard  Mr.  Reid's  statement  that  five  rails  on 
each  end  of  a  stretch  of  continuous  welded  rail  have  to  be  restrained,  and  I  think 
Mr.  Magee's  studies  will  show  that  to  accomplish  this,  every  tie  needs  to  be  boxed 
for  the  five  rails  on  each  end.  How  can  the  committee  come  up  with  a  recommendation 
to  box  only  every  other  tie,  when  the  laboratory  has  shown  we  need  to  box  every  tie 
on  the  five  rail  lengths  at  each  end? 

Chairman  Jones:  Mr.  President,  I  think  the  explanation  of  that  is  found  in  the 
wording  of  the  proposed  revision,  in  that  in  box-anchoring  alternate  ties  you  are  secur- 
ing the  rail  against  movement  as  the  rail  elongates.  We  all  are  aware  of  the  need  for 
applying  back-up  anchors  on  the  end  rails  of  the  string.  Ordinarily  that  isn't  going  to 
present  much  of  a  problem. 

Your  committee  recognizes  the  fact  that  many  railroads  are  using  a  lesser  or 
greater  number  of  rail  anchors,  and  possibly  positioning  them  differently  from  herein 
recommended.  This  proposed  revision  acknowledges  that  "other  methods  of  providing 
anchorage  have  also  given  satisfactory   results". 

Your  committee  feels  that  each  railroad  might  best  determine  for  itself  through 
experience  the  correct  number  and  proper  placement  of  anchors  necessary  to  secure 
the  rail  against  movement.  Controlling  factors  which  cause  the  rail  to  move  or  affect 
its  movement  vary  from  road  to  road.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  these  conditions  usually 
vary  within  an  individual  property,  and  obviously  they  differ  between  roads. 

What  your  committee  proposes  as  recommended  practice  is  considered  adequate 
anchorage  for  practically  all  cases. 


698 Continuous   Welded    Rail 

Mr.  WooiioRD:  Mr.  Jones,  isn't  it  a  fact  that  we  have  had  a  number  of  pull- 
aparts,  and  the  pull-aparts  have  been  more  frequent  when  the  track  is  anchored  other 
than  having  the  five  rails  on  each  end  box  anchored  at  every  tie? 

Chairman  Jones:  That  is  correct. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Why  would  you  recommend  reducing  the  anchorage  when  it  has 
been  shown  that  we  need  the  extra  anchorage  to  eliminate  pull-aparts? 

Chairman  Jones:  We  propose  here  a  practice  which  would  serve  as  a  basis  to  be 
followed  or  modified  according  to  the  local  conditions  controlling. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Does  your  recommendation  apply  to  any  length  of  rail? — when 
long  strings  of  welded  rail  are  welded  together  in  the  field? 

Chairman  Jones:  Yes,  sir.  I  think  that  was  explained  when  Mr.  Reid  gave  the 
reason  for  our  definition  of  continuous  welded  rail  that  the  unequalized  stresses  occur 
in  the  last  five  rails  of  each  long  string  of  rail,  regardless  of  the  length  of  that  rail 
after  it  is  longer  than  400  ft. 

Mr.  Woolford:  Are  you  going  to  recommend  installing  anything  at  the  ends  of 
these  long  rails,  such  as  expansion  frog  assemblies  or  buffer  rails. 

D.  T.  Faries  [B&LE]:  May  I  speak  on  this?  I  might  say  I  was  chairman  of  the 
subcommittee  when  the  new  recommendation  for  anchoring  welded  rail  was  made.  We 
studied  various  methods  of  anchorage,  and  it  was  apparent  that  there  was  no  need  to 
box-anchor  or  put  additional  anchors  at  the  end  of  the  rail  in  the  case  of  hot  weather 
when  the  rail  was  expanding,  because  the  rails  were  expanding  against  each  other.  Con- 
sequently, we  removed  one-half  of  the  box  anchors  at  the  five-rail  string  at  the  end, 
which  was  originally  recommended  to  be  fully  box  anchored. 

Further  with  respect  to  the  ends  of  the  strings,  in  cold  weather,  when  the  rail  is 
contracting,  the  ties  become  frozen  in  the  ballast  and  since  the  anchorage  is  dependent 
entirely  upon  the  resistance  of  the  tie  and  ballast,  greater  resistance  occurs.  With  the 
greater  resistance  we  considered  that,  in  the  wintertime  when  the  rails  were  contracting, 
the  additional  anchorage  was  not  needed  at  the  ends. 

On  our  road  we  have  anchored  rail  in  this  manner.  I  have  had  four  years'  experi- 
ence with  it  now,  and  have  had  no  serious  problems.  We  have  had  breaks  in  our 
welded  rail,  some  of  them  occurring  at  joints  and  some  of  them  occurring  in  the  weld 
itself.  In  all  cases  the  pull-apart  did  not  exceed   \}/z  in. 

When  you  consider  strings  of  welded  rail  that  may  be  in  1440-ft  lengths  and  taking 
up  anywhere  from  1  to  10  miles  of  track,  the  whole  piece  of  track  becomes  one  con- 
tinuous string,  assuming  that  the  joints  are  tight  and  will  be  kept  tight.  We  do  have 
movement  of  the  joints,  and  I  don't  see  how  we  can  get  away  from  it;  but  we  have 
found  that  the  recommended  method  of  anchorage  is  quite  adequate. 

I  might  also  say  that  we  feel  we  have  hit  upon  a  pretty  good  mean  in  the  anchor- 
age, because  in  all  of  the  discussion  we  have  had,  about  half  have  said  it  is  too  much 
and  about  half  have  said  it  is  too  little.  So,  I  think  it  is  about  right. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Faries.  Are  there  any  other  questions?  I  believe 
we  have  a  motion  before  us. 

B.  R.  Meyers  [C&NW] :  Is  there  any  consideration  of  adding  to  the  recommenda- 
tion some  statement  such  as  "Additional  back-up  anchors  may  be  required,  depending 
on  local  conditions",  or  something  like  that? 

Chairman  Jones:  Mr.  Meyers,  the  proposed  revision  of  the  recommended  practice 
is  complete  as  it  is  presented.  Your  committee  has  carefully  reviewed  these  other  aspects 
brought  out  in  the  discussion,  but  it  is  not  the  intention  of  the  committee  to  change 
the  recommendation  as  herein  presented. 


Discussion 699 

Mr.  Meyers:  Sometimes — and  I  presume  your  committee  gave  full  consideration 
to  this — you  put  a  recommendation  like  that  in  the  Manual,  and  sometimes  manage- 
ment reads  those  things  and,  pointing  to  a  particular  location,  they  say,  "Why  do  you 
need  these  extra  anchors  at  the  end?"  when  maybe  local  conditions  will  require  them. 
That  is  my  point. 

Chairman  Jones:  I  have  no  further  thought  other  than  to  repeat  what  I  said 
earlier — that  you  can  find  opinions  ranging  from  one  end  of  the  scale  to  the  other. 
Even  in  the  committee  it  is  apparent,  from  the  expressions  of  the  members,  that  despite 
the  known  fact  that  certain  stretches  of  rail  have  under  test  been  relieved  of  over 
half  of  the  anchors  and  still  have  not  caused  any  trouble,  exponents  of  the  other  theory 
— that  of  trying  to  hold  the  rail  by  the  sheer  weight  of  the  anchors  alone — will  still 
require  more  anchors  than  experience  might  show  to  be  adequate. 

I  would  say  that  we  have  had  experience  with  continuous  welded  rail  long  enough 
for  it  to  have  lost  some  of  its  mystery.  We  don't  adhere  to  the  belief  that  you  can  lay 
continuous  welded  rail  and  ignore  it  after  it  is  laid.  We  do  believe,  though,  that  the 
proposed  recommendation  will  take  care  of  practically  all  the  conditions  to  be  encoun- 
tered. We  would  suggest  that  the  maintenance  engineer  who  is  laying  welded  rail  on 
his  property  for  the  first  time  give  careful  attention  to  the  behavior  of  that  welded  rail, 
to  satisfy  himself  as  to  just  exactly  what  is  needed  on  his  property. 

President  Code:  I  think  we  have  kicked  this  subject  around  pretty  thoroughly. 
Maybe  we  had  better  take  a  vote.  Are  you  ready  for  the  question? 

[The  motion   was  put  to  a  vote  and  was  carried.] 

Assignment  4 — Maintenance. 

Chairman  Jones:  C.  R.  Merriman,  engineer  maintenance  of  way  and  srtuctures, 
Chicago  South  Shore  &  South  Bend  Railroad,  is  chairman  of  Subcommittee  4,  whose 
assignment  is  Maintenance.  Mr.  Merriman  was  here  earlier  but  was  called  away  from 
Chicago.  However,  we  shall  give  recognition  to  Mr.  Merriman  by  thanking  him  for  the 
work   of   his   committee. 

The  report  submitted  as  information  by  Subcommittee  4  was  developed  from 
returns  of  questionnaires  on  the  practices  used  in  timbering  and  surfacing  in  con- 
junction with  the  laying  of  continuous  welded  rail. 

Information  gathered  for  the  report,  although  varying  from  read  to  road,  shows 
a  trend  toward  a  general  practice  that  is  being  followed  by  most  roads  in  timbering 
and  surfacing  welded  rail.  This  practice  is  to  do  most  of  the  work  ahead  of  the  rail 
laying,  including  timbering,  surfacing,  lining,  Oiling  cribs  and  widening  the  ballast 
section,  with   only   touch-up  work   performed  after   laying. 

Assignment   5 — Economics. 

Chairman-  Junks:  T.  C.  Shedd,  editor,  Modern  Railroads,  is  chairman  of  Subcom- 
mittee 5.  Mr.  Shedd,  please  stand  to  be  recognized.  Mr.  Shedd's  report  will  be  found 
in   Bulletin  577,  page  481. 

That  the  railroads  are  benefiting  from  welded  rail  is  shown  by  its  rapidly  growing 
use.  However,  the  exact  extent  of  the  benefits  is  not  always  clear.  With  this  in  mind. 
Subcommittee  5  was  instructed  to  gather  as  much  detailed  information  as  possible  on 
the  maintenance  cost  of  continuous  welded  rail. 

To  accomplish  this,  the  subcommittee  prepared  a  questionnaire  with  items  as  listed 
in  the  report.  The  questionnaire  was  senl  to  80  railroads  known  or  believed  likelj  in 
have  continuous  welded  rail  in  service.  Replies  were  received  from  48.  Only  a  handful 
of  the  railroads  which  answered  had  kept  detailed  records  of  comparative  stretches   "' 

null.  570 


700 Continuous   Welded   Rail 

welded  and  jointed  track.  However,  7  railroads  which  did  report  in  some  detail  are 
maintaining  welded  track  with  anywhere  from  3  to  59  percent  fewer  man-hours  than 
required  for  similar  jointed  track.  Commonly,  the  savings  seem  to  run  about  20  to  30 
percent.  It  is  also  apparent  that  railroads  having  welded  rail  are  using  less  track  material 
(except  anchors)  in  maintaining  welded  rail  than  is  required  in  comparable  jointed  track. 

Questionnaire  comments  confirm  that  welded  track  requires  less  spot  surfacing, 
lining  and  tie  renewals.  Bolt  tightening,  joint  bar  and  bond  replacements  are  greatly 
reduced.  The  problems  stemming  from  rail  end  batter  are  minimized.  More  attention 
to  anchors  is  required,  however. 

A  number  of  railroads  commented  on  the  expected  life  of  welded  rail  in  track  and 
the  anticipated  time  cycle  for  out-of-face  surfacing.  One  railroad  predicts  a  40  to  SO 
percent  increase  in  the  surfacing  time  cycle ;  it  expects  rail  life  in  the  first  position  laid 
to  be  increased  by  50  percent  on  the  average,  with  a  100  percent  increase  on  tangent 
track. 

It  should  be  noted  that,  in  most  cases,  these  predictions  of  rail  life  and  surfacing 
cycle  can  be  only  informed  estimates  at  this  time,  due  to  the  relatively  short  time 
welded  rail  has  been  in  service. 

However,  the  Delaware  &  Hudson,  which  has  had  welded  rail  in  track  since  the 
1930s,  states:  "We  have  found  that  in  the  welded  rail  installations  which  we  have, 
the  life  of  the  rail  is  at  least  twice  that  of  rail  in  jointed  track  .  .  .  Out-of-face  sur- 
facing is  not  required  as  frequently  ...  It  is  our  opinion  that  continuous  welded  rail 
will   go  twice  as  long  between  out-of-face  surfacings  as  jointed  track." 

The  subcommittee  plans  to  conduct  a  similar  survey  on  rail  welding  costs,  com- 
pared with  the  cost  of  conventional  joint  assemblies,  during  1963. 

Assignment    6 — Welding    Second-hand   Rail. 

Chairman  Jones:  J.  F.  Beaver,  chief  engineer,  Southern  Railway  System,  is  chair- 
man of  Subcommittee  6 — Welding  Second-Hand  Rail.  Unfortunately  Mr.  Beaver  could 
not  be  here.  His  report,  appearing  on  page  483  of  the  Bulletin,  is  recommended  reading 
for  everyone  interested  in  the  ways  that  additional  economies  might  be  accrued  through 
welding  second-hand  rail. 

Our  final  report  is  a  monograph  entitled,  "Continuous  Welded  Rail  in  Europe." 
This  report  was  prepared  by  R.  E.  Dove,  associate  editor,  Railway  Track  and  Struc- 
tures. Mr.  Dove  will  now  comment  briefly  on  his  report. 

R.  E.  Dove:  Several  articles  appeared  in  Railway  Track  &  Structures  magazine 
relating  railroad  practices  in  Europe.  These  articles  were  written  by  M.  H.  Dick,  vice 
president  and  editor  of  the  magazine,  after  he  attended  an  international  railway- 
equipment  exhibition  in  Frankfort  au  Main,  Germany,  in  March  1962.  Following  this, 
he  spent  several  weeks  in  Germany,  France  and  England,  observing  track  practices  in 
those  countries. 

Noting  that  the  magazine  articles  contained  a  large  amount  of  interesting  infor- 
mation on  welded-rail  practices,  your  committee  felt  that  the  information  specifically 
relating  to  welded  rail  should  be  culled  out  of  the  articles  and  presented  as  information 
by  the  CWR  committee.  Since  I  am  a  member  of  this  committee,  I  was  asked  to  pre- 
pare this  monograph,  in  collaboration  with  Mr.  Dick,  so  as  to  keep  the  assignment 
within  the  membership  of  the  committee. 

This  monograph  is  shown  in  Bulletin  577  starting  on  page  483.  I  recommend  the 
reading  of  it  to  anyone  interested  in  welded  rail,  not  because  I  am  the  author,  but 
because  it  contains  more  welded-rail  information  than  was  published  in  the  magazine 
articles. 


Closing   Business   Session 701 

Chairman  Jones:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Dove,  for  a  most  comprehensive  story  on  Con- 
tinuous Welded  Rail  in  Europe. 

At  this  time  I  should  like  to  digress  from  the  presentation  by  our  committee.  As 
every  committee  has  occasion  to  do,  they  look  over  the  list  of  men  on  their  committee 
who  have  done  outstanding  work.  The  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail 
has  been  aware  for  some  time  that  one  of  its  members  has  been  completely  dedicated 
to  his  responsibilities  as  a  member  of  the  Committee,  and  his  dedication  has  served 
as  an  emulation  to  the  rest  of  us  on  the  committee. 

We  investigated  the  requirements  of  nominating  this  man  as  a  Member  Emeritus 
of  our  committee.  Unfortunately,  the  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail  was 
created  only  a  relatively  short  number  of  years  ago,  and  the  gentleman  who  was  under 
subject  review  retired  from  active  service  before  he  could  comply  with  the  required 
minimum  number  of  years  as  an  acting  member  on  that  committee. 

So,  as  chairman  of  the  Special  Committee  on  Continuous  Welded  Rail,  I  am  taking 
this  opportunity  to  announce  that  we  on  the  committee  feel  that  T.  A.  Blair,  retired 
chief  engineer — system,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,  has  in  our  mind  met  all 
of  the  other  prerequisites  for  such  an  honor  on  our  committee.  In  the  event  that  this 
appears  to  be  a  little  irregular,  you  can  blame  it  on  the  affection  which  we  all  have 
for  Mr.  Blair. 

Mr.  President,  at  this  time  I  would  like  to  report  a  change  in  committee  organ- 
ization. Last  December  D.  T.  Fanes  resigned  from  our  committee.  His  vacancy  as  vice 
chairman  has  been  filled  by  M.  S.  Reid,  assistant  chief  engineer — maintenance,  Chicago 
&  North  Western   Railroad. 

Mr.   President,  this  concludes  our  presentation. 

President  Code:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Jones.  You  have  put  renewed  life  into  your 
committee  during  the  past  year,  which  is  clearly  evident  in  your  committee's  report, 
and  in  the  three  interesting,  timely  and  informative  monographs  forming  a  part  of 
that  report. 

I  commend  this  idea  of  monographs — which  has  been  neglected  to  a  large  extent 
in  recent  years — to  others  of  our  committees,  where  circumstances  best  lend  themselves 
to  such   presentations — and  I  am  sure  there  are  often  such  circumstances. 

Mr.  Jones,  your  committee  has  closed  our  technical  sessions  on  a  high  note,  and 
we  now  excuse  you  with   the  thanks  of  the  Association.    [Applause] 

Closing  Business  Session 

President  Code:  Gentlemen,  there  yet  remains  our  closing  business  session,  the 
highlight  of  which  will  be  the  installation  of  your  newly  elected  officers  as  announced 
at  our  luncheon  yesterday.  This  will  not  be  a  long  session,  and  I  hope  that  many  of 
you  will  remain. 

Before  convening  the  business  session,  however,  I  want  to  take  this  opportunity 
to  thank  you  for  the  high  honor  you  conferred  upon  me  in  my  election  as  your  presi- 
dent. Truly,  this  has  been  a  rich  and  rewarding  experience  for  me,  and  to  the  extent 
that  I  may  have  served  the  Association  acceptably,   I  am  proud  and  pleased. 

And  I  want  to  take  this  opportunity,  too,  to  thank  our  membership  generally  for 
its  support  during  the  past  year,  and  especially  the  members  of  our  Board  of  Direction 
and  all  committee  chairmen  for  their  support  and  cooperation.  Statistically,  tin's  may 
not  have  been  the  biggest  year  in  the  history  of  our  Association,  but  I  am  satisfied 
that  it  has  been  another  productive  one.  Certainly  this  is  not  the  largest  annual 
convention  we  have  ever  had,  and  it  may  be  the  smallest  in  attendance;  hut  here,  too, 
I  am  satisfied  that   to  hold   it  as  we  have   was   the   thing  to   do.   and   that   with   more 


702 Closing   Business   Session 

time  !<>r  reports  and  discussion  it  fully  accomplished  its  purposes  of  keeping  our  com- 
mittee work  and  publications  on  schedule,  of  further  updating  our  Manual  of  Recom- 
mended Practice,  and  in  enabling  me  to  turn  over,  on  schedule,  my  duties  as  your 
president  to  your  newly  elected  president.  These  are  all  most  important. 

Having  already  accomplished  the  first  two  of  these  things  on  schedule,  I  now  call 
to  order  the  closing  business  session  of  this  convention  in  order  to  consummate  the  last 
mentioned. 

Is  there  any  other  business  to  come  before  this  meeting? 

R.  H.  Beeder   [Santa  Fe] :  President  Code,  ladies  and  gentlemen: 

President  Code,  when  you  and  I  were  side-stepping  around  on  this  platform  last 
year  I  know  that  I  had  no  idea  that  you  would  have  such  an  eventful  year  and  one 
that  was  filled  with  so  many  extracurricular  activities  and  duties.  I  suspect  that  perhaps 
you  did  not  realize  the  extent  of  those  extra  duties  but  you  performed  them  in  a 
perfectly   splendid   fashion. 

One  of  them  included  the  planning  and  direction  of  AREA  participation  in  the 
Annual  Meeting  and  Transportation  Engineering  Conference  with  the  American  Society 
of  Civil  Engineers  last  October  in  Detroit.  This  happens  once  in  a  lifetime. 

Another  extra  duty  was  the  planning  and  organizing  of  many  of  the  details  in 
connection  with  AREA  participation  in  the  all-out  show  of  railroad  strength  which 
will  be  called  the  "American  Railway  Progress  Exposition",  to  take  place  between 
October  9  and  October  16,  this  year,  in  Chicago  at  McCormick  Place. 

And  last,  and  more  importantly,  your  fine  leadership  in  compressing  into  the  past 
\l/2  days  the  business  of  this  Association  during  this  meeting.  This  job  has  been  a  trial 
for  many  of  us  to  accomplish  in  2l/2  days. 

I  do  not  want  to  give  you  any  momentum  in  your  move  to  join  the  Past  Presi- 
dents' Club  but  I  do  want  to  give  you  a  memento  on  behalf  of  the  membership  of  our 
Association. 

This  memento,  in  recognition  of  your  accomplishments  as  president  of  this  Asso- 
ciation, is  a  plaque  which  reads  as  follows: 

THE    AMERICAN    RAILWAY    ENGINEERING    ASSOCIATION 

RECORDS    ITS    GRATEFUL    APPRECIATION   TO 

CHARLES  JOSEPH  CODE 

FOR    HIS    ABLE    ADMINISTRATION    OF    THE    AFFAIRS 

OF   THE   ASSOCIATION  DURING  HIS  TERM 

AS    PRESIDENT 

1962-1963 

Mr.  President,  I  now  hand  you  this  plaque. 

President  Code:  Mr.  Beeder,  it  was  a  privilege  and  an  honor  to  follow  in  your 
footsteps  as  president  of  this  Association.  It  is  a  further  fulfillment  of  that  honor  to 
accept  from  you  this  beautifully  engraved  plaque,  which  I  assure  you  will  occupy  a 
place  of  honor  among  my  choicest  possessions.  Thank  you,  and  thanks  to  the  Association 
for  this  additional  memento  of  my  term  of  office. 

Now  I  would  like  to  thank  again  each  member  of  the  Board  of  Direction  for  his 
counsel,  advice  and  support  during  my  term  as  President — and  especially  those  members 
who   are  retiring  from  the   Board,  having  completed  their  terms  of  office. 

These  include  Past  President  Brown,  chief  engineer,  Burlington  Lines,  who  leaves 
the  Board  under  the  provision  of  the  Constitution  that  past  presidents  remain  on  the 
Board  for  only  two  years  following  the  completion  of  their  term  of  office  as  president. 

The  others  leaving  the  Board,  having  completed  their  three-year  terms  as  directors, 
are:    C.  J.  Henry,   chief  engineer,  Pennsylvania  Railroad;   J.  M.  Trissal,  vice  president 


Closing   Business   Session 703 


and  chief  engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad;  W.  B.  Throckmorton,  chief  engineer, 
Chicago,  Rock  Island  &  Pacific  Railroad;  and  J.  A.  Bunjer,  chief  engineer,  Union  Pacific 
Railroad.  All  of  these  men  have  served  your  Association  well  in  their  official  capacities 
on  the  Board,  and  their  sound  judgment  and  counsel  will  be  missed  at  future  meetings. 

To  the  extent  that  Past  President  Brown  and  these  four  retiring  directors  are 
present  in  the  room,  I  shall  be  pleased  if  they  will  stand  and  permit  us  to  show  them 
our  appreciation.    [Applause] 

It  is  now  my  pleasure  and  privilege  to  install  the  new  directors  and  officers  whom 
you  have  elected  for  the  ensuing  year,  as  announced  at  our  luncheon  yesterday.  As  I 
call  the  names  of  our  new  directors,  I  shall  appreciate  their  coming  to  the  speaker's 
table  and  taking  places  on  my  right. 

A.  L.  Sams,  assistant  chief  engineer,  Illinois  Central  Railroad,  Chicago.   [Applause] 

J.  F.  Beaver,  chief  engineer,  Southern  Railway  System,  Washington,  D.  C. 
[Applause] 

V.  C.  Hanna,  chief  engineer,  Terminal  Railroad  Association  of  St.  Louis,  St.  Louis, 
Mo.    [Applause] 

H.  M.  Williamson,  chief  engineer  system,  Southern  Pacific  Company,  San  Francisco, 
Calif.  [Applause] 

[Messrs.  Beaver  and  Hanna  were  not  present] 

Gentlemen,  I  congratulate  you  upon  your  election  as  directors  of  this  Association, 
and  welcome  you  to  the  Board  of  Direction.  It  is  an  office  of  high  honor  which  you 
assume,  and  at  the  same  time  one  of  large  responsibility ;  but  I  know  you  merit  the 
honor,  and  that  you   will  live  up  to  your  responsibility. 

Furthermore,  I  know  that  you  will  enjoy  your  service  on  the  Board  for  the  next 
three  years,  and  that  you  will  bring  much  of  value  to  its  deliberations.  Again,  my 
congratulations.  You  may  be  seated. 

Our  new  senior  vice  president  is  T.  F.  Burris,  general  manager  construction  and 
maintenance  of  way,  Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway  and  Baltimore  &  Ohio  Railroad,  at 
Huntington,  W.  Va.,  who,  under  the  Constitution,  has  automatically  advanced  to  this 
position    from    that   of   junior   vice   president.   Mr.   Burris   unfortunately   is   not   present. 

For  your  new  junior  vice  president  you  have  elected  A.  V.  Johnston,  chief  engineer, 
Canadian  National  Railways,  who  returns  to  the  Board  of  Direction  following  a  three- 
year  term  which  ended  with  our  1960  convention.  Mr.  Johnston,  I  shall  be  pleased 
if  you  will  come  to  the  platform  and  stand  here  beside  me. 

Mr.  Johnston,  I  congratulate  you  upon  your  election  as  junior  vice  president  and 
welcome  you  back  on  the  Board,  not  only  in  your  own  right  but  because,  through  you, 
we  give  recognition  to  our  many  valued  members  on  the  railroads  in  Canada.  You  may 
be  seated.   [Applause] 

For  your  president  you  have  elected  L.  A.  Loggins,  chief  engineer.  Southern  Pacific 
Company,  Texas  &  Louisiana  Lines,  at  Houston,  Tex.  To  accord  Mr.  Loggins  the  special 
recognition  due  him,  I  have  asked  Past  Presidents  Ray  McBrian  and  B.  R.  Meyers  to 
escort  him  to  the  platform,  and  I  should  appreciate  their  doing  so  at  this  time. 
[Applause] 

Mr.  Loggins,  my  congratulations  to  you  upon  your  further  advancement  to  the 
highest  position  in  this  Association.  It  is  an  honor  which  you  well  deserve,  and  it  is 
with  the  greatest  of  pleasure  that  I  now  proclaim  you  president  of  the  American  Rail 
way  Engineering  Association.  Even  though  not  provided  lor  in  our  Constitution,  your 
election  makes  Mrs.  Loggins  the  "first  lady"  in  our  Association,  and  we  welcome  her 
as  such.   [Applause] 


704 Closing    Business    Session 

Unfortunately,  I  haven't  anything  to  give  to  Mrs.  Loggins,  but  I  do  have  here  and 
want  to  give  to  you  this  solid  gold  emblem  of  the  Association,  which  bears  the  engraved 
words  on  the  back,  "L.  A.  Loggins,  President,  1963—1964".  I  know  you  will  wear  this 
emblem   with   credit   to   the  Association  and  distinction  to  yourself.    [Applause] 

[Mr.  Loggins  assumed  the  presidency.] 

President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Cede.  I  am  proud  of  this  emblem,  and  I  hope 
to  wear  it  with  credit  and  honor  to  this  Association. 

Mr.  Code,  you  have  given  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association  an  excel- 
lent administration,  one  of  which  you  should  be  justly  proud.  We  hope  to  continue  its 
activities  with   that   same  thoroughness  and  efficiency. 

I  feel  deeply  the  honor  bestowed  upon  me  here  today.  I  am  fully  aware  of  the 
responsibility  that  comes  with  being  elected  President  of  this  Association  during  the  year 
of  the  American  Railway  Progress  Exposition,  a  year  when  the  accent  is  on  progress, 
as  it  should  be.  But  I  have  no  misgivings.  I  am  blessed  with  outstanding  vice  presidents, 
Mr.  Burris  and  Mr.  Johnston,  a  superb  executive  secretary  in  Neal  Howard  with  his 
efficient  staff,  a  fine  Board  of  Direction,  strong  committee  chairmen,  vice  chairmen  and 
subcommittee  chairmen,  and,  I  feel,  the  full  support  of  our  membership. 

I  know  that  I  can  count  on  the  continued  support  and  cooperation  of  Gerald 
Magee  and  his  research  group,  and  the  wise  counsel  and  advice  of  you  past  presidents 
will  be  invaluable. 

I  would  be  amiss  to  not  recognize  another  important  source  of  support  and  strong 
influence  represented  here  today  by  a  group  of  ladies,  including  my  wife,  Pauline.  I  refer 
to  the  wives  of  AREA.  With  all  of  this  support  and  cooperation,  let  me  say  that  I 
believe  we  can  start  the  American  Railway  Progress  Exposition  year  with  optimism 
and  enthusiasm. 

You  may  not  know  it,  but  the  very  first  meeting  on  the  first  day  of  the  Exposi- 
tion— the  kick-off,  so  to  speak — will  feature  a  joint  session  of  AREA,  as  the  Engineering 
Division  of  AAR,  with  the  Communication  and  Signal  Section.  Immediately  following 
that  joint  opening  session,  AREA  will  present  a  full  day  of  special  features  and 
addresses.  That  gives  AREA  an  opportunity  to  present  its  programs  to  the  entire  rail- 
road industry.  I  urge  the  fullest  possible  membership  attendance  and  participation  in 
those  activities. 

In  March  1964  we  will  return  to  our  regular  2^-day  annual  meeting  pattern. 
Again    I    want    to    urge    the    fullest    possible    membership    attendance    and    participation. 

I  know  that  our  committees  will  continue  their  fine  work  and  prepare  their  usual 
or  even  better  reports  for  that  occasion ;  in  fact,  I  am  calling  upon  them  for  that  extra 
effort,  because  those  reports  will  reflect  the  ideas  and  work  of  those  who  have  accepted 
the  privileges  and  the  obligations  of  committee  membership.  They  are  workers.  They  are 
the  backbone  of  our  Association. 

In  scheduling  the  American  Railway  Progress  Exposition  for  October  1963,  and  our 
return  to  our  regular  2^-day  annual  meeting  pattern  in  March  1964,  we  are  presented 
with  an  excellent  opportunity  to  encourage  interest  and  to  acquaint  young  railroad 
engineers  with  the  benefits  of  membership  in  this  Association.  We  must  do  just  that, 
and  we  plan  to  give  this  special  attention  and  preferred  handling  in  programming  our 
work   for  the  coming  year. 

Let  me  say  to  all  of  you  that  I  pledge  to  work  with  my  utmost  ability  as  your 
president,  and  with  your  continued  cooperation  and  assistance  I  look  forward  to  a 
successful  year  of  progress  and  achievement,  in  keeping  with  the  fine  traditions  of  this 
Association. 


Closing    Business   Session 70S 

Thank  you  for  the  trust  you  have  placed  in   me.    [Applause] 

At  this  time  I  would  like  to  recognize  one  man  who  flew  here  from  Houston,  Tex. 
to  attend  this  installation — a  man  under  whom  I  work  and  to  whom  I  report  directly. 
Mr.  Sines,  will  you  stand  and  be  recognized?  Mr.  Sines  is  vice  president  of  the  Southern 
Pacific  Company,  Houston.  He  is  a  civil  engineer  by  education  and  training,  and  has 
been  a  member  of  AREA  for  many  years.  It  has  been  my  privilege  and  pleasure  to 
work  under  him  for  the  last   11  years. 

I  certainly  appreciate  his  coming  here  for  this  meeting  that  has  meant  so  much 
to  me.  I  might  say  that  it  is  certainly  with  his  permission,  cooperation  and  understand- 
ing that  I  have  been  able  to  work  in  AREA  and  participate  in  its  activities,  and  to 
advance  to  the  position  I  hold  here  today.  Thank  you,  Mr.  Sines.   [Applause] 

H.  M.  Williamson  [Southern  Pacific]:  Mr.  President,  may  I  have  the  floor  for  a 
moment  ? 

President  Loggins,  Mr.  Code,  members  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering 
Association,  ladies,  guests  and  friends: 

One  of  the  top  people  on  our  railroad  told  me  once  that  any  railroad  should  be 
organized  in  such  a  way  that  it  can  do  only  one  job  at  any  one  time.  It  is  when  we 
try  to  do  two  or  more  things  at  the  same  time  that  we  get  into  trouble.  I  think  it  was 
something  like  that  in  this  case,  because  his  many  friends  on  the  Southern  Pacific, 
extending  from  Portland  to  New  Orleans,  wanted  to  present  President  Loggins  with  a 
suitable  gavel  for  his  forthcoming  year  in  office,  so  we  got  two  gavels,  not  one. 
[Laughter] 

I  think  it  is  somewhat  symbolic  that  we  have  two  gavels,  because  they  represent 
the  double  appreciation  and  affection  with  which  we  hold  you,  Lee.  If  you  will  accept 
our  overabundance  of  appreciation  we  would  like  to  show  it  to  you  in  this  way. 

I  would  like  to  say  a  word  about  these  gavels.  These  gavels  were  formed  out  of  an 
ebony  wood  found  in  the  Rio  Grande  Valley.  Mr.  Loggins  was  the  head  chainman  in 
1925,  and  hewed  his  way  through  this  territory,  staking  out  the  T&NO  Railroad  down 
there,  and  he  can  well  attest  to  the  durability  and  toughness  of  these  gavels.  I  am  sure 
he  can  use  them  to  very  good  advantage  in  the  year  to  come. 

Congratulations,  Lee.   [Applause] 

President  Loggins:  Thank  you,  Mr.  Williamson.  Instead  of  a  two-gun  Texan,  it 
looks  like  I  will  be  a  two-gavel  Texan.  Of  course,  as  you  all  know,  they  will  mean 
a  great  deal  more  to  me  because  the  people  I  have  worked  with  for  years  put  a 
lot  of  thought  and  work  into  them.  Ebony  has  always  been  one  of  my  favorite  pieces 
of  wood,  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  I  had  some  pretty  rough  experiences  with  it  on  my 
first  job.  I  certainly  appreciate  this. 

Is  there  any  further  business  to  come  before  this  meeting  before  we  bring  it  to  a 
close?  I  believe  there  is  one  announcement  to  make.  Immediately  following  the  close 
of  this  meeting  there  will  be  a  joint  luncheon  of  the  Hoard  of  Direction,  including  the 
retiring  and  the  new  members  of  the  Board,  with  the  Arrangements  Committee.  It  will 
be  in  Dining  Room  1.  Imniediatch  following  thai  joint  session  there  will  he  ;i  meeting 
of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

If  there  is  no  further  business  to  come  before  this  meeting,  I  now  declare  the  62nd 
Business  Meeting  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering  Association,  and  concurrent 
meeting    of    the    Engineering    Division,    Association    of    American    Railroads,    adjourned. 

[The   meeting  adjourned   sine   die  at    12:20   pm ) 


Report  of  the  Executive  Secretary 

March  1,  1963 
To  the  Members: 

In  all  aspects,  except  one,  the  state  of  your  Association  at  the  close  of  another 
year — its  64th  year — is  good.  But  having  said  this,  it  would  be  less  than  honest  not  to 
say  that,  with  better  economic  conditions  generally,  and  especially  in  the  railroad  indus- 
try, things  could  be  better.  The  one  exception,  and  it  is  an  important  one,  is  Association 
membership,  which  is  down  appreciably  for  the  second  successive  year.  This  will  be 
detailed  later  in  this  report.  Again  the  Association  functioned  as  the  Engineering  Divi- 
sion of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads,  and  again  it  filled  all  demands  made 
on  it  as  such,  with  credit  to  both  organizations. 

That  the  Association  had  a  good  year  generally  in  1962  is  documented  in  the 
following  details  of  this  report.  Membership,  although  down,  remains  relatively  high; 
the  activities  and  production  of  committees,  even  without  the  desired  financial  support 
for  research  activities,  continued  at  a  high  level;  its  service  to  members  was  in  no  way 
reduced,  and  its  cooperation  with  other  groups  and  with  the  colleges  was  actually  ex- 
tended; and  even  though  the  Association  had  a  deficit  year  financially  to  achieve  cer- 
tain desirable  ends,  its  total  assets  are  high  and  it  remains  in  a  sound  financial  condi- 
tion. Most  important,  as  the  year  ended,  the  interest  of  the  membership  remained  high, 
the  Association  was  looking  forward  to  two  important  meetings  in  1963,  and  your 
Board  of  Direction  had  already  approved  plans  for  full-scale  conventions  in  1964  and 
1965 — the  latter  to  be  accompanied  by  an  exhibit. 

Noteworthy  among  the  many  special  activities  and  accomplishments  of  committees 
and  the  Association  during  the  year  were  the  completion  of  the  review  and  updating 
of  the  Manual  of  Recommended  Practice  by  committees  and  the  reprinting  of  the  Man- 
ual as  a  whole;  the  issuance  of  the  large  1962  Supplement  to  the  Portfolio  of  Track- 
work  Plans,  which  included  the  new  standard  plans  for  Nos.  6,  8,  10,  IS  and  20  turn- 
outs adopted  at  the  1962  convention;  the  official  participation  of  the  Association  in 
the  1962  Transportation  Engineering  Conference  of  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engi- 
neers, at  Detroit,  Mich.,  October  8-12,  for  which  it  developed  and  put  on  a  full-day 
program  on  railroading,  on  October  9;  the  substantial  beginning  of  a  program,  sponsored 
by  Committee  24 — Cooperative  Relations  With  Universities,  to  put  more  railroad  speak- 
ers on  college  campuses;  the  appointment  of  an  official  program  committee  to  cooper- 
ate with  committees  in  developing  the  strongest  and  most  informative  programs  possible 
for  the  membership  meetings  of  the  Association  immediately  ahead;  and  the  amend- 
ment of  the  Constitution  which  will  permit  Association  annual  conventions  in  any 
month  of  the  year,  including  March  as  in  the  past,  by  a  two-thirds  affirmative  vote  of 
the  entire  membership  of  the  Board  of  Direction,  to  meet  any  special  conditions  which 
may  exist  or  arise. 

The  1962  Convention 

Under  a  general  convention  pattern  adopted  by  the  Board  of  Direction  in  1961, 
which  called  for  2j4-day,  full-program  conventions  every  second  year,  and  1^-day, 
restricted-scope  conventions  in  alternate  years,  beginning  in  1962,  the  1962  convention 
of  the  Association  was  a  far  cry  from  the  2J^-day  convention  in  1961,  held  at  Mc- 
Cormick  Place,  Chicago,  in  conjunction  with  an  exhibit  of  the  National  Railway  Appli- 
ances Association.  True,  it  closed  out  officially  the  work  of  the  previous  year  in  an  effec- 
tive manner,  held  down  expenses  and  off-the-job  time,  and  was  a  source  of  information, 

706 


Report    of    Executive    Secretary 707 


COMMITTEES  OF  THE  BOARD  OF  DIRECTION 

1962-1963 

Executive  Committee 
C.  J.  Code  (Chairman).  L.  A.  Loggins,  R.  H.  Boeder,  E.  J.  Brown,  T.  F.  Burris 

Assignments 
C.  J.  Henry  (Chairman),  J.  A.  Bunjer,  J.  M.  Trissal,  L.  A.  Loggins,  T.  F.  Burris 

Personnel 
J.  E.  Eisemann  (Chairman),  C.  J.  Henry,  T.  F.  Burris,  J.  H.  Brown,  John  Ayer,  Jr. 

Publications 
W.    B.    Throckmorton    (Chairman),   J.    E.   Eisemann,   J.   H.   Brown,    C.    E.    Defendorf, 
W.  L.  Young. 

Manual 
L.   A.    Loggins    (Chairman),   \V.   H.    Huffman,   F.    R.    Smith,    T.    B.    Hutcheson,   John 
Ayer,  Jr. 

Membership 
\V.    H.    Huffman    (Chairman),    J.    A.    Bunjer,    F.    R.    Smith,    C.    E.    Defendorf,    T.    B. 
Hutcheson 

Finance 
J.  M.  Trissal  (Chairman),  R.  H.  Beeder,  E.  J.  Brown,  W.  H.  Huffman,  W.  B.  Throck- 
morton 

Research 
R.  H.  Beeder   (Chairman),  Ray  McBrian,  W.  J.  Cruse,  W.  L.  Young 


inspiration  and  pleasure  to  those  who  attended,  but  it  left  much  to  be  desired  from 
the  standpoint  of  the  membership  as  a  whole  and,  unquestionably,  failed  to  give  the 
normal  impetus  to  the  work  of  the  year  ahead. 

The  convention  was  held  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  Chicago,  on  Friday  and 
Saturday,  March  9  and  10 — adjourning  at  noon  on  the  10th — and  its  sessions  were 
interrupted  only  by  the  Annual  Association  Luncheon  at  noon  on  the  9th.  In  spite  of 
the  fact  that  official  invitations  were  extended  alone  to  the  officers  and  directors  of  the 
Association,  and  to  committee  chairmen,  vice  chairmen,  secretaries  and  subcommittee 
chairmen — a  total  of  approximately  two  hundred  and  fifty — 348  railroad  men  actually 
registered  their  attendance  for  all  or  part  of  the  program,  along  with  300  non-railroaders 
(largely  railroad  supply  men),  upon  whose  attendance  there  was  no  restriction — a  total 
of  648.  And  of  this  total  group,  572  participated  in  the  Annual  Luncheon.  Supple- 
menting the  men,  the  wives  of  80  railroad  and  non-railroad  nun  registered  their  at- 
tendance at  the  women's  headquarters.  While  these  attendance  figures  wen-  larger  than 
expected,  sincerely  missed  were  the  familiar  faces  of  many  who  had  regularly  attended 
previous  conventions,  who  did  not  feel  at  liberty  to  attend  in  1962  under  the  circum- 
stances, or  for  other  reasons. 

Programwise,  the  meeting  was  an  intensive  one,  it  being  necessary  to  hear  the 
reports  of  the  Association's  22  committees  on  102  of  their  assignments  in  three  sessions, 
instead  of  the  usual  five.  To  make  this  possible,  all  presentations  were  streamlined,  dis- 


708 Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

cussion  was  severely  restricted  by  the  members  themselves  and,  with  considerable  loss 
of  interest  and  valuable  information,  the  number  of  special  feature  presentations  in  the 
form  of  addresses,  papers,  panel  discussions,  etc.,  was  restricted  to  7,  compared  with  a 
total  of  18  to  23  in  recent  years.  However,  within  the  time  available,  the  business  of 
the  Association  was  effectively  transacted,  much  new  and  of  value  was  presented,  and 
constant  interest  was  sustained.  Outstanding  among  the  accomplishments  of  the  meeting 
was  action  by  the  Association  on  the  recommendations  of  committees  affecting  a  total 
of  359  specifications,  recommended  practices  and  plans  in  the  Association's  Manual  and 
Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans. 

Effective  as  was  the  1962  convention  in  officially  closing  out  the  Association  year 
and  in  acting  upon  committee  recommendations,  its  restricted  nature  with  respect  to 
time,  program,  and  number  of  participants  was  not  considered  conducive  to  the  most 
effective  work  of  the  Association  or  to  the  welfare  of  the  Association  as  such,  nor  in 
the  interest  of  the  membership  generally.  This  feeling  gave  early  rise  to  reconsideration 
by  the  Board  of  Direction  of  the  convention  pattern  referred  to  at  the  outset  of  this 
report  on  the  1962  convention,  with  resulting  changes  which  are  reflected  in  plans 
which  have  been  made  for  subsequent  conventions  of  the  Association  through  1965, 
as  set  forth  at  the  end  of  this  report  as  a  whole. 

MEMBERSHIP 

The  one  exception  to  continued  well  being  of  the  Association  in  1962,  as  mentioned 
at  the  outset  of  this  report,  is  that  of  number  of  members.  For  several  years  your  secre- 
tary has  expressed  concern  for  the  future  growth  of  the  Association — even  sustaining 
the  current  membership  level.  Now  there  is  confirmation  that  that  concern  was  justified. 
After  an  unbroken  record  of  growth  in  membership  from  1944  through  1957,  the  mem- 
bership has  slipped  backward  in  three  of  the  last  five  years — 1958,  1961,  and  1962 — 
and  might  have  slipped  backward  in  the  other  two  years  had  losses  in  these  two  years 
not  been  overcome  by  special  circumstances  or  by  special  recruiting  effort  on  the  part 
of  a  number  of  railroads. 

As  of  February  1,  1963,  the  total  membership  of  the  Association  stood  at  3261, 
a  net  loss  of  86  members  compared  with  the  membership  of  3347  one  year  earlier,  and 
a  net  loss  of  146  from  the  membership  of  3407  two  years  earlier.  This  net  loss  of  86 
during  the  past  year  resulted  from  the  enrollment  of  only  153  new  members,  compared 
with  161  in  1961  (and  with  198  in  1960)  ;  the  reinstatement  of  36  former  members — 
6  more  than  in  1961;  and  a  decrease  of  12  Junior  Members — compared  with  a  decrease 
of  2  in  1961 ;  in  combination  with  a  loss  of  263  members  through  deaths,  resignations 
and  being  dropped  for  non-payment  of  dues — compared  with  a  total  of  249  in  these 
later  categories  in   1961    (and  only  180  in  1960). 

Student  Affiliates 

Not  included  in  the  foregoing  membership  figures  are  the  Student  Affiliates  which 
the  Association  began  to  enroll  late  in  I960  on  college  campuses,  a  relationship  which 
was  explained  in  the  secretary's  report  for  that  year.  Suffice  it  to  say  here  that  as  of 
February  1,  1963,  the  Association  had  40  Student  Affiliates  on  22  different  campuses, 
compared  with  47  on  20  campuses  one  year  earlier,  and  42  on  19  campuses  two  years 
earlier. 

In  this  group  there  has  been  and  will  continue  to  be  a  large  turnover  as  new  under- 
graduates become  interested  in  affiliation  with  the  Association  and  as  upperclassmen 
and  graduate  students  complete  their  studies. 


Report  of  Executive  Secretary 709 

Continuing  effort  will  be  made  on  the  part  of  the  secretary's  office  to  keep  in  touch 
with  the  larger  engineering  campuses  of  the  United  States  and  Canada,  to  keep  them 
apprised  of  this  type  of  Association  affiliation,  but  the  success  of  this  effort  would  be 
greatly  enhanced  if  every  railroad  speaker  in  talking  to  college  groups  would  apprise 
interested  students  of  this  valuable,  low-cost  connection  which  they  can  have  with  the 
Association. 

Many  Members  Lost  Through  Death 

During  the  year  ended  February  1,  1963,  there  were  a  total  of  49  deaths  among 
the  membership,  as  indicated  in  the  roster  of  deceased  members  at  the  end  of  this  report. 
This  was  substantially  more  than  the  31  members  lost  through  death  in  the  previous 
year. 

Unhappily,  this  list  of  deceased  includes  one  of  the  Honorary  Members  of  the  Asso- 
ciation— Ralph  Budd,  retired  president  of  the  Burlington  Lines;  Past  President  George 
J.  Ray  (1924-1925),  retired  vice  president,  operations,  of  the  Delaware,  Lackawanna  & 
Western  Railroad;  and  a  past  director  of  the  Association — Clark  Hungerford  (1950- 
1952),  chairman  of  the  board  of  the  St.  Louis-San  Francisco  Railway.  Unhappily,  too, 
the  list  contains  the  names  of  many  who  contributed  much  to  the  work  of  the  Asso- 
ciation, including  four  past  committee  chairmen — Maro  Johnson,  chairman  of  Commit- 
tee 9 — Highways,  1922-1924;  C.  M.  McVay,  chairman  of  Committee  1 — Roadway  and 
Ballast,  1923-1926;  G.  B.  Campbell,  chairman  of  Committee  17— Wood  Preservation, 
1949-1951 ;  and  E.  A.  McLeod,  chairman  of  Committee  8— Masonry,  1958-1960. 

Must  Maintain  High  Membership  Level 

The  maintenance  of  a  high  level  of  membership  is  essential  from  the  standpoint 
of  both  the  total  contribution  which  the  Association  can  make  to  the  railroads  and  to 
railroad  engineers  individually,  and  to  its  financial  well  being.  In  the  latter  regard,  the 
only  alternative  to  the  maintenance  of  the  past  high  level  of  membership  may  be  reduced 
member  services  to  hold  down  costs,  or  higher  annual  dues — neither  of  which  would  be 
desirable. 

With  the  reduction  taking  place  in  the  total  number  of  technically  trained  employees 
in  the  engineering  and  maintenance  of  way  departments  of  the  railroads — a  trend  which 
can  be  expected  to  continue  with  further  increased  technology,  railroad  reorganizations 
and  consolidations,  the  answer  to  the  Association's  membership  maintenance  problem 
undoubtedly  lies  in  the  enrollment  in  the  Association  of  a  larger  percentage  of  the 
remaining  engineering  and  maintenance  of  way  department  personnel,  both  old  employees 
and  new  employees.  This  solution  can  and  should  have  the  enthusiastic  endorsement 
of  all  members  and  of  their  railroads,  because  it  is  to  the  benefit  of  all  concerned. 

That  this  solution  offers  a  fertile  field  will  be  evident  in  the  fact  that  the  total 
Association  membership  on  many  railroads  represents  a  relatively  small  percentage  of 
the  total  number  of  supervisory  employees  in  their  engineering  and  maintenance  depart- 
ments. It  is  also  particularly  evident  to  the  secretary's  office  as  it  notes  that  many  in 
these  departments  do  not  make  application  for  membership  until  they  have  accumulated 
far  beyond  the  number  of  years  of  experience  required  to  entitle  them  to  membership. 

In  this  connection,  members  are  reminded  that  full  membership  in  the  association 
is  available  to  engineering  employees  or  officers  in  the  service  of  the  railways  who  have 
had  not  less  than  five  years  experience  in  the  location,  construction,  operation  or  main- 
tenance of  railways  (an  engineering  degree  counting  for  three  years  experience) ,  and 
that  Junior  Membership  in  the  Association  is  available  to  engineering  employees  of  the 


710 Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

railroads  who  have  had  not  less  than  three  years  experience  (an  engineering  degree 
counting  for  three  years).  Thus,  every  graduate  engineer  entering  the  employ  of  a  rail- 
road is  immediately  eligible  for  the  grade  of  Junior  Member — without  entrance  fee, 
and  at  the  subsidized  dues  rate  of  only  $5.00.  Furthermore,  Junior  membership  may  be 
had  or  retained  until  the  end  of  the  year  in  which  a  man  becomes  30  years  of  age — an 
educational  and  financial  bargain  not  to  be  found  in  many  organizations. 

So,  the  essential  high  level  of  Association  membership  in  the  future  would  appear 
to  lie  in  securing  a  higher  degree  of  membership  saturation  in  the  engineering  and  main- 
tenance of  way  departments  on  the  railroads,  which  your  secretary  maintains  can  be 
secured,  to  the  benefit  of  all  concerned,  by  interested  effort  on  the  part  of  the  present 
membership,  and  especially  those  in  higher  supervisory  capacity. 

Membership 
(February   1,   1962,  to  February   1,   1963) 

Members  on  the  rolls  February  1,  1962   3347 

New  Members   153 

Reinstatements    36 

Loss  in  Junior  Membership    — 12 

3524 

Deceased    49 

Resigned     70 

Dropped     144 

263 

Net  loss  86 

Membership  February   1,   1963    3261 

Membership  Classification  as  of  February   1 

1956         1957         1958         1959  1960         1961  1962  1963 

Life 465          470          469          482  481           474  490  489 

Member    2414         2478         2524         2491  2527         2554  2467  2434 

Associate    261           258           268           251  264           288  301  261 

Junior     163           144           101             86  101             91  89  77 

Totals    3303         3350        3362         3310        3373         3407         3347        3261 

ACTIVITIES  OF  COMMITTEES 

Personnel  of  Committees 

Reflecting,  unmistakably,  the  continued  interest  of  members  in  serving  on  commit- 
tees, and  of  their  railroads  being  represented  on  committees,  is  the  large  number  of 
members  assigned  to  committees  during  1962,  even  though,  due  to  economic  conditions 
and  the  heavy  work  load  carried  by  many  members,  that  number  is  slightly  smaller 
than  the  number  who  served  on  committees  in  1961.  Specifically,  throughout  the  year 
there  were  1137  members  (including  67  Members  Emeritus)  regularly  assigned  to  1227 
places  on  the  Association's  22  standing  and  special  committees.  This  compares  with 
1160  members  who  occupied  1251  places  on  these  same  committees  during  the  previous 
year.  In  addition  to  their  regular  members  during  1962,  practically  all  committees  again 
carried  "guest"  members  on  their  rosters — members  assigned  during  the  year  on  a  guest 
basis,  awaiting  regular  assignment  with  the  official  roster  change  to  become  effective 
with  the  close  of  the  1963  Association  Business  meeting. 


Report  of  Executive  Secretary 711 

Again,  there  were  no  special  restrictions  on  the  number  of  members  permitted  on 
committees,  but  again,  to  meet  the  desire  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads  for 
relatively  small  AAR  committees,  there  was  continued  in  1962  the  plan  adopted  by  the 
Board  of  Direction  in  1961,  which  provides  that  the  chairmen,  vice  chairmen,  secretaries 
and  all  subcommittee  chairmen — to  the  extent  that  they  are  in  the  active  employ  of 
railroads — alone  constitute  the  official  Engineering  Division  committees  within  the  larger 
AREA  committees.  This  arrangement  was  amended  during  the  year  to  provide  that  in 
any  instance  where  the  chairman  of  an  AREA  committee  is  other  than  an  active  rail- 
road employee,  the  vice  chairman  of  the  committee  must  be  an  active  railroad  employee, 
and  in  addition  to  being  designated  vice  chairman  of  the  AREA  committee,  he  be  con- 
sidered the  chairman  of  the  corresponding  Engineering  Division  committee. 

Again,  to  set  apart  as  a  group  the  Engineering  Division  committee  within  each 
AREA  committee — for  convenience  and  record  purposes — the  names  of  those  on  the 
Engineering  Division  committee  were  grouped  at  the  head  of  the  list  of  personnel  of  the 
committee  as  a  whole,  as  presented  in  the  Committee  Assignments  Pamphlet  and  the 
Bulletins,  and  were  set  in  bold-face  type. 

Reflecting  the  continued  uncertain  economic  conditions  ahead  for  the  railroads  in 
1963,  and  the  continued  heavy  work  load  carried  by  many  members,  necessarily  restrict- 
ing their  Association  activities,  the  number  of  members  assigned  to  committees  for  1963, 
effective  with  the  official  roster  changes  at  the  end  of  the  1963  Business  meeting,  will 
be  down  slightly  from  1962.  Specifically,  1118  members  have  been  assigned  to  1202 
places  on  committees  for  1963,  which  compares  with  the  1137  members  who  served  in 
1227  places  during  1962. 

Work  of  Committees 

During  1962  the  22  committees  of  the  Association  worked  on  174  assignments, 
20  of  which  were  new.  In  their  work  they  continued  to  follow  much  the  same  pattern 
as  in  previous  years,  their  different  subcommittees  carrying  out  their  own  studies  and 
investigations  independently,  or  with  the  cooperation  of  the  research  staff  of  the  Asso- 
ciation of  American  Railroads,  looking  to  the  preparation  of  progress  or  final  reports 
for  information ;  of  revising  material  appearing  in  the  AREA  Manual  of  Recommended 
Practice,  the  AAR  Electrical  Manual,  and  the  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans;  or  devel- 
oping new  Manual  and  Portfolio  material;  and  of  carrying  out  special  projects  related 
to  their  assignments.  That  the  work  accomplished  by  committees  was  again  substantial 
is  seen  in  the  fact  that  they  produced  one  or  more  reports  on  116  of  their  174  assign- 
ments (not  including  Assignments  A),  17  of  which  were  final  reports  and  20  of  which 
contained  Manual  recommendations.  Furthermore,  continuing  the  practice  established 
by  the  Board  in  1958,  all  committees  presented  brief  "progress"  or  "status"  statements 
with  respect  to  assignments  on  which  they  made  no  formal  report. 

Classification   of    Material   Produced   by   Committees 

The  work  of  committees  during  the  year  was  again  so  diversified  and  extensive 
that  it  is  impossible  to  do  other  than  to  refer  to  it  in  general  terms  in  a  report  of 
this  character.  But  then-  is  presented  in  the  following  a  general  categorical  classification 
of  the  results  of  this  work,  as  published  in  the  Bulletins  of  the  Association,  and  to  be 
presented  to  the  1963  Business  meeting: 

Recommendations  pertaining  to  the  development,  revision,  deletion  or  reapproval 
without  change,  of  52  different  specifications  and  recommended  practices  for  inclusion 
in  the  AREA  Manual  and  the  AAR  Electrical  Manual;  87  reports  on  current  develop- 


712 Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

merits  in  engineering  practice  and  design;  12  reports  dealing  with  economy  in  the  use 
of  labor  and  the  recruiting  and  training  of  employees;  4  reports  involving  statistics; 
6  economic  and  analytical  studies;  4  reports  on  relations  with  public  authorities;  and 
4  bibliographies. 

The  work  of  committees  affecting  the  AREA  Manual  included  the  presentation  of 
4  specifications  for  adoption;  the  rewriting  or  revision  of  16  specifications  (with  or 
without  reapproval)  ;  the  reapproval  of  4  specifications  without  change;  the  presentation 
of  2  recommended  practices  for  adoption,  and  1  as  tentative;  the  revision  of  14  recom- 
mended practices,  with  or  without  reapproval;  the  deletion  of  1  recommended  practice; 
the  adoption  of  1  agreement  form;  the  presentation  of  3  tentative  agreement  forms; 
and  the  addition  of  2  terms  in  the  Glossary.  In  addition,  the  reports  of  committees 
presented  instructions  with  regard  to  4  machines  for  inclusion  in  the  Handbook  of 
Instructions  for  Care  and  Operation  of  Maintenance  of  Way  Equipment. 

During  1963,  the  committees  as  a  whole  will  work  on  180  assignments,  33  of 
which  are  new. 

Committee  Meetings 

In  carrying  out  their  work  during  1962,  the  22  technical  committees  of  the  Asso- 
ciation held  the  smallest  number  of  meetings  in  many  years,  and  at  least  seven  of  their 
meetings  were,  in  reality,  executive  sessions,  held  in  Chicago  during  the  1962  convention 
and  attended  in  large  part  alone  by  the  committee  officers  and  subcommittee  chairmen. 
In  fact,  the  large  majority  of  meetings,  as  in  recent  years,  were  again  held  in  Chicago 
or  at  points  central  to  the  larger  number  of  committee  members. 

Specifically,  a  total  of  63  committee  meetings  were  held  during  the  Association  year 
ended  March  1,  1963.  This  compares  with  64  committee  meetings  held  during  the  year 
ended  March  1,  1962,  and  the  more  normal  number  of  70  to  73  meetings  held  yearly 
in  immediately  preceding  years.  Of  the  63  meetings  held  during  the  1962  Association 
year,  39  were  in  Chicago  (including  the  7  held  during  the  1962  convention)  ;  3  were  held 
in  St.  Louis,  Mo.;  2  each  were  held  at  Atlanta,  Ga.,  New  Orleans,  La.,  and  Washington, 
D.  C;  and  IS  were  held  in  as  many  other  cities. 

Dictated  by  the  scope  of  their  work  and  other  considerations,  5  committees  each 
held  4  meetings;  10  committees  each  held  3  meetings;  6  committees  each  held  2  meet- 
ings; and  1  committee  held  only  1  meeting.  Combined  with  their  meetings,  17  inspec- 
ton  trips  were  made  by  committees  during  the  year  to  see  facilities,  structures,  proce- 
dures or  operations  directly  related  to  their  work. 

ASSOCIATION  PUBLICATIONS 

Again  in  1962  the  Association  made  widespread  distribution  of  its  publications 
beyond  its  own  membership,  reprinted  several  of  its  publications,  continued  distribution 
of  its  Engineer  Recruiting  Brochure,  produced  large  Supplements  to  both  its  Manual 
and  its  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans,  and  continued  successfully  several  new  policies 
with  respect  to  its  publications  adopted  in  1960. 

In  September,  on  the  basis  of  previous  requests,  the  secretary's  office  made  the 
seventh  annual  mailing  to  the  engineering  colleges  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  of 
the  Association's  Engineer  Recruiting  Brochure  "The  Railroad  Field — A  Challenge  and 
Opportunity  for  Engineering  Graduates",  this  distribution  involving  approximately  3300 
copies  to  some  125  schools.  In  the  same  month  the  secretary's  office  reprinted  the  Asso- 
ciation's 23-page,  6x9  -in,  flexible-cover  pamphlet  entitled  "Instructions  for  the  Care 
and  Safe  Operation   of  Welding  and   Grinding  Equipment."  About  the  same  time,  it 


Report    of    Executive    Secretary 713 

reprinted,  bringing  up  to  date,  the  109-page,  6  x  9-in,  AAR  Scales  Pamphlet,  after 
integrating  into  the  various  rules  and  specifications  contained  therein  for  scales  used  in 
railway  service  all  of  the  many  revisions  adopted  since  the  previous  printing  of  the 
pamphlet  in  1957. 

During  the  past  summer,  the  Association  produced  the  largest  Supplement  to  the 
Manual  of  Recommended  Practice  ever  issued,  this  1962  Supplement  containing  518 
sheets  (1036  pages),  and  during  August  all  members  who  had  paid  the  $1  fixed  fee  for 
the  Supplement — a  total  of  some  1100 — were  sent  copies. 

Following  the  completion  of  the  Supplement,  the  Association  reprinted  its  complete 
2200-page,  two-volume  Manual  to  replenish  the  "for  sale"  supply  in  the  secretary's 
office,  and  at  the  same  time  it  secured  some  300  copies  of  the  separate  chapters  for  sale 
to  members  and  others  interested  only  in,  or  with  a  special  interest  in,  certain  chapters. 
This  was  the  second  reprinting  of  the  Manual  since  it  was  completely  overhauled  and 
reprinted  in  1953. 

While  all  this  was  going  on  the  Association  produced  one  of  the  most  important 
supplements  ever  issued  to  its  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans,  this  becoming  available  in 
October  and  including  the  18  Standard  Plans  for  Nos.  6,  8,  10,  15  and  20  turnouts 
adopted  at  the  1962  convention,  along  with  revised  sheets  covering  10  other  plans  and 
2  sheets  of  specifications. 

Again  in  1962,  the  Association  dispensed  with  the  publication  of  the  annual  bound 
volume  of  the  Proceedings — a  practice  begun  in  1961.  In  place  of  the  bound  volume, 
all  of  the  Bulletins  of  the  Association  from  the  September-October  1961  issue  through 
the  June-July  1962  issue  (except  Part  2  of  the  February  Bulletin  and  the  Year  Book 
issue)  were  punched  for  binding,  and  all  members  who  had  made  prior  request  were 
furnished,  without  charge,  a  two-post,  hard-cover,  book-type  binder,  similar  in  every 
respect  to  the  binder  issued  in  1961,  in  which  to  house  as  a  unit  their  copies  of  the 
Bulletin.  Thus,  again,  without  the  past  duplication  of  material  in  the  Bulletins  and  the 
Proceedings,  members  were  able  to  assemble  in  neat  bound  form  all  of  the  Bulletins 
for  the  publication  year,  including  the  complete  proceedings  of  the  1962  annual  meeting, 
which   appeared  in  the  June-July  issue. 

RESEARCH  WORK 

In  1962,  due  to  a  combination  of  continued  restricted  earnings  in  the  railroad  indus- 
try and  a  "hold-the-line"  overall  AAR  Budget,  the  research  activities  of  the  Engineering 
Division  were  held  to  the  relatively  low  level  which  prevailed  in  1961 — total  expenditures 
for  these  activities  amounting  to  $265,343,  or  about  the  same  as  the  expenditures  of 
$263,100  in  1961.  They  were  considerably  less  than  the  total  expenditure  of  $398,400  in 
1960,  and  the  still  larger  expenditures  in  1957  and  1958. 

Of  the  total  amount  authorized  for  Engineering  Division  research  in  1962,  $41,672 
was  for  Detector  Car  Development  and  Leasing  Service,  and  $18,172  was  for  general 
technical  services,  leaving  a  total  of  only  $205,499  to  progress  research  projects  sponsored 
primarily  by  AREA  committees.  This  total  expenditure  for  research  and  technical  assist- 
ance on  behalf  of  AREA  committees  was  again  far  less  than  the  amount  proposed  by 
these  committees  ($375,550),  and  also  the  necessarily  reduced  proposed  budget  of 
$305,600  approved  by  the  AREA  Board  of  Direction  and  recommended  to  the  vice 
president  research,  AAR. 

To  bring  about  the  reduced  1962  expenditures,  many  proposed  projects  at  the 
bottom  of  the  priority  list  established  by  the  AREA  Board  and  the  director  of  engi- 
neering  research,   AAR,   were   again   entirely    eliminated;    participation   in   the   work   of 


714   Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

Research  Councils  and  contract  research  to  be  carried  out  by  outside  agencies  and  insti- 
tutions was  again  practically  eliminated;  and  cuts  were  made  in  the  amounts  requested 
for  the  remaining  projects  wherever  possible,  while  still  permitting  some  headway  during 
the  year  and  the  holding  intact  of  the  basic  research  organization  at  the  AAR  Labora- 
tory. Furthermore,  for  the  second  time  in  11  years  (1961  and  1962),  the  research  bud- 
get did  not  include  the  past  usual  appropriation  of  $5000  to  $7000  to  help  defray  the 
cost  of  publishing  Engineering  Division  research  reports  in  the  AREA  Bulletins — thus 
presumably,  indicating  a  future  general  policy  in  this  regard.  Unable  to  assume  this 
publication  cost  in  full,  the  Association,  again  in  1962,  presented  in  its  Bulletins,  for 
the  most  part,  only  edited  and  condensed  versions  of  these  reports,  along  with  any 
conclusions  and  recommendations. 

Any  disadvantage  or  loss  to  members  under  this  arrangement  was  again  offset  to 
some  extent  by  the  continued  practice  of  the  AAR  Research  Department  in  1962  of 
producing  copies  of  its  complete  reports  in  typewritten,  multilith  form,  and  of  sending 
copies  to  the  chief  engineering  and  maintenance  officers  of  AAR  Member  Roads,  to 
members  of  sponsoring  AREA  committees,  and  to  others,  on  request  to  the  AAR 
Research  Center. 

1963  Research 

In  many  respects  the  total  Engineering  Division  research  budget  for  1963  is  a 
duplicate  of  the  budget,  or  actual  research  expenditures,  for  1962,  this  budget  amount- 
ing to  $268,000.  Of  this  amount,  $41,600  is  for  AAR  detector  car  development  and 
leasing  service,  and  $18,300  is  for  general  technical  services,  leaving  a  total  of  $208,100 
to  progress  research  projects  sponsored  primarily  by  AREA  committees.  This  author- 
ized total  expenditure  for  Engineering  Division  research  and  technical  services  is  again 
far  less  than  the  amount  proposed  by  these  committees  ($363,050),  and  also  the  neces- 
sarily reduced  proposed  budget  of  $256,350  approved  by  the  AREA  Board  of  Direction 
and  recommended  to  the  vice  president,  research,  AAR. 

Details  of  the  authorized  Engineering  Division  research  budget  for  1963  are  pre- 
sented in  the  accompanying  tabulation,  which  shows  for  the  different  projects  the  ex- 
penditures authorized,  compared  with  estimated  expenditures  for  projects  in  1962.  In 
this  tabulation,  it  will  be  noted,  there  are  four  new  projects,  and  that  four  projects  for 
which  expenditures  were  made  in  1962  will  be  discontinued  in  1963.  Missing  entirely 
from  this  list  are  a  considerable  number  of  projects  proposed  by  committees.  Also,  as 
will  be  evident  to  committees,  the  authorized  expenditures  for  a  number  of  the  projects 
are  less  than  the  amount  initially  requested. 

Furthermore,  under  the  plan  begun  in  1961,  the  1963  Engineering  Division  research 
budget  provides  no  funds  to  help  defray  the  cost  of  publishing  AAR  research  reports 
in  the  AREA  Bulletins.  Unable  to  assume  these  publishing  costs  in  full,  the  AREA  will 
again,  in  1963,  present  only  edited  and  condensed  summaries  of  these  reports,  for  the 
most  part,  in  the  Bulletin,  with  any  recommendations  and  conclusions — with  the  under- 
standing that  copies  of  the  complete  reports,  in  multilith  form,  can  be  secured  by  those 
desiring  them,  upon  request,  from  the  AAR  Research  Center. 

Thus,  1963  will  see  continued  delay  and  deferment  in  Engineering  Division  research 
and  technical  services  as  visualized  and  hoped  for  by  AREA  committees  and  the  Board 
of  Direction — which  will  continue  to  hamper  the  work  of  committees  until  more  ade- 
quate funds  can  be  made  available. 


Report  of  Executive  Secretary 715 

Total  Allotments  for  Research,  Engineering  Division,  AAR,  Exclusive 
op  Detector  Car  Development  and  Leasing  Service 

1943-1963 

1943  $  98,445     1953  364,100 

1944  109,050     1954  351,307 

1945  138,110     1955  351,653 

1946  159,510     1956  365,050 

1947  234,428     1957  476,845 

1948  291,840     1958  563,709 

1949  372,457     1959  353,800 

1950  294,045      1960  350,300 

1951  354,770     1961  222,000 

1952  381,400     1962  223,671 

1963  226,400 


Summary  of  Projects  Included  in  1963  Approved  Engineering  Division  Research 

Budget,  Showing  Expenditures  Authorized  for  Each  Project,  Compared 

With   Estimated   Expenditures   for  Projects   in    1962 

1962  1963 

Estimated  Approved 

Expenditure  Budget 
Administration 

Research  Office    $  35,308  $  35,400 

Total   $  35,308  $  35,400 

Committee    1 — Roadway   and   Ballast 

Roadbed  Stabilization $  15,045  $  15,100 

Vegetation  Control    600 

Total   $  15,045  $  15,700 

Committee  3 — Ties  and  Wood  Preservation 

Development  of  Prestressed  Concrete  Ties  and  Fasten- 
ings       $     5,054  $     1,900 

Termite  Control  Investigation   400  600 

Total   $     5,454  $     2,500 

Committee  4 — Rail 

Investigation  of  Failures  in  Control-Cooled  Rail $     3,000  $     3,000 

Rail   Failure   Statistics    5,108  4,700 

Insulated  Rail  Joint  Development    3,000  3,000 

Shelly  Spots  and  Head  Checks 20,050  20,200 

Metallurgical   Investigation  of  Basic   Oxygen   Steel  for 

Rail  and  Joint  Bars 2,286  2,200 

"Metallurgical  Effects  of  Rail  Cropping  Methods 2,000 

"Semi-Automatic  Welding  of  Rail  Batter  and  Bums 4,600 

Total   $  33,444  $  39,700 

Committee  5 — Track 

Corrosion    Protection    of    Track    and    Structures    from 

Brine    Drippings    $        841  $ 

Prestressed  Concrete  Crossing  Frog  Support   889  500 

°  New  project. 


716  Report    of    Executive    Secretary 

1962  1963 

Estimated  Approved 

Expenditure  Budget 

Explosive  Hardening  of  Manganese  Frogs   2,018  

Welding  Heat  Treated  Carbon  Steel  Frogs  and  Switches  2,000  1,300 
Riding   Qualities   of   Equipment   Through    High    Speed 

Turnouts   1,318  1,300 

Specification    Development    for    Tie    Plate    Fastenings 

and  Tie  Pads  for  Wood  and  Concrete  Ties 8,600  12,300 

Design    of    Spirals    3,600  3,800 

Total   $  19,200  $  19,200 

Committee   7 — Wood  Bridges   and  Trestles 

Application  of  Synthetic  Resins  and  Adhesives    $     7,608  $     7,800 

Strength    of    Timber    Stringers    9,186  1,000 

Non-Destructive  Testing  of  Wood 2,000  5,000 

Total   $  18,794  $  13,800 

Committee  8 — Masonry 

Bearing  Pads  for  Bridges    $     2,048  $ 

"Shear  Keys  for  Concrete  Beams $ 2,700 

Total    $     2,048  $     2,700 

Committee    15 — Iron   and   Steel   Structures 

Truss  Bridge  Research   $     5,000  $     5,000 

Corrosion  of  Deck  Plates $ 1,000 

Total   $     5,000  $     6,000 

Committee    16 — Economics   of   Railway   Location   and    Operation 

Feasibility  of  Determining  Track  Maintenance  Require- 
ments by  Digital  Computer  Analysis    $     5,046  $     5,000 

Total    $     5,046  $     5,000 

Committee  24 — Cooperative  Relations  with  Universities 

"Student  Research  Grant $ $     1,000 

Total    $ $     1,000 

Committee  30 — Impact  and  Bridge  Stresses 

Steel  Bridges    $  12,126  $     9,200 

Concrete  Bridges   9,126  12,300 

Timber  Bridges    4,000  4,100 

Total   $  25,252  $  25,600 

Special   Committee   on   Continuous  Welded   Rail 

Butt-Welding  of  Rails:    $     9,000  $     9,200 

Total   $     9,000  $     9.200 

0  New  project. 


Report    of    Executive    Secretary 717 

1962  1963 

Estimated  Approved 

Expenditure  Budget 

Joint  Committee  on  Relation  Between  Track  and  Equipment 

Relation  of  Wheel  Load  to  Wheel  Diameter $     8,731  $     8,800 

Clearance  Requirements   5,000               

Dynamic  Action  of  Piggyback  Cars  in  Regard  to  Clear- 
ance, Stability  and  Ride  Qualities 5,000  10,300 

Total   $  18,731  $  19,100 

Board  Committee  on  Research 

Long-Range  Weather  Forecasting $     1,000  $     1,000 

Total    $     1,000  $     1,000 

Electrical  Laboratory  and  Instrumentation  $    12,177  $    12,200 

Total   $  12,177  $  12,200 

Grand  Total  for  Committee-sponsored  Projects $205,499  $208,100 

Detector  Car   Development  and   Leasing 

Further  Development  of  Detector  Car  Testing— Road- 
Rail  Units  and  Ultrasonic  Units $  41,672  $  41,600 

Total   $  41,672  $  41,600 

Technical   Services 

General  Technical  Services $  18,172  $  18,300 

Total   $  18,172  $  18,300 

Grand  Total   $265,343  $268,000 

FINANCES 

The  Report  of  the  Treasurer,  Financial  Statement,  General  Balance  Sheet,  and 
Statement  of  Cash  Receipts  and  Disbursements  for  the  calendar  year  1962,  all  of  which 
are  presented  herein,  indicate  that  the  Association  continues  in  a  sound  financial  condi- 
tion, even  though  Disbursements  during  the  year  exceeded  Receipts  by  $11,246.84.  This 
is  because  its  total  assets  remain  high,  and  because  the  1962  deficit  is  reflected  to  a  large 
extent  in  an  increased  inventory  of  saleable  publications,  chiefly  Manuals,  which,  it  is 
expected,  will  be  converted  into  cash  through  sales  during  the  next  4  or  S  years.  This 
deficit  situation  is  in  contrast  to  that  of  the  preceding  year  when  Receipts  exceeded 
Disbursements  by  $10,051,  but  with  an  inventory  of  saleable  publications  practically  ex- 
hausted. Following  is  a  comparison  of  Receipts  and  Disbursements  for  the  past  two 
years: 

1961  1962 

Receipts    $83,461.73  $   7(..0O7.28 

Disbursements     7.^,410.20  87,344.12 

$10,051.53  %   1  1.246.84 

This  comparison,  however,  does  not  presenl  a  tme  picture  due  to  the  unexpected 
and  necessarily  different  method  of  handling  payment  for  the   1961  Annual  Association 


718  Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

Luncheon.  In  1962  this  payment  was  made  immediately  and  directly  from  funds  realized 
through  the  sale  of  Luncheon  tickets,  and  was  kept  out  of  the  Association's  account,  but 
in  1961,  due  to  a  temporary  change  in  hotel  policy,  funds  realized  from  the  sale  of  tickets, 
in  the  amount  of  $4325,  had  to  be  deposited  into  the  bank  account  of  the  Association, 
and  charges  to  cover  the  Annual  Luncheon  were  paid  by  Association  voucher  upon  pre- 
sentation of  invoice  to  cover,  at  a  later  date.  Therefore,  a  true  comparison  of  1961-1962 
Receipts  and  Disbursements  is  as  follows: 

1961  1962 

Receipts    $79,136.73  $  76,097.28 

Disbursements     69,085.70  87,344.12 


$10,051.53  $-11,246.84 

Reviewing  the  financial  picture  briefly  on  this  basis,  1962  Receipts  were  some  $3000 
lower  than  those  of  1961.  Insofar  as  this  differential  is  concerned,  the  lower  Receipts  in 
1962  were  occasioned  by  the  receipt  in  that  year  of  only  $1196  from  Convention  Regis- 
tration Fees,  owing  to  the  smaller  attendance  at  the  lj^-day  convention  in  that  year, 
compared  with  Registration  Fee  receipts  of  $4469  in  1961.  Further  comparison  of  1961- 
1962  receipts  accounts  indicates  that  Membership  receipts  in  1962  were  some  $700  under 
those  of  1961;  Publications  $1300  lower;  Handbook — Instructions  for  the  Care  and  Op- 
eration of  Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment  $350  lower;  and  Miscellaneous  $500 
lower.  Receipts  for  Manual,  Advertising  and  Student  Affiliate  Fees  were  quite  compar- 
able to  those  of  1961.  Offsetting  these  losses  were  higher  receipts  1962  over  1961,  as 
follows:  Interest  $400,  and  Track  Plans  $3300.  The  large  increase  in  receipts  for  Track 
Plans  in  1962  was  occasioned  entirely  by  the  issuance  and  sale  of  an  abnormally  large 
Supplement  to  the  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans. 

Disbursements  during  1962  were  considerably  higher  than  those  of  1961,  but  were 
actually  somewhat  lower  than  anticipated.  Disbursements  for  most  items  for  the  year, 
with  minor  over-under  expenditure,  approximated  very  closely  those  anticipated  for  the 
year.  The  exceptions  were  Bulletin  and  Proceedings,  $942  overexpended,  due  to  the  Feb- 
ruary Bulletin  being  issued  in  two  parts,  the  second  part  to  accommodate  new  and  re- 
vised Track  Plans.  Offsetting  this  overexpenditure  was  an  underexpenditure  of  some  $900 
in  the  item  of  Miscellaneous  Stationery  and  Printing,  due  to  economies  effected,  fewer 
orders  for  reprints  than  were  expected,  etc. 

While  not  intended  to  be  on  a  comparative  basis,  the  following  items  are  commented 
on  as  a  matter  of  explanation  and  interest  in  view  of  the  large  deficit  incurred  in  1962. 
To  secure  a  supply  of  saleable  Manuals  for  the  next  5  years,  and  to  publish  for  member- 
ship and  sale  purposes  the  extremely  large  1962  Manual  Supplement,  it  was  necessary  to 
expend  $21,296  in  1962,  compared  to  a  Manual  expenditure  of  only  $5480  in  1961.  Like- 
wise, Track  Plan  expenditures  in  1962,  due  to  the  large  Supplement  to  the  Portfolio  of 
Trackwork  Plans  issued,  amounted  to  $3758,  compared  with  an  expenditure  of  only  $198 
in  1961.  Offsetting  these  heavy  expenditures,  only  $1778  was  expended  for  the  item  of 
Convention  in  1962,  while,  including  the  $4325  for  the  Annual  Luncheon,  previously  re- 
ferred to,  $8889  was  expended  for  the  item  of  Convention  in  1961.  It  is  well  that  Re- 
ceipts for  Track  Plans  totaled  some  $3300  higher  than  in  1961,  and  that  the  cost  of 
producing  the  tracings  for  the  new  and  revised  Track  Plans  was  kept  to  the  minimum 
through  the  assistance  of  two  railroads  and  two  trackwork  manufacturers,  or  the  deficit 
of  $11,246  incurred  in   1962  would  have  been  much  greater. 


Report    of    Executive    Secretary 719 

1963  Financial  Prospects 

The  year  1963,  even  with  normal  expenditures  for  Supplements  to  the  Manual  and 
the  Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans,  and  even  with  a  supply  of  saleable  Manuals  on  hand, 
could  again  present  a  financial  problem.  This  is  because  the  printing  of  a  new  edition 
of  the  Association's  Engineer  Recruiting  Brochure,  "The  Railroad  Field — A  Challenge 
and  Opportunity  for  Engineering  Graduates",  is  planned  in  1963,  for  free  distribution  to 
universities  and  colleges.  Also  under  consideration  is  the  publication  of  a  consolidated 
index  of  the  Proceedings  indexes  for  the  years  1954  through  1963,  to  supplement  the 
previously  issued,  and  available,  consolidated  index  of  Proceedings  indexes,  1940-1953. 
There  will  also  be  some  additional  expenditures  for  the  items  of  Postage  and  Conven- 
tion in  1963,  the  latter  in  view  of  the  Association's  participation  in  the  AAR-sponsored 
American  Railway  Progress  Exposition  in  October,  as  well  as  its  lj^-day  Business  meet- 
ing in  March.  But  every  effort  will  be  made  in  1963  to  prevent  loss  of  revenues,  to 
augment  income,  and  to  hold  down  disbursements,  in  an  effort  to  prevent,  or  hold  to 
the  minimum,  any  excess  of  Disbursements  over  Receipts. 

Comparison  of  Receipts  and  Disbursements  for  a  20-Year  Period 

Receipts      Disbursements      Net  Gain 

1943     28,736.00  23,809.00  4,927.00 

1944     30,492.00  26,534.00  3,958.00 

1945     32,305.00  29,305.00  3,000.00 

1946     28,836.00  34,583.00  5,747.00* 

1947     46,993.00  46,989.00  4.00 

1948     57,741.00  53,062.00  4,679.00 

1949     62,081.00  57,075.00  5,005.00 

1950     59,752.00  51,795.00  7,957.00 

1951     69,045.00  62,369.00  6,676.00 

1952     77,514.00  76,964.00  550.00 

1953     73,033.07  82,067.86  9,034.79* 

1954 85,748.99  68,003.03  17,745.96* 

1955     80,177.21  73,923.18  6,254.03 

1956     79,531.11  70,336.17  9,014.04 

1957     85,429.31  89,830.57  4,401.26* 

1958     81,454.56  77,348.92  4,105.64 

1959     80,407.16  80,297.48  109.68 

1960     81,138.79  83,978.29  2,839.50* 

1961     83,461.73  73,410.20  10,051.53 

1962     76,097.28  87,344.12  11,246.84* 

•  Deficit. 

LOOKING  AHEAD  AT  1963 

While  1962  was  a  good  Association  year,  with  sustained  interest  and  activity,  your 
Board  of  Direction  is  looking  for — indeed  has  laid  plans  for — a  still  more  active  year 
in  1963.  In  fact,  looking  beyond  1963,  your  Board  has  made  firm  plans  for  a  2J^-day 
annual  convention  in  1964,  to  be  held  at  the  Pick-Congress  Hotel  in  Chicago,  March 
9-11,  and  for  another  2^-day  annual  convention  in  1965,  at  McCormick  Place,  Chicago, 
accompanied  by  an  exhibit  of  the   National   Railway  Appliances  Association. 

Following  the  restricted,  end-of-the-week  convention  in  March  1962,  the  Associa- 
tion had  every  intention  of  holding  a  normal  2J^-day  convention  in  March  1963,  and 
had  commitments  to  that  end  with  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel.  But  then  came  into  being 
the  AAR-sponsored  plan  for  concurrent  meetings  of  major  railroad  groups  and  a  com- 
bined exhibit  of  related  railway  supply   organizations,  at  McCormick  Place,   Chicago — 


720 Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

first  contemplated  for  October  1964,  but  subsequently  set  for  the  8-day  period,  October 
9-16,    1963 — which   necessarily   altered   Association   convention   plans   for   1963. 

Obviously,  the  Association  had  to  be  prominently  represented  in  the  big  October 
affair — which  has  been  designated  as  the  1963  American  Railway  Progress  Exposition. 
Equally  obvious,  it  was  recognized  that  the  Association  should  not  hold  two  full-scale 
meetings  in  1963 — March  and  October.  What  to  do?  First  thought  in  some  quarters 
was  to  move  the  annual  convention  of  the  Association  to  October,  and  amendments  to 
the  Association's  constitution  to  permit  this  were  proposed  by  the  Board  of  Direction 
and  were  adopted  by  letter  ballot  of  the  membership  in  July  1962.  But  with  no  inten- 
tion of  shifting  the  annual  convention  permanently  to  the  fall  of  the  year,  there  came 
full  realization  of  the  serious  disruption  of  Association  activities  which  would  result 
from  moving  the  1963  convention  to  October,  with  the  prospect  of  returning  to  March 
dates  in  1964  and  in  subsequent  years.  To  name  only  the  more  important  of  these 
disruptions,  the  term  of  office  of  the  current  officers  of  the  Association  would  be  extended 
to  a  year  and  one-half,  while  that  of  the  incoming  officers  in  October  would  be  cut  to 
only  six  months,  and  there  would  be  complete  disruption  of  committee  work  schedules, 
report  filing  dates,  and  the  Association's  publication  schedule.  Not  to  be  overlooked,  too, 
was  the  questionable  situation  of  holding  annual  conventions  six  months  apart — October 
1963  and  March  1964. 

Confronted  with  this  situation,  the  Board,  completely  bypassing  its  newly  acquired 
authority  to  move  the  convention  to  any  month  of  the  year,  decided  that  the  Associa- 
tion must  have  an  official  business  meeting  in  March  1963,  modified  downward  as  neces- 
sary, while  at  the  same  time  participate  wholeheartedly  in  the  October  Railway  Progress 
Exposition,  modified  from  the  concept  of  a  full-scale  convention.  Thus,  plans  were 
developed  and  approved  for  another  lj^-day,  restricted-program,  end-of-the-week 
strictly  Business  meeting  on  March  15  and  16,  at  the  Conrad  Hilton  Hotel,  stripped 
of  all  social  activities,  including  the  usual  Annual  Luncheon,  as  such;  and  for  a  full 
Membership  meeting  in  October,  at  McCormick  Place,  with  a  one-day  program  con- 
sisting exclusively  of  special  features,  supplemented  by  the  maximum  number  of  fall 
committee  meetings.  Under  this  double-barrelled  plan,  the  Association  will  transact  all  of 
its  official  business  and  keep  its  committee  activities  on  schedule  through  the  March 
meeting,  and  will  be  prominently  represented — possibly  with  a  record  membership 
attendance — at   the   October  Railway  Progress  Exposition. 

In  order  that  the  latter  may  be  true,  President  Cole  has  asked  all  members  who 
must  make  a  choice  between  the  two  meetings  to  give  priority  to  the  October  meeting, 
and,  through  their  associations,  he  asked  railway  supply  men  to  refrain  from  extending 
any  form  of  entertainment  in  connection  with  the  March  meeting,  and  to  concentrate 
their  interest  and  attention  on  the  fall  meeting.  At  the  same  time,  President  Code 
appointed  a  special  Program  Committee  to  work  with  committees  to  develop  the 
strongest  possible  program  for  the  fall  meeting. 

So,  confronted  with  the  heavy  work  load  of  committees  referred  to  earlier  in  this 
report;  with  at  least  as  much  research  activity  in  prospect  as  in  1962;  and  with  planning 
to  do  for  another  regular  2j4-day  convention  in  March  1964,  the  Association  has  a 
busy,  interest-sustaining  year  in  prospect  in  1963.  And,  given  the  desirable,  and  war- 
ranted, encouragement  and  backing  of  railroad  managements  which  it  has  had  for  many 
years  in  the  past,  and  sustained  membership,  the  Association  is  certain  to  have  a 
successful  year  ahead  in  every  other  respect. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Neal  D.  Howard, 
Executive  Secretary. 


Report    of    Executive    Secretary 721 

Bcccascb  fflcmbcvi 

Anton  Anderson 

Retired    General    Superintendent    and    Chief    Engineer,    Monon    Railroad,    Lafayette,    Ind. 

C.  T.  Bltjme 

General    Supervisor   Work    Equipment,    St.    Louis-San    Francisco   Railway,   Springfield,    Mo. 

C.  C.  Brode 

President,  W.  M,  Brode  Company,  Newcomerstown,  Ohio 

Ralph  Budd 

Retired    President,    Burlington    Lines;    Retired    Chairman,    Chicago   Transit    Authority, 

Santa  Barbara,  Calif. 

R.  E.  Butler 
Retired    Vice   President,   Newburgh   &   South   Shore    Railway,    Brecksville,   Ohio 

G.  B.  Campbell 
Retired  Tie   and  Timber  Agent,  Missouri   Pacific  Railroad,  University  City,  Mo. 

P.   CmPMAN 
Retired   Office  Engineer,   Pere   Marquette   Railway,   Fullerton,   Calif. 

R.  L.  Cochrane 

Retired    Assistant    Engineer,    Atchison,    Topeka    &    Santa    Fe    Railway,    Chicago 

E.    L.    COLLETTE 
Retired   Division  Engineer,  St.  Louis-San   Francisco  Railway,  Van  Buren,   Ark. 

W.  G.  Cowte 

Retired   Division   Engineer,   New   York   Central   System,   Holyoke,  Mass. 

R.   A.   CUMMTNGS 
Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

W.  J.  Cunningham 

Retired   Professor   of   Transportation,   Harvard   Graduate   Business  School,   Freedom,    N.   H. 

E.  Evensen 

Retired  Assistant  Engineer,  Texas  &   Pacific  Railway,   Los  Beach,  Miss. 

R.  L.  Fletcher 

Structural   Engineer,   Timber  Engineering   Company,  Washington,   D.    C. 

L.  C.  Frohman 
Retired   Chief   Engineer,   Florida   East   Coast   Railway,    St.   Augustine,   Fla. 

E.  L.  GOSNELL 
Retired   Chief   Engineer,    Reading   Company,    Baltimore,   Md. 

F.  L.  Guy 

Retired    Engineer    Maintenance    of    Way    and    Structures,    Southern    Pacific    Company, 
San  Mateo,  Calit. 

E.  D.  Hall 
Civil   Engineer,   Roberi    and   Company   Associates,   Atlanta,   Ga. 

G.  J.  Harris 

Assistant    to   Vice    President    Finance,    Accounting.    Taxation    and    Valuation,    Association 

of  American   Railroads,  Washington,  D.  C. 

E.  L.  Hoopes 

Retred  Assistant  to  Chief  Engineer  Maintenance  of  Way,   Pennsylvania  Railroad, 

Princeton,  N.  J. 


722 Report  of  Executive  Secretary 

Clark  Hungerford 

Chairman   of   the   Board,   St.   Louis-San    Francisco   Railway,   St.   Louis,   Mo. 

H.  D.  F.  Ingram 

Retired   Office   Engineer,    Grand   Trunk   Western    Railroad,    Florence,   Wis. 

Marc-  Johnson 

Retired    Principal    Assistant    Engineer,    Illinois    Central    Railroad,    Chicago 

A.  L.  Kammerer 

Consulting  Timber  Engineer,  Clayton,  Mo. 

N.  M.  Kelly 

Assistant   Director   of   Engineering,    Board   of   Transport   Commissioners   for   Canada, 

Ottawa,  Ont. 

E.  A.  McLeod 
District   Engineer   Structures,    New   York    Central   System,    Detroit,    Mich. 

C.  M.  McVay 

Retired   Consulting  Engineer,   New   York   Central   System,   Ravenna,   Ohio 

W*.  W.  Morrison 

Retired   Vice   President   and   General   Manager,   Pittsburgh   &  Shawmut   Railroad, 
Kittanning,  Pa 

E.  H.  Ness 

Retired   Supervisor  Work   Equipment   and   Welding,    Erie   Railroad,    Susquehanna,    Pa. 

T.  J.  O'Rourke 

Plant   Engineer,    Mergenthaler  Linotype   Company,   New   York 

H.  B.  Ork 

Assistant   Chief  Engineer,   Chesapeake  &  Ohio  Railway,   Detroit,   Mich. 

J.  W.  Pfau 

Retired   Assistant   to   Vice   President,   New  York   Central   System,   Yonkers,   N.   Y. 

G.  J.  Ray 

Retired   Vice   President,    Delaware,   Lackawanna   &   Western   Railroad,    Summit,   N.    J. 

O.  T.  Rees 

Retired  Assistant  Engineer  Tests,   Atchison,  Topeka  &   Santa   Fe  Railway,   Topeka,   Kans. 

Luis  Reina 

Assistant  General  Manager  Track  and  Structures,  National  Railways  of  Mexico,  Mexico,  D.  F. 

F.  C.  Robertson 
Assistant  Engineer,   New   York,    Chicago  &   St.   Louis  Railroad,   Ft.    Wayne,    Ind. 

W.  A.  Rucks 

Assistant    Engineer,    Atchison,    Topeka   &    Santa   Fe    Railway,    Chicago 

M.  K.  Ruppert 
President  and  Chief  Executive  Officer,  Poore  &   Company,  Chicago 

J.  E.  Shaw 

Supervisor   Track    Construction,    Southern    Pacific    Company,    Texas    &    Louisiana   Lines, 

Houston,  Tex. 

G.  B.  Shipley 
Consulting  Engineer,  Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

V.  O.  Smeltzer 
Superintendent  Signal — System,  Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe  Railway,   Chicago 


Report   of    Executive    Secretary 723 

C.  K.  Smith 

Retired    Research    Engineer,    Association    of   Western    Railways,    Evanston,    111. 

M.  A.  Stainer 

Retired  Assistant   Chief   Engineer,   Colorado  &   Southern   Railway;    Ft.  Worth   &   Denver 

Railway,  Hays,   Kans. 

H.  W.  Stetson 

Retired   General   Supervisor  Maintenance  of  Way,   Maine   Central   Railroad,   Portland,   Me. 

R.  M.  Stimmel 
Engineer  Tests  and  Water  Service,   New   York,   Chicago  &  St.   Louis  Railroad,   Ft.  Wayne,   Ind. 

J.  B.  Trenholm 
Retired   Engineer   Maintenance   of    Way,   Atlantic   Coast   Line   Railroad,   Savannah,   Ga. 

E.  R.  Trodd 

Assistant    Engineer,    Canadian    Pacific    Railway,    Montreal,    Que. 

R.  A.  Whiteford 
Division   Engineer,   Chicago,    Milwaukee,   St.   Paul  &  Pacific  Railroad,   Marion,   Ind. 

H.   A.   WlSTRICH 
Retired   Chief   Engineer   Construction   and   Maintenance,    Lehigh   Valley  Railroad,   Bethlehem,   Pa. 


724  Report  of  Executive  Secretary 


FINANCIAL   STATEMENT   FOR   CALENDAR   YEAR 
ENDING  DECEMBER  31,  1962 

Balance  on  Hand  January   1,   1962 

$156,979.67 

RECEIPTS 
Membership  Account 

Entrance   Fees    $  1,380.00 

Dues    41,923.46     $43,303.46 

Sales  of  Publications 

Proceedings    1,898.56 

Bulletins     1,857.85 

Manuals     10,191.43 

Track  Plans    4,701.49 

Specifications     1,668.37       20,317.70 

Advertising 
Publications     5,876.10 

Interest  Account 
Interest  on  Investments   4,956.94 

Miscellaneous     1,643.08 

Total     $76,097.28 

DISBURSEMENTS 

Salaries     $27,764.96 

Bulletins  and  Proceedings   20,942.67 

Stationery   and  Printing    3,151.68 

Rent    1,140.00 

Postage     2,301.00 

Supplies    345.92 

Audit     400.00 

Pension     300.00 

Social  Security  and  Unemployment  Taxes   1,296.19 

Manuals 21,296.38 

Committee  and  Officers  Expenses   398.80 

News  Letter   1,569.19 

Annual    Meeting    1,778.19 

Miscellaneous    900.31 

Total     $87,344.12 

Excess  Disbursements  over  Receipts    11,246.84 

Balance  on  hand  December  31,   1962    $145,732.83 


Report    of   Treasurer 725 

REPORT  OF  THE  TREASURER 

To  The  Members: 

Balance  on  Hand  January   1,  1962    $156,979.67 

Receipts  during  1962    $76,097.28 

Paid  out  on  Audited  Vouchers   87,344.12 

Excess  of  Disbursements  over  Receipts   11,246.84         11,246.84 

Balance  on  Hand  December  31,  1962 

Consisting  of  Bonds  at  Cost   153,403.98 

Cash  in  Northern  Trust  Co.  Bank-Credit  Balance   7,696.15 

Petty   Cash    25.00    $145,732.83 


We  have  made  an  examination  of  the  accounts  of  the  American  Railway  Engineering 
Association  for  the  year  ended  December  31,  1962,  and  found  them  to  be  in  accordance 
with  the  foregoing  statement. 

C.  A.  Bick, 
E.  N.  Thomas, 

Auditors. 


GENERAL  BALANCE  SHEET 

Assets:  1962  1961 

Cash  in  Northern   Trust  Co.  Bank-Credit  Bal $—7,696.15         $     3,550.69 

Petty   Cash    25.00  25.00 

Due  from   members    26.00  1 16.50 

Due  from  sale  of   publications    24.50  49.55 

Due  from  sale  of  advertising    842.80  1,128.20 

Due  from  prepaid  postage   44.51  27.76 

Furniture  and  Fixtures    1,000.00  1,000.00 

Inventories: 

Publications    (estimated)     500.00  500.00 

Manuals     11,659.00  2,170.10 

Track   Plans    2,146.40  2,1 78.40 

Binders,  index  and  chapter    135.00  1 18.00 

Investments   (cost)    153,403.98  153,403.98 

Interest  accrued  on  investments   958.51  958.51 

Totals     $163,069.45         $165,301.69 

Liabilities: 

Members  dues  paid  in  advance    $        539.50        $       400.50 

Surplus     162,529.95  164,901 .19 

Totals     $163,069.45         $165,301.69 

STATEMENT  OF  CASH  RECEIPTS  AND  DISBURSEMENTS  YEAR  1962 

Cash  in  Bank,  January   1,   1962    $  3,550.69 

Receipts: 

From  members,  sales  of  publications,  interest,  etc 76,097.28 

$79,647.97 
Disbursements: 

Audited    vouchers    87,344.12 

Cash  in  Bank  December  31,   1962    dr  $  7,696.15 


American  Railway  Engineering 
Association 


CONSTITUTION 

Revised  to  July  10,  1962 


Article  I 
Name,  Object  and  Location 

1.  Name 

The  name  of  this  Association  shall  be  the  AMERICAN  RAILWAY  ENGINEERING 
ASSOCIATION. 

2.  Object 

The  object  of  the  Association  shall  be  the  advancement  of  knowledge  pertaining 
to  the  scientific  and  economic  location,  construction,  operation  and  maintenance  of 
railways. 

3.  Means  to  be  Used 

The  means  to  be  used  for  this  purpose  shall  be: 

(a)  The  investigation  of  matters  pertaining  to  the  object  of  the  Association  through 
Study  and  Research  Committees. 

(b)  Meeting  for  the  presentation  and  discussion  of  papers,  and  for  action  on  the 
recommendations  of  committees. 

(c)  The  publication  of  papers,  reports  and  discussions. 

4.  Conclusions 

The  conclusions  adopted  by  the  Association  shall  be  recommendatory. 

5.  Location 

The  office  of  the  Association  shall  be  located  in  Chicago,  111. 

Article  II 

Membership 

1.  Classes 

The  membership  of  this  Association  shall  be  divided  into  five  classes:  Members, 
Life  Members,  Honorary  Members,  Associates  and  Junior  Members. 

2.  Qualifications 

A.  General 

(a)  An  applicant  to  be  eligible  for  membership  in  any  class  other  than  that  of 
Junior  Member  shall  be  not  less  than  25  years  of  age. 

(b)  To  be  eligible  for  membership  in  any  class,  or  for  retention  of  membership  as  a 
Member,  an  Associate  or  a  Junior  Member,  a  person  shall  not  be  engaged  directly  or 
primarily  in  the  sale  to  the  railways  of  appliances,  supplies,  patents  or  patented  services. 

(c)  The  right  to  membership  shall  not  be  terminated  by  retirement  from  active 


726 


Constitution  727 


(d)  In  determining  the  eligibility  for  membership  in  any  class,  graduation  in  engineer- 
ing from  a  school  of  recognized  standing  shall  be  considered  as  equivalent  to  three  years 
of  active  practice,  and  satisfactory  completion  of  each  year  of  work  in  such  school, 
without  graduation,  shall  be  considered  as  equivalent  to  one-half  year  of  active  practice. 

(e)  In  determining  the  eligibility  for  Member  under  Section  B  (a)  of  this  Article, 
each  year  of  practical  experience  in  engineering,  or  in  science  related  thereto,  prior  to 
employment  on  a  railway,  if  such  experience  were  of  the  same  specialized  character  as 
the  current  work  of  the  applicant,  shall  be  considered  as  equivalent  to  one  year  of 
railway  service. 

B.  Member 

A  Member  shall  be: 

(a)  An  engineer  or  officer  in  the  service  of  a  railway  corporation  that  is  a  common 
carrier,  who  has  had  not  less  than  five  years'  experience  in  the  location,  construction, 
operation  or  maintenance  of  railways. 

(b)  A  dean,  professor,  assistant  professor,  or  equivalent  in  engineering  in  a  university 
or  college  of  recognized  standing,  or  an  instructor  or  equivalent  in  such  university  or 
college,  who,  with  an  engineering  degree,  has  had  at  least  two  years'  experience  in 
teaching  engineering. 

(c)  An  engineer  or  member  of  a  public  board,  commission  or  other  official  agency 
who,  in  the  discharge  of  his  regular  duties,  deals  with  railway  problems. 

(d)  An  editor  of  a  trade  or  technical  magazine  who,  in  the  discharge  of  his  regular 
duties,  deals  with  railway  problems,  and  who  has  had  the  equivalent  of  five  years' 
engineering  or  railway  experience. 

(e)  A  consulting  engineer,  engaged  in  private  practice,  or  an  engineer  in  his  employ 
or  in  the  employ  of  a  consulting  engineering  organization,  who  has  had  the  equivalent 
of  five  years'  engineering  experience. 

C.  Life  Member 

A  Life  Member  shall  be  a  Member  or  an  Associate  who  has  paid  dues  for  35  years, 
or  who  has  been  retired  under  a  recognized  retirement  plan  and  has  paid  dues  for  not 
less  than  25  years. 

D.  Honorary  Member 

(a)  An  Honorary  Member  shall  be  a  person  of  acknowledged  eminence  in  railway 
engineering  or  management. 

(b)  The  number  of  Honorary  Members  shall  be  limited  to  ten. 

E.  Associate 

An  Associate  shall  be: 

(a)  An  engineer  of  a  railway  which  is  essentially  an  adjunct  of  an  industry,  or 
which  is  used  primarily  to  transport  the  products  and  materials  of  an  industry  to  and 
from  a  railway  which  is  a  common  carrier. 

(b)  A  person  qualified  by  training  and  experience  to  cooperate  with  Members  in  the 
object  of  this  Association,  but  who  is  not  qualified  to  become  a  Member. 

F.  Junior  Member 

(a)  A  Junior  Member  shall  be  not  less  than  21  years  of  age  and  shall  be  an 
engineering  employee  of  a  railway  corporation  who  has  had  not  less  than  three  years 
of  experience  in  the  location,  construction,  operation  or  maintenance  of  railways. 

(b)  His  membership  in  this  classification  in  the  Association  shall  terminate  at  the 
end  of  the  calendar  year  in  which  he  becomes  30  years  of  age. 

(c)  He  may  make  application  for  membership  other  than  as  a  Junior  Member  at 
any  time  when  he  becomo  eligible  to  do  so. 


728  Constitution 


3.  Transfers 

The  Board  of  Direction  shall  transfer  from  one  class  of  membership  to  another, 
or  may  remove  from  membership,  any  person  whose  qualifications  so  change  as  to 
warrant  such  action. 

4.  Rights 

(a)  Members,  and  Life  Members  who  were  formerly  Members,  shall  have  all  the 
rights  and  privileges  of  the  Association.  Life  Members  who  were  formerly  Associates 
shall  continue  to  have  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  Associates. 

(b)  Honorary  Members  shall  have  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the  Association 
except  those  of  holding  elective  office,  provided,  however,  that  Members  or  Life  Members 
who  are  elected  Honorary  Members  shall  retain  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the 
Association. 

(c)  Associates  and  Junior  Members  shall  have  all  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the 
Association  except  those  of  voting  and  holding  elective  office. 

Article  III 

Admission,  Resignation,  Expulsion  and  Reinstatement 

1.  Charter  Membership 

The  Charter  Membership  of  this  Association  consists  of  all  persons  elected  to  mem- 
bership before  March   15,   1900. 

2.  Application  for  Membership 

(a)  A  person  desirous  of  membership  in  this  Association  shall  make  application 
upon  the  form  provided  by  the  Board  of  Direction.  In  the  event  that  Junior  Membership 
is  desired,  the  applicant  shall  so  state. 

(b)  The  applicant  shall  give  the  names  of  at  least  three  Members  of  this  Asso- 
ciation to  whom  personally  known.  Each  of  these  Members  shall  be  requested  by  the 
Executive  Secretary  of  the  Association  to  certify  to  a  personal  knowledge  of  the  applicant 
with  an  opinion  of  the  applicant's  qualifications  for  membership. 

(c)  If  an  applicant  is  not  personally  known  to  as  many  as  three  Members  of  this 
Association,  the  names  of  well-known  persons  engaged  in  railway  or  allied  professional 
work  to  whom  he  is  personally  known  shall  be  substituted,  as  necessary,  to  provide  a 
total  of  at  least  three  references.  Each  of  these  persons  shall  be  requested  by  the  Executive 
Secretary  of  the  Association  to  certify  to  a  personal  knowledge  of  the  applicant,  with  an 
opinion   of   the  applicant's   qualifications  for  membership. 

(d)  No  further  action  shall  be  taken  upon  the  application  until  replies  have  been 
received  from  at  least  three  of  the  persons  named  by  the  applicant  as  references. 

3.  Election  to  Membership 

(a)  Upon  completion  of  the  application  in  accordance  with  Section  2  of  this  Article 
the  Board  of  Direction  through  its  Membership  Committee  shall  consider  the  application 
and  make  such  investigation  as  it  may  consider  desirable  or  necessary. 

(b)  Upon  completion  of  such  consideration  and  investigation,  each  member  of  the 
Board  of  Direction  shall  be  supplied  with  the  required  information,  together  with  the 
recommendation  of  the  Membership  Committee  as  to  the  class  of  membership,  if  any, 
to  which  the  applicant  is  eligible,  and  the  admission  of  the  applicant  shall  be  canvassed  by 
ballot  among  the  members  of  the  Board  of  Direction. 


Constitution  729 


(c)  In  the  event  that  an  application  has  been  made  under  the  provisions  of  Section  2, 
Paragraphs  (a)  and  (b)  of  this  Article,  a  two-thirds  affirmative  vote  of  the  entire  Board 
of  Direction  shall  be  required  for  election. 

(d)  In  the  event  that  an  application  has  been  made  under  the  provisions  of  Section 

2,  Paragraphs   (a)   and   (c)    of  this  Article,  a  unanimous  affirmative  vote  of  the  entire 
Board  of  Direction  shall  be  required  for  election. 

4.  Subscription  to  the  Constitution 

An  applicant  for  any  class  of  membership  in  this  Association  shall  declare  his  willing- 
ness to  abide  by  the  Constitution  of  the  Association  in  his  application  for  membership. 

5.  Honorary  Member 

A  proposal  for  Honorary  Membership  shall  be  endorsed  by  ten  or  more  Members 
of  the  Association  and  a  copy  furnished  each  member  of  the  Board  of  Direction.  The 
nominee  shall  be  declared  an  Honorary  Member  upon  receiving  a  unanimous  vote  of  the 
entire  Board  of  Direction. 

6.  Resignation 

The  Board  of  Direction  shall  accept  the  resignation,  tendered  in  writing,  of  any 
person  holding  membership  in  the  Association  whose  obligations  to  the  Association  have 
been  fulfilled. 

7.  Expulsion 

Charges  of  misconduct  on  the  part  of  anyone  holding  membership  in  this  Association, 
if  in  writing  and  signed  by  ten  or  more  Members,  may  be  submitted  to  the  Board  of 
Direction  for  examination  and  action.  If,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Board  action  is  war- 
ranted, the  person  complained  of  shall  be  served  with  a  copy  of  such  charges  and  shall 
be  given  an  opportunity  to  answer  them  to  the  Board  of  Direction.  After  such  oppor- 
tunity has  been  given,  the  Board  of  Direction  shall  take  final  action.  A  two-thirds 
affirmative  vote  of  the  entire  Board  of  Direction  shall  be  required  for  expulsion. 

8.  Reinstatement 

(a)  A  person  having  been  a  Member,  an  Associate  or  a  Junior  Member  of  this 
Association  and  having  resigned  such  membership  while  in  good  standing  may  be 
reinstated  by  a  two-thirds  affirmative  vote  of  the  entire  Board  of  Direction. 

(b)  A  person  having  been  a  Member,  an  Associate  or  a  Junior  Member  of  this 
Association  and  having  forfeited  membership  under  the  provisions  of  Article  IV,  Section 

3,  may,  upon  such  conditions  as  may  be  fixed  by  the  Board,  be  reinstated  by  a  two-thirds 
affirmative  vote  of  the  entire  Board  of  Direction. 


Article  IV 

Dues 
1.  Entrance  Fee 

(a)  An  entrance  fee  of  $10  shall  be  payable  to  the  Association  with  each  application 
for  membership  other  than  Junior  Membership.  This  sum  shall  be  returned  to  an  applicant 
not  elected. 

(b)  No  entrance  fee  shall  be  required  for  Junior  Membership,  except  that  a  Junior 
Member,  in  transferring  to  another  class  of  membership,  shall  pay  the  entrance  fee 
prescribed  for  other  classes  of  Membership. 


730  Constitution 


2.  Annual  Dues 

(a)  The  annual  dues  for  each  Member  and  each  Associate  shall  be  $15. 

(b)  The  annual  dues  for  each  Junior  Member  shall  be  $5. 

(c)  Life  Members  and  Honorary  Members  shall  be  exempt  from  the  payment  of 
dues.  Life  Members  desiring  to  continue  to  receive  the  Bulletins  and  Proceedings  of  the 
Association  may  do  so  by  paying  a  subscription  fee  prescribed  by  the  Board  of  Direction 

3.  Arrears 

A  person  whose  dues  are  not  paid  before  April  1  of  the  current  year  shall  be  notified 
by  the  Executive  Secretary.  If  the  dues  are  still  unpaid  on  July  1,  further  notice  shall  be 
given,  informing  the  person  that  he  is  not  in  good  standing  in  the  Association.  If  the  dues 
remain  unpaid  by  October  1,  the  person  shall  be  notified  that  he  will  no  longer  receive 
the  publications  of  the  Association.  If  the  dues  are  not  paid  by  December  31,  the  person 
shall  forfeit  membership  without  further  action  or  notice,  except  as  provided  for  in 
Section  4  of  this  Article. 

4.  Remission  of  Dues 

The  Board  of  Direction  may  extend  the  time  of  payment  of  dues,  and  may  remit 
the  dues  of  any  Member,  Associate  or  Junior  Member  who,  for  good  reason,  is  unable 
to  pay  them. 

Article  V 
Officers 

1.  Officers 

(a)  The  officers  of  the  Association  shall  be  a  President,  two  Vice  Presidents, 
twelve  Directors,  an  Executive  Secretary  and  a  Treasurer. 

(b)  The  President,  the  Vice  Presidents  and  the  Directors,  together  with  the  two 
latest  living  Past  Presidents  continuing  to  be  Members,  shall  constitute  the  Board  of 
Direction,  in  which  the  government  of  the  Association  shall  be  vested;  they  shall  act 
as  the  trustees  and  have  the  custody  of  all  property  belonging  to  the  Association.  The 
President,  the  Vice  Presidents  and  the  Directors  shall  be  Members. 

(c)  The  Executive  Secretary  and  the  Treasurer  shall  be  appointed  by  the  Board  of 
Direction. 

2.  Term  of  Office 

The  term  of  office  of  the  President  shall  be  one  year,  of  the  Vice  Presidents  two 
years  and  of  the  Directors  three  years.  The  term  of  each  shall  begin  at  the  close  of 
the  annual  convention  at  which  elected  and  continue  until  a  successor  is  qualified. 
All  other  officers  and  employees  shall  hold  office  or  position  at  the  pleasure  of  the  Board 
of  Direction. 

3.  Officers  Elected  Annually 

(a)  There  shall  be  elected  at  each  annual  convention  a  President,  one  Vice  President 
and  four  Directors. 

(b)  The  candidates  for  President  and  for  Vice  President  shall  be  selected  from 
the  members  or  past  members  of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

4.  Conditions  of  Re-election  of  Officers 

A  President  shall  be  ineligible  for  re-election,  except  as  provided  for  in  Section  5  (e) 
of  this  Article.  Vice  Presidents  and  Directors  shall  be  ineligible  for  re-election  to  the  same 
office,  except  as  provided  for  in  Section  S  (e)  of  this  Article,  until,  at  least  one  full 
term  has  elapsed  after  the  end  of  their  respective  terms. 


Constitution  731 


5.  Vacancies  in  Offices 

(a)  If  a  vacancy  should  occur  in  the  office  of  President,  as  set  forth  in  Section  6 
of  this  Article,  the  senior  Vice  President  shall  immediately  and  automatically  become 
President  for  the  unexpired  term. 

(b)  If  a  vacancy  should  occur  in  the  office  of  the  senior  Vice  President,  due  to 
advancement  under  Section  5  (a)  of  this  Article,  or  for  reasons  set  forth  in  Section  6 
of  this  Article,  the  junior  Vice  President  shall  automatically  become  senior  Vice  President 
for  the  unexpired  term. 

(c)  If  a  vacancy  should  occur  in  the  office  of  the  junior  Vice  President,  due  to 
advancement  under  Section  5  (b)  of  this  Article,  or  for  reasons  set  forth  in  Section  6 
of  this  Article,  the  Board  of  Direction  shall  by  the  affirmative  vote  of  two-thirds  of  its 
entire  membership,  select  a  junior  Vice  President  from  the  members  or  past  members 
of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

(d)  A  vacancy  in  the  office  of  Director,  due  to  advancement  of  a  Director  to  junior 
Vice  President  under  Section  5  (c)  of  this  Article,  or  for  reasons  set  forth  in  Section  6 
of  this  Article,  shall  be  filled  by  the  Board  of  Direction  by  the  affirmative  vote  of 
two-thirds  of  its  entire  membership. 

(e)  An  incumbent  in  any  office  for  an  unexpired  term  shall  be  eligible  for  re-election 
to  the  office  held;  provided,  however,  that  anyone  selected  to  fill  a  vacancy  as  Director 
shall  be  eligible  for  election  to  that  office,  excepting  that  such  appointee  filling  out  an 
unexpired  term  of  two  years  or  more  shall  be  considered  as  coming  within  the  provisions 
of  Section  4  of  this  Article. 

6.  Vacation  of  Office 

(a)  In  the  event  of  the  death  of  an  elected  officer,  or  his  resignation  from  office, 
or  if  he  should  cease  to  be  a  Member  of  the  Association  as  provided  in  Section  2  (B), 
Article  II;  Section  6  or  7,  Article  III;  or  Section  3,  Article  IV,  the  office  shall  be  con- 
sidered as  vacated. 

(b)  In  the  event  of  the  disability  of  an  officer  or  neglect  in  the  performance  of  duty 
by  an  officer,  the  Board  of  Direction,  by  the  affirmative  vote  of  two-thirds  of  its  entire 
membership  shall  have  the  power  to  declare  the  office  vacant. 

Article  VI 
Nomination  and  Election  of  Officers 

1.  Nominating  Committee 

(a)  There  shall  be  a  Nominating  Committee  composed  of  the  five  latest  living  Past 
Presidents  of  the  Association,  who  are  Members,  and  five  Members  who  are  not 
officers. 

(b)  The  five  Members  who  are  not  Past  Presidents  shall  be  elected  annually  for  a 
term  of  one  year,  when  the  officers  of  the  Association  are  elected. 

(c)  The  senior  Past  President  who  is  a  member  of  the  committee  shall  be  the 
chairman  of  the  committee.  In  the  absence  of  the  senior  Past  President  from  a  meeting 
of   the   committee   the   Past   President   next   in   seniority   present   shall   act   as   chairman. 

2.  Method  of  Nominating 

(a)  At  least  three  months  prior  to  the  annual  convention,  the  Chairman  shall  call 
a  meeting  of  the  committee  at  a  convenient  place,  at  which  nominees  for  the  several 
elective  offices  shall  be  selected  as  follows: 


732  Constitution 


Number  of  Candi- 

Number  o)  Candi-  dates  to  be 

dates  to  be  named  elected  at  the 

by  the  Nominating  Annual  Election 

Office  to  be  Filled                                            Committee  oj  Officers 

President    1  1 

Vice    President    1  1 

Directors    8  4 

Nominating  Committee    10  5 

(b)  The  Chairman  of  the  Nominating  Committee  shall  send  the  names  of  the 
nominees  to  the  President  and  Executive  Secretary  within  15  days  after  the  meeting 
of  the  Nominating  Committee,  and  the  Executive  Secretary  shall  report  the  names  of 
these  nominees  to  the  members  of  the  Association  not  less  than  60  days  prior  to  the 
annual  convention. 

(c)  At  any  time  prior  to  30  days  before  the  annual  convention,  any  ten  or  more 
Members  may  send  to  the  Executive  Secretary  additional  nominations  for  any  elective 
office  for  the  ensuing  year,  signed  by  such  Members. 

(d)  If  any  person  nominated  shall  be  found  by  the  Board  of  Direction  to  be 
ineligible  for  the  office  for  which  nominated,  or  should  a  nominee  decline  such  nomination, 
his  name  shall  be  withdrawn.  The  Board  of  Direction  may  fill  any  vacancies  that  may 
occur  in  the  list  of  nominees  up  to  the  time  the  ballots  are  sent  out. 

3.  Ballots  Issued 

Not  less  than  thirty  days  prior  to  each  annual  convention,  the  Executive  Secretary 
shall  issue  a  ballot  to  each  voting  Member  of  record  who  has  paid  his  dues  to  or  beyond 
December  31  of  the  previous  year,  listing  the  several  candidates  to  be  voted  upon.  When 
there  is  more  than  one  candidate  for  any  office,  the  names  shall  be  arranged  on  the 
ballot  in  the  order  that  shall  be  determined  by  lot  by  the  Nominating  Committee.  The 
ballot  shall  be  accompanied  by  a  statement  giving  for  each  candidate  his  record  of 
membership  and  activities  in  this  Association. 

4.  Substitution  of  Names 

Members  may  remove  names  from  the  printed  ballot  list  and  may  substitute  the  name 
or  names  of  any  other  person  or  persons  eligible  for  any  office,  but  the  number  of  names 
voted  for  each  office  on  the  ballot  must  not  exceed  the  number  to  be  elected  at  that 
time  to  such  office. 

5.  Ballots 

(a)  Ballots  shall  be  placed  in  an  envelope,  sealed  and  endorsed  with  the  name  of 
the  voter,  and  mailed  to  or  deposited  with  the  Executive  Secretary  at  any  time  previous 
to  the  closure  of  the  polls. 

(b)  A  voter  may  withdraw  his  ballot,  and  cast  another,  at  any  time  before  the  polls 
close. 

(c)  Ballots  received  in  unendorsed  envelopes,  or  from  persons  not  qualified  to  vote, 
shall  not  be  counted. 

(d)  The  ballots  and  envelopes  shall  be  preserved  for  not  less  than  ten  days  after 
the  vote  is  canvassed. 

6.  Closure  of  Polls 

The  polls  shall  be  closed  at  12  o'clock  noon  on  the  first  day  of  the  annual  con- 
vention, and  the  ballots  shall  be  counted  by  tellers  appointed  by  the  presiding  officer. 


Con  s  t  i  L  u  t  i  o  n  733 


7.  Election 

(a)  The  persons  who  shall  receive  the  highest  number  of  votes  for  the  offices  for 
which  they  are  candidates  shall  be  declared  elected. 

(b)  In  case  of  a  tie  between  two  or  more  candidates  for  the  same  office,  the 
Members  present  at  the  annual  convention  shall  elect  the  officer  by  ballot  from  the 
candidates  so  tied. 

(c)  The  presiding  officer  shall  announce  at  the  convention  the  names  of  the  officers 
elected  in  accordance  with  this  Article. 


Article  VII 
Management 

1.  President 

The  President  shall  have  general  supervision  of  the  affairs  of  the  Association,  shall 
preside  at  meetings  of  the  Association  and  of  the  Board  of  Direction,  and,  by  virtue 
of  his  office,  shall  be  a  member  of  all  committees,  except  the  Nominating  Committee. 

2.  Vice  Presidents 

The  Vice  Presidents,  in  order  of  seniority,  shall  preside  at  meetings  in  the  absence 
of  the  President. 

3.  Treasurer 

The  Treasurer  shall  pay  all  bills  of  the  Association  when  properly  certified  by  the 
Executive  Secretary  and  approved  by  the  Finance  Committee.  He  shall  make  an  annual 
report  as  to  the  financial  condition  of  the  Association  and  such  other  reports  as  may  be 
called  for  by  the  Board  of  Direction. 

4.  Executive  Secretary 

The  Executive  Secretary,  under  the  direction  of  the  President  and  Board  of  Direc- 
tion shall  be  the  Executive  Officer  of  the  Association  and  shall  attend  the  meetings  of  the 
Association  and  of  the  Board  of  Direction,  prepare  the  business  therefor,  and  record  the 
proceedings  thereof.  The  Executive  Secretary  shall  see  that  all  money  due  the  Associa- 
tion is  collected,  is  credited  to  the  proper  accounts,  and  is  deposited  in  the  designated 
depository  of  the  Association,  with  receipt  to  the  Treasurer  therefor.  He  shall  personally 
certify  to  the  accuracy  of  all  bills  and  vouchers  on  which  money  is  to  be  paid.  He  shall 
invest  all  funds  of  the  Association  not  needed  for  current  disbursements,  as  shall  be 
recommended  by  the  Finance  Committee  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Direction,  with 
notification  to  the  Treasurer  of  such  investments.  The  Executive  Secretary  shall  conduct 
the  correspondence  of  the  Association,  make  an  annual  report  to  the  Association,  and 
perform  such  other  duties  as  the  Board  of  Direction  may  prescribe. 

5.  Auditing  of  Accounts 

The  financial  accounts  of  the  Association  shall  be  audited  annually  by  an  accountant 
or  accountants  approved  by  and  under  the  direction  of  the  Finance  Committee. 

6.  Board  of  Direction  and  Executive  Committee 

(a)  The  Board  of  Direction  shall  manage  the  affairs  of  the  Association,  and  shall 
have  full  power  to  control  and  regulate  all  matters  not  otherwise  provided  for  in  the 
Constitution. 


734  Constitution 


(b)  The  Board  of  Direction  shall  meet  within  thirty  days  after  each  annual 
convention,  and  at  such  other  times  as  the  President  may  direct.  Special  meetings  shall 
be  called  on  request,  in  writing,  of  five  members  of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

(c)  Seven  members  of  the  Board  of  Direction  shall  constitute  a  quorum. 

(d)  At  the  first  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Direction  after  the  annual  convention, 
the  President  shall  appoint  from  the  membership  of  the  Board,  subject  to  ratification 
by  the  Board,  four  members  to  serve  with  him  as  an  Executive  Committee  which  shall 
possess  and  may  exercise  during  intervals  between  meetings  of  the  Board,  all  of  the 
powers  of  the  Board  on  matters  which  in  the  judgment  of  a  majority  of  the  Executive 
Committee  cannot  properly  be  delayed  until  the  next  meeting  of  the  Board.  Actions 
of  the  Executive  Committee  shall  be  reported  to  the  Board  of  Direction  at  the  next 
meeting  of  the  Board.  The  President  shall  be  chairman  of  the  Executive  Committee. 
Actions  of  the  Executive  Committee  shall  be  authorized  by  a  concurring  majority  of 
its  full  membership.  Members  of  the  Executive  Committee  shall  serve  until  their  succes- 
sors are  appointed  or  until  the  Executive  Committee  is  dissolved  by  action  of  a  majority 
of  the  full  membership  of  the  Board  of  Direction.  Following  dissolution  of  the  Executive 
Committee  it  may  be  re-created  at  any  time  by  action  of  a  majority  of  the  full  mem- 
bership of  the  Board  of  Direction.  If  not  so  re-created  prior  to  the  next  annual  con- 
vention, the  Executive  Committee  shall  be  reconstituted  in  the  normal  manner  at  the 
first  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Direction  following  the  convention. 

7.  Administrative  Committees 

At  the  first  meeting  of  the  Board  of  Direction  after  the  annual  convention,  the 
following  Administrative  Committees,  each  consisting  of  not  less  than  three  members, 
shall  be  appointed  by  the  President.  The  personnel  of  these  committees  shall  be  subject 
to  approval  by  the  Board  of  Direction. 

Assignments 

Finance 

Manual 

Membership 

Personnel 

Publications 

Research 

Other  special  Administrative  Committees  may  be  appointed  by  the  President  at 
any  time,  and  reappointed  annually,  if  necessary,  their  personnel  being  subject  to 
approval  by   the  Board  of  Direction. 

Membership  on  Administrative  Committees  shall  be  restricted  to  members  of  the 
Board  of  Direction,  except  that  one  or  two  members  of  the  Administrative  Committee 
on  Research  may  be  past  members  of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

8.  Study  and  Research  Committees 

The  Board  of  Direction  may  establish  continuing  or  special  Study  and  Research 
Committees  to  investigate,  consider,  and  report  upon  subjects  appropriate  to  the  object 
of   the  Association,  as  set  forth  in  Art.   I. 

9.  Duties  of  Administrative  Committees 

(a)   Assignments 

The  Assignments  Committee  shall  review  and  pass  upon  the  recommendations  of 
Association  Study  and  Research  Committees  for  subjects  to  be  investigated,  considered 
and   reported   on   by   these   committees   during   the  ensuing  Association   year,   and   shall 


Constitution  735 


report  thereon  to  the  Board  of  Direction  for  its  approval.  The  Assignments  Committee 
shall  have  authority  to  assign  additional  subjects  or  change  the  scope  of  any  existing 
subjects  at  any  time  during  the  year,  reporting  its  action  thereon  to  the  Board  at  its 
next  regular  meeting. 

(b)  Finance 

The  Finance  Committee  shall  have  immediate  supervision  of  the  accounts  and 
financial  affairs  of  the  Association;  shall  approve  all  bills  before  payment,  and  shall 
make  recommendations  to  the  Board  of  Direction  as  to  the  investment  of  funds  and 
other  financial  matters.  The  Finance  Committee  shall  not  have  the  power  to  incur 
debts  or  other  obligations  binding  the  Association,  nor  authorize  the  payment  of  money 
other  than  the  amounts  necessary  to  meet  ordinary  current  expenses  of  the  Association, 
except  by  authority  of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

(c)  Manual 

The  Manual  Committee,  with  the  assistance  of  the  Publications  Committee,  shall 
have   general   supervision   over   the   Manual. 

(d)  Membership 

The  Membership  Committee  shall  investigate  applicants  for  membership  and  shall 
make  recommendations  to  the  Board  of  Direction  with  reference  thereto. 

(e)  Personnel 

The  Personnel  Committee  shall  review  and  pass  upon  applications  of  members 
for  appointment  to  Study  and  Research  Committees,  and  shall  also  appoint  the  chair- 
man and  vice  chairman  of  such  committees  and  make  a  report  thereon  to  the  Board 
of  Direction  for  its  approval.  Should  an  unexpected  vacancy  in  chairmanship  or  vice 
chairmanship  of  any  such  committee  occur,  the  Personnel  Committee  shall  have  author- 
ity to  fill  such  vacancy  immediately,  reporting  its  action  thereon  to  the  Board  at  its 
next  regular  meeting. 

(f)  Publications 

The  Publications  Committee  shall  have  general  supervision  over  the  publications 
of  the  Association.  The  Publications  Committee  shall  not  have  the  power  to  incur 
debts  or  other  obligations  binding  the  Association,  nor  authorize  the  payment  of  money 
except   by   authority   of   the   Board   of   Direction. 

(g)  Research 

The  Research  Committee  shall  encourage  and  coordinate  the  research  activities  of 
the  Association,  in  the  course  of  accomplishment  of  which  it  shall  review  and  pass 
upon  the  recommendations  of  Study  and  Research  Committees  for  research  projects  and 
shall  report  thereon  to  the  Board  of  Direction,  recommending  for  approval  specific 
projects  initiated  by  these  committees  or  by  the  Research  Committee  and  recommending 
allotments  of  funds  for  these  projects  in  the  research  budget  of  the  Association  of 
American  Railroads  or  from  other  sources  compatible  therewith;  shall  collaborate  closely 
with  the  research  staff  of  the  Association  of  American  Railroads;  and  when  called  upon 
by  the  Vice  President — Research  or  the  Vice  President — Operations  and  Maintenance 
of  that  association,  members  of  the  Research  Committee  shall  engage  in  the  activities 
of  advisory  committees  or  groups  of  that  organization  and  shall  report  from  time  to 
time  to   the  Board  of   Direction  on  those  activities. 

10.  Special  Committees 

The  Board  of  Direction  may  appoint  special  committees  to  examine  into  and  report 
upon  any  subject  connected  with   the  objects  of  this  Association. 


736  Constitution 


11.  Discussion  by  Non-Members 

The  Board  of  Direction  may  invite  discussions  of  reports  from  persons  not  members 
of  the  Association. 

12.  Sanction  of  Act  of  Board  of  Direction 

An  act  of  the  Board  of  Direction  which  shall  have  received  the  expressed  or  implied 
sanction  of  the  membership  at  the  next  annual  convention  of  the  Association  shall  be 
deemed  to  be  the  act  of  the  Association. 

Article  VIII 
Meetings 

1.  Annual  Convention 

(a)  The  Annual  Convention  of  the  Association  shall  be  held  in  the  City  of  Chicago, 
111.  or  in  such  other  city  as  may  be  determined  by  the  affirmative  vote  of  two-thirds 
of  the  entire  membership  of  the  Board  of  Direction.  The  convention  in  any  year  shall 
be  held  on  dates  determined  by  the  affirmative  vote  of  two-thirds  of  the  entire  mem- 
bership of  the  Board  of  Direction. 

(b)  The  Executive  Secretary  shall  notify  all  members  of  the  Association  of  the  time 
and  place  of  the  annual  convention  at  least  30  days  in  advance  thereof. 

(c)  The  order  of  business  at  the  annual  convention  of  the  Association  shall  be: 
Reading  of  the  minutes  of  the  last  meeting 

Address  of  the  President 

Reports  of   the  Executive  Secretary   and  the  Treasurer 

Reports  of  committees 

Unfinished   business 

New  business 

Installation  of  officers 

Adjournment 

(d)  This  order  of  business  may  be  changed  by  a  majority  vote  of  Members  present 

(e)  The  proceedings  shall  be  governed  by  "Robert's  Rules  of  Order"  except  as 
otherwise  herein  provided. 

(f)  Discussions  shall  be  limited  to  Members  and  to  those  others  invited  by  the 
presiding  officer  to  speak. 

2.  Special  Meetings 

Special  meetings  of  the  Associations  may  be  called  by  the  Board  of  Directions  on  its 
own  initiative,  and  may  be  so  called  by  the  Board  of  Direction  upon  written  request 
of  100  Members.  The  request  shall  state  the  purpose  of  such  meeting. 

The  call  for  such  special  meeting  shall  be  issued  not  less  than  ten  days  in  advance 
of  the  proposed  date  of  such  meeting  and  shall  state  the  purpose  and  place  of  the 
meeting.  No  other  business  shall  be  taken  up  at  such  meeting. 

3.  Quorum 

Twenty-five  Members  shall  constitute  a  quorum  at  all  meetings  of  the  Association. 

Article  IX 
Amendment 
1.  Amendment 

Proposed  amendment  of  this  Constitution  shall  be  made  in  writing,  shall  be  signed 
by  not  less  than  ten  Members,  and  shall  be  acted  upon  in  the  following  manner: 


Constitution  737 


The  amendment  shall  be  presented  to  the  Executive  Secretary,  who  shall  send  a 
copy  to  each  member  of  the  Board  of  Direction  as  soon  as  received.  If  a  majority  of 
the  entire  Board  of  Direction  so  votes,  the  matter  shall  be  submitted  to  the  Association 
by  letter  ballot. 

Sixty  days  after  the  date  of  issue  of  the  letter  ballot,  the  Board  of  Direction  shall 
canvass  the  ballots  which  have  been  received,  and  if  two-thirds  of  such  ballots  are  in 
the  affirmative  the  amendment  shall  be  declared  adopted  and  shall  become  effective  imme- 
diately. The  result  of  the  letter  ballot  shall  be  announced  to  members  of  the  Association. 


null.  r.7i» 


Advance    Report   of    Committee   3 — Ties   and   Wood    Preservation 

Report  on  Assignment  5 

Service  Records 

W.  F.  Arksey  (chairman,  subcommittee)  A.  B.  Baker,  C.  M.  Burpee,  C.  E.  DeGeer, 
K.  C.  Edscorn,  F.  J.  Fudge,  VV.  E.  Fuhr,  H.  M.  Harlow,  R.  P.  Hughes,  W.  E. 
Laird,    R.   W.   Orr,    C.   A.   Peebles,   R.   B.   Radkev,   J.   T.   Slocomb,   E.   F.   Snyder, 

L.  F.  Strohl. 

Tie  Renewals  and  Cost  per  Mile  of  Maintained  Track 

The  annual  statistics  compiled  by  the  Bureau  of  Railway  Economics,  AAR,  provid- 
ing information  on  cross  tie  renewals  and  cost  data  for  1962  are  presented  herewith 
in  Tables  A  and  B. 

The  1962  figures  for  the  Class  I  Roads  of  the  United  States  as  a  whole  compared 
with  1961  are  as  follows: 

Total  New  Wooden  Renewals 

Year  Ties  Renewed  Per  Mile 

1961     10,999,747  35 

1962     12,402,222  40 

S-year  average,  1958  to  1962,  incl 43 

The  average  cost  in  1961  was  $3.87  and  in  1962,  $3.90.  As  noted  on  the  tables 
these  figures  represent  storekeepers  average  cost  of  ties  charged  out;  they  are  not  the 
actual  cost   or  prices  paid  for  the  ties  purchased  during  the  period. 

In  the  statistics  for  1961  and  previous  years,  separation  was  made  in  Table  A 
between  treated  and  untreated  new  wood  cross  ties  laid  in  replacement.  For  the  1962 
statistics,  however,  for  the  sake  of  simplification,  and  on  the  basis  that  very  few 
untreated  ties  are  being  installed  these  days,  no  such  separation  was  made;  all  new 
wood  cross  ties  laid  in  replacement  were  lumped  together.  This  permitted  the  elimina- 
tion of  five  columns  in  Table  A.  Also,  the  figures  for  cross  ties  other  than  wood  installed 
in   1962   were  omitted  from  Table  A. 


738 


Region  and  R< 


NEW  ENGLAND  REGION: 
Bangor  &  Aroostook 
Boston  &  Maine 
Canadian  Pacific  (lii 
Central  Vermont 
Maine  Central 
New  York  Conm 
New  York, New  Have 


"8 


Total 

GREAT  LAKES  REGION: 
Ann  Arbor 
Delaware  &  Hudson 
Detroit  &  Toledo  She 
Erie* Lackawanna 
Grand  Trunk  Western 
Lehigh  &  Hudson  Rive 
Lehigh  Valley 
Monongahela 
New  York  Central 
New  York. Chicago  &  SI 
New  York, Susquehanna 
Pittsburgh  &  Lake  Er 
Pittsburgh  &  West  Vi: 
Wabash 

Total 


CENTRAL  EASTERN  REGIO: 
Akron, Canton  &  Young 
Baltimore  &  Ohio 
Bessemer  &  Lake  Erie 
Central  R.R.of  New  J. 
Chicago  &  Eastern  II 
Chicago  &  Illinois  M 
Detroit  .Toledo  &  Iro: 
Elgin, Joliet  &  Easte 
Illinois  Terminal 

Long  Island 

Missouri-Illinois 

Morion 

Pennsylvania 

Penna .-Reading  Seash. 

ReadinR  Company 


State 
Weste 


Island   Rapid 
n  Maryland 


Total 


POCAHONTAS  REGION: 
Chesapeake  &  Ohio 
Norfolk  &  Western 
Richmond  , Fred 'burg  £> 


Total 


SOUTHERN  REGION: 
Alabama  Great  Southe 
Alabama , Tennessee  &  '■ 
Atlanta  &  St .Andrews 
Atlanta  &  West  Point 
Atlantic  Coast  Line 


Carolina  &  Northwest' 
Central  of  Georgia 
Cincinnati, New  Orleai 
Cllnchfield 
Florida  East  Coaat 
Saorgli 

Ceorgla  &  Florida 
Ceorgla  Southern  &  F 
Gulf, Mobile  6  Ohio 

Illlnoll  Central 

Louisville  &  Nathvil 
New  Orleans  &  Northe. 
Norfolk  Southern 
Piedmont  &  Northern 
Savannah  &  Atlanta 
Seaboard  Air  Line 
Southern 

Tennessee  Central 
Western  Ry .  of  Alabai 


[   CANADIAN    RAILROADS 


SZ  <•"",« 

rljor 

Sl«"(t5ou"nSo'. 

-■»-..  ........                  I 

Region   and   R      d 

**"  tl" 

^°Jd 

ss 

HI* 

SL 

,o„l 

T 

r'Lwll' 

"uir 

Sen.w.l 

""oS" 



— 

Average 

1 

2 

3 

* 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

„ 

l2 

6  730 
40  283 

3.S2 

2    305 

11 

2  245   392 
1   232   286 

mi 

l   259  907 

IK 

':K 

■  00 

8390 

19.82c 

New   York, New   Haven  6,  Hartford 

»iS 

5.84 
3.83 

1   095 
3  239 

)- 

3  277   253 

3    132 

15  III  «8 

ii 

l:s9 

28 

246 

9.35 

Total 

284  S70 

3.83 

8  091.72 

24   386  957 

3   014 

31   198  566 

3  856 

1.17 

35 

135 

3.50 

GREAT   LAKES   REGION. 
Erie -Lackawanna 

8   241 

166 

4  582 

3  386 

4.31 
5.71 

397 
1    151 

87 

02 

1  210  341 
3  513  956 

ii 

"  "I  HI 

»| 

.68 

» 

,08 

4:0; 

Lehigh   Valley 

54  305 

3.93 
4.80 

525 

914 

231 
17  086 

75 

282   100 
52  569  575 

Ik 

aimm 

ii 

.:« 

46 
24 

210 

2.26 

Pittsburgh  &  Lake  Erie 
Pittsburgh  &  West   Virginia 

lis 

I'm 

30   HI 

3   III 

* 

557  527 

is 

1  050  906 

7    796 

i£ 

s 

286 

189 

Total 

409  258 

4.74 

559  991 

36  718.13 

112  413  573 

3  062 

236  639  440 

6   445 

.36 

11 

53 

.82 

CEKTRAL   EASTERN  REGION: 

871 
51   148 

II 

16  311 

645  806 

3  242  860 
3  815  629 

3   043 

ill 

3   779 

.13 

s 

ii 

ii 

Chicaso   6.   Eastern    Illinois 

9  559 

95 

Elgin, Jollet   4  Extern 

5    030 
28  395 
23  552 

If, 

16 

l 

830 

75 

496  296 
1   738  541 

1    130  635 

I Z 

2  511  til 

i:H 

1 

5:il 

-  ■  -    ..    .         -;--■; 

324 

4.34 

"m 

55 
so 

1   320  910 

2   867 

"SIS 

>.» 

ii 

5 

3.92 

Staten    Island    Rapid   Transit 
Western  KaryUnd 

>if» 

Mi 

nL' 

35 

3  266  373 

2    903 

7   III   "o' 

6   309 

1   78 

52 

Al 

S:JS 

Total 

1    824   121 

4.05 

40  899 

39  876.67 

114  877  505 

2  881 

272  405   283 

6  831 

1.59 

46 

IBS 

2.71 

POCAHONTAS   REGION 

ss 

4.23 

39   344 

8  255.93 
407.87 

24  610  317 

15  998  460 
1  320  684 

3  100 
3  238 

54  836  604 

£ 

J! 

IS 

:l 

Rlchstond, Fred 'burg  &  Potomac 

Total 

347  861 

4.50 

39  491 

13  824.60 

42   129  481 

3  047 

130   Z12  040 

9  419 

.63 

25 

113 

1.20 

9   33B 
9  619 

3.66 

1  675  061 

360  502 

U  617  025 

3   110 

40   904   226 

5  620 

2.59 

87 

370 
272 

!:" 

7  278 

SSl&SrSL-. »  t.p. 

296  750 

Si 

33 

3  503  070 

2  956 

iiss 

Will 

!:l 

l" 

348 

l|| 

Georgia 

Georgia  Southern  L  Florida 

3.50 

13 

,.H 

368 

994  842 

1  Old 

«   491  fi™ 

f,   074 

'-HQ 

62 

744 

2.38 

4. OS 

jj*U'J!|U'  ^Northeaatern 

289  003 

2.76 

23  059  851 
870  991 

579  604 

481   772 

3  083 

!as 

? !" 

il 

70 

500 

20.55 

Seaboard   Air   Line 

c    391   49l 
270  953 
33  376 

£    4.61 

5   659 

';' 

"is  a 

USS 

"!  486 

4   "J 

siSo 

« 

m 

'lis 

,.u. 

2  922  471 

3.93 

24  2,9 

51    357.29 

155    376  86! 

3  025 

301  640  996 

5   873 

1.66 

57 

_i^J 

Region  an 


NORTHWESTERN  REGIO 
Chicago  &  North  W 
Chicago  Great  Wes 
Chicago, Milw. ,St . 
Duluth.Missabe  & 
Duluth .Winnipeg  &. 
Great  Northern 
Green  Bay  &  Weste 
Lake  Superior  &  I 
Minneapol is , North 
Northern  Pacific 


Soo  Line  R.R.  Co. 
Spokane  Intemati 
Spokane, Port  land 


CENTRAL  WESTERN  RE< 


Atchison, Topeka  & 
Chicago, Burlingtoi 
Chicago, Rock  Islal 
Colorado  &  Southe 
Colorado  &  Wyotnin 


Denver  &  Rio  Gran' 
Fort  Worth  &  Denv 
Northwestern  Paci 
Pacific  Electric 
Southern  Pacific 


Toledo, Peoria  &  W 
Union  Pacific 
Western  Pacific 


SOUTHWESTERN  REGIO 


Kansas  City  South 
Kansas , Oklahoma  & 
Louisiana  &  Arkan 
Missouri-Kansas-T 
Missouri  Pacifi 


Quanah.Acrae  &  Pac 
St .Louis-San  Fran 
St .Louis, San  Fran 
St .Louis  Southwes 
Texas  St  Pacific 
Texas  Mexican 

Total 

Grand  Total  -  Uni' 

CANADIAN  ROADS: 
Canadian  National 
Canadian  Pacific 
Ontario  &  Northlai 


:iST!CS    (EXCLUDING   SWITCH  «.  BRIDGE)    FOR  CUSS  ,   RUUOADS  I»  THE  UNITED  STATES  . 
Calendar   year  ended  December   31,    1962 


=   CANADIAN   RAILROADS 


Region  and  Road 

Wooden  cross   t 

m"t 

Track  maintained   by 

Equated  gros 
miles    (thous 

ands)   a 

N7w  across  tie                   1 

New  ties 

Second 
3 

Total 

Total 

Cross 
mile 

Total 

mile 

renewal 
to  all 

laid 

mile 

1,000 

1 

2 

NORTHWESTERN   REGION  - 
Chicago  &  North  Western 

Chicago, Hilw., St. Paul   t,   Pac. 
Duluth.Missabe  &   Iron  Range 
Duluth. Winnipeg  &  Pacific 

355   482 
154  723 
345   528 
72   251 
7    539 

$4.62 
3.50 

4.45 
3.54 

182  948 
32  919 

13  591.51 

13  062.63 
962.24 

205.92 

40  463  628 
5  356  026 

39  746  939 
2   866  497 

2  977 

3  002 
3  043 
2   979 

38  486  725 
7  516  516 

46  666  7  31 
3  638  032 

2   632 

.88 
2.89 

26 
87 
26 

75 

$126 
334 

4.46c 
7.22 
3.05 
8.84 

Creen   Bay  &  Western 
Lake    Superior  &   Ishpeming 
Minneapolis .Northfleld  &   Sou. 
Northern  Pacific 

2   642 

23  472 

2    919 

480  960 

4.22 

3.19 
3.99 

267^75 

282.70 

86.22 

9  076.57 

31    236  542 
771    120 
687   900 
208  266 

3  118 
2   860 
2   433 

51    180  440 
567   574 
149   320 
262   780 

5    109 

2  120 
528 

3  048 

1.58 
.34 
3.41 

10 

83 

235 

265 
135 

50 

-■■..: 
17 

EE.SSSTL.u. 

9  093 
70  256 

4.50 
4.36 

5   265.73 

177.96 

I    143.43 

16   108   145 

521    509 

3  527  000 

3  059 

2  930 

3  085 

15   523  046 
378  780 

6  971    127 

2   948 
6  097 

1.74 
1.99 

23 

51 

230 
268 

10 

BO 
19 

Total 

2    141   893 

4.27 

265  464 

55   924.03 

168   391  093 

3  on 

212   432   788 

3   799 

1.27 

38 

k 

CENTRAL  WESTERN  REGION: 

451  720 
282  730 

452  936 
23  328 

1   444 

3.41 
3.65 
3.16 
4.07 
4.57 

74  030 
2   445 

19  592.68 

11   203.48 

9   690.00 

772.30 

104.82 

62  559  427 

34  596   345 

28  876   103 

2   276   740 

337   994 

3   193 
3  088 
2  980 

2  948 

3  225 

165   894  905 

62   844  949 
48  811  088 
3  639  277 

8  467 
5   609 
5  037 
4  712 

.72 
.82 
1.57 

23 

25 

30 

123 

Chicago. Burlington  &  Qulncy 
Chicago. Rock   Island  &  Pac. 

Colorado  &  Wyoming 

: 

2 

93 

93 
61 

Fort  Worth  &  Denver 
Northwestern  Pacific 
Pacific    Electric 
Southern  Pacific   Co. 

12  902 

10   728 
848  595 

3.68 
3.52 
2.41 
3.36 

403 

3  042.94 

1    256.07 

428.87 

371.00 

16   642.02 

9   420  554 
3  779  271 
1   222   280 
I  068  470 

50  070  000 

3  096 

2   850 

2  880 

3  009 

17   554  849 

S   262  430 

1   817    712 

346  952 

5   769 

4  238 
935 

.55 
1.05 
1.06 

1.00 

32 

30 
29 

70 
116 
106 

I 

:. 

76 
50 

Union  Pacific 

765  056 
91  517 

4.26 

13    388.43 
1  553,85 

918  847 
37   837   512 
4  637   434 

3    168 
2   826 
2  984 

129  090   71c 

13  499   732 

3  469 
9  642 
8  668 

.55 
2.02 

1.97 

18 

57 
59 

288 

2 

53 

Total 

3  037   951 

3.66 

87    118 

78  336.50 

237    600  977 

3  033 

615   131   783 

7   852 

1.28 

39 

142 

1.81 

SOUTHWESTERN  REGION: 
Kansas   City    Southern 

Louisiana  &  Arkansas 

Missouri -Kansas -Texas 

35  886 

36  101 
111   511 

619   238 

3.05 

3.08 
3.40 

3.23 

10  476 

1    384.91 
240 . 34 
892 .49 

3  452.55 
11   423.59 

4  377    856 

2   908  057 

10  952  579 
35   226   340 

3  161 

3  258 

3   172 
3  084 

9  514  716 

4  710  078 
12   358  959 

66   480   585 

4  768 

5  277 
3  580 

5    820 

.82 

1.31 
1.02 

26 

43 
32 

131 
110 
175 

2.49 
3.07 

3.01 

Quanah.Acae  6.  Pacific 

St .Louis-San  Francisco 

St .Louis, San   Francisco  &  Tex, 

St  .Louis  Southwestern 

Texas  &  Pacific 

4  687 
e   441   877 

110   946 

11  005 

4.28 
e    3.06 

3.40 
3.29 

2.78 

370 

144.62 

5   774.60 

152.94 

1  755.66 

2  205.88 
238.95 

456   156 

18  156  291 

489  408 

5  362  240 

6  444  660 
756  994 

3    168 
3   144 
3  200 
3  054 

2  922 

3  168 

438   105 
28   129   307 

650   161 
17   607   826 

17    194   126 
203  092 

3  029 

4  251 
7   795 

1.02 
2.24 

1.45 

32 

63 
23 

46 

139 
234 

215 

128 

4.81 
4.41 
2.14 
.95 
15.04 

Total 

1   434  097 

3.19 

10   848 

27   666.53 

85   865   365 

3   104 

158  432   955 

5   727 

1.67 

52 

166 

2.89 

Grand  Total    -   United   States 

12   402   222 

3.90 

1    028   110 

311    795.47 

941  041  834 

3  016 

1  958  093  851 

6  280 

1.32 

40 

155 

2.47 

CANADIAN   ROADS: 

1  u98  021 
1   22U  685 

100  2U 

2.77 
2.88 
3.86 

: 

29  327- 

20  821.33 
663.7 

85  993  211 
60  861  751 
1  991  302 

2  932 

2  923 

3  000 

80  927   211 
2  351  605 

f 
3  732 

3  ^58 

1.7 
2.01 
5.03 

51 
59 
151 

UJ. 
167 
583 

11^18 

16.U 

b      Includes 

d      Includes 
e      Includes 

108  concret 
641  concret 
4.930  narrc* 
1,056  concr 

"r.i: 

cost   of    $12 
cost  of   $13 

e  cost    of    $ 

97. 

17. 

f  $2.14. 

3.05. 

z::l 

CaTsenVer   ser\ 

tenders 

in    frelgh 

NEW   ENGLAND   REGICtt 


Bang 
Bost 


U   Aroost 
6,  Maine 
adian  Pacifi 
tral  Vermont 


Maine  Central 
New  York  Connect 
New  York, New  Hav 


Tot  a 


GREAT  LAKES  REGICtt 
Ann  Arbor 
Delaware  &  Huds 
Detroit  6.  Toled 
Erie-Lackawanna 
Grand  Trunk  West 


Lehigh  6.  Hudson 
Lehigh  Valley 
Monongahela 
New  York  Central 
New  York .Chicago 


New  York.Susqueh 
Pittsburgh  &  Lak 
Pittsburgh  &  We 
Wabash 


Tota 


CENTRAL  EASTERN  RE 


Akron, Canton  &  Y 
Baltimore  6.  Oh 
Bessemer  &  Lak 
Central  R.R.of  N 
Chicago  &  Easter 


lllino 
Detroit , Toll 
Elgin, Jolie 
Illinois  Te 
Long  Island 


Missouri-Illino 
Monon 

Pennsylvania 
Penna. -Reading  S 
Reading  Company 


Staten  Island  Ra 

Western  Maryland 


POCAHONTAS  REGION 


Chesapeake  &  Ohi 
Norfolk  4  West 
Richmond, Fred 'bu 


lot 


SOUTHERN  REGION 
Alabama  Great  So 
Alabama  ,Tennesse< 
Atlanta  &  St .And 
Atlanta  &  West  P 
Atlantic  Coast 


Carolina  6  Northv 
Central  of  Georg 
Cincinnati, New  0 
Cllnchfield 
Florida  East  Coal 


loridJ 


Georgl 
Ceorgl 

Georgia  Southe 
Gulf, Mobile  4  Ohl 
Illinois  Central 


Louisville  6  Nasi 
New  Orleans  &  Not 
Norfolk  Southern 
Piedmont  4  North< 
Savannah  &  At  1 


Seaboard  Air  Lln< 
Southern  Ry . 
Tennessee  Central 
Western  Ry.of  Alt 

Total 


II                   

M- 

"*"(; 

■IE  3 

-™.;, 

i<\:i:t 

Aggre 

lll'oYl 

."»!„« 

"reck 

enev.aU 

?" -VZT^ZVX-^ 

1958 

"» 

,960 

1961 

1962 

average 

1958 

.95, 

1960 

1,61 

1,62 

average 

1958         19 

1,60 

1,61 

1,62 

Lrrage 

NEW   EMGIANfi   RFmiiTN- 

148 
20 

i! 

126 

10. 

95 

122 

302 

S398 
310 

S416 

5391 

$390 

245 

2  80         2 

5 

;i 

2  69 

"; 

;i 

£!^a.-^ 

New   York   Connecting 

138 

70 

s 

S 

26 

91 

269 
679 

254 

III 

232 

469 

lie 

1.05 

.14 
30 

102 

I'M 

l'n 

Is 

Total 

47 

45 

4! 

36 

35 

41 

175 

167 

153 

145 

135 

155 

1.64         1 

49 

1.34 

1.26 

1.17 

1.38 

GREAT   LAKES   REGION: 

39 

63 

18 

25 
20 
37 

:» 

21 

85 

"2 

,06 

'el 

1.08          1 

ii 

l| 

S 

.68 

"■I 

£SdFsh™  u"* 

Lehigh  Valley 

27 

23 

39 
24 
35 

46 

36 

5 

28 

16 

121 

150 

91 

153 

:55    1 

B9 

l:« 

.80 

iS 

l:°o 

Pittsburgh  &  Lake    Erie 

60 

40 

8 
62 
62 

45 

63 
23 

59 

16 
53 
31 

207 

5 

20 

123 
154 

.36      _1 

s 

i 

.88 

.05 
.59 

105 

Total 

28 

32 

26 

9 

11 

21 

101 

131 

91 

40 

53 

83 

.91          1 

03 

.83 

.30 

.36 

.69 

CENTRAL   EASTERN   REGION 

80 
5S 

45 

39 
41 

45 

5 

80 

19 

30 

3 

172 
361 
56 

210 

246 
279 

299 

267 
205 

244 

.09 

38 

l'so 

2.80 

1*07 

.17 

B.it?;orrr»io°"n^cwn 

Central   R.R.of  New  Jersey 
Chlcaao  4.   Eastern   Illinois 

Detroit .Toledo  &   Ironton 
Elgin, Jollet  &  Eastern 
Illinois  Terminal 

38 
30 

22 

38 
42 
69 

17 
55 
53 

33 
37 
26 

30 
5 

32 
35 

22 
54 

135 
97 
48 

243 

303 

219 
223 

140 
254 

133 

111 
136 

131 

130 

.88         1 

.39          1 

52 

'S 

l:S 

.99 

1.15 

1.98 

Penn^Readlng  Seashore  Lines 

19 
51 

50 

66 

50 

52 

175 

153 

13 

.60 

.61 

36 

45 

-" 

2.30 

.93 

1.85 

1.23 

Staten  Island  Rapid  Transit 

4? 

683 

47 

52 

52 

45 

199 

271 

229 

228 

1  55         2 

16 

1.83 

1.60 

I  78 

1  78 

Total 

40 

48 

38 

41 

46 

43 

163 

191 

141 

161 

185 

168 

1.39          1 

6fi 

1.31 

1.41 

1.59 

1.47 

pnr.AHflNTAS  REGION: 

53 

29 

g 

21 

25 

28 

142 

!S 

195 

ii 

!S 

77 

1.08 

97 

IS 

:ll 

.83 

1:SI 

Richmond, Fred 'burg   &   Potomac 

Total 

30 

21 

28 

20 

25 

25 

116 

80 

115 

84 

113 

102 

.98 

67 

.,2 

.65 

.83 

.81 

VJHTHERN   REGION: 

39 

51 

86 

70 

34 
68 

69 

56 

72 

245 

434 

135 

335 

231 

306 
277 

2.61          2 

V- 

2.24 

.60 

i.u 

1.30 
2.H 

ss-JTsi'sr" 

gSjrt*.?  Sorgu'"" 

39 
99 

93 

65 

59 
65 

25 

75 

l°b°7 

163 
340 
S93 

295 

475 
348 

321 

340 
303 
250 

Is  I 

22 

Is 

!l£ 

.62 

\1 

G.orgL 

156 
57 

80 

106 

i" 

172 

106 
62 

57 

67 
54 

323 

445 
224 

469 

359 

399 

295 

188 

1.53          1 

' 

9.80 

II 

t:S 

in 

105 

1. 

123 

143 
164 

36 

158 

241 
340 
365 

382 
252 

714 
642 

500 

292 
278 

lis  5 

87 

2.55 

;:« 

2.35 

ii 

Southern  Ry- 

WesterTRy.o*  Alabama 

1 

| 

«: 

s 

ii 

101 

ii 

312 

s 

S3 

156 

186 

IS    2 

1 

lis 

3.06 

1.05 

2.39 

65 

63 

60 

49 

57 

60 

263 

236 

233 

196 

225 

231 

2.26         2 

06 

1.97 

1.62 

1.88 

1.97 

NORTHWESTERN  R 


Chicago  &  No 
Chicago  Grea 
Chicago ,Milw 
Duluth.Missa 
Duluth.Winni 


Great  Northe 
Green  Bay  & 
Lake  Super io 
Minneapolis , 
Northern  Pac 


Soo  Line  R.R 
Spokane  Inte 
Spokane .Port 


CENTRAL  HESTER 


Atchison, Top 
Chic ago, Burl 
Chicago, Rock 
Colorado  &  S 
Colorado  &  W 


Denver  &  Rio 
Fort  Worth  & 
Northwestern 
Pacific  Elec 
Southern  Pac 


Toledo, Peori 
Union  Pacifi 
Western  Paci 


SOUTHWESTERN  R 


Kansas  City 
Kansas, Oklah 
Louisiana  & 
Missouri-Kan 
Missouri  Pac 


Quanah.Acme 
St.  Louis-Sa 
St  .  Louis ,Sa 
St.  Louis  So 
Texas  &  Paci 
Texas  Mexica 


Grand  Total 


CANADIAN  ROADS 


Canadian  Nat 
Canadian  Pac 
Ontario  Nort 


Table  B 
«  AND  ACHATE  COST  OK  NEW  WOOD  CROSS  „  RENEWALS  PER  raLE  0F  HAImAINED  TRACK  MD  „„„  op  ^  ^  _,  ffl  ^  m   ^  ^  ^  ^  ^^  ^ 

Class  I  roads  In  the  United  States  and  large  Canadian  roads,  by  years  and  for  rh.  ™.,.„   «  «, 

,   y  years,  and  tor  the  average  of  five  years  1958  to  1962,  Inclusive 

Note:  AH  figures  are  exclusive  of  bridge  and  switch  ties 


1 

Road 

Number  o 
per 

mile  of 

id  cross  tie  ren 
maintained  trac 

ewals 

Aggregate  coat  of  new  wood  cross  tie  renewals 
per  mile  of  maintained  track 

Per  cent  new  wood  cross  tie  renewals 
to  all  ties  in  tracks 

1958 

1959 

1960 

1961 

1962 

average 

1958 

1959 

1960 

1961 

1962 

average 

1958 

1959 

1960 

1961 

1962 

5  year 

Chicago  &  North  Western 

Chicago  Great  Western 

Chicago, Milwaukee, St .Paul  &  Pacific 

Duluth.Missabe  &  Iron  Range 

Dulutl^Winnipee,  &  Pacific 

54 
94 
24 
48 
32 

58 
102 
29 
54 
39 

43 
73 
28 
60 
34 

27 
61 
15 
19 
38 

26 
87 
26 
75 
37 

42 
83 
24 
51 
36 

$208 
343 
90 

164 

$237 
352 
112 
240 

$197 
247 
112 
275 

$121 
214 
62 

72 

$126 
304 
109 
334 

$178 
292 
97 
217 

1.83 
3.15 
.77 
1.61 

1.93 
3.39 
.94 
1.81 

1.55 

2.42 

.93 

2.00 

.90 

2.04 

.51 

.65 

.88 
2.89 

.87 
2.52 

1.42 
2.78 
.80 
1.72 

Green  Bay  &  Western 
Lake  Superior  &  Ishpeming 
Minneapolis, Northfield  4  Southern 
Northern  Pacific 

20 
55 
54 
40 

59 
19 
43 
83 
49 

51 
14 

45 
81 
56 

51 
14 
28 
89 
51 

49 
10 
83 
34 
53 

54 
15 
51 
68 
50 

266 
67 
163 
213 

148 

281 
58 
129 
338 
181 

245 
52 
121 
336 
211 

240 
49 
78 

373 

235 
42 
265 

135 

253 

54 
151 
279 

1.93 
.70 
2.18 
2.26 

1.88 
.67 
1.69 
3.44 

1.59 
.49 
1.80 
3.38 

1.61 
.49 
1.11 
3.68 

1.58 
.34 
3.41 
1.40 

1.72 
.54 
2.04 
2.83 

Spokane  International 
Spokane, Portland  &   Seattle 

233 
107 

179 
112 

97 
86 

24 
94 
59 

23 
51 
61 

41 
131 
85 

226 
847 
452 

273 
650 

478 

49 
393 
362 

204 
429 
262 

82 
230 
268 

167 
510 
364 

2.13 
7.94 
3.46 

2.64 
6.09 
3.64 

.47 
3.30 
2.80 

.80 
3.22 
1.93 

.77 
1.74 
1.99 

1.36 
4.46 
2.76 

Total 

50 

54 

43 

34 

38 

44 

192 

219 

180 

143 

164 

180 

1.64 

1.80 

1.43 

1.13 

1.27 

1.45 

CENTRAL  WESTERN  REnTnu- 

Atchison, Topeka  &  Santa  Fe 
Chicago, Burlington  &  Quincy 
Chicago, Rock  Island  &  Pacific 
Colorado  &  Southern 
Colorado  &,  Wyominc 

32 
19 
29 
31 
15 

22 
28 
46 
37 
12 

21 
17 
40 
59 
13 

25 
22 
46 
21 
23 

23 
25 

30 
14 

25 
22 
42 
36 
15 

95 
66 

81 
127 
54 

61 
102 
136 
147 

50 

62 
61 
114 
234 
46 

80 
79 
147 
90 
88 

79 
92 
148 
123 

75 
80 
125 
144 

1.00 
.61 
1.03 
1.03 

.68 
.89 
1.54 
1.17 

.66 
.56 

1.34 
2.01 

.77 
.72 
1.56 
.73 

.72 
.82 
1.57 
1.02 

.77 
.72 
1.41 
1.19 

Fort  Worth  &  Denver 
Northwestern  Pacific 
Pacific  Electric 
Southern  Pacific  Co. 

71 
97 
59 
58 

39 
93 
99 
60 
65 

21 
62 

64 
48 
54 

33 

20 
48 

46 

17 
32 
30 
29 

51 

32 
56 
68 
39 
55 

208 
289 
313 
178 
209 

161 
382 
294 
156 
216 

93 
234 
206 

124 
182 

143 
71 
169 

70 
116 
106 

70 

135 

218 
218 
106 

1.66 
2.35 
3.39 
1.74 

1.25 
3.10 
3.45 
1.75 

.69 
2.07 
2.25 

1.42 

1.06 
.66 
1.70 

.55 
1.05 
1.06 
1.00 

1.04 
1.85 
2.37 
1.18 

Union  Pacific 
Western  Pacific 

45 
50 
87 

43 
68 
86 

22 
62 
71 

24 
47 
54 

18 
57 
59 

30 
57 

71 

178 
196 
393 

166 
259 

405 

84 
251 
349 

71 
195 
273 

54 
244 
288 

111 
229 
342 

1.43 
1.78 
2.93 

1.37 
2.40 
2.87 

.69 
2.20 
2.37 

.74 
1.63 
1.80 

.55 
2.02 
1.97 

.96 
2.01 
2.39 

Total 

41 

46 

39 

36 

39 

40 

147 

161 

138 

130 

142 

144 

1.36 

1.50 

1.27 

1.19 

1.28 

1.32 

SOUTHWESTERN  REGION: 
Kansas  City  Southern 
Kansas, Oklahoma  &  Gulf 
Louisiana  &  Arkansas 
Missouri-Kansas-Texas 
Missouri  Pacific 

51 
132 
46 
26 
77 

62 
100 
62 
53 
77 

53 
28 
63 

58 
68 

40 
46 
68 
45 
39 

26 

43 
32 

54 

46 
61 
56 
43 
63 

155 
417 
144 
82 
239 

187 
318 
188 
172 
237 

168 
80 
192 
196 
223 

123 
128 
210 
154 

124 

79 

131 
110 

175 

142 
189 
17  3 
143 
200 

1.61 
4.39 
1.42 
.83 
2.49 

1.96 
3.33 
1.89 
1.68 

2.49 

1.68 
.95 
1.93 
1.81 
2.19 

1.26 
1.52 
2.09 
1.42 
1.26 

.82 

1.31 
1.02 
1.76 

1.47 
2.04 
1.73 
1.35 

2.04 

Quanah,Acme  &  Pacific  a 

St.  Louis-San  Francisco 

St.  Louis, San  Francisco  &  Texas 

St .  Louis  Southwestern 

Texas  &  Pacific 

Texas  Mexican 

63 
74 
85 
86 

107 

74 
22 
25 
56 
83 

85 
51 
43 
32 

42 

7 
43 

51 
17 
53 

32 
77 
72 
63 
23 
46 

20 
68 
44 
53 
43 
66 

204 
255 
264 
267 
335 

226 
59 
77 
174 
253 

253 
132 
135 
99 
130 

24 
135 

166 
54 
169 

139 
234 
187 
215 
74 
128 

82 
210 
127 
171 
134 
203 

1.99 
2.40 
2.80 
2.94 
3.37 

2.36 

.74 

.81 

1.91 

2.61 

2.70 
1.68 
1.42 

1.08 
1.34 

.24 
1.38 

1.67 
.57 
1.66 

1.02 
2.43 
2.24 
2.07 
.77 
1.45 

.63 
2.17 
1.41 
1.75 
1.45 
2.09 

Total 

64 

66 

61 

40 

52 

57 

201 

205 

195 

129 

166 

179 

2.11 

2.17 

2.00 

1.30 

1.67 

1.85 

Grand  Total  -  United  Staces 

47 

50 

43 

35 

40 

43 

175 

184 

161 

135 

155 

162 

1.58 

1.64 

1.43 

1.16 

1.32 

1.43 

CANADIAN  ROADS: 
Canadian  National 
Canadian  Pacific 
Ontario  Northland 

106 
83 
166 

86 
73 
164 

62 
70 
122 

59 
62 
98 

51 
59 
151 

73 
6y 
lllO 

306 
250 
713 

261 
238 
658 

176 
216 
477 

175 
183 
400 

1U 
167 
583 

212 
211 
566 

3.63 

2.87 
5.60 

3.01 
2.54 
5.50 

2.12 
2.43 
4.11 

2.00 
2.15 
3.29 

1.7 
2.01 
5.03 

2.5 

2.U0 
li.73 

prior  Co  January  1,  1961.   Data  fo 


Compiled  by 
,  Bureau  of  Railway  Economics,  Washington,  D.C. 

ailroads  to  the  Interstate  Commerce  Commission. 


INDEX  OF  PROCEEDINGS,  Vol.  64,  1963 


Abra-Skull  Vallej  relocation,  by  George 
Rugge,    122,    610 

Accounting,  [CC,  classifications,  revi- 
sions and   interpretations,    393,   594 

Agreement   forms,  bibliography,  195,  698 

— commercial  advertising  on  railway 
bridges,   placing',   188,   597 

— disposal  of  surplus  railwaj  property, 
L91,   597 

— railway  property  used  for  unloading 
and  storing  liauifled  petroleum 
gases,  anhydrous  ammonia  and 
other  flammable  or  dangerous  ma- 
u  rials,    191,    597 

— weed  control  chemicals,  on  railway 
property,  purchase  and  applica- 
tions,   188,    596 

Annual   Meeting-,   closing-  session,    701 

— invocation.   580 

— opening   session,    579 

— program    of,    575 

ASTM  specifications  and  designations, 
references  pertaining  to  concrete, 
239,    625 

Atchison,  Topeka  &  Santa  Fe,  Abra- 
Skull  Valley  relocation  in  Arizona, 
122,   610 

— bridge  paint  test,  progress  report, 
368,   635 

— continuous  welded  rail,  laying  single 
and  multiple-track,  1440-ft  strings, 
465,   695 

— crossings,  steel,  manganese,  explo- 
sive hardened,  service  test,  107, 
688 

— grading  problems  encountered  dur- 
ing  main    line    relocation,    25 

—treated    ballast   test,    566,    680 

Automobile  cars,  mul'ti-level,  loading 
and    unloading   facilities,    17::.    604 

Average  tie  life — an  interpretation,  by 
C.  J.  Code,  95 


B 

Ballast,  asphalt- treated,  progress  re- 
port,   565,    680 

— conductivity  tests  of  open-hearth 
slag,    35 

Baltimore  &  Ohio,  cross  tie  service 
test,   252,   671 

Baltimore  &  Ohio  Chicago  Terminal, 
crossing,  manganese  steel,  explo- 
sive hardened,  service  test,   NT.  688 

Basic-ox;  process,    expla  na  - 

tion    of,    369,    635 

Bearing    pads,    neoprene,    specifications 
for   design   and    materials,    225,   623 
,    G.     i:  .    greetings    from     NRAA, 
587 

Bibliography    (See    Agreement     Forms) 

— (See    Bridges,    Non-Ferrous    Metal) 

— (Sec   Concrete) 

— (See  Engineering  and  Valuation  Re< 
or  <ls) 

Waterway    ProJectB) 


Holts,  high-strength  steel,  assemblj  of 
structural  joints,  steel  railway 
bridges,  specifications,  revisions, 
361, 

— track    (See   Track    Bolts) 

Bridges,    beams,    prestressed    concrete, 
Held    investigation,   69 
decks,    asphal't-treated,    service    test, 

.6  i,    680 
frames,    stress    distribution     in,    367, 

— steel  truss,  high-strength  bolts,  slip- 
page  investigation,   328,  627 
composite,   steel  and   concrete,   specl- 
ftcations,    364,    633 
— floorbeam     bangers,    stress    distribu- 
tion   in,   367,  633 
non-ferrous  metal,  bibliography,  365, 

— progress  report,   364,   633 
— prestressed   concrete,   field    investiga- 
tions,  329,   627 
—impact    tests,    329,    627 
—  rating    rules    for,    revisions,    361.    630 
— steel   railway,   fixed   spans,   specifica- 
tions,   revisions,    361,    630 
— structural    joints,     assembly    of,     using 
high-strength   steel    bolts,    362,    630 
—welded,    railroad,    by    J.    E.    South.    57 
Brine  drippings,   prevention  of  damage 
from  to  track    and   structures,    prog- 
ress,   report,    419,    682 
I'.rine-resistant    bridge   paints,    369,    635 
Brochure,    recruiting   engineering   gradu- 
ates,   revision   of,    402,    616 
Buildings,    report    and    discussion,    213, 
636 
specifications,    bituminous    road    mix 
surface.    215,    636 

— clay  hollow   tile,  deleted.   214,   636 
— paints,  revisions,  reapproved,  216, 

636 
— pavements,   asphaltic   concrete, 

reapproved,   214,   636 
— asphaltic     macadam,      reapproved, 

21  1,  636 
— sprinkler   systems,   216,   636 
— tile,  structural  day.  clay  facings, 
i  mic    veneer,    214,    636 


('aide,    wire    and    insulating    materials, 

109,   646 
Campbell,   George   B.,   memoir,   242 
Canadian    National,    computer    simula- 
tion    "I     CTC     operations,     bj      C      J 
Hudson.    82 
I 1  a  iii    performs  nee   ca  Icula  tor,    .  3 
lea  ning    facilit  les,    freight,    one- 
sp..t    method,    164,   608 
Cathodic    protection,    pipelines,    appli- 
cal  ion   of,    l  18,   6  h 
underground   structures,   posslbh 

on   signal   systems,    109,  646 
i  !ha  i  les,  J,    1-.   photogrammel  rj    b 

plied    to    r.i  ii  w  ay    local  Ion,    1 1 6,   61 0 
chemical    control    of   vegetation, 
ress   report,   570,   681 


739 


740 


Index 


Chesapeake  &  Ohio,  analysis  of  main- 
tenance of  way  operations,  265, 
655 

Chicago  iV-  North  Western,  crossing, 
railway,  manganese  steel,  explo- 
sive hardened,  service  test,  147, 
688 

— rail  joint  lubrication,  service  test, 
progress    report,    420,    682 

— treated   ballast   test,   568,   860 

Chicago  Great  Western,  protecting 
load  bearing  surfaces  of  bridges, 
progress   report,    368,    635 

Chicago,  Milwaukee,  St.  Paul  &  Pa- 
cific, welded  simulated  crossing  in- 
tersections,  service   test,   446,    688 

Chicago,  Rock  Island  and  Pacific,  im- 
pact tes't.  steel  truss  span,  328,  627 

— treated  ballast  test,  bridge  decks, 
569,   680 

New  Orleans  &  Texas  Pacific,  tie  plate 
service   test,    434,   688 

Clearance  information,  determination 
of  simplification  and/or  standardi- 
zation of,   355,   590 

Clearance  records,  standardized  method 
of  charting  all  obstructions,  358, 
591 

Clearance  requirements,  effect  of  spring 
travel,  center  of  gravity,  speed,  on 
curved  and   tangent  track,   335,   589 

Clearances,  report  and  discussion,  333, 
589 

— requirements  of  various  states,  334, 
589 

— vertical  or  horizontal  movements  of 
equipment,  allowances  for,  334,  589 

Code,  C.  J.,  average  tie  life — an  inter- 
pretation,  95 

— president's   address,    581 

Colleges  and  universities,  research  in, 
ways  in  which  railroads  can  coop- 
erate,   404,    618 

— stimulate  interest  of  staff  members 
in  railroad  problems  and  practices, 
including  AREA  membership,  404, 
618 

College  and  university  students,  affili- 
ates  in  AREA,   400,   613 

— brochures,    revision    of,    402,    616 

— cooperative  system  of  education,  in- 
cluding summer  employment,  401, 
615 

— importance  of  bringing  into  railroad 
service,    398,    613 

— recruiting,  and  retaining  in  railroad 
service,  effective  means  of,  398, 
613 

— stimulate  greater  interest  in  science 
of   transportation,    399,    613 

— topics  suggested  for  theses  on  rail- 
road subjects,  cash  grants  avail- 
able,   403,    617 

Composite  design  of  steel  structures 
having  concrete  decks,  stress  in- 
vestigation,   331,    629 

Composite  steel  and  concrete  spans, 
specifications,    364,    633 


Computer  simulation  of  railroad  CTC 
operations,   82 

Concrete,  and  mortars,  quality  of,  237, 
625 

Concrete  beams,  prestressed,  bridge, 
field   investigation,    69 

Concrete,  prestressed,  for  railway 
structures,    237,    624 

— quality  of,   bibliography,   238,   625 

Concrete    ties,    rail    slippage   tests,    39 

Constitution,   726 

Continuous  Welded  Rail,  report  and 
discussion,    449,    694 

— creepage,  number  and  position  of 
anchors,    480,    697 

— definition    of,    465,    695 

— fabricating,  specifications,  progress 
report,    450,    694 

— failures   in,   investigation   of,   451,   694 

— fastenings,    479,    697 

— fixed  commercial  plants  for,  future 
of,    by    E.    T.    Myers,    460,    694 

— in    Europe,    by    R.    E.    Dove,    483,    700 

— labor  economies  derived  from  weld- 
ing, distribution,  laying  and  main- 
tenance   of,    302,    663 

— laid,   by  years,   404,   695 

— laying,    464,    695 

— 1440-ft  strings.  465,  695 

— maintenance   of,    481,    699 

— maintenance,  progress  report,  481, 
699 

— welding,  second-hand  rail,  progress 
report,    483,    700 

Contract  Forms,  report  and  discussion, 
187,   596 

Contract  forms    (See  Agreement  Forms) 

Cooperative  Relations  with  Universi- 
ties, report  and  discussion,  397, 
613 

Corrosion  of  deck  plates,  progress  re- 
port,   359,    630 

Corrosion  prevention  in  potable  hot- 
water  systems,  143,  639 

Cramer,  R.  E.,  investigation  of  failures 
in  control-cooled  rail,  500,  690 

— shelly  rail  studies  at  the  University 
of   Illinois,    534,    692 

Crossing  protection,  highway- railway 
grade,  merits  of  various  types,  133, 
650 

Crossings,   highway-railway  grade,  au- 
tomatic protection,  alternate  types, 
study    with    view    toward    develop- 
ment   of,    136,    654 
— prefabricated    types,    merits    and 

economics  of,   132,   652 
— warning    to    highway    traffic    ap- 
proaching,  methods   of  providing 
additional,   130,    653 

Crossings,  railway,  service  test,  447, 
688 

Culverts,  erosion  control  for  outlet 
structures,  progress  report,  543, 
675 

Curves,  speed  on,  as  affected  by  pres- 
ent-day equipment,   446,   886 


Index 


741 


D 


Deck  plates,  corrosion  of,  progress  re- 
port,  359,   630 

Depreciation,  rules,  revision  of,  for  in- 
come   tax    purposes,    398,    593 

Diesel  fueling  and  unloading  stations, 
methods  of  controlling  spillag<  of 
fuel    oil,    156,    643 

Dove,  R.  E.,  Continuous  Welded  Rail 
in   Europe,   483,   700 

Drive  spikes,  steel,  specifleat inns,  130, 
683 

Duluth.  Missabe  and  Iron  Range,  rail. 
service    test,    533,    692 


Earth  materials,  physical  properties  of, 
546,    676 

Economics  of  Railwax  Labor,  report 
and   discussion,    263,   655 

Economics  of  Railway  Location  and 
Operation,  report  and  discussion. 
Ill,   606 

Electric  heating-,  various  applications, 
progress  report,  408,  644 

Electric  supply  lines,  fees  and  rentals 
for  occupancy  of  railway  property, 
subject   discontinued,    418,    647 

Electrical    power    sources,    new,    appli- 
cation,   progress    report,    407,    644 
bricity,    report   and   discussion,   408, 
644 

Electrification,  railway,  developments 
in  the  field  of,  domestic  and  for- 
eign,    ii  4,  646 

Electrolysis  and  electrolytic  corrosion, 
progress   report,    409,   645 

Electronic  and  mechanized  mail  han- 
dling   facilities,    168,    604 

Engineering  and  Valuation  Records, 
report    and   discussion,   387,   592 

—bibliography,   388,   592 

Epoxy  resin  compounds,  bonding  for 
shotcrete,   237,   624 

Epoxy   resins,   technology  of,  1. 

— application    of,    4 
— masonry,   5,   240 
— iron   and   steel   structures.   7.    369 
— wood   bridges  and   trestles,  5,  372 

— formulations,  8 

general   instructions  for  use  of,   16 
uses  in  repair  of  concrete,  237,  624 

Erie— Lackawanna,  clearance  req  u  i  re- 
ments  test,  freight  cars,  curved 
and    tangenl    track,   335,   589 


Fences,  right-of-way,  specifications  re- 
a ppro\  ed,    5  16,   675 

Filter  materials,  for  drains,  third  prog- 
ress   report ,    56  I.    678 

Fire-retardant  coatings  foi  creosoted 
wood,   specifics  i  ions.   374,   621 

Florida    East    Coast,    pr<  con- 

crete beams,   investigation,  69 


Foundations,  pile,  specifications,  226, 
624 

ht     car     cleaning     facilities,     164, 
603 

Fuel  oil  at  diesei  fueling  and  unload- 
ing stations,  methods  of  control- 
ling   spillage,     156,    6  13 


i  llued-laminated    bridge    stringers,    lab- 

ora/torj    Investigation,    '!s;i.   622 

Grade  crossing  protection,  highway- 
railway  grade,  various  types,  rec- 
ommended method  of  developing 
annual  maintenance  cost  of,  135, 
653 

('.lading,  problems  encountered  during 
A.T&SP    main    line    relocation,    25 

Great  Northern,  car  cleaning-  facility, 
164.   603 

—rail,    service    test,    533,    692 

Guillou,  John  C,  third  progress  report 
on  performance  of  filter  materials, 
554,   678 

H 

Handbook  of  instructions  for  care  and 
operation  of  maintenance  of  way 
equipment,    revisions,    306,    664 

Highway  crossing  signal,  flashing-light 
type     with     stop     signs,     revisions, 

132,  649 

— wig-wag-  types,  revisions,  132,  649 
Highway  overpasses  as  opposed  to  un- 
derpasses, advantages,  factors  to 
be  considered  in  determining,  134, 
651 
Highway-railway  grade  crossing  pro- 
tection,     merits    of    various    types, 

133,  650 

Highway-railway  grade  crossings, 
methods  of  providing  additional 
warning  to  highway  traffic  ap- 
proaching.   136,    653 

Highways,  report  and  discussion.  131, 
648 

1 1  ildebi  a  1 1  •  1 1  I  >r.  Kenneth,  invocation. 
580 

Hillman,  A.  B.,  treasurer's  report,  585, 
726 

Hot-water  systems,  potable,  corrosion 
prevention    in,   143,   639 

Howard,  x.  D.,  executive  secretary's 
reporl    and   statement,   583,   706 

Hudson,    C.    J.,    B     computer    simulation 

of  railroad  CTC  operations,  82 
Huffman,  J.  B.,  an  evaluation  of  forced. 
air-  drying  and  covered  air  season- 
ing   of   oak    cross   ties,   246,   670 


Ice     houses    and     Icing     stations,     218,     636 

III is    Central,    experimental    cross    tic 

ser\  Ice    lest.    269,    673 


742 


Index 


— results  of  study  of  economic  value  of 
various   sizes  of   rail,   527,   B90 

impact  and  Bridge  Stresses,  report  and 
discussion.    69,    327,    626 

impact,  prestressed  concrete  span,  de- 
sign,   study,    329,    627 

— steel    truss   spans,    328,    6l!7 

Insulated  rail  joint,  development  and 
research,    progress    report,    529,    692 

Insulating  material,  wires  and  cables, 
409,  645 

ICC,  revisions  and  interpretations  of 
accounting   classifications,    393,    594 

towa  State  University,  tests  on  two 
prestressed-steel   beams,    330,    629 

Iron  and  manganese,  practical  methods 
of  removing  from  small  water  sup- 
plies, 152,  642 

Iron  and  Steel  Structures,  report  and 
discussion,    359,    630 

Iron  Ore  Company  of  Canada,  dock  ter- 
minal, ore  handling  facilities,  180, 
605 


Joint     bars,     quenched    carbon-steel, 
specifications,    revisions,    499,    690 


K 


Kannowski,  K.  H.,  heat-treated  and 
alloy-steel  rail,  service  test  report, 
530,   692 

Keystone  dam  relocation,  by  H.  L. 
Woldridge,    119,    610 

Kleinkort,  J.  P.,  greetings  from  Com- 
bined Railway  Suppliers  Exhibit, 
587 


Labor  economics,  continuous  welded 
rail,  welding,  distributing,  laying 
and   maintenance   of,   302,   663 

— cropping  rail  in  track  versus  build- 
ing up  rail  ends  by  welding  274, 
656 

— taking  up  track,  various  methods  of, 
278,    656 

— track  maintenance  derived  from  use 
of  on-off  track  equipment  versus 
on-track    equipment    only,    300,    663 

— work  measurement  standards  for 
comparison  of  work  performance 
among  gangs   or   divisions,   271,   655 

Laminated  cross  ties,  service  test  258, 
672 

Li,  Shu-t'ien,  relative  merits  of  high- 
strength  steels  and  box  sections  in 
heavy-duty  fender  piling  of  water- 
front  facilities,   205,    600 

Loading  and  unloading  facilities,  multi- 
level  automobile   cars,   173,    604 

— rail-'truck,    173,    604 


Louisville     and     Nashville,     coated     ties 

service    test,    257,    672 
— hold-down    fastening's   for   ii>-   plates, 

including    pads,    service    test,     140, 

688 
Lumber,    hardwood    structural    timbers, 

proposed    grading    rules,    372,    620 
Luncheon,    annual,    611 


M 


Mayee,  G.  M\,  ASCE  address,  prevent- 
ing  rail   failures    in   main    track,    47 

Mail  handling  facilities,  mechanized 
and    electronic,    168,    604 

Maintenance  of  way  equipment,  hand- 
book of  instructions  for  care  and 
operation    of,    revisions,    306,    664 

Maintenance  of  way  expense,  various 
traffic  volumes,  effect  of  using  such 
variations,  in  terms  of  equated 
mileage  or  other  derived  factors, 
for  allocation  of  available  funds  to 
maintenance    of    way,    113,    607 

.Maintenance  of  way  work,  analysis  of 
operations  on  'the  B&O,   265,   655 

Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment, 
report  and   discussion,    305,   664 

Maintenance,  yards,  present  trends  in, 
183,   605 

Masonrv,  report  and  discussion,  232, 
623 

Masonry  structures,  deterioration  and 
repair   of,    237,    624 

McLeod,   E.    A.,    memoir,    224 

Mechanized  and  electronic  mail  han- 
dling   facilities,    168,    604 

Missouri  Pacific,  bridge  paint  test,  369, 
635 

— cross    tie    service    test,    252,    671 

Monon,    treated    ballast    test,    568,    860 

Multi-level  automobile  cars,  facilities 
for   loading  and   unloading,   173,   604 

Myers,  E.  T.,  the  future  for  fixed  com- 
mercial continuous  welded  rail 
plants,    460,    H94 


N 

Navigation  projects,  current  policies, 
practices  and  developments,  198, 
599 

Neoprene  bearing  pads,  specifications, 
225,   623 

New  York  Central,  car  cleaning  facili- 
ties,  166,    603 

— steel  truss  span,  high-strength  bolts, 
slippage  investigation,   328,  627 

Nominating-  Committee,   577 

Norfolk  and  Western,  rail,  service  test, 
530,   532,   692 

— treated    ballast   test,    567,    680 

Nuclear  and  conventional  equipment 
for  soil  density  and  water  content 
determinations,  comparisons  of,  546, 
676 


Index 


743 


O 


Ore-handling  facilities,  iron  Ore  Com- 
pany  of  Canada,  180,  605 

Orr,    H.    B.,   memoir,    264 

Overpasses,  highway,  opposed  to  un- 
derpasses, advantages,  factor  t'> 
determine,   134,   651 


Painting  and  preparation  of  steel  sur- 
faces, progress  report,   368,   635 

Pavements,  asphaltic  concrete,  (See 
Buildings) 

Pennsylvania,  laminated  ties,  service 
test,  258,   672 

— rail,    service   test,    531,   532,    692 

Photogrammetry  as  applied  to  railway 
location,    by    .!.    L.    Charles,    llti,    610 

Pile  foundations,  specifications,  226, 
624 

Pipe,  .structural  plate,  progress  report, 
360,  630 

Pipelines,  cathodic  protection  of,  148, 
641 

Pittsburgh  and  West  Virginia,  treated 
ballast   test,    bridge   decks,    568,    860 

Post,  Don  M  ,  an  evaluation  of  forced- 
air  drying  and  covered  air  season- 
ing   of  oak  cross  ties,   246,   670 

President's  address,    581 

Prestressed   concrete   trestles,   237,   624 


R 


Radioactive  substances,  railroad  as- 
pects of,   157,   643 

Rail,    report    and    discussion.    487,    690 

— continuous  welded  (See  Continuous 
Welded   Rail) 

— control-cooled,  investigation  of  fail- 
ures   in,    by   R.    E.   Cramer.    500,    690 

— cropping,  in  track  versus  building  up 
ends  by  welding,  labor  economics 
of,   274,   656 

— economic  value  of  various  sixes.  526, 
690 

— open-hearth  steel,  specifications,  in- 
cluding basic-oxygen  process,  498, 
690 

— end  hattci'.  causes  and  remedy,  523, 
690 

— failure    statistics.    508,    692 

— heat-treated  and  alloy-steel,  service 
test,    530,    692 

— laying      tight,      with      frozen     joints. 
prog  ress   reporl .    120,   I 
ions,   standardization   of,   542,   692 

— 78-ft,    service    performance    and    eco- 
nomics,   5  12,    tiHL' 
shel i\ .    si  ud  j     by    R    E.    <  !ra mer,    .'.  ;  i. 

692 
sb.lly    spots   and    head    checks,    meth- 
ods  of    prevention,    529,    •;:•:.' 

Kail    anchors,     number    and     position     to 

pre\  i-ni      continuous     welded      ra  n 
creepage,   480,   697 


Kail    failures    In    track,    preventing,    by 

(5.    .M.    Magee,     17 

Kail  joint,  insulated,  progress  report. 
529,    »'.:•- 

— lubrication  test,  progress  report,  120, 
682 

Kail    slippage,    concrete    ties,    test,    39 

Rail-truck  freight  equipment,  facilities 
for  loading  and  unloading,   17.:,  604 

Rail-water  transfer  facilities,  plan- 
ning, construction,  maintenance  of, 
202,    599 

Regulatory  bodies  and  courts,  current 
developments  in  valuation  and  de- 
preciation,  391,   593 

Resins,  synthetic,  and  other  adhesive 
materials  for  protective  coating 
and  reinforcement  of  steel  sur- 
faces,  368,  635 

Rest  houses,  specifications,  deleted, 
220,    636 

Roadway  and  Ballast,  report  and  dis- 
cussion,   543,    675 

Roadway,  formation  of,  specifications, 
reapproved,    545,    675 

Rugge,  George,  Abra-skull  Valley  re- 
location,    122,    610 


St.  Louis-San  Francisco,  car  cleaning 
facility,   167,   603 

—  Keystone  dam  relocation,  by  H.  L. 
Wbldridge,    119,    610 

San  key.  Charles,  train  performance  cal- 
culator,   73 

Seaboard  Air  Line,  bridge  paint  test, 
progress   report,    369,    635 

Secretary,  executive,  statement  and  re- 
port,   583,    706 

Sewage,  railway,  disposal  facilities,  re- 
visions,   reapproved,    142,    638 

Shops  and  locomotive  terminals,  store- 
houses   for,    220,    636 

Signal      systems,      possible      effect      on      of 

cathodic  protection  systems  for 
underground    structures.    4(19,    645 

Signals,  highwaj  crossing,  Hashing 
light  and  wig-wag  types,  with 
stop   sign,    revision,    1  •'!'-,    649 

Slag,     open-hearth,     ballast,     conductiv- 
ity    tests    of,    35 
delini  t  ion.    .">  16.    675 

Soil  density  and  water-  content  deter- 
minations, comparison  of,  with  con- 
ventional and  nuclear  equipment, 
546,   676 

South.  .1.  K..  A.SCE  address,  welded  rail- 
road   bridges,    57 

spikes,   drive,   Bteel,   specifications,    130, 
683 
track,     high-carbon     steel,     specifica- 
tions,   128,   683 

Spring  washers,  specifications  revi- 
sions,   199,   690 

Slanc,    K,    A,,    Single    and    mu  1 1  i  pic- 1  lack 

laying,  using  continuous  welded  rail 
in  it  m-i't  Btrlngs,  on  th<  \t.vsi-. 
it;:.. 


744 


Index 


Steel,  basic-oxygen,  process  explana- 
tion  <>f,   369,   635 

Stimmel,   Et.   M.,   memoir,   140 

Storehouses,  shops  and  Locomotive  ter- 
minals,  220,   636 

Stringers,  glued-laminated,  laboratory 
investigation  of  static  and  re- 
peated-load   strength,    383,    (122 

Structural  plate  pipe,  progress  report, 
360,    630 


Tellers,   report   of,   577 

Terminals,  freight,  design,  gradients 
revisions,    161,    602 

— waterfront,    180,    60 

Termite    control,    investigation,    19 

Texas  &  Pacific,  treated  ballast  test, 
568,    860 

Tie   coatings,    service   test,    257,    672 

Tie  life,  average,  an  interpretation  by 
C.  J.  Code,  95 

Tie  plates,  design,  service  test,  434, 
688 

— hold-down  fastenings  for,  including 
pads,   service   test,    440,    688 

— hot-worked,  high-carbon  steel,  spec- 
ifications,   423,    683 

— low-carbon  steel,  specifications,  421, 
683 

Ties  and  Wood  Preservation,  report 
and   discussion,    341,    669 

Ties,  anti-splitting  devices  study,  257, 
672 

— concrete,     prestressed,     service     test, 
259,    673 
— rail    slippage   tests,    39 

— cross  and  switch,  specifications,  ex- 
tent of  adherence  to,  243,  670 

— design,  possible  revision  of,  and/or 
spacing,  241,   670 

— fiberglas,  possibility  of  using  for  test 
purposes,    259,    673 

— incising,    extent   of   use,   257,    672 

— laminated,    service   test,    258,    672 

— oak,  forced-air  drying  and  covered 
air  seasoning  of,  by  J.  B.  Huffman 
and   Don   M.   Post,   246,   670 

— reusing  recovered,  feasibility  and 
economics  of,  with  or  without  ad- 
ditional   treatment,    244,    670 

— service  life,  methods  of  prolonging', 
257,   672 

— service    test,    252,    671 

— substitutes   for  wood,    259,    673 

— used,  possibility  of  making  charcoal 
from,    260,    673 

Timbers,  structural,  hardwood,  pro- 
posed  grading  rules,    372,    620 

Tools,    tracks    (See   Track    Tools) 

Track,    report  and   discussion,    419,    682 

— taking  up,  labor  economies  of  vari- 
ous   methods,    278,    656 

Track  bolts,  and  nuts,  specifications, 
revisions,    499,    690 

Track  spikes,  high-carbon  steel,  spec- 
ifications,   428,    683 

Trackwork  plans,  standardization  of, 
4  33,    684 


Train    performance    calculator,    by 

Charles  Sankey,  7:: 
Transfer    facilities,    rail-water,    planning, 

construction,   maintenance,  2112,  599 

Truss  liridge  research  project,  progress 

report,    367,    633 
Treasurer,   report   of,   585,   725 


u 


U.  S.  Public  Health  Service,  coach- 
servicing  facilities,  design,  con- 
struction  and   operation   to   comply 

with  regulations  of,  147,  640 
University   (See  College) 


V 


Valuation  and  depreciation,  current  de- 
velopments in  connection  with 
regulatory  bodies  and  courts,  391, 
593 

Valuation  records  (See  Engineering 
and  Valuation  Records) 

Vegetation,  chemical  control  of,  prog- 
ress   report,    570,    681 


w 

Washers,  spring,  specifications,  revi- 
sions,   499,    690 

Waste   disposal,   railway,    152,   642 

Water,  for  drinking  purposes,  stand- 
ards,   revisions,    141,    638 

Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services,  re- 
port  and   discussion,    139,    638 

Water  supplies,  small,  methods  of  re- 
moving iron  and  manganese  from, 
152,   642 

Water  systems,  potable,  hot,  corrosion 
prevention    in,    143,    639 

Waterfront  facilities,  relative  merits 
of  high-strength  steels  and  box 
sections  in  heavy-duty  fender 
piling,  by  Shu-t'ien   Li,   205.  600 

Waterfront   terminals,    180,    605 

Waterproofing  for  railway  structures, 
240,    625 

Waterway  projects  involving  naviga- 
tion, inland,  benefits  and  costs, 
bibliography,    199,    599 

Waterways  and  Harbors,  report  and 
discussion,    197,    574 

Welded  railroad  bridges,  by  ,T.  E. 
South,    57 

Wire,  cable  and  insulating  materials, 
standards,   and   new   types,    409,    645 

Woldridge,  H.  L.,  Keystone  dam  relo- 
cation,   119,    610 

Wood  Bridge  and  Trestles,  report  and 
discussion,   371,   620 

—applications  of  synthetic  resins  and 
adhesives   to,   1 

— design,  specifications,  progress  re- 
port,   371,    620 

— fire-retardant  coatings,  specifications, 
373,  621 


Index 745 

Wood,    creosoted,    flre-retardant    coat-       — procurement   and  stocking  parts  and 

ings  for,   specifications,   ::t  I.   621  material     for    the    repairs    of,    324, 


-non-destructive     testing     of,     by  666 

gamma    rays,   progress   report,   372, 

620 


Y 


Work  equipment,   machines,   reclaiming 

and      extending      service      life      of,  yard    maintenance,    presenl    trends    in. 

metallizing,     plating'    and    welding,  183,   605 

313,   665  Vards    and    Terminals,    report   and    dis- 
— maintaining,     testing-    and     repairing  cussion,   159,    601 

hydraulic      equipment,      and      other  Vards,    classification,   design,   gradients, 

components   used,   316,   666  revisions,   161,   602 


3 


outstanding 

tampers 

for  the  price  of  ONE! 


A  YARD  TAMPER  that  is  downright 
revolutionary  in  character  .  .  .  that 
will  fulfill  the  majority  of  your  yard 
tamping  requirements  faster  and  bet- 
ter than  it  has  ever  been  done  before 
.  .  .  with  just  about  half  of  the 
normal  crew. 

A  JACK  TAMPER:  By  simply  sub- 
stituting the  regulation  double-bar 
JACKSON  tamping  units  for  the  extra 
long  single  units  used  in  the  YARD 
TAMPER  you  have  a  powerful  Jack 
Tamper  that  is  exceptionally  fast, 
and  accurate  .  .  .  that  can  be  used 
with  existing  surfacing  devices  and 
easily  keeps  ahead  of  production 
tampers.  Or,  you  can  leave  the  long 
blades  on  when  jack  tamping  and 
catch  your  switches  as  you  go. 

A  UTILITY  TAMPER  of  exceptional 
speed  and  power  for  spotting  and 
smoothing  in  all  ballasts  in  all  con- 
ditions ...  and  tamping  of  finest 
quality  in  all  moderate  to  high  raises. 
Split  workhead  permits  tamping  a 
much  larger  portion  of  turnouts  as 
well  as  maintaining  proper  adjust- 
ment on  curves. 


Let  us  demonstrate  the  multiple 
advantages  of  this  machine  under 
your  own  conditions. 


JACKSON 


VIBRATORS.  ~ 

LUDINGTON,  MICHIGAN,  U.S.A. 


£-x-t-e-n-d    f-i-e  J--i-fj-eJ 

USE  TIE  PLATE 
LOCK  SPIKES 


One-piece  Design 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  tie  plates  firmly  in  place  on 
cross-ties  and  bridge  timbers. 

LOCK  SPIKES  are  quickly  and  easily  driven, 
or  removed,  with  standard  track  tools. 

Driven  to  refusal,  the  spread  shank  is  com- 
pressed by  the  walls  of  the  hole.  Tie  plates  are  held 
against  horizontal  and  vertical  movement  under 
spring  pressure.  Play  between  the  spike  and  the 
hole  is  eliminated — abrasion  and  seating  of  tie 
plates  is  overcome. 

LOCK  SPIKES  hold  their  position  in  the  tie, 
and  redriving  to  tighten  the  plate  is  not  required. 
They  provide  a  quiet  and  strengthened  track. 

Annual  cost  of  ties  and  maintenance  expense  is 
reduced  by  extending  the  life  of  ties  and  holding 
gage.  Here  is  one  answer  to  conservation  of  ma- 
terials and  labor.  Write  for  free  folder. 

BERNUTH,  LEMBCKE   CO.,  INC. 

420  Lexington  Avenue,  New  York  17,  N.  Y. 


Actual 
Size 


The  custom-built  assembly  shown 
above  and  to  the  right  is  an  all-purpose 
rig  designed  to  give  maximum  flexibility 
in  coating  and  painting  work.  It  was 
designed  for  field  application  of  paints, 
lacquers,  vinyls,  cutback  asphalts, 
creosotes,  heavy  oils  and  greases. 

'  It  uses  the  economical  Graco  Hydra- 
Spray  Process,  and  proves  once  again, 
you  get  the  job  done  faster  and  better 
with  Graco  than  with  any  other  coat- 
ing system. 

If  speed  of  coating  application,  and 
material  savings  are  important  to  you, 
write  today  for  all  the  details  of  the 
Graco  Hydra-Spray  Process. 


FREE! 


Graco  Engineers  are  prepared  to  help  you  in  the  design  of  your 
paint  and  material  spray  assemblies.  Your  Graco  Railway  Rep- 
resentative will  be  glad  to  explain  the  many  benefits  of  this 
service.  Write  or  call  him  .  .  .  today! 


Graco 

GRAY  COMPANY,  INC. 

MINNEAPOLIS  13,  MINNESOTA 


RAILWAY  DEPARTMENT 

JOHN  P.  McADAMS,  Eastern  Sales  Representative 
2304  Wilson  Boulevard,  Arlington,  Virginia 


CHICAGO  — (Broadview,  III.) 

R.  D.  Worley 

3030  South  25th  Ave. 

CLEVELAND 

M.  H.  Frank  Company,  Inc. 
1202  Marshall  Building 

HOUSTON 

Houston  Railroad  Supply  Co. 
1610  Dumble  Street 


PHILADELPHIA 

The  A.  R.  Kidd  Co. 

1036  Suburban  Station  Bldg. 

LOUISVILLE 

T.  F.  &  H.  H.  Going 
6308  Limewood  Circle 

ST.  LOUIS 

The  Carriers  Supply  Company 
81  8  Olive  Street 


NEW   YORK  — Newark,  New  Jer*ey 

R.  A.  Corley 
744  Brood  Street 

SAN    FRANCISCO 

The  Barnes  Supply  Company 
141   Eleventh  Street 

TWIN   CITIES  — Si.  Paul,  Minn. 

The  Doniel  L.  O'Brien  Supply  Company 

Endicott-On-Fourth  Bldg. 


WASHINGTON  — Arlington,  Va. 

Southeastern  Railway  Supply,  Inc. 
2304  Wilson  Blvd. 


MONTREAL  — Ontario,  Canada 
International  Equipment  Co.,  Ltd. 
360  St.  James  Street  West 


Up  to  22  rail  anchors 
per  minute  with... 


NEW  1963  RACINE  Anchor-Fast 


J.  he  increased  speed  and  efficiency  of  this  new,  1963 
Racine  Anchor-Fast  can  save  you  extra  thousands  of  dollars 
a  year  on  rail  anchoring  and  tightening  operations.  Major 
improvements  include: 

POSITIVE  TRACK  ALIGNMENT 

New  side  guide-brackets  keep  nipper  assembly  straight  and 
steady;  position  it  perfectly  on  rail  regardless  of  track 
elevation  on  curves. 

GREATER  BOXING  PRESSURE 

New  built-in  boxing  cylinder,  which  replaces  two  smaller 
external  cylinders,  delivers  3,000  lbs.  pressure — an  increase 


of  300  per  cent  —  for  tighter  anchoring  of  all  types  of 
anchors.  An  Anchor-Tight  head  attachment  is  available  for 
this  machine  to  reset  anchors  that  are  not  against  the  ties. 

115  FEWER  PARTS 

Elimination  of  over  115  separate  parts  reduces  adjustments 
and  simplifies  maintenance. 

Write  today  for  further  information  on  the  new  1963 
Racine  Anchor-Fast.  Racine  Hydraulics  &  Machinery,  Inc., 
Dept.  F93,  Racine,  Wisconsin. 


MODERNIZING  KIT  AVAILABLE  If  you  now  own  Racine 
Anchor-Fast  machines,  write  for  details  on  how  you  can 
convert  them  to  new  1963  models  at  modest  cost. 


Unit  Tamper  Portable 

Rail  Drill 


Portable  Rail  Saw  Anchor  Applicator 


Rail  Drill&Saw 


Production  and 
Spot  Tampers 


Cut  Diesel  Maintenance  Costs  With 
FLEXMASTER  Pipe  Couplings 


Join  locomotive  hot  water  and  oil  lines 
with  FLEXMASTER  Pipe  Couplings 
without  threading  or  cutting.  Simple 
hinged  couplings  grip  pipe  securely, 


absorb  shock,  vibration  and  minor 
misalignment,  yet  are  easy  to  remove. 
Available  in  a  wide  range  of  types  and 
sizes.  Write  for  complete  information. 

FLEXMASTER  is  an  Aeroquip  Trademark 


eroquip 


AEROQUIP  CORPORATION  •  JACKSON,  MICHIGAN 
INDUSTRIAL   DIVISION 

INDUSTRIAL  PLANTS:  VAN   WERT,  O.;   BURBANK,   CALIF.;  DALLAS,  TEX.; 

PORTLAND,   ORE.;   CRANBURY,   N.J.;   ATLANTA,  GA. 

In  Canada:  Aeroquip  (Canada)  Ltd.,  Toronto  19,  Ontario 

In  Germany:  Aeroquip  G.m.b.H.,  Baden  Baden-Oos 

AEROQUIP  PRODUCTS  ARE  PROTECTED   BY  PATENTS   IN   U.S.A.,  CANADA  AND   ABROAD 

AEROQUIP   PRODUCTS   ARE   DESIGNED    FOR   BETTER   RAILROADING 


Only  Aeroquip  offers  two 
automatic  fueling  systems 
for  your  diesels 


Barco  Railroad  Diesel 
Speed  Recorder 


Air  brake,  hot  water, 
lube  and  fuel  oil  lines 


the  most  efficient  use 

of  hydraulics  ever 

applied  to  a  tamper! 

TAMPING   UNIT  DOUBLE  CLUTCHES   ELIMINATED 
BY  REVERSIBLE    HYDRAULIC  MOTORS! 


HERE  IS   the  world's  highest  tamping   efficiency. 

This  machine  retains  the  unbeatable  Matisa  principle 
of  vibration-compaction  tamping  with  the  machine 
load  always  on  tamped  track,  but  now  has  many  PLUS 
features. 

For  details,  write  for  the  New  Matisa  Speedtamper 
brochure. 


1020    Washington    Avenue 


EQUIP  ME  N  TXC  ORPORATION 


Chicago    Heights,   Illinois 


MATISA  opens  fixed  location  pla 


Welded  Rail  Shipments 
Now  Faster,  Cost  Less 

Continuing  the  "Story  of  Welded  Rail"  as 
pioneered  by  Matisa,  new  chapters  are  con- 
stantly being  added. 

Refined  techniques  to  increase  the  safety 
of  the  "already  safest"  rail  weld— to  in- 
crease production  speed  of  the  "already 
fastest"  rail  weld  and  to  decrease  the 
cost  of  the  "already  least  expensive"  rail 
weld  are  constantly  improving  delivery, 
efficiency  and  cost  features  of  Matisa 
Thoroweld   Continuous  Welded   Rail. 

The  latest  addition  to  the  Matisa  service 
is  this  new  plant  location  in  the  Birming- 
ham switching  district.  Added  to  the 
Chicago  switching  district  plant  in  Argo, 
Matisa  rail  welds  are  now  available  to 
small  as  well  as  large  railroads. 

MATISA    RAILWELD,    INC. 

1020  Washington  Ave.,  Chicago  Heights,  III. 


Organized  Mechanization  with 

NORDBERG 

gives  you  maximum 
maintenance  economy 


"Organized  Mechanization"  is  the  most  effective  grouping  of 
Nordberg  track  maintenance  equipment  into  efficient  working 
teams.  In  this  way,  these  machines — which  are  efficient  and 
effective  individually — can  be  made  even  more  productive. 


These  Nordberg  Mechanical  Muscles 
can  help  you  cut  maintenance  costs: 


•  Adzer  — 

Self-Propelled 

•  Ballast  Router 

•  Ballastex® 

•  Cribex® 

•  DSL  Yard  Cleaner 

•  Dun-Rite®  Gaging 

Machine  and  Bronco 

•  Gandy®  Tie  Puller 

and  Inserter 

•  Gandy-Snapper 


Line  Indicator 
Midget  Surfacer 
Midget  Line  indicator 
Power  Jack 
Power  Wrench 
Rail  Drill 
Rail  Grinders 
Rail  Snapper 
Screenex® 
Spike  Hammer 
Spike  Puller- 
Hydraulic 


IRDBERG     MANUFACTURING      COMPANY 


•  Mechanical  Spike  Pullers  — 

Self-Propelled 

•  Surf-Rail©  Grinder 

•  Switchliner 

•  Tamping  Power  Jack 

•  Tie-Axe 

•  Tie  Drill 

•  Trakliner® 

•  Trackshifter 

•  Trak-Surfacer 

•  Trak-Sweeper 

MILWAUKEE     1,     WISCONSI 


® 


MECHANICAL     MUSCLES 


63.    N.M.   CO. 


at 

your 

service 


for 

all    types   of   cranes 

d  iesel   wreckers 

pile   drivers 

buckets 


ORTON 


CRANE    &    SHOVEL    CO. 

608       S.       DEARBORN       ST. 
CHICAGO       5,       ILLINOIS 

DANIEL  A.   COVELLI 

President 
Representatives    in    Principal    Cities 


Tbuv-s  WELDED 

RAIL 
TRANSPORT 


MM  W"    *•■*'  * 


another  development 

of  NOG...  LINK-BELT  teamwork  in 

engineering  and  manufacture 


CHECK  THESE 

SERVICE  PROVEN 

POINTS 


NOG 


Sturdy  open-span  construction— 

for  work  saving  feed-in; 

for  picking  up  jointed  re-lay  rail;  maintains 
best  riding  quality  by  keeping  rails  in 
original  sequence  for  welding. 
Positive  double  tie-down  unit. 
Simplified  low  maintenance. 
Rollers  life-lubricated. 
Hydraulically  adjustable  rollers  and  power- 
operated  unloading  equipment  included. 
One  to  six-tier  units. 

©  1963,  Chemetron  Corporation 

NATIONAL  CYLINDER  GAS 

RAILROAD    EQUIPMENT    DEPARTMENT 


840  North  Michigan  Avenue,  Chicago  11,  Illinois 


MODEL  441 

Developed  and  Built 
for  Railroad  Maintenance 

180°  BOOM  SWING 

DOCS  ALL  JOBS! 


LAYING  STANDARD  RAIL 


CUTS     MAINTENANCE     COST! 


7  2  FAST  CHANGE  ATTACHMENTS 


•  Forks 

•  V/a  Cu.  Yd.  Bucket 

•  Tote  Hook 

•  18'   Boom  Extension 

•  Fork  Tie  Baler 

•  Track   Cleaning   Bucket 


•  Back   Hoe 

•  Clamshell 

•  Back   Filler   Blade 

•  Pull   Drag   Bucket 

•  4  Cu.  Yd.  Snow  Bucket 

•  Pile  Hammer 


9'   WIDE   TRACK   CLEANING   BUCKET' 


Optional   Attachment 
Flanged   Wheels,   Hydraulically  Controlled 


PETTIBONE  MULLIKEN  CORPORATIOI 


RAILROAD         -».        DIVISION 

*»yi)D 


141    W.    JACKSON  "If"  CHICAGO    4,    III 

80   Years  of  Service 
to  the  Railroad  Industry 


AREA  Publications — Price  List 

The  following  include  some  of  the  Association  publications  available  from  the 
secretary's  office  on  order.  Prices  shown  are  for  Members  only: 

Member 
Price 
Manual  of  Recommended  Practice,  complete  in  2  volumes,  including  binders 

(first   copy)     $18.00 

Extra  binders,  each   4.50 

Annual  Supplements    ( first  copy)    1.00 

Separate  Chapters 

1— Roadway  and  Ballast    1.50 

3-Ties    25 

4-Rail    75 

5-Track     75 

6-Buildings     1.50 

7— Wood  Bridges  and  Trestles   1.00 

8-Masonry     1.00 

9-Highways    0.50 

11— Engineering  and  Valuation  Records   1.25 

13— Water,  Oil  and  Sanitation  Services 1.00 

14— Yards  and  Terminals    1.00 

15— Iron  and  Steel  Structures  1.25 

16— Economics  of  Railway  Location  and  Operation   0.75 

17— Wood  Preservation    50 

20-Contract  Forms    1.25 

22— Economics  of  Railway  Labor   0.50 

25— Waterways  and  Harbors    0.25 

27— Maintenance  of  Way  Work  Equipment 0.50 

28— Clearances     0.25 

29- Waterproofing     0.25 

Flexible-cover,  loose-leaf  binder  for  separate  chapters,  each   0.40 

Portfolio  of  Trackwork  Plans-119  plans,  8  sheets  of  specifications,  5  sheets 

definitions  of  terms,  complete  with  leatherette  cover   $12.50 

Track  Scale  Pamphlet— 109  pages,  flexible  cover   1.00 

Federal  Valuation  of  Railroads— 87  pages,  flexible  cover   1.00 

Instructions  for  Mixing  and  Placing  Concrete-24  pages,  flexible  cover 0.40 

Notes  on  Railroad  Location  and  Construction  Procedures  from  the  School  of 

Experience— 43  pages,  flexible  cover   0.50 

Handbook  of  Instructions  for  the  Care  and  Operation  of  Maintenance  of  Way 

Equipment— 149  pages,  hard  cover 0.85 

Instructions  for  Care  and  Safe  Operation  of  Welding  and  Grinding  Equip- 
ment—23  pages,  flexible  cover  0.30 

Specifications    for    Steel    Railway    Bridges    (fixed    spans)— 70    pages,    flexible 

cover    0.75 

Specifications  for  Movable  Railway  Bridges— 73  pages,  punched  sheets   1.00 


RAILWAY 

SIGNAL 

NX  Interlocking... 

Controls  New  Toronto  Subway  System 

The  Toronto  Transit  Commission  has  selected  the  GRS  NX 
route-type  interlocking  system  for  the  new  two- mile  University 
Avenue  Subway  which  serves  the  revitalized  downtown  business 
area,  and  connects  with  the  Yonge  Street  Subway  which  has 
been  serving  Toronto  residents  since  1954. 

A  single  operator  at  St.  George  Street  need  only  push  two  but- 
tons to  automatically  line  up  even  the  most  complicated  route. 
He  has  up-to-the-second  information  concerning  the  location  of 
each  train,  the  position  of  each  switch  and  signal,  what  routes 
are  available,  and  what  routes  are  established.  In  addition,  he  has 
the  facility  for  setting  up  routes  quickly  and  easily  by  using  free- 
operating  pushbuttons. 

Future  plans  call  for  extending  the  subway  to  areas  east  and 
west  of  the  center  of  the  City. 


Fred  Miles,  left,  Toronto  Transit  Commission  Signal  Design  Supervisor, 
and  Frank  Scott,  GRS  Sales  Engineer,  inspect  the  new  NX  control  machine. 

GENERAL  RAILWAY  SIGNAL  COMPANY 


ROCHESTER   2  NEV 


A    UNIT    OF    GENERAL    SIGNAL    CORPORATION 
»JEW   YORK    17   NEW   YORK  CHICAGO    1    ILLINOIS  ST   LOUIS    1    MISSOURI 


MONTR  KM,    a   CANADA 


THE  DOUBLE  U  RAIL  ANCHOR 

ACHUFF  RAILWAY  SUPPLY  CO. 
ST.  LOUIS,  MO. 


CLEVELAND  FROG  and  CROSSING  CO 

Subsidiary  of  Pettibone  Mulliken  Corporation 

CLEVELAND,  OHIO 


HIGHEST  QUALITY  TRACKWORK 

CONSTRUCTED  OF 

STANDARD  RAIL  HEAT  TREATED  RAIL 

MANGANESE  STEEL 

"CLEVELAND"  ADJUSTABLE  RAIL  BRACES 
"CLEVELAND"  ROCKER  SWITCH  CLIPS 

"CLEVELAND"  AUTOMATIC  SWITCH  STANDS 
STANDARD  SWITCH  STANDS 


AUTOJACK   m 
ELECTROMATIC 


The  only  completely 
automatic  track  surfacing 
machine  on  the  market 


Proven  in  operation  by  North  America's 
leading  railroads.  Complete  and  auto- 
matic control  of  surface  and  cross  level 
through  tangent  and  curve  territory 
regardless  of  height  of  lift. 

•  Combination  of  Autojack  and  Electromatic 
equals  or  improves  production  of  Electro- 
matic alone. 

•  Precision  of  lift  and  uniformity  of  compaction 
controlled  automatically. 


•  All  variations  in  lift,  level  and  run-out  con- 
trolled from  operator's  panel. 

•  Beam  "sighting"  for  utmost  precision. 

•  Front  buggy  self-propelled  ahead  of  tamper. 


TA  M  P  E  R     I  N  C.    53  Court  St.,  Pittsburgh,  N.Y. 

SALES   AND   SERVICE:    2  U7  University  Avenue 
St.  Paul  1  4,  Minnesota 
Phone:  645-5055 
IN   CANADA    160  St.  Joseph  Blvd., 

Lachine  (Montreal),  P.Q. 
Phone:  637-5531 
Your  enquiries  for  detailed  information  or  brochures  on 


1  'f^wHRBt 


This  is  one  way  to  kill  weeds 


It's  the  hard  way.  So  forget  it.  The  easiest,  fastest,  most  effective  way 
is  with  these  borate  weed  killers:  M0N0B0R  CHLORATE  GRANULAR 
•  MONOBOR-CHLORATE  Track  Sprays  •  BENZABOR®  •  UREABOR®  • 
UREABOR  5D  •  UREABOR  8D  •  UREABOR  62 

With  one  simple  application,  these  borate  weed  killers  will  destroy 
weeds  and  grasses  about  trestles,  tie  piles,  grade  crossings,  yards, 
signals,  switches,  (or  wherever  a  weed  problem  exists)  for  a  year  or 
more.  All  are  extremely  effective,  yet  safe  to  use.  Easy  and  economical 
to  apply.  And  nonselective.  Most  roads  already  favor  borate  weed 
killers  for  year  'round  weed  control.  How  about  you?  Call  or  write 
today:  Railroad  Sales,  Marketing  %^wv*.w**lPiit 

Dept,  U.S.  BORAX,  3456  Peterson 
Avenue,  Chicago  45,  Illinois.  (Phone: 
Independence  3-6262.  Code:  312) 


BORAX 


*•;*.>*•' 


Here  are  the  up-to-date  facts  on  the  SPENO  Ballast 
Cleaning  and  the  SPENO  Rail  Grinding  Services. 


BALLAST  CLEANING 

SPENO  Engineering  and  Research  has  de- 
veloped a  superior  screening  arrangement  so 
that  we  are  now  using  an  improved  Ballast 
Cleaner  with  greater  efficiency. 

RAIL  GRINDING 


Our  Rail  Grinding  Service  has  been  so  well 
received  we  are  now  building  a  THIRD  Rail 
Grinding  Train  to  take  care  of  the  increased 
demand. 

SPENO  is  constantly  developing  means  lor 
better  service  to  make  sure  that  the  Railroads 
receive  everything  they  pay  for  —  and  more 


c/u4^//s4>  ZTie  fau$u>ads  yaa£~nave  useds us/ 


Lll'llll 


FRANK  SPENO  RAILROAD  BALLAST  CLEANING  CO.,  INC. 


306  North  Coy-qo  Si 
Ithoca    N.  T 


THE  TRASCO  CAR  RETARDER 

HUNDREDS  IN  SERVICE 
IN  CLASS  YARD  TRACK 


TRACK  SPECIALTIES  COMPANY 

P.O.  BOX  729  WESTPORT,   CONNECTICUT 


mm 


■HI, 

I wit     IIP 

Jill  IP 


1 


SMS 


II 


ntss 


HHHP